CFR 2021 Title29 Vol5 Part1910

Occu. Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt.
1910
the RA who will negotiate for the As- (f) Termination. Either party may ter-
sistant Secretary and make final rec- minate a Cooperative Agreement under
ommendations on each Agreement to this part upon 30 days’ written notice
the Assistant Secretary. to the other party.
(2) States with Plans approved under (Approved by the Office of Management and
section 18 of the Act may initiate nego- Budget under control number 1218–0110)
tiations in anticipation of the with-
[49 FR 25094, June 19, 1984, as amended at 54
drawal from the Plan of Federally FR 24333, June 7, 1989]
funded onsite consultation services to
private sector employers. § 1908.11 Exclusions.
(3) Renegotiation of existing Agree- A Cooperative Agreement under this
ments funded under this part shall be part will not restrict in any manner
initiated within 30 days of the effective the authority and responsibility of the
date of these revisions. Assistant Secretary under sections 8, 9,
(c) Contents of Cooperative Agreement. 10, 13, and 17 of the Act, or any cor-
(1) Any Agreement and subsequent responding State authority.
modifications shall be in writing and
signed by both parties.
PART 1910—OCCUPATIONAL
(2) Each Agreement shall provide
that the State will conform its oper-
SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS
ations under the Agreement to:
Subpart A—General
(i) The requirements contained in
this part 1908; Sec.
(ii) All related formal directives sub- 1910.1 Purpose and scope.
sequently issued by the Assistant Sec- 1910.2 Definitions.
1910.3 Petitions for the issuance, amend-
retary implementing this regulation.
ment, or repeal of a standard.
(3) Each Agreement shall contain 1910.4 Amendments to this part.
such other explicit written commit- 1910.5 Applicability of standards.
ments in conformance with the provi- 1910.6 Incorporation by reference.
sions of this part as may be required by 1910.7 Definition and requirements for a na-
the Assistant Secretary. Each Agree- tionally recognized testing laboratory.
ment shall also include a budget of the 1910.8 OMB control numbers under the Pa-
State’s anticipated expenditures under perwork Reduction Act.
1910.9 Compliance duties owed to each em-
the Agreement, in the detail and for-
ployee.
mat required by the Assistant Sec-
retary. Subpart B—Adoption and Extension of
(d) Location of sample Cooperative Established Federal Standards
Agreement. A sample Agreement is
available for inspection at all Regional 1910.11 Scope and purpose.
Offices of the Occupational Safety and 1910.12 Construction work.
1910.15 Shipyard employment.
Health Administration of the U.S. De- 1910.16 Longshoring and marine terminals.
partment of Labor. 1910.17 Effective dates.
(e) Action upon requests. The State 1910.18 Changes in established Federal
will be notified within a reasonable pe- standards.
riod of time of any decision concerning 1910.19 Special provisions for air contami-
its request for a Cooperative Agree- nants.
ment. If a request is denied, the State
Subpart C [Reserved]
will be informed in writing of the rea-
sons supporting the decision. If a Coop- Subpart D—Walking-Working Surfaces
erative Agreement is negotiated, the
initial finding will specify the period 1910.21 Scope and definitions.
for the Agreement. Additional funds 1910.22 General requirements.
may be added at a later time provided 1910.23 Ladders.
1910.24 Step bolts and manhole steps.
the activity is satisfactorily carried
1910.25 Stairways.
out and appropriations are available. 1910.26 Dockboards.
The State may also be required to
kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB
1910.27 Scaffolds and rope descent systems.

amend the Agreement for continued 1910.28 Duty to have fall protection and fall-
support. ing object protection.
95
VerDate Sep<11>2014 11:40 Aug 11, 2021 Jkt 253121 PO 00000 Frm 00105 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V5.TXT PC31
Pt. 1910 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–21 Edition)
1910.29 Fall protection systems and falling 1910.124 General requirements for dipping
object protection—criteria and practices. and coating operations.
1910.30 Training requirements. 1910.125 Additional requirements for dipping
and coating operations that use flam-
Subpart E—Exit Routes and Emergency mable liquids or liquids with flashpoints
Planning greater than 199.4 °F (93 °C).
1910.126 Additional requirements for special
1910.33 Table of contents. dipping and coating operations.
1910.34 Coverage and definitions.
1910.35 Compliance with alternate exit- Subpart I—Personal Protective Equipment
route codes.
1910.36 Design and construction require- 1910.132 General requirements.
ments for exit routes. 1910.133 Eye and face protection.
1910.37 Maintenance, safeguards, and oper- 1910.134 Respiratory protection.
ational features for exit routes. 1910.135 Head protection.
1910.38 Emergency action plans. 1910.136 Foot protection.
1910.39 Fire prevention plans. 1910.137 Electrical protective equipment.
APPENDIX TO SUBPART E OF PART 1910—EXIT 1910.138 Hand protection.
ROUTES, EMERGENCY ACTION PLANS, AND 1910.139 [Reserved]
FIRE PREVENTION PLANS 1910.140 Personal fall protection systems.
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART I OF PART 1910—REF-
Subpart F—Powered Platforms, Manlifts, ERENCES FOR FURTHER INFORMATION (NON-
and Vehicle-Mounted Work Platforms MANDATORY)
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART I OF PART 1910—NON-
1910.66 Powered platforms for building MANDATORY COMPLIANCE GUIDELINES FOR
maintenance. HAZARD ASSESSMENT AND PERSONAL PRO-
1910.67 Vehicle-mounted elevating and ro- TECTIVE EQUIPMENT SELECTION
tating work platforms. APPENDIX C TO SUBPART I OF PART 1910—PER-
1910.68 Manlifts. SONAL FALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS NON-
MANDATORY GUIDELINES
Subpart G—Occupational Health and APPENDIX D TO SUBPART I OF PART 1910—
Environmental Control TEST METHODS AND PROCEDURES FOR PER-
SONAL FALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS NON-
1910.94 Ventilation. MANDATORY GUIDELINES
1910.95 Occupational noise exposure.
1910.97 Nonionizing radiation. Subpart J—General Environmental Controls
1910.98 Effective dates.
1910.141 Sanitation.
Subpart H—Hazardous Materials 1910.142 Temporary labor camps.
1910.143 Nonwater carriage disposal sys-
1910.101 Compressed gases (general require- tems. [Reserved]
ments). 1910.144 Safety color code for marking phys-
1910.102 Acetylene. ical hazards.
1910.103 Hydrogen. 1910.145 Specifications for accident preven-
1910.104 Oxygen. tion signs and tags.
1910.105 Nitrous oxide. 1910.146 Permit-required confined spaces.
1910.106 Flammable liquids. 1910.147 The control of hazardous energy
1910.107 Spray finishing using flammable (lockout/tagout).
and combustible materials.
1910.108 [Reserved] Subpart K—Medical and First Aid
1910.109 Explosives and blasting agents.
1910.110 Storage and handling of liquified 1910.151 Medical services and first aid.
petroleum gases. 1910.152 [Reserved]
1910.111 Storage and handling of anhydrous
ammonia. Subpart L—Fire Protection
1910.112–1910.113 [Reserved]
1910.119 Process safety management of high- 1910.155 Scope, application and definitions
ly hazardous chemicals. applicable to this subpart.
1910.120 Hazardous waste operations and 1910.156 Fire brigades.
emergency response.
PORTABLE FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT
1910.121 [Reserved]
1910.157 Portable fire extinguishers.
DIPPING AND COATING OPERATIONS 1910.158 Standpipe and hose systems.
1910.122 Table of contents.

FIXED FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT
1910.123 Dipping and coating operations:
Coverage and definitions. 1910.159 Automatic sprinkler systems.
96
Occu. Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1910
1910.160 Fixed extinguishing systems, gen- Subpart P—Hand and Portable Powered
eral. Tools and Other Hand-Held Equipment
1910.161 Fixed extinguishing systems, dry
chemical. 1910.241 Definitions.
1910.162 Fixed extinguishing systems, gas- 1910.242 Hand and portable powered tools
eous agent. and equipment, general.
1910.163 Fixed extinguishing systems, water 1910.243 Guarding of portable powered tools.
spray and foam. 1910.244 Other portable tools and equip-
ment.
OTHER FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
Subpart Q—Welding, Cutting and Brazing
1910.164 Fire detection systems.
1910.165 Employee alarm systems. 1910.251 Definitions.
APPENDIXES TO SUBPART L OF PART 1910— 1910.252 General requirements.
NOTE 1910.253 Oxygen-fuel gas welding and cut-
ting.
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART L OF PART 1910—
1910.254 Arc welding and cutting.
FIRE PROTECTION
1910.255 Resistance welding.
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART L OF PART 1910—NA-
TIONAL CONSENSUS STANDARDS
Subpart R—Special Industries
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART L OF PART 1910—
FIRE PROTECTION REFERENCES FOR FUR- 1910.261 Pulp, paper, and paperboard mills.
THER INFORMATION 1910.262 Textiles.
APPENDIX D TO SUBPART L OF PART 1910— 1910.263 Bakery equipment.
AVAILABILITY OF PUBLICATIONS INCOR- 1910.264 Laundry machinery and operations.
PORATED BY REFERENCE IN SECTION 1910.265 Sawmills.
1910.156 FIRE BRIGADES 1910.266 Logging operations.
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART L OF PART 1910— 1910.268 Telecommunications.
TEST METHODS FOR PROTECTIVE CLOTHING 1910.269 Electric power generation, trans-
mission, and distribution.
Subpart M—Compressed Gas and 1910.272 Grain handling facilities.
Compressed Air Equipment
Subpart S—Electrical
1910.166–1910.168 [Reserved]
GENERAL
1910.169 Air receivers.
1910.301 Introduction.
Subpart N—Materials Handling and
Storage DESIGN SAFETY STANDARDS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
1910.176 Handling materials—general. 1910.302 Electric utilization systems.
1910.177 Servicing multi-piece and single 1910.303 General.
piece rim wheels. 1910.304 Wiring design and protection.
1910.178 Powered industrial trucks. 1910.305 Wiring methods, components, and
1910.179 Overhead and gantry cranes. equipment for general use.
1910.180 Crawler locomotive and truck 1910.306 Specific purpose equipment and in-
cranes. stallations.
1910.181 Derricks. 1910.307 Hazardous (classified) locations.
1910.183 Helicopters. 1910.308 Special systems.
1910.184 Slings. 1910.309–1910.330 [Reserved]
SAFETY-RELATED WORK PRACTICES

Subpart O—Machinery and Machine
Guarding 1910.331 Scope.
1910.332 Training.
1910.211 Definitions. 1910.333 Selection and use of work practices.
1910.212 General requirements for all ma- 1910.334 Use of equipment.
chines. 1910.335 Safeguards for personnel protec-
1910.213 Woodworking machinery require- tion.
ments. 1910.336–1910.360 [Reserved]
1910.214 Cooperage machinery. [Reserved]
SAFETY-RELATED MAINTENANCE
1910.215 Abrasive wheel machinery.
REQUIREMENTS
1910.216 Mills and calenders in the rubber
and plastics industries. 1910.361–1910.380 [Reserved]
1910.217 Mechanical power presses.
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIAL
1910.218 Forging machines.

EQUIPMENT
1910.219 Mechanical power-transmission ap-
paratus. 1910.381–1910.398 [Reserved]
97
§ 1910.1 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–21 Edition)
DEFINITIONS Subpart A—General
1910.399 Definitions applicable to this sub-
part. AUTHORITY: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Sec-
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART S OF PART 1910— retary of Labor’s Order Numbers 12–71 (36 FR
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736),1–
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART S OF PART 1910—EX- 90 (55 FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR
PLANATORY DATA [RESERVED] 50017), 5–2002 (67 FR 65008), 5–2007 (72 FR
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART S OF PART 1910—TA- 31159), 4–2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1–2012 (77 FR
BLES, NOTES, AND CHARTS [RESERVED] 3912), as applicable.
Sections 1910.6, 1910.7, 1910.8 and 1910.9 also
Subpart T—Commercial Diving Operations issued under 29 CFR 1911. Section 1910.7(f)
GENERAL also issued under 31 U.S.C. 9701; 29 U.S.C. 9a;
5 U.S.C. 553; Public Law 106–113 (113 Stat.
1910.401 Scope and application. 1501A–222); Public Law 11–8 and 111–317; and
1910.402 Definitions. OMB Circular A–25 (dated July 8, 1993) (58 FR
38142, July 15, 1993).
PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS
1910.410 Qualifications of dive team. § 1910.1 Purpose and scope.
GENERAL OPERATIONS PROCEDURES (a) Section 6(a) of the Williams-
Steiger Occupational Safety and
1910.420 Safe practices manual.
Health Act of 1970 (84 Stat. 1593) pro-
1910.421 Pre-dive procedures.
1910.422 Procedures during dive.
vides that ‘‘without regard to chapter 5
1910.423 Post-dive procedures. of title 5, United States Code, or to the
other subsections of this section, the
SPECIFIC OPERATIONS PROCEDURES Secretary shall, as soon as practicable
1910.424 SCUBA diving. during the period beginning with the
1910.425 Surface-supplied air diving. effective date of this Act and ending 2
1910.426 Mixed-gas diving. years after such date, by rule promul-
1910.427 Liveboating. gate as an occupational safety or
health standard any national
EQUIPMENT PROCEDURES AND REQUIREMENTS
concensus standard, and any estab-
1910.430 Equipment. lished Federal standard, unless he de-
RECORDKEEPING termines that the promulgation of such
a standard would not result in im-
1910.440 Recordkeeping requirements. proved safety or health for specifically
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART T OF PART 1910—EX- designated employees.’’ The legislative
AMPLES OF CONDITIONS WHICH MAY RE-
purpose of this provision is to estab-
STRICT OR LIMIT EXPOSURE TO
HYPERBARIC CONDITIONS
lish, as rapidly as possible and without
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART T OF PART 1910— regard to the rule-making provisions of
GUIDELINES FOR SCIENTIFIC DIVING the Administrative Procedure Act,
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART T OF PART 1910—AL- standards with which industries are
TERNATIVE CONDITIONS UNDER generally familiar, and on whose adop-
§ 1910.401(a)(3) FOR RECREATIONAL DIVING tion interested and affected persons
INSTRUCTORS AND DIVING GUIDES (MANDA- have already had an opportunity to ex-
TORY)
press their views. Such standards are
Subpart U—COVID–19 Emergency either (1) national concensus standards
Temporary Standard on whose adoption affected persons
have reached substantial agreement, or
1910.502 Healthcare. (2) Federal standards already estab-
1910.504 Mini Respiratory Protection Pro- lished by Federal statutes or regula-
gram. tions.
1910.505 Severability.
(b) This part carries out the directive
1910.509 Incorporation by reference.
to the Secretary of Labor under section
Subparts V–Y [Reserved] 6(a) of the Act. It contains occupa-
tional safety and health standards
1910.901–1910.999 [Reserved] which have been found to be national
SOURCE: 39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, unless consensus standards or established

otherwise noted. Federal standards.
98
Occu. Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.4
§ 1910.2 Definitions. Steiger Occupational Safety and

As used in this part, unless the con- Health Act.
text clearly requires otherwise:
§ 1910.3 Petitions for the issuance,
(a) Act means the Williams-Steiger amendment, or repeal of a stand-
Occupational Safety and Health Act of ard.
1970 (84 Stat. 1590).
(b) Assistant Secretary of Labor means (a) Any interested person may peti-
the Assistant Secretary of Labor for tion in writing the Assistant Secretary
Occupational Safety and Health; of Labor to promulgate, modify, or re-
(c) Employer means a person engaged voke a standard. The petition should
in a business affecting commerce who set forth the terms or the substance of
has employees, but does not include the rule desired, the effects thereof if
the United States or any State or po- promulgated, and the reasons therefor.
litical subdivision of a State; (b)(1) The relevant legislative history
(d) Employee means an employee of an of the Act indicates congressional rec-
employer who is employed in a busi- ognition of the American National
ness of his employer which affects com- Standards Institute and the National
merce; Fire Protection Association as the
(e) Commerce means trade, traffic,
major sources of national consensus
commerce, transportation, or commu-
standards. National consensus stand-
nication among the several States, or
ards adopted on May 29, 1971, pursuant
between a State and any place outside
thereof, or within the District of Co- to section 6(a) of the Act are from
lumbia, or a possession of the United those two sources. However, any orga-
States (other than the Trust Territory nization which deems itself a producer
of the Pacific Islands), or between of national consensus standards, within
points in the same State but through a the meaning of section 3(9) of the Act,
point outside thereof; is invited to submit in writing to the
(f) Standard means a standard which Assistant Secretary of Labor at any
requires conditions, or the adoption or time prior to February 1, 1973, all rel-
use of one or more practices, means, evant information which may enable
methods, operations, or processes, rea- the Assistant Secretary to determine
sonably necessary or appropriate to whether any of its standards satisfy
provide safe or healthful employment the requirements of the definition of
and places of employment; ‘‘national consensus standard’’ in sec-
(g) National consensus standard means tion 3(9) of the Act.
any standard or modification thereof (2) Within a reasonable time after the
which (1) has been adopted and promul- receipt of a submission pursuant to
gated by a nationally recognized stand- paragraph (b)(1) of this section, the As-
ards-producing organization under pro- sistant Secretary of Labor shall pub-
cedures whereby it can be determined lish or cause to be published in the
by the Secretary of Labor or by the As- FEDERAL REGISTER a notice of such
sistant Secretary of Labor that persons submission, and shall afford interested
interested and affected by the scope or persons a reasonable opportunity to
provisions of the standard have reached present written data, views, or argu-
substantial agreement on its adoption, ments with regard to the question
(2) was formulated in a manner which whether any standards of the organiza-
afforded an opportunity for diverse
tion making the submission are na-
views to be considered, and (3) has been
tional consensus standards.
designated as such a standard by the
Secretary or the Assistant Secretary, § 1910.4 Amendments to this part.
after consultation with other appro-
priate Federal agencies; and (a) The Assistant Secretary of Labor
(h) Established Federal standard means shall have all of the authority of the
any operative standard established by Secretary of Labor under sections 3(9)
any agency of the United States and in and 6(a) of the Act.
effect on April 28, 1971, or contained in (b) The Assistant Secretary of Labor
any Act of Congress in force on the may at any time before April 28, 1973,
date of enactment of the Williams- on his own motion or upon the written
99
petition of any person, by rule promul- (2) On the other hand, any standard
gate as a standard any national con- shall apply according to its terms to
sensus standard and any established any employment and place of employ-
Federal standard, pursuant to and in ment in any industry, even though par-
accordance with section 6(a) of the Act, ticular standards are also prescribed
and, in addition, may modify or revoke for the industry, as in subpart B or sub-
any standard in this part 1910. In the part R of this part, to the extent that
event of conflict among any such none of such particular standards ap-
standards, the Assistant Secretary of plies. To illustrate, the general stand-
Labor shall take the action necessary ard regarding noise exposure in § 1910.95
to eliminate the conflict, including the applies to employments and places of
revocation or modification of a stand- employment in pulp, paper, and paper-
ard in this part, so as to assure the board mills covered by § 1910.261.
greatest protection of the safety or (d) In the event a standard protects
health of the affected employees. on its face a class of persons larger
than employees, the standard shall be
§ 1910.5 Applicability of standards. applicable under this part only to em-
(a) Except as provided in paragraph ployees and their employment and
(b) of this section, the standards con- places of employment.
tained in this Part shall apply with re- (e) [Reserved]
spect to employments performed in a (f) An employer who is in compliance
workplace in a State, the District of with any standard in this part shall be
Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puer- deemed to be in compliance with the
to Rico, the Virgin Islands, American requirement of section 5(a)(1) of the
Samoa, Guam, the Commonwealth of Act, but only to the extent of the con-
the Northern Mariana Islands, Wake Is- dition, practice, means, method, oper-
land, Outer Continental Shelf lands de- ation, or process covered by the stand-
fined in the Outer Continental Shelf ard.
Lands Act, and Johnston Island. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 58
(b) None of the standards in this part FR 35308, June 30, 1993; 85 FR 8732, Feb. 18,
shall apply to working conditions of 2020]
employees with respect to which Fed-
eral agencies other than the Depart- § 1910.6 Incorporation by reference.
ment of Labor, or State agencies act- (a)(1) The standards of agencies of
ing under section 274 of the Atomic En- the U.S. Government, and organiza-
ergy Act of 1954, as amended (42 U.S.C. tions which are not agencies of the
2021), exercise statutory authority to U.S. Government which are incor-
prescribe or enforce standards or regu- porated by reference in this part, have
lations affecting occupational safety or the same force and effect as other
health. standards in this part. Only the manda-
(c)(1) If a particular standard is spe- tory provisions (i.e., provisions con-
cifically applicable to a condition, taining the word ‘‘shall’’ or other man-
practice, means, method, operation, or datory language) of standards incor-
process, it shall prevail over any dif- porated by reference are adopted as
ferent general standard which might standards under the Occupational Safe-
otherwise be applicable to the same ty and Health Act.
condition, practice, means, method, op- (2) Any changes in the standards in-
eration, or process. For example, corporated by reference in this part
§ 1915.23(c)(3) of this title prescribes and an official historic file of such
personal protective equipment for cer- changes are available for inspection in
tain ship repairmen working in speci- the Docket Office at the national office
fied areas. Such a standard shall apply, of the Occupational Safety and Health
and shall not be deemed modified nor Administration, U.S. Department of
superseded by any different general Labor, Washington, DC 20210; tele-
standard whose provisions might other- phone: 202–693–2350 (TTY number: 877–
wise be applicable, to the ship repair- 889–5627).
men working in the areas specified in (3) The standards listed in this sec-
§ 1915.23(c)(3). tion are incorporated by reference into
100
this part with the approval of the Di- (1) AAI-RMA Specifications for An-
rector of the Federal Register in ac- hydrous Ammonia Hose, IBR approved
cordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR for § 1910.111(b)(8)(i).
part 51. To enforce any edition other (2) [Reserved]
than that specified in this section, (e) Except as noted, copies of the
OSHA must publish a document in the standards listed below in this para-
FEDERAL REGISTER and the material graph are available for purchase from
must be available to the public. the American National Standards In-
(4) Copies of standards listed in this stitute (ANSI), 25 West 43rd Street, 4th
section and issued by private standards Floor, New York, NY 10036; telephone:
organizations are available for pur- 212–642–4900; fax: 212–398–0023; Web site:
chase from the issuing organizations at http://www.ansi.org.
(1)–(2) [Reserved]
the addresses or through the other con-
(3) ANSI A11.1–65 (R 70) Practice for
tact information listed below for these
Industrial Lighting, IBR approved for
private standards organizations. In ad-
§§ 1910.219(c)(5)(iii); 1910.261 (a)(3)(i),
dition, these standards are available (c)(10), and (k)(21); and 1910.265(c)(2).
for inspection at any Regional Office of (4) ANSI A11.1–65 Practice for Indus-
the Occupational Safety and Health trial Lighting, IBR approved for
Administration (OSHA), or at the §§ 1910.262(c)(6) and 1910.265(d)(2)(i)(a).
OSHA Docket Office, U.S. Department (5) [Reserved]
of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue NW, (6) ANSI A13.1–56 Scheme for the
Room N–3508, Washington, DC 20210; Identification of Piping Systems, IBR
telephone: 202–693–2350 (TTY number: approved for §§ 1910.253(d)(4)(ii);
877–889–5627). They are also available 1910.261(a)(3)(iii); 1910.262(c)(7).
for inspection at the National Archives (7) ANSI A14.1–68 Safety Code for
and Records Administration (NARA). Portable Wood Ladders, Supplemented
For information on the availability of by ANSI A14.1a–77, IBR approved for
these standards at NARA, telephone: § 1910.261 (a)(3)(iv) and (c)(3)(i).
202–741–6030, or go to www.archives.gov/ (8) ANSI A14.2–56 Safety Code for
federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html. Portable Metal Ladders, Supplemented
(b) The following material is avail- by ANSI A14.2a–77, IBR approved for
able for purchase from the American § 1910.261 (a)(3)(v) and (c)(3)(i).
Conference of Governmental Industrial (9) ANSI A14.3–56 Safety Code for
Hygienists (ACGIH), 1014 Broadway, Fixed Ladders, IBR approved for
Cincinnati OH 45202: §§ 1910.68(b)(4); and 1910.261 (a)(3)(vi) and
(1) ‘‘Industrial Ventilation: A Manual (c)(3)(i).
of Recommended Practice’’ (22nd ed., (10) ANSI A17.1–65 Safety Code for
1995), incorporation by reference (IBR) Elevators, Dumbwaiters and Moving
approved for § 1910.124(b)(4)(iii). Walks, Including Supplements, A17.1a
(2) Threshold Limit Values and Bio- (1967); A17.1b (1968); A17.1c (1969); A17.1d
logical Exposure Indices for 1986–87 (1970), IBR approved for § 1910.261
(1986), IBR approved for § 1910.120, PEL (a)(3)(vii), (g)(11)(i), and (l)(4).
definition. (11) ANSI A17.2–60 Practice for the
Inspection of Elevators, Including Sup-
(c) The following material is avail-
plements, A17.2a (1965), A17.2b (1967),
able for purchase from the American
IBR approved for § 1910.261(a)(3)(viii).
Society of Agricultural Engineers (12) ANSI A90.1–69 Safety Standard
(ASAE), 2950 Niles Road, Post Office for Manlifts, IBR approved for
Box 229, St. Joseph, MI 49085: § 1910.68(b)(3).
(1) ASAE Emblem for Identifying (13) ANSI A92.2–69 Standard for Vehi-
Slow Moving Vehicles, ASAE S276.2 cle Mounted Elevating and Rotating
(1968), IBR approved for § 1910.145(d)(10). Work Platforms, IBR approved for
(2) [Reserved] § 1910.67 (b)(1), (2), (c)(3), and (4) and
(d) The following material is avail- 1910.268(s)(1)(v).
able for purchase from the Agriculture (14) ANSI A120.1–70 Safety Code for
Ammonia Institute-Rubber Manufac- Powered Platforms for Exterior Build-
turers (AAI-RMA) Association, 1400 K ing Maintenance, IBR approved for

St. NW, Washington DC 20005: § 1910.66 app. D (b) through (d).
101
(15) ANSI B7.1–70 Safety Code for the 1910.261 (a)(3)(xv), (b)(6), (m)(2), and
Use, Care and Protection of Abrasive (m)(5)(iii).
Wheels, IBR approved for (30) ANSI B57.1–65 Compressed Gas
§§ 1910.215(b)(12) and 1910.218(j). Cylinder Valve Outlet and Inlet Con-
(16) ANSI B15.1–53 (R 58) Safety Code nections, IBR approved for
for Mechanical Power Transmission § 1910.253(b)(1)(iii).
Apparatus, IBR approved for (31) [Reserved]
§§ 1910.68(b)(4) and 1910.261 (a)(3)(ix), (32) ANSI B175.1–1991, Safety Require-
(b)(1), (e)(3), (e)(9), (f)(4), (j)(5)(iv), ments for Gasoline-Powered Chain
(k)(12), and (l)(3). Saws 1910.266(e)(2)(i).
(17) ANSI B20.1–57 Safety Code for (33) [Reserved]
Conveyors, Cableways, and Related (34) ANSI C33.2–56 Safety Standard
Equipment, IBR approved for for Transformer-Type Arc Welding Ma-
§§ 1910.218(j)(3); 1910.261 (a)(3)(x), (b)(1), chines, IBR approved for § 1910.254(b)(1).
(c)(15)(iv), (f)(4), and (j)(2); (35) [Reserved]
1910.265(c)(18)(i). (36) ANSI H23.1–70 Seamless Copper
(18) ANSI B30.2–43 (R 52) Safety Code Water Tube Specification, IBR ap-
for Cranes, Derricks, and Hoists, IBR proved for § 1910.110(b) (8)(ii) and
approved for § 1910.261 (a)(3)(xi), (13)(ii)(b)(1).
(c)(2)(vi), and (c)(8) (i) and (iv). (37) ANSI H38.7–69 Specification for
(19) ANSI B30.2.0–67 Safety Code for Aluminum Alloy Seamless Pipe and
Overhead and Gantry Cranes, IBR ap- Seamless Extruded Tube, IBR approved
proved for §§ 1910.179(b)(2); 1910.261 for § 1910.110(b)(8)(i).
(a)(3)(xii), (c)(2)(v), and (c)(8) (i) and
(38) ANSI J6.4–71 Standard Specifica-
(iv).
tion for Rubber Insulating Blankets,
(20) ANSI B30.5–68 Safety Code for
IBR approved for § 1910.268 (f)(1) and
Crawler, Locomotive, and Truck
(n)(11)(v).
Cranes, IBR approved for
(39) ANSI J6.6–71 Standard Specifica-
§§ 1910.180(b)(2) and 1910.261(a)(3)(xiii).
tion for Rubber Insulating Gloves, IBR
(21) ANSI B30.6–69 Safety Code for
approved for § 1910.268 (f)(1) and
Derricks, IBR approved for
(n)(11)(iv).
§§ 1910.181(b)(2) and 1910.268(j)(4)(iv) (E)
and (H). (40) ANSI K13.1–67 Identification of
(22) ANSI B31.1–55 Code for Pressure Gas Mask Canisters, IBR approved for
Piping, IBR approved for § 1910.261 (a)(3)(xvi) and (h)(2)(iii).
§ 1910.261(g)(18)(iii). (41) ANSI K61.1–60 Safety Require-
(23) ANSI B31.1–67, IBR approved for ments for the Storage and Handling of
§ 1910.253(d)(1)(i)(A) Anhydrous Ammonia, IBR approved for
(24) ANSI B31.1a–63 Addenda to ANSI § 1910.111(b)(11)(i).
B31.1 (1955), IBR approved for (42) ANSI K61.1–66 Safety Require-
§ 1910.261(g)(18)(iii). ments for the Storage and Handling of
(25) ANSI B31.1–67 and Addenda B31.1 Anhydrous Ammonia, IBR approved for
(1969) Code for Pressure Piping, IBR ap- § 1910.111(b)(11)(i).
proved for §§ 1910.103(b)(1)(iii)(b); (43) ANSI O1.1–54 (R 61) Safety Code
1910.104(b)(5)(ii); 1910.218 (d)(4) and for Woodworking Machinery, IBR ap-
(e)(1)(iv); and 1910.261 (a)(3)(xiv) and proved for § 1910.261 (a)(3)(xvii), (e)(7),
(g)(18)(iii). and (i)(2).
(26) ANSI B31.2–68 Fuel Gas Piping, (44) ANSI S1.4–71 (R 76) Specification
IBR approved for § 1910.261(g)(18)(iii). for Sound Level Meters, IBR approved
(27) ANSI B31.3–66 Petroleum Refin- for § 1910.95 appendixes D and I.
ery Piping, IBR approved for (45) ANSI S1.11–71 (R 76) Specification
§ 1910.103(b)(3)(v)(b). for Octave, Half-Octave and Third-Oc-
(28) ANSI B31.5–66 Addenda B31.5a tave Band Filter Sets, IBR approved
(1968) Refrigeration Piping, IB ap- for § 1910.95 appendix D.
proved for §§ 1910.103(b)(3)(v)(b) and (46) ANSI S3.6–69 Specifications for
1910.111(b)(7)(iii). Audiometers, IBR approved for
(29) ANSI B56.1–69 Safety Standard § 1910.95(h)(2) and (5)(ii) and appendix D.
for Powered Industrial Trucks, IBR ap- (47) ANSI Z4.1–68 Requirements for
proved for §§ 1910.178(a) (2) and (3) and Sanitation in Places of Employment,
102
IBR approved for § 1910.261 (a)(3)(xviii) wood, CO 80112; telephone: 1–877–413–

and (g)(15)(vi). 5184; Web site: www.global.ihs.com.
(48) [Reserved] (60) ANSI Z41–1999, American Na-
(49) ANSI Z9.1–51 Safety Code for tional Standard for Personal Protec-
Ventilation and Operation of Open Sur- tion—Protective Footwear; IBR ap-
face Tanks, IBR approved for proved for § 1910.136(b)(1)(ii). Copies of
1910.261(a)(3)(xix), (g)(18)(v), and ANSI Z41–1999 are available for pur-
(h)(2)(i). chase only from the National Safety
(50) ANSI Z9.1–71 Practices for Ven- Council, P.O. Box 558, Itasca, IL 60143–
tilation and Operation of Open-Surface 0558; telephone: 1–800–621–7619; fax: 708–
Tanks, IBR approved for 285–0797; Web site: http://www.nsc.org.
§ 1910.124(b)(4)(iv). (61) ANSI Z41–1991, American Na-
(51) ANSI Z9.2–60 Fundamentals Gov- tional Standard for Personal Protec-
erning the Design and Operation of tion—Protective Footwear; IBR ap-
Local Exhaust Systems, IBR approved proved for § 1910.136(b)(1)(iii). Copies of
for §§ 1910.94(a)(4)(i) introductory text, ANSI Z41–1991 are available for pur-
(a)(6) introductory text, (b)(3)(ix), chase only from the National Safety
(b)(4)(i) and (ii), (c)(3)(i) introductory Council, P.O. Box 558, Itasca, IL 60143–
text, (c)(5)(iii)(b), and (c)(7)(iv)(a); 0558; telephone: 1–800–621–7619; fax: 708–
1910.261(a)(3)(xx), (g)(1)(i) and (iii), and 285–0797; Web site: http://www.nsc.org.
(h)(2)(ii). (62)–(63) [Reserved]
(52) ANSI Z9.2–79 Fundamentals Gov- (64) ANSI Z49.1–67 Safety in Welding
erning the Design and Operation of and Cutting, IBR approved for
Local Exhaust Systems, IBR approved § 1910.252(c)(1)(iv) (A) and (B).
for § 1910.124(b)(4)(i). (65) USAS Z53.1–1967 (also referred to
(53) ANSI Z12.12–68 Standard for the as ANSI Z53.1–1967), Safety Color Code
Prevention of Sulfur Fires and Explo- for Marking Physical Hazards, ANSI
sions, IBR approved for § 1910.261 approved October 9, 1967; IBR approved
(a)(3)(xxi), (d)(1)(i), (f)(2)(iv), and for § 1910.97(a) and 1910.145(d). Copies
(g)(1)(i). available for purchase from the IHS
(54) ANSI Z12.20–62 (R 69) Code for the Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way
Prevention of Dust Explosions in East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone:
Woodworking and Wood Flour Manu- 1–877–413–5184; Web site:
facturing Plants, IBR approved for www.global.ihs.com.
§ 1910.265(c)(20)(i). (66) ANSI Z535.1–2006 (R2011), Safety
(55) ANSI Z21.30–64 Requirements for Colors, reaffirmed July 19, 2011; IBR ap-
Gas Appliances and Gas Piping Instal- proved for §§ 1910.97(a) and 1910.145(d).
lations, IBR approved for Copies available for purchase from the:
§ 1910.265(c)(15). (i) American National Standards In-
(56) ANSI Z24.22–57 Method of Meas- stitute’s e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd
urement of Real-Ear Attenuation of Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036;
Ear Protectors at Threshold, IBR ap- telephone: 212–642–4980; Web site: http://
proved for § 1910.261(a)(3)(xxii). webstore.ansi.org/;
(57) ANSI Z33.1–61 Installation of (ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness
Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; tele-
Stock, and Vapor Removal or Con- phone: 877–413–5184; Web site:
veying, IBR approved for www.global.ihs.com; or
§§ 1910.94(a)(4)(i); 1910.261 (a)(3)(xxiii) (iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero
and (f)(5); and 1910.265(c)(20)(i). Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone:
(58) ANSI Z33.1–66 Installation of 877–699–9277; Web site:
Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, www.techstreet.com.
Stock, and Vapor Removal or Con- (67) ANSI Z535.2–2011, Environmental
veying, IBR approved for and Facility Safety Signs, published
§ 1910.94(a)(2)(ii). September 15, 2011; IBR approved for
(59) ANSI Z35.1–1968, Specifications § 1910.261(c). Copies available for pur-
for Accident Prevention Signs; IBR ap- chase from the:
proved for § 1910.261(c). Copies available (i) American National Standards In-
for purchase from the IHS Standards stitute’s e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd
Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Engle- Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036;
103
telephone: 212–642–4980; Web site: http:// (i) American National Standards In-
webstore.ansi.org/; stitute’s e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd
(ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036;
Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; tele- telephone: (212) 642–4980; Web site:
phone: 877–413–5184; Web site: http://webstore.ansi.org/;
www.global.ihs.com; or (ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness
(iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; tele-
Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: phone: (877) 413–5184; Web site: http://
877–699–9277; Web site: global.ihs.com; or
www.techstreet.com. (iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero
(68) ANSI Z54.1–63 Safety Standard Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone:
for Non-Medical X-Ray and Sealed (877) 699–9277; Web site: http://
Gamma Ray Sources, IBR approved for techstreet.com.
§ 1910.252(d) (1)(vii) and (2)(ii). (72) ANSI Z88.2–1969, Practices for
(69) ANSI/ISEA Z87.1–2010, Occupa- Respiratory Protection; IBR approved
tional and Educational Personal Eye for §§ 1910.94(c)(6)(iii)(a), 1910.134(c); and
and Face Protection Devices, Approved 1910.261(a)(3)(xxvi), (b)(2), (f)(5),
April 13, 2010; IBR approved for (g)(15)(v), (h)(2)(iii), (h)(2)(iv), and (i)(4).
§ 1910.133(b). Copies are available for (73) American National Standards In-
purchase from: stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–2009, American Na-
tional Standard for Industrial Head
(i) American National Standards In-
Protection, approved January 26, 2009;
stitute’s e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd
IBR approved for § 1910.135(b)(1)(i). Cop-
Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036;
ies of ANSI Z89.1–2009 are available for
telephone: (212) 642–4980; Web site:
purchase only from the International
http://webstore.ansi.org/;
Safety Equipment Association, 1901
(ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness
North Moore Street, Arlington, VA
Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; tele-
22209–1762; telephone: 703–525–1695; fax:
phone: (877) 413–5184; Web site: http://
703–528–2148; Web site:
global.ihs.com; or
www.safetyequipment.org.
(iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero (74) American National Standards In-
Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–2003, American Na-
(877) 699–9277; Web site: http:// tional Standard for Industrial Head
techstreet.com. Protection; IBR approved for
(70) ANSI Z87.1–2003, Occupational § 1910.135(b)(1)(ii). Copies of ANSI Z89.1–
and Educational Eye and Face Per- 2003 are available for purchase only
sonal Protection Devices Approved from the International Safety Equip-
June 19, 2003; IBR approved for ment Association, 1901 North Moore
§§ 1910.133(b). Copies available for pur- Street, Arlington, VA 22209–1762; tele-
chase from the: phone: 703–525–1695; fax: 703–528–2148;
(i) American National Standards In- Web site: www.safetyequipment.org.
stitute’s e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd (75) American National Standards In-
Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–1997, American Na-
telephone: (212) 642–4980; Web site: tional Standard for Personnel Protec-
http://webstore.ansi.org/; tion—Protective Headwear for Indus-
(ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness trial Workers—Requirements; IBR ap-
Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; tele- proved for § 1910.135(b)(1)(iii). Copies of
phone: (877) 413–5184; Web site: http:// ANSI Z89.1–1997 are available for pur-
global.ihs.com; or chase only from the International Safe-
(iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero ty Equipment Association, 1901 North
Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: Moore Street, Arlington, VA 22209–1762;
(877) 699–9277; Web site: http:// telephone: 703–525–1695; fax: 703–528–
techstreet.com. 2148; Web site: www.safetyequipment.org.
(71) ANSI Z87.1–1989 (R–1998), Practice (76) ANSI Z41.1–1967 Men’s Safety Toe
for Occupational and Educational Eye Footwear; IBR approved for
and Face Protection, Reaffirmation ap- § 1910.261(i)(4).
proved January 4, 1999; IBR approved (77) ANSI Z87.1–1968 Practice of Occu-
for § 1910.133(b). Copies are available for pational and Educational Eye and Face
purchase from: Protection; IBR approved for
104
§ 1910.261(a)(3)(xxv), (d)(1)(ii), (f)(5), (h)(2) (Table H–34); and

(g)(1), (g)(15)(v), (g)(18)(ii), and (i)(4). 1910.111(b)(2)(vi);
(78) ANSI Z89.1–1969 Safety Require- (2) ASME Code for Pressure Vessels,
ments for Industrial Head Protection; 1968 Ed., IBR approved for
IBR approved for § 1910.261(a)(3)(xxvii), §§ 1910.106(i)(3)(i); 1910.110(g)(2)(iii)(b)(2);
(b)(2), (g)(15)(v), and (i)(4). and 1910.217(b)(12);
(79) ANSI Z89.2–1971 Safety Require- (3) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
ments for Industrial Protective Hel- Code, Sec. VIII, 1968, IBR approved for
mets for Electrical Workers, Class B; §§ 1910.103; 1910.104(b)(4)(ii); 1910.106
IBR approved for § 1910.268(i)(1). (b)(1)(iv)(b)(2) and (i)(3)(ii); 1910.107;
(f) The following material is avail- 1910.110(b)(11) (i)(b) and (iii)(a)(1);
able for purchase from the American 1910.111(b)(2) (i), (ii), and (iv); and
Petroleum Institute (API), 1220 L 1910.169(a)(2) (i) and (ii);
Street NW, Washington DC 20005:
(4) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
(1) [Reserved]
Code, Sec. VIII, Paragraph UG–84, 1968,
(2) API 12B (May 1958) Specification
IBR approved for § 1910.104 (b)(4)(ii) and
for Bolted Production Tanks, 11th Ed.,
With Supplement No. 1, Mar. 1962, IBR (b)(5)(iii);
approved for § 1910.106(b)(1)(i)(a)(3). (5) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
(3) API 12D (Aug. 1957) Specification Code, Sec. VIII, Unfired Pressure Ves-
for Large Welded Production Tanks, sels, Including Addenda (1969), IBR ap-
7th Ed., IBR approved for proved for §§ 1910.261; 1910.262;
§ 1910.106(b)(1)(i)(a)(3). 1910.263(i)(24)(ii);
(4) API 12F (Mar. 1961) Specification (6) Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels
for Small Welded Production Tanks, for Petroleum Liquids and Gases of the
5th Ed., IBR approved for API and the ASME, 1951 Ed., IBR ap-
§ 1910.106(b)(1)(i)(a)(3). proved for § 1910.110(b)(3)(iii); and
(5) API 620, Fourth Ed. (1970) Includ- (7) ASME B56.6–1992 (with addenda),
ing appendix R, Recommended Rules Safety Standard for Rough Terrain
for Design and Construction of Large Forklift Trucks, IBR approved for
Welded Low Pressure Storage Tanks, § 1910.266(f)(4).
IBR approved for §§ 1910.103(c)(1)(i)(a); (h) Copies of the standards listed
1910.106(b)(1)(iv)(b)(1); and 1910.111(d)(1) below in this paragraph (h) are avail-
(ii) and (iii). able for purchase from ASTM Inter-
(6) API 650 (1966) Welded Steel Tanks national, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O.
for Oil Storage, 3rd Ed., IBR approved Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA
for § 1910.106(b)(1)(iii)(a)(2). 19428–2959; Telephone: 610–832–9585; Fax:
(7) API 1104 (1968) Standard for Weld- 610–832–9555; Email: seviceastm.org; Web
ing Pipelines and Related Facilities, site: http://www.astm.org. Copies of his-
IBR approved for § 1910.252(d)(1)(v). torical standards or standards that
(8) API 2000 (1968) Venting Atmos- ASTM does not have may be purchased
pheric and Low Pressure Storage from Information Handling Services,
Tanks, IBR approved for Global Engineering Documents, 15 In-
§ 1910.106(b)(2)(iv)(b)(1). verness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112;
(9) API 2201 (1963) Welding or Hot Telephone: 1–800–854–7179; Email:
Tapping on Equipment Containing
global@ihs.com; Web sites: http://glob-
Flammables, IBR approved for
al.ihs.com or http://www.store.ihs.com.
§ 1910.252(d)(1)(vi).
(g) The following material is avail- (1) ASTM A 47–68, Malleable Iron
able for purchase from the American Castings, IBR approved for § 1910.111.
Society of Mechanical Engineers (2) ASTM A 53–69, Welded and Seam-
(ASME), United Engineering Center, less Steel Pipe, IBR approved for
345 East 47th Street, New York, NY §§ 1910.110 and 1910.111.
10017: (3) ASTM A 126–66, Gray Iron Casting
(1) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fitting,
Code, Sec. VIII, 1949, 1950, 1952, 1956, IBR approved for § 1910.111.
1959, and 1962 Ed., IBR approved for (4) ASTM A 391–65 (ANSI G61.1–1968),
§§ 1910.110 (b)(10)(iii) (Table H–26), (d)(2) Alloy Steel Chain, IBR approved for
(Table H–31); (e)(3)(i) (Table H–32), § 1910.184.
105
(5) ASTM A 395–68, Ductile Iron for 2005, IBR approved for Appendix B to
Use at Elevated Temperatures, IBR ap- § 1910.1200.
proved for § 1910.111. (23) ASTM D 1692–68, Test for Flam-
(6) ASTM B 88–66A, Seamless Copper mability of Plastic Sheeting and Cel-
Water Tube, IBR approved for § 1910.252. lular Plastics, IBR approved for
(7) ASTM B 88–69, Seamless Copper § 1910.103.
Water Tube, IBR approved for § 1910.110. (24) ASTM D 2161–66, Conversion Ta-
(8) [Reserved] bles for SUS, IBR approved for
(9) ASTM B 210–68, Aluminum-Alloy § 1910.106.
Drawn Seamless Tubes, IBR approved (25) ASTM D 3278–96 (Reapproved
for § 1910.110. 2004) E1, Standard Test Methods for
(10) ASTM B 241–69, Standard Speci- Flash Point of Liquids by Small Scale
fications for Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Closed-Cup Apparatus, Approved No-
Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube, IBR vember 1, 2004, IBR approved for Ap-
approved for § 1910.110. pendix B to § 1910.1200.
(11) ASTM D 5–65, Test for Penetra- (26) ASTM D 3828–07a, Standard Test
tion by Bituminous Materials, IBR ap- Methods for Flash Point by Small
proved for § 1910.106. Scale Closed Cup Tester, Approved
(12) ASTM D 56–70, Test for Flash July 15, 2007, IBR approved for Appen-
Point by Tag Closed Tester, IBR ap- dix B to § 1910.1200.
proved for § 1910.106. (27) ASTM F–2412–2005, Standard Test
(13) ASTM D 56–05, Standard Test Methods for Foot Protection, IBR ap-
Method for Flash Point by Tag Closed proved for § 1910.136.
Cup Tester, Approved May 1, 2005, IBR (28) ASTM F–2413–2005, Standard
approved for Appendix B to § 1910.1200. Specification for Performance Require-
(14) ASTM D 86–62, Test for Distilla- ments for Protective Footwear, IBR
tion of Petroleum Products, IBR ap- approved for § 1910.136.
proved for §§ 1910.106 and 1910.119.
(i) The following material is avail-
(15) ASTM D 86–07a, Standard Test
able at the American Thoracic Society
Method for Distillation of Petroleum
(ATS), 25 Broadway, 18th Floor New
Products at Atmospheric Pressure, Ap-
York, NY 10004; website:
proved April 1, 2007, IBR approved for
www.atsjournals.org/.
Appendix B to § 1910.1200.
(1) Spirometric Reference Values
(16) ASTM D 88–56, Test for Saybolt
from a Sample of the General U.S. Pop-
Viscosity, IBR approved for § 1910.106.
ulation. Hankinson JL, Odencrantz JR,
(17) ASTM D 93–71, Test for Flash
Fedan KB. American Journal of Res-
Point by Pensky Martens, IBR ap-
piratory and Critical Care Medicine,
proved for § 1910.106.
159:179–187, 1999, IBR approved for
(18) ASTM D 93–08, Standard Test
§ 1910.1043(h).
Methods for Flash Point by Pensky-
Martens Closed Cup Tester, Approved (2) [Reserved]
Oct. 15, 2008, IBR approved for Appen- (j) The following material is avail-
dix B to § 1910.1200. able for purchase from the American
(19) ASTM D 240–02 (Reapproved 2007), Welding Society (AWS), 550 NW,
Standard Test Method for Heat of Com- LeJeune Road, P.O. Box 351040, Miami
bustion of Liquid Hydrocarbon Fuels FL 33135:
by Bomb Calorimeter, Approved May 1, (1)–(2) [Reserved]
2007, IBR approved for Appendix B to (3) AWS B3.0–41 Standard Qualifica-
§ 1910.1200. tion Procedure, IBR approved for
(20) ASTM D 323–68, Standard Test § 1910.67(c)(5)(i).
Method of Test for Vapor Pressure of (4) AWS D1.0–1966 Code for Welding in
Petroleum Products (Reid Method), Building Construction, IBR approved
IBR approved for § 1910.106. for § 1910.27(b)(6).
(21) ASTM D 445–65, Test for Vis- (5) AWS D2.0–69 Specifications for
cosity of Transparent and Opaque Liq- Welding Highway and Railway Bridges,
uids, IBR approved for § 1910.106. IBR approved for § 1910.67(c)(5)(iv).
(22) ASTM D 1078–05, Standard Test (6) AWS D8.4–61 Recommended Prac-
Method for Distillation Range of Vola- tices for Automotive Welding Design,
tile Organic Liquids, Approved May 15, IBR approved for § 1910.67(c)(5)(ii).
106
(7) AWS D10.9–69 Standard Qualifica- 1910.104(b)(6)(iii); and

tion of Welding Procedures and Weld- 1910.111(d)(4)(ii)(b).
ers for Piping and Tubing, IBR ap- (11) CGA 1957 Standard Hose Connec-
proved for § 1910.67(c)(5)(iii). tion Standard, IBR approved for
(k) The following material is avail- § 1910.253(e) (4)(v) and (5)(iii).
able for purchase from the Department (12) CGA and RMA (Rubber Manufac-
of Commerce: turer’s Association) Specification for
(1) [Reserved] Rubber Welding Hose (1958), IBR ap-
(2) Publication ‘‘Model Performance proved for § 1910.253(e)(5)(i).
Criteria for Structural Fire Fighters’ (13) CGA 1958 Regulator Connection
Helmets,’’ IBR approved for Standard, IBR approved for § 1910.253(e)
§ 1910.156(e)(5)(i). (4)(iv) and (6).
(l) The following material is avail- (m) The following material is avail-
able for purchase from the Compressed able for purchase from the Crane Man-
Gas Association (CGA), 1235 Jefferson ufacturer’s Association of America,
Davis Highway, Arlington, VA 22202: Inc. (CMAA), 1 Thomas Circle NW,
(1) CGA C–6 (1968) Standards for Vis- Washington DC 20005:
ual Inspection of Compressed Gas Cyl- (1) CMAA Specification 1B61, Speci-
inders, IBR approved for § 1910.101(a). fications for Electric Overhead Trav-
(2) CGA C–8 (1962) Standard for Re- eling Cranes, IBR approved for
qualification of ICC–3HT Cylinders, § 1910.179(b)(6)(i).
IBR approved for § 1910.101(a). (2) [Reserved]
(3) CGA G–1–2009 Acetylene, Twelfth (n) The following material is avail-
Edition, IBR approved for § 1910.102(a). able for purchase from the General
Copies of CGA Pamphlet G–1–2009 are Services Administration:
available for purchase from the: Com- (1) GSA Pub. GG-B–0067b, Air Com-
pressed Gas Association, Inc., 4221 pressed for Breathing Purposes, or In-
Walney Road, 5th Floor, Chantilly, VA terim Federal Specifications, Apr. 1965,
20151; telephone: (703) 788–2700; fax: (703) IBR approved for § 1910.134(d)(4).
961–1831; email: cga@cganet.com. (2) [Reserved]
(4) CGA G–7.1 (1966) Commodity Spec- (o) The following material is avail-
ification, IBR approved for able for purchase from the Department
§ 1910.134(d)(1). of Health and Human Services:
(5) CGA G–8.1 (1964) Standard for the (1) Publication No. 76–120 (1975), List
Installation of Nitrous Oxide Systems of Personal Hearing Protectors and At-
at Consumer Sites, IBR approved for tenuation Data, IBR approved for
§ 1910.105. § 1910.95 App. B.
(6) CGA P–1 (1965) Safe Handling of (2) [Reserved]
Compressed Gases, IBR approved for (p) The following material is avail-
§ 1910.101(b). able for purchase from the Institute of
(7) CGA P–3 (1963) Specifications, Makers of Explosives (IME), 420 Lex-
Properties, and Recommendations for ington Avenue, New York, NY 10017:
Packaging, Transportation, Storage (1) IME Pamphlet No. 17, 1960, Safety
and Use of Ammonium Nitrate, IBR ap- in the Handling and Use of Explosives,
proved for § 1910.109(i)(1)(ii)(b). IBR approved for §§ 1910.261 (a)(4)(iii)
(8) CGA S–1.1 (1963) and 1965 Addenda. and (c)(14)(ii).
Safety Release Device Standards—Cyl- (2) [Reserved]
inders for Compressed Gases, IBR ap- (q) The following material is avail-
proved for §§ 1910.101(c); able from the International Labour Or-
1910.103(c)(1)(iv)(a)(2). ganization (ILO), 4 route des Morillons,
(9) CGA S–1.2 (1963) Safety Release CH–1211 Genève 22, Switzerland; tele-
Device Standards, Cargo and Portable phone: +41 (0) 22 799 6111; fax: +41 (0) 22
Tanks for Compressed Gases, IBR ap- 798 8685; website: www.ilo.org/.
proved for §§ 1910.101(c); (1) Guidelines for the Use of the ILO
1910.103(c)(1)(iv)(a)(2). International Classification of
(10) CGA S–1.3 (1959) Safety Release Radiographs of Pneumoconioses, Re-
Device Standards-Compressed Gas vised Edition 2011, Occupational safety
Storage Containers, IBR approved for and health series; 22 (Rev.2011), IBR ap-
§§ 1910.103(c)(1)(iv)(a)(2); proved for § 1910.1001.
107
(2) [Reserved] Electrical Manufacturer’s Association

(r)(1) The following materials are (NEMA):
available for purchase from the Inter- (1) NEMA EW–1 (1962) Requirements
national Standards Organization (ISO) for Electric Arc Welding Apparatus,
through ANSI, 25 West 43rd Street, IBR approved for §§ 1910.254(b)(1).
Fourth Floor, New York, NY 10036–7417; (2) [Reserved]
Telephone: 212–642–4980; Fax: 212–302– (t) The following material is avail-
1286; Email: info@ansi.org; Web site: able for purchase from the National
http://www.ansi.org. Fire Protection Association (NFPA), 1
(2) Documents not available in the Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269;
ANSI store may be purchased from: Telephone: 800–344–3555 or 617–770–3000;
(i) Document Center Inc., 111 Indus- Fax: 1–800–593–6372 or 1–508–895–8301;
trial Road, Suite 9, Belmont, 94002; Email: custserv@nfpa.org; Web site:
Telephone: 650–591–7600; Fax: 650–591– http://www.nfpa.org.
7617; Email: info@document-center.com; (1) NFPA 30 (1969) Flammable and
Web site: www.document-center.com. Combustible Liquids Code, IBR ap-
(ii) DECO—Document Engineering proved for § 1910.178(f)(1).
Co., Inc., 15210 Stagg Street, Van Nuys, (2) NFPA 32–1970 Standard for Dry
CA 91405; Telephone: 800–645–7732 or 818– Cleaning Plants, IBR approved for
782–1010; Fax: 818–782–2374; Email: § 1910.106(j)(6)(i).
doceng@doceng.com; Web site: (3) NFPA 33–1969 Standard for Spray
www.doceng.com Finishing Using Flammable and Com-
bustible Material, IBR approved for
(iii) Global Engineering Documents,
§ 1910.94(c)(2).
15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO
(4) NFPA 34–1966 Standard for Dip
80112; Telephone: 1–800–854–7179 or 303–
Tanks Containing Flammable or Com-
397–7956; Fax: 303–397–2740; Email:
bustible Liquids, IBR approved for
global@ihs.com; Web sites: http://glob-
§ 1910.124(b)(4)(iv).
al.ihs.com or http://www.store.ihs.com;
(5) NFPA 34–1995 Standard for Dip
(iv) ILI Infodisk, Inc., 610 Winters Av- Tanks Containing Flammable or Com-
enue, Paramus, NJ 07652; Telephone: bustible Liquids, IBR approved for
201–986–1131; Fax: 201–986–7886; Email: § 1910.124(b)(4)(ii).
sales@ili-info.com; Web site: www.ili- (6) NFPA 35–1970 Standard for the
info.com. Manufacture of Organic Coatings, IBR
(v) Techstreet, a business of Thomson approved for § 1910.106(j)(6)(ii).
Reuters, 3916 Ranchero Drive, Ann (7) NFPA 36–1967 Standard for Sol-
Arbor, MI 48108; Telephone: 800–699–9277 vent Extraction Plants, IBR approved
or 734–780–8000; Fax: 734–780–2046; Email: for § 1910.106(j)(6)(iii).
techstreet.service@thomsonreuters.com; (8) NFPA 37–1970 Standard for the In-
Web site: www.Techstreet.com. stallation and Use of Stationary Com-
(3) ISO 10156:1996 (E), Gases and Gas bustion Engines and Gas Turbines, IBR
Mixtures—Determination of Fire Po- approved for §§ 1910.106(j)(6)(iv) and
tential and Oxidizing Ability for the 1910.110 (b)(20)(iv)(c) and (e)(11).
Selection of Cylinder Valve Outlets, (9) NFPA 51B–1962 Standard for Fire
Second Edition, Feb. 15, 1996, IBR ap- Protection in Use of Cutting and Weld-
proved for appendix B to § 1910.1200. ing Processes, IBR approved for
(4) ISO 10156–2:2005 (E), Gas cyl- § 1910.252(a)(1) introductory text.
inders—Gases and Gas Mixtures—Part (10) NFPA 54–1969 Standard for the
2: Determination of Oxidizing Ability Installation of Gas Appliances and Gas
of Toxic and Corrosive Gases and Gas Piping, IBR approved for
Mixtures, First Edition, Aug. 1, 2005, § 1910.110(b)(20)(iv)(a).
IBR approved for Appendix B to (11) NFPA 54A–1969 Standard for the
§ 1910.1200. Installation of Gas Piping and Gas
(5) ISO 13943:2000 (E/F), Fire Safety— Equipment on Industrial Premises and
Vocabulary, First Edition, April, 15, Certain Other Premises, IBR approved
2000, IBR approved for appendix B to for § 1910.110(b)(20)(iv)(b).
§ 1910.1200. (12) NFPA 58–1969 Standard for the
(s) The following material is avail- Storage and Handling of Liquefied Pe-
able for purchase from the National troleum Gases (ANSI Z106.1–1970), IBR
108
approved for §§ 1910.110 (b)(3)(iv) and §§ 1910.106 (d)(3)(ii) introductory text

(i)(3) (i) and (ii); and 1910.178(f)(2). and (d)(4)(i).
(13) NFPA 59–1968 Standard for the (28) NFPA 302–1968 Fire Protection
Storage and Handling of Liquefied Pe- Standard for Motor-Craft (Pleasure and
troleum Gases at Utility Gas Plants, Commercial), IBR approved for
IBR approved for §§ 1910.110 (b)(3)(iv) § 1910.265(d)(2)(iv) introductory text.
and (i)(2)(iv). (29) NFPA 385–1966 Recommended
(14) NFPA 62–1967 Standard for the Regulatory Standard for Tank Vehicles
Prevention of Dust Explosions in the for Flammable and Combustible Liq-
Production, Packaging, and Handling uids, IBR approved for
of Pulverized Sugar and Cocoa, IBR ap- § 1910.106(g)(1)(i)(e)(1).
proved for § 1910.263(k)(2)(i). (30) NFPA 496–1967 Standard for
(15) NFPA 68–1954 Guide for Explosion Purged Enclosures for Electrical
Venting, IBR approved for Equipment in Hazardous Locations,
§ 1910.94(a)(2)(iii). IBR approved for
(16) [Reserved] § 1910.103(c)(1)(ix)(e)(1).
(17) NFPA 78–1968 Lightning Protec- (31) NFPA 505–1969 Standard for Type
tion Code, IBR approved for Designations, Areas of Use, Mainte-
§ 1910.109(i)(6)(ii). nance, and Operation of Powered Indus-
(18) NFPA 80–1968 Standard for Fire trial Trucks, IBR approved for
Doors and Windows, IBR approved for § 1910.110(e)(2)(iv).
§ 1910.106(d)(4)(i). (32) NFPA 566–1965 Standard for the
(19) NFPA 80–1970 Standard for the Installation of Bulk Oxygen Systems
Installation of Fire Doors and Win- at Consumer Sites, IBR approved for
dows, IBR approved for §§ 1910.253 (b)(4)(iv) and (c)(2)(v).
§ 1910.253(f)(6)(i)(I). (33) NFPA 656–1959 Code for the Pre-
(20) NFPA 86A–1969 Standard for Oven vention of Dust Ignition in Spice
and Furnaces Design, Location and Grinding Plants, IBR approved for
Equipment, IBR approved for §§ 1910.107 § 1910.263(k)(2)(i).
(j)(1) and (l)(3) and 1910.108 (b)(2) and (34) NFPA 1971–1975 Protective Cloth-
(d)(2). ing for Structural Fire Fighting, IBR
(21) NFPA 91–1961 Standard for the approved for § 1910.156(e)(3)(ii) introduc-
Installation of Blower and Exhaust tory text.
Systems for Dust, Stock, and Vapor (35) NFPA 51A (2001) Standard for
Removal or Conveying (ANSI Z33.1–61), Acetylene Cylinder Charging Plants,
IBR approved for § 1910.107(d)(1). IBR approved for § 1910.102(b) and (c).
(22) NFPA 91–1969 Standards for Copies of NFPA 51A–2001 are available
Blower and Exhaust Systems, IBR ap- for purchase from the: National Fire
proved for § 1910.108(b)(1). Protection Association, 1
(23) NFPA 96–1970 Standard for the Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02169–
Installation of Equipment for the Re- 7471; telephone: 1–800–344–35557; e-mail:
moval of Smoke and Grease Laden Va- custserv@nfpa.org.
pors from Commercial Cooking Equip- (36) NFPA 51A (2006) Standard for
ment, IBR approved for Acetylene Cylinder Charging Plants,
§ 1910.110(b)(20)(iv)(d). IBR approved for § 1910.102(b) and (c).
(24) NFPA 101–1970 Code for Life Safe- Copies of NFPA 51A–2006 are available
ty From Fire in Buildings and Struc- for purchase from the: National Fire
tures, IBR approved for Protection Association, 1
§ 1910.261(a)(4)(ii). Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02169–
(25) NFPA 101–2009, Life Safety Code, 7471; telephone: 1–800–344–35557; e-mail:
2009 edition, IBR approved for §§ 1910.34, custserv@nfpa.org.
1910.35, 1910.36, and 1910.37. (37) NFPA 30B, Code for the Manufac-
(26) NFPA 203M–1970 Manual on Roof ture and Storage of Aerosol Products,
Coverings, IBR approved for 2007 Edition, Approved August 17, 2006,
§ 1910.109(i)(1)(iii)(c). IBR approved for Appendix B to
(27) NFPA 251–1969 Standard Methods § 1910.1200.
of Fire Tests of Building Construction (u) The following material is avail-

and Materials, IBR approved for able for purchase from the National
109
Food Plant Institute, 1700 K St. NW., Earthmoving, Forestry and Mining Ma-
Washington, DC 20006: chines, IBR approved for
(1) Definition and Test Procedures for § 1910.266(f)(3)(ii).
Ammonium Nitrate Fertilizer (Nov. (y) The following material is avail-
1964), IBR approved for § 1910.109 Table able for purchase from the Fertilizer
H–22, ftn. 3. Institute, 1015 18th Street NW, Wash-
(2) [Reserved] ington, DC 20036:
(v) The following material is avail- (1) Standard M–1 (1953, 1955, 1957, 1960,
able for purchase from the National In- 1961, 1963, 1965, 1966, 1967, 1968), Super-
stitute for Occupational Safety and seded by ANSI K61.1–1972, IBR approved
Health (NIOSH): for § 1910.111(b)(1) (i) and (iii).
(1) Registry of Toxic Effects of Chem- (2) [Reserved]
ical Substances, 1978, IBR approved for (z) The following material is avail-
§ 1910.20(c)(13)(i) and appendix B. able for purchase from Underwriters
(2) Development of Criteria for Fire Laboratories (UL), 207 East Ohio
Fighters Gloves; Vol. II, part II; Test Street, Chicago, IL 60611:
Methods, 1976, IBR approved for (1) UL 58–61 Steel Underground Tanks
§ 1910.156(e)(4)(i) introductory text. for Flammable and Combustible Liq-
(3) NIOSH Recommendations for Oc- uids, 5th Ed., IBR approved for
cupational Safety and Health Stand- § 1910.106(b)(1)(iii)(a)(1).
ards (Sept. 1987), IBR approved for (2) UL 80–63 Steel Inside Tanks for
§ 1910.120 PEL definition. Oil-Burner Fuel, IBR approved for
(w) The following material is avail- § 1910.106(b)(1)(iii)(a)(1).
able for purchase from the Public (3) UL 142–68 Steel Above Ground
Health Service: Tanks for Flammable and Combustible
(1) U.S. Pharmacopeia, IBR approved Liquids, IBR approved for
for § 1910.134(d)(1). § 1910.106(b)(1)(iii)(a)(1).
(2) Publication No. 934 (1962), Food (aa) The following material is avail-
Service Sanitation Ordinance and able for purchase from the: Inter-
Code, part V of the Food Service Sani- national Code Council, Chicago Dis-
tation Manual, IBR approved for trict Office, 4051 W. Flossmoor Rd.,
§ 1910.142(i)(1). Country Club Hills, IL 60478; telephone:
(x) The following material is avail- 708–799–2300, x3–3801; facsimile: 001–708–
able for purchase from the Society of 799–4981; e-mail: order@iccsafe.org.
Automotive Engineers (SAE), 485 Lex- (1) IFC–2009, International Fire Code,
ington Avenue, New York, NY 10017: copyright 2009, IBR approved for
(1) SAE J185, June 1988, Rec- §§ 1910.34, 1910.35, 1910.36, and 1910.37.
ommended Practice for Access Systems (2) [Reserved]
for Off-Road Machines, IBR approved (bb)(1) The following document is
for § 1910.266(f)(5)(i). available for purchase from United Na-
(2) SAE J231, January 1981, Minimum tions Publications, Customer Service,
Performance Criteria for Falling Ob- c/o National Book Network, 15200 NBN
ject Protective Structure (FOPS), IBR Way, PO Box 190, Blue Ridge Summit,
approved for § 1910.266(f)(3)(ii). PA 17214; telephone: 1–888–254–4286; fax:
(3) SAE J386, June 1985, Operator Re- 1–800–338–4550; email:
straint Systems for Off-Road Work Ma- unpublications@nbnbooks.com. Other
chines, IBR approved for distributors of United Nations Publica-
§ 1910.266(d)(3)(iv). tions include:
(4) SAE J397, April 1988, Deflection (i) Bernan, 15200 NBN Way, Blue
Limiting Volume-ROPS/FOPS Labora- Ridge Summit, PA 17214; telephone: 1–
tory Evaluation, IBR approved for 800–865–3457; fax: 1–800–865–3450; email:
§ 1910.266(f)(3)(iv). customercare@bernan; Web site: http://
(5) SAE 765 (1961) SAE Recommended www.bernan.com; and
Practice: Crane Loading Stability Test (ii) Renouf Publishing Co. Ltd., 812
Code, IBR approved for § 1910.180 Proctor Avenue, Ogdensburg, NY 13669–
(c)(1)(iii) and (e)(2)(iii)(a). 2205; telephone: 1–888–551–7470; Fax: 1–
(6) SAE J1040, April 1988, Perform- 888–551–7471; email:
ance Criteria for Rollover Protective orders@renoufbooks.com; Web site: http://

Structures (ROPS) for Construction, www.renoufbooks.com.
110
(2) UN ST/SG/AC.10/Rev.4, The UN (iii) Conducts field inspections to

Recommendations on the Transport of monitor and to assure the proper use of
Dangerous Goods, Manual of Tests and its identifying mark or labels on prod-
Criteria, Fourth Revised Edition, 2003, ucts;
IBR approved for appendix B to (3) The NRTL is completely inde-
§ 1910.1200. pendent of employers subject to the
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974] tested equipment requirements, and of
any manufacturers or vendors of equip-
EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci- ment or materials being tested for
tations affecting § 1910.6, see the List of CFR
Sections Affected, which appears in the
these purposes; and,
Finding Aids section of the printed volume (4) The NRTL maintains effective
and at www.govinfo.gov. procedures for:
(i) Producing creditable findings or
§ 1910.7 Definition and requirements reports that are objective and without
for a nationally recognized testing bias; and
laboratory.
(ii) Handling complaints and disputes
(a) Application. This section shall under a fair and reasonable system.
apply only when the term nationally (c) Test standards. An appropriate test
recognized testing laboratory is used in standard referred to in § 1910.7(b)(1) (i)
other sections of this part. and (ii) is a document which specifies
(b) Laboratory requirements. The term the safety requirements for specific
nationally recognized testing laboratory equipment or class of equipment and is:
(NRTL) means an organization which (1) Recognized in the United States
is recognized by OSHA in accordance as a safety standard providing an ade-
with appendix A of this section and quate level of safety, and
which tests for safety, and lists or la-
(2) Compatible with and maintained
bels or accepts, equipment or materials
current with periodic revisions of ap-
and which meets all of the following
plicable national codes and installation
criteria:
standards, and
(1) For each specified item of equip-
ment or material to be listed, labeled (3) Developed by a standards devel-
or accepted, the NRTL has the capa- oping organization under a method pro-
bility (including proper testing equip- viding for input and consideration of
ment and facilities, trained staff, writ- views of industry groups, experts,
ten testing procedures, and calibration users, consumers, governmental au-
and quality control programs) to per- thorities, and others having broad ex-
form: perience in the safety field involved, or
(i) Testing and examining of equip- (4) In lieu of paragraphs (c) (1), (2),
ment and materials for workplace safe- and (3), the standard is currently des-
ty purposes to determine conformance ignated as an American National
with appropriate test standards; or Standards Institute (ANSI) safety-des-
(ii) Experimental testing and exam- ignated product standard or an Amer-
ining of equipment and materials for ican Society for Testing and Materials
workplace safety purposes to deter- (ASTM) test standard used for evalua-
mine conformance with appropriate tion of products or materials.
test standards or performance in a (d) Alternative test standard. If a test-
specified manner. ing laboratory desires to use a test
(2) The NRTL shall provide, to the standard other than one allowed under
extent needed for the particular equip- paragraph (c) of this section, then the
ment or materials listed, labeled, or Assistant Secretary of Labor shall
accepted, the following controls or evaluate the proposed standard to de-
services: termine that it provides an adequate
(i) Implements control procedures for level of safety before it is used.
identifying the listed and labeled (e) Implementation. A testing organi-
equipment or materials; zation desiring recognition by OSHA as
(ii) Inspects the run of production of an NRTL shall request that OSHA
such items at factories for product evaluate its testing and control pro-
evaluation purposes to assure conform- grams against the requirements in this

ance with the test standards; and section for any equipment or material
111
it may specify. The recognition proce- (4) OSHA will implement periodic re-
dure shall be conducted in accordance view, and fee assessment, collection,
with appendix A to this section. and payment, as follows:
(f) Fees. (1) Each applicant for NRTL
recognition and each NRTL must pay Milestones/ Action required
Dates
fees for services provided by OSHA in
advance of the provision of those serv- I. Periodic Review of Fee Schedule
ices. OSHA will assess fees for the fol-
When review OSHA will publish any proposed new fee
lowing services: completed. schedule in the FEDERAL REGISTER if
(i) Processing of applications for ini- OSHA determines that costs warrant
tial recognition, expansion of recogni- changes in the fee schedule.
tion, or renewal of recognition, includ- Fifteen days Comments due on the proposed new fee
after publica- schedule.
ing on-site reviews; review and evaluation.
tion of the applications; and prepara- When OSHA OSHA will publish the final fee schedule in
tion of reports, evaluations and FED- approves the the FEDERAL REGISTER, making the fee
ERAL REGISTER notices; and fee schedule. schedule effective on a specific date.
(ii) Audits of sites. II. Application Processing Fees
(2) The fee schedule established by
OSHA reflects the full cost of per- Time of appli- Applicant must pay the applicable fees in
cation. the fee schedule that are due when sub-
forming the activities for each service mitting an application; OSHA will not
listed in paragraph (f)(1) of this sec- begin processing the application until it
tion. OSHA calculates the fees based on receives the fees.
either the average or actual time re- Before assess- Applicant must pay the estimated staff time
ment per- and travel costs for its assessment based
quired to perform the work necessary; formed. on the fees in effect at the time of the as-
the staff costs per hour (which include sessment. Applicant also must pay the
wages, fringe benefits, and expenses fees for the final report and FEDERAL
other than travel for personnel that REGISTER notice, and other applicable
fees, as specified in the fee schedule.
perform or administer the activities OSHA may cancel an application if the
covered by the fees); and the average or applicant does not pay these fees, or any
actual costs for travel when on-site re- balance of these fees, when due.
views are involved. The formula for the III. Audit Fees
fee calculation is as follows:
Before audit NRTL must pay the estimated staff time
Activity Fee = [Average (or Actual) performed. and travel costs for its audit based on the
Hours to Complete the Activity × fees in effect at the time of the audit.
Staff Costs per Hour] + Average (or NRTL also must pay other applicable
Actual) Travel Costs fees, as specified in the fee schedule.
After the audit, OSHA adjusts the audit
(3)(i) OSHA will review the full costs fees to account for the actual costs for
travel and staff time.
periodically and will propose a revised On due date ... NRTL must pay the estimated audit fees, or
fee schedule, if warranted. In its re- any balance due, by the due date estab-
view, OSHA will apply the formula es- lished by OSHA; OSHA will assess a late
tablished in paragraph (f)(2) of this sec- fee if NRTL does not pay audit fees (or
any balance of fees due) by the due date.
tion to the current estimated full costs OSHA may still perform the audit when
for the NRTL Program. If a change is an NRTL does not pay the fees or does
warranted, OSHA will follow the imple- not pay them on time.
mentation shown in paragraph (f)(4) of Thirty days OSHA will begin processing a notice for
after due publication in the FEDERAL REGISTER an-
this section. date or, if nouncing its plan to revoke recognition for
(ii) OSHA will publish all fee sched- earlier, date NRTLs that do not pay the estimated
ules in the FEDERAL REGISTER. Once NRTL re- audit fees and any balance of audit fees
fuses to pay. due.
published, a fee schedule remains in ef-
fect until it is superseded by a new fee Note: For the purposes of 29 CFR 1910.7(f)(4), ‘‘days’’
means ‘‘calendar days,’’ and ‘‘applicant’’ means ‘‘the NRTL’’
schedule. Any member of the public or ‘‘an applicant for NRTL recognition.’’
may request a change to the fees in-
cluded in the current fee schedule. (5) OSHA will provide details about
Such a request must include appro- how to pay the fees through appro-
priate documentation in support of the priate OSHA Program Directives,
suggested change. OSHA will consider which will be available on the OSHA
such requests during its annual review web site.

of the fee schedule.
112
APPENDIX A TO § 1910.7—OSHA RECOGNITION ment and materials for which recognition is
PROCESS FOR NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED being requested, unless such test methods
TESTING LABORATORIES are already specified in the test standard. If
requested to do so by OSHA, the applicant
INTRODUCTION shall provide documentation of the efficacy
This appendix provides requirements and of these testing methods.
criteria which OSHA will use to evaluate and c. The applicant may include whatever en-
recognize a Nationally Recognized Testing closures, attachments, or exhibits the appli-
Laboratory (NRTL). This process will in- cant deems appropriate. The application
clude the evaluation of the product evalua- need not be submitted on a Federal form.
tion and control programs being operated by 3. Filing office location. The application
the NRTL, as well as the NRTL’s testing fa- shall be filed with: NRTL Recognition Pro-
cilities being used in its program. In the gram, Occupational Safety and Health Ad-
evaluation of the NRTLs, OSHA will use ei- ministration, U.S. Department of Labor, 200
ther consensus-based standards currently in Constitution Avenue, NW., Washington, DC
use nationally, or other standards or criteria 20210.
which may be considered appropriate. This 4. Amendments and withdrawals. a. An appli-
appendix implements the definition of NRTL cation may be revised by an applicant at any
in 29 CFR 1910.7 which sets out the criteria time prior to the completion of activity
that a laboratory must meet to be recog- under paragraph I.B.4. of this appendix.
nized by OSHA (initially and on a continuing b. An application may be withdrawn by an
basis). The appendix is broader in scope, pro- applicant, without prejudice, at any time
viding procedures for renewal, expansion and prior to the final decision by the Assistant
revocation of OSHA recognition. Except as Secretary in paragraph I.B.7.c. of this appen-
otherwise provided, the burden is on the ap- dix.
plicant to establish by a preponderance of
the evidence that it is entitled to recogni- B. Review and Decision Process; Issuance or
tion as an NRTL. If further detailing of these Renewal.
requirements and criteria will assist the
1. Acceptance and on-site review. a. Applica-
NRTLs or OSHA in this activity, this detail-
tions submitted by eligible testing agencies
ing will be done through appropriate OSHA
will be accepted by OSHA, and their receipt
Program Directives.
acknowledged in writing. After receipt of an
I. Procedures for Initial OSHA Recognition application, OSHA may request additional
information if it believes information rel-
A. Applications. evant to the requirements for recognition
has been omitted.
1. Eligibility. a. Any testing agency or orga-
nization considering itself to meet the defi- b. OSHA shall, as necessary, conduct an
nition of nationally recognized testing lab- on-site review of the testing facilities of the
oratory as specified in § 1910.7 may apply for applicant, as well as the applicant’s adminis-
OSHA recognition as an NRTL. trative and technical practices, and, if nec-
b. However, in determining eligibility for a essary, review any additional documentation
foreign-based testing agency or organization, underlying the application.
OSHA shall take into consideration the pol- c. These on-site reviews will be conducted
icy of the foreign government regarding both by qualified individuals technically expert in
the acceptance in that country of testing these matters, including, as appropriate,
data, equipment acceptances, and listings, non-Federal consultants/contractors accept-
and labeling, which are provided through na- able to OSHA. The protocol for each review
tionally recognized testing laboratories rec- will be based on appropriate national con-
ognized by the Assistant Secretary, and the sensus standards or international guides,
accessibility to government recognition or a with such additions, changes, or deletions as
similar system in that country by U.S.-based may be considered necessary and appropriate
safety-related testing agencies, whether rec- in each case by OSHA. A written report shall
ognized by the Assistant Secretary or not, if be made of each on-site review and a copy
such recognition or a similar system is re- shall be provided to the applicant.
quired by that country. 2. Positive finding by staff. If, after review of
2. Content of application. a. The applicant the application, and additional information,
shall provide sufficient information and de- and the on-site review report, the applicant
tail demonstrating that it meets the require- appears to have met the requirements for
ments set forth in § 1910.7, in order for an in- recognition, a written recommendation shall
formed decision concerning recognition to be be submitted by the responsible OSHA per-
made by the Assistant Secretary. sonnel to the Assistant Secretary that the
b. The applicant also shall identify the application be approved, accompanied by a
scope of the NRTL-related activity for which supporting explanation.
the applicant wishes to be recognized. This 3. Negative finding by staff.—a. Notification

will include identifying the testing methods to applicant. If, after review of the applica-
it will use to test or judge the specific equip- tion, any additional information and the on-
113
site review report, the applicant does not ap- trary to the preliminary finding having been
pear to have met the requirements for rec- received in writing from the public during
ognition, the responsible OSHA personnel the comment period, the Assistant Secretary
shall notify the applicant in writing, listing will proceed to final written decision on the
the specific requirements of § 1910.7 and this application. The reasons supporting this de-
appendix which the applicant has not met, cision shall be derived from the evidence
and allow a reasonable period for response. available as a result of the full application,
b. Revision of application. (i) After receipt of the supporting documentation, the staff find-
a notification of negative finding (i.e., for ining, and the written comments and evidence
tended disapproval of the application), and
presented during the public review and com-
within the response period provided, the ap-
ment period.
plicant may:
(a) Submit a revised application for further b. Public announcement. A copy of the As-
review, which could result in a positive find- sistant Secretary’s final decision will be pro-
ing by the responsible OSHA personnel pur- vided to the applicant. Subsequently, a noti-
suant to subsection I.B.2. of this appendix; or fication of the final decision shall be pub-
(b) Request that the original application be lished in the FEDERAL REGISTER. The publi-
submitted to the Assistant Secretary with cation date will be the effective date of the
an attached statement of reasons, supplied recognition.
by the applicant of why the application c. Review of final decision. There will be no
should be approved. further review activity available within the
(ii) This procedure for applicant notifica- Department of Labor from the final decision
tion and potential revision shall be used only of the Assistant Secretary.
once during each recognition process. 7. Action after public objection—a. Review of
4. Preliminary finding by Assistant Secretary. negative information. At the discretion of the
a. The Assistant Secretary, or a special des- Assistant Secretary or his designee, OSHA
ignee for this purpose, will make a prelimi- may authorize Federal or contract personnel
nary finding as to whether the applicant has to initiate a special review of any informa-
or has not met the requirements for recognition provided in the public comment record
tion, based on the completed application file,
which appears to require resolution, before a
the written staff recommendation, and the
final decision can be made.
statement of reasons supplied by the appli-
cant if there remains a staff recommenda- b. Supplementation of record. The contents
tion of disapproval. and results of special reviews will be made
b. Notification of this preliminary finding part of this record by the Assistant Sec-
will be sent to the applicant and subse- retary by either:
quently published in the FEDERAL REGISTER. (i) Reopening the written comment period
c. This preliminary finding shall not be for public comments on these reviews; or
considered an official decision by the Assist- (ii) Convening an informal hearing to ac-
ant Secretary or OSHA, and does not confer cept public comments on these reviews, con-
any change in status or any interim or tem- ducted under applicable OSHA procedures for
porary recognition for the applicant. similar hearings.
5. Public review and comment period—a. The c. Final decision by the Assistant Secretary.
FEDERAL REGISTER notice of preliminary The Assistant Secretary shall issue a deci-
finding will provide a period of not less than sion as to whether it has been demonstrated,
30 calendar days for written comments on based on a preponderance of the evidence,
the applicant’s fulfillment of the require- that the applicant meets the requirements
ments for recognition. The application, sup- for recognition. The reasons supporting this
porting documents, staff recommendation, decision shall be derived from the evidence
statement of applicant’s reasons, and any available as a result of the full application,
comments received, will be available for pub- the supporting documentation, the staff find-
lic inspection in the OSHA Docket Office.
ing, the comments and evidence presented
b. Any member of the public, including the
during the public review and comment pe-
applicant, may supply detailed reasons and
riod, and written to transcribed evidence re-
evidence supporting or challenging the suffi-
ceived during any subsequent reopening of
ciency of the applicant’s having met the re-
quirements of the definition in 29 CFR the written comment period or informal pub-
§ 1910.7 and this appendix. Submission of per- lic hearing held.
tinent documents and exhibits shall be made d. Public announcement. A copy of the As-
in writing by the close of the comment pe- sistant Secretary’s final decision will be pro-
riod. vided to the applicant, and a notification
6. Action after public comment—a. Final deci- will be published in the FEDERAL REGISTER
sion by Assistant Secretary. Where the public subsequently announcing the decision.
review and comment record supports the As- e. Review of final decision. There will be no
sistant Secretary’s preliminary finding con- further review activity available within the
cerning the application, i.e., absent any seri- Department of Labor from the final decision
ous objections or substantive claims con- of the Assistant Secretary.
114
C. Terms and Conditions of Recognition. B. Expansion of current recognition
1. The following terms and conditions shall 1. Eligibility. A recognized NRTL may apply
be part of every recognition: to OSHA for an expansion of its current rec-
a. Letter of recognition. The recognition by ognition to cover other categories of NRTL
OSHA of any NRTL will be evidenced by a testing in addition to those included in the
letter of recognition from OSHA. The letter current recognition.
will provide the specific details of the scope 2. Procedure. a. OSHA will act upon and
of the OSHA recognition, including the spe- process the application for expansion in ac-
cific equipment or materials for which OSHA cordance with subsection I.B. of this appen-
recognition has been granted, as well as any dix, except that the period for written com-
specific conditions imposed by OSHA. ments, specified in paragraph 5.a of sub-
b. Period of recognition. The recognition by section I.B. of this appendix, will be not less
OSHA of each NRTL will be valid for five than 15 calendar days.
years, unless terminated before the expira- b. In that process, OSHA may decide not to
tion of the period. The dates of the period of conduct an on-site review, where the sub-
recognition will be stated in the recognition
stantive scope of the request to expand rec-
letter.
ognition is closely related to the current
c. Constancy in operations. The recognized area of recognition.
NRTL shall continue to satisfy all the re-
c. The expiration date for each expansion
quirements or limitations in the letter of
recognition during the period of recognition. of recognition shall coincide with the expira-
tion date of the current basic recognition pe-
d. Accurate publicity. The OSHA-recognized
riod.
NRTL shall not engage in or permit others
to engage in misrepresentation of the scope C. Renewal of OSHA recognition
or conditions of its recognition.
2. [Reserved] 1. Eligibility. A recognized NRTL may
renew its recognition by filing a renewal re-
II. Supplementary Procedures. quest at the address in paragraph I.A.3. of
this appendix not less than nine months, nor
A. Test standard changes. more than one year, before the expiration
A recognized NRTL may change a testing date of its current recognition.
standard or elements incorporated in the 2. Procedure. a. OSHA will process the re-
standard such as testing methods or pass-fail newal request in accordance with subsection
criteria by notifying the Assistant Secretary I.B. of this appendix, except that the period
of the change, certifying that the revised for written comments, specified in paragraph
standard will be at least as effective as the 5.a of subsection I.B. of this appendix, will be
prior standard, and providing the supporting not less than 15 calendar days.
data upon which its conclusions are based. b. In that process, OSHA may determine
The NRTL need not inform the Assistant not to conduct the on-site reviews in I.B.1.a.
Secretary of minor deviations from a test where appropriate.
standard such as the use of new instrumenta- c. When a recognized NRTL has filed a
tion that is more accurate or sensitive than timely and sufficient renewal request, its
originally called for in the standard. The current recognition will not expire until a
NRTL also need not inform the Assistant final decision has been made by OSHA on the
Secretary of its adoption of revisions to request.
third-party testing standards meeting the re-
d. After the first renewal has been granted
quirements of § 1910.7(c)(4), if such revisions
to the NRTL, the NRTL shall apply for a
have been developed by the standards devel-
continuation of its recognition status every
oping organization, or of its adoption of revi-
five years by submitting a renewal request.
sions to other third-party test standards
which the developing organization has sub- In lieu of submitting a renewal request after
mitted to OSHA. If, upon review, the Assist- the initial renewal, the NRTL may certify
ant Secretary or his designee determines its continuing compliance with the terms of
that the proposed revised standard is not its letter of recognition and 29 CFR 1910.7.
‘‘substantially equivalent’’ to the previous 3. Alternative procedure. After the initial
version with regard to the level of safety ob- recognition and before the expiration there-
tained, OSHA will not accept the proposed of, OSHA may (for good cause) determine
testing standard by the recognized NRTL, that there is a sufficient basis to dispense
and will initiate discontinuance of that as- with the renewal requirement for a given
pect of OSHA-recognized activity by the laboratory and will so notify the laboratory
NRTL by modification of the official letter of such a determination in writing. In lieu of
of recognition. OSHA will publicly announce submitting a renewal request, any labora-
this action and the NRTL will be required to tory so notified shall certify its continuing
communicate this OSHA decision directly to compliance with the terms of its letter of
affected manufacturers. recognition and 29 CFR 1910.7.
115
D. Voluntary termination of recognition. sion stating the reasons based on the record
as to whether it has been demonstrated,
At any time, a recognized NRTL may vol-
based on a preponderance of evidence, that
untarily terminate its recognition, either in
the applicant does not continue to meet the
its entirety or with respect to any area cov-
ered in its recognition, by giving written no- requirements for its current recognition.
tice to OSHA. The written notice shall state b. Upon issuance of the decision, any party
the date as of which the termination is to to the hearing may file exceptions within 20
take effect. The Assistant Secretary shall in- days pursuant to 29 CFR 1905.28. If no excep-
form the public of any voluntary termi- tions are filed, this decision is the final deci-
nation by FEDERAL REGISTER notice. sion of the Assistant Secretary. If objections
are filed, the Administrative Law Judge
E. Revocation of recognition by OSHA. shall forward the decision, exceptions and
record to the Assistant Secretary for the
1. Potential causes. If an NRTL either has final decision on the proposed revocation.
failed to continue to substantially satisfy c. The Assistant Secretary will review the
the requirements of § 1910.7 or this appendix, record, the decision by the Administrative
or has not been reasonably performing the Law Judge, and the exceptions filed. Based
NRTL testing requirements encompassed on this, the Assistant Secretary shall issue
within its letter of recognition, or has mate- the final decision as to whether it has been
rially misrepresented itself in its applica- demonstrated, by a preponderance of evi-
tions or misrepresented the scope or condi- dence, that the recognized NRTL has not
tions of its recognition, the Assistant Sec- continued to meet the requirements for
retary may revoke the recognition of a rec- OSHA recognition. If the Assistant Sec-
ognized NRTL, in whole or in part. OSHA retary finds that the NRTL does not meet
may initiate revocation procedures on the the NRTL recognition requirements, the rec-
basis of information provided by any inter- ognition will be revoked.
ested person. 4. Public announcement. A copy of the As-
2. Procedure. a. Before proposing to revoke
sistant Secretary’s final decision will be pro-
recognition, the Agency will notify the rec-
vided to the applicant, and a notification
ognized NRTL in writing, giving it the op-
will be published in the FEDERAL REGISTER
portunity to rebut or correct the alleged de- announcing the decision, and the availability
ficiencies which would form the basis of the of the complete record of this proceeding at
proposed revocation, within a reasonable pe- OSHA. The effective date of any revocation
riod. will be the date the final decision copy is
b. If the alleged deficiencies are not cor-
sent to the NRTL.
rected or reconciled within a reasonable pe-
5. Review of final decision. There will be no
riod, OSHA will propose, in writing to the
further review activity available within the
recognized NRTL, to revoke recognition. If
Department of Labor from the final decision
deemed appropriate, no other announcement
of the Assistant Secretary.
need be made by OSHA.
c. The revocation shall be effective in 60 [53 FR 12120, Apr. 12, 1988; 53 FR 16838, May
days unless within that period the recog- 11, 1988, as amended at 54 FR 24333, June 7,
nized NRTL corrects the deficiencies or re- 1989; 65 FR 46818, 46819, July 31, 2000; 76 FR
quests a hearing in writing. 10515, Feb. 25, 2011; 85 FR 8732, Feb. 18, 2020]
d. If a hearing is requested, it shall be held
before an administrative law judge of the De- § 1910.8 OMB control numbers under
partment of Labor pursuant to the rules the Paperwork Reduction Act.
specified in 29 CFR part 1905, subpart C.
The following sections or paragraphs
e. The parties shall be OSHA and the rec-
ognized NRTL. The Assistant Secretary may each contain a collection of informa-
allow other interested persons to participate tion requirement which has been ap-
in these hearings if such participation would proved by the Office of Management
contribute to the resolution of issues ger- and Budget under the control number
mane to the proceeding and not cause undue listed.
delay.
f. The burden of proof shall be on OSHA to OMB con-
29 CFR citation
demonstrate by a preponderance of the evi- trol No.
dence that the recognition should be revoked 1910.7 .................................................................. 1218–0147
because the NRTL is not meeting the re- 1910.23 ................................................................ 1218–0199
quirements for recognition, has not been rea- 1910.27 ................................................................ 1218–0199
sonably performing the product testing func- 1910.28 ................................................................ 1218–0199
tions as required by § 1910.7, this appendix A, 1910.66 ................................................................ 1218–0121
1910.67(b) ........................................................... 1218–0230
or the letter of recognition, or has materi-
1910.68 ................................................................ 1218–0226
ally misrepresented itself in its applications 1910.95 ................................................................ 1218–0048
or publicity. 1910.111 .............................................................. 1218–0208

3. Final decision. a. After the hearing, the 1910.119 .............................................................. 1218–0200
Administrative Law Judge shall issue a deci- 1910.120 .............................................................. 1218–0202
116
OMB con- OMB con-

29 CFR citation 29 CFR citation
trol No. trol No.
1910.132 .............................................................. 1218–0205 1910.1200 ............................................................ 1218–0072

1910.134 .............................................................. 1218–0099 1910.1450 ............................................................ 1218–0131
1910.137 .............................................................. 1218–0190
1910.142 .............................................................. 1218–0096
1910.145 .............................................................. 1218–0132 [61 FR 5508, Feb. 13, 1996, as amended at 62
1910.146 .............................................................. 1218–0203 FR 29668, June 2, 1997; 62 FR 42666, Aug. 8,
1910.147 .............................................................. 1218–0150 1997; 62 FR 43581, Aug. 14, 1997; 62 FR 65203,
1910.156 .............................................................. 1218–0075
1910.157(e)(3) ..................................................... 1218–0210
Dec. 11, 1997; 63 FR 13340, Mar. 19, 1998; 63 FR
1910.157(f)(16) .................................................... 1218–0218 17093, Apr. 8, 1998; 71 FR 38086, July 5, 2006; 72
1910.177(d)(3)(iv) ................................................ 1218–0219 FR 40075, July 23, 2007; 81 FR 48710, July 26,
1910.179(j)(2)(iii) and (iv) .................................... 1218–0224 2016; 82 FR 31253, July 6, 2017; 83 FR 9702,
1910.179(m)(1) and (m)(2) .................................. 1218–0224 Mar. 7, 2018]
1910.180(d)(6) ..................................................... 1218–0221
1910.180(g)(1) and (g)(2)(ii) ................................ 1218–0221
1910.181(g)(1) and (g)(3) .................................... 1218–0222 § 1910.9 Compliance duties owed to
1910.184(e)(4), (f)(4) and (i)(8)(ii) ....................... 1218–0223 each employee.
1910.217(e)(1)(i) and (ii) ..................................... 1218–0229
1910.217(g) ......................................................... 1218–0070
(a) Personal protective equipment.
1910.217(h) ......................................................... 1218–0143 Standards in this part requiring the
1910.218(a)(2)(i) and (ii) ..................................... 1218–0228 employer to provide personal protec-
1910.252(a)(2)(xiii)(c) .......................................... 1218–0207 tive equipment (PPE), including res-
1910.255(e) ......................................................... 1218–0207
1910.266 .............................................................. 1218–0198 pirators and other types of PPE, be-
1910.268 .............................................................. 1218–0225 cause of hazards to employees impose a
1910.269 .............................................................. 1218–0190 separate compliance duty with respect
1910.272 .............................................................. 1218–0206
1910.302 .............................................................. 1218–0256
to each employee covered by the re-
1910.303 .............................................................. 1218–0256 quirement. The employer must provide
1910.304 .............................................................. 1218–0256 PPE to each employee required to use
1910.305 .............................................................. 1218–0256 the PPE, and each failure to provide
1910.306 .............................................................. 1218–0256
1910.307 .............................................................. 1218–0256 PPE to an employee may be considered
1910.308 .............................................................. 1218–0256 a separate violation.
1910.420 .............................................................. 1218–0069 (b) Training. Standards in this part
1910.421 .............................................................. 1218–0069
1910.423 .............................................................. 1218–0069 requiring training on hazards and re-
1910.430 .............................................................. 1218–0069 lated matters, such as standards re-
1910.440 .............................................................. 1218–0069 quiring that employees receive train-
1910.1001 ............................................................ 1218–0133
1910.1003 ............................................................ 1218–0085
ing or that the employer train employ-
1910.1004 ............................................................ 1218–0084 ees, provide training to employees, or
1910.1006 ............................................................ 1218–0086 institute or implement a training pro-
1910.1007 ............................................................ 1218–0083 gram, impose a separate compliance
1910.1008 ............................................................ 1218–0087
1910.1009 ............................................................ 1218–0089 duty with respect to each employee
1910.1010 ............................................................ 1218–0082 covered by the requirement. The em-
1910.1011 ............................................................ 1218–0090 ployer must train each affected em-
1910.1012 ............................................................ 1218–0080
1910.1013 ............................................................ 1218–0079
ployee in the manner required by the
1910.1014 ............................................................ 1218–0088 standard, and each failure to train an
1910.1015 ............................................................ 1218–0044 employee may be considered a separate
1910.1016 ............................................................ 1218–0081 violation.
1910.1017 ............................................................ 1218–0010
1910.1018 ............................................................ 1218–0104 [73 FR 75583, Dec. 12, 2008]
1910.1020 ............................................................ 1218–0065
1910.1024 ............................................................ 1218–0267
1910.1025 ............................................................ 1218–0092 Subpart B—Adoption and Exten-
1910.1026 ............................................................ 1218–0252
1910.1027 ............................................................ 1218–0185
sion of Established Federal
1910.1028 ............................................................ 1218–0129 Standards
1910.1029 ............................................................ 1218–0128
1910.1030 ............................................................ 1218–0180
1910.1043 ............................................................ 1218–0061 AUTHORITY: Secs. 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupa-
1910.1044 ............................................................ 1218–0101 tional Safety and Health Act, 29 U.S.C. 653,
1910.1045 ............................................................ 1218–0126 655, 657; Walsh-Healey Act, 41 U.S.C. 35 et
1910.1047 ............................................................ 1218–0108 seq.; Service Contract Act of 1965, 41 U.S.C.
1910.1048 ............................................................ 1218–0145
351 et seq.; Sec.107, Contract Work Hours and
1910.1050 ............................................................ 1218–0184
1910.1051 ............................................................ 1218–0170 Safety Standards Act (Construction Safety
1910.1052 ............................................................ 1218–0179 Act), 40 U.S.C. 333; Sec. 41, Longshore and
1910.1053 ............................................................ 1218–0266 Harbor Workers’ Compensation Act, 33
1910.1096 ............................................................ 1218–0103 U.S.C. 941; National Foundation of Arts and
117
Humanities Act, 20 U.S.C. 951 et seq.; Sec- (c) Construction Safety Act distin-
retary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), guished. This section adopts as occupa-
8–76 (41 FR 1911), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 tional safety and health standards
FR 9033), or 6-96 (62 FR 111), as applicable. under section 6 of the Act the stand-
ards which are prescribed in part 1926
§ 1910.11 Scope and purpose.
of this chapter. Thus, the standards
(a) The provisions of this subpart B (substantive rules) published in subpart
adopt and extend the applicability of, C and the following subparts of part
established Federal standards in effect 1926 of this chapter are applied. This
on April 28, 1971, with respect to every section does not incorporate subparts
employer, employee, and employment A and B of part 1926 of this chapter.
covered by the Act. Subparts A and B have pertinence only
(b) It bears emphasis that only stand- to the application of section 107 of the
ards (i.e., substantive rules) relating to Contract Work Hours and Safety
safety or health are adopted by any Standards Act (the Construction Safe-
incorporations by reference of stand- ty Act). For example, the interpreta-
ards prescribed elsewhere in this chap- tion of the term ‘‘subcontractor’’ in
ter or this title. Other materials con- paragraph (c) of § 1926.13 of this chapter
tained in the referenced parties are not is significant in discerning the cov-
adopted. Illustrations of the types of erage of the Construction Safety Act
materials which are not adopted are and duties thereunder. However, the
these. The incorporations by reference term ‘‘subcontractor’’ has no signifi-
of parts 1915, 1916, 1917, 1918 in §§ 1910.13, cance in the application of the Act,
1910.14, 1910.15, and 1910.16 are not in- which was enacted under the Com-
tended to include the discussion in merce Clause and which establishes du-
those parts of the coverage of the ties for ‘‘employers’’ which are not de-
Longshoremen’s and Harbor Workers’ pendent for their application upon any
Compensation Act or the penalty pro- contractual relationship with the Fed-
visions of the Act. Similarly, the incor- eral Government or upon any form of
poration by reference of part 1926 in Federal financial assistance.
§ 1910.12 is not intended to include ref- (d) For the purposes of this part, to
erences to interpretative rules having the extent that it may not already be
included in paragraph (b) of this sec-
relevance to the application of the
tion, ‘‘construction work’’ includes the
Construction Safety Act, but having no
erection of new electric transmission
relevance to the application to the Oc-
and distribution lines and equipment,
cupational Safety and Health Act.
and the alteration, conversion, and im-
§ 1910.12 Construction work. provement of the existing transmission
and distribution lines and equipment.
(a) Standards. The standards pre-
scribed in part 1926 of this chapter are § 1910.15 Shipyard employment.
adopted as occupational safety and (a) Adoption and extension of estab-
health standards under section 6 of the lished safety and health standards for
Act and shall apply, according to the shipyard employment. The standards
provisions thereof, to every employ- prescribed by part 1915 (formerly parts
ment and place of employment of every 1501–1503) of this title and in effect on
employee engaged in construction April 28, 1971 (as revised), are adopted
work. Each employer shall protect the as occupational safety or health stand-
employment and places of employment ards under section 6(a) of the Act and
of each of his employees engaged in shall apply, according to the provisions
construction work by complying with thereof, to every employment and
the appropriate standards prescribed in place of employment of every employee
this paragraph. engaged in ship repair, shipbreaking,
(b) Definition. For purposes of this and shipbuilding, or a related employ-
section, Construction work means work ment. Each employer shall protect the
for construction, alteration, and/or re- employment and places of employment
pair, including painting and deco- of each of his employees engaged in
rating. See discussion of these terms in ship repair, shipbreaking, and ship-
§ 1926.13 of this title. building, or a related employment, by
118
complying with the appropriate stand- (v) Ionizing radiation. Subpart Z,

ards prescribed by this paragraph. § 1910.1096;
(b) Definitions. For purposes of this (vi) Noise. Subpart G, § 1910.95;
section: (vii) Nonionizing radiation. Subpart G,
(1) Ship repair means any repair of a § 1910.97;
vessel, including, but not restricted to, NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a)(2)(vii): Exposures
alterations, conversions, installations, to nonionizing radiation emissions from
cleaning, painting, and maintenance commercial vessel transmitters are consid-
work; ered hazardous under the following condi-
(2) Shipbreaking means any breaking tions: (1) where the radar is transmitting,
down of a vessel’s structure for the the scanner is stationary, and the exposure
purpose of scrapping the vessel, includ- distance is 18.7 feet (6 m.) or less; or (2)
ing the removal of gear, equipment, or where the radar is transmitting, the scanner
is rotating, and the exposure distance is 5.2
any component of a vessel; feet (1.8 m.) or less.
(3) Shipbuilding means the construc-
tion of a vessel, including the installa- (viii) Respiratory protection. Subpart
tion of machinery and equipment; I, § 1910.134;
(4) Related employment means any em- (ix) Toxic and hazardous substances.
ployment performed as an incident to, Subpart Z applies to marine cargo han-
or in conjunction with, ship repair, dling activities except for the fol-
shipbreaking, and shipbuilding work, lowing:
including, but not restricted to, inspec- (A) When a substance or cargo is con-
tion, testing, and employment as a tained within a sealed, intact means of
watchman; and packaging or containment complying
(5) Vessel includes every description with Department of Transportation or
of watercraft or other artificial con- International Maritime Organization
trivance used, or capable of being used, requirements;1
as a means of transportation on water, (B) Bloodborne pathogens, § 1910.1030;
including special purpose floating (C) Carbon monoxide, § 1910.1000 (See
structures not primarily designed for, § 1918.94 (a)); and
or used as a means of, transportation (D) Hydrogen sulfide, § 1910.1000 (See
on water. § 1918.94 (f)).
(x) Powered industrial truck operator
[58 FR 35308, June 30, 1993] training, Subpart N, § 1910.178(l).
(b) Safety and health standards for ma-
§ 1910.16 Longshoring and marine ter-
minals. rine terminals. Part 1917 of this chapter
shall apply exclusively, according to
(a) Safety and health standards for the provisions thereof, to employment
longshoring. (1) Part 1918 of this chapter within a marine terminal, except as
shall apply exclusively, according to follows:
the provisions thereof, to all employ- (1) The provisions of part 1917 of this
ment of every employee engaged in chapter do not apply to the following:
longshoring operations or related em- (i) Facilities used solely for the bulk
ployment aboard any vessel. All cargo storage, handling, and transfer of flam-
transfer accomplished with the use of mable and combustible liquids and
shore-based material handling devices gases.
shall be governed by part 1917 of this (ii) Facilities subject to the regula-
chapter. tions of the Office of Pipeline Safety of
(2) Part 1910 does not apply to the Research and Special Programs Ad-
longshoring operations except for the ministration, Department of Transpor-
following provisions: tation (49 CFR chapter I, subchapter
(i) Access to employee exposure and D), to the extent such regulations
medical records. Subpart Z, § 1910.1020; apply to specific working conditions.
(ii) Commercial diving operations. Sub-
part T; 1 The International Maritime Organization
(iii) Electrical. Subpart S when shore- publishes the International Maritime Dan-
based electrical installations provide gerous Goods Code to aid compliance with
power for use aboard vessels;
the international legal requirements of the

(iv) Hazard communication. Subpart Z, International Convention for the Safety of
§ 1910.1200; Life at Sea, 1960.
119
(iii) Fully automated bulk coal han- erations including, but not restricted
dling facilities contiguous to electrical to, securing cargo, rigging, and em-
power generating plants. ployment as a porter, checker, or
(2) Part 1910 does not apply to marine watchman; and
terminals except for the following: (3) Vessel includes every description
(i) Abrasive blasting. Subpart G, of watercraft or other artificial con-
§ 1910.94(a); trivance used, or capable of being used,
(ii) Access to employee exposure and
as a means of transportation on water,
medical records. Subpart Z, § 1910.1020;
including special purpose floating
(iii) Commercial diving operations. Sub-
part T; structures not primarily designed for,
(iv) Electrical. Subpart S; or used as a means of, transportation
(v) Grain handling facilities. Subpart on water.
R, § 1910.272; (4) Marine terminal means wharves,
(vi) Hazard communication. Subpart Z, bulkheads, quays, piers, docks and
§ 1910.1200; other berthing locations and adjacent
(vii) Ionizing radiation. Subpart Z, storage or adjacent areas and struc-
§ 1910.1096; tures associated with the primary
(viii) Noise. Subpart G, § 1910.95; movement of cargo or materials from
(ix) Nonionizing radiation. Subpart G, vessel to shore or shore to vessel in-
§ 1910.97. cluding structures which are devoted
(x) Respiratory protection. Subpart I, to receiving, handling, holding, con-
§ 1910.134. solidation and loading or delivery of
(xi) Safety requirements for scaffolding.
waterborne shipments or passengers,
Subpart D, § 1910.28;
including areas devoted to the mainte-
(xii) Servicing multi-piece and single
piece rim wheels. Subpart N, § 1910.177; nance of the terminal or equipment.
(xiii) Toxic and hazardous substances. The term does not include production
Subpart Z applies to marine cargo han- or manufacturing areas having their
dling activities except for the fol- own docking facilities and located at a
lowing: marine terminal nor does the term in-
(A) When a substance or cargo is con- clude storage facilities directly associ-
tained within a sealed, intact means of ated with those production or manufac-
packaging or containment complying turing areas.
with Department of Transportation or
International Maritime Organization FR 30908, July 5, 1983; 52 FR 36026, Sept. 25,
requirements; 2 1987; 62 FR 40195, July 25, 1997; 63 FR 66270,
(B) Bloodborne pathogens, § 1910.1030; Dec. 1, 1998]
(C) Carbon monoxide, § 1910.1000 (See
§ 1917.24(a)); and § 1910.17 Effective dates.
(D) Hydrogen sulfide, § 1910.1000 (See
§ 1917.73(a)(2)); and (a)–(b) [Reserved]
(xiv) Powered industrial truck oper- (c) Except whenever any employment
ator training, subpart N, § 1910.178(l). or place of employment is, or becomes,
(c) Definitions. For purposes of this subject to any safety and health stand-
section: ard prescribed in part 1915, 1916, 1917,
(1) Longshoring operation means the 1918, or 1926 of this title on a date be-
loading, unloading, moving, or han- fore August 27, 1971, by virtue of the
dling of, cargo, ship’s stores, gear, etc., Construction Safety Act or the Long-
into, in, on, or out of any vessel; shoremen’s and Harbor Workers’ Com-
(2) Related employment means any em- pensation Act, that occupational safe-
ployment performed as an incident to ty and health standard as incorporated
or in conjunction with, longshoring op- by reference in this subpart shall also
become effective under the Williams-
2 The International Maritime Organization
Steiger Occupational Safety and
publishes the International Maritime Dan- Health Act of 1970 on that date.
gerous Goods Code to aid compliance with
the international legal requirements of the [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 61
International Convention for the Safety of FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996]
Life at Sea, 1960.
120
§ 1910.18 Changes in established Fed- sure to inorganic arsenic which would

eral standards. otherwise be applicable by virtue of
Whenever an occupational safety and any of those sections.
health standard adopted and incor- (f) [Reserved]
porated by reference in this subpart B (g) Lead. Section 1910.1025 shall apply
is changed pursuant to section 6(b) of to the exposure of every employee to
the Act and the statute under which lead in every employment and place of
the standard was originally promul- employment covered by §§ 1910.13,
gated, and in accordance with part 1911 1910.14, 1910.15, and 1910.16, in lieu of
of this chapter, the standard shall be any different standard on exposure to
deemed changed for purposes of that lead which would otherwise be applica-
statute and this subpart B, and shall ble by virtue of those sections.
apply under this subpart B. For the (h) Ethylene oxide. Section 1910.1047
purposes of this section, a change in a shall apply to the exposure of every
standard includes any amendment, ad- employee to ethylene oxide in every
dition, or repeal, in whole or in part, of employment and place of employment
any standard. covered by § 1910.12, § 1910.13, § 1910.14,
§ 1910.15, or § 1910.16, in lieu of any dif-
§ 1910.19 Special provisions for air
contaminants. ferent standard on exposure to ethyl-
ene oxide which would otherwise be ap-
(a) Asbestos, tremolite, anthophyllite, plicable by virtue of those sections.
and actinolite dust. Section 1910.1001
(i) 4,4′-Methylenedianiline (MDA). Sec-
shall apply to the exposure of every
tion 1910.1050 shall apply to the expo-
employee to asbestos, tremolite,
sure of every employee to MDA in
anthophyllite, and actinolite dust in
every employment and place of em-
every employment and place of em-
ployment covered by § 1910.13, § 1910.14,
ployment covered by § 1910.16, in lieu of
§ 1910.15, or § 1910.16, in lieu of any dif-
any different standard on exposure to
ferent standard on exposure to MDA
asbestos, tremolite, anthophyllite, and
which would otherwise be applicable by
actinolite dust which would otherwise
virtue of those sections.
be applicable by virtue of any of those
sections. (j) Formaldehyde. Section 1910.1048
(b) Vinyl chloride. Section 1910.1017 shall apply to the exposure of every
shall apply to the exposure of every employee to formaldehyde in every em-
employee to vinyl chloride in every ployment and place of employment
employment and place of employment covered by § 1910.12, § 1910.13, § 1910.14,
covered by § 1910.12, § 1910.13, § 1910.14, § 1910.15 or § 1910.16 in lieu of any dif-
§ 1910.15, or § 1910.16, in lieu of any different standard on exposure to form-
ferent standard on exposure to vinyl aldehyde which would otherwise be ap-
chloride which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of those sections.
plicable by virtue of any of those sec- (k) Cadmium. Section 1910.1027 shall
tions. apply to the exposure of every em-
(c) Acrylonitrile. Section 1910.1045 ployee to cadmium in every employ-
shall apply to the exposure of every ment and place of employment covered
employee to acrylonitrile in every em- by § 1910.16 in lieu of any different
ployment and place of employment standard on exposures to cadmium that
covered by § 1910.12, § 1910.13, § 1910.14, would otherwise be applicable by virtue
§ 1910.15, or § 1910.16, in lieu of any dif- of those sections.
ferent standard on exposure to acrylo- (l) 1,3-Butadiene (BD). Section
nitrile which would otherwise be appli- 1910.1051 shall apply to the exposure of
cable by virtue of any of those sec- every employee to BD in every employ-
tions. ment and place of employment covered
(d) [Reserved] by § 1910.12, § 1910.13, § 1910.14, § 1910.15,
(e) Inorganic arsenic. Section 1910.1018 or § 1910.16, in lieu of any different
shall apply to the exposure of every standard on exposure to BD which
employee to inorganic arsenic in every would otherwise be applicable by virtue
employment covered by § 1910.12, of those sections.
§ 1910.13, § 1910.14, § 1910.15, or § 1910.16, in (m) Methylene chloride (MC). Section

lieu of any different standard on expo- 1910.1052 shall apply to the exposure of
121
every employee to MC in every employ- Carrier means the track of a ladder

ment and place of employment covered safety system that consists of a flexi-
by § 1910.16 in lieu of any different ble cable or rigid rail attached to the
standard on exposure to MC which fixed ladder or immediately adjacent
would otherwise be applicable by virtue to it.
of that section when it is not present Combination ladder means a portable
in sealed, intact containers. ladder that can be used as a stepladder,
[43 FR 28473, June 30, 1978, as amended at 43 extension ladder, trestle ladder, or
FR 45809, Oct. 3, 1978; 43 FR 53007, Nov. 14, stairway ladder. The components of a
1978; 44 FR 5447, Jan. 26, 1979; 46 FR 32022, combination ladder also may be used
June 19, 1981; 49 FR 25796, June 22, 1984; 50 FR
51173, Dec. 13, 1985; 52 FR 46291, Dec. 4, 1987;
separately as a single ladder.
57 FR 35666, Aug. 10, 1992; 57 FR 42388, Sept. Dangerous equipment means equip-
14, 1992; 59 FR 41057, Aug. 10, 1994; 61 FR 56831, ment, such as vats, tanks, electrical
Nov. 4, 1996; 62 FR 1600, Jan. 10, 1997] equipment, machinery, equipment or
machinery with protruding parts, or
Subpart C [Reserved] other similar units, that, because of
their function or form, may harm an
Subpart D—Walking-Working employee who falls into or onto the
Surfaces equipment.
Designated area means a distinct por-
AUTHORITY: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657; Sec- tion of a walking-working surface de-
retary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), lineated by a warning line in which em-
8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 ployees may perform work without ad-
FR 9033), and 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as applica- ditional fall protection.
ble; and 29 CFR part 1911.
Dockboard means a portable or fixed
SOURCE: 81 FR 82981, Nov. 18, 2016, unless device that spans a gap or compensates
otherwise noted. for a difference in elevation between a
§ 1910.21 Scope and definitions. loading platform and a transport vehi-
cle. Dockboards include, but are not
(a) Scope. This subpart applies to all limited to, bridge plates, dock plates,
general industry workplaces. It covers and dock levelers.
all walking-working surfaces unless
Equivalent means alternative designs,
specifically excluded by an individual
equipment, materials, or methods, that
section of this subpart.
(b) Definitions. The following defini- the employer can demonstrate will pro-
tions apply in this subpart: vide an equal or greater degree of safe-
Alternating tread-type stair means a ty for employees compared to the de-
type of stairway consisting of a series signs, equipment, materials, or meth-
of treads that usually are attached to a ods specified in this subpart.
center support in an alternating man- Extension ladder means a non-self-
ner such that an employee typically supporting portable ladder that is ad-
does not have both feet on the same justable in length.
level while using the stairway. Failure means a load refusal, break-
Anchorage means a secure point of at- age, or separation of component parts.
tachment for equipment such as life- A load refusal is the point at which the
lines, lanyards, deceleration devices, ultimate strength of a component or
and rope descent systems. object is exceeded.
Authorized means an employee who Fall hazard means any condition on a
the employer assigns to perform a spe- walking-working surface that exposes
cific type of duty, or allows in a spe-
an employee to a risk of harm from a
cific location or area.
fall on the same level or to a lower
Cage means an enclosure mounted on
the side rails of a fixed ladder or fas- level.
tened to a structure behind the fixed Fall protection means any equipment,
ladder that is designed to surround the device, or system that prevents an em-
climbing space of the ladder. A cage ployee from falling from an elevation
also is called a ‘‘cage guard’’ or ‘‘bas- or mitigates the effect of such a fall.
ket guard.’’
122
Fixed ladder means a ladder with rails materials, and other loads the em-
or individual rungs that is perma- ployer reasonably anticipates to be ap-
nently attached to a structure, build- plied to a walking-working surface at
ing, or equipment. Fixed ladders in- any one time.
clude individual-rung ladders, but not Mobile means manually propelled or
ship stairs, step bolts, or manhole moveable.
steps. Mobile ladder stand (ladder stand)
Grab bar means an individual hori- means a mobile, fixed-height, self-sup-
zontal or vertical handhold installed to porting ladder that usually consists of
provide access above the height of the wheels or casters on a rigid base and
ladder. steps leading to a top step. A mobile
Guardrail system means a barrier ladder stand also may have handrails
erected along an unprotected or ex- and is designed for use by one employee
posed side, edge, or other area of a at a time.
walking-working surface to prevent Mobile ladder stand platform means a
employees from falling to a lower level. mobile, fixed-height, self-supporting
Handrail means a rail used to provide unit having one or more standing plat-
employees with a handhold for support. forms that are provided with means of
Hoist area means any elevated access access or egress.
opening to a walking-working surface
Open riser means the gap or space be-
through which equipment or materials
tween treads of stairways that do not
are loaded or received.
have upright or inclined members (ris-
Hole means a gap or open space in a
ers).
floor, roof, horizontal walking-working
Opening means a gap or open space in
surface, or similar surface that is at
a wall, partition, vertical walking-
least 2 inches (5 cm) in its least dimen-
working surface, or similar surface
sion.
that is at least 30 inches (76 cm) high
Individual-rung ladder means a ladder
and at least 18 inches (46 cm) wide,
that has rungs individually attached to
through which an employee can fall to
a building or structure. An individual-
a lower level.
rung ladder does not include manhole
steps. Personal fall arrest system means a
Ladder means a device with rungs, system used to arrest an employee in a
steps, or cleats used to gain access to a fall from a walking-working surface. It
different elevation. consists of a body harness, anchorage,
Ladder safety system means a system and connector. The means of connec-
designed to eliminate or reduce the tion may include a lanyard, decelera-
possibility of falling from a ladder. A tion device, lifeline, or a suitable com-
ladder safety system usually consists bination of these.
of a carrier, safety sleeve, lanyard, con- Personal fall protection system means a
nectors, and body harness. Cages and system (including all components) an
wells are not ladder safety systems. employer uses to provide protection
Low-slope roof means a roof that has from falling or to safely arrest an em-
a slope less than or equal to a ratio of ployee’s fall if one occurs. Examples of
4 in 12 (vertical to horizontal). personal fall protection systems in-
Lower level means a surface or area to clude personal fall arrest systems, posi-
which an employee could fall. Such tioning systems, and travel restraint
surfaces or areas include, but are not systems.
limited to, ground levels, floors, roofs, Platform means a walking-working
ramps, runways, excavations, pits, surface that is elevated above the sur-
tanks, materials, water, equipment, rounding area.
and similar surfaces and structures, or Portable ladder means a ladder that
portions thereof. can readily be moved or carried, and
Manhole steps means steps that are usually consists of side rails joined at
individually attached to, or set into, intervals by steps, rungs, or cleats.
the wall of a manhole structure. Positioning system (work-positioning
Maximum intended load means the system) means a system of equipment
total load (weight and force) of all em- and connectors that, when used with a
ployees, equipment, vehicles, tools, body harness or body belt, allows an
123
employee to be supported on an ele- a walking-working surface, such as a

vated vertical surface, such as a wall or landing.
window sill, and work with both hands Spiral stairs means a series of treads
free. Positioning systems also are attached to a vertical pole in a winding
called ‘‘positioning system devices’’ fashion, usually within a cylindrical
and ‘‘work-positioning equipment.’’ space.
Qualified describes a person who, by Stair rail or stair rail system means a
possession of a recognized degree, cer- barrier erected along the exposed or
tificate, or professional standing, or open side of stairways to prevent em-
who by extensive knowledge, training, ployees from falling to a lower level.
and experience has successfully dem- Stairway (stairs) means risers and
onstrated the ability to solve or re- treads that connect one level with an-
solve problems relating to the subject other, and includes any landings and
matter, the work, or the project. platforms in between those levels.
Ramp means an inclined walking- Stairways include standard, spiral, al-
working surface used to access another ternating tread-type, and ship stairs.
level. Standard stairs means a fixed or per-
Riser means the upright (vertical) or manently installed stairway. Ship, spi-
inclined member of a stair that is lo- ral, and alternating tread-type stairs
cated at the back of a stair tread or are not considered standard stairs.
platform and connects close to the
Step bolt (pole step) means a bolt or
front edge of the next higher tread,
rung attached at intervals along a
platform, or landing.
structural member used for foot place-
Rope descent system means a suspen-
ment and as a handhold when climbing
sion system that allows an employee to
or standing.
descend in a controlled manner and, as
Stepladder means a self-supporting,
needed, stop at any point during the
portable ladder that has a fixed height,
descent. A rope descent system usually
flat steps, and a hinged back.
consists of a roof anchorage, support
rope, a descent device, carabiner(s) or Stepstool means a self-supporting,
shackle(s), and a chair (seatboard). A portable ladder that has flat steps and
rope descent system also is called con- side rails. For purposes of the final
trolled descent equipment or appa- rule, stepstool includes only those lad-
ratus. Rope descent systems do not inders that have a fixed height, do not
clude industrial rope access systems. have a pail shelf, and do not exceed 32
Rung, step, or cleat means the cross- inches (81 cm) in overall height to the
piece of a ladder on which an employee top cap, although side rails may extend
steps to climb up and down. above the top cap. A stepstool is de-
Runway means an elevated walking- signed so an employee can climb and
working surface, such as a catwalk, a stand on all of the steps and the top
foot walk along shafting, or an ele- cap.
vated walkway between buildings. Through ladder means a type of fixed
Scaffold means any temporary ele- ladder that allows the employee to step
vated or suspended platform and its through the side rails at the top of the
supporting structure, including anchor- ladder to reach a walking-working sur-
age points, used to support employees, face, such as a landing.
equipment, materials, and other items. Tieback means an attachment be-
For purposes of this subpart, a scaffold tween an anchorage (e.g., structural
does not include a crane-suspended or member) and a supporting device (e.g.,
derrick-suspended personnel platform parapet clamp or cornice hook).
or a rope descent system. Toeboard means a low protective bar-
Ship stair (ship ladder) means a stair- rier that is designed to prevent mate-
way that is equipped with treads, stair rials, tools, and equipment from falling
rails, and open risers, and has a slope to a lower level, and protect employees
that is between 50 and 70 degrees from from falling.
the horizontal. Travel restraint system means a com-
Side-step ladder means a type of fixed bination of an anchorage, anchorage
ladder that requires an employee to connector, lanyard (or other means of

step sideways from it in order to reach connection), and body support that an
124
employer uses to eliminate the possi- (1) Walking-working surfaces are in-
bility of an employee going over the spected, regularly and as necessary,
edge of a walking-working surface. and maintained in a safe condition;
Tread means a horizontal member of (2) Hazardous conditions on walking-
a stair or stairway, but does not in- working surfaces are corrected or re-
clude landings or platforms. paired before an employee uses the
Unprotected sides and edges mean any walking-working surface again. If the
side or edge of a walking-working sur- correction or repair cannot be made
face (except at entrances and other immediately, the hazard must be
points of access) where there is no wall, guarded to prevent employees from
guardrail system, or stair rail system using the walking-working surface
to protect an employee from falling to until the hazard is corrected or re-
a lower level. paired; and
Walking-working surface means any (3) When any correction or repair in-
horizontal or vertical surface on or volves the structural integrity of the
through which an employee walks, walking-working surface, a qualified
works, or gains access to a work area person performs or supervises the cor-
or workplace location. rection or repair.
Warning line means a barrier erected
to warn employees that they are ap- § 1910.23 Ladders.
proaching an unprotected side or edge, (a) Application. The employer must
and which designates an area in which ensure that each ladder used meets the
work may take place without the use requirements of this section. This sec-
of other means of fall protection. tion covers all ladders, except when the
Well means a permanent, complete ladder is:
enclosure around a fixed ladder. (1) Used in emergency operations
such as firefighting, rescue, and tac-
§ 1910.22 General requirements. tical law enforcement operations, or
(a) Surface conditions. The employer training for these operations; or
must ensure: (2) Designed into or is an integral
(1) All places of employment, pas- part of machines or equipment.
sageways, storerooms, service rooms, (b) General requirements for all ladders.
and walking-working surfaces are kept The employer must ensure:
in a clean, orderly, and sanitary condi- (1) Ladder rungs, steps, and cleats are
tion. parallel, level, and uniformly spaced
(2) The floor of each workroom is when the ladder is in position for use;
maintained in a clean and, to the ex- (2) Ladder rungs, steps, and cleats are
tent feasible, in a dry condition. When spaced not less than 10 inches (25 cm)
wet processes are used, drainage must and not more than 14 inches (36 cm)
be maintained and, to the extent fea- apart, as measured between the
sible, dry standing places, such as false centerlines of the rungs, cleats, and
floors, platforms, and mats must be steps, except that:
provided. (i) Ladder rungs and steps in elevator
(3) Walking-working surfaces are shafts must be spaced not less than 6
maintained free of hazards such as inches (15 cm) apart and not more than
sharp or protruding objects, loose 16.5 inches (42 cm) apart, as measured
boards, corrosion, leaks, spills, snow, along the ladder side rails; and
and ice. (ii) Fixed ladder rungs and steps on
(b) Loads. The employer must ensure telecommunication towers must be
that each walking-working surface can spaced not more than 18 inches (46 cm)
support the maximum intended load apart, measured between the
for that surface. centerlines of the rungs or steps;
(c) Access and egress. The employer (3) Steps on stepstools are spaced not
must provide, and ensure each em- less than 8 inches (20 cm) apart and not
ployee uses, a safe means of access and more than 12 inches (30 cm) apart, as
egress to and from walking-working measured between the centerlines of
surfaces. the steps;
(d) Inspection, maintenance, and re- (4) Ladder rungs, steps, and cleats
pair. The employer must ensure: have a minimum clear width of 11.5
125
inches (29 cm) on portable ladders and (2) Each stepladder or combination
16 inches (41 cm) (measured before in- ladder used in a stepladder mode is
stallation of ladder safety systems) for equipped with a metal spreader or
fixed ladders, except that: locking device that securely holds the
(i) The minimum clear width does front and back sections in an open po-
not apply to ladders with narrow rungs sition while the ladder is in use;
that are not designed to be stepped on, (3) Ladders are not loaded beyond the
such as those located on the tapered maximum intended load;
end of orchard ladders and similar lad-
ders; NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(3): The maximum
(ii) Rungs and steps of manhole entry intended load, as defined in § 1910.21(b), in-
ladders that are supported by the man- cludes the total load (weight and force) of
hole opening must have a minimum the employee and all tools, equipment, and
clear width of 9 inches (23 cm); materials being carried.
(iii) Rungs and steps on rolling lad- (4) Ladders are used only on stable
ders used in telecommunication cen- and level surfaces unless they are se-
ters must have a minimum clear width cured or stabilized to prevent acci-
of 8 inches (20 cm); and
dental displacement;
(iv) Stepstools have a minimum clear
width of 10.5 inches (26.7 cm); (5) No portable single rail ladders are
(5) Wooden ladders are not coated used;
with any material that may obscure (6) No ladder is moved, shifted, or ex-
structural defects; tended while an employee is on it;
(6) Metal ladders are made with cor- (7) Ladders placed in locations such
rosion-resistant material or protected as passageways, doorways, or drive-
against corrosion; ways where they can be displaced by
(7) Ladder surfaces are free of punc- other activities or traffic:
ture and laceration hazards; (i) Are secured to prevent accidental
(8) Ladders are used only for the pur- displacement; or
poses for which they were designed; (ii) Are guarded by a temporary bar-
(9) Ladders are inspected before ini- ricade, such as a row of traffic cones or
tial use in each work shift, and more
caution tape, to keep the activities or
frequently as necessary, to identify
traffic away from the ladder;
any visible defects that could cause
employee injury; (8) The cap (if equipped) and top step
(10) Any ladder with structural or of a stepladder are not used as steps;
other defects is immediately tagged (9) Portable ladders used on slippery
‘‘Dangerous: Do Not Use’’ or with simi- surfaces are secured and stabilized;
lar language in accordance with (10) The top of a non-self-supporting
§ 1910.145 and removed from service ladder is placed so that both side rails
until repaired in accordance with are supported, unless the ladder is
§ 1910.22(d), or replaced; equipped with a single support attach-
(11) Each employee faces the ladder ment;
when climbing up or down it; (11) Portable ladders used to gain ac-
(12) Each employee uses at least one cess to an upper landing surface have
hand to grasp the ladder when climbing side rails that extend at least 3 feet (0.9
up and down it; and m) above the upper landing surface (see
(13) No employee carries any object Figure D–1 of this section);
or load that could cause the employee
(12) Ladders and ladder sections are
to lose balance and fall while climbing
not tied or fastened together to provide
up or down the ladder.
(c) Portable ladders. The employer added length unless they are specifi-
must ensure: cally designed for such use;
(1) Rungs and steps of portable metal (13) Ladders are not placed on boxes,
ladders are corrugated, knurled, dim- barrels, or other unstable bases to ob-
pled, coated with skid-resistant mate- tain additional height.
rial, or otherwise treated to minimize

the possibility of slipping;
126
(d) Fixed ladders. The employer must more than 30 inches (76 cm) of clear-
ensure: ance. When a ladder safety system is
(1) Fixed ladders are capable of sup- provided, the maximum clearance be-
porting their maximum intended load; tween side rails of the extension must
(2) The minimum perpendicular dis- not exceed 36 inches (91 cm);
tance from the centerline of the steps (6) For side-step ladders, the side
or rungs, or grab bars, or both, to the rails, rungs, and steps must be contin-
nearest permanent object in back of uous in the extension (see Figure D–2
the ladder is 7 inches (18 cm), except of this section);
for elevator pit ladders, which have a (7) Grab bars extend 42 inches (1.1 m)
minimum perpendicular distance of 4.5 above the access level or landing plat-
inches (11 cm); forms served by the ladder;
(3) Grab bars do not protrude on the
(8) The minimum size (cross-section)
climbing side beyond the rungs of the
of grab bars is the same size as the
ladder that they serve;
rungs of the ladder.
(4) The side rails of through or side-
step ladders extend at least 42 inches (9) When a fixed ladder terminates at
(1.1 m) above the top of the access level a hatch (see Figure D–3 of this section),
or landing platform served by the lad- the hatch cover:
der. For parapet ladders, the access (i) Opens with sufficient clearance to
level is: provide easy access to or from the lad-
(i) The roof, if the parapet is cut to der; and
permit passage through the parapet; or (ii) Opens at least 70 degrees from
(ii) The top of the parapet, if the horizontal if the hatch is counterbal-
parapet is continuous; anced;
(5) For through ladders, the steps or (10) Individual-rung ladders are con-
rungs are omitted from the extensions, structed to prevent the employee’s feet
and the side rails are flared to provide from sliding off the ends of the rungs
not less than 24 inches (61cm) and not (see Figure D–4 of this section);
127
ER18NO16.346</GPH>
(11) Fixed ladders having a pitch terline to the nearest permanent ob-
greater than 90 degrees from the hori- ject; and
zontal are not used; (ii) A minimum perpendicular dis-
(12) The step-across distance from the tance of 30 inches (76 cm) from the cen-
centerline of the rungs or steps is: terline of the steps or rungs to the
(i) For through ladders, not less than nearest object on the climbing side.
7 inches (18 cm) and not more than 12 When unavoidable obstructions are en-
inches (30 cm) to the nearest edge of countered, the minimum clearance at
the structure, building, or equipment
the obstruction may be reduced to 24
accessed from the ladders;
inches (61 cm), provided deflector
(ii) For side-step ladders, not less
plates are installed (see Figure D–5 of
than 15 inches (38 cm) and not more
than 20 inches (51 cm) to the access this section).
points of the platform edge; NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (d): Section 1910.28 es-
(13) Fixed ladders that do not have tablishes the employer’s duty to provide fall
cages or wells have: protection for employees on fixed ladders,
(i) A clear width of at least 15 inches and § 1910.29 specifies the criteria for fall pro-
(38 cm) on each side of the ladder cen- tection systems for fixed ladders.
128
129
ER18NO16.347</GPH>
(e) Mobile ladder stands and mobile lad- may be used instead of handrails in
der stand platforms—(1) General require- special-use applications;
ments. The employer must ensure: (vi) The maximum work-surface
(i) Mobile ladder stands and plat- height of mobile ladder stands and
forms have a step width of at least 16 platforms does not exceed four times
inches (41 cm); the shortest base dimension, without
(ii) The steps and platforms of mobile additional support. For greater
ladder stands and platforms are slip re- heights, outriggers, counterweights, or
sistant. Slip-resistant surfaces must be comparable means that stabilize the
either an integral part of the design mobile ladder stands and platforms and
and construction of the mobile ladder prevent overturning must be used;
stand and platform, or provided as a (vii) Mobile ladder stands and plat-
secondary process or operation, such as forms that have wheels or casters are
dimpling, knurling, shotblasting, coat- equipped with a system to impede hori-
ing, spraying, or applying durable slip- zontal movement when an employee is
resistant tapes; on the stand or platform; and
(iii) Mobile ladder stands and plat- (viii) No mobile ladder stand or plat-
forms are capable of supporting at form moves when an employee is on it.
least four times their maximum in- (2) Design requirements for mobile lad-
tended load; der stands. The employer must ensure:
(iv) Wheels or casters under load are (i) Steps are uniformly spaced and ar-
capable of supporting their propor- ranged, with a rise of not more than 10
tional share of four times the max- inches (25 cm) and a depth of not less
imum intended load, plus their propor- than 7 inches (18 cm). The slope of the
tional share of the unit’s weight; step stringer to which the steps are at-
(v) Unless otherwise specified in this tached must not be more than 60 de-
section, mobile ladder stands and plat- grees, measured from the horizontal;
forms with a top step height of 4 feet (ii) Mobile ladder stands with a top
(1.2 m) or above have handrails with a step height above 10 feet (3 m) have the
vertical height of 29.5 inches (75 cm) to top step protected on three sides by a
37 inches (94 cm), measured from the handrail with a vertical height of at
front edge of a step. Removable gates least 36 inches (91 cm); and top steps
or non-rigid members, such as chains, that are 20 inches (51 cm) or more,
130
ER18NO16.348</GPH>
front to back, have a midrail and constructed of, or coated with, mate-
toeboard. Removable gates or non-rigid rial that protects against corrosion;
members, such as chains, may be used (2) Each step bolt is designed, con-
instead of handrails in special-use ap- structed, and maintained to prevent
plications; and the employee’s foot from slipping off
(iii) The standing area of mobile lad- the end of the step bolt;
der stands is within the base frame. (3) Step bolts are uniformly spaced at
(3) Design requirements for mobile lad- a vertical distance of not less than 12
der stand platforms. The employer must inches (30 cm) and not more than 18
ensure: inches (46 cm) apart, measured center
(i) Steps of mobile ladder stand plat- to center (see Figure D–6 of this sec-
forms meet the requirements of para- tion). The spacing from the entry and
graph (e)(2)(i) of this section. When the exit surface to the first step bolt may
employer demonstrates that the re-
differ from the spacing between the
quirement is not feasible, steeper
other step bolts;
slopes or vertical rung ladders may be
used, provided the units are stabilized (4) Each step bolt has a minimum
to prevent overturning; clear width of 4.5 inches (11 cm);
(ii) Mobile ladder stand platforms (5) The minimum perpendicular dis-
with a platform height of 4 to 10 feet tance between the centerline of each
(1.2 m to 3 m) have, in the platform step bolt to the nearest permanent ob-
area, handrails with a vertical height ject in back of the step bolt is 7 inches
of at least 36 inches (91 cm) and (18 cm). When the employer dem-
midrails; and onstrates that an obstruction cannot
(iii) All ladder stand platforms with a be avoided, the distance must be at
platform height above 10 feet (3 m) least 4.5 inches (11 cm);
have guardrails and toeboards on the (6) Each step bolt installed before
exposed sides and ends of the platform. January 17, 2017 is capable of sup-
(iv) Removable gates or non-rigid porting its maximum intended load;
members, such as chains, may be used (7) Each step bolt installed on or
on mobile ladder stand platforms in- after January 17, 2017 is capable of sup-
stead of handrails and guardrails in porting at least four times its max-
special-use applications. imum intended load;
[81 FR 82981, Nov. 18, 2016, as amended at 84 (8) Each step bolt is inspected at the
FR 68795, Dec. 17, 2019] start of the workshift and maintained
in accordance with § 1910.22; and
§ 1910.24 Step bolts and manhole steps. (9) Any step bolt that is bent more
(a) Step bolts. The employer must en- than 15 degrees from the perpendicular
sure: in any direction is removed and re-
(1) Each step bolt installed on or placed with a step bolt that meets the
after January 17, 2017 in an environ- requirements of this section before an
ment where corrosion may occur is employee uses it.
131
(b) Manhole steps. (1) The employer foot from slipping or sliding off the
must ensure that each manhole step is end.
capable of supporting its maximum in- (3) The employer must ensure that
tended load. each manhole step is inspected at the
(2) The employer must ensure that start of the work shift and maintained
each manhole step installed on or after in accordance with § 1910.22.
January 17, 2017:
(i) Has a corrugated, knurled, dim- § 1910.25 Stairways.
pled, or other surface that minimizes (a) Application. This section covers
the possibility of an employee slipping; all stairways (including standard, spi-
(ii) Is constructed of, or coated with, ral, ship, and alternating tread-type
material that protects against corro- stairs), except for articulated stairs
sion if the manhole step is located in (stairs that change pitch due to change
an environment where corrosion may in height at the point of attachment)
occur; such as those serving floating roof
(iii) Has a minimum clear step width tanks, stairs on scaffolds, stairs de-
of 10 inches (25 cm); signed into machines or equipment,
(iv) Is uniformly spaced at a vertical and stairs on self-propelled motorized
distance not more than 16 inches (41 equipment.
cm) apart, measured center to center (b) General requirements. The em-
between steps. The spacing from the ployer must ensure:
entry and exit surface to the first man- (1) Handrails, stair rail systems, and
hole step may differ from the spacing guardrail systems are provided in ac-
between the other steps. cordance with § 1910.28;
(v) Has a minimum perpendicular dis- (2) Vertical clearance above any stair
tance between the centerline of the tread to any overhead obstruction is at
manhole step to the nearest permanent least 6 feet, 8 inches (203 cm), as meas-
object in back of the step of at least 4.5 ured from the leading edge of the tread.
inches (11 cm); and Spiral stairs must meet the vertical
(vi) Is designed, constructed, and clearance requirements in paragraph

maintained to prevent the employee’s (d)(3) of this section.
132
ER18NO16.349</GPH>
(3) Stairs have uniform riser heights (7) Standard stairs are used to pro-
and tread depths between landings; vide access from one walking-working
(4) Stairway landings and platforms surface to another when operations ne-
are at least the width of the stair and cessitate regular and routine travel be-
at least 30 inches (76 cm) in depth, as tween levels, including access to oper-
measured in the direction of travel; ating platforms for equipment. Wind-
(5) When a door or a gate opens di- ing stairways may be used on tanks
rectly on a stairway, a platform is pro- and similar round structures when the
vided, and the swing of the door or gate diameter of the tank or structure is at
does not reduce the platform’s effective
least 5 feet (1.5 m).
usable depth to:
(i) Less than 20 inches (51 cm) for (8) Spiral, ship, or alternating tread-
platforms installed before January 17, type stairs are used only when the em-
2017; and ployer can demonstrate that it is not
(ii) Less than 22 inches (56 cm) for feasible to provide standard stairs.
platforms installed on or after January (9) When paragraph (b)(8) of this sec-
17, 2017 (see Figure D–7 of this section); tion allows the use of spiral, ship, or
(6) Each stair can support at least alternating tread-type stairs, they are
five times the normal anticipated live installed, used, and maintained in ac-
load, but never less than a con- cordance with manufacturer’s instruc-
centrated load of 1,000 pounds (454 kg) tions.
applied at any point;
(c) Standard stairs. In addition to (5) Exception to paragraphs (c)(2) and

paragraph (b) of this section, the em- (3) of this section. The requirements of
ployer must ensure standard stairs: paragraphs (c)(2) and (3) do not apply
(1) Are installed at angles between 30 to standard stairs installed prior to
to 50 degrees from the horizontal; January 17, 2017. OSHA will deem those
(2) Have a maximum riser height of stairs in compliance if they meet the
9.5 inches (24 cm); dimension requirements specified in
(3) Have a minimum tread depth of Table D–1 of this section or they use a
9.5 inches (24 cm); and combination that achieves the angle
(4) Have a minimum width of 22 requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of this
inches (56 cm) between vertical bar- section.
riers (see Figure D–8 of this section).
133
ER18NO16.350</GPH>
(d) Spiral stairs. In addition to para- inches (2 m), measured from the lead-
graph (b) of this section, the employer ing edge of the tread;
must ensure spiral stairs: (4) Have a minimum tread depth of
(1) Have a minimum clear width of 26 7.5 inches (19 cm), measured at a point
inches (66 cm); 12 inches (30 cm) from the narrower
(2) Have a maximum riser height of edge;
9.5 inches (24 cm); (5) Have a uniform tread size;
ER17DE19.018</GPH>
(3) Have a minimum headroom above (e) Ship stairs. In addition to para-
spiral stair treads of at least 6 feet, 6 graph (b) of this section, the employer
134
ER18NO16.351</GPH>
must ensure ship stairs (see Figure D– (3) Have minimum tread depth of 4
9 of this section): inches (10 cm); and
(1) Are installed at a slope of 50 to 70 (4) Have a minimum tread width of 18
degrees from the horizontal; inches (46 cm).
(2) Have open risers with a vertical
rise between tread surfaces of 6.5 to 12
inches (17 to 30 cm);
(f) Alternating tread-type stairs. In ad- (3) Have a minimum tread depth of
dition to paragraph (b) of this section, 8.5 inches (22 cm); and
the employer must ensure alternating (4) Have open risers if the tread depth
tread-type stairs: is less than 9.5 inches (24 cm);
(1) Have a series of treads installed at (5) Have a minimum tread width of 7
a slope of 50 to 70 degrees from the hor- inches (18 cm), measured at the leading
izontal; edge of the tread (i.e., nosing).
(2) Have a distance between handrails
of 17 to 24 inches (51 to 61 cm);
135
ER18NO16.353</GPH>
[81 FR 82981, Nov. 18, 2016, as amended at 84 (a) Dockboards are capable of sup-
FR 68795, Dec. 17, 2019] porting the maximum intended load in
accordance with § 1910.22(b);
§ 1910.26 Dockboards.
(b)(1) Dockboards put into initial
The employer must ensure that each service on or after January 17, 2017 are
dockboard used meets the require- designed, constructed, and maintained
ments of this section. The employer to prevent transfer vehicles from run-
must ensure: ning off the dockboard edge;
136
ER18NO16.354</GPH>
(2) Exception to paragraph (b)(1) of this implemented no later than November

section. When the employer dem- 20, 2017.
onstrates there is no hazard of transfer (2) Use of rope descent systems. The
vehicles running off the dockboard employer must ensure:
edge, the employer may use dockboards (i) No rope descent system is used for
that do not have run-off protection. heights greater than 300 feet (91 m)
(c) Portable dockboards are secured above grade unless the employer dem-
by anchoring them in place or using onstrates that it is not feasible to ac-
equipment or devices that prevent the cess such heights by any other means
dockboard from moving out of a safe or that those means pose a greater haz-
position. When the employer dem- ard than using a rope descent system;
onstrates that securing the dockboard (ii) The rope descent system is used
is not feasible, the employer must en- in accordance with instructions, warn-
sure there is sufficient contact between ings, and design limitations set by the
the dockboard and the surface to pre- manufacturer or under the direction of
vent the dockboard from moving out of a qualified person;
a safe position; (iii) Each employee who uses the rope
(d) Measures, such as wheel chocks or descent system is trained in accord-
sand shoes, are used to prevent the ance with § 1910.30;
transport vehicle (e.g. a truck, semi- (iv) The rope descent system is in-
trailer, trailer, or rail car) on which a spected at the start of each workshift
dockboard is placed, from moving that it is to be used. The employer
while employees are on the dockboard; must ensure damaged or defective
and equipment is removed from service im-
(e) Portable dockboards are equipped mediately and replaced;
with handholds or other means to per- (v) The rope descent system has prop-
mit safe handling of dockboards. er rigging, including anchorages and
tiebacks, with particular emphasis on
§ 1910.27 Scaffolds and rope descent providing tiebacks when counter-
systems. weights, cornice hooks, or similar non-
(a) Scaffolds. Scaffolds used in gen- permanent anchorages are used;
eral industry must meet the require- (vi) Each employee uses a separate,
ments in 29 CFR part 1926, subpart L independent personal fall arrest system
(Scaffolds). that meets the requirements of subpart
(b) Rope descent systems—(1) Anchor- I of this part;
ages. (i) Before any rope descent system (vii) All components of each rope de-
is used, the building owner must in- scent system, except seat boards, are
form the employer, in writing that the capable of sustaining a minimum rated
building owner has identified, tested, load of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). Seat
certified, and maintained each anchor- boards must be capable of supporting a
age so it is capable of supporting at live load of 300 pounds (136 kg);
least 5,000 pounds (2,268 kg), in any di- (viii) Prompt rescue of each em-
rection, for each employee attached. ployee is provided in the event of a fall;
The information must be based on an (ix) The ropes of each rope descent
annual inspection by a qualified person system are effectively padded or other-
and certification of each anchorage by wise protected, where they can contact
a qualified person, as necessary, and at edges of the building, anchorage, ob-
least every 10 years. structions, or other surfaces, to pre-
(ii) The employer must ensure that vent them from being cut or weakened;
no employee uses any anchorage before (x) Stabilization is provided at the
the employer has obtained written in- specific work location when descents
formation from the building owner are greater than 130 feet (39.6 m);
that each anchorage meets the require- (xi) No employee uses a rope descent
ments of paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this sec- system when hazardous weather condi-
tion. The employer must keep the in- tions, such as storms or gusty or exces-
formation for the duration of the job. sive wind, are present;
(iii) The requirements in paragraphs (xii) Equipment, such as tools, squee-

(b)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section must be gees, or buckets, is secured by a tool
137
lanyard or similar method to prevent it (B) Safety net systems; or

from falling; and (C) Personal fall protection systems,
(xiii) The ropes of each rope descent such as personal fall arrest, travel re-
system are protected from exposure to straint, or positioning systems.
open flames, hot work, corrosive (ii) When the employer can dem-
chemicals, and other destructive condi- onstrate that it is not feasible or cre-
tions. ates a greater hazard to use guardrail,
safety net, or personal fall protection
[81 FR 82981, Nov. 18, 2016, as amended at 84
FR 68796, Dec. 17, 2019] systems on residential roofs, the em-
ployer must develop and implement a
§ 1910.28 Duty to have fall protection fall protection plan that meets the re-
and falling object protection. quirements of 29 CFR 1926.502(k) and
(a) General. (1) This section requires training that meets the requirements
employers to provide protection for of 29 CFR 1926.503(a) and (c).
each employee exposed to fall and fall- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(1)(ii) OF THIS SEC-
ing object hazards. Unless stated other- TION: There is a presumption that it is fea-
wise, the employer must ensure that sible and will not create a greater hazard to
all fall protection and falling object use at least one of the above-listed fall pro-
tection systems specified in paragraph
protection required by this section
(b)(1)(i) of this section. Accordingly, the em-
meet the criteria in § 1910.29, except ployer has the burden of establishing that it
that personal fall protection systems is not feasible or creates a greater hazard to
required by this section meet the cri- provide the fall protection systems specified
teria of § 1910.140. in paragraph (b)(1)(i) and that it is necessary
(2) This section does not apply: to implement a fall protection plan that
(i) To portable ladders; complies with § 1926.502(k) in the particular
(ii) When employers are inspecting, work operation, in lieu of implementing any
investigating, or assessing workplace of those systems.
conditions or work to be performed (iii) When the employer can dem-
prior to the start of work or after all onstrate that the use of fall protection
work has been completed. This exemp- systems is not feasible on the working
tion does not apply when fall protec- side of a platform used at a loading
tion systems or equipment meeting the rack, loading dock, or teeming plat-
requirements of § 1910.29 have been inform, the work may be done without a
stalled and are available for workers to fall protection system, provided:
use for pre-work and post-work inspec- (A) The work operation for which fall
tions, investigations, or assessments; protection is infeasible is in process;
(iii) To fall hazards presented by the (B) Access to the platform is limited
exposed perimeters of entertainment to authorized employees; and,
stages and the exposed perimeters of (C) The authorized employees are
rail-station platforms; trained in accordance with § 1910.30.
(iv) To powered platforms covered by (2) Hoist areas. The employer must
§ 1910.66(j); ensure:
(v) To aerial lifts covered by (i) Each employee in a hoist area is
§ 1910.67(c)(2)(v); protected from falling 4 feet (1.2 m) or
(vi) To telecommunications work more to a lower level by:
covered by § 1910.268(n)(7) and (8); and (A) A guardrail system;
(vii) To electric power generation, (B) A personal fall arrest system; or
transmission, and distribution work (C) A travel restraint system.
covered by § 1910.269(g)(2)(i). (ii) When any portion of a guardrail
(b) Protection from fall hazards—(1) system, gate, or chains is removed, and
Unprotected sides and edges. (i) Except an employee must lean through or over
as provided elsewhere in this section, the edge of the access opening to facili-
the employer must ensure that each tate hoisting, the employee is pro-
employee on a walking-working sur- tected from falling by a personal fall
face with an unprotected side or edge arrest system.
that is 4 feet (1.2 m) or more above a (iii) If grab handles are installed at
lower level is protected from falling by hoist areas, they meet the require-
one or more of the following: ments of § 1910.29(l).

(A) Guardrail systems; (3) Holes. The employer must ensure:
138
(i) Each employee is protected from (4) Dockboards. (i) The employer must
falling through any hole (including ensure that each employee on a
skylights) that is 4 feet (1.2 m) or more dockboard is protected from falling 4
above a lower level by one or more of feet (1.2 m) or more to a lower level by
the following: a guardrail system or handrails.
(A) Covers; (ii) A guardrail system or handrails
(B) Guardrail systems; are not required when:
(C) Travel restraint systems; or (A) Dockboards are being used solely
(D) Personal fall arrest systems. for materials-handling operations
(ii) Each employee is protected from using motorized equipment;
tripping into or stepping into or (B) Employees engaged in these oper-
through any hole that is less than 4 ations are not exposed to fall hazards
feet (1.2 m) above a lower level by cov- greater than 10 feet (3 m); and
ers or guardrail systems. (C) Those employees have been
(iii) Each employee is protected from trained in accordance with § 1910.30.
falling into a stairway floor hole by a (5) Runways and similar walkways. (i)
fixed guardrail system on all exposed The employer must ensure each em-
sides, except at the stairway entrance. ployee on a runway or similar walkway
However, for any stairway used less is protected from falling 4 feet (1.2 m)
than once per day where traffic across or more to a lower level by a guardrail
the stairway floor hole prevents the system.
use of a fixed guardrail system (e.g., (ii) When the employer can dem-
holes located in aisle spaces), the em- onstrate that it is not feasible to have
ployer may protect employees from guardrails on both sides of a runway
falling into the hole by using a hinged used exclusively for a special purpose,
floor hole cover that meets the criteria the employer may omit the guardrail
in § 1910.29 and a removable guardrail on one side of the runway, provided the
system on all exposed sides, except at employer ensures:
the entrance to the stairway. (A) The runway is at least 18 inches
(iv) Each employee is protected from (46 cm) wide; and
falling into a ladderway floor hole or (B) Each employee is provided with
ladderway platform hole by a guardrail and uses a personal fall arrest system
system and toeboards erected on all ex- or travel restraint system.
posed sides, except at the entrance to (6) Dangerous equipment. The em-
the hole, where a self-closing gate or ployer must ensure:
an offset must be used. (i) Each employee less than 4 feet (1.2
(v) Each employee is protected from m) above dangerous equipment is pro-
falling through a hatchway and chute- tected from falling into or onto the
floor hole by: dangerous equipment by a guardrail
(A) A hinged floor-hole cover that system or a travel restraint system,
meets the criteria in § 1910.29 and a unless the equipment is covered or
fixed guardrail system that leaves only guarded to eliminate the hazard.
one exposed side. When the hole is not (ii) Each employee 4 feet (1.2 m) or
in use, the employer must ensure the more above dangerous equipment must
cover is closed or a removable guard- be protected from falling by:
rail system is provided on the exposed (A) Guardrail systems;
sides; (B) Safety net systems;
(B) A removable guardrail system (C) Travel restraint systems; or
and toeboards on not more than two (D) Personal fall arrest systems.
sides of the hole and a fixed guardrail (7) Openings. The employer must en-
system on all other exposed sides. The sure that each employee on a walking-
employer must ensure the removable working surface near an opening, in-
guardrail system is kept in place when cluding one with a chute attached,
the hole is not in use; or where the inside bottom edge of the
(C) A guardrail system or a travel reopening is less than 39 inches (99 cm)
straint system when a work operation above that walking-working surface
necessitates passing material through and the outside bottom edge of the
a hatchway or chute floor hole. opening is 4 feet (1.2 m) or more above
139
a lower level is protected from falling the fixed ladder, cage, or well where
by the use of: the replacement is located; and
(i) Guardrail systems; (D) Final deadline. On and after No-
(ii) Safety net systems; vember 18, 2036, all fixed ladders are
(iii) Travel restraint systems; or, equipped with a personal fall arrest
(iv) Personal fall arrest systems. system or a ladder safety system.
(ii) When a one-section fixed ladder is
(8) Repair pits, service pits, and assem-
equipped with a personal fall protec-
bly pits less than 10 feet in depth. The use
tion or a ladder safety system or a
of a fall protection system is not re-
fixed ladder is equipped with a personal
quired for a repair pit, service pit, or
fall arrest or ladder safety system on
assembly pit that is less than 10 feet (3
more than one section, the employer
m) deep, provided the employer:
must ensure:
(i) Limits access within 6 feet (1.8 m)
(A) The personal fall arrest system or
of the edge of the pit to authorized em-
ladder safety system provides protec-
ployees trained in accordance with
tion throughout the entire vertical dis-
§ 1910.30;
tance of the ladder, including all ladder
(ii) Applies floor markings at least 6 sections; and
feet (1.8 m) from the edge of the pit in (B) The ladder has rest platforms pro-
colors that contrast with the sur- vided at maximum intervals of 150 feet
rounding area; or places a warning line (45.7 m).
at least 6 feet (1.8 m) from the edge of (iii) The employer must ensure lad-
the pit as well as stanchions that are der sections having a cage or well:
capable of resisting, without tipping (A) Are offset from adjacent sections;
over, a force of at least 16 pounds (71 N) and
applied horizontally against the stan- (B) Have landing platforms provided
chion at a height of 30 inches (76 cm); at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15.2
or places a combination of floor mark- m).
ings and warning lines at least 6 feet (iv) The employer may use a cage or
(1.8 m) from the edge of the pit. When well in combination with a personal
two or more pits in a common area are fall arrest system or ladder safety sys-
not more than 15 feet (4.5m) apart, the tem provided that the cage or well does
employer may comply by placing con- not interfere with the operation of the
trasting floor markings at least 6 feet system.
(1.8 m) from the pit edge around the en- (10) Outdoor advertising (billboards). (i)
tire area of the pits; and The requirements in paragraph (b)(9) of
(iii) Posts readily visible caution this section, and other requirements in
signs that meet the requirements of subparts D and I of this part, apply to
§ 1910.145 and state ‘‘Caution—Open fixed ladders used in outdoor adver-
Pit.’’ tising activities.
(9) Fixed ladders (that extend more than (ii) When an employee engaged in
24 feet (7.3 m) above a lower level). (i) For outdoor advertising climbs a fixed lad-
fixed ladders that extend more than 24 der before November 19, 2018 that is not
feet (7.3 m) above a lower level, the em- equipped with a cage, well, personal
ployer must ensure: fall arrest system, or a ladder safety
(A) Existing fixed ladders. Each fixed system the employer must ensure the
ladder installed before November 19, employee:
2018 is equipped with a personal fall ar- (A) Receives training and dem-
rest system, ladder safety system, onstrates the physical capability to
cage, or well; perform the necessary climbs in ac-
(B) New fixed ladders. Each fixed lad- cordance with § 1910.29(h);
der installed on and after November 19, (B) Wears a body harness equipped
2018, is equipped with a personal fall ar- with an 18-inch (46 cm) rest lanyard;
rest system or a ladder safety system; (C) Keeps both hands free of tools or
(C) Replacement. When a fixed ladder, material when climbing on the ladder;
cage, or well, or any portion of a sec- and
tion thereof, is replaced, a personal fall (D) Is protected by a fall protection
arrest system or ladder safety system system upon reaching the work posi-
is installed in at least that section of tion.
140
(11) Stairways. The employer must en- above a lower level is protected by a
sure: guardrail or stair rail system;
(i) Each employee exposed to an un- (ii) Each flight of stairs having at
protected side or edge of a stairway least 3 treads and at least 4 risers is
landing that is 4 feet (1.2 m) or more equipped with stair rail systems and
handrails as follows:
(iii) Each ship stairs and alternating (ii) When work is performed at least
tread type stairs is equipped with 6 feet (1.6 m) but less than 15 feet (4.6
handrails on both sides. m) from the roof edge, the employer
(12) Scaffolds and rope descent systems. must ensure each employee is pro-
The employer must ensure: tected from falling by using a guardrail
(i) Each employee on a scaffold is system, safety net system, travel re-
protected from falling in accordance 29 straint system, or personal fall arrest
CFR part 1926, subpart L; and system. The employer may use a des-
(ii) Each employee using a rope de- ignated area when performing work
scent system 4 feet (1.2 m) or more that is both infrequent and temporary.
above a lower level is protected from
(iii) When work is performed 15 feet
falling by a personal fall arrest system.
(4.6 m) or more from the roof edge, the
(13) Work on low-slope roofs. (i) When
work is performed less than 6 feet (1.6 employer must:
m) from the roof edge, the employer (A) Protect each employee from fall-
must ensure each employee is pro- ing by a guardrail system, safety net
tected from falling by a guardrail sys- system, travel restraint system, or per-
tem, safety net system, travel re- sonal fall arrest system or a designated
straint system, or personal fall arrest area. The employer is not required to
system. provide any fall protection, provided
141
ER18NO16.355</GPH>
the work is both infrequent and tem- ees from entering the barricaded area,
porary; and and keeping objects far enough from an
(B) Implement and enforce a work edge or opening to prevent them from
rule prohibiting employees from going falling to a lower level.
within 15 feet (4.6 m) of the roof edge
without using fall protection in accord- § 1910.29 Fall protection systems and
ance with paragraphs (b)(13)(i) and (ii) falling object protection—criteria
of this section. and practices.
(14) Slaughtering facility platforms. (i) (a) General requirements. The em-
The employer must protect each employer must:
ployee on the unprotected working side (1) Ensure each fall protection sys-
of a slaughtering facility platform that tem and falling object protection,
is 4 feet (1.2 m) or more above a lower other than personal fall protection sys-
level from falling by using: tems, that this part requires meets the
(A) Guardrail systems; or requirements in this section. The em-
(B) Travel restraint systems. ployer must ensure each personal fall
(ii) When the employer can dem- protection system meets the require-
onstrate the use of a guardrail or trav- ments in subpart I of this part; and
el restraint system is not feasible, the (2) Provide and install all fall protec-
work may be done without those sys- tion systems and falling object protec-
tems provided: tion this subpart requires, and comply
(A) The work operation for which fall with the other requirements in this
protection is infeasible is in process; subpart before any employee begins
(B) Access to the platform is limited work that necessitates fall or falling
to authorized employees; and object protection.
(C) The authorized employees are (b) Guardrail systems. The employer
trained in accordance with § 1910.30. must ensure guardrail systems meet
(15) Walking-working surfaces not oth- the following requirements:
erwise addressed. Except as provided (1) The top edge height of top rails,
elsewhere in this section or by other or equivalent guardrail system mem-
subparts of this part, the employer bers, are 42 inches (107 cm), plus or
must ensure each employee on a walk- minus 3 inches (8 cm), above the walk-
ing-working surface 4 feet (1.2 m) or ing-working surface. The top edge
more above a lower level is protected height may exceed 45 inches (114 cm),
from falling by: provided the guardrail system meets
(i) Guardrail systems; all other criteria of paragraph (b) of
(ii) Safety net systems; or this section (see Figure D–11 of this
(iii) Personal fall protection systems, section).
such as personal fall arrest, travel re- (2) Midrails, screens, mesh, inter-
straint, or positioning systems. mediate vertical members, solid pan-
(c) Protection from falling objects. els, or equivalent intermediate mem-
When an employee is exposed to falling bers are installed between the walking-
objects, the employer must ensure that working surface and the top edge of the
each employee wears head protection guardrail system as follows when there
that meets the requirements of subpart is not a wall or parapet that is at least
I of this part. In addition, the employer 21 inches (53 cm) high:
must protect employees from falling (i) Midrails are installed at a height
objects by implementing one or more midway between the top edge of the
of the following: guardrail system and the walking-
(1) Erecting toeboards, screens, or working surface;
guardrail systems to prevent objects (ii) Screens and mesh extend from
from falling to a lower level; the walking-working surface to the top
(2) Erecting canopy structures and rail and along the entire opening be-
keeping potential falling objects far tween top rail supports;
enough from an edge, hole, or opening (iii) Intermediate vertical members
to prevent them from falling to a lower (such as balusters) are installed no
level; or more than 19 inches (48 cm) apart; and
(3) Barricading the area into which (iv) Other equivalent intermediate
objects could fall, prohibiting employ- members (such as additional midrails
142
and architectural panels) are installed able guardrail section at hoist areas if
so that the openings are not more than the employer demonstrates the chains
19 inches (48 cm) wide. or gates provide a level of safety equiv-
(3) Guardrail systems are capable of alent to guardrails.
withstanding, without failure, a force (11) When guardrail systems are used
of at least 200 pounds (890 N) applied in around holes, they are installed on all
a downward or outward direction with- unprotected sides or edges of the hole.
in 2 inches (5 cm) of the top edge, at (12) For guardrail systems used
any point along the top rail. around holes through which materials
(4) When the 200-pound (890–N) test may be passed:
load is applied in a downward direc- (i) When materials are being passed
tion, the top rail of the guardrail sys- through the hole, not more than two
tem must not deflect to a height of less sides of the guardrail system are re-
than 39 inches (99 cm) above the walk- moved; and
ing-working surface. (ii) When materials are not being
(5) Midrails, screens, mesh, inter- passed through the hole, the hole must
mediate vertical members, solid pan- be guarded by a guardrail system along
els, and other equivalent intermediate all unprotected sides or edges or closed
members are capable of withstanding, over with a cover.
without failure, a force of at least 150
(13) When guardrail systems are used
pounds (667 N) applied in any downward
around holes that serve as points of ac-
or outward direction at any point
cess (such as ladderways), the guardrail
along the intermediate member.
system opening:
(6) Guardrail systems are smooth-
surfaced to protect employees from in- (i) Has a self-closing gate that slides
jury, such as punctures or lacerations, or swings away from the hole, and is
and to prevent catching or snagging of equipped with a top rail and midrail or
clothing. equivalent intermediate member that
(7) The ends of top rails and midrails meets the requirements in paragraph
do not overhang the terminal posts, ex- (b) of this section; or
cept where the overhang does not pose (ii) Is offset to prevent an employee
a projection hazard for employees. from walking or falling into the hole;
(8) Steel banding and plastic banding (14) Guardrail systems on ramps and
are not used for top rails or midrails. runways are installed along each un-
(9) Top rails and midrails are at least protected side or edge.
0.25-inches (0.6 cm) in diameter or in (15) Manila or synthetic rope used for
thickness. top rails or midrails are inspected as
(10) When guardrail systems are used necessary to ensure that the rope con-
at hoist areas, a removable guardrail tinues to meet the strength require-
section, consisting of a top rail and ments in paragraphs (b)(3) and (5) of
midrail, are placed across the access this section.
opening between guardrail sections NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b) OF THIS SECTION:
when employees are not performing The criteria and practices requirements for
hoisting operations. The employer may guardrail systems on scaffolds are contained
use chains or gates instead of a remov- in 29 CFR part 1926, subpart L.
143
(c) Safety net systems. The employer (v) Is erected as close to the work
must ensure each safety net system area as the task permits; and
meets the requirements in 29 CFR part (vi) Is erected not less than 6 feet (1.8
1926, subpart M. m) from the roof edge for work that is
(d) Designated areas. (1) When the em- both temporary and infrequent, or not
ployer uses a designated area, the em- less than 15 feet (4.6 m) for other work.
ployer must ensure: (3) When mobile mechanical equip-
(i) Employees remain within the des- ment is used to perform work that is
ignated area while work operations are both temporary and infrequent in a
underway; and designated area, the employer must en-
(ii) The perimeter of the designated sure the warning line is erected not
area is delineated with a warning line less than 6 feet (1.8 m) from the unpro-
tected side or edge that is parallel to
consisting of a rope, wire, tape, or
the direction in which the mechanical
chain that meets the requirements of
equipment is operated, and not less
paragraphs (d)(2) and (3) of this section.
than 10 feet (3 m) from the unprotected
(2) The employer must ensure each side or edge that is perpendicular to
warning line: the direction in which the mechanical
(i) Has a minimum breaking strength equipment is operated.
of 200 pounds (0.89 kN); (e) Covers. The employer must ensure
(ii) Is installed so its lowest point, in- each cover for a hole in a walking-
cluding sag, is not less than 34 inches working surface:
(86 cm) and not more than 39 inches (99 (1) Is capable of supporting without
cm) above the walking-working sur- failure, at least twice the maximum in-
face; tended load that may be imposed on
(iii) Is supported in such a manner the cover at any one time; and
that pulling on one section of the line (2) Is secured to prevent accidental
will not result in slack being taken up displacement.
in adjacent sections causing the line to (f) Handrails and stair rail systems. The
fall below the limits specified in para- employer must ensure:
graph (d)(2)(ii) of this section; (1) Height criteria. (i) Handrails are
(iv) Is clearly visible from a distance not less than 30 inches (76 cm) and not
of 25 feet (7.6 m) away, and anywhere more than 38 inches (97 cm), as meas-
within the designated area; ured from the leading edge of the stair
144
ER17DE19.019</GPH>
tread to the top surface of the handrail (2) Finger clearance. The minimum
(see Figure D–12 of this section). clearance between handrails and any
(ii) The height of stair rail systems other object is 2.25 inches (5.7 cm).
meets the following: (3) Surfaces. Handrails and stair rail
(A) The height of stair rail systems systems are smooth-surfaced to protect
installed before January 17, 2017 is not employees from injury, such as punc-
less than 30 inches (76 cm) from the tures or lacerations, and to prevent
leading edge of the stair tread to the catching or snagging of clothing.
top surface of the top rail; and
(4) Openings in stair rails. No opening
(B) The height of stair rail systems
installed on or after January 17, 2017 is in a stair rail system exceeds 19 inches
not less than 42 inches (107 cm) from (48 cm) at its least dimension.
the leading edge of the stair tread to (5) Handhold. Handrails have the
the top surface of the top rail. shape and dimension necessary so that
(iii) The top rail of a stair rail sys- employees can grasp the handrail firm-
tem may serve as a handrail only ly.
when: (6) Projection hazards. The ends of
(A) The height of the stair rail sys- handrails and stair rail systems do not
tem is not less than 36 inches (91 cm) present any projection hazards.
and not more than 38 inches (97 cm) as (7) Strength criteria. Handrails and the
measured at the leading edge of the top rails of stair rail systems are capa-
stair tread to the top surface of the top ble of withstanding, without failure, a
rail (see Figure D–13 of this section); force of at least 200 pounds (890 N) ap-
and plied in any downward or outward di-
(B) The top rail of the stair rail sys-
rection within 2 inches (5 cm) of any
tem meets the other handrail require-
point along the top edge of the rail.
ments in paragraph (f) of this section.
145
Figure D-13 – Combination Handrail and Stair

Rail
(g) Cages, wells, and platforms used maintained to permit easy access to,
with fixed ladders. The employer must and egress from, the ladder that they
ensure: enclose (see Figures D–14 and D–15 of
(1) Cages and wells installed on fixed this section);

ladders are designed, constructed, and
146
ER18NO16.357</GPH>
(2) Cages and wells are continuous (4) Platforms used with fixed ladders
throughout the length of the fixed lad- provide a horizontal surface of at least
der, except for access, egress, and other 24 inches by 30 inches (61 cm by 76 cm).
transfer points;
(3) Cages and wells are designed, con- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (g): Section 1910.28 es-
tablishes the requirements that employers
structed, and maintained to contain
must follow on the use of cages and wells as
employees in the event of a fall, and to
a means of fall protection.
direct them to a lower landing; and
(h) Outdoor advertising. This para- must ensure that each employee who
graph (h) applies only to employers en- climbs a fixed ladder without fall pro-
ER18NO16.359</GPH>
gaged in outdoor advertising oper- tection:

ations (see § 1910.28(b)(10)). Employers
147
ER18NO16.358</GPH>
(1) Is physically capable, as dem- (k) Protection from falling objects. (1)
onstrated through observations of ac- The employers must ensure toeboards
tual climbing activities or by a phys- used for falling object protection:
ical examination, to perform the duties (i) Are erected along the exposed
that may be assigned, including climb- edge of the overhead walking-working
ing fixed ladders without fall protec- surface for a length that is sufficient to
tion; protect employees below.
(2) Has successfully completed a (ii) Have a minimum vertical height
training or apprenticeship program of 3.5 inches (9 cm) as measured from
that includes hands-on training on the the top edge of the toeboard to the
safe climbing of ladders and is re- level of the walking-working surface.
trained as necessary to maintain the (iii) Do not have more than a 0.25-
necessary skills; inch (0.5-cm) clearance or opening
(3) Has the skill to climb ladders above the walking-working surface.
safely, as demonstrated through formal (iv) Are solid or do not have any
classroom training or on-the-job train- opening that exceeds 1 inch (3 cm) at
ing, and performance observation; and its greatest dimension.
(4) Performs climbing duties as a part (v) Have a minimum height of 2.5
of routine work activity. inches (6 cm) when used around vehicle
(i) Ladder safety systems. The em- repair, service, or assembly pits.
ployer must ensure: Toeboards may be omitted around ve-
(1) Each ladder safety system allows hicle repair, service, or assembly pits
the employee to climb up and down when the employer can demonstrate
using both hands and does not require that a toeboard would prevent access
that the employee continuously hold, to a vehicle that is over the pit.
push, or pull any part of the system (vi) Are capable of withstanding,
while climbing; without failure, a force of at least 50
(2) The connection between the car- pounds (222 N) applied in any downward
rier or lifeline and the point of attach- or outward direction at any point
ment to the body harness or belt does along the toeboard.
not exceed 9 inches (23 cm); (2) The employer must ensure:
(3) Mountings for rigid carriers are (i) Where tools, equipment, or mate-
attached at each end of the carrier, rials are piled higher than the top of
with intermediate mountings spaced, the toeboard, paneling or screening is
as necessary, along the entire length of installed from the toeboard to the
the carrier so the system has the midrail of the guardrail system and for
strength to stop employee falls; a length that is sufficient to protect
(4) Mountings for flexible carriers are employees below. If the items are piled
attached at each end of the carrier and higher than the midrail, the employer
cable guides for flexible carriers are in- also must install paneling or screening
stalled at least 25 feet (7.6 m) apart but to the top rail and for a length that is
not more than 40 feet (12.2 m) apart sufficient to protect employees below;
along the entire length of the carrier; and
(5) The design and installation of (ii) All openings in guardrail systems
mountings and cable guides does not are small enough to prevent objects
reduce the design strength of the lad- from falling through the opening.
der; and (3) The employer must ensure can-
(6) Ladder safety systems and their opies used for falling object protection
support systems are capable of with- are strong enough to prevent collapse
standing, without failure, a drop test and to prevent penetration by falling
consisting of an 18-inch (41-cm) drop of objects.
a 500-pound (227-kg) weight. (l) Grab handles. The employer must
(j) Personal fall protection systems. ensure each grab handle:
Body belts, harnesses, and other com- (1) Is not less than 12 inches (30 cm)
ponents used in personal fall arrest long;
systems, work positioning systems, (2) Is mounted to provide at least 3
and travel restraint systems must inches (8 cm) of clearance from the
meet the requirements of § 1910.140. framing or opening; and
148
(3) Is capable of withstanding a max- (c) Retraining. The employer must re-
imum horizontal pull-out force equal train an employee when the employer
to two times the maximum intended has reason to believe the employee
load or 200 pounds (890 N), whichever is does not have the understanding and
greater. skill required by paragraphs (a) and (b)
[81 FR 82981, Nov. 18, 2016, as amended at 84 of this section. Situations requiring re-
FR 68796, Dec. 17, 2019] training include, but are not limited
to, the following:
§ 1910.30 Training requirements. (1) When changes in the workplace
(a) Fall hazards. (1) Before any em- render previous training obsolete or in-
ployee is exposed to a fall hazard, the adequate;
employer must provide training for (2) When changes in the types of fall
each employee who uses personal fall protection systems or equipment to be
protection systems or who is required used render previous training obsolete
to be trained as specified elsewhere in or inadequate; or
this subpart. Employers must ensure (3) When inadequacies in an affected
employees are trained in the require- employee’s knowledge or use of fall
ments of this paragraph on or before protection systems or equipment indi-
May 17, 2017. cate that the employee no longer has
(2) The employer must ensure that the requisite understanding or skill
each employee is trained by a qualified necessary to use equipment or perform
person. the job safely.
(3) The employer must train each em- (d) Training must be understandable.
ployee in at least the following topics: The employer must provide informa-
(i) The nature of the fall hazards in tion and training to each employee in a
the work area and how to recognize manner that the employee under-
them; stands.
(ii) The procedures to be followed to
minimize those hazards; Subpart E—Exit Routes and
(iii) The correct procedures for in- Emergency Planning
stalling, inspecting, operating, main-
taining, and disassembling the personal
AUTHORITY: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Sec-
fall protection systems that the em- retary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754),
ployee uses; and 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55
(iv) The correct use of personal fall FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017),
protection systems and equipment 5–2002 (67 FR 65008), 5–2007 (72 FR 31160), or 4–
specified in paragraph (a)(1) of this sec- 2010 (75 FR 55355), as applicable; and 29 CFR
tion, including, but not limited to, 1911.
proper hook-up, anchoring, and tie-off
techniques, and methods of equipment § 1910.33 Table of contents.
inspection and storage, as specified by This section lists the sections and
the manufacturer. paragraph headings contained in
(b) Equipment hazards. (1) The em- §§ 1910.34 through 1910.39.
ployer must train each employee on or
before May 17, 2017 in the proper care, § 1910.34 Coverage and definitions.
inspection, storage, and use of equip- (a) Every employer is covered.
ment covered by this subpart before an (b) Exit routes are covered.
employee uses the equipment. (c) Definitions.
(2) The employer must train each em-
ployee who uses a dockboard to prop- § 1910.35 Compliance with Alternate Exit Route
erly place and secure it to prevent un- Codes.
intentional movement. § 1910.36 Design and construction requirements
(3) The employer must train each em- for exit routes.
ployee who uses a rope descent system
(a) Basic requirements.
in proper rigging and use of the equip- (b) The number of exit routes must be ade-
ment in accordance with § 1910.27. quate.
(4) The employer must train each em-
(c) Exit discharge.

ployee who uses a designated area in (d) An exit door must be unlocked.
the proper set-up and use of the area. (e) A side-hinged exit door must be used.
149
(f) The capacity of an exit route must be ade- Exit means that portion of an exit
quate. route that is generally separated from
(g) An exit route must meet minimum height other areas to provide a protected way
and width requirements.
of travel to the exit discharge. An ex-
(h) An outdoor exit route is permitted.
ample of an exit is a two-hour fire re-
§ 1910.37 Maintenance, safeguards, and sistance-rated enclosed stairway that
operational features for exit routes. leads from the fifth floor of an office
(a) The danger to employees must be mini- building to the outside of the building.
mized. Exit access means that portion of an
(b) Lighting and marking must be adequate exit route that leads to an exit. An ex-
and appropriate. ample of an exit access is a corridor on
(c) The fire retardant properties of paints or the fifth floor of an office building that
solutions must be maintained. leads to a two-hour fire resistance-
(d) Exit routes must be maintained during
rated enclosed stairway (the Exit).
construction, repairs, or alterations.
(e) An employee alarm system must be oper- Exit discharge means the part of the
able. exit route that leads directly outside
or to a street, walkway, refuge area,
§ 1910.38 Emergency action plans. public way, or open space with access
(a) Application. to the outside. An example of an exit
(b) Written and oral emergency action plans. discharge is a door at the bottom of a
(c) Minimum elements of an emergency ac- two-hour fire resistance-rated enclosed
tion plan. stairway that discharges to a place of
(d) Employee alarm system. safety outside the building.
(e) Training.
Exit route means a continuous and
(f) Review of emergency action plan.
unobstructed path of exit travel from
§ 1910.39 Fire prevention plans. any point within a workplace to a
(a) Application. place of safety (including refuge areas).
(b) Written and oral fire prevention plans. An exit route consists of three parts:
(c) Minimum elements of a fire prevention The exit access; the exit; and, the exit
plan. discharge. (An exit route includes all
(d) Employee information. vertical and horizontal areas along the
[67 FR 67961, Nov. 7, 2002, as amended at 76 route.)
FR 33606, June 8, 2011] High hazard area means an area in-
side a workplace in which operations
§ 1910.34 Coverage and definitions. include high hazard materials, proc-
(a) Every employer is covered. Sections esses, or contents.
1910.34 through 1910.39 apply to work- Occupant load means the total num-
places in general industry except mo- ber of persons that may occupy a work-
bile workplaces such as vehicles or ves- place or portion of a workplace at any
sels. one time. The occupant load of a work-
(b) Exits routes are covered. The rules place is calculated by dividing the
in §§ 1910.34 through 1910.39 cover the gross floor area of the workplace or
minimum requirements for exit routes portion of the workplace by the occu-
that employers must provide in their pant load factor for that particular
workplace so that employees may type of workplace occupancy. Informa-
evacuate the workplace safely during tion regarding the ‘‘Occupant load’’ is
an emergency. Sections 1910.34 through located in NFPA 101–2009, Life Safety
1910.39 also cover the minimum re- Code, and in IFC–2009, International
quirements for emergency action plans Fire Code (incorporated by reference,
and fire prevention plans. see § 1910.6).
(c) Definitions. Refuge area means either:
Electroluminescent means a light- (1) A space along an exit route that is
emitting capacitor. Alternating cur- protected from the effects of fire by
rent excites phosphor atoms when separation from other spaces within
placed between the electrically conduc- the building by a barrier with at least
tive surfaces to produce light. This a one-hour fire resistance-rating; or
light source is typically contained in- (2) A floor with at least two spaces,
side the device. separated from each other by smoke-
150
resistant partitions, in a building pro- oratory. Section 1910.155(c)(3)(iv)(A) of

tected throughout by an automatic this part defines ‘‘listed’’ and § 1910.7 of
sprinkler system that complies with this part defines a ‘‘nationally recog-
§ 1910.159 of this part. nized testing laboratory.’’
Self-luminous means a light source (b) The number of exit routes must be
that is illuminated by a self-contained adequate—(1) Two exit routes. At least
power source (e.g., tritium) and that two exit routes must be available in a
operates independently from external workplace to permit prompt evacu-
power sources. Batteries are not ac- ation of employees and other building
ceptable self-contained power sources. occupants during an emergency, except
The light source is typically contained as allowed in paragraph (b)(3) of this
inside the device. section. The exit routes must be lo-
cated as far away as practical from
FR 33606, June 8, 2011] each other so that if one exit route is
blocked by fire or smoke, employees
§ 1910.35 Compliance with alternate can evacuate using the second exit
exit-route codes. route.
OSHA will deem an employer dem- (2) More than two exit routes. More
onstrating compliance with the exit- than two exit routes must be available
route provisions of NFPA 101, Life in a workplace if the number of em-
Safety Code, 2009 edition, or the exit- ployees, the size of the building, its oc-
route provisions of the International cupancy, or the arrangement of the
Fire Code, 2009 edition, to be in compli- workplace is such that all employees
ance with the corresponding require- would not be able to evacuate safely
ments in §§ 1910.34, 1910.36, and 1910.37 during an emergency.
(incorporated by reference, see section (3) A single exit route. A single exit
§ 1910.6). route is permitted where the number of
employees, the size of the building, its
[76 FR 33606, June 8, 2011] occupancy, or the arrangement of the
§ 1910.36 Design and construction re- workplace is such that all employees
quirements for exit routes. would be able to evacuate safely during
an emergency.
(a) Basic requirements. Exit routes
must meet the following design and NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b) OF THIS SECTION:
construction requirements: For assistance in determining the number of
(1) An exit route must be permanent. exit routes necessary for your workplace,
consult NFPA 101–2009, Life Safety Code, or
Each exit route must be a permanent IFC–2009, International Fire Code (incor-
part of the workplace. porated by reference, see § 1910.6).
(2) An exit must be separated by fire re-
sistant materials. Construction mate- (c) Exit discharge. (1) Each exit dis-
rials used to separate an exit from charge must lead directly outside or to
other parts of the workplace must have a street, walkway, refuge area, public
a one-hour fire resistance-rating if the way, or open space with access to the
exit connects three or fewer stories and outside.
a two-hour fire resistance-rating if the (2) The street, walkway, refuge area,
exit connects four or more stories. public way, or open space to which an
(3) Openings into an exit must be lim- exit discharge leads must be large
ited. An exit is permitted to have only enough to accommodate the building
those openings necessary to allow ac- occupants likely to use the exit route.
cess to the exit from occupied areas of (3) Exit stairs that continue beyond
the workplace, or to the exit discharge. the level on which the exit discharge is
An opening into an exit must be pro- located must be interrupted at that
tected by a self-closing fire door that level by doors, partitions, or other ef-
remains closed or automatically closes fective means that clearly indicate the
in an emergency upon the sounding of direction of travel leading to the exit
a fire alarm or employee alarm system. discharge.
Each fire door, including its frame and (d) An exit door must be unlocked. (1)
hardware, must be listed or approved Employees must be able to open an exit

by a nationally recognized testing lab- route door from the inside at all times
151
without keys, tools, or special knowl- exit route to less than the minimum
edge. A device such as a panic bar that width requirements for exit routes.
locks only from the outside is per- (h) An outdoor exit route is permitted.
mitted on exit discharge doors. Each outdoor exit route must meet the
(2) Exit route doors must be free of minimum height and width require-
any device or alarm that could restrict ments for indoor exit routes and must
emergency use of the exit route if the also meet the following requirements:
device or alarm fails. (1) The outdoor exit route must have
(3) An exit route door may be locked guardrails to protect unenclosed sides
from the inside only in mental, penal, if a fall hazard exists;
or correctional facilities and then only (2) The outdoor exit route must be
if supervisory personnel are continu- covered if snow or ice is likely to accu-
ously on duty and the employer has a mulate along the route, unless the em-
plan to remove occupants from the fa- ployer can demonstrate that any snow
cility during an emergency. or ice accumulation will be removed
(e) A side-hinged exit door must be before it presents a slipping hazard;
used. (1) A side-hinged door must be (3) The outdoor exit route must be
used to connect any room to an exit reasonably straight and have smooth,
route. solid, substantially level walkways;
(2) The door that connects any room and
to an exit route must swing out in the (4) The outdoor exit route must not
direction of exit travel if the room is have a dead-end that is longer than 20
designed to be occupied by more than feet (6.2 m).
50 people or if the room is a high haz-
ard area (i.e., contains contents that FR 33606, June 8, 2011]
are likely to burn with extreme rapid-
ity or explode). § 1910.37 Maintenance, safeguards, and
(f) The capacity of an exit route must be operational features for exit routes.
adequate. (1) Exit routes must support (a) The danger to employees must be
the maximum permitted occupant load minimized. (1) Exit routes must be kept
for each floor served. free of explosive or highly flammable
(2) The capacity of an exit route may furnishings or other decorations.
not decrease in the direction of exit (2) Exit routes must be arranged so
route travel to the exit discharge. that employees will not have to travel
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (f) OF THIS SECTION: toward a high hazard area, unless the
Information regarding the ‘‘Occupant load’’ path of travel is effectively shielded
is located in NFPA 101–2009, Life Safety from the high hazard area by suitable
Code, and in IFC–2009, International Fire partitions or other physical barriers.
Code (incorporated by reference, see § 1910.6).
(3) Exit routes must be free and unob-
(g) An exit route must meet minimum structed. No materials or equipment
height and width requirements. (1) The may be placed, either permanently or
ceiling of an exit route must be at least temporarily, within the exit route. The
seven feet six inches (2.3 m) high. Any exit access must not go through a room
projection from the ceiling must not that can be locked, such as a bath-
reach a point less than six feet eight room, to reach an exit or exit dis-
inches (2.0 m) from the floor. charge, nor may it lead into a dead-end
(2) An exit access must be at least 28 corridor. Stairs or a ramp must be pro-
inches (71.1 cm) wide at all points. vided where the exit route is not sub-
Where there is only one exit access stantially level.
leading to an exit or exit discharge, the (4) Safeguards designed to protect
width of the exit and exit discharge employees during an emergency (e.g.,
must be at least equal to the width of sprinkler systems, alarm systems, fire
the exit access. doors, exit lighting) must be in proper
(3) The width of an exit route must working order at all times.
be sufficient to accommodate the max- (b) Lighting and marking must be ade-
imum permitted occupant load of each quate and appropriate. (1) Each exit
floor served by the exit route. route must be adequately lighted so
(4) Objects that project into the exit that an employee with normal vision
route must not reduce the width of the can see along the exit route.
152
(2) Each exit must be clearly visible are beyond the normal permissible con-
and marked by a sign reading ‘‘Exit.’’ ditions in the workplace, or that would
(3) Each exit route door must be free impede exiting the workplace.
of decorations or signs that obscure the (e) An employee alarm system must be
visibility of the exit route door. operable. Employers must install and
(4) If the direction of travel to the maintain an operable employee alarm
exit or exit discharge is not imme- system that has a distinctive signal to
diately apparent, signs must be posted warn employees of fire or other emer-
along the exit access indicating the di- gencies, unless employees can prompt-
rection of travel to the nearest exit ly see or smell a fire or other hazard in
and exit discharge. Additionally, the time to provide adequate warning to
line-of-sight to an exit sign must clear- them. The employee alarm system
ly be visible at all times. must comply with § 1910.165.
(5) Each doorway or passage along an
[67 FR 67961, Nov. 7, 2002]
exit access that could be mistaken for
an exit must be marked ‘‘Not an Exit’’ § 1910.38 Emergency action plans.
or similar designation, or be identified
by a sign indicating its actual use (e.g., (a) Application. An employer must
closet). have an emergency action plan when-
(6) Each exit sign must be illumi- ever an OSHA standard in this part re-
nated to a surface value of at least five quires one. The requirements in this
foot-candles (54 lux) by a reliable light section apply to each such emergency
source and be distinctive in color. Self- action plan.
luminous or electroluminescent signs (b) Written and oral emergency action
that have a minimum luminance sur- plans. An emergency action plan must
face value of at least .06 footlamberts be in writing, kept in the workplace,
(0.21 cd/m2) are permitted. and available to employees for review.
(7) Each exit sign must have the word However, an employer with 10 or fewer
‘‘Exit’’ in plainly legible letters not employees may communicate the plan
less than six inches (15.2 cm) high, with orally to employees.
the principal strokes of the letters in (c) Minimum elements of an emergency
the word ‘‘Exit’’ not less than three- action plan. An emergency action plan
fourths of an inch (1.9 cm) wide. must include at a minimum:
(c) The fire retardant properties of (1) Procedures for reporting a fire or
paints or solutions must be maintained. other emergency;
Fire retardant paints or solutions must (2) Procedures for emergency evacu-
be renewed as often as necessary to ation, including type of evacuation and
maintain their fire retardant prop- exit route assignments;
erties. (3) Procedures to be followed by em-
(d) Exit routes must be maintained dur- ployees who remain to operate critical
ing construction, repairs, or alterations. plant operations before they evacuate;
(1) During new construction, employees (4) Procedures to account for all em-
must not occupy a workplace until the ployees after evacuation;
exit routes required by this subpart are (5) Procedures to be followed by em-
completed and ready for employee use ployees performing rescue or medical
for the portion of the workplace they duties; and
occupy. (6) The name or job title of every em-
(2) During repairs or alterations, employee who may be contacted by em-
ployees must not occupy a workplace ployees who need more information
unless the exit routes required by this about the plan or an explanation of
subpart are available and existing fire their duties under the plan.
protections are maintained, or until al- (d) Employee alarm system. An em-
ternate fire protection is furnished ployer must have and maintain an em-
that provides an equivalent level of ployee alarm system. The employee
safety. alarm system must use a distinctive
(3) Employees must not be exposed to signal for each purpose and comply
hazards of flammable or explosive sub- with the requirements in § 1910.165.
stances or equipment used during con- (e) Training. An employer must des-
struction, repairs, or alterations, that ignate and train employees to assist in
153
a safe and orderly evacuation of other APPENDIX TO SUBPART E OF PART 1910—

employees. EXIT ROUTES, EMERGENCY ACTION
(f) Review of emergency action plan. An PLANS, AND FIRE PREVENTION
employer must review the emergency PLANS
action plan with each employee cov-
This appendix serves as a nonmandatory
ered by the plan: guideline to assist employers in complying
(1) When the plan is developed or the with the appropriate requirements of subpart
employee is assigned initially to a job; E.
(2) When the employee’s responsibil-
ities under the plan change; and § 1910.38 Employee emergency plans.
(3) When the plan is changed. 1. Emergency action plan elements. The
emergency action plan should address emer-
[67 FR 67961, Nov. 7, 2002] gencies that the employer may reasonably
expect in the workplace. Examples are: fire;
§ 1910.39 Fire prevention plans. toxic chemical releases; hurricanes; torna-
(a) Application. An employer must does; blizzards; floods; and others. The ele-
have a fire prevention plan when an ments of the emergency action plan pre-
OSHA standard in this part requires sented in paragraph 1910.38(c) can be supple-
mented by the following to more effectively
one. The requirements in this section
achieve employee safety and health in an
apply to each such fire prevention plan. emergency. The employer should list in de-
(b) Written and oral fire prevention tail the procedures to be taken by those em-
plans. A fire prevention plan must be in ployees who have been selected to remain be-
writing, be kept in the workplace, and hind to care for essential plant operations
be made available to employees for re- until their evacuation becomes absolutely
view. However, an employer with 10 or necessary. Essential plant operations may
fewer employees may communicate the include the monitoring of plant power sup-
plies, water supplies, and other essential
plan orally to employees.
services which cannot be shut down for every
(c) Minimum elements of a fire preven- emergency alarm. Essential plant operations
tion plan. A fire prevention plan must may also include chemical or manufacturing
include: processes which must be shut down in stages
(1) A list of all major fire hazards, or steps where certain employees must be
proper handling and storage procedures present to assure that safe shut down proce-
for hazardous materials, potential igni- dures are completed.
tion sources and their control, and the The use of floor plans or workplace maps
which clearly show the emergency escape
type of fire protection equipment nec-
routes should be included in the emergency
essary to control each major hazard; action plan. Color coding will aid employees
(2) Procedures to control accumula- in determining their route assignments.
tions of flammable and combustible The employer should also develop and ex-
waste materials; plain in detail what rescue and medical first
(3) Procedures for regular mainte- aid duties are to be performed and by whom.
nance of safeguards installed on heat- All employees are to be told what actions
producing equipment to prevent the ac- they are to take in these emergency situa-
tions that the employer anticipates may
cidental ignition of combustible mate-
occur in the workplace.
rials; 2. Emergency evacuation. At the time of an
(4) The name or job title of employ- emergency, employees should know what
ees responsible for maintaining equip- type of evacuation is necessary and what
ment to prevent or control sources of their role is in carrying out the plan. In
ignition or fires; and some cases where the emergency is very
(5) The name or job title of employ- grave, total and immediate evacuation of all
ees responsible for the control of fuel employees is necessary. In other emer-
gencies, a partial evacuation of nonessential
source hazards.
employees with a delayed evacuation of oth-
(d) Employee information. An employer ers may be necessary for continued plant op-
must inform employees upon initial as- eration. In some cases, only those employees
signment to a job of the fire hazards to in the immediate area of the fire may be ex-
which they are exposed. An employer pected to evacuate or move to a safe area
must also review with each employee such as when a local application fire suppres-
those parts of the fire prevention plan sion system discharge employee alarm is
necessary for self-protection. sounded. Employees must be sure that they

know what is expected of them in all such
[67 FR 67961, Nov. 7, 2002] emergency possibilities which have been
154
planned in order to provide assurance of 4. Fire prevention housekeeping. The stand-
their safety from fire or other emergency. ard calls for the control of accumulations of
The designation of refuge or safe areas for flammable and combustible waste materials.
evacuation should be determined and identi- It is the intent of this standard to assure
fied in the plan. In a building divided into that hazardous accumulations of combus-
fire zones by fire walls, the refuge area may tible waste materials are controlled so that
still be within the same building but in a dif- a fast developing fire, rapid spread of toxic
ferent zone from where the emergency oc- smoke, or an explosion will not occur. This
curs. does not necessarily mean that each room
Exterior refuge or safe areas may include has to be swept each day. Employers and em-
parking lots, open fields or streets which are ployees should be aware of the hazardous
located away from the site of the emergency properties of materials in their workplaces,
and which provide sufficient space to accom- and the degree of hazard each poses. Cer-
modate the employees. Employees should be tainly oil soaked rags have to be treated dif-
instructed to move away from the exit dis- ferently than general paper trash in office
charge doors of the building, and to avoid areas. However, large accumulations of
congregating close to the building where waste paper or corrugated boxes, etc., can
they may hamper emergency operations. pose a significant fire hazard. Accumulations
3. Emergency action plan training. The em- of materials which can cause large fires or
ployer should assure that an adequate num- generate dense smoke that are easily ignited
ber of employees are available at all times
or may start from spontaneous combustion,
during working hours to act as evacuation
are the types of materials with which this
wardens so that employees can be swiftly
standard is concerned. Such combustible ma-
moved from the danger location to the safe
terials may be easily ignited by matches,
areas. Generally, one warden for each twenty
welder’s sparks, cigarettes and similar low
employees in the workplace should be able to
level energy ignition sources.
provide adequate guidance and instruction at
the time of a fire emergency. The employees 5. Maintenance of equipment under the fire
selected or who volunteer to serve as war- prevention plan. Certain equipment is often
dens should be trained in the complete work- installed in workplaces to control heat
place layout and the various alternative es- sources or to detect fuel leaks. An example is
cape routes from the workplace. All wardens a temperature limit switch often found on
and fellow employees should be made aware deep-fat food fryers found in restaurants.
of handicapped employees who may need There may be similar switches for high tem-
extra assistance, such as using the buddy perature dip tanks, or flame failure and
system, and of hazardous areas to be avoided flashback arrester devices on furnaces and
during emergencies. Before leaving, wardens similar heat producing equipment. If these
should check rooms and other enclosed devices are not properly maintained or if
spaces in the workplace for employees who they become inoperative, a definite fire haz-
may be trapped or otherwise unable to evac- ard exists. Again employees and supervisors
uate the area. should be aware of the specific type of con-
After the desired degree of evacuation is trol devices on equipment involved with
completed, the wardens should be able to ac- combustible materials in the workplace and
count for or otherwise verify that all em- should make sure, through periodic inspec-
ployees are in the safe areas. tion or testing, that these controls are oper-
In buildings with several places of employ- able. Manufacturers’ recommendations
ment, employers are encouraged to coordi- should be followed to assure proper mainte-
nate their plans with the other employers in nance procedures.
the building. A building-wide or standardized
[45 FR 60714, Sept. 12, 1980]
plan for the whole building is acceptable pro-
vided that the employers inform their re-
spective employees of their duties and re- Subpart F—Powered Platforms,
sponsibilities under the plan. The standard- Manlifts, and Vehicle-Mount-
ized plan need not be kept by each employer
in the multi-employer building, provided ed Work Platforms
there is an accessible location within the
building where the plan can be reviewed by AUTHORITY: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657; Sec-
affected employees. When multi-employer retary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754),
building-wide plans are not feasible, employ- 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55
ers should coordinate their plans with the FR 9033), 5–2007 (72 FR 31159), or 1–2012 (77 FR
other employers within the building to as- 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911.
sure that conflicts and confusion are avoided
during times of emergencies. In multi-story § 1910.66 Powered platforms for build-
buildings where more than one employer is ing maintenance.
on a single floor, it is essential that these

employers coordinate their plans with each (a) Scope. This section covers powered
other to avoid conflicts and confusion. platform installations permanently
155
dedicated to interior or exterior build- also be based on all other relevant

ing maintenance of a specific structure available information, including, but
or group of structures. This section not limited to, test data, equipment
does not apply to suspended scaffolds specifications and verification by a
(swinging scaffolds) used to service registered professional engineer.
buildings on a temporary basis and (3) Building owners of all installa-
covered under subpart D of this part, tions, new and existing, shall inform
nor to suspended scaffolds used for con- the employer in writing that the in-
struction work and covered under sub- stallation has been inspected, tested,
part L of 29 CFR part 1926. Building and maintained in compliance with the
maintenance includes, but is not lim- requirements of paragraphs (g) and (h)
ited to, such tasks as window cleaning, of this section and that all anchorages
caulking, metal polishing and re- meet the requirements of
glazing. § 1910.140(c)(13).
(b) Application—(1) New installations. (4) The employer shall not permit
This section applies to all permanent employees to use the installation prior
installations completed after July 23, to receiving assurance from the build-
1990. Major modifications to existing ing owner that the installation meets
installations completed after that date the requirements contained in para-
are also considered new installations graphs (c)(1) and (c)(3) of this section.
under this section. (d) Definitions.
(2) Existing installations. (i) Perma- Anemometer means an instrument for
nent installations in existence and/or measuring wind velocity.
completed before July 23, 1990 shall
Angulated roping means a suspension
comply with paragraphs (g), (h), (i), (j)
method where the upper point of sus-
and appendix C to subpart I of this
pension is inboard from the attach-
part.
ments on the suspended unit, thus
(ii) In addition, permanent installa-
causing the suspended unit to bear
tions completed after August 27, 1971,
against the face of the building.
and in existence and/or completed be-
fore July 23, 1990, shall comply with ap- Building face roller means a rotating
pendix D of this section. cylindrical member designed to ride on
(c) Assurance. (1) Building owners of the face of the building wall to prevent
new installations shall inform the em- the platform from abrading the face of
ployer before each use in writing that the building and to assist in stabilizing
the installation meets the require- the platform.
ments of paragraphs (e)(1) and (f)(1) of Building maintenance means oper-
this section and the additional design ations such as window cleaning, caulk-
criteria contained in other provisions ing, metal polishing, reglazing, and
of paragraphs (e) and (f) of this section general maintenance on building sur-
relating to: required load sustaining faces.
capabilities of platforms, building com- Cable means a conductor, or group of
ponents, hoisting and supporting equip- conductors, enclosed in a weatherproof
ment; stability factors for carriages, sheath, that may be used to supply
platforms and supporting equipment; electrical power and/or control current
maximum horizontal force for move- for equipment or to provide voice com-
ment of carriages and davits; design of munication circuits.
carriages, hoisting machines, wire rope Carriage means a wheeled vehicle
and stabilization systems; and design used for the horizontal movement and
criteria for electrical wiring and equip- support of other equipment.
ment. Certification means a written, signed
(2) Building owners shall base the in- and dated statement confirming the
formation required in paragraph (c)(1) performance of a requirement of this
of this section on the results of a field section.
test of the installation before being Combination cable means a cable hav-
placed into service and following any ing both steel structural members ca-
major alteration to an existing instal- pable of supporting the platform, and
lation, as required in paragraph (g)(1) copper or other electrical conductors

of this section. The assurance shall insulated from each other and the
156
structural members by nonconductive Interlock means a device designed to

barriers. ensure that operations or motions
Competent person means a person who, occur in proper sequence.
because of training and experience, is Intermittent stabilization means a
capable of identifying hazardous or method of platform stabilization in
dangerous conditions in powered plat- which the angulated suspension wire
form installations and of training em- rope(s) are secured to regularly spaced
ployees to identify such conditions. building anchors.
Continuous pressure means the need Lanyard means a flexible line of rope,
for constant manual actuation for a wire rope or strap which is used to se-
control to function. cure the body belt or body harness to a
Control means a mechanism used to deceleration device, lifeline or anchor-
regulate or guide the operation of the age.
equipment. Lifeline means a component con-
Davit means a device, used singly or sisting of a flexible line for connection
in pairs, for suspending a powered plat- to an anchorage at one end to hang
form from work, storage and rigging vertically (vertical lifeline), or for con-
locations on the building being serv- nection to anchorages at both ends to
iced. Unlike outriggers, a davit reacts stretch horizontally (horizontal life-
its operating load into a single roof line), and which serves as a means for
socket or carriage attachment. connecting other components of a per-
Equivalent means alternative designs, sonal fall arrest system to the anchor-
materials or methods which the em- age.
ployer can demonstrate will provide an Live load means the total static
equal or greater degree of safety for weight of workers, tools, parts, and
employees than the methods, materials supplies that the equipment is designed
or designs specified in the standard. to support.
Ground rigging means a method of Obstruction detector means a control
suspending a working platform start- that will stop the suspended or sup-
ing from a safe surface to a point of ported unit in the direction of travel if
suspension above the safe surface. an obstruction is encountered, and will
Ground rigged davit means a davit allow the unit to move only in a direc-
which cannot be used to raise a sus- tion away from the obstruction.
pended working platform above the Operating control means a mechanism
building face being serviced. regulating or guiding the operation of
Guide button means a building face equipment that ensures a specific oper-
anchor designed to engage a guide ating mode.
track mounted on a platform. Operating device means a device actu-
Guide roller means a rotating cylin- ated manually to activate a control.
drical member, operating separately or Outrigger means a device, used singly
as part of a guide assembly, designed to or in pairs, for suspending a working
provide continuous engagement be- platform from work, storage, and rig-
tween the platform and the building ging locations on the building being
guides or guideways. serviced. Unlike davits, an outrigger
Guide shoe means a device attached reacts its operating moment load as at
to the platform designed to provide a least two opposing vertical components
sliding contact between the platform acting into two or more distinct roof
and the building guides. points and/or attachments.
Hoisting machine means a device in- Platform rated load means the com-
tended to raise and lower a suspended bined weight of workers, tools, equip-
or supported unit. ment and other material which is per-
Hoist rated load means the hoist man- mitted to be carried by the working
ufacturer’s maximum allowable oper- platform at the installation, as stated
ating load. on the load rating plate.
Installation means all the equipment Poured socket means the method of
and all affected parts of a building providing wire rope terminations in
which are associated with the perform- which the ends of the rope are held in
ance of building maintenance using a tapered socket by means of poured

powered platforms. spelter or resins.
157
Primary brake means a brake designed Supported equipment means building

to be applied automatically whenever maintenance equipment that is held or
power to the prime mover is inter- moved to its working position by
rupted or discontinued. means of attachment directly to the
Prime mover means the source of me- building or extensions of the building
chanical power for a machine. being maintained.
Rated load means the manufacturer’s Suspended equipment means building
recommended maximum load. maintenance equipment that is sus-
Rated strength means the strength of pended and raised or lowered to its
wire rope, as designated by its manu- working position by means of ropes or
facturer or vendor, based on standard combination cables attached to some
testing procedures or acceptable engi- anchorage above the equipment.
neering design practices. Suspended scaffold (swinging scaffold)
Rated working load means the com- means a scaffold supported on wire or
bined static weight of men, materials, other ropes, used for work on, or for
and suspended or supported equipment. providing access to, vertical sides of
Registered professional engineer means structures on a temporary basis. Such
a person who has been duly and cur- scaffold is not designed for use on a
rently registered and licensed by an au- specific structure or group of struc-
thority within the United States or its tures.
territories to practice the profession of Tail line means the nonsupporting
engineering. end of the wire rope used to suspend
Roof powered platform means a work- the platform.
ing platform where the hoist(s) used to Tie-in guides means the portion of a
raise or lower the platform is located building that provides continuous posi-
on the roof. tive engagement between the building
Roof rigged davit means a davit used and a suspended or supported unit dur-
to raise the suspended working plating its vertical travel on the face of the
form above the building face being building.
serviced. This type of davit can also be Traction hoist means a type of hoist-
used to raise a suspended working plating machine that does not accumulate
form which has been ground-rigged. the suspension wire rope on the hoist-
Rope means the equipment used to ing drum or sheave, and is designed to
suspend a component of an equipment raise and lower a suspended load by the
installation, i.e., wire rope. application of friction forces between
Safe surface means a horizontal sur- the suspension wire rope and the drum
face intended to be occupied by per- or sheave.
sonnel, which is so protected by a fall Transportable outriggers means out-
protection system that it can be rea- riggers designed to be moved from one
sonably assured that said occupants work location to another.
will be protected against falls. Trolley carriage means a carriage sus-
Secondary brake means a brake depended from an overhead track struc-
signed to arrest the descent of the sus- ture.
pended or supported equipment in the Verified means accepted by design,
event of an overspeed condition. evaluation, or inspection by a reg-
Self powered platform means a work- istered professional engineer.
ing platform where the hoist(s) used to Weatherproof means so constructed
raise or lower the platform is mounted that exposure to adverse weather con-
on the platform. ditions will not affect or interfere with
Speed reducer means a positive type the proper use or functions of the
speed reducing machine. equipment or component.
Stability factor means the ratio of the Winding drum hoist means a type of
stabilizing moment to the overturning hoisting machine that accumulates the
moment. suspension wire rope on the hoisting
Stabilizer tie means a flexible line drum.
connecting the building anchor and the Working platform means suspended or
suspension wire rope supporting the supported equipment intended to pro-

platform. vide access to the face of a building and
158
manned by persons engaged in building (A) Intermittent stabilization sys-

maintenance. tem. The system shall keep the equip-
Wrap means one complete turn of the ment in continuous contact with the
suspension wire rope around the sur- building facade, and shall prevent sud-
face of a hoist drum. den horizontal movement of the plat-
(e) Powered platform installations—Af- form. The system may be used together
fected parts of buildings—(1) General re- with continuous positive building guide
quirements. The following requirements systems using tie-in guides on the
apply to affected parts of buildings same building, provided the require-
which utilize working platforms for ments for each system are met.
building maintenance. (1) The maximum vertical interval
(i) Structural supports, tie-downs, between building anchors shall be three
tie-in guides, anchoring devices and floors or 50 feet (15.3 m), whichever is
any affected parts of the building in- less.
cluded in the installation shall be de- (2) Building anchors shall be located
signed by or under the direction of a vertically so that attachment of the
registered professional engineer experi- stabilizer ties will not cause the plat-
enced in such design; form suspension ropes to angulate the
(ii) Exterior installations shall be ca- platform horizontally across the face of
pable of withstanding prevailing cli- the building. The anchors shall be posi-
matic conditions; tioned horizontally on the building
(iii) The building installation shall face so as to be symmetrical about the
provide safe access to, and egress from, platform suspension ropes.
the equipment and sufficient space to (3) Building anchors shall be easily
conduct necessary maintenance of the visible to employees and shall allow a
equipment; stabilizer tie attachment for each of
(iv) The affected parts of the building the platform suspension ropes at each
shall have the capability of sustaining vertical interval. If more than two sus-
all the loads imposed by the equip- pension ropes are used on a platform,
ment; and, only the two building-side suspension
(v) The affected parts of the building ropes at the platform ends shall require
shall be designed so as to allow the a stabilizer attachment.
equipment to be used without exposing (4) Building anchors which extend be-
employees to a hazardous condition. yond the face of the building shall be
(2) Tie-in guides. (i) The exterior of
free of sharp edges or points. Where ca-
each building shall be provided with
bles, suspension wire ropes and lifelines
tie-in guides unless the conditions in
may be in contact with the building
paragraph (e)(2)(ii) or (e)(2)(iii) of this
face, external building anchors shall
section are met.
not interfere with their handling or op-
NOTE: See figure 1 in appendix B of this eration.
section for a description of a typical contin- (5) The intermittent stabilization
uous stabilization system utilizing tie-in system building anchors and compo-
guides.
nents shall be capable of sustaining
(ii) If angulated roping is employed, without failure at least four times the
tie-in guides required in paragraph maximum anticipated load applied or
(e)(2)(i) of this section may be elimi- transmitted to the components and an-
nated for not more than 75 feet (22.9 m) chors. The minimum design wind load
of the uppermost elevation of the for each anchor shall be 300 (1334 n)
building, if infeasible due to exterior pounds, if two anchors share the wind
building design, provided an angulation load.
force of at least 10 pounds (44.4 n) is (6) The building anchors and sta-
maintained under all conditions of bilizer ties shall be capable of sus-
loading. taining anticipated horizontal and
(iii) Tie-in guides required in para- vertical loads from winds specified for
graph (e)(2)(i) of this section may be roof storage design which may act on
eliminated if one of the guide systems the platform and wire ropes if the plat-
in paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(A), (e)(2)(iii)(B) form is stranded on a building face. If
or (e)(2)(iii)(C) of this section is pro- the building anchors have different

vided, or an equivalent. spacing than the suspension wire rope
159
or if the building requires different sus- platform maintains no less than 10

pension spacings on one platform, one pounds (44.4 n) angulation force on the
building anchor and stabilizer tie shall building facade.
be capable of sustaining the wind loads. (iv) Tie-in guides for building inte-
NOTE: See figure 2 in appendix B of this
riors (atriums) may be eliminated
section for a description of a typical inter- when a registered professional engineer
mittent stabilization system. determines that an alternative sta-
bilization system, including systems in
(B) Button guide stabilization sys- paragraphs (e)(2)(iii) (A), (B) and (C), or
tem. a platform tie-off at each work station
(1) Guide buttons shall be coordi- will provide equivalent safety.
nated with platform mounted equip- (3) Roof guarding. (i) Employees
ment of paragraph (f)(5)(vi) of this sec- working on roofs while performing
tion. building maintenance shall be pro-
(2) Guide buttons shall be located tected by a perimeter guarding system
horizontally on the building face so as which meets the requirements of para-
to allow engagement of each of the graph (c)(1) of § 1910.23 of this part.
guide tracks mounted on the platform. (ii) The perimeter guard shall not be
(3) Guide buttons shall be located in more than six inches (152 mm) inboard
vertical rows on the building face for of the inside face of a barrier, i.e. the
proper engagement of the guide tracks parapet wall, or roof edge curb of the
mounted on the platform. building being serviced; however, the
(4) Two guide buttons shall engage perimeter guard location shall not ex-
each guide track at all times except for ceed an 18 inch (457 mm) setback from
the initial engagement. the exterior building face.
(5) Guide buttons which extend be- (4) Equipment stops. Operational areas
yond the face of the building shall be for trackless type equipment shall be
free of sharp edges or points. Where ca- provided with structural stops, such as
bles, ropes and lifelines may be in con- curbs, to prevent equipment from trav-
tact with the building face, guide but- eling outside its intended travel areas
tons shall not interfere with their han- and to prevent a crushing or shearing
dling or operation. hazard.
(6) Guide buttons, connections and (5) Maintenance access. Means shall be
seals shall be capable of sustaining provided to traverse all carriages and
without damage at least the weight of their suspended equipment to a safe
the platform, or provision shall be area for maintenance and storage.
made in the guide tracks or guide (6) Elevated track. (i) An elevated
track connectors to prevent the plat- track system which is located four feet
form and its attachments from trans- (1.2 m) or more above a safe surface,
mitting the weight of the platform to and traversed by carriage supported
the guide buttons, connections and equipment, shall be provided with a
seals. In either case, the minimum de- walkway and guardrail system; or
sign load shall be 300 pounds (1334 n) (ii) The working platform shall be ca-
per building anchor. pable of being lowered, as part of its
NOTE: See paragraph (f)(5)(vi) of this sec- normal operation, to the lower safe
tion for relevant equipment provisions. surface for access and egress of the per-
NOTE: See figure 3 in appendix B of this sonnel and shall be provided with a safe
section for a description of a typical button means of access and egress to the lower
guide stabilization system.
safe surface.
(C) System utilizing angulated roping (7) Tie-down anchors. Imbedded tie-
and building face rollers. The system down anchors, fasteners, and affected
shall keep the equipment in continuous structures shall be resistant to corro-
contact with the building facade, and sion.
shall prevent sudden horizontal move- (8) Cable stabilization. (i) Hanging life-
ment of the platform. This system is lines and all cables not in tension shall
acceptable only where the suspended be stabilized at each 200 foot (61 m) in-
portion of the equipment in use does terval of vertical travel of the working
not exceed 130 feet (39.6 m) above a safe platform beyond an initial 200 foot (61
surface or ground level, and where the m) distance.
160
(ii) Hanging cables, other than sus- (iv) The power circuit shall be pro-
pended wire ropes, which are in con- vided with a disconnect switch that
stant tension shall be stabilized when can be locked in the ‘‘OFF’’ and ‘‘ON’’
the vertical travel exceeds an initial positions. The switch shall be conven-
600 foot (183 m) distance, and at further iently located with respect to the pri-
intervals of 600 feet (183 m) or less. mary operating area of the equipment
(9) Emergency planning. A written to allow the operators of the equip-
emergency action plan shall be devel- ment access to the switch;
oped and implemented for each kind of (v) The disconnect switch for the
working platform operation. This plan power circuit shall be locked in the
shall explain the emergency procedures ‘‘ON’’ position when the equipment is
which are to be followed in the event of in use; and
a power failure, equipment failure or
(vi) An effective two-way voice com-
other emergencies which may be en-
munication system shall be provided
countered. The plan shall also explain
that employees inform themselves between the equipment operators and
about the building emergency escape persons stationed within the building
routes, procedures and alarm systems being serviced. The communications
before operating a platform. Upon ini- facility shall be operable and shall be
tial assignment and whenever the plan manned at all times by persons sta-
is changed the employer shall review tioned within the building whenever
with each employee those parts of the the platform is being used.
plan which the employee must know to (f) Powered platform installations—
protect himself or herself in the event Equipment—(1) General requirements.
of an emergency. The following requirements apply to
(10) Building maintenance. Repairs or equipment which are part of a powered
major maintenance of those building platform installation, such as plat-
portions that provide primary support forms, stabilizing components, car-
for the suspended equipment shall not riages, outriggers, davits, hoisting ma-
affect the capability of the building to chines, wire ropes and electrical com-
meet the requirements of this stand- ponents.
ard. (i) Equipment installations shall be
(11) Electrical requirements. The fol- designed by or under the direction of a
lowing electrical requirements apply to registered professional engineer experi-
buildings which utilize working plat- enced in such design;
forms for building maintenance. (ii) The design shall provide for a
(i) General building electrical instal- minimum live load of 250 pounds (113.6
lations shall comply with §§ 1910.302 kg) for each occupant of a suspended or
through 1910.308 of this part, unless supported platform;
otherwise specified in this section; (iii) Equipment that is exposed to
(ii) Building electrical wiring shall be wind when not in service shall be de-
of such capacity that when full load is signed to withstand forces generated
applied to the equipment power circuit
by winds of at least 100 miles per hour
not more than a five percent drop from
(44.7 m/s) at 30 feet (9.2 m) above grade;
building service-vault voltage shall
and
occur at any power circuit outlet used
by equipment regulated by this sec- (iv) Equipment that is exposed to
tion; wind when in service shall be designed
(iii) The equipment power circuit to withstand forces generated by winds
shall be an independent electrical cir- of at least 50 miles per hour (22.4 m/s)
cuit that shall remain separate from for all elevations.
all other equipment within or on the (2) Construction requirements. Bolted
building, other than power circuits connections shall be self-locking or
used for hand tools that will be used in shall otherwise be secured to prevent
conjunction with the equipment. If the loss of the connections by vibration.
building is provided with an emergency (3) Suspension methods. Elevated
power system, the equipment power building maintenance equipment shall
circuit may also be connected to this be suspended by a carriage, outriggers,

system; davits or an equivalent method.
161
(i) Carriages. Carriages used for sus- ropes suspending the working platform,
pension of elevated building mainte- and this calculated value shall include
nance equipment shall comply with the the effect of one and one-half times the
following: stall capacity of the hoist motor. All
(A) The horizontal movement of a parts of the installation shall be capa-
carriage shall be controlled so as to en- ble of withstanding without damage to
sure its safe movement and allow accu- any part of the installation the forces
rate positioning of the platform for resulting from the stall load of the
vertical travel or storage; hoist and one half the wind load.
(B) Powered carriages shall not ex- (3) Roof carriages which rely on hav-
ceed a traversing speed of 50 feet per ing tie-down devices secured to the
minute (0.3 m/s); building to develop the required sta-
(C) The initiation of a traversing
bility against overturning shall be pro-
movement for a manually propelled
vided with an interlock which will pre-
carriage on a smooth level surface
vent vertical platform movement un-
shall not require a person to exert a
less the tie-down is engaged;
horizontal force greater than 40 pounds
(444.8 n); (H) An automatically applied braking
(D) Structural stops and curbs shall or locking system, or equivalent, shall
be provided to prevent the traversing be provided that will prevent uninten-
of the carriage beyond its designed lim- tional traversing of power traversed or
its of travel; power assisted carriages;
(E) Traversing controls for a powered (I) A manual or automatic braking or
carriage shall be of a continuous pres- locking system or equivalent, shall be
sure weatherproof type. Multiple con- provided that will prevent uninten-
trols when provided shall be arranged tional traversing of manually propelled
to permit operation from only one con- carriages;
trol station at a time. An emergency (J) A means to lock out the power
stop device shall be provided on each supply for the carriage shall be pro-
end of a powered carriage for inter- vided;
rupting power to the carriage drive mo- (K) Safe access to and egress from
tors; the carriage shall be provided from a
(F) The operating controls(s) shall be safe surface. If the carriage traverses
so connected that in the case of sus- an elevated area, any operating area on
pended equipment, traversing of a car- the carriage shall be protected by a
riage is not possible until the sus- guardrail system in compliance with
pended portion of the equipment is lo- the provisions of paragraph (f)(5)(i)(F)
cated at its uppermost designed posi- of this section. Any access gate shall
tion for traversing; and is free of con- be self-closing and self-latching, or pro-
tact with the face of the building or vided with an interlock;
building guides. In addition, all protec-
(L) Each carriage work station posi-
tive devices and interlocks are to be in
tion shall be identified by location
the proper position to allow traversing
markings and/or position indicators;
of the carriage;
and
(G) Stability for underfoot supported
carriages shall be obtained by gravity, (M) The motors shall stall if the load
by an attachment to a structural sup- on the hoist motors is at any time in
port, or by a combination of gravity excess of three times that necessary for
and a structural support. The use of lifting the working platform with its
flowing counterweights to achieve sta- rated load.
bility is prohibited. (ii) Transportable outriggers. (A)
(1) The stability factor against over- Transportable outriggers may be used
turning shall not be less than two for as a method of suspension for ground
horizontal traversing of the carriage, rigged working platforms where the
including the effects of impact and point of suspension does not exceed 300
wind. feet (91.5 m) above a safe surface. Tie-
(2) The carriages and their anchor- in guide system(s) shall be provided
ages shall be capable of resisting acci- which meet the requirements of para-
dental over-tensioning of the wire graph (e)(2) of this section.
162
(B) Transportable outriggers shall be vided which meet the requirements of

used only with self-powered, ground paragraph (e)(2) of this section;
rigged working platforms. (2) Access and egress to and from the
(C) Each transportable outrigger working platform shall only be from a
shall be secured with a tie-down to a safe surface below the point of suspen-
verified anchorage on the building dur- sion.
ing the entire period of its use. The an- (D) A rotating davit shall not require
chorage shall be designed to have a sta- a horizontal force in excess of 40
bility factor of not less than four pounds (177.9 n) per person to initiate a
against overturning or upsetting of the rotating movement.
outrigger. (E) The following requirements shall
(D) Access to and egress from the apply to transportable davits:
working platform shall be from and to (1) A davit or part of a davit weighing
a safe surface below the point of sus- more than 80 pounds (36 kg) shall be
pension. provided with a means for its trans-
(E) Each transportable outrigger port, which shall keep the center of
shall be designed for lateral stability gravity of the davit at or below 36
to prevent roll-over in the event an ac- inches (914 mm) above the safe surface
cidental lateral load is applied to the during transport;
outrigger. The accidental lateral load (2) A davit shall be provided with a
to be considered in this design shall be pivoting socket or with a base that will
not less than 70 percent of the rated allow the insertion or removal of a
load of the hoist. davit at a position of not more than 35
(F) Each transportable outrigger degrees above the horizontal, with the
shall be designed to support an ulti- complete davit inboard of the building
mate load of not less than four times face being serviced; and
the rated load of the hoist. (3) Means shall be provided to lock
(G) Each transportable outrigger the davit to its socket or base before it
shall be so located that the suspension is used to suspend the platform.
wire ropes for two point suspended (4) Hoisting machines. (i) Raising and
working platforms are hung parallel. lowering of suspended or supported
(H) A transportable outrigger shall equipment shall be performed only by a
be tied-back to a verified anchorage on hoisting machine.
the building with a rope equivalent in (ii) Each hoisting machine shall be
strength to the suspension rope. capable of arresting any overspeed de-
(I) The tie-back rope shall be in- scent of the load.
stalled parallel to the centerline of the (iii) Each hoisting machine shall be
outrigger. powered only by air, electric or hy-
(iii) Davits. (A) Every davit installa- draulic sources.
tion, fixed or transportable, rotatable (iv) Flammable liquids shall not be
or non-rotatable shall be designed and carried on the working platform.
installed to insure that it has a sta- (v) Each hoisting machine shall be
bility factor against overturning of not capable of raising or lowering 125 per-
less than four. cent of the rated load of the hoist.
(B) The following requirements apply (vi) Moving parts of a hoisting ma-
to roof rigged davit systems: chine shall be enclosed or guarded in
(1) Access to and egress from the compliance with paragraphs (a)(1) and
working platform shall be from a safe (2) of § 1910.212 of this part.
surface. Access or egress shall not re- (vii) Winding drums, traction drums
quire persons to climb over a building’s and sheaves and directional sheaves
parapet or guard railing; and used in conjunction with hoisting ma-
(2) The working platform shall be chines shall be compatible with, and
provided with wheels, casters or a car- sized for, the wire rope used.
riage for traversing horizontally. (viii) Each winding drum shall be
(C) The following requirements apply provided with a positive means of at-
to ground rigged davit systems: taching the wire rope to the drum. The
(1) The point of suspension shall not attachment shall be capable of devel-
exceed 300 feet (91.5 m) above a safe oping at least four times the rated load
surface. Guide system(s) shall be proof the hoist.
163
(ix) Each hoisting machine shall be (F) Each working platform of a sus-
provided with a primary brake and at pended unit shall be secured to the
least one independent secondary brake, building facade by one or more of the
each capable of stopping and holding following methods, or by an equivalent
not less than 125 percent of the lifting method:
capacity of the hoist. (1) Continuous engagement to build-
(A) The primary brake shall be di- ing anchors as provided in paragraph
rectly connected to the drive train of (e)(2)(i) of this section;
the hoisting machine, and shall not be (2) Intermittent engagement to build-
connected through belts, chains, ing anchors as provided in paragraph
clutches, or set screw type devices. The (e)(2)(iii)(A) of this section;
brake shall automatically set when (3) Button guide engagement as pro-
power to the prime mover is inter- vided in paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(B) of this
rupted. section; or
(B)(1) The secondary brake shall be (4) Angulated roping and building
an automatic emergency type of brake face rollers as provided in paragraph
that, if actuated during each stopping (e)(2)(iii)(C) of this section.
cycle, shall not engage before the hoist (G) Each working platform of a sus-
is stopped by the primary brake. pended unit shall be provided with a
(2) When a secondary brake is actu- guardrail system on all sides which
ated, it shall stop and hold the plat- shall meet the following requirements:
form within a vertical distance of 24
(1) The system shall consist of a top
inches (609.6 mm).
guardrail, midrail, and a toeboard;
(x) Any component of a hoisting ma-
chine which requires lubrication for its (2) The top guardrail shall not be less
protection and proper functioning shall than 36 inches (914 mm) high and shall
be provided with a means for that lu- be able to withstand at least a 100-
brication to be applied. pound (444 n) force in any downward or
(5) Suspended equipment—(i) General outward direction;
requirements. (A) Each suspended unit (3) The midrail shall be able to with-
component, except suspension ropes stand at least a 75-pound (333 n) force
and guardrail systems, shall be capable in any downward or outward direction;
of supporting, without failure, at least and
four times the maximum intended live (4) The areas between the guardrail
load applied or transmitted to that and toeboard on the ends and outboard
component. side, and the area between the midrail
(B) Each suspended unit component and toeboard on the inboard side, shall
shall be constructed of materials that be closed with a material that is capa-
will withstand anticipated weather ble of withstanding a load of 100 pounds
conditions. (45.4 KG.) applied horizontally over any
(C) Each suspended unit shall be pro- area of one square foot (.09 m2). The
vided with a load rating plate, con- material shall have all openings small
spicuously located, stating the unit enough to reject passage of life lines
weight and rated load of the suspended and potential falling objects which
unit. may be hazardous to persons below.
(D) When the suspension points on a (5) Toeboards shall be capable of
suspended unit are not at the unit withstanding, without failure, a force
ends, the unit shall be capable of re- of at least 50 pounds (222 n) applied in
maining continuously stable under all any downward or horizontal direction
conditions of use and position of the at any point along the toeboard.
live load, and shall maintain at least a (6) Toeboards shall be three and one-
1.5 to 1 stability factor against unit half inches (9 cm) minimum in length
upset. from their top edge to the level of the
(E) Guide rollers, guide shoes or platform floor.
building face rollers shall be provided, (7) Toeboards shall be securely fas-
and shall compensate for variations in tened in place at the outermost edge of
building dimensions and for minor hor- the platform and have no more than
izontal out-of-level variations of each one-half inch (1.3 cm) clearance above
suspended unit. the platform floor.
164
(8) Toeboards shall be solid or with directly on a safe surface, shall be pro-
an opening not over one inch (2.5 cm) vided by stairs, ladders, platforms and
in the greatest dimension. runways conforming to the provisions
(ii) Two and four-point suspended of subpart D of this part. Access gates
working platforms. (A) The working shall be self-closing and self-latching.
platform shall be not less than 24 (K) Means of access to or egress from
inches (610 mm) wide and shall be pro- a working platform which is 48 inches
vided with a minimum of a 12 inch (305 (1.2 m) or more above a safe surface
mm) wide passage at or past any ob- shall be provided with a guardrail sys-
struction on the platform. tem or ladder handrails that conform
(B) The flooring shall be of a slip-re- to the provisions of subpart D of this
sistant type and shall contain no open- part.
ing that would allow the passage of life (L) The platform shall be provided
lines, cables and other potential falling with a secondary wire rope suspension
objects. If a larger opening is provided, system if the platform contains over-
it shall be protected by placing a mate- head structures which restrict the
rial under the opening which shall pre- emergency egress of employees. A hori-
vent the passage of life lines, cables zontal lifeline or a direct connection
and potential falling objects. anchorage shall be provided as part of
(C) The working platfrom shall be a personal fall arrest system that
provided with a means of suspension meets the requirements of subpart I of
that will restrict the platform’s in- this part for each employee on such a
board to outboard roll about its longi- platform.
tudinal axis to a maximum of 15 de- (M) A vertical lifeline shall be pro-
grees from a horizontal plane when vided as part of a personal fall arrest
moving the live load from the inboard system that meets the requirements of
to the outboard side of the platform. subpart I of this part for each employee
(D) Any cable suspended from above on a working platform suspended by
the platform shall be provided with a two or more wire ropes, if the failure of
means for storage to prevent accumu- one wire rope or suspension attach-
lation of the cable on the floor of the ment will cause the platform to upset.
platform. If a secondary wire rope suspension is
(E) All operating controls for the used, vertical lifelines are not required
vertical travel of the platform shall be for the personal fall arrest system, pro-
of the continuous-pressure type, and vided that each employee is attached
shall be located on the platform. to a horizontal lifeline anchored to the
(F) Each operating station of every platform.
working platform shall be provided (N) An emergency electric operating
with a means of interrupting the power device shall be provided on roof pow-
supply to all hoist motors to stop any ered platforms near the hoisting ma-
further powered ascent or descent of chine for use in the event of failure of
the platform. the normal operating device located on
(G) The maximum rated speed of the the working platform, or failure of the
platform shall not exceed 50 feet per cable connected to the platform. The
minute (0.3 ms) with single speed emergency electric operating device
hoists, nor 75 feet per minute (0.4 ms) shall be mounted in a secured compart-
with multi-speed hoists. ment, and the compartment shall be la-
(H) Provisions shall be made for se- beled with instructions for use. A
curing all tools, water tanks, and other means for opening the compartment
accessories to prevent their movement shall be mounted in a break-glass
or accumulation on the floor of the receptable located near the emergency
platform. electric operating device or in an
(I) Portable fire extinguishers con- equivalent secure and accessible loca-
forming to the provisions of §§ 1910.155 tion.
and 1910.157 of this part shall be pro- (iii) Single point suspended working
vided and securely attached on all platforms. (A) The requirements of
working platforms. paragraphs (f)(5)(ii) (A) through (K) of
(J) Access to and egress from a work- this section shall also apply to a single
ing platfrom, except for those that land point working platform.
165
(B) Each single point suspended (H) The platform-mounted equipment

working platform shall be provided and its suspension wire ropes shall not
with a secondary wire rope suspension be physically damaged by the loads
system which will prevent the working from the stabilizer tie or its building
platform from falling should there be a anchor. The platform, platform mount-
failure of the primary means of sup- ed equipment and wire ropes shall be
port, or if the platform contains over- able to withstand a load that is at least
head structures which restrict the twice the ultimate strength of the sta-
egress of the employees. A horizontal bilizer tie.
life line or a direct connection anchor- NOTE: See figure II in appendix B of this
age shall be provided as part of a per- section for a description of a typical inter-
sonal fall arrest system that meets the mittent stabilization system.
requirements of subpart I of this part (vi) Button-guide stabilized platforms.
for each employee on the platform. (A) The platform shall comply with
(iv) Ground-rigged working platforms. paragraphs (f)(5)(ii) (A) through (M) of
(A) Groundrigged working platforms this section.
shall comply with all the requirements (B) Each guide track on the platform
of paragraphs (f)(5)(ii) (A) through (M) shall engage a minimum of two guide
of this section. buttons during any vertical travel of
(B) After each day’s use, the power the platform following the initial but-
supply within the building shall be dis- ton engagement.
connected from a ground-rigged work- (C) Each guide track on a platform
ing platform, and the platform shall be that is part of a roof rigged system
either disengaged from its suspension shall be provided with a storage posi-
points or secured and stored at grade. tion on the platform.
(v) Intermittently stabilized platforms. (D) Each guide track on the platform
(A) The platform shall comply with shall be sufficiently maneuverable by
paragraphs (F)(5)(ii) (A) through (M) of platform occupants to permit easy en-
this section. gagement of the guide buttons, and
(B) Each stabilizer tie shall be easy movement into and out of its stor-
equipped with a ‘‘quick connect-quick age position on the platform.
disconnect’’ device which cannot be (E) Two guide tracks shall be mount-
accidently disengaged, for attachment ed on the platform and shall provide
to the building anchor, and shall be re- continuous contact with the building
sistant to adverse environmental con- face.
ditions. (F) The load carrying components of
(C) The platform shall be provided the button guide stabilization system
with a stopping device that will inter- which transmit the load into the plat-
rupt the hoist power supply in the form shall be capable of supporting the
event the platform contacts a sta- weight of the platform, or provision
bilizer tie during its ascent. shall be made in the guide track con-
(D) Building face rollers shall not be nectors or platform attachments to
placed at the anchor setting if exterior prevent the weight of the platform
anchors are used on the building face. from being transmitted to the platform
(E) Stabilizer ties used on intermit- attachments.
tently stabilized platforms shall allow NOTE: See figure III in appendix B of this
for the specific attachment length section for a description of a typical button
needed to effect the predetermined an- guide stabilization system.
gulation of the suspended wire rope. (6) Supported equipment. (i) Supported
The specific attachment length shall equipment shall maintain a vertical
be maintained at all building anchor position in respect to the face of the
locations. building by means other than friction.
(F) The platform shall be in contin- (ii) Cog wheels or equivalent means
uous contact with the face of the build- shall be incorporated to provide climb-
ing during ascent and descent. ing traction between the supported
(G) The attachment and removal of equipment and the building guides. Ad-
stabilizer ties shall not require the hor- ditional guide wheels or shoes shall be
izontal movement of the platform. incorporated as may be necessary to
166
ensure that the drive wheels are con- (B) Construction classification;
tinuously held in positive engagement (C) Whether non-preformed or
with the building guides. preformed;
(iii) Launch guide mullions indexed (D) The grade of material;
to the building guides and retained in (E) The manufacturer’s rated
alignment with the building guides strength;
shall be used to align drive wheels en- (F) The manufacturer’s name;
tering the building guides. (G) The month and year the ropes
(iv) Manned platforms used on sup- were installed; and
ported equipment shall comply with (H) The name of the person or com-
the requirements of paragraphs pany which installed the ropes.
(f)(5)(ii)(A), (f)(5)(ii)(B), and (f)(5)(ii) (D) (vii) A new tag shall be installed at
through (K) of this section covering each rope renewal.
suspended equipment. (viii) The original tag shall be
(7) Suspension wire ropes and rope con- stamped with the date of the
nections. (i) Each specific installation resocketing, or the original tag shall
shall use suspension wire ropes or com- be retained and a supplemental tag
bination cable and connections meet- shall be provided when ropes are
ing the specification recommended by resocketed. The supplemental tag shall
the manufacturer of the hoisting ma- show the date of resocketing and the
chine used. Connections shall be capa- name of the person or company that
ble of developing at least 80 percent of resocketed the rope.
the rated breaking strength of the wire (ix) Winding drum type hoists shall
rope. contain at least three wraps of the sus-
(ii) Each suspension rope shall have a pension wire rope on the drum when
‘‘Design Factor’’ of at least 10. The the suspended unit has reached the
‘‘Design Factor’’ is the ratio of the lowest possible point of its vertical
rated strength of the suspension wire travel.
rope to the rated working load, and (x) Traction drum and sheave type
shall be calculated using the following hoists shall be provided with a wire
formula: rope of sufficient length to reach the
lowest possible point of vertical travel
of the suspended unit, and an addi-
tional length of the wire rope of at
least four feet (1.2 m).
Where: (xi) The lengthening or repairing of
F = Design factor suspension wire ropes is prohibited.
S = Manufacturer’s rated strength of one (xii) Babbitted fastenings for suspen-
suspension rope sion wire rope are prohibited.
N = Number of suspension ropes under load (8) Control circuits, power circuits and
W = Rated working load on all ropes at any their components. (i) Electrical wiring
point of travel and equipment shall comply with sub-
(iii) Suspension wire rope grade shall part S of this part, except as otherwise
be at least improved plow steel or required by this section.
equivalent. (ii) Electrical runway conductor sys-
(iv) Suspension wire ropes shall be tems shall be of a type designed for use
sized to conform with the required de- in exterior locations, and shall be lo-
sign factor, but shall not be less than cated so that they do not come into
5⁄16 inch (7.94 mm) in diameter. contact with accumulated snow or
(v) No more than one reverse bend in water.
six wire rope lays shall be permitted. (iii) Cables shall be protected against
(vi) A corrosion-resistant tag shall be damage resulting from overtensioning
securely attached to one of the wire or from other causes.
rope fastenings when a suspension wire (iv) Devices shall be included in the
rope is to be used at a specific location control system for the equipment
and will remain in that location. This which will provide protection against
tag shall bear the following wire rope electrical overloads, three phase rever-
data: sal and phase failure. The control sys-

(A) The diameter (inches and/or mm); tem shall have a separate method,
167
ER25SE06.005</MATH>
independent of the direction control rupt the equipment travel in the

circuit, for breaking the power circuit ‘‘down’’ direction.
in case of an emergency or malfunc- (g) Inspection and tests—(1) Installa-
tion. tions and alterations. All completed
(v) Suspended or supported equip- building maintenance equipment in-
ment shall have a control system stallations shall be inspected and test-
which will require the operator of the ed in the field before being placed in
equipment to follow predetermined initial service to determine that all
procedures. parts of the installation conform to ap-
(vi) The following requirements shall plicable requirements of this standard,
apply to electrical protection devices: and that all safety and operating
(A) On installations where the car- equipment is functioning as required. A
riage does not have a stability factor of similar inspection and test shall be
at least four against overturning, elec- made following any major alteration to
trical contact(s) shall be provided and an existing installation. No hoist in an
so connected that the operating devices installation shall be subjected to a load
for the suspended or supported equip- in excess of 125 percent of its rated
ment shall be operative only when the load.
carriage is located and mechanically (2) Periodic inspections and tests. (i)
retained at an established operating Related building supporting structures
shall undergo periodic inspection by a
point.
competent person at intervals not ex-
(B) Overload protection shall be pro-
ceeding 12 months.
vided in the hoisting or suspension sys-
(ii) All parts of the equipment includ-
tem to protect against the equipment ing control systems shall be inspected,
operating in the ‘‘up’’ direction with a and, where necessary, tested by a com-
load in excess of 125 percent of the petent person at intervals specified by
rated load of the platform; and the manufacturer/supplier, but not to
(C) An automatic detector shall be exceed 12 months, to determine that
provided for each suspension point that they are in safe operating condition.
will interrupt power to all hoisting mo- Parts subject to wear, such as wire
tors for travel in the ‘‘down’’ direction, ropes, bearings, gears, and governors
and apply the primary brakes if any shall be inspected and/or tested to de-
suspension wire rope becomes slack. A termine that they have not worn to
continuous-pressure rigging-bypass such an extent as to affect the safe op-
switch designed for use during rigging eration of the installation.
is permitted. This switch shall only be (iii) The building owner shall keep a
used during rigging. certification record of each inspection
(vii) Upper and lower directional and test required under paragraphs
switches designed to prevent the travel (g)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section. The cer-
of suspended units beyond safe upward tification record shall include the date
and downward levels shall be provided. of the inspection, the signature of the
(viii) Emergency stop switches shall person who performed the inspection,
be provided on remote controlled, roof- and the number, or other identifier, of
powered manned platforms adjacent to the building support structure and
each control station on the platform. equipment which was inspected. This
(ix) Cables which are in constant ten- certification record shall be kept read-
sion shall have overload devices which ily available for review by the Assist-
will prevent the tension in the cable ant Secretary of Labor or the Assistant
from interfering with the load limiting Secretary’s representative and by the
device required in paragraph employer.
(f)(8)(vi)(B) of this section, or with the (iv) Working platforms and their
platform roll limiting device required components shall be inspected by the
in paragraph (f)(5)(ii)(C) of this section. employer for visible defects before
The setting of these devices shall be co- every use and after each occurrence
ordinated with other overload settings which could affect the platform’s struc-
at the time of design of the system, tural integrity.
and shall be clearly indicated on or (3) Maintenance inspections and tests.

near the device. The device shall inter- (i) A maintenance inspection and,
168
where necessary, a test shall be made (ii) Suspension wire rope shall be in-
of each platform installation every 30 spected by a competent person for visi-
days, or where the work cycle is less ble defects and gross damage to the
than 30 days such inspection and/or rope before every use and after each oc-
test shall be made prior to each work currence which might affect the wire
cycle. This inspection and test shall rope’s integrity.
follow procedures recommended by the (iii) A thorough inspection of suspen-
manufacturer, and shall be made by a sion wire ropes in service shall be made
competent person. once a month. Suspension wire ropes
(ii) The building owner shall keep a that have been inactive for 30 days or
certification record of each inspection longer shall have a thorough inspection
and test performed under paragraph before they are placed into service.
(g)(3)(i) of this section. The certifi- These thorough inspections of suspen-
cation record shall include the date of sion wire ropes shall be performed by a
the inspection and test, the signature competent person.
of the person who performed the in- (iv) The need for replacement of a
spection and/or test, and an identifier suspension wire rope shall be deter-
for the platform installation which was mined by inspection and shall be based
inspected. The certification record on the condition of the wire rope. Any
shall be kept readily available for re- of the following conditions or combina-
view by the Assistant Secretary of tion of conditions will be cause for re-
Labor or the Assistant Secretary’s rep- moval of the wire rope:
resentative and by the employer. (A) Broken wires exceeding three
(4) Special inspection of governors and wires in one strand or six wires in one
secondary brakes. (i) Governors and sec- rope lay;
ondary brakes shall be inspected and (B) Distortion of rope structure such
tested at intervals specified by the as would result from crushing or
manufacturer/supplier but not to ex- kinking;
ceed every 12 months. (C) Evidence of heat damage;
(ii) The results of the inspection and (D) Evidence of rope deterioration
test shall confirm that the initiating from corrosion;
device for the secondary braking sys- (E) A broken wire within 18 inches
tem operates at the proper overspeed. (460.8 mm) of the end attachments;
(iii) The results of the inspection and (F) Noticeable rusting and pitting;
test shall confirm that the secondary (G) Evidence of core failure (a length-
brake is functioning properly. ening of rope lay, protrusion of the
(iv) If any hoisting machine or initi- rope core and a reduction in rope di-
ating device for the secondary brake ameter suggests core failure); or
system is removed from the equipment (H) More than one valley break (bro-
for testing, all reinstalled and directly ken wire).
related components shall be rein- (I) Outer wire wear exceeds one-third
spected prior to returning the equip- of the original outer wire diameter.
ment installation to service. (J) Any other condition which the
(v) Inspection of governors and sec- competent person determines has sig-
ondary brakes shall be performed by a nificantly affected the integrity of the
competent person. rope.
(vi) The secondary brake governor (v) The building owner shall keep a
and actuation device shall be tested be- certification record of each monthly
fore each day’s use. Where testing is inspection of a suspension wire rope as
not feasible, a visual inspection of the required in paragraph (g)(5)(iii) of this
brake shall be made instead to ensure section. The record shall include the
that it is free to operate. date of the inspection, the signature of
(5) Suspension wire rope maintenance, the person who performed the inspec-
inspection and replacement. (i) Suspen- tion, and a number, or other identifier,
sion wire rope shall be maintained and of the wire rope which was inspected.
used in accordance with procedures This record of inspection shall be made
recommended by the wire rope manu- available for review by the Assistant
facturer. Secretary of Labor or the Assistant
169
Secretary’s representative and by the similarly be maintained in proper

employer. working order.
(6) Hoist inspection. Before lowering (7) Inoperative safety devices. No per-
personnel below the top elevation of son shall render a required safety de-
the building, the hoist shall be tested vice or electrical protective device in-
each day in the lifting direction with operative, except as necessary for
the intended load to make certain it tests, inspections, and maintenance.
has sufficient capacity to raise the per- Immediately upon completion of such
sonnel back to the boarding level. tests, inspections and maintenance, the
(h) Maintenance—(1) General mainte- device shall be restored to its normal
nance. All parts of the equipment af- operating condition.
fecting safe operation shall be main- (i) Operations—(1) Training. (i) Work-
tained in proper working order so that ing platforms shall be operated only by
they may perform the functions for persons who are proficient in the oper-
which they were intended. The equip- ation, safe use and inspection of the
ment shall be taken out of service particular working platform to be oper-
when it is not in proper working order. ated.
(2) Cleaning. (i) Control or power (ii) All employees who operate work-
contactors and relays shall be kept ing platforms shall be trained in the
clean. following:
(ii) All other parts shall be kept (A) Recognition of, and preventive
clean if their proper functioning would measures for, the safety hazards associ-
be affected by the presence of dirt or ated with their individual work tasks.
other contaminants. (B) General recognition and preven-
(3) Periodic resocketing of wire rope fas- tion of safety hazards associated with
tenings. (i) Hoisting ropes utilizing the use of working platforms, including
poured socket fastenings shall be the provisions in the section relating
resocketed at the non-drum ends at in- to the particular working platform to
tervals not exceeding 24 months. In be operated.
resocketing the ropes, a sufficient (C) Emergency action plan proce-
length shall be cut from the end of the dures required in paragraph (e)(9) of
rope to remove damaged or fatigued this section.
portions. (D) Work procedures required in
(ii) Resocketed ropes shall conform paragraph (i)(1)(iv) of this section.
to the requirements of paragraph (f)(7) (E) Personal fall arrest system in-
of this section. spection, care, use and system perform-
(iii) Limit switches affected by the ance.
resocketed ropes shall be reset, if nec- (iii) Training of employees in the op-
essary. eration and inspection of working plat-
(4) Periodic reshackling of suspension forms shall be done by a competent
wire ropes. The hoisting ropes shall be person.
reshackled at the nondrum ends at in- (iv) Written work procedures for the
tervals not exceeding 24 months. When operation, safe use and inspection of
reshackling the ropes, a sufficient working platforms shall be provided for
length shall be cut from the end of the employee training. Pictorial methods
rope to remove damaged or fatigued of instruction, may be used, in lieu of
portions. written work procedures, if employee
(5) Roof systems. Roof track systems, communication is improved using this
tie-downs, or similar equipment shall method. The operating manuals sup-
be maintained in proper working order plied by manufacturers for platform
so that they perform the function for system components can serve as the
which they were intended. basis for these procedures.
(6) Building face guiding members. T- (v) The employer shall certify that
rails, indented mullions, or equivalent employees have been trained in oper-
guides located in the face of a building ating and inspecting a working plat-
shall be maintained in proper working form by preparing a certification
order so that they perform the func- record which includes the identity of
tions for which they were intended. the person trained, the signature of the
Brackets for cable stabilizers shall employer or the person who conducted
170
the training and the date that training (vii) Tools, materials and debris not
was completed. The certification related to the work in progress shall
record shall be prepared at the comple- not be allowed to accumulate on plat-
tion of the training required in para- forms. Stabilizer ties shall be located
graph (i)(1)(ii) of this section, and shall so as to allow unencumbered passage
be maintained in a file for the duration along the full length of the platform
of the employee’s employment. The and shall be of such length so as not to
certification record shall be kept read- become entangled in rollers, hoists or
ily available for review by the Assist- other machinery.
ant Secretary of Labor or the Assistant (j) Personal fall protection. Employees
Secretary’s representative. on working platforms shall be pro-
(2) Use. (i) Working platforms shall tected by a personal fall arrest system
not be loaded in excess of the rated meeting the requirements of subpart I
load, as stated on the platform load of this part and as otherwise provided
rating plate. by this standard.
(ii) Employees shall be prohibited
from working on snow, ice, or other APPENDIX A TO § 1910.66, GUIDELINES
(ADVISORY)
slippery material covering platforms,
except for the removal of such mate- 1. Use of the Appendix. Appendix A provides
rials. examples of equipment and methods to assist
(iii) Adequate precautions shall be the employer in meeting the requirements of
taken to protect the platform, wire the indicated provision of the standard. Em-
ployers may use other equipment or proce-
ropes and life lines from damage due to dures which conform to the requirements of
acids or other corrosive substances, in the standard. This appendix neither adds to
accordance with the recommendations nor detracts from the mandatory require-
of the corrosive substance producer, ments set forth in § 1910.66.
supplier, platform manufacturer or 2. Assurance. Paragraph (c) of the standard
other equivalent information sources. requires the building owner to inform the
Platform members which have been ex- employer in writing that the powered plat-
posed to acids or other corrosive sub- form installation complies with certain re-
quirements of the standard, since the em-
stances shall be washed down with a
ployer may not have the necessary informa-
neutralizing solution, at a frequency tion to make these determinations. The em-
recommended by the corrosive sub- ployer, however, remains responsible for
stance producer or supplier. meeting these requirements which have not
(iv) Platform members, wire ropes been set off in paragraph (c)(1).
and life lines shall be protected when 3. Design Requirements. The design require-
using a heat producing process. Wire ments for each installation should be based
ropes and life lines which have been on the limitations (stresses, deflections,
contacted by the heat producing proc- etc.), established by nationally recognized
standards as promulgated by the following
ess shall be considered to be perma-
organizations, or to equivalent standards:
nently damaged and shall not be used.
(v) The platform shall not be oper- AA—The Aluminum Association, 818 Con-
necticut Avenue, NW., Washington, DC,
ated in winds in excess of 25 miles per 20006
hour (40.2 km/hr) except to move it Aluminum Construction Manual
from an operating to a storage posi- Specifications For Aluminum Structures
tion. Wind speed shall be determined Aluminum Standards and Data
based on the best available informa- AGMA—American Gear Manufacturers Asso-
tion, which includes on-site anemom- ciation, 101 North Fort Meyer Dr., Suite
eter readings and local weather fore- 1000, Arlington, VA 22209
casts which predict wind velocities for AISC—American Institute of Steel Construc-
the area. tion, 400 North Michigan Avenue, Chicago,
(vi) On exterior installations, an ane- IL 60611
mometer shall be mounted on the plat- ANSI—American National Standards Insti-
tute, Inc., 1430 Broadway, New York, NY
form to provide information of on-site
10018
wind velocities prior to and during the ASCE—American Society of Civil Engineers,
use of the platform. The anemometer 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017
may be a portable (hand held) unit
ASME—American Society of Mechanical En-

which is temporarily mounted during gineers, 345 East 47th Street, New York,
platform use. NY 10017
171
ASTM—American Society for Testing and used. Consideration should also be given to
Materials, 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, the use of ties which are easily installed by
PA 19103 employees, since this will encourage their
AWS—American Welding Society, Inc., Box use.
351040, 550 NW. LeJeunne Road, Miami, FL 7. Intermittent stabilization system. Intermit-
33126 tent stabilization systems may use different
JIC—Joint Industrial Council, 2139 Wisconsin equipment, tie-in devices and methods to re-
Avenue NW., Washington, DC 20007 strict the horizontal movement of a powered
NEMA—National Electric Manufacturers As- platform with respect to the face of the
sociation, 2101 L Street, NW., Washington, building. One acceptable method employs
DC 20037 corrosion-resistant building anchors secured
4. Tie-in-guides. Indented mullions, T-rails in the face of the building in vertical rows
or other equivalent guides are acceptable as every third floor or 50 feet (15.3 m), which-
tie-in guides in a building face for a contin- ever is less. The anchors are spaced hori-
uous stabilization system. Internal guides zontally to allow a stabilization attachment
are embedded in other building members (stabilizer tie) for each of the two platform
with only the opening exposed (see Figure 1 suspension wire ropes. The stabilizer tie con-
of appendix B). External guides, however, are sists of two parts. One part is a quick con-
installed external to the other building nect-quick disconnect device which utilizes a
members and so are fully exposed. The min- corrosion-resistant yoke and retainer spring
imum opening for tie-in guides is three-quar- that is designed to fit over the building an-
ters of an inch (19 mm), and the minimum in- chors. The second part of the stabilizer tie is
side dimensions are one-inch (25 mm) deep a lanyard which is used to maintain a fixed
and two inches (50 mm) wide. distance between the suspension wire rope
Employers should be aware of the hazards and the face of the building.
associated with tie-in guides in a continuous In this method, as the suspended powered
stabilization system which was not designed platform descends past the elevation of each
properly. For example, joints in these track anchor, the descent is halted and each of the
systems may become extended or discontin- platform occupants secures a stabilizer tie
uous due to installation or building settle- between a suspension wire rope and a build-
ment. If this alignment problem is not cor- ing anchor. The procedure is repeated as
rected, the system could jam when a guide each elevation of a building anchor is
roller or guide shoe strikes a joint and this reached during the descent of the powered
would cause a hazardous situation for em- platform.
ployees. In another instance, faulty design As the platform ascends, the procedure is
will result in guide rollers being mounted in reversed; that is, the stabilizer ties are re-
a line so they will jam in the track at the
moved as each elevation of a building anchor
slightest misalignment.
is reached. The removal of each stabilizer tie
5. Building anchors (intermittent stabilization
is assured since the platform is provided
system). In the selection of the vertical dis-
with stopping devices which will interrupt
tance between building anchors, certain fac-
power to its hoist(s) in the event either stop-
tors should be given consideration. These
ping device contacts a stabilizer during the
factors include building height and architec-
ascent of the platform.
tural design, platform length and weight,
wire rope angulation, and the wind velocities Figure 2 of appendix B illustrates another
in the building area. Another factor to con- type of acceptable intermittent stabilization
sider is the material of the building face, system which utilizes retaining pins as the
since this material may be adversely af- quick connect-quick disconnect device in the
fected by the building rollers. stabilizer tie.
External or indented type building anchors 8. Wire Rope Inspection. The inspection of
are acceptable. Receptacles in the building the suspension wire rope is important since
facade used for the indented type should be the rope gradually loses strength during its
kept clear of extraneous materials which useful life. The purpose of the inspection is
will hinder their use. During the inspection to determine whether the wire rope has suffi-
of the platform installation, evidence of a cient integrity to support a platform with
failure or abuse of the anchors should be the required design factor.
brought to the attention of the employer. If there is any doubt concerning the condi-
6. Stabilizer tie length. A stabilizer tie tion of a wire rope or its ability to perform
should be long enough to provide for the the required work, the rope should be re-
planned angulation of the suspension cables. placed. The cost of wire rope replacement is
However, the length of the tie should not be quite small if compared to the cost in terms
excessive and become a problem by possibly of human injuries, equipment down time and
becoming entangled in the building face roll- replacement.
ers or parts of the platform machinery. No listing of critical inspection factors,
The attachment length may vary due to which serve as a basis for wire rope replace-
material elongation and this should be con- ment in the standard, can be a substitute for
sidered when selecting the material to be an experienced inspector of wire rope. The
172
listing serves as a user’s guide to the accept- In addition, the training program should
ed standards by which ropes must be judged. also include emergency action plan ele-
Rope life can be prolonged if preventive ments. OSHA brochure #1B3088 (Rev.) 1985,
maintenance is performed regularly. Cutting ‘‘How to Prepare for Workplace Emer-
off an appropriate length of rope at the end gencies,’’ details the basic steps needed to
termination before the core degrades and prepare to handle emergencies in the work-
valley breaks appear minimizes degradation place.
at these sections. Following the completion of a training
9. General Maintenance. In meeting the gen- program, the employee should be required to
eral maintenance requirement in paragraph demonstrate competency in operating the
(h)(1) of the standard, the employer should equipment safely. Supplemental training of
undertake the prompt replacement of bro- the employee should be provided by the em-
ken, worn and damaged parts, switch con- ployer, as necessary, if the equipment used
tacts, brushes, and short flexible conductors or other working conditions should change.
of electrical devices. The components of the An employee who is required to work with
electrical service system and traveling ca- chemical products on a platform should re-
bles should be replaced when damaged or sig- ceive training in proper cleaning procedures,
nificantly abraded. In addition, gears, shafts, and in the hazards, care and handling of
bearings, brakes and hoisting drums should these products. In addition, the employee
be kept in proper alignment. should be supplied with the appropriate per-
10. Training. In meeting the training re- sonal protective equipment, such as gloves
quirement of paragraph (i)(1) of the standard,
and eye and face protection.
employers should use both on the job train-
11. Suspension and Securing of Powered Plat-
ing and formal classroom training. The writ-
forms (Equivalency). One acceptable method
ten work procedures used for this training
should be obtained from the manufacturer, if of demonstrating the equivalency of a meth-
possible, or prepared as necessary for the em- od of suspending or securing a powered plat-
ployee’s information and use. form, as required in paragraphs (e)(2)(iii),
Employees who will operate powered plat- (f)(3) and (f)(5)(i)(F), is to provide an engi-
forms with intermittent stabilization sys- neering analysis by a registered professional
tems should receive instruction in the spe- engineer. The analysis should demonstrate
cific ascent and descent procedures involving that the proposed method will provide an
the assembly and disassembly of the sta- equal or greater degree of safety for employ-
bilizer ties. ees than any one of the methods specified in
An acceptable training program should the standard.
also include employee instruction in basic APPENDIX B TO § 1910.66—EXHIBITS (ADVISORY)
inspection procedures for the purpose of de-
termining the need for repair and replace- The three drawings in appendix B illus-
ment of platform equipment. In addition, the trate typical platform stabilization systems
program should cover the inspection, care which are addressed in the standard. The
and use of the personal fall protection equip- drawings are to be used for reference pur-
ment required in paragraph (j)(1) of the poses only, and do not illustrate all the man-
standard. datory requirements for each system.
173
174
EC27OC91.012</GPH>
175
EC27OC91.013</GPH>
176
EC27OC91.014</GPH>
APPENDIX C TO § 1910.66 [RESERVED] (8) Continuous pressure. Operation by means
of buttons or switches, any one of which may
APPENDIX D TO § 1910.66—EXISTING be used to control the movement of the
INSTALLATIONS (MANDATORY) working platform or roof car, only as long as
the button or switch is manually maintained
Use of the Appendix
in the actuating position.
Appendix D sets out the mandatory build- (9) Control. A system governing starting,
ing and equipment requirements for applica- stopping, direction, acceleration, speed, and
ble permanent installations completed after retardation of moving members.
August 27, 1971, and no later than July 23, (10) Controller. A device or group of devices,
1990 which are exempt from the paragraphs usually contained in a single enclosure,
(a), (b)(1), (b)(2), (c), (d), (e), and (f) of this which serves to control in some predeter-
standard. The requirements in appendix D mined manner the apparatus to which it is
are essentially the same as unrevised build- connected.
ing and equipment provisions which pre- (11) Electrical ground. A conducting connec-
viously were designated as 29 CFR 1910.66 (a), tion between an electrical circuit or equip-
(b), (c) and (d) and which were effective on ment and the earth, or some conducting
August 27, 1971. body which serves in place of the earth.
NOTE: All existing installations subject to (12) Guide roller. A rotating, bearing-
this appendix shall also comply with para- mounted, generally cylindrical member, op-
graphs (g), (h), (i), (j) and appendix C of the erating separately or as part of a guide shoe
standard 29 CFR 1910.66. assembly, attached to the platform, and pro-
(a) Definitions applicable to this appendix— viding rolling contact with building guide-
(1) Angulated roping. A system of platform ways, or other building contact members.
suspension in which the upper wire rope (13) Guide shoe. An assembly of rollers,
sheaves or suspension points are closer to slide members, or the equivalent, attached
the plane of the building face than the cor- as a unit to the operators’ platform, and de-
responding attachment points on the plat- signed to engage with the building members
form, thus causing the platform to press provided for the vertical guidance of the op-
against the face of the building during its erators’ platform.
vertical travel. (14) Interlock. A device actuated by the op-
(2) ANSI. American National Standards In- eration of some other device with which it is
stitute. directly associated, to govern succeeding op-
(3) Babbitted fastenings. The method of pro- erations of the same or allied devices.
viding wire rope attachments in which the (15) Operating device. A pushbutton, lever,
ends of the wire strands are bent back and or other manual device used to actuate a
are held in a tapered socket by means of control.
poured molten babbitt metal. (16) Powered platform. Equipment to provide
(4) Brake—disc type. A brake in which the access to the exterior of a building for main-
holding effect is obtained by frictional re- tenance, consisting of a suspended power-op-
sistance between one or more faces of discs erated working platform, a roof car, or other
keyed to the rotating member to be held and suspension means, and the requisite oper-
fixed discs keyed to the stationary or hous- ating and control devices.
ing member (pressure between the discs (17) Rated load. The combined weight of
being applied axially). employees, tools, equipment, and other ma-
(5) Brake—self-energizing band type. An es- terial which the working platform is de-
sentially undirectional brake in which the signed and installed to lift.
holding effect is obtained by the snubbing (18) Relay, direction. An electrically ener-
action of a flexible band wrapped about a cy- gized contactor responsive to an initiating
lindrical wheel or drum affixed to the rotat- control circuit, which in turn causes a mov-
ing member to be held, the connections and ing member to travel in a particular direc-
linkages being so arranged that the motion tion.
of the brake wheel or drum will act to in- (19) Relay, potential for vertical travel. An
crease the tension or holding force of the electrically energized contactor responsive
band. to initiating control circuit, which in turn
(6) Brake—shoe type. A brake in which the controls the operation of a moving member
holding effect is obtained by applying the di- in both directions. This relay usually oper-
rect pressure of two or more segmental fric- ates in conjunction with direction relays, as
tion elements held to a stationary member covered under the definition, ‘‘relay, direc-
against a cylindrical wheel or drum affixed tion.’’
to the rotating member to be held. (20) Roof car. A structure for the suspen-
(7) Building face rollers. A specialized form sion of a working platform, providing for its
of guide roller designed to contact a portion horizontal movement to working positions.
of the outer face or wall structure of the (21) Roof-powered platform. A powered plat-
building, and to assist in stabilizing the op- form having the raising and lowering mecha-
erators’ platform during vertical travel. nism located on a roof car.
177
(22) Self-powered platform. A powered plating drums. Type F powered platforms may be
form having the raising and lowering mecha- either roof-powered or self-powered.
nism located on the working platform. (iii) Powered platforms designated as Type
(23) Traveling cable. A cable made up of T shall meet all the requirements in part III
electrical or communication conductors or of ANSI A120.1–1970 American National
both, and providing electrical connection be- Standard Safety Requirements for Powered
tween the working platform and the roof car Platforms for Exterior Building Mainte-
or other fixed point. nance, except for section 28, Safety Belts and
(24) Weatherproof. Equipment so con- Life Lines. A basic requirement of Type T
structed or protected that exposure to the equipment is that the working platform is
weather will not interfere with its proper op- suspended by at least two wire ropes. Failure
eration. of one wire rope would not permit the work-
(25) Working platform. The suspended struc- ing platform to fall to the ground, but would
ture arranged for vertical travel which pro- upset its normal position. Type T powered
vides access to the exterior of the building or platforms may be either roof-powered or self-
structure. powered.
(26) Yield point. The stress at which the ma- (iv) The requirements of this section apply
terial exhibits a permanent set of 0.2 per- to powered platforms with winding drum
cent. type hoisting machines. It is not the intent
of this section to prohibit powered platforms
(27) Zinced fastenings. The method of pro-
using other types of hoisting machines such
viding wire rope attachments in which the
as, but not limited to, traction drum hoist-
splayed or fanned wire ends are held in a ta-
ing machines, air powered machines, hydrau-
pered socket by means of poured molten
lic powered machines, and internal combus-
zinc.
tion machines. Installation of powered plat-
(b) General requirements. (1) Design require- forms with other types of hoisting machines
ments. All powered platform installations is permitted, provided adequate protective
for exterior building maintenance completed devices are used, and provided reasonable
as of August 27, 1971, but no later than [in- safety of life and limb to users of the equip-
sert date, 180 days after the effective date], ment and to others who may be exposed is
shall meet all of the design, construction and assured.
installation requirements of part II and III of (v) Both Type F and Type T powered plat-
the ‘‘American National Standard Safety Re- forms shall comply with the requirements of
quirements for Powered Platforms for Exte- appendix C of this standard.
rior Building Maintenance ANSI A120.1–1970’’ (c) Type F powered platforms—(1) Roof car,
and of this appendix. References shall be general. (i) A roof car shall be provided when-
made to appropriate parts of ANSI A120.1– ever it is necessary to move the working
1970 for detail specifications for equipment platform horizontally to working or storage
and special installations. positions.
(2) Limitation. The requirements of this ap- (ii) The maximum rated speed at which a
pendix apply only to electric powered plat- power traversed roof car may be moved in a
forms. It is not the intent of this appendix to horizontal direction shall be 50 feet per
prohibit the use of other types of power. In- minute.
stallation of powered platforms using other (2) Movement and positioning of roof car. (i)
types of power is permitted, provided such Provision shall be made to protect against
platforms have adequate protective devices having the roof car leave the roof or enter
for the type of power used, and otherwise roof areas not designed for travel.
provide for reasonable safety of life and limb (ii) The horizontal motion of the roof cars
to users of equipment and to others who may shall be positively controlled so as to insure
be exposed. proper movement and positioning of the roof
(3) Types of powered platforms. (i) For the car.
purpose of applying this appendix, powered (iii) Roof car positioning devices shall be
platforms are divided into two basic types, provided to insure that the working platform
Type F and Type T. is placed and retained in proper position for
(ii) Powered platforms designated as Type vertical travel and during storage.
F shall meet all the requirements in part II (iv) Mechanical stops shall be provided to
of ANSI A 120.1–1970, American National prevent the traversing of the roof car beyond
Standard Safety Requirements for Powered its normal limits of travel. Such stops shall
Platforms for Exterior Building Mainte- be capable of withstanding a force equal to
nance. A basic requirement of Type F equip- 100 percent of the inertial effect of the roof
ment is that the work platform is suspended car in motion with traversing power applied.
by at least four wire ropes and designed so (v)(a) The operating device of a power-op-
that failure of any one wire rope will not erated roof car for traversing shall be lo-
substantially alter the normal position of cated on the roof car, the working platform,
the working platform. Another basic require- or both, and shall be of the continuous pres-
ment of Type F equipment is that only one sure weather-proof electric type. If more
layer of hoisting rope is permitted on wind- than one operating device is provided, they
178
shall be so arranged that traversing is pos- (7) Load rating plate. Each working plat-
sible only from one operating device at a form shall bear a manufacturer’s load rating
time. plate, conspicuously posted; stating the max-
(b) The operating device shall be so con- imum permissible rated load. Load rating
nected that it is not operable until: plates shall be made of noncorrosive mate-
(1) The working platform is located at its rial and shall have letters and figures
uppermost position of travel and is not in stamped, etched, or cast on the surface. The
contact with the building face or fixed minimum height of the letters and figures
vertical guides in the face of the building; shall be one-fourth inch.
and (8) Minimum size. The working platform
(2) All protective devices and interlocks shall have a minimum net width of 24 inches.
are in a position for traversing. (9) Guardrails. Working platforms shall be
(3) Roof car stability. Roof car stability furnished with permanent guard rails not
shall be determined by either paragraph less than 36 inches high, and not more than
(c)(3) (i) or (ii) of this appendix, whichever is 42 inches high at the front (building side). At
greater. the rear, and on the sides, the rail shall not
(i) The roof car shall be continuously sta- be less than 42 inches high. An intermediate
ble, considering overturning moment as de- guardrail shall be provided around the entire
termined by 125 percent rated load, plus platform between the top guardrail and the
maximum dead load and the prescribed wind toeboard.
loading. (10) Toeboards. A four-inch toeboard shall
(ii) The roof car and its anchorages shall be be provided along all sides of the working
capable of resisting accidental over-ten- platform.
sioning of the wire ropes suspending the (11) Open spaces between guardrails and
working platform and this calculated value toeboards. The spaces between the inter-
shall include the effect of one and one-half mediate guardrail and platform toeboard on
times the value. For this calculation, the si- the building side of the working platform,
multaneous effect of one-half wind load shall and between the top guardrail and the
be included, and the design stresses shall not toeboard on other sides of the platform, shall
exceed those referred to in paragraph (b)(1) be filled with metalic mesh or similar mate-
of this appendix. rial that will reject a ball one inch in diame-
(iii) If the load on the motors is at any ter. The installed mesh shall be capable of
time in excess of three times that required withstanding a load of 100 pounds applied
for lifting the working platform with its horizontally over any area of 144 square
rated load the motor shall stall. inches. If the space between the platform and
(4) Access to the roof car. Safe access to the the building face does not exceed eight
roof car and from the roof car to the working inches, and the platform is restrained by
platform shall be provided. If the access to guides, the mesh may be omitted on the
the roof car at any point of its travel is not front side.
over the roof area or where otherwise nec- (12) Flooring. The platform flooring shall be
essary for safety, then self-closing, self-lock- of the nonskid type, and if of open construc-
ing gates shall be provided. Access to and tion, shall reject a 9⁄16-inch diameter ball, or
from roof cars must comply with the require- be provided with a screen below the floor to
ments of subpart D of this part. reject a 9⁄16-inch diameter ball.
(5) Means for maintenance, repair, and stor- (13) Access gates. Where access gates are
age. Means shall be provided to run the roof provided, they shall be self-closing and self-
car away from the roof perimeter, where nec- locking.
essary, and to provide a safe area for mainte- (14) Operating device for vertical movement of
nance, repairs, and storage. Provisions shall the working platform. (i) The normal oper-
be made to secure the machine in the stored ating device for the working platform shall
position. For stored machines subject to be located on the working platform and shall
wind forces, see special design and anchorage be of the continuous pressure weatherproof
requirements for ‘‘wind forces’’ in part II, electric type.
section 10.5.1.1 of ANSI A120.1–1970 American (ii) The operating device shall be operable
National Standard Safety Requirements for only when all electrical protective devices
Powered Platforms for Exterior Building and interlocks on the working platform are
Maintenance. in position for normal service and, the roof
(6) General requirements for working plat- car, if provided, is at an established oper-
forms. The working platform shall be of gird- ating point.
er or truss construction and shall be ade- (15) Emergency electric operative device. (i) In
quate to support its rated load under any po- addition, on roof-powered platforms, an
sition of loading, and comply with the provi- emergency electric operating device shall be
sions set forth in section 10 of ANSI A120.1– provided near the hoisting machine for use
1970, American National Standard Safety Re- in the event of failure of the normal oper-
quirements for Powered Platforms for Exte- ating device for the working platform, or
rior Building Maintenance. failure of the traveling cable system. The
179
emergency operating device shall be mount- S = Manufacturer’s rated breaking strength
ed in a locked compartment and shall have a of one rope.
legend mounted thereon reading: ‘‘For Emer- N = Number of ropes under load.
gency Operation Only. Establish Commu- W = Maximum static load on all ropes with
nication With Personnel on Working Plat- the platform and its rated load at any
form Before Use.’’ point of its travel.
(ii) A key for unlocking the compartment (iv) Hoisting ropes shall be sized to con-
housing the emergency operating device form with the required factor of safety, but
shall be mounted in a break-glass receptacle in no case shall the size be less than 5⁄16 inch
located near the emergency operating de- diameter.
vice. (v) Winding drums shall have at least three
(16) Manual cranking for emergency oper- turns of rope remaining when the platform
ation. Emergency operation of the main has landed at the lowest possible point of its
drive machine may be provided to allow travel.
manual cranking. This provision for manual (vi) The lengthening or repairing of wire
operation shall be designed so that not more rope by the joining of two or more lengths is
than two persons will be required to perform prohibited.
this operation. The access to this provision (vii) The nondrum ends of the hoisting
shall include a means to automatically make ropes shall be provided with individual
the machine inoperative electrically while shackle rods which will permit individual ad-
under the emergency manual operation. The justment of rope lengths, if required.
design shall be such that the emergency (viii) More than two reverse bends in each
brake is operative at or below governor trip- rope is prohibited.
ping speed during manual operation. (21) Rope tag data. (i) A metal data tag
(17) Arrangement and guarding of hoisting shall be securely attached to one of the wire
equipment. (i) Hoisting equipment shall con- rope fastenings. This data tag shall bear the
sist of a power-driven drum or drum con- following wire rope data:
tained in the roof car (roof-powered plat- (a) The diameter in inches.
forms) or contained on the working platform (b) Construction classification.
(self-powered platform). (c) Whether nonpreformed or preformed.
(ii) The hoisting equipment shall be power- (d) The grade of material used.
operated in both up and down directions. (e) The manufacturer’s rated breaking
(iii) Guard or other protective devices shall strength.
be installed wherever rotating shafts or (f) Name of the manufacturer of the rope.
other mechanisms or gears may expose per- (g) The month and year the ropes were in-
sonnel to a hazard. stalled.
(iv) Friction devices or clutches shall not (22) Electrical wiring and equipment. (i) All
be used for connecting the main driving electrical equipment and wiring shall con-
mechanism to the drum or drums. Belt or form to the requirements of subpart S of this
chain-driven machines are prohibited. Part, except as modified by ANSI A120.1—
(18) Hoisting motors. (i) Hoisting motors 1970 ‘‘American National Standard Safety
shall be electric and of weather-proof con- Requirements for Powered Platforms for Ex-
struction. terior Building Maintenance’’ (see § 1910.6).
(ii) Hoisting motors shall be in conform- For detail design specifications for electrical
ance with applicable provisions of paragraph equipment, see part 2, ANSI A120.1–1970.
(c)(22) of this appendix, Electric Wiring and (ii) All motors and operation and control
Equipment. equipment shall be supplied from a single
(iii) Hoisting motors shall be directly con- power source.
nected to the hoisting machinery. Motor (iii) The power supply for the powered plat-
couplings, if used, shall be of steel construc- form shall be an independent circuit supplied
tion. through a fused disconnect switch.
(19) Brakes. The hoisting machine(s) shall (iv) Electrical conductor parts of the power
have two independent braking means, each supply system shall be protected against ac-
designed to stop and hold the working plat- cidental contact.
form with 125 percent of rated load. (v) Electrical grounding shall be provided.
(20) Hoisting ropes and rope connections. (i) (a) Provisions for electrical grounding
Working platforms shall be suspended by shall be included with the power-supply sys-
wire ropes of either 6 × 19 or 6 × 37 classifica- tem.
tion, preformed or nonpreformed. (b) Controller cabinets, motor frames,
(ii) [Reserved] hoisting machines, the working platform,
(iii) The minimum factor of safety shall be roof car and roof car track system, and non-
10, and shall be calculated by the following current carrying parts of electrical equip-
formula: ment, where provided, shall be grounded.
(c) The controller, where used, shall be so

F = S × N/W designed and installed that a single ground
Where or short circuit will not prevent both the
180
normal and final stopping device from stop- motor or motors in the down direction and
ping the working platform. apply the brakes if any hoisting rope be-
(d) Means shall be provided on the roof car comes slack.
and working platform for grounding portable (xiv) Upper and lower directional limit de-
electric tools. vices shall be provided to prevent the travel
(e) The working platform shall be grounded of the working platform beyond the normal
through a grounding connection in a trav- upper and lower limits of travel.
eling cable. Electrically powered tools uti- (xv) Operation of a directional limit device
lized on the working platform shall be shall prevent further motion in the appro-
grounded. priate direction, if the normal limit of travel
(vi) Electrical receptacles located on the has been reached.
roof or other exterior location shall be of a (xvi) Directional limit devices, if driven
weatherproof type and shall be located so as from the hoisting machine by chains, tapes,
not to be subject to contact with water or or cables, shall incorporate a device to dis-
accumulated snow. The receptacles shall be connect the electric power from the hoisting
grounded and the electric cable shall include machine and apply both the primary and sec-
a grounding conductor. The receptacle and ondary brakes in the event of failure of the
plug shall be a type designed to avoid hazard driving means.
to persons inserting or withdrawing the plug. (xvii) Final terminal stopping devices of
Provision shall be made to prevent applica- the working platform:
tion of cable strain directly to the plug and (a) Final terminal stopping devices for the
receptacle. working platform shall be provided as a sec-
(vii) Electric runway conductor systems ondary means of preventing the working
shall be of the type designed for use in exte- platform from over-traveling at the termi-
rior locations and shall be located so as not nals.
to be subject to contact with water or accu- (b) The device shall be set to function as
mulated snow. The conductors, collectors, close to each terminal landing as practical,
and disconnecting means shall conform to but in such a way that under normal oper-
the same requirements as those for cranes ating conditions it will not function when
and hoists in subpart S of this Part. A the working platform is stopped by the nor-
grounded conductor shall parallel the power mal terminal stopping device.
conductors and be so connected that it can- (c) Operation of the final terminal stopping
not be opened by the disconnecting means. device shall open the potential relay for
The system shall be designed to avoid hazard vertical travel, thereby disconnecting the
to persons in the area. electric power from the hoisting machine,
(viii) Electrical protective devices and and applying both the primary and sec-
interlocks of the weatherproof type shall be ondary brakes.
provided. (d) The final terminal stopping device for
(ix) Where the installation includes a roof the upper limit of travel shall be mounted so
car, electric contact(s) shall be provided and that it is operated directly by the motion of
so connected that the operating devices for the working platform itself.
the working platform shall be operative only (xviii) Emergency stop switches shall be
when the roof car is located and mechani- provided in or adjacent to each operating de-
cally retained at an established operating vice.
point. (xix) Emergency stop switches shall:
(x) Where the powered platform includes a (a) Have red operating buttons or handles.
powered-operated roof car, the operating de- (b) Be conspicuously and permanently
vice for the roof car shall be inoperative marked ‘‘Stop.’’
when the roof car is mechanically retained (c) Be the manually opened and manually
at an established operating point. closed type.
(xi) An electric contact shall be provided (d) Be positively opened with the opening
and so connected that it will cause the down not solely dependent on springs.
direction relay for vertical travel to open if (xx) The manual operation of an emer-
the tension in the traveling cable exceeds gency stop switch associated with an oper-
safe limits. ating device for the working platform shall
(xii) An automatic overload device shall be open the potential relay for vertical travel,
provided to cut off the electrical power to thereby disconnecting the electric power
the circuit in all hoisting motors for travel from the hoisting machine and applying both
in the up direction, should the load applied the primary and secondary brakes.
to the hoisting ropes at either end of the (xxi) The manual operation of the emer-
working platform exceed 125 percent of its gency stop switch associated with the oper-
normal tension with rated load, as shown on ating device for a power-driven roof car shall
the manufacturer’s data plate on the work- cause the electrical power to the traverse
ing platform. machine to be interrupted, and the traverse
(xiii) An automatic device shall be pro- machine brake to apply.

vided for each hoisting rope which will cut (23) Requirements for emergency communica-
off the electrical power to the hoisting tions. (i) Communication equipment shall be
181
provided for each powered platform for use in powered platforms. Requirements for the
an emergency. ‘‘circuit potential limitation’’ shall be in ac-
(ii) Two-way communication shall be es- cordance with specifications contained in
tablished between personnel on the roof and part 2, section 26, of ANSI A120.1–1970.
personnel on the stalled working platform (7) Emergency communications. All the re-
before any emergency operation of the work- quirements of paragraph (c)(23) of this appen-
ing platform is undertaken by personnel on dix shall apply to Type T powered platforms.
the roof.
[54 FR 31456, July 28, 1989, as amended at 61
(iii) The equipment shall permit two-way
FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996; 72 FR 7190, Feb. 14, 2007;
voice communication between the working
81 FR 82998, Nov. 18, 2016]
platform and
(a) Designated personnel continuously
available while the powered platform is in
§ 1910.67 Vehicle-mounted elevating
use; and and rotating work platforms.
(b) Designated personnel on roof-powered (a) Definitions applicable to this sec-
platforms, undertaking emergency operation tion—(1) Aerial device. Any vehicle—
of the working platform by means of the mounted device, telescoping or articu-
emergency operating device located near the
lating, or both, which is used to posi-
hoisting machine.
(iv) The emergency communication equip- tion personnel.
ment shall be one of the following types: (2) Aerial ladder. An aerial device con-
(a) Telephone connected to the central sisting of a single- or multiple-section
telephone exchange system; or extensible ladder.
(b) Telephones on a limited system or an (3) Articulating boom platform. An aer-
approved two-way radio system, provided ial device with two or more hinged
designated personnel are available to receive boom sections.
a message during the time the powered plat-
form is in use.
(4) Extensible boom platform. An aerial
(d) Type T powered platforms—(1) Roof car. device (except ladders) with a tele-
The requirements of paragraphs (c)(1) scopic or extensible boom. Telescopic
through (c)(5) of this appendix shall apply to derricks with personnel platform at-
Type T powered platforms. tachments shall be considered to be ex-
(2) Working platform. The requirements of tensible boom platforms when used
paragraphs (c)(6) through (c)(16) of this ap- with a personnel platform.
pendix apply to Type T powered platforms. (5) Insulated aerial device. An aerial
(i) The working platform shall be sus-
pended by at least two wire ropes. device designed for work on energized
(ii) The maximum rated speed at which the lines and apparatus.
working platform of self-powered platforms (6) Mobile unit. A combination of an
may be moved in a vertical direction shall aerial device, its vehicle, and related
not exceed 35 feet per minute. equipment.
(3) Hoisting equipment. The requirements of (7) Platform. Any personnel-carrying
paragraphs (c) (17) and (18) of this appendix device (basket or bucket) which is a
shall apply to Type T powered platforms.
component of an aerial device.
(4) Brakes. Brakes requirements of para-
graph (c)(19) of this appendix shall apply. (8) Vehicle. Any carrier that is not
(5) Hoisting ropes and rope connections. (i) manually propelled.
Paragraphs (c)(20) (i) through (vi) and (viii) (9) Vertical tower. An aerial device de-
of this appendix shall apply to Type T pow- signed to elevate a platform in a sub-
ered platforms. stantially vertical axis.
(ii) Adjustable shackle rods in subpara- (b) General requirements. (1) Unless
graph (c)(20)(vii) of this appendix shall apply otherwise provided in this section, aer-
to Type T powered platforms, if the working
ial devices (aerial lifts) acquired on or
platform is suspended by more than two wire
ropes. after July 1, 1975, shall be designed and
(6) Electrical wiring and equipment. (i) The constructed in conformance with the
requirements of paragraphs (c)(22) (i) applicable requirements of the Amer-
through (vi) of this appendix shall apply to ican National Standard for ‘‘Vehicle
Type T powered platforms. ‘‘Circuit protec- Mounted Elevating and Rotating Work
tion limitation,’’ ‘‘powered platform elec- Platforms,’’ ANSI A92.2—1969, includ-
trical service system,’’ all operating services ing appendix, which is incorporated by
and control equipment shall comply with the
reference as specified in § 1910.6. Aerial
specifications contained in part 2, section 26,
ANSI A120.1–1970. lifts acquired for use before July 1, 1975
which do not meet the requirements of
(ii) For electrical protective devices the re-

quirements of paragraphs (c)(22) (i) through ANSI A92.2—1969, may not be used after
(viii) of this appendix shall apply to Type T July 1, 1976, unless they shall have been
182
modified so as to conform with the ap- (iv) Employees shall always stand
plicable design and construction re- firmly on the floor of the basket, and
quirements of ANSI A92.2—1969. Aerial shall not sit or climb on the edge of the
devices include the following types of basket or use planks, ladders, or other
vehicle-mounted aerial devices used to devices for a work position.
elevate personnel to jobsites above (v) A personal fall arrest or travel re-
ground: (i) Extensible boom platforms, straint system that meets the require-
(ii) aerial ladders, (iii) articulating ments in subpart I of this part shall be
boom platforms, (iv) vertical towers, worn and attached to the boom or bas-
and (v) a combination of any of the ket when working from an aerial lift.
above. Aerial equipment may be made (vi) Boom and basket load limits
of metal, wood, fiberglass reinforced specified by the manufacturer shall not
plastic (FRP), or other material; may be exceeded.
be powered or manually operated; and (vii) The brakes shall be set and out-
are deemed to be aerial lifts whether or riggers, when used, shall be positioned
not they are capable of rotating about on pads or a solid surface. Wheel
a substantially vertical axis. chocks shall be installed before using
(2) Aerial lifts may be ‘‘field modi- an aerial lift on an incline.
fied’’ for uses other than those in- (viii) An aerial lift truck may not be
tended by the manufacturer, provided moved when the boom is elevated in a
the modification has been certified in working position with men in the bas-
writing by the manufacturer or by any ket, except for equipment which is spe-
other equivalent entity, such as a na- cifically designed for this type of oper-
tionally recognized testing laboratory, ation in accordance with the provisions
to be in conformity with all applicable of paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2) of this
provisions of ANSI A92.2—1969 and this section.
section, and to be at least as safe as (ix) Articulating boom and extensible
the equipment was before modification. boom platforms, primarily designed as
personnel carriers, shall have both
(3) The requirements of this section
platform (upper) and lower controls.
do not apply to firefighting equipment
Upper controls shall be in or beside the
or to the vehicles upon which aerial de-
platform within easy reach of the oper-
vices are mounted, except with respect
ator. Lower controls shall provide for
to the requirement that a vehicle be a
overriding the upper controls. Controls
stable support for the aerial device.
shall be plainly marked as to their
(4) For operations near overhead elec- function. Lower level controls shall not
tric lines, see § 1910.333(c)(3). be operated unless permission has been
(c) Specific requirements—(1) Ladder obtained from the employee in the lift,
trucks and tower trucks. Before the except in case of emergency.
truck is moved for highway travel, aer- (x) Climbers shall not be worn while
ial ladders shall be secured in the lower performing work from an aerial lift.
traveling position by the locking de- (xi) The insulated portion of an aerial
vice above the truck cab, and the lift shall not be altered in any manner
manually operated device at the base that might reduce its insulating value.
of the ladder, or by other equally effec- (xii) Before moving an aerial lift for
tive means (e.g., cradles which prevent travel, the boom(s) shall be inspected
rotation of the ladder in combination to see that it is properly cradled and
with positive acting linear actuators). outriggers are in stowed position, ex-
(2) Extensible and articulating boom cept as provided in paragraph
platforms. (i) Lift controls shall be test- (c)(2)(viii) of this section.
ed each day prior to use to determine (3) Electrical tests. Electrical tests
that such controls are in safe working shall be made in conformance with the
condition. requirements of ANSI A92.2—1969, Sec-
(ii) Only trained persons shall oper- tion 5. However, equivalent DC voltage
ate an aerial lift. tests may be used in lieu of the AC
(iii) Belting off to an adjacent pole, voltage test specified in A92.2—1969. DC
structure, or equipment while working voltage tests which are approved by
from an aerial lift shall not be per- the equipment manufacturer or equiva-
mitted. lent entity shall be considered an
183
equivalent test for the purpose of this tached to it for the transportation of
paragraph (c)(3). personnel from floor to floor.
(4) Bursting safety factor. All critical (6) Rated speed. Rated speed is the
hydraulic and pneumatic components speed for which the device is designed
shall comply with the provisions of the and installed.
American National Standards Institute (7) Split-rail switch. An electric limit
standard, ANSI A92.2—1969, Section 4.9 switch operated mechanically by the
Bursting Safety Factor. Critical com- rollers on the manlift steps. It consists
ponents are those in which a failure of an additional hinged or ‘‘split’’ rail,
would result in a free fall or free rota- mounted on the regular guide rail, over
tion of the boom. All noncritical com- which the step rollers pass. It is
ponents shall have a bursting safety springloaded in the ‘‘split’’ position. If
factor of at least two to one. the step supports no load, the rollers
(5) ‘‘Welding standards.’’ All welding will ‘‘bump’’ over the switch; if a load-
shall conform to the following Amer- ed step should pass over the section,
ican Welding Society (AWS) Standards the split rail will be forced straight,
which are incorporated by reference as tripping the switch and opening the
specified in § 1910.6, as applicable: electrical circuit.
(i) Standard Qualification Procedure, (8) Step (platform). A step is a pas-
AWS B3.0—41. senger carrying unit.
(ii) Recommended Practices for (9) Travel. The travel is the distance
Automotive Welding Design, AWS between the centers of the top and bot-
D8.4–61. tom pulleys.
(iii) Standard Qualification of Weld- (b) General requirements—(1) Applica-
ing Procedures and Welders for Piping tion. This section applies to the con-
and Tubing, AWS D10.9–69. struction, maintenance, inspection,
(iv) Specifications for Welding High- and operation of manlifts in relation to
way and Railway Bridges, AWS D2.0–69. accident hazards. Manlifts covered by
this section consist of platforms or
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 brackets and accompanying handholds
FR 13439, Mar. 26, 1975; 55 FR 32014, Aug. 6, mounted on, or attached to an endless
1990; 61 FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996; 79 FR 37190, belt, operating vertically in one direc-
July 1, 2014; 81 FR 82999, Nov. 18, 2016]
tion only and being supported by, and
§ 1910.68 Manlifts. driven through pulleys, at the top and
bottom. These manlifts are intended
(a) Definitions applicable to this sec- for conveyance of persons only. It is
tion—(1) Handhold (Handgrip). A hand- not intended that this section cover
hold is a device attached to the belt moving stairways, elevators with en-
which can be grasped by the passenger closed platforms (‘‘Paternoster’’ ele-
to provide a means of maintaining bal- vators), gravity lifts, nor conveyors
ance. used only for conveying material. This
(2) Open type. One which has a hand- section applies to manlifts used to
grip surface fully exposed and capable carry only personnel trained and au-
of being encircled by the passenger’s thorized by the employer in their use.
fingers. (2) Purpose. The purpose of this sec-
(3) Closed type. A cup-shaped device, tion is to provide reasonable safety for
open at the top in the direction of trav- life and limb.
el of the step for which it is to be used, (3) Design requirements. All new
and closed at the bottom, into which manlift installations and equipment
the passenger may place his fingers. installed after the effective date of
(4) Limit switch. A device, the purpose these regulations shall meet the design
of which is to cut off the power to the requirements of the ‘‘American Na-
motor and apply the brake to stop the tional Safety Standard for Manlifts
carrier in the event that a loaded step ANSI A90.1–1969’’, which is incor-
passes the terminal landing. porated by reference as specified in
(5) Manlift. A device consisting of a § 1910.6, and the requirements of this
power-driven endless belt moving in section.
one direction only, and provided with (4) Reference to other codes and sub-
steps or platforms and handholds at- parts. The following codes and subparts
184
of this part are applicable to this sec- (a) Emergency landings shall be ac-
tion: Safety Code for Mechanical cessible from both the ‘‘up’’ and
Power Transmission Apparatus, ANSI ‘‘down’’ rungs of the manlift and shall
B15.1–1953 (R 1958); Safety Code for give access to the ladder required in
Fixed Ladders, ANSI A14.3–1956; and subparagraph (12) of this paragraph.
subparts D, O, and S. The preceding (b) Emergency landings shall be com-
ANSI standards are incorporated by pletely enclosed with a standard rail-
reference as specified in § 1910.6. ing and toeboard.
(5) Floor openings—(i) Allowable size. (c) Platforms constructed to give ac-
Floor openings for both the ‘‘up’’ and cess to bucket elevators or other equip-
‘‘down’’ runs shall be not less than 28 ment for the purpose of inspection, lu-
inches nor more than 36 inches in brication, and repair may also serve as
width for a 12-inch belt; not less than emergency landings under this rule. All
34 inches nor more than 38 inches for a such platforms will then be considered
14-inch belt; and not less than 36 inches part of the emergency landing and
nor more than 40 inches for a 16-inch shall be provided with standard rail-
belt and shall extend not less than 24 ings and toeboards.
inches, nor more than 28 inches from (7) Guards on underside of floor open-
the face of the belt. ings—(i) Fixed type. On the ascending
(ii) Uniformity. All floor openings for side of the manlift floor openings shall
a given manlift shall be uniform in size
be provided with a bevel guard or cone
and shall be approximately circular,
meeting the following requirements:
and each shall be located vertically
(a) The cone shall make an angle of
above the opening below it.
(6) Landing—(i) Vertical clearance. The not less than 45° with the horizontal.
clearanace between the floor or mount- An angle of 60° or greater shall be used
ing platform and the lower edge for the where ceiling heights permit.
conical guard above it required by sub- (b) The lower edge of this guard shall
paragraph (7) of this paragraph shall extend at least 42 inches outward from
not be less than 7 feet 6 inches. Where any handhold on the belt. It shall not
this clearance cannot be obtained no extend beyond the upper surface of the
access to the manlift shall be provided floor above.
and the manlift runway shall be en- (c) The cone shall be made of not less
closed where it passes through such than No. 18 U.S. gauge sheet steel or
floor. material of equivalent strength or
(ii) Clear landing space. The landing stiffness. The lower edge shall be rolled
space adjacent to the floor openings to a minimum diameter of one-half
shall be free from obstruction and kept inch and the interior shall be smooth
clear at all times. This landing space with no rivets, bolts or screws pro-
shall be at least 2 feet in width from truding.
the edge of the floor opening used for (ii) Floating type. In lieu of the fixed
mounting and dismounting. guards specified in subdivision (i) of
(iii) Lighting and landing. Adequate this subparagraph a floating type safe-
lighting, not less than 5-foot candles, ty cone may be used, such floating
shall be provided at each floor landing cones to be mounted on hinges at least
at all times when the lift is in oper- 6 inches below the underside of the
ation. floor and so constructed as to actuate
(iv) Landing surface. The landing sur- a limit switch should a force of 2
faces at the entrances and exits to the pounds be applied on the edge of the
manlift shall be constructed and main- cone closest to the hinge. The depth of
tained as to provide safe footing at all this floating cone need not exceed 12
times. inches.
(v) Emergency landings. Where there is (8) Protection of entrances and exits—
a travel of 50 feet or more between (i) Guard rail requirement. The en-
floor landings, one or more emergency trances and exits at all floor landings
landings shall be provided so that there affording access to the manlift shall be
will be a landing (either floor or emer- guarded by a maze (staggered railing)
gency) for every 25 feet or less of or a handrail equipped with self-closing

manlift travel. gates.
185
(ii) Construction. The rails shall be (11) Top arrangements—(i) Clearance

standard guardrails with toeboards from floor. A top clearance shall be pro-
that meet the requirements in subpart vided of at least 11 feet above the top
D of this part. terminal landing. This clearance shall
(iii) Gates. Gates, if used, shall open be maintained from a plane through
outward and shall be self-closing. Cor- each face of the belt to a vertical cylin-
ners of gates shall be rounded. drical plane having a diameter 2 feet
(iv) Maze. Maze or staggered openings greater than the diameter of the floor
shall offer no direct passage between opening, extending upward from the
enclosure and outer floor space. top floor to the ceiling on the up-run-
(v) Except where building layout pre- ning side of the belt. No encroachment
vents, entrances at all landings shall of structural or machine supporting
be in the same relative position. members within this space will be per-
(9) Guards for openings—(i) Construc- mitted.
tion. The floor opening at each landing (ii) Pulley clearance. (a) There shall be
shall be guarded on sides not used for a clearance of at least 5 feet between
entrance or exit by a wall, a railing the center of the head pulley shaft and
and toeboard or by panels of wire mesh any ceiling obstruction.
of suitable strength. (b) The center of the head pulley
(ii) Height and location. Such rails or shaft shall be not less than 6 feet above
guards shall be at least 42 inches in the top terminal landing.
height on the up-running side and 66 (iii) Emergency grab rail. An emer-
inches on the down-running side. gency grab bar or rail and platform
(10) Bottom arrangement—(i) Bottom shall be provided at the head pulley
landing. At the bottom landing the when the distance to the head pulley is
clear area shall be not smaller than the over 6 feet above the top landing, oth-
area enclosed by the guardrails on the erwise only a grab bar or rail is to be
floors above, and any wall in front of provided to permit the rider to swing
the down-running side of the belt shall free should the emergency stops be-
be not less than 48 inches from the face come inoperative.
of the belt. This space shall not be en- (12) Emergency exit ladder. A fixed
croached upon by stairs or ladders. metal ladder accessible from both the
(ii) Location of lower pulley. The lower ‘‘up’’ and ‘‘down’’ run of the manlift
(boot) pulley shall be installed so that shall be provided for the entire travel
it is supported by the lowest landing of the manlift. Such ladders shall meet
served. The sides of the pulley support the requirements in subpart D of this
shall be guarded to prevent contact part.
with the pulley or the steps. (13) Superstructure bracing. Manlift
(iii) Mounting platform. A mounting rails shall be secured in such a manner
platform shall be provided in front or as to avoid spreading, vibration, and
to one side of the uprun at the lowest misalinement.
landing, unless the floor level is such (14) Illumination—(i) General. Both
that the following requirement can be runs of the manlift shall be illumi-
met: The floor or platform shall be at nated at all times when the lift is in
or above the point at which the upper operation. An intensity of not less than
surface of the ascending step completes 1-foot candle shall be maintained at all
its turn and assumes a horizontal posi- points. (However, see subparagraph
tion. (6)(iii) of this paragraph for illumina-
(iv) Guardrails. To guard against per- tion requirements at landings.)
sons walking under a descending step, (ii) Control of illumination. Lighting of
the area on the downside of the manlift manlift runways shall be by means of
shall be guarded in accordance with circuits permanently tied in to the
subparagraph (8) of this paragraph. To building circuits (no switches), or shall
guard against a person getting between be controlled by switches at each land-
the mounting platform and an ascending. Where separate switches are pro-
ing step, the area between the belt and vided at each landing, any switch shall
the platform shall be protected by a turn on all lights necessary to illu-

guardrail. minate the entire runway.
186
(15) Weather protection. The entire the belt, and shall travel in the approx-
manlift and its driving mechanism imate horizontal position with the
shall be protected from the weather at ‘‘up’’ and ‘‘down’’ run of the belt.
all times. (v) Surfaces. The upper or working
(c) Mechanical requirements—(1) Ma- surfaces of the step shall be of a mate-
chines, general—(i) Brakes. Brakes pro- rial having inherent nonslip character-
vided for stopping and holding a istics (coefficient of friction not less
manlift shall be inherently self-engag- than 0.5) or shall be covered completely
ing, by requiring power or force from by a nonslip tread securely fastened to
an external source to cause disengage- it.
ment. The brake shall be electrically (vi) Strength of step supports. When
released, and shall be applied to the subjected to a load of 400 pounds ap-
motor shaft for direct-connected units plied at the approximate center of the
or to the input shaft for belt-driven step, step frames, or supports and their
units. The brake shall be capable of guides shall be of adequate strength to:
stopping and holding the manlift when (a) Prevent the disengagement of any
the descending side is loaded with 250 step roller.
lb on each step.
(b) Prevent any appreciable
(ii) Belt. (a) The belts shall be of
misalinement.
hard-woven canvas, rubber-coated can-
(c) Prevent any visible deformation
vas, leather, or other material meeting
of the steps or its support.
the strength requirements of paragraph
(b)(3) of this section and having a coef- (vii) Prohibition of steps without
ficient of friction such that when used handholds. No steps shall be provided
in conjunction with an adequate ten- unless there is a corresponding hand-
sion device it will meet the brake test hold above or below it meeting the re-
specified in subdivision (i) of this sub- quirements of paragraph (c)(4) of this
paragraph. section. If a step is removed for repairs
(b) The width of the belt shall be not or permanently, the handholds imme-
less than 12 inches for a travel not ex- diately above and below it shall be re-
ceeding 100 feet, not less than 14 inches moved before the lift is again placed in
for a travel greater than 100 feet but service.
not exceeding 150 feet and 16 inches for (4) Handholds—(i) Location.
a travel exceeding 150 feet. Handholds attached to the belt shall be
(c) A belt that has become torn while provided and installed so that they are
in use on a manlift shall not be spliced not less than 4 feet nor more than 4
and put back in service. feet 8 inches above the step tread.
(2) Speed—(i) Maximum speed. No These shall be so located as to be avail-
manlift designed for a speed in excess able on the both ‘‘up’’ and ‘‘down’’ run
of 80 feet per minute shall be installed. of the belt.
(ii) [Reserved] (ii) Size. The grab surface of the
(3) Platforms or steps—(i) Minimum handhold shall be not less than 41⁄2
depth. Steps or platforms shall be not inches in width, not less than 3 inches
less than 12 inches nor more than 14 in depth, and shall provide 2 inches of
inches deep, measured from the belt to clearance from the belt. Fastenings for
the edge of the step or platform. handholds shall be located not less
(ii) Width. The width of the step or than 1 inch from the edge of the belt.
platform shall be not less than the (iii) Strength. The handhold shall be
width of the belt to which it is at- capable of withstanding, without dam-
tached. age, a load of 300 pounds applied par-
(iii) Distance between steps. The dis- allel to the run of the belt.
tance between steps shall be equally (iv) Prohibition of handhold without
spaced and not less than 16 feet meas- steps. No handhold shall be provided
ured from the upper surface of one step without a corresponding step. If a
to the upper surface of the next step handhold is removed permanently or
above it. temporarily, the corresponding step
(iv) Angle of step. The surface of the and handhold for the opposite direction
step shall make approximately a right of travel shall also be removed before
angle with the ‘‘up’’ and ‘‘down’’ run of the lift is again placed in service.
187
(v) Type. All handholds shall be of the (ii) Location. This stop means shall be
closed type. within easy reach of the ascending and
(5) Up limit stops—(i) Requirements. descending runs of the belt.
Two separate automatic stop devices (iii) Operation. This stop means shall
shall be provided to cut off the power be so connected with the control lever
and apply the brake when a loaded step or operating mechanism that it will
passes the upper terminal landing. One cut off the power and apply the brake
of these shall consist of a split-rail when pulled in the direction of travel.
switch mechanically operated by the (iv) Rope. If rope is used, it shall be
step roller and located not more than 6 not less than three-eights inch in di-
inches above the top terminal landing. ameter. Wire rope, unless marlin-cov-
The second automatic stop device may ered, shall not be used.
consist of any of the following: (7) Instruction and warning signs—(i)
(a) Any split-rail switch placed 6 Instruction signs at landings or belts.
inches above and on the side opposite Signs of conspicuous and easily read
the first limit switch. style giving instructions for the use of
the manlift shall be posted at each
(b) An electronic device.
landing or stenciled on the belt.
(c) A switch actuated by a lever, rod, (a) [Reserved]
or plate, the latter to be placed on the (b) The instructions shall read ap-
‘‘up’’ side of the head pulley so as to proximately as follows:
just clear a passing step.
(ii) Manual reset location. After the Face the Belt.
Use the Handholds.
manlift has been stopped by a stop de- To Stop—Pull Rope.
vice it shall be necessary to reset the
automatic stop manually. The device (ii) Top floor warning sign and light.
shall be so located that a person reset- (a) At the top floor an illuminated sign
ting it shall have a clear view of both shall be displayed bearing the fol-
the ‘‘up’’ and ‘‘down’’ runs of the lowing wording:
manlift. It shall not be possible to ‘‘TOP FLOOR—GET OFF’’
reset the device from any step or plat-
form. Signs shall be in block letters not less
(iii) Cut-off point. The initial limit than 2 inches in height. This sign shall
stop device shall function so that the be located within easy view of an as-
manlift will be stopped before the load- cending passenger and not more than 2
ed step has reached a point 24 inches feet above the top terminal landing.
above the top terminal landing. (b) In addition to the sign required by
(iv) Electrical requirements. (a) Where paragraph (c)(7)(ii)(a) of this section, a
such switches open the main motor cir- red warning light of not less than 40-
cuit directly they shall be of the watt rating shall be provided imme-
multipole type. diately below the upper landing ter-
minal and so located as to shine in the
(b) Where electronic devices are used
passenger’s face.
they shall be so designed and installed (iii) Visitor warning. A conspicuous
that failure will result in shutting off sign having the following legend—AU-
the power to the driving motor. THORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY—shall
(c) Where flammable vapors or com- be displayed at each landing.
bustible dusts may be present, elec- (d) Operating rules—(1) Proper use of
trical installations shall be in accord- manlifts. No freight, packaged goods,
ance with the requirements of subpart pipe, lumber, or construction materials
S of this part for such locations. of any kind shall be handled on any
(d) Unless of the oil-immersed type manlift.
controller contacts carrying the main (2) [Reserved]
motor current shall be copper to car- (e) Periodic inspection—(1) Frequency.
bon or equal, except where the circuit All manlifts shall be inspected by a
is broken at two or more points simul- competent designated person at inter-
taneously. vals of not more than 30 days. Limit
(6) Emergency stop—(i) General. An switches shall be checked weekly.
emergency stop means shall be pro- Manlifts found to be unsafe shall not be
vided. operated until properly repaired.
188
(2) Items covered. This periodic inspec- the wearer’s head, neck, and shoulders
tion shall cover but is not limited to to protect the wearer from rebounding
the following items: abrasive.
Steps. (iii) Blast cleaning barrel. A complete
Step Fastenings. enclosure which rotates on an axis, or
Rails. which has an internal moving tread to
Rail Supports and Fastenings. tumble the parts, in order to expose
Rollers and Slides. various surfaces of the parts to the ac-
Belt and Belt Tension. tion of an automatic blast spray.
Handholds and Fastenings.
Floor Landings. (iv) Blast cleaning room. A complete
Guardrails. enclosure in which blasting operations
Lubrication. are performed and where the operator
Limit Switches. works inside of the room to operate the
Warning Signs and Lights. blasting nozzle and direct the flow of
Illumination. the abrasive material.
Drive Pulley.
Bottom (boot) Pulley and Clearance. (v) Blasting cabinet. An enclosure
Pulley Supports. where the operator stands outside and
Motor. operates the blasting nozzle through an
Driving Mechanism. opening or openings in the enclosure.
Brake. (vi) Clean air. Air of such purity that
Electrical Switches. it will not cause harm or discomfort to
Vibration and Misalignment.
‘‘Skip’’ on up or down run when mounting an individual if it is inhaled for ex-
step (indicating worn gears). tended periods of time.
(vii) Dust collector. A device or com-
(3) Inspection record. A certification bination of devices for separating dust
record shall be kept of each inspection from the air handled by an exhaust
which includes the date of the inspec- ventilation system.
tion, the signature of the person who
(viii) Exhaust ventilation system. A
performed the inspection and the serial
system for removing contaminated air
number, or other identifier, of the
from a space, comprising two or more
manlift which was inspected. This
of the following elements (a) enclosure
record of inspection shall be made
or hood, (b) duct work, (c) dust col-
available to the Assistant Secretary of
lecting equipment, (d) exhauster, and
Labor or a duly authorized representa-
(e) discharge stack.
tive.
(ix) Particulate-filter respirator. An air
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 purifying respirator, commonly re-
FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 51 FR 34560, Sept. 29, ferred to as a dust or a fume respirator,
1986; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 55 FR 32014, which removes most of the dust or
Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996; 72 FR
71068, Dec. 14, 2007; 81 FR 82999, Nov. 18, 2016]
fume from the air passing through the
device.
(x) Respirable dust. Airborne dust in
Subpart G—Occupational Health sizes capable of passing through the
and Environmental Control upper respiratory system to reach the
lower lung passages.
AUTHORITY: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Sec- (xi) Rotary blast cleaning table. An en-
retary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), closure where the pieces to be cleaned
8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55
FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017),
are positioned on a rotating table and
5–2002 (67 FR 50017), 5–2007 (72 FR 31159), 4– are passed automatically through a se-
2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as ries of blast sprays.
applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. (xii) Abrasive blasting. The forcible
application of an abrasive to a surface
§ 1910.94 Ventilation. by pneumatic pressure, hydraulic pres-
(a) Abrasive blasting—(1) Definitions sure, or centrifugal force.
applicable to this paragraph—(i) Abra- (2) Dust hazards from abrasive blasting.
sive. A solid substance used in an abra- (i) Abrasives and the surface coatings
sive blasting operation. on the materials blasted are shattered
(ii) Abrasive-blasting respirator. A res- and pulverized during blasting oper-

pirator constructed so that it covers ations and the dust formed will contain
189
particles of respirable size. The com- cient period of time to remove the
position and toxicity of the dust from dusty air within the enclosure.
these sources shall be considered in (d) Safety glass protected by screen-
making an evaluation of the potential ing shall be used in observation win-
health hazards. dows, where hard deep-cutting abra-
(ii) The concentration of respirable sives are used.
dust or fume in the breathing zone of (e) Slit abrasive-resistant baffles
the abrasive-blasting operator or any shall be installed in multiple sets at all
other worker shall be kept below the small access openings where dust
levels specified in § 1910.1000. might escape, and shall be inspected
(iii) Organic abrasives which are regularly and replaced when needed.
combustible shall be used only in auto- (1) Doors shall be flanged and tight
matic systems. Where flammable or ex- when closed.
plosive dust mixtures may be present, (2) Doors on blast-cleaning rooms
the construction of the equipment, in- shall be operable from both inside and
cluding the exhaust system and all outside, except that where there is a
electric wiring, shall conform to the small operator access door, the large
requirements of American National work access door may be closed or
Standard Installation of Blower and opened from the outside only.
Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and (ii) [Reserved]
Vapor Removal or Conveying, Z33.1– (4) Exhaust ventilation systems. (i) The
1961 (NFPA 91–1961), which is incor- construction, installation, inspection,
porated by reference as specified in and maintenance of exhaust systems
§ 1910.6, and subpart S of this part. The shall conform to the principles and re-
blast nozzle shall be bonded and quirements set forth in American Na-
grounded to prevent the build up of tional Standard Fundamentals Gov-
static charges. Where flammable or ex- erning the Design and Operation of
plosive dust mixtures may be present, Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2–1960, and
the abrasive blasting enclosure, the ANSI Z33.1–1961, which is incorporated
ducts, and the dust collector shall be by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
constructed with loose panels or explo- (a) When dust leaks are noted, re-
sion venting areas, located on sides pairs shall be made as soon as possible.
away from any occupied area, to pro- (b) The static pressure drop at the ex-
vide for pressure relief in case of explo- haust ducts leading from the equip-
sion, following the principles set forth ment shall be checked when the instal-
in the National Fire Protection Asso- lation is completed and periodically
ciation Explosion Venting Guide, thereafter to assure continued satisfac-
NFPA 68–1954, which is incorporated by tory operation. Whenever an appre-
reference as specified in § 1910.6. ciable change in the pressure drop indi-
(3) Blast-cleaning enclosures. (i) Blast- cates a partial blockage, the system
cleaning enclosures shall be exhaust shall be cleaned and returned to nor-
ventilated in such a way that a contin- mal operating condition.
uous inward flow of air will be main- (ii) In installations where the abra-
tained at all openings in the enclosure sive is recirculated, the exhaust ven-
during the blasting operation. tilation system for the blasting enclo-
(a) All air inlets and access openings sure shall not be relied upon for the re-
shall be baffled or so arranged that by moval of fines from the spent abrasive
the combination of inward air flow and instead of an abrasive separator. An
baffling the escape of abrasive or dust abrasive separator shall be provided for
particules into an adjacent work area the purpose.
will be minimized and visible spurts of (iii) The air exhausted from blast-
dust will not be observed. cleaning equipment shall be discharged
(b) The rate of exhaust shall be suffi- through dust collecting equipment.
cient to provide prompt clearance of Dust collectors shall be set up so that
the dust-laden air within the enclosure the accumulated dust can be emptied
after the cessation of blasting. and removed without contaminating
(c) Before the enclosure is opened, other working areas.
the blast shall be turned off and the ex- (5) Personal protective equipment. (i)
haust system shall be run for a suffi- Employers must use only respirators
190
approved by the National Institute for (b) Equipment for protection of the
Occupational Safety and Health eyes and face shall be supplied to the
(NIOSH) under 42 CFR part 84 to pro- operator when the respirator design
tect employees from dusts produced does not provide such protection and to
during abrasive-blasting operations. any other personnel working in the vi-
(ii) Abrasive-blasting respirators cinity of abrasive blasting operations.
shall be worn by all abrasive-blasting This equipment shall conform to the
operators: requirements of § 1910.133.
(a) When working inside of blast- (6) Air supply and air compressors. Air
cleaning rooms, or for abrasive-blasting respirators must
(b) When using silica sand in manual be free of harmful quantities of dusts,
blasting operations where the nozzle mists, or noxious gases, and must meet
and blast are not physically separated the requirements for supplied-air qual-
from the operator in an exhaust venti- ity and use specified in 29 CFR
lated enclosure, or 1910.134(i).
(7) Operational procedures and general
(c) Where concentrations of toxic
safety. Dust shall not be permitted to
dust dispersed by the abrasive blasting
accumulate on the floor or on ledges
may exceed the limits set in § 1910.1000
outside of an abrasive-blasting enclo-
and the nozzle and blast are not phys-
sure, and dust spills shall be cleaned up
ically separated from the operator in
promptly. Aisles and walkways shall be
an exhaust-ventilated enclosure.
kept clear of steel shot or similar abra-
(iii) Properly fitted particulate-filter sive which may create a slipping haz-
respirators, commonly referred to as ard.
dust-filter respirators, may be used for (8) Scope. This paragraph (a) applies
short, intermittent, or occasional dust to all operations where an abrasive is
exposures such as cleanup, dumping of forcibly applied to a surface by pneu-
dust collectors, or unloading shipments matic or hydraulic pressure, or by cen-
of sand at a receiving point when it is trifugal force. It does not apply to
not feasible to control the dust by en- steam blasting, or steam cleaning, or
closure, exhaust ventilation, or other hydraulic cleaning methods where
means. The respirators used must be work is done without the aid of abra-
approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part sives.
84 for protection against the specific (b) Grinding, polishing, and buffing op-
type of dust encountered. erations—(1) Definitions applicable to this
(a) Dust-filter respirators may be paragraph—(i) Abrasive cutting-off
used to protect the operator of outside wheels. Organic-bonded wheels, the
abrasive-blasting operations where thickness of which is not more than
nonsilica abrasives are used on mate- one forty-eighth of their diameter for
rials having low toxicities. those up to, and including, 20 inches in
(b) Dust-filter respirators shall not be diameter, and not more than one-six-
used for continuous protection where tieth of their diameter for those larger
silica sand is used as the blasting abra- than 20 inches in diameter, used for a
sive, or toxic materials are blasted. multitude of operations variously
(iv) For employees who use res- known as cutting, cutting off,
pirators required by this section, the grooving, slotting, coping, and joint-
employer must implement a res- ing, and the like. The wheels may be
piratory protection program in accord- ‘‘solid’’ consisting of organic-bonded
ance with 29 CFR 1910.134. abrasive material throughout, ‘‘steel
(v) Operators shall be equipped with centered’’ consisting of a steel disc
heavy canvas or leather gloves and with a rim of organic-bonded material
aprons or equivalent protection to pro- moulded around the periphery, or of
tect them from the impact of abra- the ‘‘inserted tooth’’ type consisting of
sives. Safety shoes shall be worn to a steel disc with organic-bonded abra-
protect against foot injury where sive teeth or inserts mechanically se-
heavy pieces of work are handled. cured around the periphery.
(a) Protective footwear must comply (ii) Belts. All power-driven, flexible,
with the requirements specified by 29 coated bands used for grinding,

CFR 1910.136(b)(1). polishing, or buffing purposes.
191
(iii) Branch pipe. The part of an ex- buffing wheel mounted in such manner
haust system piping that is connected that it may be manually manipulated.
directly to the hood or enclosure. (xv) Scratch brush wheels. All power-
(iv) Cradle. A movable fixture, upon driven rotatable wheels made from
which the part to be ground or polished wire or bristles, and used for scratch
is placed. cleaning and brushing purposes.
(v) Disc wheels. All power-driven ro- (xvi) Swing-frame grinder. Any power-
tatable discs faced with abrasive mate- driven rotatable grinding, polishing, or
rials, artificial or natural, and used for buffing wheel mounted in such a man-
grinding or polishing on the side of the ner that the wheel with its supporting
assembled disc. framework can be manipulated over
(vi) Entry loss. The loss in static pres- stationary objects.
sure caused by air flowing into a duct (xvii) Velocity pressure (vp). The ki-
or hood. It is usually expressed in netic pressure in the direction of flow
inches of water gauge. necessary to cause a fluid at rest to
(vii) Exhaust system. A system con- flow at a given velocity. It is usually
sisting of branch pipes connected to expressed in inches of water gauge.
hoods or enclosures, one or more head- (xviii) Vertical spindle disc grinder. A
er pipes, an exhaust fan, means for sep- grinding machine having a vertical, ro-
arating solid contaminants from the tatable power-driven spindle carrying a
air flowing in the system, and a dis- horizontal abrasive disc wheel.
charge stack to outside. (2) Application. Wherever dry grind-
(viii) Grinding wheels. All power-driving, dry polishing or buffing is per-
en rotatable grinding or abrasive formed, and employee exposure, with-
wheels, except disc wheels as defined in out regard to the use of respirators, ex-
this standard, consisting of abrasive ceeds the permissible exposure limits
particles held together by artificial or prescribed in § 1910.1000 or other sec-
natural bonds and used for peripheral tions of this part, a local exhaust ven-
grinding. tilation system shall be provided and
(ix) Header pipe (main pipe). A pipe used to maintain employee exposures
into which one or more branch pipes within the prescribed limits.
enter and which connects such branch (3) Hood and branch pipe requirements.
pipes to the remainder of the exhaust (i) Hoods connected to exhaust systems
system. shall be used, and such hoods shall be
(x) Hoods and enclosures. The partial designed, located, and placed so that
or complete enclosure around the the dust or dirt particles shall fall or
wheel or disc through which air enters be projected into the hoods in the di-
an exhaust system during operation. rection of the air flow. No wheels,
(xi) Horizontal double-spindle disc discs, straps, or belts shall be operated
grinder. A grinding machine carrying in such manner and in such direction
two power-driven, rotatable, coaxial, as to cause the dust and dirt particles
horizontal spindles upon the inside to be thrown into the operator’s
ends of which are mounted abrasive breathing zone.
disc wheels used for grinding two sur- (ii) Grinding wheels on floor stands,
faces simultaneously. pedestals, benches, and special-purpose
(xii) Horizontal single-spindle disc grinding machines and abrasive cut-
grinder. A grinding machine carrying ting-off wheels shall have not less than
an abrasive disc wheel upon one or the minimum exhaust volumes shown
both ends of a power-driven, rotatable in Table G–4 with a recommended min-
single horizontal spindle. imum duct velocity of 4,500 feet per
(xiii) Polishing and buffing wheels. All minute in the branch and 3,500 feet per
power-driven rotatable wheels com- minute in the main. The entry losses
posed all or in part of textile fabrics, from all hoods except the vertical-spin-
wood, felt, leather, paper, and may be dle disc grinder hood, shall equal 0.65
coated with abrasives on the periphery velocity pressure for a straight takeoff
of the wheel for purposes of polishing, and 0.45 velocity pressure for a tapered
buffing, and light grinding. takeoff. The entry loss for the vertical-
(xiv) Portable grinder. Any power-driv- spindle disc grinder hood is shown in
en rotatable grinding, polishing, or figure G–1 (following § 1910.94(b)).
192
TABLE G–4—GRINDING AND ABRASIVE CUTTING- having exhaust volumes as shown in

OFF WHEELS Table G–7.
Minimum TABLE G–7—HORIZONTAL DOUBLE-SPINDLE
Wheel exhaust
Wheel diameter (inches) width DISC GRINDER
volume
(inches) (feet3/min.)
Exhaust
To 9 ............................................... 11⁄2 220 Disc diameter (inches) volume
Over 9 to 16 .................................. 2 390 (ft.3/min.)
Over 16 to 19 ................................ 3 500
Over 19 to 24 ................................ 4 610 Up to 19 ............................................................... 610
Over 24 to 30 ................................ 5 880 Over 19 to 25 ...................................................... 880
Over 30 to 36 ................................ 6 1,200 Over 25 to 30 ...................................................... 1,200
Over 30 to 53 ...................................................... 1,770
Over 53 to 72 ...................................................... 6,280
For any wheel wider than wheel diame-
ters shown in Table G–4, increase the (vi) Grinding wheels or discs for
exhaust volume by the ratio of the new vertical single-spindle disc grinders
width to the width shown. shall be encircled with hoods to remove
Example: If wheel width = 41⁄2 inches, then the dust generated in the operation.
The hoods shall be connected to one or
4.5 ÷ 4 × 610 = 686 (rounded to 690). more branch pipes having exhaust vol-
(iii) Scratch-brush wheels and all umes as shown in Table G–8.
buffing and polishing wheels mounted
on floor stands, pedestals, benches, or TABLE G–8—VERTICAL SPINDLE DISC GRINDER
special-purpose machines shall have One-half or more Disc not cov-
not less than the minimum exhaust of disc covered ered
volume shown in Table G–5. Disc diameter (inches) Ex- Ex-
Num- haust Num- haust
TABLE G–5—BUFFING AND POLISHING WHEELS ber 1 foot3/ ber 1 foot3/
min.) min.
Minimum
Wheel Up to 20 ..................... 1 500 2 780
exhaust
Wheel diameter (inches) width Over 20 to 30 ............ 2 780 2 1,480
volume
(inches) Over 30 to 53 ............ 2 1,770 4 3,530
(feet3/min.)
Over 53 to 72 ............ 2 3,140 5 6,010
To 9 ............................................... 2 300 1 Number of exhaust outlets around periphery of hood, or
Over 9 to 16 .................................. 3 500 equal distribution provided by other means.
Over 16 to 19 ................................ 4 610
Over 19 to 24 ................................ 5 740 (vii) Grinding and polishing belts
Over 24 to 30 ................................ 6 1,040
Over 30 to 36 ................................ 6 1,200
shall be provided with hoods to remove
dust and dirt generated in the oper-
(iv) Grinding wheels or discs for hori- ations and the hoods shall be connected
zontal single-spindle disc grinders shall to branch pipes having exhaust vol-
be hooded to collect the dust or dirt umes as shown in Table G–9.
generated by the grinding operation TABLE G–9—GRINDING AND POLISHING BELTS
and the hoods shall be connected to
branch pipes having exhaust volumes Exhaust
Belts width (inches) volume
as shown in Table G–6. (ft.3/min.)
TABLE G–6—HORIZONTAL SINGLE-SPINDLE DISC Up to 3 ................................................................. 220

GRINDER Over 3 to 5 .......................................................... 300
Over 5 to 7 .......................................................... 390
Over 7 to 9 .......................................................... 500
Exhaust
Disc diameter (inches) volume Over 9 to 11 ........................................................ 610
(ft.3/min.) Over 11 to 13 ...................................................... 740
Up to 12 ............................................................... 220 (viii) Cradles and swing-frame grind-

Over 12 to 19 ...................................................... 390
Over 19 to 30 ...................................................... 610 ers. Where cradles are used for han-
Over 30 to 36 ...................................................... 880 dling the parts to be ground, polished,
or buffed, requiring large partial enclo-
(v) Grinding wheels or discs for hori- sures to house the complete operation,
zontal double-spindle disc grinders a minimum average air velocity of 150
shall have a hood enclosing the grind- feet per minute shall be maintained
ing chamber and the hood shall be con- over the entire opening of the enclo-
nected to one or more branch pipes sure. Swing-frame grinders shall also
193
be exhausted in the same manner as (v) Hoods for polishing and buffing
provided for cradles. (See fig. G–3) and scratch-brush wheels shall be con-
(ix) Where the work is outside the structed to conform as closely to figure
hood, air volumes must be increased as G–4 as the nature of the work will per-
shown in American Standard Fun- mit.
damentals Governing the Design and (vi) Cradle grinding and polishing op-
Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, erations shall be performed within a
Z9.2–1960 (section 4, exhaust hoods). partial enclosure similar to figure G–5.
(4) Exhaust systems. (i) Exhaust sys- The operator shall be positioned out-
tems for grinding, polishing, and buff- side the working face of the opening of
ing operations should be designed in the enclosure. The face opening of the
accordance with American Standard enclosure should not be any greater in
Fundamentals Governing the Design area than that actually required for
and Operation of Local Exhaust Sys- the performance of the operation and
tems, Z9.2–1960. the average air velocity into the work-
(ii) Exhaust systems for grinding, ing face of the enclosure shall not be
polishing, and buffing operations shall less than 150 feet per minute.
be tested in the manner described in (vii) Hoods for horizontal single-spin-
American Standard Fundamentals
dle disc grinders shall be constructed
Governing the Design and Operation of
to conform as closely as possible to the
Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2–1960.
hood shown in figure G–6. It is essen-
(iii) All exhaust systems shall be pro-
tial that there be a space between the
vided with suitable dust collectors.
back of the wheel and the hood, and a
(5) Hood and enclosure design. (i)(a) It
space around the periphery of the
is the dual function of grinding and ab-
wheel of at least 1 inch in order to per-
rasive cutting-off wheel hoods to pro-
tect the operator from the hazards of mit the suction to act around the
bursting wheels, as well as to provide a wheel periphery. The opening on the
means for the removal of dust and dirt side of the disc shall be no larger than
generated. All hoods shall be not less is required for the grinding operation,
in structural strength than specified in but must never be less than twice the
Tables O–1 and O–9 of § 1910.215. area of the branch outlet.
(b) Due to the variety of work and (viii) Horizontal double-spindle disc
types of grinding machines employed, grinders shall have a hood encircling
it is necessary to develop hoods adapt- the wheels and grinding chamber simi-
able to the particular machine in ques- lar to that illustrated in figure G–7.
tion, and such hoods shall be located as The openings for passing the work into
close as possible to the operation. the grinding chamber should be kept as
(ii) Exhaust hoods for floor stands, small as possible, but must never be
pedestals, and bench grinders shall be less than twice the area of the branch
designed in accordance with figure G–2. outlets.
The adjustable tongue shown in the fig- (ix) Vertical-spindle disc grinders
ure shall be kept in working order and shall be encircled with a hood so con-
shall be adjusted within one-fourth structed that the heavy dust is drawn
inch of the wheel periphery at all off a surface of the disc and the lighter
times. dust exhausted through a continuous
(iii) Swing-frame grinders shall be slot at the top of the hood as shown in
provided with exhaust booths as indi- figure G–1.
cated in figure G–3. (x) Grinding and polishing belt hoods
(iv) Portable grinding operations, shall be constructed as close to the op-
whenever the nature of the work per- eration as possible. The hood should
mits, shall be conducted within a par- extend almost to the belt, and 1-inch
tial enclosure. The opening in the en-
wide openings should be provided on ei-
closure shall be no larger than is actu-
ther side. Figure G–8 shows a typical
ally required in the operation and an
average face air velocity of not less hood for a belt operation.
than 200 feet per minute shall be main-

tained.
194
Dia D. inches Exhaust E Volume

Exhausted Note
No at 4,500 ft/
Min. Max. Dia.
Pipes min ft3/min
........................................................ 20 1 41⁄4 500 When one-half or more of the disc can be hood-
ed, use exhaust ducts as shown at the left.
Over 20 ......................................... 30 2 4 780
Over 30 ......................................... 72 2 6 1,770
Over 53 ......................................... 72 2 8 3,140
........................................................ 20 2 4 780 When no hood can be used over disc, use ex-
haust ducts as shown at left.
Over 20 ......................................... 20 2 4 780
Over 30 ......................................... 30 2 51⁄2 1,480
Over 53 ......................................... 53 4 6 3,530
72 5 7 6,010
Entry loss = 1.0 slot velocity pressure + 0.5 branch velocity pressure.
Minimum slot velocity = 2,000 ft/min—1⁄2-inch slot width.
195
EC27OC91.015</GPH>
Wheel dimension, inches Volume of

Exhaust air at
Diameter outlet, 4,500 ft/
Width, Max inches E min
Min=d Max=D
9 11⁄2 3 220
Over 9 ........................................................................................................... 16 2 4 390
Over 16 ......................................................................................................... 19 3 4 ⁄
12 500
Over 19 ......................................................................................................... 24 4 5 610
Over 24 ......................................................................................................... 30 5 6 880
Over 30 ......................................................................................................... 36 6 7 1,200
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff.
196
EC27OC91.016</GPH>
197
EC27OC91.017</GPH>
Standard Buffing and Polishing Hood
Wheel dimension, inches Volume of

Exhaust air at
Diameter outlet, 4,500 ft/
Width, Max inches E min
Min=d Max=D
9 2 31⁄2 300
Over 9 ........................................................................................................... 16 3 4 500
Over 16 ......................................................................................................... 19 4 5 610
Over 19 ......................................................................................................... 24 5 51⁄2 740
Over 24 ......................................................................................................... 30 6 61⁄2 1.040
Over 30 ......................................................................................................... 36 6 7 1.200
Entry loss = 0.15 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff.
198
EC27OC91.018</GPH>
199
EC27OC91.019</GPH>
Dia D, inches Volume ex-

Exhaust E, hausted at
dia. inches 4,500 ft/min
Min. Max. ft3/min
12 3 220
Over 12 .............................................................................................................................. 19 4 390
Over 19 .............................................................................................................................. 30 5 610
Over 30 .............................................................................................................................. 36 6 880
NOTE: If grinding wheels are used for disc grinding purposes, hoods must conform to structural strength and materials as de-
scribed in 9.1.
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff.
200
EC27OC91.020</GPH>
Disc dia. inches Exhaust E Volume

exhaust at
4,500 ft/ Note
Min. Max. No Pipes Dia. min. ft3/
min
19 1 5 610
Over 19 .................................. 25 1 6 880 When width ‘‘W’’ permits, exhaust ducts
should be as near heaviest grinding as
possible.
Over 25 .................................. 30 1 7 1,200
Over 30 .................................. 53 2 6 1,770
Over 53 .................................. 72 4 8 6,280
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff.
201
EC27OC91.021</GPH>
Exhaust (iv) Minimum maintained velocity. Min-

Belt width W. Inches volume. imum maintained velocity is the veloc-
ft.1/min
ity of air movement which must be
Up to 3 ................................................................. 220 maintained in order to meet minimum
3 to 5 ................................................................... 300 specified requirements for health and
5 to 7 ................................................................... 390
7 to 9 ................................................................... 500
safety.
9 to 11 ................................................................. 610 (2) Location and application. Spray
11 to 13 ............................................................... 740 booths or spray rooms are to be used to
Minimum duct velocity = 4,500 ft/min branch, 3,500 ft/min
enclose or confine all operations.
main. Spray-finishing operations shall be lo-
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65 cated as provided in sections 201
velocity pressure for straight takeoff.
through 206 of the Standard for Spray
(6) Scope. This paragraph (b), pre- Finishing Using Flammable and Com-
scribes the use of exhaust hood enclo- bustible Materials, NFPA No. 33–1969.
sures and systems in removing dust, (3) Design and construction of spray
dirt, fumes, and gases generated booths. (i) Spray booths shall be de-
through the grinding, polishing, or signed and constructed in accordance
buffing of ferrous and nonferrous met- with § 1910.107(b)(1) through (b)(4) and
als. (b)(6) through (b)(10). For a more de-
(c) Spray finishing operations—(1) Defi- tailed discussion of fundamentals re-
nitions applicable to this paragraph—(i) lating to this subject, see ANSI Z9.2–
Spray-finishing operations. Spray-fin- 1960, which is incorporated by reference
ishing operations are employment of as specified in § 1910.6.
methods wherein organic or inorganic (a) Lights, motors, electrical equip-
materials are utilized in dispersed form ment, and other sources of ignition
for deposit on surfaces to be coated, shall conform to the requirements of
treated, or cleaned. Such methods of § 1910.107(b)(10) and (c).
deposit may involve either automatic, (b) In no case shall combustible ma-
manual, or electrostatic deposition but terial be used in the construction of a
do not include metal spraying or met- spray booth and supply or exhaust duct
allizing, dipping, flow coating, roller connected to it.
coating, tumbling, centrifuging, or (ii) Unobstructed walkways shall not
spray washing and degreasing as con- be less than 61⁄2 feet high and shall be
ducted in self-contained washing and maintained clear of obstruction from
degreasing machines or systems. any work location in the booth to a
(ii) Spray booth. Spray booths are de- booth exit or open booth front. In
fined and described in § 1910.107(a). booths where the open front is the only
(iii) Spray room. A spray room is a exit, such exits shall be not less than 3
room in which spray-finishing oper- feet wide. In booths having multiple
ations not conducted in a spray booth exits, such exits shall not be less than
are performed separately from other 2 feet wide, provided that the max-
areas. imum distance from the work location
202
EC27OC91.022</GPH>
to the exit is 25 feet or less. Where (4) Design and construction of spray
booth exits are provided with doors, rooms. (i) Spray rooms, including
such doors shall open outward from the floors, shall be constructed of masonry,
booth. concrete, or other noncombustible ma-
(iii) Baffles, distribution plates, and terial.
dry-type overspray collectors shall (ii) Spray rooms shall have non-
conform to the requirements of combustible fire doors and shutters.
§ 1910.107(b)(4) and (b)(5). (iii) Spray rooms shall be adequately
(a) Overspray filters shall be in- ventilated so that the atmosphere in
stalled and maintained in accordance the breathing zone of the operator
with the requirements of § 1910.107(b)(5), shall be maintained in accordance with
and shall only be in a location easily the requirements of paragraph (c)(6)(ii)
accessible for inspection, cleaning, or of this section.
replacement. (iv) Spray rooms used for production
(b) Where effective means, inde- spray-finishing operations shall con-
pendent of the overspray filters, are inform to the requirements for spray
stalled which will result in design air booths.
distribution across the booth cross sec- (5) Ventilation. (i) Ventilation shall be
tion, it is permissible to operate the provided in accordance with provisions
booth without the filters in place. of § 1910.107(d), and in accordance with
the following:
(iv) (a) For wet or water-wash spray
(a) Where a fan plenum is used to
booths, the water-chamber enclosure,
equalize or control the distribution of
within which intimate contact of con-
exhaust air movement through the
taminated air and cleaning water or
booth, it shall be of sufficient strength
other cleaning medium is maintained,
or rigidity to withstand the differential
if made of steel, shall be 18 gage or
air pressure or other superficially im-
heavier and adequately protected
posed loads for which the equipment is
against corrosion.
designed and also to facilitate clean-
(b) Chambers may include scrubber ing. Construction specifications shall
spray nozzles, headers, troughs, or be at least equivalent to those of para-
other devices. Chambers shall be pro- graph (c)(5)(iii) of this section.
vided with adequate means for creating (b) [Reserved]
and maintaining scrubbing action for (ii) Inlet or supply ductwork used to
removal of particulate matter from the transport makeup air to spray booths
exhaust air stream. or surrounding areas shall be con-
(v) Collecting tanks shall be of weld- structed of noncombustible materials.
ed steel construction or other suitable (a) If negative pressure exists within
non-combustible material. If pits are inlet ductwork, all seams and joints
used as collecting tanks, they shall be shall be sealed if there is a possibility
concrete, masonry, or other material of infiltration of harmful quantities of
having similar properties. noxious gases, fumes, or mists from
(a) Tanks shall be provided with areas through which ductwork passes.
weirs, skimmer plates, or screens to (b) Inlet ductwork shall be sized in
prevent sludge and floating paint from accordance with volume flow require-
entering the pump suction box. Means ments and provide design air require-
for automatically maintaining the ments at the spray booth.
proper water level shall also be pro- (c) Inlet ductwork shall be ade-
vided. Fresh water inlets shall not be quately supported throughout its
submerged. They shall terminate at length to sustain at least its own
least one pipe diameter above the safe- weight plus any negative pressure
ty overflow level of the tank. which is exerted upon it under normal
(b) Tanks shall be so constructed as operating conditions.
to discourage accumulation of haz- (iii)(a) Exhaust ductwork shall be
ardous deposits. adequately supported throughout its
(vi) Pump manifolds, risers, and length to sustain its weight plus any
headers shall be adequately sized to in- normal accumulation in interior dur-
sure sufficient water flow to provide ef- ing normal operating conditions and
ficient operation of the water chamber. any negative pressure exerted upon it.
203
(b) Exhaust ductwork shall be sized wall shall be protected at the point of
in accordance with good design prac- penetration by open space or fire-resis-
tice which shall include consideration tive material between the duct and the
of fan capacity, length of duct, number roof or wall. When ducts pass through
of turns and elbows, variation in size, firewalls, they shall be provided with
volume, and character of materials automatic fire dampers on both sides of
being exhausted. See American Na- the wall, except that three-eighth-inch
tional Standard Z9.2–1960 for further steel plates may be used in lieu of
details and explanation concerning ele- automatic fire dampers for ducts not
ments of design.
exceeding 18 inches in diameter.
(c) Longitudinal joints in sheet steel
ductwork shall be either lock-seamed, (g) Ductwork used for ventilating any
riveted, or welded. For other than steel process covered in this standard shall
construction, equivalent securing of not be connected to ducts ventilating
joints shall be provided. any other process or any chimney or
(d) Circumferential joints in duct- flue used for conveying any products of
work shall be substantially fastened combustion.
together and lapped in the direction of (6) Velocity and air flow requirements.
airflow. At least every fourth joint (i) Except where a spray booth has an
shall be provided with connecting adequate air replacement system, the
flanges, bolted together, or of equiva- velocity of air into all openings of a
lent fastening security. spray booth shall be not less than that
(e) Inspection or clean-out doors shall specified in Table G–10 for the oper-
be provided for every 9 to 12 feet of run- ating conditions specified. An adequate
ning length for ducts up to 12 inches in air replacement system is one which
diameter, but the distance between
introduces replacement air upstream
cleanout doors may be greater for larg-
or above the object being sprayed and
er pipes. A clean-out door or doors
shall be provided for servicing the fan, is so designed that the velocity of air
and where necessary, a drain shall be in the booth cross section is not less
provided. than that specified in Table G–10 when
(f) Where ductwork passes through a measured upstream or above the object
combustible roof or wall, the roof or being sprayed.
TABLE G–10—MINIMUM MAINTAINED VELOCITIES INTO SPRAY BOOTHS

Airflow velocities, f.p.m.
Crossdraft,
Operating conditions for objects completely inside booth f.p.m. Design Range
Electrostatic and automatic airless operation contained in booth Negligible .... 50 large booth ...................... 50–75
without operator.
100 small booth .................... 75–125
Air-operated guns, manual or automatic ............................................ Up to 50 ...... 100 large booth .................... 75–125
150 small booth .................... 125–175

Air-operated guns, manual or automatic ............................................ Up to 100 .... 150 large booth .................... 125–175
200 small booth .................... 150–250

NOTES:
(1) Attention is invited to the fact that the effectiveness of the spray booth is dependent upon the relationship of the depth of
the booth to its height and width.
(2) Crossdrafts can be eliminated through proper design and such design should be sought. Crossdrafts in excess of
100fpm (feet per minute) should not be permitted.
(3) Excessive air pressures result in loss of both efficiency and material waste in addition to creating a backlash that may
carry overspray and fumes into adjacent work areas.
(4) Booths should be designed with velocities shown in the column headed ‘‘Design.’’ However, booths operating with veloci-
ties shown in the column headed ‘‘Range’’ are in compliance with this standard.
(ii) In addition to the requirements the lower explosive limit of the solvent
in paragraph (c)(6)(i) of this section the being sprayed. An example of the meth-
total air volume exhausted through a od of calculating this volume is given
spray booth shall be such as to dilute below.

solvent vapor to at least 25 percent of
204
Example: To determine the lower explosive TABLE G–11—LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT OF
limits of the most common solvents used in SOME COMMONLY USED SOLVENTS—Continued
spray finishing, see Table G–11. Column 1
gives the number of cubic feet of vapor per Cubic feet Lower ex-
gallon of solvent and column 2 gives the plosive
per gallon limit in per-
lower explosive limit (LEL) in percentage by Solvent of vapor of cent by
liquid at 70
volume of air. Note that the quantity of sol- °F. volume of
vent will be diminished by the quantity of air at 70 °F
solids and nonflammables contained in the Propyl Alcohol (iso) ....................... 44.0 2.0
finish. Toluene .......................................... 30.4 1.4
To determine the volume of air in cubic Turpentine ..................................... 20.8 0.8
feet necessary to dilute the vapor from 1 gal- Xylene (o) ...................................... 26.4 1.0
lon of solvent to 25 percent of the lower ex- 1 At 212 °F.
plosive limit, apply the following formula:
(iii)(a) When an operator is in a booth
Dilution volume required per gallon of sol-
vent = 4 (100¥LEL) (cubic feet of vapor
downstream from the object being
per gallon) ÷ LEL sprayed, an air-supplied respirator or
other type of respirator must be used
Using toluene as the solvent. by employees that has been approved
(1) LEL of toluene from Table G–11, column by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84 for the
2, is 1.4 percent. material being sprayed.
(2) Cubic feet of vapor per gallon from
(b) Where downdraft booths are pro-
Table G–11, column 1, is 30.4 cubic feet per
gallon. vided with doors, such doors shall be
(3) Dilution volume required= closed when spray painting.
(7) Make-up air. (i) Clean fresh air,
4 (100¥1.4) 30.4 ÷ 1.4 = 8,564 cubic feet.
free of contamination from adjacent
(4) To convert to cubic feet per minute of industrial exhaust systems, chimneys,
required ventilation, multiply the dilution stacks, or vents, shall be supplied to a
volume required per gallon of solvent by the spray booth or room in quantities
number of gallons of solvent evaporated per equal to the volume of air exhausted
minute.
through the spray booth.
TABLE G–11—LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT OF (ii) Where a spray booth or room re-
SOME COMMONLY USED SOLVENTS ceives make-up air through self-closing
doors, dampers, or louvers, they shall
Cubic feet Lower ex- be fully open at all times when the
plosive
per gallon limit in per- booth or room is in use for spraying.
Solvent of vapor of
liquid at 70 cent by The velocity of air through such doors,
volume of
°F. dampers, or louvers shall not exceed
air at 70 °F
200 feet per minute. If the fan charac-
Column 1 Column 2 teristics are such that the required air
Acetone ......................................... 44.0 2.6 flow through the booth will be pro-
Amyl Acetate (iso) ......................... 21.6 1 1.0
Amyl Alcohol (n) ............................ 29.6 1.2 vided, higher velocities through the
Amyl Alcohol (iso) ......................... 29.6 1.2 doors, dampers, or louvers may be
1 1.4
Benzene ........................................ 36.8 used.
Butyl Acetate (n) ............................ 24.8 1.7
Butyl Alcohol (n) ............................ 35.2 1.4
(iii)(a) Where the air supply to a
Butyl Cellosolve ............................. 24.8 1.1 spray booth or room is filtered, the fan
Cellosolve ...................................... 33.6 1.8 static pressure shall be calculated on
Cellosolve Acetate ......................... 23.2 1.7 the assumption that the filters are
Cyclohexanone .............................. 31.2 1 1.1
1,1 Dichloroethylene ...................... 42.4 5.9 dirty to the extent that they require
1,2 Dichloroethylene ...................... 42.4 9.7 cleaning or replacement.
Ethyl Acetate ................................. 32.8 2.5 (b) The rating of filters shall be gov-
Ethyl Alcohol .................................. 55.2 4.3
Ethyl Lactate .................................. 28.0 1 1.5
erned by test data supplied by the man-
Methyl Acetate ............................... 40.0 3.1 ufacturer of the filter. A pressure gage
Methyl Alcohol ............................... 80.8 7.3 shall be installed to show the pressure
Methyl Cellosolve .......................... 40.8 2.5 drop across the filters. This gage shall
Methyl Ethyl Ketone ...................... 36.0 1.8
Methyl n-Propyl Ketone ................. 30.4 1.5 be marked to show the pressure drop at
Naphtha (VM&P) (76° Naphtha) ... 22.4 0.9 which the filters require cleaning or re-
Naphtha (100 °Flash) Safety Sol- placement. Filters shall be replaced or
vent—Stoddard Solvent ............. 23.2 1.0 cleaned whenever the pressure drop
Propyl Acetate (n) ......................... 27.2 2.8

Propyl Acetate (iso) ....................... 28.0 1.1 across them becomes excessive or
Propyl Alcohol (n) .......................... 44.8 2.1 whenever the air flow through the face
205
of the booth falls below that specified (f) Where make-up air to any manu-
in Table G–10. ally operated spray booth or room is
(iv)(a) Means for heating make-up air heated by gas and the products of com-
to any spray booth or room, before or bustion are allowed to mix with the
at the time spraying is normally per- supply air, the following precautions
formed, shall be provided in all places must be taken:
where the outdoor temperature may be (1) The gas must have a distinctive
expected to remain below 55 °F. for ap- and strong enough odor to warn work-
preciable periods of time during the op- men in a spray booth or room of its
eration of the booth except where ade- presence if in an unburned state in the
quate and safe means of radiant heat- make-up air.
ing for all operating personnel affected (2) The maximum rate of gas supply
is provided. The replacement air during to the make-up air heater burners
the heating seasons shall be main- must not exceed that which would
tained at not less than 65 °F. at the yield in excess of 200 p.p.m. (parts per
point of entry into the spray booth or million) of carbon monoxide or 2,000
spray room. When otherwise unheated p.p.m. of total combustible gases in the
make-up air would be at a temperature mixture if the unburned gas upon the
of more than 10 °F. below room tem- occurrence of flame failure were mixed
perature, its temperature shall be regu- with all of the make-up air supplied.
lated as provided in section 3.6.3 of (3) A fan must be provided to deliver
ANSI Z9.2–1960. the mixture of heated air and products
(b) As an alternative to an air re- of combustion from the plenum cham-
placement system complying with the ber housing the gas burners to the
preceding section, general heating of spray booth or room.
the building in which the spray room (8) Scope. Spray booths or spray
or booth is located may be employed rooms are to be used to enclose or con-
provided that all occupied parts of the fine all spray finishing operations cov-
building are maintained at not less ered by this paragraph (c). This para-
than 65 °F. when the exhaust system is graph does not apply to the spraying of
in operation or the general heating sys- the exteriors of buildings, fixed tanks,
tem supplemented by other sources of or similar structures, nor to small
heat may be employed to meet this re- portable spraying apparatus not used
quirement. repeatedly in the same location.
(c) No means of heating make-up air
shall be located in a spray booth. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40
FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 40 FR 24522, June 9,
(d) Where make-up air is heated by 1975; 43 FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322,
coal or oil, the products of combustion Feb. 10, 1984; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 58 FR
shall not be allowed to mix with the 35308, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9236, Mar. 7, 1996;
make-up air, and the products of com- 63 FR 1269, Jan. 8, 1998; 64 FR 13909, Mar. 23,
bustion shall be conducted outside the 1999; 72 FR 71069, Dec. 14, 2007; 74 FR 46356,
building through a flue terminating at Sept. 9, 2009]
a point remote from all points where
make-up air enters the building. § 1910.95 Occupational noise exposure.
(e) Where make-up air is heated by (a) Protection against the effects of
gas, and the products of combustion noise exposure shall be provided when
are not mixed with the make-up air but the sound levels exceed those shown in
are conducted through an independent Table G–16 when measured on the A
flue to a point outside the building re- scale of a standard sound level meter
mote from all points where make-up at slow response. When noise levels are
air enters the building, it is not nec- determined by octave band analysis,
essary to comply with paragraph the equivalent A-weighted sound level
(c)(7)(iv)(f) of this section. may be determined as follows:
206
TABLE G–16—PERMISSIBLE NOISE

EXPOSURES 1—Continued
Sound
level dBA
Duration per day, hours slow re-
sponse
14 ⁄ or less ............................................................. 115
1 When the daily noise exposure is composed of two or
more periods of noise exposure of different levels, their com-
bined effect should be considered, rather than the individual
effect of each. If the sum of the following fractions: C1/T1 +
C2/T2Cn/Tn exceeds unity, then, the mixed exposure should be
considered to exceed the limit value. Cn indicates the total
time of exposure at a specified noise level, and Tn indicates
the total time of exposure permitted at that level.
Exposure to impulsive or impact noise should not exceed
140 dB peak sound pressure level.
(c) Hearing conservation program. (1)

The employer shall administer a con-
tinuing, effective hearing conservation
program, as described in paragraphs (c)
through (o) of this section, whenever
FIGURE G–9 employee noise exposures equal or ex-
Equivalent sound level contours. Octave ceed an 8-hour time-weighted average
band sound pressure levels may be converted sound level (TWA) of 85 decibels meas-
to the equivalent A-weighted sound level by ured on the A scale (slow response) or,
plotting them on this graph and noting the
equivalently, a dose of fifty percent.
A-weighted sound level corresponding to the
For purposes of the hearing conserva-
point of highest penetration into the sound
level contours. This equivalent A-weighted tion program, employee noise expo-
sound level, which may differ from the ac- sures shall be computed in accordance
tual A-weighted sound level of the noise, is with appendix A and Table G–16a, and
used to determine exposure limits from without regard to any attenuation pro-
Table 1.G–16. vided by the use of personal protective
equipment.
(b)(1) When employees are subjected (2) For purposes of paragraphs (c)
to sound exceeding those listed in through (n) of this section, an 8-hour
Table G–16, feasible administrative or time-weighted average of 85 decibels or
engineering controls shall be utilized. a dose of fifty percent shall also be re-
If such controls fail to reduce sound ferred to as the action level.
levels within the levels of Table G–16, (d) Monitoring. (1) When information
personal protective equipment shall be indicates that any employee’s exposure
provided and used to reduce sound lev- may equal or exceed an 8-hour time-
els within the levels of the table. weighted average of 85 decibels, the
(2) If the variations in noise level in- employer shall develop and implement
volve maxima at intervals of 1 second a monitoring program.
or less, it is to be considered contin- (i) The sampling strategy shall be de-
uous. signed to identify employees for inclu-
sion in the hearing conservation pro-
TABLE G–16—PERMISSIBLE NOISE EXPOSURES 1 gram and to enable the proper selec-
tion of hearing protectors.
Sound
level dBA (ii) Where circumstances such as high
Duration per day, hours slow re- worker mobility, significant variations
sponse
in sound level, or a significant compo-
8 ........................................................................... 90 nent of impulse noise make area moni-
6 ........................................................................... 92 toring generally inappropriate, the em-
4 ........................................................................... 95 ployer shall use representative per-
3 ........................................................................... 97 sonal sampling to comply with the
2 ........................................................................... 100 monitoring requirements of this para-
11⁄2 ....................................................................... 102
graph unless the employer can show
1 ........................................................................... 105
1⁄2 ......................................................................... 110 that area sampling produces equivalent
results.
207
EC27OC91.023
(2)(i) All continuous, intermittent (4) All audiograms obtained pursuant

and impulsive sound levels from 80 to this section shall meet the require-
decibels to 130 decibels shall be inte- ments of appendix C: Audiometric Meas-
grated into the noise measurements. uring Instruments.
(ii) Instruments used to measure em- (5) Baseline audiogram. (i) Within 6
ployee noise exposure shall be cali- months of an employee’s first exposure
brated to ensure measurement accu- at or above the action level, the em-
racy. ployer shall establish a valid baseline
(3) Monitoring shall be repeated audiogram against which subsequent
whenever a change in production, proc- audiograms can be compared.
ess, equipment or controls increases (ii) Mobile test van exception. Where
noise exposures to the extent that: mobile test vans are used to meet the
(i) Additional employees may be ex- audiometric testing obligation, the em-
posed at or above the action level; or ployer shall obtain a valid baseline
(ii) The attenuation provided by audiogram within 1 year of an employ-
hearing protectors being used by em- ee’s first exposure at or above the ac-
ployees may be rendered inadequate to tion level. Where baseline audiograms
meet the requirements of paragraph (j) are obtained more than 6 months after
of this section. the employee’s first exposure at or
(e) Employee notification. The em- above the action level, employees shall
ployer shall notify each employee ex- wearing hearing protectors for any pe-
posed at or above an 8-hour time- riod exceeding six months after first
weighted average of 85 decibels of the exposure until the baseline audiogram
results of the monitoring. is obtained.
(f) Observation of monitoring. The em- (iii) Testing to establish a baseline
ployer shall provide affected employees audiogram shall be preceded by at least
or their representatives with an oppor- 14 hours without exposure to workplace
tunity to observe any noise measure- noise. Hearing protectors may be used
ments conducted pursuant to this sec- as a substitute for the requirement
tion. that baseline audiograms be preceded
(g) Audiometric testing program. (1) by 14 hours without exposure to work-
The employer shall establish and main- place noise.
tain an audiometric testing program as (iv) The employer shall notify em-
provided in this paragraph by making ployees of the need to avoid high levels
audiometric testing available to all of non-occupational noise exposure
employees whose exposures equal or ex- during the 14-hour period immediately
ceed an 8-hour time-weighted average preceding the audiometric examina-
of 85 decibels. tion.
(2) The program shall be provided at (6) Annual audiogram. At least annu-
no cost to employees. ally after obtaining the baseline audio-
(3) Audiometric tests shall be per- gram, the employer shall obtain a new
formed by a licensed or certified audi- audiogram for each employee exposed
ologist, otolaryngologist, or other phy- at or above an 8-hour time-weighted
sician, or by a technician who is cer- average of 85 decibels.
tified by the Council of Accreditation (7) Evaluation of audiogram. (i) Each
in Occupational Hearing Conservation, employee’s annual audiogram shall be
or who has satisfactorily demonstrated compared to that employee’s baseline
competence in administering audiogram to determine if the audio-
audiometric examinations, obtaining gram is valid and if a standard thresh-
valid audiograms, and properly using, old shift as defined in paragraph (g)(10)
maintaining and checking calibration of this section has occurred. This com-
and proper functioning of the audiom- parison may be done by a technician.
eters being used. A technician who op- (ii) If the annual audiogram shows
erates microprocessor audiometers that an employee has suffered a stand-
does not need to be certified. A techni- ard threshold shift, the employer may
cian who performs audiometric tests obtain a retest within 30 days and con-
must be responsible to an audiologist, sider the results of the retest as the an-
otolaryngologist or physician. nual audiogram.
208
(iii) The audiologist, (iii) If subsequent audiometric test-

otolaryngologist, or physician shall re- ing of an employee whose exposure to
view problem audiograms and shall de- noise is less than an 8-hour TWA of 90
termine whether there is a need for fur- decibels indicates that a standard
ther evaluation. The employer shall threshold shift is not persistent, the
provide to the person performing this employer:
evaluation the following information: (A) Shall inform the employee of the
(A) A copy of the requirements for new audiometric interpretation; and
hearing conservation as set forth in (B) May discontinue the required use
paragraphs (c) through (n) of this sec-
of hearing protectors for that em-
tion;
ployee.
(B) The baseline audiogram and most
recent audiogram of the employee to (9) Revised baseline. An annual audio-
be evaluated; gram may be substituted for the base-
(C) Measurements of background line audiogram when, in the judgment
sound pressure levels in the of the audiologist, otolaryngologist or
audiometric test room as required in physician who is evaluating the audio-
appendix D: Audiometric Test Rooms. gram:
(D) Records of audiometer calibra- (i) The standard threshold shift re-
tions required by paragraph (h)(5) of vealed by the audiogram is persistent;
this section. or
(8) Follow-up procedures. (i) If a com- (ii) The hearing threshold shown in
parison of the annual audiogram to the the annual audiogram indicates signifi-
baseline audiogram indicates a stand- cant improvement over the baseline
ard threshold shift as defined in para- audiogram.
graph (g)(10) of this section has oc- (10) Standard threshold shift. (i) As
curred, the employee shall be informed used in this section, a standard thresh-
of this fact in writing, within 21 days of old shift is a change in hearing thresh-
the determination.
old relative to the baseline audiogram
(ii) Unless a physician determines
of an average of 10 dB or more at 2000,
that the standard threshold shift is not
work related or aggravated by occupa- 3000, and 4000 Hz in either ear.
tional noise exposure, the employer (ii) In determining whether a stand-
shall ensure that the following steps ard threshold shift has occurred, allow-
are taken when a standard threshold ance may be made for the contribution
shift occurs: of aging (presbycusis) to the change in
(A) Employees not using hearing pro- hearing level by correcting the annual
tectors shall be fitted with hearing pro- audiogram according to the procedure
tectors, trained in their use and care, described in appendix F: Calculation
and required to use them. and Application of Age Correction to
(B) Employees already using hearing Audiograms.
protectors shall be refitted and re- (h) Audiometric test requirements. (1)
trained in the use of hearing protectors Audiometric tests shall be pure tone,
and provided with hearing protectors air conduction, hearing threshold ex-
offering greater attenuation if nec- aminations, with test frequencies in-
essary. cluding as a minimum 500, 1000, 2000,
(C) The employee shall be referred for 3000, 4000, and 6000 Hz. Tests at each
a clinical audiological evaluation or an frequency shall be taken separately for
otological examination, as appropriate, each ear.
if additional testing is necessary or if
(2) Audiometric tests shall be con-
the employer suspects that a medical
ducted with audiometers (including
pathology of the ear is caused or aggra-
vated by the wearing of hearing protec- microprocessor audiometers) that meet
tors. the specifications of, and are main-
(D) The employee is informed of the tained and used in accordance with,
need for an otological examination if a American National Standard Specifica-
medical pathology of the ear that is tion for Audiometers, S3.6–1969, which
unrelated to the use of hearing protec- is incorporated by reference as speci-

tors is suspected. fied in § 1910.6.
209
(3) Pulsed-tone and self-recording ing protectors provided by the em-

audiometers, if used, shall meet the re- ployer.
quirements specified in appendix C: (4) The employer shall provide train-
Audiometric Measuring Instruments. ing in the use and care of all hearing
(4) Audiometric examinations shall protectors provided to employees.
be administered in a room meeting the (5) The employer shall ensure proper
requirements listed in appendix D: initial fitting and supervise the correct
Audiometric Test Rooms. use of all hearing protectors.
(5) Audiometer calibration. (i) The (j) Hearing protector attenuation. (1)
functional operation of the audiometer The employer shall evaluate hearing
shall be checked before each day’s use protector attenuation for the specific
by testing a person with known, stable noise environments in which the pro-
hearing thresholds, and by listening to tector will be used. The employer shall
the audiometer’s output to make sure use one of the evaluation methods de-
that the output is free from distorted scribed in appendix B: Methods for Esti-
or unwanted sounds. Deviations of 10 mating the Adequacy of Hearing Protec-
decibels or greater require an acoustic tion Attenuation.
calibration. (2) Hearing protectors must attenu-
(ii) Audiometer calibration shall be ate employee exposure at least to an 8-
checked acoustically at least annually hour time-weighted average of 90 deci-
in accordance with appendix E: Acoustic bels as required by paragraph (b) of
Calibration of Audiometers. Test fre- this section.
quencies below 500 Hz and above 6000 Hz (3) For employees who have experi-
may be omitted from this check. Devi- enced a standard threshold shift, hear-
ations of 15 decibels or greater require ing protectors must attenuate em-
an exhaustive calibration. ployee exposure to an 8-hour time-
(iii) An exhaustive calibration shall weighted average of 85 decibels or
be performed at least every two years below.
in accordance with sections 4.1.2; 4.1.3.; (4) The adequacy of hearing protector
4.1.4.3; 4.2; 4.4.1; 4.4.2; 4.4.3; and 4.5 of attenuation shall be re-evaluated
the American National Standard Speci- whenever employee noise exposures in-
fication for Audiometers, S3.6–1969. crease to the extent that the hearing
Test frequencies below 500 Hz and protectors provided may no longer pro-
above 6000 Hz may be omitted from this vide adequate attenuation. The em-
calibration. ployer shall provide more effective
(i) Hearing protectors. (1) Employers hearing protectors where necessary.
shall make hearing protectors avail- (k) Training program. (1) The em-
able to all employees exposed to an 8- ployer shall train each employee who is
hour time-weighted average of 85 deci- exposed to noise at or above an 8-hour
bels or greater at no cost to the em- time weighted average of 85 decibels in
ployees. Hearing protectors shall be re- accordance with the requirements of
placed as necessary. this section. The employer shall insti-
(2) Employers shall ensure that hear- tute a training program and ensure em-
ing protectors are worn: ployee participation in the program.
(i) By an employee who is required by (2) The training program shall be re-
paragraph (b)(1) of this section to wear peated annually for each employee in-
personal protective equipment; and cluded in the hearing conservation pro-
(ii) By any employee who is exposed gram. Information provided in the
to an 8-hour time-weighted average of training program shall be updated to
85 decibels or greater, and who: be consistent with changes in protec-
(A) Has not yet had a baseline audio- tive equipment and work processes.
gram established pursuant to para- (3) The employer shall ensure that
graph (g)(5)(ii); or each employee is informed of the fol-
(B) Has experienced a standard lowing:
threshold shift. (i) The effects of noise on hearing;
(3) Employees shall be given the op- (ii) The purpose of hearing protec-
portunity to select their hearing pro- tors, the advantages, disadvantages,

tectors from a variety of suitable hear- and attenuation of various types, and
210
instructions on selection, fitting, use, CFR 1910.1020 (a)–(e) and (g)–(i) apply to
and care; and access to records under this section.
(iii) The purpose of audiometric test- (5) Transfer of records. If the employer
ing, and an explanation of the test pro- ceases to do business, the employer
cedures. shall transfer to the successor em-
(l) Access to information and training ployer all records required to be main-
materials. (1) The employer shall make tained by this section, and the suc-
available to affected employees or cessor employer shall retain them for
their representatives copies of this the remainder of the period prescribed
standard and shall also post a copy in in paragraph (m)(3) of this section.
the workplace. (n) Appendices. (1) Appendices A, B, C,
(2) The employer shall provide to af- D, and E to this section are incor-
fected employees any informational porated as part of this section and the
materials pertaining to the standard contents of these appendices are man-
that are supplied to the employer by datory.
the Assistant Secretary. (2) Appendices F and G to this sec-
(3) The employer shall provide, upon tion are informational and are not in-
request, all materials related to the tended to create any additional obliga-
employer’s training and education pro- tions not otherwise imposed or to de-
gram pertaining to this standard to the tract from any existing obligations.
Assistant Secretary and the Director.
(o) Exemptions. Paragraphs (c)
(m) Recordkeeping—(1) Exposure meas-
through (n) of this section shall not
urements. The employer shall maintain
apply to employers engaged in oil and
an accurate record of all employee ex-
posure measurements required by para- gas well drilling and servicing oper-
graph (d) of this section. ations.
(2) Audiometric tests. (i) The employer APPENDIX A TO § 1910.95—NOISE EXPOSURE
shall retain all employee audiometric COMPUTATION
test records obtained pursuant to para-
graph (g) of this section: This appendix is Mandatory
(ii) This record shall include: I. COMPUTATION OF EMPLOYEE NOISE
(A) Name and job classification of EXPOSURE
the employee;
(B) Date of the audiogram; (1) Noise dose is computed using Table G–
(C) The examiner’s name; 16a as follows:
(i) When the sound level, L, is constant
(D) Date of the last acoustic or ex-
over the entire work shift, the noise dose, D,
haustive calibration of the audiometer; in percent, is given by: D = 100 C/T where C
and is the total length of the work day, in hours,
(E) Employee’s most recent noise ex- and T is the reference duration cor-
posure assessment. responding to the measured sound level, L,
(F) The employer shall maintain ac- as given in Table G–16a or by the formula
curate records of the measurements of shown as a footnote to that table.
the background sound pressure levels (ii) When the workshift noise exposure is
in audiometric test rooms. composed of two or more periods of noise at
(3) Record retention. The employer different levels, the total noise dose over the
work day is given by:
shall retain records required in this
paragraph (m) for at least the following D = 100(C1 / T1 + C2 / T2 + Cn / Tn),
periods. where Cn indicates the total time of exposure
(i) Noise exposure measurement at a specific noise level, and Tn indicates the
records shall be retained for two years. reference duration for that level as given by
Table G–16a.
(ii) Audiometric test records shall be
retained for the duration of the af- (2) The eight-hour time-weighted average
fected employee’s employment. sound level (TWA), in decibels, may be com-
puted from the dose, in percent, by means of
(4) Access to records. All records re-
the formula: TWA = 16.61 log10 (D/100) + 90.
quired by this section shall be provided For an eight-hour workshift with the noise
upon request to employees, former em- level constant over the entire shift, the TWA
ployees, representatives designated by
is equal to the measured sound level.

the individual employee, and the As- (3) A table relating dose and TWA is given
sistant Secretary. The provisions of 29 in Section II.
211
TABLE G–16A amount of such exposure is usually measured

with an audiodosimeter which gives a read-
Ref- out in terms of ‘‘dose.’’ In order to better un-
erence
A-weighted sound level, L (decibel) duration, derstand the requirements of the amend-
T (hour) ment, dosimeter readings can be converted
to an ‘‘8-hour time-weighted average sound
80 ........................................................................... 32 level.’’ (TWA).
81 ........................................................................... 27.9
In order to convert the reading of a dosim-
82 ........................................................................... 24.3
83 ........................................................................... 21.1 eter into TWA, see Table A–1, below. This
84 ........................................................................... 18.4 table applies to dosimeters that are set by
85 ........................................................................... 16 the manufacturer to calculate dose or per-
86 ........................................................................... 13.9 cent exposure according to the relationships
87 ........................................................................... 12.1 in Table G–16a. So, for example, a dose of 91
88 ........................................................................... 10.6
89 ........................................................................... 9.2
percent over an eight hour day results in a
90 ........................................................................... 8 TWA of 89.3 dB, and, a dose of 50 percent cor-
91 ........................................................................... 7.0 responds to a TWA of 85 dB.
92 ........................................................................... 6.1 If the dose as read on the dosimeter is less
93 ........................................................................... 5.3 than or greater than the values found in
94 ........................................................................... 4.6 Table A–1, the TWA may be calculated by
95 ........................................................................... 4
96 ........................................................................... 3.5
using the formula: TWA 6.61 log10 (D/100) + 90
97 ........................................................................... 3.0 where TWA = 8-hour time-weighted average
98 ........................................................................... 2.6 sound level and D = accumulated dose in per-
99 ........................................................................... 2.3 cent exposure.
100 ......................................................................... 2
101 ......................................................................... 1.7 TABLE A–1—CONVERSION FROM ‘‘PERCENT
102 ......................................................................... 1.5
103 ......................................................................... 1.3 NOISE EXPOSURE’’ OR ‘‘DOSE’’ TO ‘‘8-HOUR
104 ......................................................................... 1.1 TIME-WEIGHTED AVERAGE SOUND LEVEL’’
105 ......................................................................... 1 (TWA)
106 ......................................................................... 0.87
107 ......................................................................... 0.76 Dose or percent noise exposure TWA
108 ......................................................................... 0.66
109 ......................................................................... 0.57 10 ........................................................................... 73.4
110 ......................................................................... 0.5 15 ........................................................................... 76.3
111 ......................................................................... 0.44 20 ........................................................................... 78.4
112 ......................................................................... 0.38 25 ........................................................................... 80.0
113 ......................................................................... 0.33 30 ........................................................................... 81.3
114 ......................................................................... 0.29 35 ........................................................................... 82.4
115 ......................................................................... 0.25 40 ........................................................................... 83.4
116 ......................................................................... 0.22 45 ........................................................................... 84.2
117 ......................................................................... 0.19 50 ........................................................................... 85.0
118 ......................................................................... 0.16 55 ........................................................................... 85.7
119 ......................................................................... 0.14 60 ........................................................................... 86.3
120 ......................................................................... 0.125 65 ........................................................................... 86.9
121 ......................................................................... 0.11 70 ........................................................................... 87.4
122 ......................................................................... 0.095 75 ........................................................................... 87.9
123 ......................................................................... 0.082 80 ........................................................................... 88.4
124 ......................................................................... 0.072 81 ........................................................................... 88.5
125 ......................................................................... 0.063 82 ........................................................................... 88.6
126 ......................................................................... 0.054 83 ........................................................................... 88.7
127 ......................................................................... 0.047 84 ........................................................................... 88.7
128 ......................................................................... 0.041 85 ........................................................................... 88.8
129 ......................................................................... 0.036 86 ........................................................................... 88.9
130 ......................................................................... 0.031 87 ........................................................................... 89.0
88 ........................................................................... 89.1
In the above table the reference duration, 89 ........................................................................... 89.2
T, is computed by 90 ........................................................................... 89.2
91 ........................................................................... 89.3
92 ........................................................................... 89.4
93 ........................................................................... 89.5
94 ........................................................................... 89.6
95 ........................................................................... 89.6
96 ........................................................................... 89.7
where L is the measured A-weighted sound 97 ........................................................................... 89.8
level. 98 ........................................................................... 89.9
99 ........................................................................... 89.9
II. CONVERSION BETWEEN ‘‘DOSE’’ AND ‘‘8- 100 ......................................................................... 90.0
HOUR TIME-WEIGHTED AVERAGE’’ SOUND 101 ......................................................................... 90.1
LEVEL 102 ......................................................................... 90.1
103 ......................................................................... 90.2
Compliance with paragraphs (c)–(r) of this 104 ......................................................................... 90.3

regulation is determined by the amount of 105 ......................................................................... 90.4
exposure to noise in the workplace. The 106 ......................................................................... 90.4
212
ER25SE06.008</MATH>
TABLE A–1—CONVERSION FROM ‘‘PERCENT TABLE A–1—CONVERSION FROM ‘‘PERCENT

NOISE EXPOSURE’’ OR ‘‘DOSE’’ TO ‘‘8-HOUR NOISE EXPOSURE’’ OR ‘‘DOSE’’ TO ‘‘8-HOUR
TIME-WEIGHTED AVERAGE SOUND LEVEL’’ TIME-WEIGHTED AVERAGE SOUND LEVEL’’
(TWA)—Continued (TWA)—Continued
Dose or percent noise exposure TWA Dose or percent noise exposure TWA
107 ......................................................................... 90.5 590 ......................................................................... 102.8

108 ......................................................................... 90.6 600 ......................................................................... 102.9
109 ......................................................................... 90.6 610 ......................................................................... 103.0
110 ......................................................................... 90.7 620 ......................................................................... 103.2
111 ......................................................................... 90.8 630 ......................................................................... 103.3
112 ......................................................................... 90.8 640 ......................................................................... 103.4
113 ......................................................................... 90.9 650 ......................................................................... 103.5
114 ......................................................................... 90.9 660 ......................................................................... 103.6
115 ......................................................................... 91.1 670 ......................................................................... 103.7
116 ......................................................................... 91.1
680 ......................................................................... 103.8
117 ......................................................................... 91.1
690 ......................................................................... 103.9
118 ......................................................................... 91.2
700 ......................................................................... 104.0
119 ......................................................................... 91.3
710 ......................................................................... 104.1
120 ......................................................................... 91.3
125 ......................................................................... 91.6 720 ......................................................................... 104.2
130 ......................................................................... 91.9 730 ......................................................................... 104.3
135 ......................................................................... 92.2 740 ......................................................................... 104.4
140 ......................................................................... 92.4 750 ......................................................................... 104.5
145 ......................................................................... 92.7 760 ......................................................................... 104.6
150 ......................................................................... 92.9 770 ......................................................................... 104.7
155 ......................................................................... 93.2 780 ......................................................................... 104.8
160 ......................................................................... 93.4 790 ......................................................................... 104.9
165 ......................................................................... 93.6 800 ......................................................................... 105.0
170 ......................................................................... 93.8 810 ......................................................................... 105.1
175 ......................................................................... 94.0 820 ......................................................................... 105.2
180 ......................................................................... 94.2 830 ......................................................................... 105.3
185 ......................................................................... 94.4 840 ......................................................................... 105.4
190 ......................................................................... 94.6 850 ......................................................................... 105.4
195 ......................................................................... 94.8 860 ......................................................................... 105.5
200 ......................................................................... 95.0 870 ......................................................................... 105.6
210 ......................................................................... 95.4 880 ......................................................................... 105.7
220 ......................................................................... 95.7 890 ......................................................................... 105.8
230 ......................................................................... 96.0 900 ......................................................................... 105.8
240 ......................................................................... 96.3 910 ......................................................................... 105.9
250 ......................................................................... 96.6 920 ......................................................................... 106.0
260 ......................................................................... 96.9 930 ......................................................................... 106.1
270 ......................................................................... 97.2 940 ......................................................................... 106.2
280 ......................................................................... 97.4 950 ......................................................................... 106.2
290 ......................................................................... 97.7 960 ......................................................................... 106.3
300 ......................................................................... 97.9 970 ......................................................................... 106.4
310 ......................................................................... 98.2 980 ......................................................................... 106.5
320 ......................................................................... 98.4 990 ......................................................................... 106.5
330 ......................................................................... 98.6 999 ......................................................................... 106.6
340 ......................................................................... 98.8
350 ......................................................................... 99.0
360 ......................................................................... 99.2 APPENDIX B TO § 1910.95—METHODS FOR ESTI-
370 ......................................................................... 99.4 MATING THE ADEQUACY OF HEARING PRO-
380 ......................................................................... 99.6 TECTOR ATTENUATION
390 ......................................................................... 99.8
400 ......................................................................... 100.0 This appendix is Mandatory
410 ......................................................................... 100.2
420 ......................................................................... 100.4 For employees who have experienced a sig-
430 ......................................................................... 100.5 nificant threshold shift, hearing protector
440 ......................................................................... 100.7 attenuation must be sufficient to reduce em-
450 ......................................................................... 100.8 ployee exposure to a TWA of 85 dB. Employ-
460 ......................................................................... 101.0
470 ......................................................................... 101.2
ers must select one of the following methods
480 ......................................................................... 101.3 by which to estimate the adequacy of hear-
490 ......................................................................... 101.5 ing protector attenuation.
500 ......................................................................... 101.6 The most convenient method is the Noise
510 ......................................................................... 101.8 Reduction Rating (NRR) developed by the
520 ......................................................................... 101.9 Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).
530 ......................................................................... 102.0 According to EPA regulation, the NRR must
540 ......................................................................... 102.2
550 ......................................................................... 102.3
be shown on the hearing protector package.
560 ......................................................................... 102.4 The NRR is then related to an individual

570 ......................................................................... 102.6 worker’s noise environment in order to as-
580 ......................................................................... 102.7 sess the adequacy of the attenuation of a
213
given hearing protector. This appendix de- (A) Obtain a representative sample of the
scribes four methods of using the NRR to de- C-weighted sound levels in the employee’s
termine whether a particular hearing pro- environment.
tector provides adequate protection within a (B) Subtract the NRR from the C-weighted
given exposure environment. Selection average sound level to obtain the estimated
among the four procedures is dependent upon A-weighted TWA under the ear protector.
the employer’s noise measuring instruments. (v) When using area monitoring procedures
Instead of using the NRR, employers may and a sound level meter set to the A-weigh-
evaluate the adequacy of hearing protector ing network.
attenuation by using one of the three meth- (A) Obtain a representative sound level for
ods developed by the National Institute for the area in question.
Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), (B) Subtract 7 dB from the NRR and sub-
which are described in the ‘‘List of Personal tract the remainder from the A-weighted
Hearing Protectors and Attenuation Data,’’ sound level for that area.
HEW Publication No. 76–120, 1975, pages 21–37. (vi) When using area monitoring proce-
These methods are known as NIOSH methods dures and a sound level meter set to the C-
#1B1, #1B2 and #1B3. The NRR described weighting network:
below is a simplification of NIOSH method
(A) Obtain a representative sound level for
#1B2. The most complex method is NIOSH
the area in question.
method #1B1, which is probably the most ac-
(B) Subtract the NRR from the C-weighted
curate method since it uses the largest
sound level for that area.
amount of spectral information from the in-
dividual employee’s noise environment. As APPENDIX C TO § 1910.95—AUDIOMETRIC
in the case of the NRR method described MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
below, if one of the NIOSH methods is used,
the selected method must be applied to an This appendix is Mandatory
individual’s noise environment to assess the
adequacy of the attenuation. Employers 1. In the event that pulsed-tone audiom-
should be careful to take a sufficient number eters are used, they shall have a tone on-
of measurements in order to achieve a rep- time of at least 200 milliseconds.
resentative sample for each time segment. 2. Self-recording audiometers shall comply
NOTE: The employer must remember that with the following requirements:
calculated attenuation values reflect real- (A) The chart upon which the audiogram is
istic values only to the extent that the pro- traced shall have lines at positions cor-
tectors are properly fitted and worn. responding to all multiples of 10 dB hearing
level within the intensity range spanned by
When using the NRR to assess hearing pro- the audiometer. The lines shall be equally
tector adequacy, one of the following meth- spaced and shall be separated by at least 1⁄4
ods must be used: inch. Additional increments are optional.
(i) When using a dosimeter that is capable The audiogram pen tracings shall not exceed
of C-weighted measurements: 2 dB in width.
(A) Obtain the employee’s C-weighted dose (B) It shall be possible to set the stylus
for the entire workshift, and convert to TWA manually at the 10-dB increment lines for
(see appendix A, II). calibration purposes.
(B) Subtract the NRR from the C-weighted (C) The slewing rate for the audiometer at-
TWA to obtain the estimated A-weighted tenuator shall not be more than 6 dB/sec ex-
TWA under the ear protector. cept that an initial slewing rate greater than
(ii) When using a dosimeter that is not ca- 6 dB/sec is permitted at the beginning of
pable of C-weighted measurements, the fol- each new test frequency, but only until the
lowing method may be used: second subject response.
(A) Convert the A-weighted dose to TWA (D) The audiometer shall remain at each
(see appendix A). required test frequency for 30 seconds (±3 sec-
(B) Subtract 7 dB from the NRR. onds). The audiogram shall be clearly
(C) Subtract the remainder from the A- marked at each change of frequency and the
weighted TWA to obtain the estimated A- actual frequency change of the audiometer
weighted TWA under the ear protector. shall not deviate from the frequency bound-
(iii) When using a sound level meter set to aries marked on the audiogram by more than
the A-weighting network: ±3 seconds.
(A) Obtain the employee’s A-weighted (E) It must be possible at each test fre-
TWA. quency to place a horizontal line segment
(B) Subtract 7 dB from the NRR, and sub- parallel to the time axis on the audiogram,
tract the remainder from the A-weighted such that the audiometric tracing crosses
TWA to obtain the estimated A-weighted the line segment at least six times at that
TWA under the ear protector. test frequency. At each test frequency the
(iv) When using a sound level meter set on threshold shall be the average of the
the C-weighting network: midpoints of the tracing excursions.
214
APPENDIX D TO § 1910.95—AUDIOMETRIC TEST D. This measurement may be made elec-
ROOMS trically with a voltmeter connected to the
earphone terminals.
This appendix is Mandatory (3) Tolerances
Rooms used for audiometric testing shall When any of the measured sound levels de-
not have background sound pressure levels viate from the levels in Table E–1 or Table
exceeding those in Table D–1 when measured E–2 by ±3 dB at any test frequency between
by equipment conforming at least to the 500 and 3000 Hz, 4 dB at 4000 Hz, or 5 dB at
Type 2 requirements of American National 6000 Hz, an exhaustive calibration is advised.
Standard Specification for Sound Level Me- An exhaustive calibration is required if the
ters, S1.4–1971 (R1976), and to the Class II re- deviations are greater than 15 dB or greater
quirements of American National Standard at any test frequency.
Specification for Octave, Half-Octave, and
Third-Octave Band Filter Sets, S1.11–1971 TABLE E–1—REFERENCE THRESHOLD LEVELS
(R1976). FOR TELEPHONICS—TDH–39 EARPHONES
TABLE D–1—MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE OCTAVE- Reference

threshold Sound
BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVELS FOR level for level meter
Frequency, Hz
AUDIOMETRIC TEST ROOMS TDH–39 reading,
earphones, dB
dB
Octave-band center fre-
quency (Hz) ................ 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 500 ................................................. 11.5 81.5
Sound pressure level 1000 ............................................... 7 77
(dB) ............................. 40 40 47 57 62 2000 ............................................... 9 79
3000 ............................................... 10 80
APPENDIX E TO § 1910.95—ACOUSTIC 4000 ............................................... 9.5 79.5
CALIBRATION OF AUDIOMETERS 6000 ............................................... 15.5 85.5
This appendix is Mandatory

TABLE E–2—REFERENCE THRESHOLD LEVELS
Audiometer calibration shall be checked FOR TELEPHONICS—TDH–49 EARPHONES
acoustically, at least annually, according to
the procedures described in this appendix. Ref-
The equipment necessary to perform these erence Sound
threshold
measurements is a sound level meter, oc- level
level for
Frequency, Hz meter
tave-band filter set, and a National Bureau TDH–49 reading,
of Standards 9A coupler. In making these ear- dB
phones,
measurements, the accuracy of the cali- dB
brating equipment shall be sufficient to de-
termine that the audiometer is within the 500 ..................................................... 13.5 83.5
tolerances permitted by American Standard 1000 ................................................... 7.5 77.5
2000 ................................................... 11 81.0
Specification for Audiometers, S3.6–1969.
3000 ................................................... 9.5 79.5
(1) Sound Pressure Output Check 4000 ................................................... 10.5 80.5
A. Place the earphone coupler over the 6000 ................................................... 13.5 83.5
microphone of the sound level meter and
place the earphone on the coupler.
B. Set the audiometer’s hearing threshold APPENDIX F TO § 1910.95—CALCULATIONS AND
level (HTL) dial to 70 dB. APPLICATION OF AGE CORRECTIONS TO
C. Measure the sound pressure level of the AUDIOGRAMS
tones at each test frequency from 500 Hz This appendix Is Non-Mandatory
through 6000 Hz for each earphone.
D. At each frequency the readout on the In determining whether a standard thresh-
sound level meter should correspond to the old shift has occurred, allowance may be
levels in Table E–1 or Table E–2, as appro- made for the contribution of aging to the
priate, for the type of earphone, in the col- change in hearing level by adjusting the
umn entitled ‘‘sound level meter reading.’’ most recent audiogram. If the employer
(2) Linearity Check chooses to adjust the audiogram, the em-
A. With the earphone in place, set the fre- ployer shall follow the procedure described
quency to 1000 Hz and the HTL dial on the below. This procedure and the age correction
audiometer to 70 dB. tables were developed by the National Insti-
B. Measure the sound levels in the coupler tute for Occupational Safety and Health in
at each 10-dB decrement from 70 dB to 10 dB, the criteria document entitled ‘‘Criteria for
noting the sound level meter reading at each a Recommended Standard . . . Occupational
setting. Exposure to Noise,’’ ((HSM)–11001).
C. For each 10-dB decrement on the audi- For each audiometric test frequency;
ometer the sound level meter should indicate (i) Determine from Tables F–1 or F–2 the
a corresponding 10 dB decrease. age correction values for the employee by:
215
(A) Finding the age at which the most re- TABLE F–1—AGE CORRECTION VALUES IN
cent audiogram was taken and recording the DECIBELS FOR MALES
corresponding values of age corrections at
1000 Hz through 6000 Hz; Audiometric Test Frequencies (Hz)
(B) Finding the age at which the baseline Years
1000 2000 3000 4000 6000
audiogram was taken and recording the cor-
responding values of age corrections at 1000 20 or younger ....... 5 3 4 5 8
Hz through 6000 Hz. 21 ......................... 5 3 4 5 8
(ii) Subtract the values found in step (i)(B) 22 ......................... 5 3 4 5 8
from the value found in step (i)(A). 23 ......................... 5 3 4 6 9
(iii) The differences calculated in step (ii) 24 ......................... 5 3 5 6 9
25 ......................... 5 3 5 7 10
represented that portion of the change in 26 ......................... 5 4 5 7 10
hearing that may be due to aging. 27 ......................... 5 4 6 7 11
Example: Employee is a 32-year-old male. 28 ......................... 6 4 6 8 11
The audiometric history for his right ear is 29 ......................... 6 4 6 8 12
shown in decibels below. 30 ......................... 6 4 6 9 12
31 ......................... 6 4 7 9 13
Audiometric test frequency (Hz) 32 ......................... 6 5 7 10 14
Employee’s age 33 ......................... 6 5 7 10 14
1000 2000 3000 4000 6000 34 ......................... 6 5 8 11 15
35 ......................... 7 5 8 11 15
26 ......................... 10 5 5 10 5 36 ......................... 7 5 9 12 16
*27 ........................ 0 0 0 5 5 37 ......................... 7 6 9 12 17
28 ......................... 0 0 0 10 5 38 ......................... 7 6 9 13 17
29 ......................... 5 0 5 15 5 39 ......................... 7 6 10 14 18
30 ......................... 0 5 10 20 10 40 ......................... 7 6 10 14 19
31 ......................... 5 10 20 15 15 41 ......................... 7 6 10 14 20
*32 ........................ 5 10 10 25 20 42 ......................... 8 7 11 16 20
43 ......................... 8 7 12 16 21
The audiogram at age 27 is considered the 44 ......................... 8 7 12 17 22
baseline since it shows the best hearing 45 ......................... 8 7 13 18 23
threshold levels. Asterisks have been used to 46 ......................... 8 8 13 19 24
identify the baseline and most recent audio- 47 ......................... 8 8 14 19 24
48 ......................... 9 8 14 20 25
gram. A threshold shift of 20 dB exists at 4000
49 ......................... 9 9 15 21 26
Hz between the audiograms taken at ages 27 50 ......................... 9 9 16 22 27
and 32. 51 ......................... 9 9 16 23 28
(The threshold shift is computed by sub- 52 ......................... 9 10 17 24 29
tracting the hearing threshold at age 27, 53 ......................... 9 10 18 25 30
which was 5, from the hearing threshold at 54 ......................... 10 10 18 26 31
age 32, which is 25). A retest audiogram has 55 ......................... 10 11 19 27 32
56 ......................... 10 11 20 28 34
confirmed this shift. The contribution of
57 ......................... 10 11 21 29 35
aging to this change in hearing may be esti- 58 ......................... 10 12 22 31 36
mated in the following manner: 59 ......................... 11 12 22 32 37
Go to Table F–1 and find the age correction 60 or older ............ 11 13 23 33 38
values (in dB) for 4000 Hz at age 27 and age 32.
Frequency (Hz) TABLE F–2—AGE CORRECTION VALUES IN
1000 2000 3000 4000 6000
DECIBELS FOR FEMALES
Age 32 .................. 6 5 7 10 14 Audiometric Test Frequencies (Hz)

Years
Age 27 .................. 5 4 6 7 11 1000 2000 3000 4000 6000
Difference ...... 1 1 1 3 3 20 or younger ....... 7 4 3 3 6
21 ......................... 7 4 4 3 6
The difference represents the amount of 22 ......................... 7 4 4 4 6
hearing loss that may be attributed to aging 23 ......................... 7 5 4 4 7
in the time period between the baseline 24 ......................... 7 5 4 4 7
audiogram and the most recent audiogram. 25 ......................... 8 5 4 4 7
26 ......................... 8 5 5 4 8
In this example, the difference at 4000 Hz is 27 ......................... 8 5 5 5 8
3 dB. This value is subtracted from the hear- 28 ......................... 8 5 5 5 8
ing level at 4000 Hz, which in the most recent 29 ......................... 8 5 5 5 9
audiogram is 25, yielding 22 after adjust- 30 ......................... 8 6 5 5 9
ment. Then the hearing threshold in the 31 ......................... 8 6 6 5 9
baseline audiogram at 4000 Hz (5) is sub- 32 ......................... 9 6 6 6 10
tracted from the adjusted annual audiogram 33 ......................... 9 6 6 6 10
34 ......................... 9 6 6 6 10
hearing threshold at 4000 Hz (22). Thus the 35 ......................... 9 6 7 7 11
age-corrected threshold shift would be 17 dB 36 ......................... 9 7 7 7 11

(as opposed to a threshold shift of 20 dB 37 ......................... 9 7 7 7 12
without age correction). 38 ......................... 10 7 7 7 12
216
TABLE F–2—AGE CORRECTION VALUES IN level meter and the dosimeter. A sound level
DECIBELS FOR FEMALES—Continued meter is a device that measures the inten-
sity of sound at a given moment. Since
Audiometric Test Frequencies (Hz) sound level meters provide a measure of
Years sound intensity at only one point in time, it
1000 2000 3000 4000 6000
is generally necessary to take a number of
39 ......................... 10 7 8 8 12 measurements at different times during the
40 ......................... 10 7 8 8 13 day to estimate noise exposure over a work-
41 ......................... 10 8 8 8 13 day. If noise levels fluctuate, the amount of
42 ......................... 10 8 9 9 13
time noise remains at each of the various
43 ......................... 11 8 9 9 14
44 ......................... 11 8 9 9 14 measured levels must be determined.
45 ......................... 11 8 10 10 15 To estimate employee noise exposures with
46 ......................... 11 9 10 10 15 a sound level meter it is also generally nec-
47 ......................... 11 9 10 11 16 essary to take several measurements at dif-
48 ......................... 12 9 11 11 16 ferent locations within the workplace. After
49 ......................... 12 9 11 11 16
50 ......................... 12 10 11 12 17
appropriate sound level meter readings are
51 ......................... 12 10 12 12 17 obtained, people sometimes draw ‘‘maps’’ of
52 ......................... 12 10 12 13 18 the sound levels within different areas of the
53 ......................... 13 10 13 13 18 workplace. By using a sound level ‘‘map’’
54 ......................... 13 11 13 14 19 and information on employee locations
55 ......................... 13 11 14 14 19 throughout the day, estimates of individual
56 ......................... 13 11 14 15 20
exposure levels can be developed. This meas-
57 ......................... 13 11 15 15 20
58 ......................... 14 12 15 16 21 urement method is generally referred to as
59 ......................... 14 12 16 16 21 area noise monitoring.
60 or older ............ 14 12 16 17 22 A dosimeter is like a sound level meter ex-
cept that it stores sound level measurements
APPENDIX G TO § 1910.95—MONITORING NOISE and integrates these measurements over
LEVELS NON-MANDATORY INFORMATIONAL time, providing an average noise exposure
APPENDIX reading for a given period of time, such as an
8-hour workday. With a dosimeter, a micro-
This appendix provides information to help phone is attached to the employee’s clothing
employers comply with the noise monitoring and the exposure measurement is simply
obligations that are part of the hearing con- read at the end of the desired time period. A
servation amendment. reader may be used to read-out the
WHAT IS THE PURPOSE OF NOISE MONITORING? dosimeter’s measurements. Since the dosim-
This revised amendment requires that em- eter is worn by the employee, it measures
ployees be placed in a hearing conservation noise levels in those locations in which the
program if they are exposed to average noise employee travels. A sound level meter can
levels of 85 dB or greater during an 8 hour
also be positioned within the immediate vi-
workday. In order to determine if exposures
cinity of the exposed worker to obtain an in-
are at or above this level, it may be nec-
dividual exposure estimate. Such procedures
essary to measure or monitor the actual
are generally referred to as personal noise
noise levels in the workplace and to estimate
monitoring.
the noise exposure or ‘‘dose’’ received by em-
ployees during the workday. Area monitoring can be used to estimate
WHEN IS IT NECESSARY TO IMPLEMENT A noise exposure when the noise levels are rel-
NOISE MONITORING PROGRAM?
atively constant and employees are not mo-
It is not necessary for every employer to bile. In workplaces where employees move
measure workplace noise. Noise monitoring about in different areas or where the noise
or measuring must be conducted only when intensity tends to fluctuate over time, noise
exposures are at or above 85 dB. Factors exposure is generally more accurately esti-
which suggest that noise exposures in the mated by the personal monitoring approach.
workplace may be at this level include em- In situations where personal monitoring is
ployee complaints about the loudness of appropriate, proper positioning of the micro-
noise, indications that employees are losing phone is necessary to obtain accurate meas-
their hearing, or noisy conditions which urements. With a dosimeter, the microphone
make normal conversation difficult. The em- is generally located on the shoulder and re-
ployer should also consider any information mains in that position for the entire work-
available regarding noise emitted from spe- day. With a sound level meter, the micro-
cific machines. In addition, actual workplace phone is stationed near the employee’s head,
noise measurements can suggest whether or and the instrument is usually held by an in-
not a monitoring program should be initi- dividual who follows the employee as he or
ated. she moves about.
HOW IS NOISE MEASURED? Manufacturer’s instructions, contained in

Basically, there are two different instru- dosimeter and sound level meter operating
ments to measure noise exposures: the sound manuals, should be followed for calibration
217
and maintenance. To ensure accurate re- firms and industrial hygiene firms also pro-
sults, it is considered good professional prac- vide noise monitoring services. Universities
tice to calibrate instruments before and with audiology, industrial hygiene, or acous-
after each use. tical engineering departments may also pro-
HOW OFTEN IS IT NECESSARY TO MONITOR vide information or may be able to help em-
NOISE LEVELS? ployers meet their obligations under this
The amendment requires that when there amendment.
are significant changes in machinery or pro- Free, on-site assistance may be obtained
duction processes that may result in in- from OSHA-supported state and private con-
creased noise levels, remonitoring must be sultation organizations. These safety and
conducted to determine whether additional health consultative entities generally give
employees need to be included in the hearing priority to the needs of small businesses.
conservation program. Many companies
choose to remonitor periodically (once every APPENDIX H TO § 1910.95—AVAILABILITY OF
year or two) to ensure that all exposed em- REFERENCED DOCUMENTS
ployees are included in their hearing con- Paragraphs (c) through (o) of 29 CFR 1910.95
servation programs. and the accompanying appendices contain
WHERE CAN EQUIPMENT AND TECHNICAL AD- provisions which incorporate publications by
VICE BE OBTAINED? reference. Generally, the publications pro-
Noise monitoring equipment may be either vide criteria for instruments to be used in
purchased or rented. Sound level meters cost monitoring and audiometric testing. These
about $500 to $1,000, while dosimeters range criteria are intended to be mandatory when
in price from about $750 to $1,500. Smaller so indicated in the applicable paragraphs of
companies may find it more economical to § 1910.95 and appendices.
rent equipment rather than to purchase it. It should be noted that OSHA does not re-
Names of equipment suppliers may be found quire that employers purchase a copy of the
in the telephone book (Yellow Pages) under referenced publications. Employers, how-
headings such as: ‘‘Safety Equipment,’’ ‘‘In- ever, may desire to obtain a copy of the ref-
dustrial Hygiene,’’ or ‘‘Engineers-Acous- erenced publications for their own informa-
tical.’’ In addition to providing information tion.
on obtaining noise monitoring equipment, The designation of the paragraph of the
many companies and individuals included standard in which the referenced publica-
under such listings can provide professional tions appear, the titles of the publications,
advice on how to conduct a valid noise moni- and the availability of the publications are
toring program. Some audiological testing as follows:
Paragraph designation Referenced publication Available from—
Appendix B ......................... ‘‘List of Personal Hearing Protectors and National Technical Information Service, Port Royal
Attenuation Data,’’ HEW Pub. No. 76– Road, Springfield, VA 22161.
120, 1975. NTIS-PB267461.
Appendix D ......................... ‘‘Specification for Sound Level Meters,’’ American National Standards Institute, Inc., 1430
S1.4–1971 (R1976). Broadway, New York, NY 10018.
§ 1910.95(k)(2), appendix E ‘‘Specifications for Audiometers,’’ S3.6– American National Standards Institute, Inc., 1430
1969. Broadway, New York, NY 10018.
Appendix D ......................... ‘‘Specification for Octave, Half-Octave Back Numbers Department, Dept. STD, American In-
and Third-Octave Band Filter Sets,’’ stitute of Physics, 333 E. 45th St., New York, NY
S1.11–1971 (R1976). 10017; American National Standards Institute, Inc.,
1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018.
The referenced publications (or a micro- Action level—An 8-hour time-weighted aver-
fiche of the publications) are available for age of 85 decibels measured on the A-scale,
review at many universities and public li- slow response, or equivalently, a dose of
braries throughout the country. These publi- fifty percent.
cations may also be examined at the OSHA Audiogram—A chart, graph, or table result-
Technical Data Center, Room N2439, United ing from an audiometric test showing an
States Department of Labor, 200 Constitu- individual’s hearing threshold levels as a
tion Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20210, function of frequency.
(202) 219–7500 or at any OSHA Regional Office
Audiologist—A professional, specializing in
(see telephone directories under United
the study and rehabilitation of hearing,
States Government—Labor Department).
who is certified by the American Speech-
APPENDIX I TO § 1910.95—DEFINITIONS Language-Hearing Association or licensed
by a state board of examiners.
These definitions apply to the following

Baseline audiogram—The audiogram against
terms as used in paragraphs (c) through (n)
of 29 CFR 1910.95. which future audiograms are compared.
218
Criterion sound level—A sound level of 90 exposed to the incident electro-
decibels. magnetic energy.
Decibel (dB)—Unit of measurement of sound (iii) Radiation protection guide. Radi-
level.
Hertz (Hz)—Unit of measurement of fre-
ation level which should not be exceed-
quency, numerically equal to cycles per ed without careful consideration of the
second. reasons for doing so.
Medical pathology—A disorder or disease. (iv) The word ‘‘symbol’’ as used in
For purposes of this regulation, a condi- this specification refers to the overall
tion or disease affecting the ear, which design, shape, and coloring of the rf ra-
should be treated by a physician specialist. diation sign shown in figure G–11.
Noise dose—The ratio, expressed as a per- (v) Whole body irradiation. Pertains to
centage, of (1) the time integral, over a
stated time or event, of the 0.6 power of the
the case in which the entire body is ex-
measured SLOW exponential time-aver- posed to the incident electromagnetic
aged, squared A-weighted sound pressure energy or in which the cross section of
and (2) the product of the criterion dura- the body is smaller than the cross sec-
tion (8 hours) and the 0.6 power of the tion of the incident radiation beam.
squared sound pressure corresponding to (2) Radiation protection guide. (i) For
the criterion sound level (90 dB). normal environmental conditions and
Noise dosimeter—An instrument that inte- for incident electromagnetic energy of
grates a function of sound pressure over a
period of time in such a manner that it di-
frequencies from 10 MHz to 100 GHz,
rectly indicates a noise dose. the radiation protection guide is 10
Otolaryngologist—A physician specializing mW/cm.2 (milliwatt per square centi-
in diagnosis and treatment of disorders of meter) as averaged over any possible
the ear, nose and throat. 0.1-hour period. This means the fol-
Representative exposure—Measurements of lowing:
an employee’s noise dose or 8-hour time-
weighted average sound level that the em- Power density: 10 mW./cm.2 for periods of 0.1-
ployers deem to be representative of the hour or more.
exposures of other employees in the work- Energy density: 1 mW.-hr./cm.2 (milliwatt
place. hour per square centimeter) during any 0.1-
Sound level—Ten times the common loga- hour period.
rithm of the ratio of the square of the
measured A-weighted sound pressure to the This guide applies whether the radi-
square of the standard reference pressure ation is continuous or intermittent.
of 20 micropascals. Unit: decibels (dB). For (ii) These formulated recommenda-
use with this regulation, SLOW time re- tions pertain to both whole body irra-
sponse, in accordance with ANSI S1.4–1971 diation and partial body irradiation.
(R1976), is required. Partial body irradiation must be in-
Sound level meter—An instrument for the
cluded since it has been shown that
measurement of sound level.
Time-weighted average sound level—That some parts of the human body (e.g.,
sound level, which if constant over an 8- eyes, testicles) may be harmed if ex-
hour exposure, would result in the same posed to incident radiation levels sig-
noise dose as is measured. nificantly in excess of the rec-
ommended levels.
FR 4161, Jan. 16, 1981; 46 FR 62845, Dec. 29, (3) Warning symbol. (i) The warning
1981; 48 FR 9776, Mar. 8, 1983; 48 FR 29687, symbol for radio frequency radiation
June 28, 1983; 54 FR 24333, June 7, 1989; 61 FR hazards shall consist of a red isosceles
9236, Mar. 7, 1996; 71 FR 16672, Apr. 3, 2006; 73 triangle above an inverted black isos-
FR 75584, Dec. 12, 2008] celes triangle, separated and outlined
by an aluminum color border. The
§ 1910.97 Nonionizing radiation. words ‘‘Warning—Radio-Frequency Ra-
(a) Electromagnetic radiation—(1) Defi- diation Hazard’’ shall appear in the
nitions applicable to this paragraph. (i) upper triangle. See figure G–11.
The term electromagnetic radiation is re- (ii) ANSI Z53.1–1967 or ANSI Z535.1–
stricted to that portion of the spec- 2006(R2011), incorporated by reference
trum commonly defined as the radio in § 1910.6, is for use for color specifica-
frequency region, which for the purpose tion. All lettering and the border shall
of this specification shall include the be of aluminum color.
microwave frequency region. (iii) The inclusion and choice of
(ii) Partial body irradiation. Pertains warning information or precautionary

to the case in which part of the body is instructions is at the discretion of the
219
user. If such information is included it

shall appear in the lower triangle of
the warning symbol.
FIGURE G–11—RADIO-FREQUENCY RADIATION HAZARD WARNING SYMBOL

220
EC27OC91.024
(4) Scope. This section applies to all 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–
radiations originating from radio sta- 96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), or 5–2007
tions, radar equipment, and other pos- (72 FR 31159), 4–2010 (75 FR 55355) or 1–2012 (77
FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911.
sible sources of electromagnetic radi-
Sections 1910.103, 1910.106 through 1910.111,
ation such as used for communication,
and 1910.119, 1910.120, and 1910.122 through
radio navigation, and industrial and 1910.126 also issued under 29 CFR part 1911.
scientific purposes. This section does Section 1910.119 also issued under Section
not apply to the deliberate exposure of 304, Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990 (Pub.
patients by, or under the direction of, L. 101–549), reprinted at 29 U.S.C.A. 655 Note.
practitioners of the healing arts. Section 1910.120 also issued under Section
(b) [Reserved] 126, Superfund Amendments and Reauthor-
ization Act of 1986 as amended (29 U.S.C.A.
655 Note), and 5 U.S.C. 553.
FR 9236, Mar. 7, 1996; 78 FR 35566, June 13,
2013]
§ 1910.101 Compressed gases (general
§ 1910.98 Effective dates. requirements).
(a) The provisions of this subpart G (a) Inspection of compressed gas cyl-
shall become effective on August 27, inders. Each employer shall determine
1971, except as provided in the remain- that compressed gas cylinders under
ing paragraphs of this section. his control are in a safe condition to
(b) The following provisions shall be- the extent that this can be determined
come effective on February 15, 1972: by visual inspection. Visual and other
inspections shall be conducted as pre-
§ 1910.94 (a)(2)(iii), (a)(3), (a)(4), (b), (c)(2), scribed in the Hazardous Materials
(c)(3), (c)(4), (c)(5), (c)(6)(i), (c)(6)(ii),
(d)(1)(ii), (d)(3), (d)(4), (d)(5), and (d)(7).
Regulations of the Department of
Transportation (49 CFR parts 171–179
(c) Notwithstanding anything in and 14 CFR part 103). Where those regu-
paragraph (a), (b), or (d) of this section, lations are not applicable, visual and
any provision in any other section of other inspections shall be conducted in
this subpart which contains in itself a accordance with Compressed Gas Asso-
specific effective date or time limita- ciation Pamphlets C–6–1968 and C–8–
tion shall become effective on such 1962, which is incorporated by reference
date or shall apply in accordance with as specified in § 1910.6.
such limitation. (b) Compressed gases. The in-plant
(d) Notwithstanding anything in handling, storage, and utilization of all
paragraph (a) of this section, if any compressed gases in cylinders, portable
standard in 41 CFR part 50–204, other tanks, rail tankcars, or motor vehicle
than a national consensus standard in- cargo tanks shall be in accordance with
corporated by reference in § 50– Compressed Gas Association Pamphlet
204.2(a)(1), is or becomes applicable at P–1–1965, which is incorporated by ref-
any time to any employment and place erence as specified in § 1910.6.
of employment, by virtue of the Walsh- (c) Safety relief devices for compressed
Healey Public Contracts Act, or the gas containers. Compressed gas cyl-
Service Contract Act of 1965, or the Na- inders, portable tanks, and cargo tanks
tional Foundation on Arts and Human- shall have pressure relief devices in-
ities Act of 1965, any corresponding es- stalled and maintained in accordance
tablished Federal standard in this sub- with Compressed Gas Association Pam-
part G which is derived from 41 CFR phlets S–1.1–1963 and 1965 addenda and
part 50–204 shall also become effective, S–1.2–1963, which is incorporated by ref-
and shall be applicable to such employ- erence as specified in § 1910.6.
ment and place of employment, on the
same date. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 61
FR 9236, Mar. 7, 1996]
Subpart H—Hazardous Materials § 1910.102 Acetylene.
AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu- (a) Cylinders. Employers must ensure
that the in-plant transfer, handling,
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29

U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s storage, and use of acetylene in cyl-
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR inders comply with the provisions of
221
CGA Pamphlet G–1–2009 (‘‘Acetylene’’) structed and installed on or after that

(incorporated by reference, see § 1910.6). date.
(b) Piped systems. (1) Employers must [74 FR 40447, Aug. 11, 2009, as amended at 76
comply with Chapter 9 (‘‘Acetylene FR 75786, Dec. 5, 2011]
Piping’’) of NFPA 51A–2006 (‘‘Standard
for Acetylene Charging Plants’’) (Na- § 1910.103 Hydrogen.
tional Fire Protection Association, 2006 (a) General—(1) Definitions. As used in
ed., 2006). this section (i) Gaseous hydrogen sys-
(2) When employers can demonstrate tem is one in which the hydrogen is de-
that the facilities, equipment, struc- livered, stored and discharged in the
tures, or installations used to generate gaseous form to consumer’s piping. The
acetylene or to charge (fill) acetylene system includes stationary or movable
cylinders were installed prior to Feb- containers, pressure regulators, safety
ruary 16, 2006, these employers may relief devices, manifolds, inter-
comply with the provisions of Chapter connecting piping and controls. The
7 (‘‘Acetylene Piping’’) of NFPA 51A– system terminates at the point where
2001 (‘‘Standard for Acetylene Charging hydrogen at service pressure first en-
ters the consumer’s distribution pip-
Plants’’) (National Fire Protection As-
ing.
sociation, 2001 ed., 2001).
(ii) Approved—Means, unless other-
(3) The provisions of § 1910.102(b)(2) wise indicated, listed or approved by a
also apply when the facilities, equip- nationally recognized testing labora-
ment, structures, or installations used tory. Refer to § 1910.7 for definition of
to generate acetylene or to charge (fill) nationally recognized testing labora-
acetylene cylinders were approved for tory.
construction or installation prior to (iii) Listed—See ‘‘approved’’.
February 16, 2006, but constructed and (iv) ASME—American Society of Me-
installed on or after that date. chanical Engineers.
(4) For additional information on (v) DOT Specifications—Regulations
acetylene piping systems, see CGA G– of the Department of Transportation
1.2–2006, part 3 (‘‘Acetylene piping’’) published in 49 CFR Chapter I.
(Compressed Gas Association, Inc., 3rd (vi) DOT regulations—See § 1910.103
ed., 2006). (a)(1)(v).
(c) Generators and filling cylinders. (1) (2) Scope—(i) Gaseous hydrogen sys-
Employers must ensure that facilities, tems. (a) Paragraph (b) of this section
equipment, structures, or installations applies to the installation of gaseous
used to generate acetylene or to charge hydrogen systems on consumer prem-
(fill) acetylene cylinders comply with ises where the hydrogen supply to the
the provisions of NFPA 51A–2006 consumer premises originates outside
(‘‘Standard for Acetylene Charging the consumer premises and is delivered
Plants’’) (National Fire Protection As- by mobile equipment.
(b) Paragraph (b) of this section does
sociation, 2006 ed., 2006).
not apply to gaseous hydrogen systems
(2) When employers can demonstrate having a total hydrogen content of less
that the facilities, equipment, struc- than 400 cubic feet, nor to hydrogen
tures, or installations used to generate manufacturing plants or other estab-
acetylene or to charge (fill) of acety- lishments operated by the hydrogen
lene cylinders were constructed or in- supplier or his agent for the purpose of
stalled prior to February 16, 2006, these storing hydrogen and refilling portable
employers may comply with the provi- containers, trailers, mobile supply
sions of NFPA 51A–2001 (‘‘Standard for trucks, or tank cars.
Acetylene Charging Plants’’) (National (ii) Liquefied hydrogen systems. (a)
Fire Protection Association, 2001 ed., Paragraph (c) of this section applies to
2001). the installation of liquefied hydrogen
(3) The provisions of § 1910.102(c)(2) systems on consumer premises.
also apply when the facilities, equip- (b) Paragraph (c) of this section does
ment, structures, or installations were not apply to liquefied hydrogen port-
approved for construction or installa- able containers of less than 150 liters
tion prior to February 16, 2006, but con- (39.63 gallons) capacity; nor to liquefied
222
hydrogen manufacturing plants or suitable for hydrogen service and for

other establishments operated by the the pressures and temperatures in-
hydrogen supplier or his agent for the volved. Cast iron pipe and fittings shall
sole purpose of storing liquefied hydro- not be used.
gen and refilling portable containers, (b) Piping and tubing shall conform
trailers, mobile supply trucks, or tank to section 2—‘‘Industrial Gas and Air
cars. Piping’’—Code for Pressure Piping,
(b) Gaseous hydrogen systems—(1) De- ANSI B31.1–1967 with addenda B31.1–
sign—(i) Containers. (a) Hydrogen con- 1969, which is incorporated by reference
tainers shall comply with one of the as specified in § 1910.6.
following: (c) Joints in piping and tubing may
(1) Designed, constructed, and tested be made by welding or brazing or by
in accordance with appropriate require- use of flanged, threaded, socket, or
ments of ASME Boiler and Pressure compression fittings. Gaskets and
Vessel Code, section VIII—Unfired thread sealants shall be suitable for
Pressure Vessels—1968, which is incor- hydrogen service.
porated by reference as specified in (iv) Equipment assembly. (a) Valves,
§ 1910.6. gauges, regulators, and other acces-
(2) Designed, constructed, tested and sories shall be suitable for hydrogen
maintained in accordance with U.S. service.
Department of Transportation Speci- (b) Installation of hydrogen systems
fications and Regulations. shall be supervised by personnel famil-
(b) Permanently installed containers iar with proper practices with ref-
shall be provided with substantial non- erence to their construction and use.
combustible supports on firm non- (c) Storage containers, piping, valves,
combustible foundations. regulating equipment, and other acces-
(c) Each portable container shall be sories shall be readily accessible, and
legibly marked with the name ‘‘Hydro- shall be protected against physical
gen’’ in accordance with the marking damage and against tampering.
requirements set forth in (d) Cabinets or housings containing
§ 1910.253(b)(1)(ii). Each manifolded hy- hydrogen control or operating equip-
drogen supply unit shall be legibly ment shall be adequately ventilated.
marked with the name ‘‘Hydrogen’’ or (e) Each mobile hydrogen supply unit
a legend such as ‘‘This unit contains used as part of a hydrogen system shall
hydrogen.’’ be adequately secured to prevent move-
(ii) Safety relief devices. (a) Hydrogen ment.
containers shall be equipped with safe- (f) Mobile hydrogen supply units
ty relief devices as required by the shall be electrically bonded to the sys-
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, tem before discharging hydrogen.
section VIII Unfired Pressure Vessels, (v) Marking. The hydrogen storage lo-
1968 or the DOT Specifications and cation shall be permanently placarded
Regulations under which the container as follows: ‘‘HYDROGEN—FLAM-
is fabricated. MABLE GAS—NO SMOKING—NO
(b) Safety relief devices shall be ar- OPEN FLAMES,’’ or equivalent.
ranged to discharge upward and unob- (vi) Testing. After installations, all
structed to the open air in such a man- piping, tubing, and fittings shall be
ner as to prevent any impingement of tested and proved hydrogen gas tight
escaping gas upon the container, adja- at maximum operating pressure.
cent structure or personnel. This re- (2) Location—(i) General. (a) The sys-
quirement does not apply to DOT Spec- tem shall be located so that it is read-
ification containers having an internal ily accessible to delivery equipment
volume of 2 cubic feet or less. and to authorized personnel.
(c) Safety relief devices or vent pip- (b) Systems shall be located above
ing shall be designed or located so that ground.
moisture cannot collect and freeze in a (c) Systems shall not be located be-
manner which would interfere with neath electric power lines.
proper operation of the device. (d) Systems shall not be located close
(iii) Piping, tubing, and fittings. (a) to flammable liquid piping or piping of
Piping, tubing, and fittings shall be other flammable gases.
223
(e) Systems near aboveground flam- TABLE H–1—Continued

mable liquid storage shall be located
Size of hydrogen system
on ground higher than the flammable
liquid storage except when dikes, di- Nature of location Less than 3,000 CF In excess
to 15,000 of 15,000
version curbs, grading, or separating 3,000 CF CF CF
solid walls are used to prevent accumu-
lation of flammable liquids under the In a special room ...... III ............. III ............. Not per-
mitted.
system. Inside buildings not in IV ............. Not per- Not per-
(ii) Specific requirements. (a) The loca- a special room and mitted. mitted.
tion of a system, as determined by the exposed to other
occupancies.
maximum total contained volume of
hydrogen, shall be in the order of pref-
(b) The minimum distance in feet
erence as indicated by Roman numer-
from a hydrogen system of indicated
als in Table H–1.
capacity located outdoors, in separate
TABLE H–1 buildings or in special rooms to any
specified outdoor exposure shall be in
Size of hydrogen system accordance with Table H–2.
Nature of location 3,000 CF In excess (c) The distances in Table H–2 Items
Less than
3,000 CF to 15,000 of 15,000 1 and 3 to 10 inclusive do not apply
CF CF
where protective structures such as
Outdoors .................... I ............... IDI.. adequate fire walls are located between
In a separate building II .............. II .............. II. the system and the exposure.
TABLE H–2
Type of outdoor exposure Size of hydrogen system
3,000 CF In excess
Less than to 15,000 of 15,000
3,000 CF CF CF
1. Building or structure ............................... Wood frame construction 1 ........................ 10 25 50

Heavy timber, noncombustible or ordinary 0 10 2 25
construction 1.
Fire-resistive construction 1 ........................ 0 0 0
2. Wall openings ......................................... Not above any part of a system ................ 10 10 10
Above any part of a system ...................... 25 25 25
3. Flammable liquids above ground. .......... 0 to 1,000 gallons ...................................... 10 25 25
In excess of 1,000 gallons ......................... 25 50 50
4. Flammable liquids below ground—0 to Tank ........................................................... 10 10 10
1,000 gallons. Vent or fill opening of tank ........................ 25 25 25
5. Flammable liquids below ground—in ex- Tank ........................................................... 20 20 20
cess of 1,000 gallons.. Vent or fill opening of tank ........................ 25 25 25
6. Flammable gas storage, either high 0 to 15,000 CF capacity ............................ 10 25 25
pressure or low pressure.. In excess of 15,000 CF capacity ............... 25 50 50
7. Oxygen storage ...................................... 12,000 CF or less 4 .................................... .................. .................. ..................
More than 12,000 CF 5 .............................. .................. .................. ..................
8. Fast burning solids such as ordinary lumber, excelsior or paper .................................. 50 50 50
9. Slow burning solids such as heavy timber or coal ......................................................... 25 25 25
10. Open flames and other sources of ignition ................................................................... 25 25 25
11. Air compressor intakes or inlets to ventilating or air-conditioning equipment .............. 50 50 50
12. Concentration of people 3 .............................................................................................. 25 50 50
1 Refer to NFPA No. 220 Standard Types of Building Construction for definitions of various types of construction. (1969 Ed.)
2 But not less than one-half the height of adjacent side wall of the structure.
3 Incongested areas such as offices, lunchrooms, locker rooms, time-clock areas.
4 Refer to NFPA No. 51, gas systems for welding and cutting (1969).
5 Refer to NFPA No. 566, bulk oxygen systems at consumer sites (1969).
(d) Hydrogen systems of less than (1) In an adequately ventilated area

3,000 CF when located inside buildings as in paragraph (b)(3)(ii)(b) of this sec-
and exposed to other occupancies shall tion.
be situated in the building so that the (2) Twenty feet from stored flam-
system will be as follows: mable materials or oxidizing gases.
224
(3) Twenty-five feet from open doors in exterior walls opening out-
flames, ordinary electrical equipment ward; lightly fastened walls or roof de-
or other sources of ignition. signed to relieve at a maximum pres-
(4) Twenty-five feet from concentra- sure of 25 pounds per square foot.
tions of people. (d) There shall be no sources of igni-
(5) Fifty feet from intakes of ventilation from open flames, electrical equip-
tion or air-conditioning equipment and ment, or heating equipment.
air compressors. (e) Electrical equipment shall be in
(6) Fifty feet from other flammable accordance with subpart S of this part
gas storage.
for Class I, Division 2 locations.
(7) Protected against damage or in-
jury due to falling objects or working (f) Heating, if provided, shall be by
activity in the area. steam, hot water, or other indirect
(8) More than one system of 3,000 CF means.
or less may be installed in the same (iii) Special rooms. (a) Floor, walls,
room, provided the systems are sepa- and ceiling shall have a fire-resistance
rated by at least 50 feet. Each such sys- rating of at least 2 hours. Walls or par-
tem shall meet all of the requirements titions shall be continuous from floor
of this paragraph. to ceiling and shall be securely an-
(3) Design consideration at specific loca- chored. At least one wall shall be an
tions—(i) Outdoor locations. (a) Where exterior wall. Openings to other parts
protective walls or roofs are provided, of the building shall not be permitted.
they shall be constructed of non- Windows and doors shall be in exterior
combustible materials. walls and shall be located so as to be
(b) Where the enclosing sides adjoin readily accessible in case of emer-
each other, the area shall be properly gency. Windows shall be of glass or
ventilated. plastic in metal frames.
(c) Electrical equipment within 15 (b) Ventilation shall be as provided in
feet shall be in accordance with subparagraph (b)(3)(ii)(b) of this section.
part S of this part.
(c) Explosion venting shall be as pro-
(ii) Separate buildings. (a) Separate
buildings shall be built of at least non- vided in paragraph (b)(3)(ii)(c) of this
combustible construction. Windows section.
and doors shall be located so as to be (d) There shall be no sources of igni-
readily accessible in case of emer- tion from open flames, electrical equip-
gency. Windows shall be of glass or ment, or heating equipment.
plastic in metal frames. (e) Electric equipment shall be in ac-
(b) Adequate ventilation to the out- cordance with the requirements of sub-
doors shall be provided. Inlet openings part S of this part for Class I, Division
shall be located near the floor in exte- 2 locations.
rior walls only. Outlet openings shall (f) Heating, if provided, shall be by
be located at the high point of the steam, hot water, or indirect means.
room in exterior walls or roof. Inlet (4) Operating instructions. For instal-
and outlet openings shall each have lations which require any operation of
minimum total area of one (1) square equipment by the user, legible instruc-
foot per 1,000 cubic feet of room vol- tions shall be maintained at operating
ume. Discharge from outlet openings locations.
shall be directed or conducted to a safe
(5) Maintenance. The equipment and
location.
functioning of each charged gaseous
(c) Explosion venting shall be pro-
vided in exterior walls or roof only. hydrogen system shall be maintained
The venting area shall be equal to not in a safe operating condition in accord-
less than 1 square foot per 30 cubic feet ance with the requirements of this sec-
of room volume and may consist of any tion. The area within 15 feet of any hy-
one or any combination of the fol- drogen container shall be kept free of
lowing: Walls of light, noncombustible dry vegetation and combustible mate-
material, preferably single thickness, rial.
single strength glass; lightly fastened

hatch covers; lightly fastened swinging
225
(c) Liquefied hydrogen systems—(1) De- graph (c)(2)(i)(f) of this section for
sign—(i) Containers. (a) Hydrogen con- venting of safety relief devices in spe-
tainers shall comply with the fol- cial locations.
lowing: Storage containers shall be de- (c) Safety relief devices or vent pip-
signed, constructed, and tested in ac- ing shall be designed or located so that
cordance with appropriate require- moisture cannot collect and freeze in a
ments of the ASME Boiler and Pres- manner which would interfere with
sure Vessel Code, section VIII—Unfired proper operation of the device.
Pressure Vessels (1968) or applicable (d) Safety relief devices shall be pro-
provisions of API Standard 620, Rec- vided in piping wherever liquefied hy-
ommended Rules for Design and Con- drogen could be trapped between clo-
struction of Large, Welded, Low-Pres- sures.
sure Storage Tanks, Second Edition (v) Piping, tubing, and fittings. (a) Pip-
(June 1963) and appendix R (April 1965), ing, tubing, and fittings and gasket and
which is incorporated by reference as thread sealants shall be suitable for
specified in § 1910.6. hydrogen service at the pressures and
(b) Portable containers shall be de- temperatures involved. Consideration
signed, constructed and tested in ac- shall be given to the thermal expansion
cordance with DOT Specifications and and contraction of piping systems
Regulations. when exposed to temperature fluctua-
(ii) Supports. Permanently installed
tions of ambient to liquefied hydrogen
containers shall be provided with sub-
temperatures.
stantial noncombustible supports se-
(b) Gaseous hydrogen piping and tub-
curely anchored on firm noncombus-
tible foundations. Steel supports in ex- ing (above ¥20 °F.) shall conform to
cess of 18 inches in height shall be pro- the applicable sections of Pressure Pip-
tected with a protective coating having ing section 2—Industrial Gas and Air
a 2-hour fire-resistance rating. Piping, ANSI B31.1–1967 with addenda
(iii) Marking. Each container shall be B31.1–1969. Design of liquefied hydrogen
legibly marked to indicate ‘‘LIQUE- or cold (¥20 °F. or below) gas piping
FIED HYDROGEN—FLAMMABLE shall use Petroleum Refinery Piping
GAS.’’ ANSI B31.3–1966 or Refrigeration Pip-
(iv) Safety relief devices. (a)(1) Sta- ing ANSI B31.5–1966 with addenda
tionary liquefied hydrogen containers B31.5a–1968 as a guide, which are incor-
shall be equipped with safety relief de- porated by reference as specified in
vices sized in accordance with CGA § 1910.6.
Pamphlet S–1, part 3, Safety Relief De- (c) Joints in piping and tubing shall
vice Standards for Compressed Gas preferably be made by welding or braz-
Storage Containers, which is incor- ing; flanged, threaded, socket, or suit-
porated by reference as specified in able compression fittings may be used.
§ 1910.6. (d) Means shall be provided to mini-
(2) Portable liquefied hydrogen con- mize exposure of personnel to piping
tainers complying with the U.S. De- operating at low temperatures and to
partment of Transportation Regula- prevent air condensate from contacting
tions shall be equipped with safety re- piping, structural members, and sur-
lief devices as required in the U.S. De- faces not suitable for cryogenic tem-
partment of Transportation Specifica- peratures. Only those insulating mate-
tions and Regulations. Safety relief de- rials which are rated nonburning in ac-
vices shall be sized in accordance with cordance with ASTM Procedures D1692–
the requirements of CGA Pamphlet S– 68, which is incorporated by reference
1, Safety Relief Device Standards, part as specified in § 1910.6, may be used.
1, Compressed Gas Cylinders and part 2, Other protective means may be used to
Cargo and Portable Tank Containers. protect personnel. The insulation shall
(b) Safety relief devices shall be ar- be designed to have a vapor-tight seal
ranged to discharge unobstructed to in the outer covering to prevent the
the outdoors and in such a manner as condensation of air and subsequent ox-
to prevent impingement of escaping ygen enrichment within the insulation.
liquid or gas upon the container, adja- The insulation material and outside
cent structures or personnel. See para- shield shall also be of adequate design
226
to prevent attrition of the insulation (b) The vaporizer and its piping shall
due to normal operating conditions. be adequately protected on the hydro-
(e) Uninsulated piping and equipment gen and heating media sections with
which operate at liquefied-hydrogen safety relief devices.
temperature shall not be installed (c) Heat used in a liquefied hydrogen
above asphalt surfaces or other com- vaporizer shall be indirectly supplied
bustible materials in order to prevent utilizing media such as air, steam,
contact of liquid air with such mate- water, or water solutions.
rials. Drip pans may be installed under (d) A low temperature shutoff switch
uninsulated piping and equipment to shall be provided in the vaporizer dis-
retain and vaporize condensed liquid charge piping to prevent flow of lique-
air. fied hydrogen in the event of the loss of
(vi) Equipment assembly. (a) Valves, the heat source.
gauges, regulators, and other acces- (ix) Electrical systems. (a) Electrical
sories shall be suitable for liquefied hy- wiring and equipment located within 3
drogen service and for the pressures feet of a point where connections are
and temperatures involved. regularly made and disconnected, shall
(b) Installation of liquefied hydrogen be in accordance with subpart S of this
systems shall be supervised by per- part, for Class I, Group B, Division 1 lo-
cations.
sonnel familiar with proper practices
(b) Except as provided in (a) of this
and with reference to their construc-
subdivision, electrical wiring, and
tion and use.
equipment located within 25 feet of a
(c) Storage containers, piping, valves, point where connections are regularly
regulating equipment, and other acces- made and disconnected or within 25
sories shall be readily accessible and feet of a liquid hydrogen storage con-
shall be protected against physical tainer, shall be in accordance with sub-
damage and against tampering. A shut- part S of this part, for Class I, Group B,
off valve shall be located in liquid Division 2 locations. When equipment
product withdrawal lines as close to approved for class I, group B
the container as practical. On con- atmospheres is not commercially avail-
tainers of over 2,000 gallons capacity, able, the equipment may be—
this shutoff valve shall be of the re- (1) Purged or ventilated in accord-
mote control type with no connections, ance with NFPA No. 496–1967, Standard
flanges, or other appurtenances (other for Purged Enclosures for Electrical
than a welded manual shutoff valve) al- Equipment in Hazardous Locations,
lowed in the piping between the shutoff (2) Intrinsically safe, or
valve and its connection to the inner (3) Approved for Class I, Group C
container. atmospheres. This requirement does
(d) Cabinets or housings containing not apply to electrical equipment
hydrogen control equipment shall be which is installed on mobile supply
ventilated to prevent any accumula- trucks or tank cars from which the
tion of hydrogen gas. storage container is filled.
(vii) Testing. (a) After installation, (x) Bonding and grounding. The lique-
all field-erected piping shall be tested fied hydrogen container and associated
and proved hydrogen gas-tight at oper- piping shall be electrically bonded and
ating pressure and temperature. grounded.
(b) Containers if out of service in ex- (2) Location of liquefied hydrogen stor-
cess of 1 year shall be inspected and age—(i) General requirements. (a) The
tested as outlined in (a) of this subdivi- storage containers shall be located so
sion. The safety relief devices shall be that they are readily accessible to mo-
checked to determine if they are oper- bile supply equipment at ground level
able and properly set. and to authorized personnel.
(viii) Liquefied hydrogen vaporizers. (a) (b) The containers shall not be ex-
The vaporizer shall be anchored and its posed by electric power lines, flam-
connecting piping shall be sufficiently mable liquid lines, flammable gas lines,
flexible to provide for the effect of ex- or lines carrying oxidizing materials.
pansion and contraction due to tem- (c) When locating liquified hydrogen
perature changes. storage containers near above-ground
227
flammable liquid storage or liquid oxygen—Flammable Gas—No Smoking—

gen storage, it is advisable to locate No Open Flames.’’
the liquefied hydrogen container on (f) If liquified hydrogen is located in
ground higher than flammable liquid (as specified in Table H–3) a separate
storage or liquid oxygen storage. building, in a special room, or inside
(d) Where it is necessary to locate buildings when not in a special room
the liquefied hydrogen container on and exposed to other occupancies, con-
ground that is level with or lower than tainers shall have the safety relief de-
adjacent flammable liquid storage or
vices vented unobstructed to the out-
liquid oxygen storage, suitable protec-
doors at a minimum elevation of 25 feet
tive means shall be taken (such as by
diking, diversion curbs, grading), with above grade to a safe location as re-
respect to the adjacent flammable liq- quired in paragraph (c)(1)(iv)(b) of this
uid storage or liquid oxygen storage, to section.
prevent accumulation of liquids within (ii) Specific requirements. (a) The loca-
50 feet of the liquefied hydrogen con- tion of liquefied hydrogen storage, as
tainer. determined by the maximum total
(e) Storage sites shall be fenced and quantity of liquified hydrogen, shall be
posted to prevent entrance by unau- in the order of preference as indicated
thorized personnel. Sites shall also be by Roman numerals in the following
placarded as follows: ‘‘Liquefied Hydro- Table H–3.
TABLE H–3—MAXIMUM TOTAL QUANTITY OF LIQUEFIED HYDROGEN STORAGE PERMITTED
Size of hydrogen storage (capacity in gallons)
Nature of location 39.63 (150 liters) 51 to 300 301 to 600 In excess of 600
to 50
Outdoors ................................................................. I ......................... I ......................... I ......................... I.

In a separate building ............................................. II ........................ II ........................ II ........................ Not permitted.
In a special room .................................................... III ....................... III ....................... Not permitted .... Do.
Inside buildings not in a special room and ex- IV ....................... Not permitted .... ......do ................ Do.
posed to other occupancies.
NOTE: This table does not apply to the storage in dewars of the type generally used in laboratories for experimental purposes.
(b) The minimum distance in feet TABLE H–4—MINIMUM DISTANCE (FEET) FROM
from liquefied hydrogen systems of in- LIQUEFIED HYDROGEN SYSTEMS TO EXPO-
dicated storage capacity located out- SURE 1 2—Continued
doors, in a separate building, or in a
Liquefied hydrogen storage
special room to any specified exposure (capacity in gallons)
shall be in accordance with Table H–4.
Type of exposure 39.63 15,001
(150 li- 3,501 to
TABLE H–4—MINIMUM DISTANCE (FEET) FROM ters) to 15,000 to
30,000
LIQUEFIED HYDROGEN SYSTEMS TO EXPO- 3,500
SURE 1 2
6. Between stationary lique-
fied hydrogen containers 5 5 5
Liquefied hydrogen storage
(capacity in gallons) 7. Flammable gas storage .. 50 75 100
8. Liquid oxygen storage
Type of exposure 39.63 and other oxidizers (see
15,001
(150 li- 3,501 to 513 and 514) ................... 100 100 100
to
ters) to 15,000 30,000 9. Combustible solids .......... 50 75 100
3,500
10. Open flames, smoking
1. Fire-resistive building and and welding ...................... 50 50 50
fire walls 3 ......................... 5 5 5 11. Concentrations of peo-
2. Noncombustible building 3 25 50 75 ple .................................... 75 75 75
3. Other buildings 3 .............. 50 75 100
1 The distance in Nos. 2, 3, 5, 7, 9, and 12 in Table H–4
4. Wall openings, air-com-
pressor intakes, inlets for may be reduced where protective structures, such as firewalls
equal to height of top of the container, to safeguard the lique-
air-conditioning or ven- fied hydrogen storage system, are located between the lique-
tilating equipment ............. 75 75 75 fied hydrogen storage installation and the exposure.
5. Flammable liquids (above 2 Where protective structures are provided, ventilation and
ground and vent or fill confinement of product should be considered. The 5-foot dis-
openings if below ground) tance in Nos. 1 and 6 facilitates maintenance and enhances
(see 513 and 514) ........... 50 75 100 ventilation.
228
3 Refer to Standard Types of Building Construction, NFPA
(c) If protective walls are provided,
No. 220–1969 for definitions of various types of construction.
In congested areas such as offices, lunchrooms, locker they shall be constructed of non-
rooms, time-clock areas. combustible materials and in accord-
(iii) Handling of liquefied hydrogen in- ance with the provisions of paragraph
side buildings other than separate build- (c)(3)(i)(a) of this section.
ings and special rooms. Portable lique- (d) Electrical wiring and equipment
fied hydrogen containers of 50 gallons shall comply with paragraph (c)(1)(ix)
or less capacity as permitted in Table (a) and (b) of this section.
H–3 and in compliance with subdivision (e) Adequate lighting shall be pro-
(i)(f) of this subparagraph when housed vided for nighttime transfer operation.
inside buildings not located in a special (ii) Separate buildings. (a) Separate
room and exposed to other occupancies buildings shall be of light noncombus-
shall comply with the following min- tible construction on a substantial
imum requirements: frame. Walls and roofs shall be lightly
(a) Be located 20 feet from flammable fastened and designed to relieve at a
liquids and readily combustible mate- maximum internal pressure of 25
rials such as excelsior or paper. pounds per square foot. Windows shall
(b) Be located 25 feet from ordinary be of shatterproof glass or plastic in
electrical equipment and other sources metal frames. Doors shall be located in
of ignition including process or analyt- such a manner that they will be readily
ical equipment. accessible to personnel in an emer-
(c) Be located 25 feet from concentra- gency.
tions of people. (b) Adequate ventilation to the out-
(d) Be located 50 feet from intakes of doors shall be provided. Inlet openings
ventilation and air-conditioning equip- shall be located near the floor level in
ment or intakes of compressors. exterior walls only. Outlet openings
(e) Be located 50 feet from storage of shall be located at the high point of the
other flammable-gases or storage of room in exterior walls or roof. Both the
oxidizing gases. inlet and outlet vent openings shall
(f) Containers shall be protected have a minimum total area of 1 square
against damage or injury due to falling foot per 1,000 cubic feet of room vol-
objects or work activity in the area. ume. Discharge from outlet openings
(g) Containers shall be firmly secured shall be directed or conducted to a safe
and stored in an upright position. location.
(h) Welding or cutting operations, (c) There shall be no sources of igni-
and smoking shall be prohibited while tion.
hydrogen is in the room. (d) Electrical wiring and equipment
(i) The area shall be adequately ven- shall comply with paragraphs (c)(1)(ix)
tilated. Safety relief devices on the (a) and (b) of this section except that
containers shall be vented directly out- the provisions of paragraph (c)(1)(ix)(b)
doors or to a suitable hood. See para- of this section shall apply to all elec-
graphs (c)(1)(iv)(b) and (c)(2)(i)(f) of trical wiring and equipment in the sep-
this section. arate building.
(3) Design considerations at specific lo- (e) Heating, if provided, shall be by
cations—(i) Outdoor locations. (a) Out- steam, hot water, or other indirect
door location shall mean outside of any means.
building or structure, and includes lo- (iii) Special rooms. (a) Floors, walls,
cations under a weather shelter or can- and ceilings shall have a fire resistance
opy provided such locations are not en- rating of at least 2 hours. Walls or par-
closed by more than two walls set at titions shall be continuous from floor
right angles and are provided with to ceiling and shall be securely an-
vent-space between the walls and vent- chored. At least one wall shall be an
ed roof or canopy. exterior wall. Openings to other parts
(b) Roadways and yard surfaces lo- of the building shall not be permitted.
cated below liquefied hydrogen piping, Windows and doors shall be in exterior
from which liquid air may drip, shall walls and doors shall be located in such
be constructed of noncombustible ma- a manner that they will be accessible

terials. in an emergency. Windows shall be of
229
shatterproof glass or plastic in metal § 1910.104 Oxygen.

frames.
(a) Scope. This section applies to the
(b) Ventilation shall be as provided in
installation of bulk oxygen systems on
paragraph (c)(3)(ii)(b) of this section.
industrial and institutional consumer
(c) Explosion venting shall be pro-
vided in exterior walls or roof only. premises. This section does not apply
The venting area shall be equal to not to oxygen manufacturing plants or
less than 1 square foot per 30 cubic feet other establishments operated by the
of room volume and may consist of any oxygen supplier or his agent for the
one or any combination of the fol- purpose of storing oxygen and refilling
lowing: Walls of light noncombustible portable containers, trailers, mobile
material; lightly fastened hatch covers; supply trucks, or tank cars, nor to sys-
lightly fastened swinging doors open- tems having capacities less than those
ing outward in exterior walls; lightly stated in paragraph (b)(1) of this sec-
fastened walls or roofs designed to re- tion.
lieve at a maximum pressure of 25 (b) Bulk oxygen systems—(1) Definition.
pounds per square foot. As used in this section: A bulk oxygen
(d) There shall be no sources of igni- system is an assembly of equipment,
tion. such as oxygen storage containers,
(e) Electrical wiring and equipment pressure regulators, safety devices, va-
shall comply with paragraph (c)(1)(ix) porizers, manifolds, and inter-
(a) and (b) of this section except that connecting piping, which has storage
the provision of paragraph (c)(1)(ix)(b) capacity of more than 13,000 cubic feet
of this section shall apply to all elec- of oxygen, Normal Temperature and
trical wiring and equipment in the spe- Pressure (NTP), connected in service or
cial room. ready for service, or more than 25,000
(f) Heating, if provided, shall be cubic feet of oxygen (NTP) including
steam, hot water, or by other indirect unconnected reserves on hand at the
means. site. The bulk oxygen system termi-
(4) Operating instructions—(i) Written nates at the point where oxygen at
instructions. For installation which re- service pressure first enters the supply
quire any operation of equipment by line. The oxygen containers may be
the user, legible instructions shall be stationary or movable, and the oxygen
maintained at operating locations. may be stored as gas or liquid.
(ii) Attendant. A qualified person (2) Location—(i) General. Bulk oxygen
shall be in attendance at all times storage systems shall be located above
while the mobile hydrogen supply unit ground out of doors, or shall be in-
is being unloaded. stalled in a building of noncombustible
(iii) Security. Each mobile liquefied construction, adequately vented, and
hydrogen supply unit used as part of a used for that purpose exclusively. The
hydrogen system shall be adequately location selected shall be such that
secured to prevent movement. containers and associated equipment
(iv) Grounding. The mobile liquefied
shall not be exposed by electric power
hydrogen supply unit shall be grounded
lines, flammable or combustible liquid
for static electricity.
lines, or flammable gas lines.
(5) Maintenance. The equipment and
functioning of each charged liquefied (ii) Accessibility. The system shall be
hydrogen system shall be maintained located so that it is readily accessible
in a safe operating condition in accord- to mobile supply equipment at ground
ance with the requirements of this sec- level and to authorized personnel.
tion. Weeds or similar combustibles (iii) Leakage. Where oxygen is stored
shall not be permitted within 25 feet of as a liquid, noncombustible surfacing
any liquefied hydrogen equipment. shall be provided in an area in which
any leakage of liquid oxygen might fall
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 during operation of the system and fill-
FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 53 FR 12121, Apr. 12,
1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 58 FR 35309, ing of a storage container. For pur-
poses of this paragraph, asphaltic or bi-
June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9236, 9237, Mar. 7, 1996; 69

FR 31881, June 8, 2004; 72 FR 71069, Dec. 14, tuminous paving is considered to be
2007] combustible.
230
(iv) Elevation. When locating bulk ox- Distance (feet) Capacity (gallons)
ygen systems near above-ground flam-
25 .................................................. 0 to 1000.
mable or combustible liquid storage
50 .................................................. 1001 or more.
which may be either indoors or out-
doors, it is advisable to locate the sys-
(viii) Combustible liquid storage below-
tem on ground higher than the flam-
ground.
mable or combustible liquid storage.
(v) Dikes. Where it is necessary to lo- Distance from oxygen stor-
Distance measured hori-
cate a bulk oxygen system on ground zontally from oxygen storage age container to filling and
vent connections or openings
lower than adjacent flammable or com- container to combustible liq- to combustible liquid tank
uid tank (feet)
bustible liquid storage suitable means (feet)
shall be taken (such as by diking, di-
15 ........................................... 40.
version curbs, or grading) with respect
to the adjacent flammable or combus-
(ix) Flammable gas storage. (Such as
tible liquid storage to prevent accumu-
compressed flammable gases, liquefied
lation of liquids under the bulk oxygen
flammable gases and flammable gases
system.
(3) Distance between systems and expo- in low pressure gas holders):
sures—(i) General. The minimum dis- Distance (feet) Capacity (cu. ft. NTP)
tance from any bulk oxygen storage
container to exposures, measured in 50 .................................................. Less than 5000.
the most direct line except as indicated 90 .................................................. 5000 or more.
in paragraphs (b)(3) (vi) and (viii) of
this section, shall be as indicated in (x) Highly combustible materials. Fifty
paragraphs (b)(3) (ii) to (xviii) of this feet from solid materials which burn
section inclusive. rapidly, such as excelsior or paper.
(ii) Combustible structures. Fifty feet (xi) Slow-burning materials. Twenty-
from any combustible structures. five feet from solid materials which
(iii) Fire resistive structures. Twenty- burn slowly, such as coal and heavy
five feet from any structures with fire- timber.
resistive exterior walls or sprinklered (xii) Ventilation. Seventy-five feet in
buildings of other construction, but one direction and 35 feet in approxi-
not less than one-half the height of ad- mately 90° direction from confining
jacent side wall of the structure. walls (not including firewalls less than
(iv) Openings. At least 10 feet from 20 feet high) to provide adequate ven-
any opening in adjacent walls of fire tilation in courtyards and similar con-
resistive structures. Spacing from such fining areas.
structures shall be adequate to permit (xiii) Congested areas. Twenty-five
maintenance, but shall not be less than feet from congested areas such as of-
1 foot. fices, lunchrooms, locker rooms, time
(v) Flammable liquid storage above- clock areas, and similar locations
ground. where people may congregate.
Distance (feet) Capacity (gallons) (xiv)–(xvii) [Reserved]
(xviii) Exceptions. The distances in
50 .................................................. 0 to 1000. paragraphs (b)(3) (ii), (iii), (v) to (xi) in-
90 .................................................. 1001 or more.
clusive, of this section do not apply
(vi) Flammable liquid storage below- where protective structures such as
ground. firewalls of adequate height to safe-
guard the oxygen storage systems are
Distance measured Distance from oxygen located between the bulk oxygen stor-
storage container to
horizontally from oxy- filling and vent con- Capacity gal- age installation and the exposure. In
gen storage container
to flammable liquid nections or openings lons such cases, the bulk oxygen storage in-
to flammable liquid
tank (feet) tank (feet) stallation may be a minimum distance
of 1 foot from the firewall.
15 .............................. 50 .............................. 0 to 1000.
30 .............................. 50 .............................. 1001 or
(4) Storage containers—(i) Foundations
more. and supports. Permanently installed
containers shall be provided with sub-
(vii) Combustible liquid storage above- stantial noncombustible supports on

ground. firm noncombustible foundations.
231
(ii) Construction—liquid. Liquid oxy- fication shall be equipped with safety

gen storage containers shall be fab- relief devices as required thereby.
ricated from materials meeting the im- (iii) ASME containers. Bulk oxygen
pact test requirements of paragraph storage containers designed and con-
UG–84 of ASME Boiler and Pressure structed in accordance with the ASME
Vessel Code, section VIII—Unfired Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, sec-
Pressure Vessels—1968, which is incor- tion VIII—Unfired Pressure Vessel—
porated by reference as specified in 1968 shall be equipped with safety relief
§ 1910.6. Containers operating at pres- devices meeting the provisions of the
sures above 15 pounds per square inch Compressed Gas Association Pamphlet
gage (p.s.i.g.) shall be designed, con- ‘‘Safety Relief Device Standards for
structed, and tested in accordance with Compressed Gas Storage Containers,’’
appropriate requirements of ASME S–1, part 3, which is incorporated by
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, sec- reference as specified in § 1910.6.
tion VII—Unfired Pressure Vessels— (iv) Insulation. Insulation casings on
1968. Insulation surrounding the liquid liquid oxygen containers shall be
oxygen container shall be noncombus- equipped with suitable safety relief de-
tible. vices.
(iii) Construction—gaseous. High- pres- (v) Reliability. All safety relief de-
sure gaseous oxygen containers shall vices shall be so designed or located
comply with one of the following: that moisture cannot collect and freeze
(a) Designed, constructed, and tested in a manner which would interfere with
in accordance with appropriate require- proper operation of the device.
ments of ASME Boiler and Pressure (7) Liquid oxygen vaporizers—(i)
Vessel Code, Section VIII—Unfired Mounts and couplings. The vaporizer
Pressure Vessels—1968. shall be anchored and its connecting
(b) Designed, constructed, tested, and piping be sufficiently flexible to pro-
maintained in accordance with DOT vide for the effect of expansion and
Specifications and Regulations. contraction due to temperature
(5) Piping, tubing, and fittings—(i) Se- changes.
lection. Piping, tubing, and fittings (ii) Relief devices. The vaporizer and
shall be suitable for oxygen service and its piping shall be adequately protected
for the pressures and temperatures in- on the oxygen and heating medium sec-
volved. tions with safety relief devices.
(ii) Specification. Piping and tubing (iii) Heating. Heat used in an oxygen
shall conform to section 2—Gas and Air vaporizer shall be indirectly supplied
Piping Systems of Code for Pressure only through media such as steam, air,
Piping, ANSI, B31.1–1967 with addenda water, or water solutions which do not
B31.10a–1969, which is incorporated by react with oxygen.
reference as specified in § 1910.6. (iv) Grounding. If electric heaters are
(iii) Fabrication. Piping or tubing for used to provide the primary source of
operating temperatures below ¥20 °F. heat, the vaporizing system shall be
shall be fabricated from materials electrically grounded.
meeting the impact test requirements (8) Equipment assembly and installa-
of paragraph UG–84 of ASME Boiler tion—(i) Cleaning. Equipment making
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section up a bulk oxygen system shall be
VIII—Unfired Pressure Vessels—1968, cleaned in order to remove oil, grease
when tested at the minimum operating or other readily oxidizable materials
temperature to which the piping may before placing the system in service.
be subjected in service. (ii) Joints. Joints in piping and tubing
(6) Safety relief devices—(i) General. may be made by welding or by use of
Bulk oxygen storage containers, re- flanged, threaded, slip, or compression
gardless of design pressure shall be fittings. Gaskets or thread sealants
equipped with safety relief devices as shall be suitable for oxygen service.
required by the ASME code or the DOT (iii) Accessories. Valves, gages, regu-
specifications and regulations. lators, and other accessories shall be
(ii) DOT containers. Bulk oxygen stor- suitable for oxygen service.
age containers designed and con- (iv) Installation. Installation of bulk

structed in accordance with DOT speci- oxygen systems shall be supervised by
232
personnel familiar with proper prac- porated by reference as specified in

tices with reference to their construc- § 1910.6.
tion and use. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 61
(v) Testing. After installation all field FR 9237, Mar. 7, 1996]
erected piping shall be tested and
proved gas tight at maximum oper- § 1910.106 Flammable liquids.
ating pressure. Any medium used for (a) Definitions. As used in this sec-
testing shall be oil free and nonflam- tion:
mable. (1) Aerosol shall mean a material
(vi) Security. Storage containers, pip- which is dispensed from its container
ing, valves, regulating equipment, and as a mist, spray, or foam by a propel-
other accessories shall be protected lant under pressure.
against physical damage and against (2) Atmospheric tank shall mean a
tampering. storage tank which has been designed
(vii) Venting. Any enclosure con- to operate at pressures from atmos-
taining oxygen control or operating pheric through 0.5 p.s.i.g.
equipment shall be adequately vented. (3) Automotive service station shall
mean that portion of property where
(viii) Placarding. The bulk oxygen
flammable liquids used as motor fuels
storage location shall be permanently
are stored and dispensed from fixed
placarded to indicate: ‘‘OXYGEN—NO
equipment into the fuel tanks of motor
SMOKING—NO OPEN FLAMES’’, or an vehicles and shall include any facilities
equivalent warning. available for the sale and service of
(ix) Electrical wiring. Bulk oxygen in- tires, batteries, and accessories, and
stallations are not hazardous locations for minor automotive maintenance
as defined and covered in subpart S of work. Major automotive repairs, paint-
this part. Therefore, general purpose or ing, body and fender work are excluded.
weatherproof types of electrical wiring (4) Basement shall mean a story of a
and equipment are acceptable depend- building or structure having one-half
ing upon whether the installation is in- or more of its height below ground
doors or outdoors. Such equipment level and to which access for fire fight-
shall be installed in accordance with ing purposes is unduly restricted.
the applicable provisions of subpart S (5) Boiling point shall mean the boil-
of this part. ing point of a liquid at a pressure of
(9) Operating instructions. For instal- 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute
lations which require any operation of (p.s.i.a.) (760 mm.). Where an accurate
equipment by the user, legible instruc- boiling point is unavailable for the ma-
tions shall be maintained at operating terial in question, or for mixtures
locations. which do not have a constant boiling
(10) Maintenance. The equipment and point, for purposes of this section the
functioning of each charged bulk oxy- 10 percent point of a distillation per-
gen system shall be maintained in a formed in accordance with the Stand-
safe operating condition in accordance ard Method of Test for Distillation of
with the requirements of this section. Petroleum Products, ASTM D–86–62,
Wood and long dry grass shall be cut which is incorporated by reference as
back within 15 feet of any bulk oxygen specified in § 1910.6, may be used as the
storage container. boiling point of the liquid.
(6) Boilover shall mean the expulsion
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 of crude oil (or certain other liquids)
FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 61 FR 9237, Mar. 7, from a burning tank. The light frac-
1996] tions of the crude oil burnoff producing
a heat wave in the residue, which on
§ 1910.105 Nitrous oxide.
reaching a water strata may result in
The piped systems for the in-plant the expulsion of a portion of the con-
transfer and distribution of nitrous tents of the tank in the form of froth.
oxide shall be designed, installed, (7) Bulk plant shall mean that por-
maintained, and operated in accord- tion of a property where flammable liq-
ance with Compressed Gas Association uids are received by tank vessel, pipe-
Pamphlet G–8.1–1964, which is incor- lines, tank car, or tank vehicle, and are
233
stored or blended in bulk for the pur- (ii) For a liquid which has a viscosity
pose of distributing such liquids by of 45 SUS or more at 100 °F (37.8 °C), or
tank vessel, pipeline, tank car, tank contains suspended solids, or has a
vehicle, or container. tendency to form a surface film while
(8) Chemical plant shall mean a large under test, the Standard Method of
integrated plant or that portion of Test for Flashpoint by Pensky-Martens
such a plant other than a refinery or Closed Tester (ASTM D–93–71) or an
distillery where flammable liquids are equivalent method as defined by Ap-
produced by chemical reactions or used pendix B to § 1910.1200—Physical Hazard
in chemical reactions. Criteria, shall be used except that the
(9) Closed container shall mean a methods specified in Note 1 to section
container as herein defined, so sealed 1.1 of ASTM D–93–71 may be used for
by means of a lid or other device that the respective materials specified in
neither liquid nor vapor will escape the Note. The preceding ASTM stand-
from it at ordinary temperatures. ard is incorporated by reference as
(10) Crude petroleum shall mean hy- specified in § 1910.6.
drocarbon mixtures that have a flash (iii) For a liquid that is a mixture of
point below 150 °F. and which have not compounds that have different
been processed in a refinery. volatilities and flashpoints, its
(11) Distillery shall mean a plant or flashpoint shall be determined by using
that portion of a plant where flam- the procedure specified in paragraph
mable liquids produced by fermenta- (a)(14)(i) or (ii) of this section on the
tion are concentrated, and where the liquid in the form it is shipped.
concentrated products may also be (iv) Organic peroxides, which undergo
mixed, stored, or packaged. autoaccelerating thermal decomposi-
(12) Fire area shall mean an area of a tion, are excluded from any of the
building separated from the remainder flashpoint determination methods
of the building by construction having
specified in this subparagraph.
a fire resistance of at least 1 hour and
(15) Hotel shall mean buildings or
having all communicating openings
groups of buildings under the same
properly protected by an assembly hav-
management in which there are sleep-
ing a fire resistance rating of at least 1
ing accommodations for hire, primarily
hour.
used by transients who are lodged with
(13) Flammable aerosol shall mean a
or without meals including but not
flammable aerosol as defined by Appen-
limited to inns, clubs, motels, and
dix B to § 1910.1200—Physical Hazard
apartment hotels.
Criteria. For the purposes of paragraph
(d) of this section, such aerosols are (16) Institutional occupancy shall
considered Category 1 flammable liq- mean the occupancy or use of a build-
uids. ing or structure or any portion thereof
(14) Flashpoint means the minimum by persons harbored or detained to re-
temperature at which a liquid gives off ceive medical, charitable or other care
vapor within a test vessel in sufficient or treatment, or by persons involun-
concentration to form an ignitable tarily detained.
mixture with air near the surface of (17) Liquid shall mean, for the pur-
the liquid, and shall be determined as pose of this section, any material
follows: which has a fluidity greater than that
(i) For a liquid which has a viscosity of 300 penetration asphalt when tested
of less than 45 SUS at 100 °F (37.8 °C), in accordance with ASTM Test for Pen-
does not contain suspended solids, and etration for Bituminous Materials, D–
does not have a tendency to form a sur- 5–65, which is incorporated by reference
face film while under test, the proce- as specified in § 1910.6.
dure specified in the Standard Method (18) [Reserved]
of Test for Flashpoint by Tag Closed (19) Flammable liquid means any liq-
Tester (ASTM D–56–70), which is incor- uid having a flashpoint at or below
porated by reference as specified in 199.4 °F (93 °C). Flammable liquids are
§ 1910.6, or an equivalent test method as divided into four categories as follows:
defined in Appendix B to § 1910.1200— (i) Category 1 shall include liquids

Physical Hazard Criteria, shall be used. having flashpoints below 73.4 °F (23 °C)
234
and having a boiling point at or below dering or receiving of professional serv-

95 °F (35 °C). ices.
(ii) Category 2 shall include liquids (25) Portable tank shall mean a
having flashpoints below 73.4 °F (23 °C) closed container having a liquid capac-
and having a boiling point above 95 °F ity over 60 U.S. gallons and not in-
(35 °C). tended for fixed installation.
(iii) Category 3 shall include liquids (26) Pressure vessel shall mean a
having flashpoints at or above 73.4 °F storage tank or vessel which has been
(23 °C) and at or below 140 °F (60 °C). designed to operate at pressures above
When a Category 3 liquid with a 15 p.s.i.g.
flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) is (27) Protection for exposure shall
heated for use to within 30 °F (16.7 °C) mean adequate fire protection for
of its flashpoint, it shall be handled in structures on property adjacent to
accordance with the requirements for a tanks, where there are employees of
Category 3 liquid with a flashpoint the establishment.
below 100 °F (37.8 °C). (28) Refinery shall mean a plant in
(iv) Category 4 shall include liquids which flammable liquids are produced
having flashpoints above 140 °F (60 °C) on a commercial scale from crude pe-
and at or below 199.4 °F (93 °C). When a troleum, natural gasoline, or other hy-
Category 4 flammable liquid is heated drocarbon sources.
for use to within 30 °F (16.7 °C) of its (29) Safety can shall mean an ap-
flashpoint, it shall be handled in ac- proved container, of not more than 5
cordance with the requirements for a gallons capacity, having a spring-clos-
Category 3 liquid with a flashpoint at ing lid and spout cover and so designed
or above 100 °F (37.8 °C). that it will safely relieve internal pres-
(v) When liquid with a flashpoint sure when subjected to fire exposure.
greater than 199.4 °F (93 °C) is heated
(30) Vapor pressure shall mean the
for use to within 30 °F (16.7 °C) of its
pressure, measured in pounds per
flashpoint, it shall be handled in ac-
square inch (absolute) exerted by a
cordance with the requirements for a
volatile liquid as determined by the
Category 4 flammable liquid.
‘‘Standard Method of Test for Vapor
(20) Unstable (reactive) liquid shall
Pressure of Petroleum Products (Reid
mean a liquid which in the pure state
Method),’’ American Society for Test-
or as commercially produced or trans-
ing and Materials ASTM D323–68, which
ported will vigorously polymerize, de-
is incorporated by reference as speci-
compose, condense, or will become self-
fied in § 1910.6.
reactive under conditions of shocks,
pressure, or temperature. (31) Ventilation as specified in this
(21) Low-pressure tank shall mean a section is for the prevention of fire and
storage tank which has been designed explosion. It is considered adequate if
to operate at pressures above 0.5 p.s.i.g. it is sufficient to prevent accumulation
but not more than 15 p.s.i.g. of significant quantities of vapor-air
(22) Marine service station shall mixtures in concentration over one-
mean that portion of a property where fourth of the lower flammable limit.
flammable liquids used as fuels are (32) Storage: Flammable liquids shall
stored and dispensed from fixed equip- be stored in a tank or in a container
ment on shore, piers, wharves, or float- that complies with paragraph (d)(2) of
ing docks into the fuel tanks of self- this section.
propelled craft, and shall include all fa- (33) Barrel shall mean a volume of 42
cilities used in connection therewith. U.S. gallons.
(23) Mercantile occupancy shall mean (34) Container shall mean any can,
the occupancy or use of a building or barrel, or drum.
structure or any portion thereof for the (35) Approved unless otherwise indi-
displaying, selling, or buying of goods, cated, approved, or listed by a nation-
wares, or merchandise. ally recognized testing laboratory.
(24) Office occupancy shall mean the Refer to § 1910.7 for definition of nation-
occupancy or use of a building or struc- ally recognized testing laboratory.
ture or any portion thereof for the (36) Listed see ‘‘approved’’ in
transaction of business, or the ren- § 1910.106(a)(35).
235
(37) SUS means Saybolt Universal (1) Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.,

Seconds as determined by the Standard Subjects No. 142, Standard for Steel
Method of Test for Saybolt Viscosity Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and
(ASTM D–88–56), and may be deter- Combustible Liquids, 1968; No. 58,
mined by use of the SUS conversion ta- Standard for Steel Underground Tanks
bles specified in ASTM Method D2161– for Flammable and Combustible Liq-
66 following determination of viscosity uids, Fifth Edition, December 1961; or
in accordance with the procedures No. 80, Standard for Steel Inside Tanks
specified in the Standard Method of for Oil-Burner Fuel, September 1963.
Test for Viscosity of Transparent and (2) American Petroleum Institute
Opaque Liquids (ASTM D445–65). Standards No. 650, Welded Steel Tanks
(38) Viscous means a viscosity of 45 for Oil Storage, Third Edition, 1966.
SUS or more. (3) American Petroleum Institute
(b) Tank storage—(1) Design and con- Standards No. 12B, Specification for
struction of tanks—(i) Materials. (a) Bolted Production Tanks, Eleventh
Tanks shall be built of steel except as Edition, May 1958, and Supplement 1,
provided in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) (b) March 1962; No. 12D, Specification for
through (e) of this section. Large Welded Production Tanks, Sev-
(b) Tanks may be built of materials enth Edition, August 1957; or No. 12F,
other than steel for installation under- Specification for Small Welded Produc-
ground or if required by the properties tion Tanks, Fifth Edition, March 1961.
of the liquid stored. Tanks located Tanks built in accordance with these
above ground or inside buildings shall standards shall be used only as produc-
be of noncombustible construction. tion tanks for storage of crude petro-
(c) Tanks built of materials other leum in oil-producing areas.
than steel shall be designed to speci- (b) Tanks designed for underground
fications embodying principles recog- service not exceeding 2,500 gallons ca-
nized as good engineering design for pacity may be used aboveground.
the material used.
(c) Low-pressure tanks and pressure
(d) Unlined concrete tanks may be
vessels may be used as atmospheric
used for storing flammable liquids hav-
tanks.
ing a gravity of 40° API or heavier.
(d) Atmospheric tanks shall not be
Concrete tanks with special lining may
used for the storage of a flammable liq-
be used for other services provided the
uid at a temperature at or above its
design is in accordance with sound en-
boiling point.
gineering practice.
(e) [Reserved] (iv) Low pressure tanks. (a) The nor-
(f) Special engineering consideration mal operating pressure of the tank
shall be required if the specific gravity shall not exceed the design pressure of
of the liquid to be stored exceeds that the tank.
of water or if the tanks are designed to (b) Low-pressure tanks shall be built
contain flammable liquids at a liquid in accordance with acceptable stand-
temperature below 0 °F. ards of design. Low-pressure tanks may
(ii) Fabrication. (a) [Reserved] be built in accordance with the fol-
(b) Metal tanks shall be welded, riv- lowing consensus standards that are in-
eted, and caulked, brazed, or bolted, or corporated by reference as specified in
constructed by use of a combination of § 1910.6:
these methods. Filler metal used in (1) American Petroleum Institute
brazing shall be nonferrous metal or an Standard No. 620. Recommended Rules
alloy having a melting point above 1000 for the Design and Construction of
°F. and below that of the metal joined. Large, Welded, Low-Pressure Storage
(iii) Atmospheric tanks. (a) Atmos- Tanks, Third Edition, 1966.
pheric tanks shall be built in accord- (2) The principles of the Code for
ance with acceptable good standards of Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section VIII
design. Atmospheric tanks may be of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Ves-
built in accordance with the following sels Code, 1968.
consensus standards that are incor- (c) Atmospheric tanks built accord-
porated by reference as specified in ing to Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.,

§ 1910.6: requirements in subdivision (iii)(a) of
236
and shall be limited to 2.5 p.s.i.g. under tanks are accessible for firefighting
emergency venting conditions. purposes.
This paragraph may be used for oper- (f) The minimum separation between
ating pressures not exceeding 1 p.s.i.g. a liquefied petroleum gas container
(d) Pressure vessels may be used as and a flammable liquid storage tank
low-pressure tanks. shall be 20 feet, except in the case of
(v) Pressure vessels. (a) The normal op- flammable liquid tanks operating at
erating pressure of the vessel shall not pressures exceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g. or
exceed the design pressure of the ves- equipped with emergency venting
sel. which will permit pressures to exceed
(b) Pressure vessels shall be built in 2.5 p.s.i.g. in which case the provisions
accordance with the Code for Unfired of subdivisions (a) and (b) of this sub-
Pressure Vessels, Section VIII of the division shall apply. Suitable means
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code shall be taken to prevent the accumu-
1968. lation of flammable liquids under adja-
(vi) Provisions for internal corrosion. cent liquefied petroleum gas containers
When tanks are not designed in accord- such as by diversion curbs or grading.
ance with the American Petroleum In- When flammable liquid storage tanks
stitute, American Society of Mechan- are within a diked area, the liquefied
ical Engineers, or the Underwriters’ petroleum gas containers shall be out-
Laboratories, Inc.’s, standards, or if side the diked area and at least 10 feet
corrosion is anticipated beyond that away from the centerline of the wall of
provided for in the design formulas the diked area. The foregoing provi-
used, additional metal thickness or sions shall not apply when liquefied pe-
suitable protective coatings or linings troleum gas containers of 125 gallons or
shall be provided to compensate for the less capacity are installed adjacent to
corrosion loss expected during the de- fuel oil supply tanks of 550 gallons or
sign life of the tank. less capacity.
(2) Installation of outside aboveground (iii) [Reserved]
tanks. (iv) Normal venting for aboveground
(i) [Reserved] tanks. (a) Atmospheric storage tanks
(ii) Spacing (shell-to-shell) between shall be adequately vented to prevent
aboveground tanks. (a) The distance be- the development of vacuum or pressure
tween any two flammable liquid stor- sufficient to distort the roof of a cone
age tanks shall not be less than 3 feet. roof tank or exceeding the design pres-
(b) Except as provided in paragraph sure in the case of other atmospheric
(b)(2)(ii)(c) of this section, the distance tanks, as a result of filling or
between any two adjacent tanks shall emptying, and atmospheric tempera-
not be less than one-sixth the sum of ture changes.
their diameters. When the diameter of (b) Normal vents shall be sized either
one tank is less than one-half the di- in accordance with: (1) The American
ameter of the adjacent tank, the dis- Petroleum Institute Standard 2000
tance between the two tanks shall not (1968), Venting Atmospheric and Low-
be less than one-half the diameter of Pressure Storage Tanks, which is in-
the smaller tank. corporated by reference as specified in
(c) Where crude petroleum in con- § 1910.6; or (2) other accepted standard;
junction with production facilities are or (3) shall be at least as large as the
located in noncongested areas and have filling or withdrawal connection,
capacities not exceeding 126,000 gallons whichever is larger but in no case less
(3,000 barrels), the distance between than 11⁄4 inch nominal inside diameter.
such tanks shall not be less than 3 feet. (c) Low-pressure tanks and pressure
(d) Where unstable flammable liquids vessels shall be adequately vented to
are stored, the distance between such prevent development of pressure or
tanks shall not be less than one-half vacuum, as a result of filling or
the sum of their diameters. emptying and atmospheric tempera-
(e) When tanks are compacted in ture changes, from exceeding the de-
three or more rows or in an irregular sign pressure of the tank or vessel.
pattern, greater spacing or other Protection shall also be provided to

means shall be provided so that inside prevent overpressure from any pump
237
discharging into the tank or vessel flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C) where
when the pump discharge pressure can conditions are such that their use may,
exceed the design pressure of the tank in case of obstruction, result in tank
or vessel. damage.
(d) If any tank or pressure vessel has (v) Emergency relief venting for fire ex-
more than one fill or withdrawal con- posure for aboveground tanks. (a) Every
nection and simultaneous filling or aboveground storage tank shall have
withdrawal can be made, the vent size some form of construction or device
shall be based on the maximum antici- that will relieve excessive internal
pated simultaneous flow. pressure caused by exposure fires.
(e) Unless the vent is designed to (b) In a vertical tank the construc-
limit the internal pressure 2.5 p.s.i. or tion referred to in subdivision (a) of
less, the outlet of vents and vent drains this subdivision may take the form of a
shall be arranged to discharge in such floating roof, lifter roof, a weak roof-
a manner as to prevent localized over- to-shell seam, or other approved pres-
heating of any part of the tank in the sure relieving construction. The weak
event vapors from such vents are ig- roof-to-shell seam shall be constructed
nited. to fail preferential to any other seam.
(f)(1) Tanks and pressure vessels stor- (c) Where entire dependence for emer-
ing Category 1 flammable liquids shall gency relief is placed upon pressure re-
be equipped with venting devices which lieving devices, the total venting ca-
shall be normally closed except when pacity of both normal and emergency
venting to pressure or vacuum condi- vents shall be enough to prevent rup-
tions. Tanks and pressure vessels stor- ture of the shell or bottom of the tank
ing Category 2 flammable liquids and if vertical, or of the shell or heads if
Category 3 flammable liquids with a horizontal. If unstable liquids are
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C) shall be stored, the effects of heat or gas result-
equipped with venting devices which ing from polymerization, decomposi-
shall be normally closed except when tion, condensation, or self-reactivity
venting under pressure or vacuum con- shall be taken into account. The total
ditions, or with approved flame arrest- capacity of both normal and emergency
ers. venting devices shall be not less than
(2) Exemption: Tanks of 3,000 bbls that derived from Table H–10 except as
(barrels). capacity or less containing provided in subdivision (e) or (f) of this
crude petroleum in crude-producing subdivision. Such device may be a self-
areas and outside aboveground atmos- closing manhole cover, or one using
pheric tanks under 1,000 gallons capac- long bolts that permit the cover to lift
ity containing other than Category 1 under internal pressure, or an addi-
flammable liquids may have open tional or larger relief valve or valves.
vents. (See paragraph (b)(2)(vi)(b) of The wetted area of the tank shall be
this section.) calculated on the basis of 55 percent of
(g) Flame arresters or venting de- the total exposed area of a sphere or
vices required in paragraph (b)(2)(iv)(f) spheroid, 75 percent of the total ex-
of this section may be omitted for Cat- posed area of a horizontal tank and the
egory 2 flammable liquids and Cat- first 30 feet above grade of the exposed
egory 3 flammable liquids with a shell area of a vertical tank.
TABLE H–10—WETTED AREA VERSUS CUBIC FEET FREE AIR PER HOUR
[14.7 psia and 60 °F.]
Square feet CFH Square feet CFH Square feet CFH
20 21,100 200 211,000 1,000 524,000

30 31,600 250 239,000 1,200 557,000
40 42,100 300 265,000 1,400 587,000
50 52,700 350 288,000 1,600 614,000
60 63,200 400 312,000 1,800 639,000
70 73,700 500 354,000 2,000 662,000
80 84,200 600 392,000 2,400 704,000
90 94,800 700 428,000 2,800 742,000

100 105,000 800 462,000 and
120 126,000 900 493,000 over
238
TABLE H–10—WETTED AREA VERSUS CUBIC FEET FREE AIR PER HOUR—Continued
[14.7 psia and 60 °F.]
Square feet CFH Square feet CFH Square feet CFH
140 147,000 1,000 524,000

160 168,000
180 190,000
200 211,000
(d) For tanks and storage vessels de- tank, in the event vapors from such
signed for pressure over 1 p.s.i.g., the vents are ignited.
total rate of venting shall be deter- (h) Each commercial tank venting
mined in accordance with Table H–10, device shall have stamped on it the
except that when the exposed wetted opening pressure, the pressure at which
area of the surface is greater than 2,800 the valve reaches the full open posi-
square feet, the total rate of venting tion, and the flow capacity at the lat-
shall be calculated by the following ter pressure, expressed in cubic feet per
formula: hour of air at 60 °F. and at a pressure
CFH = 1,107A 0.82 of 14.7 p.s.i.a.
(i) The flow capacity of tank venting
Where;
devices 12 inches and smaller in nomi-
CFH = Venting requirement, in cubic feet of nal pipe size shall be determined by ac-
free air per hour.
tual test of each type and size of vent.
A = Exposed wetted surface, in square feet.
These flow tests may be conducted by
NOTE: The foregoing formula is based on Q the manufacturer if certified by a
= 21,000A0.82. qualified impartial observer, or may be
(e) The total emergency relief vent- conducted by an outside agency. The
ing capacity for any specific stable liq- flow capacity of tank venting devices
uid may be determined by the fol- larger than 12 inches nominal pipe size,
lowing formula: including manhole covers with long
bolts or equivalent, may be calculated
V = 1337 ÷ L√M provided that the opening pressure is
V = Cubic feet of free air per hour from Table actually measured, the rating pressure
H–10. and corresponding free orifice area are
L = Latent heat of vaporization of specific stated, the word ‘‘calculated’’ appears
liquid in B.t.u. per pound. on the nameplate, and the computation
M = Molecular weight of specific liquids.
is based on a flow coefficient of 0.5 ap-
(f) The required airflow rate of sub- plied to the rated orifice area.
division (c) or (e) of this subdivision (vi) Vent piping for aboveground tanks.
may be multiplied by the appropriate (a) Vent piping shall be constructed in
factor listed in the following schedule accordance with paragraph (c) of this
when protection is provided as indi- section.
cated. Only one factor may be used for (b) Where vent pipe outlets for tanks
any one tank. storing Category 1 or 2 flammable liq-
0.5 for drainage in accordance with subdivi- uids, or Category 3 flammable liquids
sion (vii)(b) of this subparagraph for tanks with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C),
over 200 square feet of wetted area. are adjacent to buildings or public
0.3 for approved water spray. ways, they shall be located so that the
0.3 for approved insulation. vapors are released at a safe point out-
0.15 for approved water spray with ap- side of buildings and not less than 12
proved insulation.
feet above the adjacent ground level. In
(g) The outlet of all vents and vent order to aid their dispersion, vapors
drains on tanks equipped with emer- shall be discharged upward or hori-
gency venting to permit pressures ex- zontally away from closely adjacent
ceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g. shall be arranged to walls. Vent outlets shall be located so
discharge in such a way as to prevent that flammable vapors will not be

localized overheating of any part of the trapped by eaves or other obstructions
239
and shall be at least five feet from be not less than the capacity of the
building openings. largest tank served by the enclosure,
(c) When tank vent piping is assuming a full tank. The capacity of
manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as the diked enclosure shall be calculated
to discharge, within the pressure limi- by deducting the volume below the
tations of the system, the vapors they height of the dike of all tanks within
may be required to handle when the enclosure.
manifolded tanks are subject to the (3) Walls of the diked area shall be of
same fire exposure. earth, steel, concrete or solid masonry
(vii) Drainage, dikes, and walls for designed to be liquidtight and to with-
aboveground tanks—(a) Drainage and stand a full hydrostatic head. Earthen
diked areas. The area surrounding a walls 3 feet or more in height shall
tank or a group of tanks shall be pro- have a flat section at the top not less
vided with drainage as in subdivision than 2 feet wide. The slope of an earth-
(b) of this subdivision, or shall be diked en wall shall be consistent with the
as provided in subdivision (c) of this angle of repose of the material of which
subdivision, to prevent accidental dis- the wall is constructed.
charge of liquid from endangering ad- (4) The walls of the diked area shall
joining property or reaching water- be restricted to an average height of 6
ways. feet above interior grade.
(b) Drainage. Where protection of ad- (5) [Reserved]
joining property or waterways is by (6) No loose combustible material,
means of a natural or manmade drain- empty or full drum or barrel, shall be
age system, such systems shall comply permitted within the diked area.
with the following: (viii) Tank openings other than vents
(1) [Reserved] for aboveground tanks.
(2) The drainage system shall termi- (a)–(c) [Reserved]
nate in vacant land or other area or in (d) Openings for gaging shall be pro-
an impounding basin having a capacity vided with a vaportight cap or cover.
not smaller than that of the largest (e) For Category 2 flammable liquids
tank served. This termination area and and Category 3 flammable liquids with
the route of the drainage system shall a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), other
be so located that, if the flammable than crude oils, gasolines, and as-
liquids in the drainage system are ig- phalts, the fill pipe shall be so designed
nited, the fire will not seriously expose and installed as to minimize the possi-
tanks or adjoining property. bility of generating static electricity.
(c) Diked areas. Where protection of A fill pipe entering the top of a tank
adjoining property or waterways is ac- shall terminate within 6 inches of the
complished by retaining the liquid bottom of the tank and shall be in-
around the tank by means of a dike, stalled to avoid excessive vibration.
the volume of the diked area shall (f) Filling and emptying connections
comply with the following require- which are made and broken shall be lo-
ments: cated outside of buildings at a location
(1) Except as provided in subdivision free from any source of ignition and
(2) of this subdivision, the volumetric not less than 5 feet away from any
capacity of the diked area shall not be building opening. Such connection
less than the greatest amount of liquid shall be closed and liquidtight when
that can be released from the largest not in use. The connection shall be
tank within the diked area, assuming a properly identified.
full tank. The capacity of the diked (3) Installation of underground tanks—
area enclosing more than one tank (i) Location. Excavation for under-
shall be calculated by deducting the ground storage tanks shall be made
volume of the tanks other than the with due care to avoid undermining of
largest tank below the height of the foundations of existing structures. Un-
dike. derground tanks or tanks under build-
(2) For a tank or group of tanks with ings shall be so located with respect to
fixed roofs containing crude petroleum existing building foundations and sup-
with boilover characteristics, the volu- ports that the loads carried by the lat-
metric capacity of the diked area shall ter cannot be transmitted to the tank.
240
The distance from any part of a tank flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall
storing Category 1 or 2 flammable liq- be so located that the discharge point
uids, or Category 3 flammable liquids is outside of buildings, higher than the
with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), fill pipe opening, and not less than 12
to the nearest wall of any basement or feet above the adjacent ground level.
pit shall be not less than 1 foot, and to Vent pipes shall discharge only upward
any property line that may be built in order to disperse vapors. Vent pipes
upon, not less than 3 feet. The distance 2 inches or less in nominal inside di-
from any part of a tank storing Cat- ameter shall not be obstructed by de-
egory 3 flammable liquids with a vices that will cause excessive back
flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) or pressure. Vent pipe outlets shall be so
Category 4 flammable liquids to the located that flammable vapors will not
nearest wall of any basement, pit or enter building openings, or be trapped
property line shall be not less than 1 under eaves or other obstructions. If
foot. the vent pipe is less than 10 feet in
(ii) Depth and cover. Underground length, or greater than 2 inches in
tanks shall be set on firm foundations nominal inside diameter, the outlet
and surrounded with at least 6 inches shall be provided with a vacuum and
of noncorrosive, inert materials such pressure relief device or there shall be
as clean sand, earth, or gravel well an approved flame arrester located in
tamped in place. The tank shall be the vent line at the outlet or within
placed in the hole with care since drop- the approved distance from the outlet.
ping or rolling the tank into the hole (b) Size of vents. Each tank shall be
can break a weld, puncture or damage vented through piping adequate in size
the tank, or scrape off the protective to prevent blow-back of vapor or liquid
coating of coated tanks. Tanks shall be at the fill opening while the tank is
covered with a minimum of 2 feet of being filled. Vent pipes shall be not less
earth, or shall be covered with not less than 11⁄4 inch nominal inside diameter.
than 1 foot of earth, on top of which
shall be placed a slab of reinforced con- TABLE H–11—VENT LINE DIAMETERS
crete not less than 4 inches thick. Pipe length 1
When underground tanks are, or are Maximum flow GPM
likely to be, subject to traffic, they 50 feet 100 feet 200 feet
shall be protected against damage from Inches Inches Inches
vehicles passing over them by at least 100 ....................................... 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4
3 feet of earth cover, or 18 inches of 200 ....................................... 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4
well-tamped earth, plus 6 inches of re- 300 ....................................... 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄2
400 ....................................... 11⁄4 11⁄2 2
inforced concrete or 8 inches of asphal- 500 ....................................... 11⁄2 11⁄2 2
tic concrete. When asphaltic or rein- 600 ....................................... 11⁄2 2 2
forced concrete paving is used as part 700 ....................................... 2 2 2
of the protection, it shall extend at 800 ....................................... 2 2 3
900 ....................................... 2 2 3
least 1 foot horizontally beyond the 1,000 .................................... 2 2 3
outline of the tank in all directions. 1 Vent lines of 50 ft., 100 ft., and 200 ft. of pipe plus 7 ells.
(iii) Corrosion protection. Corrosion
protection for the tank and its piping (c) Location and arrangement of
shall be provided by one or more of the vents for Category 3 flammable liquids
following methods: with a flashpoint at or above 100 °F
(a) Use of protective coatings or (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable liq-
wrappings; uids. Vent pipes from tanks storing
(b) Cathodic protection; or, Category 3 flammable liquids with a
(c) Corrosion resistant materials of flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) or
construction. Category 4 flammable liquids shall ter-
(iv) Vents. (a) Location and arrange- minate outside of the building and
ment of vents for Category 1 or 2 flam- higher than the fill pipe opening. Vent
mable liquids, or Category 3 flammable outlets shall be above normal snow
liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F level. They may be fitted with return
(37.8 °C). Vent pipes from tanks storing bends, coarse screens or other devices
Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or to minimize ingress of foreign mate-

Category 3 flammable liquids with a rial.
241
(d) Vent piping shall be constructed mitted. Vents shall discharge vapors
in accordance with paragraph (c) of outside the buildings.
this section. Vent pipes shall be so laid (iii) Vent piping. Vent piping shall be
as to drain toward the tank without constructed in accordance with para-
sags or traps in which liquid can col- graph (c) of this section.
lect. They shall be located so that they (iv) Tank openings other than vents. (a)
will not be subjected to physical dam- Connections for all tank openings shall
age. The tank end of the vent pipe shall be vapor or liquidtight. Vents are cov-
enter the tank through the top. ered in subdivision (ii) of this subpara-
(e) When tank vent piping is graph.
manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as (b) Each connection to a tank inside
to discharge, within the pressure limi- of buildings through which liquid can
tations of the system, the vapors they normally flow shall be provided with
may be required to handle when an internal or an external valve lo-
manifolded tanks are filled simulta- cated as close as practical to the shell
neously. of the tank. Such valves, when exter-
(v) Tank openings other than vents. (a) nal, and their connections to the tank
Connections for all tank openings shall shall be of steel except when the chem-
be vapor or liquid tight. ical characteristics of the liquid stored
(b) Openings for manual gaging, if are incompatible with steel. When ma-
independent of the fill pipe, shall be terials other than steel are necessary,
provided with a liquid-tight cap or they shall be suitable for the pressures,
cover. If inside a building, each such structural stresses, and temperatures
opening shall be protected against liq- involved, including fire exposures.
uid overflow and possible vapor release (c) Flammable liquid tanks located
by means of a spring loaded check inside of buildings, except in one-story
valve or other approved device. buildings designed and protected for
(c) Fill and discharge lines shall flammable liquid storage, shall be pro-
enter tanks only through the top. Fill vided with an automatic-closing heat-
lines shall be sloped toward the tank. actuated valve on each withdrawal con-
(d) For Category 2 flammable liquids nection below the liquid level, except
and Category 3 flammable liquids with for connections used for emergency dis-
a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), other posal, to prevent continued flow in the
than crude oils, gasolines, and as- event of fire in the vicinity of the tank.
phalts, the fill pipe shall be so designed This function may be incorporated in
and installed as to minimize the possi- the valve required in (b) of this subdivi-
bility of generating static electricity sion, and if a separate valve, shall be
by terminating within 6 inches of the located adjacent to the valve required
bottom of the tank. in (b) of this subdivision.
(e) Filling and emptying connections (d) Openings for manual gaging, if
which are made and broken shall be lo- independent of the fill pipe (see (f) of
cated outside of buildings at a location this subdivision), shall be provided
free from any source of ignition and with a vaportight cap or cover. Each
not less than 5 feet away from any such opening shall be protected against
building opening. Such connection liquid overflow and possible vapor re-
shall be closed and liquidtight when lease by means of a spring loaded check
not in use. The connection shall be valve or other approved device.
properly identified. (e) For Category 2 flammable liquids
(4) Installation of tanks inside of build- and Category 3 flammable liquids with
ings—(i) Location. Tanks shall not be a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), other
permitted inside of buildings except as than crude oils, gasoline, and asphalts,
provided in paragraphs (e), (g), (h), or the fill pipe shall be so designed and in-
(i) of this section. stalled as to minimize the possibility
(ii) Vents. Vents for tanks inside of of generating static electricity by ter-
buildings shall be as provided in sub- minating within 6 inches of the bottom
paragraphs (2) (iv), (v), (vi)(b), and of the tank.
(3)(iv) of this paragraph, except that (f) The fill pipe inside of the tank
emergency venting by the use of weak shall be installed to avoid excessive vi-
roof seams on tanks shall not be per- bration of the pipe.
242
(g) The inlet of the fill pipe shall be ing structure such as described in (m),
located outside of buildings at a loca- (n), and (o) of this subdivision.
tion free from any source of ignition (b) Independent water supply facili-
and not less than 5 feet away from any ties shall be provided at locations
building opening. The inlet of the fill where there is no ample and dependable
pipe shall be closed and liquidtight public water supply available for load-
when not in use. The fill connection ing partially empty tanks with water.
shall be properly identified. (c) In addition to the preceding re-
(h) Tanks inside buildings shall be quirements, each tank so located that
equipped with a device, or other means more than 70 percent, but less than 100
shall be provided, to prevent overflow percent, of its allowable liquid storage
into the building. capacity will be submerged at the es-
(5) Supports, foundations, and anchor- tablished maximum flood stage, shall
age for all tank locations—(i) General. be safeguarded by one of the following
Tank supports shall be installed on methods: Tank shall be raised, or its
firm foundations. Tank supports shall height shall be increased, until its top
be of concrete, masonry, or protected extends above the maximum flood
steel. Single wood timber supports (not stage a distance equivalent to 30 per-
cribbing) laid horizontally may be used cent or more of its allowable liquid
for outside aboveground tanks if not storage capacity: Provided, however,
more than 12 inches high at their low- That the submerged part of the tank
est point. shall not exceed two and one-half times
the diameter. Or, as an alternative to
(ii) Fire resistance. Steel supports or
the foregoing, adequate noncombus-
exposed piling shall be protected by
tible structural guides, designed to per-
materials having a fire resistance rat-
mit the tank to float vertically with-
ing of not less than 2 hours, except that
out loss of product, shall be provided.
steel saddles need not be protected if
(d) Each horizontal tank so located
less than 12 inches high at their lowest
that more than 70 percent of its stor-
point. Water spray protection or its
age capacity will be submerged at the
equivalent may be used in lieu of fire-
established flood stage, shall be an-
resistive materials to protect supports.
chored, attached to a foundation of
(iii) Spheres. The design of the sup- concrete or of steel and concrete, of
porting structure for tanks such as sufficient weight to provide adequate
spheres shall receive special engineer- load for the tank when filled with flam-
ing consideration. mable liquid and submerged by flood
(iv) Load distribution. Every tank waters to the established flood stage,
shall be so supported as to prevent the or adequately secured by other means.
excessive concentration of loads on the (e) [Reserved]
supporting portion of the shell. (f) At locations where there is no
(v) Foundations. Tanks shall rest on ample and dependable water supply, or
the ground or on foundations made of where filling of underground tanks
concrete, masonry, piling, or steel. with liquids is impracticable because of
Tank foundations shall be designed to the character of their contents, their
minimize the possibility of uneven set- use, or for other reasons, each tank
tling of the tank and to minimize cor- shall be safeguarded against movement
rosion in any part of the tank resting when empty and submerged by high
on the foundation. ground water or flood waters by an-
(vi) Flood areas. Where a tank is lo- choring, weighting with concrete or
cated in an area that may be subjected other approved solid loading material,
to flooding, the applicable precautions or securing by other means. Each such
outlined in this subdivision shall be ob- tank shall be so constructed and in-
served. stalled that it will safely resist exter-
(a) No aboveground vertical storage nal pressures due to high ground water
tank containing a flammable liquid or flood waters.
shall be located so that the allowable (g) At locations where there is an
liquid level within the tank is below ample and dependable water supply
the established maximum flood stage, available, underground tanks con-

unless the tank is provided with a guid- taining flammable liquids, so installed
243
that more than 70 percent of their stor- designed to withstand a unit force of
age capacity will be submerged at the not less than 50 pounds per square foot.
maximum flood stage, shall be so an- (p) The filling of a tank to be pro-
chored, weighted, or secured by other tected by water loading shall be start-
means, as to prevent movement of such ed as soon as flood waters reach a dan-
tanks when filled with flammable liq- gerous flood stage. The rate of filling
uids, and submerged by flood waters to shall be at least equal to the rate of
the established flood stage. rise of the floodwaters (or the estab-
(h) Pipe connections below the allow- lished average potential rate of rise).
able liquid level in a tank shall be pro- (q) Sufficient fuel to operate the
vided with valves or cocks located as water pumps shall be available at all
closely as practicable to the tank shell. times to insure adequate power to fill
Such valves and their connections to all tankage with water.
tanks shall be of steel or other mate- (r) All valves on connecting pipelines
rial suitable for use with the liquid shall be closed and locked in closed po-
being stored. Cast iron shall not be per- sition when water loading has been
mitted. completed.
(i) At locations where an independent (s) Where structural guides are pro-
water supply is required, it shall be en- vided for the protection of floating
tirely independent of public power and tanks, all rigid connections between
water supply. Independent source of tanks and pipelines shall be discon-
water shall be available when flood wa- nected and blanked off or blinded be-
ters reach a level not less than 10 feet fore the floodwaters reach the bottom
below the bottom of the lowest tank on of the tank, unless control valves and
a property. their connections to the tank are of a
(j) The self-contained power and type designed to prevent breakage be-
pumping unit shall be so located or so tween the valve and the tank shell.
designed that pumping into tanks may
(t) All valves attached to tanks other
be carried on continuously throughout
than those used in connection with
the rise in flood waters from a level 10
water loading operations shall be
feet below the lowest tank to the level
closed and locked.
of the potential flood stage.
(k) Capacity of the pumping unit (u) If a tank is equipped with a swing
shall be such that the rate of rise of line, the swing pipe shall be raised to
water in all tanks shall be equivalent and secured at its highest position.
to the established potential average (v) Inspections. The Assistant Sec-
rate of rise of flood waters at any retary or his designated representative
stage. shall make periodic inspections of all
(l) Each independent pumping unit plants where the storage of flammable
shall be tested periodically to insure liquids is such as to require compliance
that it is in satisfactory operating con- with the foregoing requirements, in
dition. order to assure the following:
(m) Structural guides for holding (1) That all flammable liquid storage
floating tanks above their foundations tanks are in compliance with these re-
shall be so designed that there will be quirements and so maintained.
no resistance to the free rise of a tank, (2) That detailed printed instructions
and shall be constructed of noncombus- of what to do in flood emergencies are
tible material. properly posted.
(n) The strength of the structure (3) That station operators and other
shall be adequate to resist lateral employees depended upon to carry out
movement of a tank subject to a hori- such instructions are thoroughly in-
zontal force in any direction equivalent formed as to the location and operation
to not less than 25 pounds per square of such valves and other equipment
foot acting on the projected vertical necessary to effect these requirements.
cross-sectional area of the tank. (vii) Earthquake areas. In areas sub-
(o) Where tanks are situated on ex- ject to earthquakes, the tank supports
posed points or bends in a shoreline and connections shall be designed to
where swift currents in flood waters resist damage as a result of such

will be present, the structures shall be shocks.
244
(6) Sources of ignition. In locations (iv) Repairs. All leaks or deforma-

where flammable vapors may be tions shall be corrected in an accept-
present, precautions shall be taken to able manner before the tank is placed
prevent ignition by eliminating or con- in service. Mechanical caulking is not
trolling sources of ignition. Sources of permitted for correcting leaks in weld-
ignition may include open flames, ed tanks except pinhole leaks in the
lightning, smoking, cutting and weld- roof.
ing, hot surfaces, frictional heat, (v) Derated operations. Tanks to be op-
sparks (static, electrical, and mechan- erated at pressures below their design
ical), spontaneous ignition, chemical pressure may be tested by the applica-
and physical-chemical reactions, and ble provisions of subdivision (i) or (ii)
radiant heat. of this subparagraph, based upon the
(7) Testing—(i) General. All tanks, pressure developed under full emer-
whether shop built or field erected, gency venting of the tank.
shall be strength tested before they are (c) Piping, valves, and fittings—(1) Gen-
placed in service in accordance with eral—(i) Design. The design (including
the applicable paragraphs of the code selection of materials) fabrication, as-
under which they were built. The sembly, test, and inspection of piping
American Society of Mechanical Engi- systems containing flammable liquids
neers (ASME) code stamp, American shall be suitable for the expected work-
Petroleum Institute (API) monogram, ing pressures and structural stresses.
or the label of the Underwriters’ Lab- Conformity with the applicable provi-
sions of Pressure Piping, ANSI B31 se-
oratories, Inc., on a tank shall be evi-
ries and the provisions of this para-
dence of compliance with this strength
graph, shall be considered prima facie
test. Tanks not marked in accordance
evidence of compliance with the fore-
with the above codes shall be strength
going provisions.
tested before they are placed in service
(ii) Exceptions. This paragraph does
in accordance with good engineering
not apply to any of the following:
principles and reference shall be made
(a) Tubing or casing on any oil or gas
to the sections on testing in the codes
wells and any piping connected directly
listed in subparagraphs (1) (iii)(a),
thereto.
(iv)(b), or (v)(b) of this paragraph.
(b) Motor vehicle, aircraft, boat, or
(ii) Strength. When the vertical portable or stationary engines.
length of the fill and vent pipes is such (c) Piping within the scope of any ap-
that when filled with liquid the static plicable boiler and pressures vessel
head imposed upon the bottom of the code.
tank exceeds 10 pounds per square inch, (iii) Definitions. As used in this para-
the tank and related piping shall be graph, piping systems consist of pipe,
tested hydrostatically to a pressure tubing, flanges, bolting, gaskets,
equal to the static head thus imposed. valves, fittings, the pressure con-
(iii) Tightness. In addition to the taining parts of other components such
strength test called for in subdivisions as expansion joints and strainers, and
(i) and (ii) of this subparagraph, all devices which serve such purposes as
tanks and connections shall be tested mixing, separating, snubbing, distrib-
for tightness. Except for underground uting, metering, or controlling flow.
tanks, this tightness test shall be made (2) Materials for piping, valves, and fit-
at operating pressure with air, inert tings—(i) Required materials. Materials
gas, or water prior to placing the tank for piping, valves, or fittings shall be
in service. In the case of field-erected steel, nodular iron, or malleable iron,
tanks the strength test may be consid- except as provided in paragraph (c)(2)
ered to be the test for tank tightness. (ii), (iii) and (iv) of this section.
Underground tanks and piping, before (ii) Exceptions. Materials other than
being covered, enclosed, or placed in steel, nodular iron, or malleable iron
use, shall be tested for tightness may be used underground, or if re-
hydrostatically, or with air pressure at quired by the properties of the flam-
not less than 3 pounds per square inch mable liquid handled. Material other
and not more than 5 pounds per square than steel, nodular iron, or malleable
inch. iron shall be designed to specifications
245
embodying principles recognized as operation and in the event of physical

good engineering practices for the ma- damage. Each connection to pipelines,
terial used. by which equipments such as tankcars
(iii) Linings. Piping, valves, and fit- or tank vehicles discharge liquids by
tings may have combustible or non- means of pumps into storage tanks,
combustible linings. shall be provided with a check valve for
(iv) Low-melting materials. When low- automatic protection against backflow
melting point materials such as alu- if the piping arrangement is such that
minum and brass or materials that backflow from the system is possible.
soften on fire exposure such as plastics, (7) Testing. All piping before being
or non-ductile materials such as cast covered, enclosed, or placed in use
iron, are necessary, special consider- shall be hydrostatically tested to 150
ation shall be given to their behavior percent of the maximum anticipated
on fire exposure. If such materials are pressure of the system, or pneumati-
used in above ground piping systems or cally tested to 110 percent of the max-
inside buildings, they shall be suitably imum anticipated pressure of the sys-
protected against fire exposure or so tem, but not less than 5 pounds per
located that any spill resulting from square inch gage at the highest point
the failure of these materials could not of the system. This test shall be main-
unduly expose persons, important tained for a sufficient time to complete
buildings or structures or can be read- visual inspection of all joints and con-
ily controlled by remote valves. nections, but for at least 10 minutes.
(3) Pipe joints. Joints shall be made (d) Container and portable tank stor-
liquid tight. Welded or screwed joints age—(1) Scope—(i) General. This para-
or approved connectors shall be used. graph shall apply only to the storage of
Threaded joints and connections shall flammable liquids in drums or other
be made up tight with a suitable lubri- containers (including flammable
cant or piping compound. Pipe joints aerosols) not exceeding 60 gallons indi-
dependent upon the friction character- vidual capacity and those portable
istics of combustible materials for me- tanks not exceeding 660 gallons indi-
chanical continuity of piping shall not vidual capacity.
be used inside buildings. They may be (ii) Exceptions. This paragraph shall
used outside of buildings above or not apply to the following:
below ground. If used above ground, the (a) Storage of containers in bulk
piping shall either be secured to pre- plants, service stations, refineries,
vent disengagement at the fitting or chemical plants, and distilleries;
the piping system shall be so designed (b) Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liq-
that any spill resulting from such dis- uids in the fuel tanks of a motor vehi-
engagement could not unduly expose cle, aircraft, boat, or portable or sta-
persons, important buildings or struc- tionary engine;
tures, and could be readily controlled (c) Flammable paints, oils, varnishes,
by remote valves. and similar mixtures used for painting
(4) Supports. Piping systems shall be or maintenance when not kept for a pe-
substantially supported and protected riod in excess of 30 days;
against physical damage and excessive (d) Beverages when packaged in indi-
stresses arising from settlement, vibra- vidual containers not exceeding 1 gal-
tion, expansion, or contraction. lon in size.
(5) Protection against corrosion. All (2) Design, construction, and capacity
piping for flammable liquids, both of containers—(i) General. Only ap-
aboveground and underground, where proved containers and portable tanks
subject to external corrosion, shall be shall be used. Metal containers and
painted or otherwise protected. portable tanks meeting the require-
(6) Valves. Piping systems shall con- ments of and containing products au-
tain a sufficient number of valves to thorized by chapter I, title 49 of the
operate the system properly and to Code of Federal Regulations (regula-
protect the plant. Piping systems in tions issued by the Hazardous Mate-
connection with pumps shall contain a rials Regulations Board, Department of
sufficient number of valves to control Transportation), shall be deemed to be

properly the flow of liquid in normal acceptable.
246
(ii) Emergency venting. Each portable (a)(1) Such liquid either would be
tank shall be provided with one or rendered unfit for its intended use by
more devices installed in the top with contact with metal or would exces-
sufficient emergency venting capacity sively corrode a metal container so as
to limit internal pressure under fire ex- to create a leakage hazard; and
posure conditions to 10 p.s.i.g., or 30 (2) The user’s process either would re-
percent of the bursting pressure of the quire more than 1 pint of a Category 1
tank, whichever is greater. The total flammable liquid or more than 1 quart
venting capacity shall be not less than
of a Category 2 flammable liquid of a
that specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(v) (c)
or (e) of this section. At least one pres- single assay lot to be used at one time,
sure-activated vent having a minimum or would require the maintenance of an
capacity of 6,000 cubic feet of free air analytical standard liquid of a quality
(14.7 p.s.i.a. and 60 °F.) shall be used. It which is not met by the specified
shall be set to open at not less than 5 standards of liquids available, and the
p.s.i.g. If fusible vents are used, they quantity of the analytical standard liq-
shall be actuated by elements that op- uid required to be used in any one con-
erate at a temperature not exceeding trol process exceeds one-sixteenth the
300 °F. capacity of the container allowed
(iii) Size. Flammable liquid con- under Table H–12 for the category of
tainers shall be in accordance with liquid; or
Table H–12, except that glass or plastic (b) The containers are intended for
containers of no more than 1-gallon ca- direct export outside the United
pacity may be used for a Category 1 or States.
2 flammable liquid if:
TABLE H–12—MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SIZE OF CONTAINERS AND PORTABLE TANKS FOR FLAMMABLE
LIQUIDS
Container type Category 1 Category 2 Category 3 Category 4
Glass or approved plastic ..................................................... 1 pt ................ 1 qt ................ 1 gal ............... 1 gal.

Metal (other than DOT drums) .............................................. 1 gal ............... 5 gal ............... 5 gal ............... 5 gal.
Safety cans ............................................................................ 2 gal ............... 5 gal ............... 5 gal ............... 5 gal.
Metal drums (DOT specifications) ......................................... 60 gal ............. 60 gal ............. 60 gal ............. 60 gal.
Approved portable tanks ....................................................... 660 gal ........... 660 gal ........... 660 gal ........... 660 gal.
Note: Container exemptions: (a) Medicines, beverages, foodstuffs, cosmetics, and other common consumer items, when pack-
aged according to commonly accepted practices, shall be exempt from the requirements of 1910.106(d)(2)(i) and (ii).
(3) Design, construction, and capacity shall be labeled in conspicuous let-

of storage cabinets—(i) Maximum capac- tering, ‘‘Flammable—Keep Fire Away.’’
ity. Not more than 60 gallons of Cat- (a) Metal cabinets constructed in the
egory 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids, nor following manner shall be deemed to be
more than 120 gallons of Category 4 in compliance. The bottom, top, door,
flammable liquids may be stored in a and sides of cabinet shall be at least
storage cabinet. No. 18 gage sheet iron and double
walled with 11⁄2-inch air space. Joints
(ii) Fire resistance. Storage cabinets
shall be riveted, welded or made tight
shall be designed and constructed to
by some equally effective means. The
limit the internal temperature to not door shall be provided with a three-
more than 325 °F. when subjected to a point lock, and the door sill shall be
10-minute fire test using the standard raised at least 2 inches above the bot-
time-temperature curve as set forth in tom of the cabinet.
Standard Methods of Fire Tests of (b) Wooden cabinets constructed in
Building Construction and Materials, the following manner shall be deemed
NFPA 251–1969, which is incorporated in compliance. The bottom, sides, and
by reference as specified in § 1910.6. All top shall be constructed of an approved
joints and seams shall remain tight grade of plywood at least 1 inch in
and the door shall remain securely thickness, which shall not break down
closed during the fire test. Cabinets or delaminate under fire conditions.
All joints shall be rabbetted and shall
247
be fastened in two directions with flat- TABLE H–13—STORAGE IN INSIDE ROOMS—

head woodscrews. When more than one Continued
door is used, there shall be a rabbetted
Total al-
overlap of not less than 1 inch. Hinges lowable
shall be mounted in such a manner as quan-
Fire protec- Fire resist- tities
not to lose their holding capacity due tion 1 pro- Maximum size
ance (gals./
vided
to loosening or burning out of the sq. ft./
floor
screws when subjected to the fire test. area)
(4) Design and construction of inside No ............ 1 hour ...... 150 sq. ft ...................... 2
storage rooms—(i) Construction. Inside 1 Fireprotection system shall be sprinkler, water spray, car-
storage rooms shall be constructed to bon dioxide, or other system.
meet the required fire-resistive rating
(iii) Wiring. Electrical wiring and
for their use. Such construction shall
equipment located in inside storage
comply with the test specifications set
rooms used for Category 1 or 2 flam-
forth in Standard Methods of Fire
mable liquids, or Category 3 flammable
Tests of Building Construction and Ma- liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F
terials, NFPA 251–1969. Where an auto- (37.8 °C), shall be approved under sub-
matic sprinkler system is provided, the part S of this part for Class I, Division
system shall be designed and installed 2 Hazardous Locations; for Category 3
in an acceptable manner. Openings to flammable liquids with a flashpoint at
other rooms or buildings shall be pro- or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) and Category 4
vided with noncombustible liquid-tight flammable liquids, shall be approved
raised sills or ramps at least 4 inches in for general use.
height, or the floor in the storage area (iv) Ventilation. Every inside storage
shall be at least 4 inches below the sur- room shall be provided with either a
rounding floor. Openings shall be pro- gravity or a mechanical exhaust ven-
vided with approved self-closing fire tilation system. Such system shall be
doors. The room shall be liquid-tight designed to provide for a complete
where the walls join the floor. A per- change of air within the room at least
missible alternate to the sill or ramp is six times per hour. If a mechanical ex-
an open-grated trench inside of the haust system is used, it shall be con-
room which drains to a safe location. trolled by a switch located outside of
Where other portions of the building or the door. The ventilating equipment
other properties are exposed, windows and any lighting fixtures shall be oper-
shall be protected as set forth in the ated by the same switch. A pilot light
Standard for Fire Doors and Windows, shall be installed adjacent to the
NFPA No. 80–1968, which is incor- switch if Category 1 or 2 flammable liq-
porated by reference as specified in uids, or Category 3 flammable liquids
§ 1910.6, for Class E or F openings. Wood with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C),
at least 1 inch nominal thickness may are dispensed within the room. Where
be used for shelving, racks, dunnage, gravity ventilation is provided, the
scuffboards, floor overlay, and similar fresh air intake, as well as the exhaust
installations. outlet from the room, shall be on the
exterior of the building in which the
(ii) Rating and capacity. Storage in in-
room is located.
side storage rooms shall comply with
(v) Storage in inside storage rooms. In
Table H–13.
every inside storage room there shall
TABLE H–13—STORAGE IN INSIDE ROOMS be maintained one clear aisle at least 3
feet wide. Containers over 30 gallons
Total al- capacity shall not be stacked one upon
lowable the other. Dispensing shall be by ap-
quan-
Fire protec- proved pump or self-closing faucet
Fire resist- tities
tion 1 pro- Maximum size
ance (gals./ only.
vided sq. ft./
floor (5) Storage inside building—(i) Egress.
area) Flammable liquids, including stock for
sale, shall not be stored so as to limit
Yes ........... 2 hours .... 500 sq. ft ...................... 10

No ............ 2 hours .... 500 sq. ft ...................... 5 use of exits, stairways, or areas nor-
Yes ........... 1 hour ...... 150 sq. ft ...................... 4 mally used for the safe egress of people.
248
(ii) Containers. The storage of flam- (a)–(d) [Reserved]

mable liquids in containers or portable (e) Leaking containers shall be re-
tanks shall comply with subdivisions moved to a storage room or taken to a
(iii) through (v) of this subparagraph. safe location outside the building and
(iii) Office occupancies. Storage shall the contents transferred to an
be prohibited except that which is re- undamaged container.
quired for maintenance and operation
(v) General purpose public warehouses.
of building and operation of equipment.
Storage shall be in accordance with
Such storage shall be kept in closed
Table H–14 or H–15 and in buildings or
metal containers stored in a storage
cabinet or in safety cans or in an inside in portions of such buildings cut off by
storage room not having a door that standard firewalls. Material creating
opens into that portion of the building no fire exposure hazard to the flam-
used by the public. mable liquids may be stored in the
(iv) Mercantile occupancies and other same area.
retail stores.
249
250
ER26MR12.054</GPH>
(vi) Flammable liquid warehouses or materials handing equipment shall be

storage buildings. (a) If the storage available to handle tanks safely at the
building is located 50 feet or less from upper tier level.
a building or line of adjoining property (e) No pile shall be closer than 3 feet
that may be built upon, the exposing to the nearest beam, chord, girder, or
wall shall be a blank wall having a fire- other obstruction, and shall be 3 feet
resistance rating of at least 2 hours. below sprinkler deflectors or discharge
(b) The total quantity of liquids with- orifices of water spray, or other over-
in a building shall not be restricted,
head fire protection systems.
but the arrangement of storage shall
comply with Table H–14 or H–15. (f) Aisles of at least 3 feet wide shall
(c) Containers in piles shall be sepa- be provided where necessary for rea-
rated by pallets or dunnage where nec- sons of access to doors, windows or
essary to provide stability and to pre- standpipe connections.
vent excessive stress on container (6) Storage outside buildings—(i) Gen-
walls. eral. Storage outside buildings shall be
(d) Portable tanks stored over one in accordance with Table H–16 or H–17,
tier high shall be designed to nest se- and subdivisions (ii) and (iv) of this
curely, without dunnage, and adequate subparagraph.
251
ER26MR12.055</GPH>
(ii) Maximum storage. A maximum of rounded by a curb at least 6 inches

1,100 gallons of flammable liquids may high. When curbs are used, provisions
be located adjacent to buildings lo- shall be made for draining of accumu-
cated on the same premises and under lations of ground or rain water or spills
the same management provided the of flammable liquids. Drains shall ter-
provisions of subdivisions (a) and (b) of minate at a safe location and shall be
this subdivision are complied with. accessible to operation under fire con-
(a) [Reserved] ditions.
(b) Where quantity stored exceeds (iv) Security. The storage area shall
1,100 gallons, or provisions of subdivi- be protected against tampering or tres-
sion (a) of this subdivision cannot be passers where necessary and shall be
met, a minimum distance of 10 feet be- kept free of weeds, debris and other
tween buildings and nearest container combustible material not necessary to
of flammable liquid shall be main- the storage.
tained. (7) Fire control—(i) Extinguishers.
(iii) Spill containment. The storage Suitable fire control devices, such as
area shall be graded in a manner to di- small hose or portable fire extin-
vert possible spills away from buildings guishers, shall be available at locations
or other exposures or shall be sur- where flammable liquids are stored.
252
ER26MR12.056</GPH>
(a) At least one portable fire extin- be stored in the same room with flam-
guisher having a rating of not less than mable liquids.
12–B units shall be located outside of, (e) Industrial plants—(1) Scope—(i) Ap-
but not more than 10 feet from, the plication. This paragraph shall apply to
door opening into any room used for those industrial plants where:
storage. (a) The use of flammable liquids is
(b) At least one portable fire extin- incidental to the principal business, or
guisher having a rating of not less than (b) Where flammable liquids are han-
12–B units must be located not less dled or used only in unit physical oper-
than 10 feet, nor more than 25 feet, ations such as mixing, drying,
from any Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable evaporating, filtering, distillation, and
liquid storage area located outside of a
similar operations which do not in-
storage room but inside a building.
volve chemical reaction. This para-
(ii) Sprinklers. When sprinklers are
graph shall not apply to chemical
provided, they shall be installed in ac-
plants, refineries or distilleries.
cordance with § 1910.159.
(ii) Exceptions. Where portions of such
(iii) Open flames and smoking. Open
plants involve chemical reactions such
flames and smoking shall not be per-
mitted in flammable liquid storage as oxidation, reduction, halogenation,
areas. hydrogenation, alkylation, polymeriza-
(iv) Water reactive materials. Materials tion, and other chemical processes,
which will react with water shall not those portions of the plant shall be in
253
ER26MR12.057</GPH>
accordance with paragraph (h) of this (c) Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids,

section. or Category 3 flammable liquids with a
(2) Incidental storage or use of flam- flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), may be
mable liquids—(i) Application. This sub- used only where there are no open
paragraph shall be applicable to those flames or other sources of ignition
portions of an industrial plant where within the possible path of vapor trav-
the use and handling of flammable liq- el.
uids is only incidental to the principal (d) Flammable liquids shall be drawn
business, such as automobile assembly, from or transferred into vessels, con-
construction of electronic equipment, tainers, or portable tanks within a
furniture manufacturing, or other building only through a closed piping
similar activities. system, from safety cans, by means of
(ii) Containers. Flammable liquids a device drawing through the top, or
shall be stored in tanks or closed con- from a container or portable tanks by
tainers. gravity through an approved self-clos-
(a) Except as provided in subdivisions ing valve. Transferring by means of air
(b) and (c) of this subdivision, all stor- pressure on the container or portable
age shall comply with paragraph (d) (3) tanks shall be prohibited.
or (4) of this section. (3) Unit physical operations—(i) Appli-
(b) The quantity of liquid that may cation. This subparagraph shall be ap-
be located outside of an inside storage plicable in those portions of industrial
room or storage cabinet in a building plants where flammable liquids are
or in any one fire area of a building
handled or used in unit physical oper-
shall not exceed:
ations such as mixing, drying,
(1) 25 gallons of Category 1 flammable
evaporating, filtering, distillation, and
liquids in containers
similar operations which do not in-
(2) 120 gallons of Category 2, 3, or 4 volve chemical change. Examples are
flammable liquids in containers
plants compounding cosmetics, phar-
(3) 660 gallons of Category 2, 3, or 4 maceuticals, solvents, cleaning fluids,
flammable liquids in a single portable insecticides, and similar types of ac-
tank.
tivities.
(c) Where large quantities of flam-
(ii) Location. Industrial plants shall
mable liquids are necessary, storage
be located so that each building or unit
may be in tanks which shall comply
of equipment is accessible from at least
with the applicable requirements of
paragraph (b) of this section. one side for firefighting and fire con-
trol purposes. Buildings shall be lo-
(iii) Separation and protection. Areas
cated with respect to lines of adjoining
in which flammable liquids are trans-
ferred from one tank or container to property which may be built upon as
another container shall be separated set forth in paragraph (h)(2) (i) and (ii)
from other operations in the building of this section except that the blank
by adequate distance or by construc- wall referred to in paragraph (h)(2)(ii)
tion having adequate fire resistance. of this section shall have a fire resist-
Drainage or other means shall be pro- ance rating of at least 2 hours.
vided to control spills. Adequate nat- (iii) Chemical processes. Areas where
ural or mechanical ventilation shall be unstable liquids are handled or small
provided. scale unit chemical processes are car-
(iv) Handling liquids at point of final ried on shall be separated from the re-
use. (a) Category 1 or 2 flammable liq- mainder of the plant by a fire wall of 2-
uids, or Category 3 flammable liquids hour minimum fire resistance rating.
with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), (iv) Drainage. (a) Emergency drainage
shall be kept in covered containers systems shall be provided to direct
when not actually in use. flammable liquid leakage and fire pro-
(b) Where flammable liquids are used tection water to a safe location. This
or handled, except in closed containers, may require curbs, scuppers, or special
means shall be provided to dispose drainage systems to control the spread
promptly and safely of leakage or of fire; see paragraph (b)(2)(vii)(b) of

spills. this section.
254
(b) Emergency drainage systems, if (ii) [Reserved]

connected to public sewers or dis- (5) Fire control—(i) Portable and special
charged into public waterways, shall be equipment. Portable fire extinguish-
equipped with traps or separator. ment and control equipment shall be
(v) Ventilation—(a) Areas as defined provided in such quantities and types
in paragraph (e)(3)(i) of this section as are needed for the special hazards of
using Category 1 or 2 flammable liq- operation and storage.
uids, or Category 3 flammable liquids (ii) Water supply. Water shall be
with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), available in volume and at adequate
shall be ventilated at a rate of not less pressure to supply water hose streams,
than 1 cubic foot per minute per square foam-producing equipment, automatic
foot of solid floor area. This shall be sprinklers, or water spray systems as
accomplished by natural or mechanical the need is indicated by the special
ventilation with discharge or exhaust hazards of operation, dispensing and
to a safe location outside of the build- storage.
ing. Provision shall be made for intro- (iii) Special extinguishers. Special ex-
duction of makeup air in such a man- tinguishing equipment such as that
ner as not to short circuit the ventila- utilizing foam, inert gas, or dry chem-
tion. Ventilation shall be arranged to ical shall be provided as the need is in-
include all floor areas or pits where dicated by the special hazards of oper-
flammable vapors may collect. ation dispensing and storage.
(b) Equipment used in a building and (iv) Special hazards. Where the need is
the ventilation of the building shall be indicated by special hazards of oper-
designed so as to limit flammable ation, flammable liquid processing
vapor-air mixtures under normal oper- equipment, major piping, and sup-
ating conditions to the interior of porting steel shall be protected by ap-
equipment, and to not more than 5 feet proved water spray systems, deluge
from equipment which exposes Cat- systems, approved fire-resistant coat-
egory 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Cat- ings, insulation, or any combination of
egory 3 flammable liquids with a these.
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), to the (v) Maintenance. All plant fire protec-
air. Examples of such equipment are tion facilities shall be adequately
dispensing stations, open centrifuges, maintained and periodically inspected
plate and frame filters, open vacuum and tested to make sure they are al-
filters, and surfaces of open equipment. ways in satisfactory operating condi-
(vi) Storage and handling. The stor- tion, and they will serve their purpose
age, transfer, and handling of liquid in time of emergency.
shall comply with paragraph (h)(4) of (6) Sources of ignition—(i) General.
this section. Adequate precautions shall be taken to
(4) Tank vehicle and tank car loading prevent the ignition of flammable va-
and unloading. (i) Tank vehicle and pors. Sources of ignition include but
tank car loading or unloading facilities are not limited to open flames; light-
shall be separated from aboveground ning; smoking; cutting and welding;
tanks, warehouses, other plant build- hot surfaces; frictional heat; static,
ings or nearest line of adjoining prop- electrical, and mechanical sparks;
erty which may be built upon by a dis- spontaneous ignition, including heat-
tance of 25 feet for Category 1 or 2 producing chemical reactions; and ra-
flammable liquids, or Category 3 flam- diant heat.
mable liquids with a flashpoint below (ii) Grounding. Category 1 or 2 flam-
100 °F (37.8 °C), and 15 feet for Category mable liquids, or Category 3 flammable
3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F
at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) and Cat- (37.8 °C), shall not be dispensed into
egory 4 flammable liquids, measured containers unless the nozzle and con-
from the nearest position of any fill tainer are electrically interconnected.
stem. Buildings for pumps or shelters Where the metallic floorplate on which
for personnel may be a part of the fa- the container stands while filling is
cility. Operations of the facility shall electrically connected to the fill stem
comply with the appropriate portions or where the fill stem is bonded to the
of paragraph (f)(3) of this section. container during filling operations by
255
means of a bond wire, the provisions of air shall be uncontaminated by flam-

this section shall be deemed to have mable vapors.
been complied with. (8) Repairs to equipment. Hot work,
(7) Electrical—(i) Equipment. (a) All such as welding or cutting operations,
electrical wiring and equipment shall use of spark-producing power tools, and
be installed according to the require- chipping operations shall be permitted
ments of subpart S of this part. only under supervision of an individual
(b) Locations where flammable in responsible charge. The individual in
vapor-air mixtures may exist under responsible charge shall make an in-
normal operations shall be classified spection of the area to be sure that it
Class I, Division 1 according to the re- is safe for the work to be done and that
quirements of subpart S of this part. safe procedures will be followed for the
For those pieces of equipment installed work specified.
in accordance with subparagraph (9) Housekeeping—(i) General. Mainte-
(3)(v)(b) of this paragraph, the Division nance and operating practices shall be
1 area shall extend 5 feet in all direc- in accordance with established proce-
tions from all points of vapor libera- dures which will tend to control leak-
tion. All areas within pits shall be clas- age and prevent the accidental escape
sified Division 1 if any part of the pit is of flammable liquids. Spills shall be
within a Division 1 or 2 classified area, cleaned up promptly.
unless the pit is provided with mechan-
(ii) Access. Adequate aisles shall be
ical ventilation.
maintained for unobstructed move-
(c) Locations where flammable vapor-
ment of personnel and so that fire pro-
air mixtures may exist under abnormal
tection equipment can be brought to
conditions and for a distance beyond
bear on any part of flammable liquid
Division 1 locations shall be classified
storage, use, or any unit physical oper-
Division 2 according to the require-
ation.
ments of subpart S of this part. These
locations include an area within 20 feet (iii) Waste and residue. Combustible
horizontally, 3 feet vertically beyond a waste material and residues in a build-
Division 1 area, and up to 3 feet above ing or unit operating area shall be kept
floor or grade level within 25 feet, if in- to a minimum, stored in covered metal
doors, or 10 feet if outdoors, from any receptacles and disposed of daily.
pump, bleeder, withdrawal fitting, (iv) Clear zone. Ground area around
meter, or similar device handling Cat- buildings and unit operating areas
egory 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Cat- shall be kept free of weeds, trash, or
egory 3 flammable liquids with a other unnecessary combustible mate-
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C). Pits rials.
provided with adequate mechanical (f) Bulk plants—(1)(i) Category 1 or 2
ventilation within a Division 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flam-
area shall be classified Division 2. If mable liquids with a flashpoint below 100
only Category 3 flammable liquids with °F (37.8 °C). Category 1 or 2 flammable
a flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) liquids, or Category 3 flammable liq-
or Category 4 flammable liquids are uids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8
handled, then ordinary electrical °C), shall be stored in closed con-
equipment is satisfactory though care tainers, or in storage tanks above
shall be used in locating electrical ap- ground outside of buildings, or under-
paratus to prevent hot metal from fall- ground in accordance with paragraph
ing into open equipment. (b) of this section.
(d) Where the provisions of subdivi- (ii) Category 3 flammable liquids with a
sions (a), (b), and (c), of this subdivision flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) and
require the installation of electrical Category 4 flammable liquids. Category 3
equipment suitable for Class I, Division flammable liquids with a flashpoint at
1 or Division 2 locations, ordinary elec- or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) and Category 4
trical equipment including switchgear flammable liquids shall be stored in
may be used if installed in a room or containers, or in tanks within build-
enclosure which is maintained under ings or above ground outside of build-
positive pressure with respect to the ings, or underground in accordance

hazardous area. Ventilation makeup with paragraph (b) of this section.
256
(iii) Piling containers. Containers of a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C) are
flammable liquids when piled one upon being handled.
the other shall be separated by (3) Loading and unloading facilities—
dunnage sufficient to provide stability (i) Separation. Tank vehicle and tank
and to prevent excessive stress on con- car loading or unloading facilities shall
tainer walls. The height of the pile be separated from aboveground tanks,
shall be consistent with the stability warehouses, other plant buildings or
and strength of containers. nearest line of adjoining property that
(2) Buildings—(i) Exits. Rooms in may be built upon by a distance of 25
which flammable liquids are stored or feet for Category 1 or 2 flammable liq-
handled by pumps shall have exit fa- uids, or Category 3 flammable liquids
cilities arranged to prevent occupants with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C),
from being trapped in the event of fire. and 15 feet for Category 3 flammable
(ii) Heating. Rooms in which Cat- liquids with a flashpoint at or above
egory 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Cat- 100 °F (37.8 °C) and Category 4 flam-
egory 3 flammable liquids with a mable liquids measured from the near-
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), are est position of any fill spout. Buildings
stored or handled shall be heated only for pumps or shelters for personnel
by means not constituting a source of may be a part of the facility.
ignition, such as steam or hot water. (ii) Category restriction. Equipment
Rooms containing heating appliances such as piping, pumps, and meters used
involving sources of ignition shall be for the transfer of Category 1 or 2 flam-
located and arranged to prevent entry mable liquids, or Category 3 flammable
of flammable vapors. liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F
(iii) Ventilation. (a) Ventilation shall (37.8 °C), between storage tanks and the
be provided for all rooms, buildings, or fill stem of the loading rack shall not
enclosures in which Category 1 or 2 be used for the transfer of Category 3
flammable liquids, or Category 3 flam- flammable liquids with a flashpoint at
mable liquids with a flashpoint below or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) or Category 4
100 °F (37.8 °C), are pumped or dis- flammable liquids.
pensed. Design of ventilation systems (iii) Valves. Valves used for the final
shall take into account the relatively control for filling tank vehicles shall
high specific gravity of the vapors. be of the self-closing type and manu-
Ventilation may be provided by ade- ally held open except where automatic
quate openings in outside walls at floor means are provided for shutting off the
level unobstructed except by louvers or flow when the vehicle is full or after
coarse screens. Where natural ventila- filling of a preset amount.
tion is inadequate, mechanical ventila- (iv) Static protection. (a) Bonding fa-
tion shall be provided. cilities for protection against static
(b) Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, sparks during the loading of tank vehi-
or Category 3 flammable liquids with a cles through open domes shall be pro-
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall vided:
not be stored or handled within a build- (1) Where Category 1 or 2 flammable
ing having a basement or pit into liquids, or Category 3 flammable liq-
which flammable vapors may travel, uids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8
unless such area is provided with ven- °C), are loaded, or
tilation designed to prevent the accu- (2) Where Category 3 flammable liq-
mulation of flammable vapors therein. uids with a flashpoint at or above 100
(c) Containers of Category 1 or 2 °F (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable
flammable liquids, or Category 3 flam- liquids are loaded into vehicles which
mable liquids with a flashpoint below may contain vapors from previous car-
100 °F (37.8 °C), shall not be drawn from goes of Category 1 or 2 flammable liq-
or filled within buildings unless provi- uids, or Category 3 flammable liquids
sion is made to prevent the accumula- with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C).
tion of flammable vapors in hazardous (b) Protection as required in (a) of
concentrations. Where mechanical ven- this subdivision (iv) shall consist of a
tilation is required, it shall be kept in metallic bond wire permanently elec-

operation while flammable liquids with trically connected to the fill stem or to
257
some part of the rack structure in elec- between the tank car and the rack or
trical contact with the fill stem. The piping is required during either loading
free end of such wire shall be provided or unloading of Category 3 flammable
with a clamp or equivalent device for liquids with a flashpoint at or above
convenient attachment to some metal- 100 °F (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable
lic part in electrical contact with the liquids.
cargo tank of the tank vehicle. (vi) Container filling facilities. Cat-
(c) Such bonding connection shall be egory 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Cat-
made fast to the vehicle or tank before egory 3 flammable liquids with a
dome covers are raised and shall re- flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall
main in place until filling is completed not be dispensed into containers unless
and all dome covers have been closed the nozzle and container are elec-
and secured. trically interconnected. Where the me-
(d) Bonding as specified in (a), (b), tallic floorplate on which the container
and (c) of this subdivision is not re- stands while filling is electrically con-
quired: nected to the fill stem or where the fill
(1) Where vehicles are loaded exclu- stem is bonded to the container during
sively with products not having a stat- filling operations by means of a bond
ic accumulating tendency, such as as- wire, the provisions of this section
phalt, most crude oils, residual oils, shall be deemed to have been complied
and water soluble liquids; with.
(2) Where no Category 1 or 2 flam- (4) Wharves—(i) Definition, application.
mable liquids, or Category 3 flammable The term wharf shall mean any wharf,
liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F pier, bulkhead, or other structure over
(37.8 °C), are handled at the loading fa- or contiguous to navigable water used
cility and the tank vehicles loaded are in conjunction with a bulk plant, the
used exclusively for Category 3 flam- primary function of which is the trans-
mable liquids with a flashpoint at or fer of flammable liquid cargo in bulk
above 100 °F (37.8 °C) and Category 4 between the bulk plant and any tank
flammable liquids; and vessel, ship, barge, lighter boat, or
(3) Where vehicles are loaded or un- other mobile floating craft; and this
loaded through closed bottom or top subparagraph shall apply to all such in-
connections. stallations except Marine Service Sta-
(e) Filling through open domes into tions as covered in paragraph (g) of
the tanks of tank vehicles or tank cars, this section.
that contain vapor-air mixtures within (ii)–(iii) [Reserved]
the flammable range or where the liq- (iv) Design and construction. Sub-
uid being filled can form such a mix- structure and deck shall be substan-
ture, shall be by means of a downspout tially designed for the use intended.
which extends near the bottom of the Deck may employ any material which
tank. This precaution is not required will afford the desired combination of
when loading liquids which are non- flexibility, resistance to shock, dura-
accumulators of static charges. bility, strength, and fire resistance.
(v) Stray currents. Tank car loading Heavy timber construction is accept-
facilities where Category 1 or 2 flam- able.
mable liquids, or Category 3 flammable (v) [Reserved]
liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (vi) Pumps. Loading pumps capable of
(37.8 °C), are loaded through open building up pressures in excess of the
domes shall be protected against stray safe working pressure of cargo hose or
currents by bonding the pipe to at least loading arms shall be provided with by-
one rail and to the rack structure if of passes, relief valves, or other arrange-
metal. Multiple lines entering the rack ment to protect the loading facilities
area shall be electrically bonded to- against excessive pressure. Relief de-
gether. In addition, in areas where ex- vices shall be tested at not more than
cessive stray currents are known to yearly intervals to determine that they
exist, all pipe entering the rack area function satisfactorily at the pressure
shall be provided with insulating sec- at which they are set.
tions to electrically isolate the rack (vii) Hoses and couplings. All pressure
piping from the pipelines. No bonding hoses and couplings shall be inspected
258
at intervals appropriate to the service. joints shall be installed. Bonding and

The hose and couplings shall be tested grounding connections on all pipelines
with the hose extended and using the shall be located on wharfside of hose-
‘‘inservice maximum operating pres- riser insulating flanges, if used, and
sures.’’ Any hose showing material de- shall be accessible for inspection.
teriorations, signs of leakage, or weak- (h) Hose or articulated swivel-joint
ness in its carcass or at the couplings pipe connections used for cargo trans-
shall be withdrawn from service and refer shall be capable of accommodating
paired or discarded. the combined effects of change in draft
(viii) Piping and fittings. Piping, and maximum tidal range, and mooring
valves, and fittings shall be in accord- lines shall be kept adjusted to prevent
ance with paragraph (c) of this section, the surge of the vessel from placing
with the following exceptions and addi- stress on the cargo transfer system.
tions: (i) Hose shall be supported so as to
(a) Flexibility of piping shall be as- avoid kinking and damage from chaf-
sured by appropriate layout and ar- ing.
rangement of piping supports so that (ix) Fire protection. Suitable portable
motion of the wharf structure resulting fire extinguishers with a rating of not
from wave action, currents, tides, or less than 12–BC shall be located within
the mooring of vessels will not subject 75 feet of those portions of the facility
the pipe to repeated strain beyond the where fires are likely to occur, such as
elastic limit. hose connections, pumps, and separator
(b) Pipe joints depending upon the tanks.
friction characteristics of combustible (a) Where piped water is available,
materials or grooving of pipe ends for ready-connected fire hose in size appro-
mechanical continuity of piping shall priate for the water supply shall be
not be used. provided so that manifolds where con-
(c) Swivel joints may be used in pip- nections are made and broken can be
ing to which hoses are connected, and reached by at least one hose stream.
for articulated swivel-joint transfer (b) Material shall not be placed on
systems, provided that the design is wharves in such a manner as to ob-
such that the mechanical strength of struct access to firefighting equipment,
the joint will not be impaired if the or important pipeline control valves.
packing material should fail, as by ex- (c) Where the wharf is accessible to
posure to fire. vehicle traffic, an unobstructed road-
(d) Piping systems shall contain a way to the shore end of the wharf shall
sufficient number of valves to operate be maintained for access of firefighting
the system properly and to control the apparatus.
flow of liquid in normal operation and (x) Operations control. Loading or dis-
in the event of physical damage. charging shall not commence until the
(e) In addition to the requirements of wharf superintendent and officer in
paragraph (f)(4)(viii)(d) of this section, charge of the tank vessel agree that
each line conveying Category 1 or 2 the tank vessel is properly moored and
flammable liquids, or Category 3 flam- all connections are properly made. Me-
mable liquids with a flashpoint below chanical work shall not be performed
100 °F (37.8 °C), leading to a wharf shall on the wharf during cargo transfer, ex-
be provided with a readily accessible cept under special authorization based
block valve located on shore near the on a review of the area involved, meth-
approach to the wharf and outside of ods to be employed, and precautions
any diked area. Where more than one necessary.
line is involved, the valves shall be (5) Electrical equipment—(i) Applica-
grouped in one location. tion. This paragraph (f)(5)(i) shall apply
(f) Means of easy access shall be pro- to areas where Category 1 or 2 flam-
vided for cargo line valves located mable liquids, or Category 3 flammable
below the wharf deck. liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F
(g) Pipelines on flammable liquids (37.8 °C), are stored or handled. For
wharves shall be adequately bonded areas where only Category 3 flammable
and grounded. If excessive stray cur- liquids with a flashpoint at or above

rents are encountered, insulating 100 °F (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable
259
liquids are stored or handled, the elec- (37.8 °C), and where an unusual expo-
trical equipment may be installed in sure hazard exists from surrounding
accordance with the provisions of Sub- property. Such additional fire-control
part S of this part, for ordinary loca- equipment shall be sufficient to extin-
tions. guish a fire in the largest tank. The de-
(ii) Conformance. All electrical equip- sign and amount of such equipment
ment and wiring shall be of a type shall be in accordance with approved
specified by and shall be installed in engineering standards.
accordance with subpart S of this part. (g) Service stations—(1) Storage and
(iii) Classification. So far as it applies handling—(i) General provisions. (a) Liq-
Table H–18 shall be used to delineate uids shall be stored in approved closed
and classify hazardous areas for the containers not exceeding 60 gallons ca-
purpose of installation of electrical pacity, in tanks located underground,
equipment under normal cir- in tanks in special enclosures as de-
cumstances. In Table H–18 a classified scribed in paragraph (g)(i) of this sec-
area shall not extend beyond an tion, or in aboveground tanks as pro-
unpierced wall, roof, or other solid par- vided for in paragraphs (g)(4)(ii), (b), (c)
tition. The area classifications listed and (d) of this section.
shall be based on the premise that the (b) Aboveground tanks, located in an
installation meets the applicable re- adjoining bulk plant, may be connected
quirements of this section in all re- by piping to service station under-
spects. ground tanks if, in addition to valves
(6) Sources of ignition. Category 1 or 2 at aboveground tanks, a valve is also
flammable liquids, or Category 3 flam- installed within control of service sta-
mable liquids with a flashpoint below tion personnel.
100 °F (37.8 °C), shall not be handled, (c) Apparatus dispensing Category 1
drawn, or dispensed where flammable or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3
vapors may reach a source of ignition. flammable liquids with a flashpoint
Smoking shall be prohibited except in below 100 °F (37.8 °C), into the fuel
designated localities. ‘‘No Smoking’’ tanks of motor vehicles of the public
signs shall be conspicuously posted shall not be located at a bulk plant un-
where hazard from flammable liquid less separated by a fence or similar
vapors is normally present. barrier from the area in which bulk op-
(7) Drainage and waste disposal. Provi- erations are conducted.
sion shall be made to prevent flam- (d) [Reserved]
mable liquids which may be spilled at (e) The provisions of paragraph
loading or unloading points from enter- (g)(1)(i)(a) of this section shall not pro-
ing public sewers and drainage sys- hibit the dispensing of flammable liq-
tems, or natural waterways. Connec- uids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8
tion to such sewers, drains, or water- °C) in the open from a tank vehicle to
ways by which flammable liquids a motor vehicle. Such dispensing shall
might enter shall be provided with sep- be permitted provided:
arator boxes or other approved means (1) The tank vehicle complies with
whereby such entry is precluded. the requirements covered in the Stand-
Crankcase drainings and flammable ard on Tank Vehicles for Flammable
liquids shall not be dumped into sew- Liquids, NFPA 385–1966.
ers, but shall be stored in tanks or (2) The dispensing is done on prem-
tight drums outside of any building ises not open to the public.
until removed from the premises. (3) [Reserved]
(8) Fire control. Suitable fire-control (4) The dispensing hose does not ex-
devices, such as small hose or portable ceed 50 feet in length.
fire extinguishers, shall be available to (5) The dispensing nozzle is a listed
locations where fires are likely to automatic-closing type without a
occur. Additional fire-control equip- latchopen device.
ment may be required where a tank of (f) Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids,
more than 50,000 gallons individual ca- or Category 3 flammable liquids with a
pacity contains Category 1 or 2 flam- flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall
mable liquids, or Category 3 flammable not be stored or handled within a build-

liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F ing having a basement or pit into
260
which flammable vapors may travel, tilation designed to prevent the accu-
unless such area is provided with ven- mulation of flammable vapors therein.
(g) [Reserved]
TABLE H–18—ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT HAZARDOUS AREAS—BULK PLANTS
Class I
Location Group D Extent of classified area
division
Tank vehicle and tank car: 1

Loading through open dome ........................... 1 Within 3 feet of edge of dome, extending in all directions.
2 Area between 3 feet and 5 feet from edge of dome, extending
in all directions.
Loading through bottom connections with at- 1 Within 3 feet of point of venting to atmosphere extending in all
mospheric venting. directions.
2 Area between 3 feet and 5 feet from point of venting to at-
mosphere, extending in all directions. Also up to 18 inches
above grade within a horizontal radius of 10 feet from point
of loading connection.
Loading through closed dome with atmos- 1 Within 3 feet of open end of vent, extending in all directions.
pheric venting. 2 Area between 3 feet and 5 feet from open end of vent, ex-
tending in all directions. Also within 3 feet of edge of dome,
extending in all directions.
Loading through closed dome with vapor re- 2 Within 3 feet of point of connection of both fill and vapor lines,
covery. extending in all directions.
Bottom loading with vapor recovery or any 2 Within 3 feet of point of connections extending in all direc-
bottom unloading. tions. Also up to 18 inches above grade with in a horizontal
radius of 10 feet from point of connection.
Drum and container filling:
Outdoors, or indoors with adequate ventilation 1 Within 3 feet of vent and fill opening, extending in all direc-
tions.
2 Area between 3 feet and 5 feet from vent or fill opening, ex-
tending in all directions. Also up to 18 inches above floor or
grade level within a horizontal radius of 10 feet from vent or
fill opening.
Outdoors, or indoors with adequate ventilation 1 Within 3 feet of vent and fill opening, extending in all direc-
tions.
2 Area between 3 feet and 5 feet from vent or fill opening, ex-
tending in all directions. Also up to 18 inches above floor or
grade level within a horizontal radius of 10 feet from vent or
fill opening.
Tank—Aboveground:
Shell, ends, or roof and dike area .................. 2 Within 10 feet from shell, ends, or roof of tank, Area inside
dikes to level of top of dike.
Vent ................................................................. 1 Within 5 feet of open end of vent, extending in all directions.
2 Area between 5 feet and 10 feet from open end of vent, ex-
tending in all directions.
Floating roof .................................................... 1 Area above the roof and within the shell.
Pits:
Without mechanical ventilation ........................ 1 Entire area within pit if any part is within a Division 1 or 2
classified area.
With mechanical ventilation ............................. 2 Entire area within pit if any part is within a Division 1 or 2
classified area.
Containing valves, fittings or piping, and not 2 Entire pit.
within a Division 1 or 2 classified area.
Pumps, bleeders, withdrawal fittings, meters and
similar devices:
Indoors ............................................................. 2 Within 5 feet of any edge of such devices, extending in all di-
rections. Also up to 3 feet above floor or grade level within
25 feet horizontally from any edge of such devices.
Outdoors .......................................................... 2 Within 3 feet of any edge of such devices, extending in all di-
rections. Also up to 18 inches above grade level within 10
feet horizontally from any edge of such devices.
Storage and repair garage for tank vehicles .. 1 All pits or spaces below floor level.
2 Area up to 18 inches above floor or grade level for entire stor-
age or repair garage.
Drainage ditches, separators, impounding ba- 2 Area up to 18 inches above ditch, separator or basin. Also up
sins. to 18 inches above grade within 15 feet horizontally from
any edge.
Garages for other than tank vehicles .............. (2 ) If there is any opening to these rooms within the extent of an
outdoor classified area, the entire room shall be classified
the same as the area classification at the point of the open-

ing.
Outdoor drum storage ..................................... (2 )
261
TABLE H–18—ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT HAZARDOUS AREAS—BULK PLANTS—Continued

Class I
Location Group D Extent of classified area
division
Indoor warehousing where there is no flam- (2 ) If there is any opening to these rooms within the extent of an
mable liquid transfer. indoor classified are, the room shall be classified the same
as if the wall, curb or partition did not exist.
Office and rest rooms ...................................... (2 )
1 When classifying the extent of the area, consideration shall be given to the fact that tank cars or tank vehicles may be spot-
ted at varying points. Therefore, the extremities of the loading or unloading positions shall be used.
2 Ordinary.
(ii) Special enclosures. (a) When instal- station buildings from tanks of not
lation of tanks in accordance with more than 120 gallons capacity each.
paragraph (b)(3) of this section is im- (iv) [Reserved]
practical because of property or build- (v) Dispensing into portable containers.
ing limitations, tanks for flammable No delivery of any Category 1 or 2
liquids may be installed in buildings if flammable liquids, or Category 3 flam-
properly enclosed. mable liquids with a flashpoint below
(b) The enclosure shall be substan- 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall be made into port-
tially liquid and vaportight without able containers unless the container is
backfill. Sides, top, and bottom of the constructed of metal, has a tight clo-
enclosure shall be of reinforced con- sure with screwed or spring cover, and
crete at least 6 inches thick, with open- is fitted with a spout or so designed so
ings for inspection through the top the contents can be poured without
only. Tank connections shall be so spilling.
piped or closed that neither vapors nor (2) [Reserved]
liquid can escape into the enclosed (3) Dispensing systems—(i) Location.
space. Means shall be provided whereby Dispensing devices at automotive serv-
portable equipment may be employed ice stations shall be so located that all
to discharge to the outside any liquid parts of the vehicle being served will be
or vapors which might accumulate on the premises of the service station.
should leakage occur. (ii) Inside location. Approved dis-
(iii) Inside buildings. (a) Except where pensing units may be located inside of
stored in tanks as provided in para- buildings. The dispensing area shall be
graph (g)(1)(ii) of this section, no Cat- separated from other areas in an ap-
egory 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Cat- proved manner. The dispensing unit
egory 3 flammable liquids with a and its piping shall be mounted either
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall on a concrete island or protected
be stored within any service station against collision damage by suitable
building except in closed containers of means and shall be located in a posi-
aggregate capacity not exceeding 60 tion where it cannot be struck by a ve-
gallons. One container not exceeding 60 hicle descending a ramp or other slope
gallons capacity equipped with an ap- out of control. The dispensing area
proved pump is permitted. shall be provided with an approved me-
(b) Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, chanical or gravity ventilation system.
or Category 3 flammable liquids with a When dispensing units are located
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), may be below grade, only approved mechanical
transferred from one container to an- ventilation shall be used and the entire
other in lubrication or service rooms of dispensing area shall be protected by
a service station building provided the an approved automatic sprinkler sys-
electrical installation complies with tem. Ventilating systems shall be elec-
Table H–19 and provided that any heat- trically interlocked with gasoline dis-
ing equipment complies with paragraph pensing units so that the dispensing
(g)(6) of this section. units cannot be operated unless the
(c) Category 3 flammable liquids with ventilating fan motors are energized.
a flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) (iii) Emergency power cutoff. A clearly
and Category 4 flammable liquids may identified and easily accessible

be stored and dispensed inside service switch(es) or a circuit breaker(s) shall
262
be provided at a location remote from ings, shall be located not less than 10
dispensing devices, including remote feet from lines of adjoining property
pumping systems, to shut off the power which may be built upon, and not less
to all dispensing devices in the event of than 5 feet from any building opening.
an emergency. When an outside pump location is im-
(iv) Dispensing units. (a) Category 1 or practical, pumps may be installed in-
2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 side of buildings, as provided for dis-
flammable liquids with a flashpoint pensers in subdivision (ii) of this sub-
below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall be trans- paragraph, or in pits as provided in
ferred from tanks by means of fixed subdivision (c) of this subdivision.
pumps so designed and equipped as to Pumps shall be substantially anchored
allow control of the flow and to pre- and protected against physical damage
vent leakage or accidental discharge. by vehicles.
(b)(1) Only listed devices may be used (c) Pits for subsurface pumps or pip-
for dispensing Category 1 or 2 flaming manifolds of submersible pumps
mable liquids, or Category 3 flammable shall withstand the external forces to
liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F which they may be subjected without
(37.8 °C). No such device may be used if damage to the pump, tank, or piping.
it shows evidence of having been dis- The pit shall be no larger than nec-
mantled. essary for inspection and maintenance
(2) Every dispensing device for Cat- and shall be provided with a fitted
egory 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Cat- cover.
egory 3 flammable liquids with a (d) A control shall be provided that
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), in- will permit the pump to operate only
stalled after December 31, 1978, shall when a dispensing nozzle is removed
contain evidence of listing so placed from its bracket on the dispensing unit
that any attempt to dismantle the de- and the switch on this dispensing unit
vice will result in damage to such evi- is manually actuated. This control
dence, visible without disassembly or shall also stop the pump when all noz-
dismounting of the nozzle. zles have been returned to their brack-
(c) Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, ets.
or Category 3 flammable liquids with a (e) An approved impact valve, incor-
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall porating a fusible link, designed to
not be dispensed by pressure from close automatically in the event of se-
drums, barrels, and similar containers. vere impact or fire exposure shall be
Approved pumps taking suction properly installed in the dispensing
through the top of the container or ap- supply line at the base of each indi-
proved self-closing faucets shall be vidual dispensing device.
used. (f) Testing. After the completion of
(d) The dispensing units, except those the installation, including any paving,
attached to containers, shall be mount- that section of the pressure piping sys-
ed either on a concrete island or pro- tem between the pump discharge and
tected against collision damage by the connection for the dispensing facil-
suitable means. ity shall be tested for at least 30 min-
(v) Remote pumping systems. (a) This utes at the maximum operating pres-
paragraph (g)(3)(v) shall apply to sys- sure of the system. Such tests shall be
tems for dispensing Category 1 or 2 repeated at 5-year intervals thereafter.
flammable liquids, or Category 3 flam- (vi) Delivery nozzles. (a) A listed man-
mable liquids with a flashpoint below ual or automatic-closing type hose noz-
100 °F (37.8 °C), where such liquids are zle valve shall be provided on dis-
transferred from storage to individual pensers used for the dispensing of Cat-
or multiple dispensing units by pumps egory 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Cat-
located elsewhere than at the dis- egory 3 flammable liquids with a
pensing units. flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C).
(b) Pumps shall be designed or (b) Manual-closing type valves shall
equipped so that no part of the system be held open manually during dis-
will be subjected to pressures above its pensing. Automatic-closing type valves
allowable working pressure. Pumps in- may be used in conjunction with an ap-
stalled above grade, outside of build- proved latch-open device.
263
(4) Marine service stations—(i) Dis- plied with and the quantity so stored
pensing. (a) The dispensing area shall does not exceed 1,100 gallons aggregate
be located away from other structures capacity.
so as to provide room for safe ingress (c) Shore tanks supplying marine
and egress of craft to be fueled. Dis- service stations may be located above
pensing units shall in all cases be at ground, where rock ledges or high
least 20 feet from any activity involv- water table make underground tanks
ing fixed sources of ignition. impractical.
(b) Dispensing shall be by approved (d) Where tanks are at an elevation
dispensing units with or without inte- which would produce gravity head on
gral pumps and may be located on open the dispensing unit, the tank outlet
piers, wharves, or floating docks or on shall be equipped with a pressure con-
shore or on piers of the solid fill type. trol valve positioned adjacent to and
(c) Dispensing nozzles shall be auto- outside the tank block valve specified
matic-closing without a hold-open in paragraph (b)(2)(ix)(b) of this sec-
latch. tion, so adjusted that liquid cannot
(ii) Tanks and pumps. (a) Tanks, and flow by gravity from the tank in case
pumps not integral with the dispensing of piping or hose failure.
unit, shall be on shore or on a pier of (iii) Piping. (a) Piping between shore
the solid fill type, except as provided in tanks and dispensing units shall be as
paragraphs (g)(4)(ii) (b) and (c) of this described in paragraph (c) of this sec-
section. tion, except that, where dispensing is
(b) Where shore location would re- from a floating structure, suitable
quire excessively long supply lines to lengths of oil-resistant flexible hose
dispensers, tanks may be installed on a may be employed between the shore
pier provided that applicable portions piping and the piping on the floating
of paragraph (b) of this section relative structure as made necessary by change
to spacing, diking, and piping are com- in water level or shoreline.
264
265
ER26MR12.058</GPH>
(b) A readily accessible valve to shut liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F
off the supply from shore shall be pro- (37.8 °C), are stored or handled. For
vided in each pipeline at or near the areas where Category 3 flammable liq-
approach to the pier and at the shore uids with a flashpoint at or above 100
end of each pipeline adjacent to the °F (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable
point where flexible hose is attached. liquids are stored or handled the elec-
(c) Piping shall be located so as to be trical equipment may be installed in
protected from physical damage. accordance with the provisions of sub-
(d) Piping handling Category 1 or 2 part S of this part, for ordinary loca-
flammable liquids, or Category 3 flam-
tions.
mable liquids with a flashpoint below
100 °F (37.8 °C), shall be grounded to (ii) All electrical equipment and wir-
control stray currents. ing shall be of a type specified by and
(5) Electrical equipment—(i) Applica- shall be installed in accordance with
tion. This paragraph (g)(5) shall apply subpart S of this part.
to areas where Category 1 or 2 flam- (iii) So far as it applies. Table H–19

mable liquids, or Category 3 flammable shall be used to delineate and classify
266
ER26MR12.059</GPH>
hazardous areas for the purpose of in- dispensed to prevent spilled liquids
stallation of electrical equipment from flowing into the interior of serv-
under normal circumstances. A classi- ice station buildings. Such provision
fied area shall not extend beyond an may be by grading driveways, raising
unpierced wall, roof, or other solid par- door sills, or other equally effective
tition. means. Crankcase drainings and flam-
(iv) The area classifications listed mable liquids shall not be dumped into
shall be based on the assumption that sewers but shall be stored in tanks or
the installation meets the applicable drums outside of any building until re-
requirements of this section in all removed from the premises.
spects. (8) Sources of ignition. In addition to
(6) Heating equipment—(i) Conform- the previous restrictions of this para-
ance. Heating equipment shall be in- graph, the following shall apply: There
stalled as provided in paragraphs (g)(6) shall be no smoking or open flames in
(ii) through (v) of this section. the areas used for fueling, servicing
(ii) Application. Heating equipment fuel systems for internal combustion
may be installed in the conventional engines, receiving or dispensing of
manner in an area except as provided flammable liquids. Conspicuous and
in paragraph (g)(6) (iii), (iv), or (v) of legible signs prohibiting smoking shall
this section. be posted within sight of the customer
(iii) Special room. Heating equipment being served. The motors of all equip-
may be installed in a special room sep- ment being fueled shall be shut off dur-
arated from an area classified by Table ing the fueling operation.
H–19 by walls having a fire resistance (9) Fire control. Each service station
rating of at least 1 hour and without shall be provided with at least one fire
any openings in the walls within 8 feet extinguisher having a minimum ap-
of the floor into an area classified in proved classification of 6 B, C, located
Table H–19. This room shall not be used so that an extinguisher, will be within
for combustible storage and all air for 75 feet of each pump, dispenser, under-
combustion purposes shall come from ground fill pipe opening, and lubrica-
outside the building. tion or service room.
(iv) Work areas. Heating equipment (h) Processing plants—(1) Scope. This
using gas or oil fuel may be installed in paragraph shall apply to those plants
the lubrication, sales, or service room or buildings which contain chemical
where there is no dispensing or trans- operations such as oxidation, reduc-
ferring of Category 1 or 2 flammable tion, halogenation, hydrogenation,
liquids or 3 flammable liquids with a alkylation, polymerization, and other
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), pro- chemical processes but shall not apply
vided the bottom of the combustion to chemical plants, refineries or distill-
chamber is at least 18 inches above the eries.
floor and the heating equipment is pro- (2) Location—(i) Classification. The lo-
tected from physical damage by vehi- cation of each processing vessel shall
cles. Heating equipment using gas or be based upon its flammable liquid ca-
oil fuel listed for use in garages may be pacity.
installed in the lubrication or service (ii) [Reserved]
room where Category 1 or 2 flammable (3) Processing building—(i) Construc-
liquids, or Category 3 flammable liq- tion. (a) Processing buildings shall be of
uids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 fire-resistance or noncombustible con-
°C), are dispensed provided the equip- struction, except heavy timber con-
ment is installed at least 8 feet above struction with load-bearing walls may
the floor. be permitted for plants utilizing only
(v) Electric heat. Electrical heating stable Category 3 flammable liquids
equipment shall conform to paragraph with a flashpoint at or above 100 °F
(g)(5) of this section. (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable liq-
(7) Drainage and waste disposal. Provi- uids. Except as provided in paragraph
sion shall be made in the area where (h)(2)(ii) of this section or in the case
Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or of explosion resistant walls used in
Category 3 flammable liquids with a conjunction with explosion relieving

flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), are facilities, see paragraph (h)(3)(iv) of
267
this section, load-bearing walls are pro- (d) Windows of explosion venting
hibited. Buildings shall be without type.
basements or covered pits. (4) Liquid handling—(i) Storage. (a)
(b) Areas shall have adequate exit fa- The storage of flammable liquids in
cilities arranged to prevent occupants tanks shall be in accordance with the
from being trapped in the event of fire. applicable provisions of paragraph (b)
Exits shall not be exposed by the drain- of this section.
age facilities described in paragraph (b) If the storage of flammable liq-
(h)(ii) of this section. uids in outside aboveground or under-
(ii) Drainage. (a) Emergency drainage ground tanks is not practical because
systems shall be provided to direct of temperature or production consider-
flammable liquid leakage and fire pro- ations, tanks may be permitted inside
tection water to a safe location. This of buildings or structures in accord-
may require curbs, scuppers, or special ance with the applicable provisions of
drainage systems to control the spread paragraph (b) of this section.
of fire, see paragraph (b)(2)(vii)(b) of (c) Storage tanks inside of buildings
this section. shall be permitted only in areas at or
(b) Emergency drainage systems, if above grade which have adequate
connected to public sewers or dis- drainage and are separated from the
charged into public waterways, shall be processing area by construction having
equipped with traps or separators. a fire resistance rating of at least 2
(iii) Ventilation. (a) Enclosed proc- hours.
essing buildings shall be ventilated at a (d) The storage of flammable liquids
rate of not less than 1 cubic foot per in containers shall be in accordance
minute per square foot of solid floor with the applicable provisions of para-
area. This shall be accomplished by graph (d) of this section.
natural or mechanical ventilation with (ii) Piping, valves, and fittings. (a) Pip-
discharge or exhaust to a safe location ing, valves, and fittings shall be in ac-
outside of the building. Provisions cordance with paragraph (c) of this sec-
shall be made for introduction of tion.
makeup air in such a manner as not to (b) Approved flexible connectors may
short circuit the ventilation. Ventila- be used where vibration exists or where
tion shall be arranged to include all frequent movement is necessary. Ap-
floor areas or pits where flammable va- proved hose may be used at transfer
pors may collect. stations.
(b) Equipment used in a building and (c) Piping containing flammable liq-
the ventilation of the building shall be uids shall be identified.
designed so as to limit flammable (iii) Transfer. (a) The transfer of large
vapor-air mixtures under normal oper- quantities of flammable liquids shall
ating conditions to the interior of be through piping by means of pumps
equipment, and to not more than 5 feet or water displacement. Except as re-
from equipment which exposes Cat- quired in process equipment, gravity
egory 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Cat- flow shall not be used. The use of com-
egory 3 flammable liquids with a pressed air as a transferring medium is
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), to the prohibited.
air. Examples of such equipment are (b) Positive displacement pumps
dispensing stations, open centrifuges, shall be provided with pressure relief
plate and frame filters, open vacuum discharging back to the tank or to
filters, and surfaces of open equipment. pump suction.
(iv) Explosion relief. Areas where Cat- (iv) Equipment. (a) Equipment shall
egory 1 or unstable liquids are proc- be designed and arranged to prevent
essed shall have explosion venting the unintentional escape of liquids and
through one or more of the following vapors and to minimize the quantity
methods: escaping in the event of accidental re-
(a) Open air construction. lease.
(b) Lightweight walls and roof. (b) Where the vapor space of equip-
(c) Lightweight wall panels and roof ment is usually within the flammable
hatches. range, the probability of explosion
268
damage to the equipment can be lim- vided, approved equipment shall be

ited by inerting, by providing an explo- used and installed in an approved man-
sion suppression system, or by design- ner.
ing the equipment to contain the peak (iii) Alarm systems. An approved
explosion pressure which may be modi- means for prompt notification of fire
fied by explosion relief. Where the spe- to those within the plant and any pub-
cial hazards of operation, sources of ig- lic fire department available shall be
nition, or exposures indicate a need, provided. It may be advisable to con-
consideration shall be given to pro- nect the plant system with the public
viding protection by one or more of the system where public fire alarm system
above means. is available.
(5) Tank vehicle and tank car loading
(iv) Maintenance. All plant fire pro-
and unloading. Tank vehicle and tank
tection facilities shall be adequately
car loading or unloading facilities shall
maintained and periodically inspected
be separated from aboveground tanks,
warehouses, other plant buildings, or and tested to make sure they are al-
nearest line of adjoining property ways in satisfactory operating condi-
which may be built upon by a distance tion and that they will serve their pur-
of 25 feet for Category 1 or 2 flammable pose in time of emergency.
liquids, or Category 3 flammable liq- (7) Sources of ignition—(i) General. (a)
uids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 Precautions shall be taken to prevent
°C), and 15 feet for Category 3 flam- the ignition of flammable vapors.
mable liquids with a flashpoint at or Sources of ignition include but are not
above 100 °F (37.8 °C) and Category 4 limited to open flames; lightning;
flammable liquids measured from the smoking; cutting and welding; hot sur-
nearest position of any fill stem. Build- faces; frictional heat; static, electrical,
ings for pumps or shelters for personnel and mechanical sparks; spontaneous ig-
may be a part of the facility. Oper- nition, including heat-producing chem-
ations of the facility shall comply with ical reactions; and radiant heat.
the appropriate portions of paragraph (b) Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids,
(f)(3) of this section. or Category 3 flammable liquids with a
(6) Fire control—(i) Portable extin- flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall
guishers. Approved portable fire extin- not be dispensed into containers unless
guishers of appropriate size, type, and the nozzle and container are elec-
number shall be provided. trically interconnected. Where the me-
(ii) Other controls. Where the special tallic floorplate on which the container
hazards of operation or exposure indi- stands while filling is electrically con-
cate a need, the following fire control nected to the fill stem or where the fill
provision shall be provided.
stem is bonded to the container during
(a) A reliable water supply shall be
filling operations by means of a bond
available in pressure and quantity ade-
wire, the provisions of this section
quate to meet the probable fire de-
shall be deemed to have been complied
mands.
with.
(b) Hydrants shall be provided in ac-
cordance with accepted good practice. (ii) Maintenance and repair. (a) When
(c) Hose connected to a source of necessary to do maintenance work in a
water shall be installed so that all ves- flammable liquid processing area, the
sels, pumps, and other equipment con- work shall be authorized by a respon-
taining flammable liquids can be sible representative of the employer.
reached with at least one hose stream. (b) Hot work, such as welding or cut-
Nozzles that are capable of discharging ting operations, use of spark-producing
a water spray shall be provided. power tools, and chipping operations
(d) Processing plants shall be pro- shall be permitted only under super-
tected by an approved automatic sprin- vision of an individual in responsible
kler system or equivalent extin- charge who shall make an inspection of
guishing system. If special extin- the area to be sure that it is safe for
guishing systems including but not the work to be done and that safe pro-
limited to those employing foam, car- cedures will be followed for the work
bon dioxide, or dry chemical are pro- specified.
269
(iii) Electrical. (a) All electric wiring dures which will tend to control leak-
and equipment shall be installed in ac- age and prevent the accidental escape
cordance with subpart S of this part. of flammable liquids. Spills shall be
(b) Locations where flammable cleaned up promptly.
vapor-air mixtures may exist under (ii) Access. Adequate aisles shall be
normal operations shall be classified maintained for unobstructed move-
Class I, Division 1 according to the re- ment of personnel and so that fire pro-
quirements of subpart S of this part. tection equipment can be brought to
For those pieces of equipment installed bear on any part of the processing
in accordance with paragraph equipment.
(h)(3)(iii)(b) of this section, the Divi- (iii) Waste and residues. Combustible
sion 1 area shall extend 5 feet in all di- waste material and residues in a build-
rections from all points of vapor libera- ing or operating area shall be kept to a
tion. All areas within pits shall be clas- minimum, stored in closed metal waste
sified Division 1 if any part of the pit is cans, and disposed of daily.
within a Division 1 or 2 classified area, (iv) Clear zone. Ground area around
unless the pit is provided with mechan- buildings and operating areas shall be
ical ventilation. kept free of tall grass, weeds, trash, or
(c) Locations where flammable vapor- other combustible materials.
air mixtures may exist under abnormal (i) Refineries, chemical plants, and dis-
conditions and for a distance beyond tilleries—(1) Storage tanks. Flammable
Division 1 locations shall be classified liquids shall be stored in tanks, in con-
Division 2 according to the require- tainers, or in portable tanks. Tanks
ments of subpart S of this part. These shall be installed in accordance with
locations include an area within 20 feet paragraph (b) of this section. Tanks for
horizontally, 3 feet vertically beyond a the storage of flammable liquids in
Division 1 area, and up to 3 feet above tank farms and in locations other than
floor or grade level within 25 feet, if in- process areas shall be located in ac-
doors, or 10 feet if outdoors, from any cordance with paragraph (b)(2) (i) and
pump, bleeder, withdrawal fitting, (ii) of this section.
meter, or similar device handling Cat- (2) Wharves. Wharves handling flam-
egory 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Cat- mable liquids shall be in accordance
egory 3 flammable liquids with a with paragraph (f)(4) of this section.
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C). Pits (3) Fired and unfired pressure vessels—
provided with adequate mechanical (i) Fired vessels. Fired pressure vessels
ventilation within a Division 1 or 2 shall be constructed in accordance with
area shall be classified Division 2. If the Code for Fired Pressure Vessels,
Category 3 flammable liquids with a Section I of the ASME Boiler and Pres-
flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) or sure Vessel Code—1968.
Category 4 flammable liquids only are (ii) Unfired vessels shall be con-
handled, then ordinary electrical structed in accordance with the Code
equipment is satisfactory though care for Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section
shall be used in locating electrical ap- VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure
paratus to prevent hot metal from fall- Vessel Code—1968.
ing into open equipment. (4) Location of process units. Process
(d) Where the provisions of para- units shall be located so that they are
graphs (h)(7)(iii) (a), (b), and (c) of this accessible from at least one side for the
section require the installation of ex- purpose of fire control.
plosion-proof equipment, ordinary elec- (5) Fire control—(i) Portable equipment.
trical equipment including switchgear Portable fire extinguishment and con-
may be used if installed in a room or trol equipment shall be provided in
enclosure which is maintained under such quantities and types as are needed
positive pressure with respect to the for the special hazards of operation and
hazardous area. Ventilation makeup storage.
air shall be uncontaminated by flam- (ii) Water supply. Water shall be
mable vapors. available in volume and at adequate
(8) Housekeeping—(i) General. Mainte- pressure to supply water hose streams,
nance and operating practices shall be foam producing equipment, automatic

in accordance with established proce- sprinklers, or water spray systems as
270
the need is indicated by the special terial used as a coating material which
hazards of operation and storage. shall be fluidized within a container by
(iii) Special equipment. Special extin- passing air uniformly from below. It is
guishing equipment such as that uti- common practice to fluidize such mate-
lizing foam, inert gas, or dry chemical rials to form a fluidized powder bed and
shall be provided as the need is indi- then dip the part to be coated into the
cated by the special hazards of oper- bed in a manner similar to that used in
ation and storage. liquid dipping. Such beds are also used
(j) Scope. This section applies to the as sources for powder spray operations.
handling, storage, and use of flam- (2) Spraying area. Any area in which
mable liquids with a flashpoint at or dangerous quantities of flammable va-
below 199.4 °F (93 °C) unless otherwise pors or mists, or combustible residues,
noted. This section does not apply to: dusts, or deposits are present due to
(1) Bulk transportation of flammable the operation of spraying processes.
liquids;
(3) Spray booth. A power-ventilated
(2) Storage, handling, and use of fuel
structure provided to enclose or accom-
oil tanks and containers connected
with oil burning equipment; modate a spraying operation to confine
(3) Storage of flammable liquids on and limit the escape of spray, vapor,
farms; and residue, and to safely conduct or
(4) Liquids without flashpoints that direct them to an exhaust system.
may be flammable under some condi- (4) Waterwash spray booth. A spray
tions, such as certain halogenated hy- booth equipped with a water washing
drocarbons and mixtures containing system designed to minimize dusts or
halogenated hydrocarbons; residues entering exhaust ducts and to
(5) Mists, sprays, or foams, except permit the recovery of overspray fin-
flammable aerosols covered in para- ishing material.
graph (d) of this section; or (5) Dry spray booth. A spray booth not
(6) Installations made in accordance equipped with a water washing system
with requirements of the following as described in subparagraph (4) of this
standards that are incorporated by ref- paragraph. A dry spray booth may be
erence as specified in § 1910.6: equipped with (i) distribution or baffle
(i) National Fire Protection Associa- plates to promote an even flow of air
tion Standard for Drycleaning Plants, through the booth or cause the deposit
NFPA No. 32–1970; of overspray before it enters the ex-
(ii) National Fire Protection Associa- haust duct; or (ii) overspray dry filters
tion Standard for the Manufacture of to minimize dusts; or (iii) overspray
Organic Coatings, NFPA No. 35–1970; dry filters to minimize dusts or resi-
(iii) National Fire Protection Asso- dues entering exhaust ducts; or (iv)
ciation Standard for Solvent Extrac- overspray dry filter rolls designed to
tion Plants, NFPA No. 36–1967; or minimize dusts or residues entering ex-
(iv) National Fire Protection Asso- haust ducts; or (v) where dry powders
ciation Standard for the Installation are being sprayed, with powder collec-
and Use of Stationary Combustion En- tion systems so arranged in the ex-
gines and Gas Turbines, NFPA No. 37– haust to capture oversprayed material.
1970.
(6) Fluidized bed. A container holding
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 powder coating material which is aer-
FR 3982, Jan. 27, 1975; 40 FR 23743, June 2, ated from below so as to form an air-
1975; 43 FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51759, supported expanded cloud of such ma-
Nov. 7, 1978; 47 FR 39164, Sept. 7, 1982; 51 FR
terial through which the preheated ob-
34560, Sept. 29, 1986; 53 FR 12121, Apr. 12, 1988;
55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9237, Mar. 7, ject to be coated is immersed and
1996; 70 FR 53929, Sept. 13, 2005; 77 FR 17765, transported.
Mar. 26, 2012] (7) Electrostatic fluidized bed. A con-
tainer holding powder coating material
§ 1910.107 Spray finishing using flam- which is aerated from below so as to
mable and combustible materials. form an air-supported expanded cloud
(a) Definitions applicable to this sec- of such material which is electrically
tion—(1) Aerated solid powders. Aerated charged with a charge opposite to the
powders shall mean any powdered ma- charge of the object to be coated; such
271
object is transported, through the con- feet per minute, or more, depending on
tainer immediately above the charged the volume of the finishing material
and aerated materials in order to be being applied and its flammability and
coated. explosion characteristics. Visible
(8) Approved. Shall mean approved gauges or audible alarm or pressure ac-
and listed by a nationally recognized tivated devices shall be installed to in-
testing laboratory. Refer to § 1910.7 for dicate or insure that the required air
definition of nationally recognized velocity is maintained. Filter rolls
testing laboratory. shall be inspected to insure proper re-
(9) Listed. See ‘‘approved’’ in placement of filter media.
§ 1910.107(a)(8). (ii) All discarded filter pads and filter
(b) Spray booths—(1) Construction. rolls shall be immediately removed to
Spray booths shall be substantially a safe, well-detached location or placed
constructed of steel, securely and rig- in a water-filled metal container and
idly supported, or of concrete or ma- disposed of at the close of the day’s op-
sonry except that aluminum or other eration unless maintained completely
substantial noncombustible material in water.
may be used for intermittent or low (iii) The location of filters in a spray
volume spraying. Spray booths shall be booth shall be so as to not reduce the
designed to sweep air currents toward effective booth enclosure of the arti-
the exhaust outlet. cles being sprayed.
(2) Interiors. The interior surfaces of
(iv) Space within the spray booth on
spray booths shall be smooth and con-
the downstream and upstream sides of
tinuous without edges and otherwise
filters shall be protected with approved
designed to prevent pocketing of resi-
automatic sprinklers.
dues and facilitate cleaning and wash-
ing without injury. (v) Filters or filter rolls shall not be
(3) Floors. The floor surface of a spray used when applying a spray material
booth and operator’s working area, if known to be highly susceptible to spon-
combustible, shall be covered with non- taneous heating and ignition.
combustible material of such character (vi) Clean filters or filter rolls shall
as to facilitate the safe cleaning and be noncombustible or of a type having
removal of residues. a combustibility not in excess of class
(4) Distribution or baffle plates. Dis- 2 filters as listed by Underwriters’ Lab-
tribution or baffle plates, if installed oratories, Inc. Filters and filter rolls
to promote an even flow of air through shall not be alternately used for dif-
the booth or cause the deposit of ferent types of coating materials,
overspray before it enters the exhaust where the combination of materials
duct, shall be of noncombustible mate- may be conducive to spontaneous igni-
rial and readily removable or acces- tion. See also paragraph (g)(6) of this
sible on both sides for cleaning. Such section.
plates shall not be located in exhaust (6) Frontal area. Each spray booth
ducts. having a frontal area larger than 9
(5) Dry type overspray collectors—(ex- square feet shall have a metal deflector
haust air filters). In conventional dry or curtain not less than 21⁄2 inches deep
type spray booths, overspray dry filters installed at the upper outer edge of the
or filter rolls, if installed, shall con- booth over the opening.
form to the following: (7) Conveyors. Where conveyors are
(i) The spraying operations except arranged to carry work into or out of
electrostatic spraying operations shall spray booths, the openings therefor
be so designed, installed and main- shall be as small as practical.
tained that the average air velocity (8) Separation of operations. Each
over the open face of the booth (or spray booth shall be separated from
booth cross section during spraying op- other operations by not less than 3
erations) shall be not less than 100 lin- feet, or by a greater distance, or by
ear feet per minute. Electrostatic such partition or wall as to reduce the
spraying operations may be conducted danger from juxtaposition of hazardous
with an air velocity over the open face operations. See also paragraph (c)(1) of
of the booth of not less than 60 linear this section.
272
(9) Cleaning. Spray booths shall be so able residue and explosive vapors, there
installed that all portions are readily shall be no electrical equipment in any
accessible for cleaning. A clear space of spraying area, whereon deposits of
not less than 3 feet on all sides shall be combustible residues may readily accu-
kept free from storage or combustible mulate, except wiring in rigid conduit
construction. or in boxes or fittings containing no
(10) Illumination. When spraying areas taps, splices, or terminal connections.
are illuminated through glass panels or (6) Wiring type approved. Electrical
other transparent materials, only fixed wiring and equipment not subject to
lighting units shall be used as a source deposits of combustible residues but lo-
of illumination. Panels shall effec- cated in a spraying area as herein de-
tively isolate the spraying area from fined shall be of explosion-proof type
the area in which the lighting unit is
approved for Class I, group D locations
located, and shall be of a noncombus-
and shall otherwise conform to the pro-
tible material of such a nature or so
visions of subpart S of this part, for
protected that breakage will be un-
Class I, Division 1, Hazardous Loca-
likely. Panels shall be so arranged that
normal accumulations of residue on tions. Electrical wiring, motors, and
the exposed surface of the panel will other equipment outside of but within
not be raised to a dangerous tempera- twenty (20) feet of any spraying area,
ture by radiation or conduction from and not separated therefrom by parti-
the source of illumination. tions, shall not produce sparks under
(c) Electrical and other sources of igni- normal operating conditions and shall
tion—(1) Conformance. All electrical otherwise conform to the provisions of
equipment, open flames and other subpart S of this part for Class I, Divi-
sources of ignition shall conform to the sion 2 Hazardous Locations.
requirements of this paragraph, except (7) Lamps. Electric lamps outside of,
as follows: but within twenty (20) feet of any
(i) Electrostatic apparatus shall con- spraying area, and not separated there-
form to the requirements of paragraphs from by a partition, shall be totally en-
(h) and (i) of this section; closed to prevent the falling of hot par-
(ii) Drying, curing, and fusion appa- ticles and shall be protected from me-
ratus shall conform to the require- chanical injury by suitable guards or
ments of paragraph (j) of this section; by location.
(iii) Automobile undercoating spray (8) Portable lamps. Portable electric
operations in garages shall conform to lamps shall not be used in any spraying
the requirements of paragraph (k) of area during spraying operations. Port-
this section; able electric lamps, if used during
(iv) Powder-coating equipment shall cleaning or repairing operations, shall
conform to the requirements of para- be of the type approved for hazardous
graph (l)(1) of this section. Class I locations.
(2) Minimum separation. There shall be
(9) Grounding. (i) All metal parts of
no open flame or spark producing
spray booths, exhaust ducts, and piping
equipment in any spraying area nor
within 20 feet thereof, unless separated systems conveying flammable liquids
by a partition. or liquids with a flashpoint greater
(3) Hot surfaces. Space-heating appli- than 199.4 °F (93 °C) or aerated solids
ances, steampipes, or hot surfaces shall shall be properly electrically grounded
not be located in a spraying area where in an effective and permanent manner.
deposits of combustible residues may (ii) [Reserved]
readily accumulate. (d) Ventilation—(1) Conformance. Ven-
(4) Wiring conformance. Electrical wir- tilating and exhaust systems shall be
ing and equipment shall conform to the in accordance with the Standard for
provisions of this paragraph and shall Blower and Exhaust Systems for Vapor
otherwise be in accordance with sub- Removal, NFPA No. 91–1961, which is
part S of this part. incorporated by reference as specified
(5) Combustible residues, areas. Unless in § 1910.6, where applicable and shall
specifically approved for locations con- also conform to the provisions of this
taining both deposits of readily ignit- section.
273
(2) General. All spraying areas shall be in a full open position at all times
be provided with mechanical ventila- the ventilating system is in operation.
tion adequate to remove flammable va- (i) Exhaust ducts shall be protected
pors, mists, or powders to a safe loca- against mechanical damage and have a
tion and to confine and control com- clearance from unprotected combus-
bustible residues so that life is not en- tible construction or other combustible
dangered. Mechanical ventilation shall material of not less than 18 inches.
be kept in operation at all times while (ii) If combustible construction is
spraying operations are being con- provided with the following protection
ducted and for a sufficient time there- applied to all surfaces within 18 inches,
after to allow vapors from drying coat- clearances may be reduced to the dis-
ed articles and drying finishing mate- tances indicated:
rial residue to be exhausted. (a) 28-gage sheet metal on 1⁄4-inch asbestos 12 inches.
(3) Independent exhaust. Each spray mill board.
booth shall have an independent ex- (b) 28-gage sheet metal on 1⁄8-inch asbestos 9 inches.
haust duct system discharging to the mill board spaced out 1 inch on non-
combustible spacers.
exterior of the building, except that (c) 22-gage sheet metal on 1-inch rockwool 3 inches.
multiple cabinet spray booths in which batts reinforced with wire mesh or the
identical spray finishing material is equivalent.
used with a combined frontal area of (d) Where ducts are protected with an ap-
proved automatic sprinkler system, properly
not more than 18 square feet may have maintained, the clearance required in sub-
a common exhaust. If more than one division (i) of this subparagraph may be re-
fan serves one booth, all fans shall be duced to 6 inches.
so interconnected that one fan cannot
(8) Discharge clearance. Unless the
operate without all fans being oper-
spray booth exhaust duct terminal is
ated.
from a water-wash spray booth, the
(4) Fan-rotating element. The fan-ro-
terminal discharge point shall be not
tating element shall be nonferrous or
less than 6 feet from any combustible
nonsparking or the casing shall consist
exterior wall or roof nor discharge in
of or be lined with such material.
the direction of any combustible con-
There shall be ample clearance be-
struction or unprotected opening in
tween the fan-rotating element and the
fan casing to avoid a fire by friction, any noncombustible exterior wall with-
necessary allowance being made for or- in 25 feet.
dinary expansion and loading to pre- (9) Air exhaust. Air exhaust from
vent contact between moving parts and spray operations shall not be directed
the duct or fan housing. Fan blades so that it will contaminate makeup air
shall be mounted on a shaft suffi- being introduced into the spraying area
ciently heavy to maintain perfect or other ventilating intakes, nor di-
alignment even when the blades of the rected so as to create a nuisance. Air
fan are heavily loaded, the shaft pref- exhausted from spray operations shall
erably to have bearings outside the not be recirculated.
duct and booth. All bearings shall be of (10) Access doors. When necessary to
the self-lubricating type, or lubricated facilitate cleaning, exhaust ducts shall
from the outside duct. be provided with an ample number of
(5) Electric motors. Electric motors access doors.
driving exhaust fans shall not be placed (11) Room intakes. Air intake openings
inside booths or ducts. See also para- to rooms containing spray finishing op-
graph (c) of this section. erations shall be adequate for the effi-
(6) Belts. Belts shall not enter the cient operation of exhaust fans and
duct or booth unless the belt and pul- shall be so located as to minimize the
ley within the duct or booth are thor- creation of dead air pockets.
oughly enclosed. (12) Drying spaces. Freshly sprayed
(7) Exhaust ducts. Exhaust ducts shall articles shall be dried only in spaces
be constructed of steel and shall be provided with adequate ventilation to
substantially supported. Exhaust ducts prevent the formation of explosive va-
without dampers are preferred; how- pors. In the event adequate and reliable
ever, if dampers are installed, they ventilation is not provided such drying
shall be maintained so that they will spaces shall be considered a spraying
274
area. See also paragraph (j) of this sec- be subject to air pressure for supplying
tion. spray nozzles. Containers under air
(e) Flammable liquids and liquids with pressure supplying spray nozzles shall
a flashpoint greater than 199.4 °F (93 be of limited capacity, not exceeding
°C)—(1) Conformance. The storage of that necessary for 1 day’s operation;
flammable liquids or liquids with a shall be designed and approved for such
flashpoint greater than 199.4 °F (93 °C) use; shall be provided with a visible
in connection with spraying operations pressure gage; and shall be provided
shall conform to the requirements of with a relief valve set to operate in
§ 1910.106, where applicable. conformance with the requirements of
(2) Quantity. The quantity of flam- the Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels,
mable liquids or liquids with a Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and
flashpoint greater than 199.4 °F (93 °C) Pressure Vessel Code—1968, which is in-
kept in the vicinity of spraying oper- corporated by reference as specified in
ations shall be the minimum required
§ 1910.6. Containers under air pressure
for operations and should ordinarily
supplying spray nozzles, air-storage
not exceed a supply for 1 day or one
tanks and coolers shall conform to the
shift. Bulk storage of portable con-
tainers of flammable liquids or liquids standards of the Code for Unfired Pres-
with a flashpoint greater than 199.4 °F sure Vessels, Section VIII of the ASME
(93 °C) shall be in a separate, con- Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code—1968
structed building detached from other for construction, tests, and mainte-
important buildings or cut off in a nance.
standard manner. (6) Pipes and hoses. (i) All containers
(3) Containers. Original closed con- or piping to which is attached a hose or
tainers, approved portable tanks, ap- flexible connection shall be provided
proved safety cans or a properly ar- with a shutoff valve at the connection.
ranged system of piping shall be used Such valves shall be kept shut when
for bringing flammable liquids or liq- spraying operations are not being con-
uids with a flashpoint greater than ducted.
199.4 °F (93 °C) into spray finishing (ii) When a pump is used to deliver
room. Open or glass containers shall products, automatic means shall be
not be used. provided to prevent pressure in excess
(4) Transferring liquids. Except as proof the design working pressure of ac-
vided in paragraph (e)(5) of this section cessories, piping, and hose.
the withdrawal of flammable liquids (iii) All pressure hose and couplings
and liquids with a flashpoint greater shall be inspected at regular intervals
than 199.4 °F (93 °C) from containers appropriate to this service. The hose
having a capacity of greater than 60 and couplings shall be tested with the
gallons shall be by approved pumps. hose extended, and using the ‘‘inservice
The withdrawal of flammable liquids or
maximum operating pressures.’’ Any
liquids with a flashpoint greater than
hose showing material deteriorations,
199.4 °F (93 °C) from containers and the
signs of leakage, or weakness in its
filling of containers, including portable
mixing tanks, shall be done only in a carcass or at the couplings, shall be
suitable mixing room or in a spraying withdrawn from service and repaired or
area when the ventilating system is in discarded.
operation. Adequate precautions shall (iv) Piping systems conveying flam-
be taken to protect against liquid spill- mable liquids or liquids with a
age and sources of ignition. flashpoint greater than 199.4 °F (93 °C)
(5) Spraying containers. Containers shall be of steel or other material hav-
supplying spray nozzles shall be of ing comparable properties of resistance
closed type or provided with metal cov- to heat and physical damage. Piping
ers kept closed. Containers not resting systems shall be properly bonded and
on floors shall be on metal supports or grounded.
suspended by wire cables. Containers (7) Spray liquid heaters. Electrically
supplying spray nozzles by gravity flow powered spray liquid heaters shall be
shall not exceed 10 gallons capacity. approved and listed for the specific lo-
Original shipping containers shall not cation in which used (see paragraph (c)
275
of this section). Heaters shall not be lo- practical, with cleaning conducted
cated in spray booths nor other loca- daily if necessary. Scrapers, spuds, or
tions subject to the accumulation of other such tools used for cleaning pur-
deposits or combustible residue. If an poses shall be of nonsparking material.
electric motor is used, see paragraph (3) Residue disposal. Residue scrapings
(c) of this section. and debris contaminated with residue
(8) Pump relief. If flammable liquids shall be immediately removed from the
or liquids with a flashpoint greater premises and properly disposed of. Ap-
than 199.4 °F (93 °C) are supplied to proved metal waste cans shall be pro-
spray nozzles by positive displacement vided wherever rags or waste are im-
pumps, the pump discharge line shall pregnated with finishing material and
be provided with an approved relief all such rags or waste deposited therein
valve discharging to a pump suction or immediately after use. The contents of
a safe detached location, or a device waste cans shall be properly disposed of
provided to stop the prime mover if the at least once daily or at the end of each
discharge pressure exceeds the safe op- shift.
erating pressure of the system. (4) Clothing storage. Spray finishing
(9) Grounding. Whenever flammable employees’ clothing shall not be left on
liquids or liquids with a flashpoint the premises overnight unless kept in
greater than 199.4 °F (93 °C) are trans- metal lockers.
ferred from one container to another, (5) Cleaning solvents. The use of sol-
both containers shall be effectively vents for cleaning operations shall be
bonded and grounded to prevent dis- restricted to those having flashpoints
charge sparks of static electricity. not less than 100 °F.; however, for
(f) Protection—(1) Conformance. In cleaning spray nozzles and auxiliary
sprinklered buildings, the automatic equipment, solvents having flashpoints
sprinkler system in rooms containing not less than those normally used in
spray finishing operations shall con- spray operations may be used. Such
form to the requirements of § 1910.159. cleaning shall be conducted inside
In unsprinklered buildings where sprin- spray booths and ventilating equip-
klers are installed only to protect ment operated during cleaning.
spraying areas, the installation shall (6) Hazardous materials combinations.
conform to such standards insofar as Spray booths shall not be alternately
they are applicable. Sprinkler heads used for different types of coating ma-
shall be located so as to provide water terials, where the combination of the
distribution throughout the entire materials may be conducive to sponta-
booth. neous ignition, unless all deposits of
(2) Valve access. Automatic sprinklers the first used material are removed
protecting each spray booth (together from the booth and exhaust ducts prior
with its connecting exhaust) shall be to spraying with the second used mate-
under an accessibly located separate rial.
outside stem and yoke (OS&Y) subcon- (7) ‘‘No Smoking’’ signs. ‘‘No smoking’’
trol valve. signs in large letters on contrasting
(3) Cleaning of heads. Sprinklers pro- color background shall be conspicu-
tecting spraying areas shall be kept as ously posted at all spraying areas and
free from deposits as practical by paint storage rooms.
cleaning daily if necessary. (See also (h) Fixed electrostatic apparatus—(1)
paragraph (g) of this section.) Conformance. Where installation and
(4) Portable extinguishers. An adequate use of electrostatic spraying equip-
supply of suitable portable fire extin- ment is used, such installation and use
guishers shall be installed near all shall conform to all other paragraphs
spraying areas. of this section, and shall also conform
(g) Operations and maintenance—(1) to the requirements of this paragraph.
Spraying. Spraying shall not be con- (2) Type approval. Electrostatic appa-
ducted outside of predetermined spray- ratus and devices used in connection
ing areas. with coating operations shall be of ap-
(2) Cleaning. All spraying areas shall proved types.
be kept as free from the accumulation (3) Location. Transformers, power

of deposits of combustible residues as packs, control apparatus, and all other
276
electrical portions of the equipment, equipment which is manipulated by

with the exception of high-voltage hand, see paragraph (i) of this section
grids, electrodes, and electrostatic for applicable requirements.
atomizing heads and their connections, (9) Fail-safe controls. Electrostatic ap-
shall be located outside of the spraying paratus shall be equipped with auto-
area, or shall otherwise conform to the matic controls which will operate with-
requirements of paragraph (c) of this out time delay to disconnect the power
section. supply to the high voltage transformer
(4) Support. Electrodes and electro- and to signal the operator under any of
static atomizing heads shall be ade- the following conditions:
quately supported in permanent loca- (i) Stoppage of ventilating fans or
tions and shall be effectively insulated
failure of ventilating equipment from
from the ground. Electrodes and elec-
any cause.
trostatic atomizing heads which are
permanently attached to their bases, (ii) Stoppage of the conveyor car-
supports, or reciprocators, shall be rying goods through the high voltage
deemed to comply with this section. field.
Insulators shall be nonporous and non- (iii) Occurrence of a ground or of an
combustible. imminent ground at any point on the
(5) Insulators, grounding. High-voltage high voltage system.
leads to electrodes shall be properly in- (iv) Reduction of clearance below
sulated and protected from mechanical that specified in paragraph (h)(6) of
injury or exposure to destructive this section.
chemicals. Electrostatic atomizing (10) Guarding. Adequate booths, fenc-
heads shall be effectively and perma- ing, railings, or guards shall be so
nently supported on suitable insulators placed about the equipment that they,
and shall be effectively guarded either by their location or character or
against accidental contact or ground- both, assure that a safe isolation of the
ing. An automatic means shall be pro- process is maintained from plant stor-
vided for grounding the electrode sys- age or personnel. Such railings, fenc-
tem when it is electrically deenergized ing, and guards shall be of conducting
for any reason. All insulators shall be material, adequately grounded.
kept clean and dry. (11) Ventilation. Where electrostatic
(6) Safe distance. A safe distance shall atomization is used the spraying area
be maintained between goods being shall be so ventilated as to insure safe
painted and electrodes or electrostatic conditions from a fire and health
atomizing heads or conductors of at standpoint.
least twice the sparking distance. A (12) Fire protection. All areas used for
suitable sign indicating this safe dis- spraying, including the interior of the
tance shall be conspicuously posted
booth, shall be protected by automatic
near the assembly.
sprinklers where this protection is
(7) Conveyors required. Goods being
available. Where this protection is not
painted using this process are to be
available, other approved automatic
supported on conveyors. The conveyors
extinguishing equipment shall be pro-
shall be so arranged as to maintain
safe distances between the goods and vided.
the electrodes or electrostatic atom- (i) Electrostatic hand spraying equip-
izing heads at all times. Any irregu- ment—(1) Application. This paragraph
larly shaped or other goods subject to shall apply to any equipment using
possible swinging or movement shall be electrostatically charged elements for
rigidly supported to prevent such the atomization and/or, precipitation
swinging or movement which would re- of materials for coatings on articles, or
duce the clearance to less than that for other similar purposes in which the
specified in paragraph (h)(6) of this sec- atomizing device is hand held and ma-
tion. nipulated during the spraying oper-
(8) Prohibition. This process is not ac- ation.
ceptable where goods being coated are (2) Conformance. Electrostatic hand
manipulated by hand. When finishing spraying equipment shall conform with

materials are applied by electrostatic the other provisions of this section.
277
(3) Equipment approval and specifica- ventilation of the spraying area that
tions. Electrostatic hand spray appa- the equipment cannot be operated un-
ratus and devices used in connection less the ventilation fans are in oper-
with coating operations shall be of ap- ation.
proved types. The high voltage circuits (9) Ventilation. The spraying oper-
shall be designed so as to not produce ation shall take place within a spray
a spark of sufficient intensity to ignite area which is adequately ventilated to
any vapor-air mixtures nor result in remove solvent vapors released from
appreciable shock hazard upon coming the operation.
in contact with a grounded object (j) Drying, curing, or fusion appa-
under all normal operating conditions. ratus—(1) Conformance. Drying, curing,
The electrostatically charged exposed
or fusion apparatus in connection with
elements of the handgun shall be capa-
spray application of flammable and
ble of being energized only by a switch
combustible finishes shall conform to
which also controls the coating mate-
rial supply. the Standard for Ovens and Furnaces,
(4) Electrical support equipment. Trans- NFPA 86A–1969, which is incorporated
formers, powerpacks, control appa- by reference as specified in § 1910.6,
ratus, and all other electrical portions where applicable and shall also con-
of the equipment, with the exception of form with the following requirements
the handgun itself and its connections of this paragraph.
to the power supply shall be located (2) Alternate use prohibited. Spray
outside of the spraying area or shall booths, rooms, or other enclosures used
otherwise conform to the requirements for spraying operations shall not alter-
of paragraph (c) of this section. nately be used for the purpose of dry-
(5) Spray gun ground. The handle of ing by any arrangement which will
the spraying gun shall be electrically cause a material increase in the sur-
connected to ground by a metallic con- face temperature of the spray booth,
nection and to be so constructed that room, or enclosure.
the operator in normal operating posi- (3) Adjacent system interlocked. Except
tion is in intimate electrical contact as specifically provided in paragraph
with the grounded handle. (j)(4) of this section, drying, curing, or
(6) Grounding—general. All elec- fusion units utilizing a heating system
trically conductive objects in the having open flames or which may
spraying area shall be adequately produce sparks shall not be installed in
grounded. This requirement shall apply a spraying area, but may be installed
to paint containers, wash cans, and any adjacent thereto when equipped with
other objects or devices in the area. an interlocked ventilating system ar-
The equipment shall carry a prominent ranged to:
permanently installed warning regard- (i) Thoroughly ventilate the drying
ing the necessity for this grounding space before the heating system can be
feature. started;
(7) Maintenance of grounds. Objects
(ii) Maintain a safe atmosphere at
being painted or coated shall be main-
any source of ignition;
tained in metallic contact with the
conveyor or other grounded support. (iii) Automatically shut down the
Hooks shall be regularly cleaned to in- heating system in the event of failure
sure this contact and areas of contact of the ventilating system.
shall be sharp points or knife edges (4) Alternate use permitted. Auto-
where possible. Points of support of the mobile refinishing spray booths or en-
object shall be concealed from random closures, otherwise installed and main-
spray where feasible and where the obtained in full conformity with this sec-
jects being sprayed are supported from tion, may alternately be used for dry-
a conveyor, the point of attachment to ing with portable electrical infrared
the conveyor shall be so located as to drying apparatus when conforming
not collect spray material during nor- with the following:
mal operation. (i) Interior (especially floors) of
(8) Interlocks. The electrical equip- spray enclosures shall be kept free of
ment shall be so interlocked with the overspray deposits.
278
(ii) During spray operations, the dry- (l) Powder coating—(1) Electrical and
ing apparatus and electrical connec- other sources of ignition. Electrical
tions and wiring thereto shall not be equipment and other sources of igni-
located within spray enclosure nor in tion shall conform to the requirements
any other location where spray resi- of paragraphs (c)(1) (i)–(iv), (8) and (9)(i)
dues may be deposited thereon. of this section and subpart S of this
(iii) The spraying apparatus, the dry- part.
ing apparatus, and the ventilating sys- (2) Ventilation. (i) In addition to the
tem of the spray enclosure shall be provisions of paragraph (d) of this sec-
equipped with suitable interlocks so ar- tion, where applicable, exhaust ventila-
ranged that: tion shall be sufficient to maintain the
(a) The spraying apparatus cannot be atmosphere below the lowest explosive
operated while the drying apparatus is limits for the materials being applied.
inside the spray enclosure. All nondeposited air-suspended powders
(b) The spray enclosure will be shall be safely removed via exhaust
purged of spray vapors for a period of ducts to the powder recovery cyclone
not less than 3 minutes before the dry- or receptacle. Each installation shall
ing apparatus can be energized. be designed and operated to meet the
(c) The ventilating system will main- foregoing performance specification.
tain a safe atmosphere within the en- (ii) Powders shall not be released to
closure during the drying process and the outside atmosphere.
the drying apparatus will automati- (3) Drying, curing, or fusion equipment.
cally shut off in the event of failure of The provisions of the Standard for
the ventilating system. ovens and furnaces, NFPA No. 86A–1969
(iv) All electrical wiring and equip- shall apply where applicable.
ment of the drying apparatus shall con- (4) Operation and maintenance. (i) All
form with the applicable sections of areas shall be kept free of the accumu-
subpart S of this part. Only equipment lation of powder coating dusts, particu-
of a type approved for Class I, Division larly such horizontal surfaces as
2 hazardous locations shall be located ledges, beams, pipes, hoods, booths, and
within 18 inches of floor level. All me- floors.
tallic parts of the drying apparatus (ii) Surfaces shall be cleaned in such
shall be properly electrically bonded manner as to avoid scattering dust to
and grounded. other places or creating dust clouds.
(v) The drying apparatus shall con- (iii) ‘‘No Smoking’’ signs in large let-
tain a prominently located, perma- ters on contrasting color background
nently attached warning sign indi- shall be conspicuously posted at all
cating that ventilation should be main- powder coating areas and powder stor-
tained during the drying period and age rooms.
that spraying should not be conducted (5) Fixed electrostatic spraying equip-
in the vicinity that spray will deposit ment. The provisions of paragraph (h) of
on apparatus. this section and other subparagraphs of
(k) Automobile undercoating in garages. this paragraph shall apply to fixed
Automobile undercoating spray oper- electrostatic equipment, except that
ations in garages, conducted in areas electrical equipment not covered there-
having adequate natural or mechanical in shall conform to paragraph (l)(1) of
ventilation, are exempt from the re- this section.
quirements pertaining to spray fin- (6) Electrostatic hand spraying equip-
ishing operations, when using under- ment. The provisions of paragraph (i) of
coating materials not more hazardous this section and other subparagraphs of
than kerosene (as listed by Under- this paragraph, shall apply to electro-
writers’ Laboratories in respect to fire static handguns when used in powder
hazard rating 30–40) or undercoating coating, except that electrical equip-
materials using only solvents listed as ment not covered therein shall conform
having a flash point in excess of 100 °F. to paragraph (l)(1) of this section.
Undercoating spray operations not con- (7) Electrostatic fluidized beds. (i) Elec-
forming to these provisions are subject trostatic fluidized beds and associated
to all requirements of this section per- equipment shall be of approved types.

taining to spray finishing operations. The maximum surface temperature of
279
this equipment in the coating area section also covers the application of
shall not exceed 150 °F. The high volt- combustible powders by powder spray
age circuits shall be so designed as to guns, electrostatic powder spray guns,
not produce a spark of sufficient inten- fluidized beds, or electrostatic fluidized
sity to ignite any powder-air mixtures beds. The section does not apply to
nor result in appreciable shock hazard outdoor spray application of buildings,
upon coming in contact with a ground- tanks, or other similar structures, nor
ed object under normal operating con- to small portable spraying apparatus
ditions. not used repeatedly in the same loca-
(ii) Transformers, powerpacks, con- tion.
trol apparatus, and all other electrical
portions of the equipment, with the ex- [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 45
ception of the charging electrodes and FR 60704, Sept. 12, 1980; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10,
1984; 53 FR 12121, Apr. 12, 1988; 61 FR 9237,
their connections to the power supply
Mar. 7, 1996; 72 FR 71069, Dec. 14, 2007; 77 FR
shall be located outside of the powder 17776, Mar. 26, 2012]
coating area or shall otherwise con-
form to the requirements of paragraph § 1910.108 [Reserved]
(l)(1) of this section.
(iii) All electrically conductive ob- § 1910.109 Explosives and blasting
jects within the charging influence of agents.
the electrodes shall be adequately (a) Definitions applicable to this sec-
grounded. The powder coating equip- tion—(1) Blasting agent. Blasting
ment shall carry a prominent, perma-
agent—any material or mixture, con-
nently installed warning regarding the
sisting of a fuel and oxidizer, intended
necessity for grounding these objects.
for blasting, not otherwise classified as
(iv) Objects being coated shall be
an explosive and in which none of the
maintained in contact with the con-
ingredients are classified as an explo-
veyor or other support in order to in-
sive, provided that the finished prod-
sure proper grounding. Hangers shall
uct, as mixed and packaged for use or
be regularly cleaned to insure effective
shipment, cannot be detonated by
contact and areas of contact shall be
means of a No. 8 test blasting cap when
sharp points or knife edges where pos-
unconfined.
sible.
(v) The electrical equipment shall be (2) Explosive-actuated power devices.
so interlocked with the ventilation sys- Explosive-actuated power device—any
tem that the equipment cannot be op- tool or special mechanized device
erated unless the ventilation fans are which is actuated by explosives, but
in operation. not including propellant-actuated
(m) Organic peroxides and dual compo- power devices. Examples of explosive-
nent coatings—(1) Conformance. All actuated power devices are jet tappers
spraying operations involving the use and jet perforators.
of organic peroxides and other dual (3) Explosive. Explosive—any chem-
component coatings shall be conducted ical compound, mixture, or device, the
in approved sprinklered spray booths primary or common purpose of which is
meeting the requirements of this sec- to function by explosion, i.e., with sub-
tion. stantially instantaneous release of gas
(2) Smoking. Smoking shall be prohib- and heat, unless such compound, mix-
ited and ‘‘No Smoking’’ signs shall be ture, or device is otherwise specifically
prominently displayed and only non- classified by the U.S. Department of
sparking tools shall be used in any area Transportation; see 49 CFR chapter I.
where organic peroxides are stored, The term ‘‘explosives’’ shall include all
mixed or applied. material which is classified as Class A,
(n) Scope. This section applies to Class B, and Class C explosives by the
flammable and combustible finishing U.S. Department of Transportation,
materials when applied as a spray by and includes, but is not limited to dy-
compressed air, ‘‘airless’’ or ‘‘hydraulic namite, black powder, pellet powders,
atomization,’’ steam, electrostatic initiating explosives, blasting caps,
methods, or by any other means in con- electric blasting caps, safety fuse, fuse
tinuous or intermittent processes. The lighters, fuse igniters, squibs, cordeau
280
detonant fuse, instantaneous fuse, ig- prepared for the purpose of producing
niter cord, igniters, small arms ammu- audible or visible effects which are
nition, small arms ammunition prim- commonly referred to as fireworks.
ers, smokeless propellant, cartridges (11) [Reserved]
for propellant-actuated power devices, (12) Semiconductive hose.
and cartridges for industrial guns. Semiconductive hose—a hose with an
Commercial explosives are those explo- electrical resistance high enough to
sives which are intended to be used in limit flow of stray electric currents to
commercial or industrial operations. safe levels, yet not so high as to pre-
NOTE 1: Classification of explosives is de- vent drainage of static electric charges
scribed by the U.S. Department of Transpor- to ground; hose of not more than 2
tation as follows (see 49 CFR chapter I): megohms resistance over its entire
length and of not less than 5,000 ohms
(i) Class A explosives. Possessing, det-
per foot meets the requirement.
onating, or otherwise maximum haz-
(13) Small arms ammunition. Small
ard; such as dynamite, nitroglycerin,
arms ammunition—any shotgun, rifle,
picric acid, lead azide, fulminate of
pistol, or revolver cartridge, and car-
mercury, black powder, blasting caps,
tridges for propellant-actuated power
and detonating primers.
(ii) Class B explosives. Possessing devices and industrial guns. Military-
flammable hazard, such as propellant type ammunition containing explosive-
explosives (including some smokeless bursting charges, incendiary, tracer,
propellants), photographic flash pow- spotting, or pyrotechnic projectiles is
ders, and some special fireworks. excluded from this definition.
(iii) Class C explosives. Includes cer- (14) Small arms ammunition primers.
tain types of manufactured articles Small arms ammunition primers—
which contain Class A or Class B explo- small percussion-sensitive explosive
sives, or both, as components but in re- charges, encased in a cup, used to ig-
stricted quantities. nite propellant powder.
(iv) Forbidden or not acceptable explo- (15) Smokeless propellants. Smokeless
sives. Explosives which are forbidden or propellants—solid propellants, com-
not acceptable for transportation by monly called smokeless powders in the
common carriers by rail freight, rail trade, used in small arms ammunition,
express, highway, or water in accord- cannon, rockets, propellant-actuated
ance with the regulations of the U.S. power devices, etc.
Department of Transportation, 49 CFR (16) Special industrial explosives de-
chapter I. vices. Special industrial explosives de-
(4) Highway. Highway—any public vices—explosive-actuated power de-
street, public alley, or public road. vices and propellant-actuated power
(5) [Reserved] devices.
(6) Magazine. Magazine—any building (17) Special industrial explosives mate-
or structure, other than an explosives rials. Special industrial explosives ma-
manufacturing building, used for the terials—shaped materials and sheet
storage of explosives. forms and various other extrusions,
(7) Motor vehicle. Motor vehicle—any pellets, and packages of high explo-
self-propelled vehicle, truck, tractor, sives, which include dynamite, tri-
semitrailer, or truck-full trailers used nitrotoluene (TNT), pentaerythritol
for the transportation of freight over tetranitrate (PETN), hexahydro-1,3,5-
public highways. trinitro-s-triazine (RDX), and other
(8) Propellant-actuated power devices. similar compounds used for high-en-
Propellant-actuated power devices— ergy-rate forming, expanding, and
any tool or special mechanized device shaping in metal fabrication, and for
or gas generator system which is actu- dismemberment and quick reduction of
ated by a smokeless propellant or scrap metal.
which releases and directs work (18) Water gels or slurry explosives.
through a smokeless propellant charge. These comprise a wide variety of mate-
(9) [Reserved] rials used for blasting. They all contain
(10) Pyrotechnics. Pyrotechnics—any substantial proportions of water and
combustible or explosive compositions high proportions of ammonium nitrate,

or manufactured articles designed and some of which is in solution in the
281
water. Two broad classes of water gels TABLE H–21—AMERICAN TABLE OF DISTANCES
are (i) those which are sensitized by a FOR STORAGE OF EXPLOSIVES 1–5
material classed as an explosive, such [As revised and approved by the Institute of Makers of
Explosives, June 5, 1964]
as TNT or smokeless powder, (ii) those
which contain no ingredient classified Explosives Distances in feet
when storage is
as an explosive; these are sensitized barricaded: Sepa-
with metals such as aluminum or with Pounds over Pounds not over ration of maga-
zines
other fuels. Water gels may be
premixed at an explosives plant or 2 5 6
mixed at the site immediately before 5 10 8
10 20 10
delivery into the borehole. 20 30 11
(19) DOT specifications. Regulations of 30 40 12
40 50 14
the Department of Transportation pub- 50 75 15
lished in 49 CFR chapter I. 75 100 16
(b) Miscellaneous provisions—(1) Gen- 100 125 18
125 150 19
eral hazard. No person shall store, han- 150 200 21
dle, or transport explosives or blasting 200 250 23
agents when such storage, handling, 250 300 24
300 400 27
and transportation of explosives or 400 500 29
blasting agents constitutes an undue 500 600 31
600 700 32
hazard to life. 700 800 33
(2) [Reserved] 800 900 35
(c) Storage of explosives—(1) General 900 1,000 36
1,000 1,200 39
provisions. (i) All Class A, Class B, Class 1,200 1,400 41
C explosives, and special industrial ex- 1,400 1,600 43
plosives, and any newly developed and 1,600 1,800 44
1,800 2,000 45
unclassified explosives, shall be kept in 2,000 2,500 49
magazines which meet the require- 2,500 3,000 52
ments of this paragraph. 3,000 4,000 58
4,000 5,000 61
(ii) Blasting caps, electric blasting 5,000 6,000 65
caps, detonating primers, and primed 6,000 7,000 68
cartridges shall not be stored in the 7,000 8,000 72
8,000 9,000 75
same magazine with other explosives. 9,000 10,000 78
(iii) Ground around magazines shall 10,000 12,000 82
12,000 14,000 87
slope away for drainage. The land sur- 14,000 16,000 90
rounding magazines shall be kept clear 16,000 18,000 94
of brush, dried grass, leaves, and other 18,000 20,000 98
20,000 25,000 105
materials for a distance of at least 25 25,000 30,000 112
feet. 30,000 35,000 119
(iv) Magazines as required by this 35,000 40,000 124
40,000 45,000 129
paragraph shall be of two classes; 45,000 50,000 135
namely, Class I magazines, and Class II 50,000 55,000 140
magazines. 55,000 60,000 145
60,000 65,000 150
(v) Class I magazines shall be re- 65,000 70,000 155
quired where the quantity of explosives 70,000 75,000 160
stored is more than 50 pounds. Class II 75,000 80,000 165
80,000 85,000 170
magazines may be used where the 85,000 90,000 175
quantity of explosives stored is 50 90,000 95,000 180
pounds or less. 95,000 100,000 185
100,000 110,000 195
(vi) Class I magazines shall be lo- 110,000 120,000 205
cated away from other magazines in 120,000 130,000 215
130,000 140,000 225
conformity with Table H–21. 140,000 150,000 235
150,000 160,000 245
160,000 170,000 255
170,000 180,000 265

180,000 190,000 275
190,000 200,000 285
282
TABLE H–21—AMERICAN TABLE OF DISTANCES II magazines and the work in progress

FOR STORAGE OF EXPLOSIVES 1–5—Continued when the quantity of explosives kept
[As revised and approved by the Institute of Makers of therein is in excess of 25 pounds, and at
Explosives, June 5, 1964] least 50 feet when the quantity of ex-
Explosives Distances in feet plosives is 25 pounds, or less.
when storage is (ix) This paragraph (c) does not apply
barricaded: Sepa-
Pounds over Pounds not over ration of maga- to:
zines (a) Stocks of small arms ammuni-
200,000 210,000 295
tion, propellant-actuated power car-
210,000 230,000 315 tridges, small arms ammunition prim-
230,000 250,000 335 ers in quantities of less than 750,000, or
250,000 275,000 360 of smokeless propellants in quantities
275,000 300,000 385 less than 750 pounds;
1 ‘‘Natural barricade’’ means natural features of the ground, (b) Explosive-actuated power devices
such as hills, or timber of sufficient density that the sur-
rounding exposures which require protection cannot be seen when in quantities less than 50 pounds
from the magazine when the trees are bare of leaves. net weight of explosives;
2 ‘‘Artificial barricade’’ means an artificial mound or revetted
wall of earth of a minimum thickness of three feet.
(c) Fuse lighters and fuse igniters;
3 ‘‘Barricaded’’ means that a building containing explosives (d) Safety fuses other than cordeau
is effectually screened from a magazine, building, railway, or detonant fuses.
highway, either by a natural barricade, or by an artificial barri-
cade of such height that a straight line from the top of any (2) Construction of magazines—general.
sidewall of the building containing explosives to the eave line (i) Magazines shall be constructed in
of any magazine, or building, or to a point 12 feet above the
center of a railway or highway, will pass through such inter- conformity with the provisions of this
vening natural or artificial barricade. paragraph.
4 When two or more storage magazines are located on the
same property, each magazine must comply with the min- (ii) Magazines for the storage of ex-
imum distances specified from inhabited buildings, railways, plosives, other than black powder,
and highways, and in addition, they should be separated from
each other by not less than the distances shown for ‘‘Separa- Class B and Class C explosives shall be
tion of Magazines,’’ except that the quantity of explosives con- bullet resistant, weather resistant, fire
tained in cap magazines shall govern in regard to the spacing
of said cap magazines from magazines containing other ex- resistant, and ventilated sufficiently to
plosives. If any two or more magazines are separated from protect the explosive in the specific lo-
each other by less than the specified ‘‘Separation of Maga-
zines’’ distances, then such two or more magazines, as a cality. Magazines used only for storage
group, must be considered as one magazine, and the total of black powder, Class B and Class C
quantity of explosives stored in such group must be treated as
if stored in a single magazine located on the site of any mag- explosives shall be weather resistant,
azine of the group, and must comply with the minimum of dis- fire-resistant, and have ventilation.
tances specified from other magazines, inhabited buildings,
railways, and highways. Magazines for storage of blasting and
5 This table applies only to the permanent storage of com-
electric blasting caps shall be weather
mercial explosives. It is not applicable to transportation of ex-
plosives, or any handling or temporary storage necessary or resistant, fire-resistant, and venti-
incident thereto. It is not intended to apply to bombs, projec- lated.
tiles, or other heavily encased explosives.
(iii) Property upon which Class I
(vii) Except as provided in subdivi- magazines are located and property
sion (viii) of this subparagraph, class II where Class II magazines are located
magazines shall be located in con- outside of buildings shall be posted
formity with Table H–21, but may be with signs reading ‘‘Explosives—Keep
permitted in warehouses and in whole- Off.’’
sale and retail establishments when lo- (iv) Magazines requiring heat shall be
cated on a floor which has an entrance heated by either hot-water radiant
at outside grade level and the magazine heating with the magazine building; or
is located not more than 10 feet from air directed into the magazine building
such an entrance. Two class II maga- over either hot water or low pressure
zines may be located in the same build- steam (15 p.s.i.g.) coils located outside
ing when one is used only for blasting the magazine building.
caps in quantities not in excess of 5,000 (v) The magazine heating systems
caps and a distance of 10 feet is main- shall meet the following requirements:
tained between magazines. (a) The radiant heating coils within
(viii) When used for temporary stor- the building shall be installed in such a
age at a site for blasting operations, manner that the explosives or explo-
class II magazines shall be located sives containers cannot contact the
away from other magazines. A distance coils and air is free to circulate be-
of at least one hundred and fifty (150) tween the coils and the explosives or
feet shall be maintained between class explosives containers.
283
(b) The heating ducts shall be in- least a 6-inch sandfill between interior
stalled in such a manner that the hot- and exterior walls.
air discharge from the duct is not di- (ii) Floors and roofs of masonry mag-
rected against the explosives or explo- azines may be of wood construction.
sives containers. Wood floors shall be tongue and
(c) The heating device used in con- grooved lumber having a nominal
nection with a magazine shall have thickness of 1 inch.
controls which prevent the ambient (iii) Roofs required to be bullet re-
building temperature from exceeding sistant shall be protected by a sand
130 °F. tray located at the line of eaves and
(d) The electric fan or pump used in covering the entire area except that
the heating system for a magazine necessary for ventilation. Sand in the
shall be mounted outside and separate sand tray shall be maintained at a
from the wall of the magazine and shall depth of not less than 4 inches.
be grounded. (iv) All wood at the exterior of maga-
(e) The electric fan motor and the zines, including eaves, shall be pro-
controls for electrical heating devices tected by being covered with black or
used in heating water or steam shall galvanized steel or aluminum metal of
have overloads and disconnects, which thickness of not less than No. 26 gage.
comply with subpart S of this part. All All nails exposed to the interior of
magazines shall be well countersunk.
electrical switch gear shall be located
(v) Foundations for magazines shall
a minimum distance of 25 feet from the
be of substantial construction and ar-
magazine.
ranged to provide good cross ventila-
(f) The heating source for water or tion.
steam shall be separated from the mag- (vi) Magazines shall be ventilated
azine by a distance of not less than 25 sufficiently to prevent dampness and
feet when electrical and 50 feet when heating of stored explosives. Ven-
fuel fired. The area between the heat- tilating openings shall be screened to
ing unit and the magazine shall be prevent the entrance of sparks.
cleared of all combustible materials. (vii) Openings to magazines shall be
(g) The storage of explosives and ex- restricted to that necessary for the
plosives containers in the magazine placement and removal of stocks of ex-
shall allow uniform air circulation so plosives. Doors for openings in maga-
product temperature uniformity can be zines for Class A explosives shall be
maintained. bullet resistant. Doors for magazines
(vi) When lights are necessary inside not required to be bullet resistant shall
the magazine, electric safety flash- be designed to prevent unauthorized
light, or electric safety lanterns shall entrance to the magazine.
be used. (viii) [Reserved]
(3) Construction of Class I magazines. (ix) Provisions shall be made to pre-
(i) Class I magazines shall be of ma- vent the piling of stocks of explosives
sonry construction or of wood or of directly against masonry walls, brick-
metal construction, or a combination lined or sand-filled metal walls and sin-
of these types. Thickness of masonry gle-thickness metal walls; such protec-
units shall not be less than 8 inches. tion, however, shall not interfere with
Hollow masonry units used in con- proper ventilation at the interior of
struction required to be bullet resist- side and end walls.
ant shall have all hollow spaces filled (4) Construction of Class II magazines.
with weak cement or well-tamped sand. (i) Class II magazines shall be of wood
Wood constructed walls, required to be or metal construction, or a combina-
bullet resistant, shall have at least a 6- tion thereof.
inch space between interior and exte- (ii) Wood magazines of this class
rior sheathing and the space between shall have sides, bottom, and cover
sheathing shall be filled with well- constructed of 2-inch hardwood boards
tamped sand. Metal wall construction, well braced at corners and protected by
when required to be bullet resistant, being entirely covered with sheet
shall be lined with brick at least 4 metal of not less than No. 20 gage. All
inches in thickness or shall have at nails exposed to the interior of the
284
magazine shall be well countersunk. age of blasting agents and blasting sup-
All metal magazines of this class shall plies.
have sides, bottom, and cover con- (iv) Magazine floors shall be regu-
structed of sheet metal, and shall be larly swept, kept clean, dry, free of
lined with three-eighths-inch plywood grit, paper, empty used packages, and
or equivalent. Edges of metal covers rubbish. Brooms and other cleaning
shall overlap sides at least 1 inch. utensils shall not have any spark-pro-
(iii) Covers for both wood- and metal- ducing metal parts. Sweepings from
constructed magazines of this class floors of magazines shall be properly
shall be provided with substantial disposed of. Magazine floors stained
strap hinges and shall be provided with with nitroglycerin shall be cleaned ac-
substantial means for locking. cording to instructions by the manu-
(iv) Magazines of this class shall be facturer.
painted red and shall bear lettering in (v) When any explosive has deterio-
white, on all sides and top, at least 3 rated to an extent that it is in an un-
inches high, ‘‘Explosives—Keep Fire stable or dangerous condition, or if ni-
Away.’’ Class II magazines when lo- troglycerin leaks from any explosives,
cated in warehouses, and in wholesale then the person in possession of such
and retail establishments shall be pro- explosive shall immediately proceed to
vided with substantial wheels or cast- destroy such explosive in accordance
ers to facilitate easy removal in the with the instructions of the manufac-
case of fire. Where necessary due to cli- turer. Only experienced persons shall
matic conditions, Class II magazines be allowed to do the work of destroying
shall be ventilated. explosives.
(5) Storage within magazines. (i) Pack- (vi) When magazines need inside re-
ages of explosives shall be laid flat pairs, all explosives shall be removed
with top side up. Black powder when therefrom and the floors cleaned. In
stored in magazines with other explo- making outside repairs, if there is a
sives shall be stored separately. Black possibility of causing sparks or fire the
powder stored in kegs shall be stored explosives shall be removed from the
on ends, bungs down, or on side, seams magazine. Explosives removed from a
down. Corresponding grades and brands magazine under repair shall either be
shall be stored together in such a man- placed in another magazine or placed a
ner that brands and grade marks show. safe distance from the magazine where
All stocks shall be stored so as to be they shall be properly guarded and pro-
easily counted and checked. Packages tected until repairs have been com-
of explosives shall be piled in a stable pleted, when they shall be returned to
manner. When any kind of explosive is the magazine.
removed from a magazine for use, the (vii) Smoking, matches, open flames,
oldest explosive of that particular kind spark-producing devices, and firearms
shall always be taken first. (except firearms carried by guards)
(ii) Packages of explosives shall not shall not be permitted inside of or
be unpacked or repacked in a magazine within 50 feet of magazines. The land
nor within 50 feet of a magazine or in surrounding a magazine shall be kept
close proximity to other explosives. clear of all combustible materials for a
Tools used for opening packages of ex- distance of at least 25 feet. Combus-
plosives shall be constructed of non- tible materials shall not be stored
sparking materials, except that metal within 50 feet of magazines.
slitters may be used for opening fiber- (viii) Magazines shall be in the
board boxes. A wood wedge and a fiber, charge of a competent person at all
rubber, or wood mallet shall be used for times and who shall be held responsible
opening or closing wood packages of for the enforcement of all safety pre-
explosives. Opened packages of explo- cautions.
sives shall be securely closed before (ix) Explosives recovered from blast-
being returned to a magazine. ing misfires shall be placed in a sepa-
(iii) Magazines shall not be used for rate magazine until competent per-
the storage of any metal tools nor any sonnel has determined from the manu-
commodity except explosives, but this facturer the method of disposal. Caps
restriction shall not apply to the stor- recovered from blasting misfires shall
285
not be reused. Such explosives and caps as follows for the various classes of
shall then be disposed of in the manner commodities:
recommended by the manufacturer.
Type of marking or
(d) Transportation of explosives—(1) Commodity placard
General provisions. (i) No employee
Explosives, Class A, any quantity Explosives A (Red letters
shall be allowed to smoke, carry or a combination of Class A on white background).
matches or any other flame-producing and Class B explosives.
device, or carry any firearms or loaded Explosives, Class B, and quantity Explosives B (Red letters
cartridges while in or near a motor ve- on white background).
Oxidizing material (blasting Oxidizers (Yellow letters
hicle transporting explosives; or drive, agents, ammonium nitrate, on black background).
load, or unload such vehicle in a care- etc.), 1,000 pounds or more
less or reckless manner. gross weight.
(ii) [Reserved]
(b) [Reserved]
(iii) Explosives shall not be trans-
(c) Such markings or placards shall
ferred from one vehicle to another
be displayed at the front, rear, and on
within the confines of any jurisdiction
each side of the motor vehicle or trail-
(city, county, State, or other area)
er, or other cargo carrying body while
without informing the fire and police
it contains explosives or other dan-
departments thereof. In the event of
gerous articles of such type and in such
breakdown or collision the local fire
quantity as specified in paragraph
and police departments shall be
(d)(1)(ii)(a) of this subdivision. The
promptly notified to help safeguard
front marking or placard may be dis-
such emergencies. Explosives shall be played on the front of either the truck,
transferred from the disabled vehicle truck body, truck tractor or the trail-
to another only, when proper and er.
qualified supervision is provided. (d) Any motor vehicle, trailer, or
(iv) Blasting caps or electric blasting other cargo-carrying body containing
caps shall not be transported over the more than one kind of explosive as well
highways on the same vehicles with as an oxidizing material requiring a
other explosives, unless packaged, seg- placard under the provisions of para-
regated, and transported in accordance graph (d)(2)(ii)(a), the aggregate gross
with the Department of Transpor- weight of which totals 1,000 pounds or
tation’s Hazardous Materials Regula- more, shall be marked or placarded
tions (49 CFR parts 177–180). ‘‘Dangerous’’ as well as ‘‘Explosive A’’
(2) Transportation vehicles. (i) Vehicles or ‘‘Explosive B’’ as appropriate. If ex-
used for transporting explosives shall plosives Class A and explosives Class B
be strong enough to carry the load are loaded on the same vehicle, the
without difficulty and be in good me- ‘‘Explosives B’’ marking need not be
chanical condition. If vehicles do not displayed.
have a closed body, the body shall be (e) In any combination of two or
covered with a flameproof and mois- more vehicles containing explosives or
tureproof tarpaulin or other effective other dangerous articles each vehicle
protection against moisture and shall be marked or placarded as to its
sparks. All vehicles used for the trans- contents and in accordance with para-
portation of explosives shall have tight graphs (d)(2)(ii) (a) and (c) of this sub-
floors and any exposed spark-producing division.
metal on the inside of the body shall be (iii) Each motor vehicle used for
covered with wood or other non- transporting explosives shall be
sparking materials to prevent contact equipped with a minimum of two extin-
with packages of explosives. Packages guishers, each having a rating of at
of explosives shall not be loaded above least 10–BC.
the sides of an open-body vehicle. (a) Only extinguishers listed or ap-
(ii) Every vehicle used for trans- proved by a nationally recognized test-
porting explosives and oxidizing mate- ing laboratory shall be deemed suitable
rials listed in paragraph (d)(2)(ii)(a) of for use on explosives-carrying vehicles.
this section shall be marked as follows: Refer to § 1910.155(c)(3)(iv)(A) for defini-
(a) Exterior markings or placards re- tion of listed, and § 1910.7 for nationally
quired on applicable vehicles shall be recognized testing laboratory.
286
(b) Extinguishers shall be filled and ‘‘attended’’ only when the driver or
ready for immediate use and located other attendant is physically on or in
near the driver’s seat. Extinguishers the vehicle, or has the vehicle within
shall be examined periodically by a his field of vision and can reach it
competent person. quickly and without any kind of inter-
(iv) A motor vehicle used for trans- ference ‘‘attended’’ also means that the
porting explosives shall be given the driver or attendant is awake, alert, and
following inspection to determine that not engaged in other duties or activi-
it is in proper condition for safe trans- ties which may divert his attention
portation of explosives: from the vehicle, except for necessary
(a) Fire extinguishers shall be filled communication with public officers, or
and in working order. representatives of the carrier shipper,
(b) All electrical wiring shall be com- or consignee, or except for necessary
pletely protected and securely fastened absence from the vehicle to obtain food
to prevent short-circuiting. or to provide for his physical comfort.
(c) Chassis, motor, pan, and underside (b) However, an explosive-laden vehi-
of body shall be reasonably clean and cle may be left unattended if parked
free of excess oil and grease. within a securely fenced or walled area
(d) Fuel tank and feedline shall be se- with all gates or entrances locked
cure and have no leaks. where parking of such vehicle is other-
(e) Brakes, lights, horn, windshield wise permissible, or at a magazine site
wipers, and steering apparatus shall established solely for the purpose of
function properly. storing explosives.
(f) Tires shall be checked for proper (iv) No spark-producing metal, spark-
inflation and defects. producing metal tools, oils, matches,
(g) The vehicle shall be in proper con- firearms, electric storage batteries,
dition in every other respect and ac- flammable substances, acids, oxidizing
ceptable for handling explosives.
materials, or corrosive compounds
(3) Operation of transportation vehicles.
shall be carried in the body of any
(i) Vehicles transporting explosives
motor truck and/or vehicle trans-
shall only be driven by and be in the
porting explosives, unless the loading
charge of a driver who is familiar with
of such dangerous articles and the ex-
the traffic regulations, State laws, and
plosives comply with U.S. Department
the provisions of this section.
of Transportation regulations.
(ii) Except under emergency condi-
tions, no vehicle transporting explo- (v) Vehicles transporting explosives
sives shall be parked before reaching shall avoid congested areas and heavy
its destination, even though attended, traffic. Where routes through con-
on any public street adjacent to or in gested areas have been designated by
proximity to any place where people local authorities such routes shall be
work. followed.
(iii) Every motor vehicle trans- (vi) Delivery shall only be made to
porting any quantity of Class A or authorized persons and into authorized
Class B explosives shall, at all times, magazines or authorized temporary
be attended by a driver or other at- storage or handling areas.
tendant of the motor carrier. This at- (e) Use of explosives and blasting
tendant shall have been made aware of agents—(1) General provisions. (i) While
the class of the explosive material in explosives are being handled or used,
the vehicle and of its inherent dangers, smoking shall not be permitted and no
and shall have been instructed in the one near the explosives shall possess
measures and procedures to be followed matches, open light or other fire or
in order to protect the public from flame. No person shall be allowed to
those dangers. He shall have been made handle explosives while under the in-
familiar with the vehicle he is as- fluence of intoxicating liquors, nar-
signed, and shall be trained, supplied cotics, or other dangerous drugs.
with the necessary means, and author- (ii) Original containers or Class II
ized to move the vehicle when required. magazines shall be used for taking det-
(a) For the purpose of this subdivi- onators and other explosives from stor-
sion, a motor vehicle shall be deemed age magazines to the blasting area.
287
(iii) When blasting is done in con- (iii) Explosives or blasting equipment

gested areas or in close proximity to a that are obviously deteriorated or dam-
structure, or any other installation aged shall not be used.
that may be damaged, the blast shall (iv) No explosives shall be abandoned.
be covered before firing with a mat (3) Loading of explosives in blast holes.
constructed so that it is capable of pre- (i) All drill holes shall be sufficiently
venting fragments from being thrown. large to admit freely the insertion of
(iv) Persons authorized to prepare ex- the cartridges of explosives.
plosive charges or conduct blasting op- (ii) Tamping shall be done only with
erations shall use every reasonable pre- wood rods without exposed metal parts,
caution, including but not limited to but nonsparking metal connectors may
warning signals, flags, barricades, or be used for jointed poles. Violent tamp-
woven wire mats to insure the safety of ing shall be avoided. Primed cartridges
the general public and workmen. shall not be tamped.
(v) Blasting operations shall be con- (iii) When loading blasting agents
ducted during daylight hours. pneumatically over electric blasting
(vi) Whenever blasting is being con- caps, semiconductive delivery hose
ducted in the vicinity of gas, electric, shall be used and the equipment shall
water, fire alarm, telephone, telegraph, be bonded and grounded.
and steam utilities, the blaster shall (iv) No holes shall be loaded except
notify the appropriate representatives those to be fired in the next round of
of such utilities at least 24 hours in ad- blasting. After loading, all remaining
vance of blasting, specifying the loca- explosives shall be immediately re-
tion and intended time of such blast- turned to an authorized magazine.
ing. Verbal notice shall be confirmed (v) Drilling shall not be started until
with written notice. all remaining butts of old holes are ex-
(vii) Due precautions shall be taken amined with a wooden stick for
to prevent accidental discharge of elec- unexploded charges, and if any are
tric blasting caps from current induced found, they shall be refired before work
by radar, radio transmitters, lightning, proceeds.
adjacent powerlines, dust storms, or (vi) No person shall be allowed to
other sources of extraneous electricity. deepen drill holes which have con-
These precautions shall include: tained explosives.
(a) The suspension of all blasting op- (vii) After loading for a blast is com-
erations and removal of persons from pleted, all excess blasting caps or elec-
the blasting area during the approach tric blasting caps and other explosives
and progress of an electric storm. shall immediately be returned to their
(b) The posting of signs warning separate storage magazines.
against the use of mobile radio trans- (4) Initiation of explosive charges.
mitters on all roads within 350 feet of (i) [Reserved]
the blasting operations. (ii) When fuse is used, the blasting
(2) Storage at use sites. (i) Empty con- cap shall be securely attached to the
tainers and paper and fiber packing safety fuse with a standard-ring type
materials which have previously con- cap crimper. All primers shall be as-
tained explosive materials shall be dis- sembled at least 50 feet from any maga-
posed of in a safe manner, or reused in zine.
accordance with the Department of (iii) Primers shall be made up only as
Transportation’s Hazardous Materials required for each round of blasting.
Regulations (49 CFR parts 177–180). (iv) No blasting cap shall be inserted
(ii) Containers of explosives shall not in the explosives without first making
be opened in any magazine or within 50 a hole in the cartridge for the cap with
feet of any magazine. In opening kegs a wooden punch of proper size or stand-
or wooden cases, no sparking metal ard cap crimper.
tools shall be used; wooden wedges and (v) Explosives shall not be extracted
either wood, fiber or rubber mallets from a hole that has once been charged
shall be used. Nonsparking metallic or has misfired unless it is impossible
slitters may be used for opening fiber- to detonate the unexploded charge by
board cases. insertion of a fresh additional primer.
288
(vi) If there are any misfires while ters at least 11⁄2 inches high on a white
using cap and fuse, all persons shall be background.
required to remain away from the (4) Storage. Any explosives at a rail-
charge for at least 1 hour. If electric way facility, truck terminal, pier,
blasting caps are used and a misfire oc- wharf harbor facility, or airport ter-
curs, this waiting period may be re- minal whether for delivery to a con-
duced to 30 minutes. Misfires shall be signee, or forwarded to some other des-
handled under the direction of the per- tination shall be kept in a safe place,
son in charge of the blasting and all isolated as far as practicable and in
wires shall be carefully traced and such manner that they can be easily
search made for unexploded charges. and quickly removed.
(vii) Blasters, when testing circuits (5) Hours of transfer. Explosives shall
to charged holes, shall use only blast- not be delivered to or received from
ing galvanometers designed for this any railway station, truck terminal,
purpose. pier, wharf, harbor facility, or airport
(viii) Only the employee making terminal between the hours of sunset
leading wire connections in electrical and sunrise.
firing shall be allowed to fire the shot. (g) Blasting agents—(1) General. Unless
Leading wires shall remain shorted and otherwise set forth in this paragraph,
not be connected to the blasting ma- blasting agents, excluding water gels,
chine or other source of current until shall be transported, stored, and used
the charge is to be fired. in the same manner as explosives.
(5) Warning required. Before a blast is Water gels are covered in paragraph (h)
fired, the employer shall require that a of this section.
loud warning signal be given by the (2) Fixed location mixing. (i) [Re-
person in charge, who has made certain served]
that all surplus explosives are in a safe (ii) Buildings used for the mixing of
place, all persons and vehicles are at a blasting agents shall conform to the re-
safe distance or under sufficient cover, quirements of this section.
and that an adequate warning has been (a) Buildings shall be of noncombus-
given. tible construction or sheet metal on
(f) Explosives at piers, railway stations, wood studs.
and cars or vessels not otherwise specified (b) Floors in a mixing plant shall be
in this standard—(1) Railway cars. Ex- of concrete or of other nonabsorbent
cept in an emergency and with permis- materials.
sion of the local authority, no person (c) All fuel oil storage facilities shall
shall have or keep explosives in a rail- be separated from the mixing plant and
way car unless said car and contents located in such a manner that in case
and methods of loading are in accord- of tank rupture, the oil will drain away
ance with the U.S. Department of from the mixing plant building.
Transportation Regulations for the (d) The building shall be well venti-
Transportation of Explosives, 49 CFR lated.
chapter I. (e) Heating units which do not depend
(2) Packing and marking. No person on combustion processes, when prop-
shall deliver any explosive to any car- erly designed and located, may be used
rier unless such explosive conforms in in the building. All direct sources of
all respects, including marking and heat shall be provided exclusively from
packing, to the U.S. Department of units located outside the mixing build-
Transportation Regulations for the ing.
Transportation of Explosives. (f) All internal-combustion engines
(3) Marking cars. Every railway car used for electric power generation shall
containing explosives which has be located outside the mixing plant
reached its designation, or is stopped building, or shall be properly venti-
in transit so as no longer to be in inter- lated and isolated by a firewall. The ex-
state commerce, shall have attached to haust systems on all such engines shall
both sides and ends of the car, cards be located so any spark emission can-
with the words ‘‘Explosives—Handle not be a hazard to any materials in or

Carefully—Keep Fire Away’’ in red let- adjacent to the plant.
289
(iii) Equipment used for mixing (vi) Safety precautions at mixing

blasting agents shall conform to the re- plants shall include the requirements
quirements of this subdivision. of this subdivision.
(a) The design of the mixer shall min- (a) Floors shall be constructed so as
imize the possibility of frictional heat- to eliminate floor drains and piping
ing, compaction, and especially con- into which molten materials could flow
finement. All bearings and drive as- and be confined in case of fire.
semblies shall be mounted outside the (b) The floors and equipment of the
mixer and protected against the accu- mixing and packaging room shall be
mulation of dust. All surfaces shall be cleaned regularly and thoroughly to
accessible for cleaning. prevent accumulation of oxidizers or
(b) Mixing and packaging equipment fuels and other sensitizers.
shall be constructed of materials com-
(c) The entire mixing and packaging
patible with the fuel-ammonium ni-
plant shall be cleaned regularly and
trate composition.
thoroughly to prevent excessive accu-
(c) Suitable means shall be provided
mulation of dust.
to prevent the flow of fuel oil to the
mixer in case of fire. In gravity flow (d) Smoking, matches, open flames,
systems an automatic spring-loaded spark-producing devices, and firearms
shutoff valve with fusible link shall be (except firearms carried by guards)
installed. shall not be permitted inside of or
(iv) The provisions of this subdivision within 50 feet of any building or facil-
shall be considered when determining ity used for the mixing of blasting
blasting agent compositions. agents.
(a) The sensitivity of the blasting (e) The land surrounding the mixing
agent shall be determined by means of plant shall be kept clear of brush, dried
a No. 8 test blasting cap at regular in- grass, leaves, and other materials for a
tervals and after every change in for- distance of at least 25 feet.
mulation. (f) Empty ammonium nitrate bags
(b) Oxidizers of small particle size, shall be disposed of daily in a safe man-
such as crushed ammonium nitrate ner.
prills or fines, may be more sensitive (g) No welding shall be permitted or
than coarser products and shall, there- open flames used in or around the mix-
fore, be handled with greater care. ing or storage area of the plant unless
(c) No hydrocarbon liquid fuel with the equipment or area has been com-
flashpoint lower than that of No. 2 die- pletely washed down and all oxidizer
sel fuel oil 125 °F. minimum shall be material removed.
used. (h) Before welding or repairs to hol-
(d) Crude oil and crankcase oil shall low shafts, all oxidizer material shall
not be used. be removed from the outside and inside
(e) Metal powders such as aluminum of the shaft and the shaft vented with
shall be kept dry and shall be stored in a minimum one-half inch diameter
containers or bins which are moisture- opening.
resistant or weathertight. Solid fuels
(i) Explosives shall not be permitted
shall be used in such manner as to min-
inside of or within 50 feet of any build-
imize dust explosion hazards.
(f) Peroxides and chlorates shall not ing or facility used for the mixing of
be used. blasting agents.
(v) All electrical switches, controls, (3) Bulk delivery and mixing vehicles.
motors, and lights located in the mix- (i) The provisions of this paragraph
ing room shall conform to the require- shall apply to off-highway private oper-
ments in subpart S of this part for ations as well as to all public highway
Class II, Division 2 locations; otherwise movements.
they shall be located outside the mix- (ii) A bulk vehicle body for delivering
ing room. The frame of the mixer and and mixing blasting agents shall con-
all other equipment that may be used form with the requirements of this
shall be electrically bonded and be pro- paragraph (ii).
vided with a continuous path to the (a) The body shall be constructed of
ground. noncombustible materials.
290
(b) Vehicles used to transport bulk static-sensitive systems shall conform

premixed blasting agents on public to the requirements of this subdivision.
highways shall have closed bodies. (a) A positive grounding device shall
(c) All moving parts of the mixing be used to prevent the accumulation of
system shall be designed as to prevent static electricity.
a heat buildup. Shafts or axles which (b) A discharge hose shall be used
contact the product shall have out- that has a resistance range that will
board bearings with 1-inch minimum prevent conducting stray currents, but
clearance between the bearings and the that is conductive enough to bleed off
outside of the product container. Par- static buildup.
ticular attention shall be given to the (c) A qualified person shall evaluate
clearances on all moving parts. all systems to determine if they will
(d) A bulk delivery vehicle shall be adequately dissipate static under po-
strong enough to carry the load with- tential field conditions.
out difficulty and be in good mechan- (v) Repairs to bulk delivery vehicles
ical condition. shall conform to the requirements of
(iii) Operation of bulk delivery vehi- this section.
cles shall conform to the requirements (a) No welding or open flames shall
of this subdivision. These include the be used on or around any part of the
placarding requirements as specified by delivery equipment unless it has been
Department of Transportation. completely washed down and all oxi-
(a) The operator shall be trained in dizer material removed.
the safe operation of the vehicle to- (b) Before welding or making repairs
gether with its mixing, conveying, and to hollow shafts, the shaft shall be
related equipment. The employer shall thoroughly cleaned inside and out and
assure that the operator is familiar vented with a minimum one-half-inch
with the commodities being delivered diameter opening.
and the general procedure for handling (4) Bulk storage bins. (i) The bin, in-
emergency situations. cluding supports, shall be constructed
(b) The hauling of either blasting of compatible materials, waterproof,
caps or other explosives but not both, and adequately supported and braced
shall be permitted on bulk trucks pro- to withstand the combination of all
vided that a special wood or non- loads including impact forces arising
ferrous-lined container is installed for from product movement within the bin
the explosives. Such blasting caps or and accidental vehicle contact with the
other explosives shall be in DOT-speci- support legs.
fied shipping containers: see 49 CFR (ii) The bin discharge gate shall be
chapter I. designed to provide a closure tight
(c) No person shall smoke, carry enough to prevent leakage of the
matches or any flame-producing de- stored product. Provision shall also be
vice, or carry any firearms while in or made so that the gate can be locked.
about bulk vehicles effecting the mix- (iii) Bin loading manways or access
ing transfer or down-the-hole loading hatches shall be hinged or otherwise
of blasting agents at or near the blast- attached to the bin and be designed to
ing site. permit locking.
(d) Caution shall be exercised in the (iv) Any electrically driven con-
movement of the vehicle in the blast- veyors for loading or unloading bins
ing area to avoid driving the vehicle shall conform to the requirements of
over or dragging hoses over firing lines, subpart S of this part. They shall be
cap wires, or explosive materials. The designed to minimize damage from cor-
employer shall assure that the driver, rosion.
in moving the vehicle, has assistance of (v) Bins containing blasting agent
a second person to guide his move- shall be located, with respect to inhab-
ments. ited buildings, passenger railroads, and
(e) No intransit mixing of materials public highways, in accordance with
shall be performed. Table-21 and separation from other
(iv) Pneumatic loading from bulk de- blasting agent storage and explosives
livery vehicles into blastholes primed storage shall be in conformity with

with electric blasting caps or other Table H–22.
291
5 Earth, or sand dikes, or enclosures filled with the pre-
(vi) Bins containing ammonium ni- scribed minimum thickness of earth or sand are acceptable
trate shall be separated from blasting artificial barricades. Natural barricades, such as hills or timber
agent storage and explosives storage in of sufficient density that the surrounding exposures which re-
quire protection cannot be seen from the ‘‘donor’’ when the
conformity with Table H–22. trees are bare of leaves, are also acceptable.
6 When the ammonium nitrate must be counted in deter-
mining the distances to be maintained from inhabited build-
TABLE H–22—TABLE OF RECOMMENDED SEPA- ings, passenger railways and public highways, it may be
RATION DISTANCES OF AMMONIUM NITRATE counted at one-half its actual weight because its blast effect is
lower.
AND BLASTING AGENTS FROM EXPLOSIVES OR NOTE 7: Guide to use of table of recommended separation
BLASTING AGENTS 1–6 distances of ammonium nitrate and blasting agents from ex-
plosives or blasting agents.
Donor weight Minimum separation (a) Sketch location of all potential donor and acceptor mate-
Minimum rials together with the maximum mass of material to be al-
distance of receptor thickness lowed in that vicinity. (Potential donors are high explosives,
when barricaded 2 (ft.) of artificial blasting agents, and combination of masses of detonating ma-
Pounds Pounds barri- terials. Potential acceptors are high explosives, blasting
Ammo-
over not over nium ni- Blasting cades 5 agents, and ammonium nitrate.)
agent 4 (in.) (b) Consider separately each donor mass in combination
trate 3
with each acceptor mass. If the masses are closer than table
allowance (distances measured between nearest edges), the
100 3 11 12 combination of masses becomes a new potential donor of
100 300 4 14 12 weight equal to the total mass. When individual masses are
300 600 5 18 12 considered as donors, distances to potential acceptors shall
600 1,000 6 22 12 be measured between edges. When combined masses within
1,000 1,600 7 25 12 propagating distance of each other are considered as a
1,600 2,000 8 29 12 donor, the appropriate distance to the edge of potential ac-
2,000 3,000 9 32 15 ceptors shall be computed as a weighted distance from the
combined masses.
3,000 4,000 10 36 15 Calculation of weighted distance from combined masses:
4,000 6,000 11 40 15 Let M2, M3 . . . Mn be donor masses to be combined.
6,000 8,000 12 43 20 M1 is a potential acceptor mass.
8,000 10,000 13 47 20 D12 is distance from M1 to M2 (edge to edge).
10,000 12,000 14 50 20 D13 is distance from M1 to M3 (edge to edge), etc.
12,000 16,000 15 54 25 To find weighted distance [D1(2,3 . . . n)] from combined
16,000 20,000 16 58 25 masses to M1, add the products of the individual masses and
20,000 25,000 18 65 25 distances and divide the total by the sum of the masses thus:
25,000 30,000 19 68 30 D1(2, 3 . . . n)=M2 × D12 + M3 × D12 . . . + Mn × D12M2 +
30,000 35,000 20 72 30 M3 . . . + Mn
35,000 40,000 21 76 30 Propagation is possible if either an individual donor mass is
40,000 45,000 22 79 35 less than the tabulated distance from an acceptor or a com-
45,000 50,000 23 83 35 bined mass is less than the weighted distance from an accep-
tor.
50,000 55,000 24 86 35 (c) In determining the distances separating highways, rail-
55,000 60,000 25 90 35 roads, and inhabited buildings from potential explosions (as
60,000 70,000 26 94 40 prescribed in Table H–21), the sum of all masses which may
70,000 80,000 28 101 40 propagate (i.e., lie at distances less than prescribed in the
80,000 90,000 30 108 40 Table) from either individual or combined donor masses are
90,000 100,000 32 115 40 included. However, when the ammonium nitrate must be in-
cluded, only 50 percent of its weight shall be used because of
100,000 120,000 34 122 50 its reduced blast effects. In applying Table H–21 to distances
120,000 140,000 37 133 50 from highways, railroads, and inhabited buildings, distances
140,000 160,000 40 144 50 are measured from the nearest edge of potentially explodable
160,000 180,000 44 158 50 material as prescribed in Table H–21, Note 5.
180,000 200,000 48 173 50 (d) When all or part of a potential acceptor comprises Ex-
200,000 220,000 52 187 60 plosives Class A as defined in DOT regulations, storage in
220,000 250,000 56 202 60 bullet-resistant magazines is required. Safe distances to
stores in bullet-resistant magazines may be obtained from the
250,000 275,000 60 216 60 intermagazine distances prescribed in Table H–21.
275,000 300,000 64 230 60 (e) Barricades must not have line-of-sight openings be-
1 These distances apply to the separation of stores only.
tween potential donors and acceptors which permit blast or
missiles to move directly between masses.
Table H–21 shall be used in determining separation distances (f) Good housekeeping practices shall be maintained
from inhabited buildings, passenger railways, and public high- around any bin containing ammonium nitrate or blasting
ways. agent. This includes keeping weeds and other combustible
2 When the ammonium nitrate and/or blasting agent is not
materials cleared within 25 feet of such bin. Accumulation of
barricaded, the distances shown in the table shall be multi- spilled product on the ground shall be prevented.
plied by six. These distances allow for the possibility of high
velocity metal fragments from mixers, hoppers, truck bodies,
sheet metal structures, metal container, and the like which (5) Storage of blasting agents and sup-
may enclose the ‘‘donor’’. Where storage is in bullet-resistant plies. (i) Blasting agents and oxidizers
magazines recommended for explosives or where the storage
is protected by a bullet-resistant wall, distances, and barricade used for mixing of blasting agents shall
thicknesses in excess of those prescribed in Table H–21 are be stored in the manner set forth in
not required.
3 The distances in the table apply to ammonium nitrate that this subdivision.
passes the insensitivity test prescribed in the definition of am- (a) Blasting agents or ammonium ni-
monium nitrate fertilizer promulgated by the National Plant
Food Institute*; and ammonium nitrate failing to pass said test trate, when stored in conjunction with
shall be stored at separation distances determined by com- explosives, shall be stored in the man-
petent persons. (*Definition and Test Procedures for Ammo-
nium Nitrate Fertilizer, National Plant Food Institute, Novem- ner set forth in paragraph (c) of this
ber 1964.) section for explosives. The mass of
4 These distances apply to nitro-carbo-nitrates and blasting

agents which pass the insensitivity test prescribed in the U.S. blasting agents and one-half the mass
Department of Transportation (DOT) regulations. of ammonium nitrate shall be included
292
when computing the total quantity of empty containers. Spilled materials

explosives for determining distance re- shall be cleaned up promptly and safely
quirements. removed. Combustible materials, flam-
(b) Blasting agents, when stored en- mable liquids, corrosive acids, chlor-
tirely separate from explosives, may be ates, or nitrates shall not be stored in
stored in the manner set forth in para- any warehouse used for blasting agents
graph (c) of this section or in one-story unless separated therefrom by a fire re-
warehouses (without basements) which sistive separation of not less than 1
shall be: hour resistance. The provisions of this
(1) Noncombustible or fire resistive; subdivision shall not prohibit the stor-
(2) Constructed so as to eliminate age of blasting agents together with
open floor drains and piping into which nonexplosive blasting supplies.
molten materials could flow and be (v) Piles of ammonium nitrate and
confined in case of fire; warehouses containing ammonium ni-
(3) Weather resistant; trate shall be adequately separated
(4) Well ventilated; and from readily combustible fuels.
(5) Equipped with a strong door kept (vi) Caked oxidizers, either in bags or
securely locked except when open for in bulk, shall not be loosened by blast-
business. ing.
(c) Semitrailer or full-trailer vans (vii) Every warehouse used for the
used for highway or onsite transpor- storage of blasting agents shall be
tation of the blasting agents are satis- under the supervision of a competent
factory for temporarily storing these person.
materials, provided they are located in (6) Transportation of packaged blasting
accordance with Table H–22 with re- agents. (i) When blasting agents are
spect to one another. Trailers shall be transported in the same vehicle with
provided with substantial means for explosives, all of the requirements of
locking, and the trailer doors shall be paragraph (d) of this section shall be
kept locked, except during the time of complied with.
placement and removal of stocks of (ii) Vehicles transporting blasting
blasting agents. agents shall only be driven by and be in
(ii) Warehouses used for the storage charge of a driver in possession of a
of blasting agents separate from explo- valid motor vehicle operator’s license.
sives shall be located as set forth in Such a person shall also be familiar
this subdivision. with the State’s vehicle and traffic
(a) Warehouses used for the storage laws.
of blasting agents shall be located in (iii) No matches, firearms, acids, or
Table H–22 with respect to one another. other corrosive liquids shall be carried
(b) If both blasting agents and ammo- in the bed or body of any vehicle con-
nium nitrate are handled or stored taining blasting agents.
within the distance limitations pre- (iv) No person shall be permitted to
scribed through paragraph (g)(2) of this ride upon, drive, load, or unload a vehi-
section, one-half the mass of the am- cle containing blasting agents while
monium nitrate shall be added to the smoking or under the influence of in-
mass of the blasting agent when com- toxicants, narcotics, or other dan-
puting the total quantity of explosives gerous drugs.
for determining the proper distance for (v) [Reserved]
compliance with Table H–21. (vi) Vehicles transporting blasting
(iii) Smoking, matches, open flames, agents shall be in safe operating condi-
spark producing devices, and firearms tion at all times.
are prohibited inside of or within 50 (7) Use of blasting agents. Persons
feet of any warehouse used for the stor- using blasting agents shall comply
age of blasting agents. Combustible with all of the applicable provisions of
materials shall not be stored within 50 paragraph (e) of this section.
feet of warehouses used for the storage (h) Water gel (Slurry) explosives and
of blasting agents. blasting agents—(1) General provisions.
(iv) The interior of warehouses used Unless otherwise set forth in this para-
for the storage of blasting agents shall graph, water gels shall be transported,
be kept clean and free from debris and stored and used in the same manner as
293
explosives or blasting agents in accord- units located outside of the mixing

ance with the classification of the building.
product. (f) All internal-combustion engines
(2) Types and classifications. (i) Water used for electric power generation shall
gels containing a substance in itself be located outside the mixing plant
classified as an explosive shall be clas- building, or shall be properly venti-
sified as an explosive and manufac- lated and isolated by a firewall. The ex-
tured, transported, stored, and used as haust systems on all such engines shall
specified for ‘‘explosives’’ in this sec- be located so any spark emission can-
tion, except as noted in subdivision (iv) not be a hazard to any materials in or
of this subparagraph. adjacent to the plant.
(ii) Water gels containing no sub- (iii) Ingredients of water gels shall
stance in itself classified as an explo- conform to the requirements of this
sive and which are cap-sensitive as de- subdivision.
fined in paragraph (a) of this section (a) Ingredients in themselves classi-
under Blasting Agent shall be classified fied as Class A or Class B explosives
as an explosive and manufactured, shall be stored in conformity with
transported, stored and used as speci- paragraph (c) of this section.
fied for ‘‘explosives’’ in this section.
(b) Nitrate-water solutions may be
(iii) Water gels containing no sub- stored in tank cars, tank trucks, or
stance in itself classified as an explo- fixed tanks without quantity or dis-
sive and which are not cap-sensitive as
tance limitations. Spills or leaks which
defined in paragraph (a) of this section
may contaminate combustible mate-
under Blasting Agent shall be classified
rials shall be cleaned up immediately.
as blasting agents and manufactured,
transported, stored, and used as speci- (c) Metal powders such as aluminum
fied for ‘‘blasting agents’’ in this sec- shall be kept dry and shall be stored in
tion. containers or bins which are moisture-
(iv) When tests on specific formula- resistant or weathertight. Solid fuels
tions of water gels result in Depart- shall be used in such manner as to min-
ment of Transportation classification imize dust explosion hazards.
as a Class B explosive, bullet-resistant (d) Ingredients shall not be stored
magazines are not required, see para- with incompatible materials.
graph (c)(2)(ii) of this section. (e) Peroxides and chlorates shall not
(3) Fixed location mixing. be used.
(i) [Reserved] (iv) Mixing equipment shall comply
(ii) Buildings used for the mixing of with the requirements of this subdivi-
water gels shall conform to the re- sion.
quirements of this subdivision. (a) The design of the processing
(a) Buildings shall be of noncombus- equipment, including mixing and con-
tible construction or sheet metal on veying equipment, shall be compatible
wood studs. with the relative sensitivity of the ma-
(b) Floors in a mixing plant shall be terials being handled. Equipment shall
of concrete or of other nonabsorbent be designed to minimize the possibility
materials. of frictional heating, compaction, over-
(c) Where fuel oil is used all fuel oil loading, and confinement.
storage facilities shall be separated (b) Both equipment and handling pro-
from the mixing plant and located in cedures shall be designed to prevent
such a manner that in case of tank rup- the introduction of foreign objects or
ture, the oil will drain away from the materials.
mixing plant building. (c) Mixers, pumps, valves, and related
(d) The building shall be well venti- equipment shall be designed to permit
lated. regular and periodic flushing, cleaning,
(e) Heating units that do not depend dismantling, and inspection.
on combustion processes, when prop- (d) All electrical equipment including
erly designed and located, may be used wiring, switches, controls, motors, and
in the building. All direct sources of lights, shall conform to the require-
heat shall be provided exclusively from ments of subpart S of this part.
294
(e) All electric motors and generators least one axle shall be provided on ve-
shall be provided with suitable over- hicles when equipped with air brakes
load protection devices. Electrical gen- and shall be used during bulk delivery
erators, motors, proportioning devices, operations. Wheel chocks shall supple-
and all other electrical enclosures shall ment parking brakes whenever condi-
be electrically bonded. The grounding tions may require.
conductor to all such electrical equip- (ii) Operation of bulk delivery and
ment shall be effectively bonded to the mixing vehicles shall comply with the
service-entrance ground connection requirements of this subdivision.
and to all equipment ground connec- (a) The placarding requirements con-
tions in a manner so as to provide a tained in DOT regulations apply to ve-
continuous path to ground. hicles carrying water gel explosives or
(v) Mixing facilities shall comply blasting agents.
with the fire prevention requirements (b) The operator shall be trained in
of this subdivision. the safe operation of the vehicle to-
(a) The mixing, loading, and ingre- gether with its mixing, conveying, and
dient transfer areas where residues or related equipment. He shall be familiar
spilled materials may accumulate shall with the commodities being delivered
be cleaned periodically. A cleaning and and the general procedure for handling
collection system for dangerous resi- emergency situations.
dues shall be provided. , (c) The hauling of either blasting
(b) A daily visual inspection shall be caps or other explosives, but not both,
made of mixing, conveying, and elec- shall be permitted on bulk trucks pro-
trical equipment to establish that such vided that a special wood or non-
equipment is in good operating condi- ferrous-lined container is installed for
tion. A program of systematic mainte- the explosives. Such blasting caps or
nance shall be conducted on regular other explosives shall be in DOT-speci-
schedule. fied shipping containers; see 49 CFR
(c) Heaters which are not dependent chapter I.
on the combustion process within the (d) No person shall be allowed to
heating unit may be used within the smoke, carry matches or any flame-
confines of processing buildings, or producing device, or carry any firearms
compartments, if provided with tem- while in or about bulk vehicles effect-
perature and safety controls and lo- ing the mixing, transfer, or down-the-
cated away from combustible materials hole loading of water gels at or near
and the finished product. the blasting site.
(4) Bulk delivery and mixing vehicles. (e) Caution shall be exercised in the
(i) The design of vehicles shall comply movement of the vehicle in the blast-
with the requirements of this subdivi- ing area to avoid driving the vehicle
sion. over or dragging hoses over firing lines,
(a) Vehicles used over public high- cap wires, or explosive materials. The
ways for the bulk transportation of employer shall furnish the driver the
water gels or of ingredients classified assistance of a second person to guide
as dangerous commodities, shall meet the driver’s movements.
the requirements of the Department of (f) No intransit mixing of materials
Transportation and shall meet the re- shall be performed.
quirements of paragraphs (d) and (g)(6) (g) The location chosen for water gel
of this section. or ingredient transfer from a support
(b) When electric power is supplied by vehicle into the borehole loading vehi-
a self-contained motor generator lo- cle shall be away from the blasthole
cated on the vehicle the generator site when the boreholes are loaded or
shall be at a point separate from where in the process of being loaded.
the water gel is discharged. (i) Storage of ammonium nitrate—(1)
(c) The design of processing equip- Scope and definitions. (i)(a) Except as
ment and general requirements shall provided in paragraph (i)(1)(i)(d) of this
conform to subparagraphs (3) (iii) and paragraph applies to the storage of am-
(iv) of this paragraph. monium nitrate in the form of crystals,
(d) A positive action parking brake, flakes, grains, or prills including fer-
which will set the wheel brakes on at tilizer grade, dynamite grade, nitrous
295
oxide grade, technical grade, and other shall be Class C or better, as defined in
mixtures containing 60 percent or more the Manual on Roof Coverings, NFPA
ammonium nitrate by weight but does 203M–1970, which is incorporated by ref-
not apply to blasting agents. erence as specified in § 1910.6.
(b) This paragraph does not apply to (d) All flooring in storage and han-
the transportation of ammonium ni- dling areas, shall be of noncombustible
trate. material or protected against impreg-
(c) This paragraph does not apply to nation by ammonium nitrate and shall
storage under the jurisdiction of and in be without open drains, traps, tunnels,
compliance with the regulations of the pits, or pockets into which any molten
U.S. Coast Guard (see 46 CFR parts 146– ammonium nitrate could flow and be
149). confined in the event of fire.
(d) The storage of ammonium nitrate (e) The continued use of an existing
and ammonium nitrate mixtures that storage building or structure not in
are more sensitive than allowed by the strict conformity with this paragraph
‘‘Definition of Test Procedures for Am- may be approved in cases where such
monium Nitrate Fertilizer’’ is prohib- continued use will not constitute a
ited. hazard to life.
(ii)(a) [Reserved] (f) Buildings and structures shall be
(b) The standards for ammonium ni- dry and free from water seepage
trate (nitrous oxide grade) are those through the roof, walls, and floors.
found in the ‘‘Specifications, Prop-
(3) Storage of ammonium nitrate in
erties, and Recommendations for Pack-
bags, drums, or other containers. (i)(a)
aging, Transportation, Storage, and
Bags and containers used for ammo-
Use of Ammonium Nitrate’’, available
nium nitrate must comply with speci-
from the Compressed Gas Association,
fications and standards required for use
Inc., which is incorporated by reference
in interstate commerce (see 49 CFR
as specified in § 1910.6.
chapter I).
(2) General provisions. (i) This para-
(b) Containers used on the premises
graph applies to all persons storing,
in the actual manufacturing or proc-
having, or keeping ammonium nitrate,
essing need not comply with provisions
and to the owner or lessee of any build-
of paragraph (i)(3)(i)(a) of this para-
ing, premises, or structure in which
graph.
ammonium nitrate is stored in quan-
tities of 1,000 pounds or more. (ii)(a) Containers of ammonium ni-
(ii) Approval of large quantity stor- trate shall not be accepted for storage
age shall be subject to due consider- when the temperature of the ammo-
ation of the fire and explosion hazards, nium nitrate exceeds 130 °F.
including exposure to toxic vapors (b) Bags of ammonium nitrate shall
from burning or decomposing ammo- not be stored within 30 inches of the
nium nitrate. storage building walls and partitions.
(iii)(a) Storage buildings shall not (c) The height of piles shall not ex-
have basements unless the basements ceed 20 feet. The width of piles shall
are open on at least one side. Storage not exceed 20 feet and the length 50 feet
buildings shall not be over one story in except that where the building is of
height. noncombustible construction or is pro-
(b) Storage buildings shall have ade- tected by automatic sprinklers the
quate ventilation or be of a construc- length of piles shall not be limited. In
tion that will be self-ventilating in the no case shall the ammonium nitrate be
event of fire. stacked closer than 36 inches below the
(c) The wall on the exposed side of a roof or supporting and spreader beams
storage building within 50 feet of a overhead.
combustible building, forest, piles of (d) Aisles shall be provided to sepa-
combustible materials and similar ex- rate piles by a clear space of not less
posure hazards shall be of fire-resistive than 3 feet in width. At least one serv-
construction. In lieu of the fire-resis- ice or main aisle in the storage area
tive wall, other suitable means of expo- shall be not less than 4 feet in width.
sure protection such as a free standing (4) Storage of bulk ammonium nitrate.
wall may be used. The roof coverings (i)(a) Warehouses shall have adequate
296
ventilation or be capable of adequate paper, bleaching powder, burlap or cot-

ventilation in case of fire. ton bags, caustic soda, coal, coke, char-
(b) Unless constructed of noncombus- coal, cork, camphor, excelsior, fibers of
tible material or unless adequate fa- any kind, fish oils, fish meal, foam rub-
cilities for fighting a roof fire are ber, hay, lubricating oil, linseed oil, or
available, bulk storage structures shall other oxidizable or drying oils, naph-
not exceed a height of 40 feet. thalene, oakum, oiled clothing, oiled
(ii)(a) Bins shall be clean and free of paper, oiled textiles, paint, straw, saw-
materials which may contaminate am- dust, wood shavings, or vegetable oils.
monium nitrate. Walls referred to in this subdivision
(b) Due to the corrosive and reactive need extend only to the underside of
properties of ammonium nitrate, and the roof.
to avoid contamination, galvanized (b) In lieu of separation walls, ammo-
iron, copper, lead, and zinc shall not be nium nitrate may be separated from
used in a bin construction unless suit- the materials referred to in paragraph
ably protected. Aluminum bins and (a) of this section by a space of at least
wooden bins protected against impreg- 30 feet.
nation by ammonium nitrate are per- (c) Flammable liquids such as gaso-
missible. The partitions dividing the line, kerosene, solvents, and light fuel
ammonium nitrate storage from other oils shall not be stored on the premises
products which would contaminate the except when such storage conforms to
ammonium nitrate shall be of tight § 1910.106, and when walls and sills or
construction. curbs are provided in accordance with
(c) The ammonium nitrate storage paragraphs (i)(5)(i) (a) or (b) of this sec-
bins or piles shall be clearly identified tion.
by signs reading ‘‘Ammonium Nitrate’’ (d) LP-Gas shall not be stored on the
with letters at least 2 inches high. premises except when such storage con-
(iii)(a) Piles or bins shall be so sized forms to § 1910.110.
and arranged that all material in the (ii)(a) Sulfur and finely divided met-
pile is moved out periodically in order als shall not be stored in the same
to minimize possible caking of the building with ammonium nitrate ex-
stored ammonium nitrate. cept when such storage conforms to
(b) Height or depth of piles shall be paragraphs (a) through (h) of this sec-
limited by the pressure-setting tend- tion.
ency of the product. However, in no (b) Explosives and blasting agents
case shall the ammonium nitrate be shall not be stored in the same building
piled higher at any point than 36 inches with ammonium nitrate except on the
below the roof or supporting and premises of makers, distributors, and
spreader beams overhead. user-compounders of explosives or
(c) Ammonium nitrate shall not be blasting agents.
accepted for storage when the tempera- (c) Where explosives or blasting
ture of the product exceeds 130 °F. agents are stored in separate buildings,
(d) Dynamite, other explosives, and other than on the premises of makers,
blasting agents shall not be used to distributors, and user-compounders of
break up or loosen caked ammonium explosives or blasting agents, they
nitrate. shall be separated from the ammonium
(5) Contaminants. (i)(a) Ammonium nitrate by the distances and/or barri-
nitrate shall be in a separate building cades specified in Table H–22 of this
or shall be separated by approved type subpart, but by not less than 50 feet.
firewalls of not less than 1 hour fire-re- (d) Storage and/or operations on the
sistance rating from storage of organic premises of makers, distributors, and
chemicals, acids, or other corrosive user-compounders of explosives or
materials, materials that may require blasting agents shall be in conformity
blasting during processing or handling, with paragraphs (a) through (h) of this
compressed flammable gases, flam- section.
mable and combustible materials or (6) General precautions. (i) Electrical
other contaminating substances, in- installations shall conform to the re-
cluding but not limited to animal fats, quirements of subpart S of this part,
baled cotton, baled rags, baled scrap for ordinary locations. They shall be
297
designed to minimize damage from cor- (ii) [Reserved]

rosion. (iii) Commercial stocks of smokeless
(ii) In areas where lightning storms propellants over 20 pounds and not
are prevalent, lightning protection more than 100 pounds shall be stored in
shall be provided. (See the Lightning portable wooden boxes having walls of
Protection Code, NFPA 78–1968, which at least 1 inch nominal thickness.
is incorporated by reference as speci- (iv) Commercial stocks in quantities
fied in § 1910.6.) not to exceed 750 pounds shall be stored
(iii) Provisions shall be made to pre- in nonportable storage cabinets having
vent unauthorized personnel from en-
wooden walls of at least 1 inch nominal
tering the ammonium nitrate storage
thickness. Not more than 400 pounds
area.
(7) Fire protection. (i) Not more than shall be permitted in any one cabinet.
2,500 tons (2270 tonnes) of bagged am- (v) Quantities in excess of 750 pounds
monium nitrate shall be stored in a shall be stored in magazines in accord-
building or structure not equipped with ance with paragraph (c) of this section.
an automatic sprinkler system. Sprin- (4) Small arms ammunition primers. (i)
kler systems shall be of the approved Small arms ammunition primers shall
type and installed in accordance with not be stored except in the original
§ 1910.159. shipping container in accordance with
(ii)(a) Suitable fire control devices the requirements of 49 CFR 173.107 for
such as small hose or portable fire ex- small arms ammunition primers.
tinguishers shall be provided through- (ii) [Reserved]
out the warehouse and in the loading (iii) Small arms ammunition primers
and unloading areas. Suitable fire con- shall be separated from flammable liq-
trol devices shall comply with the re- uids, flammable solids as classified in
quirements of §§ 1910.157 and 1910.158. 49 CFR part 172, and oxidizing mate-
(b) Water supplies and fire hydrants rials by a fire-resistive wall of 1-hour
shall be available in accordance with
rating or by a distance of 25 feet.
recognized good practices.
(j) Small arms ammunition, small arms (iv) Not more than 750,000 small arms
primers, and small arms propellants—(1) ammunition primers shall be stored in
Scope. This paragraph does not apply to any one building, except as provided in
in-process storage and intraplant paragraph (j)(4)(v) of this paragraph.
transportation during manufacture of Not more than 100,000 shall be stored in
small arms ammunition, small arms any one pile. Piles shall be at least 15
primers, and smokeless propellants. feet apart.
(2) Small arms ammunition. (i) No (v) Quantities of small arms ammuni-
quantity limitations are imposed on tion primers in excess of 750,000 shall
the storage of small arms ammunition be stored in magazines in accordance
in warehouses, retail stores, and other with paragraph (c) of this section.
general occupancy facilities, except (k) Scope. (1) This section applies to
those imposed by limitations of storage the manufacture, keeping, having,
facilities. storage, sale, transportation, and use
(ii) Small arms ammunition shall be of explosives, blasting agents, and py-
separated from flammable liquids, rotechnics. The section does not apply
flammable solids as classified in 49 to the sale and use (public display) of
CFR part 172, and from oxidizing mate- pyrotechnics, commonly known as fire-
rials, by a fire-resistive wall of 1-hour works, nor the use of explosives in the
rating or by a distance of 25 feet.
form prescribed by the official U.S.
(iii) Small arms ammunition shall
Pharmacopeia.
not be stored together with Class A or
Class B explosives unless the storage (2) The manufacture of explosives as
facility is adequate for this latter stor- defined in paragraph (a)(3) of this sec-
age. tion shall also meet the requirements
(3) Smokeless propellants. (i) All contained in § 1910.119.
smokeless propellants shall be stored (3) The manufacture of pyrotechnics
in shipping containers specified in 49 as defined in paragraph (a)(10) of this

CFR 173.93 for smokeless propellants.
298
section shall also meet the require- tainer or containers, major devices
ments contained in § 1910.119. such as vaporizers, safety relief valves,
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 excess flow valves, regulators, and pip-
FR 49747, Oct. 24, 1978; 45 FR 60704, Sept. 12, ing connecting such parts.
1980; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 57 FR 6403, (12) Vaporizer-burner—an integral va-
Feb. 24, 1992; 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993; 61 FR porizer-burner unit, dependent upon
9237, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33466, June 18, 1998] the heat generated by the burner as the
source of heat to vaporize the liquid
§ 1910.110 Storage and handling of liq-
uefied petroleum gases. used for dehydrators or dryers.
(13) Ventilation, adequate—when
(a) Definitions applicable to this sec- specified for the prevention of fire dur-
tion. As used in this section:
ing normal operation, ventilation shall
(1) API-ASME container—A con-
be considered adequate when the con-
tainer constructed in accordance with
centration of the gas in a gas-air mix-
the requirements of paragraph
ture does not exceed 25 percent of the
(b)(3)(iii) of this section.
lower flammable limit.
(2) ASME container—A container
constructed in accordance with the re- (14) Approved—unless otherwise indi-
quirements of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this cated, listing or approval by a nation-
section. ally recognized testing laboratory.
(3) Container assembly—An assembly Refer to § 1910.7 for definition of nation-
consisting essentially of the container ally recognized testing laboratory.
and fittings for all container openings, (15) Listed—see ‘‘approved’’ in
including shutoff valves, excess flow § 1910.110(14).
valves, liquid-level gaging devices, (16) DOT Specifications—regulations
safety relief devices, and protective of the Department of Transportation
housing. published in 49 CFR chapter I.
(4) Containers—All vessels, such as (17)–(18) [Reserved]
tanks, cylinders, or drums, used for (19) DOT cylinders—cylinders meet-
transportation or storing liquefied pe- ing the requirements of 49 CFR chapter
troleum gases. I.
(5) DOT—Department of Transpor- (b) Basic rules—(1) Odorizing gases. (i)
tation. All liquefied petroleum gases shall be
(6) DOT container—A container con- effectively odorized by an approved
structed in accordance with the appli- agent of such character as to indicate
cable requirements of 49 CFR chapter 1. positively, by distinct odor, the pres-
(7) ‘‘Liquified petroleum gases’’— ence of gas down to concentration in
‘‘LPG’’ and ‘‘LP-Gas’’—Any material air of not over one-fifth the lower limit
which is composed predominantly of of flammability. Odorization, however,
any of the following hydrocarbons, or
is not required if harmful in the use of
mixtures of them; propane, propylene,
further processing of the liquefied pe-
butanes (normal butane or iso-butane),
troleum gas, or if odorization will serve
and butylenes.
no useful purpose as a warning agent in
(8) Movable fuel storage tenders or
such use or further processing.
farm carts—Containers not in excess of
1,200 gallons water capacity, equipped (ii) The odorization requirement of
with wheels to be towed from one loca- paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section shall
tion of usage to another. They are basi- be considered to be met by the use of
cally nonhighway vehicles, but may oc- 1.0 pounds of ethyl mercaptan, 1.0
casionally be moved over public roads pounds of thiophane or 1.4 pounds of
or highways. They are used as a fuel amyl mercaptan per 10,000 gallons of
supply for farm tractors, construction LP-Gas. However, this listing of
machinery and similar equipment. odorants and quantities shall not ex-
(9) P.S.I.G.—pounds per square inch clude the use of other odorants that
gauge. meet the odorization requirements of
(10) P.S.I.A.—pounds per square inch paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section.
absolute. (2) Approval of equipment and systems.
(11) Systems—an assembly of equip- (i) Each system utilizing DOT con-
ment consisting essentially of the containers in accordance with 49 CFR part
299
178 shall have its container valves, con- ply with section I or with appendix to
nectors, manifold valve assemblies, and section I. Paragraphs W–601 to W–606
regulators approved. inclusive in the 1943 and earlier edi-
(ii) Each system for domestic or com- tions do not apply.
mercial use utilizing containers of 2,000 (iv) The provisions of paragraph
gallons or less water capacity, other (b)(3)(i) of this section shall not be con-
than those constructed in accordance strued as prohibiting the continued use
with 49 CFR part 178, shall consist of a or reinstallation of containers con-
container assembly and one or more structed and maintained in accordance
regulators, and may include other with the standard for the Storage and
parts. The system as a unit or the con- Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases
tainer assembly as a unit, and the reg- NFPA No. 58 in effect at the time of
ulator or regulators, shall be individ- fabrication.
ually listed. (v) Containers used with systems em-
(iii) In systems utilizing containers bodied in paragraph (b), (d)(3)(iii), and
of over 2,000 gallons water capacity, (f) of this section, shall be constructed,
each regulator, container valve, excess tested, and stamped in accordance with
flow valve, gaging device, and relief DOT specifications effective at the
valve installed on or at the container, date of their manufacture.
shall have its correctness as to design, (4) Welding of containers. (i) Welding
construction, and performance deter-
to the shell, head, or any other part of
mined by listing by a nationally recog-
the container subject to internal pres-
nized testing laboratory. Refer to
sure, shall be done in compliance with
§ 1910.7 for definition of nationally rec-
the code under which the tank was fab-
ognized testing laboratory.
ricated. Other welding is permitted
(3) Requirements for construction and
only on saddle plates, lugs, or brackets
original test of containers. (i) Containers
attached to the container by the tank
used with systems embodied in para-
manufacturer.
graphs (d), (e), (g), and (h) of this sec-
tion, except as provided in paragraphs (ii) Where repair or modification in-
(e)(3)(iii) and (g)(2)(i) of this section, volving welding of DOT containers is
shall be designed, constructed, and required, the container shall be re-
tested in accordance with the Rules for turned to a qualified manufacturer
Construction of Unfired Pressure Ves- making containers of the same type,
sels, section VIII, Division 1, American and the repair or modification made in
Society of Mechanical Engineers compliance with DOT regulations.
(ASME) Boiler and Pressure Vessel (5) Markings on containers. (i) Each
Code, 1968 edition, which is incor- container covered in paragraph (b)(3)(i)
porated by reference as specified in of this section, except as provided in
§ 1910.6. paragraph (b)(3)(iv) of this section shall
(ii) Containers constructed according be marked as specified in the following:
to the 1949 and earlier editions of the (a) With a marking identifying com-
ASME Code do not have to comply pliance with, and other markings re-
with paragraphs U–2 through U–10 and quired by, the rules of the reference
U–19 thereof. Containers constructed under which the container is con-
according to paragraph U–70 in the 1949 structed; or with the stamp and other
and earlier editions are not authorized. markings required by the National
(iii) Containers designed, con- Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel In-
structed, and tested prior to July 1, spectors.
1961, according to the Code for Unfired (b) With notation as to whether the
Pressure Vessels for Petroleum Liquids container is designed for underground
and Gases, 1951 edition with 1954 Ad- or aboveground installation or both. If
denda, of the American Petroleum In- intended for both and different style
stitute and the American Society of hoods are provided, the marking shall
Mechanical Engineers, which is incor- indicate the proper hood for each type
porated by reference as specified in of installation.
§ 1910.6, shall be considered in conform- (c) With the name and address of the
ance. Containers constructed according supplier of the container, or with the

to API-ASME Code do not have to com- trade name of the container.
300
(d) With the water capacity of the (e) LP-Gas fueled vehicles garaged in
container in pounds or gallons, U.S. accordance with paragraph (e)(14) of
Standard. this section.
(e) With the pressure in p.s.i.g., for (f) Containers awaiting use or resale
which the container is designed. when stored in accordance with para-
(f) With the wording ‘‘This container graph (f) of this section.
shall not contain a product having a (ii) Each individual container shall
vapor pressure in excess of ll p.s.i.g. be located with respect to the nearest
at 100 °F.,’’ see subparagraph (14)(viii) important building or group of build-
of this paragraph. ings in accordance with Table H–23.
(g) With the tare weight in pounds or
TABLE H–23
other identified unit of weight for con-
tainers with a water capacity of 300 Minimum distances
pounds or less.
Water capacity per Containers Between
(h) With marking indicating the container above-
maximum level to which the container Under- Above- ground
ground ground containers
may be filled with liquid at tempera-
tures between 20 °F. and 130 °F., except Less than 125 gals. 1 .. 10 feet .... None ....... None.
125 to 250 gals ........... 10 feet .... 10 feet .... None.
on containers provided with fixed max-
251 to 500 gals ........... 10 feet .... 10 feet .... 3 feet.
imum level indicators or which are 501 to 2,000 gals ........ 25 feet 2 .. 25 feet 2 .. 3 feet.
filled by weighing. Markings shall be 2,001 to 30,000 gals ... 50 feet .... 50 feet .... 5 feet.
increments of not more than 20 °F. 30,001 to 70,000 gals 50 feet .... 75 feet. 3.
This marking may be located on the 70,001 to 90,000 gals 50 feet .... 100 feet. 3.
liquid level gaging device. 1 If the aggregate water capacity of a multi-container instal-
lation at a consumer site is 501 gallons or greater, the min-
(i) With the outside surface area in imum distance shall comply with the appropriate portion of
square feet. this table, applying the aggregate capacity rather than the ca-
pacity per container. If more than one installation is made,
(ii) Markings specified shall be on a each installation shall be separated from another installation
metal nameplate attached to the con- by at least 25 feet. Do not apply the MINIMUM DISTANCES
BETWEEN ABOVE-GROUND CONTAINERS to such installa-
tainer and located in such a manner as tions.
2 The above distance requirements may be reduced to not
to remain visible after the container is
less than 10 feet for a single container of 1,200 gallons water
installed. capacity or less, providing such a container is at least 25 feet
(iii) When LP-Gas and one or more from any other LP-Gas container of more than 125 gallons
water capacity.
other gases are stored or used in the 3 1⁄4 of sum of diameters of adjacent containers.
same area, the containers shall be

(iii) Containers installed for use shall
marked to identify their content.
not be stacked one above the other.
Marking shall conform to the marking
(iv) [Reserved]
requirements set forth in
§ 1910.253(b)(1)(ii). (v) In the case of buildings devoted
exclusively to gas manufacturing and
(6) Location of containers and regu-
distributing operations, the distances
lating equipment. (i) Containers, and
required by Table H–23 may be reduced
first stage regulating equipment if provided that in no case shall con-
used, shall be located outside of build- tainers of water capacity exceeding 500
ings, except under one or more of the gallons be located closer than 10 feet to
following: such gas manufacturing and distrib-
(a) In buildings used exclusively for uting buildings.
container charging, vaporization pres- (vi) Readily ignitible material such
sure reduction, gas mixing, gas manu- as weeds and long dry grass shall be re-
facturing, or distribution. moved within 10 feet of any container.
(b) When portable use is necessary (vii) The minimum separation be-
and in accordance with paragraph (c)(5) tween liquefied petroleum gas con-
of this section. tainers and flammable liquid tanks
(c) LP-Gas fueled stationary or port- shall be 20 feet, and the minimum sepa-
able engines in accordance with para- ration between a container and the
graph (e) (11) or (12) of this section. centerline of the dike shall be 10 feet.
(d) LP-Gas fueled industrial trucks The foregoing provision shall not apply
used in accordance with paragraph when LP-Gas containers of 125 gallons

(e)(13) of this section. or less capacity are installed adjacent
301
to Class III flammable liquid tanks of flow or back pressure check valve will
275 gallons or less capacity. not cause breakage between the con-
(viii) Suitable means shall be taken tainer and such valve.
to prevent the accumulation of flam- (vii) Excess flow valves shall be de-
mable liquids under adjacent liquified signed with a bypass, not to exceed a
petroleum gas containers, such as by No. 60 drill size opening to allow
diking, diversion curbs, or grading. equalization of pressures.
(ix) When dikes are used with flam- (viii) Containers of more than 30 gal-
mable liquid tanks, no liquefied petro- lons water capacity and less than 2,000
leum gas containers shall be located gallons water capacity, filled on a vol-
within the diked area. umetric basis, and manufactured after
(7) Container valves and container ac-
December 1, 1963, shall be equipped for
cessories. (i) Valves, fittings, and acces-
filling into the vapor space.
sories connected directly to the con-
tainer including primary shutoff (8) Piping—including pipe, tubing, and
valves, shall have a rated working pres- fittings. (i) Pipe, except as provided in
sure of at least 250 p.s.i.g. and shall be paragraphs (e)(6)(i) and (g)(10)(iii), of
of material and design suitable for LP- this section shall be wrought iron or
Gas service. Cast iron shall not be used steel (black or galvanized), brass, cop-
for container valves, fittings, and ac- per, or aluminum alloy. Aluminum
cessories. This does not prohibit the alloy pipe shall be at least Schedule 40
use of container valves made of malle- in accordance with the specifications
able or nodular iron. for Aluminum Alloy Pipe, American
(ii) Connections to containers, except National Standards Institute (ANSI)
safety relief connections, liquid level H38.7–1969 (ASTM, B241–69), which is in-
gaging devices, and plugged openings, corporated by reference as specified in
shall have shutoff valves located as § 1910.6, except that the use of alloy 5456
close to the container as practicable. is prohibited and shall be suitably
(iii) Excess flow valves, where re- marked at each end of each length in-
quired shall close automatically at the dicating compliance with American
rated flows of vapor or liquid as speci- National Standard Institute Specifica-
fied by the manufacturer. The connections. Aluminum Alloy pipe shall be
tions or line including valves, fittings, protected against external corrosion
etc., being protected by an excess flow when it is in contact with dissimilar
valve shall have a greater capacity metals other than galvanized steel, or
than the rated flow of the excess flow its location is subject to repeated wet-
valve. ting by such liquids as water (except
(iv) Liquid level gaging devices which rain water), detergents, sewage, or
are so constructed that outward flow of leaking from other piping, or it passes
container contents shall not exceed through flooring, plaster, masonry, or
that passed by a No. 54 drill size open-
insulation. Galvanized sheet steel or
ing, need not be equipped with excess
pipe, galvanized inside and out, may be
flow valves.
considered suitable protection. The
(v) Openings from container or
through fittings attached directly on maximum nominal pipe size for alu-
container to which pressure gage con- minum pipe shall be three-fourths inch
nection is made, need not be equipped and shall not be used for pressures ex-
with shutoff or excess flow valves if ceeding 20 p.s.i.g. Aluminum alloy pipe
such openings are restricted to not shall not be installed within 6 inches of
larger than No. 54 drill size opening. the ground.
(vi) Except as provided in paragraph (a) Vapor piping with operating pres-
(c)(5)(i)(b) of this section, excess flow sures not exceeding 125 p.s.i.g. shall be
and back pressure check valves where suitable for a working pressure of at
required by this section shall be lo- least 125 p.s.i.g. Pipe shall be at least
cated inside of the container or at a Schedule 40 (ASTM A–53–69, Grade B
point outside where the line enters the Electric Resistance Welded and Elec-
container; in the latter case, installa- tric Flash Welded Pipe, which is incor-
tion shall be made in such manner that porated by reference as specified in

any undue strain beyond the excess § 1910.6, or equal).
302
(b) Vapor piping with operating pres- TABLE H–24—WALL THICKNESS OF COPPER
sures over 125 p.s.i.g. and all liquid pip- TUBING 1—Continued
ing shall be suitable for a working
Nominal wall thickness
pressure of at least 250 p.s.i.g. Pipe Standard size Nominal out- (inches)
side diameter
shall be at least Schedule 80 if joints (inches) (inches) Type K Type L
are threaded or threaded and back
welded. At least Schedule 40 (ASTM A– 11⁄4 1.375 0.065 0.055
53–69 Grade B Electric Resistance Weld- 11⁄2 1.625 0.072 0.060
ed and Electric Flash Welded Pipe or 2 2.125 0.083 0.070
equal) shall be used if joints are weld- 1 Based on data in Specification for Seamless Copper
Water Tube, ANSI H23.1–1970 (ASTM B–88–69).
ed, or welded and flanged.
NOTE: The standard size by which tube is designated is 1⁄8
(ii) Tubing shall be seamless and of inch smaller than its nominal outside diameter.
copper, brass, steel, or aluminum alloy.
Copper tubing shall be of type K or L TABLE H–25—WALL THICKNESS OF ALUMINUM
or equivalent as covered in the Speci- ALLOY TUBING 1
fication for Seamless Copper Water
Nominal wall thickness (inches)
Tube, ANSI H23.1–1970 (ASTM B88–69), Outside diameter
(inches)
which is incorporated by reference as Type A Type B
specified in § 1910.6. Aluminum alloy ⁄
38 0.035 0.049
tubing shall be of Type A or B or equiv- 1⁄2 0.035 0.049
alent as covered in Specification ASTM 5⁄8 0.042 0.049
3⁄4 0.049 0.058
B210–68 (which is incorporated by ref-
erence as specified in § 1910.6) and shall 1 Based on data in Standard Specification for Aluminum-
be suitably marked every 18 inches in- Alloy Drawn Seamless Coiled Tubes for Special Purpose Ap-
plications, ASTM B210–68.
dicating compliance with ASTM Speci-
fications. The minimum nominal wall (iii) In systems where the gas in liq-
thickness of copper tubing and alu- uid form without pressure reduction
minum alloy tubing shall be as speci- enters the building, only heavy walled
fied in Table H–24 and Table H–25. seamless brass or copper tubing with
Aluminum alloy tubing shall be pro- an internal diameter not greater than
tected against external corrosion when three thirty-seconds inch, and a wall
it is in contact with dissimilar metals thickness of not less than three sixty-
other than galvanized steel, or its loca- fourths inch shall be used. This re-
tion is subject to repeated wetting by quirement shall not apply to research
liquids such as water (except rain- and experimental laboratories, build-
water), detergents, sewage, or leakage ings, or separate fire divisions of build-
from other piping, or it passes through ings used exclusively for housing inter-
flooring, plaster, masonry, or insula- nal combustion engines, and to com-
tion. Galvanized sheet steel or pipe, mercial gas plants or bulk stations
galvanized inside and out, may be con- where containers are charged, nor to
sidered suitable protection. The max- industrial vaporizer buildings, nor to
imum outside diameter for aluminum buildings, structures, or equipment
alloy tubing shall be three-fourths inch under construction or undergoing
and shall not be used for pressures ex- major renovation.
ceeding 20 p.s.i.g. Aluminum alloy tub- (iv) Pipe joints may be screwed,
ing shall not be installed within 6 flanged, welded, soldered, or brazed
inches of the ground. with a material having a melting point
exceeding 1,000 °F. Joints on seamless
TABLE H–24—WALL THICKNESS OF COPPER copper, brass, steel, or aluminum alloy
TUBING 1 gas tubing shall be made by means of
approved gas tubing fittings, or sol-
Nominal wall thickness dered or brazed with a material having
Nominal out-
Standard size (inches)
(inches) side diameter
(inches)
a melting point exceeding 1,000 °F.
Type K Type L (v) For operating pressures of 125
⁄
14 0.375 0.035 0.030 p.s.i.g. or less, fittings shall be de-
3⁄8 0.500 0.049 0.035 signed for a pressure of at least 125
1⁄2 0.625 0.049 0.040 p.s.i.g. For operating pressures above
5⁄8 0.750 0.049 0.042

3⁄4 0.875 0.065 0.045 125 p.s.i.g., fittings shall be designed
1 1.125 0.065 0.050 for a minimum of 250 p.s.i.g.
303
(vi) The use of threaded cast iron (iv) Hose subject to container pres-
pipe fittings such as ells, tees, crosses, sure shall have its correctness as to de-
couplings, and unions is prohibited. sign construction and performance de-
Aluminum alloy fittings shall be used termined by being listed (see
with aluminum alloy pipe and tubing. § 1910.110(a)(15)).
Insulated fittings shall be used where (v) Hose connections subject to con-
aluminum alloy pipe or tubing container pressure shall be capable of
nects with a dissimilar metal. withstanding, without leakage, a test
(vii) Strainers, regulators, meters, pressure of not less than 500 p.s.i.g.
compressors, pumps, etc., are not to be (vi) Hose and hose connections on the
considered as pipe fittings. This does low-pressure side of the regulator or re-
not prohibit the use of malleable, nod- ducing valve shall be designed for a
ular, or higher strength gray iron for bursting pressure of not less than 125
such equipment. p.s.i.g. or five times the set pressure of
(viii) All materials such as valve the relief devices protecting that por-
seats, packing, gaskets, diaphragms, tion of the system, whichever is higher.
etc., shall be of such quality as to be (vii) Hose may be used on the low-
resistant to the action of liquefied pe- pressure side of regulators to connect
troleum gas under the service condi- to other than domestic and commercial
tions to which they are subjected. gas appliances under the following con-
(ix) All piping, tubing, or hose shall
ditions:
be tested after assembly and proved
(a) The appliances connected with
free from leaks at not less than normal
hose shall be portable and need a flexi-
operating pressures. After installation,
ble connection.
piping and tubing of all domestic and
commercial systems shall be tested (b) For use inside buildings the hose
and proved free of leaks using a ma- shall be of minimum practical length,
nometer or equivalent device that will but shall not exceed 6 feet except as
indicate a drop in pressure. Test shall provided in paragraph (c)(5)(i)(g) of this
not be made with a flame. section and shall not extend from one
(x) Provision shall be made to com- room to another, nor pass through any
pensate for expansion, contraction, jar- walls, partitions, ceilings, or floors.
ring, and vibration, and for settling. Such hose shall not be concealed from
This may be accomplished by flexible view or used in a concealed location.
connections. For use outside of buildings, the hose
(xi) Piping outside buildings may be may exceed this length but shall be
buried, above ground, or both, but shall kept as short as practical.
be well supported and protected (c) The hose shall be approved and
against physical damage. Where soil shall not be used where it is likely to
conditions warrant, all piping shall be be subjected to temperatures above 125
protected against corrosion. Where °F. The hose shall be securely con-
condensation may occur, the piping nected to the appliance and the use of
shall be pitched back to the container, rubber slip ends shall not be permitted.
or suitable means shall be provided for (d) The shutoff valve for an appliance
revaporization of the condensate. connected by hose shall be in the metal
(9) Hose specifications. (i) Hose shall pipe or tubing and not at the appliance
be fabricated of materials that are re- end of the hose. When shutoff valves
sistant to the action of LP-Gas in the are installed close to each other, pre-
liquid and vapor phases. If wire braid is cautions shall be taken to prevent op-
used for reinforcing the hose, it shall eration of the wrong valve.
be of corrosion-resistant material such (e) Hose used for connecting to wall
as stainless steel. outlets shall be protected from phys-
(ii) Hose subject to container pres- ical damage.
sure shall be marked ‘‘LP-Gas’’ or (10) Safety devices. (i) Every container
‘‘LPG’’ at not greater than 10-foot in- except those constructed in accordance
tervals. with DOT specifications and every va-
(iii) Hose subject to container pres- porizer (except motor fuel vaporizers
sure shall be designed for a bursting and except vaporizers described in

pressure of not less than 1,250 p.s.i.g. paragraph (b)(11)(ii)(c) of this section
304
and paragraph (d)(4)(v)(a) of this sec- Surface area (sq. ft.) Flow rate
tion) whether heated by artificial CFM air
means or not, shall be provided with 280 ....................................................................... 5,450
one or more safety relief valves of 290 ....................................................................... 5,610
spring-loaded or equivalent type. These 300 ....................................................................... 5,760
310 ....................................................................... 5,920
valves shall be arranged to afford free 320 ....................................................................... 6,080
vent to the outer air with discharge 330 ....................................................................... 6,230
not less than 5 feet horizontally away 340 ....................................................................... 6,390
from any opening into the building 350 ....................................................................... 6,540
360 ....................................................................... 6,690
which is below such discharge. The rate 370 ....................................................................... 6,840
of discharge shall be in accordance 380 ....................................................................... 7,000
with the requirements of paragraph 390 ....................................................................... 7,150
400 ....................................................................... 7,300
(b)(10)(ii) or (b)(10)(iii) of this section in 450 ....................................................................... 8,040
the case of vaporizers. 500 ....................................................................... 8,760
(ii) Minimum required rate of dis- 550 ....................................................................... 9,470
charge in cubic feet per minute of air 600 ....................................................................... 10,170
650 ....................................................................... 10,860
at 120 percent of the maximum per- 700 ....................................................................... 11,550
mitted start to discharge pressure for 750 ....................................................................... 12,220
safety relief valves to be used on con- 800 ....................................................................... 12,880
tainers other than those constructed in 850 ....................................................................... 13,540
900 ....................................................................... 14,190
accordance with DOT specification 950 ....................................................................... 14,830
shall be as follows: 1,000 .................................................................... 15,470
1,050 .................................................................... 16,100
Flow rate 1,100 .................................................................... 16,720
Surface area (sq. ft.) CFM air 1,150 .................................................................... 17,350
1,200 .................................................................... 17,960
20 or less ............................................................. 626
1,250 .................................................................... 18,570
25 ......................................................................... 751
1,300 .................................................................... 19,180
30 ......................................................................... 872
1,350 .................................................................... 19,780
35 ......................................................................... 990
1,400 .................................................................... 20,380
40 ......................................................................... 1,100
45 ......................................................................... 1,220 1,450 .................................................................... 20,980
50 ......................................................................... 1,330 1,500 .................................................................... 21,570
55 ......................................................................... 1,430 1,550 .................................................................... 22,160
60 ......................................................................... 1,540 1,600 .................................................................... 22,740
65 ......................................................................... 1,640 1,650 .................................................................... 23,320
70 ......................................................................... 1,750 1,700 .................................................................... 23,900
75 ......................................................................... 1,850 1,750 .................................................................... 24,470
80 ......................................................................... 1,950 1,800 .................................................................... 25,050
85 ......................................................................... 2,050 1,850 .................................................................... 25,620
90 ......................................................................... 2,150 1,900 .................................................................... 26,180
95 ......................................................................... 2,240 1,950 .................................................................... 26,750
100 ....................................................................... 2,340 2,000 .................................................................... 27,310
105 ....................................................................... 2,440
110 ....................................................................... 2,530
115 ....................................................................... 2,630 Surface area = total outside surface area of
120 ....................................................................... 2,720 container in square feet.
125 ....................................................................... 2,810 When the surface area is not stamped on
130 ....................................................................... 2,900
the nameplate or when the marking is not
135 ....................................................................... 2,990
140 ....................................................................... 3,080 legible, the area can be calculated by using
145 ....................................................................... 3,170 one of the following formulas:
150 ....................................................................... 3,260 (1) Cylindrical container with hemi-
155 ....................................................................... 3,350 spherical heads:
160 ....................................................................... 3,440
Area = Overall length × outside diameter ×
165 ....................................................................... 3,530
170 ....................................................................... 3,620 3.1416.
175 ....................................................................... 3,700 (2) Cylindrical container with other than
180 ....................................................................... 3,790 hemispherical heads:
185 ....................................................................... 3,880
190 ....................................................................... 3,960 Area = (Overall length + 0.3 outside diame-
195 ....................................................................... 4,050 ter) × outside diameter × 3.1416.
200 ....................................................................... 4,130
NOTE: This formula is not exact, but will
210 ....................................................................... 4,300
220 ....................................................................... 4,470 give results within the limits of practical ac-
230 ....................................................................... 4,630 curacy for the sole purpose of sizing relief
240 ....................................................................... 4,800 valves.
250 ....................................................................... 4,960

260 ....................................................................... 5,130 (3) Spherical container:
270 ....................................................................... 5,290 Area = Outside diameter squared × 3.1416.
305
Flow Rate-CFM Air = Required flow capacity of this section) permitted start to dis-
in cubic feet per minute of air at stand- charge pressure setting of the device.
ard conditions, 60 F. and atmospheric
pressure (14.7 p.s.i.a.). TABLE H–26
The rate of discharge may be interpolated
for intermediate values of surface area. For Minimum Maximum
Containers (percent) (percent)
containers with total outside surface area
greater than 2,000 square feet, the required ASME Code; Par. U–68, U–69—
flow rate can be calculated using the for- 1949 and earlier editions ........... 110 1 25
mula, Flow Rate-CFM Air = 53.632 A0.82. ASME Code; Par. U–200, U–
201—1949 edition ...................... 88 1 100
A = total outside surface area of the con-
ASME Code—1950, 1952, 1956,
tainer in square feet. 1959, 1962, 1965 and 1968 (Di-
Valves not marked ‘‘Air’’ have flow rate vision I) editions ......................... 88 1 100
marking in cubic feet per minute of liquefied API—ASME Code—all editions .... 88 1 100
petroleum gas. These can be converted to DOT—As prescribed in 49 CFR

ratings in cubic feet per minute of air by Chapter I.
multiplying the liquefied petroleum gas rat- 1 Manufacturers of safety relief valves are allowed a plus
ings by factors listed below. Air flow ratings tolerance not exceeding 10 percent of the set pressure
can be converted to ratings in cubic feet per marked on the valve.
minute of liquefied petroleum gas by divid- (vi) In certain locations sufficiently
ing the air ratings by the factors listed sustained high temperatures prevail
below.
which require the use of a lower vapor
AIR CONVERSION FACTORS pressure product to be stored or the use
Container type ...... 100 125 150 175 200
of a higher designed pressure vessel in
Air conversion fac- order to prevent the safety valves
tor ...................... 1.162 1.142 1.113 1.078 1.010 opening as the result of these tempera-
tures. As an alternative the tanks may
(iii) Minimum Required Rate of Dis-
be protected by cooling devices such as
charge for Safety Relief Valves for Liq-
by spraying, by shading, or other effec-
uefied Petroleum Gas Vaporizers
tive means.
(Steam Heated, Water Heated, and Di-
(vii) Safety relief valves shall be ar-
rect Fired).
ranged so that the possibility of tam-
The minimum required rate of dis- pering will be minimized. If pressure
charge for safety relief valves shall be setting or adjustment is external, the
determined as follows: relief valves shall be provided with ap-
(a) Obtain the total surface area by proved means for sealing adjustment.
adding the surface area of vaporizer (viii) Shutoff valves shall not be in-
shell in square feet directly in contact stalled between the safety relief de-
with LP-Gas and the heat exchanged vices and the container, or the equip-
surface area in square feet directly in ment or piping to which the safety re-
contact with LP-Gas. lief device is connected except that a
(b) Obtain the minimum required shutoff valve may be used where the
rate of discharge in cubic feet of air per arrangement of this valve is such that
minute, at 60 °F. and 14.7 p.s.i.a. from full required capacity flow through the
paragraph (b)(10)(ii) of this section, for safety relief device is always afforded.
this total surface area. (ix) Safety relief valves shall have di-
(iv) Container and vaporizer safety rect communication with the vapor
relief valves shall be set to start-to-dis- space of the container at all times.
charge, with relation to the design (x) Each container safety relief valve
pressure of the container, in accord- used with systems covered by para-
ance with Table H–26. graphs (d), (e), (g), and (h) of this sec-
(v) Safety relief devices used with tion, except as provided in paragraph
systems employing containers other (e)(3)(iii) of this section shall be plainly
than those constructed according to and permanently marked with the fol-
DOT specifications shall be so con- lowing: ‘‘Container Type’’ of the pres-
structed as to discharge at not less sure vessel on which the valve is de-
than the rates shown in paragraph signed to be installed; the pressure in
(b)(10)(ii) of this section, before the p.s.i.g. at which the valve is set to dis-
pressure is in excess of 120 percent of charge; the actual rate of discharge of
the maximum (not including the 10 per- the valve in cubic feet per minute of
cent referred to in paragraph (b)(10)(iv) air at 60 °F. and 14.7 p.s.i.a.; and the
306
manufacturer’s name and catalog num- (2) With the allowable working pres-
ber, for example: T200–250–4050 AIR—insure and temperature for which the va-
dicating that the valve is suitable for porizer is designed.
use on a Type 200 container, that it is (3) With the sum of the outside sur-
set to start to discharge at 250 p.s.i.g.; face area and the inside heat exchange
and that its rate of discharge is 4,050 surface area expressed in square feet.
cubic feet per minute of air as deter- (4) With the name or symbol of the
mined in subdivision (ii) of this sub- manufacturer.
paragraph. (b) Vaporizers having an inside di-
ameter of 6 inches or less exempted by
(xi) Safety relief valve assemblies, in-
the ASME Unfired Pressure Vessel
cluding their connections, shall be of
Code, Section VIII of the ASME Boiler
sufficient size so as to provide the rate
and Pressure Vessel Code—1968 shall
of flow required for the container on
have a design pressure not less than 250
which they are installed. p.s.i.g. and need not be permanently
(xii) A hydrostatic relief valve shall marked.
be installed between each pair of shut- (c) Heating or cooling coils shall not
off valves on liquefied petroleum gas be installed inside a storage container.
liquid piping so as to relieve into a safe (d) Vaporizers may be installed in
atmosphere. The start-to-discharge buildings, rooms, sheds, or lean-tos
pressure setting of such relief valves used exclusively for gas manufacturing
shall not be in excess of 500 p.s.i.g. The or distribution, or in other structures
minimum setting on relief valves in- of light, noncombustible construction
stalled in piping connected to other or equivalent, well ventilated near the
than DOT containers shall not be lower floor line and roof.
than 140 percent of the container relief When vaporizing and/or mixing equip-
valve setting and in piping connected ment is located in a structure or build-
to DOT containers not lower than 400 ing not used exclusively for gas manu-
p.s.i.g. The start-to-discharge pressure facturing or distribution, either at-
setting of such a relief valve, if in- tached to or within such a building,
stalled on the discharge side of a pump, such structure or room shall be sepa-
shall be greater than the maximum rated from the remainder of the build-
pressure permitted by the recirculation ing by a wall designed to withstand a
device in the system. static pressure of at least 100 pounds
(xiii) The discharge from any safety per square foot. This wall shall have no
relief device shall not terminate in or openings or pipe or conduit passing
beneath any building, except relief de- through it. Such structure or room
vices covered by paragraphs (b)(6)(i) (a) shall be provided with adequate ven-
through (e) of this section, or para- tilation and shall have a roof or at
graphs (c) (4)(i) or (5) of this section. least one exterior wall of lightweight
(xiv) Container safety relief devices construction.
and regulator relief vents shall be lo- (e) Vaporizers shall have, at or near
cated not less than five (5) feet in any the discharge, a safety relief valve pro-
viding an effective rate of discharge in
direction from air openings into sealed
accordance with paragraph (b)(10)(iii)
combustion system appliances or me-
of this section, except as provided in
chanical ventilation air intakes.
paragraph (d)(4)(v)(a), of this section.
(11) Vaporizer and housing. (i) Indirect (f) The heating medium lines into
fired vaporizers utilizing steam, water, and leaving the vaporizer shall be pro-
or other heating medium shall be con- vided with suitable means for pre-
structed and installed as follows: venting the flow of gas into the heat
(a) Vaporizers shall be constructed in systems in the event of tube rupture in
accordance with the requirements of the vaporizer. Vaporizers shall be pro-
paragraph (b)(3) (i)–(iii) of this section vided with suitable automatic means
and shall be permanently marked as to prevent liquid passing through the
follows: vaporizers to the gas discharge piping.
(1) With the code marking signifying (g) The device that supplies the nec-
the specifications to which the vapor- essary heat for producing steam, hot
izer is constructed. water, or other heating medium may
307
be installed in a building, compart- in square feet; the outside surface of

ment, room, or lean-to which shall be the vaporizer in square feet; and the
ventilated near the floorline and roof maximum vaporizing capacity in gal-
to the outside. The device location lons per hour.
shall be separated from all compart- (b)(1) Vaporizers may be connected to
ments or rooms containing liquefied the liquid section or the gas section of
petroleum gas vaporizers, pumps, and the storage container, or both; but in
central gas mixing devices by a wall any case there shall be at the container
designed to withstand a static pressure a manually operated valve in each con-
of at least 100 pounds per square foot. nection to permit completely shutting
This wall shall have no openings or off when desired, of all flow of gas or
pipes or conduit passing through it. liquid from container to vaporizer.
This requirement does not apply to the (2) Vaporizers with capacity not ex-
domestic water heaters which may sup- ceeding 35 gallons per hour shall be lo-
ply heat for a vaporizer in a domestic cated at least 5 feet from container
system. shutoff valves. Vaporizers having ca-
(h) Gas-fired heating systems sup- pacity of more than 35 gallons but not
plying heat exclusively for vaporiza- exceeding 100 gallons per hour shall be
tion purposes shall be equipped with located at least 10 feet from the con-
automatic safety devices to shut off tainer shutoff valves. Vaporizers hav-
the flow of gas to main burners, if the ing a capacity greater than 100 gallons
pilot light should fail. per hour shall be located at least 15
(i) Vaporizers may be an integral part feet from container shutoff valves.
of a fuel storage container directly
(c) Vaporizers may be installed in
connected to the liquid section or gas
buildings, rooms, housings, sheds, or
section or both.
lean-tos used exclusively for vaporizing
(j) Vaporizers shall not be equipped
or mixing of liquefied petroleum gas.
with fusible plugs.
Vaporizing housing structures shall be
(k) Vaporizer houses shall not have
of noncombustible construction, well
unprotected drains to sewers or sump
ventilated near the floorline and the
pits.
(ii) Atmospheric vaporizers employ- highest point of the roof. When vapor-
ing heat from the ground or sur- izer and/or mixing equipment is located
rounding air shall be installed as fol- in a structure or room attached to or
lows: within a building, such structure or
(a) Buried underground, or room shall be separated from the re-
(b) Located inside the building close mainder of the building by a wall de-
to a point at which pipe enters the signed to withstand a static pressure of
building provided the capacity of the at least 100 pounds per square foot.
unit does not exceed 1 quart. This wall shall have no openings or
(c) Vaporizers of less than 1 quart ca- pipes or conduit passing through it.
pacity heated by the ground or sur- Such structure or room shall be pro-
rounding air, need not be equipped with vided with adequate ventilation, and
safety relief valves provided that ade- shall have a roof or at least one exte-
quate tests demonstrate that the as- rior wall of lightweight construction.
sembly is safe without safety relief (d) Vaporizers shall have at or near
valves. the discharge, a safety relief valve pro-
(iii) Direct gas-fired vaporizers shall viding an effective rate of discharge in
be constructed, marked, and installed accordance with paragraph (b)(10)(iii)
as follows: of this section. The relief valve shall be
(a)(1) In accordance with the require- so located as not to be subjected to
ments of the American Society of Me- temperatures in excess of 140 °F.
chanical Engineers Boiler and Pressure (e) Vaporizers shall be provided with
Vessel Code—1968 that are applicable to suitable automatic means to prevent
the maximum working conditions for liquid passing from the vaporizer to the
which the vaporizer is designed. gas discharge piping of the vaporizer.
(2) With the name of the manufac- (f) Vaporizers shall be provided with
turer; rated BTU input to the burner; means for manually turning off the gas
the area of the heat exchange surface to the main burner and pilot.
308
(g) Vaporizers shall be equipped with (e) Tank heaters shall be equipped
automatic safety devices to shut off with an automatic safety device to
the flow of gas to main burners if the shut off the flow of gas to main burn-
pilot light should fail. When the flow ers, if the pilot light should fail. When
through the pilot exceeds 2,000 B.t.u. flow through pilot exceeds 2,000 B.t.u.
per hour, the pilot also shall be per hour, the pilot also shall be
equipped with an automatic safety de- equipped with an automatic safety de-
vice to shut off the flow of gas to the vice to shut off the flow of gas to the
pilot should the pilot flame be extin- pilot should the pilot flame be extin-
guished. guished.
(h) Pressure regulating and pressure (f) Pressure regulating and pressure
reducing equipment if located within 10 reducing equipment if located within 10
feet of a direct fire vaporizer shall be feet of a direct fired tank heater shall
separated from the open flame by a be separated from the open flame by a
substantially airtight noncombustible substantially airtight noncombustible
partition or partitions. partition.
(i) Except as provided in (c) of this (g) The following minimum distances
subdivision, the following minimum shall be maintained between a storage
distances shall be maintained between tank heated by a direct fired tank
direct fired vaporizers and the nearest heater and the nearest important
important building or group of build- building or group of buildings:
ings: Ten feet for storage containers of less than
Ten feet for vaporizers having a capacity of 500 gallons water capacity.
15 gallons per hour or less vaporizing ca- Twenty-five feet for storage containers of 500
pacity. to 1,200 gallons water capacity.
Twenty-five feet for vaporizers having a va- Fifty feet for storage containers of over 1,200
porizing capacity of 16 to 100 gallons per gallons water capacity.
hour. (h) No direct fired tank heater shall
Fifty feet for vaporizers having a vaporizing
capacity exceeding 100 gallons per hour.
raise the product pressure within the
storage container over 75 percent of the
(j) Direct fired vaporizers shall not pressure set out in the second column
raise the product pressure above the of Table H–31.
design pressure of the vaporizer equip- (v) The vaporizer section of vapor-
ment nor shall they raise the product izer-burners used for dehydrators or
pressure within the storage container dryers shall be located outside of build-
above the pressure shown in the second ings; they shall be constructed and in-
column of Table H–31. stalled as follows:
(k) Vaporizers shall not be provided (a) Vaporizer-burners shall have a
with fusible plugs. minimum design pressure of 250 p.s.i.g.
(l) Vaporizers shall not have unpro- with a factor of safety of five.
tected drains to sewers or sump pits. (b) Manually operated positive shut-
(iv) Direct gas-fired tank heaters off valves shall be located at the con-
shall be constructed and installed as tainers to shut off all flow to the va-
follows: porizer-burners.
(a) Direct gas-fired tank heaters, and (c) Minimum distances between stor-
tanks to which they are applied, shall age containers and vaporizer-burners
only be installed above ground. shall be as follows:
(b) Tank heaters shall be perma-
nently marked with the name of the Minimum
Water capacity per container (gallons) distances
manufacturer, the rated B.t.u. input to (feet)
the burner, and the maximum vapor-
Less than 501 ...................................................... 10
izing capacity in gallons per hour. 501 to 2,000 ........................................................ 25
(c) Tank heaters may be an integral Over 2,000 ........................................................... 50
part of a fuel storage container di-
rectly connected to the container liq- (d) The vaporizer section of vapor-
uid section, or vapor section, or both. izer-burners shall be protected by a hy-
(d) Tank heaters shall be provided drostatic relief valve. The relief valve
with a means for manually turning off shall be located so as not to be sub-
the gas to the main burner and pilot. jected to temperatures in excess of 140
309
°F. The start-to-discharge pressure set- TABLE H–27—MAXIMUM PERMITTED FILLING

ting shall be such as to protect the DENSITY
components involved, but not less than
Above ground containers
250 p.s.i.g. The discharge shall be di-
rected upward and away from compo- 0 to 1,200 Over 1,200 Under
Specific gravity U.S. gals. U.S. gals. ground con-
at 60 °F. (15.6
nent parts of the equipment and away °C.) (1,000 imp. (1,000 imp. tainers, all
gal., 4,550 gal., 4,550 capacities
from operating personnel. liters) total liters) total
(e) Vaporizer-burners shall be pro- water cap. water cap.
vided with means for manually turning Percent Percent Percent
off the gas to the main burner and 0 .496–0 .503 41 44 45
pilot. .504– .510 42 45 46
.511– .519 43 46 47
(f) Vaporizer-burners shall be .520– .527 44 47 48
equipped with automatic safety devices .528– .536 45 48 49
.537– .544 46 49 50
to shut off the flow of gas to the main .545– .552 47 50 51
burner and pilot in the event the pilot .553– .560 48 51 52
is extinguished. .561– .568 49 52 53
.569– .576 50 53 54
(g) Pressure regulating and control .577– .584 51 54 55
equipment shall be located or pro- .585– .592 52 55 56
.593– .600 53 56 57
tected so that the temperatures sur-
rounding this equipment shall not ex- (ii) Except as provided in paragraph
ceed 140 °F. except that equipment (b)(12)(iii) of this section, any con-
components may be used at higher tainer including mobile cargo tanks
temperatures if designed to withstand and portable tank containers regard-
such temperatures. less of size or construction, shipped
(h) Pressure regulating and control under DOT jurisdiction or constructed
equipment when located downstream of in accordance with 49 CFR chapter I
the vaporizer shall be designed to with- Specifications shall be charged accord-
stand the maximum discharge tem- ing to 49 CFR chapter I requirements.
perature of the vapor. (iii) Portable containers not subject
(i) The vaporizer section of vaporizer- to DOT jurisdiction (such as, but not
burners shall not be provided with fusi- limited to, motor fuel containers on in-
ble plugs. dustrial and lift trucks, and farm trac-
tors covered in paragraph (e) of this
(j) Vaporizer coils or jackets shall be
section, or containers recharged at the
made of ferrous metal or high tempera-
installation) may be filled either by
ture alloys. weight, or by volume using a fixed
(k) Equipment utilizing vaporizer- length dip tube gaging device.
burners shall be equipped with auto- (13) LP-Gas in buildings. (i) Vapor
matic shutoff devices upstream and shall be piped into buildings at pres-
downstream of the vaporizer section sures in excess of 20 p.s.i.g. only if the
connected so as to operate in the event buildings or separate areas thereof, (a)
of excessive temperature, flame failure, are constructed in accordance with this
and, if applicable, insufficient airflow. section; (b) are used excusively to
(12) Filling densities. (i) The ‘‘filling house equipment for vaporization, pres-
density’’ is defined as the percent ratio sure reduction, gas mixing, gas manu-
of the weight of the gas in a container facturing, or distribution, or to house
to the weight of water the container internal combustion engines, industrial
will hold at 60 °F. All containers shall processes, research and experimental
be filled according to the filling den- laboratories, or equipment and proc-
esses using such gas and having similar
sities shown in Table H–27.
hazard; (c) buildings, structures, or
equipment under construction or un-
dergoing major renovation.
(ii) Liquid may be permitted in build-
ings as follows:
(a) Buildings, or separate areas of
buildings, used exclusively to house

equipment for vaporization, pressure
310
reduction, gas mixing, gas manufac- (6) Where flexible connectors are nec-
turing, or distribution, or to house in- essary for appliance installation, such
ternal combustion engines, industrial connectors shall be as short as prac-
processes, research and experimental ticable and shall comply with para-
laboratories, or equipment and proc- graph (b)(8)(ii) or (9) of this section.
esses using such gas and having similar (7) Release of fuel when any section
hazard; and when such buildings, or of piping or appliances is disconnected
separate areas thereof are constructed shall be minimized by either of the fol-
in accordance with this section. lowing methods:
(b) Buildings, structures, or equip- (i) Using an approved automatic
ment under construction or undergoing quick-closing coupling (a type closing
major renovation provided the tem- in both directions when coupled in the
porary piping meets the following con- fuel line), or
ditions: (ii) Closing the valve nearest to the
(1) Liquid piping inside the building appliance and allowing the appliance
shall conform to the requirements of to operate until the fuel in the line is
paragraph (b)(8) of this section, and consumed.
shall not exceed three-fourths iron pipe (iii) Portable containers shall not be
size. Copper tubing with an outside di- taken into buildings except as provided
ameter of three-fourths inch or less in paragraph (b)(6)(i) of this section.
may be used provided it conforms to (14) Transfer of liquids. The employer
Type K of Specifications for Seamless shall assure that (i) at least one at-
Water Tube, ANSI H23.1–1970 (ASTM tendant shall remain close to the
B88–69) (see Table H–24). All such pip- transfer connection from the time the
ing shall be protected against construc- connections are first made until they
tion hazards. Liquid piping inside are finally disconnected, during the
buildings shall be kept to a minimum. transfer of the product.
Such piping shall be securely fastened (ii) Containers shall be filled or used
to walls or other surfaces so as to pro- only upon authorization of the owner.
vide adequate protection from break- (iii) Containers manufactured in ac-
age and so located as to subject the liq- cordance with specifications of 49 CFR
uid line to lowest ambient tempera- part 178 and authorized by 49 CFR
tures. chapter 1 as a ‘‘single trip’’ or ‘‘non-
(2) A shutoff valve shall be installed refillable container’’ shall not be re-
in each intermediate branch line where filled or reused in LP-Gas service.
it takes off the main line and shall be (iv) Gas or liquid shall not be vented
readily accessible. A shutoff valve shall to the atmosphere to assist in transfer-
also be placed at the appliance end of ring contents of one container to an-
the intermediate branch line. Such other, except as provided in paragraph
shutoff valve shall be upstream of any (e)(5)(iv) of this section and except that
flexible connector used with the appli- this shall not preclude the use of listed
ance. pump utilizing LP-Gas in the vapor
(3) Suitable excess flow valves shall phase as a source of energy and venting
be installed in the container outlet line such gas to the atmosphere at a rate
supplying liquid LP-Gas to the build- not to exceed that from a No. 31 drill
ing. A suitable excess flow valve shall size opening and provided that such
be installed immediately downstream venting and liquid transfer shall be lo-
of each shutoff valve. Suitable excess cated not less than 50 feet from the
flow valves shall be installed where nearest important building.
piping size is reduced and shall be sized (v) Filling of fuel containers for in-
for the reduced size piping. dustrial trucks or motor vehicles from
(4) Hydrostatic relief valves shall be industrial bulk storage containers
installed in accordance with paragraph shall be performed not less than 10 feet
(b)(10)(xii) of this section. from the nearest important masonry-
(5) The use of hose to carry liquid be- walled building or not less than 25 feet
tween the container and the building from the nearest important building or
or at any point in the liquid line, ex- other construction and, in any event,
cept at the appliance connector, shall not less than 25 feet from any building
be prohibited. opening.
311
(vi) Filling of portable containers, (xiii) When necessary, unloading pip-

containers mounted on skids, fuel con- ing or hoses shall be provided with
tainers on farm tractors, or similar ap- suitable bleeder valves for relieving
plications, from storage containers pressure before disconnection.
used in domestic or commercial serv- (xiv) Agricultural air moving equip-
ice, shall be performed not less than 50 ment, including crop dryers, shall be
feet from the nearest important build- shut down when supply containers are
ing. being filled unless the air intakes and
(vii) The filling connection and the sources of ignition on the equipment
vent from the liquid level gages in con- are located 50 feet or more from the
tainers, filled at point of installation, container.
shall not be less than 10 feet in any di- (xv) Agricultural equipment employ-
rection from air openings into sealed ing open flames or equipment with in-
combustion system appliances or me- tegral containers, such as flame cul-
chanical ventilation air intakes. tivators, weed burners, and, in addi-
(viii) Fuel supply containers shall be tion, tractors, shall be shut down dur-
gaged and charged only in the open air ing refueling.
or in buildings especially provided for (15) Tank car or transport truck loading
that purpose. or unloading points and operations. (i)
(ix) The maximum vapor pressure of The track of tank car siding shall be
the product at 100 °F. which may be relatively level.
transferred into a container shall be in (ii) A ‘‘Tank Car Connected’’ sign, as
accordance with paragraphs (d)(2) and covered by DOT rules, shall be in-
(e)(3) of this section. (For DOT con- stalled at the active end or ends of the
tainers use DOT requirements.) siding while the tank car is connected.
(x) Marketers and users shall exercise (iii) While cars are on sidetrack for
precaution to assure that only those loading or unloading, the wheels at
gases for which the system is designed, both ends shall be blocked on the rails.
examined, and listed, are employed in
(iv) The employer shall insure that
its operation, particularly with regard
an employee is in attendance at all
to pressures.
times while the tank car, cars, or
(xi) Pumps or compressors shall be
trucks are being loaded or unloaded.
designed for use with LP-Gas. When
(v) A backflow check valve, excess-
compressors are used they shall nor-
flow valve, or a shutoff valve with
mally take suction from the vapor
means of remote closing, to protect
space of the container being filled and
against uncontrolled discharge of LP-
discharge to the vapor space of the con-
tainer being emptied. Gas from storage tank piping shall be
installed close to the point where the
(xii) Pumping systems, when
liquid piping and hose or swing joint
equipped with a positive displacement
pipe is connected.
pump, shall include a recirculating de-
vice which shall limit the differential (vi) Where practical, the distance of
pressure on the pump under normal op- the unloading or loading point shall
erating conditions to the maximum conform to the distances in subpara-
differential pressure rating of the graph (6)(ii) of this paragraph.
pump. The discharge of the pumping (16) Instructions. Personnel per-
system shall be protected so that pres- forming installation, removal, oper-
sure does not exceed 350 p.s.i.g. If a re- ation, and maintenance work shall be
circulation system discharges into the properly trained in such function.
supply tank and contains a manual (17) Electrical equipment and other
shutoff valve, an adequate secondary sources of ignition. (i) Electrical equip-
safety recirculation system shall be in- ment and wiring shall be of a type
corporated which shall have no means specified by and shall be installed in
of rendering it inoperative. Manual accordance with subpart S of this part,
shutoff valves in recirculation systems for ordinary locations except that fixed
shall be kept open except during an electrical equipment in classified areas
emergency or when repairs are being shall comply with subparagraph (18) of
made to the system. this paragraph.
312
(ii) Open flames or other sources of electrically conductive or electrically

ignition shall not be permitted in va- bonded for protection against static
porizer rooms (except those housing di- electricity.
rect-fired vaporizers), pumphouses, (v) Open flames (except as provided
container charging rooms or other for in paragraph (b)(11) of this section),
similar locations. Direct-fired vapor- cutting or welding, portable electric
izers shall not be permitted in pump- tools, and extension lights capable of
houses or container charging rooms. igniting LP-Gas, shall not be permitted
(iii) Liquefied petroleum gas storage
within classified areas specified in
containers do not require lightning
Table H–28 unless the LP-Gas facilities
protection.
(iv) Since liquefied petroleum gas is have been freed of all liquid and vapor,
contained in a closed system of piping or special precautions observed under
and equipment, the system need not be carefully controlled conditions.
TABLE H–28
Equipment shall be
Part Location Extent of classified area 1 suitable for Class 1,
Group D 2
A ..... Storage containers other than Within 15 feet in all directions from connections, except con- Division 2.
DOT cylinders. nections otherwise covered in Table H–28.
B ..... Tank vehicle and tank car Within 5 feet in all directions from connections regularly made Division 1.
loading and unloading 3. or disconnected for product transfer.
Beyond 5 feet but within 15 feet in all directions from a point Division 2.
where connections are regularly made or disconnected and
within the cylindrical volume between the horizontal equator
of the sphere and grade. (See Figure H–1).
C ..... Gage vent openings other than Within 5 feet in all directions from point of discharge ............... Division 1.
those on DOT cylinders. Beyond 5 feet but within 15 feet in all directions from point of
discharge.
Division 2.
D ..... Relief valve discharge other Within direct path of discharge .................................................. Division 1.
than those on DOT cylinders.
Within 5 feet in all directions from point of discharge ............... Division 1.
Beyond 5 feet but within 15 feet in all directions from point of Division 2.
discharge except within the direct path of discharge.
E ..... Pumps, compressors, gas-air .
mixers and vaporizers other
than direct fired.
Indoors without ventilation ....... Entire room and any adjacent room not separated by a gas- Division 1.
tight partition.
Within 15 feet of the exterior side of any exterior wall or roof Division 2.
that is not vaportight or within 15 feet of any exterior open-
ing.
Indoors with adequate ventila- Entire room and any adjacent room not separated by a gas- Division 2.
4
tion . tight partition.
Outdoors in open air at or Within 15 feet in all directions from this equipment and within Division 2.
abovegrade. the cylindrical volume between the horizontal equator of the
sphere and grade. See Figure H–1.
F ..... Service Station Dispensing Entire space within dispenser enclosure, and 18 inches hori- Division 1.
Units. zontally from enclosure exterior up to an elevation 4 ft.
above dispenser base. Entire pit or open space beneath
dispenser.
Up to 18 inches abovegrade within 20 ft. horizontally from any Division 2.
edge of enclosure.
NOTE: For pits within this area, see part F of this table..
G ..... Pits or trenches containing or .
located beneath LP-Gas
valves, pumps, compressors,
regulators, and similar equip-
ment.
Without mechanical ventilation Entire pit or trench ..................................................................... Division 1.
Entire room and any adjacent room not separated by a gas- Division 1.
tight partition.
Within 15 feet in all directions from pit or trench when located Division 2.
outdoors.
With adequate mechanical Entire pit or trench ..................................................................... Division 2.
ventilation.
Entire room and any adjacent room not separated by a gas- Division 2.
tight partition.
313
TABLE H–28—Continued
Equipment shall be
Part Location Extent of classified area 1 suitable for Class 1,
Group D 2
Within 15 feet in all directions from pit or trench when located Division 2.
outdoors.
H ..... Special buildings or rooms for Entire room ................................................................................. Division 2.
storage of portable con-
tainers.
Pipelines and connections con- Within 5 ft. in all directions from point of discharge .................. Division 1.
taining operational bleeds, Beyond 5 ft. from point of discharge, same as part E of this
drips, vents or drains. table.
J ...... Container filling:.
Indoors without ventilation ....... Entire room ................................................................................. Division 1.
Indoors with adequate ventila- Within 5 feet in all directions from connections regularly made Division 1.
tion 4. or disconnected for product transfer.
Beyond 5 feet and entire room .................................................. Division 2.
Outdoors in open air ................ Within 5 feet in all directions from connections regularly made Division 1.
or disconnected for product transfer.
Beyond 5 feet but within 15 feet in all directions from a point Division 2.
where connections are regularly made or disconnected and
within the cylindrical volume between the horizontal equator
of the sphere and grade. (See Figure H–1).
1 The classified area shall not extend beyond an unpierced wall, roof, or solid vaportight partition.
2 See subpart S of this part.
3 When classifying extent of hazardous area, consideration shall be given to possible variations in the spotting of tank cars and
tank vehicles at the unloading points and the effect these variations of actual spotting point may have on the point of connection.
4 Ventilation, either natural or mechanical, is considered adequate when the concentration of the gas in a gas-air mixture does
not exceed 25 percent of the lower flammable limit under normal operating conditions.
vided in paragraph (b)(19)(v) of this sec-

tion. Each container manufactured
after December 31, 1969, shall have per-
manently attached to the container ad-
jacent to the fixed level gage a mark-
ing showing the percentage full that
will be shown by that gage. When a
variable liquid-level gage is also pro-
vided, the fixed liquid-level gage will
also serve as a means for checking the
variable gage. These gages shall be
used in charging containers as required
in paragraph (b)(12) of this section.
(ii) All variable gaging devices shall
FIGURE H–1 be arranged so that the maximum liq-
(18) Fixed electrical equipment in classi- uid level for butane, for a 50–50 mixture
fied areas. Fixed electrical equipment of butane and propane, and for propane,
and wiring installed within classified to which the container may be charged
areas specified in Table H–28 shall com- is readily determinable. The markings
ply with Table H–28 and shall be in- indicating the various liquid levels
stalled in accordance with subpart S of from empty to full shall be on the sys-
this part. This provision does not apply tem nameplate or gaging device or part
to fixed electrical equipment at resi- may be on the system nameplate and
dential or commercial installations of part on the gaging device. Dials of
LP-Gas systems or to systems covered magnetic or rotary gages shall show
by paragraph (e) or (g) of this section. whether they are for cylindrical or
(19) Liquid-level gaging device. (i) Each spherical containers and whether for
container manufactured after Decem- aboveground or underground service.
ber 31, 1965, and filled on a volumetric The dials of gages intended for use only
basis shall be equipped with a fixed liq- on aboveground containers of over 1,200
uid-level gage to indicate the max- gallons water capacity shall be so

imum permitted filling level as pro- marked.
314
EC27OC91.025
(iii) Gaging devices that require TABLE H–29—VOLUME CORRECTION FACTORS

bleeding of the product to the atmos-
Specific gravity Aboveground Underground
phere, such as the rotary tube, fixed
tube, and slip tube, shall be designed so 0.500 1.033 1.017
that the bleed valve maximum opening .510 1.031 1.016
is not larger than a No. 54 drill size, un- .520 1.029 1.015
.530 1.028 1.014
less provided with excess flow valve. .540 1.026 1.013
(iv) Gaging devices shall have a de- .550 1.025 1.013
sign working pressure of at least 250 .560 1.024 1.012
p.s.i.g. .570 1.023 1.011
.580 1.021 1.011
(v) Length of tube or position of fixed .590 1.020 1.010
liquid-level gage shall be designed to
indicate the maximum level to which (c) The maximum volume of LP-Gas
the container may be filled for the which can be placed in a container
product contained. This level shall be when determining the length of the dip
based on the volume of the product at tube expressed as a percentage of total
40 °F. at its maximum permitted filling water content of the container is cal-
density for aboveground containers and culated by the following formula.
at 50 °F. for underground containers. (d) The maximum weight of LP-Gas
The employer shall calculate the fill- which may be placed in a container for
ing point for which the fixed liquid determining the length of a fixed dip tube
level gage shall be designed according is determined by multiplying the max-
to the method in this subdivision. imum volume of liquefied petroleum
(a) It is impossible to set out in a gas obtained by the formula in para-
table the length of a fixed dip tube for graph (b)(19)(b) of this section by the
various capacity tanks because of the pounds of liquefied petroleum gas in a
varying tank diameters and lengths gallon at 40 °F. for abovegound and at
and because the tank may be installed 50 °F. for underground containers. For
either in a vertical or horizontal posi- example, typical pounds per gallon are
tion. Knowing the maximum permitted specified below:
filling volume in gallons, however, the
length of the fixed tube can be deter- Example: Assume a 100-gallon total water
mined by the use of a strapping table capacity tank for aboveground storage of
obtained from the container manufac- propane having a specific gravity of 0.510 of
60 °F.
turer. The length of the fixed tube [(100 (gals.) × 42 (filling density from subpara-
should be such that when its lower end graph (12) of this paragraph)) ÷ (0.510 ×
touches the surface of the liquid in the 1.031 (correction factor from Table H–29)
container, the contents of the con- × 100)] = (4200 ÷ 52.6)
tainer will be the maximum permitted (4200 ÷ 52.6) = 79.8 gallons propane, the max-
volume as determined by the following imum amount permitted to be placed in
formula: a 100-gallon total water capacity above-
ground container equipped with a fixed
[(Water capacity (gals.) of container* × dip tube.
filling density**) ÷ (Specific gravity [(Maximum volume of LP-Gas (from formula
of LP-Gas* × volume correction fac- in subdivision (b) of this subdivision) ×
tor × 100)] = Maximum volume of 100) ÷ Total water content of container in
LP-Gas gallons] = Maximum percent of LP-Gas
*Measured at 60 °F. Above- Under-
**From subparagraph (12) of this paragraph ground, ground,
‘‘Filling Densities.’’ pounds per pounds per
gallon gallon
For aboveground containers the liquid
temperature is assumed to be 40 °F. and for Propane ......................................... 4.37 4.31
underground containers the liquid tempera- N Butane ....................................... 4.97 4.92
ture is assumed to be 50 °F. To correct the
liquid volumes at these temperatures to 60 (vi) Fixed liquid-level gages used on
°F. the following factors shall be used. containers other than DOT containers
(b) Formula for determining max- shall be stamped on the exterior of the
imum volume of liquefied petroleum gage with the letters ‘‘DT’’ followed by
gas for which a fixed length of dip tube the vertical distance (expressed in
shall be set: inches and carried out to one decimal
315
place) from the top of container to the (iii) Unattended heaters used inside
end of the dip tube or to the centerline buildings for the purpose of animal or
of the gage when it is located at the poultry production or care shall be
maximum permitted filling level. For equipped with an approved automatic
portable containers that may be filled device designed to shut off the flow of
in the horizontal and/or vertical posi- gas to the main burners, and pilot if
tion the letters ‘‘DT’’ shall be followed used, in the event of flame extinguish-
by ‘‘V’’ with the vertical distance from ment.
the top of the container to the end of (iv) All commercial, industrial, and
the dip tube for vertical filling and agricultural appliances or equipment
with ‘‘H’’ followed by the proper dis- shall be installed in accordance with
tance for horizontal filling. For DOT the requirements of this section and in
containers the stamping shall be placed accordance with the following NFPA
both on the exterior of the gage and on consensus standards, which are incor-
the container. On above-ground or porated by reference as specified in
cargo containers where the gages are § 1910.6:
positioned at specific levels, the mark- (a) Domestic and commercial appli-
ing may be specified in percent of total ances—NFPA 54–1969, Standard for the
tank contents and the marking shall be Installation of Gas Appliances and Gas
stamped on the container. Piping.
(vii) Gage glasses of the columnar (b) Industrial appliances—NFPA 54A–
type shall be restricted to charging 1969, Standard for the Installation of
plants where the fuel is withdrawn in Gas Piping and Gas Equipment on In-
the liquid phase only. They shall be dustrial Premises and Certain Other
equipped with valves having metallic Premises.
handwheels, with excess flow valves, (c) Standard for the Installation and
and with extra-heavy glass adequately Use of Stationary Combustion Engines
protected with a metal housing applied and Gas Turbines—NFPA 37–1970.
by the gage manufacturer. They shall (d) Standard for the Installation of
be shielded against the direct rays of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke
the sun. Gage glasses of the columnar and Grease-Laden Vapors from Com-
type are prohibited on tank trucks, and mercial Cooking Equipment, NFPA 96–
on motor fuel tanks, and on containers 1970.
used in domestic, commercial, and in- (c) Cylinder systems—(1) Application.
dustrial installations. This paragraph applies specifically to
(viii) Gaging devices of the float, or systems utilizing containers con-
equivalent type which do not require structed in accordance with DOT Spec-
flow for their operation and having ifications. All requirements of para-
connections extending to a point out- graph (b) of this section apply to this
side the container do not have to be paragraph unless otherwise noted in
equipped with excess flow valves pro- paragraph (b) of this section.
vided the piping and fittings are ade- (2) Marking of containers. Containers
quately designed to withstand the con- shall be marked in accordance with
tainer pressure and are properly pro- DOT regulations. Additional markings
tected against physical damage and not in conflict with DOT regulations
breakage. may be used.
(20) Requirements for appliances. (i) (3) Description of a system. A system
Except as provided in paragraph shall include the container base or
(b)(20)(ii) of this section, new commer- bracket, containers, container valves,
cial and industrial gas consuming ap- connectors, manifold valve assembly,
pliances shall be approved. regulators, and relief valves.
(ii) Any appliance that was originally (4) Containers and regulating equip-
manufactured for operation with a gas- ment installed outside of buildings or
eous fuel other than LP-Gas and is in structures. (i) Containers shall not be
good condition may be used with LP- buried below ground. However, this
Gas only after it is properly converted, shall not prohibit the installation in a
adapted, and tested for performance compartment or recess below grade
with LP-Gas before the appliance is level such as a niche in a slope or ter-
placed in use. race wall which is used for no other
316
purpose, providing that the container be suitable for use with LP-Gas. Mani-
and regulating equipment are not in folds and fittings connecting con-
contact with the ground and the com- tainers to pressure regulator inlets
partment or recess is drained and ven- shall be designed for at least 250 p.s.i.g.
tilated horizontally to the outside air service pressure.
from its lowest level, with the outlet at (d) Valves on containers having a
least 3 feet away from any building water capacity greater than 50 pounds
opening which is below the level of (nominal 20 pounds LP-Gas capacity)
such outlet. shall be protected while in use.
Except as provided in paragraph (e) Containers shall be marked in ac-
(b)(10)(xiii) of this section, the dis- cordance with paragraph (b)(5)(iii) of
charge from safety relief devices shall this section and paragraph (c)(2) of this
be located not less than 3 feet hori- section.
zontally away from any building open- (f) Pipe or tubing shall conform to
ing which is below the level of such dis- paragraph (b)(8) of this section except
charge and shall not terminate beneath that aluminum pipe or tubing shall not
any building unless such space is well be used.
ventilated to the outside and is not en-
(g)(1) Hose shall be designed for a
closed on more than two sides.
(ii) Containers shall be set upon firm working pressure of at least 250 p.s.i.g.
foundation or otherwise firmly secured; Hose and hose connections shall have
the possible effect on the outlet piping their correctness as to design, con-
of settling shall be guarded against by struction and performance determined
a flexible connection or special fitting. by listing by a nationally recognized
(5) Containers and equipment used in- testing laboratory. The hose length
side of buildings or structures. (i) When may exceed the length specified in
operational requirements make port- paragraph (b)(9)(vii)(b) of this section,
able use of containers necessary and but shall be as short as practicable.
their location outside of buildings or Refer to § 1910.7 for definition of nation-
structure is impracticable, containers ally recognized testing laboratory.
and equipment are permitted to be (2) Hose shall be long enough to per-
used inside of buildings or structures in mit compliance with spacing provi-
accordance with (a) through (l) of this sions of this subparagraph without
subdivision, and, in addition, such kinking or straining or causing hose to
other provisions of this subparagraph be so close to a burner as to be dam-
as are applicable to the particular use aged by heat.
or occupancy. (h) Portable heaters, including sala-
(a) Containers in use shall mean con- manders, shall be equipped with an ap-
nected for use. proved automatic device to shut off the
(b) Systems utilizing containers hav- flow of gas to the main burner, and
ing a water capacity greater than 21⁄2 pilot if used, in the event of flame ex-
pounds (nominal 1 pound LP-Gas ca- tinguishment. Such heaters having in-
pacity) shall be equipped with excess puts above 50,000 B.t.u. manufactured
flow valves. Such excess flow valves on or after May 17, 1967, and such heat-
shall be either integral with the con- ers having inputs above 100,000 B.t.u.
tainer valves or in the connections to manufactured before May 17, 1967, shall
the container valve outlets. In either be equipped with either.
case, an excess flow valve shall be in-
(1) A pilot which must be lighted and
stalled in such a manner that any
proved before the main burner can be
undue strain beyond the excess flow
turned on; or
valve will not cause breakage between
the container and the excess flow (2) An electric ignition system.
valve. The installation of excess flow The provisions of this paragraph (h) do
valves shall take into account the type not apply to tar kettle burners, torch-
of valve protection provided. es, melting pots, nor do they apply to
(c) Regulators, if used, shall be either portable heaters under 7,500 B.t.u.h.
directly connected to the container input when used with containers hav-
valves or to manifolds connected to the ing a maximum water capacity of 21⁄2

container values. The regulator shall pounds. Container valves, connectors,
317
regulators, manifolds, piping, and tub- or to a supporting standard, provided

ing shall not be used as structural sup- they are designed and installed so as to
ports for heaters. prevent direct or radiant heat applica-
(i) Containers, regulating equipment, tion from the heater onto the con-
manifolds, pipe, tubing, and hose shall tainer. Blower and radiant type heaters
be located so as to minimize exposure shall not be directed toward any LP-
to abnormally high temperatures (such Gas container within 20 feet.
as may result from exposure to convec- (c) If two or more heater-container
tion or radiation from heating equip- units, of either the integral or non-
ment or installation in confined integral type, are located in an
spaces), physical damage, or tampering unpartitioned area on the same floor,
by unauthorized persons. the container or containers of each
(j) Heat producing equipment shall be unit shall be separated from the con-
located and used so as to minimize the tainer or containers of any other unit
possibility of ignition of combustibles. by at least 20 feet.
(k) Containers having a water capac- (d) When heaters are connected to
ity greater than 21⁄2 pounds (nominal 1 containers for use in an unpartitioned
pound LP-Gas capacity) connected for area on the same floor, the total water
use, shall stand on a firm and substan- capacity of containers manifolded to-
tially level surface and, when nec- gether for connection to a heater or
essary, shall be secured in an upright heaters shall not be greater than 735
position. pounds (nominal 300 pounds LP-Gas ca-
(l) Containers, including the valve pacity). Such manifolds shall be sepa-
protective devices, shall be installed so rated by at least 20 feet.
as to minimize the probability of im-
(e) On floors on which heaters are not
pingement of discharge of safety relief
connected for use, containers are per-
devices upon containers.
mitted to be manifolded together for
(ii) Containers having a maximum
connection to a heater or heaters on
water capacity of 21⁄2 pounds (nominal 1
another floor, Provided:
pound LP-Gas capacity) are permitted
(1) The total water capacity of con-
to be used inside of buildings as part of
tainers connected to any one manifold
approved self-contained hand torch as-
is not greater than 2,450 pounds (nomi-
semblies or similar appliances.
nal 1,000 pounds LP-Gas capacity) and;
(iii) Containers having a maximum
water capacity of 12 pounds (nominal 5 (2) Where more than one manifold
pounds LP-Gas capacity) are permitted having a total water capacity greater
to be used temporarily inside of build- than 735 pounds (nominal 300 pounds
ings for public exhibition or dem- LP-Gas capacity) are located in the
onstration purposes, including use for same unpartitioned area, they shall be
classroom demonstrations. separated by at least 50 feet.
(iv) [Reserved] (f) Storage of containers awaiting use
(v) Containers are permitted to be shall be in accordance with paragraph
used in buildings or structures under (f) of this section.
construction or undergoing major ren- (vi) Containers are permitted to be
ovation when such buildings or struc- used in industrial occupancies for proc-
tures are not occupied by the public, as essing, research, or experimental pur-
follows: poses as follows:
(a) The maximum water capacity of (a) The maximum water capacity of
individual containers shall be 245 individual containers shall be 245
pounds (nominal 100 pounds LP-Gas ca- pounds (nominal 100 pounds LP-Gas ca-
pacity). pacity).
(b) For temporary heating such as (b) Containers connected to a mani-
curing concrete, drying plaster and fold shall have a total water capacity
similar applications, heaters (other not greater than 735 pounds (nominal
than integral heater-container units) 300 pounds LP-Gas capacity) and not
shall be located at least 6 feet from any more than one such manifold may be
LP-Gas container. This shall not pro- located in the same room unless sepa-
hibit the use of heaters specifically derated at least 20 feet from a similar
signed for attachment to the container unit.
318
(c) The amount of LP-Gas in con- transit, in storage, and while being
tainers for research and experimental moved into final utilization, as follows:
use shall be limited to the smallest (a) By setting into the recess of the
practical quantity. container to prevent the possibility of
(vii)(a) Containers are permitted to their being struck if the container is
be used in industrial occupancies with dropped upon a flat surface, or
essentially noncombustible contents (b) By ventilated cap or collar, fas-
where portable equipment for space tened to the container capable of with-
heating is essential and where a perma- standing a blow from any direction
nent heating installation is not prac- equivalent to that of a 30-pound weight
tical, as follows: dropped 4 feet. Construction must be
(b) Containers and heaters shall com- such that a blow will not be trans-
ply with and be used in accordance mitted to the valve or other connec-
with paragraph (c)(5)(v) of this section. tion.
(viii) Containers are permitted to be (iv) When containers are not con-
used in buildings for temporary emer- nected to the system, the outlet valves
gency heating purposes, if necessary to shall be kept tightly closed or plugged,
prevent damage to the buildings or even though containers are considered
contents, when the permanent heating empty.
system is temporarily out of service, as (v) Containers having a water capac-
follows:
ity in excess of 50 pounds (approxi-
(a) Containers and heaters shall com-
mately 21 pounds LP-Gas capacity), re-
ply with and be used in accordance
charged at the installation, shall be
with paragraph (c)(5)(v) of this section.
provided with excess flow or backflow
(b) The temporary heating equipment
check valves to prevent the discharge
shall not be left unattended.
of container contents in case of failure
(ix) Containers are permitted to be
used temporarily in buildings for train- of the filling or equalizing connection.
ing purposes related in installation and (7) Safety devices. (i) Containers shall
use of LP-Gas systems, as follows: be provided with safety devices as re-
(a) The maximum water capacity of quired by DOT regulations.
individual containers shall be 245 (ii) A final stage regulator of an LP-
pounds (nominal 100 pounds LP-Gas ca- Gas system (excluding any appliance
pacity), but the maximum quantity of regulator) shall be equipped on the low-
LP-Gas that may be placed in each pressure side with a relief valve which
container shall be 20 pounds. is set to start to discharge within the
(b) If more than one such container is limits specified in Table H–30.
located in the same room, the con-
tainers shall be separated by at least 20 TABLE H–30
feet. Relief valve start-to-dis-
(6) Container valves and accessories. (i) charge pressure setting
(percent of regulator
Valves in the assembly of multiple con- Regulator delivery pressure delivery pressure)
tainer systems shall be arranged so
Minimum Maximum
that replacement of containers can be
made without shutting off the flow of 1 p.s.i.g. or less ............................. 200 300
gas in the system. Above 1 p.s.i.g. but not over 3
p.s.i.g ......................................... 140 200
NOTE: This provision is not to be construed Above 3 p.s.i.g .............................. 125 200
as requiring an automatic changeover de-
vice. (iii) When a regulator or pressure re-
(ii) Regulators and low-pressure relief valve is used inside a building for
lief devices shall be rigidly attached to other than purposes specified in para-
the cylinder valves, cylinders, sup- graphs (b)(6)(i) (a)–(g) of this section,
porting standards, the building walls or the relief valve and the space above the
otherwise rigidly secured and shall be regulator and relief valve diaphragms
so installed or protected that the ele- shall be vented to the outside air with
ments (sleet, snow, or ice) will not af- the discharge outlet located not less
fect their operation. than 3 feet horizontally away from any
(iii) Valves and connections to the building opening which is below such
containers shall be protected while in discharge. These provisions do not
319
apply to individual appliance regu- located inside a building. For con-

lators when protection is otherwise tainers with a water capacity of 125
provided nor to paragraph (c)(5) of this gallons or more, such terminals shall
section and paragraph (b)(10)(xiii) of be located not less than 10 feet from
this section. In buildings devoted ex- any building (see paragraph (b)(6)(ii) of
clusively to gas distribution purposes, this section), and preferably not less
the space above the diaphragm need than 5 feet from any driveway, and
not be vented to the outside. shall be located in a protective housing
(8) Reinstallation of containers. Con- built for the purpose.
tainers shall not be reinstalled unless (ii) The filling connection shall be
they are requalified in accordance with fitted with one of the following:
DOT regulations. (a) Combination back-pressure check
(9) Permissible product. A product valve and excess flow valve.
shall not be placed in a container (b) One double or two single back-
marked with a service pressure less pressure check valves.
than four-fifths of the maximum vapor (c) A positive shutoff valve, in con-
pressure of product at 130 °F. junction with either:
(d) Systems utilizing containers other (1) An internal back-pressure valve,
than DOT containers—(1) Application. or
This paragraph applies specifically to (2) An internal excess flow valve.
systems utilizing storage containers (iii) All openings in a container shall
other than those constructed in accord- be equipped with approved automatic
ance with DOT specifications. Para- excess flow valves except in the fol-
graph (b) of this section applies to this lowing: Filling connections as provided
paragraph unless otherwise noted in in paragraph (d)(3)(ii) of this section;
paragraph (b) of this section. safety relief connections, liquid-level
(2) Design pressure and classification of gaging devices as provided in para-
storage containers. Storage containers graphs (b)(7)(iv), (19)(iii), and (19)(viii)
shall be designed and classified in ac- of this section; pressure gage connec-
cordance with Table H–31. tions as provided in paragraph (b)(7)(v)
of this section, as provided in para-
TABLE H–31 graphs (d) (iv), (vi), and (vii) of this
Minimum design pressure of con- section.
tainer, lb. per sq. in. gage (iv) An excess flow valve is not re-
For gases
with vapor 1949 edition of ASME quired in the withdrawal service line
press. Not 1949 and Code (Par. U–200, providing the following are complied
Con- to exceed earlier edi- U–201); 1950, 1952,
tainer with:
type lb. per sq. tions of 1956, 1959, 1962,
in. gage at ASME 1965, and 1968 (Divi- (a) Such systems’ total water capac-
100 °F. Code (Par. sion 1) editions of
(37.8 °C.) U–68, U– ASME Code; All edi- ity does not exceed 2,000 U.S. gallons.
69) tions of API-ASME (b) The discharge from the service
Code 3
outlet is controlled by a suitable
1 80 1 80 1 80 1 100
manually operated shutoff valve which
100 100 100 125 is:
125 125 125 156
150 150 150 187 (1) Threaded directly into the service
175 175 175 219 outlet of the container; or
2 200 215 200 250 (2) Is an integral part of a substantial
1 New storage containers of the 80 type have not been au-
fitting threaded into or on the service
thorized since Dec. 31, 1947.
2 Container type may be increased by increments of 25. outlet of the container; or
The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 100% of (3) Threaded directly into a substan-
the container type designation when constructed under 1949
or earlier editions of the ASME Code (Par. U–68 and U–69). tial fitting threaded into or on the
The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 125% of service outlet of the container.
the container type designation when constructed under: (1)
the 1949 ASME Code (Par. U–200 and U–201), (2) 1950, (c) The shutoff valve is equipped with
1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions an attached handwheel or the equiva-
of the ASME Code, and (3) all editions of the API-ASME
Code. lent.
3 Construction of containers under the API-ASME Code is
(d) The controlling orifice between
not authorized after July 1, 1961.
the contents of the container and the
(3) Container valves and accessories, outlet of the shutoff valve does not ex-
filler pipes, and discharge pipes. (i) The ceed five-sixteenths inch in diameter
filling pipe inlet terminal shall not be for vapor withdrawal systems and one-
320
eighth inch in diameter for liquid with- protection against physical damage
drawal systems. and such discharge pipes shall be fitted
(e) An approved pressure-reducing with loose raincaps. Return bends and
regulator is directly attached to the restrictive pipefittings shall not be
outlet of the shutoff valve and is rig- permitted.
idly supported, or that an approved (d) If desired, discharge lines from
pressure-reducing regulator is attached two or more safety relief devices lo-
to the outlet of the shutoff valve by cated on the same unit, or similar lines
means of a suitable flexible connection, from two or more different units, may
provided the regulator is adequately be run into a common discharge head-
supported and properly protected on or
er, provided that the cross-sectional
at the tank.
area of such header be at least equal to
(v) All inlet and outlet connections
except safety relief valves, liquid level the sum of the cross-sectional area of
gaging devices and pressure gages on the individual discharge lines, and that
containers of 2,000 gallons water capac- the setting of safety relief valves are
ity, or more, and on any container used the same.
to supply fuel directly to an internal (e) Each storage container of over
combustion engine, shall be labeled to 2,000 gallons water capacity shall be
designate whether they communicate provided with a suitable pressure gage.
with vapor or liquid space. Labels may (f) A final stage regulator of an LP-
be on valves. Gas system (excluding any appliance
(vi) In lieu of an excess flow valve regulator) shall be equipped on the low-
openings may be fitted with a quick- pressure side with a relief valve which
closing internal valve which, except is set to start to discharge within the
during operating periods shall remain limits specified in Table H–30.
closed. The internal mechanism for (g) When a regulator or pressure re-
such valves may be provided with a lief valve is installed inside a building,
secondary control which shall be the relief valve and the space above the
equipped with a fusible plug (not over regulator and relief valve diaphragms
220 °F. melting point) which will cause
shall be vented to the outside air with
the internal valve to close automati-
the discharge outlet located not less
cally in case of fire.
(vii) Not more than two plugged than 3 feet horizontally away from any
openings shall be permitted on a con- opening into the building which is
tainer of 2,000 gallons or less water ca- below such discharge. (These provisions
pacity. do not apply to individual appliance
(viii) Containers of 125 gallons water regulators when protection is other-
capacity or more manufactured after wise provided. In buildings devoted ex-
July 1, 1961, shall be provided with an clusively to gas distribution purposes,
approved device for liquid evacuation, the space above the diaphragm need
the size of which shall be three-fourths not be vented to the outside.)
inch National Pipe Thread minimum. A (ii) Safety devices for aboveground
plugged opening will not satisfy this containers shall be provided as follows:
requirement. (a) Containers of 1,200 gallons water
(4) Safety devices. (i) All safety de- capacity or less which may contain liq-
vices shall comply with the following: uid fuel when installed above ground
(a) All container safety relief devices shall have the rate of discharge re-
shall be located on the containers and quired by paragraph (b)(10)(ii) of this
shall have direct communication with section provided by a spring-loaded re-
the vapor of space of the container. lief valve or valves. In addition to the
(b) In industrial and gas manufac- required spring-loaded relief valve(s),
turing plants, discharge pipe from safe-
suitable fuse plug(s) may be used pro-
ty relief valves on pipe lines within a
vided the total discharge area of the
building shall discharge vertically up-
ward and shall be piped to a point out- fuse plug(s) for each container does not
side a building. exceed 0.25 square inch.
(c) Safety relief device discharge ter- (b) The fusible metal of the fuse plugs
minals shall be so located as to provide shall have a yield temperature of 208
321
°F. minimum and 220 °F. maximum. Re- containers when determining the rate
lief valves and fuse plugs shall have di- of discharge requirement of the relief
rect communication with the vapor valves.
space of the container. (iv) On underground containers of
(c) On a container having a water ca- more than 2,000 gallons water capacity,
pacity greater than 125 gallons, but not the discharge from safety relief devices
over 2,000 gallons, the discharge from shall be piped vertically and directly
the safety relief valves shall be vented upward to a point at least 7 feet above
away from the container vertically up- the ground.
wards and unobstructed to the open air Where there is a probability of the
in such a manner as to prevent any im- manhole or housing becoming flooded,
pingement of escaping gas upon the the discharge from regulator vent lines
container; loose-fitting rain caps shall shall be above the highest probable
be used. Suitable provision shall be water level. All manholes or housings
made for draining condensate which shall be provided with ventilated
may accumulate in the relief valve or louvers or their equivalent, the area of
its discharge pipe. such openings equaling or exceeding
(d) On containers of 125 gallons water the combined discharge areas of the
capacity or less, the discharge from safety relief valves and other vent lines
safety relief devices shall be located which discharge their content into the
not less than 5 feet horizontally away manhole housing.
from any opening into the building (v) Safety devices for vaporizers shall
below the level of such discharge. be provided as follows:
(e) On a container having a water ca- (a) Vaporizers of less than 1 quart
pacity greater than 2,000 gallons, the total capacity, heated by the ground or
discharge from the safety relief valves the surrounding air, need not be
shall be vented away from the con- equipped with safety relief valves pro-
tainer vertically upwards to a point at vided that adequate tests certified by
least 7 feet above the container, and any of the authorities referred to in
unobstructed to the open air in such a paragraph (b)(2) of this section, dem-
manner as to prevent any impingement onstrate that the assembly is safe
of escaping gas upon the container; without safety relief valves.
loose-fitting rain caps shall be used. (b) No vaporizer shall be equipped
Suitable provision shall be made so with fusible plugs.
that any liquid or condensate that may (c) In industrial and gas manufac-
accumulate inside of the safety relief turing plants, safety relief valves on
valve or its discharge pipe will not vaporizers within a building shall be
render the valve inoperative. If a drain piped to a point outside the building
is used, a means shall be provided to and be discharged upward.
protect the container, adjacent con- (5) Reinstallation of containers. Con-
tainers, piping, or equipment against tainers may be reinstalled if they do
impingement of flame resulting from not show any evidence of harmful ex-
ignition of product escaping from the ternal corrosion or other damage.
drain. Where containers are reinstalled un-
(iii) On all containers which are in- derground, the corrosion resistant
stalled underground and which contain coating shall be put in good condition
no liquid fuel until buried and covered, (see paragraph (c)(7)(vi) of this sec-
the rate of discharge of the spring-load- tion). Where containers are reinstalled
ed relief valve installed thereon may be above ground, the safety devices and
reduced to a minimum of 30 percent of gaging devices shall comply with para-
the rate of discharge specified in paragraph (c)(4) of this section and para-
graph (b)(10)(ii) of this section. Con- graph (b)(19) of this section respec-
tainers so protected shall not be uncov- tively for aboveground containers.
ered after installation until the liquid (6) Capacity of containers. A storage
fuel has been removed therefrom. Con- container shall not exceed 90,000 gal-
tainers which may contain liquid fuel lons water capacity.
before being installed under ground and (7) Installation of storage containers. (i)
before being completely covered with Containers installed above ground, ex-
earth are to be considered aboveground cept as provided in paragraph (c)(7)(vii)
322
of this section, shall be provided with hicular traffic or other causes, then it
substantial masonry or noncombus- shall be:
tible structural supports on firm ma- (a) Placed not less than 2 feet below
sonry foundation. grade, or
(ii) Aboveground containers shall be (b) Otherwise protected against such
supported as follows: physical damage.
(a) Horizontal containers shall be It will not be necessary to cover the
mounted on saddles in such a manner portion of the container to which man-
as to permit expansion and contrac- hole and other connections are affixed;
tion. Structural metal supports may be however, where necessary, protection
employed when they are protected shall be provided against vehicular
against fire in an approved manner. damage. When necessary to prevent
Suitable means of preventing corrosion floating, containers shall be securely
shall be provided on that portion of the anchored or weighted.
container in contact with the founda- (vi)(a) Containers shall be given a
tions or saddles. protective coating before being placed
(b) Containers of 2,000 gallons water under ground. This coating shall be
capacity or less may be installed with equivalent to hot-dip galvanizing or to
nonfireproofed ferrous metal supports two coatings of red lead followed by a
if mounted on concrete pads or foot- heavy coating of coal tar or asphalt. In
ings, and if the distance from the out- lowering the container into place, care
side bottom of the container shell to shall be exercised to prevent damage to
the concrete pad, footing, or the the coating. Any damage to the coat-
ground does not exceed 24 inches. ing shall be repaired before backfilling.
(iii) Any container may be installed (b) Containers shall be set on a firm
with nonfireproofed ferrous metal sup- foundation (firm earth may be used)
ports if mounted on concrete pads or and surrounded with earth or sand
footings, and if the distance from the firmly tamped in place.
outside bottom of the container to the (vii) Containers with foundations at-
ground does not exceed 5 feet, provided tached (portable or semiportable con-
the container is in an isolated location. tainers with suitable steel ‘‘runners’’
(iv) Containers may be partially bur- or ‘‘skids’’ and popularly known in the
ied providing the following require- industry as ‘‘skid tanks’’) shall be de-
ments are met: signed, installed, and used in accord-
(a) The portion of the container ance with these rules subject to the fol-
below the surface and for a vertical dis- lowing provisions:
tance not less than 3 inches above the (a) If they are to be used at a given
surface of the ground is protected to general location for a temporary period
resist corrosion, and the container is not to exceed 6 months they need not
protected against settling and corro- have fire-resisting foundations or sad-
sion as required for fully buried con- dles but shall have adequate ferrous
tainers. metal supports.
(b) Spacing requirements shall be as (b) They shall not be located with the
specified for underground tanks in outside bottom of the container shell
paragraph (b)(6)(ii) of this section. more than 5 feet above the surface of
(c) Relief valve capacity shall be as the ground unless fire-resisting sup-
required for aboveground containers. ports are provided.
(d) Container is located so as not to (c) The bottom of the skids shall not
be subject to vehicular damage, or is be less than 2 inches or more than 12
adequately protected against such inches below the outside bottom of the
damage. container shell.
(e) Filling densities shall be as re- (d) Flanges, nozzles, valves, fittings,
quired for above-ground containers. and the like, having communication
(v) Containers buried underground with the interior of the container, shall
shall be placed so that the top of the be protected against physical damage.
container is not less than 6 inches (e) When not permanently located on
below grade. Where an underground fire-resisting foundations, piping con-
container might be subject to abrasive nections shall be sufficiently flexible

action or physical damage due to ve- to minimize the possibility of breakage
323
or leakage of connections if the con- opening through which there can be a

tainer settles, moves, or is otherwise flow from safety relief valves shall be
displaced. at least 4 inches above the container
(f) Skids, or lugs for attachment of and this opening shall be located in the
skids, shall be secured to the container dome or housing. Underground systems
in accordance with the code or rules shall be so installed that all the above
under which the container is designed openings, including the regulator vent,
and built (with a minimum factor of are located above the normal max-
safety of four) to withstand loading in imum water table.
any direction equal to four times the (iii) All connections to underground
weight of the container and attach- containers shall be located within a
ments when filled to the maximum per- substantial dome, housing, or manhole
missible loaded weight. and with access thereto protected by a
(viii) Field welding where necessary substantial cover.
shall be made only on saddle plates or (9) Drips for condensed gas. Where va-
brackets which were applied by the porized gas on the low-pressure side of
manufacturer of the tank. the system may condense to a liquid at
(ix) For aboveground containers, se- normal operating temperatures and
cure anchorage or adequate pier height pressures, suitable means shall be pro-
shall be provided against possible con- vided for revaporization of the conden-
tainer flotation wherever sufficiently sate.
high floodwater might occur.
(10) Damage from vehicles. When dam-
(x) When permanently installed con-
age to LP-Gas systems from vehicular
tainers are interconnected, provision
traffic is a possibility, precautions
shall be made to compensate for expan-
against such damage shall be taken.
sion, contraction, vibration, and set-
(11) Drains. No drains or blowoff lines
tling of containers, and inter-
shall be directed into or in proximity
connecting piping. Where flexible con-
to sewer systems used for other pur-
nections are used, they shall be of an
poses.
approved type and shall be designed for
a bursting pressure of not less than five (12) General provisions applicable to
times the vapor pressure of the product systems in industrial plants (of 2,000 gal-
at 100 °F. The use of nonmetallic hose lons water capacity and more) and to bulk
is prohibited for permanently inter- filling plants. (i) When standard watch
connecting such containers. service is provided, it shall be extended
(xi) Container assemblies listed for to the LP-Gas installation and per-
interchangeable installation above sonnel properly trained.
ground or under ground shall conform (ii) If loading and unloading are nor-
to the requirements for aboveground mally done during other than daylight
installations with respect to safety re- hours, adequate lights shall be pro-
lief capacity and filling density. For vided to illuminate storage containers,
installation above ground all other re- control valves, and other equipment.
quirements for aboveground installa- (iii) Suitable roadways or means of
tions shall apply. For installation access for extinguishing equipment
under ground all other requirements such as wheeled extinguishers or fire
for underground installations shall department apparatus shall be pro-
apply. vided.
(8) Protection of container accessories. (iv) To minimize trespassing or tam-
(i) Valves, regulating, gaging, and pering, the area which includes con-
other container accessory equipment tainer appurtenances, pumping equip-
shall be protected against tampering ment, loading and unloading facilities,
and physical damage. Such accessories and cylinder-filling facilities shall be
shall also be so protected during the enclosed with at least a 6-foot-high in-
transit of containers intended for industrial type fence unless otherwise
stallation underground. adequately protected. There shall be at
(ii) On underground or combination least two means of emergency access.
aboveground-underground containers, (13) Container-charging plants. (i) The
the service valve handwheel, the ter- container-charging room shall be lo-
minal for connecting the hose, and the cated not less than:
324
(a) Ten feet from bulk storage con- hose line with a combination fog noz-
tainers. zle. A shelter shall be provided to pro-
(b) [Reserved] tect the hose and its conveyor from the
(ii) Tank truck filling station outlets weather.
shall be located not less than: (15) [Reserved]
(a) [Reserved] (16) Lighting. Electrical equipment
(b) Ten feet from pumps and compres- and installations shall conform to
sors if housed in one or more separate paragraphs (b) (17) and (18) of this sec-
buildings. tion.
(iii) The pumps or compressors may (17) Vaporizers for internal combustion
be located in the container-charging engines. The provisions of paragraph
room or building, in a separate build- (e)(8) of this section shall apply.
ing, or outside of buildings. When (18) Gas regulating and mixing equip-
housed in a separate building, such ment for internal combustion engines. The
building (a small noncombustible provisions of paragraph (e)(9) of this
weather cover is not to be construed as section shall apply.
a building) shall be located not less (e) Liquefied petroleum gas as a motor
than: fuel—(1) Application. (i) This paragraph
(a) Ten feet from bulk storage tanks. applies to internal combustion engines,
(b) [Reserved] fuel containers, and pertinent equip-
(c) Twenty-five feet from sources of ment for the use of liquefied petroleum
ignition. gases as a motor fuel on easily mov-
(iv) When a part of the container- able, readily portable units including
charging building is to be used for a self-propelled vehicles.
boiler room or where open flames or (ii) Fuel containers and pertinent
similar sources of ignition exist or are equipment for internal combustion en-
employed, the space to be so occupied gines using liquefied petroleum gas
shall be separated from container where installation is of the stationary
charging room by a partition wall or type are covered by paragraph (d) of
walls of fire-resistant construction this section. This paragraph does not
continuous from floor to roof or ceil- apply to containers for transportation
ing. Such separation walls shall be of liquefied petroleum gases nor to ma-
without openings and shall be joined to rine fuel use. All requirements of para-
the floor, other walls, and ceiling or graph (b) of this section apply to this
roof in a manner to effect a permanent paragraph, unless otherwise noted in
gas-tight joint. paragraph (b) of this section.
(v) Electrical equipment and installa- (2) General. (i) Fuel may be used from
tions shall conform with paragraphs (b) the cargo tank of a truck while in tran-
(17) and (18) of this section. sit, but not from cargo tanks on trail-
(14) Fire protection. (i) Each bulk ers or semitrailers. The use of fuel
plant shall be provided with at least from the cargo tanks to operate sta-
one approved portable fire extinguisher tionary engines is permitted providing
having a minimum rating of 12–B, C. wheels are securely blocked.
(ii) In industrial installations involv- (ii) Passenger-carrying vehicles shall
ing containers of 150,000 gallons aggre- not be fueled while passengers are on
gate water capacity or more, provision board.
shall be made for an adequate supply of (iii) Industrial trucks (including lift
water at the container site for fire pro- trucks) equipped with permanently
tection in the container area, unless mounted fuel containers shall be
other adequate means for fire control charged outdoors. Charging equipment
are provided. Water hydrants shall be shall comply with the provisions of
readily accessible and so spaced as to paragraph (h) of this section.
provide water protection for all con- (iv) LP-Gas fueled industrial trucks
tainers. Sufficient lengths of firehose shall comply with the Standard for
shall be provided at each hydrant loca- Type Designations, Areas of Use, Main-
tion on a hose cart, or other means tenance and Operation of Powered In-
provided to facilitate easy movement dustrial Trucks, NFPA 505–1969, which
of the hose in the container area. It is is incorporated by reference as speci-

desirable to equip the outlet of each fied in § 1910.6.
325
(v) Engines on vehicles shall be shut containers on passenger-carrying vehi-

down while fueling if the fueling oper- cles shall be installed as far from the
ation involves venting to the atmos- engine as is practicable, and the pas-
phere. senger space and any space containing
(3) Design pressure and classification of radio equipment shall be sealed from
fuel containers. (i) Except as covered in the container space to prevent direct
paragraphs (e)(3) (ii) and (iii) of this seepage of gas to these spaces. The con-
section, containers shall be in accord- tainer compartment shall be vented to
ance with Table H–32. the outside. In case the fuel container
(ii) Fuel containers for use in indus- is mounted near the engine or the ex-
trial trucks (including lift trucks) haust system, the container shall be
shall be either DOT containers author- shielded against direct heat radiation.
ized for LP-Gas service having a min- (ii) Containers shall be installed with
imum service pressure of 240 p.s.i.g. or as much clearance as practicable but
minimum Container Type 250. Under never less than the minimum road
1950 and later ASME codes, this means clearance of the vehicle under max-
a 312.5–p.s.i.g. design pressure con- imum spring deflection. This minimum
tainer. clearance shall be to the bottom of the
TABLE H–32 container or to the lowest fitting on
the container or housing, whichever is
Minimum design pressure of con- lower.
tainer, lb. per sq. in. gage
For gases (iii) Permanent and removable fuel
with vapor 1949 edition of ASME containers shall be securely mounted
press. Not 1949 and Code (Par. U–200,
Con- to exceed earlier edi- U–201); 1950, 1952, to prevent jarring loose, slipping, or ro-
tainer lb. per sq. tions of 1956, 1959, 1962, tating, and the fastenings shall be de-
type in. gage at ASME 1965, and 1968 (Divi-
100 °F. Code (Par. sion 1) editions of signed and constructed to withstand
(37.8 °C.) U–68, U– ASME Code; All edi- static loading in any direction equal to
69) tions of API-ASME
Code 2 twice the weight of the tank and at-
1 200
tachments when filled with fuel using a
215Z 200 250
safety factor of not less than four
1 Container type may be increased by increments of 25.
The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 100% of
based on the ultimate strength of the
the container type designation when constructed under 1949 material to be used. Field welding,
or earlier editions of the ASME Code (Par. U–68 and U–69). when necessary, shall be made only on
The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 125% of
the container type designation when constructed under: (1) saddle plates, lugs or brackets, origi-
the 1949 ASME Code (Par. U–200 and U–201), (2) 1950, nally attached to the container by the
1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions
of the ASME Code, and (3) all editions of the API-ASME tank manufacturer.
Code.
2 Construction of containers under the API-ASME Code is (iv) Fuel containers on buses shall be
not authorized after July 1, 1961. permanently installed.
(iii) Containers manufactured and (v) Containers from which vapor only
maintained under DOT specifications is to be withdrawn shall be installed
and regulations may be used as fuel and equipped with suitable connections
containers. When so used they shall to minimize the accidental withdrawal
conform to all requirements of this of liquid.
paragraph. (5) Valves and accessories. (i) Con-
(iv) All container inlets and outlets tainer valves and accessories shall have
except safety relief valves and gaging a rated working pressure of at least 250
devices shall be labeled to designate p.s.i.g., and shall be of a type suitable
whether they communicate with vapor for liquefied petroleum gas service.
or liquid space. Labels may be on (ii) The filling connection shall be
valves. fitted with an approved double back-
(4) Installation of fuel containers. (i) pressure check valve, or a positive
Containers shall be located in a place shutoff in conjunction with an internal
and in a manner to minimize the possi- back-pressure check valve. On a remov-
bility of damage to the container. Con- able container the filler valve may be a
tainers located in the rear of trucks hand operated shutoff valve with an in-
and buses, when protected by substan- ternal excess flow valve. Main shutoff
tial bumpers, will be considered in con- valves on the container on liquid and
formance with this requirement. Fuel vapor lines must be readily accessible.
326
(iii) With the exceptions of paragraph the fuel system to minimize the escape
(e)(5)(iv)(c) of this section, filling con- of fuel when the containers are ex-
nections equipped with approved auto- changed. This may be accomplished by
matic back-pressure check valves, and either of the following methods:
safety relief valves, all connections to (1) Using an approved automatic
containers having openings for the flow quick-closing coupling (a type closing
of gas in excess of a No. 54 drill size in both directions when uncoupled) in
shall be equipped with approved auto- the fuel line, or
matic excess flow valves to prevent dis- (2) Closing the valve at the fuel con-
charge of content in case connections tainer and allowing the engine to run
are broken. until the fuel in the line is consumed.
(iv) Liquid-level gaging devices: (6) Piping—including pipe, tubing, and
(a) Variable liquid-level gages which fittings. (i) Pipe from fuel container to
require the venting of fuel to the at- first-stage regulator shall be not less
mosphere shall not be used on fuel con- than schedule 80 wrought iron or steel
tainers of industrial trucks (including (black or galvanized), brass or copper;
lift trucks). or seamless copper, brass, or steel tub-
(b) On portable containers that may ing. Steel tubing shall have a min-
be filled in the vertical and/or hori- imum wall thickness of 0.049 inch.
zontal position, the fixed liquid-level Steel pipe or tubing shall be ade-
gage must indicate maximum per- quately protected against exterior cor-
mitted filling level for both vertical rosion. Copper tubing shall be types K
and horizontal filling with the con- or L or equivalent having a minimum
tainer oriented to place the safety re- wall thickness of 0.032 inch. Approved
lief valve in communication with the flexible connections may be used be-
vapor space. tween container and regulator or be-
(c) In the case of containers used tween regulator and gas-air mixer
solely in farm tractor service, and within the limits of approval. The use
charged at a point at least 50 feet from of aluminum pipe or tubing is prohib-
any important building, the fixed liq- ited. In the case of removable con-
uid-level gaging device may be so containers an approved flexible connection
structed that the outward flow of con- shall be used between the container
tainer content exceeds that passed by a and the fuel line.
No. 54 drill size opening, but in no case (ii) All piping shall be installed,
shall the flow exceed that passed by a braced, and supported so as to reduce
No. 31 drill-size opening. An excess flow to a minimum the possibility of vibra-
valve is not required. Fittings equipped tion strains or wear.
with such restricted drill size opening (7) Safety devices. (i) Spring-loaded in-
and container on which they are used ternal type safety relief valves shall be
shall be marked to indicate the size of used on all motor fuel containers.
the opening. (ii) The discharge outlet from safety
(d) All valves and connections on relief valves shall be located on the
containers shall be adequately pro- outside of enclosed spaces and as far as
tected to prevent damage due to acci- practicable from possible sources of ig-
dental contact with stationary objects nition, and vented upward within 45 de-
or from loose objects thrown up from grees of the vertical in such a manner
the road, and all valves shall be safe- as to prevent impingement of escaping
guarded against damage due to colli- gas upon containers, or parts of vehi-
sion, overturning or other accident. cles, or on vehicles in adjacent lines of
For farm tractors where parts of the traffic. A rain cap or other protector
vehicle provide such protection to shall be used to keep water and dirt
valves and fittings, the foregoing re- from collecting in the valve.
quirements shall be considered ful- (iii) When a discharge line from the
filled. However, on removable type con- container safety relief valve is used,
tainers the protection for the fittings the line shall be metallic, other than
shall be permanently attached to the aluminum, and shall be sized, located,
container. and maintained so as not to restrict
(e) When removable fuel containers the required flow of gas from the safety
are used, means shall be provided in relief valve. Such discharge line shall
327
be able to withstand the pressure re- reducing equipment shall be installed

sulting from the discharge of vapor in a secure manner between the fuel
when the safety relief valve is in the supply container and gas-air mixer for
full open position. When flexibility is the purpose of reducing the pressure of
necessary, flexible metal hose or tub- the fuel delivered to the gas-air mixer.
ing shall be used. (ii) An approved automatic shutoff
(iv) Portable containers equipped for valve shall be provided in the fuel sys-
volumetric filling may be filled in ei- tem at some point ahead of the inlet of
ther the vertical or horizontal position the gas-air mixer, designed to prevent
only when oriented to place the safety flow of fuel to the mixer when the igni-
relief valve in communication with the tion is off and the engine is not run-
vapor space. ning. In the case of industrial trucks
(v) Paragraph (b)(10)(xii) of this sec- and engines operating in buildings
tion for hydrostatic relief valves shall other than those used exclusively to
apply. house engines, the automatic shutoff
(8) Vaporizers. (i) Vaporizers and any valve shall be designed to operate if the
part thereof and other devices that engine should stop. Atmospheric type
may be subjected to container pressure regulators (zero governors) shall be
shall have a design pressure of at least considered adequate as an automatic
250 p.s.i.g. shutoff valve only in cases of outdoor
(ii) Each vaporizer shall have a valve operation such as farm tractors, con-
or suitable plug which will permit sub- struction equipment, irrigation pump
stantially complete draining of the va- engines, and other outdoor stationary
porizer. It shall be located at or near engine installations.
the lowest portion of the section occu- (iii) The source of the air for combus-
pied by the water or other heating me- tion shall be completely isolated from
dium. the passenger compartment, ven-
(iii) Vaporizers shall be securely fas-
tilating system, or air-conditioning
tened so as to minimize the possibility
system.
of becoming loosened.
(10) [Reserved]
(iv) Each vaporizer shall be perma-
nently marked at a visible point as fol- (11) Stationary engines in buildings.
lows: Stationary engines and gas turbines in-
(a) With the design pressure of the stalled in buildings, including portable
fuel-containing portion in p.s.i.g. engines used instead of or to supple-
(b) With the water capacity of the ment stationary engines, shall comply
fuel-containing portion of the vapor- with the Standard for the Institution
izer in pounds. and Use of Stationary Combustion En-
(v) Devices to supply heat directly to gines and Gas Turbines, NFPA 37–1970,
a fuel container shall be equipped with and the appropriate provisions of para-
an automatic device to cut off the sup- graphs (b), (c), and (d) of this section.
ply of heat before the pressure inside (12) Portable engines in buildings. (i)
the fuel container reaches 80 percent of Portable engines may be used in build-
the start to discharge pressure setting ings only for emergency use, except as
of the safety relief device on the fuel provided by subparagraph (11) of this
container. paragraph.
(vi) Engine exhaust gases may be (ii) Exhaust gases shall be discharged
used as a direct source of heat supply to outside the building or to an area
for the vaporization of fuel if the mate- where they will not constitute a haz-
rials of construction of those parts of ard.
the vaporizer in contact with exhaust (iii) Provision shall be made to sup-
gases are resistant to the corrosive ac- ply sufficient air for combustion and
tion of exhaust gases and the vaporizer cooling.
system is designed to prevent excessive (iv) An approved automatic shutoff
pressures. valve shall be provided in the fuel sys-
(vii) Vaporizers shall not be equipped tem ahead of the engine, designed to
with fusible plugs. prevent flow of fuel to the engine when
(9) Gas regulating and mixing equip- the ignition is off or if the engine
ment. (i) Approved automatic pressure should stop.
328
(v) The capacity of LP-Gas con- (a) By setting into recess of con-
tainers used with such engines shall tainer to prevent the possibility of
comply with the applicable occupancy their being struck if the container is
provision of paragraph (c)(5) of this sec- dropped upon a flat surface, or
tion. (b) By ventilated cap or collar, fas-
(13) Industrial trucks inside buildings. tened to container capable of with-
(i) LP-Gas-fueled industrial trucks are standing blow from any direction
permitted to be used in buildings and equivalent to that of a 30-pound weight
structures. dropped 4 feet. Construction must be
(ii) No more than two LP-Gas con- such that a blow will not be trans-
tainers shall be used on an industrial mitted to a valve or other connection.
truck for motor fuel purposes. (iv) The outlet valves of containers in
(iii)–(iv) [Reserved] storage shall be closed.
(v) Industrial trucks shall not be (v) Empty containers which have
parked and left unattended in areas of been in LP-Gas service when stored in-
possible excessive heat or sources of ig- side, shall be considered as full con-
nition. tainers for the purpose of determining
the maximum quantity of LP-Gas per-
(14) Garaging LP-Gas-fueled vehicles.
mitted by this paragraph.
(i) LP-Gas-fueled vehicles may be
(3) [Reserved]
stored or serviced inside garages pro-
(4) Storage within buildings not fre-
vided there are no leaks in the fuel sys-
quented by the public (such as industrial
tem and the fuel tanks are not filled
buildings). (i) The quantity of LP-Gas
beyond the maximum filling capacity
stored shall not exceed 300 pounds (ap-
specified in paragraph (b)(12)(i) of this
proximately 2,550 cubic feet in vapor
section.
form) except as provided in subpara-
(ii) LP-Gas-fueled vehicles being re- graph (5) of this paragraph.
paired in garages shall have the con- (ii) Containers carried as a part of
tainer shutoff valve closed except when service equipment on highway mobile
fuel is required for engine operation. vehicles are not to be considered in the
(iii) Such vehicles shall not be total storage capacity in subdivision (i)
parked near sources of heat, open of this subparagraph provided such ve-
flames, or similar sources of ignition hicles are stored in private garages,
or near open pits unless such pits are and are limited to one container per
adequately ventilated. vehicle with an LP-Gas capacity of not
(f) Storage of containers awaiting use or more than 100 pounds. All container
resale—(1) Application. This paragraph valves shall be closed.
shall apply to the storage of portable (5) Storage within special buildings or
containers not in excess of 1,000 pounds rooms. (i) The quantity of LP-Gas
water capacity, filled or partially stored in special buildings or rooms
filled, at user location but not con- shall not exceed 10,000 pounds.
nected for use, or in storage for resale (ii) The walls, floors, and ceilings of
by dealers or resellers. This paragraph container storage rooms that are with-
shall not apply to containers stored at in or adjacent to other parts of the
charging plants or at plants devoted building shall be constructed of mate-
primarily to the storage and distribu- rial having at least a 2-hour fire resist-
tion of LP-Gas or other petroleum ance rating.
products. (iii) A portion of the exterior walls or
(2) General. (i) Containers in storage roof having an area not less than 10
shall be located so as to minimize ex- percent of that of the combined area of
posure to excessive temperature rise, the enclosing walls and roof shall be of
physical damage, or tampering by un- explosion relieving construction.
authorized persons. (iv) Each opening from such storage
(ii) Containers when stored inside rooms to other parts of the building
shall not be located near exits, stair- shall be protected by a 11⁄2 hour (B) fire
ways, or in areas normally used or indoor listed by a nationally recognized
tended for the safe exit of people. testing laboratory. Refer to § 1910.7 for
(iii) Container valves shall be pro- definition of nationally recognized

tected while in storage as follows: testing laboratory.
329
(v) Such rooms shall have no open requirements of paragraph (b) of this
flames for heating or lighting. section apply to this paragraph unless
(vi) Such rooms shall be adequately otherwise noted.
ventilated both top and bottom to the (2) Design pressure and classification of
outside only. The openings from such storage containers. Storage containers
vents shall be at least 5 feet away from shall be designed and classified in ac-
any other opening into any building. cordance with Table H–34.
(vii) The floors of such rooms shall
not be below ground level. Any space TABLE H–34
below the floor shall be of solid fill or Minimum design pressure of con-
properly ventilated to the open air. tainer, lb. per sq. in. gage
(viii) Such storage rooms shall not be For gases
with vapor 1949 edition of ASME
located adjoining the line of property Con- press. Not 1949 and Code (Par. U–200,
occupied by schools, churches, hos- to exceed earlier edi- U–201); 1950, 1952,
tainer lb. per sq. tions of 1956, 1959, 1962,
pitals, athletic fields or other points of type in. gage at ASME 1965, and 1968 (Divi-
public gathering. 100 °F. Code (Par. sion 1) editions of
(37.8 °C.) U–68, U– ASME Code; All edi-
(ix) Fixed electrical equipment shall 69) tions of API-ASME
be installed in accordance with para- Code 2
graph (b)(18) of this section. 1 200 215 200 250
(6) Storage outside of buildings. (i) 1 Container type may be increased by increments of 25.
Storage outside of buildings, for con- The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 100 per-
tainers awaiting use or resale, shall be cent of the container type designation when constructed
under 1949 or earlier editions of the ASME Code (Par. U–68
located in accordance with Table H–33 and U–69). The minimum design pressure of containers shall
with respect to: be 125 percent of the container type designation when con-
structed under: (1) The 1949 ASME Code (Paragraphs U–200
(a) The nearest important building or and U–201), (2) 1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and
group of buildings; 1968 (Division 1) editions of the ASME Code, and (3) all edi-
tions of the API-ASME Code.
(b) [Reserved] 2 Construction of containers under the API-ASME Code is
(c) Busy thoroughfares; not authorized after July 1, 1961.
TABLE H–33 (3) Container valves and accessories. (i)

A filling connection on the container
Quantity of LP-Gas Stored Distance shall be fitted with one of the fol-
500 pounds or less .............................................. 0
lowing:
501 to 2,500 pounds ........................................... 10 (a) A combination back-pressure
2,501 to 6,000 pounds ........................................ 10 feet check and excess flow valve.
6,001 to 10,000 pounds ...................................... 20 feet (b) One double or two single back-
Over 10,000 pounds ............................................ 25 feet
pressure valves.
1 Container or containers shall be at least 10 feet from any
building on adjoining property, any sidewalk, or any of the ex-
(c) A positive shutoff valve, in con-
posures described in § 1910.110(f)(6)(i) (c) or (d) of this junction with either,
paragraph. (1) An internal back-pressure valve,
(ii) Containers shall be in a suitable or
enclosure or otherwise protected (2) On internal excess flow valve.
against tampering. In lieu of an excess flow valve, filling
(7) Fire protection. Storage locations connections may be fitted with a
other than supply depots separated and quick-closing internal valve, which
located apart from dealer, reseller, or shall remain closed except during oper-
user establishments shall be provided ating periods. The mechanism for such
with at least one approved portable fire valves may be provided with a sec-
extinguisher having a minimum rating ondary control which will cause it to
of 8–B, C. close automatically in case of fire.
(g) [Reserved] When a fusible plug is used its melting
(h) Liquefied petroleum gas service sta- point shall not exceed 220 °F.
tions—(1) Application. This paragraph (ii) A filling pipe inlet terminal not
applies to storage containers, and dis- on the container shall be fitted with a
pensing devices, and pertinent equip- positive shutoff valve in conjunction
ment in service stations where LP-Gas with either;
is stored and is dispensed into fuel (a) A black pressure check valve, or
tanks of motor vehicles. See paragraph (b) An excess flow check valve.
(e) of this section for requirements cov- (iii) All openings in the container ex-
ering use of LP-Gas as a motor fuel. All cept those listed below shall be
330
equipped with approved excess flow capacity greater than 2,000 gallons, the
check valves: discharge from the safety relief valves
(a) Filling connections as provided in shall be vented away from the con-
subdivision (i) of this subparagraph. tainer vertically upwards to a point at
(b) Safety relief connections as pro- least 7 feet above the container. Suit-
vided in paragraph (b)(7)(ii) of this sec- able provisions shall be made so that
tion. any liquid or condensate that may ac-
(c) Liquid-level gaging devices as pro- cumulate inside of the relief valve or
vided in paragraphs (b)(7)(iv) and its discharge pipe will not render the
(19)(iv) of this section. valve inoperative. If a drain is used, a
(d) Pressure gage connections as pro- means shall be provided to protect the
vided in paragraph (b)(7)(v) of this sec-
container, adjacent containers, piping,
tion.
or equipment against impingement of
(iv) All container inlets and outlets
except those listed below shall be la- flame resulting from ignition of the
beled to designate whether they con- product escaping from the drain.
nect with vapor or liquid (labels may (iii) Underground containers shall be
be on valves): provided with safety relief valves as
(a) Safety relief valves. follows:
(b) Liquid-level gaging devices. (a) The discharge from safety-relief
(c) Pressure gages. valves shall be piped vertically upward
(v) Each storage container shall be to a point at least 10 feet above the
provided with a suitable pressure gage. ground. The discharge lines or pipes
(4) Safety-relief valves. (i) All safety- shall be adequately supported and pro-
relief devices shall be installed as fol- tected against physical damage.
lows: (b) [Reserved]
(a) On the container and directly con- (c) If no liquid is put into a container
nected with the vapor space. until after it is buried and covered, the
(b) Safety-relief valves and discharge rate of discharge of the relief valves
piping shall be protected against phys- may be reduced to not less than 30 per-
ical damage. The outlet shall be pro-
cent of the rate shown in paragraph
vided with loose-fitting rain caps.
(b)(10)(ii) of this section. If liquid fuel
There shall be no return bends or re-
strictions in the discharge piping. is present during installation of con-
(c) The discharge from two or more tainers, the rate of discharge shall be
safety relief valves having the same the same as for aboveground con-
pressure settings may be run into a tainers. Such containers shall not be
common discharge header. The cross- uncovered until emptied of liquid fuel.
sectional area of such header shall be (5) Capacity of liquid containers. Indi-
at least equal to the sum of the cross- vidual liquid storage containers shall
sectional areas of the individual dis- not exceed 30,000 gallons water capac-
charges. ity.
(d) Discharge from any safety relief (6) Installation of storage containers.
device shall not terminate in any (i)(a) Each storage container used ex-
building nor beneath any building. clusively in service station operation
(ii) Aboveground containers shall be shall comply with the following table
provided with safety relief valves as which specifies minimum distances to
follows: a building and groups of buildings.
(a) The rate of discharge, which may
be provided by one or more valves, Minimum distances
shall be not less than that specified in Above- Between
Water capacity per container (gal-
paragraph (b)(10)(ii) of this section. lons) ground above-
and underground
(b) The discharge from safety relief ground containers
valves shall be vented to the open air (feet) (feet)
unobstructed and vertically upwards in Up to 2,000 .................................... 25 3
such a manner as to prevent any im- Over 2,000 ..................................... 50 5
pingement of escaping gas upon the
NOTE: The above distances may be reduced to not less

container; loose-fitting rain caps shall than 10 feet for service station buildings of other than wood
be used. On a container having a water frame construction.
331
(b) Readily ignitible material includ- quired on prefabricated storage and

ing weeds and long dry grass, shall be pump assemblies, mounted on a com-
removed within 10 feet of containers. mon base, with container bottom not
(c) The minimum separation between more than 24 inches above ground and
LP-Gas containers and flammable liq- whose water capacity is 2,000 gallons or
uid tanks shall be 20 feet and the min- less if the piping connected to the stor-
imum separation between a container age and pump assembly is sufficiently
and the centerline of the dike shall be flexible to minimize the possibility of
10 feet. breakage or leakage in the event of
(d) LP-Gas containers located near failure of the container supports.
flammable liquid containers shall be (iii) Underground containers shall be
protected against the flow or accumu- installed in accordance with this sub-
lation of flammable liquids by diking, division.
diversion curbs, or grading. (a) Containers shall be given a pro-
(e) LP-Gas containers shall not be lo- tective coating before being placed
cated within diked areas for flammable under ground. This coating shall be
liquid containers. equivalent to hot-dip galvanizing or to
(f) Field welding is permitted only on two coatings of red lead followed by a
saddle plates or brackets which were heavy coating of coal tar or asphalt. In
applied by the container manufacturer. lowering the container into place, care
(g) When permanently installed con- shall be exercised to minimize abrasion
tainers are interconnected, provision or other damage to the coating. Dam-
shall be made to compensate for expan- age to the coating shall be repaired be-
sion, contraction, vibration, and set- fore back-filling.
tling of containers and interconnecting (b) Containers shall be set on a firm
piping. Where flexible connections are foundation (firm earth may be used)
used, they shall be of an approved type and surrounded with earth or sand
and shall be designed for a bursting firmly tamped in place. Backfill should
pressure of not less than five times the be free of rocks or other abrasive mate-
vapor pressure of the product at 100 °F. rials.
The use of nonmetallic hose is prohib- (c) A minimum of 2 feet of earth
ited for interconnecting such con- cover shall be provided. Where ground
tainers. conditions make compliance with this
(h) Where high water table or flood requirement impractical, equivalent
conditions may be encountered protec- protection against physical damage
tion against container flotation shall shall be provided. The portion of the
be provided. container to which manhole and other
(ii) Aboveground containers shall be connections are attached need not be
installed in accordance with this sub- covered. If the location is subjected to
division. vehicular traffic, containers shall be
(a) Containers may be installed hori- protected by a concrete slab or other
zontally or vertically. cover adequate to prevent the weight
(b) Containers shall be protected by of a loaded vehicle imposing con-
crash rails or guards to prevent phys- centrated direct loads on the container
ical damage unless they are so pro- shell.
tected by virtue of their location. Vehi- (7) Protection of container fittings.
cles shall not be serviced within 10 feet Valves, regulators, gages, and other
of containers. container fittings shall be protected
(c) Container foundations shall be of against tampering and physical dam-
substantial masonry or other non- age.
combustible material. Containers shall (8) Transport truck unloading point. (i)
be mounted on saddles which shall per- During unloading, the transport truck
mit expansion and contraction, and shall not be parked on public thorough-
shall provide against the excessive con- fares and shall be at least 5 feet from
centration of stresses. Corrosion pro- storage containers, and shall be posi-
tection shall be provided for tank- tioned so that shutoff valves are read-
mounting areas. Structural metal con- ily accessible.
tainer supports shall be protected (ii) The filling pipe inlet terminal
against fire. This protection is not re- shall not be located within a building
332
nor within 10 feet of any building or LP-Gas service and shall be designed
driveway. It shall be protected against for a minimum working pressure of 250
physical damage. p.s.i.g.
(9) Piping, valves, and fittings. (i) Pip- (ii) Provisions shall be made for vent-
ing may be underground, above ground, ing LP-Gas contained in a dispensing
or a combination of both. It shall be device to a safe location.
well supported and protected against (iii) Pumps used to transfer LP-Gas
physical damage and corrosion. shall be equipped to allow control of
(ii) Piping laid beneath driveways the flow and to prevent leakage or ac-
shall be installed to prevent physical cidental discharge. Means shall be pro-
damage by vehicles. vided outside the dispensing device to
(iii) Piping shall be wrought iron or
readily shut off the power in the event
steel (black or galvanized), brass or
of fire or accident.
copper pipe; or seamless copper, brass,
or steel tubing and shall be suitable for (iv) A manual shutoff valve and an
a minimum pressure of 250 p.s.i.g. Pipe excess flow check valve shall be in-
joints may be screwed, flanged, brazed, stalled downstream of the pump and
or welded. The use of aluminum alloy ahead of the dispenser inlet.
piping or tubing is prohibited. (v)(a) Dispensing hose shall be resist-
(iv) All shutoff valves (liquid or gas) ant to the action of LP-Gas in the liq-
shall be suitable for liquefied petro- uid phase and designed for a minimum
leum gas service and designed for not bursting pressure of 1,250 p.s.i.g.
less than the maximum pressure to (b) An excess flow check valve or
which they may be subjected. Valves automatic shutoff valve shall be in-
which may be subjected to container stalled at the terminus of the liquid
pressure shall have a rated working line at the point of attachment of the
pressure of at least 250 p.s.i.g. dispensing hose.
(v) All materials used for valve seats, (vi)(a) LP-Gas dispensing devices
packing, gaskets, diaphragms, etc., shall be located not less than 10 feet
shall be resistant to the action of LP- from aboveground storage containers
Gas. greater than 2,000 gallons water capac-
(vi) Fittings shall be steel, malleable ity. The dispensing devices shall not be
iron, or brass having a minimum work- less than 20 feet from any building (not
ing pressure of 250 p.s.i.g. Cast iron including canopies), basement, cellar,
pipe fittings, such as ells, tees, and pit, or line of adjoining property which
unions shall not be used. may be built upon and not less than 10
(vii) All piping shall be tested after feet from sidewalks, streets, or thor-
assembly and proved free from leaks at oughfares. No drains or blowoff lines
not less than normal operating pres- shall be directed into or in proximity
sures. to the sewer systems used for other
(viii) Provision shall be made for ex- purposes.
pansion, contraction, jarring, and vi-
(b) LP-Gas dispensing devices shall
bration, and for settling. This may be
be installed on a concrete foundation
accomplished by flexible connections.
or as part of a complete storage and
(10) Pumps and accessories. All pumps
and accessory equipment shall be suit- dispensing assembly mounted on a
able for LP-Gas service, and designed common base, and shall be adequately
for not less than the maximum pres- protected from physical damage.
sure to which they may be subjected. (c) LP-Gas dispensing devices shall
Accessories shall have a minimum not be installed within a building ex-
rated working pressure of 250 p.s.i.g. cept that they may be located under a
Positive displacement pumps shall be weather shelter or canopy provided
equipped with suitable pressure actu- this area is not enclosed on more than
ated bypass valves permitting flow two sides. If the enclosing sides are ad-
from pump discharge to storage con- jacent to each other, the area shall be
tainer or pump suction. properly ventilated.
(11) Dispensing devices. (i) Meters, (vii) The dispensing of LP-Gas into
vapor separators, valves, and fittings the fuel container of a vehicle shall be
in the dispenser shall be suitable for performed by a competent attendant
333
who shall remain at the LP-Gas dis- (3) Retroactivity. Unless otherwise
penser during the entire transfer oper- stated, it is not intended that the pro-
ation. visions of this section be retroactive.
(12) Additional rules. There shall be no (i) Existing plants, appliances, equip-
smoking on the driveway of service ment, buildings, structures, and instal-
stations in the dispensing areas or lations for the storage, handling or use
transport truck unloading areas. Con- of LP-Gas, which were in compliance
spicuous signs prohibiting smoking with the current provisions of the Na-
shall be posted within sight of the cus- tional Fire Protection Association
tomer being served. Letters on such Standard for the Storage and Handling
signs shall be not less than 4 inches of Liquefied Petroleum Gases NFPA
high. The motors of all vehicles being No. 58, at the time of manufacture or
fueled shall be shut off during the fuel- installation may be continued in use, if
ing operations. such continued use does not constitute
(13) Electrical. Electrical equipment a recognized hazard that is causing or
and installations shall conform to is likely to cause death or serious
paragraphs (b) (17) and (18) of this sec- physical harm to employees.
tion. (ii) Stocks of equipment and appli-
(14) Fire protection. Each service sta- ances on hand in such locations as
tion shall be provided with at least one manufacturers’ storage, distribution
approved portable fire extinguisher warehouses, and dealers’ storage and
having at least an 8–B, C, rating. showrooms, which were in compliance
(i) Scope—(1) Application. (i) Para- with the current provisions of the Na-
graph (b) of this section applies to in- tional Fire Protection Association
stallations made in accordance with Standard for the Storage and Handling
the requirements of paragraphs (c), (d), of Liquefied Petroleum Gases, NFPA
(e), (g), and (h) of this section, except No. 58, at the time of manufacture,
as noted in each of those paragraphs.
may be placed in service, if such use
(ii) Paragraphs (c) through (h) of this
does not constitute a recognized hazard
section apply as provided in each of
that is causing or is likely to cause
those paragraphs.
death or serious physical harm to em-
(2) Inapplicability. This section does
ployees.
not apply to:
(i) Marine and pipeline terminals, [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43
natural gas processing plants, refin- FR 49747, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10,
eries, or tank farms other than those 1984; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 25094,
at industrial sites. June 20, 1990; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 58 FR
35309, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9237, 9238, Mar. 7,
(ii) LP-Gas refrigerated storage sys-
1996; 63 FR 33466, June 18, 1998; 72 FR 71069,
tems; Dec. 14, 2007]
(iii) LP-Gas when used with oxygen.
The requirements of § 1910.253 shall § 1910.111 Storage and handling of an-
apply to such use; hydrous ammonia.
(iv) LP-Gas when used in utility gas
(a) General—(1) Scope. (i) This stand-
plants. The National Fire Protection
ard is intended to apply to the design,
Association Standard for the Storage
construction, location, installation,
and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum
and operation of anhydrous ammonia
Gases at Utility Gas Plants, NFPA No.
systems including refrigerated ammo-
59–1968, shall apply to such use;
nia storage systems.
(v) Low-pressure (not in excess of
one-half pound per square inch or 14 (ii) This standard does not apply to:
inches water column) LP-Gas piping (a) Ammonia manufacturing plants.
systems, and the installation and oper- (b) Refrigeration plants where ammo-
ation of residential and commercial ap- nia is used solely as a refrigerant.
pliances including their inlet connec- (2) Definitions. As used in this sec-
tions, supplied through such systems. tion.
For such systems, the National Fire (i) Appurtenances. All devices such as
Protection Association Standard for pumps, compressors, safety relief de-
the Installation of Gas Appliances and vices, liquid-level gaging devices,

Gas Piping, NFPA 54–1969 shall apply. valves and pressure gages.
334
(ii) Cylinder. A container of 1,000 to be safe by a nationally recognized

pounds of water capacity or less con- testing laboratory; or
structed in accordance with Depart- (iii) It is a type which no nationally
ment of Transportation specifications. recognized testing laboratory does, or
(iii) Code. The Boiler and Pressure will undertake to, accept, certify, list,
Vessel Code, Section VIII, Unfired label, or determine to be safe; and such
Pressure Vessels of the American Soci- equipment is inspected or tested by
ety of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)— any Federal, State, municipal, or other
1968. local authority responsible for enforc-
(iv) Container. Includes all vessels, ing occupational safety provisions of a
tanks, cylinders, or spheres used for Federal, State, municipal or other
transportation, storage, or application local law, code, or regulation per-
of anhydrous ammonia. taining to the storage, handling, trans-
(v) DOT. U.S. Department of Trans- port, and use of anhydrous ammonia,
portation. and found to be in compliance with ei-
(vi) Design pressure is identical to the ther the provisions of the American
term Maximum Allowable Working Pres- National Standard for the Storage and
sure used in the Code. Handling of Anhydrous Ammonia,
(vii) Farm vehicle (implement of hus- K61.1, or the Fertilizer Institute Stand-
bandry). A vehicle for use on a farm on ards for the Storage and Handling of
which is mounted a container of not Agricultural Anhydrous Ammonia, M–
over 1,200 gallons water capacity. 1, in effect at the time of installation;
(viii) Filling density. the percent ratio
or
of the weight of the gas in a container
(iv) It is a custom-designed and cus-
to the weight of water at 60 °F. that
tom-built unit, which no nationally
the container will hold.
(ix) Gas. Anhydrous ammonia in ei- recognized testing laboratory, or Fed-
ther the gaseous or liquefied state. eral, State, municipal or local author-
(x) Gas masks. Gas masks must be ap- ity responsible for the enforcement of a
proved by the National Institute for Federal, State, municipal, or local law,
Occupational Safety and Health code or regulation pertaining to the
(NIOSH) under 42 CFR part 84 for use storage, transportation and use of an-
with anhydrous ammonia. hydrous ammonia is willing to under-
(xi) Capacity. Total volume of the take to accept, certify, list, label or de-
container in standard U.S. gallons. termine to be safe, and the employer
(xii) DOT specifications—Regulations has on file a document attesting to its
of the Department of Transportation safe condition following the conduct of
published in 49 CFR chapter I. appropriate tests. The document shall
(b) Basic rules. This paragraph applies be signed by a registered professional
to all paragraphs of this section unless engineer or other person having special
otherwise noted. training or experience sufficient to per-
(1) Approval of equipment and systems. mit him to form an opinion as to safety
Each appurtenance shall be approved in of the unit involved. The document
accordance with paragraph (b)(1) (i), shall set forth the test bases, test data
(ii), (iii), or (iv) of this section. and results, and also the qualifications
(i) It was installed before February 8, of the certifying person.
1973, and was approved, tested, and in- (v) For the purposes of this para-
stalled in accordance with either the graph (b)(1), the word listed means that
provisions of the American National equipment is of a kind mentioned in a
Standard for the Storage and Handling list which is published by a nationally
of Anhydrous Ammonia, K61.1, or the recognized laboratory which makes
Fertilizer Institute Standards for the periodic inspection of the production of
Storage and Handling of Agricultural such equipment, and states such equip-
Anhydrous Ammonia, M–1, (both of ment meets nationally recognized
which are incorporated by reference as standards or has been tested and found
specified in § 1910.6) in effect at the safe for use in a specified manner. La-
time of installation; or beled means there is attached to it a
(ii) It is accepted, or certified, or list- label, symbol, or other identifying

ed, or labeled, or otherwise determined mark of a nationally recognized testing
335
laboratory which, makes periodic instructed and maintained in accordance

spections of the production of such with the 1949, 1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, and
equipment, and whose labeling indi- 1962 editions of the Code or any revi-
cates compliance with nationally rec- sions thereof in effect at the time of
ognized standards or tests to determine fabrication.
safe use in a specified manner. Certified (3) Marking nonrefrigerated containers.
means it has been tested and found by (i) System nameplates, when required,
a nationally recognized testing labora- shall be permanently attached to the
tory to meet nationally recognized system so as to be readily accessible
standards or to be safe for use in a for inspection and shall include mark-
specified manner, or is of a kind whose ings as prescribed in subdivision (ii) of
production is periodically inspected by this subparagraph.
a nationally recognized testing labora- (ii) Each container or system covered
tory, and it bears a label, tag, or other in paragraphs (c), (f), (g), and (h) of this
record of certification. section shall be marked as specified in
(vi) For the purposes of this para- the following:
graph (b)(1), refer to § 1910.7 for defini- (a) With a notation ‘‘Anhydrous Am-
tion of nationally recognized testing monia.’’
laboratory. (b) With a marking identifying com-
(2) Requirements for construction, origi- pliance with the rules of the Code
nal test and requalification of nonrefrig- under which the container is con-
erated containers. (i) Containers used structed.
with systems covered in paragraphs (c), Under ground: Container and system name-
(f), (g), and (h) of this section shall be plate.
constructed and tested in accordance Above ground: Container.
with the Code except that construction
(c) With a notation whether the sys-
under Table UW12 at a basic joint effi-
tem is designed for underground or
ciency of under 80 percent is not au-
aboveground installation or both.
thorized.
(d) With the name and address of the
(ii) Containers built according to the
supplier of the system or the trade
Code do not have to comply with Para-
name of the system and with the date
graphs UG125 to UG128 inclusive, and
of fabrication.
Paragraphs UG132 and UG133 of the
Code. Under ground and above ground: System
(iii) Containers exceeding 36 inches in nameplate.
diameter or 250 gallons water capacity (e) With the water capacity of the
shall be constructed to comply with container in pounds at 60 °F. or gal-
one or more of the following: lons, U.S. Standard.
(a) Containers shall be stress relieved
after fabrication in accordance with Under ground: Container and system name-
plate.
the Code, or Above ground: Container.
(b) Cold-form heads when used, shall
be stress relieved, or (f) With the design pressure in pounds
(c) Hot-formed heads shall be used. per square inch.
(iv) Welding to the shell, head, or any Under ground: Container and system name-
other part of the container subject to plate.
internal pressure shall be done in com- Above ground: Container.
pliance with the Code. Other welding is (g) With the wall thickness of the
permitted only on saddle plates, lugs, shell and heads.
or brackets attached to the container
by the container manufacturer. Under ground: Container and system name-
(v) Containers used with systems cov- plate.
Above ground: Container.
ered in paragraph (e) of this section
shall be constructed and tested in ac- (h) With marking indicating the
cordance with the DOT specifications. maximum level to which the container
(vi) The provisions of subdivision (i) may be filled with liquid anhydrous
of this subparagraph shall not be con- ammonia at temperatures between 20
strued as prohibiting the continued use °F. and 130 °F. except on containers
or reinstallation of containers con- provided with fixed level indicators,
336
such as fixed length dip tubes, or con- less than the maximum working pres-
tainers that are filled with weight. sure of that portion of the system on
Markings shall be in increments of not which they are installed. All appur-
more than 20 °F. tenances shall be fabricated from ma-
Above ground and under ground: System terials proved suitable for anhydrous
nameplate or on liquid-level gaging device. ammonia service.
(ii) All connections to containers ex-
(i) With the total outside surface area
cept safety relief devices, gaging de-
of the container in square feet.
vices, or those fitted with No. 54 drill-
Under ground: System nameplate. size orifice shall have shutoff valves lo-
Above ground: No requirement. cated as close to the container as prac-
(j) Marking specified on the con- ticable.
tainer shall be on the container itself (iii) Excess flow valves where re-
or on a nameplate permanently at- quired by these standards shall close
tached to it. automatically at the rated flows of
(4) Marking refrigerated containers. vapor or liquid as specified by the man-
Each refrigerated container shall be ufacturer. The connections and line in-
marked with nameplate on the outer cluding valves and fittings being pro-
covering in an accessible place as spec- tected by an excess flow valve shall
ified in the following: have a greater capacity than the rated
(i) With the notation, ‘‘Anhydrous flow of the excess flow valve so that
Ammonia.’’ the valve will close in case of failure of
(ii) With the name and address of the the line or fittings.
builder and the date of fabrication. (iv) Liquid-level gaging devices that
(iii) With the water capacity of the require bleeding of the product to the
container in gallons, U.S. Standard. atmosphere and which are so con-
(iv) With the design pressure. structed that outward flow will not ex-
(v) With the minimum temperature ceed that passed by a No. 54 drill-size
in degrees Fahrenheit for which the opening need not be equipped with ex-
container was designed. cess flow valves.
(vi) The maximum allowable water
(v) Openings from the container or
level to which the container may be
through fittings attached directly on
filled for test purposes.
the container to which pressure gage
(vii) With the density of the product
connections are made need not be
in pounds per cubic foot for which the
equipped with excess flow valves if
container was designed.
(viii) With the maximum level to such openings are not larger than No.
which the container may be filled with 54 drill size.
liquid anhydrous ammonia. (vi) Excess flow and back pressure
(5) Location of containers. (i) Consider- check valves where required by the
ation shall be given to the physio- standards in this section shall be lo-
logical effects of ammonia as well as to cated inside of the container or at a
adjacent fire hazards in selecting the point outside as close as practicable to
location for a storage container. Con- where the line enters the container. In
tainers shall be located outside of the latter case installation shall be
buildings or in buildings or sections made in such manner that any undue
thereof especially provided for this strain beyond the excess flow or back
purpose. pressure check valve will not cause
(ii) Permanent storage containers breakage between the container and
shall be located at least 50 feet from a the valve.
dug well or other sources of potable (vii) Excess flow valves shall be de-
water supply, unless the container is a signed with a bypass, not to exceed a
part of a water-treatment installation. No. 60 drill-size opening to allow
(iii)–(iv) [Reserved] equalization of pressures.
(v) Storage areas shall be kept free of (viii) All excess flow valves shall be
readily ignitible materials such as plainly and permanently marked with
waste, weeds, and long dry grass. the name or trademark of the manufac-
(6) Container appurtenances. (i) All ap- turer, the catalog number, and the
purtenances shall be designed for not rated capacity.
337
(7) Piping, tubing, and fittings. (i) All control of pressure-reducing valves
piping, tubing, and fittings shall be shall be designed for a bursting pres-
made of material suitable for anhy- sure of not less than 5 times the pres-
drous ammonia service. sure setting of the safety relief devices
(ii) All piping, tubing, and fittings protecting that portion of the system
shall be designed for a pressure not less but not less than 125 p.s.i.g. All connec-
than the maximum pressure to which tions shall be so designed and con-
they may be subjected in service. structed that there will be no leakage
(iii) All refrigerated piping shall con- when connected.
form to the Refrigeration Piping Code, (iv) Where hose is to be used for
American National Standards Insti- transferring liquid from one container
tute, B31.5–1966 with addenda B31.1a– to another, ‘‘wet’’ hose is rec-
1968, which is incorporated by reference ommended. Such hose shall be
as specified in § 1910.6, as it applies to equipped with approved shutoff valves
ammonia. at the discharge end. Provision shall be
(iv) Piping used on non-refrigerated made to prevent excessive pressure in
systems shall be at least American So- the hose.
ciety for Testing and Materials (v) On all hose one-half inch outside
(ASTM) A–53–69 Grade B Electric Re- diameter and larger, used for the trans-
sistance Welded and Electric Flash fer of anhydrous ammonia liquid or
Welded Pipe, which is incorporated by vapor, there shall be etched, cast, or
reference as specified in § 1910.6, or impressed at 5-foot intervals the fol-
equal. Such pipe shall be at least lowing information.
schedule 40 when joints are welded, or ‘‘Anhydrous Ammonia’’ xxx p.s.i.g. (max-
welded and flanged. Such pipe shall be imum working pressure), manufacturer’s
at least schedule 80 when joints are name or trademark, year of manufac-
threaded. Threaded connections shall ture.
not be back-welded. Brass, copper, or
galvanized steel pipe shall not be used. In lieu of this requirement the same in-
(v) Tubing made of brass, copper, or formation may be contained on a
other material subject to attack by nameplate permanently attached to
ammonia shall not be used. the hose.
(vi) Cast iron fittings shall not be
TABLE H–36
used but this shall not prohibit the use
[Minimum required rate of discharge in cubic feet per minute
of fittings made specifically for ammo- of air at 120 percent of the maximum permitted start to dis-
nia service of malleable, nodular, or charge pressure of safety relief valves]
high strength gray iron meeting Amer- Flow rate
ican Society for Testing and Materials Surface area (sq. ft.) CFM air
(ASTM) A47–68, ASTM 395–68, or ASTM
20 ......................................................................... 258
A126–66 Class B or C all of which are in- 25 ......................................................................... 310
corporated by reference as specified in 30 ......................................................................... 360
§ 1910.6. 35 ......................................................................... 408
40 ......................................................................... 455
(vii) Joint compounds shall be resist- 45 ......................................................................... 501
ant to ammonia. 50 ......................................................................... 547
(8) Hose specifications. (i) Hose used in 55 ......................................................................... 591
ammonia service shall conform to the 60 ......................................................................... 635
65 ......................................................................... 678
joint Agricultural Ammonia Insti- 70 ......................................................................... 720
tute—Rubber Manufacturers Associa- 75 ......................................................................... 762
tion Specifications for Anhydrous Am- 80 ......................................................................... 804
85 ......................................................................... 845
monia Hose. 90 ......................................................................... 885
(ii) Hose subject to container pres- 95 ......................................................................... 925
sure shall be designed for a minimum 100 ....................................................................... 965
working pressure of 350 p.s.i.g. and a 105 ....................................................................... 1,010
110 ....................................................................... 1,050
minimum burst pressure of 1,750 p.s.i.g. 115 ....................................................................... 1,090
Hose assemblies, when made up, shall 120 ....................................................................... 1,120
be capable of withstanding a test pres- 125 ....................................................................... 1,160
130 ....................................................................... 1,200
sure of 500 p.s.i.g.
135 ....................................................................... 1,240

(iii) Hose and hose connections lo- 140 ....................................................................... 1,280
cated on the low-pressure side of flow 145 ....................................................................... 1,310
338
TABLE H–36—Continued TABLE H–36—Continued

[Minimum required rate of discharge in cubic feet per minute [Minimum required rate of discharge in cubic feet per minute
of air at 120 percent of the maximum permitted start to dis- of air at 120 percent of the maximum permitted start to dis-
charge pressure of safety relief valves] charge pressure of safety relief valves]
Flow rate Flow rate

Surface area (sq. ft.) Surface area (sq. ft.)
CFM air CFM air
150 ....................................................................... 1,350 2,300 .................................................................... 12,630

155 ....................................................................... 1,390 2,350 .................................................................... 12,850
160 ....................................................................... 1,420 2,400 .................................................................... 13,080
165 ....................................................................... 1,460
2,450 .................................................................... 13,300
170 ....................................................................... 1,500
175 ....................................................................... 1,530 2,500 .................................................................... 13,520
180 ....................................................................... 1,570
185 ....................................................................... 1,600
190 ....................................................................... 1,640 Surface Area = total outside surface area
195 ....................................................................... 1,670 of container in square feet. When the surface
200 ....................................................................... 1,710 area is not stamped on the nameplate or
210 ....................................................................... 1,780 when the marking is not legible the area can
220 ....................................................................... 1,850
be calculated by using one of the following
230 ....................................................................... 1,920
240 ....................................................................... 1,980 formulas:
250 ....................................................................... 2,050 (1) Cylindrical container with hemi-
260 ....................................................................... 2,120 spherical heads:
270 ....................................................................... 2,180
280 ....................................................................... 2,250 Area = overall length in feet times outside
290 ....................................................................... 2,320 diameter in feet times 3.1416.
300 ....................................................................... 2,380 (2) Cylindrical container with other than
310 ....................................................................... 2,450
320 ....................................................................... 2,510
hemispherical heads:
330 ....................................................................... 2,570 Area = (overall length in feet plus 0.3 outside
340 ....................................................................... 2,640 diameter in feet) times outside diameter
350 ....................................................................... 2,700 in feet times 3.1416.
360 ....................................................................... 2,760
370 ....................................................................... 2,830 (3) Spherical container:
380 ....................................................................... 2,890
390 ....................................................................... 2,950
Area = outside diameter in feet squared
400 ....................................................................... 3,010 times 3.1416.
450 ....................................................................... 3,320 Flow Rate—CFM Air = cubic feet per
500 ....................................................................... 3,620 minute of air required at standard condi-
550 ....................................................................... 3,910
600 ....................................................................... 4,200
tions, 60 °F. and atmospheric pressure (14.7
650 ....................................................................... 4,480 p.s.i.a.).
700 ....................................................................... 4,760 The rate of discharge may be interpolated
750 ....................................................................... 5,040 for intermediate values of surface area. For
800 ....................................................................... 5,300 containers with total outside surface area
850 ....................................................................... 5,590
900 ....................................................................... 5,850
greater than 2,500 square feet, the required
950 ....................................................................... 6,120 flow rate can be calculated using the for-
1,000 .................................................................... 6,380 mula: Flow Rate CFM Air = 22.11 A0 82, where
1,050 .................................................................... 6,640 A = outside surface area of the container in
1,100 .................................................................... 6,900 square feet.
1,150 .................................................................... 7,160
1,200 .................................................................... 7,410 (9) Safety relief devices. (i) Every con-
1,250 .................................................................... 7,660
1,300 .................................................................... 7,910
tainer used in systems covered by para-
1,350 .................................................................... 8,160 graphs (c), (f), (g), and (h) of this sec-
1,400 .................................................................... 8,410 tion shall be provided with one or more
1,450 .................................................................... 8,650 safety relief valves of the spring-loaded
1,500 .................................................................... 8,900
1,550 .................................................................... 9,140 or equivalent type. The discharge from
1,600 .................................................................... 9,380 safety-relief valves shall be vented
1,650 .................................................................... 9,620 away from the container upward and
1,700 .................................................................... 9,860
1,750 .................................................................... 10,090 unobstructed to the atmosphere. All
1,800 .................................................................... 10,330 relief-valve discharge openings shall
1,850 .................................................................... 10,560 have suitable rain caps that will allow
1,900 .................................................................... 10,800
1,950 .................................................................... 11,030
free discharge of the vapor and prevent
2,000 .................................................................... 11,260 entrance of water. Provision shall be
2,050 .................................................................... 11,490 made for draining condensate which
2,100 .................................................................... 11,720 may accumulate. The rate of the dis-
2,150 .................................................................... 11,950

2,200 .................................................................... 12,180 charge shall be in accordance with the
2,250 .................................................................... 12,400 provisions of Table H–36.
339
(ii) Container safety-relief valves sions (ii) and (iii) of this subparagraph)
shall be set to start-to-discharge as fol- is 4,050 cubic feet per minute of air.
lows, with relation to the design pres- (viii) The flow capacity of the relief
sure of the container: valve shall not be restricted by any
connection to it on either the upstream
Minimum Maximum
Containers or downstream side.
(percent) (percent)
(ix) A hydrostatic relief valve shall
ASME-U–68, U–69 ........................ 110 125
ASME-U–200, U–201 .................... 95 100 be installed between each pair of valves
ASME 1959, 1956, 1952, or 1962 95 100 in the liquid ammonia piping or hose
API-ASME ..................................... 95 100 where liquid may be trapped so as to
U.S. Coast Guard .......................... 95 100
relieve into the atmosphere at a safe
location.
As required by DOT Regulations. (10) General.
(iii) Safety relief devices used in sys-
(i) [Reserved]
tems covered by paragraphs (c), (f), (g),
and (h) of this section shall be con- (ii) Stationary storage installations
structed to discharge at not less than must have at least two suitable gas
the rates required in paragraph (b)(9)(i) masks in readily-accessible locations.
of this section before the pressure is in Full-face masks with ammonia can-
excess of 120 percent (not including the isters that have been approved by
10 percent tolerance referred to in NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84 are suit-
paragraph (b)(9)(ii) of this section) of able for emergency action involving
the maximum permitted start-to-dis- most anhydrous ammonia leaks, par-
charge pressure setting of the device. ticularly leaks that occur outdoors.
(iv) Safety-relief valves shall be so For respiratory protection in con-
arranged that the possibility of tam- centrated ammonia atmospheres, a
pering will be minimized. If the pres- self-contained breathing apparatus is
sure setting adjustment is external, required.
the relief valves shall be provided with (iii) Stationary storage installations
means for sealing the adjustment. shall have an easily accessible shower
(v) Shutoff valves shall not be in- or a 50-gallon drum of water.
stalled between the safety-relief valves (iv) Each vehicle transporting ammo-
and the container; except, that a shut- nia in bulk except farm applicator ve-
off valve may be used where the ar- hicles shall carry a container of at
rangement of this valve is such as al- least 5 gallons of water and shall be
ways to afford full required capacity equipped with a full face mask.
flow through the relief valves. (11) Charging of containers. (i) The fill-
(vi) Safety-relief valves shall have di- ing densities for containers that are
rect communication with the vapor not refrigerated shall not exceed the
space of the container. following:
(vii) Each container safety-relief
Percent by Percent by
valve used with systems covered by Type of container weight volume
paragraphs (c), (f), (g), and (h) of this
section shall be plainly and perma- Aboveground-Uninsulated ............. 56 82
Aboveground-Uninsulated ............. .................. 87.5
nently marked with the symbol ‘‘NH3’’
Aboveground-Insulated ................. 57 83.5
or ‘‘AA’’; with the pressure in pounds- Underground-Uninsulated ............. 58 85
per-square-inch gage at which the DOT—In accord with DOT regula-
valve is set to start-to-discharge; with tions..
the actual rate of discharge of the
valve at its full open position in cubic (ii) Aboveground uninsulated con-
feet per minute of air at 60 °F. and at- tainers may be charged 87.5 percent by
mospheric pressure; and with the man- volume provided the temperature of
ufacturer’s name and catalog number. the anhydrous ammonia being charged
Example: ‘‘NH3 250–4050 Air’’ indicates is determined to be not lower than 30
that the valve is suitable for use on an °F. or provided the charging of the con-
anhydrous ammonia container, is set tainer is stopped at the first indication
to start-to-discharge at a pressure of of frost or ice formation on its outside
250 p.s.i.g., and that its rate of dis- surface and is not resumed until such
charge at full open position (subdivi- frost or ice has disappeared.
340
(12) Transfer of liquids. (i) Anhydrous the compressor suction to minimize

ammonia shall always be at a tempera- the entry of liquid into the compressor.
ture suitable for the material of con- (vii) Loading and unloading systems
struction and the design of the receiv- shall be protected by suitable devices
ing container. to prevent emptying of the storage
(ii) The employer shall require the container or the container being loaded
continuous presence of an attendant in or unloaded in the event of severance
the vicinity of the operation during of the hose. Backflow check valves or
such time as ammonia is being trans- properly sized excess flow valves shall
ferred. be installed where necessary to provide
(iii) Containers shall be charged or such protection. In the event that such
used only upon authorization of the valves are not practical, remotely op-
owner. erated shutoff valves may be installed.
(iv) Containers shall be gaged and (13) Tank car unloading points and op-
charged only in the open atmosphere or erations. (i) Provisions for unloading
in buildings or areas thereof provided tank cars shall conform to the applica-
for that purpose. ble recommendations contained in the
(v) Pumps used for transferring am- DOT regulations.
monia shall be those manufactured for (ii) The employer shall insure that
that purpose. unloading operations are performed by
(a) Pumps shall be designed for at reliable persons properly instructed
least 250 p.s.i.g. working pressure. and given the authority to monitor
(b) Positive displacement pumps careful compliance with all applicable
shall have, installed off the discharged procedures.
port, a constant differential relief (iii) Caution signs shall be so placed
valve discharging into the suction port on the track or car as to give necessary
of the pump through a line of sufficient warning to persons approaching the car
size to carry the full capacity of the from open end or ends of siding and
pump at relief valve setting, which set- shall be left up until after the car is
ting and installation shall be according unloaded and disconnected from dis-
to the pump manufacturer’s rec- charge connections. Signs shall be of
ommendations. metal or other suitable material, at
(c) On the discharge side of the pump, least 12 by 15 inches in size and bear
before the relief valve line, there shall the words ‘‘STOP—Tank Car Con-
be installed a pressure gage graduated nected’’ or ‘‘STOP—Men at Work’’ the
from 0 to 400 p.s.i. word, ‘‘STOP,’’ being in letters at least
(d) Plant piping shall contain shutoff 4 inches high and the other words in
valves located as close as practical to letters at least 2 inches high.
pump connections. (iv) The track of a tank car siding
(vi) Compressors used for transfer- shall be substantially level.
ring or refrigerating ammonia shall be (v) Brakes shall be set and wheels
recommended for ammonia service by blocked on all cars being unloaded.
the manufacturer. (14) Liquid-level gaging device. (i) Each
(a) Compressors shall be designed for container except those filled by weight
at least 250 p.s.i.g. working pressure. shall be equipped with an approved liq-
(b) Plant piping shall contain shutoff uid-level gaging device. A thermometer
valves located as close as practical to well shall be provided in all containers
compressor connections. not utilizing a fixed liquid-level gaging
(c) A relief valve large enough to dis- device.
charge the full capacity of the com- (ii) All gaging devices shall be ar-
pressor shall be connected to the dis- ranged so that the maximum liquid
charge before any shutoff valve. level to which the container is filled is
(d) Compressors shall have pressure readily determined.
gages at suction and discharge grad- (iii) Gaging devices that require
uated to at least one and one-half bleeding of the product to the atmos-
times the maximum pressure that can phere such as the rotary tube, fixed
be developed. tube, and slip tube devices shall be de-
(e) Adequate means, such as drain- signed so that the maximum opening of
able liquid trap, shall be provided on the bleed valve is not larger than No.
341
54 drill size unless provided with an ex- provided with orifices not larger than
cess flow valve. (This requirement does No. 54 drill size as required in para-
not apply to farm vehicles used for the graphs (b)(6) (iv) and (v) of this section
application of ammonia as covered in shall be equipped with excess-flow
paragraph (h) of this section.) valves.
(iv) Gaging devices shall have a de- (iii) Each storage container shall be
sign pressure equal to or greater than provided with a pressure gage grad-
the design pressure of the container on uated from 0 to 400 p.s.i. Gages shall be
which they are installed. designated for use in ammonia service.
(v) Fixed tube liquid-level gages shall (iv) All containers shall be equipped
be designed and installed to indicate with vapor return valves.
that level at which the container is (3) Safety-relief devices. (i) Every con-
filled to 85 percent of its water capac- tainer shall be provided with one or
ity in gallons. more safety-relief valves of the spring-
(vi) Gage glasses of the columnar loaded or equivalent type in accord-
type shall be restricted to stationary ance with paragraph (b)(9) of this sec-
storage installations. They shall be tion.
equipped with shutoff valves having (ii) The rate of discharge of spring-
metallic handwheels, with excess-flow loaded safety relief valves installed on
valves, and with extra heavy glass ade- underground containers may be re-
quately protected with a metal housing duced to a minimum of 30 percent of
applied by the gage manufacturer. the rate of discharge specified in Table
They shall be shielded against the di- H–36. Containers so protected shall not
rect rays of the sun. be uncovered after installation until
(15) [Reserved] the liquid ammonia has been removed.
(16) Electrical equipment and wiring. (i) Containers which may contain liquid
Electrical equipment and wiring for ammonia before being installed under-
use in ammonia installations shall be ground and before being completely
general purpose or weather resistant as covered with earth are to be considered
appropriate. aboveground containers when deter-
(ii) Electrical systems shall be in- mining the rate of discharge require-
stalled and maintained in accordance ments of the safety-relief valves.
with subpart S of this part. (iii) On underground installations
(c) Systems utilizing stationary, non- where there is a probability of the
refrigerated storage containers. This manhole or housing becoming flooded,
paragraph applies to stationary, non- the discharge from vent lines shall be
refrigerated storage installations uti- located above the high water level. All
lizing containers other than those cov- manholes or housings shall be provided
ered in paragraph (e) of this section. with ventilated louvers or their equiva-
Paragraph (b) of this section applies to lent, the area of such openings equal-
this paragraph unless otherwise noted. ling or exceeding combined discharge
(1) Design pressure and construction of areas of safety-relief valves and vent
containers. The minimum design pres- lines which discharge their content
sure for nonrefrigerated containers into the manhole housing.
shall be 250 p.s.i.g. (iv) Vent pipes, when used, shall not
(2) Container valves and accessories, be restricted or of smaller diameter
filling and discharge connections. (i) than the relief-valve outlet connection.
Each filling connection shall be pro- (v) If desired, vent pipes from two or
vided with combination back-pressure more safety-relief devices located on
check valve and excess-flow valve; one the same unit, or similar lines from
double or two single back-pressure two or more different units may be run
check valves; or a positive shutoff into a common discharge header, pro-
valve in conjunction with either an in- vided the capacity of such header is at
ternal back-pressure check valve or an least equal to the sum of the capacities
internal excess flow valve. of the individual discharge lines.
(ii) All liquid and vapor connections (4) Reinstallation of containers. (i) Con-
to containers except filling pipes, safe- tainers once installed under ground
ty relief connections, and liquid-level shall not later be reinstalled above

gaging and pressure gage connections ground or under ground, unless they
342
successfully withstand hydrostatic in the industry as ‘‘skid tanks’’) shall

pressure retests at the pressure speci- be designed and constructed in accord-
fied for the original hydrostatic test as ance with paragraph (c)(1) of this sec-
required by the code under which con- tion.
structed and show no evidence of seri- (vi) Secure anchorage or adequate
ous corrosion. pier height shall be provided against
(ii) Where containers are reinstalled container flotation wherever suffi-
above ground, safety devices or gaging ciently high flood water might occur.
devices shall comply with paragraph (vii) The distance between under-
(b)(9) of this section and this paragraph ground containers of over 2,000 gallons
respectively for aboveground con- capacity shall be at least 5 feet.
tainers. (6) Protection of appurtenances. (i)
(5) Installation of storage containers. (i) Valves, regulating, gaging, and other
Containers installed above ground, ex- appurtenances shall be protected
cept as provided in paragraph (c)(5)(v) against tampering and physical dam-
of this section shall be provided with age. Such appurtenances shall also be
substantial concrete or masonry sup- protected during transit of containers.
ports, or structural steel supports on
(ii) All connections to underground
firm concrete or masonry foundations.
containers shall be located within a
All foundations shall extend below the
dome, housing, or manhole and with
frost line.
access thereto by means of a substan-
(ii) Horizontal aboveground con-
tial cover.
tainers shall be so mounted on founda-
(7) Damage from vehicles. Precaution
tions as to permit expansion and con-
shall be taken against damage to am-
traction. Every container shall be sup-
monia systems from vehicles.
ported to prevent the concentration of
excessive loads on the supporting por- (d) Refrigerated storage systems. This
tion of the shell. That portion of the paragraph applies to systems utilizing
container in contact with foundations containers with the storage of anhy-
or saddles shall be protected against drous ammonia under refrigerated con-
corrosion. ditions. All applicable rules of para-
(iii) Containers installed under graph (b) of this section apply to this
ground shall be so placed that the top paragraph unless otherwise noted.
of the container is below the frost line (1) Design of containers. (i) The design
and in no case less than 2 feet below temperature shall be the minimum
the surface of the ground. Should temperature to which the container
ground conditions make compliance will be refrigerated.
with these requirements impracticable, (ii) Containers with a design pressure
installation shall be made otherwise to exceeding 15 p.s.i.g. shall be con-
prevent physical damage. It will not be structed in accordance with paragraph
necessary to cover the portion of the (b)(2) of this section, and the materials
container to which manhole and other shall be selected from those listed in
connections are affixed. When nec- API Standard 620, Recommended Rules
essary to prevent floating, containers for Design and Construction of Large,
shall be securely anchored or weighted. Welded, Low-Pressure Storage Tanks,
(iv) Underground containers shall be Fourth Edition, 1970, Tables 2.02, R2.2,
set on a firm foundation (firm earth R2.2(A), R2.2.1, or R2.3 which are incor-
may be used) and surrounded with porated by reference as specified in
earth or sand well tamped in place. The § 1910.6.
container, prior to being placed under (iii) Containers with a design pres-
ground, shall be given a corrosion re- sure of 15 p.s.i.g. and less shall be con-
sisting protective coating. The constructed in accordance with the appli-
tainer thus coated shall be so lowered cable requirements of API Standard 620
into place as to prevent abrasion or including its appendix R.
other damage to the coating. (iv) When austenitic steels or non-
(v) Containers with foundations at- ferrous materials are used, the Code
tached (portable or semiportable tank shall be used as a guide in the selection
containers with suitable steel ‘‘run- of materials for use at the design tem-
ners’’ or ‘‘skids’’ and commonly known perature.
343
(v) The filling density for refrig- posure is greater than that required by
erated storage containers shall be such (a) of this subdivision, the additional
that the container will not be liquid capacity may be provided by weak roof
full at a liquid temperature cor- to shell seams in containers operating
responding to the vapor pressure at the at essentially atmospheric pressure
start-to-discharge pressure setting of and having an inherently weak roof-to-
the safety-relief valve. shell seam. The weak roof-to-shell
(2) Installation of refrigerated storage seam is not to be considered as pro-
containers. (i) Containers shall be sup- viding any of the capacity required in
ported on suitable noncombustible (a) of this subdivision.
foundations designed to accommodate (iii) If vent lines are installed to con-
the type of container being used. duct the vapors from the relief valve,
(ii) Adequate protection against flo- the back pressure under full relieving
tation or other water damage shall be conditions shall not exceed 50 percent
provided wherever high flood water of the start-to-discharge pressure for
might occur. pressure balanced valves or 10 percent
(iii) Containers for product storage at of the start-to-discharge pressure for
less than 32 °F. shall be supported in conventional valves. The vent lines
such a way, or heat shall be supplied, shall be installed to prevent accumula-
to prevent the effects of freezing and tion of liquid in the lines.
consequent frost heaving. (iv) The valve or valve installation
(3) Shutoff valves. When operating shall provide weather protection.
conditions make it advisable, a check (v) Atmospheric storage shall be pro-
valve shall be installed on the fill con- vided with vacuum breakers. Ammonia
nection and a remotely operated shut- gas, nitrogen, methane, or other inert
off valve on other connections located gases can be used to provide a pad.
below the maximum liquid level.
(5) Protection of container appur-
(4) Safety relief devices. (i) Safety re-
tenances. Appurtenances shall be pro-
lief valves shall be set to start-to-dis-
tected against tampering and physical
charge at a pressure not in excess of
damage.
the design pressure of the container
and shall have a total relieving capac- (6) Reinstallation of refrigerated storage
ity sufficient to prevent a maximum containers. Containers of such size as to
pressure in the container of more than require field fabrication shall, when
120 percent of the design pressure. Re- moved and reinstalled, be recon-
lief valves for refrigerated storage constructed and reinspected in complete
tainers shall be self-contained spring- accordance with the requirements
under which they were constructed.
loaded, weight-loaded, or self-con-
The containers shall be subjected to a
tained pilot-operated type.
pressure retest and if rerating is nec-
(ii) The total relieving capacity shall
essary, rerating shall be in accordance
be the larger of:
with applicable requirements.
(a) Possible refrigeration system
upset such as (1) cooling water failure, (7) Damage from vehicles. Precaution
(2) power failure, (3) instrument air or shall be taken against damage from ve-
instrument failure, (4) mechanical fail- hicles.
ure of any equipment, (5) excessive (8) Refrigeration load and equipment.
pumping rates. (i) The total refrigeration load shall be
(b) Fire exposure determined in ac- computed as the sum of the following:
cordance with Compressed Gas Associa- (a) Load imposed by heat flow into
tion (CGA) S–1, part 3, Safety Relief the container caused by the tempera-
Device Standards for Compressed Gas ture differential between design ambi-
Storage Containers, 1959, which is in- ent temperature and storage tempera-
corporated by reference as specified in ture.
§ 1910.6, except that ‘‘A’’ shall be the (b) Load imposed by heat flow into
total exposed surface area in square the container caused by maximum sun
feet up to 25 foot above grade or to the radiation.
equator of the storage container if it is (c) Maximum load imposed by filling
a sphere, whichever is greater. If the the container with ammonia warmer

relieving capacity required for fire ex- than the design storage temperature.
344
(ii) More than one storage container be equipped with a drain and gaging de-
may be handled by the same refrigera- vice.
tion system. (ii) [Reserved]
(9) Compressors. (i) A minimum of two (13) Condensers. The condenser sys-
compressors shall be provided either of tem may be cooled by air or water or
which shall be of sufficient size to han- both. The condenser shall be designed
dle the loads listed in paragraphs for at least 250 p.s.i.g. Provision shall
(d)(8)(i) (a) and (b) of this section. be made for purging noncondensibles
Where more than two compressors are either manually or automatically.
provided minimum standby equipment (14) Receiver and liquid drain. A re-
equal to the largest normally operating ceiver shall be provided with a liquid-
equipment shall be installed. Filling level control to discharge the liquid
compressors may be used as standby ammonia to storage. The receiver shall
equipment for holding compressors. be designed for at least 250 p.s.i.g. and
(ii) Compressors shall be sized to op- be equipped with the necessary connec-
erate with a suction pressure at least tions, safety valves, and gaging device.
10 percent below the minimum setting (15) Insulation. Refrigerated con-
of the safety valve(s) on the storage tainers and pipelines which are insu-
container and shall withstand a suc- lated shall be covered with a material
tion pressure at least equal to 120 per- of suitable quality and thickness for
cent of the design pressure of the con- the temperatures encountered. Insula-
tainer. tion shall be suitably supported and
protected against the weather. Weath-
(10) Compressor drives. (i) Each com-
erproofing shall be of a type which will
pressor shall have its individual driv-
not support flame propagation.
ing unit.
(e) Systems utilizing portable DOT con-
(ii) An emergency source of power of tainers—(1) Conformance. Cylinders
sufficient capacity to handle the loads shall comply with DOT specifications
listed in paragraphs (d)(8)(i) (a) and (b) and shall be maintained, filled, pack-
of this section shall be provided unless aged, marked, labeled, and shipped to
facilities are available to safely dispose comply with 49 CFR chapter I and the
of vented vapors while the refrigera- marking requirements set forth in
tion system is not operating. § 1910.253(b)(1)(ii).
(11) Automatic control equipment. (i) (2) Storage. Cylinders shall be stored
The refrigeration system shall be ar- in an area free from ignitable debris
ranged with suitable controls to govern and in such manner as to prevent ex-
the compressor operation in accord- ternal corrosion. Storage may be in-
ance with the load as evidenced by the doors or outdoors.
pressure in the container(s). (3) Heat protection. Cylinders filled in
(ii) An emergency alarm system shall accordance with DOT regulations will
be installed to function in the event become liquid full at 145 °F. Cylinders
the pressure in the container(s) rises to shall be protected from heat sources
the maximum allowable operating such as radiant flame and steampipes.
pressure. Heat shall not be applied directly to
(iii) An emergency alarm and shutoff cylinders to raise the pressure.
shall be located in the condenser sys- (4) Protection. Cylinders shall be
tem to respond to excess discharge stored in such manner as to protect
pressure caused by failure of the cool- them from moving vehicles or external
ing medium. damage.
(iv) All automatic controls shall be (5) Valve cap. Any cylinder which is
installed in a manner to preclude oper- designed to have a valve protection cap
ation of alternate compressors unless shall have the cap securely in place
the controls will function with the al- when the cylinder is not in service.
ternate compressors. (f) Tank motor vehicles for the transpor-
(12) Separators for compressors. (i) An tation of ammonia. (1) This paragraph
entrainment separator of suitable size applies to containers and pertinent
and design pressure shall be installed equipment mounted on tank motor ve-
in the compressor suction line of lubri- hicles including semitrailers and full
cated compression. The separator shall trailers used for the transportation of
345
ammonia. This paragraph does not space) or with an approved vapor re-
apply to farm vehicles. For require- turn valve of adequate capacity.
ments covering farm vehicles, refer to (4) Piping and fittings. (i) All piping,
paragraphs (g) and (h) of this section. tubing, and fittings shall be securely
Paragraph (b) of this section applies to mounted and protected against dam-
this paragraph unless otherwise noted. age. Means shall be provided to protect
Containers and pertinent equipment hoses while the vehicle is in motion.
for tank motor vehicles for the trans- (ii) Fittings shall comply with para-
portation of anhydrous ammonia, in graph (b)(6) of this section. Pipe shall
addition to complying with the re- be Schedule 80.
quirements of this section, shall also (5) Safety relief devices. (i) The dis-
comply with the requirements of DOT. charge from safety relief valves shall
be vented away from the container up-
(2) Design pressure and construction of
ward and unobstructed to the open air
containers. (i) The minimum design
in such a manner as to prevent any im-
pressure for containers shall be that
pingement of escaping gas upon the
specified in the regulations of the DOT.
container; loose-fitting rain caps shall
(ii) The shell or head thickness of be used. Size of discharge lines from
any container shall not be less than safety valves shall not be smaller than
three-sixteenth inch. the nominal size of the safety-relief
(iii) All container openings, except valve outlet connection. Suitable pro-
safety relief valves, liquid-level gaging vision shall be made for draining con-
devices, and pressure gages, shall be la- densate which may accumulate in the
beled to designate whether they com- discharge pipe.
municate with liquid or vapor space. (ii) Any portion of liquid ammonia
(3) Container appurtenances. (i) All ap- piping which at any time may be closed
purtenances shall be protected against at both ends shall be provided with a
physical damage. hydrostatic relief valve.
(ii) All connections to containers, ex- (6) Transfer of liquids. (i) The content
cept filling connections, safety relief of tank motor vehicle containers shall
devices, and liquid-level and pressure be determined by weight, by a suitable
gage connections, shall be provided liquid-level gaging device, or other ap-
with suitable automatic excess flow proved methods. If the content of a
valves, or in lieu thereof, may be fitted container is to be determined by liq-
with quick-closing internal valves, uid-level measurement, the container
which shall remain closed except dur- shall have a thermometer well so that
ing delivery operations. The control the internal liquid temperature can be
mechanism for such valves may be pro- easily determined. This volume when
vided with a secondary control remote converted to weight shall not exceed
from the delivery connections and such the filling density specified by the
control mechanism shall be provided DOT.
with a fusible section (melting point (ii) Any pump, except a constant
208 °F. to 220 °F.) which will permit the speed centrifugal pump, shall be
internal valve to close automatically equipped with a suitable pressure actu-
in case of fire. ated bypass valve permitting flow from
(iii) Filling connections shall be pro- discharge to suction when the dis-
vided with automatic back-pressure charge pressure rises above a predeter-
check valves, excess-flow valves, or mined point. Pump discharge shall also
quick-closing internal valves, to pre- be equipped with a spring-loaded safety
vent back-flow in case the filling con- relief valve set at a pressure not more
nection is broken. Where the filling than 135 percent of the setting of the
and discharge connect to a common bypass valve or more than 400 p.s.i.g.,
opening in the container shell and that whichever is larger.
opening is fitted with a quick-closing (iii) Compressors shall be equipped
internal valve as specified in paragraph with manually operated shutoff valves
(f)(3)(ii) of this section, the automatic on both suction and discharge connec-
valve shall not be required. tions. Pressure gages of bourdon-tube
(iv) All containers shall be equipped type shall be installed on the suction
for spray loading (filling in the vapor and discharge of the compressor before
346
the shutoff valves. The compressor (iii) When containers are mounted on
shall not be operated if either pressure four-wheel trailers, care shall be taken
gage is removed or is inoperative. A to insure that the weight is distributed
spring-loaded, safety-relief valve capa- evenly over both axles.
ble of discharging to atmosphere the (iv) When the cradle and the tank are
full flow of gas from the compressor at not welded together suitable material
a pressure not exceeding 300 p.s.i.g. shall be used between them to elimi-
shall be connected between the com- nate metal-to-metal friction.
pressor discharge and the discharge (4) Container appurtenances. (i) All
shutoff valve. containers shall be equipped with a
(iv) Valve functions shall be clearly fixed liquid-level gage.
and legibly identified by metal tags or (ii) All containers with a capacity ex-
nameplates permanently affixed to ceeding 250 gallons shall be equipped
each valve. with a pressure gage having a dial
(7)–(8) [Reserved] graduated from 0–400 p.s.i.
(9) Chock blocks. At least two chock
(iii) The filling connection shall be
blocks shall be provided. These blocks
fitted with combination back-pressure
shall be placed to prevent rolling of the
check valve and excess-flow valve; one
vehicle whenever it is parked during
double or two single back-pressure
loading and unloading operations.
check valves; or a positive shutoff
(10) Portable tank containers (skid
valve in conjunction with either an in-
tanks). Where portable tank containers
ternal back-pressure check valve or an
are used for farm storage they shall
internal excess flow valve.
comply with paragraph (c)(1) of this
(iv) All containers with a capacity
section. When portable tank containers
exceeding 250 gallons shall be equipped
are used in lieu of cargo tanks and are
for spray loading or with an approved
permanently mounted on tank motor
vapor return valve.
vehicles for the transportation of am-
monia, they shall comply with the re- (v) All vapor and liquid connections
quirements of this paragraph. except safety-relief valves and those
(g) Systems mounted on farm vehicles specifically exempted by paragraph
other than for the application of ammo- (b)(6)(v) of this section shall be
nia—(1) Application. This paragraph ap- equipped with approved excess-flow
plies to containers of 1,200 gallons ca- valves or may be fitted with quick-
pacity or less and pertinent equipment closing internal valves which, except
mounted on farm vehicles (implements during operating periods, shall remain
of husbandry) and used other than for closed.
the application of ammonia to the soil. (vi) Fittings shall be adequately pro-
Paragraph (b) of this section applies to tected from damage by a metal box or
this paragraph unless otherwise noted. cylinder with open top securely fas-
(2) Design pressure and classification of tened to the container or by rigid
containers. (i) The minimum design guards, well braced, welded to the con-
pressure for containers shall be 250 tainer on both sides of the fittings or
p.s.i.g. by a metal dome. If a metal dome is
(ii) The shell or head thickness of used, the relief valve shall be properly
any container shall be not less than vented through the dome.
three-sixteenths of an inch. (vii) If a liquid withdrawal line is in-
(3) Mounting containers. (i) A suitable stalled in the bottom of a container,
‘‘stop’’ or ‘‘stops’’ shall be mounted on the connections thereto, including
the vehicle or on the container in such hose, shall not be lower than the low-
a way that the container shall not be est horizontal edge of the vehicle axle.
dislodged from its mounting due to the (viii) Provision shall be made to se-
vehicle coming to a sudden stop. Back cure both ends of the hose while in
slippage shall also be prevented by transit.
proper methods. (5) Marking the container. There shall
(ii) A suitable ‘‘hold down’’ device appear on each side and on the rear end
shall be provided which will anchor the of the container in letters at least 4
container to the vehicle at one or more inches high, the words, ‘‘Caution—Am-
places on each side of the container. monia’’ or the container shall be
347
§§ 1910.112–1910.113 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–21 Edition)
marked in accordance with DOT regu- shall be flexibly connected to the con-
lations. tainer shutoff valve.
(6) Farm vehicles. (i) Farm vehicles (v) No excess flow valve is required in
shall conform with State regulations. the liquid withdrawal line provided the
(ii) All trailers shall be securely at- controlling orifice between the con-
tached to the vehicle drawing them by tents of the container and the outlet of
means of drawbars supplemented by the shutoff valve does not exceed
suitable safety chains. seven-sixteenths inch in diameter.
(iii) A trailer shall be constructed so [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43
that it will follow substantially in the FR 49748, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10,
path of the towing vehicle and will not 1984; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 61 FR 9238,
whip or swerve dangerously from side Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 1269, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR
to side. 33466, June 18, 1998; 72 FR 71069, Dec. 14, 2007]
(iv) All vehicles shall carry a can
containing 5 gallons or more of water. §§ 1910.112–1910.113 [Reserved]
(h) Systems mounted on farm vehicles § 1910.119 Process safety management
for the application of ammonia. (1) This of highly hazardous chemicals.
paragraph applies to systems utilizing
Purpose. This section contains re-
containers of 250 gallons capacity or
quirements for preventing or mini-
less which are mounted on farm vehi-
mizing the consequences of cata-
cles (implement of husbandry) and used
strophic releases of toxic, reactive,
for the application of ammonia to the
flammable, or explosive chemicals.
soil. Paragraph (b) of this section ap-
These releases may result in toxic, fire
plies to this paragraph unless other-
or explosion hazards.
wise noted. Where larger containers are
(a) Application. (1) This section ap-
used, they shall comply with paragraph plies to the following:
(g) of this section. (i) A process which involves a chem-
(2) Design pressure and classification of ical at or above the specified threshold
containers. (i) The minimum design quantities listed in appendix A to this
pressure for containers shall be 250 section;
p.s.i.g. (ii) A process which involves a Cat-
(ii) The shell or head thickness of egory 1 flammable gas (as defined in
any container shall not be less than 1910.1200(c)) or a flammable liquid with
three-sixteenths inch. a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C) on
(3) Mounting of containers. All con- site in one location, in a quantity of
tainers and flow-control devices shall 10,000 pounds (4535.9 kg) or more except
be securely mounted. for:
(4) Container valves and accessories. (i) (A) Hydrocarbon fuels used solely for
Each container shall have a fixed liq- workplace consumption as a fuel (e.g.,
uid-level gage. propane used for comfort heating, gaso-
(ii) The filling connection shall be line for vehicle refueling), if such fuels
fitted with a combination back-pres- are not a part of a process containing
sure check valve and an excess-flow another highly hazardous chemical
valve; one double or two single back- covered by this standard;
pressure check valves: or a positive (B) Flammable liquids with a
shutoff valve in conjunction with an flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C) stored
internal back-pressure check valve or in atmospheric tanks or transferred
an internal excess-flow valve. which are kept below their normal
(iii) The applicator tank may be boiling point without benefit of
filled by venting to open air provided chilling or refrigeration.
the bleeder valve orifice does not ex- (2) This section does not apply to:
ceed seven-sixteenths inch in diameter. (i) Retail facilities;
(iv) Regulation equipment may be (ii) Oil or gas well drilling or serv-
connected directly to the tank cou- icing operations; or,
pling or flange, in which case a flexible (iii) Normally unoccupied remote fa-
connection shall be used between such cilities.
regulating equipment and the remain- (b) Definitions. Atmospheric tank
der of the liquid withdrawal system. means a storage tank which has been
Regulating equipment not so installed designed to operate at pressures from
348
atmospheric through 0.5 p.s.i.g. (pounds Replacement in kind means a replace-

per square inch gauge, 3.45 Kpa). ment which satisfies the design speci-
Boiling point means the boiling point fication.
of a liquid at a pressure of 14.7 pounds Trade secret means any confidential
per square inch absolute (p.s.i.a.) (760 formula, pattern, process, device, infor-
mm.). For the purposes of this section, mation or compilation of information
where an accurate boiling point is un- that is used in an employer’s business,
available for the material in question, and that gives the employer an oppor-
or for mixtures which do not have a tunity to obtain an advantage over
constant boiling point, the 10 percent competitors who do not know or use it.
point of a distillation performed in ac- See Appendix E to § 1910.1200—Defini-
cordance with the Standard Method of tion of a Trade Secret (which sets out
Test for Distillation of Petroleum the criteria to be used in evaluating
Products, ASTM D–86–62, which is in- trade secrets).
corporated by reference as specified in (c) Employee participation. (1) Employ-
§ 1910.6, may be used as the boiling ers shall develop a written plan of ac-
point of the liquid. tion regarding the implementation of
Catastrophic release means a major the employee participation required by
uncontrolled emission, fire, or explo- this paragraph.
sion, involving one or more highly haz- (2) Employers shall consult with em-
ardous chemicals, that presents serious ployees and their representatives on
danger to employees in the workplace. the conduct and development of proc-
ess hazards analyses and on the devel-
Facility means the buildings, con-
opment of the other elements of proc-
tainers or equipment which contain a
ess safety management in this stand-
process.
ard.
Highly hazardous chemical means a (3) Employers shall provide to em-
substance possessing toxic, reactive, ployees and their representatives ac-
flammable, or explosive properties and cess to process hazard analyses and to
specified by paragraph (a)(1) of this all other information required to be de-
section. veloped under this standard.
Hot work means work involving elec- (d) Process safety information. In ac-
tric or gas welding, cutting, brazing, or cordance with the schedule set forth in
similar flame or spark-producing oper- paragraph (e)(1) of this section, the em-
ations. ployer shall complete a compilation of
Normally unoccupied remote facility written process safety information be-
means a facility which is operated, fore conducting any process hazard
maintained or serviced by employees analysis required by the standard. The
who visit the facility only periodically compilation of written process safety
to check its operation and to perform information is to enable the employer
necessary operating or maintenance and the employees involved in oper-
tasks. No employees are permanently ating the process to identify and under-
stationed at the facility. stand the hazards posed by those proc-
Facilities meeting this definition are esses involving highly hazardous
not contiguous with, and must be geo- chemicals. This process safety informa-
graphically remote from all other tion shall include information per-
buildings, processes or persons. taining to the hazards of the highly
Process means any activity involving hazardous chemicals used or produced
a highly hazardous chemical including by the process, information pertaining
any use, storage, manufacturing, han- to the technology of the process, and
dling, or the on-site movement of such information pertaining to the equip-
chemicals, or combination of these ac- ment in the process.
tivities. For purposes of this definition, (1) Information pertaining to the haz-
any group of vessels which are inter- ards of the highly hazardous chemicals in
connected and separate vessels which the process. This information shall con-
are located such that a highly haz- sist of at least the following:
ardous chemical could be involved in a (i) Toxicity information;
potential release shall be considered a (ii) Permissible exposure limits;

single process. (iii) Physical data;
349
(iv) Reactivity data: shall determine and document that the

(v) Corrosivity data; equipment is designed, maintained, in-
(vi) Thermal and chemical stability spected, tested, and operating in a safe
data; and manner.
(vii) Hazardous effects of inadvertent (e) Process hazard analysis. (1) The
mixing of different materials that employer shall perform an initial proc-
could foreseeably occur. ess hazard analysis (hazard evaluation)
NOTE: Safety data sheets meeting the re- on processes covered by this standard.
quirements of 29 CFR 1910.1200(g) may be The process hazard analysis shall be
used to comply with this requirement to the appropriate to the complexity of the
extent they contain the information required process and shall identify, evaluate,
by this subparagraph. and control the hazards involved in the
(2) Information pertaining to the tech- process. Employers shall determine and
nology of the process. (i) Information document the priority order for con-
concerning the technology of the proc- ducting process hazard analyses based
ess shall include at least the following: on a rationale which includes such con-
(A) A block flow diagram or sim- siderations as extent of the process
plified process flow diagram (see appen- hazards, number of potentially affected
dix B to this section); employees, age of the process, and op-
(B) Process chemistry; erating history of the process. The
(C) Maximum intended inventory; process hazard analysis shall be con-
(D) Safe upper and lower limits for ducted as soon as possible, but not
such items as temperatures, pressures, later than the following schedule:
flows or compositions; and, (i) No less than 25 percent of the ini-
(E) An evaluation of the con- tial process hazards analyses shall be
sequences of deviations, including completed by May 26, 1994;
those affecting the safety and health of (ii) No less than 50 percent of the ini-
employees. tial process hazards analyses shall be
(ii) Where the original technical in- completed by May 26, 1995;
formation no longer exists, such infor- (iii) No less than 75 percent of the
mation may be developed in conjunc- initial process hazards analyses shall
tion with the process hazard analysis be completed by May 26, 1996;
in sufficient detail to support the anal- (iv) All initial process hazards anal-
ysis. yses shall be completed by May 26, 1997.
(3) Information pertaining to the equip- (v) Process hazards analyses com-
ment in the process. (i) Information per- pleted after May 26, 1987 which meet
taining to the equipment in the process the requirements of this paragraph are
shall include: acceptable as initial process hazards
(A) Materials of construction; analyses. These process hazard anal-
(B) Piping and instrument diagrams yses shall be updated and revalidated,
(P&ID’s); based on their completion date, in ac-
(C) Electrical classification; cordance with paragraph (e)(6) of this
(D) Relief system design and design section.
basis; (2) The employer shall use one or
(E) Ventilation system design;
more of the following methodologies
(F) Design codes and standards em-
that are appropriate to determine and
ployed;
evaluate the hazards of the process
(G) Material and energy balances for
being analyzed.
processes built after May 26, 1992; and,
(H) Safety systems (e.g. interlocks, (i) What-If;
detection or suppression systems). (ii) Checklist;
(ii) The employer shall document (iii) What-If/Checklist;
that equipment complies with recog- (iv) Hazard and Operability Study
nized and generally accepted good engi- (HAZOP):
neering practices. (v) Failure Mode and Effects Analysis
(iii) For existing equipment designed (FMEA);
and constructed in accordance with (vi) Fault Tree Analysis; or
codes, standards, or practices that are (vii) An appropriate equivalent meth-

no longer in general use, the employer odology.
350
(3) The process hazard analysis shall (7) Employers shall retain process
address: hazards analyses and updates or re-
(i) The hazards of the process; validations for each process covered by
(ii) The identification of any previous this section, as well as the documented
incident which had a likely potential resolution of recommendations de-
for catastrophic consequences in the scribed in paragraph (e)(5) of this sec-
workplace; tion for the life of the process.
(iii) Engineering and administrative (f) Operating procedures. (1) The em-
controls applicable to the hazards and ployer shall develop and implement
their interrelationships such as appro- written operating procedures that pro-
priate application of detection meth- vide clear instructions for safely con-
odologies to provide early warning of ducting activities involved in each cov-
releases. (Acceptable detection meth- ered process consistent with the proc-
ods might include process monitoring ess safety information and shall ad-
and control instrumentation with dress at least the following elements.
alarms, and detection hardware such as (i) Steps for each operating phase:
hydrocarbon sensors.); (A) Initial startup;
(iv) Consequences of failure of engi- (B) Normal operations;
neering and administrative controls; (C) Temporary operations;
(v) Facility siting; (D) Emergency shutdown including
(vi) Human factors; and the conditions under which emergency
(vii) A qualitative evaluation of a shutdown is required, and the assign-
range of the possible safety and health ment of shutdown responsibility to
effects of failure of controls on employ- qualified operators to ensure that
ees in the workplace. emergency shutdown is executed in a
(4) The process hazard analysis shall safe and timely manner.
be performed by a team with expertise (E) Emergency Operations;
in engineering and process operations, (F) Normal shutdown; and,
and the team shall include at least one (G) Startup following a turnaround,
employee who has experience and or after an emergency shutdown.
knowledge specific to the process being (ii) Operating limits:
evaluated. Also, one member of the (A) Consequences of deviation; and
team must be knowledgeable in the (B) Steps required to correct or avoid
specific process hazard analysis meth- deviation.
odology being used. (iii) Safety and health considerations:
(5) The employer shall establish a (A) Properties of, and hazards pre-
system to promptly address the team’s sented by, the chemicals used in the
findings and recommendations; assure process;
that the recommendations are resolved (B) Precautions necessary to prevent
in a timely manner and that the reso- exposure, including engineering con-
lution is documented; document what trols, administrative controls, and per-
actions are to be taken; complete ac- sonal protective equipment;
tions as soon as possible; develop a (C) Control measures to be taken if
written schedule of when these actions physical contact or airborne exposure
are to be completed; communicate the occurs;
actions to operating, maintenance and (D) Quality control for raw materials
other employees whose work assign- and control of hazardous chemical in-
ments are in the process and who may ventory levels; and,
be affected by the recommendations or (E) Any special or unique hazards.
actions. (iv) Safety systems and their functions.
(6) At least every five (5) years after (2) Operating procedures shall be
the completion of the initial process readily accessible to employees who
hazard analysis, the process hazard work in or maintain a process.
analysis shall be updated and revali- (3) The operating procedures shall be
dated by a team meeting the require- reviewed as often as necessary to as-
ments in paragraph (e)(4) of this sec- sure that they reflect current oper-
tion, to assure that the process hazard ating practice, including changes that
analysis is consistent with the current result from changes in process chemi-
process. cals, technology, and equipment, and
351
changes to facilities. The employer (h) Contractors—(1) Application. This

shall certify annually that these oper- paragraph applies to contractors per-
ating procedures are current and accu- forming maintenance or repair, turn-
rate. around, major renovation, or specialty
(4) The employer shall develop and work on or adjacent to a covered proc-
implement safe work practices to pro- ess. It does not apply to contractors
vide for the control of hazards during providing incidental services which do
operations such as lockout/tagout; con- not influence process safety, such as
fined space entry; opening process janitorial work, food and drink serv-
equipment or piping; and control over ices, laundry, delivery or other supply
entrance into a facility by mainte- services.
nance, contractor, laboratory, or other (2) Employer responsibilities. (i) The
support personnel. These safe work employer, when selecting a contractor,
practices shall apply to employees and shall obtain and evaluate information
contractor employees. regarding the contract employer’s safe-
(g) Training—(1) Initial training. (i) ty performance and programs.
Each employee presently involved in (ii) The employer shall inform con-
operating a process, and each employee tract employers of the known potential
before being involved in operating a fire, explosion, or toxic release hazards
newly assigned process, shall be related to the contractor’s work and
trained in an overview of the process the process.
and in the operating procedures as (iii) The employer shall explain to
specified in paragraph (f) of this sec- contract employers the applicable pro-
tion. The training shall include empha- visions of the emergency action plan
sis on the specific safety and health required by paragraph (n) of this sec-
hazards, emergency operations includ- tion.
ing shutdown, and safe work practices (iv) The employer shall develop and
applicable to the employee’s job tasks. implement safe work practices con-
(ii) In lieu of initial training for sistent with paragraph (f)(4) of this sec-
those employees already involved in tion, to control the entrance, presence
operating a process on May 26, 1992, an and exit of contract employers and
employer may certify in writing that contract employees in covered process
the employee has the required knowl- areas.
edge, skills, and abilities to safely (v) The employer shall periodically
carry out the duties and responsibil- evaluate the performance of contract
ities as specified in the operating pro- employers in fulfilling their obliga-
cedures. tions as specified in paragraph (h)(3) of
(2) Refresher training. Refresher train- this section.
ing shall be provided at least every (vi) The employer shall maintain a
three years, and more often if nec- contract employee injury and illness
essary, to each employee involved in log related to the contractor’s work in
operating a process to assure that the process areas.
employee understands and adheres to (3) Contract employer responsibilities.
the current operating procedures of the (i) The contract employer shall assure
process. The employer, in consultation that each contract employee is trained
with the employees involved in oper- in the work practices necessary to safe-
ating the process, shall determine the ly perform his/her job.
appropriate frequency of refresher (ii) The contract employer shall as-
training. sure that each contract employee is in-
(3) Training documentation. The em- structed in the known potential fire,
ployer shall ascertain that each em- explosion, or toxic release hazards re-
ployee involved in operating a process lated to his/her job and the process,
has received and understood the train- and the applicable provisions of the
ing required by this paragraph. The emergency action plan.
employer shall prepare a record which (iii) The contract employer shall doc-
contains the identity of the employee, ument that each contract employee
the date of training, and the means has received and understood the train-
used to verify that the employee under- ing required by this paragraph. The
stood the training. contract employer shall prepare a
352
record which contains the identity of procedures to maintain the on-going

the contract employee, the date of integrity of process equipment.
training, and the means used to verify (3) Training for process maintenance
that the employee understood the activities. The employer shall train each
training. employee involved in maintaining the
(iv) The contract employer shall as- on-going integrity of process equip-
sure that each contract employee fol- ment in an overview of that process
lows the safety rules of the facility in- and its hazards and in the procedures
cluding the safe work practices re- applicable to the employee’s job tasks
quired by paragraph (f)(4) of this sec- to assure that the employee can per-
tion. form the job tasks in a safe manner.
(v) The contract employer shall ad- (4) Inspection and testing. (i) Inspec-
vise the employer of any unique haz- tions and tests shall be performed on
ards presented by the contract employ- process equipment.
er’s work, or of any hazards found by (ii) Inspection and testing procedures
the contract employer’s work. shall follow recognized and generally
(i) Pre-startup safety review. (1) The accepted good engineering practices.
employer shall perform a pre-startup (iii) The frequency of inspections and
safety review for new facilities and for tests of process equipment shall be con-
modified facilities when the modifica- sistent with applicable manufacturers’
tion is significant enough to require a recommendations and good engineering
change in the process safety informa- practices, and more frequently if deter-
tion. mined to be necessary by prior oper-
(2) The pre-startup safety review ating experience.
shall confirm that prior to the intro- (iv) The employer shall document
duction of highly hazardous chemicals each inspection and test that has been
to a process: performed on process equipment. The
(i) Construction and equipment is in documentation shall identify the date
accordance with design specifications; of the inspection or test, the name of
(ii) Safety, operating, maintenance, the person who performed the inspec-
and emergency procedures are in place tion or test, the serial number or other
and are adequate; identifier of the equipment on which
(iii) For new facilities, a process haz- the inspection or test was performed, a
ard analysis has been performed and description of the inspection or test
recommendations have been resolved performed, and the results of the in-
or implemented before startup; and spection or test.
modified facilities meet the require- (5) Equipment deficiencies. The em-
ments contained in management of ployer shall correct deficiencies in
change, paragraph (l). equipment that are outside acceptable
(iv) Training of each employee in- limits (defined by the process safety in-
volved in operating a process has been formation in paragraph (d) of this sec-
completed. tion) before further use or in a safe and
(j) Mechanical integrity—(1) Applica- timely manner when necessary means
tion. Paragraphs (j)(2) through (j)(6) of are taken to assure safe operation.
this section apply to the following (6) Quality assurance. (i) In the con-
process equipment: struction of new plants and equipment,
(i) Pressure vessels and storage the employer shall assure that equip-
tanks; ment as it is fabricated is suitable for
(ii) Piping systems (including piping the process application for which they
components such as valves); will be used.
(iii) Relief and vent systems and de- (ii) Appropriate checks and inspec-
vices; tions shall be performed to assure that
(iv) Emergency shutdown systems; equipment is installed properly and
(v) Controls (including monitoring consistent with design specifications
devices and sensors, alarms, and inter- and the manufacturer’s instructions.
locks) and, (iii) The employer shall assure that
(vi) Pumps. maintenance materials, spare parts and
(2) Written procedures. The employer equipment are suitable for the process
shall establish and implement written application for which they will be used.
353
(k) Hot work permit. (1) The employer (2) An incident investigation shall be
shall issue a hot work permit for hot initiated as promptly as possible, but
work operations conducted on or near a not later than 48 hours following the
covered process. incident.
(2) The permit shall document that (3) An incident investigation team
the fire prevention and protection re- shall be established and consist of at
quirements in 29 CFR 1910.252(a) have least one person knowledgeable in the
been implemented prior to beginning process involved, including a contract
the hot work operations; it shall indi- employee if the incident involved work
cate the date(s) authorized for hot of the contractor, and other persons
work; and identify the object on which with appropriate knowledge and experi-
hot work is to be performed. The per- ence to thoroughly investigate and
mit shall be kept on file until comple- analyze the incident.
tion of the hot work operations. (4) A report shall be prepared at the
(l) Management of change. (1) The em- conclusion of the investigation which
ployer shall establish and implement includes at a minimum:
written procedures to manage changes (i) Date of incident;
(except for ‘‘replacements in kind’’) to (ii) Date investigation began;
process chemicals, technology, equip- (iii) A description of the incident;
ment, and procedures; and, changes to (iv) The factors that contributed to
facilities that affect a covered process. the incident; and,
(2) The procedures shall assure that (v) Any recommendations resulting
the following considerations are ad- from the investigation.
dressed prior to any change: (5) The employer shall establish a
(i) The technical basis for the pro- system to promptly address and resolve
posed change; the incident report findings and rec-
ommendations. Resolutions and correc-
(ii) Impact of change on safety and
tive actions shall be documented.
health;
(6) The report shall be reviewed with
(iii) Modifications to operating pro-
all affected personnel whose job tasks
cedures;
are relevant to the incident findings in-
(iv) Necessary time period for the cluding contract employees where ap-
change; and, plicable.
(v) Authorization requirements for (7) Incident investigation reports
the proposed change. shall be retained for five years.
(3) Employees involved in operating a (n) Emergency planning and response.
process and maintenance and contract The employer shall establish and im-
employees whose job tasks will be af- plement an emergency action plan for
fected by a change in the process shall the entire plant in accordance with the
be informed of, and trained in, the provisions of 29 CFR 1910.38. In addi-
change prior to start-up of the process tion, the emergency action plan shall
or affected part of the process. include procedures for handling small
(4) If a change covered by this para- releases. Employers covered under this
graph results in a change in the process standard may also be subject to the
safety information required by para- hazardous waste and emergency re-
graph (d) of this section, such informa- sponse provisions contained in 29 CFR
tion shall be updated accordingly. 1910.120 (a), (p) and (q).
(5) If a change covered by this para- (o) Compliance Audits. (1) Employers
graph results in a change in the oper- shall certify that they have evaluated
ating procedures or practices required compliance with the provisions of this
by paragraph (f) of this section, such section at least every three years to
procedures or practices shall be up- verify that the procedures and prac-
dated accordingly. tices developed under the standard are
(m) Incident investigation. (1) The em- adequate and are being followed.
ployer shall investigate each incident (2) The compliance audit shall be
which resulted in, or could reasonably conducted by at least one person
have resulted in a catastrophic release knowledgeable in the process.
of highly hazardous chemical in the (3) A report of the findings of the

workplace. audit shall be developed.
354
(4) The employer shall promptly de- Chemical name CAS * TQ **

termine and document an appropriate
Ammonium Perchlorate ......... 7790–98–9 7500
response to each of the findings of the Ammonium Permanganate .... 7787–36–2 7500
compliance audit, and document that Arsine (also called Arsenic
deficiencies have been corrected. Hydride) ............................. 7784–42–1 100
Bis(Chloromethyl) Ether ........ 542–88–1 100
(5) Employers shall retain the two (2) Boron Trichloride ................... 10294–34–5 2500
most recent compliance audit reports. Boron Trifluoride .................... 7637–07–2 250
(p) Trade secrets. (1) Employers shall Bromine ................................. 7726–95–6 1500
make all information necessary to Bromine Chloride ................... 13863–41–7 1500
Bromine Pentafluoride ........... 7789–30–2 2500
comply with the section available to Bromine Trifluoride ................ 7787–71–5 15000
those persons responsible for compiling 3-Bromopropyne (also called
the process safety information (re- Propargyl Bromide) ............ 106–96–7 100
Butyl Hydroperoxide (Tertiary) 75–91–2 5000
quired by paragraph (d) of this section), Butyl Perbenzoate (Tertiary) 614–45–9 7500
those assisting in the development of Carbonyl Chloride (see Phos-
the process hazard analysis (required gene) .................................. 75–44–5 100
by paragraph (e) of this section), those Carbonyl Fluoride .................. 353–50–4 2500
Cellulose Nitrate (concentra-
responsible for developing the oper- tion >12.6% nitrogen) ........ 9004–70–0 2500
ating procedures (required by para- Chlorine ................................. 7782–50–5 1500
graph (f) of this section), and those in- Chlorine Dioxide .................... 10049–04–4 1000
Chlorine Pentrafluoride .......... 13637–63–3 1000
volved in incident investigations (re- Chlorine Trifluoride ................ 7790–91–2 1000
quired by paragraph (m) of this sec- Chlorodiethylaluminum (also
tion), emergency planning and response called Diethylaluminum
(paragraph (n) of this section) and com- Chloride) ............................ 96–10–6 5000
1-Chloro-2,4-Dinitrobenzene 97–00–7 5000
pliance audits (paragraph (o) of this Chloromethyl Methyl Ether .... 107–30–2 500
section) without regard to possible Chloropicrin ........................... 76–06–2 500
trade secret status of such informa- Chloropicrin and Methyl Bro-
mide mixture ...................... None 1500
tion. Chloropicrin and Methyl Chlo-
(2) Nothing in this paragraph shall ride mixture ........................ None 1500
preclude the employer from requiring Cumene Hydroperoxide ........ 80–15–9 5000
the persons to whom the information is Cyanogen .............................. 460–19–5 2500
Cyanogen Chloride ................ 506–77–4 500
made available under paragraph (p)(1) Cyanuric Fluoride .................. 675–14–9 100
of this section to enter into confiden- Diacetyl Peroxide (Concentra-
tiality agreements not to disclose the tion >70%) .......................... 110–22–5 5000
Diazomethane ....................... 334–88–3 500
information as set forth in 29 CFR Dibenzoyl Peroxide ............... 94–36–0 7500
1910.1200. Diborane ................................ 19287–45–7 100
(3) Subject to the rules and proce- Dibutyl Peroxide (Tertiary) ..... 110–05–4 5000
dures set forth in 29 CFR 1910.1200(i)(1) Dichloro Acetylene ................ 7572–29–4 250
Dichlorosilane ........................ 4109–96–0 2500
through 1910.1200(i)(12), employees and Diethylzinc ............................. 557–20–0 10000
their designated representatives shall Diisopropyl
have access to trade secret information Peroxydicarbonate ............. 105–64–6 7500
contained within the process hazard Dilaluroyl Peroxide ................ 105–74–8 7500
Dimethyldichlorosilane ........... 75–78–5 1000
analysis and other documents required Dimethylhydrazine, 1,1- ......... 57–14–7 1000
to be developed by this standard. Dimethylamine, Anhydrous ... 124–40–3 2500
2,4-Dinitroaniline .................... 97–02–9 5000
APPENDIX A TO § 1910.119—LIST OF HIGHLY Ethyl Methyl Ketone Peroxide
HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS, TOXICS AND (also Methyl Ethyl Ketone
REACTIVES (MANDATORY) Peroxide; concentration
>60%) ................................. 1338–23–4 5000
This appendix contains a listing of toxic Ethyl Nitrite ............................ 109–95–5 5000
and reactive highly hazardous chemicals Ethylamine ............................. 75–04–7 7500
which present a potential for a catastrophic Ethylene Fluorohydrin ........... 371–62–0 100
event at or above the threshold quantity. Ethylene Oxide ...................... 75–21–8 5000
Ethyleneimine ........................ 151–56–4 1000
Chemical name CAS * TQ ** Fluorine .................................. 7782–41–4 1000
Formaldehyde (Formalin) ...... 50–00–0 1000
Acetaldehyde ......................... 75–07–0 2500 Furan ..................................... 110–00–9 500
Acrolein (2-Propenal) ............ 107–02–8 150 Hexafluoroacetone ................ 684–16–2 5000
Acrylyl Chloride ..................... 814–68–6 250 Hydrochloric Acid, Anhydrous 7647–01–0 5000
Allyl Chloride ......................... 107–05–1 1000 Hydrofluoric Acid, Anhydrous 7664–39–3 1000
Allylamine .............................. 107–11–9 1000 Hydrogen Bromide ................ 10035–10–6 5000
Alkylaluminums ...................... Varies 5000 Hydrogen Chloride ................ 7647–01–0 5000
Ammonia, Anhydrous ............ 7664–41–7 10000 Hydrogen Cyanide, Anhy-

Ammonia solutions (>44% drous .................................. 74–90–8 1000
ammonia by weight) .......... 7664–41–7 15000 Hydrogen Fluoride ................. 7664–39–3 1000
355
Chemical name CAS * TQ ** Chemical name CAS * TQ **
Hydrogen Peroxide (52% by Peracetic Acid (concentration

weight or greater) .............. 7722–84–1 7500 >60% Acetic Acid; also
Hydrogen Selenide ................ 7783–07–5 150 called Peroxyacetic Acid) .. 79–21–0 1000
Hydrogen Sulfide ................... 7783–06–4 1500 Perchloric Acid (concentration
Hydroxylamine ....................... 7803–49–8 2500 >60% by weight) ................ 7601–90–3 5000
Iron, Pentacarbonyl ............... 13463–40–6 250 Perchloromethyl Mercaptan ... 594–42–3 150
Isopropylamine ...................... 75–31–0 5000 Perchloryl Fluoride ................ 7616–94–6 5000
Ketene ................................... 463–51–4 100 Peroxyacetic Acid (concentra-
Methacrylaldehyde ................ 78–85–3 1000 tion >60% Acetic Acid; also
Methacryloyl Chloride ............ 920–46–7 150 called Peracetic Acid) ........ 79–21–0 1000
Methacryloyloxyethyl Phosgene (also called Car-
Isocyanate .......................... 30674–80–7 100 bonyl Chloride) ................... 75–44–5 100
Methyl Acrylonitrile ................ 126–98–7 250
Phosphine (Hydrogen
Methylamine, Anhydrous ....... 74–89–5 1000
Phosphide) ......................... 7803–51–2 100
Methyl Bromide ..................... 74–83–9 2500
Methyl Chloride ..................... 74–87–3 15000 Phosphorus Oxychloride (also
Methyl Chloroformate ............ 79–22–1 500 called Phosphoryl Chloride) 10025–87–3 1000
Methyl Ethyl Ketone Peroxide Phosphorus Trichloride ......... 7719–12–2 1000
(concentration >60%) ......... 1338–23–4 5000 Phosphoryl Chloride (also
Methyl Fluoroacetate ............. 453–18–9 100 called Phosphorus
Methyl Fluorosulfate .............. 421–20–5 100 Oxychloride) ....................... 10025–87–3 1000
Methyl Hydrazine ................... 60–34–4 100 Propargyl Bromide ................. 106–96–7 100
Methyl Iodide ......................... 74–88–4 7500 Propyl Nitrate ......................... 627–3–4 2500
Methyl Isocyanate ................. 624–83–9 250 Sarin ...................................... 107–44–8 100
Methyl Mercaptan .................. 74–93–1 5000 Selenium Hexafluoride .......... 7783–79–1 1000
Methyl Vinyl Ketone .............. 78–94–4 100 Stibine (Antimony Hydride) ... 7803–52–3 500
Methyltrichlorosilane .............. 75–79–6 500 Sulfur Dioxide (liquid) ............ 7446–09–5 1000
Nickel Carbonly (Nickel Sulfur Pentafluoride ............... 5714–22–7 250
Tetracarbonyl) .................... 13463–39–3 150 Sulfur Tetrafluoride ................ 7783–60–0 250
Nitric Acid (94.5% by weight Sulfur Trioxide (also called
or greater) .......................... 7697–37–2 500 Sulfuric Anhydride) ............ 7446–11–9 1000
Nitric Oxide ............................ 10102–43–9 250 Sulfuric Anhydride (also
Nitroaniline (para Nitroaniline 100–01–6 5000 called Sulfur Trioxide) ........ 7446–11–9 1000
Nitromethane ......................... 75–52–5 2500 Tellurium Hexafluoride ........... 7783–80–4 250
Nitrogen Dioxide .................... 10102–44–0 250 Tetrafluoroethylene ................ 116–14–3 5000
Nitrogen Oxides (NO; NO2; Tetrafluorohydrazine .............. 10036–47–2 5000
N204; N203) ...................... 10102–44–0 250 Tetramethyl Lead .................. 75–74–1 1000
Nitrogen Tetroxide (also Thionyl Chloride .................... 7719–09–7 250
called Nitrogen Peroxide) .. 10544–72–6 250 Trichloro (chloromethyl) Sil-
Nitrogen Trifluoride ................ 7783–54–2 5000 ane ..................................... 1558–25–4 100
Nitrogen Trioxide ................... 10544–73–7 250
Trichloro (dichlorophenyl) Sil-
Oleum (65% to 80% by
ane ..................................... 27137–85–5 2500
weight; also called Fuming
Trichlorosilane ....................... 10025–78–2 5000
Sulfuric Acid) ...................... 8014–95–7 1,000
Trifluorochloroethylene .......... 79–38–9 10000
Osmium Tetroxide ................. 20816–12–0 100
Trimethyoxysilane .................. 2487–90–3 1500
Oxygen Difluoride (Fluorine
Monoxide) .......................... 7783–41–7 100 * Chemical Abstract Service Number.
Ozone .................................... 10028–15–6 100 ** Threshold Quantity in Pounds (Amount necessary to be
Pentaborane .......................... 19624–22–7 100 covered by this standard).
356
APPENDIX B TO § 1910.119—BLOCK FLOW DIAGRAM AND SIMPLIFIED PROCESS

FLOW DIAGRAM (NONMANDATORY)
357
EC27OC91.026</GPH>
APPENDIX C TO § 1910.119—COMPLIANCE GUIDE- ment program requires a systematic ap-

LINES AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR PROCESS proach to evaluating the whole process.
SAFETY MANAGEMENT (NONMANDATORY) Using this approach the process design, proc-
ess technology, operational and maintenance
This appendix serves as a nonmandatory activities and procedures, nonroutine activi-
guideline to assist employers and employees ties and procedures, emergency preparedness
in complying with the requirements of this plans and procedures, training programs, and
section, as well as provides other helpful rec- other elements which impact the process are
ommendations and information. Examples all considered in the evaluation. The various
presented in this appendix are not the only lines of defense that have been incorporated
means of achieving the performance goals in into the design and operation of the process
the standard. This appendix neither adds nor to prevent or mitigate the release of haz-
detracts from the requirements of the stand- ardous chemicals need to be evaluated and
ard. strengthened to assure their effectiveness at
1. Introduction to Process Safety Manage- each level. Process safety management is the
ment. The major objective of process safety proactive identification, evaluation and
management of highly hazardous chemicals mitigation or prevention of chemical re-
is to prevent unwanted releases of hazardous leases that could occur as a result of failures
chemicals especially into locations which in process, procedures or equipment.

could expose employees and others to serious The process safety management standard
hazards. An effective process safety manage- targets highly hazardous chemicals that
358
EC27OC91.027</GPH>
have the potential to cause a catastrophic formed about relevant safety and health
incident. This standard as a whole is to aid issues and employers may be able to adapt
employers in their efforts to prevent or miti- these practices and procedures to meet their
gate episodic chemical releases that could obligations under this standard. Employers
lead to a catastrophe in the workplace and who have not implemented an occupational
possibly to the surrounding community. To safety and health program may wish to form
control these types of hazards, employers a safety and health committee of employees
need to develop the necessary expertise, ex- and management representatives to help the
periences, judgement and proactive initia- employer meet the obligations specified by
tive within their workforce to properly im- this standard. These committees can become
plement and maintain an effective process a significant ally in helping the employer to
safety management program as envisioned in implement and maintain an effective process
the OSHA standard. This OSHA standard is safety management program for all employ-
required by the Clean Air Act Amendments ees.
as is the Environmental Protection Agency’s 3. Process Safety Information. Complete and
Risk Management Plan. Employers, who accurate written information concerning
merge the two sets of requirements into process chemicals, process technology, and
their process safety management program, process equipment is essential to an effective
will better assure full compliance with each process safety management program and to a
as well as enhancing their relationship with process hazards analysis. The compiled infor-
the local community. mation will be a necessary resource to a va-
While OSHA believes process safety man- riety of users including the team that will
agement will have a positive effect on the perform the process hazards analysis as re-
safety of employees in workplaces and also quired under paragraph (e); those developing
offers other potential benefits to employers the training programs and the operating pro-
(increased productivity), smaller businesses cedures; contractors whose employees will be
which may have limited resources available working with the process; those conducting
to them at this time, might consider alter- the pre-startup reviews; local emergency
native avenues of decreasing the risks asso-
preparedness planners; and insurance and en-
ciated with highly hazardous chemicals at
forcement officials.
their workplaces. One method which might
The information to be compiled about the
be considered is the reduction in the inven-
tory of the highly hazardous chemical. This chemicals, including process intermediates,
reduction in inventory will result in a reduc- needs to be comprehensive enough for an ac-
tion of the risk or potential for a cata- curate assessment of the fire and explosion
strophic incident. Also, employers including characteristics, reactivity hazards, the safe-
small employers may be able to establish ty and health hazards to workers, and the
more efficient inventory control by reducing corrosion and erosion effects on the process
the quantities of highly hazardous chemicals equipment and monitoring tools. Current
on site below the established threshold quan- safety data sheet (SDS) information can be
tities. This reduction can be accomplished used to help meet this requirement which
by ordering smaller shipments and maintain- must be supplemented with process chem-
ing the minimum inventory necessary for ef- istry information including runaway reac-
ficient and safe operation. When reduced in- tion and over pressure hazards if applicable.
ventory is not feasible, then the employer Process technology information will be a
might consider dispersing inventory to sev- part of the process safety information pack-
eral locations on site. Dispersing storage age and it is expected that it will include
into locations where a release in one loca- diagrams of the type shown in appendix B of
tion will not cause a release in another loca- this section as well as employer established
tion is a practical method to also reduce the criteria for maximum inventory levels for
risk or portential for catastrophic incidents. process chemicals; limits beyond which
2. Employee Involvement in Process Safety would be considered upset conditions; and a
Management. Section 304 of the Clean Air Act qualitative estimate of the consequences or
Amendments states that employers are to results of deviation that could occur if oper-
consult with their employees and their rep- ating beyond the established process limits.
resentatives regarding the employers efforts Employers are encouraged to use diagrams
in the development and implementation of which will help users understand the process.
the process safety management program ele- A block flow diagram is used to show the
ments and hazard assessments. Section 304 major process equipment and inter-
also requires employers to train and educate connecting process flow lines and show flow
their employees and to inform affected em- rates, stream composition, temperatures,
ployees of the findings from incident inves- and pressures when necessary for clarity.
tigations required by the process safety man- The block flow diagram is a simplified dia-
agement program. Many employers, under gram.
their safety and health programs, have al- Process flow diagrams are more complex
ready established means and methods to and will show all main flow streams includ-
keep employees and their representatives ining valves to enhance the understanding of
359
the process, as well as pressures and tem- significance of potential hazards associated
peratures on all feed and product lines with- with the processing or handling of highly
in all major vessels, in and out of headers hazardous chemicals. A PHA provides infor-
and heat exchangers, and points of pressure mation which will assist employers and em-
and temperature control. Also, materials of ployees in making decisions for improving
construction information, pump capacities safety and reducing the consequences of un-
and pressure heads, compressor horsepower wanted or unplanned releases of hazardous
and vessel design pressures and temperatures chemicals. A PHA is directed toward ana-
are shown when necessary for clarity. In ad- lyzing potential causes and consequences of
dition, major components of control loops fires, explosions, releases of toxic or flam-
are usually shown along with key utilities mable chemicals and major spills of haz-
on process flow diagrams. ardous chemicals. The PHA focuses on equip-
Piping and instrument diagrams (P&IDs) ment, instrumentation, utilities, human ac-
may be the more appropriate type of dia- tions (routine and nonroutine), and external
grams to show some of the above details and factors that might impact the process. These
to display the information for the piping de- considerations assist in determining the haz-
signer and engineering staff. The P&IDs are ards and potential failure points or failure
to be used to describe the relationships be- modes in a process.
tween equipment and instrumentation as
The selection of a PHA methodology or
well as other relevant information that will
technique will be influenced by many factors
enhance clarity. Computer software pro-
including the amount of existing knowledge
grams which do P&IDs or other diagrams
useful to the information package, may be about the process. Is it a process that has
used to help meet this requirement. been operated for a long period of time with
The information pertaining to process little or no innovation and extensive experi-
equipment design must be documented. In ence has been generated with its use? Or, is
other words, what were the codes and stand- it a new process or one which has been
ards relied on to establish good engineering changed frequently by the inclusion of inno-
practice. These codes and standards are pub- vative features? Also, the size and com-
lished by such organizations as the American plexity of the process will influence the deci-
Society of Mechanical Engineers, American sion as to the appropriate PHA methodology
Petroleum Institute, American National to use. All PHA methodologies are subject to
Standards Institute, National Fire Protec- certain limitations. For example, the check-
tion Association, American Society for Test- list methodology works well when the proc-
ing and Materials, National Board of Boiler ess is very stable and no changes are made,
and Pressure Vessel Inspectors, National As- but it is not as effective when the process
sociation of Corrosion Engineers, American has undergone extensive change. The check-
Society of Exchange Manufacturers Associa- list may miss the most recent changes and
tion, and model building code groups. consequently the changes would not be eval-
In addition, various engineering societies uated. Another limitation to be considered
issue technical reports which impact process concerns the assumptions made by the team
design. For example, the American Institute or analyst. The PHA is dependent on good
of Chemical Engineers has published tech- judgement and the assumptions made during
nical reports on topics such as two phase the study need to be documented and under-
flow for venting devices. This type of tech- stood by the team and reviewer and kept for
nically recognized report would constitute a future PHA.
good engineering practice. The team conducting the PHA need to un-
For existing equipment designed and con- derstand the methodology that is going to be
structed many years ago in accordance with used. A PHA team can vary in size from two
the codes and standards available at that people to a number of people with varied
time and no longer in general use today, the operational and technical backgrounds.
employer must document which codes and Some team members may only be a part of
standards were used and that the design and the team for a limited time. The team leader
construction along with the testing, inspec- needs to be fully knowledgeable in the proper
tion and operation are still suitable for the implementation of the PHA methodology
intended use. Where the process technology that is to be used and should be impartial in
requires a design which departs from the ap- the evaluation. The other full or part time
plicable codes and standards, the employer team members need to provide the team with
must document that the design and con- expertise in areas such as process tech-
struction is suitable for the intended pur- nology, process design, operating procedures
pose. and practices, including how the work is ac-
4. Process Hazard Analysis. A process hazard tually performed, alarms, emergency proce-
analysis (PHA), sometimes called a process dures, instrumentation, maintenance proce-
hazard evaluation, is one of the most impor- dures, both routine and nonroutine tasks, in-
tant elements of the process safety manage- cluding how the tasks are authorized, pro-
ment program. A PHA is an organized and curement of parts and supplies, safety and
systematic effort to identify and analyze the health, and any other relevant subject as the
360
need dictates. At least one team member evolved from a checklist or what-if ques-
must be familiar with the process. tions, could be developed and used by each
The ideal team will have an intimate employer effectively to reflect his/her par-
knowledge of the standards, codes, specifica- ticular process; this would simplify compli-
tions and regulations applicable to the proc- ance for them.
ess being studied. The selected team mem- When the employer has a number of proc-
bers need to be compatible and the team esses which require a PHA, the employer
leader needs to be able to manage the team, must set up a priority system of which PHAs
and the PHA study. The team needs to be to conduct first. A preliminary or gross haz-
able to work together while benefiting from ard analysis may be useful in prioritizing the
the expertise of others on the team or out- processes that the employer has determined
side the team, to resolve issues, and to forge are subject to coverage by the process safety
a consensus on the findings of the study and management standard. Consideration should
recommendations. first be given to those processes with the po-
The application of a PHA to a process may tential of adversely affecting the largest
involve the use of different methodologies number of employees. This prioritizing
for various parts of the process. For example, should consider the potential severity of a
a process involving a series of unit operation chemical release, the number of potentially
of varying sizes, complexities, and ages may affected employees, the operating history of
use different methodologies and team mem- the process such as the frequency of chem-
bers for each operation. Then the conclu- ical releases, the age of the process and any
sions can be integrated into one final study other relevant factors. These factors would
and evaluation. A more specific example is suggest a ranking order and would suggest
the use of a checklist PHA for a standard either using a weighing factor system or a
boiler or heat exchanger and the use of a systematic ranking method. The use of a
Hazard and Operability PHA for the overall preliminary hazard analysis would assist an
process. Also, for batch type processes like employer in determining which process
custom batch operations, a generic PHA of a should be of the highest priority and thereby
representative batch may be used where the employer would obtain the greatest im-
there are only small changes of monomer or provement in safety at the facility.
other ingredient ratios and the chemistry is Detailed guidance on the content and ap-
documented for the full range and ratio of plication of process hazard analysis meth-
batch ingredients. Another process that odologies is available from the American In-
might consider using a generic type of PHA stitute of Chemical Engineers’ Center for
is a gas plant. Often these plants are simply Chemical Process Safety (see appendix D).
moved from site to site and therefore, a ge- 5. Operating Procedures and Practices. Oper-
neric PHA may be used for these movable ating procedures describe tasks to be per-
plants. Also, when an employer has several formed, data to be recorded, operating condi-
similar size gas plants and no sour gas is tions to be maintained, samples to be col-
being processed at the site, then a generic lected, and safety and health precautions to
PHA is feasible as long as the variations of be taken. The procedures need to be tech-
the individual sites are accounted for in the nically accurate, understandable to employ-
PHA. Finally, when an employer has a large ees, and revised periodically to ensure that
continuous process which has several control they reflect current operations. The process
rooms for different portions of the process safety information package is to be used as
such as for a distillation tower and a blend- a resource to better assure that the oper-
ing operation, the employer may wish to do ating procedures and practices are consistent
each segment separately and then integrate with the known hazards of the chemicals in
the final results. the process and that the operating param-
Additionally, small businesses which are eters are accurate. Operating procedures
covered by this rule, will often have proc- should be reviewed by engineering staff and
esses that have less storage volume, less ca- operating personnel to ensure that they are
pacity, and less complicated than processes accurate and provide practical instructions
at a large facility. Therefore, OSHA would on how to actually carry out job duties safe-
anticipate that the less complex methodolo- ly.
gies would be used to meet the process haz- Operating procedures will include specific
ard analysis criteria in the standard. These instructions or details on what steps are to
process hazard analyses can be done in less be taken or followed in carrying out the
time and with a few people being involved. A stated procedures. These operating instruc-
less complex process generally means that tions for each procedure should include the
less data, P&IDs, and process information is applicable safety precautions and should
needed to perform a process hazard analysis. contain appropriate information on safety
Many small businesses have processes that implications. For example, the operating
are not unique, such as cold storage lockers procedures addressing operating parameters
or water treatment facilities. Where em- will contain operating instructions about
ployer associations have a number of mem- pressure limits, temperature ranges, flow
bers with such facilities, a generic PHA, rates, what to do when an upset condition
361
occurs, what alarms and instruments are erating personnel should be informed to pro-
pertinent if an upset condition occurs, and vide closure on the job.
other subjects. Another example of using op- 6. Employee Training. All employees, includ-
erating instructions to properly implement ing maintenance and contractor employees,
operating procedures is in starting up or involved with highly hazardous chemicals
shutting down the process. In these cases, need to fully understand the safety and
different parameters will be required from health hazards of the chemicals and proc-
those of normal operation. These operating esses they work with for the protection of
instructions need to clearly indicate the dis- themselves, their fellow employees and the
tinctions between startup and normal oper- citizens of nearby communities. Training
ations such as the appropriate allowances for conducted in compliance with § 1910.1200, the
heating up a unit to reach the normal oper- Hazard Communication standard, will help
ating parameters. Also the operating in- employees to be more knowledgeable about
structions need to describe the proper meth- the chemicals they work with as well as fa-
od for increasing the temperature of the unit miliarize them with reading and under-
until the normal operating temperature pa- standing SDSs. However, additional training
rameters are achieved. in subjects such as operating procedures and
Computerized process control systems add safety work practices, emergency evacuation
complexity to operating instructions. These and response, safety procedures, routine and
operating instructions need to describe the nonroutine work authorization activities,
logic of the software as well as the relation- and other areas pertinent to process safety
and health will need to be covered by an em-
ship between the equipment and the control
ployer’s training program.
system; otherwise, it may not be apparent to
In establishing their training programs,
the operator.
employers must clearly define the employees
Operating procedures and instructions are to be trained and what subjects are to be
important for training operating personnel. covered in their training. Employers in set-
The operating procedures are often viewed as ting up their training program will need to
the standard operating practices (SOPs) for clearly establish the goals and objectives
operations. Control room personnel and oper- they wish to achieve with the training that
ating staff, in general, need to have a full un- they provide to their employees. The learn-
derstanding of operating procedures. If working goals or objectives should be written in
ers are not fluent in English then procedures clear measurable terms before the training
and instructions need to be prepared in a sec- begins. These goals and objectives need to be
ond language understood by the workers. In tailored to each of the specific training mod-
addition, operating procedures need to be ules or segments. Employers should describe
changed when there is a change in the proc- the important actions and conditions under
ess as a result of the management of change which the employee will demonstrate com-
procedures. The consequences of operating petence or knowledge as well as what is ac-
procedure changes need to be fully evaluated ceptable performance.
and the information conveyed to the per- Hands-on-training where employees are
sonnel. For example, mechanical changes to able to use their senses beyond listening,
the process made by the maintenance depart- will enhance learning. For example, oper-
ment (like changing a valve from steel to ating personnel, who will work in a control
brass or other subtle changes) need to be room or at control panels, would benefit by
evaluated to determine if operating proce- being trained at a simulated control panel or
dures and practices also need to be changed. panels. Upset conditions of various types
All management of change actions must be could be displayed on the simulator, and
coordinated and integrated with current op- then the employee could go through the
erating procedures and operating personnel proper operating procedures to bring the
must be oriented to the changes in proce- simulator panel back to the normal oper-
dures before the change is made. When the ating parameters. A training environment
process is shut down in order to make a could be created to help the trainee feel the
change, then the operating procedures must full reality of the situation but, of course,
be updated before startup of the process. under controlled conditions. This realistic
Training in how to handle upset conditions type of training can be very effective in
must be accomplished as well as what oper- teaching employees correct procedures while
ating personnel are to do in emergencies allowing them to also see the consequences
such as when a pump seal fails or a pipeline of what might happen if they do not follow
ruptures. Communication between operating established operating procedures. Other
personnel and workers performing work training techniques using videos or on-the-
within the process area, such as nonroutine job training can also be very effective for
tasks, also must be maintained. The hazards teaching other job tasks, duties, or other im-
of the tasks are to be conveyed to operating portant information. An effective training
personnel in accordance with established program will allow the employee to fully
procedures and to those performing the ac- participate in the training process and to
tual tasks. When the work is completed, op- practice their skill or knowledge.
362
Employers need to periodically evaluate rience. This log will also contain informa-
their training programs to see if the nection which will be of use to those auditing
essary skills, knowledge, and routines are process safety management compliance and
being properly understood and implemented those involved in incident investigations.
by their trained employees. The means or Contract employees must perform their
methods for evaluating the training should work safely. Considering that contractors
be developed along with the training pro- often perform very specialized and poten-
gram goals and objectives. Training program tially hazardous tasks such as confined space
evaluation will help employers to determine entry activities and nonroutine repair activi-
the amount of training their employees un- ties it is quite important that their activi-
derstood, and whether the desired results ties be controlled while they are working on
were obtained. If, after the evaluation, it ap- or near a covered process. A permit system
pears that the trained employees are not at or work authorization system for these ac-
the level of knowledge and skill that was ex- tivities would also be helpful to all affected
pected, the employer will need to revise the employers. The use of a work authorization
training program, provide retraining, or pro- system keeps an employer informed of con-
vide more frequent refresher training ses- tract employee activities, and as a benefit
sions until the deficiency is resolved. Those the employer will have better coordination
who conducted the training and those who and more management control over the work
received the training should also be con- being performed in the process area. A well
sulted as to how best to improve the training run and well maintained process where em-
process. If there is a language barrier, the ployee safety is fully recognized will benefit
language known to the trainees should be all of those who work in the facility whether
used to reinforce the training messages and they be contract employees or employees of
information. the owner.
Careful consideration must be given to as- 8. Pre-Startup Safety. For new processes,
sure that employees including maintenance the employer will find a PHA helpful in im-
and contract employees receive current and proving the design and construction of the
updated training. For example, if changes process from a reliability and quality point
are made to a process, impacted employees of view. The safe operation of the new proc-
must be trained in the changes and under- ess will be enhanced by making use of the
stand the effects of the changes on their job PHA recommendations before final installa-
tasks (e.g., any new operating procedures tions are completed. P&IDs are to be com-
pertinent to their tasks). Additionally, as al- pleted along with having the operating pro-
ready discussed the evaluation of the em- cedures in place and the operating staff
ployee’s absorption of training will certainly trained to run the process before startup.
influence the need for training. The initial startup procedures and normal
7. Contractors. Employers who use contrac- operating procedures need to be fully evalu-
tors to perform work in and around processes ated as part of the pre-startup review to as-
that involve highly hazardous chemicals, sure a safe transfer into the normal oper-
will need to establish a screening process so ating mode for meeting the process param-
that they hire and use contractors who ac- eters.
complish the desired job tasks without com- For existing processes that have been shut-
promising the safety and health of employ- down for turnaround, or modification, etc.,
ees at a facility. For contractors, whose safe- the employer must assure that any changes
ty performance on the job is not known to other than ‘‘replacement in kind’’ made to
the hiring employer, the employer will need the process during shutdown go through the
to obtain information on injury and illness management of change procedures. P&IDs
rates and experience and should obtain con- will need to be updated as necessary, as well
tractor references. Additionally, the em- as operating procedures and instructions. If
ployer must assure that the contractor has the changes made to the process during shut-
the appropriate job skills, knowledge and down are significant and impact the training
certifications (such as for pressure vessel program, then operating personnel as well as
welders). Contractor work methods and expe- employees engaged in routine and nonrou-
riences should be evaluated. For example, tine work in the process area may need some
does the contractor conducting demolition refresher or additional training in light of
work swing loads over operating processes or the changes. Any incident investigation rec-
does the contractor avoid such hazards? ommendations, compliance audits or PHA
Maintaining a site injury and illness log recommendations need to be reviewed as
for contractors is another method employers well to see what impacts they may have on
must use to track and maintain current the process before beginning the startup.
knowledge of work activities involving con- 9. Mechanical Integrity. Employers will need
tract employees working on or adjacent to to review their maintenance programs and
covered processes. Injury and illness logs of schedules to see if there are areas where
both the employer’s employees and contract ‘‘breakdown’’ maintenance is used rather
employees allow an employer to have full than an on-going mechanical integrity pro-
knowledge of process injury and illness expe- gram. Equipment used to process, store, or
363
handle highly hazardous chemicals needs to and inspection frequency, as well as appro-
be designed, constructed, installed and main- priate methodologies.
tained to minimize the risk of releases of The applicable codes and standards provide
such chemicals. This requires that a mechan- criteria for external inspections for such
ical integrity program be in place to assure items as foundation and supports, anchor
the continued integrity of process equip- bolts, concrete or steel supports, guy wires,
ment. Elements of a mechanical integrity nozzles and sprinklers, pipe hangers, ground-
program include the identification and cating connections, protective coatings and in-
egorization of equipment and instrumenta- sulation, and external metal surfaces of pip-
tion, inspections and tests, testing and ining and vessels, etc. These codes and stand-
spection frequencies, development of mainte- ards also provide information on methodolo-
nance procedures, training of maintenance gies for internal inspection, and a frequency
personnel, the establishment of criteria for formula based on the corrosion rate of the
acceptable test results, documentation of materials of construction. Also, erosion both
test and inspection results, and documenta- internal and external needs to be considered
tion of manufacturer recommendations as to along with corrosion effects for piping and
meantime to failure for equipment and in- valves. Where the corrosion rate is not
strumentation. known, a maximum inspection frequency is
The first line of defense an employer has recommended, and methods of developing
available is to operate and maintain the the corrosion rate are available in the codes.
process as designed, and to keep the chemi- Internal inspections need to cover items
cals contained. This line of defense is backed such as vessel shell, bottom and head; metal-
up by the next line of defense which is the lic linings; nonmetallic linings; thickness
controlled release of chemicals through measurements for vessels and piping; inspec-
venting to scrubbers or flares, or to surge or tion for erosion, corrosion, cracking and
overflow tanks which are designed to receive bulges; internal equipment like trays, baf-
such chemicals, etc. These lines of defense fles, sensors and screens for erosion, corro-
are the primary lines of defense or means to sion or cracking and other deficiencies.
prevent unwanted releases. The secondary Some of these inspections may be performed
lines of defense would include fixed fire pro- by state of local government inspectors
tection systems like sprinklers, water spray, under state and local statutes. However,
or deluge systems, monitor guns, etc., dikes, each employer needs to develop procedures
designed drainage systems, and other sys- to ensure that tests and inspections are con-
tems which would control or mitigate haz- ducted properly and that consistency is
ardous chemicals once an unwanted release maintained even where different employees
occurs. These primary and secondary lines of may be involved. Appropriate training is to
defense are what the mechanical integrity be provided to maintenance personnel to en-
program needs to protect and strengthen sure that they understand the preventive
these primary and secondary lines of de- maintenance program procedures, safe prac-
fenses where appropriate. tices, and the proper use amd application of
The first step of an effective mechanical special equipment or unique tools that may
integrity program is to compile and cat- be required. This training is part of the over-
egorize a list of process equipment and in- all training program called for in the stand-
strumentation for inclusion in the program. ard.
This list would include pressure vessels, stor- A quality assurance system is needed to
age tanks, process piping, relief and vent help ensure that the proper materials of con-
systems, fire protection system components, struction are used, that fabrication and in-
emergency shutdown systems and alarms spection procedures are proper, and that in-
and interlocks and pumps. For the cat- stallation procedures recognize field instal-
egorization of instrumentation and the listed lation concerns. The quality assurance pro-
equipment the employer would prioritize gram is an essential part of the mechanical
which pieces of equipment require closer integrity program and will help to maintain
scrutiny than others. Meantime to failure of the primary and secondary lines of defense
various instrumentation and equipment that have been designed into the process to
parts would be known from the manufactur- prevent unwanted chemical releases or those
ers data or the employer’s experience with which control or mitigate a release. ‘‘As
the parts, which would then influence the in- built’’ drawings, together with certifications
spection and testing frequency and associ- of coded vessels and other equipment, and
ated procedures. Also, applicable codes and materials of construction need to be verified
standards such as the National Board Inspec- and retained in the quality assurance docu-
tion Code, or those from the American Soci- mentation. Equipment installation jobs need
ety for Testing and Material, American Pe- to be properly inspected in the field for use
troleum Institute, National Fire Protection of proper materials and procedures and to as-
Association, American National Standards sure that qualified craftsmen are used to do
Institute, American Society of Mechanical the job. The use of appropriate gaskets,
Engineers, and other groups, provide infor- packing, bolts, valves, lubricants and weld-
mation to help establish an effective testing ing rods need to be verified in the field. Also
364
procedures for installation of safety devices change in materials of construction, equip-
need to be verified, such as the torque on the ment specifications, piping pre-arrange-
bolts on ruptured disc installations, uniform ments, experimental equipment, computer
torque on flange bolts, proper installation of program revisions and changes in alarms and
pump seals, etc. If the quality of parts is a interlocks. Employers need to establish
problem, it may be appropriate to conduct means and methods to detect both technical
audits of the equipment supplier’s facilities changes and mechanical changes.
to better assure proper purchases of required Temporary changes have caused a number
equipment which is suitable for its intended of catastrophes over the years, and employ-
service. Any changes in equipment that may ers need to establish ways to detect tem-
become necessary will need to go through porary changes as well as those that are per-
the management of change procedures. manent. It is important that a time limit for
10. Nonroutine Work Authorizations. Nonrou- temporary changes be established and mon-
tine work which is conducted in process itored since, without control, these changes
areas needs to be controlled by the employer may tend to become permanent. Temporary
in a consistent manner. The hazards identi- changes are subject to the management of
fied involving the work that is to be accom- change provisions. In addition, the manage-
plished must be communicated to those ment of change procedures are used to insure
doing the work, but also to those operating that the equipment and procedures are re-
personnel whose work could affect the safety turned to their original or designed condi-
of the process. A work authorization notice
tions at the end of the temporary change.
or permit must have a procedure that de-
Proper documentation and review of these
scribes the steps the maintenance super-
changes is invaluable in assuring that the
visor, contractor representative or other per-
safety and health considerations are being
son needs to follow to obtain the necessary
incorporated into the operating procedures
clearance to get the job started. The work
and the process.
authorization procedures need to reference
and coordinate, as applicable, lockout/tagout Employers may wish to develop a form or
procedures, line breaking procedures, con- clearance sheet to facilitate the processing
fined space entry procedures and hot work of changes through the management of
authorizations. This procedure also needs to change procedures. A typical change form
provide clear steps to follow once the job is may include a description and the purpose of
completed in order to provide closure for the change, the technical basis for the
those that need to know the job is now com- change, safety and health considerations,
pleted and equipment can be returned to nor- documentation of changes for the operating
mal. procedures, maintenance procedures, inspec-
11. Managing Change. To properly manage tion and testing, P&IDs, electrical classifica-
changes to process chemicals, technology, tion, training and communications, pre-
equipment and facilities, one must define startup inspection, duration if a temporary
what is meant by change. In this process change, approvals and authorization. Where
safety management standard, change in- the impact of the change is minor and well
cludes all modifications to equipment, proce- understood, a check list reviewed by an au-
dures, raw materials and processing condi- thorized person with proper communication
tions other than ‘‘replacement in kind’’. to others who are affected may be sufficient.
These changes need to be properly managed However, for a more complex or significant
by identifying and reviewing them prior to design change, a hazard evaluation procedure
implementation of the change. For example, with approvals by operations, maintenance,
the operating procedures contain the oper- and safety departments may be appropriate.
ating parameters (pressure limits, tempera- Changes in documents such as P&IDs, raw
ture ranges, flow rates, etc.) and the impor- materials, operating procedures, mechanical
tance of operating within these limits. While integrity programs, electrical classifica-
the operator must have the flexibility to tions, etc., need to be noted so that these re-
maintain safe operation within the estab- visions can be made permanent when the
lished parameters, any operation outside of drawings and procedure manuals are up-
these parameters requires review and ap- dated. Copies of process changes need to be
proval by a written management of change kept in an accessible location to ensure that
procedure. design changes are available to operating
Management of change covers such as personnel as well as to PHA team members
changes in process technology and changes when a PHA is being done or one is being up-
to equipment and instrumentation. Changes dated.
in process technology can result from 12. Investigation of Incidents. Incident inves-
changes in production rates, raw materials, tigation is the process of identifying the un-
experimentation, equipment unavailability, derlying causes of incidents and imple-
new equipment, new product development, menting steps to prevent similar events from
change in catalyst and changes in operating occurring. The intent of an incident inves-
conditions to improve yield or quality. tigation is for employers to learn from past
Equipment changes include among others experiences and thus avoid repeating past
365
mistakes. The incidents for whicn OSHA ex- Employers at a minimum must have an
pects employers to become aware and to in- emergency action plan which will facilitate
vestigate are the types of events which re- the prompt evacuation of employees due to
sult in or could reasonably have resulted in an unwanted release of a highly hazardous
a catastrophic release. Some of the events chemical. This means that the employer will
are sometimes referred to as ‘‘near misses,’’ have a plan that will be activated by an
meaning that a serious consequence did not alarm system to alert employees when to
occur, but could have. evacuate and, that employees who are phys-
Employers need to develop in-house capa- ically impaired, will have the necessary sup-
bility to investigate incidents that occur in port and assistance to get them to the safe
their facilities. A team needs to be assem- zone as well. The intent of these require-
bled by the employer and trained in the tech- ments is to alert and move employees to a
niques of investigation including how to con- safe zone quickly. Delaying alarms or con-
duct interviews of witnesses, needed docu- fusing alarms are to be avoided. The use of
mentation and report writing. A multi-dis- process control centers or similar process
ciplinary team is better able to gather the buildings in the process area as safe areas is
facts of the event and to analyze them and discouraged. Recent catastrophes have
develop plausible scenarios as to what hap- shown that a large life loss has occurred in
pened, and why. Team members should be se- these structures because of where they have
lected on the basis of their training, knowl- been sited and because they are not nec-
edge and ability to contribute to a team ef- essarily designed to withstand over-pressures
fort to fully investigate the incident. Em- from shockwaves resulting from explosions
ployees in the process area where the inci- in the process area.
dent occurred should be consulted, inter- Unwanted incidental releases of highly
viewed or made a member of the team. Their hazardous chemicals in the process area
knowledge of the events form a significant must be addressed by the employer as to
set of facts about the incident which oc- what actions employees are to take. If the
curred. The report, its findings and rec- employer wants employees to evacuate the
ommendations are to be shared with those area, then the emergency action plan will be
who can benefit from the information. The activated. For outdoor processes where wind
cooperation of employees is essential to an direction is important for selecting the safe
effective incident investigation. The focus of route to a refuge area, the employer should
the investigation should be to obtain facts, place a wind direction indicator such as a
and not to place blame. The team and the in- wind sock or pennant at the highest point
vestigation process should clearly deal with that can be seen throughout the process
all involved individuals in a fair, open and area. Employees can move in the direction of
consistent manner. cross wind to upwind to gain safe access to
13. Emergency Preparedness. Each employer the refuge area by knowing the wind direc-
must address what actions employees are to tion.
take when there is an unwanted release of If the employer wants specific employees
highly hazardous chemicals. Emergency pre- in the release area to control or stop the
paredness or the employer’s tertiary (third) minor emergency or incidental release, these
lines of defense are those that will be relied actions must be planned for in advance and
on along with the secondary lines of defense procedures developed and implemented.
when the primary lines of defense which are Preplanning for handling incidental releases
used to prevent an unwanted release fail to for minor emergencies in the process area
stop the release. Employers will need to de- needs to be done, appropriate equipment for
cide if they want employees to handle and the hazards must be provided, and training
stop small or minor incidental releases. conducted for those employees who will per-
Whether they wish to mobilize the available form the emergency work before they re-
resources at the plant and have them spond to handle an actual release. The em-
brought to bear on a more significant re- ployer’s training program, including the
lease. Or whether employers want their em- Hazard Communication standard training is
ployees to evacuate the danger area and to address the training needs for employees
promptly escape to a preplanned safe zone who are expected to handle incidental or
area, and allow the local community emer- minor releases.
gency response organizations to handle the Preplanning for releases that are more se-
release. Or whether the employer wants to rious than incidental releases is another im-
use some combination of these actions. Em- portant line of defense to be used by the em-
ployers will need to select how many dif- ployer. When a serious release of a highly
ferent emergency preparedness or tertiary hazardous chemical occurs, the employer
lines of defense they plan to have and then through preplanning will have determined in
develop the necessary plans and procedures, advance what actions employees are to take.
and appropriately train employees in their The evacuation of the immediate release
emergency duties and responsibilities and area and other areas as necessary would be
then implement these lines of defense. accomplished under the emergency action
366
plan. If the employer wishes to use plant per- 14. Compliance Audits. Employers need to
sonnel such as a fire brigade, spill control select a trained individual or assemble a
team, a hazardous materials team, or use trained team of people to audit the process
employees to render aid to those in the im- safety management system and program. A
mediate release area and control or mitigate small process or plant may need only one
the incident, these actions are covered by knowledgeable person to conduct an audit.
§ 1910.120, the Hazardous Waste Operations The audit is to include an evaluation of the
and Emergency Response (HAZWOPER) design and effectiveness of the process safety
standard. If outside assistance is necessary, management system and a field inspection of
such as through mutual aid agreements be- the safety and health conditions and prac-
tween employers or local government emer- tices to verify that the employer’s systems
gency response organizations, these emer- are effectively implemented. The audit
gency responders are also covered by should be conducted or lead by a person
HAZWOPER. The safety and health protec- knowledgeable in audit techniques and who
tions required for emergency responders are is impartial towards the facility or area
the responsibility of their employers and of being audited. The essential elements of an
the on-scene incident commander. audit program include planning, staffing,
conduting the audit, evaluation and correc-
Responders may be working under very
tive action, follow-up and documentation.
hazardous conditions and therefore the ob-
Planning in advance is essential to the suc-
jective is to have them competently led by
cess of the auditing process. Each employer
an on-scene incident commander and the
needs to establish the format, staffing,
commander’s staff, properly equipped to do
scheduling and verification methods prior to
their assigned work safely, and fully trained conducting the audit. The format should be
to carry out their duties safely before they designed to provide the lead auditor with a
respond to an emergency. Drills, training ex- procedure or checklist which details the re-
ercises, or simulations with the local com- quirements of each section of the standard.
munity emergency response planners and re- The names of the audit team members
sponder organizations is one means to obtain should be listed as part of the format as well.
better preparedness. This close cooperation The checklist, if properly designed, could
and coordination between plant and local serve as the verification sheet which pro-
community emergency preparedness man- vides the auditor with the necessary infor-
agers will also aid the employer in com- mation to expedite the review and assure
plying with the Environmental Protection that no requirements of the standard are
Agency’s Risk Management Plan criteria. omitted. This verification sheet format
One effective way for medium to large fa- could also identify those elements that will
cilities to enhance coordination and commu- require evaluation or a response to correct
nication during emergencies for on plant op- deficiencies. This sheet could also be used for
erations and with local community organiza- developing the follow-up and documentation
tions is for employers to establish and equip requirements.
an emergency control center. The emergency The selection of effective audit team mem-
control center would be sited in a safe zone bers is critical to the success of the program.
area so that it could be occupied throughout Team members should be chosen for their ex-
the duration of an emergency. The center perience, knowledge, and training and should
would serve as the major ccommunication be familiar with the processes and with au-
link between the on-scene incident com- diting techniques, practices and procedures.
mander and plant or corporate management The size of the team will vary depending on
as well as with the local community offi- the size and complexity of the process under
cials. The communication equipment in the consideration. For a large, complex, highly
emergency control center should include a instrumented plant, it may be desirable to
network to receive and transmit information have team members with expertise in proc-
by telephone, radio or other means. It is im- ess engineering and design, process chem-
portant to have a backup communication istry, instrumentation and computer con-
network in case of power failure or one com- trols, electrical hazards and classifications,
munication means fails. The center should safety and health disciplines, maintenance,
also be equipped with the plant layout and emergency preparedness, warehousing or
community maps, utility drawings including shipping, and process safety auditing. The
fire water, emergency lighting, appropriate team may use part-time members to provide
reference materials such as a government for the depth of expertise required as well as
agency notification list, company personnel for what is actually done or followed, com-
phone list, SARA Title III reports and safety pared to what is written.
data sheets, emergency plans and procedures An effective audit includes a review of the
manual, a listing with the location of emer- relevant documentation and process safety
gency response equipment, mutual aid infor- information, inspection of the physical fa-
mation, and access to meteorological or cilities, and interviews with all levels of
weather condition data and any dispersion plant personnel. Utilizing the audit proce-
modeling data. dure and checklist developed in the
367
preplanning stage, the audit team can sys- It is important to assure that each defi-
tematically analyze compliance with the ciency identified is addressed, the corrective
provisions of the standard and any other cor- action to be taken noted, and the audit per-
porate policies that are relevant. For exam- son or team responsible be properly docu-
ple, the audit team will review all aspects of mented by the employer. To control the cor-
the training program as part of the overall rective action process, the employer should
audit. The team will review the written consider the use of a tracking system. This
training program for adequacy of content, tracking system might include periodic sta-
frequency of training, effectiveness of train- tus reports shared with affected levels of
ing in terms of its goals and objectives as management, specific reports such as com-
well as to how it fits into meeting the stand- pletion of an engineering study, and a final
ard’s requirements, documentation, etc. implementation report to provide closure for
Through interviews, the team can determine audit findings that have been through man-
the employee’s knowledge and awareness of agement of change, if appropriate, and then
the safety procedures, duties, rules, emer- shared with affected employees and manage-
gency response assignments, etc. During the ment. This type of tracking system provides
inspection, the team can observe actual the employer with the status of the correc-
practices such as safety and health policies, tive action. It also provides the documenta-
procedures, and work authorization prac- tion required to verify that appropriate cor-
tices. This approach enables the team to rective actions were taken on deficiencies
identify deficiencies and determine where identified in the audit.
corrective actions or improvements are nec- APPENDIX D TO § 1910.119—SOURCES OF
essary. FURTHER INFORMATION (NONMANDATORY)
An audit is a technique used to gather suf-
ficient facts and information, including sta- 1. Center for Chemical Process Safety,
tistical information, to verify compliance American Institute of Chemical Engineers,
with standards. Auditors should select as 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017,
part of their preplanning a sample size suffi- (212) 705–7319.
cient to give a degree of confidence that the 2. ‘‘Guidelines for Hazard Evaluation Pro-
audit reflects the level of compliance with cedures,’’ American Institute of Chemical
the standard. The audit team, through this Engineers; 345 East 47th Street, New York,
NY 10017.
systematic analysis, should document areas
3. ‘‘Guidelines for Technical Management
which require corrective action as well as
of Chemical Process Safety,’’ Center for
those areas where the process safety man-
Chemical Process Safety of the American In-
agement system is effective and working in
stitute of Chemical Engineers; 345 East 47th
an effective manner. This provides a record
Street, New York, NY 10017.
of the audit procedures and findings, and
4. ‘‘Evaluating Process Safety in the Chem-
serves as a baseline of operation data for fu-
ical Industry,’’ Chemical Manufacturers As-
ture audits. It will assist future auditors in sociation; 2501 M Street NW, Washington, DC
determining changes or trends from previous 20037.
audits. 5. ‘‘Safe Warehousing of Chemicals,’’
Corrective action is one of the most impor- Chemical Manufacturers Association; 2501 M
tant parts of the audit. It includes not only Street NW, Washington, DC 20037.
addressing the identified deficiencies, but 6. ‘‘Management of Process Hazards,’’
also planning, followup, and documentation. American Petroleum Institute (API Rec-
The corrective action process normally be- ommended Practice 750); 1220 L Street, N.W.,
gins with a management review of the audit Washington, D.C. 20005.
findings. The purpose of this review is to de- 7. ‘‘Improving Owner and Contractor Safe-
termine what actions are appropriate, and to ty Performance,’’ American Petroleum Insti-
establish priorities, timetables, resource al- tute (API Recommended Practice 2220); API,
locations and requirements and responsibil- 1220 L Street N.W., Washington, D.C. 20005.
ities. In some cases, corrective action may 8. Chemical Manufacturers Association
involve a simple change in procedure or (CMA’s Manager Guide), First Edition, Sep-
minor maintenance effort to remedy the con- tember 1991; CMA, 2501 M Street, N.W.,
cern. Management of change procedures need Washington, D.C. 20037.
to be used, as appropriate, even for what 9. ‘‘Improving Construction Safety Per-
may seem to be a minor change. Many of the formance,’’ Report A–3, The Business Round-
deficiencies can be acted on promptly, while table; The Business Roundtable, 200 Park Av-
some may require engineering studies or in- enue, New York, NY 10166. (Report includes
depth review of actual procedures and prac- criteria to evaluate contractor safety per-
tices. There may be instances where no ac- formance and criteria to enhance contractor
tion is necessary and this is a valid response safety performance).
to an audit finding. All actions taken, in- 10. ‘‘Recommended Guidelines for Con-
cluding an explanation where no action is tractor Safety and Health,’’ Texas Chemical
taken on a finding, needs to be documented Council; Texas Chemical Council, 1402
as to what was done and why. Nueces Street, Austin, TX 78701–1534.
368
11. ‘‘Loss Prevention in the Process Indus- (ii) Corrective actions involving
tries,’’ Volumes I and II; Frank P. Lees, clean-up operations at sites covered by
Butterworth; London 1983. the Resource Conservation and Recov-
12. ‘‘Safety and Health Program Manage-
ery Act of 1976 (RCRA) as amended (42
ment Guidelines,’’ 1989; U.S. Department of
Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Ad- U.S.C. 6901 et seq.);
ministration. (iii) Voluntary clean-up operations at
13. ‘‘Safety and Health Guide for the Chem- sites recognized by Federal, state, local
ical Industry,’’ 1986, (OSHA 3091); U.S. De- or other governmental bodies as uncon-
partment of Labor, Occupational Safety and trolled hazardous waste sites;
Health Administration; 200 Constitution Av-
(iv) Operations involving hazardous
enue, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20210.
14. ‘‘Review of Emergency Systems,’’ June
wastes that are conducted at treat-
1988; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency ment, storage, and disposal (TSD) fa-
(EPA), Office of Solid Waste and Emergency cilities regulated by 40 CFR parts 264
Response, Washington, DC 20460. and 265 pursuant to RCRA; or by agen-
15. ‘‘Technical Guidance for Hazards Anal- cies under agreement with U.S.E.P.A.
ysis, Emergency Planning for Extremely to implement RCRA regulations; and
Hazardous Substances,’’ December 1987; U.S. (v) Emergency response operations
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA),
Federal Emergency Management Adminis-
for releases of, or substantial threats of
tration (FEMA) and U.S. Department of releases of, hazardous substances with-
Transportation (DOT), Washington, DC 20460. out regard to the location of the haz-
16. ‘‘Accident Investigation * * * A New ard.
Approach,’’ 1983, National Safety Council; 444 (2) Application. (i) All requirements of
North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, IL 60611– part 1910 and part 1926 of title 29 of the
3991. Code of Federal Regulations apply pur-
17. ‘‘Fire & Explosion Index Hazard Classi-
suant to their terms to hazardous
fication Guide,’’ 6th Edition, May 1987, Dow
Chemical Company; Midland, Michigan 48674. waste and emergency response oper-
18. ‘‘Chemical Exposure Index,’’ May 1988, ations whether covered by this section
Dow Chemical Company; Midland, Michigan or not. If there is a conflict or overlap,
48674. the provision more protective of em-
[57 FR 6403, Feb. 24, 1992; 57 FR 7847, Mar. 4,
ployee safety and health shall apply
1992, as amended at 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; without regard to 29 CFR 1910.5(c)(1).
67 FR 67964, Nov. 7, 2002; 76 FR 80738, Dec. 27, (ii) Hazardous substance clean-up op-
2011; 77 FR 17776, Mar. 26, 2012; 78 FR 9313, erations within the scope of paragraphs
Feb. 8, 2013; 84 FR 15102, Apr. 15, 2019] (a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(iii) of this sec-
tion must comply with all paragraphs
§ 1910.120 Hazardous waste operations of this section except paragraphs (p)
and emergency response. and (q).
(a) Scope, application, and definitions— (iii) Operations within the scope of
(1) Scope. This section covers the fol- paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section
lowing operations, unless the employer must comply only with the require-
can demonstrate that the operation ments of paragraph (p) of this section.
does not involve employee exposure or
the reasonable possibility for employee NOTES AND EXCEPTIONS: (A) All provisions
of paragraph (p) of this section cover any
exposure to safety or health hazards:
treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) oper-
(i) Clean-up operations required by a ation regulated by 40 CFR parts 264 and 265
governmental body, whether Federal, or by state law authorized under RCRA, and
state, local or other involving haz- required to have a permit or interim status
ardous substances that are conducted from EPA pursuant to 40 CFR 270.1 or from
at uncontrolled hazardous waste sites a state agency pursuant to RCRA.
(including, but not limited to, the (B) Employers who are not required to
EPA’s National Priority Site List have a permit or interim status because they
(NPL), state priority site lists, sites are conditionally exempt small quantity
generators under 40 CFR 261.5 or are genera-
recommended for the EPA NPL, and
tors who qualify under 40 CFR 262.34 for ex-
initial investigations of government emptions from regulation under 40 CFR parts
identified sites which are conducted be- 264, 265 and 270 (‘‘excepted employers’’) are
fore the presence or absence of haz-
not covered by paragraphs (p)(1) through

ardous substances has been (p)(7) of this section. Excepted employers
ascertained); who are required by the EPA or state agency
369
to have their employees engage in emer- substance. Responses to incidental re-
gency response or who direct their employ- leases of hazardous substances where
ees to engage in emergency response are cov- the substance can be absorbed, neutral-
ered by paragraph (p)(8) of this section, and
ized, or otherwise controlled at the
cannot be exempted by (p)(8)(i) of this sec-
tion. Excepted employers who are not re- time of release by employees in the im-
quired to have employees engage in emer- mediate release area, or by mainte-
gency response, who direct their employees nance personnel are not considered to
to evacuate in the case of such emergencies be emergency responses within the
and who meet the requirements of paragraph scope of this standard. Responses to re-
(p)(8)(i) of this section are exempt from the leases of hazardous substances where
balance of paragraph (p)(8) of this section. there is no potential safety or health
(C) If an area is used primarily for treat-
hazard (i.e., fire, explosion, or chemical
ment, storage or disposal, any emergency re-
sponse operations in that area shall comply exposure) are not considered to be
with paragraph (p)(8) of this section. In other emergency responses.
areas not used primarily for treatment, stor- Facility means (A) any building,
age, or disposal, any emergency response op- structure, installation, equipment, pipe
erations shall comply with paragraph (q) of or pipeline (including any pipe into a
this section. Compliance with the require- sewer or publicly owned treatment
ments of paragraph (q) of this section shall works), well, pit, pond, lagoon, im-
be deemed to be in compliance with the re-
poundment, ditch, storage container,
quirements of paragraph (p)(8) of this sec-
tion. motor vehicle, rolling stock, or air-
craft, or (B) any site or area where a
(iv) Emergency response operations hazardous substance has been depos-
for releases of, or substantial threats of ited, stored, disposed of, or placed, or
releases of, hazardous substances which otherwise come to be located; but does
are not covered by paragraphs (a)(1)(i) not include any consumer product in
through (a)(1)(iv) of this section must consumer use or any water-borne ves-
only comply with the requirements of sel.
paragraph (q) of this section. Hazardous materials response
(3) Definitions—Buddy system means a (HAZMAT) team means an organized
system of organizing employees into group of employees, designated by the
work groups in such a manner that employer, who are expected to perform
each employee of the work group is work to handle and control actual or
designated to be observed by at least potential leaks or spills of hazardous
one other employee in the work group. substances requiring possible close ap-
The purpose of the buddy system is to proach to the substance. The team
provide rapid assistance to employees members perform responses to releases
in the event of an emergency. or potential releases of hazardous sub-
Clean-up operation means an oper- stances for the purpose of control or
ation where hazardous substances are stabilization of the incident. A
removed, contained, incinerated, neu- HAZMAT team is not a fire brigade nor
tralized, stabilized, cleared-up, or in is a typical fire brigade a HAZMAT
any other manner processed or handled team. A HAZMAT team, however, may
with the ultimate goal of making the be a separate component of a fire bri-
site safer for people or the environ- gade or fire department.
ment. Hazardous substance means any sub-
Decontamination means the removal stance designated or listed under para-
of hazardous substances from employ- graphs (A) through (D) of this defini-
ees and their equipment to the extent tion, exposure to which results or may
necessary to preclude the occurrence of result in adverse affects on the health
foreseeable adverse health affects. or safety of employees:
Emergency response or responding to (A) Any substance defined under sec-
emergencies means a response effort by tion 103(14) of the Comprehensive Envi-
employees from outside the immediate ronmental Response Compensation and
release area or by other designated re- Liability Act (CERCLA) (42 U.S.C.
sponders (i.e., mutual-aid groups, local 9601).
fire departments, etc.) to an occurrence (B) Any biological agent and other
which results, or is likely to result, in disease-causing agent which after re-

an uncontrolled release of a hazardous lease into the environment and upon
370
exposure, ingestion, inhalation, or as- vidual’s ability to escape from a dan-

similation into any person, either di- gerous atmosphere.
rectly from the environment or indi- Oxygen deficiency means that con-
rectly by ingestion through food centration of oxygen by volume below
chains, will or may reasonably be an- which atmosphere supplying res-
ticipated to cause death, disease, be- piratory protection must be provided.
havioral abnormalities, cancer, genetic It exists in atmospheres where the per-
mutation, physiological malfunctions centage of oxygen by volume is less
(including malfunctions in reproduc- than 19.5 percent oxygen.
tion) or physical deformations in such Permissible exposure limit means the
persons or their offspring; exposure, inhalation or dermal permis-
(C) Any substance listed by the U.S. sible exposure limit specified in 29 CFR
Department of Transportation as haz- part 1910, subparts G and Z.
ardous materials under 49 CFR 172.101 Published exposure level means the ex-
and appendices; and posure limits published in ‘‘NIOSH
(D) Hazardous waste as herein de- Recommendations for Occupational
fined. Health Standards’’ dated 1986, which is
Hazardous waste means— incorporated by reference as specified
in § 1910.6 or if none is specified, the ex-
(A) A waste or combination of wastes
posure limits published in the stand-
as defined in 40 CFR 261.3, or
ards specified by the American Con-
(B) Those substances defined as haz- ference of Governmental Industrial Hy-
ardous wastes in 49 CFR 171.8. gienists in their publication ‘‘Thresh-
Hazardous waste operation means any old Limit Values and Biological Expo-
operation conducted within the scope sure Indices for 1987–88’’ dated 1987,
of this standard. which is incorporated by reference as
Hazardous waste site or Site means specified in § 1910.6.
any facility or location within the Post emergency response means that
scope of this standard at which haz- portion of an emergency response per-
ardous waste operations take place. formed after the immediate threat of a
Health hazard means a chemical or a release has been stabilized or elimi-
pathogen where acute or chronic nated and clean-up of the site has
health effects may occur in exposed begun. If post emergency response is
employees. It also includes stress due performed by an employer’s own em-
to temperature extremes. The term ployees who were part of the initial
health hazard includes chemicals that emergency response, it is considered to
are classified in accordance with the be part of the initial response and not
Hazard Communication Standard, 29 post emergency response. However, if a
CFR 1910.1200, as posing one of the fol- group of an employer’s own employees,
lowing hazardous effects: Acute tox- separate from the group providing ini-
icity (any route of exposure); skin cor- tial response, performs the clean-up op-
rosion or irritation; serious eye dam- eration, then the separate group of em-
age or eye irritation; respiratory or ployees would be considered to be per-
skin sensitization; germ cell mutage- forming post-emergency response and
nicity; carcinogenicity; reproductive subject to paragraph (q)(11) of this sec-
toxicity; specific target organ toxicity tion.
(single or repeated exposure); aspira- Qualified person means a person with
tion toxicity or simple asphyxiant. (See specific training, knowledge and expe-
Appendix A to § 1910.1200—Health Haz- rience in the area for which the person
ard Criteria (Mandatory) for the cri- has the responsibility and the author-
teria for determining whether a chem- ity to control.
ical is classified as a health hazard.) Site safety and health supervisor (or of-
IDLH orImmediately dangerous to life ficial) means the individual located on
or health means an atmospheric con- a hazardous waste site who is respon-
centration of any toxic, corrosive or sible to the employer and has the au-
asphyxiant substance that poses an im- thority and knowledge necessary to
mediate threat to life or would cause implement the site safety and health
irreversible or delayed adverse health plan and verify compliance with appli-
effects or would interfere with an indi- cable safety and health requirements.
371
Small quantity qenerator means a gen- (F) The employer’s standard oper-
erator of hazardous wastes who in any ating procedures for safety and health;
calendar month generates no more and
than 1,000 kilograms (2,205 pounds) of (G) Any necessary interface between
hazardous waste in that month. general program and site specific ac-
Uncontrolled hazardous waste site, tivities.
means an area identified as an uncon- (iii) Site excavation. Site excavations
trolled hazardous waste site by a gov- created during initial site preparation
ernmental body, whether Federal, or during hazardous waste operations
state, local or other where an accumu- shall be shored or sloped as appropriate
lation of hazardous substances creates to prevent accidental collapse in ac-
a threat to the health and safety of in- cordance with subpart P of 29 CFR part
dividuals or the environment or both. 1926.
Some sites are found on public lands (iv) Contractors and sub-contractors.
such as those created by former munic- An employer who retains contractor or
ipal, county or state landfills where il- sub-contractor services for work in
legal or poorly managed waste disposal hazardous waste operations shall in-
has taken place. Other sites are found form those contractors, sub-contrac-
on private property, often belonging to tors, or their representatives of the
generators or former generators of haz- site emergency response procedures
ardous substance wastes. Examples of and any potential fire, explosion,
such sites include, but are not limited health, safety or other hazards of the
to, surface impoundments, landfills, hazardous waste operation that have
dumps, and tank or drum farms. Nor- been identified by the employer, in-
mal operations at TSD sites are not cluding those identified in the employ-
covered by this definition. er’s information program.
(b) Safety and health program. (v) Program availability. The written
safety and health program shall be
NOTE TO (b): Safety and health programs made available to any contractor or
developed and implemented to meet other
subcontractor or their representative
Federal, state, or local regulations are con-
sidered acceptable in meeting this require- who will be involved with the haz-
ment if they cover or are modified to cover ardous waste operation; to employees;
the topics required in this paragraph. An ad- to employee designated representa-
ditional or separate safety and health pro- tives; to OSHA personnel, and to per-
gram is not required by this paragraph. sonnel of other Federal, state, or local
agencies with regulatory authority
(1) General. (i) Employers shall de-
over the site.
velop and implement a written safety
(2) Organizational structure part of the
and health program for their employ-
site program—(i) The organizationa1
ees involved in hazardous waste oper-
structure part of the program shall es-
ations. The program shall be designed
tablish the specific chain of command
to identify, evaluate, and control safe-
and specify the overall responsibilities
ty and health hazards, and provide for
of supervisors and employees. It shall
emergency response for hazardous
include, at a minimum, the following
waste operations.
elements:
(ii) The written safety and health (A) A general supervisor who has the
program shall incorporate the fol- responsibility and authority to direct
lowing: all hazardous waste operations.
(A) An organizational structure; (B) A site safety and health super-
(B) A comprehensive workplan; visor who has the responsibility and
(C) A site-specific safety and health authority to develop and implement
plan which need not repeat the employ- the site safety and health plan and
er’s standard operating procedures re- verify compliance.
quired in paragraph (b)(1)(ii)(F) of this (C) All other personnel needed for
section; hazardous waste site operations and
(D) The safety and health training emergency response and their general
program; functions and responsibilities.
(E) The medical surveillance pro- (D) The lines of authority, responsi-
gram; bility, and communication.
372
(ii) The organizational structure (D) Medical surveillance require-

shall be reviewed and updated as nec- ments in accordance with the program
essary to reflect the current status of in paragraph (f) of this section.
waste site operations. (E) Frequency and types of air moni-
(3) Comprehensive workplan part of the toring, personnel monitoring, and envi-
site program. The comprehensive ronmental sampling techniques and in-
workplan part of the program shall ad- strumentation to be used, including
dress the tasks and objectives of the methods of maintenance and calibra-
site operations and the logistics and re- tion of monitoring and sampling equip-
sources required to reach those tasks ment to be used.
and objectives. (F) Site control measures in accord-
(i) The comprehensive workplan shall ance with the site control program re-
address anticipated clean-up activities quired in paragraph (d) of this section.
as well as normal operating procedures (G) Decontamination procedures in
which need not repeat the employer’s accordance with paragraph (k) of this
procedures available elsewhere. section.
(ii) The comprehensive workplan
(H) An emergency response plan
shall define work tasks and objectives
meeting the requirements of paragraph
and identify the methods for accom-
(l) of this section for safe and effective
plishing those tasks and objectives.
responses to emergencies, including
(iii) The comprehensive workplan
the necessary PPE and other equip-
shall establish personnel requirements
ment.
for implementing the plan.
(iv) The comprehensive workplan (I) Confined space entry procedures.
shall provide for the implementation of (J) A spill containment program
the training required in paragraph (e) meeting the requirements of paragraph
of this section. (j) of this section.
(v) The comprehensive workplan (iii) Pre-entry briefing. The site spe-
shall provide for the implementation of cific safety and health plan shall pro-
the required informational programs vide for pre-entry briefings to be held
required in paragraph (i) of this sec- prior to initiating any site activity,
tion. and at such other times as necessary to
(vi) The comprehensive workplan ensure that employees are apprised of
shall provide for the implementation of the site safety and health plan and
the medical surveillance program de- that this plan is being followed. The in-
scribed in paragraph (f) of this section. formation and data obtained from site
(4) Site-specific safety and health plan characterization and analysis work re-
part of the program—(i) General. The site quired in paragraph (c) of this section
safety and health plan, which must be shall be used to prepare and update the
kept on site, shall address the safety site safety and health plan.
and health hazards of each phase of site (iv) Effectiveness of site safety and
operation and include the requirements health plan. Inspections shall be con-
and procedures for employee protec- ducted by the site safety and health su-
tion. pervisor or, in the absence of that indi-
(ii) Elements. The site safety and vidual, another individual who is
health plan, as a minimum, shall ad- knowledgeable in occupational safety
dress the following: and health, acting on behalf of the em-
(A) A safety and health risk or haz- ployer as necessary to determine the
ard analysis for each site task and op- effectiveness of the site safety and
eration found in the workplan. health plan. Any deficiencies in the ef-
(B) Employee training assignments fectiveness of the site safety and
to assure compliance with paragraph health plan shall be corrected by the
(e) of this section. employer.
(C) Personal protective equipment to (c) Site characterization and analysis—
be used by employees for each of the (1) General. Hazardous waste sites shall
site tasks and operations being con- be evaluated in accordance with this
ducted as required by the personal pro- paragraph to identify specific site haz-
tective equipment program in para- ards and to determine the appropriate

graph (g)(5) of this section. safety and health control procedures
373
needed to protect employees from the (5) Personal protective equipment. Per-
identified hazards. sonal protective equipment (PPE) shall
(2) Preliminary evaluation. A prelimi- be provided and used during initial site
nary evaluation of a site’s characteris- entry in accordance with the following
tics shall be performed prior to site requirements:
entry by a qualified person in order to (i) Based upon the results of the pre-
aid in the selection of appropriate em- liminary site evaluation, an ensemble
ployee protection methods prior to site of PPE shall be selected and used dur-
entry. Immediately after initial site ing initial site entry which will provide
entry, a more detailed evaluation of protection to a level of exposure below
the site’s specific characteristics shall permissible exposure limits and pub-
be performed by a qualified person in lished exposure levels for known or sus-
order to further identify existing site pected hazardous substances and
hazards and to further aid in the selec- health hazards, and which will provide
tion of the appropriate engineering protection against other known and
controls and personal protective equip-
suspected hazards identified during the
ment for the tasks to be performed.
preliminary site evaluation. If there is
(3) Hazard identification. All suspected no permissible exposure limit or pub-
conditions that may pose inhalation or
lished exposure level, the employer
skin absorption hazards that are imme-
may use other published studies and in-
diately dangerous to life or health
formation as a guide to appropriate
(IDLH), or other conditions that may
cause death or serious harm, shall be personal protective equipment.
identified during the preliminary sur- (ii) If positive-pressure self-contained
vey and evaluated during the detailed breathing apparatus is not used as part
survey. Examples of such hazards in- of the entry ensemble, and if res-
clude, but are not limited to, confined piratory protection is warranted by the
space entry, potentially explosive or potential hazards identified during the
flammable situations, visible vapor preliminary site evaluation, an escape
clouds, or areas where biological indi- self-contained breathing apparatus of
cators such as dead animals or vegeta- at least five minute’s duration shall be
tion are located. carried by employees during initial site
(4) Required information. The fol- entry.
lowing information to the extent avail- (iii) If the preliminary site evalua-
able shall be obtained by the employer tion does not produce sufficient infor-
prior to allowing employees to enter a mation to identify the hazards or sus-
site: pected hazards of the site, an ensemble
(i) Location and approximate size of providing protection equivalent to
the site. Level B PPE shall be provided as min-
(ii) Description of the response activ- imum protection, and direct reading
ity and/or the job task to be performed. instruments shall be used as appro-
(iii) Duration of the planned em- priate for identifying IDLH conditions.
ployee activity. (See appendix B for a description of
(iv) Site topography and accessibility Level B hazards and the recommenda-
by air and roads. tions for Level B protective equip-
(v) Safety and health hazards ex- ment.)
pected at the site. (iv) Once the hazards of the site have
(vi) Pathways for hazardous sub- been identified, the appropriate PPE
stance dispersion. shall be selected and used in accord-
(vii) Present status and capabilities ance with paragraph (g) of this section.
of emergency response teams that (6) Monitoring. The following moni-
would provide assistance to hazardous toring shall be conducted during initial
waste clean-up site employees at the site entry when the site evaluation
time of an emergency. produces information that shows the
(viii) Hazardous substances and potential for ionizing radiation or
health hazards involved or expected at IDLH conditions, or when the site in-
the site, and their chemical and phys- formation is not sufficient reasonably
ical properties. to eliminate these possible conditions:
374
(i) Monitoring with direct reading in- (2) Site control program. A site control
struments for hazardous levels of ion- program for protecting employees
izing radiation. which is part of the employer’s site
(ii) Monitoring the air with appro- safety and health program required in
priate direct reading test equipment paragraph (b) of this section shall be
(i.e., combustible gas meters, detector developed during the planning stages of
tubes) for IDLH and other conditions a hazardous waste clean-up operation
that may cause death or serious harm and modified as necessary as new infor-
(combustible or explosive atmospheres, mation becomes available.
oxygen deficiency, toxic substances). (3) Elements of the site control program.
(iii) Visually observing for signs of The site control program shall, as a
actual or potential IDLH or other dan- minimum, include: A site map; site
gerous conditions. work zones; the use of a ‘‘buddy sys-
(iv) An ongoing air monitoring pro- tem’’; site communications including
gram in accordance with paragraph (h) alerting means for emergencies; the
of this section shall be implemented standard operating procedures or safe
after site characterization has deter- work practices; and, identification of
mined the site is safe for the start-up the nearest medical assistance. Where
of operations. these requirements are covered else-
(7) Risk identification. Once the pres-
where they need not be repeated.
ence and concentrations of specific
hazardous substances and health haz- (e) Training—(1) General. (i) All em-
ards have been established, the risks ployees working on site (such as but
associated with these substances shall not limited to equipment operators,
be identified. Employees who will be general laborers and others) exposed to
working on the site shall be informed hazardous substances, health hazards,
of any risks that have been identified. or safety hazards and their supervisors
In situations covered by the Hazard and management responsible for the
Communication Standard, 29 CFR site shall receive training meeting the
1910.1200, training required by that requirements of this paragraph before
standard need not be duplicated. they are permitted to engage in haz-
ardous waste operations that could ex-
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(7): Risks to con- pose them to hazardous substances,
sider include, but are not limited to: safety, or health hazards, and they
(a) Exposures exceeding the permissible ex-
posure limits and published exposure levels. shall receive review training as speci-
(b) IDLH concentrations. fied in this paragraph.
(c) Potential skin absorption and irritation (ii) Employees shall not be permitted
sources. to participate in or supervise field ac-
(d) Potential eye irritation sources. tivities until they have been trained to
(e) Explosion sensitivity and flammability a level required by their job function
ranges.
(f) Oxygen deficiency. and responsibility.
(2) Elements to be covered. The train-
(8) Employee notification. Any infor- ing shall thoroughly cover the fol-
mation concerning the chemical, phys- lowing:
ical, and toxicologic properties of each (i) Names of personnel and alternates
substance known or expected to be responsible for site safety and health;
present on site that is available to the
(ii) Safety, health and other hazards
employer and relevant to the duties an
present on the site;
employee is expected to perform shall
be made available to the affected em- (iii) Use of personal protective equip-
ployees prior to the commencement of ment;
their work activities. The employer (iv) Work practices by which the em-
may utilize information developed for ployee can minimize risks from haz-
the hazard communication standard for ards;
this purpose. (v) Safe use of engineering controls
(d) Site control—(1) General. Appro- and equipment on the site;
priate site control procedures shall be (vi) Medical surveillance require-
implemented to control employee expo- ments, including recognition of symp-
sure to hazardous substances before toms and signs which might indicate
clean-up work begins. overexposure to hazards; and
375
(vii) The contents of paragraphs (G) sponsibility is employees covered by

through (J) of the site safety and paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) and (e)(3)(iii)) and
health plan set forth in paragraph at least eight additional hours of spe-
(b)(4)(ii) of this section. cialized training at the time of job as-
(3) Initial training. (i) General site signment on such topics as, but not
workers (such as equipment operators, limited to, the employer’s safety and
general laborers and supervisory per- health program and the associated em-
sonnel) engaged in hazardous substance ployee training program, personal pro-
removal or other activities which ex- tective equipment program, spill con-
pose or potentially expose workers to tainment program, and health hazard
hazardous substances and health haz- monitoring procedure and techniques.
ards shall receive a minimum of 40 (5) Qualifications for trainers. Trainers
hours of instruction off the site, and a shall be qualified to instruct employees
minimum of three days actual field ex- about the subject matter that is being
perience under the direct supervision of presented in training. Such trainers
a trained, experienced supervisor. shall have satisfactorily completed a
(ii) Workers on site only occasionally training program for teaching the sub-
for a specific limited task (such as, but jects they are expected to teach, or
not limited to, ground water moni- they shall have the academic creden-
toring, land surveying, or geo-physical tials and instructional experience nec-
surveying) and who are unlikely to be essary for teaching the subjects. In-
exposed over permissible exposure lim- structors shall demonstrate competent
its and published exposure limits shall instructional skills and knowledge of
receive a minimum of 24 hours of in- the applicable subject matter.
struction off the site, and the min-
(6) Training certification. Employees
imum of one day actual field experi-
and supervisors that have received and
ence under the direct supervision of a
successfully completed the training
trained, experienced supervisor.
and field experience specified in para-
(iii) Workers regularly on site who
graphs (e)(1) through (e)(4) of this sec-
work in areas which have been mon-
tion shall be certified by their instruc-
itored and fully characterized indi-
tor or the head instructor and trained
cating that exposures are under per-
supervisor as having successfully com-
missible exposure limits and published
exposure limits where respirators are pleted the necessary training. A writ-
not necessary, and the characterization ten certificate shall be given to each
indicates that there are no health haz- person so certified. Any person who has
ards or the possibility of an emergency not been so certified or who does not
developing, shall receive a minimum of meet the requirements of paragraph
24 hours of instruction off the site and (e)(9) of this section shall be prohibited
the minimum of one day actual field from engaging in hazardous waste oper-
experience under the direct supervision ations.
of a trained, experienced supervisor. (7) Emergency response. Employees
(iv) Workers with 24 hours of training who are engaged in responding to haz-
who are covered by paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) ardous emergency situations at haz-
and (e)(3)(iii) of this section, and who ardous waste clean-up sites that may
become general site workers or who are expose them to hazardous substances
required to wear respirators, shall have shall be trained in how to respond to
the additional 16 hours and two days of such expected emergencies.
training necessary to total the training (8) Refresher training. Employees spec-
specified in paragraph (e)(3)(i). ified in paragraph (e)(1) of this section,
(4) Management and supervisor train- and managers and supervisors specified
ing. On-site management and super- in paragraph (e)(4) of this section, shall
visors directly responsible for, or who receive eight hours of refresher train-
supervise employees engaged in, haz- ing annually on the items specified in
ardous waste operations shall receive paragraph (e)(2) and/or (e)(4) of this
40 hours initial training, and three section, any critique of incidents that
days of supervised field experience (the have occurred in the past year that can
training may be reduced to 24 hours serve as training examples of related

and one day if the only area of their re- work, and other relevant topics.
376
(9) Equivalent training. Employers ployee covered under paragraph (f)(2) of

who can show by documentation or cer- this section on the following schedules:
tification that an employee’s work ex- (i) For employees covered under
perience and/or training has resulted in paragraphs (f)(2)(i), (f)(2)(ii), and
training equivalent to that training re- (f)(2)(iv):
quired in paragraphs (e)(1) through (A) Prior to assignment;
(e)(4) of this section shall not be re- (B) At least once every twelve
quired to provide the initial training months for each employee covered un-
requirements of those paragraphs to less the attending physician believes a
such employees and shall provide a longer interval (not greater than bien-
copy of the certification or documenta- nially) is appropriate;
tion to the employee upon request. (C) At termination of employment or
However, certified employees or em- reassignment to an area where the em-
ployees with equivalent training new ployee would not be covered if the em-
to a site shall receive appropriate, site ployee has not had an examination
specific training before site entry and within the last six months;
have appropriate supervised field expe- (D) As soon as possible upon notifica-
rience at the new site. Equivalent tion by an employee that the employee
training includes any academic train- has developed signs or symptoms indi-
ing or the training that existing em- cating possible overexposure to haz-
ployees might have already received ardous substances or health hazards, or
from actual hazardous waste site work that the employee has been injured or
experience. exposed above the permissible exposure
(f) Medical surveillance—(1) General. limits or published exposure levels in
Employers engaged in operations speci- an emergency situation;
fied in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (E) At more frequent times, if the ex-
(a)(1)(iv) of this section and not cov- amining physician determines that an
ered by (a)(2)(iii) exceptions and em- increased frequency of examination is
ployers of employees specified in para- medically necessary.
graph (q)(9) shall institute a medical (ii) For employees covered under
surveillance program in accordance paragraph (f)(2)(iii) and for all employ-
with this paragraph. ees including those of employers cov-
ered by paragraph (a)(1)(v) who may
(2) Employees covered. The medical
have been injured, received a health
surveillance program shall be insti-
impairment, developed signs or symp-
tuted by the employer for the following
toms which may have resulted from ex-
employees:
posure to hazardous substances result-
(i) All employees who are or may be ing from an emergency incident, or ex-
exposed to hazardous substances or posed during an emergency incident to
health hazards at or above the permis- hazardous substances at concentra-
sible exposure limits or, if there is no tions above the permissible exposure
permissible exposure limit, above the limits or the published exposure levels
published exposure levels for these sub- without the necessary personal protec-
stances, without regard to the use of tive equipment being used:
respirators, for 30 days or more a year; (A) As soon as possible following the
(ii) All employees who wear a res- emergency incident or development of
pirator for 30 days or more a year or as signs or symptoms;
required by § 1910.134; (B) At additional times, if the exam-
(iii) All employees who are injured, ining physician determines that follow-
become ill or develop signs or symp- up examinations or consultations are
toms due to possible overexposure in- medically necessary.
volving hazardous substances or health (4) Content of medical examinations and
hazards from an emergency response or consultations. (i) Medical examinations
hazardous waste operation; and required by paragraph (f)(3) of this sec-
(iv) Members of HAZMAT teams. tion shall include a medical and work
(3) Frequency of medical examinations history (or updated history if one is in
and consultations. Medical examina- the employee’s file) with special em-
tions and consultations shall be made phasis on symptoms related to the han-
available by the employer to each em- dling of hazardous substances and
377
health hazards, and to fitness for duty (C) The results of the medical exam-
including the ability to wear any re- ination and tests if requested by the
quired PPE under conditions (i.e., tem- employee.
perature extremes) that may be ex- (D) A statement that the employee
pected at the work site. has been informed by the physician of
(ii) The content of medical examina- the results of the medical examination
tions or consultations made available and any medical conditions which re-
to employees pursuant to paragraph (f) quire further examination or treat-
shall be determined by the attending ment.
physician. The guidelines in the Occu- (ii) The written opinion obtained by
pational Safety and Health Guidance the employer shall not reveal specific
Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activi- findings or diagnoses unrelated to oc-
ties (See appendix D, Reference #10) cupational exposures.
should be consulted. (8) Recordkeeping. (i) An accurate
(5) Examination by a physician and record of the medical surveillance re-
costs. All medical examinations and quired by paragraph (f) of this section
procedures shall be performed by or shall be retained. This record shall be
under the supervision of a licensed phy- retained for the period specified and
sician, preferably one knowledgeable in meet the criteria of 29 CFR 1910.1020.
occupational medicine, and shall be (ii) The record required in paragraph
provided without cost to the employee, (f)(8)(i) of this section shall include at
without loss of pay, and at a reason- least the following information:
able time and place. (A) The name of the employee;
(6) Information provided to the physi- (B) Physician’s written opinions, rec-
cian. The employer shall provide one ommended limitations, and results of
copy of this standard and its appen- examinations and tests;
dices to the attending physician, and in (C) Any employee medical com-
addition the following for each em- plaints related to exposure to haz-
ployee: ardous substances;
(i) A description of the employee’s (D) A copy of the information pro-
duties as they relate to the employee’s vided to the examining physician by
exposures. the employer, with the exception of the
standard and its appendices.
(ii) The employee’s exposure levels or
(g) Engineering controls, work prac-
anticipated exposure levels.
tices, and personal protective equipment
(iii) A description of any personal
for employee protection. Engineering
protective equipment used or to be
controls, work practices, personal pro-
used.
tective equipment, or a combination of
(iv) Information from previous med- these shall be implemented in accord-
ical examinations of the employee ance with this paragraph to protect
which is not readily available to the employees from exposure to hazardous
examining physician. substances and safety and health haz-
(v) Information required by § 1910.134. ards.
(7) Physician’s written opinion. (i) The (1) Engineering controls, work practices
employer shall obtain and furnish the and PPE for substances regulated in sub-
employee with a copy of a written parts G and Z. (i) Engineering controls
opinion from the attending physician and work practices shall be instituted
containing the following: to reduce and maintain employee expo-
(A) The physician’s opinion as to sure to or below the permissible expo-
whether the employee has any detected sure limits for substances regulated by
medical conditions which would place 29 CFR part 1910, to the extent required
the employee at increased risk of ma- by subpart Z, except to the extent that
terial impairment of the employee’s such controls and practices are not fea-
health from work in hazardous waste sible.
operations or emergency response, or
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (g)(1)(i): Engineering
from respirator use. controls which may be feasible include the
(B) The physician’s recommended
use of pressurized cabs or control booths on

limitations upon the employee’s as- equipment, and/or the use of remotely oper-
signed work. ated material handling equipment. Work
378
practices which may be feasible are remov- (iii) Positive pressure self-contained
ing all non-essential employees from poten- breathing apparatus, or positive pres-
tial exposure during opening of drums, wet- sure air-line respirators equipped with
ting down dusty operations and locating em-
an escape air supply, shall be used
ployees upwind of possible hazards.
when chemical exposure levels present
(ii) Whenever engineering controls will create a substantial possibility of
and work practices are not feasible or immediate death, immediate serious
not required, any reasonable combina- illness or injury, or impair the ability
tion of engineering controls, work to escape.
practices and PPE shall be used to re- (iv) Totally-encapsulating chemical
duce and maintain employee exposures protective suits (protection equivalent
to or below the permissible exposure to Level A protection as recommended
limits or dose limits for substances in appendix B) shall be used in condi-
regulated by 29 CFR part 1910, subpart tions where skin absorption of a haz-
Z. ardous substance may result in a sub-
(iii) The employer shall not imple- stantial possibility of immediate
ment a schedule of employee rotation death, immediate serious illness or in-
as a means of compliance with permis- jury, or impair the ability to escape.
sible exposure limits or dose limits ex- (v) The level of protection provided
cept when there is no other feasible by PPE selection shall be increased
way of complying with the airborne or when additional information on site
dermal dose limits for ionizing radi- conditions indicates that increased
ation. protection is necessary to reduce em-
(iv) The provisions of 29 CFR, subpart ployee exposures below permissible ex-
G, shall be followed. posure limits and published exposure
(2) Engineering controls, work practices, levels for hazardous substances and
and PPE for substances not regulated in health hazards. (See appendix B for
subparts G and Z. An appropriate com- guidance on selecting PPE ensembles.)
bination of engineering controls, work
practices and personal protective NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (g)(3): The level of em-
ployee protection provided may be decreased
equipment shall be used to reduce and
when additional information or site condi-
maintain employee exposure to or tions show that decreased protection will not
below published exposure levels for result in hazardous exposures to employees.
hazardous substances and health haz-
ards not regulated by 29 CFR part 1910, (vi) Personal protective equipment
subparts G and Z. The employer may shall be selected and used to meet the
use the published literature and SDS as requirements of 29 CFR part 1910, sub-
a guide in making the employer’s depart I, and additional requirements
termination as to what level of protec- specified in this section.
tion the employer believes is appro- (4) Totally-encapsulating chemical pro-
priate for hazardous substances and tective suits. (i) Totally-encapsulating
health hazards for which there is no suits shall protect employees from the
permissible exposure limit or published particular hazards which are identified
exposure limit. during site characterization and anal-
(3) Personal protective equipment selec- ysis.
tion. (i) Personal protective equipment (ii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall
(PPE) shall be selected and used which be capable of maintaining positive air
will protect employees from the haz- pressure. (See appendix A for a test
ards and potential hazards they are method which may be used to evaluate
likely to encounter as identified during this requirement.)
the site characterization and analysis. (iii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall
(ii) Personal protective equipment be capable of preventing inward test
selection shall be based on an evalua- gas leakage of more than 0.5 percent.
tion of the performance characteristics (See appendix A for a test method
of the PPE relative to the require- which may be used to evaluate this re-
ments and limitations of the site, the quirement.)
task-specific conditions and duration, (5) Personal protective equipment (PPE)
and the hazards and potential hazards program. A written personal protective
identified at the site. equipment program, which is part of
379
the employer’s safety and health pro- condition such as the presence of flam-
gram required in paragraph (b) of this mable atmospheres or oxygen-deficient
section or required in paragraph (p)(1) environments.
of this section and which is also a part (3) Periodic monitoring. Periodic moni-
of the site-specific safety and health toring shall be conducted when the pos-
plan shall be established. The PPE pro- sibility of an IDLH condition or flam-
gram shall address the elements listed mable atmosphere has developed or
below. When elements, such as donning when there is indication that exposures
and doffing procedures, are provided by may have risen over permissible expo-
the manufacturer of a piece of equip- sure limits or published exposure levels
ment and are attached to the plan, since prior monitoring. Situations
they need not be rewritten into the where it shall be considered whether
plan as long as they adequately address the possibility that exposures have
the procedure or element. risen are as follows:
(i) PPE selection based upon site haz- (i) When work begins on a different
ards, portion of the site.
(ii) PPE use and limitations of the (ii) When contaminants other than
equipment, those previously identified are being
(iii) Work mission duration, handled.
(iv) PPE maintenance and storage, (iii) When a different type of oper-
(v) PPE decontamination and dis- ation is initiated (e.g., drum opening as
posal, opposed to exploratory well drilling).
(vi) PPE training and proper fitting, (iv) When employees are handling
(vii) PPE donning and doffing proce- leaking drums or containers or work-
dures, ing in areas with obvious liquid con-
(viii) PPE inspection procedures tamination (e.g., a spill or lagoon).
prior to, during, and after use, (4) Monitoring of high-risk employees.
(ix) Evaluation of the effectiveness of After the actual clean-up phase of any
the PPE program, and hazardous waste operation commences;
(x) Limitations during temperature for example, when soil, surface water
extremes, heat stress, and other appro- or containers are moved or disturbed;
priate medical considerations. the employer shall monitor those em-
(h) Monitoring—(1) General. (i) Moni- ployees likely to have the highest ex-
toring shall be performed in accord- posures to hazardous substances and
health hazards likely to be present
ance with this paragraph where there
above permissible exposure limits or
may be a question of employee expo-
published exposure levels by using per-
sure to hazardous concentrations of
sonal sampling frequently enough to
hazardous substances in order to assure
characterize employee exposures. If the
proper selection of engineering con-
employees likely to have the highest
trols, work practices and personal pro-
exposure are over permissible exposure
tective equipment so that employees
limits or published exposure limits,
are not exposed to levels which exceed
then monitoring shall continue to de-
permissible exposure limits, or pub-
termine all employees likely to be
lished exposure levels if there are no
above those limits. The employer may
permissible exposure limits, for haz-
utilize a representative sampling ap-
ardous substances.
proach by documenting that the em-
(ii) Air monitoring shall be used to
ployees and chemicals chosen for moni-
identify and quantify airborne levels of
toring are based on the criteria stated
hazardous substances and safety and
above.
health hazards in order to determine
the appropriate level of employee pro- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (h): It is not required
tection needed on site. to monitor employees engaged in site char-
(2) Initial entry. Upon initial entry, acterization operations covered by paragraph
(c) of this section.
representative air monitoring shall be
conducted to identify any IDLH condi- (i) Informational programs. Employers
tion, exposure over permissible expo- shall develop and implement a pro-
sure limits or published exposure lev- gram, which is part of the employer’s
els, exposure over a radioactive mate- safety and health program required in
rial’s dose limits or other dangerous paragraph (b) of this section, to inform
380
employees, contractors, and sub- (ix) Drums and containers that can-
contractors (or their representative) not be moved without rupture, leakage,
actually engaged in hazardous waste or spillage shall be emptied into a
operations of the nature, level and de- sound container using a device classi-
gree of exposure likely as a result of fied for the material being transferred.
participation in such hazardous waste (x) A ground-penetrating system or
operations. Employees, contractors and other type of detection system or de-
subcontractors working outside of the vice shall be used to estimate the loca-
operations part of a site are not cov- tion and depth of buried drums or con-
ered by this standard. tainers.
(j) Handling drums and containers—(1) (xi) Soil or covering material shall be
General. (i) Hazardous substances and removed with caution to prevent drum
contaminated soils, liquids, and other or container rupture.
residues shall be handled, transported, (xii) Fire extinguishing equipment
labeled, and disposed of in accordance meeting the requirements of 29 CFR
with this paragraph. part 1910, subpart L, shall be on hand
(ii) Drums and containers used dur- and ready for use to control incipient
ing the clean-up shall meet the appro- fires.
priate DOT, OSHA, and EPA regula- (2) Opening drums and containers. The
tions for the wastes that they contain. following procedures shall be followed
(iii) When practical, drums and con- in areas where drums or containers are
tainers shall be inspected and their in- being opened:
tegrity shall be assured prior to being (i) Where an airline respirator system
moved. Drums or containers that can- is used, connections to the source of air
not be inspected before being moved supply shall be protected from con-
because of storage conditions (i.e., bur- tamination and the entire system shall
ied beneath the earth, stacked behind be protected from physical damage.
other drums, stacked several tiers high (ii) Employees not actually involved
in a pile, etc.) shall be moved to an ac- in opening drums or containers shall be
cessible location and inspected prior to kept a safe distance from the drums or
further handling. containers being opened.
(iv) Unlabelled drums and containers (iii) If employees must work near or
shall be considered to contain haz- adjacent to drums or containers being
ardous substances and handled accord- opened, a suitable shield that does not
ingly until the contents are positively interfere with the work operation shall
identified and labeled. be placed between the employee and
(v) Site operations shall be organized the drums or containers being opened
to minimize the amount of drum or to protect the employee in case of acci-
container movement. dental explosion.
(vi) Prior to movement of drums or (iv) Controls for drum or container
containers, all employees exposed to opening equipment, monitoring equip-
the transfer operation shall be warned ment, and fire suppression equipment
of the potential hazards associated shall be located behind the explosion-
with the contents of the drums or con- resistant barrier.
tainers. (v) When there is a reasonable possi-
(vii) U.S. Department of Transpor- bility of flammable atmospheres being
tation specified salvage drums or con- present, material handling equipment
tainers and suitable quantities of prop- and hand tools shall be of the type to
er absorbent shall be kept available prevent sources of ignition.
and used in areas where spills, leaks, or (vi) Drums and containers shall be
ruptures may occur. opened in such a manner that excess
(viii) Where major spills may occur, a interior pressure will be safely re-
spill containment program, which is lieved. If pressure can not be relieved
part of the employer’s safety and from a remote location, appropriate
health program required in paragraph shielding shall be placed between the
(b) of this section, shall be imple- employee and the drums or containers
mented to contain and isolate the en- to reduce the risk of employee injury.
tire volume of the hazardous substance (vii) Employees shall not stand upon
being transferred. or work from drums or containers.
381
(3) Material handling equipment. Mate- ment of Transportation regulations. Employ-

rial handiing equipment used to trans- ers and their shippers should refer to 49 CFR
fer drums and containers shall be se- 173.21 and 173.50.
lected, positioned and operated to min- (6) Laboratory waste packs. In addition
imize sources of ignition related to the to the requirements of paragraph (j)(5)
equipment from igniting vapors re- of this section, the following pre-
leased from ruptured drums or con- cautions shall be taken, as a minimum,
tainers. in handling laboratory waste packs
(4) Radioactive wastes. Drums and con-
(lab packs):
tainers containing radioactive wastes
shall not be handled until such time as (i) Lab packs shall be opened only
their hazard to employees is properly when necessary and then only by an in-
assessed. dividual knowledgeable in the inspec-
(5) Shock sensitive wastes. As a min- tion, classification, and segregation of
imum, the following special pre- the containers within the pack accord-
cautions shall be taken when drums ing to the hazards of the wastes.
and containers containing or suspected (ii) If crystalline material is noted on
of containing shock-sensitive wastes any container, the contents shall be
are handled: handled as a shock-sensitive waste
(i) All non-essential employees shall until the contents are identified.
be evacuated from the area of transfer. (7) Sampling of drum and container
(ii) Material handling equipment contents. Sampling of containers and
shall be provided with explosive con- drums shall be done in accordance with
tainment devices or protective shields a sampling procedure which is part of
to protect equipment operators from the site safety and health plan devel-
exploding containers. oped for and available to employees
(iii) An employee alarm system capa- and others at the specific worksite.
ble of being perceived above sur- (8) Shipping and transport. (i) Drums
rounding light and noise conditions and containers shall be identified and
shall be used to signal the commence- classified prior to packaging for ship-
ment and completion of explosive ment.
waste handling activities. (ii) Drum or container staging areas
(iv) Continuous communications (i.e.,
shall be kept to the minimum number
portable radios, hand signals, tele-
necessary to identify and classify ma-
phones, as appropriate) shall be main-
terials safely and prepare them for
tained between the employee-in-charge
transport.
of the immediate handling area and
both the site safety and health super- (iii) Staging areas shall be provided
visor and the command post until such with adequate access and egress routes.
time as the handling operation is com- (iv) Bulking of hazardous wastes
pleted. Communication equipment or shall be permitted only after a thor-
methods that could cause shock sen- ough characterization of the materials
sitive materials to explode shall not be has been completed.
used. (9) Tank and vault procedures. (i)
(v) Drums and containers under pres- Tanks and vaults containing hazardous
sure, as evidenced by bulging or swell- substances shall be handled in a man-
ing, shall not be moved until such time ner similar to that for drums and con-
as the cause for excess pressure is de- tainers, taking into consideration the
termined and appropriate containment size of the tank or vault.
procedures have been implemented to (ii) Appropriate tank or vault entry
protect employees from explosive relief procedures as described in the employ-
of the drum. er’s safety and health plan shall be fol-
(vi) Drums and containers containing lowed whenever employees must enter
packaged laboratory wastes shall be a tank or vault.
considered to contain shock-sensitive (k) Decontamination—(1) General. Pro-
or explosive materials until they have cedures for all phases of decontamina-
been characterized. tion shall be developed and imple-
CAUTION: Shipping of shock sensitive mented in accordance with this para-

wastes may be prohibited under U.S. Depart- graph.
382
(2) Decontamination procedures. (i) A (8) Showers and change rooms. Where
decontamination procedure shall be de- the decontamination procedure indi-
veloped, communicated to employees cates a need for regular showers and
and implemented before any employees change rooms outside of a contami-
or equipment may enter areas on site nated area, they shall be provided and
where potential for exposure to haz- meet the requirements of 29 CFR
ardous substances exists. 1910.141. If temperature conditions pre-
(ii) Standard operating procedures vent the effective use of water, then
shall be developed to minimize em- other effective means for cleansing
ployee contact with hazardous sub- shall be provided and used.
stances or with equipment that has (l) Emergency response by employees at
contacted hazardous substances. uncontrolled hazardous waste sites—(1)
(iii) All employees leaving a contami- Emergency response plan. (i) An emer-
nated area shall be appropriately de- gency response plan shall be developed
contaminated; all contaminated cloth- and implemented by all employers
ing and equipment leaving a contami- within the scope of paragraphs (a)(1)
nated area shall be appropriately dis- (i)–(ii) of this section to handle antici-
posed of or decontaminated. pated emergencies prior to the com-
(iv) Decontamination procedures mencement of hazardous waste oper-
shall be monitored by the site safety ations. The plan shall be in writing and
and health supervisor to determine available for inspection and copying by
their effectiveness. When such proce- employees, their representatives,
dures are found to be ineffective, ap- OSHA personnel and other govern-
propriate steps shall be taken to cor- mental agencies with relevant respon-
rect any deficiencies. sibilities.
(3) Location. Decontamination shall (ii) Employers who will evacuate
be performed in geographical areas their employees from the danger area
that will minimize the exposure of when an emergency occurs, and who do
uncontaminated employees or equip- not permit any of their employees to
ment to contaminated employees or assist in handling the emergency, are
equipment. exempt from the requirements of this
(4) Equipment and solvents. All equip- paragraph if they provide an emer-
ment and solvents used for decon- gency action plan complying with 29
tamination shall be decontaminated or CFR 1910.38.
disposed of properly. (2) Elements of an emergency response
(5) Personal protective clothing and plan. The employer shall develop an
equipment. (i) Protective clothing and emergency response plan for emer-
equipment shall be decontaminated, gencies which shall address, as a min-
cleaned, laundered, maintained or re- imum, the following:
placed as needed to maintain their ef- (i) Pre-emergency planning.
fectiveness. (ii) Personnel roles, lines of author-
(ii) Employees whose non-imper- ity, and communication.
meable clothing becomes wetted with (iii) Emergency recognition and pre-
hazardous substances shall imme- vention.
diately remove that clothing and pro- (iv) Safe distances and places of ref-
ceed to shower. The clothing shall be uge.
disposed of or decontaminated before it (v) Site security and control.
is removed from the work zone. (vi) Evacuation routes and proce-
(6) Unauthorized employees. Unauthor- dures.
ized employees shall not remove pro- (vii) Decontamination procedures
tective clothing or equipment from which are not covered by the site safe-
change rooms. ty and health plan.
(7) Commercial laundries or cleaning es- (viii) Emergency medical treatment
tablishments. Commercial laundries or and first aid.
cleaning establishments that decon- (ix) Emergency alerting and response
taminate protective clothing or equip- procedures.
ment shall be informed of the poten- (x) Critique of response and follow-
tially harmful effects of exposures to up.

hazardous substances. (xi) PPE and emergency equipment.
383
(3) Procedures for handling emergency TABLE H–120.1—MINIMUM ILLUMINATION

incidents. (i) In addition to the ele- INTENSITIES IN FOOT-CANDLES—Continued
ments for the emergency response plan
Foot-
required in paragraph (l)(2) of this sec- can- Area or operations
tion, the following elements shall be dles
included for emergency response plans: 5 ........ Tunnels, shafts, and general underground work
(A) Site topography, layout, and pre- areas. (Exception: Minimum of 10 foot-candles is
vailing weather conditions. required at tunnel and shaft heading during drilling
mucking, and scaling. Mine Safety and Health Ad-
(B) Procedures for reporting inci- ministration approved cap lights shall be accept-
dents to local, state, and federal gov- able for use in the tunnel heading.)
ernmental agencies. 10 ...... General shops (e.g., mechanical and electrical
equipment rooms, active storerooms, barracks or
(ii) The emergency response plan living quarters, locker or dressing rooms, dining
shall be a separate section of the Site areas, and indoor toilets and workrooms.)
Safety and Health Plan. 30 ...... First aid stations, infirmaries, and offices.
(iii) The emergency response plan
shall be compatible and integrated (n) Sanitation at temporary work-
with the disaster, fire and/or emer- places—(1) Potable water. (i) An ade-
gency response plans of local, state, quate supply of potable water shall be
and federal agencies. provided on the site.
(iv) The emergency response plan (ii) Portable containers used to dis-
shall be rehearsed regularly as part of pense drinking water shall be capable
the overall training program for site of being tightly closed, and equipped
operations. with a tap. Water shall not be dipped
(v) The site emergency response plan from containers.
shall be reviewed periodically and, as (iii) Any container used to distribute
necessary, be amended to keep it cur- drinking water shall be clearly marked
rent with new or changing site condi- as to the nature of its contents and not
tions or information. used for any other purpose.
(vi) An employee alarm system shall (iv) Where single service cups (to be
be installed in accordance with 29 CFR used but once) are supplied, both a san-
1910.165 to notify employees of an emer- itary container for the unused cups and
gency situation; to stop work activities a receptacle for disposing of the used
if necessary; to lower background noise cups shall be provided.
in order to speed communication; and (2) Nonpotable water. (i) Outlets for
to begin emergency procedures. nonpotable water, such as water for
firefighting purposes, shall be identi-
(vii) Based upon the information
fied to indicate clearly that the water
available at time of the emergency, the
is unsafe and is not to be used for
employer shall evaluate the incident
drinking, washing, or cooking pur-
and the site response capabilities and
poses.
proceed with the appropriate steps to
(ii) There shall be no cross-connec-
implement the site emergency response
tion, open or potential, between a sys-
plan.
tem furnishing potable water and a
(m) Illumination. Areas accessible to
system furnishing nonpotable water.
employees shall be lighted to not less
(3) Toilet facilities. (i) Toilets shall be
than the minimum illumination inten-
provided for employees according to
sities listed in the following Table H–
the following Table H–120.2.
120.1 while any work is in progress:
TABLE H–120.2—TOILET FACILITIES
TABLE H–120.1—MINIMUM ILLUMINATION
INTENSITIES IN FOOT-CANDLES Number of employees Minimum number of facilities
Foot- 20 or fewer ............................. One.

can- Area or operations More than 20, fewer than 200 One toilet seat and one uri-
dles nal per 40 employees.
More than 200 ........................ One toilet seat and one uri-
5 ........ General site areas. nal per 50 employees.
3 ........ Excavation and waste areas, accessways, active
storage areas, loading platforms, refueling, and
(ii) Under temporary field conditions,
field maintenance areas.

5 ........ Indoors: Warehouses, corridors, hallways, and provisions shall be made to assure that
exitways. at least one toilet facility is available.
384
(iii) Hazardous waste sites not pro- off the worksite, shall provide employ-
vided with a sanitary sewer shall be ees with a clean area where they can
provided with the following toilet fa- remove, store, and put on street cloth-
cilities unless prohibited by local ing. The second area, with an exit to
codes: the worksite, shall provide employees
(A) Chemical toilets; with an area where they can put on, re-
(B) Recirculating toilets; move and store work clothing and per-
(C) Combustion toilets; or sonal protective equipment.
(D) Flush toilets. (iii) Showers and change rooms shall
(iv) The requirements of this para- be located in areas where exposures are
graph for sanitation facilities shall not below the permissible exposure limits
apply to mobile crews having transpor- and published exposure levels. If this
tation readily available to nearby toi- cannot be accomplished, then a ven-
let facilities. tilation system shall be provided that
(v) Doors entering toilet facilities will supply air that is below the per-
shall be provided with entrance locks missible exposure limits and published
controlled from inside the facility. exposure levels.
(4) Food handling. All food service fa- (iv) Employers shall assure that em-
cilities and operations for employees ployees shower at the end of their work
shall meet the applicable laws, ordi- shift and when leaving the hazardous
nances, and regulations of the jurisdic- waste site.
tions in which they are located. (o) New technology programs. (1) The
(5) Temporary sleeping quarters. When employer shall develop and implement
temporary sleeping quarters are pro- procedures for the introduction of ef-
vided, they shall be heated, ventilated, fective new technologies and equip-
and lighted. ment developed for the improved pro-
(6) Washing facilities. The employer tection of employees working with haz-
shall provide adequate washing facili- ardous waste clean-up operations, and
ties for employees engaged in oper- the same shall be implemented as part
ations where hazardous substances of the site safety and health program
may be harmful to employees. Such fa- to assure that employee protection is
cilities shall be in near proximity to being maintained.
the worksite; in areas where exposures (2) New technologies, equipment or
are below permissible exposure limits control measures available to the in-
and published exposure levels and dustry, such as the use of foams,
which are under the controls of the em- absorbents, adsorbents, neutralizers, or
ployer; and shall be so equipped as to other means to suppress the level of air
enable employees to remove hazardous contaminates while excavating the site
substances from themselves. or for spill control, shall be evaluated
(7) Showers and change rooms. When by employers or their representatives.
hazardous waste clean-up or removal Such an evaluation shall be done to de-
operations commence on a site and the termine the effectiveness of the new
duration of the work will require six methods, materials, or equipment be-
months or greater time to complete, fore implementing their use on a large
the employer shall provide showers and scale for enhancing employee protec-
change rooms for all employees ex- tion. Information and data from manu-
posed to hazardous substances and facturers or suppliers may be used as
health hazards involved in hazardous part of the employer’s evaluation ef-
waste clean-up or removal operations. fort. Such evaluations shall be made
(i) Showers shall be provided and available to OSHA upon request.
shall meet the requirements of 29 CFR (p) Certain Operations Conducted
1910.141(d)(3). Under the Resource Conservation and Re-
(ii) Change rooms shall be provided covery Act of 1976 (RCRA). Employers
and shall meet the requirements of 29 conducting operations at treatment,
CFR 1910.141(e). Change rooms shall storage and disposal (TSD) facilities
consist of two separate change areas specified in paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this
separated by the shower area required section shall provide and implement
in paragraph (n)(7)(i) of this section. the programs specified in this para-

One change area, with an exit leading graph. See the ‘‘Notes and Exceptions’’
385
to paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section stances at TSD operations to enable

for employers not covered.)’’. the employees to perform their as-
(1) Safety and health program. The em- signed duties and functions in a safe
ployer shall develop and implement a and healthful manner so as not endan-
written safety and health program for ger themselves or other employees. The
employees involved in hazardous waste initial training shall be for 24 hours
operations that shall be available for and refresher training shall be for eight
inspection by employees, their rep- hours annually. Employees who have
resentatives and OSHA personnel. The received the initial training required
program shall be designed to identify, by this paragraph shall be given a writ-
evaluate and control safety and health ten certificate attesting that they have
hazards in their facilities for the pur- successfully completed the necessary
pose of employee protection, to provide training.
for emergency response meeting the re- (ii) Current employees. Employers who
quirements of paragraph (p)(8) of this can show by an employee’s previous
section and to address as appropriate work experience and/or training that
site analysis, engineering controls, the employee has had training equiva-
maximum exposure limits, hazardous lent to the initial training required by
waste handling procedures and uses of this paragraph, shall be considered as
new technologies. meeting the initial training require-
(2) Hazard communication program. ments of this paragraph as to that em-
The employer shall implement a haz- ployee. Equivalent training includes
ard communication program meeting the training that existing employees
the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1200 as might have already received from ac-
part of the employer’s safety and pro- tual site work experience. Current em-
gram. ployees shall receive eight hours of re-
NOTE TO § 1910.120: The exemption for haz- fresher training annually.
ardous waste provided in § 1910.1200 is appli- (iii) Trainers. Trainers who teach ini-
cable to this section. tial training shall have satisfactorily
(3) Medical surveillance program. The completed a training course for teach-
employer shall develop and implement ing the subjects they are expected to
a medical surveillance program meet- teach or they shall have the academic
ing the requirements of paragraph (f) of credentials and instruction experience
this section. necessary to demonstrate a good com-
(4) Decontamination program. The em- mand of the subject matter of the
ployer shall develop and implement a courses and competent instructional
decontamination procedure meeting skills.
the requirements of paragraph (k) of (8) Emergency response program—(i)
this section. Emergency response plan. An emergency
(5) New technology program. The em- response plan shall be developed and
ployer shall develop and implement implemented by all employers. Such
procedures meeting the requirements plans need not duplicate any of the
of paragraph (o) of this section for in- subjects fully addressed in the employ-
troducing new and innovative equip- er’s contingency planning required by
ment into the workplace. permits, such as those issued by the
(6) Material handling program. Where U.S. Environmental Protection Agen-
employees will be handling drums or cy, provided that the contingency plan
containers, the employer shall develop is made part of the emergency response
and implement procedures meeting the plan. The emergency response plan
requirements of paragraphs (j)(1) (ii) shall be a written portion of the em-
through (viii) and (xi) of this section, ployer’s safety and health program re-
as well as (j)(3) and (j)(8) of this section quired in paragraph (p)(1) of this sec-
prior to starting such work. tion. Employers who will evacuate
(7) Training program—(i) New employ- their employees from the worksite lo-
ees. The employer shall develop and im- cation when an emergency occurs and
plement a training program, which is who do not permit any of their employ-
part of the employer’s safety and ees to assist in handling the emergency
health program, for employees exposed are exempt from the requirements of
to health hazards or hazardous subparagraph (p)(8) if they provide an
386
emergency action plan complying with recognize that an emergency response situa-
29 CFR 1910.38. tion exists and they have been instructed to
(ii) Elements of an emergency response call the designated outside fully-trained
plan. The employer shall develop an emergency response team for assistance.
emergency response plan for emer- (B) Employee members of TSD facil-
gencies which shall address, as a min- ity emergency response organizations
imum, the following areas to the ex- shall be trained to a level of com-
tent that they are not addressed in any petence in the recognition of health
specific program required in this para- and safety hazards to protect them-
graph: selves and other employees. This would
(A) Pre-emergency planning and co- include training in the methods used to
ordination with outside parties. minimize the risk from safety and
(B) Personnel roles, lines of author- health hazards; in the safe use of con-
ity, and communication. trol equipment; in the selection and
(C) Emergency recognition and pre- use of appropriate personal protective
vention. equipment; in the safe operating proce-
(D) Safe distances and places of ref- dures to be used at the incident scene;
uge. in the techniques of coordination with
(E) Site security and control. other employees to minimize risks; in
(F) Evacuation routes and proce- the appropriate response to over expo-
dures. sure from health hazards or injury to
(G) Decontamination procedures.
themselves and other employees; and
(H) Emergency medical treatment
in the recognition of subsequent symp-
and first aid.
toms which may result from over expo-
(I) Emergency alerting and response
sures.
procedures.
(J) Critique of response and follow- (C) The employer shall certify that
up. each covered employee has attended
(K) PPE and emergency equipment. and successfully completed the train-
(iii) Training. (A) Training for emer- ing required in paragraph (p)(8)(iii) of
gency response employees shall be this section, or shall certify the em-
completed before they are called upon ployee’s competency at least yearly.
to perform in real emergencies. Such The method used to demonstrate com-
training shall include the elements of petency for certification of training
the emergency response plan, standard shall be recorded and maintained by
operating procedures the employer has the employer.
established for the job, the personal (iv) Procedures for handling emergency
protective equipment to be worn and incidents. (A) In addition to the ele-
procedures for handling emergency in- ments for the emergency response plan
cidents. required in paragraph (p)(8)(ii) of this
section, the following elements shall be
Exception #1: An employer need not train
included for emergency response plans
all employees to the degree specified if the
employer divides the work force in a manner to the extent that they do not repeat
such that a sufficient number of employees any information already contained in
who have responsibility to control emer- the emergency response plan:
gencies have the training specified, and all (1) Site topography, layout, and pre-
other employees, who may first respond to vailing weather conditions.
an emergency incident, have sufficient (2) Procedures for reporting incidents
awareness training to recognize that an
emergency response situation exists and that
to local, state, and federal govern-
they are instructed in that case to summon mental agencies.
the fully trained employees and not attempt (B) The emergency response plan
control activities for which they are not shall be compatible and integrated
trained. with the disaster, fire and/or emer-
Exception #2: An employer need not train gency response plans of local, state,
all employees to the degree specified if ar- and federal agencies.
rangements have been made in advance for
an outside fully-trained emergency response (C) The emergency response plan
shall be rehearsed regularly as part of
team to respond in a reasonable period and

all employees, who may come to the incident the overall training program for site
first, have sufficient awareness training to operations.
387
(D) The site emergency response plan imum, the following to the extent that
shall be reviewed periodically and, as they are not addressed elsewhere:
necessary, be amended to keep it cur- (i) Pre-emergency planning and co-
rent with new or changing site condi- ordination with outside parties.
tions or information. (ii) Personnel roles, lines of author-
(E) An employee alarm system shall ity, training, and communication.
be installed in accordance with 29 CFR (iii) Emergency recognition and pre-
1910.165 to notify employees of an emer- vention.
gency situation; to stop work activities
(iv) Safe distances and places of ref-
if necessary; to lower background noise
in order to speed communication; and uge.
to begin emergency procedures. (v) Site security and control.
(F) Based upon the information avail- (vi) Evacuation routes and proce-
able at time of the emergency, the em- dures.
ployer shall evaluate the incident and (vii) Decontamination.
the site response capabilities and pro- (viii) Emergency medical treatment
ceed with the appropriate steps to im- and first aid.
plement the site emergency response (ix) Emergency alerting and response
plan. procedures.
(q) Emergency response to hazardous (x) Critique of response and follow-
substance releases. This paragraph cov- up.
ers employers whose employees are en- (xi) PPE and emergency equipment.
gaged in emergency response no matter
(xii) Emergency response organiza-
where it occurs except that it does not
tions may use the local emergency re-
cover employees engaged in operations
specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through sponse plan or the state emergency re-
(a)(1)(iv) of this section. Those emer- sponse plan or both, as part of their
gency response organizations who have emergency response plan to avoid du-
developed and implemented programs plication. Those items of the emer-
equivalent to this paragraph for han- gency response plan that are being
dling releases of hazardous substances properly addressed by the SARA Title
pursuant to section 303 of the Super- III plans may be substituted into their
fund Amendments and Reauthorization emergency plan or otherwise kept to-
Act of 1986 (Emergency Planning and gether for the employer and employee’s
Community Right-to-Know Act of 1986, use.
42 U.S.C. 11003) shall be deemed to have (3) Procedures for handling emergency
met the requirements of this para- response. (i) The senior emergency re-
graph. sponse official responding to an emer-
(1) Emergency response plan. An emergency shall become the individual in
gency response plan shall be developed charge of a site-specific Incident Com-
and implemented to handle anticipated mand System (ICS). All emergency re-
emergencies prior to the commence- sponders and their communications
ment of emergency response oper- shall be coordinated and controlled
ations. The plan shall be in writing and through the individual in charge of the
available for inspection and copying by ICS assisted by the senior official
employees, their representatives and
present for each employer.
OSHA personnel. Employers who will
evacuate their employees from the NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (q)(3)(i): The ‘‘senior
danger area when an emergency occurs, official’’ at an emergency response is the
and who do not permit any of their em- most senior official on the site who has the
ployees to assist in handling the emer- responsibility for controlling the operations
gency, are exempt from the require- at the site. Initially it is the senior officer
ments of this paragraph if they provide on the first-due piece of responding emer-
an emergency action plan in accord- gency apparatus to arrive on the incident
scene. As more senior officers arrive (i.e.,
ance with 29 CFR 1910.38.
battalion chief, fire chief, state law enforce-
(2) Elements of an emergency response ment official, site coordinator, etc.) the posi-
plan. The employer shall develop an
tion is passed up the line of authority which

emergency response plan for emer- has been previously established.
gencies which shall address, as a min-
388
(ii) The individual in charge of the (viii) When activities are judged by
ICS shall identify, to the extent pos- the safety official to be an IDLH condi-
sible, all hazardous substances or con- tion and/or to involve an imminent
ditions present and shall address as ap- danger condition, the safety official
propriate site analysis, use of engineer- shall have the authority to alter, sus-
ing controls, maximum exposure lim- pend, or terminate those activities.
its, hazardous substance handling pro- The safety official shall immediately
cedures, and use of any new tech- inform the individual in charge of the
nologies. ICS of any actions needed to be taken
(iii) Based on the hazardous sub- to correct these hazards at the emer-
stances and/or conditions present, the gency scene.
individual in charge of the ICS shall (ix) After emergency operations have
implement appropriate emergency op- terminated, the individual in charge of
erations, and assure that the personal the ICS shall implement appropriate
protective equipment worn is appro- decontamination procedures.
priate for the hazards to be encoun-
(x) When deemed necessary for meet-
tered. However, personal protective
ing the tasks at hand, approved self-
equipment shall meet, at a minimum,
contained compressed air breathing ap-
the criteria contained in 29 CFR
paratus may be used with approved cyl-
1910.156(e) when worn while performing
inders from other approved self-con-
fire fighting operations beyond the in-
tained compressed air breathing appa-
cipient stage for any incident.
ratus provided that such cylinders are
(iv) Employees engaged in emergency
of the same capacity and pressure rat-
response and exposed to hazardous sub-
ing. All compressed air cylinders used
stances presenting an inhalation haz-
with self-contained breathing appa-
ard or potential inhalation hazard shall
wear positive pressure self-contained ratus shall meet U.S. Department of
breathing apparatus while engaged in Transportation and National Institute
emergency response, until such time for Occupational Safety and Health cri-
that the individual in charge of the ICS teria.
determines through the use of air mon- (4) Skilled support personnel. Per-
itoring that a decreased level of res- sonnel, not necessarily an employer’s
piratory protection will not result in own employees, who are skilled in the
hazardous exposures to employees. operation of certain equipment, such as
(v) The individual in charge of the mechanized earth moving or digging
ICS shall limit the number of emer- equipment or crane and hoisting equip-
gency response personnel at the emer- ment, and who are needed temporarily
gency site, in those areas of potential to perform immediate emergency sup-
or actual exposure to incident or site port work that cannot reasonably be
hazards, to those who are actively per- performed in a timely fashion by an
forming emergency operations. How- employer’s own employees, and who
ever, operations in hazardous areas will be or may be exposed to the haz-
shall be performed using the buddy sys- ards at an emergency response scene,
tem in groups of two or more. are not required to meet the training
(vi) Back-up personnel shall stand by required in this paragraph for the em-
with equipment ready to provide as- ployer’s regular employees. However,
sistance or rescue. Advance first aid these personnel shall be given an ini-
support personnel, as a minimum, shall tial briefing at the site prior to their
also stand by with medical equipment participation in any emergency re-
and transportation capability. sponse. The initial briefing shall in-
(vii) The individual in charge of the clude instruction in the wearing of ap-
ICS shall designate a safety official, propriate personal protective equip-
who is knowledgable in the operations ment, what chemical hazards are in-
being implemented at the emergency volved, and what duties are to be per-
response site, with specific responsi- formed. All other appropriate safety
bility to identify and evaluate hazards and health precautions provided to the
and to provide direction with respect employer’s own employees shall be
to the safety of operations for the used to assure the safety and health of
emergency at hand. these personnel.
389
(5) Specialist employees. Employees Transportation’s Emergency Response

who, in the course of their regular job Guidebook.
duties, work with and are trained in (F) The ability to realize the need for
the hazards of specific hazardous sub- additional resources, and to make ap-
stances, and who will be called upon to propriate notifications to the commu-
provide technical advice or assistance nication center.
at a hazardous substance release inci- (ii) First responder operations level.
dent to the individual in charge, shall First responders at the operations level
receive training or demonstrate com- are individuals who respond to releases
petency in the area of their specializa- or potential releases of hazardous sub-
tion annually. stances as part of the initial response
(6) Training. Training shall be based to the site for the purpose of protecting
on the duties and function to be per- nearby persons, property, or the envi-
formed by each responder of an emer- ronment from the effects of the re-
gency response organization. The skill lease. They are trained to respond in a
and knowledge levels required for all defensive fashion without actually try-
new responders, those hired after the ing to stop the release. Their function
effective date of this standard, shall be is to contain the release from a safe
conveyed to them through training be- distance, keep it from spreading, and
fore they are permitted to take part in prevent exposures. First responders at
actual emergency operations on an in- the operational level shall have re-
cident. Employees who participate, or
ceived at least eight hours of training
are expected to participate, in emer-
or have had sufficient experience to ob-
gency response, shall be given training
jectively demonstrate competency in
in accordance with the following para-
the following areas in addition to those
graphs:
listed for the awareness level and the
(i) First responder awareness level. employer shall so certify:
First responders at the awareness level
(A) Knowledge of the basic hazard
are individuals who are likely to wit-
and risk assessment techniques.
ness or discover a hazardous substance
release and who have been trained to (B) Know how to select and use prop-
initiate an emergency response se- er personal protective equipment pro-
quence by notifying the proper authori- vided to the first responder operational
ties of the release. They would take no level.
further action beyond notifying the au- (C) An understanding of basic haz-
thorities of the release. First respond- ardous materials terms.
ers at the awareness level shall have (D) Know how to perform basic con-
sufficient training or have had suffi- trol, containment and/or confinement
cient experience to objectively dem- operations within the capabilities of
onstrate competency in the following the resources and personal protective
areas: equipment available with their unit.
(A) An understanding of what haz- (E) Know how to implement basic de-
ardous substances are, and the risks as- contamination procedures.
sociated with them in an incident. (F) An understanding of the relevant
(B) An understanding of the potential standard operating procedures and ter-
outcomes associated with an emer- mination procedures.
gency created when hazardous sub- (iii) Hazardous materials technician.
stances are present. Hazardous materials technicians are
(C) The ability to recognize the pres- individuals who respond to releases or
ence of hazardous substances in an potential releases for the purpose of
emergency. stopping the release. They assume a
(D) The ability to identify the haz- more aggressive role than a first re-
ardous substances, if possible. sponder at the operations level in that
(E) An understanding of the role of they will approach the point of release
the first responder awareness indi- in order to plug, patch or otherwise
vidual in the employer’s emergency re- stop the release of a hazardous sub-
sponse plan including site security and stance. Hazardous materials techni-
control and the U.S. Department of cians shall have received at least 24
390
hours of training equal to the first re- (D) Be able to select and use proper
sponder operations level and in addi- specialized chemical personal protec-
tion have competency in the following tive equipment provided to the haz-
areas and the employer shall so certify: ardous materials specialist.
(A) Know how to implement the em- (E) Understand in-depth hazard and
ployer’s emergency response plan. risk techniques.
(B) Know the classification, identi- (F) Be able to perform specialized
fication and verification of known and control, containment, and/or confine-
unknown materials by using field sur- ment operations within the capabili-
vey instruments and equipment. ties of the resources and personal pro-
(C) Be able to function within an as- tective equipment available.
signed role in the Incident Command (G) Be able to determine and imple-
System. ment decontamination procedures.
(D) Know how to select and use prop- (H) Have the ability to develop a site
er specialized chemical personal pro- safety and control plan.
tective equipment provided to the haz- (I) Understand chemical, radiological
ardous materials technician. and toxicological terminology and be-
(E) Understand hazard and risk as- havior.
sessment techniques. (v) On scene incident commander. Inci-
(F) Be able to perform advance con- dent commanders, who will assume
trol, containment, and/or confinement control of the incident scene beyond
operations within the capabilities of the first responder awareness level,
the resources and personal protective shall receive at least 24 hours of train-
equipment available with the unit. ing equal to the first responder oper-
(G) Understand and implement de- ations level and in addition have com-
contamination procedures. petency in the following areas and the
(H) Understand termination proce- employer shall so certify:
dures. (A) Know and be able to implement
(I) Understand basic chemical and the employer’s incident command sys-
toxicological terminology and behav- tem.
ior. (B) Know how to implement the em-
(iv) Hazardous materials specialist. ployer’s emergency response plan.
Hazardous materials specialists are in- (C) Know and understand the hazards
dividuals who respond with and provide and risks associated with employees
support to hazardous materials techni- working in chemical protective cloth-
cians. Their duties parallel those of the ing.
hazardous materials technician, how- (D) Know how to implement the local
ever, those duties require a more di- emergency response plan.
rected or specific knowledge of the var- (E) Know of the state emergency re-
ious substances they may be called sponse plan and of the Federal Re-
upon to contain. The hazardous mate- gional Response Team.
rials specialist would also act as the (F) Know and understand the impor-
site liaison with Federal, state, local tance of decontamination procedures.
and other government authorities in (7) Trainers. Trainers who teach any
regards to site activities. Hazardous of the above training subjects shall
materials specialists shall have re- have satisfactorily completed a train-
ceived at least 24 hours of training ing course for teaching the subjects
equal to the technician level and in ad- they are expected to teach, such as the
dition have competency in the fol- courses offered by the U.S. National
lowing areas and the employer shall so Fire Academy, or they shall have the
certify: training and/or academic credentials
(A) Know how to implement the local and instructional experience necessary
emergency response plan. to demonstrate competent instruc-
(B) Understand classification, identi- tional skills and a good command of
fication and verification of known and the subject matter of the courses they
unknown materials by using advanced are to teach.
survey instruments and equipment. (8) Refresher training. (i) Those em-
(C) Know of the state emergency re- ployees who are trained in accordance
sponse plan. with paragraph (q)(6) of this section
391
shall receive annual refresher training tective equipment and decontamina-

of sufficient content and duration to tion procedures. All equipment to be
maintain their competencies, or shall used in the performance of the clean-up
demonstrate competency in those areas work shall be in serviceable condition
at least yearly. and shall have been inspected prior to
(ii) A statement shall be made of the use.
training or competency, and if a state-
APPENDICES TO § 1910.120—HAZARDOUS WASTE
ment of competency is made, the em-
OPERATIONS AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE
ployer shall keep a record of the meth-
odology used to demonstrate com- NOTE: The following appendices serve as
petency. non-mandatory guidelines to assist employ-
(9) Medical surveillance and consulta- ees and employers in complying with the ap-
propriate requirements of this section. How-
tion. (i) Members of an organized and
ever paragraph 1910.120(g) makes mandatory
designated HAZMAT team and haz- in certain circumstances the use of Level A
ardous materials specialists shall re- and Level B PPE protection.
ceive a baseline physical examination
and be provided with medical surveil- APPENDIX A TO § 1910.120—PERSONAL
lance as required in paragraph (f) of PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT TEST METHODS
this section. This appendix sets forth the non-manda-
(ii) Any emergency response employ- tory examples of tests which may be used to
ees who exhibits signs or symptoms evaluate compliance with § 1910.120 (g)(4) (ii)
which may have resulted from exposure and (iii). Other tests and other challenge
to hazardous substances during the agents may be used to evaluate compliance.
course of an emergency incident, either A. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective
immediately or subsequently, shall be suit pressure test
provided with medical consultation as
1.0—Scope
required in paragraph (f)(3)(ii) of this
1.1 This practice measures the ability of a
section. gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical
(10) Chemical protective clothing. protective suit material, seams, and closures
Chemical protective clothing and to maintain a fixed positive pressure. The re-
equipment to be used by organized and sults of this practice allow the gas tight in-
designated HAZMAT team members, or tegrity of a totally-encapsulating chemical
to be used by hazardous materials spe- protective suit to be evaluated.
cialists, shall meet the requirements of 1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to
paragraphs (g) (3) through (5) of this permeation, penetration, and degradation by
specific hazardous substances is not deter-
section.
mined by this test method.
(11) Post-emergency response oper- 2.0—Definition of terms
ations. Upon completion of the emer- 2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective
gency response, if it is determined that suit (TECP suit) means a full body garment
it is necessary to remove hazardous which is constructed of protective clothing
substances, health hazards, and mate- materials; covers the wearer’s torso, head,
rials contaminated with them (such as arms, legs and respirator; may cover the
contaminated soil or other elements of wearer’s hands and feet with tightly at-
the natural environment) from the site tached gloves and boots; completely encloses
the wearer and respirator by itself or in com-
of the incident, the employer con-
bination with the wearer’s gloves and boots.
ducting the clean-up shall comply with 2.2 Protective clothing material means any
one of the following: material or combination of materials used in
(i) Meet all of the requirements of an item of clothing for the purpose of iso-
paragraphs (b) through (o) of this sec- lating parts of the body from direct contact
tion; or with a potentially hazardous liquid or gas-
(ii) Where the clean-up is done on eous chemicals.
plant property using plant or work- 2.3 Gas tight means, for the purpose of this
place employees, such employees shall test method, the limited flow of a gas under
pressure from the inside of a TECP suit to
have completed the training require-
atmosphere at a prescribed pressure and
ments of the following: 29 CFR 1910.38, time interval.
1910.134, 1910.1200, and other appro- 3.0—Summary of test method
priate safety and health training made
3.1 The TECP suit is visually inspected and

necessary by the tasks they are ex- modified for the test. The test apparatus is
pected to perform such as personal pro- attached to the suit to permit inflation to
392
the pre-test suit expansion pressure for re- sure to pressure (B), the suit test pressure.
moval of suit wrinkles and creases. The pres- Begin timing. At the end of three minutes,
sure is lowered to the test pressure and mon- record the suit pressure as pressure (C), the
itored for three minutes. If the pressure drop ending suit pressure. The difference between
is excessive, the TECP suit fails the test and the suit test pressure and the ending suit
is removed from service. The test is repeated test pressure (B ¥ C) shall be defined as the
after leak location and repair. suit pressure drop.
4.0—Required Supplies 6.1.6 If the suit pressure drop is more than
4.1 Source of compressed air. 20 percent of the suit test pressure (B) during
4.2 Test apparatus for suit testing, includ- the three-minute test period, the suit fails
ing a pressure measurement device with a the test and shall be removed from service.
sensitivity of at least 1⁄4 inch water gauge. 7.0—Retest Procedure
4.3 Vent valve closure plugs or sealing 7.1 If the suit fails the test check for leaks
tape. by inflating the suit to pressure (A) and
4.4 Soapy water solution and soft brush. brushing or wiping the entire suit (including
4.5 Stop watch or appropriate timing de-
seams, closures, lens gaskets, glove-to-sleeve
vice.
joints, etc.) with a mild soap and water solu-
5.0—Safety Precautions
tion. Observe the suit for the formation of
5.1 Care shall be taken to provide the cor-
soap bubbles, which is an indication of a
rect pressure safety devices required for the
leak. Repair all identified leaks.
source of compressed air used.
6.0—Test Procedure 7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in
6.1 Prior to each test, the tester shall per- Test procedure 6.0.
form a visual inspection of the suit. Check 8.0—Report
the suit for seam integrity by visually exam- 8.1 Each TECP suit tested by this practice
ining the seams and gently pulling on the shall have the following information re-
seams. Ensure that all air supply lines, fit- corded:
tings, visor, zippers, and valves are secure 8.1.1 Unique identification number, identi-
and show no signs of deterioration. fying brand name, date of purchase, material
6.1.1 Seal off the vent valves along with of construction, and unique fit features, e.g.,
any other normal inlet or exhaust points special breathing apparatus.
(such as umbilical air line fittings or face 8.1.2 The actual values for test pressures
piece opening) with tape or other appropriate (A), (B), and (C) shall be recorded along with
means (caps, plugs, fixture, etc.). Care should the specific observation times. If the ending
be exercised in the sealing process not to pressure (C) is less than 80 percent of the test
damage any of the suit components. pressure (B), the suit shall be identified as
6.1.2 Close all closure assemblies. failing the test. When possible, the specific
6.1.3 Prepare the suit for inflation by pro- leak location shall be identified in the test
viding an improvised connection point on the records. Retest pressure data shall be re-
suit for connecting an airline. Attach the corded as an additional test.
pressure test apparatus to the suit to permit 8.1.3 The source of the test apparatus used
suit inflation from a compressed air source shall be identified and the sensitivity of the
equipped with a pressure indicating regu- pressure gauge shall be recorded.
lator. The leak tightness of the pressure test 8.1.4 Records shall be kept for each pres-
apparatus should be tested before and after sure test even if repairs are being made at
each test by closing off the end of the tubing the test location.
attached to the suit and assuring a pressure
of three inches water gauge for three min- CAUTION
utes can be maintained. If a component is re-
Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be
moved for the test, that component shall be
sure they are positioned correctly and se-
replaced and a second test conducted with
cured tightly before putting the suit back
another component removed to permit a
into service. Special care should be taken to
complete test of the ensemble.
examine each exhaust valve to make sure it
6.1.4 The pre-test expansion pressure (A)
is not blocked.
and the suit test pressure (B) shall be sup-
plied by the suit manufacturer, but in no Care should also be exercised to assure
case shall they be less than: (A) = three that the inside and outside of the suit is
inches water gauge; and (B) = two inches completely dry before it is put into storage.
water gauge. The ending suit pressure (C) B. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective
shall be no less than 80 percent of the test suit qualitative leak test
pressure (B); i.e., the pressure drop shall not
exceed 20 percent of the test pressure (B). 1.0—Scope
6.1.5 Inflate the suit until the pressure in- 1.1 This practice semi-qualitatively tests
side is equal to pressure (A), the pre-test ex- gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical
pansion suit pressure. Allow at least one protective suit integrity by detecting inward
minute to fill out the wrinkles in the suit. leakage of ammonia vapor. Since no modi-
Release sufficient air to reduce the suit pres- fications are made to the suit to carry out
393
this test, the results from this practice pro- the test room and his stand-by person meas-
vide a realistic test for the integrity of the ures the ammonia concentration inside the
entire suit. suit using a low range ammonia length of
1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to per- stain detector tube or other more sensitive
meation, penetration, and degradation is not ammonia detector. A stand-by person is re-
determined by this test method. ASTM test quired to observe the test individual during
methods are available to test suit materials the test procedure; aid the person in donning
for these characteristics and the tests are and doffing the TECP suit; and monitor the
usually conducted by the manufacturers of suit interior. The intrusion coefficient of the
the suits. suit can be calculated by dividing the aver-
2.0—Definition of terms age test area concentration by the interior
2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective suit concentration. A colorimetric ammonia
suit (TECP suit) means a full body garment indicator strip of bromophenol blue or equiv-
which is constructed of protective clothing alent is placed on the inside of the suit face
materials; covers the wearer’s torso, head, piece lens so that the suited individual is
arms, legs and respirator; may cover the able to detect a color change and know if the
wearer’s hands and feet with tightly at- suit has a significant leak. If a color change
tached gloves and boots; completely encloses is observed the individual shall leave the test
the wearer and respirator by itself or in com- room immediately.
bination with the wearer’s gloves, and boots. 4.0—Required supplies
2.2 Protective clothing material means any 4.1 A supply of concentrated aqueous am-
material or combination of materials used in monium hydroxide (58% by weight).
an item of clothing for the purpose of iso- 4.2 A supply of bromophenol/blue indi-
lating parts of the body from direct contact cating paper or equivalent, sensitive to 5–10
with a potentially hazardous liquid or gas- ppm ammonia or greater over a two-minute
eous chemicals. period of exposure. [pH 3.0 (yellow) to pH 4.6
2.3 Gas tight means, for the purpose of this (blue)]
test method, the limited flow of a gas under 4.3 A supply of high range (0.5–10 volume
pressure from the inside of a TECP suit to percent) and low range (5–700 ppm) detector
atmosphere at a prescribed pressure and tubes for ammonia and the corresponding
time interval. sampling pump. More sensitive ammonia de-
2.4 Intrusion Coefficient means a number ex- tectors can be substituted for the low range
pressing the level of protection provided by a detector tubes to improve the sensitivity of
gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical this practice.
protective suit. The intrusion coefficient is 4.4 A shallow plastic pan (PVC) at least
calculated by dividing the test room chal- 12″:14″:1″ and a half pint plastic container
lenge agent concentration by the concentra- (PVC) with tightly closing lid.
tion of challenge agent found inside the suit. 4.5 A graduated cylinder or other volu-
The accuracy of the intrusion coefficient is metric measuring device of at least 50 milli-
dependent on the challenge agent monitoring liters in volume with an accuracy of at least
methods. The larger the intrusion coefficient ±1 milliliters.
the greater the protection provided by the 5.0—Safety precautions
TECP suit. 5.1 Concentrated aqueous ammonium hy-
3.0—Summary of recommended practice droxide, NH4 OH, is a corrosive volatile liq-
3.1 The volume of concentrated aqueous uid requiring eye, skin, and respiratory pro-
ammonia solution (ammonia hydroxide NH4 tection. The person conducting the test shall
OH) required to generate the test atmos- review the SDS for aqueous ammonia.
phere is determined using the directions out- 5.2 Since the established permissible ex-
lined in 6.1. The suit is donned by a person posure limit for ammonia is 35 ppm as a 15
wearing the appropriate respiratory equip- minute STEL, only persons wearing a posi-
ment (either a positive pressure self-con- tive pressure self-contained breathing appa-
tained breathing apparatus or a positive ratus or a positive pressure supplied air res-
pressure supplied air respirator) and worn in- pirator shall be in the chamber. Normally
side the enclosed test room. The con- only the person wearing the totally-encap-
centrated aqueous ammonia solution is sulating suit will be inside the chamber. A
taken by the suited individual into the test stand-by person shall have a positive pres-
room and poured into an open plastic pan. A sure self-contained breathing apparatus, or a
two-minute evaporation period is observed positive pressure supplied air respirator
before the test room concentration is meas- available to enter the test area should the
ured, using a high range ammonia length of suited individual need assistance.
stain detector tube. When the ammonia 5.3 A method to monitor the suited indi-
vapor reaches a concentration of between vidual must be used during this test. Visual
1000 and 1200 ppm, the suited individual contact is the simplest but other methods
starts a standardized exercise protocol to using communication devices are acceptable.
stress and flex the suit. After this protocol is 5.4 The test room shall be large enough to
completed, the test room concentration is allow the exercise protocol to be carried out
measured again. The suited individual exits and then to be ventilated to allow for easy
394
exhaust of the ammonia test atmosphere shall be generated before the exercises are
after the test(s) are completed. started.
5.5 Individuals shall be medically 6.7 To test the integrity of the suit the
screened for the use of respiratory protection following four minute exercise protocol
and checked for allergies to ammonia before should be followed:
participating in this test procedure. 6.7.1 Raising the arms above the head
6.0—Test procedure with at least 15 raising motions completed in
6.1.1 Measure the test area to the nearest one minute.
foot and calculate its volume in cubic feet. 6.7.2 Walking in place for one minute with
Multiply the test area volume by 0.2 milli- at least 15 raising motions of each leg in a
liters of concentrated aqueous ammonia so- one-minute period.
lution per cubic foot of test area volume to 6.7.3 Touching the toes with a least 10
determine the approximate volume of con- complete motions of the arms from above
centrated aqueous ammonia required to gen- the head to touching of the toes in a one-
erate 1000 ppm in the test area. minute period.
6.1.2 Measure this volume from the supply 6.7.4 Knee bends with at least 10 complete
of concentrated aqueous ammonia and place standing and squatting motions in a one-
it into a closed plastic container. minute period.
6.1.3 Place the container, several high 6.8 If at any time during the test the col-
range ammonia detector tubes, and the pump orimetric indicating paper should change
in the clean test pan and locate it near the colors, the test should be stopped and section
test area entry door so that the suited indi- 6.10 and 6.12 initiated (See ¶ 4.2).
vidual has easy access to these supplies. 6.9 After completion of the test exercise,
6.2.1 In a non-contaminated atmosphere, the test area concentration should be meas-
open a pre-sealed ammonia indicator strip ured again using the high range colorimetric
and fasten one end of the strip to the inside detector tube.
of the suit face shield lens where it can be 6.10 Exit the test area.
seen by the wearer. Moisten the indicator 6.11 The opening created by the suit zip-
strip with distilled water. Care shall be per or other appropriate suit penetration
taken not to contaminate the detector part should be used to determine the ammonia
of the indicator paper by touching it. A concentration in the suit with the low range
small piece of masking tape or equivalent length of stain detector tube or other ammo-
should be used to attach the indicator strip nia monitor. The internal TECP suit air
to the interior of the suit face shield. should be sampled far enough from the en-
6.2.2 If problems are encountered with closed test area to prevent a false ammonia
this method of attachment, the indicator reading.
strip can be attached to the outside of the 6.12 After completion of the measurement
respirator face piece lens being used during of the suit interior ammonia concentration
the test. the test is concluded and the suit is doffed
6.3 Don the respiratory protective device and the respirator removed.
normally used with the suit, and then don 6.13 The ventilating fan for the test room
the TECP suit to be tested. Check to be sure should be turned on and allowed to run for
all openings which are intended to be sealed enough time to remove the ammonia gas.
(zippers, gloves, etc.) are completely sealed. The fan shall be vented to the outside of the
DO NOT, however, plug off any venting building.
valves. 6.14 Any detectable ammonia in the suit
6.4 Step into the enclosed test room such interior (five ppm ammonia (NH3) or more
as a closet, bathroom, or test booth, for the length of stain detector tube) indi-
equipped with an exhaust fan. No air should cates that the suit has failed the test. When
be exhausted from the chamber during the other ammonia detectors are used a lower
test because this will dilute the ammonia level of detection is possible, and it should be
challenge concentrations. specified as the pass/fail criteria.
6.5 Open the container with the pre-meas- 6.15 By following this test method, an in-
ured volume of concentrated aqueous ammo- trusion coefficient of approximately 200 or
nia within the enclosed test room, and pour more can be measured with the suit in a
the liquid into the empty plastic test pan. completely operational condition. If the in-
Wait two minutes to allow for adequate vola- trusion coefficient is 200 or more, then the
tilization of the concentrated aqueous am- suit is suitable for emergency response and
monia. A small mixing fan can be used near field use.
the evaporation pan to increase the evapo- 7.0—Retest procedures
ration rate of the ammonia solution. 7.1 If the suit fails this test, check for
6.6 After two minutes a determination of leaks by following the pressure test in test A
the ammonia concentration within the above.
chamber should be made using the high 7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in
range colorimetric detector tube. A con- the test procedure 6.0.
centration of 1000 ppm ammonia or greater 8.0—Report
395
8.1 Each gas tight totally-encapsulating PPE materials (and seams) in providing a bar-
chemical protective suit tested by this prac- rier to these hazards. The amount of protec-
tice shall have the following information re- tion provided by PPE is material-hazard spe-
corded. cific. That is, protective equipment mate-
8.1.1 Unique identification number, iden- rials will protect well against some haz-
tifying brand name, date of purchase, mate- ardous substances and poorly, or not at all,
rial of construction, and unique suit fea- against others. In many instances, protec-
tures; e.g., special breathing apparatus. tive equipment materials cannot be found
8.1.2 General description of test room which will provide continuous protection
used for test. from the particular hazardous substance. In
8.1.3 Brand name and purchase date of these cases the breakthrough time of the
ammonia detector strips and color change protective material should exceed the work
data. durations.
8.1.4 Brand name, sampling range, and ex- Other factors in this selection process to
piration date of the length of stain ammonia be considered are matching the PPE to the
detector tubes. The brand name and model of employee’s work requirements and task-spe-
the sampling pump should also be recorded. cific conditions. The durability of PPE mate-
If another type of ammonia detector is used, rials, such as tear strength and seam
it should be identified along with its min- strength, should be considered in relation to
imum detection limit for ammonia. the employee’s tasks. The effects of PPE in
8.1.5 Actual test results shall list the two relation to heat stress and task duration are
test area concentrations, their average, the a factor in selecting and using PPE. In some
interior suit concentration, and the cal- cases layers of PPE may be necessary to pro-
culated intrusion coefficient. Retest data vide sufficient protection, or to protect ex-
shall be recorded as an additional test. pensive PPE inner garments, suits or equip-
8.2 The evaluation of the data shall be ment.
specified as ‘‘suit passed’’ or ‘‘suit failed,’’ The more that is known about the hazards
and the date of the test. Any detectable am- at the site, the easier the job of PPE selec-
monia (five ppm or greater for the length of tion becomes. As more information about
stain detector tube) in the suit interior indi- the hazards and conditions at the site be-
cates the suit has failed this test. When comes available, the site supervisor can
other ammonia detectors are used, a lower make decisions to up-grade or down-grade
level of detection is possible and it should be the level of PPE protection to match the
specified as the pass fail criteria. tasks at hand.
The following are guidelines which an em-
CAUTION ployer can use to begin the selection of the
appropriate PPE. As noted above, the site in-
Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be formation may suggest the use of combina-
sure they are positioned correctly and se- tions of PPE selected from the different pro-
cured tightly before putting the suit back tection levels (i.e., A, B, C, or D) as being
into service. Special care should be taken to more suitable to the hazards of the work. It
examine each exhaust valve to make sure it should be cautioned that the listing below
is not blocked. does not fully address the performance of the
Care should also be exercised to assure specific PPE material in relation to the spe-
that the inside and outside of the suit is cific hazards at the job site, and that PPE
completely dry before it is put into storage. selection, evaluation and re-selection is an
APPENDIX B TO § 1910.120—GENERAL DESCRIP- ongoing process until sufficient information
TION AND DISCUSSION OF THE LEVELS OF
about the hazards and PPE performance is
PROTECTION AND PROTECTIVE GEAR obtained.
Part A. Personal protective equipment is
This appendix sets forth information about divided into four categories based on the de-
personal protective equipment (PPE) protec- gree of protection afforded. (See part B of
tion levels which may be used to assist em- this appendix for further explanation of Lev-
ployers in complying with the PPE require- els A, B, C, and D hazards.)
ments of this section. I. Level A—To be selected when the great-
As required by the standard, PPE must be est level of skin, respiratory, and eye protec-
selected which will protect employees from tion is required.
the specific hazards which they are likely to The following constitute Level A equip-
encounter during their work on-site. ment; it may be used as appropriate;
Selection of the appropriate PPE is a com- 1. Positive pressure, full face-piece self-
plex process which should take into consider- contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or
ation a variety of factors. Key factors in- positive pressure supplied air respirator with
volved in this process are identification of escape SCBA, approved by the National In-
the hazards, or suspected hazards; their stitute for Occupational Safety and Health
routes of potential hazard to employees (in- (NIOSH).

halation, skin absorption, ingestion, and eye 2. Totally-encapsulating chemical-protec-
or skin contact); and the performance of the tive suit.
396
3. Coveralls. 1 5. Safety glasses or chemical splash
4. Long underwear. 1 goggles*.
5. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. 6. Hard hat. 1
6. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. 7. Escape mask. 1
7. Boots, chemical-resistant, steel toe and 8. Face shield. 1
shank. Part B. The types of hazards for which lev-
8. Hard hat (under suit). 1 els A, B, C, and D protection are appropriate
9. Disposable protective suit, gloves and are described below:
boots (depending on suit construction, may I. Level A—Level A protection should be
be worn over totally-encapsulating suit). used when:
II. Level B—The highest level of res- 1. The hazardous substance has been iden-
piratory protection is necessary but a lesser tified and requires the highest level of pro-
level of skin protection is needed. tection for skin, eyes, and the respiratory
The following constitute Level B equip- system based on either the measured (or po-
ment; it may be used as appropriate. tential for) high concentration of atmos-
1. Positive pressure, full-facepiece self-con- pheric vapors, gases, or particulates; or the
tained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or posi- site operations and work functions involve a
tive pressure supplied air respirator with es- high potential for splash, immersion, or ex-
cape SCBA (NIOSH approved). posure to unexpected vapors, gases, or par-
2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing ticulates of materials that are harmful to
(overalls and long-sleeved jacket; coveralls; skin or capable of being absorbed through
one or two-piece chemical-splash suit; dis- the skin;
posable chemical-resistant overalls). 2. Substances with a high degree of hazard
3. Coveralls. 1 to the skin are known or suspected to be
4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. present, and skin contact is possible; or
5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. 3. Operations are being conducted in con-
6. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant steel fined, poorly ventilated areas, and the ab-
toe and shank. sence of conditions requiring Level A have
7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant not yet been determined.
(disposable). 1 II. Level B—Level B protection should be
8. Hard hat. 1 used when:
9. [Reserved] 1. The type and atmospheric concentration
10. Face shield. 1 of substances have been identified and re-
III. Level C—The concentration(s) and quire a high level of respiratory protection,
type(s) of airborne substance(s) is known and but less skin protection;
the criteria for using air purifying res- 2. The atmosphere contains less than 19.5
pirators are met. percent oxygen; or
The following constitute Level C equip- 3. The presence of incompletely identified
ment; it may be used as appropriate. vapors or gases is indicated by a direct-read-
1. Full-face or half-mask, air purifying res- ing organic vapor detection instrument, but
pirators (NIOSH approved). vapors and gases are not suspected of con-
2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing taining high levels of chemicals harmful to
(overalls; two-piece chemical-splash suit; skin or capable of being absorbed through
disposable chemical-resistant overalls). the skin.
3. Coveralls. 1
4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. NOTE: This involves atmospheres with
5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. IDLH concentrations of specific substances
6. Boots (outer), chemical-resistant steel that present severe inhalation hazards and
toe and shank. 1 that do not represent a severe skin hazard;
7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant or that do not meet the criteria for use of
(disposable) 1. air-purifying respirators.
8. Hard hat. 1 III. Level C—Level C protection should be
9. Escape mask. 1 used when:
10. Face shield. 1 1. The atmospheric contaminants, liquid
IV. Level D—A work uniform affording splashes, or other direct contact will not ad-
minimal protection, used for nuisance con- versely affect or be absorbed through any ex-
tamination only. posed skin;
The following constitute Level D equip- 2. The types of air contaminants have been
ment; it may be used as appropriate: identified, concentrations measured, and an
1. Coveralls.
air-purifying respirator is available that can
2. Gloves. 1
remove the contaminants; and
3. Boots/shoes, chemical-resistant steel toe
3. All criteria for the use of air-purifying
and shank.
respirators are met.
4. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant (dispos-
IV. Level D—Level D protection should be
able). 1
used when:
1. The atmosphere contains no known haz-
1 Optional, as applicable. ard; and
397
2. Work functions preclude splashes, im- services as to what each employer’s safety
mersion, or the potential for unexpected in- and health responsibilities are for their em-
halation of or contact with hazardous levels ployees on the site. Each contractor on the
of any chemicals. site needs to have its own safety and health
NOTE: As stated before, combinations of program so structured that it will smoothly
personal protective equipment other than interface with the program of the site coor-
those described for Levels A, B, C, and D pro- dinator or principal contractor.
tection may be more appropriate and may be Also those employers involved with treat-
used to provide the proper level of protec- ing, storing or disposal of hazardous waste as
tion. covered in paragraph (p) must have imple-
mented a safety and health program for their
As an aid in selecting suitable chemical employees. This program is to include the
protective clothing, it should be noted that hazard communication program required in
the National Fire Protection Association paragraph (p)(1) and the training required in
(NFPA) has developed standards on chemical paragraphs (p)(7) and (p)(8) as parts of the
protective clothing. The standards that have employers comprehensive overall safety and
been adopted by include: health program. This program is to be in
NFPA 1991—Standard on Vapor-Protective writing.
Suits for Hazardous Chemical Emergencies
Each site or workplace safety and health
(EPA Level A Protective Clothing).
program will need to include the following:
NFPA 1992—Standard on Liquid Splash-
(1) Policy statements of the line of authority
Protective Suits for Hazardous Chemical
and accountability for implementing the
Emergencies (EPA Level B Protective Cloth-
program, the objectives of the program and
ing).
the role of the site safety and health super-
NFPA 1993—Standard on Liquid Splash-
Protective Suits for Non-emergency, Non- visor or manager and staff; (2) means or
flammable Hazardous Chemical Situations methods for the development of procedures
(EPA Level B Protective Clothing). for identifying and controlling workplace
These standards apply documentation and hazards at the site; (3) means or methods for
performance requirements to the manufac- the development and communication to em-
ture of chemical protective suits. Chemical ployees of the various plans, work rules,
protective suits meeting these requirements standard operating procedures and practices
are labelled as compliant with the appro- that pertain to individual employees and su-
priate standard. It is recommended that pervisors; (4) means for the training of super-
chemical protective suits that meet these visors and employees to develop the needed
standards be used. skills and knowledge to perform their work
in a safe and healthful manner; (5) means to
APPENDIX C TO § 1910.120—COMPLIANCE anticipate and prepare for emergency situa-
GUIDELINES tions; and (6) means for obtaining informa-
tion feedback to aid in evaluating the pro-
1. Occupational Safety and Health Program.
gram and for improving the effectiveness of
Each hazardous waste site clean-up effort
the program. The management and employ-
will require an occupational safety and
ees should be trying continually to improve
health program headed by the site coordi-
nator or the employer’s representative. The the effectiveness of the program thereby en-
purpose of the program will be the protec- hancing the protection being afforded those
tion of employees at the site and will be an working on the site.
extension of the employer’s overall safety Accidents on the site or workplace should
and health program. The program will need be investigated to provide information on
to be developed before work begins on the how such occurrences can be avoided in the
site and implemented as work proceeds as future. When injuries or illnesses occur on
stated in paragraph (b). The program is to fa- the site or workplace, they will need to be
cilitate coordination and communication of investigated to determine what needs to be
safety and health issues among personnel re- done to prevent this incident from occurring
sponsible for the various activities which again. Such information will need to be used
will take place at the site. It will provide the as feedback on the effectiveness of the pro-
overall means for planning and imple- gram and the information turned into posi-
menting the needed safety and health train- tive steps to prevent any reoccurrence. Re-
ing and job orientation of employees who ceipt of employee suggestions or complaints
will be working at the site. The program will relating to safety and health issues involved
provide the means for identifying and con- with site or workplace activities is also a
trolling worksite hazards and the means for feedback mechanism that can be used effec-
monitoring program effectiveness. The pro- tively to improve the program and may serve
gram will need to cover the responsibilities in part as an evaluative tool(s).
and authority of the site coordinator or the For the development and implementation
employer’s manager on the site for the safe- of the program to be the most effective, pro-
ty and health of employees at the site, and fessional safety and health personnel should
the relationships with contractors or support be used. Certified Safety Professionals,
398
Board Certified Industrial Hygienists or Reg- ating procedures for the hazardous materials
istered Professional Safety Engineers are team including the use of plugging and
good examples of professional stature for patching equipment and other subject areas.
safety and health managers who will admin- Officers and leaders who may be expected
ister the employer’s program. to be in charge at an incident should be fully
2. Training. The training programs for em- knowledgeable of their company’s incident
ployees subject to the requirements of para- command system. They should know where
graph (e) of this standard should address: the and how to obtain additional assistance and
safety and health hazards employees should be familiar with the local district’s emer-
expect to find on hazardous waste clean-up gency response plan and the state emergency
sites; what control measures or techniques response plan.
are effective for those hazards; what moni- Specialist employees such as technical ex-
toring procedures are effective in character- perts, medical experts or environmental ex-
izing exposure levels; what makes an effec- perts that work with hazardous materials in
tive employer’s safety and health program; their regular jobs, who may be sent to the
what a site safety and health plan should in- incident scene by the shipper, manufacturer
clude; hands on training with personal pro- or governmental agency to advise and assist
tective equipment and clothing they may be the person in charge of the incident should
expected to use; the contents of the OSHA have training on an annual basis. Their
standard relevant to the employee’s duties training should include the care and use of
and function; and, employee’s responsibil- personal protective equipment including res-
ities under OSHA and other regulations. Su- pirators; knowledge of the incident com-
pervisors will need training in their respon- mand system and how they are to relate to
sibilities under the safety and health pro- it; and those areas needed to keep them cur-
gram and its subject areas such as the spill rent in their respective field as it relates to
containment program, the personal protec- safety and health involving specific haz-
tive equipment program, the medical sur- ardous substances.
veillance program, the emergency response Those skilled support personnel, such as
plan and other areas. employees who work for public works depart-
The training programs for employees sub- ments or equipment operators who operate
ject to the requirements of paragraph (p) of bulldozers, sand trucks, backhoes, etc., who
this standard should address: the employers may be called to the incident scene to pro-
safety and health program elements impact- vide emergency support assistance, should
ing employees; the hazard communication have at least a safety and health briefing be-
program; the medical surveillance program; fore entering the area of potential or actual
the hazards and the controls for such hazards exposure. These skilled support personnel,
that employees need to know for their job who have not been a part of the emergency
duties and functions. All require annual re- response plan and do not meet the training
fresher training. requirements, should be made aware of the
The training programs for employees cov- hazards they face and should be provided all
ered by the requirements of paragraph (q) of necessary protective clothing and equipment
this standard should address those com- required for their tasks.
petencies required for the various levels of There are two National Fire Protection As-
response such as: the hazards associated with sociation standards, NFPA 472—‘‘Standard
hazardous substances; hazard identification for Professional Competence of Responders
and awareness; notification of appropriate to Hazardous Material Incidents’’ and NFPA
persons; the need for and use of personal pro- 471—‘‘Recommended Practice for Responding
tective equipment including respirators; the to Hazardous Material Incidents’’, which are
decontamination procedures to be used; excellent resource documents to aid fire de-
preplanning activities for hazardous sub- partments and other emergency response or-
stance incidents including the emergency ganizations in developing their training pro-
reponse plan; company standard operating gram materials. NFPA 472 provides guidance
procedures for hazardous substance emer- on the skills and knowledge needed for first
gency responses; the use of the incident com- responder awareness level, first responder
mand system and other subjects. Hands-on operations level, hazmat technicians, and
training should be stressed whenever pos- hazmat specialist. It also offers guidance for
sible. Critiques done after an incident which the officer corp who will be in charge of haz-
include an evaluation of what worked and ardous substance incidents.
what did not and how could the incident be 3. Decontamination. Decontamination pro-
better handled the next time may be counted cedures should be tailored to the specific
as training time. hazards of the site, and may vary in com-
For hazardous materials specialists (usu- plexity and number of steps, depending on
ally members of hazardous materials teams), the level of hazard and the employee’s expo-
the training should address the care, use and/ sure to the hazard. Decontamination proce-
or testing of chemical protective clothing in- dures and PPE decontamination methods
cluding totally encapsulating suits, the med- will vary depending upon the specific sub-
ical surveillance program, the standard oper- stance, since one procedure or method may
399
not work for all substances. Evaluation of goals, a comprehensive PPE program should
decontamination methods and procedures include hazard identification, medical moni-
should be performed, as necessary, to assure toring, environmental surveillance, selec-
that employees are not exposed to hazards tion, use, maintenance, and decontamination
by re-using PPE. References in appendix D of PPE and its associated training.
may be used for guidance in establishing an The written PPE program should include
effective decontamination program. In addi- policy statements, procedures, and guide-
tion, the U.S. Coast Guard’s Manual, ‘‘Policy lines. Copies should be made available to all
Guidance for Response to Hazardous Chem- employees, and a reference copy should be
ical Releases,’’ U.S. Department of Transpor- made available at the worksite. Technical
tation, Washington, DC (COMDTINST data on equipment, maintenance manuals,
M16465.30) is a good reference for establishing relevant regulations, and other essential in-
an effective decontamination program. formation should also be collected and main-
4. Emergency response plans. States, along tained.
with designated districts within the states, 6. Incident command system (ICS). Paragraph
will be developing or have developed local 1910.120(q)(3)(ii) requires the implementation
emergency response plans. These state and of an ICS. The ICS is an organized approach
district plans should be utilized in the emer- to effectively control and manage operations
gency response plans called for in the stand- at an emergency incident. The individual in
ard. Each employer should assure that its charge of the ICS is the senior official re-
emergency response plan is compatible with sponding to the incident. The ICS is not
the local plan. The major reference being much different than the ‘‘command post’’ ap-
used to aid in developing the state and local proach used for many years by the fire serv-
district plans is the Hazardous Materials ice. During large complex fires involving sev-
Emergency Planning Guide, NRT–1. The cur-
eral companies and many pieces of appa-
rent Emergency Response Guidebook from
ratus, a command post would be established.
the U.S. Department of Transportation,
This enabled one individual to be in charge of
CMA’s CHEMTREC and the Fire Service
managing the incident, rather than having
Emergency Management Handbook may also
several officers from different companies
be used as resources.
making separate, and sometimes conflicting,
Employers involved with treatment, stor-
decisions. The individual in charge of the
age, and disposal facilities for hazardous
command post would delegate responsibility
waste, which have the required contingency
plan called for by their permit, would not for performing various tasks to subordinate
need to duplicate the same planning ele- officers. Additionally, all communications
ments. Those items of the emergency re- were routed through the command post to
sponse plan that are properly addressed in reduce the number of radio transmissions
the contingency plan may be substituted and eliminate confusion. However, strategy,
into the emergency response plan required in tactics, and all decisions were made by one
1910.120 or otherwise kept together for em- individual.
ployer and employee use. The ICS is a very similar system, except it
5. Personal protective equipment programs. is implemented for emergency response to
The purpose of personal protective clothing all incidents, both large and small, that in-
and equipment (PPE) is to shield or isolate volve hazardous substances.
individuals from the chemical, physical, and For a small incident, the individual in
biologic hazards that may be encountered at charge of the ICS may perform many tasks
a hazardous substance site. of the ICS. There may not be any, or little,
As discussed in appendix B, no single com- delegation of tasks to subordinates. For ex-
bination of protective equipment and cloth- ample, in response to a small incident, the
ing is capable of protecting against all haz- individual in charge of the ICS, in addition
ards. Thus PPE should be used in conjunc- to normal command activities, may become
tion with other protective methods and its the safety officer and may designate only
effectiveness evaluated periodically. one employee (with proper equipment) as a
The use of PPE can itself create significant back-up to provide assistance if needed.
worker hazards, such as heat stress, physical OSHA does recommend, however, that at
and psychological stress, and impaired vi- least two employees be designated as back-
sion, mobility, and communication. For any up personnel since the assistance needed
given situation, equipment and clothing may include rescue.
should be selected that provide an adequate To illustrate the operation of the ICS, the
level of protection. However, over-protec- following scenario might develop during a
tion, as well as under-protection, can be haz- small incident, such as an overturned tank
ardous and should be avoided where possible. truck with a small leak of flammable liquid.
Two basic objectives of any PPE program The first responding senior officer would
should be to protect the wearer from safety implement and take command of the ICS.
and health hazards, and to prevent injury to That person would size-up the incident and
the wearer from incorrect use and/or mal- determine if additional personnel and appa-
function of the PPE. To accomplish these ratus were necessary; would determine what
400
actions to take to control the leak; and, de- triage area; hazard monitoring plan (air con-
termine the proper level of personal protec- taminate monitoring, etc.); decontamination
tive equipment. If additional assistance is procedures and area; and other relevant
not needed, the individual in charge of the areas. This plan should be a part of the em-
ICS would implement actions to stop and ployer’s emergency response plan or an ex-
control the leak using the fewest number of tension of it to the specific site.
personnel that can effectively accomplish 8. Medical surveillance programs. Workers
the tasks. The individual in charge of the handling hazardous substances may be ex-
ICS then would designate himself as the safe- posed to toxic chemicals, safety hazards, bio-
ty officer and two other employees as a logic hazards, and radiation. Therefore, a
back-up in case rescue may become nec- medical surveillance program is essential to
essary. In this scenario, decontamination assess and monitor workers’ health and fit-
procedures would not be necessary. ness for employment in hazardous waste op-
A large complex incident may require erations and during the course of work; to
many employees and difficult, time-con- provide emergency and other treatment as
suming efforts to control. In these situa- needed; and to keep accurate records for fu-
tions, the individual in charge of the ICS will ture reference.
want to delegate different tasks to subordi- The Occupational Safety and Health Guid-
nates in order to maintain a span of control ance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activi-
that will keep the number of subordinates, ties developed by the National Institute for
that are reporting, to a manageable level. Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH),
Delegation of task at large incidents may the Occupational Safety and Health Admin-
be by location, where the incident scene is istration (OSHA), the U.S. Coast Guard
divided into sectors, and subordinate officers (USCG), and the Environmental Protection
coordinate activities within the sector that Agency (EPA); October 1985 provides an ex-
they have been assigned. cellent example of the types of medical test-
Delegation of tasks can also be by func- ing that should be done as part of a medical
tion. Some of the functions that the indi- surveillance program.
vidual in charge of the ICS may want to del- 9. New Technology and Spill Containment
egate at a large incident are: medical serv- Programs. Where hazardous substances may
ices; evacuation; water supply; resources be released by spilling from a container that
(equipment, apparatus); media relations; will expose employees to the hazards of the
safety; and, site control (integrate activities materials, the employer will need to imple-
with police for crowd and traffic control). ment a program to contain and control the
Also for a large incident, the individual in spilled material. Diking and ditching, as well
charge of the ICS will designate several em- as use of absorbents like diatomaceous
ployees as back-up personnel; and a number earth, are traditional techniques which have
of safety officers to monitor conditions and proven to be effective over the years. How-
recommend safety precautions. ever, in recent years new products have come
Therefore, no matter what size or com- into the marketplace, the use of which com-
plexity an incident may be, by implementing plement and increase the effectiveness of
an ICS there will be one individual in charge these traditional methods. These new prod-
who makes the decisions and gives direc- ucts also provide emergency responders and
tions; and, all actions, and communications others with additional tools or agents to use
are coordinated through one central point of to reduce the hazards of spilled materials.
command. Such a system should reduce con- These agents can be rapidly applied over a
fusion, improve safety, organize and coordi- large area and can be uniformly applied or
nate actions, and should facilitate effective otherwise can be used to build a small dam,
management of the incident. thus improving the workers’ ability to con-
7. Site Safety and Control Plans. The safety trol spilled material. These application tech-
and security of response personnel and oth- niques enhance the intimate contact be-
ers in the area of an emergeny response inci- tween the agent and the spilled material al-
dent site should be of primary concern to the lowing for the quickest effect by the agent or
incident commander. The use of a site safety quickest control of the spilled material.
and control plan could greatly assist those in Agents are available to solidify liquid spilled
charge of assuring the safety and health of materials, to suppress vapor generation from
employees on the site. spilled materials, and to do both. Some spe-
A comprehensive site safety and control cial agents, which when applied as rec-
plan should include the following: summary ommended by the manufacturer, will react
analysis of hazards on the site and a risk in a controlled manner with the spilled ma-
analysis of those hazards; site map or terial to neutralize acids or caustics, or
sketch; site work zones (clean zone, transi- greatly reduce the level of hazard of the
tion or decontamination zone, work or hot spilled material.
zone); use of the buddy system; site commu- There are several modern methods and de-
nications; command post or command cen- vices for use by emergency response per-
ter; standard operating procedures and safe sonnel or others involved with spill control
work practices; medical assistance and efforts to safely apply spill control agents to
401
control spilled material hazards. These in- and care of spill control equipment; and in
clude portable pressurized applicators simi- the associated hazards and control of such
lar to hand-held portable fire extinguishing hazards of spill containment work.
devices, and nozzle and hose systems similar These new tools and agents are the things
to portable fire fighting foam systems which that employers will want to evaluate as part
allow the operator to apply the agent with- of their new technology program. The treat-
out having to come into contact with the ment of spills of hazardous substances or
spilled material. The operator is able to wastes at an emergency incident as part of
apply the agent to the spilled material from the immediate spill containment and control
a remote position. efforts is sometimes acceptable to EPA and a
The solidification of liquids provides for permit exception is described in 40 CFR
rapid containment and isolation of haz- 264.1(g)(8) and 265.1(c)(11).
ardous substance spills. By directing the
agent at run-off points or at the edges of the APPENDIX D TO § 1910.120—REFERENCES
spill, the reactant solid will automatically The following references may be consulted
create a barrier to slow or stop the spread of for further information on the subject of this
the material. Clean-up of hazardous sub- standard:
stances is greatly improved when solidifying 1. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2.70—Janu-
agents, acid or caustic neutralizers, or acti- ary 29, 1986, Special Emphasis Program: Haz-
vated carbon adsorbents are used. Properly ardous Waste Sites.
applied, these agents can totally solidify liq- 2. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2–2.37A—
uid hazardous substances or neutralize or ab- January 29, 1986, Technical Assistance and
sorb them, which results in materials which Guidelines for Superfund and Other Hazardous
are less hazardous and easier to handle, Waste Site Activities.
transport, and dispose of. The concept of 3. OSHA Instruction DTS CPL 2.74—Janu-
spill treatment, to create less hazardous sub- ary 29, 1986, Hazardous Waste Activity Form,
stances, will improve the safety and level of OSHA 175.
protection of employees working at spill 4. Hazardous Waste Inspections Reference
clean-up operations or emergency response Manual, U.S. Department of Labor, Occupa-
operations to spills of hazardous substances. tional Safety and Health Administration,
The use of vapor suppression agents for 1986.
volatile hazardous substances, such as flam- 5. Memorandum of Understanding Among
mable liquids and those substances which the National Institute for Occupational Safe-
present an inhalation hazard, is important ty and Health, the Occupational Safety and
for protecting workers. The rapid and uni- Health Administration, the United States
form distribution of the agent over the sur- Coast Guard, and the United States Environ-
face of the spilled material can provide quick mental Protection Agency, Guidance for
vapor knockdown. There are temporary and Worker Protection During Hazardous Waste Site
long-term foam-type agents which are effec- Investigations and Clean-up and Hazardous
tive on vapors and dusts, and activated car- Substance Emergencies. December 18, 1980.
bon adsorption agents which are effective for 6. National Priorities List, 1st Edition, Octo-
vapor control and soaking-up of the liquid. ber 1984; U.S. Environmental Protection
The proper use of hose lines or hand-held Agency, Revised periodically.
portable pressurized applicators provides 7. The Decontamination of Response Per-
good mobility and permits the worker to de- sonnel, Field Standard Operating Procedures
liver the agent from a safe distance without (F.S.O.P.) 7; U.S. Environmental Protection
having to step into the untreated spilled ma- Agency, Office of Emergency and Remedial
terial. Some of these systems can be re- Response, Hazardous Response Support Divi-
charged in the field to provide coverage of sion, December 1984.
larger spill areas than the design limits of a 8. Preparation of a Site Safety Plan, Field
single charged applicator unit. Some of the Standard Operating Procedures (F.S.O.P.) 9;
more effective agents can solidify the liquid U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Of-
flammable hazardous substances and at the fice of Emergency and Remedial Response,
same time elevate the flashpoint above 140 Hazardous Response Support Division, April
°F so the resulting substance may be handled 1985.
as a nonhazardous waste material if it meets 9. Standard Operating Safety Guidelines; U.S.
the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s Environmental Protection Agency, Office of
40 CFR part 261 requirements (See particu- Emergency and Remedial Response, Haz-
larly § 261.21). ardous Response Support Division, Environ-
All workers performing hazardous sub- mental Response Team; November 1984.
stance spill control work are expected to 10. Occupational Safety and Health Guidance
wear the proper protective clothing and Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities,
equipment for the materials present and to National Institute for Occupational Safety
follow the employer’s established standard and Health (NIOSH), Occupational Safety
operating procedures for spill control. All in- and Health Administration (OSHA), U.S.
volved workers need to be trained in the es- Coast Guard (USCG), and Environmental
tablished operating procedures; in the use Protection Agency (EPA); October 1985.
402
11. Protecting Health and Safety at Haz- riculum for any specific employer. Site-spe-
ardous Waste Sites: An Overview, U.S. Envi- cific training programs must be developed on
ronmental Protection Agency, EPA/625/9–85/ the basis of a needs assessment of the haz-
006; September 1985. ardous waste site, RCRA/TSDF, or emer-
12. Hazardous Waste Sites and Hazardous gency response operation in accordance with
Substance Emergencies, NIOSH Worker Bul- 29 CFR 1910.120.
letin, U.S. Department of Health and Human It is noted that the legal requirements are
Services, Public Health Service, Centers for set forth in the regulatory text of § 1910.120.
Disease Control, National Institute for Occu- The guidance set forth here presents a highly
pational Safety and Health; December 1982. effective program that in the areas covered
13. Personal Protective Equipment for Haz- would meet or exceed the regulatory require-
ardous Materials Incidents: A Selection Guide; ments. In addition, other approaches could
U.S. Department of Health and Human Serv- meet the regulatory requirements.
ices, Public Health Service, Centers for Dis-
ease Control, National Institute for Occupa- Suggested General Criteria
tional Safety and Health; October 1984.
Definitions:
14. Fire Service Emergency Management
‘‘Competent’’ means possessing the skills,
Handbook, International Association of Fire
knowledge, experience, and judgment to per-
Chiefs Foundation, 101 East Holly Avenue,
form assigned tasks or activities satisfac-
Unit 10B, Sterling, VA 22170, January 1985.
torily as determined by the employer.
15. Emergency Response Guidebook, U.S De-
‘‘Demonstration’’ means the showing by
partment of Transportation, Washington,
actual use of equipment or procedures.
DC, 1987.
16. Report to the Congress on Hazardous Ma- ‘‘Hands-on training’’ means training in a
terials Training, Planning and Preparedness, simulated work environment that permits
Federal Emergency Management Agency, each student to have experience performing
Washington, DC, July 1986. tasks, making decisions, or using equipment
17. Workbook for Fire Command, Alan V. appropriate to the job assignment for which
Brunacini and J. David Beageron, National the training is being conducted.
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch ‘‘Initial training’’ means training required
Park, Quincy, MA 02269, 1985. prior to beginning work.
18. Fire Command, Alan V. Brunacini, Na- ‘‘Lecture’’ means an interactive discourse
tional Fire Protection Association, with a class lead by an instructor.
Batterymarch Park,, Quincy, MA 02269, 1985. ‘‘Proficient’’ means meeting a stated level
19. Incident Command System, Fire Protec- of achievement.
tion Publications, Oklahoma State Univer- ‘‘Site-specific’’ means individual training
sity, Stillwater, OK 74078, 1983. directed to the operations of a specific job
20. Site Emergency Response Planning, Chem- site.
ical Manufacturers Association, Washington, ‘‘Training hours’’ means the number of
DC 20037, 1986. hours devoted to lecture, learning activities,
21. Hazardous Materials Emergency Planning small group work sessions, demonstration,
Guide, NRT–1, Environmental Protection evaluations, or hands-on experience.
Agency, Washington, DC, March 1987. Suggested core criteria:
22. Community Teamwork: Working Together
1. Training facility. The training facility
to Promote Hazardous Materials Transportation
should have available sufficient resources,
Safety. U.S. Department of Transportation,
equipment, and site locations to perform di-
Washington, DC, May 1983.
dactic and hands-on training when appro-
23. Disaster Planning Guide for Business and
priate. Training facilities should have suffi-
Industry, Federal Emergency Management
cient organization, support staff, and serv-
Agency, Publication No. FEMA 141, August
ices to conduct training in each of the
1987.
courses offered.
(The Office of Management and Budget has 2. Training Director. Each training program
approved the information collection require- should be under the direction of a training
ments in this section under control number director who is responsible for the program.
1218–0139) The Training Director should have a min-
imum of two years of employee education ex-
APPENDIX E TO § 1910.120—TRAINING perience.
CURRICULUM GUIDELINES
3. Instructors. Instructors should be deem
The following non-mandatory general cri- competent on the basis of previous docu-
teria may be used for assistance in devel- mented experience in their area of instruc-
oping site-specific training curriculum used tion, successful completion of a ‘‘train-the-
to meet the training requirements of 29 CFR trainer’’ program specific to the topics they
1910.120(e); 29 CFR 1910.120(p)(7), (p)(8)(iii); will teach, and an evaluation of instruc-
and 29 CFR 1910.120(q)(6), (q)(7), and (q)(8). tional competence by the Training Director.
These are generic guidelines and they are Instructors should be required to maintain
not presented as a complete training cur- professional competency by participating in
403
continuing education or professional devel- The content of the written test or of the
opment programs or by completing success- skill demonstration shall be relevant to the
fully an annual refresher course and having objectives of the course. The written test
an annual review by the Training Director. and skill demonstration should be updated as
The annual review by the Training Direc- necessary to reflect changes in the cur-
tor should include observation of an instruc- riculum and any update should be approved
tor’s delivery, a review of those observations by the Training Director.
with the trainer, and an analysis of any in- The proficiency assessment methods, re-
structor or class evaluations completed by gardless of the approach or combination of
the students during the previous year. approaches used, should be justified, docu-
4. Course materials. The Training Director mented and approved by the Training Direc-
should approve all course materials to be tor.
used by the training provider. Course mate- The proficiency of those taking the addi-
rials should be reviewed and updated at least tional courses for supervisors should be eval-
annually. Materials and equipment should be uated and documented by using proficiency
in good working order and maintained prop- assessment methods acceptable to the Train-
erly. ing Director. These proficiency assessment
All written and audio-visual materials in methods must reflect the additional respon-
training curricula should be peer reviewed by sibilities borne by supervisory personnel in
technically competent outside reviewers or hazardous waste operations or emergency re-
by a standing advisory committee. sponse.
Reviews should possess expertise in the fol- 8. Course certificate. Written documentation
lowing disciplines were applicable: occupa- should be provided to each student who sat-
tional health, industrial hygiene and safety, isfactorily completes the training course.
chemical/environmental engineering, em- The documentation should include:
ployee education, or emergency response. a. Student’s name.
One or more of the peer reviewers should be b. Course title.
an employee experienced in the work activi- c. Course date.
ties to which the training is directed. d. Statement that the student has success-
5. Students. The program for accepting stu- fully completed the course.
dents should include: e. Name and address of the training pro-
a. Assurance that the student is or will be vider.
involved in work where chemical exposures f. An individual identification number for
are likely and that the student possesses the the certificate.
skills necessary to perform the work. g. List of the levels of personal protective
b. A policy on the necessary medical clear- equipment used by the student to complete
ance. the course.
6. Ratios. Student-instructor ratios should This documentation may include a certifi-
not exceed 30 students per instructor. Hands- cate and an appropriate wallet-sized lami-
on activity requiring the use of personal pro- nated card with a photograph of the student
tective equipment should have the following and the above information. When such
student-instructor ratios. For Level C or course certificate cards are used, the indi-
Level D personal protective equipment the vidual identification number for the training
ratio should be 10 students per instructor. certificate should be shown on the card.
For Level A or Level B personal protective 9. Recordkeeping. Training providers should
equipment the ratio should be 5 students per maintain records listing the dates courses
instructor. were presented, the names of the individual
7. Proficiency assessment. Proficiency should course attenders, the names of those stu-
be evaluated and documented by the use of a dents successfully completing each course,
written assessment and a skill demonstra- and the number of training certificates
tion selected and developed by the Training issued to each successful student. These
Director and training staff. The assessment records should be maintained for a minimum
and demonstration should evaluate the of five years after the date an individual par-
knowledge and individual skills developed in ticipated in a training program offered by
the course of training. The level of minimum the training provider. These records should
achievement necessary for proficiency shall be available and provided upon the student’s
be specified in writing by the Training Direc- request or as mandated by law.
tor. 10. Program quality control. The Training
If a written test is used, there should be a Director should conduct or direct an annual
minimum of 50 questions. If a written test is written audit of the training program. Pro-
used in combination with a skills demonstra- gram modifications to address deficiencies, if
tion, a minimum of 25 questions should be any, should be documented, approved, and
used. If a skills demonstration is used, the implemented by the training provider. The
tasks chosen and the means to rate success- audit and the program modification docu-
ful completion should be fully documented ments should be maintained at the training
by the Training Director. facility.
404
Suggested Program Quality Control Criteria 11. Adequacy of the organization and ap-
propriate resources assigned to assure appro-
Factors listed here are suggested criteria
priate training.
for determining the quality and appropriate-
12. In the case of multiple-site training
ness of employee health and safety training
programs, adequacy of satellite centers man-
for hazardous waste operations and emer-
agement.
gency response.
C. Training facilities and resources.
A. Training Plan.
Adequacy and appropriateness of the facili-
Adequacy and appropriateness of the train-
ties and resources for supporting the train-
ing program’s curriculum development, in-
ing program should be considered, including,
structor training, distribution of course ma-
1. Space and equipment to conduct the
terials, and direct student training should be
training.
considered, including
2. Facilities for representative hands-on
1. The duration of training, course content,
training.
and course schedules/agendas;
3. In the case of multiple-site programs,
2. The different training requirements of
equipment and facilities at the satellite cen-
the various target populations, as specified
ters.
in the appropriate generic training cur-
4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
riculum;
quality control and evaluations program to
3. The process for the development of cur-
account for instructor performance.
riculum, which includes appropriate tech-
nical input, outside review, evaluation, pro-
quality control and evaluation program to
gram pretesting.
ensure appropriate course evaluation, feed-
4. The adequate and appropriate inclusion
back, updating, and corrective action.
of hands-on, demonstration, and instruction
6. Adequacy and appropriateness of dis-
methods;
ciplines and expertise being used within the
5. Adequate monitoring of student safety,
quality control and evaluation program.
progress, and performance during the train-
ing.
role of student evaluations to provide feed-
B. Program management, Training Director, back for training program improvement.
staff, and consultants.
D. Quality control and evaluation.
Adequacy and appropriateness of staff per-
Adequacy and appropriateness of quality
formance and delivering an effective training
control and evaluation plans for training
program should be considered, including
programs should be considered, including:
1. Demonstration of the training director’s
1. A balanced advisory committee and/or
leadership in assuring quality of health and
competent outside reviewers to give overall
safety training.
policy guidance;
2. Demonstration of the competency of the
2. Clear and adequate definition of the
staff to meet the demands of delivering high
composition and active programmatic role of
quality hazardous waste employee health
the advisory committee or outside reviewers.
and safety training.
3. Adequacy of the minutes or reports of
3. Organization charts establishing clear
the advisory committee or outside reviewers’
lines of authority.
4. Clearly defined staff duties including the meetings or written communication.
relationship of the training staff to the over- 4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
all program. quality control and evaluations program to
5. Evidence that the training organiza- account for instructor performance.
tional structure suits the needs of the train- 5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
ing program. quality control and evaluation program to
6. Appropriateness and adequacy of the ensure appropriate course evaluation, feed-
training methods used by the instructors. back, updating, and corrective action.
7. Sufficiency of the time committed by 6. Adequacy and appropriateness of dis-
the training director and staff to the train- ciplines and expertise being used within the
ing program. quality control and evaluation program.
8. Adequacy of the ratio of training staff to 7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
students. role of student evaluations to provide feed-
9. Availability and commitment of the back for training program improvement.
training program of adequate human and E. Students
equipment resources in the areas of Adequacy and appropriateness of the pro-
a. Health effects, gram for accepting students should be con-
b. Safety, sidered, including
c. Personal protective equipment (PPE), 1. Assurance that the student already pos-
d. Operational procedures, sess the necessary skills for their job, includ-
e. Employee protection practices/proce- ing necessary documentation.
dures. 2. Appropriateness of methods the program

10. Appropriateness of management con- uses to ensure that recruits are capable of
trols. satisfactorily completing training.
405
3. Review and compliance with any medical (2) The content of a medical surveillance
clearance policy. program as outlined in 29 CFR 1910.120(f).
F. Institutional Environment and Administra- (3) The content of an effective site safety
tive Support and health plan consistent with the require-
The adequacy and appropriateness of the ments of 29 CFR 1910.120(b)(4)(ii).
institutional environment and administra- (4) Emergency response plan and proce-
tive support system for the training program dures as outlined in 29 CFR 1910.38 and 29
should be considered, including CFR 1910.120(l).
1. Adequacy of the institutional commit- (5) Adequate illumination.
ment to the employee training program. (6) Sanitation recommendation and equip-
2. Adequacy and appropriateness of the ad- ment.
ministrative structure and administrative (7) Review and explanation of OSHA’s haz-
support. ard-communication standard (29 CFR
G. Summary of Evaluation Questions 1910.1200) and lock-out-tag-out standard (29
Key questions for evaluating the quality CFR 1910.147).
and appropriateness of an overall training (8) Review of other applicable standards in-
program should include the following: cluding but not limited to those in the con-
1. Are the program objectives clearly stat- struction standards (29 CFR part 1926).
ed? (9) Rights and responsibilities of employers
2. Is the program accomplishing its objec- and employees under applicable OSHA and
tives? EPA laws.
3. Are appropriate facilities and staff avail- b. Technical knowledge.
able? (1) Type of potential exposures to chem-
4. Is there an appropriate mix of classroom, ical, biological, and radiological hazards;
demonstration, and hands-on training? types of human responses to these hazards
5. Is the program providing quality em-
and recognition of those responses; prin-
ployee health and safety training that fully
ciples of toxicology and information about
meets the intent of regulatory requirements?
acute and chronic hazards; health and safety
6. What are the program’s main strengths?
considerations of new technology.
7. What are the program’s main weak-
nesses? (2) Fundamentals of chemical hazards in-
8. What is recommended to improve the cluding but not limited to vapor pressure,
program? boiling points, flash points, ph, other phys-
9. Are instructors instructing according to ical and chemical properties.
their training outlines? (3) Fire and explosion hazards of chemi-
10. Is the evaluation tool current and ap- cals.
propriate for the program content? (4) General safety hazards such as but not
11. Is the course material current and rel- limited to electrical hazards, powered equip-
evant to the target group? ment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, walk-
ing-working surface hazards, excavation haz-
Suggested Training Curriculum Guidelines ards, and hazards associated with working in
The following training curriculum guide- hot and cold temperature extremes.
lines are for those operations specifically (5) Review and knowledge of confined space
identified in 29 CFR 1910.120 as requiring entry procedures in 29 CFR 1910.146.
training. Issues such as qualifications of in- (6) Work practices to minimize employee
structors, training certification, and similar risk from site hazards.
criteria appropriate to all categories of oper- (7) Safe use of engineering controls, equip-
ations addressed in 1910.120 have been cov- ment, and any new relevant safety tech-
ered in the preceding section and are not re- nology or safety procedures.
addressed in each of the generic guidelines. (8) Review and demonstration of com-
Basic core requirements for training pro- petency with air sampling and monitoring
grams that are addressed include equipment that may be used in a site moni-
1. General Hazardous Waste Operations toring program.
2. RCRA operations—Treatment, storage, (9) Container sampling procedures and
and disposal facilities. safeguarding; general drum and container
3. Emergency Response. handling procedures including special re-
A. General Hazardous Waste Operations and quirement for laboratory waste packs,
Site-specific Training shock-sensitive wastes, and radioactive
1. Off-site training.Training course content wastes.
for hazardous waste operations, required by (10) The elements of a spill control pro-
29 CFR 1910.120(e), should include the fol- gram.
lowing topics or procedures: (11) Proper use and limitations of material
a. Regulatory knowledge. handling equipment.
(1) An review of 29 CFR 1910.120 and the (12) Procedures for safe and healthful prep-
core elements of an occupational safety and aration of containers for shipping and trans-
health program. port.
406
(13) Methods of communication including (f) Review of newly developed air and con-
those used while wearing respiratory protec- taminant monitoring equipment.
tion. 3. On-site training.
c. Technical skills. a. The employer should provide employees
(1) Selection, use maintenance, and limita- engaged in hazardous waste site activities
tions of personal protective equipment in- with information and training prior to ini-
cluding the components and procedures for tial assignment into their work area, as fol-
carrying out a respirator program to comply lows:
with 29 CFR 1910.134. (1) The requirements of the hazard commu-
(2) Instruction in decontamination pro- nication program including the location and
grams including personnel, equipment, and availability of the written program, required
hardware; hands-on training including level lists of hazardous chemicals, and safety data
A, B, and C ensembles and appropriate de- sheets.
contamination lines; field activities includ- (2) Activities and locations in their work
ing the donning and doffing of protective area where hazardous substance may be
equipment to a level commensurate with the present.
employee’s anticipated job function and re- (3) Methods and observations that may be
sponsibility and to the degree required by used to detect the present or release of a haz-
potential hazards. ardous chemical in the work area (such as
(3) Sources for additional hazard informa- monitoring conducted by the employer, con-
tion; exercises using relevant manuals and tinuous monitoring devices, visual appear-
hazard coding systems. ances, or other evidence (sight, sound or
smell) of hazardous chemicals being released,
d. Additional suggested items.
and applicable alarms from monitoring de-
(1) A laminated, dated card or certificate
vices that record chemical releases.
with photo, denoting limitations and level of
(4) The physical and health hazards of sub-
protection for which the employee is trained
stances known or potentially present in the
should be issued to those students success-
work area.
fully completing a course.
(5) The measures employees can take to
(2) Attendance should be required at all
help protect themselves from work-site haz-
training modules, with successful comple-
ards, including specific procedures the em-
tion of exercises and a final written or oral
ployer has implemented.
examination with at least 50 questions. (6) An explanation of the labeling system
(3) A minimum of one-third of the program
and safety data sheets and how employees
should be devoted to hands-on exercises. can obtain and use appropriate hazard infor-
(4) A curriculum should be established for
mation.
the 8-hour refresher training required by 29 (7) The elements of the confined space pro-
CFR 1910.120(e)(8), with delivery of such gram including special PPE, permits, moni-
courses directed toward those areas of pre- toring requirements, communication proce-
vious training that need improvement or re- dures, emergency response, and applicable
emphasis. lock-out procedures.
(5) A curriculum should be established for b. The employer should provide hazardous
the required 8-hour training for supervisors. waste employees information and training
Demonstrated competency in the skills and and should provide a review and access to
knowledge provided in a 40-hour course the site safety and plan as follows:
should be a prerequisite for supervisor train- (1) Names of personnel and alternate re-
ing. sponsible for site safety and health.
2. Refresher training. (2) Safety and health hazards present on
The 8-hour annual refresher training re- the site.
quired in 29 CFR 1910.120(e)(8) should be con- (3) Selection, use, maintenance, and limi-
ducted by qualified training providers. Re- tations of personal protective equipment
fresher training should include at a min- specific to the site.
imum the following topics and procedures: (4) Work practices by which the employee
(a) Review of and retraining on relevant can minimize risks from hazards.
topics covered in the 40-hour program, as ap- (5) Safe use of engineering controls and
propriate, using reports by the students on equipment available on site.
their work experiences. (6) Safe decontamination procedures estab-
(b) Update on developments with respect to lished to minimize employee contact with
material covered in the 40-hour course. hazardous substances, including:
(c) Review of changes to pertinent provi- (A) Employee decontamination,
sions of EPA or OSHA standards or laws. (B) Clothing decontamination, and
(d) Introduction of additional subject areas (C) Equipment decontamination.
as appropriate. (7) Elements of the site emergency re-
(e) Hands-on review of new or altered PPE sponse plan, including:
or decontamination equipment or proce- (A) Pre-emergency planning.

dures. Review of new developments in per- (B) Personnel roles and lines of authority
sonal protective equipment. and communication.
407
(C) Emergency recognition and prevention. (c) General safety hazards including those
(D) Safe distances and places of refuge. associated with electrical hazards, powered
(E) Site security and control. equipment hazards, lock-out-tag-out proce-
(F) Evacuation routes and procedures. dures, motor vehicle hazards and walking-
(G) Decontamination procedures not cov- working surface hazards.
ered by the site safety and health plan. (d) Confined-space hazards and procedures.
(H) Emergency medical treatment and first (e) Work practices to minimize employee
aid. risk from workplace hazards.
(I) Emergency equipment and procedures (f) Emergency response plan and proce-
for handling emergency incidents. dures including first aid meeting the require-
c. The employer should provide hazardous ments of paragraph (p)(8).
waste employees information and training (g) A review of procedures to minimize ex-
on personal protective equipment used at the posure to hazardous waste and various type
site, such as the following: of waste streams, including the materials
(1) PPE to be used based upon known or an- handling program and spill containment pro-
ticipated site hazards. gram.
(2) PPE limitations of materials and con- (h) A review of hazard communication pro-
struction; limitations during temperature grams meeting the requirements of 29 CFR
extremes, heat stress, and other appropriate 1910.1200.
medical considerations; use and limitations (i) A review of medical surveillance pro-
of respirator equipment as well as docu- grams meeting the requirements of 29 CFR
mentation procedures as outlined in 29 CFR 1910.120(p)(3) including the recognition of
1910.134. signs and symptoms of overexposure to haz-
(3) PPE inspection procedures prior to, ardous substance including known syner-
during, and after use. gistic interactions.
(4) PPE donning and doffing procedures. (j) A review of decontamination programs
(5) PPE decontamination and disposal pro- and procedures meeting the requirements of
cedures. 29 CFR 1910.120(p)(4).
(6) PPE maintenance and storage. (k) A review of an employer’s requirements
(7) Task duration as related to PPE limita- to implement a training program and its ele-
tions. ments.
d. The employer should instruct the em- (l) A review of the criteria and programs
ployee about the site medical surveillance for proper selection and use of personal pro-
program relative to the particular site, in- tective equipment, including respirators.
cluding (m) A review of the applicable appendices
(1) Specific medical surveillance programs to 29 CFR 1910.120.
that have been adapted for the site. (n) Principles of toxicology and biological
(2) Specific signs and symptoms related to monitoring as they pertain to occupational
exposure to hazardous materials on the site. health.
(3) The frequency and extent of periodic (o) Rights and responsibilities of employ-
medical examinations that will be used on ees and employers under applicable OSHA
the site. and EPA laws.
(4) Maintenance and availability of (p) Hands-on exercises and demonstrations
records. of competency with equipment to illustrate
(5) Personnel to be contacted and proce- the basic equipment principles that may be
dures to be followed when signs and symp- used during the performance of work duties,
toms of exposures are recognized. including the donning and doffing of PPE.
e. The employees will review and discuss (q) Sources of reference, efficient use of
the site safety plan as part of the training relevant manuals, and knowledge of hazard
program. The location of the site safety plan coding systems to include information con-
and all written programs should be discussed tained in hazardous waste manifests.
with employees including a discussion of the (r) At least 8 hours of hands-on training.
mechanisms for access, review, and ref- (s) Training in the job skills required for
erences described. an employee’s job function and responsi-
B. RCRA Operations Training for Treatment, bility before they are permitted to partici-
Storage and Disposal Facilities. pate in or supervise field activities.
1. As a minimum, the training course re- 2. The individual employer should provide
quired in 29 CFR 1910.120 (p) should include hazardous waste employees with information
the following topics: and training prior to an employee’s initial
(a) Review of the applicable paragraphs of assignment into a work area. The training
29 CFR 1910.120 and the elements of the em- and information should cover the following
ployer’s occupational safety and health plan. topics:
(b) Review of relevant hazards such as, but (a) The Emergency response plan and pro-
not limited to, chemical, biological, and ra- cedures including first aid.
diological exposures; fire and explosion haz- (b) A review of the employer’s hazardous
ards; thermal extremes; and physical haz- waste handling procedures including the ma-
ards. terials handling program and elements of the
408
spill containment program, location of spill or potential release of hazardous substances
response kits or equipment, and the names of in the community.
those trained to respond to releases. a. General considerations.
(c) The hazardous communication program Emergency response organizations are re-
meeting the requirements of 29 CFR quired to consider the topics listed in
1910.1200. § 1910.120(q)(6). Emergency response organiza-
(d) A review of the employer’s medical sur- tions may use some or all of the following
veillance program including the recognition topics to supplement those mandatory topics
of signs and symptoms of exposure to rel- when developing their response training pro-
evant hazardous substance including known grams. Many of the topics would require an
synergistic interactions. interaction between the response provider
(e) A review of the employer’s decon- and the individuals responsible for the site
tamination program and procedures. where the response would be expected.
(f) An review of the employer’s training (1) Hazard recognition, including:
program and the parties responsible for that (A) Nature of hazardous substances
program. present,
(g) A review of the employer’s personal (B) Practical applications of hazard rec-
protective equipment program including the ognition, including presentations on biology,
proper selection and use of PPE based upon chemistry, and physics.
specific site hazards. (2) Principles of toxicology, biological
(h) All relevant site-specific procedures ad- monitoring, and risk assessment.
dressing potential safety and health hazards. (3) Safe work practices and general site
This may include, as appropriate, biological safety.
and radiological exposures, fire and explo- (4) Engineering controls and hazardous
sion hazards, thermal hazards, and physical waste operations.
hazards such as electrical hazards, powered (5) Site safety plans and standard oper-
equipment hazards, lock-out-tag-out haz- ating procedures.
ards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking- (6) Decontamination procedures and prac-
working surface hazards. tices.
(i) Safe use engineering controls and equip- (7) Emergency procedures, first aid, and
ment on site. self-rescue.
(j) Names of personnel and alternates re- (8) Safe use of field equipment.
sponsible for safety and health. (9) Storage, handling, use and transpor-
C. Emergency response training. tation of hazardous substances.
Federal OSHA standards in 29 CFR (10) Use, care, and limitations of personal
1910.120(q) are directed toward private sector protective equipment.
emergency responders. Therefore, the guide- (11) Safe sampling techniques.
lines provided in this portion of the appendix (12) Rights and responsibilities of employ-
are directed toward that employee popu- ees under OSHA and other related laws con-
lation. However, they also impact indirectly cerning right-to-know, safety and health,
through State OSHA or USEPA regulations compensations and liability.
some public sector emergency responders. (13) Medical monitoring requirements.
Therefore, the guidelines provided in this (14) Community relations.
portion of the appendix may be applied to b. Suggested criteria for specific courses.
both employee populations. (1) First responder awareness level.
States with OSHA state plans must cover (A) Review of and demonstration of com-
their employees with regulations at least as petency in performing the applicable skills
effective as the Federal OSHA standards. of 29 CFR 1910.120(q).
Public employees in states without approved (B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. De-
state OSHA programs covering hazardous partment of Transportation’s Emergency Re-
waste operations and emergency response sponse Guidebook (ERG) and familiarization
are covered by the U.S. EPA under 40 CFR with OSHA standard 29 CFR 1910.1201.
311, a regulation virtually identical to (C) Review of the principles and practices
§ 1910.120. for analyzing an incident to determine both
Since this is a non-mandatory appendix the hazardous substances present and the
and therefore not an enforceable standard, basic hazard and response information for
OSHA recommends that those employers, each hazardous substance present.
employees or volunteers in public sector (D) Review of procedures for implementing
emergency response organizations outside actions consistent with the local emergency
Federal OSHA jurisdiction consider the fol- response plan, the organization’s standard
lowing criteria in developing their own operating procedures, and the current edi-
training programs. A unified approach to tion of DOT’s ERG including emergency no-
training at the community level between tification procedures and follow-up commu-
emergency response organizations covered nications.
by Federal OSHA and those not covered di- (E) Review of the expected hazards includ-
rectly by Federal OSHA can help ensure an ing fire and explosions hazards, confined
effective community response to the release space hazards, electrical hazards, powered
409
equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, (C) Review of the principles and practices
and walking-working surface hazards. for analyzing an incident to determine the
(F) Awareness and knowledge of the com- hazardous substances present, their physical
petencies for the First Responder at the and chemical properties, the likely behavior
Awareness Level covered in the National of the hazardous substance and its container,
Fire Protection Association’s Standard No. the types of hazardous substance transpor-
472, Professional Competence of Responders to tation containers and vehicles involved in
Hazardous Materials Incidents. the release, the appropriate strategy for ap-
(2) First responder operations level. proaching release sites and containing the
(A) Review of and demonstration of com- release.
petency in performing the applicable skills (D) Review of procedures for implementing
of 29 CFR 1910.120(q). continuing response actions consistent with
(B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. De- the local emergency response plan, the orga-
partment of Transportation’s Emergency Re- nization’s standard operating procedures,
sponse Guidebook (ERG), manufacturer safe- and the current edition of DOT’s ERG in-
ty data sheets, CHEMTREC/CANUTEC, ship- cluding extended emergency notification
per or manufacturer contacts, and other rel- procedures and follow-up communications.
evant sources of information addressing haz- (E) Review of the principles and practice
ardous substance releases. Familiarization for proper selection and use of personal pro-
with OSHA standard 29 CFR 1910.1201. tective equipment.
(C) Review of the principles and practices (F) Review of the principles and practices
for analyzing an incident to determine the
of establishing exposure zones, proper decon-
hazardous substances present, the likely be-
tamination and medical surveillance sta-
havior of the hazardous substance and its
tions and procedures.
container, the types of hazardous substance
(G) Review of the expected hazards includ-
transportation containers and vehicles, the
ing fire and explosions hazards, confined
types and selection of the appropriate defen-
space hazards, electrical hazards, powered
sive strategy for containing the release.
(D) Review of procedures for implementing equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards,
continuing response actions consistent with and walking-working surface hazards.
the local emergency response plan, the orga- (H) Awareness and knowledge of the com-
nization’s standard operating procedures, petencies for the Hazardous Materials Tech-
and the current edition of DOT’s ERG in- nician covered in the National Fire Protec-
cluding extended emergency notification tion Association’s Standard No. 472, Profes-
procedures and follow-up communications. sional Competence of Responders to Hazardous
(E) Review of the principles and practice Materials Incidents.
for proper selection and use of personal pro- (4) Hazardous materials specialist.
tective equipment. (A) Review of and demonstration of com-
(F) Review of the principles and practice of petency in performing the applicable skills
personnel and equipment decontamination. of 29 CFR 1910.120(q).
(G) Review of the expected hazards includ- (B) Hands-on experience with retrieval and
ing fire and explosions hazards, confined use of written and electronic information
space hazards, electrical hazards, powered relative to response decision making includ-
equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, ing but not limited to the U.S. Department
and walking-working surface hazards. of Transportation’s Emergency Response
(H) Awareness and knowledge of the com- Guidebook (ERG), manufacturer safety data
petencies for the First Responder at the Op- sheets, CHEMTREC/CANUTEC, shipper or
erations Level covered in the National Fire manufacturer contacts, computer data bases
Protection Association’s Standard No. 472, and response models, and other relevant
Professional Competence of Responders to Haz- sources of information addressing hazardous
ardous Materials Incidents. substance releases. Familiarization with
(3) Hazardous materials technician. OSHA standard 29 CFR 1910.1201.
(A) Review of and demonstration of com- (C) Review of the principles and practices
petency in performing the applicable skills for analyzing an incident to determine the
of 29 CFR 1910.120(q). hazardous substances present, their physical
(B) Hands-on experience with written and and chemical properties, and the likely be-
electronic information relative to response havior of the hazardous substance and its
decision making including but not limited to container, vessel, or vehicle.
the U.S. Department of Transportation’s (D) Review of the principles and practices
Emergency Response Guidebook (ERG), manu- for identification of the types of hazardous
facturer safety data sheets, CHEMTREC/ substance transportation containers, vessels
CANUTEC, shipper or manufacturer con- and vehicles involved in the release; select-
tacts, computer data bases and response ing and using the various types of equipment
models, and other relevant sources of infor- available for plugging or patching transpor-
mation addressing hazardous substance re- tation containers, vessels or vehicles; orga-
leases. Familiarization with OSHA standard nizing and directing the use of multiple
29 CFR 1910.1201. teams of hazardous material technicians and
410
selecting the appropriate strategy for ap- (D) Ability to evaluate the progress of the
proaching release sites and containing or emergency response to ensure that the re-
stopping the release. sponse objectives are being met safely, effec-
(E) Review of procedures for implementing tively, and efficiently.
continuing response actions consistent with (E) Ability to adjust the response plan to
the local emergency response plan, the orga- the conditions of the response and to notify
nization’s standard operating procedures, in- higher levels of response when required by
cluding knowledge of the available public the changes to the response plan.
and private response resources, establish- [54 FR 9317, Mar. 6, 1989, as amended at 55 FR
ment of an incident command post, direction 14073, Apr. 13, 1990; 56 FR 15832, Apr. 18, 1991;
of hazardous material technician teams, and 59 FR 43270, Aug. 22, 1994; 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7,
extended emergency notification procedures 1996; 67 FR 67964, Nov. 7, 2002; 71 FR 16672,
and follow-up communications. Apr. 3, 2006; 76 FR 80738, Dec. 27, 2011; 77 FR
(F) Review of the principles and practice 17776, Mar. 26, 2012; 78 FR 9313, Feb. 8, 2013; 84
for proper selection and use of personal pro- FR 21597, May 14, 2019]
tective equipment.
(G) Review of the principles and practices § 1910.121 [Reserved]
of establishing exposure zones and proper de-
contamination, monitoring and medical sur- DIPPING AND COATING OPERATIONS
veillance stations and procedures.
(H) Review of the expected hazards includ- SOURCE: 64 FR 13909, Mar. 23, 1999, unless
ing fire and explosions hazards, confined otherwise noted.
space hazards, electrical hazards, powered
equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, § 1910.122 Table of contents.
and walking-working surface hazards.
(I) Awareness and knowledge of the com- This section lists the paragraph
petencies for the Off-site Specialist Em- headings contained in §§ 1910.123
ployee covered in the National Fire Protec- through 1910.126.
tion Association’s Standard No. 472, Profes-
sional Competence of Responders to Hazardous § 1910.123 Dipping and coating operations:
Materials Incidents. Coverage and definitions.
(5) Incident commander. (a) Does this rule apply to me?
The incident commander is the individual (b) What operations are covered?
who, at any one time, is responsible for and (c) What operations are not covered?
in control of the response effort. This indi- (d) How are terms used in §§ 1910.123
vidual is the person responsible for the direc- through 1910.126 defined?
tion and coordination of the response effort.
An incident commander’s position should be § 1910.124 General requirements for dipping and
occupied by the most senior, appropriately coating operations.
trained individual present at the response (a) What construction requirements apply
site. Yet, as necessary and appropriate by to dip tanks?
the level of response provided, the position (b) What ventilation requirements apply to
may be occupied by many individuals during vapor areas?
a particular response as the need for greater (c) What requirements must I follow to re-
authority, responsibility, or training in- circulate exhaust air into the workplace?
creases. It is possible for the first responder (d) What must I do when I use an exhaust
at the awareness level to assume the duties hood?
of incident commander until a more senior (e) What requirements must I follow when
and appropriately trained individual arrives an employee enters a dip tank?
at the response site. (f) What first-aid procedures must my em-
Therefore, any emergency responder ex- ployees know?
pected to perform as an incident commander (g) What hygiene facilities must I provide?
should be trained to fulfill the obligations of (h) What treatment and first aid must I
the position at the level of response they will provide?
be providing including the following: (i) What must I do before an employee
(A) Ability to analyze a hazardous sub- cleans a dip tank?
stance incident to determine the magnitude (j) What must I do to inspect and maintain
of the response problem. my dipping or coating operation?
(B) Ability to plan and implement an ap-
propriate response plan within the capabili- § 1910.125 Additional requirements for dipping
ties of available personnel and equipment. and coating operations that use flammable or
(C) Ability to implement a response to fa- combustible liquids.
vorably change the outcome of the incident (a) What type of construction material
in a manner consistent with the local emer- must be used in making my dip tank?
gency response plan and the organization’s (b) When must I provide overflow piping?
standard operating procedures. (c) When must I provide a bottom drain?
411
(d) When must my conveyer system shut nationally recognized testing labora-
down automatically? tory, as defined by § 1910.7.
(e) What ignition and fuel sources must be Autoignition temperature means the
controlled?
minimum temperature required to
(f) What fire protection must I provide?
(g) To what temperature may I heat a liq- cause self-sustained combustion, inde-
uid in a dip tank? pendent of any other source of heat.
Dip tank means a container holding a
§ 1910.126 Additional requirements for special liquid other than water and that is
dipping and coating operations. used for dipping or coating. An object
(a) What additional requirements apply to may be immersed (or partially im-
hardening or tempering tanks? mersed) in a dip tank or it may be sus-
(b) What additional requirements apply to pended in a vapor coming from the
flow coating? tank.
(c) What additional requirements apply to
roll coating, roll spreading, or roll impreg-
Flammable liquid means any liquid
nating? having a flashpoint at or below 199.4
(d) What additional requirements apply to °F (93 °C).
vapor degreasing tanks? Flashpoint means the minimum tem-
(e) What additional requirements apply to perature at which a liquid gives off a
cyanide tanks? vapor in sufficient concentration to ig-
(f) What additional requirements apply to nite if tested in accordance with the
spray cleaning tanks and spray degreasing test methods in Appendix B to
tanks?
(g) What additional requirements apply to § 1910.1200—Physical Hazard Criteria.
electrostatic paint detearing? Lower flammable limit (LFL) means
the lowest concentration of a material
§ 1910.123 Dipping and coating oper- that will propagate a flame. The LFL
ations: Coverage and definitions. is usually expressed as a percent by
(a) Does this rule apply to me? (1) volume of the material in air (or other
This rule (§§ 1910.123 through 1910.126) oxidant).
applies when you use a dip tank con- Vapor area means any space con-
taining a liquid other than water. It taining a dip tank, including its drain
applies when you use the liquid in the boards, associated drying or conveying
tank or its vapor to: equipment, and any surrounding area
(i) Clean an object; where the vapor concentration exceeds
(ii) Coat an object; 25% of the LFL of the liquid in the
(iii) Alter the surface of an object; or tank.
(iv) Change the character of an ob- You means the employer, as defined
ject. by the Occupational Safety and Health
(2) This rule also applies to the drain- Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 651 et seq.).
ing or drying of an object you have [64 FR 13909, Mar. 23, 1999, as amended at 77
dipped or coated. FR 17777, Mar. 26, 2012]
(b) What operations are covered? Ex-
amples of covered operations are paint § 1910.124 General requirements for
dipping, electroplating, pickling, dipping and coating operations.
quenching, tanning, degreasing, strip- (a) What construction requirements
ping, cleaning, roll coating, flow coat- apply to dip tanks? Any container that
ing, and curtain coating. you use as a dip tank must be strong
(c) What operations are not covered? enough to withstand any expected load.
You are not covered by this rule if your (b) What ventilation requirements
dip-tank operation only uses a molten apply to vapor areas? (1) The ventila-
material (a molten metal, alloy, or tion that you provide to a vapor area
salt, for example). must keep the airborne concentration
(d) How are terms used in §§ 1910.123 of any substance below 25% of its LFL.
through 1910.126 defined? (2) When a liquid in a dip tank cre-
Adjacent area means any area within ates an exposure hazard covered by a
20 feet (6.1 m) of a vapor area that is standard listed in subpart Z of this
not separated from the vapor area by part, you must control worker expo-
tight partitions. sure as required by that standard.
Approved means that the equipment (3) You may use a tank cover or ma-
so designated is listed or approved by a terial that floats on the surface of the
412
liquid in a dip tank to replace or sup- (d) What must I do when I use an ex-
plement ventilation. The method or haust hood? You must:
combination of methods you choose (1) Provide each room having exhaust
must maintain the airborne concentra- hoods with a volume of outside air that
tion of the hazardous material and the is at least 90 percent of the volume of
worker’s exposure within the limits the exhaust air; and
specified in paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2) (2) Ensure that the outside air supply
of this section. does not damage exhaust hoods.
(4) When you use mechanical ventila- (e) What requirements must I follow
tion, it must conform to the following when an employee enters a dip tank?
standards that are incorporated by ref- When an employee enters a dip tank,
erence as specified in § 1910.6: you must meet the entry requirements
(i) ANSI Z9.2–1979, Fundamentals of § 1910.146, OSHA’s standard for Per-
Governing the Design and Operation of mit-Required Confined Spaces, as ap-
Local Exhaust Systems; plicable.
(ii) NFPA 34–1995, Standard for Dip (f) What first-aid procedures must my
Tanks Containing Flammable or Com- employees know? Your employees must
bustible Liquids; know the first-aid procedures that are
(iii) ACGIH’s ‘‘Industrial Ventilation: appropriate to the dipping or coating
A Manual of Recommended Practice’’ hazards to which they are exposed.
(22nd ed., 1995); or (g) What hygiene facilities must I
(iv) ANSI Z9.1–1971, Practices for provide? When your employees work
Ventilation and Operation of Open-Sur- with liquids that may burn, irritate, or
face Tanks, and NFPA 34–1966, Stand- otherwise harm their skin, you must
ard for Dip Tanks Containing Flam- provide:
mable or Combustible Liquids.
(1) Locker space or other storage
(5) When you use mechanical ventila-
space to prevent contamination of the
tion, it must draw the flow of air into
employee’s street clothes;
a hood or exhaust duct.
(2) An emergency shower and eye-
(6) When you use mechanical ventila-
wash station close to the dipping or
tion, each dip tank must have an inde-
coating operation. In place of this
pendent exhaust system unless the
equipment, you may use a water hose
combination of substances being re-
that is at least 4 feet (1.22 m) long and
moved will not cause a:
at least 3⁄4 of an inch (18 mm) thick
(i) Fire;
with a quick-opening valve and car-
(ii) Explosion; or
rying a pressure of 25 pounds per
(iii) Chemical reaction.
square inch (1.62 k/cm2) or less; and
(c) What requirements must I follow
to recirculate exhaust air into the (3) At least one basin with a hot-
workplace? (1) You may not recirculate water faucet for every 10 employees
exhaust air when any substance in that who work with such liquids. (See para-
air poses a health hazard to employees graph (d) of § 1910.141.)
or exceeds 25% of its LFL. (h) What treatment and first aid
(2) You must ensure that any exhaust must I provide? When your employees
air re-circulated from a dipping or work with liquids that may burn, irri-
coating operation using flammable liq- tate, or otherwise harm their skin, you
uids or liquids with flashpoints greater must provide:
than 199.4 °F (93 °C) is: (1) A physician’s approval before an
(i) Free of any solid particulate that employee with a sore, burn, or other
poses a health or safety hazard for em- skin lesion that requires medical treat-
ployees; and ment works in a vapor area;
(ii) Monitored by approved equip- (2) Treatment by a properly des-
ment. ignated person of any small skin abra-
(3) You must have a system that sion, cut, rash, or open sore;
sounds an alarm and automatically (3) Appropriate first-aid supplies that
shuts down the operation when the are located near the dipping or coating
vapor concentration for any substance operation; and
in the exhaust airstream exceeds 25% (4) For employees who work with
of its LFL. chromic acid, periodic examinations of
413
their exposed body parts, especially You must also comply with this section And:
if:
their nostrils.
(i) What must I do before an em- • The flashpoint of the liquid is 199.4 °F • The liquid is
ployee cleans a dip tank? Before per- (93 °C) or above. heated as part
of the operation;
mitting an employee to clean the inte- or
rior of a dip tank, you must: • A heated object
(1) Drain the contents of the tank is placed in the
liquid.
and open the cleanout doors; and
(2) Ventilate and clear any pockets (a) What type of construction mate-
where hazardous vapors may have ac- rial must be used in making my dip
cumulated. tank? Your dip tank must be made of
(j) What must I do to inspect and noncombustible material.
maintain my dipping or coating oper- (b) When must I provide overflow pip-
ation? You must: ing? (1) You must provide properly
(1) Inspect the hoods and ductwork of trapped overflow piping that discharges
the ventilation system for corrosion or to a safe location for any dip tank hav-
damage: ing:
(i) At least quarterly during oper- (i) A capacity greater than 150 gal-
ation; and lons (568 L); or
(ii) Prior to operation after a pro- (ii) A liquid surface area greater than
longed shutdown. 10 feet 2 (0.95 m2).
(2) Ensure that the airflow is ade- (2) You must also ensure that:
quate: (i) Any overflow piping is at least 3
(i) At least quarterly during oper- inches (7.6 cm) in diameter and has suf-
ation; and ficient capacity to prevent the dip tank
(ii) Prior to operation after a pro- from overflowing;
longed shutdown. (ii) Piping connections on drains and
overflow pipes allow ready access to
(3) Periodically inspect all dipping
the interior of the pipe for inspection
and coating equipment, including cov-
and cleaning; and
ers, drains, overflow piping, and elec-
(iii) The bottom of the overflow con-
trical and fire-extinguishing systems,
nection is at least 6 inches (15.2 cm)
and promptly correct any deficiencies;
below the top of the dip tank.
(4) Provide mechanical ventilation or (c) When must I provide a bottom
respirators (selected and used as speci- drain? (1) You must provide a bottom
fied in § 1910.134, OSHA’s Respiratory drain for dip tanks that contain more
Protection standard) to protect em- than 500 gallons (1893 L) of liquid, un-
ployees in the vapor area from expo- less:
sure to toxic substances released dur- (i) The dip tank is equipped with an
ing welding, burning, or open-flame automatic closing cover meeting the
work; and requirements of paragraph (f)(3) of this
(5) Have dip tanks thoroughly section; or
cleaned of solvents and vapors before (ii) The viscosity of the liquid at nor-
permitting welding, burning, or open- mal atmospheric temperature does not
flame work on them. allow the liquid to flow or be pumped
[64 FR 13909, Mar. 23, 1999, as amended at 77 easily.
FR 17777, Mar. 26, 2012] (2) You must ensure that the bottom
drain required by this section:
§ 1910.125 Additional requirements for (i) Will empty the dip tank during a
dipping and coating operations that fire;
use flammable liquids or liquids (ii) Is properly trapped;
with flashpoints greater than 199.4 (iii) Has pipes that permit the dip
≥F (93 ≥C). tank’s contents to be removed within
If you use flammable liquids, you five minutes after a fire begins; and
must comply with the requirements of (iv) Discharges to a safe location.
this section as well as the require- (3) Any bottom drain you provide
ments of §§ 1910.123, 1910.124, and must be capable of manual and auto-

1910.126, as applicable. matic operation, and manual operation
414
must be from a safe and accessible lo- visible ‘‘No Smoking’’ sign near each
cation. dip tank.
(4) You must ensure that automatic (f) What fire protection must I pro-
pumps are used when gravity flow from vide? (1) You must provide the fire pro-
the bottom drain is impractical. tection required by this paragraph (f)
(d) When must my conveyor system for:
shut down automatically? If your con- (i) Any dip tank having a capacity of
veyor system is used with a dip tank, at least 150 gallons (568 L) or a liquid
the system must shut down automati- surface area of at least 4 feet 2 (0.38
cally: m 1); and
(1) If there is a fire; or (ii) Any hardening or tempering tank
(2) If the ventilation rate drops below having a capacity of at least 500 gal-
what is required by paragraph (b) of lons (1893 L) or a liquid surface area of
§ 1910.124. at least 25 feet 2 (2.37 m 2).
(e) What ignition and fuel sources (2) For every vapor area, you must
must be controlled? (1) In each vapor provide:
area and any adjacent area, you must (i) Manual fire extinguishers that are
ensure that: suitable for flammable and combus-
(i) All electrical wiring and equip- tible liquid fires and that conform to
ment conform to the applicable haz- the requirements of § 1910.157; and
ardous (classified)-area requirements of (ii) An automatic fire-extinguishing
subpart S of this part (except as spe- system that conforms to the require-
cifically permitted in paragraph (g) of ments of subpart L of this part.
§ 1910.126); and (3) You may substitute a cover that
(ii) There are no flames, spark-pro- is closed by an approved automatic de-
ducing devices, or other surfaces that vice for the automatic fire-extin-
are hot enough to ignite vapors. guishing system if the cover:
(2) You must ensure that any port- (i) Can also be activated manually;
able container used to add liquid to the (ii) Is noncombustible or tin-clad,
tank is electrically bonded to the dip with the enclosing metal applied with
tank and positively grounded to pre- locked joints; and
vent static electrical sparks or arcs. (iii) Is kept closed when the dip tank
(3) You must ensure that a heating is not in use.
system that is used in a drying oper- (g) To what temperature may I heat
ation and could cause ignition: a liquid in a dip tank? You must main-
(i) Is installed in accordance with tain the temperature of the liquid in a
NFPA 86A–1969, Standard for Ovens and dip tank:
Furnaces (which is incorporated by ref- (1) Below the liquid’s boiling point;
erence in § 1910.6 of this part); and
(ii) Has adequate mechanical ventila- (2) At least 100 °F (37.8 °C) below the
tion that operates before and during liquid’s autoignition temperature.
the drying operation; and [64 FR 13909, Mar. 23, 1999, as amended at 77
(iii) Shuts down automatically if any FR 17777, Mar. 26, 2012]
ventilating fan fails to maintain ade-
quate ventilation. § 1910.126 Additional requirements for
(4) You also must ensure that: special dipping and coating oper-
(i) All vapor areas are free of combus- ations.
tible debris and as free as practicable In addition to the requirements in
of combustible stock; §§ 1910.123 through 1910.125, you must
(ii) Rags and other material contami- comply with any requirement in this
nated with liquids from dipping or section that applies to your operation.
coating operations are placed in ap- (a) What additional requirements
proved waste cans immediately after apply to hardening or tempering
use; and tanks?
(iii) Waste can contents are properly (1) You must ensure that hardening
disposed of at the end of each shift. or tempering tanks:
(5) You must prohibit smoking in a (i) Are located as far as practicable
vapor area and must post a readily from furnaces;
415
(ii) Are on noncombustible flooring; (2) When you use gas as a fuel to heat
and the tank liquid, you must prevent sol-
(iii) Have noncombustible hoods and vent vapors from entering the air-fuel
vents (or equivalent devices) for vent- mixture. To do this, you must make
ing to the outside. For this purpose, the combustion chamber airtight (ex-
vent ducts must be treated as flues and cept for the flue opening).
kept away from combustible materials, (3) The flue must be made of corro-
particularly roofs. sion-resistant material, and it must ex-
(2) You must equip each tank with an tend to the outside. You must install a
alarm that will sound if the tempera- draft diverter if mechanical exhaust is
ture of the liquid comes within 50 °F (10 used on the flue.
°C) of its flashpoint (the alarm set (4) You must not allow the tempera-
point). ture of the heating element to cause a
(3) When practicable, you must also solvent or mixture to decompose or to
provide each tank with a limit switch generate an excessive amount of vapor.
to shut down the conveyor supplying (e) What additional requirements
work to the tank. apply to cyanide tanks? You must en-
(4) If the temperature of the liquid sure that cyanide tanks have a dike or
can exceed the alarm set point, you other safeguard to prevent cyanide
must equip the tank with a circulating from mixing with an acid if a dip tank
cooling system. fails.
(f) What additional requirements
(5) If the tank has a bottom drain,
apply to spray cleaning tanks and
the bottom drain may be combined
spray degreasing tanks? If you spray a
with the oil-circulating system.
liquid in the air over an open-surface
(6) You must not use air under pres-
cleaning or degreasing tank, you must
sure when you fill the dip tank or agi-
control the spraying to the extent fea-
tate the liquid in the dip tank.
sible by:
(b) What additional requirements (1) Enclosing the spraying operation;
apply to flow coating? (1) You must use and
a direct low-pressure pumping system (2) Using mechanical ventilation to
or a 10-gallon (38 L) or smaller gravity provide enough inward air velocity to
tank to supply the paint for flow coat- prevent the spray from leaving the
ing. In case of fire, an approved heat- vapor area.
actuated device must shut down the (g) What additional requirements
pumping system. apply to electrostatic paint detearing?
(2) You must ensure that the piping (1) You must use only approved electro-
is substantial and rigidly supported. static equipment in paint-detearing op-
(c) What additional requirements erations. Electrodes in such equipment
apply to roll coating, roll spreading, or must be substantial, rigidly supported,
roll impregnating? When these oper- permanently located, and effectively
ations use a flammable liquid that has insulated from ground by nonporous,
a flashpoint below 140 °F (60 °C), you noncombustible, clean, dry insulators.
must prevent sparking of static elec- (2) You must use conveyors to sup-
tricity by: port any goods being paint deteared.
(1) Bonding and grounding all metal- (3) You must ensure that goods being
lic parts (including rotating parts) and electrostatically deteared are not
installing static collectors; or manually handled.
(2) Maintaining a conductive atmos- (4) Between goods being electro-
phere (for example, one with a high rel- statically deteared and the electrodes
ative humidity) in the vapor area. or conductors of the electrostatic
(d) What additional requirements equipment, you must maintain a min-
apply to vapor degreasing tanks? (1) imum distance of twice the sparking
You must ensure that the condenser or distance. This minimum distance must
vapor-level thermostat keeps the vapor be displayed conspicuously on a sign
level at least 36 inches (91 cm) or one- located near the equipment.
half the tank width, whichever is less, (5) You must ensure that the electro-
below the top of the vapor degreasing static equipment has automatic con-
tank. trols that immediately disconnect the
416
power supply to the high-voltage trans- through absorption, inhalation or

former and signal the operator if: physical contact.
(i) Ventilation or the conveyors fail (b) Employee-owned equipment. Where
to operate; employees provide their own protective
(ii) A ground (or imminent ground) equipment, the employer shall be re-
occurs anywhere in the high-voltage sponsible to assure its adequacy, in-
system; or cluding proper maintenance, and sani-
(iii) Goods being electrostatically tation of such equipment.
deteared come within twice the spark- (c) Design. All personal protective
ing distance of the electrodes or con- equipment shall be of safe design and
ductors of the equipment. construction for the work to be per-
(6) You must use fences, rails, or formed.
guards, made of conducting material (d) Hazard assessment and equipment
and adequately grounded, to separate selection. (1) The employer shall assess
paint-detearing operations from stor- the workplace to determine if hazards
age areas and from personnel. are present, or are likely to be present,
(7) To protect paint-detearing oper- which necessitate the use of personal
ations from fire, you must have in protective equipment (PPE). If such
place: hazards are present, or likely to be
(i) Automatic sprinklers; or present, the employer shall:
(ii) An automatic fire-extinguishing (i) Select, and have each affected em-
system conforming to the requirements ployee use, the types of PPE that will
of subpart L of this part. protect the affected employee from the
(8) To collect paint deposits, you hazards identified in the hazard assess-
must: ment;
(i) Provide drip plates and screens; (ii) Communicate selection decisions
and to each affected employee; and,
(ii) Clean these plates and screens in (iii) Select PPE that properly fits
a safe location. each affected employee.
[64 FR 13909, Mar. 23, 1999, as amended at 77 NOTE: Non-mandatory appendix B contains
FR 17777, Mar. 26, 2012] an example of procedures that would comply
with the requirement for a hazard assess-
ment.
Subpart I—Personal Protective
Equipment (2) The employer shall verify that the
required workplace hazard assessment
has been performed through a written
AUTHORITY: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Sec- certification that identifies the work-
retary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754),
8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55
place evaluated; the person certifying
FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), that the evaluation has been per-
5–2002 (67 FR 65008), 5–2007 (72 FR 31160), 4– formed; the date(s) of the hazard as-
2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as sessment; and, which identifies the
applicable, and 29 CFR part 1911. document as a certification of hazard
assessment.
§ 1910.132 General requirements. (e) Defective and damaged equipment.
(a) Application. Protective equipment, Defective or damaged personal protec-
including personal protective equip- tive equipment shall not be used.
ment for eyes, face, head, and extrem- (f) Training. (1) The employer shall
ities, protective clothing, respiratory provide training to each employee who
devices, and protective shields and bar- is required by this section to use PPE.
riers, shall be provided, used, and Each such employee shall be trained to
maintained in a sanitary and reliable know at least the following:
condition wherever it is necessary by (i) When PPE is necessary;
reason of hazards of processes or envi- (ii) What PPE is necessary;
ronment, chemical hazards, radio- (iii) How to properly don, doff, ad-
logical hazards, or mechanical irri- just, and wear PPE;
tants encountered in a manner capable (iv) The limitations of the PPE; and,
of causing injury or impairment in the (v) The proper care, maintenance,

function of any part of the body useful life and disposal of the PPE.
417
(2) Each affected employee shall dem- (iii) Ordinary clothing, skin creams,
onstrate an understanding of the train- or other items, used solely for protec-
ing specified in paragraph (f)(1) of this tion from weather, such as winter
section, and the ability to use PPE coats, jackets, gloves, parkas, rubber
properly, before being allowed to per- boots, hats, raincoats, ordinary sun-
form work requiring the use of PPE. glasses, and sunscreen.
(3) When the employer has reason to (5) The employer must pay for re-
believe that any affected employee who placement PPE, except when the em-
has already been trained does not have ployee has lost or intentionally dam-
the understanding and skill required by aged the PPE.
paragraph (f)(2) of this section, the em- (6) Where an employee provides ade-
ployer shall retrain each such em- quate protective equipment he or she
ployee. Circumstances where retrain- owns pursuant to paragraph (b) of this
ing is required include, but are not lim- section, the employer may allow the
ited to, situations where: employee to use it and is not required
(i) Changes in the workplace render to reimburse the employee for that
previous training obsolete; or equipment. The employer shall not re-
(ii) Changes in the types of PPE to be quire an employee to provide or pay for
used render previous training obsolete; his or her own PPE, unless the PPE is
or excepted by paragraphs (h)(2) through
(iii) Inadequacies in an affected em- (h)(5) of this section.
ployee’s knowledge or use of assigned (7) This paragraph (h) shall become
PPE indicate that the employee has effective on February 13, 2008. Employ-
not retained the requisite under- ers must implement the PPE payment
standing or skill. requirements no later than May 15,
(g) Paragraphs (d) and (f) of this sec- 2008.
tion apply only to §§ 1910.133, 1910.135, NOTE TO § 1910.132(h): When the provisions
1910.136, 1910.138, and 1910.140. Para- of another OSHA standard specify whether
graphs (d) and (f) of this section do not or not the employer must pay for specific
apply to §§ 1910.134 and 1910.137. equipment, the payment provisions of that
(h) Payment for protective equipment. standard shall prevail.
(1) Except as provided by paragraphs [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 59
(h)(2) through (h)(6) of this section, the FR 16334, Apr. 6, 1994; 59 FR 33910, July 1,
protective equipment, including per- 1994; 72 FR 64428, Nov. 15, 2007; 76 FR 33606,
sonal protective equipment (PPE), used June 8, 2011; 81 FR 82999, Nov. 18, 2016]
to comply with this part, shall be pro-
vided by the employer at no cost to § 1910.133 Eye and face protection.
employees. (a) General requirements. (1) The em-
(2) The employer is not required to ployer shall ensure that each affected
pay for non-specialty safety-toe protec- employee uses appropriate eye or face
tive footwear (including steel-toe shoes protection when exposed to eye or face
or steel-toe boots) and non-specialty hazards from flying particles, molten
prescription safety eyewear, provided metal, liquid chemicals, acids or caus-
that the employer permits such items tic liquids, chemical gases or vapors, or
to be worn off the job-site. potentially injurious light radiation.
(3) When the employer provides (2) The employer shall ensure that
metatarsal guards and allows the em- each affected employee uses eye pro-
ployee, at his or her request, to use tection that provides side protection
shoes or boots with built-in metatarsal when there is a hazard from flying ob-
protection, the employer is not re- jects. Detachable side protectors (e.g.
quired to reimburse the employee for clip-on or slide-on side shields) meeting
the shoes or boots. the pertinent requirements of this sec-
(4) The employer is not required to tion are acceptable.
pay for: (3) The employer shall ensure that
(i) The logging boots required by 29 each affected employee who wears pre-
CFR 1910.266(d)(1)(v); scription lenses while engaged in oper-
(ii) Everyday clothing, such as long- ations that involve eye hazards wears
sleeve shirts, long pants, street shoes, eye protection that incorporates the
and normal work boots; or prescription in its design, or wears eye
418
protection that can be worn over the (5) The employer shall ensure that
prescription lenses without disturbing each affected employee uses equipment
the proper position of the prescription with filter lenses that have a shade
lenses or the protective lenses. number appropriate for the work being
(4) Eye and face PPE shall be dis- performed for protection from inju-
tinctly marked to facilitate identifica- rious light radiation. The following is a
tion of the manufacturer. listing of appropriate shade numbers
for various operations.
Filter Lenses for Protection Against Radiant Energy
Minimum* Pro-
Operations Electrode Size 1⁄32 in. Arc Current tective Shade
Shielded metal arc welding Less than 3 ............... Less than 60 ............. 7
3-5 ............................. 60-160 ....................... 8
5-8 ............................. 160-250 ..................... 10
More than 8 ............... 250-550 ..................... 11
Gas metal arc welding and less than 60 ............... 7

flux cored arc welding
60-160 ....................... 10
160-250 ..................... 10
250-500 ..................... 10
Gas Tungsten arc welding less than 50 ............... 8

50-150 ....................... 8
150-500 ..................... 10
Air carbon (Light) ........................ less than 500 ............. 10

Arc cutting (Heavy) ...................... 500-1000 ................... 11
Plasma arc welding less than 20 ............... 6

20-100 ....................... 8
100-400 ..................... 10
400-800 ..................... 11
Plasma arc cutting (light)** ....................... less than 300 ............. 8

(medium)** ................ 300-400 ..................... 9
(heavy)** .................... 400-800 ..................... 10
Torch brazing .................................... 3

Torch soldering .................................... 2
Carbon arc welding .................................... 14
419
Filter Lenses for Protection Against Radiant Energy
Plate thickness— Minimum* Pro-

Operations Plate thickness—mm
inches tective Shade
Gas Welding:
Light Under 1/8 .................. Under 3.2 .................. 4
Medium 1/8 to 1/2 ................... 3.2 to 12.7 ................. 5
Heavy Over 1/2 .................... Over 12.7 .................. 6
Oxygen cutting:
Light Under 1 ..................... Under 25 ................... 3
Medium 1 to 6 ......................... 25 to 150 ................... 4
Heavy Over 6 ....................... Over 150 ................... 5
* As a rule of thumb, start with a shade that is too dark to see the weld zone. Then go to a
lighter shade which gives sufficient view of the weld zone without going below the minimum. In
oxyfuel gas welding or cutting where the torch produces a high yellow light, it is desirable to use
a filter lens that absorbs the yellow or sodium line in the visible light of the (spectrum) operation.
** These values apply where the actual arc is clearly seen. Experience has shown that lighter
filters may be used when the arc is hidden by the workpiece.
(b) Criteria for protective eye and face (a) Permissible practice. (1) In the con-
protection. (1) Protective eye and face trol of those occupational diseases
protection devices must comply with caused by breathing air contaminated
any of the following consensus stand- with harmful dusts, fogs, fumes, mists,
ards: gases, smokes, sprays, or vapors, the
(i) ANSI/ISEA Z87.1–2010, Occupa- primary objective shall be to prevent
tional and Educational Personal Eye atmospheric contamination. This shall
and Face Protection Devices, incor- be accomplished as far as feasible by
porated by reference in § 1910.6; accepted engineering control measures
(ii) ANSI Z87.1–2003, Occupational (for example, enclosure or confinement
and Educational Personal Eye and of the operation, general and local ven-
Face Protection Devices, incorporated tilation, and substitution of less toxic
by reference in § 1910.6; or materials). When effective engineering
(iii) ANSI Z87.1–1989 (R–1998), Prac- controls are not feasible, or while they
tice for Occupational and Educational are being instituted, appropriate res-
Eye and Face Protection, incorporated pirators shall be used pursuant to this
by reference in § 1910.6; section.
(2) Protective eye and face protection (2) A respirator shall be provided to
devices that the employer dem- each employee when such equipment is
onstrates are at least as effective as necessary to protect the health of such
protective eye and face protection de- employee. The employer shall provide
vices that are constructed in accord- the respirators which are applicable
ance with one of the above consensus and suitable for the purpose intended.
standards will be deemed to be in com- The employer shall be responsible for
pliance with the requirements of this the establishment and maintenance of
section. a respiratory protection program,
[59 FR 16360, Apr. 6, 1994; 59 FR 33911, July 1, which shall include the requirements
1994, as amended at 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; outlined in paragraph (c) of this sec-
61 FR 19548, May 2, 1996; 74 FR 46356, Sept. 9, tion. The program shall cover each em-
2009; 81 FR 16090, Mar. 25, 2016] ployee required by this section to use a
respirator.
§ 1910.134 Respiratory protection. (b) Definitions. The following defini-
This section applies to General In- tions are important terms used in the
dustry (part 1910), Shipyards (part respiratory protection standard in this
1915), Marine Terminals (part 1917), section.
Longshoring (part 1918), and Construc- Air-purifying respirator means a res-

tion (part 1926). pirator with an air-purifying filter,
420
cartridge, or canister that removes spe- piece composed of the filtering me-
cific air contaminants by passing am- dium.
bient air through the air-purifying ele- Fit factor means a quantitative esti-
ment. mate of the fit of a particular res-
Assigned protection factor (APF) means pirator to a specific individual, and
the workplace level of respiratory pro- typically estimates the ratio of the
tection that a respirator or class of res- concentration of a substance in ambi-
pirators is expected to provide to em- ent air to its concentration inside the
ployees when the employer implements respirator when worn.
a continuing, effective respiratory pro- Fit test means the use of a protocol to
tection program as specified by this qualitatively or quantitatively evalu-
section.
ate the fit of a respirator on an indi-
Atmosphere-supplying respirator means
vidual. (See also Qualitative fit test
a respirator that supplies the res-
QLFT and Quantitative fit test QNFT.)
pirator user with breathing air from a
source independent of the ambient at- Helmet means a rigid respiratory
mosphere, and includes supplied-air inlet covering that also provides head
respirators (SARs) and self-contained protection against impact and penetra-
breathing apparatus (SCBA) units. tion.
Canister or cartridge means a con- High efficiency particulate air (HEPA)
tainer with a filter, sorbent, or cata- filter means a filter that is at least
lyst, or combination of these items, 99.97% efficient in removing
which removes specific contaminants monodisperse particles of 0.3 microm-
from the air passed through the con- eters in diameter. The equivalent
tainer. NIOSH 42 CFR 84 particulate filters are
Demand respirator means an atmos- the N100, R100, and P100 filters.
phere-supplying respirator that admits Hood means a respiratory inlet cov-
breathing air to the facepiece only ering that completely covers the head
when a negative pressure is created in- and neck and may also cover portions
side the facepiece by inhalation. of the shoulders and torso.
Emergency situation means any occur- Immediately dangerous to life or health
rence such as, but not limited to, (IDLH) means an atmosphere that
equipment failure, rupture of con- poses an immediate threat to life,
tainers, or failure of control equipment would cause irreversible adverse health
that may or does result in an uncon- effects, or would impair an individual’s
trolled significant release of an air- ability to escape from a dangerous at-
borne contaminant. mosphere.
Employee exposure means exposure to Interior structural firefighting means
a concentration of an airborne con- the physical activity of fire suppres-
taminant that would occur if the em-
sion, rescue or both, inside of buildings
ployee were not using respiratory pro-
or enclosed structures which are in-
tection.
volved in a fire situation beyond the
End-of-service-life indicator (ESLI)
incipient stage. (See 29 CFR 1910.155)
means a system that warns the res-
pirator user of the approach of the end Loose-fitting facepiece means a res-
of adequate respiratory protection, for piratory inlet covering that is designed
example, that the sorbent is approach- to form a partial seal with the face.
ing saturation or is no longer effective. Maximum use concentration (MUC)
Escape-only respirator means a res- means the maximum atmospheric con-
pirator intended to be used only for centration of a hazardous substance
emergency exit. from which an employee can be ex-
Filter or air purifying element means a pected to be protected when wearing a
component used in respirators to re- respirator, and is determined by the as-
move solid or liquid aerosols from the signed protection factor of the res-
inspired air. pirator or class of respirators and the
Filtering facepiece (dust mask) means exposure limit of the hazardous sub-
a negative pressure particulate res- stance. The MUC can be determined
pirator with a filter as an integral part mathematically by multiplying the as-

of the facepiece or with the entire face- signed protection factor specified for a
421
respirator by the required OSHA per- Self-contained breathing apparatus

missible exposure limit, short-term ex- (SCBA) means an atmosphere-sup-
posure limit, or ceiling limit. When no plying respirator for which the breath-
OSHA exposure limit is available for a ing air source is designed to be carried
hazardous substance, an employer by the user.
must determine an MUC on the basis of Service life means the period of time
relevant available information and in- that a respirator, filter or sorbent, or
formed professional judgment. other respiratory equipment provides
Negative pressure respirator (tight fit- adequate protection to the wearer.
ting) means a respirator in which the Supplied-air respirator (SAR) or airline
air pressure inside the facepiece is neg- respirator means an atmosphere-sup-
ative during inhalation with respect to plying respirator for which the source
the ambient air pressure outside the of breathing air is not designed to be
respirator. carried by the user.
Oxygen deficient atmosphere means an This section means this respiratory
atmosphere with an oxygen content protection standard.
below 19.5% by volume.
Tight-fitting facepiece means a res-
Physician or other licensed health care
piratory inlet covering that forms a
professional (PLHCP) means an indi-
complete seal with the face.
vidual whose legally permitted scope of
practice (i.e., license, registration, or User seal check means an action con-
certification) allows him or her to ducted by the respirator user to deter-
independently provide, or be delegated mine if the respirator is properly seat-
the responsibility to provide, some or ed to the face.
all of the health care services required (c) Respiratory protection program.
by paragraph (e) of this section. This paragraph requires the employer
Positive pressure respirator means a to develop and implement a written
respirator in which the pressure inside respiratory protection program with
the respiratory inlet covering exceeds required worksite-specific procedures
the ambient air pressure outside the and elements for required respirator
respirator. use. The program must be administered
Powered air-purifying respirator by a suitably trained program adminis-
(PAPR) means an air-purifying res- trator. In addition, certain program
pirator that uses a blower to force the elements may be required for vol-
ambient air through air-purifying ele- untary use to prevent potential haz-
ments to the inlet covering. ards associated with the use of the res-
Pressure demand respirator means a pirator. The Small Entity Compliance
positive pressure atmosphere-supplying Guide contains criteria for the selec-
respirator that admits breathing air to tion of a program administrator and a
the facepiece when the positive pres- sample program that meets the re-
sure is reduced inside the facepiece by quirements of this paragraph. Copies of
inhalation. the Small Entity Compliance Guide
Qualitative fit test (QLFT) means a will be available on or about April 8,
pass/fail fit test to assess the adequacy 1998 from the Occupational Safety and
of respirator fit that relies on the indi- Health Administration’s Office of Pub-
vidual’s response to the test agent. lications, Room N 3101, 200 Constitu-
Quantitative fit test (QNFT) means an tion Avenue, NW, Washington, DC,
assessment of the adequacy of res- 20210 (202–219–4667).
pirator fit by numerically measuring (1) In any workplace where res-
the amount of leakage into the respirators are necessary to protect the
pirator. health of the employee or whenever
Respiratory inlet covering means that respirators are required by the em-
portion of a respirator that forms the ployer, the employer shall establish
protective barrier between the user’s and implement a written respiratory
respiratory tract and an air-purifying protection program with worksite-spe-
device or breathing air source, or both. cific procedures. The program shall be
It may be a facepiece, helmet, hood, updated as necessary to reflect those
suit, or a mouthpiece respirator with changes in workplace conditions that

nose clamp. affect respirator use. The employer
422
shall include in the program the fol- employees whose only use of res-
lowing provisions of this section, as ap- pirators involves the voluntary use of
plicable: filtering facepieces (dust masks).
(i) Procedures for selecting res- (3) The employer shall designate a
pirators for use in the workplace; program administrator who is qualified
(ii) Medical evaluations of employees by appropriate training or experience
required to use respirators; that is commensurate with the com-
(iii) Fit testing procedures for tight- plexity of the program to administer or
fitting respirators; oversee the respiratory protection pro-
(iv) Procedures for proper use of res- gram and conduct the required evalua-
pirators in routine and reasonably fore- tions of program effectiveness.
seeable emergency situations; (4) The employer shall provide res-
(v) Procedures and schedules for pirators, training, and medical evalua-
cleaning, disinfecting, storing, inspect- tions at no cost to the employee.
ing, repairing, discarding, and other- (d) Selection of respirators. This para-
wise maintaining respirators; graph requires the employer to evalu-
(vi) Procedures to ensure adequate ate respiratory hazard(s) in the work-
air quality, quantity, and flow of place, identify relevant workplace and
breathing air for atmosphere-supplying user factors, and base respirator selec-
respirators; tion on these factors. The paragraph
(vii) Training of employees in the
also specifies appropriately protective
respiratory hazards to which they are
respirators for use in IDLH
potentially exposed during routine and
atmospheres, and limits the selection
emergency situations;
and use of air-purifying respirators.
(viii) Training of employees in the
(1) General requirements. (i) The em-
proper use of respirators, including
ployer shall select and provide an ap-
putting on and removing them, any
propriate respirator based on the res-
limitations on their use, and their
piratory hazard(s) to which the worker
maintenance; and
is exposed and workplace and user fac-
(ix) Procedures for regularly evalu-
tors that affect respirator performance
ating the effectiveness of the program.
and reliability.
(2) Where respirator use is not re-
quired: (ii) The employer shall select a
(i) An employer may provide res- NIOSH-certified respirator. The res-
pirators at the request of employees or pirator shall be used in compliance
permit employees to use their own res- with the conditions of its certification.
pirators, if the employer determines (iii) The employer shall identify and
that such respirator use will not in evaluate the respiratory hazard(s) in
itself create a hazard. If the employer the workplace; this evaluation shall in-
determines that any voluntary res- clude a reasonable estimate of em-
pirator use is permissible, the employee exposures to respiratory haz-
ployer shall provide the respirator ard(s) and an identification of the con-
users with the information contained taminant’s chemical state and physical
in appendix D to this section (‘‘Infor- form. Where the employer cannot iden-
mation for Employees Using Res- tify or reasonably estimate the em-
pirators When Not Required Under the ployee exposure, the employer shall
Standard’’); and consider the atmosphere to be IDLH.
(ii) In addition, the employer must (iv) The employer shall select res-
establish and implement those ele- pirators from a sufficient number of
ments of a written respiratory protec- respirator models and sizes so that the
tion program necessary to ensure that respirator is acceptable to, and cor-
any employee using a respirator volun- rectly fits, the user.
tarily is medically able to use that res- (2) Respirators for IDLH atmospheres.
pirator, and that the respirator is (i) The employer shall provide the fol-
cleaned, stored, and maintained so that lowing respirators for employee use in
its use does not present a health hazard IDLH atmospheres:
to the user. Exception: Employers are (A) A full facepiece pressure demand
not required to include in a written SCBA certified by NIOSH for a min-

respiratory protection program those imum service life of thirty minutes, or
423
(B) A combination full facepiece pres- vide a respirator that is adequate to

sure demand supplied-air respirator protect the health of the employee and
(SAR) with auxiliary self-contained air ensure compliance with all other OSHA
supply. statutory and regulatory requirements,
(ii) Respirators provided only for es- under routine and reasonably foresee-
cape from IDLH atmospheres shall be able emergency situations.
NIOSH-certified for escape from the at- (A) Assigned Protection Factors (APFs).
mosphere in which they will be used. Employers must use the assigned pro-
(iii) All oxygen-deficient
tection factors listed in Table 1 to se-
atmospheres shall be considered IDLH.
Exception: If the employer dem- lect a respirator that meets or exceeds
onstrates that, under all foreseeable the required level of employee protec-
conditions, the oxygen concentration tion. When using a combination res-
can be maintained within the ranges pirator (e.g., airline respirators with an
specified in Table II of this section air-purifying filter), employers must
(i.e., for the altitudes set out in the ensure that the assigned protection
table), then any atmosphere-supplying factor is appropriate to the mode of op-
respirator may be used. eration in which the respirator is being
(3) Respirators for atmospheres that are used.
not IDLH. (i) The employer shall pro-
TABLE 1—ASSIGNED PROTECTION FACTORS 5
Quarter Full face- Helmet/ Loose-fitting
Type of respirator 1 2 Half mask
mask piece hood facepiece
1. Air-Purifying Respirator ............................................. 5 3 10 50 .................... ....................

2. Powered Air-Purifying Respirator (PAPR) ................ .................... 50 1,000 4 25/1,000 25
3. Supplied-Air Respirator (SAR) or Airline Respirator.
• Demand mode ............................................. .................... 10 50 .................... ....................
• Continuous flow mode ................................ .................... 50 1,000 4 25/1,000 25
• Pressure-demand or other positive-pres-
sure mode ................................................... .................... 50 1,000 .................... ....................
4. Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA).
• Demand mode ............................................. .................... 10 50 50 ....................
• Pressure-demand or other positive-pres-
sure mode (e.g., open/closed circuit) ......... .................... .................... 10,000 10,000 ....................
Notes:
1 Employers may select respirators assigned for use in higher workplace concentrations of a hazardous substance for use at
lower concentrations of that substance, or when required respirator use is independent of concentration.
2 The assigned protection factors in Table 1 are only effective when the employer implements a continuing, effective respirator
program as required by this section (29 CFR 1910.134), including training, fit testing, maintenance, and use requirements.
3 This APF category includes filtering facepieces, and half masks with elastomeric facepieces.
4 The employer must have evidence provided by the respirator manufacturer that testing of these respirators demonstrates per-
formance at a level of protection of 1,000 or greater to receive an APF of 1,000. This level of performance can best be dem-
onstrated by performing a WPF or SWPF study or equivalent testing. Absent such testing, all other PAPRs and SARs with hel-
mets/hoods are to be treated as loose-fitting facepiece respirators, and receive an APF of 25.
5 These APFs do not apply to respirators used solely for escape. For escape respirators used in association with specific sub-
stances covered by 29 CFR 1910 subpart Z, employers must refer to the appropriate substance-specific standards in that sub-
part. Escape respirators for other IDLH atmospheres are specified by 29 CFR 1910.134 (d)(2)(ii).
(B) Maximum Use Concentration stance, or the performance limits of

(MUC). (1) The employer must select a the cartridge or canister, then employ-
respirator for employee use that main- ers must set the maximum MUC at
tains the employee’s exposure to the that lower limit.
hazardous substance, when measured (ii) The respirator selected shall be
outside the respirator, at or below the appropriate for the chemical state and
MUC. physical form of the contaminant.
(2) Employers must not apply MUCs (iii) For protection against gases and
to conditions that are immediately
vapors, the employer shall provide:
dangerous to life or health (IDLH); in-
(A) An atmosphere-supplying res-
stead, they must use respirators listed
for IDLH conditions in paragraph (d)(2) pirator, or
of this standard. (B) An air-purifying respirator, pro-
(3) When the calculated MUC exceeds vided that:

the IDLH level for a hazardous sub-
424
(1) The respirator is equipped with an quirements for medical evaluation that
end-of-service-life indicator (ESLI) cer- employers must implement to deter-
tified by NIOSH for the contaminant; mine the employee’s ability to use a
or respirator.
(2) If there is no ESLI appropriate for (1) General. The employer shall pro-
conditions in the employer’s work- vide a medical evaluation to determine
place, the employer implements a the employee’s ability to use a res-
change schedule for canisters and car- pirator, before the employee is fit test-
tridges that is based on objective infor- ed or required to use the respirator in
mation or data that will ensure that the workplace. The employer may dis-
canisters and cartridges are changed continue an employee’s medical eval-
before the end of their service life. The uations when the employee is no longer
employer shall describe in the res- required to use a respirator.
pirator program the information and
(2) Medical evaluation procedures. (i)
data relied upon and the basis for the
The employer shall identify a physi-
canister and cartridge change schedule
cian or other licensed health care pro-
and the basis for reliance on the data.
fessional (PLHCP) to perform medical
(iv) For protection against particu-
lates, the employer shall provide: evaluations using a medical question-
(A) An atmosphere-supplying res- naire or an initial medical examination
pirator; or that obtains the same information as
(B) An air-purifying respirator the medical questionnaire.
equipped with a filter certified by (ii) The medical evaluation shall ob-
NIOSH under 30 CFR part 11 as a high tain the information requested by the
efficiency particulate air (HEPA) fil- questionnaire in Sections 1 and 2, part
ter, or an air-purifying respirator A of appendix C of this section.
equipped with a filter certified for par- (3) Follow-up medical examination. (i)
ticulates by NIOSH under 42 CFR part The employer shall ensure that a fol-
84; or low-up medical examination is pro-
(C) For contaminants consisting pri- vided for an employee who gives a posi-
marily of particles with mass median tive response to any question among
aerodynamic diameters (MMAD) of at questions 1 through 8 in Section 2, part
least 2 micrometers, an air-purifying A of appendix C or whose initial med-
respirator equipped with any filter cer- ical examination demonstrates the
tified for particulates by NIOSH. need for a follow-up medical examina-
tion.
TABLE I—ASSIGNED PROTECTION (ii) The follow-up medical examina-
FACTORS [RESERVED] tion shall include any medical tests,
consultations, or diagnostic procedures
TABLE II
that the PLHCP deems necessary to
Oxygen deficient make a final determination.
Atmospheres (% 02) for
Altitude (ft.) which the employer may rely (4) Administration of the medical ques-
on atmosphere-supplying res- tionnaire and examinations. (i) The med-
pirators
ical questionnaire and examinations
Less than 3,001 ..................... 16.0–19.5 shall be administered confidentially
3,001–4,000 ........................... 16.4–19.5 during the employee’s normal working
4,001–5,000 ........................... 17.1–19.5
5,001–6,000 ........................... 17.8–19.5
hours or at a time and place conven-
6,001–7,000 ........................... 18.5–19.5 ient to the employee. The medical
7,001–8,000 1 ......................... 19.3–19.5. questionnaire shall be administered in
1 Above 8,000 feet the exception does not apply. Oxygen- a manner that ensures that the em-
enriched breathing air must be supplied above 14,000 feet. ployee understands its content.
(e) Medical evaluation. Using a res- (ii) The employer shall provide the
pirator may place a physiological bur- employee with an opportunity to dis-
den on employees that varies with the cuss the questionnaire and examina-
type of respirator worn, the job and tion results with the PLHCP.
workplace conditions in which the res- (5) Supplemental information for the
pirator is used, and the medical status PLHCP. (i) The following information
of the employee. Accordingly, this must be provided to the PLHCP before

paragraph specifies the minimum re- the PLHCP makes a recommendation
425
concerning an employee’s ability to use the PLHCP’s medical evaluation finds

a respirator: that the employee can use such a res-
(A) The type and weight of the respirator; if a subsequent medical eval-
pirator to be used by the employee; uation finds that the employee is medi-
(B) The duration and frequency of cally able to use a negative pressure
respirator use (including use for rescue respirator, then the employer is no
and escape); longer required to provide a PAPR.
(C) The expected physical work ef- (7) Additional medical evaluations. At a
fort; minimum, the employer shall provide
(D) Additional protective clothing additional medical evaluations that
and equipment to be worn; and comply with the requirements of this
(E) Temperature and humidity ex- section if:
tremes that may be encountered. (i) An employee reports medical signs
(ii) Any supplemental information or symptoms that are related to ability
provided previously to the PLHCP re- to use a respirator;
garding an employee need not be pro- (ii) A PLHCP, supervisor, or the res-
vided for a subsequent medical evalua- pirator program administrator informs
tion if the information and the PLHCP the employer that an employee needs
remain the same. to be reevaluated;
(iii) The employer shall provide the (iii) Information from the respiratory
PLHCP with a copy of the written res- protection program, including observa-
piratory protection program and a tions made during fit testing and pro-
copy of this section. gram evaluation, indicates a need for
employee reevaluation; or
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (e)(5)(iii): When the
employer replaces a PLHCP, the employer
(iv) A change occurs in workplace
must ensure that the new PLHCP obtains conditions (e.g., physical work effort,
this information, either by providing the protective clothing, temperature) that
documents directly to the PLHCP or having may result in a substantial increase in
the documents transferred from the former the physiological burden placed on an
PLHCP to the new PLHCP. However, OSHA employee.
does not expect employers to have employees (f) Fit testing. This paragraph requires
medically reevaluated solely because a new that, before an employee may be re-
PLHCP has been selected.
quired to use any respirator with a
(6) Medical determination. In deter- negative or positive pressure tight-fit-
mining the employee’s ability to use a ting facepiece, the employee must be
respirator, the employer shall: fit tested with the same make, model,
(i) Obtain a written recommendation style, and size of respirator that will be
regarding the employee’s ability to use used. This paragraph specifies the
the respirator from the PLHCP. The kinds of fit tests allowed, the proce-
recommendation shall provide only the dures for conducting them, and how
following information: the results of the fit tests must be
(A) Any limitations on respirator use used.
related to the medical condition of the (1) The employer shall ensure that
employee, or relating to the workplace employees using a tight-fitting face-
conditions in which the respirator will piece respirator pass an appropriate
be used, including whether or not the qualitative fit test (QLFT) or quan-
employee is medically able to use the titative fit test (QNFT) as stated in
respirator; this paragraph.
(B) The need, if any, for follow-up (2) The employer shall ensure that an
medical evaluations; and employee using a tight-fitting face-
(C) A statement that the PLHCP has piece respirator is fit tested prior to
provided the employee with a copy of initial use of the respirator, whenever
the PLHCP’s written recommendation. a different respirator facepiece (size,
(ii) If the respirator is a negative style, model or make) is used, and at
pressure respirator and the PLHCP least annually thereafter.
finds a medical condition that may (3) The employer shall conduct an ad-
place the employee’s health at in- ditional fit test whenever the employee
creased risk if the respirator is used, reports, or the employer, PLHCP, su-
the employer shall provide a PAPR if pervisor, or program administrator
426
makes visual observations of, changes stalling a permanent sampling probe

in the employee’s physical condition onto a surrogate facepiece, or by using
that could affect respirator fit. Such a sampling adapter designed to tempo-
conditions include, but are not limited rarily provide a means of sampling air
to, facial scarring, dental changes, cos- from inside the facepiece.
metic surgery, or an obvious change in (iii) Any modifications to the res-
body weight. pirator facepiece for fit testing shall be
(4) If after passing a QLFT or QNFT, completely removed, and the facepiece
the employee subsequently notifies the restored to NIOSH-approved configura-
employer, program administrator, su- tion, before that facepiece can be used
pervisor, or PLHCP that the fit of the in the workplace.
respirator is unacceptable, the em- (g) Use of respirators. This paragraph
ployee shall be given a reasonable op- requires employers to establish and im-
portunity to select a different res- plement procedures for the proper use
pirator facepiece and to be retested. of respirators. These requirements in-
(5) The fit test shall be administered clude prohibiting conditions that may
using an OSHA-accepted QLFT or result in facepiece seal leakage, pre-
QNFT protocol. The OSHA-accepted venting employees from removing res-
QLFT and QNFT protocols and proce- pirators in hazardous environments,
dures are contained in appendix A of taking actions to ensure continued ef-
this section. fective respirator operation throughout
(6) QLFT may only be used to fit test the work shift, and establishing proce-
negative pressure air-purifying res- dures for the use of respirators in IDLH
pirators that must achieve a fit factor atmospheres or in interior structural
of 100 or less. firefighting situations.
(7) If the fit factor, as determined
(1) Facepiece seal protection. (i) The
through an OSHA-accepted QNFT pro-
employer shall not permit respirators
tocol, is equal to or greater than 100 for
with tight-fitting facepieces to be worn
tight-fitting half facepieces, or equal
by employees who have:
to or greater than 500 for tight-fitting
full facepieces, the QNFT has been (A) Facial hair that comes between
passed with that respirator. the sealing surface of the facepiece and
(8) Fit testing of tight-fitting atmos- the face or that interferes with valve
phere-supplying respirators and tight- function; or
fitting powered air-purifying res- (B) Any condition that interferes
pirators shall be accomplished by per- with the face-to-facepiece seal or valve
forming quantitative or qualitative fit function.
testing in the negative pressure mode, (ii) If an employee wears corrective
regardless of the mode of operation glasses or goggles or other personal
(negative or positive pressure) that is protective equipment, the employer
used for respiratory protection. shall ensure that such equipment is
(i) Qualitative fit testing of these res- worn in a manner that does not inter-
pirators shall be accomplished by tem- fere with the seal of the facepiece to
porarily converting the respirator the face of the user.
user’s actual facepiece into a negative (iii) For all tight-fitting respirators,
pressure respirator with appropriate the employer shall ensure that employ-
filters, or by using an identical nega- ees perform a user seal check each
tive pressure air-purifying respirator time they put on the respirator using
facepiece with the same sealing sur- the procedures in appendix B–1 or pro-
faces as a surrogate for the atmos- cedures recommended by the respirator
phere-supplying or powered air-puri- manufacturer that the employer dem-
fying respirator facepiece. onstrates are as effective as those in
(ii) Quantitative fit testing of these appendix B–1 of this section.
respirators shall be accomplished by (2) Continuing respirator effectiveness.
modifying the facepiece to allow sam- (i) Appropriate surveillance shall be
pling inside the facepiece in the maintained of work area conditions
breathing zone of the user, midway be- and degree of employee exposure or
tween the nose and mouth. This re- stress. When there is a change in work
quirement shall be accomplished by in- area conditions or degree of employee
427
exposure or stress that may affect res- and would not increase the overall risk
pirator effectiveness, the employer resulting from entry; or
shall reevaluate the continued effec- (C) Equivalent means for rescue
tiveness of the respirator. where retrieval equipment is not re-
(ii) The employer shall ensure that quired under paragraph (g)(3)(vi)(B).
employees leave the respirator use (4) Procedures for interior structural
area: firefighting. In addition to the require-
(A) To wash their faces and res- ments set forth under paragraph (g)(3),
pirator facepieces as necessary to pre- in interior structural fires, the em-
vent eye or skin irritation associated ployer shall ensure that:
with respirator use; or (i) At least two employees enter the
(B) If they detect vapor or gas break- IDLH atmosphere and remain in visual
through, changes in breathing resist- or voice contact with one another at
ance, or leakage of the facepiece; or all times;
(ii) At least two employees are lo-
(C) To replace the respirator or the
cated outside the IDLH atmosphere;
filter, cartridge, or canister elements.
and
(iii) If the employee detects vapor or (iii) All employees engaged in inte-
gas breakthrough, changes in breath- rior structural firefighting use SCBAs.
ing resistance, or leakage of the face-
piece, the employer must replace or re- NOTE 1 TO PARAGRAPH (g): One of the two
pair the respirator before allowing the individuals located outside the IDLH atmos-
phere may be assigned to an additional role,
employee to return to the work area. such as incident commander in charge of the
(3) Procedures for IDLH atmospheres. emergency or safety officer, so long as this
For all IDLH atmospheres, the em- individual is able to perform assistance or
ployer shall ensure that: rescue activities without jeopardizing the
(i) One employee or, when needed, safety or health of any firefighter working at
more than one employee is located out- the incident.
NOTE 2 TO PARAGRAPH (g): Nothing in this
side the IDLH atmosphere; section is meant to preclude firefighters
(ii) Visual, voice, or signal line com- from performing emergency rescue activities
munication is maintained between the before an entire team has assembled.
employee(s) in the IDLH atmosphere
(h) Maintenance and care of res-
and the employee(s) located outside
pirators. This paragraph requires the
the IDLH atmosphere;
employer to provide for the cleaning
(iii) The employee(s) located outside and disinfecting, storage, inspection,
the IDLH atmosphere are trained and and repair of respirators used by em-
equipped to provide effective emer- ployees.
gency rescue; (1) Cleaning and disinfecting. The em-
(iv) The employer or designee is noti- ployer shall provide each respirator
fied before the employee(s) located out- user with a respirator that is clean,
side the IDLH atmosphere enter the sanitary, and in good working order.
IDLH atmosphere to provide emer- The employer shall ensure that res-
gency rescue; pirators are cleaned and disinfected
(v) The employer or designee author- using the procedures in appendix B–2 of
ized to do so by the employer, once no- this section, or procedures rec-
tified, provides necessary assistance ommended by the respirator manufac-
appropriate to the situation; turer, provided that such procedures
(vi) Employee(s) located outside the are of equivalent effectiveness. The
IDLH atmospheres are equipped with: respirators shall be cleaned and dis-
(A) Pressure demand or other posi- infected at the following intervals:
tive pressure SCBAs, or a pressure de- (i) Respirators issued for the exclu-
mand or other positive pressure sup- sive use of an employee shall be
plied-air respirator with auxiliary cleaned and disinfected as often as nec-
SCBA; and either essary to be maintained in a sanitary
(B) Appropriate retrieval equipment condition;
for removing the employee(s) who (ii) Respirators issued to more than
enter(s) these hazardous atmospheres one employee shall be cleaned and dis-
where retrieval equipment would con- infected before being worn by different
tribute to the rescue of the employee(s) individuals;
428
(iii) Respirators maintained for falls to 90% of the manufacturer’s rec-

emergency use shall be cleaned and dis- ommended pressure level. The em-
infected after each use; and ployer shall determine that the regu-
(iv) Respirators used in fit testing lator and warning devices function
and training shall be cleaned and dis- properly.
infected after each use. (iv) For respirators maintained for
(2) Storage. The employer shall ensure emergency use, the employer shall:
that respirators are stored as follows: (A) Certify the respirator by docu-
(i) All respirators shall be stored to menting the date the inspection was
protect them from damage, contamina- performed, the name (or signature) of
tion, dust, sunlight, extreme tempera- the person who made the inspection,
tures, excessive moisture, and dam- the findings, required remedial action,
aging chemicals, and they shall be and a serial number or other means of
packed or stored to prevent deforma- identifying the inspected respirator;
tion of the facepiece and exhalation and
valve. (B) Provide this information on a tag
(ii) In addition to the requirements of or label that is attached to the storage
paragraph (h)(2)(i) of this section, compartment for the respirator, is kept
emergency respirators shall be: with the respirator, or is included in
(A) Kept accessible to the work area; inspection reports stored as paper or
(B) Stored in compartments or in
electronic files. This information shall
covers that are clearly marked as con-
be maintained until replaced following
taining emergency respirators; and
a subsequent certification.
(C) Stored in accordance with any ap-
(4) Repairs. The employer shall ensure
plicable manufacturer instructions.
that respirators that fail an inspection
(3) Inspection. (i) The employer shall
or are otherwise found to be defective
ensure that respirators are inspected as
are removed from service, and are dis-
follows:
carded or repaired or adjusted in ac-
(A) All respirators used in routine
cordance with the following proce-
situations shall be inspected before
dures:
each use and during cleaning;
(B) All respirators maintained for use (i) Repairs or adjustments to res-
in emergency situations shall be in- pirators are to be made only by persons
spected at least monthly and in accord- appropriately trained to perform such
ance with the manufacturer’s rec- operations and shall use only the res-
ommendations, and shall be checked pirator manufacturer’s NIOSH-ap-
for proper function before and after proved parts designed for the res-
each use; and pirator;
(C) Emergency escape-only res- (ii) Repairs shall be made according
pirators shall be inspected before being to the manufacturer’s recommenda-
carried into the workplace for use. tions and specifications for the type
(ii) The employer shall ensure that and extent of repairs to be performed;
respirator inspections include the fol- and
lowing: (iii) Reducing and admission valves,
(A) A check of respirator function, regulators, and alarms shall be ad-
tightness of connections, and the con- justed or repaired only by the manufac-
dition of the various parts including, turer or a technician trained by the
but not limited to, the facepiece, head manufacturer.
straps, valves, connecting tube, and (i) Breathing air quality and use. This
cartridges, canisters or filters; and paragraph requires the employer to
(B) A check of elastomeric parts for provide employees using atmosphere-
pliability and signs of deterioration. supplying respirators (supplied-air and
(iii) In addition to the requirements SCBA) with breathing gases of high pu-
of paragraphs (h)(3)(i) and (ii) of this rity.
section, self-contained breathing appa- (1) The employer shall ensure that
ratus shall be inspected monthly. Air compressed air, compressed oxygen,
and oxygen cylinders shall be main- liquid air, and liquid oxygen used for
tained in a fully charged state and respiration accords with the following
shall be recharged when the pressure specifications:
429
(i) Compressed and liquid oxygen ther ensure breathing air quality. Sor-
shall meet the United States Pharma- bent beds and filters shall be main-
copoeia requirements for medical or tained and replaced or refurbished peri-
breathing oxygen; and odically following the manufacturer’s
(ii) Compressed breathing air shall instructions.
meet at least the requirements for (iv) Have a tag containing the most
Grade D breathing air described in recent change date and the signature of
ANSI/Compressed Gas Association the person authorized by the employer
Commodity Specification for Air, G– to perform the change. The tag shall be
7.1–1989, to include: maintained at the compressor.
(A) Oxygen content (v/v) of 19.5– (6) For compressors that are not oil-
23.5%; lubricated, the employer shall ensure
(B) Hydrocarbon (condensed) content that carbon monoxide levels in the
of 5 milligrams per cubic meter of air breathing air do not exceed 10 ppm.
or less; (7) For oil-lubricated compressors,
(C) Carbon monoxide (CO) content of the employer shall use a high-tempera-
10 ppm or less; ture or carbon monoxide alarm, or
(D) Carbon dioxide content of 1,000 both, to monitor carbon monoxide lev-
ppm or less; and els. If only high-temperature alarms
(E) Lack of noticeable odor. are used, the air supply shall be mon-
(2) The employer shall ensure that
itored at intervals sufficient to prevent
compressed oxygen is not used in at-
carbon monoxide in the breathing air
mosphere-supplying respirators that
from exceeding 10 ppm.
have previously used compressed air.
(3) The employer shall ensure that (8) The employer shall ensure that
oxygen concentrations greater than breathing air couplings are incompat-
23.5% are used only in equipment de- ible with outlets for nonrespirable
signed for oxygen service or distribu- worksite air or other gas systems. No
tion. asphyxiating substance shall be intro-
(4) The employer shall ensure that duced into breathing air lines.
cylinders used to supply breathing air (9) The employer shall use only the
to respirators meet the following re- respirator manufacturer’s NIOSH-ap-
quirements: proved breathing-gas containers,
(i) Cylinders are tested and main- marked and maintained in accordance
tained as prescribed in the Shipping with the Quality Assurance provisions
Container Specification Regulations of of the NIOSH approval for the SCBA as
the Department of Transportation (49 issued in accordance with the NIOSH
CFR part 180); respirator-certification standard at 42
(ii) Cylinders of purchased breathing CFR part 84.
air have a certificate of analysis from (j) Identification of filters, cartridges,
the supplier that the breathing air and canisters. The employer shall en-
meets the requirements for Grade D sure that all filters, cartridges and can-
breathing air; and isters used in the workplace are labeled
(iii) The moisture content in the cyl- and color coded with the NIOSH ap-
inder does not exceed a dew point of proval label and that the label is not
¥50 °F (¥45.6 °C) at 1 atmosphere pres- removed and remains legible.
sure. (k) Training and information. This
(5) The employer shall ensure that paragraph requires the employer to
compressors used to supply breathing provide effective training to employees
air to respirators are constructed and who are required to use respirators.
situated so as to: The training must be comprehensive,
(i) Prevent entry of contaminated air understandable, and recur annually,
into the air-supply system; and more often if necessary. This para-
(ii) Minimize moisture content so graph also requires the employer to
that the dew point at 1 atmosphere provide the basic information on res-
pressure is 10 degrees F (5.56 °C) below pirators in appendix D of this section
the ambient temperature; to employees who wear respirators
(iii) Have suitable in-line air-puri- when not required by this section or by
fying sorbent beds and filters to fur- the employer to do so.
430
(1) The employer shall ensure that (6) The basic advisory information on
each employee can demonstrate knowl- respirators, as presented in appendix D
edge of at least the following: of this section, shall be provided by the
(i) Why the respirator is necessary employer in any written or oral for-
and how improper fit, usage, or mainte- mat, to employees who wear res-
nance can compromise the protective pirators when such use is not required
effect of the respirator; by this section or by the employer.
(ii) What the limitations and capa- (l) Program evaluation. This section
bilities of the respirator are; requires the employer to conduct eval-
(iii) How to use the respirator effec- uations of the workplace to ensure that
tively in emergency situations, includ- the written respiratory protection pro-
ing situations in which the respirator gram is being properly implemented,
malfunctions; and to consult employees to ensure
(iv) How to inspect, put on and re- that they are using the respirators
move, use, and check the seals of the properly.
respirator; (1) The employer shall conduct eval-
(v) What the procedures are for main- uations of the workplace as necessary
tenance and storage of the respirator; to ensure that the provisions of the
(vi) How to recognize medical signs current written program are being ef-
and symptoms that may limit or pre- fectively implemented and that it con-
vent the effective use of respirators; tinues to be effective.
and (2) The employer shall regularly con-
(vii) The general requirements of this sult employees required to use res-
section. pirators to assess the employees’ views
(2) The training shall be conducted in on program effectiveness and to iden-
a manner that is understandable to the tify any problems. Any problems that
employee. are identified during this assessment
(3) The employer shall provide the shall be corrected. Factors to be as-
training prior to requiring the em- sessed include, but are not limited to:
ployee to use a respirator in the work- (i) Respirator fit (including the abil-
place. ity to use the respirator without inter-
(4) An employer who is able to dem- fering with effective workplace per-
onstrate that a new employee has re- formance);
ceived training within the last 12 (ii) Appropriate respirator selection
months that addresses the elements for the hazards to which the employee
specified in paragraph (k)(1)(i) through is exposed;
(vii) is not required to repeat such (iii) Proper respirator use under the
training provided that, as required by workplace conditions the employee en-
paragraph (k)(1), the employee can counters; and
demonstrate knowledge of those ele- (iv) Proper respirator maintenance.
ment(s). Previous training not repeated (m) Recordkeeping. This section re-
initially by the employer must be pro- quires the employer to establish and
vided no later than 12 months from the retain written information regarding
date of the previous training. medical evaluations, fit testing, and
(5) Retraining shall be administered the respirator program. This informa-
annually, and when the following situ- tion will facilitate employee involve-
ations occur: ment in the respirator program, assist
(i) Changes in the workplace or the the employer in auditing the adequacy
type of respirator render previous of the program, and provide a record
training obsolete; for compliance determinations by
(ii) Inadequacies in the employee’s OSHA.
knowledge or use of the respirator indi- (1) Medical evaluation. Records of
cate that the employee has not re- medical evaluations required by this
tained the requisite understanding or section must be retained and made
skill; or available in accordance with 29 CFR
(iii) Any other situation arises in 1910.1020.
which retraining appears necessary to (2) Fit testing. (i) The employer shall
ensure safe respirator use. establish a record of the qualitative
431
and quantitative fit tests administered that provides the most acceptable fit. Each
to an employee including: respirator represents a different size and
(A) The name or identification of the shape, and if fitted and used properly, will
provide adequate protection.
employee tested; 4. The test subject shall be instructed to
(B) Type of fit test performed; hold each chosen facepiece up to the face and
(C) Specific make, model, style, and eliminate those that obviously do not give
size of respirator tested; an acceptable fit.
(D) Date of test; and 5. The more acceptable facepieces are
(E) The pass/fail results for QLFTs or noted in case the one selected proves unac-
the fit factor and strip chart recording ceptable; the most comfortable mask is
or other recording of the test results donned and worn at least five minutes to as-
sess comfort. Assistance in assessing comfort
for QNFTs. can be given by discussing the points in the
(ii) Fit test records shall be retained following item A.6. If the test subject is not
for respirator users until the next fit familiar with using a particular respirator,
test is administered. the test subject shall be directed to don the
(3) A written copy of the current res- mask several times and to adjust the straps
pirator program shall be retained by each time to become adept at setting proper
the employer. tension on the straps.
6. Assessment of comfort shall include a re-
(4) Written materials required to be
view of the following points with the test
retained under this paragraph shall be subject and allowing the test subject ade-
made available upon request to af- quate time to determine the comfort of the
fected employees and to the Assistant respirator:
Secretary or designee for examination (a) Position of the mask on the nose
and copying. (b) Room for eye protection
(n) Effective date. Paragraphs (c) Room to talk
(d)(3)(i)(A) and (d)(3)(i)(B) of this sec- (d) Position of mask on face and cheeks
7. The following criteria shall be used to
tion become effective November 22, help determine the adequacy of the res-
2006. pirator fit:
(o) Appendices. Compliance with ap- (a) Chin properly placed;
pendix A, appendix B–1, appendix B–2, (b) Adequate strap tension, not overly
appendix C, and appendix D to this sec- tightened;
tion are mandatory. (c) Fit across nose bridge;
(d) Respirator of proper size to span dis-
APPENDIX A TO § 1910.134—FIT TESTING tance from nose to chin;
PROCEDURES (MANDATORY) (e) Tendency of respirator to slip;
(f) Self-observation in mirror to evaluate
PART I. OSHA-ACCEPTED FIT TEST fit and respirator position.
PROTOCOLS 8. The test subject shall conduct a user
seal check, either the negative and positive
A. Fit Testing Procedures—General
pressure seal checks described in appendix
Requirements
B–1 of this section or those recommended by
The employer shall conduct fit testing the respirator manufacturer which provide
using the following procedures. The require- equivalent protection to the procedures in
ments in this appendix apply to all OSHA-ac- appendix B–1. Before conducting the negative
cepted fit test methods, both QLFT and and positive pressure checks, the subject
QNFT. shall be told to seat the mask on the face by
1. The test subject shall be allowed to pick moving the head from side-to-side and up
the most acceptable respirator from a suffi- and down slowly while taking in a few slow
cient number of respirator models and sizes deep breaths. Another facepiece shall be se-
so that the respirator is acceptable to, and lected and retested if the test subject fails
correctly fits, the user. the user seal check tests.
2. Prior to the selection process, the test 9. The test shall not be conducted if there
subject shall be shown how to put on a resis any hair growth between the skin and the
pirator, how it should be positioned on the facepiece sealing surface, such as stubble
face, how to set strap tension and how to de- beard growth, beard, mustache or sideburns
termine an acceptable fit. A mirror shall be which cross the respirator sealing surface.
available to assist the subject in evaluating Any type of apparel which interferes with a
the fit and positioning of the respirator. This satisfactory fit shall be altered or removed.
instruction may not constitute the subject’s 10. If a test subject exhibits difficulty in
formal training on respirator use, because it breathing during the tests, she or he shall be
is only a review. referred to a physician or other licensed

3. The test subject shall be informed that health care professional, as appropriate, to
he/she is being asked to select the respirator determine whether the test subject can wear
432
a respirator while performing her or his du- clearly by the test conductor. The subject
ties. can read from a prepared text such as the
11. If the employee finds the fit of the res- Rainbow Passage, count backward from 100,
pirator unacceptable, the test subject shall or recite a memorized poem or song.
be given the opportunity to select a different
respirator and to be retested. Rainbow Passage
12. Exercise regimen. Prior to the com- When the sunlight strikes raindrops in the
mencement of the fit test, the test subject air, they act like a prism and form a rain-
shall be given a description of the fit test bow. The rainbow is a division of white light
and the test subject’s responsibilities during into many beautiful colors. These take the
the test procedure. The description of the shape of a long round arch, with its path
process shall include a description of the test high above, and its two ends apparently be-
exercises that the subject will be performing. yond the horizon. There is, according to leg-
The respirator to be tested shall be worn for end, a boiling pot of gold at one end. People
at least 5 minutes before the start of the fit look, but no one ever finds it. When a man
test. looks for something beyond reach, his
13. The fit test shall be performed while friends say he is looking for the pot of gold
the test subject is wearing any applicable at the end of the rainbow.
safety equipment that may be worn during (6) Grimace. The test subject shall grimace
actual respirator use which could interfere by smiling or frowning. (This applies only to
with respirator fit.
QNFT testing; it is not performed for QLFT)
14. Test Exercises. (a) Employers must per-
(7) Bending over. The test subject shall
form the following test exercises for all fit
bend at the waist as if he/she were to touch
testing methods prescribed in this appendix,
his/her toes. Jogging in place shall be sub-
except for the two modified ambient aerosol
stituted for this exercise in those test envi-
CNC quantitative fit testing protocols, the
ronments such as shroud type QNFT or
CNP quantitative fit testing protocol, and
QLFT units that do not permit bending over
the CNP REDON quantitative fit testing pro-
at the waist.
tocol. For the modified ambient aerosol CNC
(8) Normal breathing. Same as exercise (1).
quantitative fit testing protocols, employers
(b) Each test exercise shall be performed
shall ensure that the test subjects (i.e., em-
for one minute except for the grimace exer-
ployees) perform the exercise procedure spec-
cise which shall be performed for 15 seconds.
ified in Part I.C.4(b) of this appendix for full-
The test subject shall be questioned by the
facepiece and half-mask elastomeric res-
test conductor regarding the comfort of the
pirators, or the exercise procedure specified
in Part I.C.5(b) for filtering facepiece res- respirator upon completion of the protocol.
pirators. Employers shall ensure that the If it has become unacceptable, another
test subjects (i.e., employees) perform the ex- model of respirator shall be tried. The res-
ercise procedure specified in Part I.C.6(b) of pirator shall not be adjusted once the fit test
this appendix for the CNP quantitative fit exercises begin. Any adjustment voids the
testing protocol, or the exercise procedure test, and the fit test must be repeated.
described in Part I.C.7(b) of this appendix for B. Qualitative Fit Test (QLFT) Protocols
the CNP REDON quantitative fit testing pro-
tocol. For the remaining fit testing methods, 1. General
employers shall ensure that the test exer-
(a) The employer shall ensure that persons
cises are performed in the appropriate test
administering QLFT are able to prepare test
environment in the following manner:
solutions, calibrate equipment and perform
(1) Normal breathing. In a normal standing
tests properly, recognize invalid tests, and
position, without talking, the subject shall
ensure that test equipment is in proper
breathe normally.
working order.
(2) Deep breathing. In a normal standing
(b) The employer shall ensure that QLFT
position, the subject shall breathe slowly
equipment is kept clean and well maintained
and deeply, taking caution so as not to
so as to operate within the parameters for
hyperventilate.
which it was designed.
(3) Turning head side to side. Standing in
place, the subject shall slowly turn his/her 2. Isoamyl Acetate Protocol
head from side to side between the extreme
positions on each side. The head shall be held NOTE: This protocol is not appropriate to
at each extreme momentarily so the subject use for the fit testing of particulate res-
can inhale at each side. pirators. If used to fit test particulate res-
(4) Moving head up and down. Standing in pirators, the respirator must be equipped
place, the subject shall slowly move his/her with an organic vapor filter.
head up and down. The subject shall be in- (a) Odor Threshold Screening
structed to inhale in the up position (i.e., Odor threshold screening, performed with-
when looking toward the ceiling). out wearing a respirator, is intended to de-
(5) Talking. The subject shall talk out loud termine if the individual tested can detect
slowly and loud enough so as to be heard the odor of isoamyl acetate at low levels.
433
(1) Three 1 liter glass jars with metal lids plastic sheeting. The inside top center of the
are required. chamber shall have a small hook attached.
(2) Odor-free water (e.g., distilled or spring (2) Each respirator used for the fitting and
water) at approximately 25 °C (77 °F) shall be fit testing shall be equipped with organic
used for the solutions. vapor cartridges or offer protection against
(3) The isoamyl acetate (IAA) (also known organic vapors.
at isopentyl acetate) stock solution is pre- (3) After selecting, donning, and properly
pared by adding 1 ml of pure IAA to 800 ml adjusting a respirator, the test subject shall
of odor-free water in a 1 liter jar, closing the wear it to the fit testing room. This room
lid and shaking for 30 seconds. A new solu- shall be separate from the room used for
tion shall be prepared at least weekly. odor threshold screening and respirator se-
(4) The screening test shall be conducted in lection, and shall be well-ventilated, as by an
a room separate from the room used for ac- exhaust fan or lab hood, to prevent general
tual fit testing. The two rooms shall be well- room contamination.
ventilated to prevent the odor of IAA from (4) A copy of the test exercises and any
becoming evident in the general room air prepared text from which the subject is to
where testing takes place. read shall be taped to the inside of the test
(5) The odor test solution is prepared in a chamber.
second jar by placing 0.4 ml of the stock so- (5) Upon entering the test chamber, the
lution into 500 ml of odor-free water using a test subject shall be given a 6-inch by 5-inch
clean dropper or pipette. The solution shall piece of paper towel, or other porous, absorb-
be shaken for 30 seconds and allowed to ent, single-ply material, folded in half and
stand for two to three minutes so that the wetted with 0.75 ml of pure IAA. The test
IAA concentration above the liquid may subject shall hang the wet towel on the hook
reach equilibrium. This solution shall be at the top of the chamber. An IAA test swab
used for only one day. or ampule may be substituted for the IAA
(6) A test blank shall be prepared in a third wetted paper towel provided it has been dem-
jar by adding 500 cc of odor-free water. onstrated that the alternative IAA source
(7) The odor test and test blank jar lids will generate an IAA test atmosphere with a
shall be labeled (e.g., 1 and 2) for jar identi- concentration equivalent to that generated
fication. Labels shall be placed on the lids so by the paper towel method.
that they can be peeled off periodically and (6) Allow two minutes for the IAA test con-
switched to maintain the integrity of the centration to stabilize before starting the fit
test. test exercises. This would be an appropriate
(8) The following instruction shall be typed time to talk with the test subject; to explain
on a card and placed on the table in front of the fit test, the importance of his/her co-
the two test jars (i.e., 1 and 2): ‘‘The purpose operation, and the purpose for the test exer-
of this test is to determine if you can smell cises; or to demonstrate some of the exer-
banana oil at a low concentration. The two cises.
bottles in front of you contain water. One of (7) If at any time during the test, the sub-
these bottles also contains a small amount ject detects the banana-like odor of IAA, the
of banana oil. Be sure the covers are on test is failed. The subject shall quickly exit
tight, then shake each bottle for two sec- from the test chamber and leave the test
onds. Unscrew the lid of each bottle, one at area to avoid olfactory fatigue.
a time, and sniff at the mouth of the bottle. (8) If the test is failed, the subject shall re-
Indicate to the test conductor which bottle turn to the selection room and remove the
contains banana oil.’’ respirator. The test subject shall repeat the
(9) The mixtures used in the IAA odor de- odor sensitivity test, select and put on an-
tection test shall be prepared in an area sep- other respirator, return to the test area and
arate from where the test is performed, in again begin the fit test procedure described
order to prevent olfactory fatigue in the sub- in (b) (1) through (7) above. The process con-
ject. tinues until a respirator that fits well has
(10) If the test subject is unable to cor- been found. Should the odor sensitivity test
rectly identify the jar containing the odor be failed, the subject shall wait at least 5
test solution, the IAA qualitative fit test minutes before retesting. Odor sensitivity
shall not be performed. will usually have returned by this time.
(11) If the test subject correctly identifies (9) If the subject passes the test, the effi-
the jar containing the odor test solution, the ciency of the test procedure shall be dem-
test subject may proceed to respirator selec- onstrated by having the subject break the
tion and fit testing. respirator face seal and take a breath before
(b) Isoamyl Acetate Fit Test exiting the chamber.
(1) The fit test chamber shall be a clear 55- (10) When the test subject leaves the cham-
gallon drum liner suspended inverted over a ber, the subject shall remove the saturated
2-foot diameter frame so that the top of the towel and return it to the person conducting
chamber is about 6 inches above the test sub- the test, so that there is no significant IAA
ject’s head. If no drum liner is available, a concentration buildup in the chamber during
similar chamber shall be constructed using subsequent tests. The used towels shall be
434
kept in a self-sealing plastic bag to keep the (9) If the second response is negative, ten
test area from being contaminated. more squeezes are repeated rapidly and the
test subject is again asked whether the sac-
3. Saccharin Solution Aerosol Protocol charin is tasted. If the test subject reports
The entire screening and testing procedure tasting the sweet taste during the third set
shall be explained to the test subject prior to of ten squeezes, the screening test is com-
the conduct of the screening test. pleted. The taste threshold is noted as thirty
(a) Taste threshold screening. The sac- regardless of the number of squeezes actually
charin taste threshold screening, performed completed.
without wearing a respirator, is intended to (10) The test conductor will take note of
determine whether the individual being test- the number of squeezes required to solicit a
ed can detect the taste of saccharin. taste response.
(1) During threshold screening as well as (11) If the saccharin is not tasted after 30
during fit testing, subjects shall wear an en- squeezes (step 10), the test subject is unable
closure about the head and shoulders that is to taste saccharin and may not perform the
approximately 12 inches in diameter by 14 saccharin fit test.
inches tall with at least the front portion
clear and that allows free movements of the NOTE TO PARAGRAPH 3(a): If the test subject
head when a respirator is worn. An enclosure eats or drinks something sweet before the
substantially similar to the 3M hood assem- screening test, he/she may be unable to taste
bly, parts # FT 14 and # FT 15 combined, is the weak saccharin solution.
adequate. (12) If a taste response is elicited, the test
(2) The test enclosure shall have a 3⁄4-inch subject shall be asked to take note of the
(1.9 cm) hole in front of the test subject’s taste for reference in the fit test.
nose and mouth area to accommodate the (13) Correct use of the nebulizer means
nebulizer nozzle. that approximately 1 ml of liquid is used at
(3) The test subject shall don the test en- a time in the nebulizer body.
closure. Throughout the threshold screening
(14) The nebulizer shall be thoroughly
test, the test subject shall breathe through
rinsed in water, shaken dry, and refilled at
his/her slightly open mouth with tongue ex-
least each morning and afternoon or at least
tended. The subject is instructed to report
when he/she detects a sweet taste. every four hours.
(4) Using a DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation (b) Saccharin solution aerosol fit test pro-
Medication Nebulizer or equivalent, the test cedure.
conductor shall spray the threshold check (1) The test subject may not eat, drink (ex-
solution into the enclosure. The nozzle is di- cept plain water), smoke, or chew gum for 15
rected away from the nose and mouth of the minutes before the test.
person. This nebulizer shall be clearly (2) The fit test uses the same enclosure de-
marked to distinguish it from the fit test so- scribed in 3. (a) above.
lution nebulizer. (3) The test subject shall don the enclosure
(5) The threshold check solution is pre- while wearing the respirator selected in sec-
pared by dissolving 0.83 gram of sodium sac- tion I. A. of this appendix. The respirator
charin USP in 100 ml of warm water. It can shall be properly adjusted and equipped with
be prepared by putting 1 ml of the fit test so- a particulate filter(s).
lution (see (b)(5) below) in 100 ml of distilled (4) A second DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation
water. Medication Nebulizer or equivalent is used
(6) To produce the aerosol, the nebulizer to spray the fit test solution into the enclo-
bulb is firmly squeezed so that it collapses
sure. This nebulizer shall be clearly marked
completely, then released and allowed to
to distinguish it from the screening test so-
fully expand.
lution nebulizer.
(7) Ten squeezes are repeated rapidly and
then the test subject is asked whether the (5) The fit test solution is prepared by add-
saccharin can be tasted. If the test subject ing 83 grams of sodium saccharin to 100 ml of
reports tasting the sweet taste during the warm water.
ten squeezes, the screening test is completed. (6) As before, the test subject shall breathe
The taste threshold is noted as ten regard- through the slightly open mouth with tongue
less of the number of squeezes actually com- extended, and report if he/she tastes the
pleted. sweet taste of saccharin.
(8) If the first response is negative, ten (7) The nebulizer is inserted into the hole
more squeezes are repeated rapidly and the in the front of the enclosure and an initial
test subject is again asked whether the sac- concentration of saccharin fit test solution
charin is tasted. If the test subject reports is sprayed into the enclosure using the same
tasting the sweet taste during the second ten number of squeezes (either 10, 20 or 30 squeez-
squeezes, the screening test is completed. es) based on the number of squeezes required
The taste threshold is noted as twenty re- to elicit a taste response as noted during the
gardless of the number of squeezes actually screening test. A minimum of 10 squeezes is
completed. required.
435
(8) After generating the aerosol, the test conductor shall spray the Threshold Check
subject shall be instructed to perform the ex- Solution into the enclosure. This Nebulizer
ercises in section I. A. 14. of this appendix. shall be clearly marked to distinguish it
(9) Every 30 seconds the aerosol concentra- from the fit test solution nebulizer.
tion shall be replenished using one half the (5) The Threshold Check Solution is pre-
original number of squeezes used initially pared by adding 13.5 milligrams of Bitrex to
(e.g., 5, 10 or 15). 100 ml of 5% salt (NaCl) solution in distilled
(10) The test subject shall indicate to the water.
test conductor if at any time during the fit (6) To produce the aerosol, the nebulizer
test the taste of saccharin is detected. If the bulb is firmly squeezed so that the bulb col-
test subject does not report tasting the sac- lapses completely, and is then released and
charin, the test is passed. allowed to fully expand.
(11) If the taste of saccharin is detected, (7) An initial ten squeezes are repeated rap-
the fit is deemed unsatisfactory and the test idly and then the test subject is asked
is failed. A different respirator shall be tried whether the Bitrex can be tasted. If the test
and the entire test procedure is repeated subject reports tasting the bitter taste dur-
(taste threshold screening and fit testing). ing the ten squeezes, the screening test is
(12) Since the nebulizer has a tendency to completed. The taste threshold is noted as
clog during use, the test operator must make ten regardless of the number of squeezes ac-
periodic checks of the nebulizer to ensure tually completed.
that it is not clogged. If clogging is found at (8) If the first response is negative, ten
the end of the test session, the test is in- more squeezes are repeated rapidly and the
valid. test subject is again asked whether the
Bitrex is tasted. If the test subject reports
4. Bitrex TM (Denatonium Benzoate) Solution tasting the bitter taste during the second
Aerosol Qualitative Fit Test Protocol ten squeezes, the screening test is completed.
The Bitrex TM (Denatonium benzoate) solu- The taste threshold is noted as twenty re-
tion aerosol QLFT protocol uses the pub- gardless of the number of squeezes actually
lished saccharin test protocol because that completed.
protocol is widely accepted. Bitrex is rou- (9) If the second response is negative, ten
tinely used as a taste aversion agent in more squeezes are repeated rapidly and the
household liquids which children should not test subject is again asked whether the
be drinking and is endorsed by the American Bitrex is tasted. If the test subject reports
Medical Association, the National Safety tasting the bitter taste during the third set
Council, and the American Association of of ten squeezes, the screening test is com-
Poison Control Centers. The entire screening pleted. The taste threshold is noted as thirty
and testing procedure shall be explained to regardless of the number of squeezes actually
the test subject prior to the conduct of the completed.
screening test. (10) The test conductor will take note of
(a) Taste Threshold Screening. the number of squeezes required to solicit a
The Bitrex taste threshold screening, per- taste response.
formed without wearing a respirator, is in- (11) If the Bitrex is not tasted after 30
tended to determine whether the individual squeezes (step 10), the test subject is unable
being tested can detect the taste of Bitrex. to taste Bitrex and may not perform the
(1) During threshold screening as well as Bitrex fit test.
during fit testing, subjects shall wear an en- (12) If a taste response is elicited, the test
closure about the head and shoulders that is subject shall be asked to take note of the
approximately 12 inches (30.5 cm) in diame- taste for reference in the fit test.
ter by 14 inches (35.6 cm) tall. The front por- (13) Correct use of the nebulizer means
tion of the enclosure shall be clear from the that approximately 1 ml of liquid is used at
respirator and allow free movement of the a time in the nebulizer body.
head when a respirator is worn. An enclosure (14) The nebulizer shall be thoroughly
substantially similar to the 3M hood assem- rinsed in water, shaken to dry, and refilled
bly, parts # FT 14 and # FT 15 combined, is at least each morning and afternoon or at
adequate. least every four hours.
(2) The test enclosure shall have a 3⁄4 inch (b) Bitrex Solution Aerosol Fit Test Proce-
(1.9 cm) hole in front of the test subject’s dure.
nose and mouth area to accommodate the (1) The test subject may not eat, drink (ex-
nebulizer nozzle. cept plain water), smoke, or chew gum for 15
(3) The test subject shall don the test en- minutes before the test.
closure. Throughout the threshold screening (2) The fit test uses the same enclosure as
test, the test subject shall breathe through that described in 4. (a) above.
his or her slightly open mouth with tongue (3) The test subject shall don the enclosure
extended. The subject is instructed to report while wearing the respirator selected accord-
when he/she detects a bitter taste. ing to section I. A. of this appendix. The res-
(4) Using a DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation pirator shall be properly adjusted and
Medication Nebulizer or equivalent, the test equipped with any type particulate filter(s).
436
(4) A second DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation (5) The fit test shall be performed in an
Medication Nebulizer or equivalent is used area with adequate ventilation to prevent
to spray the fit test solution into the enclo- exposure of the person conducting the fit
sure. This nebulizer shall be clearly marked test or the build-up of irritant smoke in the
to distinguish it from the screening test so- general atmosphere.
lution nebulizer. (b) Sensitivity Screening Check
(5) The fit test solution is prepared by add- The person to be tested must demonstrate
ing 337.5 mg of Bitrex to 200 ml of a 5% salt his or her ability to detect a weak con-
(NaCl) solution in warm water. centration of the irritant smoke.
(6) As before, the test subject shall breathe (1) The test operator shall break both ends
through his or her slightly open mouth with of a ventilation smoke tube containing
tongue extended, and be instructed to report stannic chloride, and attach one end of the
if he/she tastes the bitter taste of Bitrex. smoke tube to a low flow air pump set to de-
(7) The nebulizer is inserted into the hole liver 200 milliliters per minute, or an aspi-
in the front of the enclosure and an initial rator squeeze bulb. The test operator shall
concentration of the fit test solution is cover the other end of the smoke tube with
sprayed into the enclosure using the same a short piece of tubing to prevent potential
number of squeezes (either 10, 20 or 30 squeez- injury from the jagged end of the smoke
es) based on the number of squeezes required tube.
to elicit a taste response as noted during the (2) The test operator shall advise the test
screening test. subject that the smoke can be irritating to
(8) After generating the aerosol, the test the eyes, lungs, and nasal passages and in-
subject shall be instructed to perform the ex- struct the subject to keep his/her eyes closed
ercises in section I. A. 14. of this appendix. while the test is performed.
(9) Every 30 seconds the aerosol concentra- (3) The test subject shall be allowed to
tion shall be replenished using one half the smell a weak concentration of the irritant
number of squeezes used initially (e.g., 5, 10 smoke before the respirator is donned to be-
or 15). come familiar with its irritating properties
(10) The test subject shall indicate to the and to determine if he/she can detect the ir-
test conductor if at any time during the fit ritating properties of the smoke. The test
test the taste of Bitrex is detected. If the operator shall carefully direct a small
test subject does not report tasting the amount of the irritant smoke in the test sub-
Bitrex, the test is passed. ject’s direction to determine that he/she can
(11) If the taste of Bitrex is detected, the detect it.
fit is deemed unsatisfactory and the test is (c) Irritant Smoke Fit Test Procedure
failed. A different respirator shall be tried (1) The person being fit tested shall don the
and the entire test procedure is repeated respirator without assistance, and perform
(taste threshold screening and fit testing). the required user seal check(s).
(2) The test subject shall be instructed to
5. Irritant Smoke (Stannic Chloride) keep his/her eyes closed.
Protocol
(3) The test operator shall direct the
This qualitative fit test uses a person’s re- stream of irritant smoke from the smoke
sponse to the irritating chemicals released tube toward the faceseal area of the test sub-
in the ‘‘smoke’’ produced by a stannic chlo- ject, using the low flow pump or the squeeze
ride ventilation smoke tube to detect leak- bulb. The test operator shall begin at least 12
age into the respirator. inches from the facepiece and move the
(a) General Requirements and Precautions smoke stream around the whole perimeter of
(1) The respirator to be tested shall be the mask. The operator shall gradually make
equipped with high efficiency particulate air two more passes around the perimeter of the
(HEPA) or P100 series filter(s). mask, moving to within six inches of the res-
(2) Only stannic chloride smoke tubes shall pirator.
be used for this protocol. (4) If the person being tested has not had
(3) No form of test enclosure or hood for an involuntary response and/or detected the
the test subject shall be used. irritant smoke, proceed with the test exer-
(4) The smoke can be irritating to the eyes, cises.
lungs, and nasal passages. The test con- (5) The exercises identified in section I.A.
ductor shall take precautions to minimize 14. of this appendix shall be performed by the
the test subject’s exposure to irritant smoke. test subject while the respirator seal is being
Sensitivity varies, and certain individuals continually challenged by the smoke, di-
may respond to a greater degree to irritant rected around the perimeter of the respirator
smoke. Care shall be taken when performing at a distance of six inches.
the sensitivity screening checks that deter- (6) If the person being fit tested reports de-
mine whether the test subject can detect ir- tecting the irritant smoke at any time, the
ritant smoke to use only the minimum test is failed. The person being retested must
amount of smoke necessary to elicit a re- repeat the entire sensitivity check and fit
sponse from the test subject. test procedure.
437
(7) Each test subject passing the irritant late air (HEPA) or P100 series filter supplied
smoke test without evidence of a response by the same manufacturer.
(involuntary cough, irritation) shall be given (4) The sampling instrument shall be se-
a second sensitivity screening check, with lected so that a computer record or strip
the smoke from the same smoke tube used chart record may be made of the test show-
during the fit test, once the respirator has ing the rise and fall of the test agent con-
been removed, to determine whether he/she centration with each inspiration and expira-
still reacts to the smoke. Failure to evoke a tion at fit factors of at least 2,000. Integra-
response shall void the fit test. tors or computers that integrate the amount
(8) If a response is produced during this of test agent penetration leakage into the
second sensitivity check, then the fit test is respirator for each exercise may be used pro-
passed. vided a record of the readings is made.
(5) The combination of substitute air-puri-
C. Quantitative Fit Test (QNFT) Protocols fying elements, test agent and test agent
The following quantitative fit testing pro- concentration shall be such that the test
cedures have been demonstrated to be ac- subject is not exposed in excess of an estab-
ceptable: Quantitative fit testing using a lished exposure limit for the test agent at
non-hazardous test aerosol (such as corn oil, any time during the testing process, based
polyethylene glycol 400 [PEG 400], di-2-ethyl upon the length of the exposure and the ex-
hexyl sebacate [DEHS], or sodium chloride) posure limit duration.
generated in a test chamber, and employing (6) The sampling port on the test specimen
instrumentation to quantify the fit of the respirator shall be placed and constructed so
respirator; Quantitative fit testing using am- that no leakage occurs around the port (e.g.,
bient aerosol as the test agent and appro- where the respirator is probed), a free air
priate instrumentation (condensation nuclei flow is allowed into the sampling line at all
counter) to quantify the respirator fit; Quan- times, and there is no interference with the
titative fit testing using controlled negative fit or performance of the respirator. The in-
pressure and appropriate instrumentation to mask sampling device (probe) shall be de-
measure the volumetric leak rate of a face- signed and used so that the air sample is
piece to quantify the respirator fit. drawn from the breathing zone of the test
subject, midway between the nose and mouth
1. General and with the probe extending into the face-
piece cavity at least 1⁄4 inch.
(a) The employer shall ensure that persons (7) The test setup shall permit the person
administering QNFT are able to calibrate administering the test to observe the test
equipment and perform tests properly, recog- subject inside the chamber during the test.
nize invalid tests, calculate fit factors prop- (8) The equipment generating the test at-
erly and ensure that test equipment is in mosphere shall maintain the concentration
proper working order. of test agent constant to within a 10 percent
(b) The employer shall ensure that QNFT variation for the duration of the test.
equipment is kept clean, and is maintained (9) The time lag (interval between an event
and calibrated according to the manufactur- and the recording of the event on the strip
er’s instructions so as to operate at the pa- chart or computer or integrator) shall be
rameters for which it was designed. kept to a minimum. There shall be a clear
association between the occurrence of an
2. Generated Aerosol Quantitative Fit
event and its being recorded.
Testing Protocol
(10) The sampling line tubing for the test
(a) Apparatus. chamber atmosphere and for the respirator
(1) Instrumentation. Aerosol generation, sampling port shall be of equal diameter and
dilution, and measurement systems using of the same material. The length of the two
particulates (corn oil, polyethylene glycol lines shall be equal.
400 [PEG 400], di-2-ethyl hexyl sebacate (11) The exhaust flow from the test cham-
[DEHS] or sodium chloride) as test aerosols ber shall pass through an appropriate filter
shall be used for quantitative fit testing. (i.e., high efficiency particulate filter) before
(2) Test chamber. The test chamber shall release.
be large enough to permit all test subjects to (12) When sodium chloride aerosol is used,
perform freely all required exercises without the relative humidity inside the test cham-
disturbing the test agent concentration or ber shall not exceed 50 percent.
the measurement apparatus. The test cham- (13) The limitations of instrument detec-
ber shall be equipped and constructed so that tion shall be taken into account when deter-
the test agent is effectively isolated from mining the fit factor.
the ambient air, yet uniform in concentra- (14) Test respirators shall be maintained in
tion throughout the chamber. proper working order and be inspected regu-
(3) When testing air-purifying respirators, larly for deficiencies such as cracks or miss-
the normal filter or cartridge element shall ing valves and gaskets.
be replaced with a high efficiency particu- (b) Procedural Requirements.
438
(1) When performing the initial user seal of the average chamber concentration to the
check using a positive or negative pressure concentration measured inside the respirator
check, the sampling line shall be crimped for each test exercise except the grimace ex-
closed in order to avoid air pressure leakage ercise.
during either of these pressure checks. (ii) The average test chamber concentra-
(2) The use of an abbreviated screening tion shall be calculated as the arithmetic av-
QLFT test is optional. Such a test may be erage of the concentration measured before
utilized in order to quickly identify poor fit- and after each test (i.e., 7 exercises) or the
ting respirators that passed the positive and/ arithmetic average of the concentration
or negative pressure test and reduce the measured before and after each exercise or
amount of QNFT time. The use of the CNC the true average measured continuously dur-
QNFT instrument in the count mode is an- ing the respirator sample.
other optional method to obtain a quick esti- (iii) The concentration of the challenge
mate of fit and eliminate poor fitting res- agent inside the respirator shall be deter-
pirators before going on to perform a full mined by one of the following methods:
QNFT.
(A) Average peak penetration method
(3) A reasonably stable test agent con-
means the method of determining test agent
centration shall be measured in the test
penetration into the respirator utilizing a
chamber prior to testing. For canopy or
strip chart recorder, integrator, or com-
shower curtain types of test units, the deter-
puter. The agent penetration is determined
mination of the test agent’s stability may be
by an average of the peak heights on the
established after the test subject has entered
the test environment. graph or by computer integration, for each
(4) Immediately after the subject enters exercise except the grimace exercise. Inte-
the test chamber, the test agent concentra- grators or computers that calculate the ac-
tion inside the respirator shall be measured tual test agent penetration into the res-
to ensure that the peak penetration does not pirator for each exercise will also be consid-
exceed 5 percent for a half mask or 1 percent ered to meet the requirements of the average
for a full facepiece respirator. peak penetration method.
(5) A stable test agent concentration shall (B) Maximum peak penetration method
be obtained prior to the actual start of test- means the method of determining test agent
ing. penetration in the respirator as determined
(6) Respirator restraining straps shall not by strip chart recordings of the test. The
be over-tightened for testing. The straps highest peak penetration for a given exercise
shall be adjusted by the wearer without as- is taken to be representative of average pen-
sistance from other persons to give a reason- etration into the respirator for that exercise.
ably comfortable fit typical of normal use. (C) Integration by calculation of the area
The respirator shall not be adjusted once the under the individual peak for each exercise
fit test exercises begin. except the grimace exercise. This includes
(7) The test shall be terminated whenever computerized integration.
any single peak penetration exceeds 5 per- (D) The calculation of the overall fit factor
cent for half masks and 1 percent for full using individual exercise fit factors involves
facepiece respirators. The test subject shall first converting the exercise fit factors to
be refitted and retested. penetration values, determining the average,
(8) Calculation of fit factors. and then converting that result back to a fit
(i) The fit factor shall be determined for factor. This procedure is described in the fol-
the quantitative fit test by taking the ratio lowing equation:
Number of exercises
Overall Fit Factor =
1 ff1 + 1 ff2 + 1 ff3 + 1 ff4 + 1 ff5 + 1 ff7 + 1 ff8
Where ff1, ff2, ff3, etc. are the fit factors for test agent has altered the integrity of the
exercises 1, 2, 3, etc. filter media.
(9) The test subject shall not be permitted
3. Ambient aerosol condensation nuclei
to wear a half mask or quarter facepiece res-
counter (CNC) quantitative fit testing pro-
pirator unless a minimum fit factor of 100 is
tocol.
obtained, or a full facepiece respirator unless
a minimum fit factor of 500 is obtained. The ambient aerosol condensation nuclei
(10) Filters used for quantitative fit testing counter (CNC) quantitative fit testing
shall be replaced whenever increased breath- (PortaCount®) protocol quantitatively fit

ing resistance is encountered, or when the tests respirators with the use of a probe. The
439
ER08JA98.006</GPH>
probed respirator is only used for quan- the same model respirator, or another model
titative fit tests. A probed respirator has a of respirator.
special sampling device, installed on the res- (5) Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
pirator, that allows the probe to sample the for operating the Portacount® and proceed
air from inside the mask. A probed res- with the test.
pirator is required for each make, style, (6) The test subject shall be instructed to
model, and size that the employer uses and perform the exercises in section I. A. 14. of
can be obtained from the respirator manu- this appendix.
facturer or distributor. The primary CNC in- (7) After the test exercises, the test subject
strument manufacturer, TSI Incorporated, shall be questioned by the test conductor re-
also provides probe attachments (TSI mask garding the comfort of the respirator upon
sampling adapters) that permit fit testing in completion of the protocol. If it has become
an employee’s own respirator. A minimum unacceptable, another model of respirator
fit factor pass level of at least 100 is nec- shall be tried.
essary for a half-mask respirator (elas- (b) PortaCount® Test Instrument.
tomeric or filtering facepiece), and a min- (1) The PortaCount® will automatically
imum fit factor pass level of at least 500 is stop and calculate the overall fit factor for
required for a full-facepiece elastomeric res- the entire set of exercises. The overall fit
pirator. The entire screening and testing factor is what counts. The Pass or Fail mes-
procedure shall be explained to the test sub- sage will indicate whether or not the test
ject prior to the conduct of the screening was successful. If the test was a Pass, the fit
test. test is over.
(a) PortaCount® Fit Test Requirements. (1) (2) Since the pass or fail criterion of the
Check the respirator to make sure the sam- PortaCount® is user programmable, the test
pling probe and line are properly attached to operator shall ensure that the pass or fail
the facepiece and that the respirator is fitted criterion meet the requirements for min-
with a particulate filter capable of pre- imum respirator performance in this Appen-
venting significant penetration by the ambi- dix.
ent particles used for the fit test (e.g., (3) A record of the test needs to be kept on
NIOSH 42 CFR 84 series 100, series 99, or se- file, assuming the fit test was successful.
ries 95 particulate filter) per manufacturer’s The record must contain the test subject’s
instruction. name; overall fit factor; make, model, style,
(2) Instruct the person to be tested to don and size of respirator used; and date tested.
the respirator for five minutes before the fit
test starts. This purges the ambient par- 4. Modified ambient aerosol condensation
ticles trapped inside the respirator and per- nuclei counter (CNC) quantitative fit test-
mits the wearer to make certain the res- ing protocol for full-facepiece and half-
pirator is comfortable. This individual shall mask elastomeric respirators.
already have been trained on how to wear (a) When administering this protocol to
the respirator properly. test subjects, employers shall comply with
(3) Check the following conditions for the the requirements specified in Part I.C.3 of
adequacy of the respirator fit: Chin properly this appendix (ambient aerosol condensation
placed; Adequate strap tension, not overly nuclei counter (CNC) quantitative fit testing
tightened; Fit across nose bridge; Respirator protocol), except they shall use the test exer-
of proper size to span distance from nose to cises described below in paragraph (b) of this
chin; Tendency of the respirator to slip; Self- protocol instead of the test exercises speci-
observation in a mirror to evaluate fit and fied in section I.C.3(a)(6) of this appendix.
respirator position. (b) Employers shall ensure that each test
(4) Have the person wearing the respirator subject being fit tested using this protocol
do a user seal check. If leakage is detected, follows the exercise and duration procedures,
determine the cause. If leakage is from a including the order of administration, de-
poorly fitting facepiece, try another size of scribed in Table A–1 of this appendix.
TABLE A–1— MODIFIED AMBIENT AEROSAL CNC QUANTITATIVE FIT TESTING PROTOCOL FOR FULL
FACEPIECE AND HALF–MASK ELASTOMERIC RESPIRATORS
Exercises 1 Exercise procedure Measurement procedure
Bending Over .................................. The test subject shall bend at the waist, as if going A 20 second ambient sample, fol-
to touch his/her toes for 50 seconds and inhale 2 lowed by a 30 second mask
times at the bottom 2. sample.
Jogging-in-Place ............................. The test subject shall jog in place comfortably for 30 A 30 second mask sample.
seconds.
Head Side-to-Side ........................... The test subject shall stand in place, slowly turning A 30 second mask sample.
his/her head from side to side for 30 seconds and

inhale 2 times at each extreme 2.
440
TABLE A–1— MODIFIED AMBIENT AEROSAL CNC QUANTITATIVE FIT TESTING PROTOCOL FOR FULL
FACEPIECE AND HALF–MASK ELASTOMERIC RESPIRATORS—Continued
Head Up-and-Down ........................ The test subject shall stand in place, slowly moving A 30 second mask sample fol-
his/her head up and down for 39 seconds and in- lowed by a 9 second ambient
hale 2 times at each extreme 2. sample.
1 Exercises are listed in the order in which they are to be administered.
2 It is optional for test subjects to take additional breaths at other times during this exercise.
5. Modified ambient aerosol condensation protocol), except they shall use the test exer-
nuclei counter (CNC) quantitative fit test- cises described below in paragraph (b) of this
ing protocol for filtering facepiece res- protocol instead of the test exercises speci-
pirators. fied in section I.C.3(a)(6) of this appendix.
(a) When administering this protocol to (b) Employers shall ensure that each test
test subjects, employers shall comply with subject being fit tested using this protocol
the requirements specified in Part I.C.3 of follows the exercise and duration procedures,
this appendix (ambient aerosol condensation including the order of administration, de-
nuclei counter (CNC) quantitative fit testing scribed in Table A–2 of this appendix.
TABLE A–2— MODIFIED AMBIENT AEROSAL CNC QUANTITATIVE FIT TESTING PROTOCOL FOR
FILTERING FACEPIECE RESPIRATORS
Exercise Measurement
Exercises 1 procedure procedure
Bending Over .................................. The test subject shall bend at the waist, as if going A 20 second ambient sample, fol-
to touch his/her toes for 50 seconds and inhale 2 lowed by a 30 second mask
times at the bottom 2. sample.
Talking ............................................. The test subject shall talk out loud slowly and loud A 30 second mask sample.
enough so as to be heard clearly by the test con-
ductor for 30 seconds. He/she will either read from
a prepared text such as the Rainbow Passage,
count backward from 100, or recite a memorized
poem or song.
Head Side-to-Side ........................... The test subject shall stand in place, slowly turning A 30 second mask sample.
his/her head from side to side for 30 seconds and
inhale 2 times at each extreme 2.
Head Up-and-Down ........................ The test subject shall stand in place, slowly moving A 30 second mask sample fol-
his/her head up and down for 39 seconds and in- lowed by a 9 second ambient
hale 2 times at each extreme 2. sample.
2 It is optional for test subjects to take additional breaths at other times during this exercise.
6. Controlled negative pressure (CNP) CNP fit test method measures leak rates
quantitative fit testing protocol. through the facepiece as a method for deter-
mining the facepiece fit for negative pres-
The CNP protocol provides an alternative
sure respirators. The CNP instrument manu-
to aerosol fit test methods. The CNP fit test
facturer Occupational Health Dynamics of
method technology is based on exhausting
air from a temporarily sealed respirator Birmingham, Alabama also provides attach-
facepiece to generate and then maintain a ments (sampling manifolds) that replace the
constant negative pressure inside the face- filter cartridges to permit fit testing in an
piece. The rate of air exhaust is controlled so employee’s own respirator. To perform the
that a constant negative pressure is main- test, the test subject closes his or her mouth
tained in the respirator during the fit test. and holds his/her breath, after which an air
The level of pressure is selected to replicate pump removes air from the respirator face-
the mean inspiratory pressure that causes piece at a pre-selected constant pressure.
leakage into the respirator under normal use The facepiece fit is expressed as the leak
conditions. With pressure held constant, air rate through the facepiece, expressed as mil-
flow out of the respirator is equal to air flow liliters per minute. The quality and validity
into the respirator. Therefore, measurement of the CNP fit tests are determined by the
of the exhaust stream that is required to degree to which the in-mask pressure tracks
hold the pressure in the temporarily sealed the test pressure during the system measure-
respirator constant yields a direct measure ment time of approximately five seconds. In-
of leakage air flow into the respirator. The stantaneous feedback in the form of a real-
441
time pressure trace of the in-mask pressure shall be held at each extreme momentarily
is provided and used to determine test valid- so the subject can inhale at each side. After
ity and quality. A minimum fit factor pass the turning head side to side exercise, the
level of 100 is necessary for a half-mask res- subject needs to hold head full left and hold
pirator and a minimum fit factor of at least his or her breath for 10 seconds during test
500 is required for a full facepiece respirator. measurement. Next, the subject needs to
The entire screening and testing procedure hold head full right and hold his or her
shall be explained to the test subject prior to breath for 10 seconds during test measure-
the conduct of the screening test. ment.
(a) CNP Fit Test Requirements. (4) Moving head up and down. Standing in
(1) The instrument shall have a non-adjust- place, the subject shall slowly move his or
able test pressure of 15.0 mm water pressure. her head up and down for 1 minute. The sub-
(2) The CNP system defaults selected for ject shall be instructed to inhale in the up
test pressure shall be set at ¥15 mm of water position (i.e., when looking toward the ceil-
(-0.58 inches of water) and the modeled ining). After the moving head up and down ex-
spiratory flow rate shall be 53.8 liters per ercise, the subject shall hold his or her head
minute for performing fit tests. full up and hold his or her breath for 10 sec-
NOTE: CNP systems have built-in capa- onds during test measurement. Next, the
bility to conduct fit testing that is specific subject shall hold his or her head full down
to unique work rate, mask, and gender situa- and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds dur-
tions that might apply in a specific working test measurement.
place. Use of system default values, which (5) Talking. The subject shall talk out loud
were selected to represent respirator wear slowly and loud enough so as to be heard
with medium cartridge resistance at a low- clearly by the test conductor. The subject
moderate work rate, will allow inter-test can read from a prepared text such as the
comparison of the respirator fit.) Rainbow Passage, count backward from 100,
(3) The individual who conducts the CNP or recite a memorized poem or song for 1
fit testing shall be thoroughly trained to minute. After the talking exercise, the sub-
perform the test. ject shall hold his or her head straight ahead
(4) The respirator filter or cartridge needs and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds dur-
to be replaced with the CNP test manifold. ing the test measurement.
The inhalation valve downstream from the (6) Grimace. The test subject shall grimace
manifold either needs to be temporarily re- by smiling or frowning for 15 seconds.
moved or propped open. (7) Bending Over. The test subject shall
(5) The employer must train the test sub- bend at the waist as if he or she were to
ject to hold his or her breath for at least 10 touch his or her toes for 1 minute. Jogging in
seconds. place shall be substituted for this exercise in
(6) The test subject must don the test res- those test environments such as shroud-type
pirator without any assistance from the test QNFT units that prohibit bending at the
administrator who is conducting the CNP fit waist. After the bending over exercise, the
test. The respirator must not be adjusted subject shall hold his or her head straight
once the fit-test exercises begin. Any adjust- ahead and hold his or her breath for 10 sec-
ment voids the test, and the test subject onds during the test measurement.
must repeat the fit test. (8) Normal Breathing. The test subject
(7) The QNFT protocol shall be followed ac- shall remove and re-don the respirator with-
cording to section I. C. 1. of this appendix in a one-minute period. Then, in a normal
with an exception for the CNP test exercises. standing position, without talking, the sub-
(b) CNP Test Exercises. ject shall breathe normally for 1 minute.
(1) Normal breathing. In a normal standing After the normal breathing exercise, the sub-
position, without talking, the subject shall ject shall hold his or her head straight ahead
breathe normally for 1 minute. After the and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds dur-
normal breathing exercise, the subject needs ing the test measurement. After the test ex-
to hold head straight ahead and hold his or ercises, the test subject shall be questioned
her breath for 10 seconds during the test by the test conductor regarding the comfort
measurement. of the respirator upon completion of the pro-
(2) Deep breathing. In a normal standing tocol. If it has become unacceptable, another
position, the subject shall breathe slowly model of a respirator shall be tried.
and deeply for 1 minute, being careful not to (c) CNP Test Instrument.
hyperventilate. After the deep breathing ex- (1) The test instrument must have an effec-
ercise, the subject shall hold his or her head tive audio-warning device, or a visual-warn-
straight ahead and hold his or her breath for ing device in the form of a screen tracing,
10 seconds during test measurement. that indicates when the test subject fails to
(3) Turning head side to side. Standing in hold his or her breath during the test. The
place, the subject shall slowly turn his or her test must be terminated and restarted from
head from side to side between the extreme the beginning when the test subject fails to
positions on each side for 1 minute. The head hold his or her breath during the test. The
442
test subject then may be refitted and re- the requirements specified in paragraphs (a)
tested. and (c) of part I.C.6 of this appendix (‘‘Con-
(2) A record of the test shall be kept on trolled negative pressure (CNP) quantitative
file, assuming the fit test was successful. fit testing protocol,’’) as well as use the test
The record must contain the test subject’s exercises described below in paragraph (b) of
name; overall fit factor; make, model, style this protocol instead of the test exercises
and size of respirator used; and date tested. specified in paragraph (b) of part I.C.6 of this
appendix.
7. Controlled negative pressure (CNP) (b) Employers must ensure that each test
REDON quantitative fit testing protocol. subject being fit tested using this protocol
follows the exercise and measurement proce-
(a) When administering this protocol to dures, including the order of administration
test subjects, employers must comply with described in Table A–3 of this appendix.
TABLE A–3—CNP REDON QUANTITATIVE FIT TESTING PROTOCOL
Facing Forward ............................... Stand and breathe normally, without talking, for 30 Face forward, while holding breath
seconds. for 10 seconds.
Bending Over .................................. Bend at the waist, as if going to touch his or her Face parallel to the floor, while
toes, for 30 seconds. holding breath for 10 seconds
Head Shaking ................................. For about three seconds, shake head back and forth Face forward, while holding breath
vigorously several times while shouting. for 10 seconds
REDON 1 ........................................ Remove the respirator mask, loosen all facepiece Face forward, while holding breath
straps, and then redon the respirator mask. for 10 seconds.
REDON 2 ........................................ Remove the respirator mask, loosen all facepiece Face forward, while holding breath
straps, and then redon the respirator mask again. for 10 seconds.
(c) After completing the test exercises, the 1. A test report prepared by an independent
test administrator must question each test government research laboratory (e.g., Law-
subject regarding the comfort of the res- rence Livermore National Laboratory, Los
pirator. When a test subject states that the Alamos National Laboratory, the National
respirator is unacceptable, the employer Institute for Standards and Technology)
must ensure that the test administrator re- stating that the laboratory has tested the
peats the protocol using another respirator protocol and had found it to be accurate and
model. reliable; or
(d) Employers must determine the overall 2. An article that has been published in a
fit factor for each test subject by calculating peer-reviewed industrial hygiene journal de-
the harmonic mean of the fit testing exer-
scribing the protocol and explaining how test
cises as follows:
data support the protocol’s accuracy and re-
N liability.
Overall Fit Factor =
[1/FF1 + 1/FF2 + ... 1/FFN ]
C. If OSHA determines that additional in-
formation is required before the Agency
commences a rulemaking proceeding under
Where:
this section, OSHA will so notify the appli-
N = The number of exercises; cant and afford the applicant the oppor-
FF1 = The fit factor for the first exercise; tunity to submit the supplemental informa-
FF2 = The fit factor for the second exercise; tion. Initiation of a rulemaking proceeding
and will be deferred until OSHA has received and
FFN = The fit factor for the nth exercise.
evaluated the supplemental information.
PART II. NEW FIT TEST PROTOCOLS
APPENDIX B–1 TO § 1910.134: USER SEAL CHECK
A. Any person may submit to OSHA an ap- PROCEDURES (MANDATORY)
plication for approval of a new fit test pro-
tocol. If the application meets the following The individual who uses a tight-fitting res-
criteria, OSHA will initiate a rulemaking pirator is to perform a user seal check to en-
proceeding under section 6(b)(7) of the OSH sure that an adequate seal is achieved each
Act to determine whether to list the new time the respirator is put on. Either the
protocol as an approved protocol in this ap- positive and negative pressure checks listed
pendix A. in this appendix, or the respirator manufac-
B. The application must include a detailed turer’s recommended user seal check method
description of the proposed new fit test pro- shall be used. User seal checks are not sub-
tocol. This application must be supported by stitutes for qualitative or quantitative fit
either: tests.
443
ER04AU04.001</MATH>
I. Facepiece Positive and/or Negative Pressure with a cleaner recommended by the manu-
Checks facturer. A stiff bristle (not wire) brush may
be used to facilitate the removal of dirt.
A. Positive pressure check. Close off the ex-
halation valve and exhale gently into the C. Rinse components thoroughly in clean,
facepiece. The face fit is considered satisfac- warm (43 °C [110 °F] maximum), preferably
tory if a slight positive pressure can be built running water. Drain.
up inside the facepiece without any evidence D. When the cleaner used does not contain
of outward leakage of air at the seal. For a disinfecting agent, respirator components
most respirators this method of leak testing should be immersed for two minutes in one
requires the wearer to first remove the exha- of the following:
lation valve cover before closing off the ex- 1. Hypochlorite solution (50 ppm of chlo-
halation valve and then carefully replacing rine) made by adding approximately one mil-
it after the test. liliter of laundry bleach to one liter of water
B. Negative pressure check. Close off the at 43 °C (110 °F); or,
inlet opening of the canister or cartridge(s) 2. Aqueous solution of iodine (50 ppm io-
by covering with the palm of the hand(s) or dine) made by adding approximately 0.8 mil-
by replacing the filter seal(s), inhale gently liliters of tincture of iodine (6–8 grams am-
so that the facepiece collapses slightly, and monium and/or potassium iodide/100 cc of
hold the breath for ten seconds. The design 45% alcohol) to one liter of water at 43 °C
of the inlet opening of some cartridges can- (110 °F); or,
not be effectively covered with the palm of 3. Other commercially available cleansers
the hand. The test can be performed by cov- of equivalent disinfectant quality when used
ering the inlet opening of the cartridge with as directed, if their use is recommended or
a thin latex or nitrile glove. If the facepiece approved by the respirator manufacturer.
remains in its slightly collapsed condition E. Rinse components thoroughly in clean,
and no inward leakage of air is detected, the warm (43 °C [110 °F] maximum), preferably
tightness of the respirator is considered sat- running water. Drain. The importance of
isfactory. thorough rinsing cannot be overemphasized.
Detergents or disinfectants that dry on
II. Manufacturer’s Recommended User Seal facepieces may result in dermatitis. In addi-
Check Procedures tion, some disinfectants may cause deterio-
The respirator manufacturer’s rec- ration of rubber or corrosion of metal parts
ommended procedures for performing a user if not completely removed.
seal check may be used instead of the posi- F. Components should be hand-dried with a
tive and/or negative pressure check proce- clean lint-free cloth or air-dried.
dures provided that the employer dem- G. Reassemble facepiece, replacing filters,
onstrates that the manufacturer’s proce- cartridges, and canisters where necessary.
dures are equally effective. H. Test the respirator to ensure that all
components work properly.
APPENDIX B–2 TO § 1910.134: RESPIRATOR
CLEANING PROCEDURES (MANDATORY) APPENDIX C TO § 1910.134: OSHA RESPIRATOR
MEDICAL EVALUATION QUESTIONNAIRE (MAN-
These procedures are provided for em- DATORY)
ployer use when cleaning respirators. They
are general in nature, and the employer as To the employer: Answers to questions in
an alternative may use the cleaning rec- Section 1, and to question 9 in Section 2 of
ommendations provided by the manufacturer part A, do not require a medical examina-
of the respirators used by their employees, tion.
provided such procedures are as effective as To the employee:
those listed here in appendix B–2. Equivalent Your employer must allow you to answer
effectiveness simply means that the proce- this questionnaire during normal working
dures used must accomplish the objectives hours, or at a time and place that is conven-
set forth in appendix B–2, i.e., must ensure ient to you. To maintain your confiden-
that the respirator is properly cleaned and tiality, your employer or supervisor must
disinfected in a manner that prevents dam- not look at or review your answers, and your
age to the respirator and does not cause employer must tell you how to deliver or
harm to the user. send this questionnaire to the health care
professional who will review it.
I. Procedures for Cleaning Respirators Part A. Section 1. (Mandatory) The fol-
A. Remove filters, cartridges, or canisters. lowing information must be provided by
Disassemble facepieces by removing speak- every employee who has been selected to use
ing diaphragms, demand and pressure-de- any type of respirator (please print).
mand valve assemblies, hoses, or any compo- 1. Today’s date: lllllllllllllll
nents recommended by the manufacturer.
2. Your name: llllllllllllllll
Discard or repair any defective parts.

B. Wash components in warm (43 °C [110 °F] 3. Your age (to nearest year): llllllll
maximum) water with a mild detergent or 4. Sex (circle one): Male/Female
444
5. Your height: ll ft. ll in. c. Shortness of breath when walking with
6. Your weight: ll lbs. other people at an ordinary pace on level
ground: Yes/No
7. Your job title: llllllllllllll d. Have to stop for breath when walking at
8. A phone number where you can be reached your own pace on level ground: Yes/No
by the health care professional who re- e. Shortness of breath when washing or
views this questionnaire (include the Area dressing yourself: Yes/No
Code): lll f. Shortness of breath that interferes with
9. The best time to phone you at this num- your job: Yes/No
ber: ll g. Coughing that produces phlegm (thick
10. Has your employer told you how to con- sputum): Yes/No
tact the health care professional who will h. Coughing that wakes you early in the
review this questionnaire (circle one): Yes/ morning: Yes/No
No i. Coughing that occurs mostly when you
11. Check the type of respirator you will use are lying down: Yes/No
(you can check more than one category): j. Coughing up blood in the last month:
a. ll N, R, or P disposable respirator (fil- Yes/No
k. Wheezing: Yes/No
ter-mask, non-cartridge type only).
l. Wheezing that interferes with your job:
b. ll Other type (for example, half- or
Yes/No
full-facepiece type, powered-air puri-
m. Chest pain when you breathe deeply:
fying, supplied-air, self-contained breath-
Yes/No
ing apparatus). n. Any other symptoms that you think
12. Have you worn a respirator (circle one): may be related to lung problems: Yes/No
Yes/No 5. Have you ever had any of the following car-
7 If ‘‘yes,’’ what type(s): llllllllll diovascular or heart problems?
a. Heart attack: Yes/No
llllllllllllllllllllllll
b. Stroke: Yes/No
Part A. Section 2. (Mandatory) Questions 1 c. Angina: Yes/No
through 9 below must be answered by every d. Heart failure: Yes/No
employee who has been selected to use any e. Swelling in your legs or feet (not caused
type of respirator (please circle ‘‘yes’’ or by walking): Yes/No
‘‘no’’). f. Heart arrhythmia (heart beating irregu-
1. Do you currently smoke tobacco, or have larly): Yes/No
you smoked tobacco in the last month: g. High blood pressure: Yes/No
Yes/No h. Any other heart problem that you’ve
2. Have you ever had any of the following been told about: Yes/No
conditions? 6. Have you ever had any of the following car-
a. Seizures: Yes/No diovascular or heart symptoms?
b. Diabetes (sugar disease): Yes/No a. Frequent pain or tightness in your
c. Allergic reactions that interfere with chest: Yes/No
your breathing: Yes/No b. Pain or tightness in your chest during
d. Claustrophobia (fear of closed-in places): physical activity: Yes/No
Yes/No c. Pain or tightness in your chest that
e. Trouble smelling odors: Yes/No interferes with your job: Yes/No
d. In the past two years, have you noticed
3. Have you ever had any of the following pul-
your heart skipping or missing a beat:
monary or lung problems?
Yes/No
a. Asbestosis: Yes/No
e. Heartburn or indigestion that is not re-
b. Asthma: Yes/No
lated to eating: Yes/No
c. Chronic bronchitis: Yes/No f. Any other symptoms that you think may
d. Emphysema: Yes/No be related to heart or circulation prob-
e. Pneumonia: Yes/No lems: Yes/No
f. Tuberculosis: Yes/No 7. Do you currently take medication for any
g. Silicosis: Yes/No of the following problems?
h. Pneumothorax (collapsed lung): Yes/No a. Breathing or lung problems: Yes/No
i. Lung cancer: Yes/No b. Heart trouble: Yes/No
j. Broken ribs: Yes/No c. Blood pressure: Yes/No
k. Any chest injuries or surgeries: Yes/No d. Seizures: Yes/No
l. Any other lung problem that you’ve been 8. If you’ve used a respirator, have you ever
told about: Yes/No had any of the following problems? (If
4. Do you currently have any of the following you’ve never used a respirator, check the
symptoms of pulmonary or lung illness? following space and go to question 9:)
a. Shortness of breath: Yes/No a. Eye irritation: Yes/No
b. Shortness of breath when walking fast b. Skin allergies or rashes: Yes/No

on level ground or walking up a slight c. Anxiety: Yes/No
hill or incline: Yes/No d. General weakness or fatigue: Yes/No
445
e. Any other problem that interferes with airborne chemicals (e.g., gases, fumes, or
your use of a respirator: Yes/No dust), or have you come into skin con-
9. Would you like to talk to the health care tact with hazardous chemicals: Yes/No
professional who will review this ques- If ‘‘yes,’’ name the chemicals if you know
tionnaire about your answers to this them: lllllllllllllllllll
questionnaire: Yes/No
3. Have you ever worked with any of the ma-
Questions 10 to 15 below must be answered terials, or under any of the conditions,
by every employee who has been selected to listed below:
use either a full-facepiece respirator or a a. Asbestos: Yes/No
self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA). b. Silica (e.g., in sandblasting): Yes/No
For employees who have been selected to use c. Tungsten/cobalt (e.g., grinding or weld-
other types of respirators, answering these ing this material): Yes/No
questions is voluntary. d. Beryllium: Yes/No
10. Have you ever lost vision in either eye e. Aluminum: Yes/No
(temporarily or permanently): Yes/No f. Coal (for example, mining): Yes/No
11. Do you currently have any of the following g. Iron: Yes/No
vision problems? h. Tin: Yes/No
a. Wear contact lenses: Yes/No i. Dusty environments: Yes/No
b. Wear glasses: Yes/No j. Any other hazardous exposures: Yes/No
c. Color blind: Yes/No
d. Any other eye or vision problem: Yes/No If ‘‘yes,’’ describe these exposures: llll
12. Have you ever had an injury to your ears, llllllllllllllllllllllll
including a broken ear drum: Yes/No 4. List any second jobs or side businesses you
13. Do you currently have any of the following have: lllllllllllllllllll
hearing problems? llllllllllllllllllllllll
a. Difficulty hearing: Yes/No
b. Wear a hearing aid: Yes/No 5. List your previous occupations: lllll
c. Any other hearing or ear problem: Yes/ llllllllllllllllllllllll
No 6. List your current and previous hobbies: l
14. Have you ever had a back injury: Yes/No
15. Do you currently have any of the following
musculoskeletal problems? 7. Have you been in the military services?
a. Weakness in any of your arms, hands, Yes/No
legs, or feet: Yes/No If ‘‘yes,’’ were you exposed to biological or
b. Back pain: Yes/No chemical agents (either in training or
c. Difficulty fully moving your arms and combat): Yes/No
legs: Yes/No 8. Have you ever worked on a HAZMAT
d. Pain or stiffness when you lean forward team? Yes/No
or backward at the waist: Yes/No 9. Other than medications for breathing and
e. Difficulty fully moving your head up or lung problems, heart trouble, blood pres-
down: Yes/No sure, and seizures mentioned earlier in
f. Difficulty fully moving your head side to this questionnaire, are you taking any
side: Yes/No other medications for any reason (includ-
g. Difficulty bending at your knees: Yes/No ing over-the-counter medications): Yes/
h. Difficulty squatting to the ground: Yes/ No
No If ‘‘yes,’’ name the medications if you
i. Climbing a flight of stairs or a ladder know them: llllllllllllllll
carrying more than 25 lbs: Yes/No
10. Will you be using any of the following
j. Any other muscle or skeletal problem
items with your respirator(s)?
that interferes with using a respirator:
a. HEPA Filters: Yes/No
Yes/No
b. Canisters (for example, gas masks): Yes/
Part B Any of the following questions, No
and other questions not listed, may be added c. Cartridges: Yes/No
to the questionnaire at the discretion of the 11. How often are you expected to use the
health care professional who will review the respirator(s) (circle ‘‘yes’’ or ‘‘no’’ for all
questionnaire. answers that apply to you)?:
1. In your present job, are you working at a. Escape only (no rescue): Yes/No
high altitudes (over 5,000 feet) or in a b. Emergency rescue only: Yes/No
place that has lower than normal c. Less than 5 hours per week: Yes/No
amounts of oxygen: Yes/No d. Less than 2 hours per day: Yes/No
If ‘‘yes,’’ do you have feelings of dizziness, e. 2 to 4 hours per day: Yes/No
shortness of breath, pounding in your f. Over 4 hours per day: Yes/No
chest, or other symptoms when you’re 12. During the period you are using the res-
working under these conditions: Yes/No pirator(s), is your work effort:

2. At work or at home, have you ever been a. Light (less than 200 kcal per hour): Yes/
exposed to hazardous solvents, hazardous No
446
If ‘‘yes,’’ how long does this period last dur- Name of the second toxic substance: lll
ing the average Estimated maximum exposure level per
shift:llllllhrs.llllllmins. shift: lllllllllllllllllll
Examples of a light work effort are sitting Duration of exposure per shift: llllll
while writing, typing, drafting, or per-
Name of the third toxic substance: llll
forming light assembly work; or standing
while operating a drill press (1–3 lbs.) or con- Estimated maximum exposure level per
trolling machines. shift: lllllllllllllllllll
b. Moderate (200 to 350 kcal per hour): Yes/ Duration of exposure per shift: llllll
No The name of any other toxic substances
If ‘‘yes,’’ how long does this period last that you’ll be exposed to while using
during the average your respirator:
shift:llllllhrs.llllllmins. llllllllllllllllllllllll
Examples of moderate work effort are sit- llllllllllllllllllllllll
ting while nailing or filing; driving a truck or llllllllllllllllllllllll
bus in urban traffic; standing while drilling, 19. Describe any special responsibilities
nailing, performing assembly work, or trans- you’ll have while using your respirator(s)
ferring a moderate load (about 35 lbs.) at that may affect the safety and well-being
trunk level; walking on a level surface about of others (for example, rescue, security):
2 mph or down a 5-degree grade about 3 mph;
or pushing a wheelbarrow with a heavy load
(about 100 lbs.) on a level surface. APPENDIX D TO § 1910.134 (MANDATORY) INFOR-
c. Heavy (above 350 kcal per hour): Yes/No MATION FOR EMPLOYEES USING RESPIRATORS
If ‘‘yes,’’ how long does this period last WHEN NOT REQUIRED UNDER THE STAND-
during the average ARD
shift:llllllhrs.llllllmins. Respirators are an effective method of pro-
Examples of heavy work are lifting a heavy tection against designated hazards when
load (about 50 lbs.) from the floor to your properly selected and worn. Respirator use is
waist or shoulder; working on a loading dock; encouraged, even when exposures are below
shoveling; standing while bricklaying or chip- the exposure limit, to provide an additional
ping castings; walking up an 8-degree grade level of comfort and protection for workers.
about 2 mph; climbing stairs with a heavy However, if a respirator is used improperly
load (about 50 lbs.). or not kept clean, the respirator itself can
13. Will you be wearing protective clothing become a hazard to the worker. Sometimes,
and/or equipment (other than the res- workers may wear respirators to avoid expo-
pirator) when you’re using your res- sures to hazards, even if the amount of haz-
pirator: Yes/No ardous substance does not exceed the limits
If ‘‘yes,’’ describe this protective clothing set by OSHA standards. If your employer
and/or equipment: lllllllllllll provides respirators for your voluntary use,
or if you provide your own respirator, you
need to take certain precautions to be sure
14. Will you be working under hot conditions that the respirator itself does not present a
(temperature exceeding 77 °F): Yes/No hazard.
15. Will you be working under humid condi- You should do the following:
tions: Yes/No 1. Read and heed all instructions provided
16. Describe the work you’ll be doing while by the manufacturer on use, maintenance,
you’re using your respirator(s): cleaning and care, and warnings regarding
llllllllllllllllllllllll the respirators limitations.
llllllllllllllllllllllll 2. Choose respirators certified for use to
protect against the contaminant of concern.
17. Describe any special or hazardous condi-
NIOSH, the National Institute for Occupa-
tions you might encounter when you’re
tional Safety and Health of the U.S. Depart-
using your respirator(s) (for example,
ment of Health and Human Services, cer-
confined spaces, life-threatening gases):
tifies respirators. A label or statement of
llllllllllllllllllllllll certification should appear on the respirator
llllllllllllllllllllllll or respirator packaging. It will tell you what
18. Provide the following information, if you the respirator is designed for and how much
know it, for each toxic substance that it will protect you.
you’ll be exposed to when you’re using 3. Do not wear your respirator into
your respirator(s): atmospheres containing contaminants for
which your respirator is not designed to pro-
Name of the first toxic substance: llll
tect against. For example, a respirator de-
Estimated maximum exposure level per
signed to filter dust particles will not pro-

shift: lllllllllllllllllll tect you against gases, vapors, or very small
Duration of exposure per shift llllll solid particles of fumes or smoke.
447
4. Keep track of your respirator so that when working in areas where there is a
you do not mistakenly use someone else’s danger of foot injuries due to falling or
respirator. rolling objects, or objects piercing the
[63 FR 1270, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR 20098, 20099, sole, or when the use of protective foot-
Apr. 23, 1998, as amended at 69 FR 46993, Aug. wear will protect the affected employee
4, 2004; 71 FR 16672, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50187, from an electrical hazard, such as a
Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75584, Dec. 12, 2008; 76 FR static-discharge or electric-shock haz-
33607, June 8, 2011; 77 FR 46949, Aug. 7, 2012;
ard, that remains after the employer
84 FR 50755, Sept. 26, 2019]
takes other necessary protective meas-
§ 1910.135 Head protection. ures.
(b) Criteria for protective footwear. (1)
(a) General requirements. (1) The em- Protective footwear must comply with
ployer shall ensure that each affected any of the following consensus stand-
employee wears a protective helmet ards:
when working in areas where there is a (i) ASTM F–2412–2005, ‘‘Standard Test
potential for injury to the head from Methods for Foot Protection,’’ and
falling objects. ASTM F–2413–2005, ‘‘Standard Speci-
(2) The employer shall ensure that a fication for Performance Requirements
protective helmet designed to reduce for Protective Footwear,’’ which are
electrical shock hazard is worn by each incorporated by reference in § 1910.6;
such affected employee when near ex- (ii) ANSI Z41–1999, ‘‘American Na-
posed electrical conductors which tional Standard for Personal Protec-
could contact the head. tion—Protective Footwear,’’ which is
(b) Criteria for head protection. (1) incorporated by reference in § 1910.6; or
Head protection must comply with any (iii) ANSI Z41–1991, ‘‘American Na-
of the following consensus standards: tional Standard for Personal Protec-
(i) American National Standards In- tion—Protective Footwear,’’ which is
stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–2009, ‘‘American incorporated by reference in § 1910.6.
National Standard for Industrial Head (2) Protective footwear that the em-
Protection,’’ incorporated by reference ployer demonstrates is at least as ef-
in § 1910.6; fective as protective footwear that is
(ii) American National Standards In- constructed in accordance with one of
stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–2003, ‘‘American the above consensus standards will be
National Standard for Industrial Head deemed to be in compliance with the
Protection,’’ incorporated by reference requirements of this section.
in § 1910.6; or
(iii) American National Standards In- [59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994; 59 FR 33911, July 1,
1994, as amended at 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996;
stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–1997, ‘‘American
61 FR 19548, May 2, 1996; 61 FR 21228, May 9,
National Standard for Personnel Pro- 1996; 74 FR 46356, Sept. 9, 2009; 79 FR 20629,
tection—Protective Headwear for In- Apr. 11, 2014]
dustrial Workers—Requirements,’’ in-
corporated by reference in § 1910.6. § 1910.137 Electrical protective equip-
(2) Head protection devices that the ment.
employer demonstrates are at least as (a) Design requirements for specific
effective as head protection devices types of electrical protective equipment.
that are constructed in accordance Rubber insulating blankets, rubber in-
with one of the above consensus stand- sulating matting, rubber insulating
ards will be deemed to be in compli- covers, rubber insulating line hose,
ance with the requirements of this sec- rubber insulating gloves, and rubber in-
tion. sulating sleeves shall meet the fol-
[59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994, as amended at 61 lowing requirements:
FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 61 FR 19548, May 2, 1996; (1) Manufacture and marking of rubber
74 FR 46356, Sept. 9, 2009; 77 FR 37598, June 22, insulating equipment. (i) Blankets,
2012] gloves, and sleeves shall be produced by
a seamless process.
§ 1910.136 Foot protection. (ii) Each item shall be clearly
(a) General requirements. The em- marked as follows:
ployer shall ensure that each affected (A) Class 00 equipment shall be
employee uses protective footwear marked Class 00.
448
(B) Class 0 equipment shall be as necessary, so that the water level is

marked Class 0. the same inside and outside the glove.
(C) Class 1 equipment shall be (C) After the 16-hour water soak spec-
marked Class 1. ified in paragraph (a)(2)(i)(C) of this
(D) Class 2 equipment shall be section, the 60-hertz proof-test current
marked Class 2. may not exceed the values given in
(E) Class 3 equipment shall be Table I–1 by more than 2 milliamperes.
marked Class 3. (iii) Equipment that has been sub-
(F) Class 4 equipment shall be jected to a minimum breakdown volt-
marked Class 4. age test may not be used for electrical
(G) Nonozone-resistant equipment protection. (See the note following
shall be marked Type I. paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.)
(iv) Material used for Type II insu-
(H) Ozone-resistant equipment shall
lating equipment shall be capable of
be marked Type II.
withstanding an ozone test, with no
(I) Other relevant markings, such as
visible effects. The ozone test shall re-
the manufacturer’s identification and
liably indicate that the material will
the size of the equipment, may also be
resist ozone exposure in actual use.
provided.
Any visible signs of ozone deterioration
(iii) Markings shall be nonconducting of the material, such as checking,
and shall be applied in such a manner cracking, breaks, or pitting, is evi-
as not to impair the insulating quali- dence of failure to meet the require-
ties of the equipment. ments for ozone-resistant material.
(iv) Markings on gloves shall be con- (See the note following paragraph
fined to the cuff portion of the glove. (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.)
(2) Electrical requirements. (i) Equip- (3) Workmanship and finish. (i) Equip-
ment shall be capable of withstanding ment shall be free of physical irreg-
the ac proof-test voltage specified in ularities that can adversely affect the
Table I–1 or the dc proof-test voltage insulating properties of the equipment
specified in Table I–2. and that can be detected by the tests
(A) The proof test shall reliably indi- or inspections required under this sec-
cate that the equipment can withstand tion.
the voltage involved. (ii) Surface irregularities that may
(B) The test voltage shall be applied be present on all rubber goods (because
continuously for 3 minutes for equip- of imperfections on forms or molds or
ment other than matting and shall be because of inherent difficulties in the
applied continuously for 1 minute for manufacturing process) and that may
matting. appear as indentations, protuberances,
(C) Gloves shall also be capable of or imbedded foreign material are ac-
separately withstanding the ac proof- ceptable under the following condi-
test voltage specified in Table I–1 after tions:
a 16-hour water soak. (See the note fol- (A) The indentation or protuberance
lowing paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this blends into a smooth slope when the
section.) material is stretched.
(ii) When the ac proof test is used on (B) Foreign material remains in
gloves, the 60-hertz proof-test current place when the insulating material is
may not exceed the values specified in folded and stretches with the insu-
Table I–1 at any time during the test lating material surrounding it.
period. NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a): Rubber insulating
(A) If the ac proof test is made at a equipment meeting the following national
frequency other than 60 hertz, the per- consensus standards is deemed to be in com-
missible proof-test current shall be pliance with the performance requirements
computed from the direct ratio of the of paragraph (a) of this section:
frequencies. American Society for Testing and Mate-
rials (ASTM) D120–09, Standard Specification
(B) For the test, gloves (right side
for Rubber Insulating Gloves.
out) shall be filled with tap water and ASTM D178–01 (2010), Standard Specification
immersed in water to a depth that is in
for Rubber Insulating Matting.

accordance with Table I–3. Water shall ASTM D1048–12, Standard Specification for
be added to or removed from the glove, Rubber Insulating Blankets.
449
ASTM D1049–98 (2010), Standard Specifica- current may not exceed 1 microampere
tion for Rubber Insulating Covers. per kilovolt of phase-to-phase applied
ASTM D1050–05 (2011), Standard Specifica- voltage.
tion for Rubber Insulating Line Hose.
ASTM D1051–08, Standard Specification for NOTE 1 TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2): This para-
Rubber Insulating Sleeves. graph applies to equipment that provides pri-
The preceding standards also contain spec- mary insulation of employees from energized
ifications for conducting the various tests parts. It does not apply to equipment used
required in paragraph (a) of this section. For for secondary insulation or equipment used
example, the ac and dc proof tests, the for brush contact only.
breakdown test, the water-soak procedure, NOTE 2 TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2): For ac exci-
and the ozone test mentioned in this para- tation, this current consists of three compo-
graph are described in detail in these ASTM nents: Capacitive current because of the di-
standards. electric properties of the insulating material
ASTM F1236–96 (2012), Standard Guide for itself; conduction current through the vol-
Visual Inspection of Electrical Protective Rub- ume of the insulating equipment; and leak-
ber Products, presents methods and tech- age current along the surface of the tool or
niques for the visual inspection of electrical equipment. The conduction current is nor-
protective equipment made of rubber. This mally negligible. For clean, dry insulating
guide also contains descriptions and photo- equipment, the leakage current is small, and
graphs of irregularities that can be found in the capacitive current predominates.
this equipment. NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b): Plastic guard
ASTM F819–10, Standard Terminology Relat- equipment is deemed to conform to the per-
ing to Electrical Protective Equipment for Work- formance requirements of paragraph (b) of
ers, includes definitions of terms relating to this section if it meets, and is used in ac-
the electrical protective equipment covered cordance with, ASTM F712–06 (2011), Standard
under this section. Test Methods and Specifications for Electrically
Insulating Plastic Guard Equipment for Protec-
(b) Design requirements for other types
tion of Workers.
of electrical protective equipment. The
following requirements apply to the de- (c) In-service care and use of electrical
sign and manufacture of electrical pro- protective equipment—(1) General. Elec-
tective equipment that is not covered trical protective equipment shall be
by paragraph (a) of this section: maintained in a safe, reliable condi-
(1) Voltage withstand. Insulating tion.
equipment used for the protection of (2) Specific requirements. The following
employees shall be capable of with- specific requirements apply to rubber
standing, without failure, the voltages insulating blankets, rubber insulating
that may be imposed upon it. covers, rubber insulating line hose,
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(1): These voltages
rubber insulating gloves, and rubber in-
include transient overvoltages, such as sulating sleeves:
switching surges, as well as nominal line (i) Maximum use voltages shall con-
voltage. See appendix B to § 1910.269 for a dis- form to those listed in Table I–4.
cussion of transient overvoltages on electric (ii) Insulating equipment shall be in-
power transmission and distribution sys- spected for damage before each day’s
tems. See IEEE Std 516–2009, IEEE Guide for use and immediately following any in-
Maintenance Methods on Energized Power
Lines, for methods of determining the mag-
cident that can reasonably be sus-
nitude of transient overvoltages on an elec- pected of causing damage. Insulating
trical system and for a discussion comparing gloves shall be given an air test, along
the ability of insulation equipment to with- with the inspection.
stand a transient overvoltage based on its
ability to withstand ac voltage testing. NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(2)(ii): ASTM F1236–
96 (2012), Standard Guide for Visual Inspection
(2) Equipment current. (i) Protective of Electrical Protective Rubber Products, pre-
equipment used for the primary insula- sents methods and techniques for the visual
tion of employees from energized cir- inspection of electrical protective equipment
cuit parts shall be capable of passing a made of rubber. This guide also contains de-
scriptions and photographs of irregularities
current test when subjected to the that can be found in this equipment.
highest nominal voltage on which the
equipment is to be used. (iii) Insulating equipment with any
(ii) When insulating equipment is of the following defects may not be
tested in accordance with paragraph used:

(b)(2)(i) of this section, the equipment (A) A hole, tear, puncture, or cut;
450
(B) Ozone cutting or ozone checking terity but only if the employer can
(that is, a series of interlacing cracks demonstrate that the possibility of
produced by ozone on rubber under me- physical damage to the gloves is small
chanical stress); and if the class of glove is one class
(C) An embedded foreign object; higher than that required for the volt-
(D) Any of the following texture age involved.
changes: swelling, softening, hard- (D) Insulating gloves that have been
ening, or becoming sticky or inelastic. used without protector gloves may not
(E) Any other defect that damages be reused until they have been tested
the insulating properties. under the provisions of paragraphs
(iv) Insulating equipment found to (c)(2)(viii) and (c)(2)(ix) of this section.
have other defects that might affect its (viii) Electrical protective equipment
insulating properties shall be removed shall be subjected to periodic electrical
from service and returned for testing tests. Test voltages and the maximum
under paragraphs (c)(2)(viii) and intervals between tests shall be in ac-
(c)(2)(ix) of this section. cordance with Table I–4 and Table I–5.
(v) Insulating equipment shall be (ix) The test method used under para-
cleaned as needed to remove foreign graphs (c)(2)(viii) and (c)(2)(xi) of this
substances. section shall reliably indicate whether
(vi) Insulating equipment shall be the insulating equipment can with-
stored in such a location and in such a stand the voltages involved.
manner as to protect it from light,
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(2)(ix): Standard
temperature extremes, excessive hu-
electrical test methods considered as meet-
midity, ozone, and other damaging sub- ing this paragraph are given in the following
stances and conditions. national consensus standards:
(vii) Protector gloves shall be worn ASTM D120–09, Standard Specification for
over insulating gloves, except as fol- Rubber Insulating Gloves.
lows: ASTM D178–01 (2010), Standard Specification
(A) Protector gloves need not be used for Rubber Insulating Matting.
with Class 0 gloves, under limited-use ASTM D1048–12, Standard Specification for
Rubber Insulating Blankets.
conditions, when small equipment and
ASTM D1049–98 (2010), Standard Specifica-
parts manipulation necessitate unusu- tion for Rubber Insulating Covers.
ally high finger dexterity. ASTM D1050–05 (2011), Standard Specifica-
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(2)(vii)(A): Persons tion for Rubber Insulating Line Hose.
inspecting rubber insulating gloves used ASTM D1051–08, Standard Specification for
under these conditions need to take extra Rubber Insulating Sleeves.
care in visually examining them. Employees ASTM F478–09, Standard Specification for In-
using rubber insulating gloves under these Service Care of Insulating Line Hose and Cov-
conditions need to take extra care to avoid ers.
ASTM F479–06 (2011), Standard Specification
handling sharp objects.
for In-Service Care of Insulating Blankets.
(B) If the voltage does not exceed 250 ASTM F496–08, Standard Specification for In-
volts, ac, or 375 volts, dc, protector Service Care of Insulating Gloves and Sleeves.
gloves need not be used with Class 00 (x) Insulating equipment failing to
gloves, under limited-use conditions, pass inspections or electrical tests may
when small equipment and parts ma- not be used by employees, except as
nipulation necessitate unusually high follows:
finger dexterity. (A) Rubber insulating line hose may
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(2)(vii)(B): Persons be used in shorter lengths with the de-
inspecting rubber insulating gloves used fective portion cut off.
under these conditions need to take extra (B) Rubber insulating blankets may
care in visually examining them. Employees be salvaged by severing the defective
using rubber insulating gloves under these area from the undamaged portion of
conditions need to take extra care to avoid the blanket. The resulting undamaged
handling sharp objects.
area may not be smaller than 560 milli-
(C) Any other class of glove may be meters by 560 millimeters (22 inches by
used without protector gloves, under 22 inches) for Class 1, 2, 3, and 4 blan-
limited-use conditions, when small kets.
equipment and parts manipulation ne- (C) Rubber insulating blankets may
cessitate unusually high finger dex- be repaired using a compatible patch
451
that results in physical and electrical (xii) The employer shall certify that
properties equal to those of the blan- equipment has been tested in accord-
ket. ance with the requirements of para-
(D) Rubber insulating gloves and graphs (c)(2)(iv), (c)(2)(vii)(D),
sleeves with minor physical defects, (c)(2)(viii), (c)(2)(ix), and (c)(2)(xi) of
such as small cuts, tears, or punctures, this section. The certification shall
may be repaired by the application of a identify the equipment that passed the
compatible patch. Also, rubber insu- test and the date it was tested and
lating gloves and sleeves with minor
shall be made available upon request to
surface blemishes may be repaired with
the Assistant Secretary for Occupa-
a compatible liquid compound. The re-
paired area shall have electrical and tional Safety and Health and to em-
physical properties equal to those of ployees or their authorized representa-
the surrounding material. Repairs to tives.
gloves are permitted only in the area NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(2)(xii): Marking
between the wrist and the reinforced equipment with, and entering onto logs, the
edge of the opening. results of the tests and the dates of testing
(xi) Repaired insulating equipment are two acceptable means of meeting the cer-
shall be retested before it may be used tification requirement.
by employees.
TABLE I–1—AC PROOF-TEST REQUIREMENTS
Maximum proof-test current, mA
(gloves only)
Proof-test
Class of Equipment Voltage 280-mm 360-mm 410-mm 460-mm
rms V (11-in) (14-in) (16-in) (18-in)
glove glove glove glove
00 .......................................... 2,500 8 12
0 ............................................ 5,000 8 12 14 16
1 ............................................ 10,000 ............................ 14 16 18
2 ............................................ 20,000 ............................ 16 18 20
3 ............................................ 30,000 ............................ 18 20 22
4 ............................................ 40,000 ............................ ............................ 22 24
TABLE I–2—DC PROOF-TEST REQUIREMENTS TABLE I–2—DC PROOF-TEST REQUIREMENTS—

Continued
Proof–test
Class of equipment voltage Proof–test
Class of equipment voltage
00 ................................................................... 10,000
0 ..................................................................... 20,000 4 ..................................................................... 70,000
1 ..................................................................... 40,000 Note: The dc voltages listed in this table are not appro-
2 ..................................................................... 50,000 priate for proof testing rubber insulating line hose or covers.
3 ..................................................................... 60,000 For this equipment, dc proof tests shall use a voltage high
enough to indicate that the equipment can be safely used at
the voltages listed in Table I–4. See ASTM D1050–05 (2011)
and ASTM D1049–98 (2010) for further information on proof
tests for rubber insulating line hose and covers, respectively.
TABLE I–3—GLOVE TESTS—WATER LEVEL 1 2

AC proof test DC proof test
Class of glove
mm in mm in
00 .......................................................................... 38 1.5 38 1.5

0 ............................................................................ 38 1.5 38 1.5
1 ............................................................................ 38 1.5 51 2.0
2 ............................................................................ 64 2.5 76 3.0
3 ............................................................................ 89 3.5 102 4.0
4 ............................................................................ 127 5.0 153 6.0
1 The water level is given as the clearance from the reinforced edge of the glove to the water line, with a tolerance of ±13 mm.
(±0.5 in.).
2 If atmospheric conditions make the specified clearances impractical, the clearances may be increased by a maximum of 25
mm. (1 in.).
452
TABLE I–4—RUBBER INSULATING EQUIPMENT, VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS

Maximum Retest Retest
Class of equipment use voltage 1 voltage 2 voltage 2
AC rms AC rms DC avg
00 ........................................................................................................... 500 2,500 10,000

0 ............................................................................................................. 1,000 5,000 20,000
1 ............................................................................................................. 7,500 10,000 40,000
2 ............................................................................................................. 17,000 20,000 50,000
3 ............................................................................................................. 26,500 30,000 60,000
4 ............................................................................................................. 36,000 40,000 70,000
1 The maximum use voltage is the ac voltage (rms) classification of the protective equipment that designates the maximum
nominal design voltage of the energized system that may be safely worked. The nominal design voltage is equal to the phase-to-
phase voltage on multiphase circuits. However, the phase-to-ground potential is considered to be the nominal design voltage if:
(1) There is no multiphase exposure in a system area and the voltage exposure is limited to the phase-to-ground potential, or
(2) The electric equipment and devices are insulated or isolated or both so that the multiphase exposure on a grounded wye
circuit is removed.
2 The proof-test voltage shall be applied continuously for at least 1 minute, but no more than 3 minutes.
TABLE I–5—RUBBER INSULATING EQUIPMENT, TEST INTERVALS

Type of When to test
equipment
Rubber insulating line Upon indication that insulating value is suspect and after repair.
hose.
Rubber insulating covers Upon indication that insulating value is suspect and after repair.
Rubber insulating blan- Before first issue and every 12 months thereafter; 1 upon indication that insulating value is suspect;
kets. and after repair.
Rubber insulating gloves Before first issue and every 6 months thereafter; 1 upon indication that insulating value is suspect;
after repair; and after use without protectors.
Rubber insulating Before first issue and every 12 months thereafter; 1 upon indication that insulating value is suspect;
sleeves. and after repair.
1 If the insulating equipment has been electrically tested but not issued for service, the insulating equipment may not be placed
into service unless it has been electrically tested within the previous 12 months.
[79 FR 20629, Apr. 11, 2014]
§ 1910.138 Hand protection. § 1910.139 [Reserved]

(a) General requirements. Employers § 1910.140 Personal fall protection sys-
shall select and require employees to tems.
use appropriate hand protection when
employees’ hands are exposed to haz- (a) Scope and application. This section
ards such as those from skin absorp- establishes performance, care, and use
tion of harmful substances; severe cuts criteria for all personal fall protection
or lacerations; severe abrasions; punc- systems. The employer must ensure
tures; chemical burns; thermal burns; that each personal fall protection sys-
and harmful temperature extremes. tem used to comply with this part
(b) Selection. Employers shall base must meet the requirements of this
the selection of the appropriate hand section.
protection on an evaluation of the per- (b) Definitions. The following defini-
formance characteristics of the hand tions apply to this section:
protection relative to the task(s) to be Anchorage means a secure point of at-
performed, conditions present, dura- tachment for equipment such as life-
tion of use, and the hazards and poten- lines, lanyards, or deceleration devices.
tial hazards identified. Belt terminal means an end attach-
ment of a window cleaner’s positioning
[59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994; 59 FR 33911, July 1, system used for securing the belt or
1994]
harness to a window cleaner’s belt an-
chor.
Body belt means a strap with means
both for securing about the waist and

for attaching to other components such
453
as a lanyard used with positioning sys- vide an equal or greater degree of safe-
tems, travel restraint systems, or lad- ty for employees compared to the de-
der safety systems. signs, equipment, materials, or meth-
Body harness means straps that se- ods specified in the standard.
cure about the employee in a manner Free fall means the act of falling be-
to distribute the fall arrest forces over fore the personal fall arrest system be-
at least the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest, gins to apply force to arrest the fall.
and shoulders, with a means for attach- Free fall distance means the vertical
ing the harness to other components of displacement of the fall arrest attach-
a personal fall protection system. ment point on the employee’s body belt
Carabiner means a connector gen- or body harness between onset of the
erally comprised of a trapezoidal or fall and just before the system begins
oval shaped body with a closed gate or to apply force to arrest the fall. This
similar arrangement that may be distance excludes deceleration dis-
opened to attach another object and, tance, lifeline and lanyard elongation,
when released, automatically closes to but includes any deceleration device
retain the object. slide distance or self-retracting life-
Competent person means a person who line/lanyard extension before the de-
is capable of identifying existing and vices operate and fall arrest forces
predictable hazards in any personal fall occur.
protection system or any component of Lanyard means a flexible line of rope,
it, as well as in their application and wire rope, or strap that generally has a
uses with related equipment, and who connector at each end for connecting
has authorization to take prompt, cor- the body belt or body harness to a de-
rective action to eliminate the identi- celeration device, lifeline, or anchor-
fied hazards. age.
Connector means a device used to cou- Lifeline means a component of a per-
ple (connect) parts of the fall protec- sonal fall protection system consisting
tion system together. of a flexible line for connection to an
D-ring means a connector used: anchorage at one end so as to hang
(i) In a harness as an integral attach- vertically (vertical lifeline), or for con-
ment element or fall arrest attach- nection to anchorages at both ends so
ment; as to stretch horizontally (horizontal
(ii) In a lanyard, energy absorber, lifeline), and serves as a means for con-
lifeline, or anchorage connector as an necting other components of the sys-
integral connector; or tem to the anchorage.
(iii) In a positioning or travel re- Personal fall arrest system means a
straint system as an attachment ele- system used to arrest an employee in a
ment. fall from a walking-working surface. It
Deceleration device means any mecha- consists of a body harness, anchorage,
nism that serves to dissipate energy and connector. The means of connec-
during a fall. tion may include a lanyard, decelera-
Deceleration distance means the tion device, lifeline, or a suitable com-
vertical distance a falling employee bination of these.
travels from the point at which the de- Personal fall protection system means a
celeration device begins to operate, ex- system (including all components) an
cluding lifeline elongation and free fall employer uses to provide protection
distance, until stopping. It is measured from falling or to safely arrest an em-
as the distance between the location of ployee’s fall if one occurs. Examples of
an employee’s body harness attach- personal fall protection systems in-
ment point at the moment of activa- clude personal fall arrest systems, posi-
tion (at the onset of fall arrest forces) tioning systems, and travel restraint
of the deceleration device during a fall, systems.
and the location of that attachment Positioning system (work-positioning
point after the employee comes to a system) means a system of equipment
full stop. and connectors that, when used with a
Equivalent means alternative designs, body harness or body belt, allows an
equipment, materials, or methods that employee to be supported on an ele-

the employer can demonstrate will pro- vated vertical surface, such as a wall or
454
window sill, and work with both hands connector, lanyard (or other means of
free. Positioning systems also are connection), and body support that an
called ‘‘positioning system devices’’ employer uses to eliminate the possi-
and ‘‘work-positioning equipment.’’ bility of an employee going over the
Qualified describes a person who, by edge of a walking-working surface.
possession of a recognized degree, cer- Window cleaner’s belt means a posi-
tificate, or professional standing, or tioning belt that consists of a waist
who by extensive knowledge, training, belt, an integral terminal runner or
and experience has successfully dem- strap, and belt terminals.
onstrated the ability to solve or re- Window cleaner’s belt anchor (window
solve problems relating to the subject anchor) means specifically designed
matter, the work, or the project. fall-preventing attachment points per-
Rope grab means a deceleration de- manently affixed to a window frame or
vice that travels on a lifeline and auto- to a building part immediately adja-
matically, by friction, engages the life- cent to the window frame, for direct at-
line and locks so as to arrest the fall of tachment of the terminal portion of a
an employee. A rope grab usually em- window cleaner’s belt.
ploys the principle of inertial locking, Window cleaner’s positioning system
cam/lever locking, or both. means a system which consists of a
Safety factor means the ratio of the window cleaner’s belt secured to win-
design load and the ultimate strength dow anchors.
of the material. Work-positioning system (see Posi-
Self-retracting lifeline/lanyard means a tioning system in this paragraph (b)).
deceleration device containing a drum- (c) General requirements. The em-
wound line that can be slowly ex- ployer must ensure that personal fall
tracted from, or retracted onto, the protection systems meet the following
drum under slight tension during nor- requirements. Additional requirements
mal movement by the employee. At the for personal fall arrest systems and po-
onset of a fall, the device automati- sitioning systems are contained in
cally locks the drum and arrests the paragraphs (d) and (e) of this section,
fall. respectively.
Snaphook means a connector com- (1) Connectors must be drop forged,
prised of a hook-shaped body with a pressed or formed steel, or made of
normally closed gate, or similar ar- equivalent materials.
rangement that may be manually (2) Connectors must have a corrosion-
opened to permit the hook to receive resistant finish, and all surfaces and
an object. When released, the snaphook edges must be smooth to prevent dam-
automatically closes to retain the ob- age to interfacing parts of the system.
ject. Opening a snaphook requires two (3) When vertical lifelines are used,
separate actions. Snaphooks are gen- each employee must be attached to a
erally one of two types: separate lifeline.
(i) Automatic-locking type (per- (4) Lanyards and vertical lifelines
mitted) with a self-closing and self- must have a minimum breaking
locking gate that remains closed and strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN).
locked until intentionally unlocked (5) Self-retracting lifelines and lan-
and opened for connection or dis- yards that automatically limit free fall
connection; and distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less must
(ii) Non-locking type (prohibited) have components capable of sustaining
with a self-closing gate that remains a minimum tensile load of 3,000 pounds
closed, but not locked, until inten- (13.3 kN) applied to the device with the
tionally opened for connection or dis- lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended
connection. position.
Travel restraint (tether) line means a (6) A competent person or qualified
rope or wire rope used to transfer person must inspect each knot in a lan-
forces from a body support to an an- yard or vertical lifeline to ensure that
chorage or anchorage connector in a it meets the requirements of para-
travel restraint system. graphs (c)(4) and (5) of this section be-
Travel restraint system means a com- fore any employee uses the lanyard or
bination of an anchorage, anchorage lifeline.
455
(7) D-rings, snaphooks, and (13) Anchorages, except window

carabiners must be capable of sus- cleaners’ belt anchors covered by para-
taining a minimum tensile load of 5,000 graph (e) of this section, must be:
pounds (22.2 kN). (i) Capable of supporting at least
(8) D-rings, snaphooks, and 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) for each em-
carabiners must be proof tested to a ployee attached; or
minimum tensile load of 3,600 pounds (ii) Designed, installed, and used,
(16 kN) without cracking, breaking, or under the supervision of qualified per-
incurring permanent deformation. The son, as part of a complete personal fall
gate strength of snaphooks and protection system that maintains a
carabiners must be capable of with- safety factor of at least two.
standing a minimum load of 3,600 (14) Travel restraint lines must be ca-
pounds (16 kN) without the gate sepa- pable of sustaining a tensile load of at
rating from the nose of the snaphook least 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN).
or carabiner body by more than 0.125 (15) Lifelines must not be made of
inches (3.175 mm). natural fiber rope. Polypropylene rope
(9) Snaphooks and carabiners must be must contain an ultraviolet (UV) light
the automatic locking type that re- inhibitor.
quire at least two separate, consecu- (16) Personal fall protection systems
tive movements to open. and their components must be used ex-
(10) Snaphooks and carabiners must clusively for employee fall protection
not be connected to any of the fol- and not for any other purpose, such as
lowing unless they are designed for hoisting equipment or materials.
such connections: (17) A personal fall protection system
(i) Directly to webbing, rope, or wire or its components subjected to impact
rope; loading must be removed from service
(ii) To each other; immediately and not used again until a
(iii) To a D-ring to which another competent person inspects the system
snaphook, carabiner, or connector is or components and determines that it
attached; is not damaged and safe for use for em-
(iv) To a horizontal life line; or ployee personal fall protection.
(v) To any object that is incom- (18) Personal fall protection systems
patibly shaped or dimensioned in rela- must be inspected before initial use
tion to the snaphook or carabiner such during each workshift for mildew,
that unintentional disengagement wear, damage, and other deterioration,
could occur when the connected object and defective components must be re-
depresses the snaphook or carabiner moved from service.
gate, allowing the components to sepa- (19) Ropes, belts, lanyards, and har-
rate. nesses used for personal fall protection
(11) The employer must ensure that must be compatible with all connectors
each horizontal lifeline: used.
(i) Is designed, installed, and used (20) Ropes, belts, lanyards, lifelines,
under the supervision of a qualified and harnesses used for personal fall
person; and protection must be protected from
(ii) Is part of a complete personal fall being cut, abraded, melted, or other-
arrest system that maintains a safety wise damaged.
factor of at least two. (21) The employer must provide for
(12) Anchorages used to attach to prompt rescue of each employee in the
personal fall protection equipment event of a fall.
must be independent of any anchorage (22) Personal fall protection systems
used to suspend employees or platforms must be worn with the attachment
on which employees work. Anchorages point of the body harness located in
used to attach to personal fall protec- the center of the employee’s back near
tion equipment on mobile work plat- shoulder level. The attachment point
forms on powered industrial trucks may be located in the pre-sternal posi-
must be attached to an overhead mem- tion if the free fall distance is limited
ber of the platform, at a point located to 2 feet (0.6 m) or less.
above and near the center of the plat- (d) Personal fall arrest systems—(1) Sys-
form. tem performance criteria. In addition to
456
the general requirements in paragraph the system to allow a free fall of more
(c) of this section, the employer must than 6 feet and tested the system to en-
ensure that personal fall arrest sys- sure a maximum arresting force of 1,800
tems: pounds (8 kN) is not exceeded.
(i) Limit the maximum arresting (3) Body belts. Body belts are prohib-
force on the employee to 1,800 pounds (8 ited as part of a personal fall arrest
kN); system.
(ii) Bring the employee to a complete (e) Positioning systems—(1) System per-
stop and limit the maximum decelera- formance requirements. The employer
tion distance the employee travels to must ensure that each positioning sys-
3.5 feet (1.1 m); tem meets the following requirements:
(iii) Have sufficient strength to with- (i) General. All positioning systems,
stand twice the potential impact en- except window cleaners’ positioning
ergy of the employee free falling a dis- systems, are capable of withstanding,
tance of 6 feet (1.8 m), or the free fall without failure, a drop test consisting
distance permitted by the system; and of a 4-foot (1.2-m) drop of a 250-pound
(iv) Sustain the employee within the (113-kg) weight;
system/strap configuration without (ii) Window cleaners’ positioning sys-
making contact with the employee’s tems. All window cleaners’ positioning
neck and chin area. systems must:
(v) If the personal fall arrest system
(A) Be capable of withstanding with-
meets the criteria and protocols in ap-
out failure a drop test consisting of a 6-
pendix D of this subpart, and is being
foot (1.8-m) drop of a 250-pound (113-kg)
used by an employee having a com-
weight; and
bined body and tool weight of less than
310 pounds (140 kg), the system is con- (B) Limit the initial arresting force
sidered to be in compliance with the on the falling employee to not more
provisions of paragraphs (d)(1)(i) than 2,000 pounds (8.9 kN), with a dura-
through (iii) of this section. If the sys- tion not exceeding 2 milliseconds and
tem is used by an employee having a any subsequent arresting forces to not
combined body and tool weight of 310 more than 1,000 pounds (4.5 kN).
pounds (140kg) or more and the em- (iii) Positioning systems, including
ployer has appropriately modified the window cleaners’ positioning systems,
criteria and protocols in appendix D, that meet the test methods and proce-
then the system will be deemed to be in dures in appendix D of this subpart are
compliance with the requirements of considered to be in compliance with
paragraphs (d)(1)(i) through (iii). paragraphs (e)(1)(i) and (ii).
(2) System use criteria. The employer (iv) Lineman’s body belt and pole strap
must ensure that: systems. Lineman’s body belt and pole
(i) On any horizontal lifeline that strap systems must meet the following
may become a vertical lifeline, the de- tests:
vice used to connect to the horizontal (A) A dielectric test of 819.7 volts,
lifeline is capable of locking in both di- AC, per centimeter (25,000 volts per
rections on the lifeline. foot) for 3 minutes without visible de-
(ii) Personal fall arrest systems are terioration;
rigged in such a manner that the em- (B) A leakage test of 98.4 volts, AC,
ployee cannot free fall more than 6 feet per centimeter (3,000 volts per foot)
(1.8 m) or contact a lower level. A free with a leakage current of no more than
fall may be more than 6 feet (1.8 m) 1 mA; and
provided the employer can dem- (C) A flammability test in accord-
onstrate the manufacturer designed ance with Table I–7 of this section.
457
(2) System use criteria for window (vii) Both terminals of the window
cleaners’ positioning systems. The em- cleaner’s belt are attached to separate
ployer must ensure that window clean- window anchors during any cleaning
ers’ positioning systems meet and are operation;
used in accordance with the following: (viii) No employee works on a win-
(i) Window cleaners’ belts are de- dow sill or ledge on which there is
signed and constructed so that: snow, ice, or any other slippery condi-
(A) Belt terminals will not pass tion, or one that is weakened or rotted;
through their fastenings on the belt or (ix) No employee works on a window
harness if a terminal comes loose from sill or ledge unless:
the window anchor; and (A) The window sill or ledge is a min-
(B) The length of the runner from imum of 4 inches (10 cm) wide and
terminal tip to terminal tip is 8 feet slopes no more than 15 degrees below
(2.44 m) or less; horizontal; or
(ii) Window anchors to which belts (B) The 4-inch minimum width of the
are fastened are installed in the side window sill or ledge is increased 0.4
frames or mullions of the window at a inches (1 cm) for every degree the sill
point not less than 42 inches (106.7 cm) or ledge slopes beyond 15 degrees, up to
and not more than 51 inches (129.5 cm)
a maximum of 30 degrees;
above the window sill;
(x) The employee attaches at least
(iii) Each window anchor is capable
one belt terminal to a window anchor
of supporting a minimum load of 6,000
before climbing through the window
pounds (26.5 kN);
opening, and keeps at least one ter-
(iv) Use of installed window anchors
minal attached until completely back
for any purpose other than attaching
inside the window opening;
the window cleaner’s belt is prohibited;
(xi) Except as provided in paragraph
(v) A window anchor that has dam-
aged or deteriorated fastenings or sup- (e)(2)(xii) of this section, the employee
ports is removed, or the window anchor travels from one window to another by
head is detached so the anchor cannot returning inside the window opening
be used; and repeating the belt terminal attach-
(vi) Rope that has wear or deteriora- ment procedure at each window in ac-
tion that affects its strength is not cordance with paragraph (e)(2)(x) of
used; this section;
458
ER18NO16.360</GPH>
Occu. Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1910, Subpt. I, App. B
(xii) An employee using a window 1. Controlling hazards. PPE devices alone

cleaner’s positioning system may trav- should not be relied on to provide protection
el from one window to another while against hazards, but should be used in con-
junction with guards, engineering controls,
outside of the building, provided: and sound manufacturing practices.
(A) At least one belt terminal is at- 2. Assessment and selection. It is necessary
tached to a window anchor at all times; to consider certain general guidelines for as-
(B) The distance between window an- sessing the foot, head, eye and face, and hand
chors does not exceed 4 feet (1.2 m) hazard situations that exist in an occupa-
horizontally. The distance between tional or educational operation or process,
windows may be increased up to 6 feet and to match the protective devices to the
particular hazard. It should be the responsi-
(1.8 m) horizontally if the window sill
bility of the safety officer to exercise com-
or ledge is at least 1 foot (0.31 m) wide mon sense and appropriate expertise to ac-
and the slope is less than 5 degrees; complish these tasks.
(C) The sill or ledge between windows 3. Assessment guidelines. In order to assess
is continuous; and the need for PPE the following steps should
(D) The width of the window sill or be taken:
ledge in front of the mullions is at a. Survey. Conduct a walk-through survey
least 6 inches (15.2 cm) wide. of the areas in question. The purpose of the
survey is to identify sources of hazards to
[81 FR 82999, Nov. 18, 2016, as amended at 84 workers and co-workers. Consideration
FR 68797, Dec. 17, 2019] should be given to the basic hazard cat-
egories:
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART I OF PART (a) Impact
1910—REFERENCES FOR FURTHER IN- (b) Penetration
FORMATION (NON-MANDATORY)
(c) Compression (roll-over)
(d) Chemical
The documents in appendix A provide in- (e) Heat
formation which may be helpful in under- (f) Harmful dust
standing and implementing the standards in (g) Light (optical) radiation
Subpart I. b. Sources. During the walk-through survey
1. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). ‘‘Ac- the safety officer should observe: (a) sources
cidents Involving Eye Injuries.’’ Report 597, of motion; i.e., machinery or processes where
Washington, D.C.: BLS, 1980. any movement of tools, machine elements or
2. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). ‘‘Ac- particles could exist, or movement of per-
cidents Involving Face Injuries.’’ Report 604, sonnel that could result in collision with sta-
Washington, D.C.: BLS, 1980. tionary objects; (b) sources of high tempera-
3. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). ‘‘Ac- tures that could result in burns, eye injury
cidents Involving Head Injuries.’’ Report 605, or ignition of protective equipment, etc.; (c)
Washington, D.C.: BLS, 1980. types of chemical exposures; (d) sources of
4. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). ‘‘Ac- harmful dust; (e) sources of light radiation,
cidents Involving Foot Injuries.’’ Report 626, i.e., welding, brazing, cutting, furnaces, heat
Washington, D.C.: BLS, 1981. treating, high intensity lights, etc.; (f)
5. National Safety Council. ‘‘Accident sources of falling objects or potential for
Facts’’, Annual edition, Chicago, IL: 1981. dropping objects; (g) sources of sharp objects
6. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). ‘‘Oc- which might pierce the feet or cut the hands;
cupational Injuries and Illnesses in the (h) sources of rolling or pinching objects
United States by Industry,’’ Annual edition, which could crush the feet; (i) layout of
Washington, D.C.: BLS. workplace and location of co-workers; and (j)
7. National Society to Prevent Blindness. any electrical hazards. In addition, injury/ac-
‘‘A Guide for Controlling Eye Injuries in In- cident data should be reviewed to help iden-
dustry,’’ Chicago, Il: 1982. tify problem areas.
c. Organize data. Following the walk-
[59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994] through survey, it is necessary to organize
the data and information for use in the as-
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART I OF PART sessment of hazards. The objective is to pre-
1910—NONMANDATORY COMPLIANCE pare for an analysis of the hazards in the en-
GUIDELINES FOR HAZARD ASSESS- vironment to enable proper selection of pro-
MENT AND PERSONAL PROTECTIVE tective equipment.
EQUIPMENT SELECTION d. Analyze data. Having gathered and orga-
nized data on a workplace, an estimate of
This appendix is intended to provide com- the potential for injuries should be made.
pliance assistance for employers and employ- Each of the basic hazards (paragraph 3.a.)
ees in implementing requirements for a haz- should be reviewed and a determination

ard assessment and the selection of personal made as to the type, level of risk, and seri-
protective equipment. ousness of potential injury from each of the
459
Pt. 1910, Subpt. I, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–21 Edition)
hazards found in the area. The possibility of vices for eye protection against dust and
exposure to several hazards simultaneously chemical splash to ensure that the devices
should be considered. are sealed to the face. In addition, proper fit-
4. Selection guidelines. After completion of ting of helmets is important to ensure that
the procedures in paragraph 3, the general it will not fall off during work operations. In
procedure for selection of protective equip- some cases a chin strap may be necessary to
ment is to: a) Become familiar with the po- keep the helmet on an employee’s head.
tential hazards and the type of protective (Chin straps should break at a reasonably
equipment that is available, and what it can low force, however, so as to prevent a stran-
do; i.e., splash protection, impact protection, gulation hazard). Where manufacturer’s in-
etc.; b) compare the hazards associated with structions are available, they should be fol-
the environment; i.e., impact velocities, lowed carefully.
masses, projectile shape, radiation inten- 7. Reassessment of hazards. It is the respon-
sities, with the capabilities of the available
sibility of the safety officer to reassess the
protective equipment; c) select the protec-
workplace hazard situation as necessary, by
tive equipment which ensures a level of pro-
identifying and evaluating new equipment
tection greater than the minimum required
and processes, reviewing accident records,
to protect employees from the hazards; and
and reevaluating the suitability of pre-
d) fit the user with the protective device and
give instructions on care and use of the PPE. viously selected PPE.
It is very important that end users be made 8. Selection chart guidelines for eye and face
aware of all warning labels for and limita- protection. Some occupations (not a complete
tions of their PPE. list) for which eye protection should be rou-
5. Fitting the device. Careful consideration tinely considered are: carpenters, elec-
must be given to comfort and fit. PPE that tricians, machinists, mechanics and repair-
fits poorly will not afford the necessary pro- ers, millwrights, plumbers and pipe fitters,
tection. Continued wearing of the device is sheet metal workers and tinsmiths, assem-
more likely if it fits the wearer comfortably. blers, sanders, grinding machine operators,
Protective devices are generally available in lathe and milling machine operators, saw-
a variety of sizes. Care should be taken to yers, welders, laborers, chemical process op-
ensure that the right size is selected. erators and handlers, and timber cutting and
6. Devices with adjustable features. Adjust- logging workers. The following chart pro-
ments should be made on an individual basis vides general guidance for the proper selec-
for a comfortable fit that will maintain the tion of eye and face protection to protect
protective device in the proper position. Par- against hazards associated with the listed
ticular care should be taken in fitting de- hazard ‘‘source’’ operations.
EYE AND FACE PROTECTION SELECTION CHART

Source Assessment of Hazard Protection
IMPACT—Chipping, grinding machining, masonry Flying fragments, objects, Spectacles with side protection, goggles,
work, woodworking, sawing, drilling, chiseling, large chips, particles sand, face shields. See notes (1), (3), (5), (6),
powered fastening, riveting, and sanding. dirt, etc. (10). For severe exposure, use
faceshield.
HEAT—Furnace operations, pouring, casting, hot Hot sparks ............................... Faceshields, goggles, spectacles with side
dipping, and welding. protection. For severe exposure use
faceshield. See notes (1), (2), (3).
Splash from molten metals ..... Faceshields worn over goggles. See notes
(1), (2), (3).
High temperature exposure .... Screen face shields, reflective face
shields. See notes (1), (2), (3).
CHEMICALS—Acid and chemicals handling, Splash ..................................... Goggles, eyecup and cover types. For se-
degreasing plating. vere exposure, use face shield. See
notes (3), (11).
Irritating mists .......................... Special-purpose goggles.
DUST—Woodworking, buffing, general dusty con- Nuisance dust ......................... Goggles, eyecup and cover types. See
ditions. note (8).
LIGHT and/or RADIATION—.
Welding: Electric arc Optical radiation ...................... Welding helmets or welding shields. Typ-
ical shades: 10-14. See notes (9), (12)
Welding: Gas Optical radiation ...................... Welding goggles or welding face shield.
Typical shades: gas welding 4-8, cutting
3-6, brazing 3-4. See note (9)
Cutting, Torch brazing, Torch soldering Optical radiation ...................... Spectacles or welding face-shield. Typical
shades, 1.5-3. See notes (3), (9)
Glare Poor vision .............................. Spectacles with shaded or special-purpose
lenses, as suitable. See notes (9), (10).

Notes to Eye and Face Protection Selection Chart:
460
Occu. Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1910, Subpt. I, App. B
(1) Care should be taken to recognize the possibility of multiple and simultaneous exposure to a variety of hazards. Adequate
protection against the highest level of each of the hazards should be provided. Protective devices do not provide unlimited pro-
tection.
(2) Operations involving heat may also involve light radiation. As required by the standard, protection from both hazards must
be provided.
(3) Faceshields should only be worn over primary eye protection (spectacles or goggles).
(4) As required by the standard, filter lenses must meet the requirements for shade designations in § 1910.133(a)(5). Tinted
and shaded lenses are not filter lenses unless they are marked or identified as such.
(5) As required by the standard, persons whose vision requires the use of prescription (Rx) lenses must wear either protective
devices fitted with prescription (Rx) lenses or protective devices designed to be worn over regular prescription (Rx) eyewear.
(6) Wearers of contact lenses must also wear appropriate eye and face protection devices in a hazardous environment. It
should be recognized that dusty and/or chemical environments may represent an additional hazard to contact lens wearers.
(7) Caution should be exercised in the use of metal frame protective devices in electrical hazard areas.
(8) Atmospheric conditions and the restricted ventilation of the protector can cause lenses to fog. Frequent cleansing may be
necessary.
(9) Welding helmets or faceshields should be used only over primary eye protection (spectacles or goggles).
(10) Non-sideshield spectacles are available for frontal protection only, but are not acceptable eye protection for the sources
and operations listed for ‘‘impact.’’
(11) Ventilation should be adequate, but well protected from splash entry. Eye and face protection should be designed and
used so that it provides both adequate ventilation and protects the wearer from splash entry.
(12) Protection from light radiation is directly related to filter lens density. See note (4) . Select the darkest shade that allows
task performance.
9. Selection guidelines for head protection. All hazard assessment indicates that lateral im-
head protection (helmets) is designed to pro- pact to the head is foreseeable, employers
vide protection from impact and penetration must select Type II helmets for their em-
hazards caused by falling objects. Head pro- ployees. To improve comprehension and use-
tection is also available which provides pro- fulness, the 1997 revision also redesignated
tection from electric shock and burn. When the electrical-protective classifications for
selecting head protection, knowledge of po- helmets as follows: ‘‘Class G—General’’; hel-
tential electrical hazards is important. Class mets designed to reduce the danger of con-
A helmets, in addition to impact and pene- tact with low-voltage conductors; ‘‘Class E—
tration resistance, provide electrical protec- Electrical’’; helmets designed to reduce the
tion from low-voltage conductors (they are danger of contact with conductors at higher
proof tested to 2,200 volts). Class B helmets, voltage levels; and ‘‘Class C—Conductive’’;
in addition to impact and penetration resist- helmets that provide no protection against
ance, provide electrical protection from contact with electrical hazards.
high-voltage conductors (they are proof test- 10. Selection guidelines for foot protection.
ed to 20,000 volts). Class C helmets provide Safety shoes and boots which meet the ANSI
impact and penetration resistance (they are Z41–1991 Standard provide both impact and
usually made of aluminum which conducts compression protection. Where necessary,
electricity), and should not be used around safety shoes can be obtained which provide
electrical hazards. puncture protection. In some work situa-
Where falling object hazards are present, tions, metatarsal protection should be pro-
helmets must be worn. Some examples in- vided, and in other special situations elec-
clude: working below other workers who are trical conductive or insulating safety shoes
using tools and materials which could fall; would be appropriate.
working around or under conveyor belts Safety shoes or boots with impact protec-
which are carrying parts or materials; work- tion would be required for carrying or han-
ing below machinery or processes which dling materials such as packages, objects,
might cause material or objects to fall; and parts or heavy tools, which could be dropped;
working on exposed energized conductors. and, for other activities where objects might
Some examples of occupations for which fall onto the feet. Safety shoes or boots with
head protection should be routinely consid- compression protection would be required for
ered are: carpenters, electricians, linemen, work activities involving skid trucks (man-
mechanics and repairers, plumbers and pipe ual material handling carts) around bulk
fitters, assemblers, packers, wrappers, saw- rolls (such as paper rolls) and around heavy
yers, welders, laborers, freight handlers, tim- pipes, all of which could potentially roll over
ber cutting and logging, stock handlers, and an employee’s feet. Safety shoes or boots
warehouse laborers. with puncture protection would be required
Beginning with the ANSI Z89.1–1997 stand- where sharp objects such as nails, wire,
ard, ANSI updated the classification system tacks, screws, large staples, scrap metal etc.,
for protective helmets. Prior revisions used could be stepped on by employees causing a
type classifications to distinguish between foot injury. Electrically conductive shoes
caps and full brimmed hats. Beginning in would be required as a supplementary form
1997, Type I designated helmets designed to of protection for work activities in which
reduce the force of impact resulting from a there is a danger of fire or explosion from
blow only to the top of the head, while Type the discharge of static electricity. Elec-
II designated helmets designed to reduce the trical-hazard or dielectric footwear would be

force of impact resulting from a blow to the required as a supplementary form of protec-
top or sides of the head. Accordingly, if a tion when an employee standing on the
461
Pt. 1910, Subpt. I, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–21 Edition)
ground is exposed to hazardous step or touch (C) For mixtures and formulated products
potential (the difference in electrical poten- (unless specific test data are available), a
tial between the feet or between the hands glove should be selected on the basis of the
and feet) or when primary forms of electrical chemical component with the shortest
protective equipment, such as rubber insu- breakthrough time, since it is possible for
lating gloves and blankets, do not provide solvents to carry active ingredients through
complete protection for an employee stand- polymeric materials; and,
ing on the ground. (D) Employees must be able to remove the
Some occupations (not a complete list) for gloves in such a manner as to prevent skin
which foot protection should be routinely contamination.
considered are: Shipping and receiving 12. Cleaning and maintenance. It is impor-
clerks, stock clerks, carpenters, electricians, tant that all PPE be kept clean and properly
machinists, mechanics and repairers, plumb- maintained. Cleaning is particularly impor-
ers and pipe fitters, structural metal work- tant for eye and face protection where dirty
ers, assemblers, drywall installers and lath- or fogged lenses could impair vision.
ers, packers, wrappers, craters, punch and For the purposes of compliance with
stamping press operators, sawyers, welders, § 1910.132 (a) and (b), PPE should be in-
laborers, freight handlers, gardeners and spected, cleaned, and maintained at regular
grounds-keepers, timber cutting and logging intervals so that the PPE provides the req-
workers, stock handlers and warehouse la- uisite protection.
borers. It is also important to ensure that con-
11. Selection guidelines for hand protection. taminated PPE which cannot be decontami-
Gloves are often relied upon to prevent cuts, nated is disposed of in a manner that pro-
abrasions, burns, and skin contact with tects employees from exposure to hazards.
chemicals that are capable of causing local
or systemic effects following dermal expo- [59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994, as amended at 74
sure. OSHA is unaware of any gloves that FR 46357, Sept. 9, 2009; 79 FR 20633, Apr. 11,
provide protection against all potential hand 2014]
hazards, and commonly available glove ma-
terials provide only limited protection APPENDIX C TO SUBPART I OF PART
against many chemicals. Therefore, it is im- 1910—PERSONAL FALL PROTECTION
portant to select the most appropriate glove SYSTEMS NON-MANDATORY GUIDE-
for a particular application and to determine LINES
how long it can be worn, and whether it can
be reused. The following information generally ap-
It is also important to know the perform- plies to all personal fall protection systems
ance characteristics of gloves relative to the and is intended to assist employers and em-
specific hazard anticipated; e.g., chemical ployees comply with the requirements of
hazards, cut hazards, flame hazards, etc. § 1910.140 for personal fall protection systems.
These performance characteristics should be (a) Planning considerations. It is impor-
assessed by using standard test procedures. tant for employers to plan prior to using per-
Before purchasing gloves, the employer sonal fall protection systems. Probably the
should request documentation from the man- most overlooked component of planning is
ufacturer that the gloves meet the appro- locating suitable anchorage points. Such
priate test standard(s) for the hazard(s) an- planning should ideally be done before the
ticipated. structure or building is constructed so that
Other factors to be considered for glove se- anchorage points can be used later for win-
lection in general include: dow cleaning or other building maintenance.
(A) As long as the performance character- (b) Selection and use considerations. (1)
istics are acceptable, in certain cir- The kind of personal fall protection system
cumstances, it may be more cost effective to selected should be appropriate for the em-
regularly change cheaper gloves than to ployee’s specific work situation. Free fall
reuse more expensive types; and, distances should always be kept to a min-
(B) The work activities of the employee imum. Many systems are designed for par-
should be studied to determine the degree of ticular work applications, such as climbing
dexterity required, the duration, frequency, ladders and poles; maintaining and servicing
and degree of exposure of the hazard, and the equipment; and window cleaning. Consider-
physical stresses that will be applied. ation should be given to the environment in
With respect to selection of gloves for pro- which the work will be performed. For exam-
tection against chemical hazards: ple, the presence of acids, dirt, moisture, oil,
(A) The toxic properties of the chemical(s) grease, or other substances, and their poten-
must be determined; in particular, the abil- tial effects on the system selected, should be
ity of the chemical to cause local effects on evaluated. The employer should fully evalu-
the skin and /or to pass through the skin and ate the work conditions and environment
cause systemic effects; (including seasonal weather changes) before

(B) Generally, any ‘‘chemical resistant’’ selecting the appropriate personal fall pro-
glove can be used for dry powders; tection system. Hot or cold environments
462
Occu. Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1910, Subpt. I, App. C
may also affect fall protection systems. Wire may include the following: The limits of the
rope should not be used where electrical haz- system; proper anchoring and tie-off tech-
ards are anticipated. As required by niques; estimating free fall distance, includ-
§ 1910.140(c)(21), the employer must provide a ing determining elongation and deceleration
means for promptly rescuing an employee distance; methods of use; and inspection and
should a fall occur. storage. Careless or improper use of fall pro-
(2) Where lanyards, connectors, and life- tection equipment can result in serious in-
lines are subject to damage by work oper- jury or death. Employers and employees
ations, such as welding, chemical cleaning, should become familiar with the material in
and sandblasting, the component should be this standard and appendix, as well as manu-
protected, or other securing systems should facturers’ recommendations, before a system
be used. A program for cleaning and main- is used. It is important for employees to be
taining the system may be necessary. aware that certain tie-offs (such as using
(c) Testing considerations. Before pur- knots and tying around sharp edges) can re-
chasing a personal fall protection system, an duce the overall strength of a system. Em-
employer should insist that the supplier pro- ployees also need to know the maximum per-
vide information about its test performance mitted free fall distance. Training should
(using recognized test methods) so the em-
stress the importance of inspections prior to
ployer will know that the system meets the
use, the limitations of the equipment to be
criteria in § 1910.140. Otherwise, the employer
used, and unique conditions at the worksite
should test the equipment to ensure that it
that may be important.
is in compliance. Appendix D to this subpart
contains test methods which are rec- (f) Instruction considerations. Employers
ommended for evaluating the performance of should obtain comprehensive instructions
any system. There are some circumstances from the supplier or a qualified person as to
in which an employer can evaluate a system the system’s proper use and application, in-
based on data and calculations derived from cluding, where applicable:
the testing of similar systems. Enough infor- (1) The force measured during the sample
mation must be available for the employer force test;
to demonstrate that its system and the test- (2) The maximum elongation measured for
ed system(s) are similar in both function and lanyards during the force test;
design. (3) The deceleration distance measured for
(d) Component compatibility consider- deceleration devices during the force test;
ations. Ideally, a personal fall protection (4) Caution statements on critical use limi-
system is designed, tested, and supplied as a tations;
complete system. However, it is common (5) Limits of the system;
practice for lanyards, connectors, lifelines,
(6) Proper hook-up, anchoring and tie-off
deceleration devices, body belts, and body
techniques, including the proper D-ring or
harnesses to be interchanged since some
other attachment point to use on the body
components wear out before others. Employ-
harness;
ers and employees should realize that not all
components are interchangeable. For in- (7) Proper climbing techniques;
stance, a lanyard should not be connected (8) Methods of inspection, use, cleaning,
between a body harness and a deceleration and storage; and
device of the self-retracting type (unless spe- (9) Specific lifelines that may be used.
cifically allowed by the manufacturer) since (g) Inspection considerations. Personal fall
this can result in additional free fall for protection systems must be inspected before
which the system was not designed. In addi- initial use in each workshift. Any component
tion, positioning components, such as pole with damage, such as a cut, tear, abrasion,
straps, ladder hooks and rebar hooks, should mold, or evidence of undue stretching, an al-
not be used in personal fall arrest systems teration or addition that might affect its ef-
unless they meet the appropriate strength fectiveness, damage due to deterioration,
and performance requirements of part 1910 fire, acid, or other corrosive damage, dis-
(e.g., §§ 1910.140, 1910.268 and 1910.269). Any torted hooks or faulty hook springs, tongues
substitution or change to a personal fall pro- that are unfitted to the shoulder of buckles,
tection system should be fully evaluated or loose or damaged mountings, non-func-
tested by a competent person to determine tioning parts, or wear, or internal deteriora-
that it meets applicable OSHA standards be- tion must be removed from service imme-
fore the modified system is put in use. Also, diately, and should be tagged or marked as
OSHA suggests that rope be used according unusable, or destroyed. Any personal fall
to manufacturers’ recommendations, espe- protection system, including components,
cially if polypropylene rope is used. subjected to impact loading must be re-
(e) Employee training considerations. As moved from service immediately and not
required by §§ 1910.30 and 1910.132, before an used until a competent person inspects the
employee uses a fall protection system, the system and determines that it is not dam-
employer must ensure that he or she is aged and is safe to use for personal fall pro-
trained in the proper use of the system. This tection.
463
Pt. 1910, Subpt. I, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–21 Edition)
(h) Rescue considerations. As required by sag, may be subjected to greater loads than
§ 1910.140(c)(21), when personal fall arrest sys- the impact load imposed by an attached
tems are used, special consideration must be component. When the angle of horizontal
given to rescuing an employee promptly lifeline sag is less than 30 degrees, the im-
should a fall occur. The availability of res- pact force imparted to the lifeline by an at-
cue personnel, ladders, or other rescue equip- tached lanyard is greatly amplified. For ex-
ment needs to be evaluated since there may ample, with a sag angle of 15 degrees the
be instances in which employees cannot self- force amplification is about 2:1, and at 5 de-
rescue (e.g., employee unconscious or seri- grees sag it is about 6:1. Depending on the
ously injured). In some situations, equip- angle of sag, and the line’s elasticity, the
ment allowing employees to rescue them- strength of the horizontal lifeline, and the
selves after the fall has been arrested may be anchorages to which it is attached should be
desirable, such as devices that have descent increased a number of times over that of the
capability. lanyard. Extreme care should be taken in
(i) Tie-off considerations. Employers and considering a horizontal lifeline for multiple
employees should at all times be aware that tie-offs. If there are multiple tie-offs to a
the strength of a personal fall arrest system horizontal lifeline, and one employee falls,
is based on its being attached to an anchor- the movement of the falling employee and
ing system that can support the system. the horizontal lifeline during arrest of the
Therefore, if a means of attachment is used fall may cause other employees to fall. Hori-
that will reduce the strength of the system zontal lifeline and anchorage strength should
(such as an eye-bolt/snaphook anchorage), be increased for each additional employee to
that component should be replaced by a be tied-off. For these and other reasons, the
stronger one that will also maintain the ap- systems using horizontal lifelines must be
propriate maximum deceleration character- designed only by qualified persons. OSHA
istics. The following is a listing of some situ- recommends testing installed lifelines and
ations in which employers and employees anchors prior to use. OSHA requires that
should be especially cautious: horizontal lifelines are designed, installed
(1) Tie-off using a knot in the lanyard or and used under the supervision of a qualified
lifeline (at any location). The strength of the person.
line can be reduced by 50 percent or more if (k) Eye-bolts. It must be recognized that
a knot is used. Therefore, a stronger lanyard the strength of an eye-bolt is rated along the
or lifeline should be used to compensate for axis of the bolt, and that its strength is
the knot, or the lanyard length should be re- greatly reduced if the force is applied at
duced (or the tie-off location raised) to mini- right angles to this axis (in the direction of
mize free fall distance, or the lanyard or life- its shear strength). Care should also be exer-
line should be replaced by one which has an cised in selecting the proper diameter of the
appropriately incorporated connector to eye to avoid creating a roll-out hazard (acci-
eliminate the need for a knot. dental disengagement of the snaphook from
(2) Tie-off around rough or sharp (e.g., ‘‘H’’ the eye-bolt).
or ‘‘I’’ beams) surfaces. Sharp or rough sur- (l) Vertical lifeline considerations. As re-
faces can damage rope lines and this reduces quired by § 1910.140(c)(3), each employee must
strength of the system drastically. Such tie- have a separate lifeline when the lifeline is
offs should be avoided whenever possible. An vertical. If multiple tie-offs to a single life-
alternate means should be used such as a line are used, and one employee falls, the
snaphook/D-ring connection, a tie-off appa- movement of the lifeline during the arrest of
ratus (steel cable tie-off), an effective pad- the fall may pull other employees’ lanyards,
ding of the surfaces, or an abrasion-resistant causing them to fall as well.
strap around the supporting member. If (m) Snaphook and carabiner consider-
these alternative means of tie-off are not ations. As required by § 1910.140(c)(10), the
available, the employer should try to mini- following connections must be avoided un-
mize the potential free fall distance. less the locking snaphook or carabiner has
(3) Knots. Sliding hitch knots should not been designed for them because they are con-
be used except in emergency situations. The ditions that can result in rollout:
one-and-one sliding hitch knot should never (1) Direct connection to webbing, rope, or a
be used because it is unreliable in stopping a horizontal lifeline;
fall. The two-and-two, or three-and-three (2) Two (or more) snaphooks or carabiners
knots (preferable) may be used in emergency connected to one D-ring;
situations; however, care should be taken to (3) Two snaphooks or carabiners connected
limit free fall distances because of reduced to each other;
lifeline/lanyard strength. OSHA requires (4) Snaphooks or carabiners connected di-
that a competent or qualified person inspect rectly to webbing, rope, or wire rope; and
each knot in a lanyard or vertical lifeline to (5) Improper dimensions of the D-ring,
ensure it meets the strength requirements in rebar, or other connection point in relation
§ 1910.140. to the snaphook or carabiner dimensions

(j) Horizontal lifelines. Horizontal lifelines, which would allow the gate to be depressed
depending on their geometry and angle of by a turning motion.
464
Occu. Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1910, Subpt. I, App. D
(n) Free fall considerations. Employers and APPENDIX D TO SUBPART I OF PART
employees should always be aware that a 1910—TEST METHODS AND PROCE-
system’s maximum arresting force is evalu- DURES FOR PERSONAL FALL PROTEC-
ated under normal use conditions established
TION SYSTEMS NON-MANDATORY
by the manufacturer. OSHA requires that
personal fall arrest systems be rigged so an
GUIDELINES
employee cannot free fall in excess of 6 feet This appendix contains test methods for
(1.8 m). Even a few additional feet of free fall personal fall protection systems which may
can significantly increase the arresting force be used to determine if they meet the system
on the employee, possibly to the point of performance criteria specified in paragraphs
causing injury and possibly exceeding the (d) and (e) of § 1910.140.
strength of the system. Because of this, the Test methods for personal fall arrest sys-
free fall distance should be kept to a min- tems (paragraph (d) of § 1910.140).
imum, and, as required by § 1910.140(d)(2), (a) General. The following sets forth test
must never be greater than 6 feet (1.8 m). To procedures for personal fall arrest systems as
assure this, the tie-off attachment point to defined in paragraph (d) of § 1910.140.
the lifeline or anchor should be located at or (b) General test conditions.
above the connection point of the fall arrest (1) Lifelines, lanyards and deceleration de-
equipment to the harness. (Otherwise, addi- vices should be attached to an anchorage and
tional free fall distance is added to the connected to the body harness in the same
length of the connecting means (i.e., lan- manner as they would be when used to pro-
yard)). Tying off to the walking-working sur- tect employees.
face will often result in a free fall greater (2) The fixed anchorage should be rigid, and
than 6 feet (1.8 m). For instance, if a 6-foot should not have a deflection greater than
(1.8-m) lanyard is used, the total free fall dis- 0.04 inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250
tance will be the distance from the walking- pounds (10 kN) is applied.
working level to the harness connection plus (3) The frequency response of the load
the 6 feet (1.8 m) of lanyard. measuring instrumentation should be 120 Hz.
(o) Elongation and deceleration distance (4) The test weight used in the strength
considerations. During fall arrest, a lanyard and force tests should be a rigid, metal cylin-
will stretch or elongate, whereas activation drical or torso-shaped object with a girth of
of a deceleration device will result in a cer- 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96 cm plus
tain stopping distance. These distances or minus 10 cm).
should be available with the lanyard or de- (5) The lanyard or lifeline used to create
vice’s instructions and must be added to the the free fall distance should be supplied with
free fall distance to arrive at the total fall the system, or in its absence, the least elas-
distance before an employee is fully stopped. tic lanyard or lifeline available should be
The additional stopping distance may be sig- used with the system.
nificant if the lanyard or deceleration device (6) The test weight for each test should be
is attached near or at the end of a long life- hoisted to the required level and should be
line, which may itself add considerable dis- quickly released without having any appre-
tance due to its own elongation. As required ciable motion imparted to it.
by § 1910.140(d)(2), sufficient distance to allow (7) The system’s performance should be
for all of these factors must also be main- evaluated, taking into account the range of
tained between the employee and obstruc- environmental conditions for which it is de-
tions below, to prevent an injury due to im- signed to be used.
pact before the system fully arrests the fall. (8) Following the test, the system need not
In addition, a minimum of 12 feet (3.7 m) of be capable of further operation.
lifeline should be allowed below the securing (c) Strength test.
point of a rope-grab-type deceleration de- (1) During the testing of all systems, a test
vice, and the end terminated to prevent the weight of 300 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds
device from sliding off the lifeline. Alter- (136.4 kg plus or minus 1.4 kg) should be used.
natively, the lifeline should extend to the (See paragraph (b)(4) of this appendix.)
ground or the next working level below. (2) The test consists of dropping the test
These measures are suggested to prevent the weight once. A new unused system should be
employee from inadvertently moving past used for each test.
the end of the lifeline and having the rope (3) For lanyard systems, the lanyard
grab become disengaged from the lifeline. length should be 6 feet plus or minus 2 inches
(p) Obstruction considerations. In selecting (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) as measured from
a location for tie-off, employers and employ- the fixed anchorage to the attachment on
ees should consider obstructions in the po- the body harness.
tential fall path of the employee. Tie-offs (4) For rope-grab-type deceleration sys-
that minimize the possibilities of exagger- tems, the length of the lifeline above the
ated swinging should be considered. centerline of the grabbing mechanism to the

lifeline’s anchorage point should not exceed
[81 FR 83002, Nov. 18, 2016] 2 feet (0.61 m).
465
Pt. 1910, Subpt. I, App. D 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–21 Edition)
(5) For lanyard systems, for systems with in normal use. (For example, to test a sys-
deceleration devices which do not automati- tem with a self-retracting lifeline or lan-
cally limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) yard, the test weight should be supported
or less, and for systems with deceleration de- and the system allowed to retract the life-
vices which have a connection distance in ex- line or lanyard as it would in normal use.
cess of 1 foot (0.3 m) (measured between the The test weight would then be released and
centerline of the lifeline and the attachment the force and deceleration distance meas-
point to the body harness), the test weight ured).
should be rigged to free fall a distance of 7.5 (4) Failure. A system fails the force test
feet (2.3 m) from a point that is 1.5 feet (46 when the recorded maximum arresting force
cm) above the anchorage point, to its hang- exceeds 2,520 pounds (11.2 kN) when using a
ing location (6 feet (1.83 m) below the anchor- body harness.
age). The test weight should fall without in- (5) Distances. The maximum elongation
terference, obstruction, or hitting the floor and deceleration distance should be recorded
or ground during the test. In some cases a during the force test.
non-elastic wire lanyard of sufficient length (e) Deceleration device tests.
may need to be added to the system (for test (1) General. The device should be evaluated
purposes) to create the necessary free fall or tested under the environmental condi-
distance. tions (such as rain, ice, grease, dirt, and type
(6) For deceleration device systems with of lifeline) for which the device is designed.
integral lifelines or lanyards that automati- (2) Rope-grab-type deceleration devices. (i)
cally limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) Devices should be moved on a lifeline 1,000
or less, the test weight should be rigged to times over the same length of line a distance
free fall a distance of 4 feet (1.22 m). of not less than 1 foot (30.5 cm), and the
(7) Any weight that detaches from the har- mechanism should lock each time.
ness should constitute failure for the (ii) Unless the device is permanently
strength test. marked to indicate the type of lifelines that
(d) Force test. must be used, several types (different diame-
(1) General. The test consists of dropping ters and different materials), of lifelines
the respective test weight specified in para- should be used to test the device.
graph (d)(2)(i) or (d)(3)(i) of this appendix (3) Other self-activating-type deceleration
once. A new, unused system should be used devices. The locking mechanisms of other
for each test. self-activating-type deceleration devices de-
(2) For lanyard systems. (i) A test weight signed for more than one arrest should lock
of 220 pounds plus or minus three pounds (100 each of 1,000 times as they would in normal
kg plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See service.
paragraph (b)(4) of this appendix.) Test methods for positioning systems
(ii) Lanyard length should be 6 feet plus or (paragraph (e) of § 1910.140).
minus 2 inches (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) as (a) General. The following sets forth test
measured from the fixed anchorage to the at- procedures for positioning systems as defined
tachment on the body harness. in paragraph (e) of § 1910.140. The require-
(iii) The test weight should fall free from ments in this appendix for personal fall ar-
the anchorage level to its hanging location rest systems set forth procedures that may
(a total of 6 feet (1.83 m) free fall distance) be used, along with the procedures listed
without interference, obstruction, or hitting below, to determine compliance with the re-
the floor or ground during the test. quirements for positioning systems.
(3) For all other systems. (i) A test weight (b) Test conditions.
of 220 pounds plus or minus 2 pounds (100 kg (1) The fixed anchorage should be rigid and
plus or minus 1.0 kg) should be used. (See should not have a deflection greater than
paragraph (b)(4) of this appendix.) 0.04 inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250
(ii) The free fall distance to be used in the pounds (10 kN) is applied.
test should be the maximum fall distance (2) For window cleaners’ belts, the com-
physically permitted by the system during plete belt should withstand a drop test con-
normal use conditions, up to a maximum sisting of a 250 pound (113 kg) weight falling
free fall distance for the test weight of 6 feet free for a distance of 6 feet (1.83 m). The
(1.83 m), except as follows: weight should be a rigid object with a girth
(A) For deceleration systems having a con- of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96 cm
nection link or lanyard, the test weight plus or minus 10 cm). The weight should be
should free fall a distance equal to the con- placed in the waistband with the belt buckle
nection distance (measured between the cen- drawn firmly against the weight, as when
terline of the lifeline and the attachment the belt is worn by a window cleaner. One
point to the body harness). belt terminal should be attached to a rigid
(B) For deceleration device systems with anchor and the other terminal should hang
integral lifelines or lanyards that automati- free. The terminals should be adjusted to
cally limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) their maximum span. The weight fastened in
or less, the test weight should free fall a dis- the freely suspended belt should then be lift-
tance equal to that permitted by the system ed exactly 6 feet (1.83 m) above its ‘‘at rest’’
466
position and released so as to permit a free function performed by the establish-
fall of 6 feet (1.83 m) vertically below the ment. Such activities include, but are
point of attachment of the terminal anchor. not limited to, first-aid, medical serv-
The belt system should be equipped with de-
vices and instrumentation capable of meas-
ices, dressing, showering, toilet use,
uring the duration and magnitude of the ar- washing, and eating.
rest forces. Failure of the test should consist Potable water means water that meets
of any breakage or slippage sufficient to per- the standards for drinking purposes of
mit the weight to fall free of the system. In the State or local authority having ju-
addition, the initial and subsequent arrest- risdiction, or water that meets the
ing forces should be measured and should not quality standards prescribed by the
exceed 2,000 pounds (8.5 kN) for more than 2
milliseconds for the initial impact, or exceed
U.S. Environmental Protection Agen-
1,000 pounds (4.5 kN) for the remainder of the cy’s National Primary Drinking Water
arrest time. Regulations (40 CFR 141).
(3) All other positioning systems (except Toilet facility, means a fixture main-
for restraint line systems) should withstand tained within a toilet room for the pur-
a drop test consisting of a 250 pound (113 kg) pose of defecation or urination, or
weight free falling a distance of 4 feet (1.2 both.
m). The weight must be a rigid object with a
Toilet room, means a room maintained
girth of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96
cm plus or minus 10 cm). The body belt or within or on the premises of any place
harness should be affixed to the test weight of employment, containing toilet fa-
as it would be to an employee. The system cilities for use by employees.
should be connected to the rigid anchor in Toxic material means a material in
the manner that the system would be con- concentration or amount which ex-
nected in normal use. The weight should be ceeds the applicable limit established
lifted exactly 4 feet (1.2 m) above its ‘‘at by a standard, such as §§ 1910.1000 and
rest’’ position and released so as to permit a
1910.1001 or, in the absence of an appli-
vertical free fall of 4 feet (1.2 m). Failure of
the system should be indicated by any break- cable standard, which is of such tox-
age or slippage sufficient to permit the icity so as to constitute a recognized
weight to fall free to the ground. hazard that is causing or is likely to
[81 FR 83002, Nov. 18, 2016]
cause death or serious physical harm.
Urinal means a toilet facility main-
tained within a toilet room for the sole
Subpart J—General Environmental purpose of urination.
Controls Water closet means a toilet facility
maintained within a toilet room for
AUTHORITY: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Sec- the purpose of both defecation and uri-
retary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), nation and which is flushed with water.
8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 Wet process means any process or op-
FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017),
eration in a workroom which normally
5–2007 (72 FR 31159), 4–2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1–
2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable. results in surfaces upon which employ-
Sections 1910.141, 1910.142, 1910.145, 1910.146, ees may walk or stand becoming wet.
and 1910.147 also issued under 29 CFR part (3) Housekeeping. (i) All places of em-
1911. ployment shall be kept clean to the ex-
tent that the nature of the work al-
§ 1910.141 Sanitation. lows.
(a) General—(1) Scope. This section (ii) The floor of every workroom shall
applies to permanent places of employ- be maintained, so far as practicable, in
ment. a dry condition. Where wet processes
(2) Definitions applicable to this section. are used, drainage shall be maintained
Nonwater carriage toilet facility, means and false floors, platforms, mats, or
a toilet facility not connected to a other dry standing places shall be pro-
sewer. vided, where practicable, or appro-
Number of employees means, unless priate waterproof footgear shall be pro-
otherwise specified, the maximum vided.
number of employees present at any (iii) To facilitate cleaning, every
one time on a regular shift. floor, working place, and passageway
Personal service room, means a room shall be kept free from protruding
used for activities not directly con- nails, splinters, loose boards, and un-
nected with the production or service necessary holes and openings.
467
(4) Waste disposal. (i) Any receptacle used for drinking, washing of the per-
used for putrescible solid or liquid son, cooking, washing of food, washing
waste or refuse shall be so constructed of cooking or eating utensils, washing
that it does not leak and may be thor- of food preparation or processing prem-
oughly cleaned and maintained in a ises, or personal service rooms, or for
sanitary condition. Such a receptacle washing clothes.
shall be equipped with a solid tight-fit- (ii) Construction of nonpotable water
ting cover, unless it can be maintained systems or systems carrying any other
in a sanitary condition without a nonpotable substance shall be such as
cover. This requirement does not pro- to prevent backflow or backsiphonage
hibit the use of receptacles which are into a potable water system.
designed to permit the maintenance of (iii) Nonpotable water shall not be
a sanitary condition without regard to used for washing any portion of the
the aforementioned requirements. person, cooking or eating utensils, or
(ii) All sweepings, solid or liquid clothing. Nonpotable water may be
wastes, refuse, and garbage shall be reused for cleaning work premises, other
moved in such a manner as to avoid than food processing and preparation
creating a menace to health and as premises and personal service rooms:
often as necessary or appropriate to Provided, That this nonpotable water
maintain the place of employment in a does not contain concentrations of
sanitary condition. chemicals, fecal coliform, or other sub-
(5) Vermin control. Every enclosed stances which could create insanitary
workplace shall be so constructed, conditions or be harmful to employees.
equipped, and maintained, so far as (c) Toilet facilities—(1) General. (i) Ex-
reasonably practicable, as to prevent cept as otherwise indicated in this
the entrance or harborage of rodents, paragraph (c)(1)(i), toilet facilities, in
insects, and other vermin. A con- toilet rooms separate for each sex,
tinuing and effective extermination shall be provided in all places of em-
program shall be instituted where their ployment in accordance with table J–1
presence is detected. of this section. The number of facilities
(b) Water supply—(1) Potable water. (i) to be provided for each sex shall be
Potable water shall be provided in all based on the number of employees of
places of employment, for drinking, that sex for whom the facilities are fur-
washing of the person, cooking, wash- nished. Where toilet rooms will be oc-
ing of foods, washing of cooking or eat- cupied by no more than one person at a
ing utensils, washing of food prepara- time, can be locked from the inside,
tion or processing premises, and per- and contain at least one water closet,
sonal service rooms. separate toilet rooms for each sex need
(ii) [Reserved] not be provided. Where such single-oc-
(iii) Portable drinking water dis- cupancy rooms have more than one toi-
pensers shall be designed, constructed, let facility, only one such facility in
and serviced so that sanitary condi- each toilet room shall be counted for
tions are maintained, shall be capable the purpose of table J–1.
of being closed, and shall be equipped
with a tap. TABLE J–1
(iv) [Reserved]
Minimum
(v) Open containers such as barrels, number of
Number of employees
pails, or tanks for drinking water from water clos-
ets 1
which the water must be dipped or
poured, whether or not they are fitted 1 to 15 ................................................................. 1
with a cover, are prohibited. 16 to 35 ............................................................... 2
(vi) A common drinking cup and 36 to 55 ............................................................... 3
56 to 80 ............................................................... 4
other common utensils are prohibited. 81 to 110 ............................................................. 5.
(2) Nonpotable water. (i) Outlets for 111 to 150 ........................................................... 6
nonpotable water, such as water for in- Over 150 .............................................................. (2)
dustrial or firefighting purposes, shall 1 Where toilet facilities will not be used by women, urinals
be posted or otherwise marked in a may be provided instead of water closets, except that the
number of water closets in such cases shall not be reduced to

manner that will indicate clearly that less than 2⁄3 of the minimum specified.
the water is unsafe and is not to be 2 1 additional fixture for each additional 40 employees.
468
(ii) The requirements of paragraph (v) Employees who use showers shall
(c)(1)(i) of this section do not apply to be provided with individual clean tow-
mobile crews or to normally unat- els.
tended work locations so long as em- (e) Change rooms. Whenever employ-
ployees working at these locations ees are required by a particular stand-
have transportation immediately ard to wear protective clothing because
available to nearby toilet facilities of the possibility of contamination
which meet the other requirements of with toxic materials, change rooms
this subparagraph. equipped with storage facilities for
(iii) The sewage disposal method street clothes and separate storage fa-
shall not endanger the health of em- cilities for the protective clothing
ployees. shall be provided.
(2) Construction of toilet rooms. (i) (f) Clothes drying facilities. Where
Each water closet shall occupy a sepa- working clothes are provided by the
rate compartment with a door and employer and become wet or are
walls or partitions between fixtures washed between shifts, provision shall
sufficiently high to assure privacy. be made to insure that such clothing is
(ii) [Reserved] dry before reuse.
(d) Washing facilities—(1) General. (g) Consumption of food and beverages
Washing facilities shall be maintained on the premises—(1) Application. This
in a sanitary condition. paragraph shall apply only where em-
(2) Lavatories. (i) Lavatories shall be ployees are permitted to consume food
made available in all places of employ- or beverages, or both, on the premises.
ment. The requirements of this sub- (2) Eating and drinking areas. No em-
division do not apply to mobile crews ployee shall be allowed to consume
or to normally unattended work loca- food or beverages in a toilet room nor
tions if employees working at these lo- in any area exposed to a toxic mate-
cations have transportation readily
rial.
available to nearby washing facilities
(3) Waste disposal containers. Recep-
which meet the other requirements of
tacles constructed of smooth, corrosion
this paragraph.
resistant, easily cleanable, or dispos-
(ii) Each lavatory shall be provided
able materials, shall be provided and
with hot and cold running water, or
used for the disposal of waste food. The
tepid running water.
number, size, and location of such re-
(iii) Hand soap or similar cleansing
ceptacles shall encourage their use and
agents shall be provided.
not result in overfilling. They shall be
(iv) Individual hand towels or sec-
emptied not less frequently than once
tions thereof, of cloth or paper, air
each working day, unless unused, and
blowers or clean individual sections of
shall be maintained in a clean and san-
continuous cloth toweling, convenient
itary condition. Receptacles shall be
to the lavatories, shall be provided.
provided with a solid tight-fitting
(3) Showers. (i) Whenever showers are
cover unless sanitary conditions can be
required by a particular standard, the
maintained without use of a cover.
showers shall be provided in accord-
ance with paragraphs (d)(3) (ii) through (4) Sanitary storage. No food or bev-
(v) of this section. erages shall be stored in toilet rooms
(ii) One shower shall be provided for or in an area exposed to a toxic mate-
each 10 employees of each sex, or nu- rial.
merical fraction thereof, who are re- (h) Food handling. All employee food
quired to shower during the same shift. service facilities and operations shall
(iii) Body soap or other appropriate be carried out in accordance with
cleansing agents convenient to the sound hygienic principles. In all places
showers shall be provided as specified of employment where all or part of the
in paragraph (d)(2)(iii) of this section. food service is provided, the food dis-
(iv) Showers shall be provided with pensed shall be wholesome, free from
hot and cold water feeding a common spoilage, and shall be processed, pre-
discharge line. pared, handled, and stored in such a
469
manner as to be protected against con- (4) The floors of each shelter shall be
tamination. constructed of wood, asphalt, or con-
crete. Wooden floors shall be of smooth
FR 18446, Apr. 28, 1975; 40 FR 23073, May 28, and tight construction. The floors shall
1975; 43 FR 49748, Oct. 24, 1978; 63 FR 33466, be kept in good repair.
June 18, 1998; 76 FR 33607, June 8, 2011] (5) All wooden floors shall be ele-
vated not less than 1 foot above the
§ 1910.142 Temporary labor camps. ground level at all points to prevent
(a) Site. (1) All sites used for camps dampness and to permit free circula-
shall be adequately drained. They shall tion of air beneath.
not be subject to periodic flooding, nor (6) Nothing in this section shall be
located within 200 feet of swamps, construed to prohibit ‘‘banking’’ with
pools, sink holes, or other surface col- earth or other suitable material around
lections of water unless such quiescent the outside walls in areas subject to ex-
water surfaces can be subjected to mos- treme low temperatures.
quito control measures. The camp shall (7) All living quarters shall be pro-
be located so the drainage from and vided with windows the total of which
through the camp will not endanger shall be not less than one-tenth of the
any domestic or public water supply. floor area. At least one-half of each
All sites shall be graded, ditched, and window shall be so constructed that it
rendered free from depressions in which
can be opened for purposes of ventila-
water may become a nuisance.
tion.
(2) All sites shall be adequate in size
(8) All exterior openings shall be ef-
to prevent overcrowding of necessary
structures. The principal camp area in fectively screened with 16–mesh mate-
which food is prepared and served and rial. All screen doors shall be equipped
where sleeping quarters are located with self-closing devices.
shall be at least 500 feet from any area (9) In a room where workers cook,
in which livestock is kept. live, and sleep a minimum of 100 square
(3) The grounds and open areas sur- feet per person shall be provided. Sani-
rounding the shelters shall be main- tary facilities shall be provided for
tained in a clean and sanitary condi- storing and preparing food.
tion free from rubbish, debris, waste (10) In camps where cooking facilities
paper, garbage, or other refuse. are used in common, stoves (in ratio of
(b) Shelter. (1) Every shelter in the one stove to 10 persons or one stove to
camp shall be constructed in a manner two families) shall be provided in an
which will provide protection against enclosed and screened shelter. Sanitary
the elements. facilities shall be provided for storing
(2) Each room used for sleeping pur- and preparing food.
poses shall contain at least 50 square (11) All heating, cooking, and water
feet of floor space for each occupant. heating equipment shall be installed in
At least a 7–foot ceiling shall be pro- accordance with State and local ordi-
vided. nances, codes, and regulations gov-
(3) Beds, cots, or bunks, and suitable erning such installations. If a camp is
storage facilities such as wall lockers used during cold weather, adequate
for clothing and personal articles shall heating equipment shall be provided.
be provided in every room used for (c) Water supply. (1) An adequate and
sleeping purposes. Such beds or similar convenient water supply, approved by
facilities shall be spaced not closer the appropriate health authority, shall
than 36 inches both laterally and end
be provided in each camp for drinking,
to end, and shall be elevated at least 12
cooking, bathing, and laundry pur-
inches from the floor. If double-deck
bunks are used, they shall be spaced poses.
not less than 48 inches both laterally (2) A water supply shall be deemed
and end to end. The minimum clear adequate if it is capable of delivering 35
space between the lower and upper gallons per person per day to the camp-
bunk shall be not less than 27 inches. site at a peak rate of 21⁄2 times the av-
Triple-deck bunks are prohibited. erage hourly demand.
470
(3) The distribution lines shall be ca- nal trough for each 25 men. The floor
pable of supplying water at normal op- from the wall and for a distance not
erating pressures to all fixtures for si- less than 15 inches measured from the
multaneous operation. Water outlets outward edge of the urinals shall be
shall be distributed throughout the constructed of materials impervious to
camp in such a manner that no shelter moisture. Where water under pressure
is more than 100 feet from a yard hy- is available, urinals shall be provided
drant if water is not piped to the shel- with an adequate water flush. Urinal
ters. troughs in privies shall drain freely
(4) Where water under pressure is into the pit or vault and the construc-
available, one or more drinking foun- tion of this drain shall be such as to ex-
tains shall be provided for each 100 oc- clude flies and rodents from the pit.
cupants or fraction thereof. Common (7) Every water closet installed on or
drinking cups are prohibited. after August 31, 1971, shall be located
(d) Toilet facilities. (1) Toilet facilities in a toilet room.
adequate for the capacity of the camp (8) Each toilet room shall be lighted
shall be provided. naturally, or artificially by a safe type
(2) Each toilet room shall be located of lighting at all hours of the day and
so as to be accessible without any indi- night.
vidual passing through any sleeping (9) An adequate supply of toilet paper
room. Toilet rooms shall have a win- shall be provided in each privy, water
dow not less than 6 square feet in area closet, or chemical toilet compart-
opening directly to the outside area or ment.
otherwise be satisfactorily ventilated. (10) Privies and toilet rooms shall be
All outside openings shall be screened kept in a sanitary condition. They
with 16–mesh material. No fixture, shall be cleaned at least daily.
water closet, chemical toilet, or urinal (e) Sewage disposal facilities. In camps
shall be located in a room used for where public sewers are available, all
other than toilet purposes. sewer lines and floor drains from build-
(3) A toilet room shall be located ings shall be connected thereto.
within 200 feet of the door of each
(f) Laundry, handwashing, and bathing
sleeping room. No privy shall be closer
facilities. (1) Laundry, handwashing,
than 100 feet to any sleeping room, din-
and bathing facilities shall be provided
ing room, lunch area, or kitchen.
in the following ratio:
(4) Where the toilet rooms are shared,
such as in multifamily shelters and in (i) Handwash basin per family shelter
barracks type facilities, separate toilet or per six persons in shared facilities.
rooms shall be provided for each sex. (ii) Shower head for every 10 persons.
These rooms shall be distinctly marked (iii) Laundry tray or tub for every 30
‘‘for men’’ and ‘‘for women’’ by signs persons.
printed in English and in the native (iv) Slop sink in each building used
language of the persons occupying the for laundry, hand washing, and bath-
camp, or marked with easily under- ing.
stood pictures or symbols. If the facili- (2) Floors shall be of smooth finish
ties for each sex are in the same build- but not slippery materials; they shall
ing, they shall be separated by solid be impervious to moisture. Floor
walls or partitions extending from the drains shall be provided in all shower
floor to the roof or ceiling. baths, shower rooms, or laundry rooms
(5) Where toilet facilities are shared, to remove waste water and facilitate
the number of water closets or privy cleaning. All junctions of the curbing
seats provided for each sex shall be and the floor shall be coved. The walls
based on the maximum number of per- and partitions of shower rooms shall be
sons of that sex which the camp is de- smooth and impervious to the height of
signed to house at any one time, in the splash.
ratio of one such unit to each 15 per- (3) An adequate supply of hot and
sons, with a minimum of two units for cold running water shall be provided
any shared facility. for bathing and laundry purposes. Fa-
(6) Urinals shall be provided on the cilities for heating water shall be pro-
basis of one unit or 2 linear feet of uri- vided.
471
(4) Every service building shall be (3) No person with any communicable
provided with equipment capable of disease shall be employed or permitted
maintaining a temperature of at least to work in the preparation, cooking,
70 °F. during cold weather. serving, or other handling of food, food-
(5) Facilities for drying clothes shall stuffs, or materials used therein, in
be provided. any kitchen or dining room operated in
(6) All service buildings shall be kept connection with a camp or regularly
clean. used by persons living in a camp.
(g) Lighting. Where electric service is (j) Insect and rodent control. Effective
available, each habitable room in a measures shall be taken to prevent in-
camp shall be provided with at least festation by and harborage of animal
one ceiling-type light fixture and at or insect vectors or pests.
least one separate floor- or wall-type (k) First aid. (1) Adequate first aid fa-
convenience outlet. Laundry and toilet cilities approved by a health authority
rooms and rooms where people con- shall be maintained and made available
gregate shall contain at least one in every labor camp for the emergency
ceiling- or wall-type fixture. Light lev- treatment of injured persons.
els in toilet and storage rooms shall be (2) Such facilities shall be in charge
at least 20 foot-candles 30 inches from of a person trained to administer first
the floor. Other rooms, including aid and shall be readily accessible for
kitchens and living quarters, shall be use at all times.
at least 30 foot-candles 30 inches from (l) Reporting communicable disease. (1)
the floor. It shall be the duty of the camp super-
(h) Refuse disposal. (1) Fly-tight, ro- intendent to report immediately to the
dent-tight, impervious, cleanable or local health officer the name and ad-
single service containers, approved by dress of any individual in the camp
the appropriate health authority shall known to have or suspected of having a
be provided for the storage of garbage. communicable disease.
At least one such container shall be (2) Whenever there shall occur in any
provided for each family shelter and camp a case of suspected food poi-
shall be located within 100 feet of each soning or an unusual prevalence of any
shelter on a wooden, metal, or concrete illness in which fever, diarrhea, sore
stand. throat, vomiting, or jaundice is a
(2) Garbage containers shall be kept prominent symptom, it shall be the
clean. duty of the camp superintendent to re-
port immediately the existence of the
(3) Garbage containers shall be
outbreak to the health authority by
emptied when full, but not less than
telegram, telephone, electronic mail or
twice a week.
any other method that is equally fast.
(i) Construction and operation of kitch-
ens, dining hall, and feeding facilities. (1) [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 47
In all camps where central dining or FR 14696, Apr. 6, 1982; 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30,
multiple family feeding operations are 1984; 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33466,
June 18, 1998; 70 FR 1141, Jan. 5, 2005; 70 FR
permitted or provided, the food han-
53929, Sept. 13, 2005]
dling facilities shall comply with the
requirements of the ‘‘Food Service § 1910.143 Nonwater carriage disposal
Sanitation Ordinance and Code,’’ Part systems. [Reserved]
V of the ‘‘Food Service Sanitation
Manual,’’ U.S. Public Health Service § 1910.144 Safety color code for mark-
Publication 934 (1965), which is incor- ing physical hazards.
porated by reference as specified in (a) Color identification—(1) Red. Red
§ 1910.6. shall be the basic color for the identi-
(2) A properly constructed kitchen fication of:
and dining hall adequate in size, sepa- (i) Fire protection equipment and appa-
rate from the sleeping quarters of any ratus. [Reserved]
of the workers or their families, shall (ii) Danger. Safety cans or other port-
be provided in connection with all food able containers of flammable liquids
handling facilities. There shall be no having a flash point at or below 80 °F,
direct opening from living or sleeping table containers of flammable liquids

quarters into a kitchen or dining hall. (open cup tester), excluding shipping
472
containers, shall be painted red with (c) Classification of signs according to

some additional clearly visible identi- use—(1) Danger signs. (i) There shall be
fication either in the form of a yellow no variation in the type of design of
band around the can or the name of the signs posted to warn of specific dangers
contents conspicuously stenciled or and radiation hazards.
painted on the can in yellow. Red (ii) All employees shall be instructed
lights shall be provided at barricades that danger signs indicate immediate
and at temporary obstructions. Danger danger and that special precautions are
signs shall be painted red. necessary.
(iii) Stop. Emergency stop bars on (2) Caution signs. (i) Caution signs
hazardous machines such as rubber shall be used only to warn against po-
mills, wire blocks, flat work ironers, tential hazards or to caution against
etc., shall be red. Stop buttons or elec- unsafe practices.
trical switches which letters or other (ii) All employees shall be instructed
markings appear, used for emergency that caution signs indicate a possible
stopping of machinery shall be red. hazard against which proper precaution
(2) [Reserved] should be taken.
(3) Yellow. Yellow shall be the basic (3) Safety instruction signs. Safety in-
color for designating caution and for struction signs shall be used where
marking physical hazards such as: there is a need for general instructions
Striking against, stumbling, falling, and suggestions relative to safety
tripping, and ‘‘caught in between.’’ measures.
(b) [Reserved] (d) Sign design—(1) Design features. All
signs shall be furnished with rounded
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 or blunt corners and shall be free from
FR 49748, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, sharp edges, burrs, splinters, or other
1984; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 72 FR 71069, Dec. sharp projections. The ends or heads of
14, 2007] bolts or other fastening devices shall
be located in such a way that they do
§ 1910.145 Specifications for accident
prevention signs and tags. not constitute a hazard.
(2) Danger signs. The colors red,
(a) Scope. (1) These specifications black, and white shall be those of
apply to the design, application, and opaque glossy samples as specified in
use of signs or symbols (as included in Table 1, ‘‘Fundamental Specification of
paragraphs (c) through (e) of this sec- Safety Colors for CIE Standard Source
tion) intended to indicate and, insofar ‘C,’ ’’ of ANSI Z53.1–1967 or in Table 1,
as possible, to define specific hazards of ‘‘Specification of the Safety Colors for
a nature such that failure to designate CIE Illuminate C and the CIE 1931, 2
them may lead to accidental injury to Standard Observer,’’ of ANSI Z535.1–
workers or the public, or both, or to 2006(R2011), incorporated by reference
property damage. These specifications in § 1910.6.
are intended to cover all safety signs (3) [Reserved]
except those designed for streets, high- (4) Caution signs. The standard color
ways, and railroads. These specifica- of the background shall be yellow; and
tions do not apply to plant bulletin the panel, black with yellow letters.
boards or to safety posters. Any letters used against the yellow
(2) All new signs and replacements of background shall be black. The colors
old signs shall be in accordance with shall be those of opaque glossy samples
these specifications. as specified in Table 1 of ANSI Z53.1–
(b) Definitions. As used in this sec- 1967 or Table 1 of ANSI Z535.1–
tion, the word sign refers to a surface 2006(R2011), incorporated by reference
on prepared for the warning of, or safe- in § 1910.6.
ty instructions of, industrial workers (5) [Reserved]
or members of the public who may be (6) Safety instruction signs. The stand-
exposed to hazards. Excluded from this ard color of the background shall be
definition, however, are news releases, white; and the panel, green with white
displays commonly known as safety letters. Any letters used against the
posters, and bulletins used for em- white background shall be black. The
ployee education. colors shall be those of opaque glossy
473
samples as specified in Table 1 of ANSI cise. The sign should contain sufficient
Z53.1–1967 or in Table 1 of ANSI Z535.1– information to be easily understood.
2006(R2011), incorporated by reference The wording should make a positive,
in § 1910.6. rather than negative suggestion and
(7)–(9) [Reserved] should be accurate in fact.
(10) Slow-moving vehicle emblem. This (3) [Reserved]
emblem (see fig. J–7) consists of a fluo- (4) Biological hazard signs. The bio-
rescent yellow-orange triangle with a logical hazard warning shall be used to
dark red reflective border. The yellow- signify the actual or potential presence
orange fluorescent triangle is a highly of a biohazard and to identify equip-
visible color for daylight exposure. The ment, containers, rooms, materials, ex-
reflective border defines the shape of perimental animals, or combinations
the fluorescent color in daylight and thereof, which contain, or are contami-
creates a hollow red triangle in the nated with, viable hazardous agents.
path of motor vehicle headlights at For the purpose of this subparagraph
night. The emblem is intended as a the term ‘‘biological hazard,’’ or ‘‘bio-
unique identification for, and it shall hazard,’’ shall include only those infec-
be used only on, vehicles which by de- tious agents presenting a risk or poten-
sign move slowly (25 m.p.h. or less) on tial risk to the well-being of man.
the public roads. The emblem is not a (f) Accident prevention tags—(1) Scope
clearance marker for wide machinery and application. (i) This paragraph (f)
nor is it intended to replace required applies to all accident prevention tags
lighting or marking of slow-moving ve- used to identify hazardous conditions
hicles. Neither the color film pattern and provide a message to employees
and its dimensions nor the backing with respect to hazardous conditions as
shall be altered to permit use of adver- set forth in paragraph (f)(3) of this sec-
tising or other markings. The material, tion, or to meet the specific tagging re-
location, mounting, etc., of the em- quirements of other OSHA standards.
blem shall be in accordance with the (ii) This paragraph (f) does not apply
American Society of Agricultural En- to construction or agriculture.
gineers Emblem for Identifying Slow- (2) Definitions. Biological hazard or
Moving Vehicles, ASAE R276, 1967, or BIOHAZARD means those infectious
ASAE S276.2 (ANSI B114.1–1971), which agents presenting a risk of death, in-
are incorporated by reference as speci- jury or illness to employees.
fied in § 1910.6. Major message means that portion of
a tag’s inscription that is more specific
than the signal word and that indicates
the specific hazardous condition or the
instruction to be communicated to the
employee. Examples include: ‘‘High
Voltage,’’ ‘‘Close Clearance,’’ ‘‘Do Not
Start,’’ or ‘‘Do Not Use’’ or a cor-
responding pictograph used with a
written text or alone.
Pictograph means a pictorial rep-
resentation used to identify a haz-
ardous condition or to convey a safety
instruction.
Signal word means that portion of a
tag’s inscription that contains the
word or words that are intended to cap-
ture the employee’s immediate atten-
tion.
FIGURE J–7—SLOW-MOVING VEHICLE EMBLEM Tag means a device usually made of
NOTE: All dimensions are in inches. card, paper, pasteboard, plastic or
other material used to identify a haz-
(e) Sign wordings. (1) [Reserved] ardous condition.
(2) Nature of wording. The wording of (3) Use. Tags shall be used as a means
any sign should be easily read and con- to prevent accidental injury or illness
474
EC27OC91.028
to employees who are exposed to haz- provided that they have a signal word
ardous or potentially hazardous condi- of ‘‘Warning,’’ an appropriate major
tions, equipment or operations which message, and otherwise meet the gen-
are out of the ordinary, unexpected or eral tag criteria of paragraph (f)(4) of
not readily apparent. Tags shall be this section.
used until such time as the identified (8) Biological hazard tags. (i) Biologi-
hazard is eliminated or the hazardous cal hazard tags shall be used to iden-
operation is completed. Tags need not tify the actual or potential presence of
be used where signs, guarding or other a biological hazard and to identify
positive means of protection are being equipment, containers, rooms, experi-
used. mental animals, or combinations
(4) General tag criteria. All required thereof, that contain or are contami-
tags shall meet the following criteria: nated with hazardous biological agents.
(i) Tags shall contain a signal word (ii) The symbol design for biological
and a major message. hazard tags shall conform to the design
(A) The signal word shall be either shown below:
‘‘Danger,’’ ‘‘Caution,’’ or ‘‘Biological
Hazard,’’ ‘‘BIOHAZARD,’’ or the bio-
logical hazard symbol.
(B) The major message shall indicate
the specific hazardous condition or the
instruction to be communicated to the
employee.
(ii) The signal word shall be readable
at a minimum distance of five feet (1.52
m) or such greater distance as war-
ranted by the hazard.
(iii) The tag’s major message shall be
presented in either pictographs, writ-
ten text or both.
(iv) The signal word and the major
message shall be understandable to all
employees who may be exposed to the
identified hazard.
(v) All employees shall be informed
as to the meaning of the various tags
used throughout the workplace and
what special precautions are necessary.
(vi) Tags shall be affixed as close as
safely possible to their respective haz-
ards by a positive means such as BIOLOGICAL HAZARD SYMBOL CONFIGURATION
string, wire, or adhesive that prevents (9) Other tags. Other tags may be used
their loss or unintentional removal. in addition to those required by this
(5) Danger tags. Danger tags shall be paragraph (f), or in other situations
used in major hazard situations where where this paragraph (f) does not re-
an immediate hazard presents a threat quire tags, provided that they do not
of death or serious injury to employ- detract from the impact or visibility of
ees. Danger tags shall be used only in the signal word and major message of
these situations. any required tag.
(6) Caution tags. Caution tags shall be
used in minor hazard situations where APPENDIXES TO § 1910.145(f), ACCIDENT
PREVENTION TAGS
a non-immediate or potential hazard or
unsafe practice presents a lesser threat APPENDIX A TO § 1910.145(f)—RECOMMENDED
of employee injury. Caution tags shall COLOR CODING
be used only in these situations. While the standard does not specifically
(7) Warning tags. Warning tags may mandate colors to be used on accident pre-
be used to represent a hazard level be-
vention tags, the following color scheme is

tween ‘‘Caution’’ and ‘‘Danger,’’ in- recommended by OSHA for meeting the re-
stead of the required ‘‘Caution’’ tag, quirements of this section:
475
EC27OC91.086
‘‘DANGER’’—Red, or predominantly red, § 1910.146 Permit-required confined
with lettering or symbols in a contrasting spaces.
color.
‘‘CAUTION’’—Yellow, or predominantly (a) Scope and application. This section
yellow, with lettering or symbols in a con- contains requirements for practices
trasting color. and procedures to protect employees in
‘‘WARNING’’—Orange, or predominantly general industry from the hazards of
orange, with lettering or symbols in a con- entry into permit-required confined
trasting color. spaces. This section does not apply to
‘‘BIOLOGICAL HAZARD’’—Fluorescent or-
ange or orange-red, or predominantly so, agriculture, to construction, or to ship-
with lettering or symbols in a contrasting yard employment (parts 1928, 1926, and
color. 1915 of this chapter, respectively).
(b) Definitions.
APPENDIX B TO § 1910.145(f)—REFERENCES FOR Acceptable entry conditions means the
FURTHER INFORMATION
conditions that must exist in a permit
The following references provide informa- space to allow entry and to ensure that
tion which can be helpful in understanding employees involved with a permit-re-
the requirements contained in various sec- quired confined space entry can safely
tions of the standard:
enter into and work within the space.
1. Bresnahan, Thomas F., and Bryk, Jo- Attendant means an individual sta-
seph, ‘‘The Hazard Association Values of Ac-
cident Prevention Signs’’, Journal of Amer-
tioned outside one or more permit
ican Society of Safety Engineers; January 1975. spaces who monitors the authorized en-
2. Dreyfuss, H., Symbol Sourcebook, McGraw trants and who performs all attend-
Hill; New York, NY, 1972. ant’s duties assigned in the employer’s
3. Glass, R.A. and others, Some Criteria for permit space program.
Colors and Signs in Workplaces, National Bu- Authorized entrant means an em-
reau of Standards, Washington DC, 1983. ployee who is authorized by the em-
4. Graphic Symbols for Public Areas and Oc-
ployer to enter a permit space.
cupational Environments, Treasury Board of
Canada, Ottawa, Canada, July 1980.
Blanking or blinding means the abso-
5. Howett, G.L., Size of Letters Required for lute closure of a pipe, line, or duct by
Visibility as a Function of Viewing Distance the fastening of a solid plate (such as a
and Observer Acuity, National Bureau of spectacle blind or a skillet blind) that
Standards, Washington DC, July 1983. completely covers the bore and that is
6. Lerner, N.D. and Collins, B.L., The As- capable of withstanding the maximum
sessment of Safety Symbol Understandability by pressure of the pipe, line, or duct with
Different Testing Methods, National Bureau of
no leakage beyond the plate.
Standards, Washington DC, 1980.
7. Lerner, N.D. and Collins, B.L., Workplace Confined space means a space that:
Safety Symbols, National Bureau of Stand- (1) Is large enough and so configured
ards, Washington DC, 1980. that an employee can bodily enter and
8. Modley, R. and Meyers, W.R., Handbook perform assigned work; and
of Pictorial Symbols, Dover Publication, New (2) Has limited or restricted means
York, NY, 1976. for entry or exit (for example, tanks,
9. Product Safety Signs and Labels, FMC Cor- vessels, silos, storage bins, hoppers,
poration, Santa Clara, CA, 1978.
vaults, and pits are spaces that may
10. Safety Color Coding for Marking Physical
Hazards, Z53.1, American National Standards have limited means of entry.); and
Institute, New York, NY, 1979. (3) Is not designed for continuous em-
11. Signs and Symbols for the Occupational ployee occupancy.
Environment, Can. 3–Z–321–77, Canadian Double block and bleed means the clo-
Standards Association, Ottawa, September sure of a line, duct, or pipe by closing
1977. and locking or tagging two in-line
12. Symbols for Industrial Safety, National valves and by opening and locking or
Bureau of Standards, Washington DC, April
tagging a drain or vent valve in the
1982.
13. Symbol Signs, U.S. Department of Trans- line between the two closed valves.
portation, Washington DC, November 1974. Emergency means any occurrence (in-
cluding any failure of hazard control or
FR 49749, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51759, Nov. 7,
monitoring equipment) or event inter-
1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 33260, nal or external to the permit space
that could endanger entrants.
Sept. 19, 1986; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 76 FR

24698, May 2, 2011; 76 FR 44265, July 25, 2011; Engulfment means the surrounding
78 FR 35566, June 13, 2013] and effective capture of a person by a
476
liquid or finely divided (flowable) solid (4) Atmospheric concentration of any

substance that can be aspirated to substance for which a dose or a permis-
cause death by filling or plugging the sible exposure limit is published in sub-
respiratory system or that can exert part G, Occupational Health and Envi-
enough force on the body to cause ronmental Control, or in subpart Z, Toxic
death by strangulation, constriction, and Hazardous Substances, of this part
or crushing. and which could result in employee ex-
Entry means the action by which a posure in excess of its dose or permis-
person passes through an opening into sible exposure limit;
a permit-required confined space.
Entry includes ensuing work activities NOTE: An atmospheric concentration of
any substance that is not capable of causing
in that space and is considered to have
death, incapacitation, impairment of ability
occurred as soon as any part of the en- to self-rescue, injury, or acute illness due to
trant’s body breaks the plane of an its health effects is not covered by this pro-
opening into the space. vision.
Entry permit (permit) means the writ-
ten or printed document that is pro- (5) Any other atmospheric condition
vided by the employer to allow and that is immediately dangerous to life
control entry into a permit space and or health.
that contains the information specified NOTE: For air contaminants for which
in paragraph (f) of this section. OSHA has not determined a dose or permis-
Entry supervisor means the person sible exposure limit, other sources of infor-
(such as the employer, foreman, or mation, such as Material Safety Data Sheets
crew chief) responsible for determining that comply with the Hazard Communica-
if acceptable entry conditions are tion Standard, § 1910.1200 of this part, pub-
present at a permit space where entry lished information, and internal documents
is planned, for authorizing entry and can provide guidance in establishing accept-
able atmospheric conditions.
overseeing entry operations, and for
terminating entry as required by this Hot work permit means the employer’s
section. written authorization to perform oper-
NOTE: An entry supervisor also may serve ations (for example, riveting, welding,
as an attendant or as an authorized entrant, cutting, burning, and heating) capable
as long as that person is trained and of providing a source of ignition.
equipped as required by this section for each Immediately dangerous to life or health
role he or she fills. Also, the duties of entry (IDLH) means any condition that poses
supervisor may be passed from one indi- an immediate or delayed threat to life
vidual to another during the course of an
entry operation.
or that would cause irreversible ad-
verse health effects or that would
Hazardous atmosphere means an at- interfere with an individual’s ability to
mosphere that may expose employees escape unaided from a permit space.
to the risk of death, incapacitation,
impairment of ability to self-rescue NOTE: Some materials—hydrogen fluoride
gas and cadmium vapor, for example—may
(that is, escape unaided from a permit
produce immediate transient effects that,
space), injury, or acute illness from one even if severe, may pass without medical at-
or more of the following causes: tention, but are followed by sudden, possibly
(1) Flammable gas, vapor, or mist in fatal collapse 12–72 hours after exposure. The
excess of 10 percent of its lower flam- victim ‘‘feels normal’’ from recovery from
mable limit (LFL); transient effects until collapse. Such mate-
(2) Airborne combustible dust at a rials in hazardous quantities are considered
concentration that meets or exceeds its to be ‘‘immediately’’ dangerous to life or
health.
LFL;
NOTE: This concentration may be approxi- Inerting means the displacement of
mated as a condition in which the dust ob- the atmosphere in a permit space by a
scures vision at a distance of 5 feet (1.52 m) noncombustible gas (such as nitrogen)
or less. to such an extent that the resulting at-
(3) Atmospheric oxygen concentra- mosphere is noncombustible.
tion below 19.5 percent or above 23.5 NOTE: This procedure produces an IDLH ox-
percent; ygen-deficient atmosphere.
477
Isolation means the process by which lowed by the permit during the period
a permit space is removed from service when entry is authorized.
and completely protected against the Rescue service means the personnel
release of energy and material into the designated to rescue employees from
space by such means as: blanking or permit spaces.
blinding; misaligning or removing sec- Retrieval system means the equipment
tions of lines, pipes, or ducts; a double (including a retrieval line, chest or
block and bleed system; lockout or full-body harness, wristlets, if appro-
tagout of all sources of energy; or priate, and a lifting device or anchor)
blocking or disconnecting all mechan- used for non-entry rescue of persons
ical linkages. from permit spaces.
Line breaking means the intentional Testing means the process by which
opening of a pipe, line, or duct that is the hazards that may confront entrants
or has been carrying flammable, corro- of a permit space are identified and
sive, or toxic material, an inert gas, or evaluated. Testing includes specifying
any fluid at a volume, pressure, or tem- the tests that are to be performed in
perature capable of causing injury. the permit space.
Non-permit confined space means a NOTE: Testing enables employers both to
confined space that does not contain devise and implement adequate control
or, with respect to atmospheric haz- measures for the protection of authorized en-
ards, have the potential to contain any trants and to determine if acceptable entry
hazard capable of causing death or seri- conditions are present immediately prior to,
and during, entry.
ous physical harm.
Oxygen deficient atmosphere means an (c) General requirements. (1) The em-
atmosphere containing less than 19.5 ployer shall evaluate the workplace to
percent oxygen by volume. determine if any spaces are permit- re-
Oxygen enriched atmosphere means an quired confined spaces.
atmosphere containing more than 23.5 NOTE: Proper application of the decision
percent oxygen by volume. flow chart in appendix A to § 1910.146 would
Permit-required confined space (permit facilitate compliance with this requirement.
space) means a confined space that has
one or more of the following character- (2) If the workplace contains permit
istics: spaces, the employer shall inform ex-
(1) Contains or has a potential to posed employees, by posting danger
signs or by any other equally effective
contain a hazardous atmosphere;
means, of the existence and location of
(2) Contains a material that has the
and the danger posed by the permit
potential for engulfing an entrant;
spaces.
(3) Has an internal configuration
such that an entrant could be trapped NOTE: A sign reading ‘‘DANGER—PERMIT-
or asphyxiated by inwardly converging REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE, DO NOT
walls or by a floor which slopes down- ENTER’’ or using other similar language
ward and tapers to a smaller cross- sec- would satisfy the requirement for a sign.
tion; or (3) If the employer decides that its
(4) Contains any other recognized se- employees will not enter permit
rious safety or health hazard. spaces, the employer shall take effec-
Permit-required confined space program tive measures to prevent its employees
(permit space program) means the em- from entering the permit spaces and
ployer’s overall program for control- shall comply with paragraphs (c)(1),
ling, and, where appropriate, for pro- (c)(2), (c)(6), and (c)(8) of this section.
tecting employees from, permit space (4) If the employer decides that its
hazards and for regulating employee employees will enter permit spaces, the
entry into permit spaces. employer shall develop and implement
Permit system means the employer’s a written permit space program that
written procedure for preparing and complies with this section. The written
issuing permits for entry and for re- program shall be available for inspec-
turning the permit space to service fol- tion by employees and their authorized
lowing termination of entry. representatives.
Prohibited condition means any condi- (5) An employer may use the alter-
tion in a permit space that is not al- nate procedures specified in paragraph
478
(c)(5)(ii) of this section for entering a ployee working in the space from for-
permit space under the conditions set eign objects entering the space.
forth in paragraph (c)(5)(i) of this sec- (C) Before an employee enters the
tion. space, the internal atmosphere shall be
(i) An employer whose employees tested, with a calibrated direct-reading
enter a permit space need not comply instrument, for oxygen content, for
with paragraphs (d) through (f) and (h) flammable gases and vapors, and for
through (k) of this section, provided potential toxic air contaminants, in
that: that order. Any employee who enters
(A) The employer can demonstrate the space, or that employee’s author-
that the only hazard posed by the per- ized representative, shall be provided
mit space is an actual or potential haz- an opportunity to observe the pre-
ardous atmosphere; entry testing required by this para-
(B) The employer can demonstrate graph.
that continuous forced air ventilation (D) There may be no hazardous at-
alone is sufficient to maintain that mosphere within the space whenever
permit space safe for entry; any employee is inside the space.
(C) The employer develops moni- (E) Continuous forced air ventilation
toring and inspection data that sup- shall be used, as follows:
ports the demonstrations required by (1) An employee may not enter the
paragraphs (c)(5)(i)(A) and (c)(5)(i)(B) of space until the forced air ventilation
this section; has eliminated any hazardous atmos-
(D) If an initial entry of the permit phere;
space is necessary to obtain the data (2) The forced air ventilation shall be
required by paragraph (c)(5)(i)(C) of so directed as to ventilate the imme-
this section, the entry is performed in diate areas where an employee is or
compliance with paragraphs (d) will be present within the space and
through (k) of this section; shall continue until all employees have
(E) The determinations and sup- left the space;
porting data required by paragraphs (3) The air supply for the forced air
(c)(5)(i)(A), (c)(5)(i)(B), and (c)(5)(i)(C) ventilation shall be from a clean
of this section are documented by the source and may not increase the haz-
employer and are made available to ards in the space.
each employee who enters the permit (F) The atmosphere within the space
space under the terms of paragraph shall be periodically tested as nec-
(c)(5) of this section or to that employ- essary to ensure that the continuous
ee’s authorized representative; and forced air ventilation is preventing the
(F) Entry into the permit space
accumulation of a hazardous atmos-
under the terms of paragraph (c)(5)(i)
phere. Any employee who enters the
of this section is performed in accord-
space, or that employee’s authorized
ance with the requirements of para-
representative, shall be provided with
graph (c)(5)(ii) of this section.
an opportunity to observe the periodic
NOTE: See paragraph (c)(7) of this section testing required by this paragraph.
for reclassification of a permit space after (G) If a hazardous atmosphere is de-
all hazards within the space have been elimi- tected during entry:
nated. (1) Each employee shall leave the
(ii) The following requirements apply space immediately;
to entry into permit spaces that meet (2) The space shall be evaluated to
the conditions set forth in paragraph determine how the hazardous atmos-
(c)(5)(i) of this section. phere developed; and
(A) Any conditions making it unsafe (3) Measures shall be implemented to
to remove an entrance cover shall be protect employees from the hazardous
eliminated before the cover is removed. atmosphere before any subsequent
(B) When entrance covers are re- entry takes place.
moved, the opening shall be promptly (H) The employer shall verify that
guarded by a railing, temporary cover, the space is safe for entry and that the
or other temporary barrier that will pre-entry measures required by para-
prevent an accidental fall through the graph (c)(5)(ii) of this section have been
opening and that will protect each em- taken, through a written certification
479
that contains the date, the location of (c)(7) of this section, each employee in
the space, and the signature of the per- the space shall exit the space. The em-
son providing the certification. The ployer shall then reevaluate the space
certification shall be made before and determine whether it must be re-
entry and shall be made available to classified as a permit space, in accord-
each employee entering the space or to ance with other applicable provisions
that employee’s authorized representa- of this section.
tive . (8) When an employer (host em-
(6) When there are changes in the use ployer) arranges to have employees of
or configuration of a non-permit con- another employer (contractor) perform
fined space that might increase the work that involves permit space entry,
hazards to entrants, the employer shall the host employer shall:
reevaluate that space and, if necessary, (i) Inform the contractor that the
reclassify it as a permit-required con- workplace contains permit spaces and
fined space. that permit space entry is allowed only
(7) A space classified by the employer through compliance with a permit
as a permit-required confined space space program meeting the require-
may be reclassified as a non-permit ments of this section;
confined space under the following pro- (ii) Apprise the contractor of the ele-
cedures: ments, including the hazards identified
(i) If the permit space poses no actual and the host employer’s experience
or potential atmospheric hazards and if with the space, that make the space in
all hazards within the space are elimi- question a permit space;
nated without entry into the space, the (iii) Apprise the contractor of any
permit space may be reclassified as a precautions or procedures that the host
non-permit confined space for as long employer has implemented for the pro-
as the non-atmospheric hazards remain tection of employees in or near permit
eliminated. spaces where contractor personnel will
(ii) If it is necessary to enter the per- be working;
mit space to eliminate hazards, such (iv) Coordinate entry operations with
entry shall be performed under para- the contractor, when both host em-
graphs (d) through (k) of this section. ployer personnel and contractor per-
If testing and inspection during that sonnel will be working in or near per-
entry demonstrate that the hazards mit spaces, as required by paragraph
within the permit space have been (d)(11) of this section; and
eliminated, the permit space may be (v) Debrief the contractor at the con-
reclassified as a non-permit confined clusion of the entry operations regard-
space for as long as the hazards remain ing the permit space program followed
eliminated. and regarding any hazards confronted
NOTE: Control of atmospheric hazards or created in permit spaces during
through forced air ventilation does not con- entry operations.
stitute elimination of the hazards. Para- (9) In addition to complying with the
graph (c)(5) covers permit space entry where permit space requirements that apply
the employer can demonstrate that forced to all employers, each contractor who
air ventilation alone will control all hazards is retained to perform permit space
in the space.
entry operations shall:
(iii) The employer shall document (i) Obtain any available information
the basis for determining that all haz- regarding permit space hazards and
ards in a permit space have been elimi- entry operations from the host em-
nated, through a certification that con- ployer;
tains the date, the location of the (ii) Coordinate entry operations with
space, and the signature of the person the host employer, when both host em-
making the determination. The certifi- ployer personnel and contractor per-
cation shall be made available to each sonnel will be working in or near per-
employee entering the space or to that mit spaces, as required by paragraph
employee’s authorized representative. (d)(11) of this section; and
(iv) If hazards arise within a permit (iii) Inform the host employer of the
space that has been declassified to a permit space program that the con-
non-permit space under paragraph tractor will follow and of any hazards
480
confronted or created in permit spaces, work safely and to exit the space
either through a debriefing or during quickly in an emergency;
the entry operation. (vi) Barriers and shields as required
(d) Permit-required confined space pro- by paragraph (d)(3)(v) of this section.
gram (permit space program). Under (vii) Equipment, such as ladders,
the permit space program required by needed for safe ingress and egress by
paragraph (c)(4) of this section, the em- authorized entrants;
ployer shall: (viii) Rescue and emergency equip-
(1) Implement the measures nec- ment needed to comply with paragraph
essary to prevent unauthorized entry; (d)(9) of this section, except to the ex-
(2) Identify and evaluate the hazards tent that the equipment is provided by
of permit spaces before employees rescue services; and
enter them; (ix) Any other equipment necessary
(3) Develop and implement the for safe entry into and rescue from per-
means, procedures, and practices nec- mit spaces.
essary for safe permit space entry oper- (5) Evaluate permit space conditions
ations, including, but not limited to, as follows when entry operations are
the following: conducted:
(i) Specifying acceptable entry condi- (i) Test conditions in the permit
tions; space to determine if acceptable entry
(ii) Providing each authorized en- conditions exist before entry is author-
trant or that employee’s authorized ized to begin, except that, if isolation
representative with the opportunity to of the space is infeasible because the
observe any monitoring or testing of space is large or is part of a continuous
permit spaces; system (such as a sewer), pre-entry
testing shall be performed to the ex-
(iii) Isolating the permit space;
tent feasible before entry is authorized
(iv) Purging, inerting, flushing, or
and, if entry is authorized, entry condi-
ventilating the permit space as nec-
tions shall be continuously monitored
essary to eliminate or control atmos-
in the areas where authorized entrants
pheric hazards;
are working;
(v) Providing pedestrian, vehicle, or (ii) Test or monitor the permit space
other barriers as necessary to protect as necessary to determine if acceptable
entrants from external hazards; and entry conditions are being maintained
(vi) Verifying that conditions in the during the course of entry operations;
permit space are acceptable for entry and
throughout the duration of an author- (iii) When testing for atmospheric
ized entry. hazards, test first for oxygen, then for
(4) Provide the following equipment combustible gases and vapors, and then
(specified in paragraphs (d)(4)(i) for toxic gases and vapors.
through (d)(4)(ix) of this section) at no (iv) Provide each authorized entrant
cost to employees, maintain that or that employee’s authorized rep-
equipment properly, and ensure that resentative an opportunity to observe
employees use that equipment prop- the pre-entry and any subsequent test-
erly: ing or monitoring of permit spaces;
(i) Testing and monitoring equipment (v) Reevaluate the permit space in
needed to comply with paragraph (d)(5) the presence of any authorized entrant
of this section; or that employee’s authorized rep-
(ii) Ventilating equipment needed to resentative who requests that the em-
obtain acceptable entry conditions; ployer conduct such reevaluation be-
(iii) Communications equipment nec- cause the entrant or representative has
essary for compliance with paragraphs reason to believe that the evaluation of
(h)(3) and (i)(5) of this section; that space may not have been ade-
(iv) Personal protective equipment quate;
insofar as feasible engineering and (vi) Immediately provide each au-
work practice controls do not ade- thorized entrant or that employee’s au-
quately protect employees; thorized representative with the re-
(v) Lighting equipment needed to en- sults of any testing conducted in ac-
able employees to see well enough to cord with paragraph (d) of this section.
481
NOTE: Atmospheric testing conducted in not endanger the employees of any
accordance with appendix B to § 1910.146 other employer;
would be considered as satisfying the re- (12) Develop and implement proce-
quirements of this paragraph. For permit
space operations in sewers, atmospheric test- dures (such as closing off a permit
ing conducted in accordance with appendix space and canceling the permit) nec-
B, as supplemented by appendix E to essary for concluding the entry after
§ 1910.146, would be considered as satisfying entry operations have been completed;
the requirements of this paragraph. (13) Review entry operations when
(6) Provide at least one attendant the employer has reason to believe that
outside the permit space into which the measures taken under the permit
entry is authorized for the duration of space program may not protect em-
entry operations; ployees and revise the program to cor-
rect deficiencies found to exist before
NOTE: Attendants may be assigned to mon- subsequent entries are authorized; and
itor more than one permit space provided the
duties described in paragraph (i) of this sec- NOTE: Examples of circumstances requiring
tion can be effectively performed for each the review of the permit space program are:
permit space that is monitored. Likewise, at- any unauthorized entry of a permit space,
tendants may be stationed at any location the detection of a permit space hazard not
outside the permit space to be monitored as covered by the permit, the detection of a
long as the duties described in paragraph (i) condition prohibited by the permit, the oc-
of this section can be effectively performed currence of an injury or near-miss during
for each permit space that is monitored. entry, a change in the use or configuration
of a permit space, and employee complaints
(7) If multiple spaces are to be mon-
about the effectiveness of the program.
itored by a single attendant, include in
the permit program the means and pro- (14) Review the permit space pro-
cedures to enable the attendant to re- gram, using the canceled permits re-
spond to an emergency affecting one or tained under paragraph (e)(6) of this
more of the permit spaces being mon- section within 1 year after each entry
itored without distraction from the at- and revise the program as necessary, to
tendant’s responsibilities under para- ensure that employees participating in
graph (i) of this section; entry operations are protected from
(8) Designate the persons who are to permit space hazards.
have active roles (as, for example, au- NOTE: Employers may perform a single an-
thorized entrants, attendants, entry nual review covering all entries performed
supervisors, or persons who test or during a 12-month period. If no entry is per-
monitor the atmosphere in a permit formed during a 12-month period, no review
space) in entry operations, identify the is necessary.
duties of each such employee, and pro- Appendix C to § 1910.146 presents examples of
vide each such employee with the permit space programs that are considered
training required by paragraph (g) of to comply with the requirements of para-
this section; graph (d) of this section.
(9) Develop and implement proce- (e) Permit system. (1) Before entry is
dures for summoning rescue and emer- authorized, the employer shall docu-
gency services, for rescuing entrants ment the completion of measures re-
from permit spaces, for providing nec- quired by paragraph (d)(3) of this sec-
essary emergency services to rescued tion by preparing an entry permit.
employees, and for preventing unau-
thorized personnel from attempting a NOTE: Appendix D to § 1910.146 presents ex-
rescue; amples of permits whose elements are con-
sidered to comply with the requirements of
(10) Develop and implement a system
this section.
for the preparation, issuance, use, and
cancellation of entry permits as re- (2) Before entry begins, the entry su-
quired by this section; pervisor identified on the permit shall
(11) Develop and implement proce- sign the entry permit to authorize
dures to coordinate entry operations entry.
when employees of more than one em- (3) The completed permit shall be
ployer are working simultaneously as made available at the time of entry to
authorized entrants in a permit space, all authorized entrants or their author-

so that employees of one employer do ized representatives, by posting it at
482
the entry portal or by any other equal- (8) The measures used to isolate the
ly effective means, so that the entrants permit space and to eliminate or con-
can confirm that pre-entry prepara- trol permit space hazards before entry;
tions have been completed.
NOTE: Those measures can include the
(4) The duration of the permit may lockout or tagging of equipment and proce-
not exceed the time required to com- dures for purging, inerting, ventilating, and
plete the assigned task or job identi- flushing permit spaces.
fied on the permit in accordance with
paragraph (f)(2) of this section. (9) The acceptable entry conditions;
(5) The entry supervisor shall termi- (10) The results of initial and periodic
nate entry and cancel the entry permit tests performed under paragraph (d)(5)
when: of this section, accompanied by the
(i) The entry operations covered by names or initials of the testers and by
the entry permit have been completed; an indication of when the tests were
or performed;
(ii) A condition that is not allowed (11) The rescue and emergency serv-
under the entry permit arises in or ices that can be summoned and the
near the permit space. means (such as the equipment to use
(6) The employer shall retain each and the numbers to call) for sum-
canceled entry permit for at least 1 moning those services;
year to facilitate the review of the per- (12) The communication procedures
mit-required confined space program used by authorized entrants and at-
required by paragraph (d)(14) of this tendants to maintain contact during
section. Any problems encountered the entry;
during an entry operation shall be (13) Equipment, such as personal pro-
noted on the pertinent permit so that tective equipment, testing equipment,
appropriate revisions to the permit communications equipment, alarm sys-
space program can be made. tems, and rescue equipment, to be pro-
(f) Entry permit. The entry permit vided for compliance with this section;
that documents compliance with this (14) Any other information whose in-
section and authorizes entry to a per- clusion is necessary, given the cir-
mit space shall identify: cumstances of the particular confined
(1) The permit space to be entered; space, in order to ensure employee
(2) The purpose of the entry; safety; and
(3) The date and the authorized dura- (15) Any additional permits, such as
tion of the entry permit; for hot work, that have been issued to
(4) The authorized entrants within authorize work in the permit space.
the permit space, by name or by such (g) Training. (1) The employer shall
other means (for example, through the provide training so that all employees
use of rosters or tracking systems) as whose work is regulated by this section
will enable the attendant to determine acquire the understanding, knowledge,
quickly and accurately, for the dura- and skills necessary for the safe per-
tion of the permit, which authorized formance of the duties assigned under
entrants are inside the permit space; this section.
NOTE: This requirement may be met by in- (2) Training shall be provided to each
serting a reference on the entry permit as to affected employee:
the means used, such as a roster or tracking (i) Before the employee is first as-
system, to keep track of the authorized en- signed duties under this section;
trants within the permit space. (ii) Before there is a change in as-
(5) The personnel, by name, currently signed duties;
serving as attendants; (iii) Whenever there is a change in
(6) The individual, by name, cur- permit space operations that presents a
rently serving as entry supervisor, hazard about which an employee has
with a space for the signature or ini- not previously been trained;
tials of the entry supervisor who origi- (iv) Whenever the employer has rea-
nally authorized entry; son to believe either that there are de-
(7) The hazards of the permit space to viations from the permit space entry
be entered; procedures required by paragraph (d)(3)
483
of this section or that there are inad- (2) Is aware of possible behavioral ef-
equacies in the employee’s knowledge fects of hazard exposure in authorized
or use of these procedures. entrants;
(3) The training shall establish em- (3) Continuously maintains an accu-
ployee proficiency in the duties re- rate count of authorized entrants in
quired by this section and shall intro- the permit space and ensures that the
duce new or revised procedures, as nec- means used to identify authorized en-
essary, for compliance with this sec- trants under paragraph (f)(4) of this
tion. section accurately identifies who is in
(4) The employer shall certify that the permit space;
the training required by paragraphs (4) Remains outside the permit space
(g)(1) through (g)(3) of this section has during entry operations until relieved
been accomplished. The certification by another attendant;
shall contain each employee’s name,
NOTE: When the employer’s permit entry
the signatures or initials of the train- program allows attendant entry for rescue,
ers, and the dates of training. The cer- attendants may enter a permit space to at-
tification shall be available for inspec- tempt a rescue if they have been trained and
tion by employees and their authorized equipped for rescue operations as required by
representatives. paragraph (k)(1) of this section and if they
(h) Duties of authorized entrants. The have been relieved as required by paragraph
employer shall ensure that all author- (i)(4) of this section.
ized entrants: (5) Communicates with authorized
(1) Know the hazards that may be entrants as necessary to monitor en-
faced during entry, including informa- trant status and to alert entrants of
tion on the mode, signs or symptoms, the need to evacuate the space under
and consequences of the exposure; paragraph (i)(6) of this section;
(2) Properly use equipment as re- (6) Monitors activities inside and out-
quired by paragraph (d)(4) of this sec- side the space to determine if it is safe
tion; for entrants to remain in the space and
(3) Communicate with the attendant orders the authorized entrants to evac-
as necessary to enable the attendant to uate the permit space immediately
monitor entrant status and to enable under any of the following conditions;
the attendant to alert entrants of the (i) If the attendant detects a prohib-
need to evacuate the space as required ited condition;
by paragraph (i)(6) of this section; (ii) If the attendant detects the be-
(4) Alert the attendant whenever: havioral effects of hazard exposure in
(i) The entrant recognizes any warn- an authorized entrant;
ing sign or symptom of exposure to a (iii) If the attendant detects a situa-
dangerous situation, or tion outside the space that could en-
(ii) The entrant detects a prohibited danger the authorized entrants; or
condition; and (iv) If the attendant cannot effec-
(5) Exit from the permit space as tively and safely perform all the duties
quickly as possible whenever: required under paragraph (i) of this
(i) An order to evacuate is given by section;
the attendant or the entry supervisor, (7) Summon rescue and other emer-
(ii) The entrant recognizes any warn- gency services as soon as the attendant
ing sign or symptom of exposure to a determines that authorized entrants
dangerous situation, may need assistance to escape from
(iii) The entrant detects a prohibited permit space hazards;
condition, or (8) Takes the following actions when
(iv) An evacuation alarm is acti- unauthorized persons approach or enter
vated. a permit space while entry is under-
(i) Duties of attendants. The employer way:
shall ensure that each attendant: (i) Warn the unauthorized persons
(1) Knows the hazards that may be that they must stay away from the per-
faced during entry, including informa- mit space;
tion on the mode, signs or symptoms, (ii) Advise the unauthorized persons
and consequences of the exposure; that they must exit immediately if
484
they have entered the permit space; requires that employers provide a standby
and person or persons capable of immediate ac-
(iii) Inform the authorized entrants tion to rescue employee(s) wearing res-
and the entry supervisor if unauthor- piratory protection while in work areas de-
fined as IDLH atmospheres.
ized persons have entered the permit
space; (ii) Evaluate a prospective rescue
(9) Performs non-entry rescues as service’s ability, in terms of pro-
specified by the employer’s rescue proficiency with rescue-related tasks and
cedure; and equipment, to function appropriately
(10) Performs no duties that might while rescuing entrants from the par-
interfere with the attendant’s primary ticular permit space or types of permit
duty to monitor and protect the au- spaces identified;
thorized entrants. (iii) Select a rescue team or service
(j) Duties of entry supervisors. The em- from those evaluated that:
ployer shall ensure that each entry su- (A) Has the capability to reach the
pervisor:
victim(s) within a time frame that is
(1) Knows the hazards that may be
appropriate for the permit space haz-
faced during entry, including informa-
ard(s) identified;
tion on the mode, signs or symptoms,
and consequences of the exposure; (B) Is equipped for and proficient in
(2) Verifies, by checking that the ap- performing the needed rescue services;
propriate entries have been made on (iv) Inform each rescue team or serv-
the permit, that all tests specified by ice of the hazards they may confront
the permit have been conducted and when called on to perform rescue at the
that all procedures and equipment site; and
specified by the permit are in place be- (v) Provide the rescue team or serv-
fore endorsing the permit and allowing ice selected with access to all permit
entry to begin; spaces from which rescue may be nec-
(3) Terminates the entry and cancels essary so that the rescue service can
the permit as required by paragraph develop appropriate rescue plans and
(e)(5) of this section; practice rescue operations.
(4) Verifies that rescue services are
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (k)(1): Non-mandatory
available and that the means for sum- appendix F contains examples of criteria
moning them are operable; which employers can use in evaluating pro-
(5) Removes unauthorized individuals spective rescuers as required by paragraph
who enter or who attempt to enter the (k)(1) of this section.
permit space during entry operations;
and (2) An employer whose employees
(6) Determines, whenever responsi- have been designated to provide permit
bility for a permit space entry oper- space rescue and emergency services
ation is transferred and at intervals shall take the following measures:
dictated by the hazards and operations (i) Provide affected employees with
performed within the space, that entry the personal protective equipment
operations remain consistent with (PPE) needed to conduct permit space
terms of the entry permit and that ac- rescues safely and train affected em-
ceptable entry conditions are main- ployees so they are proficient in the
tained. use of that PPE, at no cost to those
(k) Rescue and emergency services. (1) employees;
An employer who designates rescue and (ii) Train affected employees to per-
emergency services, pursuant to para- form assigned rescue duties. The em-
graph (d)(9) of this section, shall: ployer must ensure that such employ-
(i) Evaluate a prospective rescuer’s ees successfully complete the training
ability to respond to a rescue summons required to establish proficiency as an
in a timely manner, considering the authorized entrant, as provided by
hazard(s) identified; paragraphs (g) and (h) of this section;
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (k)(1)(i): What will be (iii) Train affected employees in
basic first-aid and cardiopulmonary re-
considered timely will vary according to the

specific hazards involved in each entry. For suscitation (CPR). The employer shall
example, § 1910.134, Respiratory Protection, ensure that at least one member of the
485
rescue team or service holding a cur- the use of wristlets is the safest and
rent certification in first aid and CPR most effective alternative.
is available; and (ii) The other end of the retrieval line
(iv) Ensure that affected employees shall be attached to a mechanical de-
practice making permit space rescues vice or fixed point outside the permit
at least once every 12 months, by space in such a manner that rescue can
means of simulated rescue operations begin as soon as the rescuer becomes
in which they remove dummies, mani- aware that rescue is necessary. A me-
kins, or actual persons from the actual chanical device shall be available to re-
permit spaces or from representative trieve personnel from vertical type per-
mit spaces more than 5 feet (1.52 m)
permit spaces. Representative permit
deep.
spaces shall, with respect to opening
(4) If an injured entrant is exposed to
size, configuration, and accessibility,
a substance for which a Material Safe-
simulate the types of permit spaces
ty Data Sheet (MSDS) or other similar
from which rescue is to be performed. written information is required to be
(3) To facilitate non-entry rescue, re- kept at the worksite, that MSDS or
trieval systems or methods shall be written information shall be made
used whenever an authorized entrant available to the medical facility treat-
enters a permit space, unless the re- ing the exposed entrant.
trieval equipment would increase the (l) Employee participation. (1) Employ-
overall risk of entry or would not con- ers shall consult with affected employ-
tribute to the rescue of the entrant. ees and their authorized representa-
Retrieval systems shall meet the fol- tives on the development and imple-
lowing requirements. mentation of all aspects of the permit
(i) Each authorized entrant shall use space program required by paragraph
a chest or full body harness, with a re- (c) of this section.
trieval line attached at the center of (2) Employers shall make available
the entrant’s back near shoulder level, to affected employees and their author-
above the entrant’s head, or at another ized representatives all information re-
point which the employer can establish quired to be developed by this section.
presents a profile small enough for the APPENDIXES TO § 1910.146—PERMIT-REQUIRED
successful removal of the entrant. CONFINED SPACES
Wristlets may be used in lieu of the
NOTE: Appendixes A through F serve to
chest or full body harness if the em- provide information and non-mandatory
ployer can demonstrate that the use of guidelines to assist employers and employees
a chest or full body harness is infeasi- in complying with the appropriate require-
ble or creates a greater hazard and that ments of this section.
486
APPENDIX A TO § 1910.146—PERMIT-REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE DECISION

FLOW CHART
EC27OC91.029</GPH></EXTRACT>
487
APPENDIX B TO § 1910.146—PROCEDURES FOR Potential hazards. The employees could be ex-
ATMOSPHERIC TESTING posed to the following:
Atmospheric testing is required for two Engulfment.
distinct purposes: evaluation of the hazards Presence of toxic gases. Equal to or more than
of the permit space and verification that ac- 10 ppm hydrogen sulfide measured as an 8-
ceptable entry conditions for entry into that hour time-weighted average. If the presence
space exist. of other toxic contaminants is suspected,
(1) Evaluation testing. The atmosphere of a
specific monitoring programs will be devel-
confined space should be analyzed using
oped.
equipment of sufficient sensitivity and speci-
ficity to identify and evaluate any hazardous Presence of explosive/flammable gases. Equal to
atmospheres that may exist or arise, so that or greater than 10% of the lower flammable
appropriate permit entry procedures can be limit (LFL).
developed and acceptable entry conditions Oxygen Deficiency. A concentration of oxygen
stipulated for that space. Evaluation and in- in the atmosphere equal to or less than 19.5%
terpretation of these data, and development
by volume.
of the entry procedure, should be done by, or
reviewed by, a technically qualified profes- A. Entry Without Permit/Attendant
sional (e.g., OSHA consultation service, or Certification. Confined spaces may be entered
certified industrial hygienist, registered without the need for a written permit or at-
safety engineer, certified safety professional, tendant provided that the space can be main-
certified marine chemist, etc.) based on eval- tained in a safe condition for entry by me-
uation of all serious hazards. chanical ventilation alone, as provided in
(2) Verification testing. The atmosphere of a § 1910.146(c)(5). All spaces shall be considered
permit space which may contain a hazardous
permit-required confined spaces until the
atmosphere should be tested for residues of
pre-entry procedures demonstrate otherwise.
all contaminants identified by evaluation
Any employee required or permitted to pre-
testing using permit specified equipment to
determine that residual concentrations at check or enter an enclosed/confined space
the time of testing and entry are within the shall have successfully completed, -as a min-
range of acceptable entry conditions. Results imum, the training as required by the fol-
of testing (i.e., actual concentration, etc.) lowing sections of these procedures. A written
should be recorded on the permit in the copy of operating and rescue procedures as re-
space provided adjacent to the stipulated acquired by these procedures shall be at the work
ceptable entry condition. site for the duration of the job. The Confined
(3) Duration of testing. Measurement of val- Space Pre-Entry Check List must be com-
ues for each atmospheric parameter should pleted by the LEAD WORKER before entry
be made for at least the minimum response into a confined space. This list verifies com-
time of the test instrument specified by the pletion of items listed below. This check list
manufacturer. shall be kept at the job site for duration of
(4) Testing stratified atmospheres. When the job. If circumstances dictate an interrup-
monitoring for entries involving a descent tion in the work, the permit space must be
into atmospheres that may be stratified, the re-evaluated and a new check list must be
atmospheric envelope should be tested a dis- completed.
tance of approximately 4 feet (1.22 m) in the
direction of travel and to each side. If a sam- Control of atmospheric and engulfment hazards.
pling probe is used, the entrant’s rate of Pumps and Lines. All pumps and lines which
progress should be slowed to accommodate may reasonably cause contaminants to flow
the sampling speed and detector response. into the space shall be disconnected, blinded
(5) Order of testing. A test for oxygen is per- and locked out, or effectively isolated by
formed first because most combustible gas other means to prevent development of dan-
meters are oxygen dependent and will not gerous air contamination or engulfment. Not
provide reliable readings in an oxygen defi- all laterals to sewers or storm drains require
cient atmosphere. Combustible gasses are blocking. However, where experience or
tested for next because the threat of fire or knowledge of industrial use indicates there
explosion is both more immediate and more is a reasonable potential for contamination
life threatening, in most cases, than expo- of air or engulfment into an occupied sewer,
sure to toxic gasses and vapors. If tests for then all affected laterals shall be blocked. If
toxic gasses and vapors are necessary, they blocking and/or isolation requires entry into
are performed last.
the space the provisions for entry into a
APPENDIX C TO § 1910.146—EXAMPLES OF permit- required confined space must be im-
PERMIT-REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE PROGRAMS plemented.
Surveillance. The surrounding area shall be

Example 1.
surveyed to avoid hazards such as drifting
Workplace. Sewer entry. vapors from the tanks, piping, or sewers.
488
Testing. The atmosphere within the space Confined Space Entry Permit must be com-
will be tested to determine whether dan- pleted.
gerous air contamination and/or oxygen defi- Control of atmospheric and engulfment hazards.
ciency exists. Detector tubes, alarm only gas
Surveillance. The surrounding area shall be
monitors and explosion meters are examples
surveyed to avoid hazards such as drifting
of monitoring equipment that may be used
vapors from tanks, piping or sewers.
to test permit space atmospheres. Testing
shall be performed by the LEAD WORKER Testing. The confined space atmosphere shall
who has successfully completed the Gas De- be tested to determine whether dangerous
tector training for the monitor he will use. air contamination and/or oxygen deficiency
The minimum parameters to be monitored exists. A direct reading gas monitor shall be
are oxygen deficiency, LFL, and hydrogen used. Testing shall be performed by the SU-
sulfide concentration. A written record of PERVISOR who has successfully completed
the pre-entry test results shall be made and the gas detector training for the monitor he
kept at the work site for the duration of the will use. The minimum parameters to be
job. The supervisor will certify in writing, monitored are oxygen deficiency, LFL and
based upon the results of the pre-entry test- hydrogen sulfide concentration. A written
ing, that all hazards have been eliminated. record of the pre- entry test results shall be
Affected employees shall be able to review made and kept at the work site for the dura-
the testing results. The most hazardous con- tion of the job. Affected employees shall be
ditions shall govern when work is being per- able to review the testing results. The most
formed in two adjoining, connecting spaces. hazardous conditions shall govern when
work is being performed in two adjoining,
Entry Procedures. If there are no non-atmos-
connected spaces.
pheric hazards present and if the pre-entry
tests show there is no dangerous air con- Space Ventilation. Mechanical ventilation
tamination and/or oxygen deficiency within systems, where applicable, shall be set at
the space and there is no reason to believe 100% outside air. Where possible, open addi-
that any is likely to develop, entry into and tional manholes to increase air circulation.
work within may proceed. Continuous test- Use portable blowers to augment natural cir-
ing of the atmosphere in the immediate vi- culation if needed. After a suitable ven-
cinity of the workers within the space shall tilating period, repeat the testing. Entry
be accomplished. The workers will imme- may not begin until testing has dem-
diately leave the permit space when any of onstrated that the hazardous atmosphere has
the gas monitor alarm set points are reached been eliminated.
as defined. Workers will not return to the Entry Procedures. The following procedure
area until a SUPERVISOR who has com- shall be observed under any of the following
pleted the gas detector training has used a conditions: 1.) Testing demonstrates the ex-
direct reading gas detector to evaluate the istence of dangerous or deficient conditions
situation and has determined that it is safe and additional ventilation cannot reduce
to enter. concentrations to safe levels; 2.) The atmos-
Rescue. Arrangements for rescue services are phere tests as safe but unsafe conditions can
not required where there is no attendant. reasonably be expected to develop; 3.) It is
See the rescue portion of section B., below, not feasible to provide for ready exit from
for instructions regarding rescue planning spaces equipped with automatic fire suppres-
where an entry permit is required. sion systems and it is not practical or safe to
deactivate such systems; or 4.) An emer-
B. Entry Permit Required
gency exists and it is not feasible to wait for
Permits. Confined Space Entry Permit. All pre-entry procedures to take effect.
spaces shall be considered permit-required All personnel must be trained. A self con-
confined spaces until the pre-entry proce- tained breathing apparatus shall be worn by
dures demonstrate otherwise. Any employee any person entering the space. At least one
required or permitted to pre-check or enter a worker shall stand by the outside of the
permit-required confined space shall have space ready to give assistance in case of
successfully completed, as a minimum, the emergency. The standby worker shall have a
training as required by the following sec- self contained breathing apparatus available
tions of these procedures. A written copy of for immediate use. There shall be at least
operating and rescue procedures as required by one additional worker within sight or call of
these procedures shall be at the work site for the the standby worker. Continuous powered
duration of the job. The Confined Space Entry communications shall be maintained be-
Permit must be completed before approval tween the worker within the confined space
can be given to enter a permit-required con- and standby personnel.
fined space. This permit verifies completion If at any time there is any questionable ac-
of items listed below. This permit shall be tion or non- movement by the worker inside,
kept at the job site for the duration of the a verbal check will be made. If there is no re-
job. If circumstances cause an interruption sponse, the worker will be moved imme-
in the work or a change in the alarm condi- diately. Exception: If the worker is disabled
tions for which entry was approved, a new due to falling or impact, he/she shall not be
489
removed from the confined space unless 2. Engulfed in raw material or hot, recycled
there is immediate danger to his/her life. fat;
Local fire department rescue personnel shall 3. Burned by steam from leaks into the cook-
be notified immediately. The standby worker er/dryer steam jacket or the condenser duct
may only enter the confined space in case of system if steam valves are not properly
an emergency (wearing the self contained closed and locked out;
breathing apparatus) and only after being re- 4. Burned by contact with hot metal sur-
lieved by another worker. Safety belt or har- faces, such as the agitator shaft assembly, or
ness with attached lifeline shall be used by inner shell of the cooker/dryer;
all workers entering the space with the free 5. Heat stress caused by warm atmosphere
end of the line secured outside the entry inside cooker/dryer;
opening. The standby worker shall attempt 6. Slipping and falling on grease in the cook-
to remove a disabled worker via his lifeline er/dryer;
before entering the space. 7. Electrically shocked by faulty equipment
When practical, these spaces shall be en- taken into the cooker/dryer;
tered through side openings—those within 8. Burned or overcome by fire or products of
31⁄2 feet (1.07 m) of the bottom. When entry combustion; or
must be through a top opening, the safety 9. Overcome by fumes generated by welding
belt shall be of the harness type that sus- or cutting done on grease covered surfaces.
pends a person upright and a hoisting device Permits. The supervisor in this case is always
or similar apparatus shall be available for present at the cooker/dryer or other permit
lifting workers out of the space. entry confined space when entry is made.
In any situation where their use may en- The supervisor must follow the pre-entry iso-
danger the worker, use of a hoisting device lation procedures described in the entry per-
or safety belt and attached lifeline may be mit in preparing for entry, and ensure that
discontinued. the protective clothing, ventilating equip-
When dangerous air contamination is at- ment and any other equipment required by
tributable to flammable and/or explosive the permit are at the entry site.
substances, lighting and electrical equip- Control of hazards. Mechanical. Lock out
ment shall be Class 1, Division 1 rated per main power switch to agitator motor at
National Electrical Code and no ignition main power panel. Affix tag to the lock to
sources shall be introduced into the area. inform others that a permit entry confined
Continuous gas monitoring shall be per- space entry is in progress.
formed during all confined space operations.
If alarm conditions change adversely, entry Engulfment. Close all valves in the raw mate-
personnel shall exit the confined space and a rial blow line. Secure each valve in its closed
new confined space permit issued. position using chain and lock. Attach a tag
to the valve and chain warning that a permit
Rescue. Call the fire department services for entry confined space entry is in progress.
rescue. Where immediate hazards to injured The same procedure shall be used for secur-
personnel are present, workers at the site ing the fat recycle valve.
shall implement emergency procedures to fit
the situation. Burns and heat stress. Close steam supply
valves to jacket and secure with chains and
Example 2. tags. Insert solid blank at flange in cooker
vent line to condenser manifold duct system.
Workplace. Meat and poultry rendering Vent cooker/dryer by opening access door at
plants. discharge end and top center door to allow
Cookers and dryers are either batch or con- natural ventilation throughout the entry. If
tinuous in their operation. Multiple batch faster cooling is needed, use a portable ven-
cookers are operated in parallel. When one tilation fan to increase ventilation. Cooling
unit of a multiple set is shut down for re- water may be circulated through the jacket
pairs, means are available to isolate that to reduce both outer and inner surface tem-
unit from the others which remain in oper- peratures of cooker/dryers faster. Check air
ation. and inner surface temperatures in cooker/
Cookers and dryers are horizontal, cylin- dryer to assure they are within acceptable
drical vessels equipped with a center, rotat- limits before entering, or use proper protec-
ing shaft and agitator paddles or discs. If the tive clothing.
inner shell is jacketed, it is usually heated Fire and fume hazards. Careful site prepara-
with steam at pressures up to 150 psig (1034.25 tion, such as cleaning the area within 4
kPa). The rotating shaft assembly of the inches (10.16 cm) of all welding or torch cut-
continuous cooker or dryer is also steam ting operations, and proper ventilation are
heated. the preferred controls. All welding and cut-
Potential Hazards. The recognized hazards as- ting operations shall be done in accordance
sociated with cookers and dryers are the risk
with the requirements of 29 CFR part 1910,

that employees could be: subpart Q, OSHA’s welding standard. Proper
1. Struck or caught by rotating agitator; ventilation may be achieved by local exhaust
490
ventilation, or the use of portable ventilation if the forced ventilation does not main-
tion fans, or a combination of the two prac- tain acceptable respiratory conditions.
tices. Permits. Because of the repetitive nature of
Electrical shock. Electrical equipment used in the entries in these operations, an ‘‘Area
cooker/dryers shall be in serviceable condi- Entry Permit’’ will be issued for a 1 month
tion. period to cover those production areas where
Slips and falls. Remove residual grease before tanks are fabricated to the point that entry
entering cooker/dryer. and exit are made using manholes.
Attendant. The supervisor shall be the at- Authorization. Only the area supervisor may
tendant for employees entering cooker/dry- authorize an employee to enter a tank with-
ers. in the permit area. The area supervisor must
Permit. The permit shall specify how isola- determine that conditions in the tank trail-
tion shall be done and any other prepara- er, dry bulk trailer or truck, etc. meet per-
tions needed before making entry. This is es- mit requirements before authorizing entry.
pecially important in parallel arrangements Attendant. The area supervisor shall des-
of cooker/dryers so that the entire operation ignate an employee to maintain communica-
need not be shut down to allow safe entry tion by employer specified means with em-
into one unit. ployees working in tanks to ensure their
Rescue. When necessary, the attendant shall safety. The attendant may not enter any
call the fire department as previously ar- permit entry confined space to rescue an en-
ranged. trant or for any other reason, unless author-
ized by the rescue procedure and, and even
Example 3. then, only after calling the rescue team and
being relieved by as attendant by another
Workplace. Workplaces where tank cars, worker.
trucks, and trailers, dry bulk tanks and
trailers, railroad tank cars, and similar port- Communications and observation. Communica-
able tanks are fabricated or serviced. tions between attendant and entrant(s) shall
be maintained throughout entry. Methods of
A. During fabrication. These tanks and dry- communication that may be specified by the
bulk carriers are entered repeatedly permit include voice, voice powered radio,
throughout the fabrication process. These tapping or rapping codes on tank walls, sig-
products are not configured identically, but nalling tugs on a rope, and the attendant’s
the manufacturing processes by which they observation that work activities such as
are made are very similar. chipping, grinding, welding, spraying, etc.,
Sources of hazards. In addition to the me- which require deliberate operator control
chanical hazards arising from the risks that continue normally. These activities often
an entrant would be injured due to contact generate so much noise that the necessary
with components of the tank or the tools hearing protection makes communication by
being used, there is also the risk that a voice difficult.
worker could be injured by breathing fumes
Rescue procedures. Acceptable rescue proce-
from welding materials or mists or vapors
dures include entry by a team of employee-
from materials used to coat the tank inte-
rescuers, use of public emergency services,
rior. In addition, many of these vapors and
and procedures for breaching the tank. The
mists are flammable, so the failure to prop-
area permit specifies which procedures are
erly ventilate a tank could lead to a fire or
available, but the area supervisor makes the
explosion.
final decision based on circumstances. (Cer-
Control of hazards. tain injuries may make it necessary to
Welding. Local exhaust ventilation shall be breach the tank to remove a person rather
used to remove welding fumes once the tank than risk additional injury by removal
or carrier is completed to the point that through an existing manhole. However, the
workers may enter and exit only through a supervisor must ensure that no breaching
manhole. (Follow the requirements of 29 CFR procedure used for rescue would violate
1910, subpart Q, OSHA’s welding standard, at terms of the entry permit. For instance, if
all times.) Welding gas tanks may never be the tank must be breached by cutting with a
brought into a tank or carrier that is a per- torch, the tank surfaces to be cut must be
mit entry confined space. free of volatile or combustible coatings with-
Application of interior coatings/linings. At- in 4 inches (10.16 cm) of the cutting line and
mospheric hazards shall be controlled by the atmosphere within the tank must be
forced air ventilation sufficient to keep the below the LFL.
atmospheric concentration of flammable ma- Retrieval line and harnesses. The retrieval
terials below 10% of the lower flammable lines and harnesses generally required under
limit (LFL) (or lower explosive limit (LEL), this standard are usually impractical for use
whichever term is used locally). The appro- in tanks because the internal configuration
priate respirators are provided and shall be of the tanks and their interior baffles and
used in addition to providing forced ventila- other structures would prevent rescuers from
491
hauling out injured entrants. However, un- Welding. In addition to tank cleaning for
less the rescue procedure calls for breaching control of atmospheric hazards, coating and
the tank for rescue, the rescue team shall be surface materials shall be removed 4 inches
trained in the use of retrieval lines and har- (10.16 cm) or more from any surface area
nesses for removing injured employees where welding or other torch work will be
through manholes. done and care taken that the atmosphere
within the tank remains well below the LFL.
B. Repair or service of ‘‘used’’ tanks and bulk (Follow the requirements of 29 CFR 1910, sub-
trailers. part Q, OSHA’s welding standard, at all
Sources of hazards. In addition to facing the times.)
potential hazards encountered in fabrication Permits. An entry permit valid for up to 1
or manufacturing, tanks or trailers which year shall be issued prior to authorization of
have been in service may contain residues of entry into used tank trailers, dry bulk trail-
dangerous materials, whether left over from ers or trucks. In addition to the pre-entry
the transportation of hazardous cargoes or cleaning requirement, this permit shall re-
generated by chemical or bacterial action on quire the employee safeguards specified for
residues of non-hazardous cargoes. new tank fabrication or construction permit
areas.
Control of atmospheric hazards. A ‘‘used’’ tank
shall be brought into areas where tank entry Authorization. Only the area supervisor may
is authorized only after the tank has been authorize an employee to enter a tank trail-
emptied, cleansed (without employee entry) er, dry bulk trailer or truck within the per-
of any residues, and purged of any potential mit area. The area supervisor must deter-
atmospheric hazards. mine that the entry permit requirements
have been met before authorizing entry.
492
APPENDIX D TO § 1910.146—SAMPLE PERMITS

493
EC27OC91.030</GPH>
APPENDIX E TO § 1910.146—SEWER SYSTEM exists any way to completely isolate the

ENTRY space (a section of a continuous system) to
be entered; second, because isolation is not

Sewer entry differs in three vital respects
complete, the atmosphere may suddenly and
from other permit entries; first, there rarely
494
EC27OC91.031</GPH>
unpredictably become lethally hazardous entry. Only the employer can decide, based
(toxic, flammable or explosive) from causes upon his or her knowledge of, and experience
beyond the control of the entrant or em- with permit spaces in sewer systems, what
ployer, and third, experienced sewer workers the best type of testing instrument may be
are especially knowledgeable in entry and for any specific entry operation.
work in their permit spaces because of their The selected testing instrument should be
frequent entries. Unlike other employments carried and used by the entrant in sewer line
where permit space entry is a rare and excep- work to monitor the atmosphere in the en-
tional event, sewer workers’ usual work entrant’s environment, and in advance of the
vironment is a permit space. entrant’s direction of movement, to warn the
(1) Adherence to procedure. The employer entrant of any deterioration in atmospheric
should designate as entrants only employees conditions. Where several entrants are work-
who are thoroughly trained in the employing together in the same immediate loca-
er’s sewer entry procedures and who dem- tion, one instrument, used by the lead en-
onstrate that they follow these entry proce- trant, is acceptable.
dures exactly as prescribed when performing (3) Surge flow and flooding. Sewer crews
sewer entries. should develop and maintain liaison, to the
(2) Atmospheric monitoring. Entrants should extent possible, with the local weather bu-
be trained in the use of, and be equipped reau and fire and emergency services in their
with, atmospheric monitoring equipment area so that sewer work may be delayed or
which sounds an audible alarm, in addition interrupted and entrants withdrawn when-
to its visual readout, whenever one of the ever sewer lines might be suddenly flooded
following conditions are encountered: Oxy- by rain or fire suppression activities, or
gen concentration less than 19.5 percent; whenever flammable or other hazardous ma-
flammable gas or vapor at 10 percent or more terials are released into sewers during emer-
of the lower flammable limit (LFL); or hy- gencies by industrial or transportation acci-
drogen sulfide or carbon monoxide at or dents.
above 10 ppm or 35 ppm, respectively, meas- (4) Special Equipment. Entry into large bore
ured as an 8-hour time-weighted average. At- sewers may require the use of special equip-
mospheric monitoring equipment needs to be ment. Such equipment might include such
calibrated according to the manufacturer’s items as atmosphere monitoring devices
instructions. The oxygen sensor/broad range with automatic audible alarms, escape self-
sensor is best suited for initial use in situa- contained breathing apparatus (ESCBA) with
tions where the actual or potential contami- at least 10 minute air supply (or other
nants have not been identified, because NIOSH approved self-rescuer), and water-
broad range sensors, unlike substance-spe- proof flashlights, and may also include boats
cific sensors, enable employers to obtain an and rafts, radios and rope stand-offs for pull-
overall reading of the hydrocarbons ing around bends and corners as needed.
(flammables) present in the space. However,
such sensors only indicate that a hazardous APPENDIX F TO § 1910.146—RESCUE TEAM OR
threshold of a class of chemicals has been ex- RESCUE SERVICE EVALUATION CRITERIA
ceeded. They do not measure the levels of (NON-MANDATORY)
contamination of specific substances. There- (1) This appendix provides guidance to em-
fore, substance-specific devices, which meas- ployers in choosing an appropriate rescue
ure the actual levels of specific substances, service. It contains criteria that may be used
are best suited for use where actual and po- to evaluate the capabilities both of prospec-
tential contaminants have been identified. tive and current rescue teams. Before a res-
The measurements obtained with substance- cue team can be trained or chosen, however,
specific devices are of vital importance to a satisfactory permit program, including an
the employer when decisions are made con- analysis of all permit-required confined
cerning the measures necessary to protect spaces to identify all potential hazards in
entrants (such as ventilation or personal those spaces, must be completed. OSHA be-
protective equipment) and the setting and lieves that compliance with all the provi-
attainment of appropriate entry conditions. sions of § 1910.146 will enable employers to
However, the sewer environment may sud- conduct permit space operations without re-
denly and unpredictably change, and the sub- course to rescue services in nearly all cases.
stance-specific devices may not detect the However, experience indicates that cir-
potentially lethal atmospheric hazards cumstances will arise where entrants will
which may enter the sewer environment. need to be rescued from permit spaces. It is
Although OSHA considers the information therefore important for employers to select
and guidance provided above to be appro- rescue services or teams, either on-site or
priate and useful in most sewer entry situa- off-site, that are equipped and capable of
tions, the Agency emphasizes that each em- minimizing harm to both entrants and res-
ployer must consider the unique cir- cuers if the need arises.
cumstances, including the predictability of (2) For all rescue teams or services, the
the atmosphere, of the sewer permit spaces employer’s evaluation should consist of two
in the employer’s workplace in preparing for components: an initial evaluation, in which
495
employers decide whether a potential rescue potential bottlenecks or traffic congestion
service or team is adequately trained and that might be encountered in transit, the re-
equipped to perform permit space rescues of liability of the rescuer’s vehicles, and the
the kind needed at the facility and whether training and skill of its drivers.
such rescuers can respond in a timely man- 3. What is the availability of the rescue
ner, and a performance evaluation, in which service? Is it unavailable at certain times of
employers measure the performance of the the day or in certain situations? What is the
team or service during an actual or practice likelihood that key personnel of the rescue
rescue. For example, based on the initial service might be unavailable at times? If the
evaluation, an employer may determine that rescue service becomes unavailable while an
maintaining an on-site rescue team will be entry is underway, does it have the capa-
more expensive than obtaining the services bility of notifying the employer so that the
of an off-site team, without being signifi- employer can instruct the attendant to abort
cantly more effective, and decide to hire a the entry immediately?
rescue service. During a performance evalua- 4. Does the rescue service meet all the re-
tion, the employer could decide, after ob- quirements of paragraph (k)(2) of the stand-
serving the rescue service perform a practice ard? If not, has it developed a plan that will
rescue, that the service’s training or pre- enable it to meet those requirements in the
paredness was not adequate to effect a time- future? If so, how soon can the plan be imple-
ly or effective rescue at his or her facility mented?
and decide to select another rescue service, 5. For off-site services, is the service will-
or to form an internal rescue team. ing to perform rescues at the employer’s
workplace? (An employer may not rely on a
A. Initial Evaluation rescuer who declines, for whatever reason, to
I. The employer should meet with the pro- provide rescue services.)
spective rescue service to facilitate the eval- 6. Is an adequate method for communica-
uations required by § 1910.146(k)(1)(i) and tions between the attendant, employer and
§ 1910.146(k)(1)(ii). At a minimum, if an off- prospective rescuer available so that a res-
site rescue service is being considered, the cue request can be transmitted to the res-
employer must contact the service to plan cuer without delay? How soon after notifica-
and coordinate the evaluations required by tion can a prospective rescuer dispatch a res-
the standard. Merely posting the service’s cue team to the entry site?
number or planning to rely on the 911 emer- 7. For rescues into spaces that may pose
gency phone number to obtain these services significant atmospheric hazards and from
at the time of a permit space emergency which rescue entry, patient packaging and
would not comply with paragraph (k)(1) of retrieval cannot be safely accomplished in a
the standard. relatively short time (15–20 minutes), em-
II. The capabilities required of a rescue ployers should consider using airline res-
service vary with the type of permit spaces pirators (with escape bottles) for the res-
from which rescue may be necessary and the cuers and to supply rescue air to the patient.
hazards likely to be encountered in those If the employer decides to use SCBA, does
spaces. Answering the questions below will the prospective rescue service have an ample
assist employers in determining whether the supply of replacement cylinders and proce-
rescue service is capable of performing res- dures for rescuers to enter and exit (or be re-
cues in the permit spaces present at the em- trieved) well within the SCBA’s air supply
ployer’s workplace. limits?
1. What are the needs of the employer with 8. If the space has a vertical entry over 5
regard to response time (time for the rescue feet in depth, can the prospective rescue
service to receive notification, arrive at the service properly perform entry rescues? Does
scene, and set up and be ready for entry)? the service have the technical knowledge
For example, if entry is to be made into an and equipment to perform rope work or ele-
IDLH atmosphere, or into a space that can vated rescue, if needed?
quickly develop an IDLH atmosphere (if ven- 9. Does the rescue service have the nec-
tilation fails or for other reasons), the rescue essary skills in medical evaluation, patient
team or service would need to be standing by packaging and emergency response?
at the permit space. On the other hand, if 10. Does the rescue service have the nec-
the danger to entrants is restricted to me- essary equipment to perform rescues, or
chanical hazards that would cause injuries must the equipment be provided by the em-
(e.g., broken bones, abrasions) a response ployer or another source?
time of 10 or 15 minutes might be adequate. B. Performance Evaluation
2. How quickly can the rescue team or
service get from its location to the permit Rescue services are required by paragraph
spaces from which rescue may be necessary? (k)(2)(iv) of the standard to practice rescues
Relevant factors to consider would include: at least once every 12 months, provided that
the location of the rescue team or service the team or service has not successfully per-
relative to the employer’s workplace, the formed a permit space rescue within that
quality of roads and highways to be traveled, time. As part of each practice session, the
496
service should perform a critique of the prac- that are ‘‘worst-case’’ or most restrictive
tice rescue, or have another qualified party with respect to internal configuration, ele-
perform the critique, so that deficiencies in vation, and portal size. The following charac-
procedures, equipment, training, or number teristics of a practice space should be consid-
of personnel can be identified and corrected. ered when deciding whether a space is truly
The results of the critique, and the correc- representative of an actual permit space:
tions made to respond to the deficiencies (1) Internal configuration.
identified, should be given to the employer (a) Open—there are no obstacles, barriers,
to enable it to determine whether the rescue or obstructions within the space. One exam-
service can quickly be upgraded to meet the ple is a water tank.
employer’s rescue needs or whether another (b) Obstructed—the permit space contains
service must be selected. The following ques- some type of obstruction that a rescuer
tions will assist employers and rescue teams would need to maneuver around. An example
and services evaluate their performance. would be a baffle or mixing blade. Large
1. Have all members of the service been equipment, such as a ladder or scaffold,
trained as permit space entrants, at a min- brought into a space for work purposes
imum, including training in the potential would be considered an obstruction if the po-
hazards of all permit spaces, or of represent- sitioning or size of the equipment would
ative permit spaces, from which rescue may make rescue more difficult.
be needed? Can team members recognize the (2) Elevation.
signs, symptoms, and consequences of expo- (a) Elevated—a permit space where the en-
sure to any hazardous atmospheres that may trance portal or opening is above grade by 4
be present in those permit spaces? feet or more. This type of space usually re-
2. Is every team member provided with, quires knowledge of high angle rescue proce-
and properly trained in, the use and need for dures because of the difficulty in packaging
PPE, such as SCBA or fall arrest equipment, and transporting a patient to the ground
which may be required to perform permit from the portal.
space rescues in the facility? Is every team
(b) Non-elevated—a permit space with the
member properly trained to perform his or
entrance portal located less than 4 feet above
her functions and make rescues, and to use
grade. This type of space will allow the res-
any rescue equipment, such as ropes and
cue team to transport an injured employee
backboards, that may be needed in a rescue
normally.
attempt?
(3) Portal size.
3. Are team members trained in the first
(a) Restricted—A portal of 24 inches or less
aid and medical skills needed to treat vic-
in the least dimension. Portals of this size
tims overcome or injured by the types of
are too small to allow a rescuer to simply
hazards that may be encountered in the per-
enter the space while using SCBA. The por-
mit spaces at the facility?
4. Do all team members perform their func- tal size is also too small to allow normal spi-
tions safely and efficiently? Do rescue serv- nal immobilization of an injured employee.
ice personnel focus on their own safety be- (b) Unrestricted—A portal of greater than
fore considering the safety of the victim? 24 inches in the least dimension. These por-
5. If necessary, can the rescue service prop- tals allow relatively free movement into and
erly test the atmosphere to determine if it is out of the permit space.
IDLH? (4) Space access.
6. Can the rescue personnel identify infor- (a) Horizontal—The portal is located on
mation pertinent to the rescue from entry the side of the permit space. Use of retrieval
permits, hot work permits, and MSDSs? lines could be difficult.
7. Has the rescue service been informed of (b) Vertical—The portal is located on the
any hazards to personnel that may arise top of the permit space, so that rescuers
from outside the space, such as those that must climb down, or the bottom of the per-
may be caused by future work near the mit space, so that rescuers must climb up to
space? enter the space. Vertical portals may require
8. If necessary, can the rescue service prop- knowledge of rope techniques, or special pa-
erly package and retrieve victims from a tient packaging to safely retrieve a downed
permit space that has a limited size opening entrant.
(less than 24 inches (60.9 cm) in diameter), [58 FR 4549, Jan. 14, 1993; 58 FR 34845, 34846,
limited internal space, or internal obstacles June 29, 1993, as amended at 59 FR 26114, May
or hazards? 19, 1994; 63 FR 66038, 66039, Dec. 1, 1998; 76 FR
9. If necessary, can the rescue service safe- 80739, Dec. 27, 2011]
ly perform an elevated (high angle) rescue?
10. Does the rescue service have a plan for § 1910.147 The control of hazardous
each of the kinds of permit space rescue op- energy (lockout/tagout).
erations at the facility? Is the plan adequate
(a) Scope, application, and purpose—(1)
for all types of rescue operations that may

be needed at the facility? Teams may prac- Scope. (i) This standard covers the serv-
tice in representative spaces, or in spaces icing and maintenance of machines and
497
equipment in which the unexpected (A) Work on cord and plug connected
energization or start up of the ma- electric equipment for which exposure
chines or equipment, or release of to the hazards of unexpected
stored energy could cause injury to em- energization or start up of the equip-
ployees. This standard establishes min- ment is controlled by the unplugging of
imum performance requirements for the equipment from the energy source
the control of such hazardous energy. and by the plug being under the exclu-
(ii) This standard does not cover the sive control of the employee per-
following: forming the servicing or maintenance.
(A) Construction and agriculture em- (B) Hot tap operations involving
ployment; transmission and distribution systems
(B) Employment covered by parts for substances such as gas, steam,
1915, 1917, and 1918 of this title; water or petroleum products when they
(C) Installations under the exclusive are performed on pressurized pipelines,
control of electric utilities for the pur- provided that the employer dem-
pose of power generation, transmission onstrates that (1) continuity of service
and distribution, including related is essential; (2) shutdown of the system
equipment for communication or me- is impractical; and (3) documented pro-
tering; cedures are followed, and special equip-
(D) Exposure to electrical hazards ment is used which will provide proven
from work on, near, or with conductors effective protection for employees.
or equipment in electric-utilization in- (3) Purpose. (i) This section requires
stallations, which is covered by sub- employers to establish a program and
part S of this part; and utilize procedures for affixing appro-
(E) Oil and gas well drilling and serv- priate lockout devices or tagout de-
icing. vices to energy isolating devices, and
(2) Application. (i) This standard ap- to otherwise disable machines or equip-
plies to the control of energy during ment to prevent unexpected
servicing and/or maintenance of ma- energization, start-up or release of
chines and equipment. stored energy in order to prevent in-
(ii) Normal production operations are jury to employees.
not covered by this standard (See sub- (ii) When other standards in this part
part 0 of this part). Servicing and/or require the use of lockout or tagout,
maintenance which takes place during they shall be used and supplemented by
normal production operations is cov- the procedural and training require-
ered by this standard only if;: ments of this section.
(A) An employee is required to re- (b) Definitions applicable to this sec-
move or bypass a guard or other safety tion.
device; or Affected employee. An employee whose
(B) An employee is required to place job requires him/her to operate or use a
any part of his or her body into an area machine or equipment on which serv-
on a machine or piece of equipment icing or maintenance is being per-
where work is actually performed upon formed under lockout or tagout, or
the material being processed (point of whose job requires him/her to work in
operation) or where an associated dan- an area in which such servicing or
ger zone exists during a machine oper- maintenance is being performed.
ating cycle. Authorized employee. A person who
locks out or tags out machines or
NOTE: Exception to paragraph (a)(2)(ii):
equipment in order to perform serv-
Minor tool changes and adjustments, and
other minor servicing activities, which take icing or maintenance on that machine
place during normal production operations, or equipment. An affected employee be-
are not covered by this standard if they are comes an authorized employee when
routine, repetitive, and integral to the use of that employee’s duties include per-
the equipment for production, provided that forming servicing or maintenance cov-
the work is performed using alternative ered under this section.
measures which provide effective protection Capable of being locked out. An energy
(See subpart 0 of this part).
isolating device is capable of being
(iii) This standard does not apply to locked out if it has a hasp or other
the following. means of attachment to which, or
498
through which, a lock can be affixed, or perform its intended production func-
it has a locking mechanism built into tion.
it. Other energy isolating devices are Servicing and/or maintenance. Work-
capable of being locked out, if lockout place activities such as constructing,
can be achieved without the need to installing, setting up, adjusting, in-
dismantle, rebuild, or replace the en- specting, modifying, and maintaining
ergy isolating device or permanently and/or servicing machines or equip-
alter its energy control capability. ment. These activities include lubrica-
Energized. Connected to an energy tion, cleaning or unjamming of ma-
source or containing residual or stored chines or equipment and making ad-
energy. justments or tool changes, where the
Energy isolating device. A mechanical employee may be exposed to the unex-
device that physically prevents the pected energization or startup of the
transmission or release of energy, in- equipment or release of hazardous en-
cluding but not limited to the fol- ergy.
lowing: A manually operated electrical Setting up. Any work performed to
circuit breaker; a disconnect switch; a prepare a machine or equipment to per-
manually operated switch by which the form its normal production operation.
conductors of a circuit can be discon- Tagout. The placement of a tagout
nected from all ungrounded supply con- device on an energy isolating device, in
ductors, and, in addition, no pole can accordance with an established proce-
be operated independently; a line dure, to indicate that the energy iso-
valve; a block; and any similar device lating device and the equipment being
used to block or isolate energy. Push controlled may not be operated until
buttons, selector switches and other the tagout device is removed.
control circuit type devices are not en- Tagout device. A prominent warning
ergy isolating devices. device, such as a tag and a means of at-
tachment, which can be securely fas-
Energy source. Any source of elec-
tened to an energy isolating device in
trical, mechanical, hydraulic, pneu-
accordance with an established proce-
matic, chemical, thermal, or other en-
dure, to indicate that the energy iso-
ergy. lating device and the equipment being
Hot tap. A procedure used in the re- controlled may not be operated until
pair, maintenance and services activi- the tagout device is removed.
ties which involves welding on a piece (c) General—(1) Energy control pro-
of equipment (pipelines, vessels or gram. The employer shall establish a
tanks) under pressure, in order to in- program consisting of energy control
stall connections or appurtenances. It procedures, employee training and
is commonly used to replace or add periodic inspections to ensure that be-
sections of pipeline without the inter- fore any employee performs any serv-
ruption of service for air, gas, water, icing or maintenance on a machine or
steam, and petrochemical distribution equipment where the unexpected ener-
systems. gizing, start up or release of stored en-
Lockout. The placement of a lockout ergy could occur and cause injury, the
device on an energy isolating device, in machine or equipment shall be isolated
accordance with an established proce- from the energy source, and rendered
dure, ensuring that the energy iso- inoperative.
lating device and the equipment being (2) Lockout/tagout. (i) If an energy iso-
controlled cannot be operated until the lating device is not capable of being
lockout device is removed. locked out, the employer’s energy con-
Lockout device. A device that utilizes trol program under paragraph (c)(1) of
a positive means such as a lock, either this section shall utilize a tagout sys-
key or combination type, to hold an tem.
energy isolating device in a safe posi- (ii) If an energy isolating device is
tion and prevent the energizing of a capable of being locked out, the em-
machine or equipment. Included are ployer’s energy control program under
blank flanges and bolted slip blinds. paragraph (c)(1) of this section shall
Normal production operations. The uti- utilize lockout, unless the employer
lization of a machine or equipment to can demonstrate that the utilization of
499
a tagout system will provide full em- source will completely deenergize and de-
ployee protection as set forth in para- activate the machine or equipment; (4) the
graph (c)(3) of this section. machine or equipment is isolated from that
(iii) After January 2, 1990, whenever energy source and locked out during serv-
replacement or major repair, renova- icing or maintenance; (5) a single lockout de-
vice will achieve a locked-out condition; (6)
tion or modification of a machine or
the lockout device is under the exclusive
equipment is performed, and whenever control of the authorized employee per-
new machines or equipment are informing the servicing or maintenance; (7)
stalled, energy isolating devices for the servicing or maintenance does not create
such machine or equipment shall be de- hazards for other employees; and (8) the em-
signed to accept a lockout device. ployer, in utilizing this exception, has had
(3) Full employee protection. (i) When a no accidents involving the unexpected acti-
tagout device is used on an energy iso- vation or reenergization of the machine or
lating device which is capable of being equipment during servicing or maintenance.
locked out, the tagout device shall be
(ii) The procedures shall clearly and
attached at the same location that the
lockout device would have been at- specifically outline the scope, purpose,
tached, and the employer shall dem- authorization, rules, and techniques to
onstrate that the tagout program will be utilized for the control of hazardous
provide a level of safety equivalent to energy, and the means to enforce com-
that obtained by using a lockout pro- pliance including, but not limited to,
gram. the following:
(ii) In demonstrating that a level of (A) A specific statement of the in-
safety is achieved in the tagout pro- tended use of the procedure;
gram which is equivalent to the level (B) Specific procedural steps for
of safety obtained by using a lockout shutting down, isolating, blocking and
program, the employer shall dem- securing machines or equipment to
onstrate full compliance with all control hazardous energy;
tagout-related provisions of this stand- (C) Specific procedural steps for the
ard together with such additional ele- placement, removal and transfer of
ments as are necessary to provide the lockout devices or tagout devices and
equivalent safety available from the the responsibility for them; and
use of a lockout device. Additional (D) Specific requirements for testing
means to be considered as part of the a machine or equipment to determine
demonstration of full employee protec-
and verify the effectiveness of lockout
tion shall include the implementation
devices, tagout devices, and other en-
of additional safety measures such as
ergy control measures.
the removal of an isolating circuit ele-
ment, blocking of a controlling switch, (5) Protective materials and hardware.
opening of an extra disconnecting de- (i) Locks, tags, chains, wedges, key
vice, or the removal of a valve handle blocks, adapter pins, self-locking fas-
to reduce the likelihood of inadvertent teners, or other hardware shall be pro-
energization. vided by the employer for isolating, se-
(4) Energy control procedure. (i) Proce- curing or blocking of machines or
dures shall be developed, documented equipment from energy sources.
and utilized for the control of poten- (ii) Lockout devices and tagout de-
tially hazardous energy when employ- vices shall be singularly identified;
ees are engaged in the activities cov- shall be the only devices(s) used for
ered by this section. controlling energy; shall not be used
NOTE: Exception: The employer need not
for other purposes; and shall meet the
document the required procedure for a par- following requirements:
ticular machine or equipment, when all of (A) Durable. (1) Lockout and tagout
the following elements exist: (1) The ma- devices shall be capable of with-
chine or equipment has no potential for standing the environment to which
stored or residual energy or reaccumulation they are exposed for the maximum pe-
of stored energy after shut down which could
riod of time that exposure is expected.
endanger employees; (2) the machine or
(2) Tagout devices shall be con-
equipment has a single energy source which

can be readily identified and isolated; (3) the structed and printed so that exposure
isolation and locking out of that energy to weather conditions or wet and damp
500
locations will not cause the tag to de- include a review, between the inspector
teriorate or the message on the tag to and each authorized employee, of that
become illegible. employee’s responsibilities under the
(3) Tags shall not deteriorate when energy control procedure being in-
used in corrosive environments such as spected.
areas where acid and alkali chemicals (D) Where tagout is used for energy
are handled and stored. control, the periodic inspection shall
(B) Standardized. Lockout and tagout include a review, between the inspector
devices shall be standardized within and each authorized and affected em-
the facility in at least one of the fol- ployee, of that employee’s responsibil-
lowing criteria: Color; shape; or size; ities under the energy control proce-
and additionally, in the case of tagout dure being inspected, and the elements
devices, print and format shall be set forth in paragraph (c)(7)(ii) of this
standardized. section.
(C) Substantial—(1) Lockout devices. (ii) The employer shall certify that
Lockout devices shall be substantial the periodic inspections have been per-
enough to prevent removal without the formed. The certification shall identify
use of excessive force or unusual tech- the machine or equipment on which
niques, such as with the use of bolt the energy control procedure was being
cutters or other metal cutting tools. utilized, the date of the inspection, the
(2) Tagout devices. Tagout devices, in- employees included in the inspection,
cluding and their means of attachment, and the person performing the inspec-
shall be substantial enough to prevent tion.
inadvertent or accidental removal. (7) Training and communication. (i)
Tagout device attachment means shall The employer shall provide training to
be of a non-reusable type, attachable ensure that the purpose and function of
by hand, self-locking, and non-releas- the energy control program are under-
able with a minimum unlocking stood by employees and that the
strength of no less than 50 pounds and knowledge and skills required for the
having the general design and basic safe application, usage, and removal of
characteristics of being at least equiv- the energy controls are acquired by
alent to a one-piece, all-environment- employees. The training shall include
tolerant nylon cable tie. the following:
(D) Identifiable. Lockout devices and (A) Each authorized employee shall
tagout devices shall indicate the iden- receive training in the recognition of
tity of the employee applying the de- applicable hazardous energy sources,
vice(s). the type and magnitude of the energy
(iii) Tagout devices shall warn available in the workplace, and the
against hazardous conditions if the ma- methods and means necessary for en-
chine or equipment is energized and ergy isolation and control.
shall include a legend such as the fol- (B) Each affected employee shall be
lowing: Do Not Start, Do Not Open, Do instructed in the purpose and use of
Not Close, Do Not Energize, Do Not Oper- the energy control procedure.
ate. (C) All other employees whose work
(6) Periodic inspection. (i) The em- operations are or may be in an area
ployer shall conduct a periodic inspec- where energy control procedures may
tion of the energy control procedure at be utilized, shall be instructed about
least annually to ensure that the pro- the procedure, and about the prohibi-
cedure and the requirements of this tion relating to attempts to restart or
standard are being followed. reenergize machines or equipment
(A) The periodic inspection shall be which are locked out or tagged out.
perfomed by an authorized employee (ii) When tagout systems are used,
other than the ones(s) utilizing the en- employees shall also be trained in the
ergy control procedure being inspected. following limitations of tags:
(B) The periodic inspection shall be (A) Tags are essentially warning de-
conducted to correct any deviations or vices affixed to energy isolating de-
inadequacies identified. vices, and do not provide the physical
(C) Where lockout is used for energy restraint on those devices that is pro-
control, the periodic inspection shall vided by a lock.
501
(B) When a tag is attached to an en- applied, and after they are removed
ergy isolating means, it is not to be re- from the machine or equipment.
moved without authorization of the au- (d) Application of control. The estab-
thorized person responsible for it, and lished procedures for the application of
it is never to be bypassed, ignored, or energy control (the lockout or tagout
otherwise defeated. procedures) shall cover the following
(C) Tags must be legible and under- elements and actions and shall be done
standable by all authorized employees, in the following sequence:
affected employees, and all other em- (1) Preparation for shutdown. Before
ployees whose work operations are or an authorized or affected employee
may be in the area, in order to be effec- turns off a machine or equipment, the
tive. authorized employee shall have knowl-
(D) Tags and their means of attach- edge of the type and magnitude of the
ment must be made of materials which energy, the hazards of the energy to be
will withstand the environmental con- controlled, and the method or means to
ditions encountered in the workplace. control the energy.
(E) Tags may evoke a false sense of (2) Machine or equipment shutdown.
security, and their meaning needs to be The machine or equipment shall be
understood as part of the overall en- turned off or shut down using the pro-
ergy control program. cedures established for the machine or
(F) Tags must be securely attached
equipment. An orderly shutdown must
to energy isolating devices so that they
be utilized to avoid any additional or
cannot be inadvertently or acciden-
increased hazard(s) to employees as a
tally detached during use.
result of the equipment stoppage.
(iii) Employee retraining.
(3) Machine or equipment isolation. All
(A) Retraining shall be provided for
energy isolating devices that are need-
all authorized and affected employees
ed to control the energy to the ma-
whenever there is a change in their job
chine or equipment shall be physically
assignments, a change in machines,
located and operated in such a manner
equipment or processes that present a
as to isolate the machine or equipment
new hazard, or when there is a change
from the energy source(s).
in the energy control procedures.
(B) Additional retraining shall also (4) Lockout or tagout device applica-
be conducted whenever a periodic in- tion. (i) Lockout or tagout devices shall
spection under paragraph (c)(6) of this be affixed to each energy isolating de-
section reveals, or whenever the em- vice by authorized employees.
ployer has reason to believe, that there (ii) Lockout devices, where used,
are deviations from or inadequacies in shall be affixed in a manner to that
the employee’s knowledge or use of the will hold the energy isolating devices
energy control procedures. in a ‘‘safe’’ or ‘‘off’’ position.
(C) The retraining shall reestablish (iii) Tagout devices, where used, shall
employee proficiency and introduce be affixed in such a manner as will
new or revised control methods and clearly indicate that the operation or
procedures, as necessary. movement of energy isolating devices
(iv) The employer shall certify that from the ‘‘safe’’ or ‘‘off’’ position is
employee training has been accom- prohibited.
plished and is being kept up to date. (A) Where tagout devices are used
The certification shall contain each with energy isolating devices designed
employee’s name and dates of training. with the capability of being locked, the
(8) Energy isolation. Lockout or tag attachment shall be fastened at the
tagout shall be performed only bythe same point at which the lock would
authorized employees who are per- have been attached.
forming the servicing or maintenance. (B) Where a tag cannot be affixed di-
(9) Notification of employees. Affected rectly to the energy isolating device,
employees shall be notified by the em- the tag shall be located as close as
ployer or authorized employee of the safely possible to the device, in a posi-
application and removal of lockout de- tion that will be immediately obvious
vices or tagout devices. Notification to anyone attempting to operate the

shall be given before the controls are device.
502
(5) Stored energy. (i) Following the ap- safety to the removal of the device by
plication of lockout or tagout devices the authorized employee who applied
to energy isolating devices, all poten- it. The specific procedure shall include
tially hazardous stored or residual en- at least the following elements:
ergy shall be relieved, disconnected, re- (i) Verfication by the employer that
strained, and otherwise rendered safe. the authorized employee who applied
(ii) If there is a possibility of re- the device is not at the facility;
accumulation of stored energy to a (ii) Making all reasonable efforts to
hazardous level, verification of isola- contact the authorized employee to in-
tion shall be continued until the serv- form him/her that his/her lockout or
icing or maintenance is completed, or tagout device has been removed; and
until the possibility of such accumula- (iii) Ensuring that the authorized
tion no longer exists. employee has this knowledge before he/
(6) Verification of isolation. Prior to she resumes work at that facility.
starting work on machines or equip- (f) Additional requirements—(1) Testing
ment that have been locked out or or positioning of machines, equipment or
tagged out, the authorized employee components thereof. In situations in
shall verify that isolation and which lockout or tagout devices must
deenergization of the machine or be temporarily removed from the en-
equipment have been accomplished. ergy isolating device and the machine
(e) Release from lockout or tagout. Be- or equipment energized to test or posi-
fore lockout or tagout devices are re- tion the machine, equipment or compo-
moved and energy is restored to the nent thereof, the following sequence of
machine or equipment, procedures actions shall be followed:
shall be followed and actions taken by (i) Clear the machine or equipment of
the authorized employee(s) to ensure tools and materials in accordance with
the following: paragraph (e)(1) of this section;
(1) The machine or equipment. The (ii) Remove employees from the ma-
work area shall be inspected to ensure chine or equipment area in accordance
that nonessential items have been re- with paragraph (e)(2) of this section;
moved and to ensure that machine or (iii) Remove the lockout or tagout
equipment components are operation- devices as specified in paragraph (e)(3)
ally intact. of this section;
(2) Employees. (i) The work area shall (iv) Energize and proceed with test-
be checked to ensure that all employing or positioning;
ees have been safely positioned or re- (v) Deenergize all systems and re-
moved. apply energy control measures in ac-
(ii) After lockout or tagout devices cordance with paragraph (d) of this sec-
have been removed and before a mation to continue the servicing and/or
chine or equipment is started, affected maintenance.
employees shall be notified that the (2) Outside personnel (contractors, etc.).
lockout or tagout device(s) have been (i) Whenever outside servicing per-
removed. sonnel are to be engaged in activities
(3) Lockout or tagout devices removal. covered by the scope and application of
Each lockout or tagout device shall be this standard, the on-site employer and
removed from each energy isolating de- the outside employer shall inform each
vice by the employee who applied the other of their respective lockout or
device. Exception to paragraph (e)(3): tagout procedures.
When the authorized employee who ap- (ii) The on-site employer shall ensure
plied the lockout or tagout device is that his/her employees understand and
not available to remove it, that device comply with the restrictions and prohi-
may be removed under the direction of bitions of the outside employer’s en-
the employer, provided that specific ergy control program.
procedures and training for such re- (3) Group lockout or tagout. (i) When
moval have been developed, docu- servicing and/or maintenance is per-
mented and incorporated into the em- formed by a crew, craft, department or
ployer’s energy control program. The other group, they shall utilize a proce-
employer shall demonstrate that the dure which affords the employees a
specific procedure provides equivalent level of protection equivalent to that
503
provided by the implementation of a their procedures so they meet the require-

personal lockout or tagout device. ments of this standard. When the energy iso-
(ii) Group lockout or tagout devices lating devices are not lockable, tagout may
be used, provided the employer complies
shall be used in accordance with the
with the provisions of the standard which re-
procedures required by paragraph (c)(4) quire additional training and more rigorous
of this section including, but not nec- periodic inspections. When tagout is used
essarily limited to, the following spe- and the energy isolating devices are lock-
cific requirements: able, the employer must provide full em-
(A) Primary responsibility is vested ployee protection (see paragraph (c)(3)) and
in an authorized employee for a set additional training and more rigorous peri-
number of employees working under odic inspections are required. For more com-
plex systems, more comprehensive proce-
the protection of a group lockout or
dures may need to be developed, documented
tagout device (such as an operations and utilized.
lock);
(B) Provision for the authorized em- Lockout Procedure
ployee to ascertain the exposure status Lockout procedure for
of individual group members with re-
gard to the lockout or tagout of the
machine or equipment and (Name of Company for single procedure or
identification of equipment if multiple pro-
(C) When more than one crew, craft, cedures are used)
department, etc. is involved, assign-
ment of overall job-associated lockout Purpose
or tagout control responsibility to an This procedure establishes the minimum
authorized employee designated to co- requirements for the lockout of energy iso-
ordinate affected work forces and en- lating devices whenever maintenance or
sure continuity of protection; and servicing is done on machines or equipment.
(D) Each authorized employee shall It shall be used to ensure that the machine
affix a personal lockout or tagout de- or equipment is stopped, isolated from all
vice to the group lockout device, group potentially hazardous energy sources and
locked out before employees perform any
lockbox, or comparable mechanism
servicing or maintenance where the unex-
when he or she begins work, and shall pected energization or start-up of the ma-
remove those devices when he or she chine or equipment or release of stored en-
stops working on the machine or equip- ergy could cause injury.
ment being serviced or maintained.
(4) Shift or personnel changes. Specific Compliance With This Program
procedures shall be utilized during All employees are required to comply with
shift or personnel changes to ensure the restrictions and limitations imposed
the continuity of lockout or tagout upon them during the use of lockout. The au-
protection, including provision for the thorized employees are required to perform
orderly transfer of lockout or tagout the lockout in accordance with this proce-
dure. All employees, upon observing a ma-
device protection between off-going chine or piece of equipment which is locked
and oncoming employees, to minimize out to perform servicing or maintenance
exposure to hazards from the unex- shall not attempt to start, energize or use
pected energization or start-up of the that machine or equipment.
machine or equipment, or the release llllllllllllllllllllllll
of stored energy. Type of compliance enforcement to be taken
NOTE: The following appendix to § 1910.147 for violation of the above.
services as a non-mandatory guideline to as-
sist employers and employees in complying Sequence of Lockout
with the requirements of this section, as well (1) Notify all affected employees that serv-
as to provide other helpful information. icing or maintenance is required on a ma-
Nothing in the appendix adds to or detracts chine or equipment and that the machine or
from any of the requirements of this section. equipment must be shut down and locked out
to perform the servicing or maintenance.
APPENDIX A TO § 1910.147—TYPICAL MINIMAL
LOCKOUT PROCEDURE llllllllllllllllllllllll
Name(s)/Job Title(s) of affected employees
General and how to notify.
The following simple lockout procedure is (2) The authorized employee shall refer to
provided to assist employers in developing the company procedure to identify the type
504
and magnitude of the energy that the ma- (4) Remove the lockout devices and reener-
chine or equipment utilizes, shall understand gize the machine or equipment.
the hazards of the energy, and shall know NOTE: The removal of some forms of block-
the methods to control the energy. ing may require reenergization of the ma-
llllllllllllllllllllllll chine before safe removal.
Type(s) and magnitude(s) of energy, its haz- (5) Notify affected employees that the serv-
ards and the methods to control the energy. icing or maintenance is completed and the
machine or equipment is ready for use.
(3) If the machine or equipment is oper-
ating, shut it down by the normal stopping [54 FR 36687, Sept. 1, 1989, as amended at 54
procedure (depress stop button, open switch, FR 42498, Oct. 17, 1989; 55 FR 38685, 38686,
close valve, etc.). Sept. 20, 1990; 76 FR 24698, May 2, 2011; 76 FR
llllllllllllllllllllllll 44265, July 25, 2011]
Type(s) and location(s) of machine or equip-
ment operating controls. Subpart K—Medical and First Aid
(4) De-activate the energy isolating de-
vice(s) so that the machine or equipment is
isolated from the energy source(s). AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu-
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970, 29
llllllllllllllllllllllll U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657; Secretary of Labor’s
Type(s) and location(s) of energy isolating Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
devices. 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–
(5) Lock out the energy isolating device(s) 96 (62 FR 111), or 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), as ap-
with assigned individual lock(s). plicable, and 29 CFR part 1911.
(6) Stored or residual energy (such as that
in capacitors, springs, elevated machine § 1910.151 Medical services and first
members, rotating flywheels, hydraulic sys- aid.
tems, and air, gas, steam, or water pressure, (a) The employer shall ensure the
etc.) must be dissipated or restrained by
ready availability of medical personnel
methods such as grounding, repositioning,
blocking, bleeding down, etc. for advice and consultation on matters
of plant health.
(b) In the absence of an infirmary,
Type(s) of stored energy—methods to dis-
clinic, or hospital in near proximity to
sipate or restrain.
the workplace which is used for the
(7) Ensure that the equipment is discon- treatment of all injured employees, a
nected from the energy source(s) by first
checking that no personnel are exposed, then
person or persons shall be adequately
verify the isolation of the equipment by op- trained to render first aid. Adequate
erating the push button or other normal op- first aid supplies shall be readily avail-
erating control(s) or by testing to make cer- able.
tain the equipment will not operate. (c) Where the eyes or body of any per-
CAUTION: Return operating control(s) to son may be exposed to injurious corro-
neutral or ‘‘off’’ position after verifying the sive materials, suitable facilities for
isolation of the equipment. quick drenching or flushing of the eyes
llllllllllllllllllllllll and body shall be provided within the
Method of verifying the isolation of the work area for immediate emergency
equipment. use.
(8) The machine or equipment is now
APPENDIX A TO § 1910.151—FIRST AID KITS
locked out.
(NON-MANDATORY)
Restoring Equipment to Service. When the
servicing or maintenance is completed and First aid supplies are required to be readily
the machine or equipment is ready to return available under paragraph § 1910.151(b). An
to normal operating condition, the following example of the minimal contents of a generic
steps shall be taken. first aid kit is described in American Na-
(1) Check the machine or equipment and tional Standard (ANSI) Z308.1–1998 ‘‘Min-
the immediate area around the machine or imum Requirements for Workplace First-aid
equipment to ensure that nonessential items Kits.’’ The contents of the kit listed in the
have been removed and that the machine or ANSI standard should be adequate for small
equipment components are operationally in- worksites. When larger operations or mul-
tact. tiple operations are being conducted at the
(2) Check the work area to ensure that all same location, employers should determine
employees have been safely positioned or re- the need for additional first aid kits at the
moved from the area. worksite, additional types of first aid equip-
(3) Verify that the controls are in neutral. ment and supplies and additional quantities
505
and types of supplies and equipment in the (2) Aqueous film forming foam (AFFF)
first aid kits. means a fluorinated surfactant with a
In a similar fashion, employers who have foam stabilizer which is diluted with
unique or changing first-aid needs in their water to act as a temporary barrier to
workplace may need to enhance their first-
aid kits. The employer can use the OSHA 300
exclude air from mixing with the fuel
log, OSHA 301 log, or other reports to iden- vapor by developing an aqueous film on
tify these unique problems. Consultation the fuel surface of some hydrocarbons
from the local fire/rescue department, appro- which is capable of suppressing the
priate medical professional, or local emer- generation of fuel vapors.
gency room may be helpful to employers in (3) Approved means acceptable to the
these circumstances. By assessing the spe- Assistant Secretary under the fol-
cific needs of their workplace, employers can lowing criteria:
ensure that reasonably anticipated supplies
are available. Employers should assess the
(i) If it is accepted, or certified, or
specific needs of their worksite periodically listed, or labeled or otherwise deter-
and augment the first aid kit appropriately. mined to be safe by a nationally recog-
If it is reasonably anticipated that employ- nized testing laboratory; or
ees will be exposed to blood or other poten- (ii) With respect to an installation or
tially infectious materials while using first equipment of a kind which no nation-
aid supplies, employers are required to pro- ally recognized testing laboratory ac-
vide appropriate personal protective equip- cepts, certifies, lists, labels, or deter-
ment (PPE) in compliance with the provi-
mines to be safe, if it is inspected or
sions of the Occupational Exposure to Blood
borne Pathogens standard, § 1910.1030(d)(3) (56 tested by another Federal agency and
FR 64175). This standard lists appropriate found in compliance with the provi-
PPE for this type of exposure, such as sions of the applicable National Fire
gloves, gowns, face shields, masks, and eye Protection Association Fire Code; or
protection. (iii) With respect to custom-made
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 63 equipment or related installations
FR 33466, June 18, 1998; 70 FR 1141, Jan. 5, which are designed, fabricated for, and
2005; 76 FR 80739, Dec. 27, 2011] intended for use by its manufacturer
on the basis of test data which the em-
§ 1910.152 [Reserved] ployer keeps and makes available for
inspection to the Assistant Secretary.
Subpart L—Fire Protection (iv) For the purposes of paragraph
(c)(3) of this section:
(A) Equipment is listed if it is of a
AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu-
kind mentioned in a list which is pub-
U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657); Secretary of Labor’s lished by a nationally recognized test-
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR ing laboratory which makes periodic
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6– inspections of the production of such
96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), 5–2002 (67 equipment and which states that such
FR 65008), or 5–2007 (72 FR 31160), as applica- equipment meets nationally recognized
ble, and 29 CFR part 1911. standards or has been tested and found
safe for use in a specified manner;
§ 1910.155 Scope, application and defi- (B) Equipment is labeled if there is
nitions applicable to this subpart.
attached to it a label, symbol, or other
(a) Scope. This subpart contains re- identifying mark of a nationally recog-
quirements for fire brigades, and all nized testing laboratory which makes
portable and fixed fire suppression periodic inspections of the production
equipment, fire detection systems, and of such equipment, and whose labeling
fire or employee alarm systems in- indicates compliance with nationally
stalled to meet the fire protection re- recognized standards or tests to deter-
quirements of 29 CFR part 1910. mine safe use in a specified manner;
(b) Application. This subpart applies (C) Equipment is accepted if it has
to all employments except for mari- been inspected and found by a nation-
time, construction, and agriculture. ally recognized testing laboratory to
(c) Definitions applicable to this sub- conform to specified plans or to proce-
part—(1) After-flame means the time a dures of applicable codes; and
test specimen continues to flame after (D) Equipment is certified if it has

the flame source has been removed. been tested and found by a nationally
506
recognized testing laboratory to meet proper flow capabilities. Dry chemical

nationally recognized standards or to does not include dry powders.
be safe for use in a specified manner or (13) Dry powder means a compound
is of a kind whose production is peri- used to extinguish or control Class D
odically inspected by a nationally rec- fires.
ognized testing laboratory, and if it (14) Education means the process of
bears a label, tag, or other record of imparting knowledge or skill through
certification. systematic instruction. It does not re-
(E) Refer to § 1910.7 for definition of quire formal classroom instruction.
nationally recognized testing labora- (15) Enclosed structure means a struc-
tory. ture with a roof or ceiling and at least
(4) Assistant Secretary means the As- two walls which may present fire haz-
sistant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- ards to employees, such as accumula-
tional Safety and Health or designee. tions of smoke, toxic gases and heat,
(5) Automatic fire detection device similar to those found in buildings.
means a device designed to automati- (16) Extinguisher classification means
cally detect the presence of fire by the letter classification given an extin-
heat, flame, light, smoke or other prod- guisher to designate the class or class-
ucts of combustion. es of fire on which an extinguisher will
(6) Buddy-breathing device means an be effective.
accessory to self-contained breathing (17) Extinguisher rating means the nu-
apparatus which permits a second per- merical rating given to an extinguisher
son to share the same air supply as which indicates the extinguishing po-
that of the wearer of the apparatus. tential of the unit based on standard-
(7) Carbon dioxide means a colorless, ized tests developed by Underwriters’
odorless, electrically nonconductive Laboratories, Inc.
inert gas (chemical formula CO2) that (18) Fire brigade (private fire depart-
is a medium for extinguishing fires by ment, industrial fire department)
reducing the concentration of oxygen means an organized group of employees
or fuel vapor in the air to the point who are knowledgeable, trained, and
where conbustion is impossible. skilled in at least basic fire fighting
(8) Class A fire means a fire involving operations.
ordinary combustible materials such as (19) Fixed extinguishing system means
paper, wood, cloth, and some rubber a permanently installed system that
and plastic materials. either extinguishes or controls a fire at
(9) Class B fire means a fire involving the location of the system.
flammable or combustible liquids, (20) Flame resistance is the property of
flammable gases, greases and similar materials, or combinations of compo-
materials, and some rubber and plastic nent materials, to retard ignition and
materials. restrict the spread of flame.
(10) Class C fire means a fire involving (21) Foam means a stable aggregation
energized electrical equipment where of small bubbles which flow freely over
safety to the employee requires the use a burning liquid surface and form a co-
of electrically nonconductive extin- herent blanket which seals combus-
guishing media. tible vapors and thereby extinguishes
(11) Class D fire means a fire involving the fire.
combustible metals such as magne- (22) Gaseous agent is a fire extin-
sium, titanium, zirconium, sodium, guishing agent which is in the gaseous
lithium and potassium. state at normal room temperature and
(12) Dry chemical means an extin- pressure. It has low viscosity, can ex-
guishing agent composed of very small pand or contract with changes in pres-
particles of chemicals such as, but not sure and temperature, and has the abil-
limited to, sodium bicarbonate, potas- ity to diffuse readily and to distribute
sium bicarbonate, urea-based potas- itself uniformly throughout an enclo-
sium bicarbonate, potassium chloride, sure.
or monoammonium phosphate supple- (23) Halon 1211 means a colorless,
mented by special treatment to provide faintly sweet smelling, electrically
resistance to packing and moisture ab- nonconductive liquefied gas (chemical

sorption (caking) as well as to provide formula CBrC1F2) which is a medium
507
for extinguishing fires by inhibiting (32) Multipurpose dry chemical means a

the chemical chain reaction of fuel and dry chemical which is approved for use
oxygen. It is also known as on Class A, Class B and Class C fires.
bromochlorodifluoromethane. (33) Outer shell is the exterior layer of
(24) Halon 1301 means a colorless, material on the fire coat and protec-
odorless, electrically nonconductive tive trousers which forms the outer-
gas (chemical formula CBrF3) which is most barrier between the fire fighter
a medium for extinguishing fires by in- and the environment. It is attached to
hibiting the chemical chain reaction of the vapor barrier and liner and is usu-
fuel and oxygen. It is also known as ally constructed with a storm flap,
bromotrifluoromethane. suitable closures, and pockets.
(25) Helmet is a head protective device (34) Positive-pressure breathing appa-
consisting of a rigid shell, energy ab- ratus means self-contained breathing
sorption system, and chin strap in- apparatus in which the pressure in the
tended to be worn to provide protection breathing zone is positive in relation to
for the head or portions thereof, the immediate environment during in-
against impact, flying or falling ob- halation and exhalation.
jects, electric shock, penetration, heat (35) Pre-discharge employee alarm
and flame. means an alarm which will sound at a
(26) Incipient stage fire means a fire set time prior to actual discharge of an
extinguishing system so that employ-
which is in the initial or beginning
ees may evacuate the discharge area
stage and which can be controlled or
prior to system discharge.
extinguished by portable fire extin-
(36) Quick disconnect valve means a
guishers, Class II standpipe or small
device which starts the flow of air by
hose systems without the need for pro-
inserting of the hose (which leads from
tective clothing or breathing appa-
the facepiece) into the regulator of
ratus.
self-contained breathing apparatus,
(27) Inspection means a visual check and stops the flow of air by disconnec-
of fire protection systems and equip- tion of the hose from the regulator.
ment to ensure that they are in place, (37) Sprinkler alarm means an ap-
charged, and ready for use in the event proved device installed so that any wa-
of a fire. terflow from a sprinkler system equal
(28) Interior structural fire fighting to or greater than that from single
means the physical activity of fire sup- automatic sprinkler will result in an
pression, rescue or both, inside of audible alarm signal on the premises.
buildings or enclosed structures which (38) Sprinkler system means a system
are involved in a fire situation beyond of piping designed in accordance with
the incipient stage. fire protection engineering standards
(29) Lining means a material perma- and installed to control or extinguish
nently attached to the inside of the fires. The system includes an adequate
outer shell of a garment for the pur- and reliable water supply, and a net-
pose of thermal protection and pad- work of specially sized piping and
ding. sprinklers which are interconnected.
(30) Local application system means a The system also includes a control
fixed fire suppression system which has valve and a device for actuating an
a supply of extinguishing agent, with alarm when the system is in operation.
nozzles arranged to automatically dis- (39) Standpipe systems. (i) Class I
charge extinguishing agent directly on standpipe system means a 21⁄2″ (6.3 cm)
the burning material to extinguish or hose connection for use by fire depart-
control a fire. ments and those trained in handling
(31) Maintenance means the perform- heavy fire streams.
ance of services on fire protection (ii) Class II standpipe system means a
equipment and systems to assure that 11⁄2″ (3.8 cm) hose system which pro-
they will perform as expected in the vides a means for the control or extin-
event of a fire. Maintenance differs guishment of incipient stage fires.
from inspection in that maintenance (iii) Class III standpipe system means a
requires the checking of internal fit- combined system of hose which is for
tings, devices and agent supplies. the use of employees trained in the use
508
of hose operations and which is capable frequency of training to be provided to

of furnishing effective water discharge fire brigade members; the expected
during the more advanced stages of fire number of members in the fire brigade;
(beyond the incipient stage) in the in- and the functions that the fire brigade
terior of workplaces. Hose outlets are is to perform at the workplace. The or-
available for both 11⁄2″ (3.8 cm) and 21⁄2″ ganizational statement shall be avail-
(6.3 cm) hose. able for inspection by the Assistant
(iv) Small hose system means a system Secretary and by employees or their
of hose ranging in diameter from 5⁄8″ designated representatives.
(1.6 cm up to 11⁄2″ (3.8 cm) which is for (2) Personnel. The employer shall as-
the use of employees and which pro- sure that employees who are expected
vides a means for the control and ex- to do interior structural fire fighting
tinguishment of incipient stage fires. are physically capable of performing
(40) Total flooding system means a duties which may be assigned to them
fixed suppression system which is ar- during emergencies. The employer
ranged to automatically discharge a shall not permit employees with known
predetermined concentration of agent heart disease, epilepsy, or emphysema,
into an enclosed space for the purpose to participate in fire brigade emer-
of fire extinguishment or control. gency activities unless a physician’s
(41) Training means the process of certificate of the employees’ fitness to
making proficient through instruction participate in such activities is pro-
and hands-on practice in the operation vided. For employees assigned to fire
of equipment, including respiratory brigades before September 15, 1980, this
protection equipment, that is expected paragraph is effective on September 15,
to be used and in the performance of 1990. For employees assigned to fire
assigned duties. brigades on or after September 15, 1980,
(42) Vapor barrier means that mate- this paragraph is effective December
rial used to prevent or substantially in- 15, 1980.
hibit the transfer of water, corrosive (c) Training and education. (1) The
liquids and steam or other hot vapors employer shall provide training and
from the outside of a garment to the education for all fire brigade members
wearer’s body. commensurate with those duties and
[45 FR 60704, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 53 functions that fire brigade members
FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988] are expected to perform. Such training
and education shall be provided to fire
§ 1910.156 Fire brigades. brigade members before they perform
(a) Scope and application—(1) Scope. fire brigade emergency activities. Fire
This section contains requirements for brigade leaders and training instruc-
the organization, training, and per- tors shall be provided with training
sonal protective equipment of fire bri- and education which is more com-
gades whenever they are established by prehensive than that provided to the
an employer. general membership of the fire brigade.
(2) Application. The requirements of (2) The employer shall assure that
this section apply to fire brigades, in- training and education is conducted
dustrial fire departments and private frequently enough to assure that each
or contractual type fire departments. member of the fire brigade is able to
Personal protective equipment require- perform the member’s assigned duties
ments apply only to members of fire and functions satisfactorily and in a
brigades performing interior structural safe manner so as not to endanger fire
fire fighting. The requirements of this brigade members or other employees.
section do not apply to airport crash All fire brigade members shall be pro-
rescue or forest fire fighting oper- vided with training at least annually.
ations. In addition, fire brigade members who
(b) Organization—(1) Organizational are expected to perform interior struc-
statement. The employer shall prepare tural fire fighting shall be provided
and maintain a statement or written with an education session or training
policy which establishes the existence at least quarterly.
of a fire brigade; the basic organiza- (3) The quality of the training and
tional structure; the type, amount, and education program for fire brigade
509
members shall be similar to those con- assure that protective clothing ordered
ducted by such fire training schools as or purchased after July 1, 1981, meets
the Maryland Fire and Rescue Insti- the requirements contained in this
tute; Iowa Fire Service Extension; paragraph. As the new equipment is
West Virginia Fire Service Extension; provided, the employer shall assure
Georgia Fire Academy, New York that all fire brigade members wear the
State Department, Fire Prevention and equipment when performing interior
Control; Louisiana State University structural fire fighting. After July 1,
Firemen Training Program, or Wash- 1985, the employer shall assure that all
ington State’s Fire Service Training fire brigade members wear protective
Commission for Vocational Education. clothing meeting the requirements of
(For example, for the oil refinery in- this paragraph when performing inte-
dustry, with its unique hazards, the rior structural fire fighting.
training and education program for (ii) The employer shall assure that
those fire brigade members shall be protective clothing protects the head,
similar to those conducted by Texas A body, and extremities, and consists of
& M University, Lamar University, at least the following components: foot
Reno Fire School, or the Delaware and leg protection; hand protection;
State Fire School.) body protection; eye, face and head
(4) The employer shall inform fire protection.
brigade members about special hazards (2) Foot and leg protection. (i) Foot
such as storage and use of flammable and leg protection shall meet the re-
liquids and gases, toxic chemicals, ra- quirements of paragraphs (e)(2)(ii) and
dioactive sources, and water reactive (e)(2)(iii) of this section, and may be
substances, to which they may be ex- achieved by either of the following
posed during fire and other emer- methods:
gencies. The fire brigade members shall
(A) Fully extended boots which pro-
also be advised of any changes that
vide protection for the legs; or
occur in relation to the special haz-
ards. The employer shall develop and (B) Protective shoes or boots worn in
make available for inspection by fire combination with protective trousers
brigade members, written procedures that meet the requirements of para-
that describe the actions to be taken in graph (e)(3) of this section.
situations involving the special haz- (ii) Protective footwear shall meet
ards and shall include these in the the requirements of § 1910.136 for Class
training and education program. 75 footwear. In addition, protective
(d) Fire fighting equipment. The em- footwear shall be water-resistant for at
ployer shall maintain and inspect, at least 5 inches (12.7 cm) above the bot-
least annually, fire fighting equipment tom of the heel and shall be equipped
to assure the safe operational condi- with slip-resistant outer soles.
tion of the equipment. Portable fire ex- (iii) Protective footwear shall be
tinguishers and respirators shall be in- tested in accordance with paragraph (1)
spected at least monthly. Fire fighting of appendix E, and shall provide protec-
equipment that is in damaged or un- tion against penetration of the midsole
serviceable condition shall be removed by a size 8D common nail when at least
from service and replaced. 300 pounds (1330 N) of static force is ap-
(e) Protective clothing. The following plied to the nail.
requirements apply to those employees (3) Body protection. (i) Body protec-
who perform interior structural fire tion shall be coordinated with foot and
fighting. The requirements do not leg protection to ensure full body pro-
apply to employees who use fire extin- tection for the wearer. This shall be
guishers or standpipe systems to con- achieved by one of the following meth-
trol or extinguish fires only in the in- ods:
cipient stage. (A) Wearing of a fire-resistive coat
(1) General. (i) The employer shall meeting the requirements of paragraph
provide at no cost to the employee and (e)(3)(ii) of this section in combination
assure the use of protective clothing with fully extended boots meeting the
which complies with the requirements requirements of paragraphs (e)(2)(ii)

of this paragraph. The employer shall and (e)(2)(iii) of this section; or
510
(B) Wearing of a fire-resistive coat in greater or equal to 20 in/min (.85 cm./

combination with protective trousers sec); and
both of which meet the requirements of (C) The temperature inside the palm
paragraph (e)(3)(ii) of this section. and gripping surface of the fingers of
(ii) The performance, construction, gloves shall not exceed 135 °F (57 °C)
and testing of fire-resistive coats and when gloves or glove system are ex-
protective trousers shall be at least posed to 932 °F (500 °C) for five seconds
equivalent to the requirements of the at 4 psi (28 kPa) pressure.
National Fire Protection Association (ii) Exterior materials of gloves shall
(NFPA) standard NFPA No. 1971–1975, be flame resistant and shall be tested
‘‘Protective Clothing for Structural in accordance with paragraph (3) of ap-
Fire Fighting,’’ which is incorporated pendix E. Maximum allowable
by reference as specified in § 1910.6, (See afterflame shall be 2.0 seconds, and the
appendix D to subpart L) with the fol- maximum char length shall be 4.0
lowing permissible variations from inches (10.2 cm).
those requirements: (iii) When design of the fire-resistive
(A) Tearing strength of the outer coat does not otherwise provide protec-
shell shall be a minimum of 8 pounds tion for the wrists, protective gloves
(35.6 N) in any direction when tested in shall have wristlets of at least 4.0
accordance with paragraph (2) of ap- inches (10.2 cm) in length to protect
pendix E; and the wrist area when the arms are ex-
(B) The outer shell may discolor but tended upward and outward from the
shall not separate or melt when placed body.
in a forced air laboratory oven at a (5) Head, eye and face protection. (i)
temperature of 500 °F (260 °C) for a pe- Head protection shall consist of a pro-
riod of five minutes. After cooling to tective head device with ear flaps and
ambient temperature and using the chin strap which meet the perform-
test method specified in paragraph (3) ance, construction, and testing require-
of appendix E, char length shall not ex- ments of the National Fire Safety and
ceed 4.0 inches (10.2 cm) and after- Research Office of the National Fire
flame shall not exceed 2.0 seconds. Prevention and Control Administra-
(4) Hand protection. (i) Hand protection, U.S. Department of Commerce
tion shall consist of protective gloves (now known as the U.S. Fire Adminis-
or glove system which will provide pro- tration), which are contained in
tection against cut, puncture, and heat ‘‘Model Performance Criteria for
penetration. Gloves or glove system Structural Firefighters’ Helmets’’ (Au-
shall be tested in accordance with the gust 1977) which is incorporated by ref-
test methods contained in the National erence as specified in § 1910.6, (See ap-
Institute for Occupational Safety and pendix D to subpart L).
Health (NIOSH) 1976 publication, ‘‘The (ii) Protective eye and face devices
Development of Criteria for Fire Fight- which comply with § 1910.133 shall be
er’s Gloves; Vol. II, Part II: Test Meth- used by fire brigade members when per-
ods,’’ which is incorporated by ref- forming operations where the hazards
erence as specified in § 1910.6, (See ap- of flying or falling materials which
pendix D to subpart L) and shall meet may cause eye and face injuries are
the following criteria for cut, puncture, present. Protective eye and face de-
and heat penetration: vices provided as accessories to protec-
(A) Materials used for gloves shall re- tive head devices (face shields) are per-
sist surface cut by a blade with an edge mitted when such devices meet the re-
having a 60° included angle and a .001 quirements of § 1910.133.
inch (.0025 cm.) radius, under an ap- (iii) Full facepieces, helmets, or
plied force of 16 lbf (72N), and at a slic- hoods of breathing apparatus which
ing velocity of greater or equal to 60 in/ meet the requirements of § 1910.134 and
min (2.5 cm./sec); paragraph (f) of this section, shall be
(B) Materials used for the palm and acceptable as meeting the eye and face
palm side of the fingers shall resist protection requirements of paragraph
puncture by a penetrometer (simu- (e)(5)(ii) of this section.
lating a 4d lath nail), under an applied (f) Respiratory protection devices—(1)

force of 13.2 lbf (60N), and at a velocity General requirements. (i) The employer
511
must ensure that respirators are pro- fighting operations, are of the pres-
vided to, and used by, each fire brigade sure-demand or other positive-pressure
member, and that the respirators meet type. Effective July 1, 1983, only pres-
the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.134 for sure-demand or other positive-pressure
each employee required by this section self-contained breathing apparatus
to use a respirator. shall be worn by fire brigade members
(ii) Approved self-contained breath- performing interior structural fire
ing apparatus with full-facepiece, or fighting.
with approved helmet or hood configu- (ii) This paragraph does not prohibit
ration, shall be provided to and worn the use of a self-contained breathing
by fire brigade members while working apparatus where the apparatus can be
inside buildings or confined spaces switched from a demand to a positive-
where toxic products of combustion or pressure mode. However, such appa-
an oxygen deficiency may be present. ratus shall be in the positive-pressure
Such apparatus shall also be worn dur- mode when fire brigade members are
ing emergency situations involving performing interior structural fire
toxic substances. fighting operations.
(iii) Approved self-contained breath-
ing apparatus may be equipped with ei- [45 FR 60706, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May
1, 1981; 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 61 FR 9239,
ther a ‘‘buddy-breathing’’ device or a
Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 1284, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR
quick disconnect valve, even if these 33467, June 18, 1998; 73 FR 75584, Dec. 12, 2008]
devices are not certified by NIOSH. If
these accessories are used, they shall PORTABLE FIRE SUPPRESSION
not cause damage to the apparatus, or EQUIPMENT
restrict the air flow of the apparatus,
or obstruct the normal operation of the § 1910.157 Portable fire extinguishers.
apparatus.
(iv) Approved self-contained com- (a) Scope and application. The require-
pressed air breathing apparatus may be ments of this section apply to the
used with approved cylinders from placement, use, maintenance, and test-
other approved self-contained coming of portable fire extinguishers pro-
pressed air breathing apparatus provided for the use of employees. Para-
vided that such cylinders are of the graph (d) of this section does not apply
same capacity and pressure rating. All to extinguishers provided for employee
compressed air cylinders used with use on the outside of workplace build-
self-contained breathing apparatus ings or structures. Where extinguishers
shall meet DOT and NIOSH criteria. are provided but are not intended for
(v) Self-contained breathing employee use and the employer has an
apparatuses must have a minimum emergency action plan and a fire pre-
service-life rating of 30 minutes in ac- vention plan that meet the require-
cordance with the methods and re- ments of 29 CFR 1910.38 and 29 CFR
quirements specified by NIOSH under 1910.39 respectively, then only the re-
42 CFR part 84, except for escape self- quirements of paragraphs (e) and (f) of
contained breathing apparatus this section apply.
(ESCBAs) used only for emergency es- (b) Exemptions. (1) Where the em-
cape purposes. ployer has established and imple-
(vi) Self-contained breathing appa- mented a written fire safety policy
ratus shall be provided with an indi- which requires the immediate and total
cator which automatically sounds an evacuation of employees from the
audible alarm when the remaining workplace upon the sounding of a fire
service life of the apparatus is reduced alarm signal and which includes an
to within a range of 20 to 25 percent of emergency action plan and a fire pre-
its rated service time. vention plan which meet the require-
(2) Positive-pressure breathing appa- ments of 29 CFR 1910.38 and 29 CFR
ratus. (i) The employer shall assure 1910.39 respectively, and when extin-
that self-contained breathing appa- guishers are not available in the work-
ratus ordered or purchased after July 1, place, the employer is exempt from all
1981, for use by fire brigade members requirements of this section unless a
performing interior structural fire specific standard in part 1910 requires
512
that a portable fire extinguisher be ees instead of Class A portable fire ex-
provided. tinguishers, provided that such sys-
(2) Where the employer has an emer- tems meet the respective requirements
gency action plan meeting the require- of § 1910.158 or § 1910.159, that they pro-
ments of § 1910.38 which designates cer- vide total coverage of the area to be
tain employees to be the only employ- protected, and that employees are
ees authorized to use the available trained at least annually in their use.
portable fire extinguishers, and which (4) The employer shall distribute
requires all other employees in the fire portable fire extinguishers for use by
area to immediately evacuate the af- employees on Class B fires so that the
fected work area upon the sounding of travel distance from the Class B hazard
the fire alarm, the employer is exempt area to any extinguisher is 50 feet (15.2
from the distribution requirements in
m) or less.
paragraph (d) of this section.
(5) The employer shall distribute
(c) General requirements. (1) The em-
ployer shall provide portable fire extin- portable fire extinguishers used for
guishers and shall mount, locate and Class C hazards on the basis of the ap-
identify them so that they are readily propriate pattern for the existing Class
accessible to employees without sub- A or Class B hazards.
jecting the employees to possible in- (6) The employer shall distribute
jury. portable fire extinguishers or other
(2) Only approved portable fire extin- containers of Class D extinguishing
guishers shall be used to meet the re- agent for use by employees so that the
quirements of this section. travel distance from the combustible
(3) The employer shall not provide or metal working area to any extin-
make available in the workplace port- guishing agent is 75 feet (22.9 m) or
able fire extinguishers using carbon less. Portable fire extinguishers for
tetrachloride or chlorobromomethane Class D hazards are required in those
extinguishing agents. combustible metal working areas
(4) The employer shall assure that where combustible metal powders,
portable fire extinguishers are main- flakes, shavings, or similarly sized
tained in a fully charged and operable products are generated at least once
condition and kept in their designated every two weeks.
places at all times except during use. (e) Inspection, maintenance and testing.
(5) The employer shall remove from (1) The employer shall be responsible
service all soldered or riveted shell for the inspection, maintenance and
self-generating soda acid or self-gener- testing of all portable fire extin-
ating foam or gas cartridge water type guishers in the workplace.
portable fire extinguishers which are
(2) Portable extinguishers or hose
operated by inverting the extinguisher
used in lieu thereof under paragraph
to rupture the cartridge or to initiate
(d)(3) of this section shall be visually
an uncontrollable pressure generating
inspected monthly.
chemical reaction to expel the agent.
(d) Selection and distribution. (1) Port- (3) The employer shall assure that
able fire extinguishers shall be pro- portable fire extinguishers are sub-
vided for employee use and selected jected to an annual maintenance
and distributed based on the classes of check. Stored pressure extinguishers
anticipated workplace fires and on the do not require an internal examina-
size and degree of hazard which would tion. The employer shall record the an-
affect their use. nual maintenance date and retain this
(2) The employer shall distribute record for one year after the last entry
portable fire extinguishers for use by or the life of the shell, whichever is
employees on Class A fires so that the less. The record shall be available to
travel distance for employees to any the Assistant Secretary upon request.
extinguisher is 75 feet (22.9 m) or less. (4) The employer shall assure that
(3) The employer may use uniformly stored pressure dry chemical extin-
spaced standpipe systems or hose sta- guishers that require a 12-year hydro-
tions connected to a sprinkler system static test are emptied and subjected
installed for emergency use by employ- to applicable maintenance procedures
513
every 6 years. Dry chemical extin- TABLE L–1—Continued

guishers having non-refillable dispos-
Test
able containers are exempt from this inter-
Type of extinguishers
requirement. When recharging or hy- val
(years)
drostatic testing is performed, the 6-
year requirement begins from that Halon 1211 ................................................................. 12
date. Halon 1301 ................................................................. 12
Dry powder, cartridge or cylinder operated with mild
(5) The employer shall assure that al- steel shells .............................................................. 12
ternate equivalent protection is pro-
1 Extinguishershaving shells constructed of copper or brass
vided when portable fire extinguishers joined by soft solder or rivets shall not be hydrostatically test-
are removed from service for mainte- ed and shall be removed from service by January 1, 1982.
nance and recharging. (Not permitted)
(f) Hydrostatic testing. (1) The em- (4) The employer shall assure that
ployer shall assure that hydrostatic portable fire extinguishers are
testing is performed by trained persons hydrostatically tested whenever they
with suitable testing equipment and fa- show new evidence of corrosion or me-
cilities. chanical injury, except under the con-
(2) The employer shall assure that ditions listed in paragraphs (f)(2)(i)–(v)
portable extinguishers are of this section.
hydrostatically tested at the intervals (5) The employer shall assure that
listed in Table L–1 of this section, ex- hydrostatic tests are performed on ex-
cept under any of the following condi- tinguisher hose assemblies which are
tions: equipped with a shut-off nozzle at the
(i) When the unit has been repaired discharge end of the hose. The test in-
by soldering, welding, brazing, or use of terval shall be the same as specified for
patching compounds; the extinguisher on which the hose is
(ii) When the cylinder or shell installed.
threads are damaged; (6) The employer shall assure that
(iii) When there is corrosion that has carbon dioxide hose assemblies with a
caused pitting, including corrosion shut-off nozzle are hydrostatically
under removable name plate assem- tested at 1,250 psi (8,620 kPa).
blies; (7) The employer shall assure that
(iv) When the extinguisher has been dry chemical and dry powder hose as-
burned in a fire; or semblies with a shut-off nozzle are
(v) When a calcium chloride extin- hydrostatically tested at 300 psi (2,070
guishing agent has been used in a kPa).
stainless steel shell. (8) Hose assemblies passing a hydro-
(3) In addition to an external visual static test do not require any type of
examination, the employer shall assure recording or stamping.
that an internal examination of cyl- (9) The employer shall assure that
inders and shells to be tested is made hose assemblies for carbon dioxide ex-
prior to the hydrostatic tests. tinguishers that require a hydrostatic
TABLE L–1 test are tested within a protective cage
device.
Test (10) The employer shall assure that
inter-
Type of extinguishers val carbon dioxide extinguishers and nitro-
(years) gen or carbon dioxide cylinders used
Soda acid (soldered brass shells) (until 1/1/82) ........ (1)
with wheeled extinguishers are tested
Soda acid (stainless steel shell) ................................ 5 every 5 years at 5/3 of the service pres-
Cartridge operated water and/or antifreeze ............... 5 sure as stamped into the cylinder. Ni-
Stored pressure water and/or antifreeze ................... 5
Wetting agent ............................................................. 5
trogen cylinders which comply with 49
Foam (soldered brass shells) (until 1/1/82) ............... (1) CFR 173.34(e)(15) may be
Foam (stainless steel shell) ....................................... 5 hydrostatically tested every 10 years.
Aqueous Film Forming foam (AFFF) ......................... 5
Loaded stream ........................................................... 5
(11) The employer shall assure that
Dry chemical with stainless steel ............................... 5 all stored pressure and Halon 1211 types
Carbon dioxide ........................................................... 5 of extinguishers are hydrostatically
Dry chemical, stored pressure, with mild steel, tested at the factory test pressure not
brazed brass or aluminum shells ........................... 12

Dry chemical, cartridge or cylinder operated, with to exceed two times the service pres-
mild steel shells ...................................................... 12 sure.
514
(12) The employer shall assure that hazards involved with incipient stage
acceptable self-generating type soda fire fighting.
acid and foam extinguishers are tested (2) The employer shall provide the
at 350 psi (2,410 kPa). education required in paragraph (g)(1)
(13) Air or gas pressure may not be of this section upon initial employ-
used for hydrostatic testing. ment and at least annually thereafter.
(14) Extinguisher shells, cylinders, or (3) The employer shall provide em-
cartridges which fail a hydrostatic ployees who have been designated to
pressure test, or which are not fit for use fire fighting equipment as part of
testing shall be removed from service an emergency action plan with train-
and from the workplace. ing in the use of the appropriate equip-
(15)(i) The equipment for testing ment.
compressed gas type cylinders shall be (4) The employer shall provide the
training required in paragraph (g)(3) of
of the water jacket type. The equip-
this section upon initial assignment to
ment shall be provided with an expan-
the designated group of employees and
sion indicator which operates with an
at least annually thereafter.
accuracy within one percent of the
total expansion or .1cc (.1mL) of liquid. [45 FR 60708, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May
(ii) The equipment for testing non- 1, 1981, as amended at 51 FR 34560, Sept. 29,
compressed gas type cylinders shall 1986; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 67 FR 67964,
Nov. 7, 2002]
consist of the following:
(A) A hydrostatic test pump, hand or § 1910.158 Standpipe and hose systems.
power operated, capable of producing
(a) Scope and application—(1) Scope.
not less than 150 percent of the test This section applies to all small hose,
pressure, which shall include appro- Class II, and Class III standpipe sys-
priate check valves and fittings; tems installed to meet the require-
(B) A flexible connection for attachments of a particular OSHA standard.
ment to fittings to test through the ex- (2) Exception. This section does not
tinguisher nozzle, test bonnet, or hose apply to Class I standpipe systems.
outlet, as is applicable; and (b) Protection of standpipes. The em-
(C) A protective cage or barrier for ployer shall assure that standpipes are
personal protection of the tester, de- located or otherwise protected against
signed to provide visual observation of mechanical damage. Damaged
the extinguisher under test. standpipes shall be repaired promptly.
(16) The employer shall maintain and (c) Equipment—(1) Reels and cabinets.
provide upon request to the Assistant Where reels or cabinets are provided to
Secretary evidence that the required contain fire hose, the employer shall
hydrostatic testing of fire extin- assure that they are designed to facili-
guishers has been performed at the tate prompt use of the hose valves, the
time intervals shown in Table L–1. hose, and other equipment at the time
Such evidence shall be in the form of a of a fire or other emergency. The em-
certification record which includes the ployer shall assure that the reels and
date of the test, the signature of the cabinets are conspicuously identified
person who performed the test and the and used only for fire equipment.
serial number, or other identifier, of (2) Hose outlets and connections. (i)
the fire extinguisher that was tested. The employer shall assure that hose
Such records shall be kept until the ex- outlets and connections are located
tinguisher is hydrostatically retested high enough above the floor to avoid
at the time interval specified in Table being obstructed and to be accessible
L–1 or until the extinguisher is taken to employees.
out of service, whichever comes first. (ii) The employer shall standardize
(g) Training and education. (1) Where screw threads or provide appropriate
the employer has provided portable fire adapters throughout the system and
extinguishers for employee use in the assure that the hose connections are
workplace, the employer shall also pro- compatible with those used on the sup-
vide an educational program to famil- porting fire equipment.
iarize employees with the general prin- (3) Hose. (i) The employer shall assure
ciples of fire extinguisher use and the that every 11⁄2″ (3.8 cm) or smaller hose
515
outlet used to meet this standard is tanks are used, the employer shall as-
equipped with hose connected and sure that proper pressure is maintained
ready for use. In extremely cold cli- at all times except during repairs.
mates where such installation may re- (ii) The employer shall assure that
sult in damaged equipment, the hose valves in the main piping connections
may be stored in another location pro- to the automatic sources of water sup-
vided it is readily available and can be ply are kept fully open at all times ex-
connected when needed. cept during repair.
(ii) Standpipe systems installed after (iii) The employer shall assure that
January 1, 1981, for use by employees, hose systems are inspected at least an-
shall be equipped with lined hose. Un- nually and after each use to assure
lined hose may remain in use on exist- that all of the equipment and hose are
ing systems. However, after the effec- in place, available for use, and in serv-
tive date of this standard, unlined hose iceable condition.
which becomes unserviceable shall be (iv) When the system or any portion
replaced with lined hose. thereof is found not to be serviceable,
(iii) The employer shall provide hose the employer shall remove it from
of such length that friction loss result- service immediately and replace it
ing from water flowing through the with equivalent protection such as ex-
hose will not decrease the pressure at tinguishers and fire watches.
the nozzle below 30 psi (210 kPa). The (v) The employer shall assure that
dynamic pressure at the nozzle shall be hemp or linen hose on existing systems
within the range of 30 psi (210 kPa) to is unracked, physically inspected for
125 psi (860 kPa). deterioration, and reracked using a dif-
(4) Nozzles. The employer shall assure ferent fold pattern at least annually.
that standpipe hose is equipped with The employer shall assure that defec-
shut-off type nozzles. tive hose is replaced in accordance
(d) Water supply. The minimum water with paragraph (c)(3)(ii) of this section.
supply for standpipe and hose systems, (vi) The employer shall designate
which are provided for the use of em- trained persons to conduct all inspec-
ployees, shall be sufficient to provide tions required under this section.
100 gallons per minute (6.3 l/s) for a pe-
riod of at least thirty minutes. [45 FR 60710, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 61
(e) Tests and maintenance—(1) Accept- FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996]
ance tests. (i) The employer shall assure
that the piping of Class II and Class III FIXED FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT
systems installed after January 1, 1981,
§ 1910.159 Automatic sprinkler sys-
including yard piping, is tems.
hydrostatically tested for a period of at
least 2 hours at not less than 200 psi (a) Scope and application. (1) The re-
(1380 kPa), or at least 50 psi (340 kPa) quirements of this section apply to all
in excess of normal pressure when such automatic sprinkler systems installed
pressure is greater than 150 psi (1030 to meet a particular OSHA standard.
kPa). (2) For automatic sprinkler systems
(ii) The employer shall assure that used to meet OSHA requirements and
hose on all standpipe systems installed installed prior to the effective date of
after January 1, 1981, is hydrostatically this standard, compliance with the Na-
tested with couplings in place, at a tional Fire Protection Association
pressure of not less than 200 psi (1380 (NFPA) or the National Board of Fire
kPa), before it is placed in service. Underwriters (NBFU) standard in effect
This pressure shall be maintained for at the time of the system’s installation
at least 15 seconds and not more than will be acceptable as compliance with
one minute during which time the hose this section.
shall not leak nor shall any jacket (b) Exemptions. Automatic sprinkler
thread break during the test. systems installed in workplaces, but
(2) Maintenance. (i) The employer not required by OSHA, are exempt
shall assure that water supply tanks from the requirements of this section.
are kept filled to the proper level ex- (c) General requirements—(1) Design. (i)
cept during repairs. When pressure All automatic sprinkler designs used to
516
comply with this standard shall pro- (8) Sprinklers. (i) The employer shall
vide the necessary discharge patterns, assure that only approved sprinklers
densities, and water flow characteris- are used on systems.
tics for complete coverage in a par- (ii) The employer may not use older
ticular workplace or zoned subdivision style sprinklers to replace standard
of the workplace. sprinklers without a complete engi-
(ii) The employer shall assure that neering review of the altered part of
only approved equipment and devices the system.
are used in the design and installation (iii) The employer shall assure that
of automatic sprinkler systems used to sprinklers are protected from mechan-
comply with this standard. ical damage.
(2) Maintenance. The employer shall (9) Sprinkler alarms. On all sprinkler
properly maintain an automatic sprin- systems having more than twenty (20)
kler system installed to comply with sprinklers, the employer shall assure
this section. The employer shall assure that a local waterflow alarm is pro-
that a main drain flow test is per- vided which sounds an audible signal
formed on each system annually. The on the premises upon water flow
inspector’s test valve shall be opened through the system equal to the flow
at least every two years to assure that from a single sprinkler.
the sprinkler system operates properly. (10) Sprinkler spacing. The employer
(3) Acceptance tests. The employer shall assure that sprinklers are spaced
shall conduct proper acceptance tests to provide a maximum protection area
on sprinkler systems installed for em- per sprinkler, a minimum of inter-
ployee protection after January 1, 1981, ference to the discharge pattern by
and record the dates of such tests. building or structural members or
Proper acceptance tests include the building contents and suitable sensi-
following: tivity to possible fire hazards. The
(i) Flushing of underground connec- minimum vertical clearance between
tions; sprinklers and material below shall be
(ii) Hydrostatic tests of piping in sys- 18 inches (45.7 cm).
tem; (11) Hydraulically designed systems.
(iii) Air tests in dry-pipe systems; The employer shall assure that hydrau-
(iv) Dry-pipe valve operation; and lically designed automatic sprinkler
(v) Test of drainage facilities. systems or portions thereof are identi-
(4) Water supplies. The employer shall fied and that the location, number of
assure that every automatic sprinkler sprinklers in the hydraulically de-
system is provided with at least one signed section, and the basis of the de-
automatic water supply capable of pro- sign is indicated. Central records may
viding design water flow for at least 30 be used in lieu of signs at sprinkler
minutes. An auxiliary water supply or valves provided the records are avail-
equivalent protection shall be provided able for inspection and copying by the
when the automatic water supply is Assistant Secretary.
out of service, except for systems of 20 [45 FR 60710, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May
or fewer sprinklers. 1, 1981]
(5) Hose connections for fire fighting
use. The employer may attach hose § 1910.160 Fixed extinguishing sys-
connections for fire fighting use to wet tems, general.
pipe sprinkler systems provided that (a) Scope and application. (1) This sec-
the water supply satisfies the combined tion applies to all fixed extinguishing
design demand for sprinklers and systems installed to meet a particular
standpipes. OSHA standard except for automatic
(6) Protection of piping. The employer sprinkler systems which are covered by
shall assure that automatic sprinkler § 1910.159.
system piping is protected against (2) This section also applies to fixed
freezing and exterior surface corrosion. systems not installed to meet a par-
(7) Drainage. The employer shall as- ticular OSHA standard, but which, by
sure that all dry sprinkler pipes and means of their operation, may expose
fittings are installed so that the sys- employees to possible injury, death, or
tem may be totally drained. adverse health consequences caused by
517
the extinguishing agent. Such systems than 10 percent, it shall be subjected to

are only subject to the requirements of maintenance.
paragraphs (b)(4) through (b)(7) and (c) (8) The employer shall assure that
of this section. factory charged nonrefillable con-
(3) Systems otherwise covered in tainers which have no means of pres-
paragraph (a)(2) of this section which sure indication are weighed at least
are installed in areas with no employee semi-annually. If a container shows a
exposure are exempted from the re- loss in net weight or more than 5 per-
quirements of this section. cent it shall be replaced.
(b) General requirements. (1) Fixed ex- (9) The employer shall assure that in-
tinguishing system components and spection and maintenance dates are re-
agents shall be designed and approved corded on the container, on a tag at-
for use on the specific fire hazards they tached to the container, or in a central
are expected to control or extinguish. location. A record of the last semi-an-
(2) If for any reason a fixed extin- nual check shall be maintained until
guishing system becomes inoperable, the container is checked again or for
the employer shall notify employees the life of the container, whichever is
and take the necessary temporary pre- less.
cautions to assure their safety until (10) The employer shall train employ-
the system is restored to operating ees designated to inspect, maintain, op-
order. Any defects or impairments erate, or repair fixed extinguishing sys-
shall be properly corrected by trained tems and annually review their train-
personnel. ing to keep them up-to-date in the
(3) The employer shall provide a dis- functions they are to perform.
tinctive alarm or signaling system (11) The employer shall not use
which complies with § 1910.165 and is ca- chlorobromomethane or carbon tetra-
pable of being perceived above ambient chloride as an extinguishing agent
noise or light levels, on all extin- where employees may be exposed.
guishing systems in those portions of (12) The employer shall assure that
the workplace covered by the extin- systems installed in the presence of
guishing system to indicate when the corrosive atmospheres are constructed
extinguishing system is discharging. of non-corrosive material or otherwise
Discharge alarms are not required on protected against corrosion.
systems where discharge is imme- (13) Automatic detection equipment
diately recognizable. shall be approved, installed and main-
(4) The employer shall provide effec- tained in accordance with § 1910.164.
tive safeguards to warn employees (14) The employer shall assure that
against entry into discharge areas all systems designed for and installed
where the atmosphere remains haz- in areas with climatic extremes shall
ardous to employee safety or health. operate effectively at the expected ex-
(5) The employer shall post hazard treme temperatures.
warning or caution signs at the en- (15) The employer shall assure that
trance to, and inside of, areas pro- at least one manual station is provided
tected by fixed extinguishing systems for discharge activation of each fixed
which use agents in concentrations extinguishing system.
known to be hazardous to employee (16) The employer shall assure that
safety and health. manual operating devices are identified
(6) The employer shall assure that as to the hazard against which they
fixed systems are inspected annually will provide protection.
by a person knowledgeable in the de- (17) The employer shall provide and
sign and function of the system to as- assure the use of the personal protec-
sure that the system is maintained in tive equipment needed for immediate
good operating condition. rescue of employees trapped in haz-
(7) The employer shall assure that ardous atmospheres created by an
the weight and pressure of refillable agent discharge.
containers is checked at least semi-an- (c) Total flooding systems with poten-
nually. If the container shows a loss in tial health and safety hazards to employ-
net content or weight of more than 5 ees. (1) The employer shall provide an
percent, or a loss in pressure of more emergency action plan in accordance
518
with § 1910.38 for each area within a (4) The employer shall sample the dry
workplace that is protected by a total chemical supply of all but stored pres-
flooding system which provides agent sure systems at least annually to as-
concentrations exceeding the max- sure that the dry chemical supply is
imum safe levels set forth in para- free of moisture which may cause the
graphs (b)(5) and (b)(6) of § 1910.162. supply to cake or form lumps.
(2) Systems installed in areas where (5) The employer shall assure that
employees cannot enter during or after the rate of application of dry chemicals
the system’s operation are exempt is such that the designed concentration
from the requirements of paragraph (c) of the system will be reached within 30
of this section. seconds of initial discharge.
(3) On all total flooding systems the [45 FR 60712, Sept. 12, 1980]
employer shall provide a pre-discharge
employee alarm which complies with § 1910.162 Fixed extinguishing sys-
§ 1910.165, and is capable of being per- tems, gaseous agent.
ceived above ambient light or noise (a) Scope and application—(1) Scope.
levels before the system discharges, This section applies to all fixed extin-
which will give employees time to safe- guishing systems, using a gas as the
ly exit from the discharge area prior to extinguishing agent, installed to meet
system discharge. a particular OSHA standard. These sys-
(4) The employer shall provide auto- tems shall also comply with § 1910.160.
matic actuation of total flooding sys- In some cases, the gas may be in a liq-
tems by means of an approved fire de- uid state during storage.
tection device installed and inter- (2) Application. The requirements of
connected with a pre-discharge em- paragraphs (b)(2) and (b)(4) through
ployee alarm system to give employees (b)(6) shall apply only to total flooding
time to safely exit from the discharge systems.
area prior to system discharge. (b) Specific requirements. (1) Agents
used for initial supply and replenish-
[45 FR 60711, Sept. 12, 1980] ment shall be of the type approved for
the system’s application. Carbon diox-
§ 1910.161 Fixed extinguishing sys-
tems, dry chemical. ide obtained by dry ice conversion to
liquid is not acceptable unless it is
(a) Scope and application. This section processed to remove excess water and
applies to all fixed extinguishing sys- oil.
tems, using dry chemical as the extin- (2) Except during overhaul, the em-
guishing agent, installed to meet a par- ployer shall assure that the designed
ticular OSHA standard. These systems concentration of gaseous agents is
shall also comply with § 1910.160. maintained until the fire has been ex-
(b) Specific requirements. (1) The em- tinguished or is under control.
ployer shall assure that dry chemical (3) The employer shall assure that
agents are compatible with any foams employees are not exposed to toxic lev-
or wetting agents with which they are els of gaseous agent or its decomposi-
used. tion products.
(2) The employer may not mix to- (4) The employer shall assure that
gether dry chemical extinguishing the designed extinguishing concentra-
agents of different compositions. The tion is reached within 30 seconds of ini-
employer shall assure that dry chem- tial discharge except for Halon systems
ical systems are refilled with the which must achieve design concentra-
chemical stated on the approval name- tion within 10 seconds.
plate or an equivalent compatible ma- (5) The employer shall provide a dis-
terial. tinctive pre-discharge employee alarm
(3) When dry chemical discharge may capable of being perceived above ambi-
obscure vision, the employer shall pro- ent light or noise levels when agent de-
vide a pre-discharge employee alarm sign concentrations exceed the max-
which complies with § 1910.165 and imum safe level for employee exposure.
which will give employees time to safe- A pre-discharge employee alarm for
ly exit from the discharge area prior to alerting employees before system dis-
system discharge. charge shall be provided on Halon 1211
519
and carbon dioxide systems with a de- systems installed to meet the require-
sign concentration of 4 percent or ments of a particular OSHA standard.
greater and for Halon 1301 systems with (b) Installation and restoration. (1) The
a design concentration of 10 percent or employer shall assure that all devices
greater. The pre-discharge employee and equipment constructed and in-
alarm shall provide employees time to stalled to comply with this standard
safely exit the discharge area prior to are approved for the purpose for which
system discharge. they are intended.
(6)(i) Where egress from an area can- (2) The employer shall restore all fire
not be accomplished within one detection systems and components to
minute, the employer shall not use normal operating condition as prompt-
Halon 1301 in concentrations greater ly as possible after each test or alarm.
than 7 percent. Spare detection devices and compo-
(ii) Where egress takes greater than nents which are normally destroyed in
30 seconds but less than one minute, the process of detecting fires shall be
the employer shall not use Halon 1301 available on the premises or from a
in a concentration greater than 10 per- local supplier in sufficient quantities
cent. and locations for prompt restoration of
(iii) Halon 1301 concentrations great- the system.
er than 10 percent are only permitted (c) Maintenance and testing. (1) The
in areas not normally occupied by em- employer shall maintain all systems in
ployees provided that any employee in an operable condition except during re-
the area can escape within 30 seconds. pairs or maintenance.
The employer shall assure that no un- (2) The employer shall assure that
protected employees enter the area fire detectors and fire detection sys-
during agent discharge. tems are tested and adjusted as often
[45 FR 60712, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May as needed to maintain proper reli-
1, 1981] ability and operating condition except
that factory calibrated detectors need
§ 1910.163 Fixed extinguishing sys- not be adjusted after installation.
tems, water spray and foam. (3) The employer shall assure that
(a) Scope and application. This section pneumatic and hydraulic operated de-
applies to all fixed extinguishing sys- tection systems installed after January
tems, using water or foam solution as 1, 1981, are equipped with supervised
the extinguishing agent, installed to systems.
meet a particular OSHA standard. (4) The employer shall assure that
These systems shall also comply with the servicing, maintenance and testing
§ 1910.160. This section does not apply to of fire detection systems, including
automatic sprinkler systems which are cleaning and necessary sensitivity ad-
covered under § 1910.159. justments are performed by a trained
(b) Specific requirements. (1) The em- person knowledgeable in the operations
ployer shall assure that foam and and functions of the system.
water spray systems are designed to be (5) The employer shall also assure
effective in at least controlling fire in that fire detectors that need to be
the protected area or on protected cleaned of dirt, dust, or other particu-
equipment. lates in order to be fully operational
(2) The employer shall assure that are cleaned at regular periodic inter-
drainage of water spray systems is di- vals.
rected away from areas where employ- (d) Protection of fire detectors. (1) The
ees are working and that no emergency employer shall assure that fire detec-
egress is permitted through the drain- tion equipment installed outdoors or in
age path. the presence of corrosive atmospheres
[45 FR 60712, Sept. 12, 1980] be protected from corrosion. The em-
ployer shall provide a canopy, hood, or
OTHER FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS other suitable protection for detection
equipment requiring protection from
§ 1910.164 Fire detection systems. the weather.
(a) Scope and application. This section (2) The employer shall locate or oth-
applies to all automatic fire detection erwise protect detection equipment so
520
that it is protected from mechanical or (b) General requirements. (1) The em-
physical impact which might render it ployee alarm system shall provide
inoperable. warning for necessary emergency ac-
(3) The employer shall assure that de- tion as called for in the emergency ac-
tectors are supported independently of tion plan, or for reaction time for safe
their attachment to wires or tubing. escape of employees from the work-
(e) Response time. (1) The employer place or the immediate work area, or
shall assure that fire detection systems both.
installed for the purpose of actuating (2) The employee alarm shall be capa-
fire extinguishment or suppression sys- ble of being perceived above ambient
tems shall be designed to operate in noise or light levels by all employees
time to control or extinguish a fire. in the affected portions of the work-
(2) The employer shall assure that place. Tactile devices may be used to
fire detection systems installed for the alert those employees who would not
purpose of employee alarm and evacu- otherwise be able to recognize the audi-
ation be designed and installed to pro- ble or visual alarm.
vide a warning for emergency action (3) The employee alarm shall be dis-
and safe escape of employees. tinctive and recognizable as a signal to
(3) The employer shall not delay evacuate the work area or to perform
alarms or devices initiated by fire de- actions designated under the emer-
tector actuation for more than 30 sec- gency action plan.
onds unless such delay is necessary for (4) The employer shall explain to
the immediate safety of employees. each employee the preferred means of
When such delay is necessary, it shall reporting emergencies, such as manual
be addressed in an emergency action pull box alarms, public address sys-
plan meeting the requirements of tems, radio or telephones. The em-
§ 1910.38. ployer shall post emergency telephone
(f) Number, location and spacing of de- numbers near telephones, or employee
tecting devices. The employer shall as- notice boards, and other conspicuous
sure that the number, spacing and lo- locations when telephones serve as a
cation of fire detectors is based upon means of reporting emergencies. Where
design data obtained from field experi- a communication system also serves as
ence, or tests, engineering surveys, the the employee alarm system, all emer-
manufacturer’s recommendations, or a gency messages shall have priority
recognized testing laboratory listing. over all non-emergency messages.
[45 FR 60713, Sept. 12, 1980] (5) The employer shall establish pro-
cedures for sounding emergency alarms
§ 1910.165 Employee alarm systems. in the workplace. For those employers
(a) Scope and application. (1) This sec- with 10 or fewer employees in a par-
tion applies to all emergency employee ticular workplace, direct voice commu-
alarms installed to meet a particular nication is an acceptable procedure for
OSHA standard. This section does not sounding the alarm provided all em-
apply to those discharge or supervisory ployees can hear the alarm. Such work-
alarms required on various fixed extin- places need not have a back-up system.
guishing systems or to supervisory (c) Installation and restoration. (1) The
alarms on fire suppression, alarm or employer shall assure that all devices,
detection systems unless they are in- components, combinations of devices
tended to be employee alarm systems. or systems constructed and installed to
(2) The requirements in this section comply with this standard are ap-
that pertain to maintenance, testing proved. Steam whistles, air horns,
and inspection shall apply to all local strobe lights or similar lighting de-
fire alarm signaling systems used for vices, or tactile devices meeting the re-
alerting employees regardless of the quirements of this section are consid-
other functions of the system. ered to meet this requirement for ap-
(3) All pre-discharge employee alarms proval.
installed to meet a particular OSHA (2) The employer shall assure that all
standard shall meet the requirements employee alarm systems are restored
of paragraphs (b)(1) through (4), (c), and to normal operating condition as

(d)(1) of this section. promptly as possible after each test or
521
Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, Apps. Nt. 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–21 Edition)
alarm. Spare alarm devices and compo- APPENDIX A TO SUBPART L OF PART

nents subject to wear or destruction 1910—FIRE PROTECTION
shall be available in sufficient quan-
§ 1910.156 Fire brigades.
tities and locations for prompt restora- 1. Scope. This section does not require an
tion of the system. employer to organize a fire brigade. How-
(d) Maintenance and testing. (1) The ever, if an employer does decide to organize
employer shall assure that all em- a fire brigade, the requirements of this sec-
ployee alarm systems are maintained tion apply.
2. Pre-fire planning. It is suggested that pre-
in operating condition except when un- fire planning be conducted by the local fire
dergoing repairs or maintenance. department and/or the workplace fire bri-
(2) The employer shall assure that a gade in order for them to be familiar with
test of the reliability and adequacy of the workplace and process hazards. Involve-
non-supervised employee alarm sys- ment with the local fire department or fire
tems is made every two months. A dif- prevention bureau is encouraged to facilitate
coordination and cooperation between mem-
ferent actuation device shall be used in bers of the fire brigade and those who might
each test of a multi-actuation device be called upon for assistance during a fire
system so that no individual device is emergency.
used for two consecutive tests. 3. Organizational statement. In addition to
(3) The employer shall maintain or the information required in the organiza-
tional statement, paragraph 1910.156(b)(1), it
replace power supplies as often as is is suggested that the organizational state-
necessary to assure a fully operational ment also contain the following information:
condition. Back-up means of alarm, a description of the duties that the fire bri-
such as employee runners or tele- gade members are expected to perform; the
phones, shall be provided when systems line authority of each fire brigade officer;
are out of service. the number of the fire brigade officers and
number of training instructors; and a list
(4) The employer shall assure that and description of the types of awards or rec-
employee alarm circuitry installed ognition that brigade members may be eligi-
after January 1, 1981, which is capable ble to receive.
of being supervised is supervised and 4. Physical capability. The physical capa-
that it will provide positive notifica- bility requirement applies only to those fire
tion to assigned personnel whenever a brigade members who perform interior struc-
tural fire fighting. Employees who cannot
deficiency exists in the system. The meet the physical capability requirement
employer shall assure that all super- may still be members of the fire brigade as
vised employee alarm systems are test- long as such employees do not perform inte-
ed at least annually for reliability and rior structural fire fighting. It is suggested
adequacy. that fire brigade members who are unable to
perform interior structural fire fighting be
(5) The employer shall assure that
assigned less stressful and physically de-
the servicing, maintenance and testing manding fire brigade duties, e.g., certain
of employee alarms are done by persons types of training, recordkeeping, fire preven-
trained in the designed operation and tion inspection and maintenance, and fire
functions necessary for reliable and pump operations.
safe operation of the system. Physically capable can be defined as being
(e) Manual operation. The employer able to perform those duties specified in the
training requirements of section 1910.156(c).
shall assure that manually operated Physically capable can also be determined
actuation devices for use in conjunc- by physical performance tests or by a phys-
tion with employee alarms are unob- ical examination when the examining physi-
structed, conspicuous and readily ac- cian is aware of the duties that the fire bri-
cessible. gade member is expected to perform.
It is also recommended that fire brigade
[45 FR 60713, Sept. 12, 1980] members participate in a physical fitness
program. There are many benefits which can
APPENDIXES TO SUBPART L OF PART be attributed to being physically fit. It is be-
1910—NOTE lieved that physical fitness may help to re-
duce the number of sprain and strain injuries
NOTE: The following appendices to subpart as well as contributing to the improvement
L, except appendix E, serve as nonmandatory of the cardiovascular system.
guidelines to assist employers in complying 5. Training and education. The paragraph on

with the appropriate requirements of subpart training and education does not contain spe-
L. cific training and education requirements
522
Occu. Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, App. A
because the type, amount, and frequency of protection of other employees and the work-
training and education will be as varied as place.
are the purposes for which fire brigades are It is suggested that publications from the
organized. However, the paragraph does re- International Fire Service Training Associa-
quire that training and education be com- tion, the National Fire Protection Associa-
mensurate with those functions that the fire tion (NFPA–1041), the International Society
brigade is expected to perform; i.e., those of Fire Service Instructors and other fire
functions specified in the organizational training sources be consulted for rec-
statement. Such a performance requirement ommended qualifications of fire brigade
provides the necessary flexibility to design a training instructors.
training program which meets the needs of In order to be effective, fire brigades must
individual fire brigades. have competent leadership and supervision.
At a minimum, hands-on training is re- It is important for those who supervise the
quired to be conducted annually for all fire fire brigade during emergency situations,
brigade members. However, for those fire bri- e.g., fire brigade chiefs, leaders, etc., to re-
gade members who are expected to perform ceive the necessary training and education
interior structural fire fighting, some type of for supervising fire brigade activities during
training or education session must be pro- these hazardous and stressful situations.
vided at least quarterly. These fire brigade members with leadership
In addition to the required hands-on train- responsibilities should demonstrate skills in
ing, it is strongly recommended that fire bri- strategy and tactics, fire suppression and
gade members receive other types of training prevention techniques, leadership principles,
and education such as: classroom instruc- pre-fire planning, and safety practices. It is
tion, review of emergency action procedures, again suggested that fire service training
pre-fire planning, review of special hazards sources be consulted for determining the
in the workplace, and practice in the use of kinds of training and education which are
self-contained breathing apparatus. necessary for those with fire brigade leader-
It is not necessary for the employer to du- ship responsibilities.
plicate the same training or education that a It is further suggested that fire brigade
fire brigade member receives as a member of leaders and fire brigade instructors receive
a community volunteer fire department, res- more formalized training and education on a
cue squad, or similar organization. However, continuing basis by attending classes pro-
such training or education must have been vided by such training sources as univer-
provided to the fire brigade member within sities and university fire extension services.
the past year and it must be documented The following recommendations should not
that the fire brigade member has received be considered to be all of the necessary ele-
the training or education. For example: ments of a complete comprehensive training
there is no need for a fire brigade member to program, but the information may be helpful
receive another training class in the use of as a guide in developing a fire brigade train-
positive-pressure self-contained breathing ing program.
apparatus if the fire brigade member has re- All fire brigade members should be famil-
cently completed such training as a member iar with exit facilities and their location,
of a community fire department. Instead, the emergency escape routes for handicapped
fire brigade member should receive training workers, and the workplace ‘‘emergency ac-
or education covering other important equip- tion plan.’’
ment or duties of the fire brigade as they re- In addition, fire brigade members who are
late to the workplace hazards, facilities and expected to control and extinguish fires in
processes. the incipient stage should, at a minimum, be
It is generally recognized that the effec- trained in the use of fire extinguishers,
tiveness of fire brigade training and edu- standpipes, and other fire equipment they
cation depends upon the expertise of those are assigned to use. They should also be
providing the training and education as well aware of first aid medical procedures and
as the motivation of the fire brigade mem- procedures for dealing with special hazards
bers. Fire brigade training instructors must to which they may be exposed. Training and
receive a higher level of training and edu- education should include both classroom in-
cation than the fire brigade members they struction and actual operation of the equip-
will be teaching. This includes being more ment under simulated emergency conditions.
knowledgeable about the functions to be per- Hands-on type training must be conducted at
formed by the fire brigade and the hazards least annually but some functions should be
involved. The instructors should be qualified reviewed more often.
to train fire brigade members and dem- In addition to the above training, fire bri-
onstrate skills in communication, methods gade members who are expected to perform
of teaching, and motivation. It is important emergency rescue and interior structural fire
for instructors and fire brigade members fighting should, at a minimum, be familiar
alike to be motivated toward the goals of the with the proper techniques in rescue and fire
fire brigade and be aware of the importance suppression procedures. Training and edu-
of the service that they are providing for the cation should include fire protection courses,
523
Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–21 Edition)
classroom training, simulated fire situations protective clothing requirements only apply
including ‘‘wet drills’’ and, when feasible, ex- to those fire brigade members who perform
tinguishment of actual mock fires. Fre- interior structural fire fighting operations.
quency of training or education must be at Additionally, the protective clothing re-
least quarterly, but some drills or classroom quirements do not apply to the protective
training should be conducted as often as clothing worn during outside fire fighting
monthly or even weekly to maintain the pro- operations (brush and forest fires, crash crew
ficiency of fire brigade members. operations) or other special fire fighting ac-
There are many excellent sources of train- tivities. It is important that the protective
ing and education that the employer may clothing to be worn during these types of fire
want to use in developing a training program fighting operations reflect the hazards which
for the workplace fire brigade. These sources are expected to be encountered by fire bri-
include publications, seminars, and courses gade members.
offered by universities. (B) Foot and leg protection. Section 1910.156
There are also excellent fire school courses permits an option to achieve foot and leg
by such facilities as Texas A and M Univer- protection.
sity, Delaware State Fire School, Lamar The section recognizes the interdependence
University, and Reno Fire School, that deal of protective clothing to cover one or more
with those unique hazards which may be en- parts of the body. Therefore, an option is
countered by fire brigades in the oil and given so that fire brigade members may
chemical industry. These schools, and oth- meet the foot and leg requirements by either
ers, also offer excellent training courses wearing long fire-resistive coats in combina-
which would be beneficial to fire brigades in tion with fully extended boots, or by wearing
other types of industries. These courses shorter fire-resistive costs in combination
should be a continuing part of the training with protective trousers and protective shoes
program, and employers are strongly encour- or shorter boots.
aged to take advantage of these excellent re- (C) Body protection. Paragraph (e)(3) of
sources. § 1910.156 provides an option for fire brigade
It is also important that fire brigade mem- members to achieve body protection. Fire
bers be informed about special hazards to brigade members may wear a fire-resistive
which they may be exposed during fire and coat in combination with fully extended
other emergencies. Such hazards as storage boots, or they may wear a fire-resistive coat
and use areas of flammable liquids and gases, in combination with protective trousers.
toxic chemicals, water-reactive substances, Fire-resistive coats and protective trousers
etc., can pose difficult problems. There must meeting all of the requirements contained in
be written procedures developed that de- NFPA 1971–1975 ‘‘Protective Clothing for
scribe the actions to be taken in situations Structural Fire Fighters,’’ are acceptable as
involving special hazards. Fire brigade mem- meeting the requirements of this standard.
bers must be trained in handling these spe- The lining is required to be permanently
cial hazards as well as keeping abreast of attached to the outer shell. However, it is
any changes that occur in relation to these permissible to attach the lining to the outer
special hazards. shell material by stitching in one area such
6. Fire fighting equipment. It is important as at the neck. Fastener tape or snap fas-
that fire fighting equipment that is in dam- teners may be used to secure the rest of the
aged or unserviceable condition be removed lining to the outer shell to facilitate clean-
from service and replaced. This will prevent ing. Reference to permanent lining does not
fire brigade members from using unsafe refer to a winter liner which is a detachable
equipment by mistake. extra lining used to give added protection to
Fire fighting equipment, except portable the wearer against the effects of cold weath-
fire extinguishers and respirators, must be er and wind.
inspected at least annually. Portable fire ex- (D) Hand protection. The requirements of
tinguishers and respirators are required to the paragraph on hand protection may be
be inspected at least monthly. met by protective gloves or a glove system.
7. Protective clothing. (A) General. Para- A glove system consists of a combination of
graph (e) of § 1910.156 does not require all fire different gloves. The usual components of a
brigade members to wear protective cloth- glove system consist of a pair of gloves,
ing. It is not the intention of these standards which provide thermal insulation to the
to require employers to provide a full ensem- hands, worn in combination with a second
ble of protective clothing for every fire bri- pair of gloves which provide protection
gade member without consideration given to against flame, cut, and puncture.
the types of hazardous environments to It is suggested that protective gloves pro-
which the fire brigade member might be ex- vide dexterity and a sense of feel for objects.
posed. It is the intention of these standards Criteria and test methods for dexterity are
to require adequate protection for those fire contained in the NIOSH publications, ‘‘The
brigade members who might be exposed to Development of Criteria for Firefighters’

fires in an advanced stage, smoke, toxic Gloves; Vol. I: Glove Requirements’’ and
gases, and high temperatures. Therefore, the ‘‘Vol. II: Glove Criteria and Test Methods.’’
524
These NIOSH publications also contain a same air supply with the wearer of the appa-
permissible modified version of Federal Test ratus for emergency escape purposes.
Method 191, Method 5903, (paragraph (3) of The employer is encouraged to provide fire
appendix E) for flame resistance when brigade members with an alternative means
gloves, rather than glove material, are test- of respiratory protection to be used only for
ed for flame resistance. emergency escape purposes if the self-con-
(E) Head, eye, and face protection. Head pro- tained breathing apparatus becomes inoper-
tective devices which meet the requirements ative. Such alternative means of respiratory
contained in NFPA No. 1972 are acceptable as protection may be either a buddy-breathing
meeting the requirements of this standard device or an escape self-contained breathing
for head protection. apparatus (ESCBA). The ESCBA is a short-
Head protective devices are required to be duration respiratory protective device which
provided with ear flaps so that the ear flaps is approved for only emergency escape pur-
will be available if needed. It is rec- poses. It is suggested that if ESCBA units
ommended that ear protection always be are used, that they be of at least 5 minutes
used while fighting interior structural fires. service life.
Many head protective devices are equipped Quick-disconnect valves are devices which
with face shields to protect the eyes and start the flow of air by insertion of the hose
face. These face shields are permissible as
(which leads to the facepiece) into the regu-
meeting the eye and face protection require-
lator of self-contained breathing apparatus,
ments of this paragraph as long as such face
and stop the flow of air by disconnecting the
shields meet the requirements of § 1910.133 of
hose from the regulator. These devices are
the General Industry Standards.
particularly useful for those positive-pres-
Additionally, full facepieces, helmets or
sure self-contained breathing apparatus
hoods of approved breathing apparatus which
which do not have the capability of being
meet the requirements of § 1910.134 and para-
switched from the demand to the positive-
graph (f) of § 1910.156 are also acceptable as
pressure mode.
meeting the eye and face protection require-
ments. The use of a self-contained breathing appa-
It is recommended that a flame resistant ratus where the apparatus can be switched
protective head covering such as a hood or from a demand to a positive-pressure mode is
snood, which will not adversely affect the acceptable as long as the apparatus is in the
seal of a respirator facepiece, be worn during positive-pressure mode when performing in-
interior structural fire fighting operations to terior structural fire fighting operations.
protect the sides of the face and hair. Also acceptable are approved respiratory
8. Respiratory protective devices. Respiratory protective devices which have been con-
protection is required to be worn by fire bri- verted to the positive-pressure type when
gade members while working inside build- such modification is accomplished by trained
ings or confined spaces where toxic products and experienced persons using kits or parts
of combustion or an oxygen deficiency is approved by NIOSH and provided by the
likely to be present; respirators are also to manufacturer and by following the manufac-
be worn during emergency situations involv- turer’s instructions.
ing toxic substances. When fire brigade There are situations which require the use
members respond to emergency situations, of respirators which have a duration of 2
they may be exposed to unknown contami- hours or more. Presently, there are no ap-
nants in unknown concentrations. Therefore, proved positive-pressure apparatus with a
it is imperative that fire brigade members rated service life of more than 2 hours. Con-
wear proper respiratory protective devices sequently, negative-pressure self-contained
during these situations. Additionally, there breathing apparatus with a rated service life
are many instances where toxic products of of more than 2 hours and which have a min-
combustion are still present during mop-up imum protection factor of 5,000 as deter-
and overhaul operations. Therefore, fire bri- mined by an acceptable quantitative fit test
gade members should continue to wear res- performed on each individual, will be accept-
pirators during these types of operations. able for use during situations which require
Self-contained breathing apparatus are not long duration apparatus. Long duration ap-
required to be equipped with either a buddy- paratus may be needed in such instances as
breathing device or a quick-disconnect valve. working in tunnels, subway systems, etc.
However, these accessories may be very use- Such negative-pressure breathing apparatus
ful and are acceptable as long as such acces- will continue to be acceptable for a max-
sories do not cause damage to the apparatus, imum of 18 months after a positive-pressure
restrict the air flow of the apparatus, or ob- apparatus with the same or longer rated
struct the normal operation of the appa- service life of more than 2 hours is certified
ratus. by NIOSH/MSHA. After this 18 month phase-
Buddy-breathing devices are useful for in period, all self-contained breathing appa-
emergency situations where a victim or an- ratus used for these long duration situations
other fire brigade member can share the will have to be of the positive-pressure type.
525
Protection factor (sometimes called fit fac- test should be conducted at least three
tor) is defined as the ratio of the contami- times. It is acceptable to conduct all three
nant concentrations outside of the respirator tests on the same day. However, there should
to the contaminant concentrations inside be at least one hour between tests to reflect
the facepiece of the respirator. the protection afforded by the apparatus dur-
ing different times of the day.
The above elements are not meant to be a
comprehensive, technical description of a
quantitative fit test protocol. However,
Protection factors are determined by quan- quantitative fit test procedures which in-
titative fit tests. An acceptable quantitative clude these elements are acceptable for de-
fit test should include the following ele- termining protection factors. Procedures for
ments: a quantitative fit test are required to be
1. A fire brigade member who is physically available for inspection by the Assistant
and medically capable of wearing res- Secretary or authorized representative.
pirators, and who is trained in the use of res- Organizations such as Los Alamos Sci-
pirators, dons a self-contained breathing ap- entific Laboratory, Lawrence Livermore
paratus equipped with a device that will Laboratory, NIOSH, and American National
monitor the concentration of a contaminant Standards Institute (ANSI) are excellent
inside the facepiece. sources for additional information con-
2. The fire brigade member then performs a cerning qualitative and quantitative fit test-
qualitative fit test to assure the best face to ing.
facepiece seal as possible. A qualitative fit
test can consist of a negative-pressure test, § 1910.157 Portable fire extinguishers.
positive-pressure test, isoamyl acetate vapor
1. Scope and application. The scope and ap-
(banana oil) test, or an irritant smoke test.
plication of this section is written to apply
For more details on respirator fitting see the to three basic types of workplaces. First,
NIOSH booklet entitled ‘‘A Guide to Indus- there are those workplaces where the em-
trial Respiratory Protection’’ June, 1976, and ployer has chosen to evacuate all employees
HEW publication No. (NIOSH) 76–189. from the workplace at the time of a fire
3. The wearer should then perform physical emergency. Second, there are those work-
activity which reflects the level of work ac- places where the employer has chosen to per-
tivity which would be expected during fire mit certain employees to fight fires and to
fighting activities. The physical activity evacuate all other non-essential employees
should include simulated fire-ground work at the time of a fire emergency. Third, there
activity or physical exercise such as run- are those workplaces where the employer has
ning-in-place, a step test, etc. chosen to permit all employees in the work-
4. Without readjusting the apparatus, the place to use portable fire extinguishers to
wearer is placed in a test atmosphere con- fight fires.
taining a non-toxic contaminant with a The section also addresses two kinds of
known, constant, concentration. work areas. The entire workplace can be di-
The protection factor is then determined vided into outside (exterior) work areas and
by dividing the known concentration of the inside (interior) work areas. This division of
contaminant in the test atmosphere by the the workplace into two areas is done in rec-
concentration of the contaminant inside the ognition of the different types of hazards em-
facepiece when the following exercises are ployees may be exposed to during fire fight-
performed: ing operations. Fires in interior workplaces,
(a) Normal breathing with head motionless pose a greater hazard to employees; they can
for one minute; produce greater exposure to quantities of
(b) Deep breathing with head motionless smoke, toxic gases, and heat because of the
for 30 seconds; capability of a building or structure to con-
(c) Turning head slowly from side to side tain or entrap these products of combustion
while breathing normally, pausing for at until the building can be ventilated. Exterior
least two breaths before changing direction. work areas, normally open to the environ-
Continue for at least one minute; ment, are somewhat less hazardous, because
(d) Moving head slowly up and down while the products of combustion are generally
breathing normally, pausing for at least two carried away by the thermal column of the
breaths before changing direction. Continue fire. Employees also have a greater selection
for at least two minutes; of evacuation routes if it is necessary to
(e) Reading from a prepared text, slowly abandon fire fighting efforts.
and clearly, and loudly enough to be heard In recognition of the degree of hazard
and understood. Continue for one minute; present in the two types of work areas, the
and standards for exterior work areas are some-
(f) Normal breathing with head motionless what less restrictive in regards to extin-
for at least one minute. guisher distribution. Paragraph (a) explains

The protection factor which is determined this by specifying which paragraphs in the
must be at least 5,000. The quantitative fit section apply.
526
ER25SE06.011</MATH>
2. Portable fire extinguisher exemptions. In level where they could be struck by vehic-
recognition of the three options given to em- ular traffic. When needed, they can be low-
ployers in regard to the amount of employee ered quickly for use. This method of mount-
evacuation to be carried out, the standards ing can also reduce vandalism and unauthor-
permit certain exemptions based on the ized use of extinguishers. The extinguishers
number of employees expected to use fire ex- may also be mounted as outlined in the Na-
tinguishers. tional Fire Protection Association’s Stand-
Where the employer has chosen to totally ard No. 10, ‘‘Portable Fire Extinguishers.’’
evacuate the workplace at the time of a fire 4. Selection and distribution. The employer
emergency and when fire extinguishers are is responsible for the proper selection and
not provided, the requirements of this sec- distribution of fire extinguishers and the de-
tion do not apply to that workplace. termination of the necessary degree of pro-
Where the employer has chosen to par- tection. The selection and distribution of fire
tially evacuate the workplace or the effected extinguishers must reflect the type and class
area at the time of a fire emergency and has of fire hazards associated with a particular
permitted certain designated employees to workplace.
remain behind to operate critical plant oper- Extinguishers for protecting Class A haz-
ations or to fight fires with extinguishers, ards may be selected from the following
then the employer is exempt from the dis- types: water, foam, loaded stream, or multi-
tribution requirements of this section. Em- purpose dry chemical. Extinguishers for pro-
ployees who will be remaining behind to per- tecting Class B hazards may be selected from
form incipient fire fighting or members of a the following types: Halon 1301, Halon 1211,
fire brigade must be trained in their duties. carbon dioxide, dry chemicals, foam, or load-
The training must result in the employees ed stream. Extinguishers for Class C hazards
becoming familiar with the locations of fire may be selected from the following types:
extinguishers. Therefore, the employer must Halon 1301, Halon 1211, carbon dioxide, or dry
locate the extinguishers in convenient loca- chemical.
tions where the employees know they can be Combustible metal (Class D hazards) fires
found. For example, they could be mounted pose a different type of fire problem in the
in the fire truck or cart that the fire brigade workplace. Extinguishers using water, gas,
uses when it responds to a fire emergency. or certain dry chemicals cannot extinguish
They can also be distributed as set forth in or control this type of fire. Therefore, cer-
the National Fire Protection Association’s tain metals have specific dry powder extin-
Standard No. 10, ‘‘Portable Fire Extin- guishing agents which can extinguish or con-
guishers.’’ trol this type of fire. Those agents which
Where the employer has decided to permit have been specifically approved for use on
all employees in the workforce to use fire ex- certain metal fires provide the best protec-
tinguishers, then the entire OSHA section tion; however, there are also some ‘‘uni-
applies. versal’’ type agents which can be used effec-
3. Portable fire extinguisher mounting. Pre- tively on a variety of combustible metal
vious standards for mounting fire extin- fires if necessary. The ‘‘universal’’ type
guishers have been criticized for requiring agents include: Foundry flux, Lith-X powder,
specific mounting locations. In recognition TMB liquid, pyromet powder, TEC powder,
of this criticism, the standard has been re- dry talc, dry graphite powder, dry sand, dry
written to permit as much flexibility in ex- sodium chloride, dry soda ash, lithium chlo-
tinguisher mounting as is acceptable to as- ride, zirconium silicate, and dry dolomite.
sure that fire extinguishers are available Water is not generally accepted as an ef-
when needed and that employees are not sub- fective extinguishing agent for metal fires.
jected to injury hazards when they try to ob- When applied to hot burning metal, water
tain an extinguisher. will break down into its basic atoms of oxy-
It is the intent of OSHA to permit the gen and hydrogen. This chemical breakdown
mounting of extinguishers in any location contributes to the combustion of the metal.
that is accessible to employees without the However, water is also a good universal cool-
use of portable devices such as a ladder. This ant and can be used on some combustible
limitation is necessary because portable de- metals, but only under proper conditions and
vices can be moved or taken from the place application, to reduce the temperature of the
where they are needed and, therefore, might burning metal below the ignition point. For
not be available at the time of an emer- example, automatic deluge systems in mag-
gency. nesium plants can discharge such large quan-
Employers are given as much flexibility as tities of water on burning magnesium that
possible to assure that employees can obtain the fire will be extinguished. The National
extinguishers as fast as possible. For exam- Fire Protection Association has specific
ple, an acceptable method of mounting ex- standards for this type of automatic sprin-
tinguishers in areas where fork lift trucks or kler system. Further information on the
tow-motors are used is to mount the units on control of metal fires with water can be
retractable boards which, by means of found in the National Fire Protection Asso-
counterweighting, can be raised above the ciation’s Fire Protection Handbook.
527
An excellent source of selection and dis- guisher shells fail violently under hydro-
tribution criteria is found in the National static pressure.
Fire Protection Association’s Standard No. Employers are encouraged to use contrac-
10. Other sources of information include the tors who can perform adequate and reliable
National Safety Council and the employer’s service. Firms which have been certified by
fire insurance carrier. the Materials Transportation Board (MTB)
5. Substitution of standpipe systems for port- of the U.S. Department of Transportation
able fire extinguishers. The employer is per- (DOT) or State licensed extinguisher serv-
mitted to substitute acceptable standpipe
icing firms or recognized by the National As-
systems for portable fire extinguishers under
sociation of Fire Equipment Distributors in
certain circumstances. It is necessary to as-
sure that any substitution will provide the Chicago, Illinois, are generally acceptable
same coverage that portable units provide. for performing this service.
This means that fire hoses, because of their 8. Training and education. This part of the
limited portability, must be spaced through- standard is of the utmost importance to em-
out the protected area so that they can reach ployers and employees if the risk of injury or
around obstructions such as columns, ma- death due to extinguisher use is to be re-
chinery, etc. and so that they can reach into duced. If an employer is going to permit an
closets and other enclosed areas. employee to fight a workplace fire of any
6. Inspection, maintenance and testing. The size, the employer must make sure that the
ultimate responsibility for the inspection, employee knows everything necessary to as-
maintenance and testing of portable fire ex- sure the employee’s safety.
tinguishers lies with the employer. The ac- Training and education can be obtained
tual inspection, maintenance, and testing through many channels. Often, local fire de-
may, however, be conducted by outside con- partments in larger cities have fire preven-
tractors with whom the employer has ar- tion bureaus or similar organizations which
ranged to do the work. When contracting for
can provide basic fire prevention training
such work, the employer should assure that
programs. Fire insurance companies will
the contractor is capable of performing the
work that is needed to comply with this have data and information available. The
standard. National Fire Protection Association and
If the employer should elect to perform the the National Safety Council will provide, at
inspection, maintenance, and testing re- a small cost, publications that can be used in
quirements of this section in-house, then the a fire prevention program.
employer must make sure that those persons Actual fire fighting training can be ob-
doing the work have been trained to do the tained from various sources in the country.
work and to recognize problem areas which The Texas A & M University, the University
could cause an extinguisher to be inoperable. of Maryland’s Fire and Rescue Institute,
The National Fire Protection Association West Virginia University’s Fire Service Ex-
provides excellent guidelines in its standard tension, Iowa State University’s Fire Service
for portable fire extinguishers. The employer Extension and other State training schools
may also check with the manufacturer of the and land grant colleges have fire fighting
unit that has been purchased and obtain programs directed to industrial applications.
guidelines on inspection, maintenance, and Some manufacturers of extinguishers, such
testing. Hydrostatic testing is a process that as the Ansul Company and Safety First, con-
should be left to contractors or individuals duct fire schools for customers in the proper
using suitable facilities and having the use of extinguishers. Several large corpora-
training necessary to perform the work. tions have taken time to develop their own
Anytime the employer has removed an ex-
on-site training programs which expose em-
tinguisher from service to be checked or re-
ployees to the actual ‘‘feeling’’ of fire fight-
paired, alternate equivalent protection must
ing. Simulated fires for training of employ-
be provided. Alternate equivalent protection
ees in the proper use of extinguishers are
could include replacing the extinguisher
with one or more units having equivalent or also an acceptable part of a training pro-
equal ratings, posting a fire watch, restrict- gram.
ing the unprotected area from employee ex- In meeting the requirements of this sec-
posure, or providing a hose system ready to tion, the employer may also provide edu-
operate. cational materials, without classroom in-
7. Hydrostatic testing. As stated before, the struction, through the use of employee no-
employer may contract for hydrostatic test- tice campaigns using instruction sheets or
ing. However, if the employer wishes to pro- flyers or similar types of informal programs.
vide the testing service, certain equipment The employer must make sure that employ-
and facilities must be available. Employees ees are trained and educated to recognize not
should be made aware of the hazards associ- only what type of fire is being fought and
ated with hydrostatic testing and the impor- how to fight it, but also when it is time to
tance of using proper guards and water pres- get away from it and leave fire suppression
sures. Severe injury can result if extin- to more experienced fire fighters.
528
§ 1910.158 Standpipe and hose systems. 5. Hose. When the employer elects to pro-
vide small hose in lieu of portable fire extin-
1. Scope and application. This section has guishers, those hose stations being used for
been written to provide adequate coverage of the substitution must have hose attached
those standpipe and hose systems that an and ready for service. However, if more than
employer may install in the workplace to the necessary amount of small hose outlets
meet the requirements of a particular OSHA are provided, hose does not have to be at-
standard. For example, OSHA permits the tached to those outlets that would provide
substitution of hose systems for portable fire redundant coverage. Further, where the in-
extinguishers in § 1910.157. If an employer stallation of hose on outlets may expose the
chooses to provide hose systems instead of hose to extremely cold climates, the em-
portable Class A fire extinguishers, then ployer may store the hose in houses or simi-
those hose systems used for substitution lar protective areas and connect it to the
would have to meet the applicable require- outlet when needed.
ments of § 1910.157. All other standpipe and There is approved lined hose available that
hose systems not used as a substitute would can be used to replace unlined hose which is
be exempt from these requirements. stored on racks in cabinets. The lined hose is
The section specifically exempts Class I constructed so that it can be folded and
large hose systems. By large hose systems, placed in cabinets in the same manner as un-
OSHA means those 21⁄2″ (6.3 cm) hose lines lined hose.
that are usually associated with fire depart- Hose is considered to be unserviceable
ments of the size that provide their own when it deteriorates to the extent that it can
water supply through fire apparatus. When no longer carry water at the required pres-
the fire gets to the size that outside protec- sure and flow rates. Dry rotted linen or hemp
tion of that degree is necessary, OSHA be- hose, cross threaded couplings, and punc-
lieves that in most industries employees will tured hose are examples of unserviceable
have been evacuated from the fire area and hose.
the ‘‘professional’’ fire fighters will take 6. Nozzles. Variable stream nozzles can pro-
control. vide useful variations in water flow and
spray patterns during fire fighting oper-
2. Protection of standpipes. Employers must
ations and they are recommended for em-
make sure that standpipes are protected so
ployee use. It is recommended that 100 psi
that they can be relied upon during a fire (700kPa) nozzle pressure be used to provide
emergency. This means protecting the pipes good flow patterns for variable stream noz-
from mechanical and physical damage. There zles. The most desirable attribute for nozzles
are various means for protecting the equip- is the ability of the nozzle person to shut off
ment such as, but not limited to, enclosing the water flow at the nozzle when it is nec-
the supply piping in the construction of the essary. This can be accomplished in many
building, locating the standpipe in an area ways. For example, a shut-off nozzle with a
which is inaccessible to vehicles, or locating lever or rotation of the nozzle to stop flow
the standpipe in a stairwell. would be effective, but in other cases a sim-
3. Hose covers and cabinets. The employer ple globe valve placed between a straight
should keep fire protection hose equipment stream nozzle and the hose could serve the
in cabinets or inside protective covers which same purpose. For straight stream nozzles 50
will protect it from the weather elements, psi nozzle pressure is recommended. The in-
dirt or other damaging sources. The use of tent of this standard is to protect the em-
protective covers must be easily removed or ployee from ‘‘run-away’’ hoses if it becomes
opened to assure that hose and nozzle are ac- necessary to drop a pressurized hose line and
cessible. When the employer places hose in a retreat from the fire front and other related
cabinet, the employer must make sure that hazards.
the hose and nozzle are accessible to employ- 7. Design and installation. Standpipe and
ees without subjecting them to injury. In hose systems designed and installed in ac-
order to make sure that the equipment is cordance with NFPA Standard No. 14,
readily accessible, the employer must also ‘‘Standpipe and Hose Systems,’’ are consid-
make sure that the cabinets used to store ered to be in compliance with this standard.
equipment are kept free of obstructions and
other equipment which may interfere with § 1910.159 Automatic sprinkler systems.
the fast distribution of the fire hose stored 1. Scope and application. This section con-
in the cabinet. tains the minimum requirements for design,
4. Hose outlets and connections. The em- installation and maintenance of sprinkler
ployer must assure that employees who use systems that are needed for employee safety.
standpipe and hose systems can reach the The Occupational Safety and Health Admin-
hose rack and hose valve without the use of istration is aware of the fact that the Na-
portable equipment such as ladders. Hose tional Board of Fire Underwriters is no
reels are encouraged for use because one em- longer an active organization, however,
ployee can retrieve the hose, charge it, and sprinkler systems still exist that were de-
place it into service without much difficulty. signed and installed in accordance with that
529
organization’s standards. Therefore, OSHA the fire hazard. For example, if repairs or
will recognize sprinkler systems designed to, changes to the system are to be made, they
and maintained in accordance with, NBFU should be made during those hours when em-
and earlier NFPA standards. ployees are not working or are not occupying
2. Exemptions. In an effort to assure that that portion of the workplace protected by
employers will continue to use automatic the portion of the system which has been
sprinkler systems as the primary fire protec- shut down.
tion system in workplaces, OSHA is exempt- The procedures for performing a flow test
ing from coverage those systems not re- via a main drain test or by the use of an in-
quired by a particular OSHA standard and spector’s test valve can be obtained from the
which have been installed in workplaces employer’s fire insurance company or from
solely for the purpose of protecting property. the National Fire Protection Association’s
Many of these types of systems are installed Standard No. 13A, ‘‘Sprinkler System, Main-
in areas or buildings with little or no em- tenance.’’
ployee exposure. An example is those ware- 5. Water supplies. The water supply to a
houses where employees may enter occasion- sprinkler system is one of the most impor-
ally to take inventory or move stock. Some tant factors an employer should consider
employers may choose to shut down those when evaluationg a system. Obviously, if
systems which are not specifically required there is no water supply, the system is use-
by OSHA rather than upgrade them to com- less. Water supplies can be lost for various
ply with the standards. OSHA does not in- reasons such as improperly closed valves, ex-
tend to regulate such systems. OSHA only cessive demand, broken water mains, and
intends to regulate those systems which are broken fire pumps. The employer must be
installed to comply with a particular OSHA able to determine if or when this type of con-
standard. dition exists either by performing a main
3. Design. There are two basic types of drain test or visual inspection. Another
sprinkler system design. Pipe schedule de- problem may be an inadequate water supply.
signed systems are based on pipe schedule ta- For example, a light hazard occupancy may,
bles developed to protect hazards with stand- through rehabilitation or change in tenants,
ard sized pipe, number of sprinklers, and pipe become an ordinary or high hazard occu-
lengths. Hydraulic designed systems are pancy. In such cases, the existing water sup-
based on an engineered design of pipe size ply may not be able to provide the pressure
which will produce a given water density or or duration necessary for proper protection.
flow rate at any particular point in the sys- Employers must assure that proper design
tem. Either design can be used to comply and tests have been made to assure an ade-
with this standard. quate water supply. These tests can be ar-
The National Fire Protection Association’s ranged through the employer’s fire insurance
Standard No. 13, ‘‘Automatic Sprinkler Sys- carrier or through a local sprinkler mainte-
tems,’’ contains the tables needed to design nance company or through the local fire pre-
and install either type of system. Minimum vention organization.
water supplies, densities, and pipe sizes are Anytime the employer must shut down the
given for all types of occupancies. primary water supply for a sprinkler system,
The employer may check with a reputable the standard requires that equivalent protec-
fire protection engineering consultant or tion be provided. Equivalent protection may
sprinkler design company when evaluating include a fire watch with extinguishers or
existing systems or designing a new installa- hose lines in place and manned, or a sec-
tion. ondary water supply such as a tank truck
With the advent of new construction mate- and pump, or a tank or fire pond with fire
rials for the manufacuture of sprinkler pipe, pumps, to protect the areas where the pri-
materials, other than steel have been ap- mary water supply is limited or shut down.
proved for use as sprinkler pipe. Selection of The employer may also require evacuation of
pipe material should be made on the basis of the workplace and have an emergency action
the type of installation and the acceptability plan which specifies such action.
of the material to local fire and building offi- 6. Protection of piping. Piping which is ex-
cials where such systems may serve more posed to corrosive atmospheres, either chem-
than one purpose. ical or natural, can become defective to the
Before new sprinkler systems are placed extent that it is useless. Employers must as-
into service, an acceptance test is to be con- sure that piping is protected from corrosion
ducted. The employer should invite the in- by its material of construction, e.g., stain-
staller, designer, insurance representative, less steel, or by a protective coating, e.g.,
and a local fire official to witness the test. paint.
Problems found during the test are to be cor- 7. Sprinklers. When an employer finds it
rected before the system is placed into serv- necessary to replace sprinkler system com-
ice. ponents or otherwise change a sprinkler’s de-
4. Maintenance. It is important that any sign, employer should make a complete fire
sprinkler system maintenance be done only protection engineering survey of that part of
when there is minimal employee exposure to the system being changed. This review
530
should assure that the changes to the system can splatter when hit with the discharging
will not alter the effectiveness of the system agent. All of these hazards must be deter-
as it is presently designed. Water supplies, mined before the system is placed into oper-
densities and flow characteristics should be ation, and must be discussed with employees.
maintained. Based on the known toxicological effects of
8. Protection of sprinklers. All components of agents such as carbon tetrachloride and
the system must be protected from mechan- chlorobromomethane, OSHA is not permit-
ical impact damage. This can be achieved ting the use of these agents in areas where
with the use of mechanical guards or screens employees can be exposed to the agent or its
or by locating components in areas where side effects. However, chlorobromomethane
physical contact is impossible or limited. has been accepted and may be used as an ex-
9. Sprinkler alarms. The most recognized plosion suppression agent in unoccupied
sprinkler alarm is the water motor gong or spaces. OSHA is permitting the use of this
bell that sounds when water begins to flow agent only in areas where employees will not
through the system. This is not however, the be exposed.
only type of acceptable water flow alarm. 2. Distinctive alarm signals. A distinctive
Any alarm that gives an indication that alarm signal is required to indicate that a
water is flowing through the system is ac- fixed system is discharging. Such a signal is
ceptable. For example, a siren, a whistle, a necessary on those systems where it is not
flashing light, or similar alerting device immediately apparent that the system is dis-
which can transmit a signal to the necessary charging. For example, certain gaseous
persons would be acceptable. The purpose of
agents make a loud noise when they dis-
the alarm is to alert persons that the system
charge. In this case no alarm signal is nec-
is operating, and that some type of planned
essary. However, where systems are located
action is necessary.
in remote locations or away from the general
10. Sprinkler spacing. For a sprinkler sys-
work area and where it is possible that a sys-
tem to be effective there must be an ade-
tem could discharge without anyone know-
quate discharge of water spray from the
ing that it is doing so, then a distinctive
sprinkler head. Any obstructions which
alarm is necessary to warn employees of the
hinder the designed density or spray pattern
of the water may create unprotected areas hazards that may exist. The alarm can be a
which can cause fire to spread. There are bell, gong, whistle, horn, flashing light, or
some sprinklers that, because of the sys- any combination of signals as long as it is
tem’s design, are deflected to specific areas. identifiable as a discharge alarm.
This type of obstruction is acceptable if the 3. Maintenance. The employer is respon-
system’s design takes it into consideration sible for the maintenance of all fixed sys-
in providing adequate coverage. tems, but this responsibility does not pre-
clude the use of outside contractors to do
§ 1910.160 Fixed extinguishing systems, general. such work. New systems should be subjected
to an acceptance test before placed in serv-
1. Scope and application. This section con-
ice. The employer should invite the installer,
tains the general requirements that are ap-
designer, insurance representative and oth-
plicable to all fixed extinguishing systems
ers to witness the test. Problems found dur-
installed to meet OSHA standards. It also
applies to those fixed extinguishing systems, ing the test need to be corrected before the
generally total flooding, which are not re- system is considered operational.
quired by OSHA, but which, because of the 4. Manual discharge stations. There are in-
agent’s discharge, may expose employees to stances, such as for mechanical reasons and
hazardous concentrations of extinguishing others, where the standards call for a man-
agents or combustion by-products. Employ- ual back-up activation device. While the lo-
ees who work around fixed extinguishing sys- cation of this device is not specified in the
tems must be warned of the possible hazards standard, the employer should assume that
associated with the system and its agent. the device should be located where employ-
For example, fixed dry chemical extin- ees can easily reach it. It could, for example,
guishing systems may generate a large be located along the main means of egress
enough cloud of dry chemical particles that from the protected area so that employees
employees may become visually disoriented. could activate the system as they evacuate
Certain gaseous agents can expose employees the work area.
to hazardous by-products of combustion 5. Personal protective equipment. The em-
when the agent comes into contact with hot ployer is required to provide the necessary
metal or other hot surface. Some gaseous personal protective equipment to rescue em-
agents may be present in hazardous con- ployees who may be trapped in a totally
centrations when the system has totally dis- flooded environment which may be haz-
charged because an extra rich concentration ardous to their health. This equipment
is necessary to extinguish deep-seated fires. would normally include a positive-pressure
Certain local application systems may be de- self-contained breathing apparatus and any
signed to discharge onto the flaming surface necessary first aid equipment. In cases where
of a liquid, and it is possible that the liquid the employer can assure the prompt arrival
531
of the local fire department or plant emer- § 1910.163 Fixed extinguishing systems, water
gency personnel which can provide the equip- spray and foam.
ment, this can be considered as complying 1. Scope and application. This section ap-
with the standards. plies to those systems that use water spray
or foam. The requirements of § 1910.160 also
§ 1910.161 Fixed extinguishing systems, dry
apply to this type of system.
chemical.
2. Characteristics of foams. When selecting
1. Scope and application. The requirements the type of foam for a specific hazard, the
of this section apply only to dry chemical employer should consider the following limi-
systems. These requirements are to be used tations of some foams.
in conjunction with the requirements of a. Some foams are not acceptable for use
§ 1910.160. on fires involving flammable gases and lique-
fied gases with boiling points below ambient
2. Maintenance. The employer is respon-
workplace temperatures. Other foams are
sible for assuring that dry chemical systems
not effective when used on fires involving
will operate effectively. To do this, periodic
polar solvent liquids.
maintenance is necessary. One test that b. Any agent using water as part of the
must be conducted during the maintenance mixture should not be used on fire involving
check is one which will determine if the combustible metals unless it is applied under
agent has remained free of moisture. If an proper conditions to reduce the temperature
agent absorbs any moisture, it may tend to of burning metal below the ignition tempera-
cake and thereby clog the system. An easy ture. The employer should use only those
test for acceptable moisture content is to foams that have been tested and accepted for
take a lump of dry chemical from the con- this application by a recognized independent
tainer and drop it from a height of four testing laboratory.
inches. If the lump crumbles into fine par- c. Certain types of foams may be incompat-
ticles, the agent is acceptable. ible and break down when they are mixed to-
gether.
§ 1910.162 Fixed extinguishing systems, gaseous d. For fires involving water miscible sol-
agent. vents, employers should use only those
1. Scope and application. This section ap- foams tested and approved for such use. Reg-
plies only to those systems which use gas- ular protein foams may not be effective on
eous agents. The requirements of § 1910.160 such solvents.
Whenever employers provide a foam or
also apply to the gaseous agent systems cov-
water spray system, drainage facilities must
ered in this section.
be provided to carry contaminated water or
2. Design concentrations. Total flooding gas- foam overflow away from the employee work
eous systems are based on the volume of gas areas and egress routes. This drainage sys-
which must be discharged in order to tem should drain to a central impounding
produce a certain designed concentration of area where it can be collected and disposed
gas in an enclosed area. The concentration of properly. Other government agencies may
needed to extinguish a fire depends on sev- have regulations concerning environmental
eral factors including the type of fire hazard considerations.
and the amount of gas expected to leak away
from the area during discharge. At times it § 1910.164 Fire detection systems.
is necessary to ‘‘super-saturate’’ a work area 1. Installation and restoration. Fire detec-
to provide for expected leakage from the en- tion systems must be designed by knowl-
closed area. In such cases, employers must edgeable engineers or other professionals,
assure that the flooded area has been venti- with expertise in fire detection systems and
lated before employees are permitted to re- when the systems are installed, there should
enter the work area without protective be an acceptance test performed on the sys-
clothing and respirators. tem to insure it operates properly. The man-
3. Toxic decomposition. Certain halogenated ufacturer’s recommendations for system de-
hydrocarbons will break down or decompose sign should be consulted. While entire sys-
when they are combined with high tempera- tems may not be approved, each component
tures found in the fire environment. The used in the system is required to be ap-
products of the decomposition can include proved. Custom fire detection systems
toxic elements or compounds. For example, should be designed by knowledgeable fire
when Halon 1211 is placed into contact with protection or electrical engineers who are fa-
hot metal it will break down and form bro- miliar with the workplace hazards and condi-
mide or fluoride fumes. The employer must tions. Some systems may only have one or
find out which toxic products may result two individual detectors for a small work-
from decomposition of a particular agent place, but good design and installation is
from the manufacturer, and take the nec- still important. An acceptance test should be
essary precautions to prevent employee ex- performed on all systems, including these
posure to the hazard. smaller systems.
532
OSHA has a requirement that spare compo- ble alarm signals are acceptable methods for
nents used to replace those which may be de- giving alarms to employees. Flashing lights
stroyed during an alarm situation be avail- or vibrating devices can be used in areas
able in sufficient quantities and locations for where the employer has hired employees
prompt restoration of the system. This does with hearing or vision impairments. Vibrat-
not mean that the parts or components have ing devices, air fans, or other tactile devices
to be stored at the workplace. If the em- can be used where visually and hearing im-
ployer can assure that the supply of parts is paired employees work. Employers are cau-
available in the local community or the gen- tioned that certain frequencies of flashing
eral metropolitan area of the workplace, lights have been claimed to initiate epileptic
then the requirements for storage and avail- seizures in some employees and that this
ability have been met. The intent is to make fact should be considered when selecting an
sure that the alarm system is fully oper- alarm device. Two way radio communica-
ational when employees are occupying the tions would be most appropriate for trans-
workplace, and that when the system oper- mitting emergency alarms in such work-
ates it can be returned to full service the places which may be remote or where tele-
next day or sooner. phones may not be available.
2. Supervision. Fire detection systems 3. Reporting alarms. Employee alarms may
should be supervised. The object of super- require different means of reporting, depend-
vision is detection of any failure of the cir- ing on the workplace involved. For example,
cuitry, and the employer should use any in small workplaces, a simple shout through-
method that will assure that the system’s out the workplace may be sufficient to warn
circuits are operational. Electrically oper- employees of a fire or other emergency. In
ated sensors for air pressure, fluid pressure, larger workplaces, more sophisticated equip-
or electrical circuits, can provide effective ment is necessary so that entire plants or
monitoring and are the typical types of su- high-rise buildings are not evacuated for one
pervision. small emergency. In remote areas, such as
3. Protection of fire detectors. Fire detectors pumping plants, radio communication with a
must be protected from corrosion either by central base station may be necessary. The
protective coatings, by being manufactured goal of this standard is to assure that all em-
from non-corrosive materials or by location. ployees who need to know that an emergency
Detectors must also be protected from me- exists can be notified of the emergency. The
chanical impact damage, either by suitable method of transmitting the alarm should re-
cages or metal guards where such hazards flect the situation found at the workplace.
are present, or by locating them above or out Personal radio transmitters, worn by an
of contact with materials or equipment individual, can be used where the individual
which may cause damage. may be working such as in a remote loca-
4. Number, location, and spacing of detectors. tion. Such personal radio transmitters shall
This information can be obtained from the send a distinct signal and should clearly in-
approval listing for detectors or NFPA dicate who is having an emergency, the loca-
standards. It can also be obtained from fire tion, and the nature of the emergency. All
protection engineers or consultants or manu- radio transmitters need a feedback system to
facturers of equipment who have access to assure that the emergency alarm is sent to
approval listings and design methods. the people who can provide assistance.
For multi-story buildings or single story
§ 1910.165 Employee alarm systems. buildings with interior walls for subdivi-
1. Scope and application. This section is in- sions, the more traditional alarm systems
tended to apply to employee alarm systems are recommended for these types of work-
used for all types of employee emergencies places. Supervised telephone or manual fire
except those which occur so quickly and at alarm or pull box stations with paging sys-
such a rapid rate (e.g., explosions) that any tems to transmit messages throughout the
action by the employee is extremely limited building is the recommended alarm system.
following detection. The alarm box stations should be available
In small workplaces with 10 or less employ- within a travel distance of 200 feet. Water
ees the alarm system can be by direct voice flow detection on a sprinkler system, fire de-
communication (shouting) where any one in- tection systems (guard’s supervisory station)
dividual can quickly alert all other employ- or tour signal (watchman’s service), or other
ees. Radio may be used to transmit alarms related systems may be part of the overall
from remote workplaces where telephone system. The paging system may be used for
service is not available, provided that radio nonemergency operations provided the emer-
messages will be monitored by emergency gency messages and uses will have prece-
services, such as fire, police or others, to in- dence over all other uses of the system.
sure alarms are transmitted and received. 4. Supervision. The requirements for super-
2. Alarm signal alternatives. In recognition vising the employee alarm system circuitry
of physically impaired individuals, OSHA is and power supply may be accomplished in a

accepting various methods of giving alarm variety of ways. Typically, electrically oper-
signals. For example, visual, tactile or audi- ated sensors for air pressure, fluid pressure,
533
Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–21 Edition)
steam pressure, or electrical continuity of and to identify trouble in the system and
circuitry may be used to continuously mon- give a warning signal.
itor the system to assure it is operational [45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May
1, 1981]
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART L OF PART 1910—NATIONAL CONSENSUS STANDARDS

The following table contains a cross-reference listing of those current national consensus
standards which contains information and guidelines that would be considered acceptable in
complying with requirements in the specific sections of subpart L.
Subpart L section National consensus standard
1910.156 ...................... ANSI/NFPA No. 1972; Structural Fire Fighter’s Helmets.

ANSI Z88.5 American National Standard, Practice for Respirator Protection for the Fire Service.
ANSI/NFPA No. 1971, Protective Clothing for Structural Fire Fighters.
NFPA No. 1041, Fire Service Instructor Professional Qualifications.
1910.157 ...................... ANSI/NFPA No. 10, Portable Fire Extinguishers.
1910.158 ...................... ANSI/NFPA No. 18, Wetting Agents.
ANSI/NFPA No. 20, Centrifugal Fire Pumps.
NFPA No. 21, Steam Fire Pumps.
ANSI/NFPA No. 22, Water Tanks.
NFPA No. 24, Outside Protection.
NFPA No. 26, Supervision of Valves.
NFPA No. 13E, Fire Department Operations in Properties Protected by Sprinkler, Standpipe Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 194, Fire Hose Connections.
NFPA No. 197, Initial Fire Attack, Training for.
NFPA No. 1231, Water Supplies for Suburban and Rural Fire Fighting.
1910.159 ...................... ANSI-NFPA No. 13, Sprinkler Systems.
NFPA No. 13A, Sprinkler Systems, Maintenance.
ANSI/NFPA No. 18, Wetting Agents.
ANSI/NFPA No. 20, Centrifugal Fire Pumps.
ANSI/NFPA No. 22, Water Tanks.
NFPA No. 24, Outside Protection.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72B, Auxiliary Signaling Systems.
NFPA No. 1231, Water Supplies for Suburban and Rural Fire Fighting.
1910.160 ...................... ANSI/NFPA No. 11, Foam Systems.
ANSI/NFPA 11A, High Expansion Foam Extinguishing Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 11B, Synthetic Foam and Combined Agent Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 12, Carbon Dioxide Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 12A, Halon 1301 Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 12B, Halon 1211 Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 15, Water Spray Systems.
ANSI/NFPA 16 Foam-Water Spray Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 17, Dry Chemical Systems.
ANSI/NFPA 69, Explosion Suppression Systems.
1910.161 ...................... ANSI/NFPA No. 11B, Synthetic Foam and Combined Agent Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 17, Dry Chemical Systems.
1910.162 ...................... ANSI/NFPA No. 12, Carbon Dioxide Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 12A, Halon 1211 Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 12B, Halon 1301 Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 69, Explosion Suppression Systems.
1910.163 ...................... ANSI/NFPA No. 11, Foam Extinguishing Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 11A, High Expansion Foam Extinguishing Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 11B, Synthetic Foam and Combined Agent Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 15, Water Spray Fixed Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 16, Foam-Water Spray Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 18, Wetting Agents.
1910.164 ...................... ANSI/NFPA No. 71, Central Station Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72A, Local Protective Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72B, Auxiliary Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72D, Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72E, Automatic Fire Detectors.
ANSI/NFPA No. 101, Life Safety Code.
1910.165 ...................... ANSI/NFPA No. 71, Central Station Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72A, Local Protective Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72B, Auxiliary Protective Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72C, Remote Station Protective Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72D, Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 101, Life Safety Code.

Metric Conversion ........ ANSI/ASTM No. E380, American National Standard for Metric Practice.
NFPA standards are available from the National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
534
Occu. Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, App. C
ANSI Standards are available from the American National Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018.
[45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993]
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART L OF PART tional Standards Institute, New York, NY

1910—FIRE PROTECTION REFERENCES 10018.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION 11. Testing Physical Fitness; Davis and
Santa Maria. Fire Command. April 1975.
I. Appendix general references. The following 12. Development of a Job-Related Physical
references provide information which can be Performance Examination for Fire Fighters;
helpful in understanding the requirements Dotson and Others. A summary report for
contained in all of the sections of subpart L: the National Fire Prevention and Control
A. Fire Protection Handbook, National Fire Administration. Washington, DC. March
Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, 1977.
Quincy, MA 02269. 13. Proposed Sample Standards for Fire Fight-
B. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial ers’ Protective Clothing and Equipment; Inter-
Operations, National Safety Council; 425 national Association of Fire Fighters, Wash-
North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, IL 60611. ington, DC.
C. Various associations also publish infor- 14. A Study of Facepiece Leakage of Self-Con-
mation which may be useful in under- tained Breathing Apparatus by DOP Man Tests;
standing these standards. Examples of these Los Alamos Scientific Laboratory, Los Ala-
associations are: Fire Equipment Manufac- mos, NM.
turers Association (FEMA) of Arlington, VA 15. The Development of Criteria for Fire
22204 and the National Association of Fire Fighters’ Gloves; Vol. II: Glove Criteria and Test
Equipment Distributors (NAFED) of Chi- Methods; National Institute for Occupational
cago, IL 60601. Safety and Health, Cincinnati, OH. 1976.
II. Appendix references applicable to indi- 16. Model Performance Criteria for Structural
vidual sections. The following references are Fire Fighters’ Helmets; National Fire Preven-
grouped according to individual sections tion and Control Administration, Wash-
contained in subpart L. These references pro- ington, DC. 1977.
vide information which may be helpful in un- 17. Firefighters; Job Safety and Health Mag-
derstanding and implementing the standards
azine, Occupational Safety and Health Ad-
of each section of subpart L.
ministration, Washington, DC. June 1978.
A. § 1910.156. Fire brigades:
18. Eating Smoke—The Dispensable Diet;
1. Private Fire Brigades, NFPA 27; National
Utech, H.P. The Fire Independent, 1975.
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch
Park, Quincy, MA 02269 . 19. Project Monoxide—A Medical Study of an
2. Initial Fire Attack, Training Standard On, Occupational Hazard of Fire Fighters; Inter-
NFPA 197; National Fire Protection Associa- national Association of Fire Fighters, Wash-
tion, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 . ington, DC.
3. Fire Fighter Professional Qualifications, 20. Occupational Exposures to Carbon Mon-
NFPA 1001; National Fire Protection Asso- oxide in Baltimore Firefighters; Radford and
ciation, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA Levine. Johns Hopkins University, Balti-
02269 . more, MD. Journal of Occupational Medi-
4. Organization for Fire Services, NFPA 1201; cine, September, 1976.
National Fire Protection Association, 21. Fire Brigades; National Safety Council,
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 . Chicago, IL. 1966.
5. Organization of a Fire Department, NFPA 22. American National Standard, Practice for
1202; National Fire Protection Association, Respiratory Protection for the Fire Service;
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 . ANSI Z88.5; American National Standards
6. Protective Clothing for Structural Fire Institute, New York, NY 10018.
Fighting, ANSI/NFPA 1971; . 23. Respirator Studies for the Nuclear Regu-
7. American National Standard for Men’s latory Commission; October 1, 1977—September
Safety-Toe Footwear, ANSI Z41.1; American 30, 1978. Evaluation and Performance of Open
National Standards Institute, New York, NY Circuit Breathing Apparatus. NU REG/CR–1235.
10018. Los Alamos Scientific Laboratory; Los Ala-
8. American National Standard for Occupa- mos, NM. 87545, January, 1980.
tional and Educational Eye and Face Protec- B. § 1910.157. Portable fire extinguishers:
tion, ANSI Z87.1; American National Stand- 1. Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers,
ards Institute, New York, NY 10018. ANSI/NFPA 10; National Fire Protection As-
9. American National Standard, Safety Re- sociation, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA
quirements for Industrial Head Protection, 02269
ANSI Z89.1; American National Standards 2. Methods for Hydrostatic Testing of Com-
Institute, New York, NY 10018. pressed Gas Cylinders, C–1; Compressed Gas
10. Specifications for Protective Headgear for Association, 1235 Jefferson Davis Highway,
Vehicular Users, ANSI Z90.1; American Na- Arlington, VA 22202.
535
Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–21 Edition)
3. Recommendations for the Disposition of Un- Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy,
serviceable Compressed Gas Cylinders, C–2; MA 02269.
Compressed Gas Association, 1235 Jefferson E. § 1910.160. Fixed extinguishing systems—
Davis Highway, Arlington, VA 22202. general information:
4. Standard for Visual Inspection of Com- 1. Standard for Foam Extinguishing Systems,
pressed Gas Cylinders, C–6; Compressed Gas ANSI-NFPA 11; National Fire Protection As-
Association, 1235 Jefferson Davis Highway, sociation, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA
Arlington, VA 22202. 02269 .
5. Portable Fire Extinguisher Selection Guide, 2. Standard for Hi-Expansion Foam Systems,
National Association of Fire Equipment Dis- ANSI/NFPA 11A; National Fire Protection
tributors; 111 East Wacker Drive, Chicago, IL Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy,
60601. MA 02269 .
C. § 1910.158. Standpipe and hose systems:
3. Standard on Synthetic Foam and Combined
1. Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Agent Systems, ANSI/NFPA 11B; National
Systems, ANSI/NFPA 13; National Fire Pro-
tection Association, Batterymarch Park,
Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
Quincy, MA 02269.
4. Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing
2. Standard of the Installation of Standpipe
Systems, ANSI/NFPA 12; National Fire Pro-
and Hose Systems, ANSI/NFPA 14; National
tection Association, Batterymarch Park,
Quincy, MA 02269 .
3. Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal 5. Standard on Halon 1301, ANSI/NFPA 12A;
Fire Pumps, ANSI/NFPA 20; National Fire National Fire Protection Association,
Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
Quincy, MA 02269. 6. Standard on Halon 1211, ANSI/NFPA 12B;
4. Standard for Water Tanks for Private Fire National Fire Protection Association,
Protection, ANSI/NFPA 22; National Fire Pro- Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
tection Association, Batterymarch Park, 7. Standard for Water Spray Systems, ANSI/
Quincy, MA 02269. NFPA 15; National Fire Protection Associa-
5. Standard for Screw Threads and Gaskets tion, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
for Fire Hose Connections, ANSI/NFPA 194; 8. Standard for Foam-Water Sprinkler Systems
National Fire Protection Association, and Foam-Water Spray Systems, ANSI/NFPA
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 . 16; National Fire Protection Association, Na-
6. Standard for Fire Hose, NFPA 196; Na- tional Fire Protection Association,
tional Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269. 9. Standard for Dry Chemical Extinguishing
7. Standard for the Care of Fire Hose, NFPA Systems, ANSI/NFPA 17; National Fire Pro-
198; National Fire Protection Association, tection Association, Batterymarch Park,
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269. Quincy, MA 02269.
D. § 1910.159. Automatic sprinkler systems: F. § 1910.161. Fixed extinguishing systems—
1. Standard of the Installation of Sprinkler dry chemical:
Systems, ANSI-NFPA 13; National Fire Pro- 1. Standard for Dry Chemical Extinguishing
tection Association, Batterymarch Park, Systems, ANSI/NFPA 17; National Fire Pro-
Quincy, MA 02269. tection Association, Batterymarch Park,
2. Standard for the Care and Maintenance of Quincy, MA 02269.
Sprinkler Systems, ANSI/NFPA 13A; National 2. National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70;
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch National Fire Protection Association,
Park, Quincy, MA 02269. Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
3. Standard for the Installation of Standpipe
3. Standard for the Installation of Equipment
and Hose Systems, ANSI/NFPA 14; National
for the Removal of Smoke and Grease-Laden
Vapor from Commercial Cooking Equipment,
NFPA 96; National Fire Protection Associa-
4. Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal
tion, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
Fire Pumps, ANSI/NFPA 20; National Fire
Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, G. § 1910.162. Fixed extinguishing systems—
Quincy, MA 02269 . gaseous agents:
5. Standard for Water Tanks for Private Fire 1. Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing
Protection, ANSI-NFPA 22; National Fire Systems, ANSI/NFPA 12; National Fire Pro-
Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, tection Association, Batterymarch Park,
Quincy, MA 02269. Quincy, MA 02269 .
6. Standard for Indoor General Storage, 2. Standard on Halon 1301, ANSI/NFPA 12B;
ANSI/NFPA 231; National Fire Protection National Fire Protection Association,
Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
MA 02269. 3. Standard on Halon 1211, ANSI/NFPA 12B;

7. Standard for Rack Storage of Materials, National Fire Protection Association,
ANSI/NFPA 231C; National Fire Protection Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
536
Occu. Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, App. D
4. Standard on Explosion Prevention Systems, tection Association, Batterymarch Park,
ANSI/NFPA 69; National Fire Protection As- Quincy, MA 02269.
sociation, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 4. Standard for Auxiliary Protective Signaling
02269 . Systems, ANSI/NFPA 72B; National Fire Pro-
5. National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70; tection Association, Batterymarch Park,
National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA 02269.
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 . 5. Standard for Remote Station Protective Sig-
6. Standard on Automatic Fire Detectors, naling Systems, ANSI/NFPA 72C; National
ANSI/NFPA 72E; National Fire Protection Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch
Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
MA 02269 . 6. Standard for Proprietary Protective Sig-
7. Determination of Halon 1301/1211 Threshold naling Systems, ANSI/NFPA 72D; National
Extinguishing Concentrations Using the Cup Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch
Burner Method; Riley and Olson, Ansul Re- Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
port AL–530–A. 7. Vocal Emergency Alarms in Hospitals and
H. § 1910.163. Fixed extinguishing systems— Nursing Facilities: Practice and Potential. Na-
water spray and foam agents: tional Bureau of Standards. Washington,
1. Standard for Foam Extinguisher Systems, D.C., July 1977.
ANSI/NFPA 11; National Fire Protection As- 8. Fire Alarm and Communication Systems.
sociation, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA National Bureau of Standards. Washington,
02269 . D.C., April 1978.
2. Standard for High Expansion Foam Sys-
tems, ANSI/NFPA 11A; National Fire Protec- [45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 58
tion Association, Batterymarch Park, Quin- FR 35309, June 30, 1993]
cy, MA 02269 .
3. Standard for Water Spray Fixed Systems for APPENDIX D TO SUBPART L OF PART
Fire Protection, ANSI/NFPA 15; National Fire 1910—AVAILABILITY OF PUBLICA-
Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, TIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
Quincy, MA 02269 . IN SECTION 1910.156 FIRE BRIGADES
4. Standard for the Installation of Foam-
Water Sprinkler Systems and Foam-Water Spray The final standard for fire brigades, section
Systems, ANSI/NFPA 16; National Fire Pro- 1910.156, contains provisions which incor-
tection Association, Batterymarch Park, porate certain publications by reference. The
Quincy, MA 02269 . publications provide criteria and test meth-
I. § 1910.164. Fire Detection systems: ods for protective clothing worn by those fire
1. National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70; brigade members who are expected to per-
National Fire Protection Association, form interior structural fire fighting. The
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 . standard references the publications as the
2. Standard for Central Station Signaling Sys- chief sources of information for determining
tems, ANSI/NFPA 71; National Fire Protec- if the protective clothing affords the re-
tion Association, Batterymarch Park, Quin- quired level of protection.
cy, MA 02269 . It is appropriate to note that the final
3. Standard on Automatic Fire Detectors, standard does not require employers to pur-
ANSI/NFPA 72E; National Fire Protection chase a copy of the referenced publications.
Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Instead, employers can specify (in purchase
MA 02269 . orders to the manufacturers) that the pro-
J. § 1910.165. Employee alarm systems: tective clothing meet the criteria and test
1. National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70; methods contained in the referenced publica-
National Fire Protection Association, tions and can rely on the manufacturers’ as-
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 . surances of compliance. Employers, however,
2. Standard for Central Station Signaling sys- may desire to obtain a copy of the referenced
tems, ANSI/NFPA 71; National Fire Protec- publications for their own information.
tion Association, Batterymarch Park, Quin- The paragraph designation of the standard
cy, MA 02269. where the referenced publications appear,
3. Standard for Local Protective Signaling the title of the publications, and the
Systems, ANSI/NFPA 72A; National Fire Pro- availablity of the publications are as follows:
Paragraph designation Referenced publication Available from
1910.156(e)(3)(ii) .................... ‘‘Protective Clothing for Structural Fire Fight- National Fire Protection Association,
ing,’’ NFPA No. 1971 (1975). Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
1910.156(e)(4)(i) ..................... ‘‘Development of Criteria for Fire Fighter’s U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington,
Gloves; Vol. II, Part II: Test Methods’’ D.C. 20402. Stock No. for Vol. II is: 071–
(1976). 033–0201–1.
1910.156(e)(5)(i) ..................... ‘‘Model Performance Criteria for Structural U.S. Fire Administration, National Fire Safety
Firefighter’s Helmets’’ (1977). and Research Office, Washington, D.C.

20230.
537
Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–21 Edition)
The referenced publications (or a micro- A. Test specimen. The specimen shall be a
fiche of the publications) are available for rectangle of cloth 3-inches by 6-inches (7.6
review at many universities and public li- cm by 15.2 cm). The long dimension shall be
braries throughout the country. These publi- parallel to the warp for warp tests and par-
cations may also be examined at the OSHA allel to the filling for filling tests. No two
Technical Data Center, Room N2439–Rear, specimens for warp tests shall contain the
United States Department of Labor, 200 Con- same warp yarns, nor shall any two speci-
stitution Ave., N.W., Washington, D.C. 20210 mens for filling tests contain the same fill-
(202–219–7500), or at any OSHA Regional Of- ing yarns. The specimen shall be taken no
fice (see telephone directories under United nearer the selvage than 1⁄10 the width of the
States Government-Labor Department). cloth. An isosceles trapezoid having an alti-
tude of 3-inches (7.6 cm) and bases of 1 inch
[45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 58 (2.5cm) and 4 inches (10.2 cm) in length, re-
FR 33509, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, spectively, shall be marked on each speci-
1996] men, preferably with the aid of a template. A
cut approximately 3⁄8-inch (1 cm) in length
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART L OF PART shall then be made in the center of a perpen-
1910—TEST METHODS FOR PROTEC- dicular to the 1-inch (2.5 cm) edge.
TIVE CLOTHING B. Apparatus. (i) Six-ounce (.17 kg) weight
tension clamps shall be used so designed that
This appendix contains test methods which the six ounces (.17 kg) of weight are distrib-
must be used to determine if protective uted evenly across the complete width of the
clothing affords the required level of protec- sample.
tion as specified in § 1910.156, fire brigades. (ii) The machine shall consist of three
(1) Puncture resistance test method for foot main parts: Straining mechanism, clamps
protection. for holding specimen, and load and elon-
A. Apparatus. The puncture resistance test gation recording mechanisms.
shall be performed on a testing machine hav- (iii) A machine wherein the specimen is
ing a movable platform adjusted to travel at held between two clamps and strained by a
1⁄4-inch/min (0.1 cm/sec). Two blocks of hard-
uniform movement of the pulling clamp
wood, metal, or plastic shall be prepared as shall be used.
follows: the blocks shall be of such size and (iv) The machine shall be adjusted so that
thickness as to insure a suitable rigid test the pulling clamp shall have a uniform speed
ensemble and allow for at least one-inch of of 12 ±10.5 inches per minute (0.5 ±.02 cm/sec).
the pointed end of an 8D nail to be exposed (v) The machine shall have two clamps
for the penetration. One block shall have a with two jaws on each clamp. The design of
hole drilled to hold an 8D common nail firm- the two clamps shall be such that one grip-
ly at an angle of 98°. The second block shall ping surface or jaw may be an integral part
have a maximum 1⁄2-inch (1.3 cm) diameter of the rigid frame of the clamp or be fastened
hole drilled through it so that the hole will to allow a slight vertical movement, while
allow free passage of the nail after it pene- the other gripping surface or jaw shall be
trates the insole during the test. completely moveable. The dimension of the
B. Procedure. The test ensemble consisting immovable jaw of each clamp parallel to the
of the sample unit, the two prepared blocks, application of the load shall measure one-
a piece of leather outsole 10 to 11 irons thick, inch, and the dimension of the jaw perpen-
and a new 8D nail, shall be placed as follows: dicular to this direction shall measure three
the 8D nail in the hole, the sample of outsole inches or more. The face of the movable jaw
stock superimposed above the nail, the area of each clamp shall measure one-inch by
of the sole plate to be tested placed on the three inches.
outsole, and the second block with hole so Each jaw face shall have a flat smooth,
placed as to allow for free passage of the nail gripping surface. All edges which might
after it passes through the outsole stock and cause a cutting action shall be rounded to a
sole plate in that order. The machine shall radius of not over 1⁄64-inch (.04 cm). In cases
be started and the pressure, in pounds re- where a cloth tends to slip when being test-
quired for the nail to completely penetrate ed, the jaws may be faced with rubber or
the outsole and sole plate, recorded to the other material to prevent slippage. The dis-
nearest five pounds. Two determinations tance between the jaws (gage length) shall be
shall be made on each sole plate and the re- one-inch at the start of the test.
sults averaged. A new nail shall be used for (vi) Calibrated dial; scale or chart shall be
each determination. used to indicate applied load and elongation.
C. Source. These test requirements are con- The machine shall be adjusted or set, so that
tained in ‘‘Military Specification For Fire- the maximum load required to break the
man’s Boots,’’ MIL-B-2885D (1973 and amend- specimen will remain indicated on the cali-
ment dated 1975) and are reproduced for your brated dial or scale after the test specimen
convenience. has ruptured.

(2) Test method for determining the strength (vii) The machine shall be of such capacity
of cloth by tearing: Trapezoid Method. that the maximum load required to break
538
Occu. Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, App. E
the specimen shall be not greater than 85 tire inside back wall of the cabinet shall be
percent or less than 15 percent of the rated painted black to facilitate the viewing of the
capacity. test specimen and pilot flame.
(viii) The error of the machine shall not (ii) Burner. The burner shall be equipped
exceed 2 percent up to and including a 50- with a variable orifice to adjust the flame
pound load (22.6 kg) and 1 percent over a 50- height, a barrel having a 3⁄8-inch (1 cm) inside
pound load (22.6 kg) at any reading within its diameter and a pilot light.
loading range. (a) The burner may be constructed by com-
(ix) All machine attachments for deter- bining a 3⁄8-inch (1 cm) inside diameter barrel
mining maximum loads shall be disengaged 3 ±1⁄4 inches (7.6 ±.6 cm) long from a fixed ori-
during this test. fice burner with a base from a variable ori-
C. Procedure. (i) The specimen shall be fice burner.
clamped in the machine along the nonpar- (b) The pilot light tube shall have a diame-
allel sides of the trapezoid so that these sides ter of approximately 1⁄16-inch (.2 cm) and
lie along the lower edge of the upper clamp shall be spaced 1⁄8-inch (.3 cm) away from the
and the upper edge of the lower clamp with burner edge with a pilot flame 1⁄8-inch (.3 cm)
the cut halfway between the clamps. The long.
short trapezoid base shall be held taut and (c) The necessary gas connections and the
the long trapezoid base shall lie in the folds. applicable plumbing shall be as specified in
(ii) The machine shall be started and the Figure L–4 except that a solenoid valve may
force necessary to tear the cloth shall be ob-
be used in lieu of the stopcock valve to
served by means of an autographic recording
which the burner is attached. The stopcock
device. The speed of the pulling clamp shall
valve or solenoid valve, whichever is used,
be 12 inches ±0.5 inch per minute (0.5 ±.02 cm/
shall be capable of being fully opened or
sec).
fully closed in 0.1-second.
(iii) If a specimen slips between the jaws,
breaks in or at the edges of the jaws, or if for (d) On the side of the barrel of the burner,
any reason attributable to faulty technique, opposite the pilot light there shall be a
an individual measurement falls markedly metal rod of approximately 1⁄8-inch (.3 cm)
below the average test results for the sample diameter spaced 1⁄2-inch (1.3 cm) from the
unit, such result shall be discarded and an- barrel and extending above the burner. The
other specimen shall be tested. rod shall have two 5⁄16-inch (.8 cm) prongs
(iv) The tearing strength of the specimen marking the distances of 3⁄4-inch (1.9 cm) and
shall be the average of the five highest peak 11⁄2 inches (3.8 cm) above the top of the burn-
loads of resistance registered for 3 inches (7.6 er.
cm) of separation of the tear. (e) The burner shall be fixed in a position
D. Report. (i) Five specimens in each of the so that the center of the barrel of the burner
warp and filling directions shall be tested is directly below the center of the specimen.
from each sample unit. (iii) There shall be a control valve system
(ii) The tearing strength of the sample unit with a delivery rate designed to furnish gas
shall be the average of the results obtained to the burner under a pressure of 21⁄2 ±1⁄4 (psi)
from the specimens tested in each of the (17.5 ±1.8 kPa) per square inch at the burner
warp and filling directions and shall be re- inlet (see (g)(3)(vi)(A)). The manufacturer’s
ported separately to the nearest 0.1-pound recommended delivery rate for the valve sys-
(.05 kg). tem shall be included in the required pres-
E. Source. These test requirements are con- sure.
tained in ‘‘Federal Test Method Standard (iv) A synthetic gas mixture shall be of the
191, Method 5136’’ and are reproduced for following composition within the following
your convenience. limits (analyzed at standard conditions): 55
(3) Test method for determining flame resist- ±3 percent hydrogen, 24 ±1 percent methane,
ance of cloth; vertical. 3 ±1 percent ethane, and 18 ±1 percent carbon
A. Test specimen. The specimen shall be a monoxide which will give a specific gravity
rectangle of cloth 23⁄4 inches (7.0 cm) by 12 of 0.365 ±0.018 (air = 1) and a B.T.U. content
inches (30.5 cm) with the long dimension par- of 540 ±20 per cubic foot (20.1 ±3.7 kJ/L)(dry
allel to either the warp or filling direction of basis) at 69.8 °F (21 °C).
the cloth. No two warp specimens shall con- (v) There shall be metal hooks and weights
tain the same warp yarns, and no two filling to produce a series of total loads to deter-
specimens shall contain the same filling mine length of char. The metal hooks shall
yarn. consist of No. 19 gage steel wire or equiva-
B. Number of determinations. Five specimens lent and shall be made from 3-inch (7.6 cm)
from each of the warp and filling directions lengths of wire and bent 1⁄2-inch (1.3 cm) from
shall be tested from each sample unit. one end to a 45 degree hook. One end of the
C. Apparatus. (i) Cabinet. A cabinet and ac- hook shall be fastened around the neck of
cessories shall be fabricated in accordance the weight to be used.
with the requirements specified in Figures (vi) There shall be a stop watch or other
L–1, L–2, and L–3. Galvanized sheet metal or device to measure the burning time to 0.2-
other suitable metal shall be used. The en- second.
539
(vii) There shall be a scale, graduated in 0.1 ter of the charred area as follows: The speci-
inch (.3 cm) to measure the length of char. men shall be folded lengthwise and creased
D. Procedure. (i) The material undergoing by hand along a line through the highest
test shall be evaluated for the characteris- peak of the charred area. The hook shall be
tics of after-flame time and char length on inserted in the specimen (or a hole, 1⁄4-inch
each specimen. (.6 cm) diameter or less, punched out for the
(ii) All specimens to be tested shall be at hook) at one side of the charred area 1⁄4-inch
moisture equilibrium under standard atmos- (.6 cm) from the adjacent outside edge and
pheric conditions in accordance with para- 1⁄4-inch (.6 cm) in from the lower end. A
graph (3)C of this appendix. Each specimen weight of sufficient size such that the weight
to be tested shall be exposed to the test and hook together shall equal the total tear-
flame within 20 seconds after removal from ing load required in Table L–2 of this section
the standard atmosphere. In case of dispute, shall be attached to the hook.
all testing will be conducted under Standard (viii) A tearing force shall be applied gent-
Atmospheric Conditions in accordance with ly to the specimen by grasping the corner of
paragraph (3)C of this appendix. the cloth at the opposite edge of the char
(iii) The specimen in its holder shall be from the load and raising the specimen and
suspended vertically in the cabinet in such a weight clear of the supporting surface. The
manner that the entire length of the speci- end of the tear shall be marked off on the
men is exposed and the lower end is 3⁄4-inch edge and the char length measurement made
(1.9 cm) above the top of the gas burner. The along the undamaged edge.
apparatus shall be set up in a draft free area.
Loads for determining char length applica-
(iv) Prior to inserting the specimen, the
ble to the weight of the test cloth shall be as
pilot flame shall be adjusted to approxi-
shown in Table L–2.
mately 1⁄8-inch (.3 cm) in height measured
from its lowest point to the tip.
The burner flame shall be adjusted by
TABLE L–2 1
means of the needle valve in the base of the
Total tear-
burner to give a flame height of 11⁄2 inches ing weight
(3.8 cm) with the stopcock fully open and the Specified weight per square yard of cloth before for deter-
air supply to the burner shut off and taped. mining the
any fire retardant treatment or coating—ounces charred
The 11⁄2-inch (3.8 cm) flame height is ob- length—
tained by adjusting the valve so that the up- pound
permost portion (tip) of the flame is level
with the tip of the metal prong (see Figure 2.0 to 6.0 ............................................................. 0.25
L–2) specified for adjustment of flame Over 6.0 to 15.0 .................................................. 0.50
height. It is an important aspect of the eval- Over 15.0 to 23.0 ................................................ 0.75
uation that the flame height be adjusted Over 23.0 ............................................................. 1.0
with the tip of the flame level with the tip of 1 To change into S.I. (System International) units, 1 ounce =
the metal prong. After inserting the speci- 28.35 grams, 1 pound = 453 grams, 1 yard = .91 metre.
men, the stopcock shall be fully opened, and
(ix) The after-flame time of the specimen
the burner flame applied vertically at the
shall be recorded to the nearest 0.2-second
middle of the lower edge of the specimen for
and the char length to the nearest 0.1-inch (.3
12 seconds and the burner turned off. The
cm).
cabinet door shall remain shut during test-
ing. E. Report. (i) The after-flame time and char
(v) The after-flame shall be the time the length of the sample unit shall be the aver-
specimen continues to flame after the burner age of the results obtained from the indi-
flame is shut off. vidual specimens tested. All values obtained
(vi) After each specimen is removed, the from the individual specimens shall be re-
test cabinet shall be cleared of fumes and corded.
smoke prior to testing the next specimen. (ii) The after-flame time shall be reported
(vii) After both flaming and glowing have to the nearest 0.2-second and the char length
ceased, the char length shall be measured. to the nearest 0.1-inch (.3 cm).
The char length shall be the distance from F. Source. These test requirements are con-
the end of the specimen, which was exposed tained in ‘‘Federal Test Method Standard
to the flame, to the end of a tear (made 191, Method 5903 (1971)’’ and are reproduced
lengthwise) of the specimen through the cen- for your convenience.
540
541
EC27OC91.032</GPH>
542
EC27OC91.033</GPH>
543
EC27OC91.034</GPH>
§§ 1910.166–1910.168 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–21 Edition)
[45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May 1, 1981]
Subpart M—Compressed Gas and pressed air as in tunnels and caissons.

Compressed Air Equipment This section is not intended to apply to
compressed air machinery and equip-
ment used on transportation vehicles
AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu- such as steam railroad cars, electric
U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s
railway cars, and automotive equip-
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR ment.
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 1–90 (55 FR 9033), (2) New and existing equipment. (i) All
as applicable. new air receivers installed after the ef-
fective date of these regulations shall
§§ 1910.166–1910.168 [Reserved] be constructed in accordance with the
1968 edition of the A.S.M.E. Boiler and
§ 1910.169 Air receivers. Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII,
(a) General requirements—(1) Applica- which is incorporated by reference as
tion. This section applies to compressed specified in § 1910.6.
air receivers, and other equipment used (ii) All safety valves used shall be
in providing and utilizing compressed constructed, installed, and maintained
air for performing operations such as in accordance with the A.S.M.E. Boiler
cleaning, drilling, hoisting, and chip- and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII
ping. On the other hand, however, this Edition 1968.
section does not deal with the special (b) Installation and equipment require-
problems created by using compressed ments—(1) Installation. Air receivers
air to convey materials nor the prob- shall be so installed that all drains,
lems created when men work in com- handholes, and manholes therein are
544
EC27OC91.035</GPH>
easily accessible. Under no cir- be allowed for aisles, at loading docks,

cumstances shall an air receiver be through doorways and wherever turns
buried underground or located in an in- or passage must be made. Aisles and
accessible place. passageways shall be kept clear and in
(2) Drains and traps. A drain pipe and good repair, with no obstruction across
valve shall be installed at the lowest or in aisles that could create a hazard.
point of every air receiver to provide Permanent aisles and passageways
for the removal of accumulated oil and shall be appropriately marked.
water. Adequate automatic traps may (b) Secure storage. Storage of material
be installed in addition to drain valves. shall not create a hazard. Bags, con-
The drain valve on the air receiver tainers, bundles, etc., stored in tiers
shall be opened and the receiver com- shall be stacked, blocked, interlocked
pletely drained frequently and at such and limited in height so that they are
intervals as to prevent the accumula- stable and secure against sliding or col-
tion of excessive amounts of liquid in lapse.
the receiver. (c) Housekeeping. Storage areas shall
(3) Gages and valves. (i) Every air re- be kept free from accumulation of ma-
ceiver shall be equipped with an indi- terials that constitute hazards from
cating pressure gage (so located as to tripping, fire, explosion, or pest harbor-
be readily visible) and with one or age. Vegetation control will be exer-
more spring-loaded safety valves. The cised when necessary.
total relieving capacity of such safety (d) [Reserved]
valves shall be such as to prevent pres- (e) Clearance limits. Clearance signs to
sure in the receiver from exceeding the warn of clearance limits shall be pro-
maximum allowable working pressure vided.
of the receiver by more than 10 per- (f) Rolling railroad cars. Derail and/or
cent. bumper blocks shall be provided on
(ii) No valve of any type shall be spur railroad tracks where a rolling car
placed between the air receiver and its could contact other cars being worked,
safety valve or valves. enter a building, work or traffic area.
(iii) Safety appliances, such as safety (g) Guarding. Covers and/or guardrails
valves, indicating devices and control- shall be provided to protect personnel
ling devices, shall be constructed, lo- from the hazards of open pits, tanks,
cated, and installed so that they can- vats, ditches, etc.
not be readily rendered inoperative by [39 FR 23052, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43
any means, including the elements. FR 49749, Oct. 24, 1978]
(iv) All safety valves shall be tested
frequently and at regular intervals to § 1910.177 Servicing multi-piece and
determine whether they are in good op- single piece rim wheels.
erating condition. (a) Scope. (1) This section applies to
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 the servicing of multi-piece and single
FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996] piece rim wheels used on large vehicles
such as trucks, tractors, trailers, buses
Subpart N—Materials Handling and off-road machines. It does not
apply to the servicing of rim wheels
and Storage used on automobiles, or on pickup
trucks and vans utilizing automobile
AUTHORITY: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Sec- tires or truck tires designated ‘‘LT’’.
(2) This section does not apply to em-
8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55
FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), ployers and places of employment reg-
5–2002 (67 FR 65008), 5–2007 (72 FR 31159), 4– ulated under the Longshoring Stand-
2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as ards, 29 CFR part 1918; Construction
applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. Safety Standards, 29 CFR part 1926; or
Agriculture Standards, 29 CFR part
§ 1910.176 Handling materials—gen- 1928.
eral. (3) All provisions of this section
(a) Use of mechanical equipment. apply to the servicing of both single
Where mechanical handling equipment piece rim wheels and multi-piece rim
is used, sufficient safe clearances shall wheels unless designated otherwise.
545
(b) Definitions. Barrier means a fence, Rim wheel means an assemblage of

wall or other structure or object placed tire, tube and liner (where appro-
between a single piece rim wheel and priate), and wheel components.
an employee during tire inflation, to Service or servicing means the mount-
contain the rim wheel components in ing and demounting of rim wheels, and
the event of the sudden release of the related activities such as inflating, de-
contained air of the single piece rim flating, installing, removing, and han-
wheel. dling.
Charts means the U.S. Department of Service area means that part of an
Labor, Occupational Safety and Health employer’s premises used for the serv-
Administration publications entitled icing of rim wheels, or any other place
‘‘Demounting and Mounting Proce- where an employee services rim
dures for Tube-Type Truck and Bus wheels.
Tires,’’ ‘‘Demounting and Mounting Single piece rim wheel means the as-
Procedures for Tubeless Truck and Bus semblage of single piece rim wheel
Tires,’’ and ‘‘Multi-Piece Rim Match- with the tire and other components.
ing Chart.’’ These charts may be in Single piece wheel means a vehicle
manual or poster form. OSHA also will wheel consisting of one part, designed
accept any other manual or poster that to hold the tire on the wheel when the
provides at least the same instructions, tire is inflated.
safety precautions, and other informa- Trajectory means any potential path
tion contained in these publications, or route that a rim wheel component
which is applicable to the types of may travel during an explosive separa-
wheels the employer is servicing. tion, or the sudden release of the pres-
Installing a rim wheel means the surized air, or an area at which an air-
transfer and attachment of an assem- blast from a single piece rim wheel
bled rim wheel onto a vehicle axle hub. may be released. The trajectory may
Removing means the opposite of install- deviate from paths which are perpen-
ing. dicular to the assembled position of the
Mounting a tire means the assembly rim wheel at the time of separation or
or putting together of the wheel and explosion. (See appendix A for exam-
tire components to form a rim wheel, ples of trajectories.)
including inflation. Demounting means Wheel means that portion of a rim
the opposite of mounting. wheel which provides the method of at-
Multi-piece rim wheel means the as- tachment of the assembly to the axle
semblage of a multi-piece wheel with of a vehicle and also provides the
the tire tube and other components. means to contain the inflated portion
Multi-piece wheel means a vehicle of the assembly (i.e., the tire and/or
wheel consisting of two or more parts, tube).
one of which is a side or locking ring (c) Employee training. (1) The em-
designed to hold the tire on the wheel ployer shall provide a program to train
by interlocking components when the all employees who service rim wheels
tire is inflated. in the hazards involved in servicing
Restraining device means an apparatus those rim wheels and the safety proce-
such as a cage, rack, assemblage of dures to be followed.
bars and other components that will (i) The employer shall assure that no
constrain all rim wheel components employee services any rim wheel un-
during an explosive separation of a less the employee has been trained and
multi-piece rim wheel, or during the instructed in correct procedures of
sudden release of the contained air of a servicing the type of wheel being serv-
single piece rim wheel. iced, and in the safe operating proce-
Rim manual means a publication con- dures described in paragraphs (f) and
taining instructions from the manufac- (g) of this section.
turer or other qualified organization (ii) Information to be used in the
for correct mounting, demounting, training program shall include, at a
maintenance, and safety precautions minimum, the applicable data con-
peculiar to the type of wheel being tained in the charts (rim manuals) and
serviced. the contents of this standard.
546
(iii) Where an employer knows or has the maximum tire specification pres-
reason to believe that any of his em- sure for the type of rim wheel being
ployees is unable to read and under- serviced.
stand the charts or rim manual, the (ii) Restraining devices and barriers
employer shall assure that the em- shall be capable of preventing the rim
ployee is instructed concerning the wheel components from being thrown
contents of the charts and rim manual outside or beyond the device or barrier
in a manner which the employee is able for any rim wheel positioned within or
to understand. behind the device;
(2) The employer shall assure that (iii) Restraining devices and barriers
each employee demonstrates and main- shall be visually inspected prior to
tains the ability to service rim wheels each day’s use and after any separation
safely, including performance of the of the rim wheel components or sudden
following tasks: release of contained air. Any restrain-
(i) Demounting of tires (including de- ing device or barrier exhibiting damage
flation); such as the following defects shall be
(ii) Inspection and identification of immediately removed from service:
the rim wheel components; (A) Cracks at welds;
(iii) Mounting of tires (including in- (B) Cracked or broken components;
flation with a restraining device or (C) Bent or sprung components
other safeguard required by this sec- caused by mishandling, abuse, tire ex-
tion); plosion or rim wheel separation;
(iv) Use of the restraining device or
(D) Pitting of components due to cor-
barrier, and other equipment required
rosion; or
by this section;
(E) Other structural damage which
(v) Handling of rim wheels;
would decrease its effectiveness.
(vi) Inflation of the tire when a single
piece rim wheel is mounted on a vehi- (iv) Restraining devices or barriers
cle; removed from service shall not be re-
(vii) An understanding of the neces- turned to service until they are re-
sity of standing outside the trajectory paired and reinspected. Restraining de-
both during inflation of the tire and vices or barriers requiring structural
during inspection of the rim wheel fol- repair such as component replacement
lowing inflation; and or rewelding shall not be returned to
(viii) Installation and removal of rim service until they are certified by ei-
wheels. ther the manufacturer or a Registered
(3) The employer shall evaluate each Professional Engineer as meeting the
employee’s ability to perform these strength requirements of paragraph
tasks and to service rim wheels safely, (d)(3)(i) of this section.
and shall provide additional training as (4) The employer shall furnish and as-
necessary to assure that each employee sure that an air line assembly con-
maintains his or her proficiency. sisting of the following components be
(d) Tire servicing equipment. (1) The used for inflating tires:
employer shall furnish a restraining (i) A clip-on chuck;
device for inflating tires on multi-piece (ii) An in-line valve with a pressure
wheels. gauge or a presettable regulator; and
(2) The employer shall provide a re- (iii) A sufficient length of hose be-
straining device or barrier for inflating tween the clip-on chuck and the in-line
tires on single piece wheels unless the valve (if one is used) to allow the em-
rim wheel will be bolted onto a vehicle ployee to stand outside the trajectory.
during inflation. (5) Current charts or rim manuals
(3) Restraining devices and barriers containing instructions for the type of
shall comply with the following re- wheels being serviced shall be available
quirements: in the service area.
(i) Each restraining device or barrier (6) The employer shall furnish and as-
shall have the capacity to withstand sure that only tools recommended in
the maximum force that would be the rim manual for the type of wheel
transferred to it during a rim wheel being serviced are used to service rim
separation occurring at 150 percent of wheels.
547
(e) Wheel component acceptability. (1) (5) Tires shall be inflated outside a
Multi-piece wheel components shall restraining device only to a pressure
not be interchanged except as provided sufficient to force the tire bead onto
in the charts or in the applicable rim the rim ledge and create an airtight
manual. seal with the tire and bead.
(2) Multi-piece wheel components and (6) Whenever a rim wheel is in a re-
single piece wheels shall be inspected straining device the employee shall not
prior to assembly. Any wheel or wheel rest or lean any part of his body or
component which is bent out of shape, equipment on or against the restrain-
pitted from corrosion, broken, or ing device.
cracked shall not be used and shall be (7) After tire inflation, the tire and
marked or tagged unserviceable and re- wheel components shall be inspected
moved from the service area. Damaged while still within the restraining de-
or leaky valves shall be replaced. vice to make sure that they are prop-
(3) Rim flanges, rim gutters, rings, erly seated and locked. If further ad-
bead seating surfaces and the bead justment to the tire or wheel compo-
areas of tires shall be free of any dirt, nents is necessary, the tire shall be de-
surface rust, scale or loose or flaked flated by removal of the valve core be-
rubber build-up prior to mounting and fore the adjustment is made.
inflation. (8) No attempt shall be made to cor-
(4) The size (bead diameter and tire/ rect the seating of side and lock rings
wheel widths) and type of both the tire by hammering, striking or forcing the
and the wheel shall be checked for components while the tire is pressur-
compatibility prior to assembly of the ized.
rim wheel. (9) Cracked, broken, bent or other-
(f) Safe operating procedure—multi- wise damaged rim components shall
piece rim wheels. The employer shall es- not be reworked, welded, brazed, or
tablish a safe operating procedure for otherwise heated.
servicing multi-piece rim wheels and (10) Whenever multi-piece rim wheels
shall assure that employees are in- are being handled, employees shall stay
structed in and follow that procedure. out of the trajectory unless the em-
The procedure shall include at least ployer can demonstrate that perform-
the following elements: ance of the servicing makes the em-
(1) Tires shall be completely deflated ployee’s presence in the trajectory nec-
before demounting by removal of the essary.
valve core. (11) No heat shall be applied to a
(2) Tires shall be completely deflated multi-piece wheel or wheel component.
by removing the valve core before a (g) Safe operating procedure—single
rim wheel is removed from the axle in piece rim wheels. The employer shall es-
either of the following situations: tablish a safe operating procedure for
(i) When the tire has been driven servicing single piece rim wheels and
underinflated at 80% or less of its rec- shall assure that employees are in-
ommended pressure, or structed in and follow that procedure.
(ii) When there is obvious or sus- The procedure shall include at least
pected damage to the tire or wheel the following elements:
components. (1) Tires shall be completely deflated
(3) Rubber lubricant shall be applied by removal of the valve core before de-
to bead and rim mating surfaces during mounting.
assembly of the wheel and inflation of (2) Mounting and demounting of the
the tire, unless the tire or wheel manu- tire shall be done only from the narrow
facturer recommends against it. ledge side of the wheel. Care shall be
(4) If a tire on a vehicle is undertaken to avoid damaging the tire beads
inflated but has more than 80% of the while mounting tires on wheels. Tires
recommended pressure, the tire may be shall be mounted only on compatible
inflated while the rim wheel is on the wheels of matching bead diameter and
vehicle provided remote control infla- width.
tion equipment is used, and no employ- (3) Nonflammable rubber lubricant
ees remain in the trajectory during in- shall be applied to bead and wheel mat-
flation. ing surfaces before assembly of the rim
548
wheel, unless the tire or wheel manu- tory and within one foot of the side-
facturer recommends against the use of wall.
any rubber lubricant. (8) Employees shall stay out of the
(4) If a tire changing machine is used, trajectory when inflating a tire.
the tire shall be inflated only to the (9) Tires shall not be inflated to more
minimum pressure necessary to force than the inflation pressure stamped in
the tire bead onto the rim ledge while
the sidewall unless a higher pressure is
on the tire changing machine.
recommended by the manufacturer.
(5) If a bead expander is used, it shall
be removed before the valve core is in- (10) Tires shall not be inflated above
stalled and as soon as the rim wheel be- the maximum pressure recommended
comes airtight (the tire bead slips onto by the manufacturer to seat the tire
the bead seat). bead firmly against the rim flange.
(6) Tires may be inflated only when (11) No heat shall be applied to a sin-
contained within a restraining device, gle piece wheel.
positioned behind a barrier or bolted on (12) Cracked, broken, bent, or other-
the vehicle with the lug nuts fully wise damaged wheels shall not be re-
tightened. worked, welded, brazed, or otherwise
(7) Tires shall not be inflated when heated.
any flat, solid surface is in the trajec-
549
APPENDIX B TO § 1910.177—ORDERING containing the three charts, entitled ‘‘De-

INFORMATION FOR THE OSHA CHARTS mounting and Mounting Procedures for
Tubeless Truck and Bus Tires,’’ ‘‘Demount-

The information on the OSHA charts is
ing and Mounting Procedures for Tube-Type
available on three posters, or in a manual
550
EC27OC91.036</GPH>
Truck and Bus Tires,’’ and ‘‘Multi-piece Rim (4) Modifications and additions which
Matching Chart.’’ Interested parties can affect capacity and safe operation shall
download and print both the manuals and not be performed by the customer or
posters from OSHA’s Web site at http://
user without manufacturers prior writ-
www.osha.gov/publications (and type ‘‘tire
chart’’ in the search field). However, when
ten approval. Capacity, operation, and
used by the employer at a worksite to pro- maintenance instruction plates, tags,
vide information to employees, the printed or decals shall be changed accordingly.
posters must be, at a minimum, 2 feet wide (5) If the truck is equipped with
and 3 feet long. Copies of the manual also are front-end attachments other than fac-
available from the Occupational Safety and tory installed attachments, the user
Health Administration (OSHA Office of Pub- shall request that the truck be marked
lications, Room N–3101, U.S. Department of to identify the attachments and show
Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue NW., Wash-
the approximate weight of the truck
ington, DC 20210; telephone: (202) 693–1888; or
fax: (202) 693–2498). and attachment combination at max-
imum elevation with load laterally
[49 FR 4350, Feb. 3, 1984, as amended at 52 FR centered.
36026, Sept. 25, 1987; 53 FR 34737, Sept. 8, 1988; (6) The user shall see that all name-
61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 76 FR 24698, May 2,
plates and markings are in place and
2011; 76 FR 80739, Dec. 27, 2011]
are maintained in a legible condition.
§ 1910.178 Powered industrial trucks. (7) As used in this section, the term,
approved truck or approved industrial
(a) General requirements. (1) This sec- truck means a truck that is listed or
tion contains safety requirements reapproved for fire safety purposes for
lating to fire protection, design, main- the intended use by a nationally recog-
tenance, and use of fork trucks, trac- nized testing laboratory, using nation-
tors, platform lift trucks, motorized ally recognized testing standards.
hand trucks, and other specialized in- Refer to § 1910.155(c)(3)(iv)(A) for defini-
dustrial trucks powered by electric motion of listed, and to § 1910.7 for defini-
tors or internal combustion engines. tion of nationally recognized testing
This section does not apply to com- laboratory.
pressed air or nonflammable com- (b) Designations. For the purpose of
pressed gas-operated industrial trucks, this standard there are eleven different
nor to farm vehicles, nor to vehicles in- designations of industrial trucks or
tended primarily for earth moving or tractors as follows: D, DS, DY, E, ES,
over-the-road hauling. EE, EX, G, GS, LP, and LPS.
(2) All new powered industrial trucks (1) The D designated units are units
acquired and used by an employer shall similar to the G units except that they
meet the design and construction re- are diesel engine powered instead of
quirements for powered industrial gasoline engine powered.
trucks established in the ‘‘American (2) The DS designated units are diesel
National Standard for Powered Indus- powered units that are provided with
trial Trucks, Part II, ANSI B56.1–1969’’, additional safeguards to the exhaust,
which is incorporated by reference as fuel and electrical systems. They may
specified in § 1910.6, except for vehicles be used in some locations where a D
intended primarily for earth moving or unit may not be considered suitable.
over-the-road hauling. (3) The DY designated units are die-
(3) Approved trucks shall bear a label sel powered units that have all the
or some other identifying mark indi- safeguards of the DS units and in addi-
cating approval by the testing labora- tion do not have any electrical equip-
tory. See paragraph (a)(7) of this sec- ment including the ignition and are
tion and paragraph 405 of ‘‘American equipped with temperature limitation
National Standard for Powered Indus- features.
trial Trucks, Part II, ANSI B56.1–1969’’, (4) The E designated units are elec-
which is incorporated by reference in trically powered units that have min-
paragraph (a)(2) of this section and imum acceptable safeguards against in-
which provides that if the powered inherent fire hazards.
dustrial truck is accepted by a nation- (5) The ES designated units are elec-
ally recognized testing laboratory it trically powered units that, in addition

should be so marked. to all of the requirements for the E
551
units, are provided with additional trucks having greater safeguards may
safeguards to the electrical system to be used if desired.
prevent emission of hazardous sparks (2) For specific areas of use, see Table
and to limit surface temperatures. N–1 which tabulates the information
They may be used in some locations contained in this section. References
where the use of an E unit may not be are to the corresponding classification
considered suitable. as used in subpart S of this part.
(6) The EE designated units are elec- (i) Power-operated industrial trucks
trically powered units that have, in ad- shall not be used in atmospheres con-
dition to all of the requirements for taining hazardous concentration of
the E and ES units, the electric motors acetylene, butadiene, ethylene oxide,
and all other electrical equipment hydrogen (or gases or vapors equiva-
completely enclosed. In certain loca- lent in hazard to hydrogen, such as
tions the EE unit may be used where manufactured gas), propylene oxide,
the use of an E and ES unit may not be acetaldehyde, cyclopropane, diethyl
considered suitable. ether, ethylene, isoprene, or unsym-
(7) The EX designated units are elec- metrical dimethyl hydrazine (UDMH).
trically powered units that differ from (ii)(a) Power-operated industrial
the E, ES, or EE units in that the elec- trucks shall not be used in
trical fittings and equipment are so de- atmospheres containing hazardous con-
signed, constructed and assembled that centrations of metal dust, including
the units may be used in certain aluminum, magnesium, and their com-
atmospheres containing flammable va- mercial alloys, other metals of simi-
pors or dusts. larly hazardous characteristics, or in
atmospheres containing carbon black,
(8) The G designated units are gaso-
coal or coke dust except approved
line powered units having minimum
power-operated industrial trucks des-
acceptable safeguards against inherent
ignated as EX may be used in such
fire hazards.
atmospheres.
(9) The GS designated units are gaso- (b) In atmospheres where dust of
line powered units that are provided magnesium, aluminum or aluminum
with additional safeguards to the ex- bronze may be present, fuses, switches,
haust, fuel, and electrical systems. motor controllers, and circuit breakers
They may be used in some locations of trucks shall have enclosures specifi-
where the use of a G unit may not be cally approved for such locations.
considered suitable. (iii) Only approved power-operated
(10) The LP designated unit is similar industrial trucks designated as EX
to the G unit except that liquefied pe- may be used in atmospheres containing
troleum gas is used for fuel instead of acetone, acrylonitrile, alcohol, ammo-
gasoline. nia, benzine, benzol, butane, ethylene
(11) The LPS designated units are liq- dichloride, gasoline, hexane, lacquer
uefied petroleum gas powered units solvent vapors, naphtha, natural gas,
that are provided with additional safe- propane, propylene, styrene, vinyl ace-
guards to the exhaust, fuel, and elec- tate, vinyl chloride, or xylenes in quan-
trical systems. They may be used in tities sufficient to produce explosive or
some locations where the use of an LP ignitable mixtures and where such con-
unit may not be considered suitable. centrations of these gases or vapors
(12) The atmosphere or location shall exist continuously, intermittently or
have been classified as to whether it is periodically under normal operating
hazardous or nonhazardous prior to the conditions or may exist frequently be-
consideration of industrial trucks cause of repair, maintenance oper-
being used therein and the type of in- ations, leakage, breakdown or faulty
dustrial truck required shall be as pro- operation of equipment.
vided in paragraph (d) of this section (iv) Power-operated industrial trucks
for such location. designated as DY, EE, or EX may be
(c) Designated locations. (1) The indus- used in locations where volatile flam-
trial trucks specified under subpara- mable liquids or flammable gases are
graph (2) of this paragraph are the min- handled, processed or used, but in
imum types required but industrial which the hazardous liquids, vapors or
552
gases will normally be confined within ure or abnormal operation of the ven-
closed containers or closed systems tilating equipment; or in locations
from which they can escape only in which are adjacent to Class I, Division
case of accidental rupture or break- 1 locations, and to which hazardous
down of such containers or systems, or concentrations of gases or vapors
in the case of abnormal operation of might occasionally be communicated
equipment; also in locations in which unless such communication is pre-
hazardous concentrations of gases or vented by adequate positive-pressure
vapors are normally prevented by posi- ventilation from a source of clear air,
tive mechanical ventilation but which and effective safeguards against ven-
might become hazardous through fail- tilation failure are provided.
553
VerDate Sep<11>2014
TABLE N–1—SUMMARY TABLE ON USE OF INDUSTRIAL TRUCKS IN VARIOUS LOCATIONS
Classes Unclassified Class I locations Class II locations Class III locations
11:40 Aug 11, 2021

Description of classes Locations not possessing Locations in which flammable gases or vapors Locations which are hazardous because of the Locations where easily ignitible
atmospheres as de- are, or may be, present in the air in quantities presence of combustible dust. fibers or flyings are present
§ 1910.178
scribed in other columns. sufficient to produce explosive or ignitible mix- but not likely to be in suspen-
tures. sion in quantities sufficient to
Jkt 253121
produce ignitible mixtures.
Groups in classes None A B C D E F G None
Examples of locations Piers and wharves inside Acetylene Hydrogen Ethyl ether Gasoline Metal dust Carbon Grain dust, flour dust, Baled waste, cocoa
or atmospheres in and outside general Naphtha black coal starch dust, organic fiber, cotton, excel-
PO 00000
classes and groups. storage, general indus- Alcohols dust, dust sior, hemp, istle,
trial or commercial Acetone coke dust jute, kapok, oakum,
properties. Lacquer sisal, Spanish
solvent moss, synthetic fi-
Benzene bers, tow.
Frm 00564
TABLE N–1—SUMMARY TABLE ON USE OF INDUSTRIAL TRUCKS IN VARIOUS LOCATIONS—CONTINUED
1 2 1 2 1 2
Fmt 8010
554
Divisions (nature of None Above condition exists Above condition may Explosive mixture may Explosive mixture not Locations in which eas- Locations in which eas-
hazardous condi- continuously, inter- occur accidentally as be present under normally present, but ily ignitible fibers or ily ignitible fibers are
tions) mittently, or periodi- due to a puncture of normal operating where deposits of materials producing stored or handled
cally under normal a storage drum. conditions, or where dust may cause heat combustible flyings (except in the proc-
Sfmt 8002
operating conditions. failure of equipment rise in electrical are handled, manu- ess of manufacture).
may cause the con- equipment, or where factured, or used.
dition to exist simul- such deposits may
taneously with arcing be ignited by arcs or
or sparking of elec- sparks from electrical
trical equipment, or equipment.
where dusts of an
electrically con-
Q:\29\29V5.TXT
ducting nature may
be present.
PC31
Authorized uses of trucks by types in groups of classes and divisions
Groups in classes None A B C D A B C D E F G E F G None None
Type of truck author-

ized:
Diesel:
Type D ................. D** ........... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .................
Type DS ............... ................. .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... DS .... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... DS .... ................. DS
29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–21 Edition)
Type DY ............... ................. .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... DY .... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... DY .... DY ........... DY
VerDate Sep<11>2014
Electric:
Type E ................. E** ........... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ................. E
Type ES ............... ................. .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ES .... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ES .... ................. ES
11:40 Aug 11, 2021

Type EE ............... ................. .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... EE .... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... EE .... EE ........... EE
Type EX ............... ................. .......... .......... .......... EX .... .......... .......... .......... EX .... .......... EX .... EX .... .......... .......... EX .... EX ........... EX
Gasoline:
Type G ................. G** .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .................
Type GS .............. ................. .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... GS .... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... GS .... ................. GS
Jkt 253121
LP-Gas:
Type LP ............... LP** ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .................
Type LPS ............. ................. .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... LPS .. .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... LPS .. ................. LPS
Paragraph Ref. in No. 210.211 201 203 209 204 202 205 209 206 207(a) 208 (a)
505. (a) (a) (a) (a), (a) (a) (a) (a),
PO 00000
(b) (b)
**Trucks conforming to these types may also be used—see subdivision (c)(2)(x) and (c)(2)(xii) of this section.
Frm 00565
Occu. Safety and Health Admin., Labor
Fmt 8010
555
Sfmt 8002
Q:\29\29V5.TXT
PC31
§ 1910.178
(v) In locations used for the storage plants, malting plants, hay grinding
of hazardous liquids in sealed con- plants, and other occupancies of simi-
tainers or liquefied or compressed lar nature; coal pulverizing plants (ex-
gases in containers, approved power-op- cept where the pulverizing equipment
erated industrial trucks designated as is essentially dust tight); all working
DS, ES, GS, or LPS may be used. This areas where metal dusts and powders
classification includes locations where are produced, processed, handled,
volatile flammable liquids or flam- packed, or stored (except in tight con-
mable gases or vapors are used, but tainers); and other similar locations
which, would become hazardous only in where combustible dust may, under
case of an accident or of some unusual normal operating conditions, be
operating condition. The quantity of present in the air in quantities suffi-
hazardous material that might escape cient to produce explosive or ignitable
in case of accident, the adequacy of mixtures.
ventilating equipment, the total area (vii) Only approved power-operated
involved, and the record of the indus- industrial trucks designated as DY,
try or business with respect to explo- EE, or EX shall be used in atmospheres
sions or fires are all factors that should in which combustible dust will not nor-
receive consideration in determining mally be in suspension in the air or
whether or not the DS or DY, ES, EE, will not be likely to be thrown into
GS, LPS designated truck possesses suspension by the normal operation of
sufficient safeguards for the location. equipment or apparatus in quantities
Piping without valves, checks, meters sufficient to produce explosive or ignit-
and similar devices would not ordi- able mixtures but where deposits or ac-
narily be deemed to introduce a haz- cumulations of such dust may be ig-
ardous condition even though used for nited by arcs or sparks originating in
hazardous liquids or gases. Locations the truck.
used for the storage of hazardous liq- (viii) Only approved power-operated
uids or of liquified or compressed gases industrial trucks designated as DY,
in sealed containers would not nor- EE, or EX shall be used in locations
mally be considered hazardous unless which are hazardous because of the
subject to other hazardous conditions presence of easily ignitable fibers or
also. flyings but in which such fibers or
(vi)(a) Only approved power operated flyings are not likely to be in suspen-
industrial trucks designated as EX sion in the air in quantities sufficient
shall be used in atmospheres in which to produce ignitable mixtures.
combustible dust is or may be in sus- (ix) Only approved power-operated in-
pension continuously, intermittently, dustrial trucks designated as DS, DY,
or periodically under normal operating ES, EE, EX, GS, or LPS shall be used
conditions, in quantities sufficient to in locations where easily ignitable fi-
produce explosive or ignitable mix- bers are stored or handled, including
tures, or where mechanical failure or outside storage, but are not being proc-
abnormal operation of machinery or essed or manufactured. Industrial
equipment might cause such mixtures trucks designated as E, which have
to be produced. been previously used in these locations
(b) The EX classification usually in- may be continued in use.
cludes the working areas of grain han- (x) On piers and wharves handling
dling and storage plants, room con- general cargo, any approved power-op-
taining grinders or pulverizers, clean- erated industrial truck designated as
ers, graders, scalpers, open conveyors Type D, E, G, or LP may be used, or
or spouts, open bins or hoppers, mixers, trucks which conform to the require-
or blenders, automatic or hopper ments for these types may be used.
scales, packing machinery, elevator (xi) If storage warehouses and outside
heads and boots, stock distributors, storage locations are hazardous only
dust and stock collectors (except all- the approved power-operated industrial
metal collectors vented to the outside), truck specified for such locations in
and all similar dust producing machin- this paragraph (c)(2) shall be used. If
ery and equipment in grain processing not classified as hazardous, any ap-
plants, starch plants, sugar pulverizing proved power-operated industrial truck
556
designated as Type D, E, G, or LP may tilation for dispersal of fumes from

be used, or trucks which conform to gassing batteries.
the requirements for these types may (3) [Reserved]
be used. (4) A conveyor, overhead hoist, or
(xii) If general industrial or commer- equivalent material handling equip-
cial properties are hazardous, only ap- ment shall be provided for handling
proved power-operated industrial batteries.
trucks specified for such locations in (5) Reinstalled batteries shall be
this paragraph (c)(2) shall be used. If properly positioned and secured in the
not classified as hazardous, any ap- truck.
proved power-operated industrial truck (6) A carboy tilter or siphon shall be
designated as Type D, E, G, or LP may provided for handling electrolyte.
be used, or trucks which conform to (7) When charging batteries, acid
the requirements of these types may be shall be poured into water; water shall
used. not be poured into acid.
(d) Converted industrial trucks. Power- (8) Trucks shall be properly posi-
operated industrial trucks that have tioned and brake applied before at-
been originally approved for the use of tempting to change or charge bat-
gasoline for fuel, when converted to the teries.
use of liquefied petroleum gas fuel in (9) Care shall be taken to assure that
accordance with paragraph (q) of this vent caps are functioning. The battery
section, may be used in those locations (or compartment) cover(s) shall be
where G, GS or LP, and LPS des- open to dissipate heat.
ignated trucks have been specified in (10) Smoking shall be prohibited in
the preceding paragraphs. the charging area.
(e) Safety guards. (1) High Lift Rider (11) Precautions shall be taken to
trucks shall be fitted with an overhead prevent open flames, sparks, or electric
guard manufactured in accordance arcs in battery charging areas.
with paragraph (a)(2) of this section, (12) Tools and other metallic objects
unless operating conditions do not per- shall be kept away from the top of un-
mit. covered batteries.
(2) If the type of load presents a haz- (h) Lighting for operating areas. (1)
ard, the user shall equip fork trucks [Reserved]
with a vertical load backrest extension (2) Where general lighting is less
manufactured in accordance with para- than 2 lumens per square foot, auxil-
graph (a)(2) of this section. iary directional lighting shall be pro-
(f) Fuel handling and storage. (1) The vided on the truck.
storage and handling of liquid fuels (i) Control of noxious gases and fumes.
such as gasoline and diesel fuel shall be (1) Concentration levels of carbon mon-
in accordance with NFPA Flammable oxide gas created by powered industrial
and Combustible Liquids Code (NFPA truck operations shall not exceed the
No. 30–1969), which is incorporated by levels specified in § 1910.1000.
reference as specified in § 1910.6. (j) Dockboards (bridge plates). See sub-
(2) The storage and handling of lique- part D of this part.
fied petroleum gas fuel shall be in ac- (k) Trucks and railroad cars. (1) The
cordance with NFPA Storage and Han- brakes of highway trucks shall be set
dling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases and wheel chocks placed under the rear
(NFPA No. 58–1969), which is incor- wheels to prevent the trucks from roll-
porated by reference as specified in ing while they are boarded with pow-
§ 1910.6. ered industrial trucks.
(g) Changing and charging storage bat- (2) Wheel stops or other recognized
teries. (1) Battery charging installa- positive protection shall be provided to
tions shall be located in areas des- prevent railroad cars from moving dur-
ignated for that purpose. ing loading or unloading operations.
(2) Facilities shall be provided for (3) Fixed jacks may be necessary to
flushing and neutralizing spilled elec- support a semitrailer and prevent up-
trolyte, for fire protection, for pro- ending during the loading or unloading
tecting charging apparatus from dam- when the trailer is not coupled to a
age by trucks, and for adequate ven- tractor.
557
(4) Positive protection shall be pro- (C) Truck controls and instrumenta-
vided to prevent railroad cars from tion: where they are located, what they
being moved while dockboards or do, and how they work;
bridge plates are in position. (D) Engine or motor operation;
(l) Operator training. (1) Safe oper- (E) Steering and maneuvering;
ation. (i) The employer shall ensure (F) Visibility (including restrictions
that each powered industrial truck op- due to loading);
erator is competent to operate a pow- (G) Fork and attachment adaptation,
ered industrial truck safely, as dem- operation, and use limitations;
onstrated by the successful completion (H) Vehicle capacity;
of the training and evaluation specified
(I) Vehicle stability;
in this paragraph (l).
(J) Any vehicle inspection and main-
(ii) Prior to permitting an employee
tenance that the operator will be re-
to operate a powered industrial truck
quired to perform;
(except for training purposes), the em-
ployer shall ensure that each operator (K) Refueling and/or charging and re-
has successfully completed the train- charging of batteries;
ing required by this paragraph (l), ex- (L) Operating limitations;
cept as permitted by paragraph (l)(5). (M) Any other operating instruc-
(2) Training program implementation. tions, warnings, or precautions listed
(i) Trainees may operate a powered in- in the operator’s manual for the types
dustrial truck only: of vehicle that the employee is being
(A) Under the direct supervision of trained to operate.
persons who have the knowledge, train- (ii) Workplace-related topics:
ing, and experience to train operators (A) Surface conditions where the ve-
and evaluate their competence; and hicle will be operated;
(B) Where such operation does not (B) Composition of loads to be car-
endanger the trainee or other employ- ried and load stability;
ees. (C) Load manipulation, stacking, and
(ii) Training shall consist of a com- unstacking;
bination of formal instruction (e.g., (D) Pedestrian traffic in areas where
lecture, discussion, interactive com- the vehicle will be operated;
puter learning, video tape, written ma- (E) Narrow aisles and other re-
terial), practical training (demonstra- stricted places where the vehicle will
tions performed by the trainer and be operated;
practical exercises performed by the (F) Hazardous (classified) locations
trainee), and evaluation of the opera- where the vehicle will be operated;
tor’s performance in the workplace. (G) Ramps and other sloped surfaces
(iii) All operator training and evalua- that could affect the vehicle’s sta-
tion shall be conducted by persons who bility;
have the knowledge, training, and ex- (H) Closed environments and other
perience to train powered industrial areas where insufficient ventilation or
truck operators and evaluate their poor vehicle maintenance could cause a
competence. buildup of carbon monoxide or diesel
(3) Training program content. Powered exhaust;
industrial truck operators shall receive (I) Other unique or potentially haz-
initial training in the following topics, ardous environmental conditions in the
except in topics which the employer workplace that could affect safe oper-
can demonstrate are not applicable to ation.
safe operation of the truck in the em- (iii) The requirements of this section.
ployer’s workplace. (4) Refresher training and evaluation.
(i) Truck-related topics: (i) Refresher training, including an
(A) Operating instructions, warnings, evaluation of the effectiveness of that
and precautions for the types of truck training, shall be conducted as required
the operator will be authorized to oper- by paragraph (l)(4)(ii) to ensure that
ate; the operator has the knowledge and
(B) Differences between the truck skills needed to operate the powered
and the automobile; industrial truck safely.
558
(ii) Refresher training in relevant training in a topic specified in para-

topics shall be provided to the operator graph (l)(3) of this section, and such
when: training is appropriate to the truck
(A) The operator has been observed and working conditions encountered,
to operate the vehicle in an unsafe additional training in that topic is not
manner; required if the operator has been evalu-
(B) The operator has been involved in ated and found competent to operate
an accident or near-miss incident; the truck safely.
(C) The operator has received an (6) Certification. The employer shall
evaluation that reveals that the oper-
certify that each operator has been
ator is not operating the truck safely;
trained and evaluated as required by
(D) The operator is assigned to drive
a different type of truck; or this paragraph (l). The certification
(E) A condition in the workplace shall include the name of the operator,
changes in a manner that could affect the date of the training, the date of the
safe operation of the truck. evaluation, and the identity of the per-
(iii) An evaluation of each powered son(s) performing the training or eval-
industrial truck operator’s perform- uation.
ance shall be conducted at least once (7) Dates. The employer shall ensure
every three years. that operators of powered industrial
(5) Avoidance of duplicative training. If trucks are trained, as appropriate, by
an operator has previously received the dates shown in the following table.
If the employee was hired: The initial training and evaluation of that employee must be completed:
Before December 1, 1999 .......................... By December 1, 1999.

After December 1, 1999 ............................. Before the employee is assigned to operate a powered industrial truck.
(8) Appendix A to this section pro- more away from the vehicle which re-
vides non-mandatory guidance to assist mains in his view, or whenever the op-
employers in implementing this para- erator leaves the vehicle and it is not
graph (l). This appendix does not add in his view.
to, alter, or reduce the requirements of (iii) When the operator of an indus-
this section. trial truck is dismounted and within 25
(m) Truck operations. (1) Trucks shall ft. of the truck still in his view, the
not be driven up to anyone standing in load engaging means shall be fully low-
front of a bench or other fixed object. ered, controls neutralized, and the
(2) No person shall be allowed to brakes set to prevent movement.
stand or pass under the elevated por- (6) A safe distance shall be main-
tion of any truck, whether loaded or
tained from the edge of ramps or plat-
empty.
forms while on any elevated dock, or
(3) Unauthorized personnel shall not
platform or freight car. Trucks shall
be permitted to ride on powered indus-
not be used for opening or closing
trial trucks. A safe place to ride shall
freight doors.
be provided where riding of trucks is
authorized. (7) Brakes shall be set and wheel
(4) The employer shall prohibit arms blocks shall be in place to prevent
or legs from being placed between the movement of trucks, trailers, or rail-
uprights of the mast or outside the road cars while loading or unloading.
running lines of the truck. Fixed jacks may be necessary to sup-
(5)(i) When a powered industrial port a semitrailer during loading or un-
truck is left unattended, load engaging loading when the trailer is not coupled
means shall be fully lowered, controls to a tractor. The flooring of trucks,
shall be neutralized, power shall be trailers, and railroad cars shall be
shut off, and brakes set. Wheels shall checked for breaks and weakness be-
be blocked if the truck is parked on an fore they are driven onto.
incline. (8) There shall be sufficient head-
(ii) A powered industrial truck is un- room under overhead installations,

attended when the operator is 25 ft. or lights, pipes, sprinkler system, etc.
559
(9) An overhead guard shall be used will permit it to be brought to a stop in

as protection against falling objects. It a safe manner.
should be noted that an overhead guard (9) Stunt driving and horseplay shall
is intended to offer protection from the not be permitted.
impact of small packages, boxes, (10) The driver shall be required to
bagged material, etc., representative of slow down for wet and slippery floors.
the job application, but not to with- (11) Dockboard or bridgeplates, shall
stand the impact of a falling capacity be properly secured before they are
load. driven over. Dockboard or bridgeplates
(10) A load backrest extension shall shall be driven over carefully and slow-
be used whenever necessary to mini- ly and their rated capacity never ex-
mize the possibility of the load or part ceeded.
of it from falling rearward. (12) Elevators shall be approached
(11) Only approved industrial trucks slowly, and then entered squarely after
shall be used in hazardous locations. the elevator car is properly leveled.
(12)–(13) [Reserved] Once on the elevator, the controls shall
(14) Fire aisles, access to stairways, be neutralized, power shut off, and the
and fire equipment shall be kept clear. brakes set.
(n) Traveling. (1) All traffic regula- (13) Motorized hand trucks must
tions shall be observed, including au- enter elevator or other confined areas
thorized plant speed limits. A safe dis- with load end forward.
tance shall be maintained approxi-
(14) Running over loose objects on
mately three truck lengths from the
the roadway surface shall be avoided.
truck ahead, and the truck shall be
(15) While negotiating turns, speed
kept under control at all times.
shall be reduced to a safe level by
(2) The right of way shall be yielded
means of turning the hand steering
to ambulances, fire trucks, or other ve-
wheel in a smooth, sweeping motion.
hicles in emergency situations.
Except when maneuvering at a very
(3) Other trucks traveling in the
low speed, the hand steering wheel
same direction at intersections, blind
shall be turned at a moderate, even
spots, or other dangerous locations
rate.
shall not be passed.
(4) The driver shall be required to (o) Loading. (1) Only stable or safely
slow down and sound the horn at cross arranged loads shall be handled. Cau-
aisles and other locations where vision tion shall be exercised when handling
is obstructed. If the load being carried off-center loads which cannot be cen-
obstructs forward view, the driver shall tered.
be required to travel with the load (2) Only loads within the rated capac-
trailing. ity of the truck shall be handled.
(5) Railroad tracks shall be crossed (3) The long or high (including mul-
diagonally wherever possible. Parking tiple-tiered) loads which may affect ca-
closer than 8 feet from the center of pacity shall be adjusted.
railroad tracks is prohibited. (4) Trucks equipped with attach-
(6) The driver shall be required to ments shall be operated as partially
look in the direction of, and keep a loaded trucks when not handling a
clear view of the path of travel. load.
(7) Grades shall be ascended or de- (5) A load engaging means shall be
scended slowly. placed under the load as far as possible;
(i) When ascending or descending the mast shall be carefully tilted back-
grades in excess of 10 percent, loaded ward to stabilize the load.
trucks shall be driven with the load up- (6) Extreme care shall be used when
grade. tilting the load forward or backward,
(ii) [Reserved] particularly when high tiering. Tilting
(iii) On all grades the load and load forward with load engaging means ele-
engaging means shall be tilted back if vated shall be prohibited except to pick
applicable, and raised only as far as up a load. An elevated load shall not be
necessary to clear the road surface. tilted forward except when the load is
(8) Under all travel conditions the in a deposit position over a rack or
truck shall be operated at a speed that stack. When stacking or tiering, only
560
enough backward tilt to stabilize the shall not be placed in service if the ex-
load shall be used. amination shows any condition ad-
(p) Operation of the truck. (1) If at any versely affecting the safety of the vehi-
time a powered industrial truck is cle. Such examination shall be made at
found to be in need of repair, defective, least daily.
or in any way unsafe, the truck shall
be taken out of service until it has Where industrial trucks are used on a
been restored to safe operating condi- round-the-clock basis, they shall be ex-
tion. amined after each shift. Defects when
(2) Fuel tanks shall not be filled found shall be immediately reported
while the engine is running. Spillage and corrected.
shall be avoided. (8) Water mufflers shall be filled
(3) Spillage of oil or fuel shall be daily or as frequently as is necessary
carefully washed away or completely to prevent depletion of the supply of
evaporated and the fuel tank cap re- water below 75 percent of the filled ca-
placed before restarting engine. pacity. Vehicles with mufflers having
(4) No truck shall be operated with a screens or other parts that may be-
leak in the fuel system until the leak come clogged shall not be operated
has been corrected. while such screens or parts are clogged.
(5) Open flames shall not be used for Any vehicle that emits hazardous
checking electrolyte level in storage sparks or flames from the exhaust sys-
batteries or gasoline level in fuel tem shall immediately be removed
tanks. from service, and not returned to serv-
(q) Maintenance of industrial trucks. ice until the cause for the emission of
(1) Any power-operated industrial such sparks and flames has been elimi-
truck not in safe operating condition nated.
shall be removed from service. All re- (9) When the temperature of any part
pairs shall be made by authorized per- of any truck is found to be in excess of
sonnel. its normal operating temperature, thus
(2) No repairs shall be made in Class creating a hazardous condition, the ve-
I, II, and III locations. hicle shall be removed from service and
(3) Those repairs to the fuel and igni- not returned to service until the cause
tion systems of industrial trucks which for such overheating has been elimi-
involve fire hazards shall be conducted nated.
only in locations designated for such (10) Industrial trucks shall be kept in
repairs.
a clean condition, free of lint, excess
(4) Trucks in need of repairs to the
oil, and grease. Noncombustible agents
electrical system shall have the bat-
should be used for cleaning trucks. Low
tery disconnected prior to such repairs.
flash point (below 100 °F.) solvents
(5) All parts of any such industrial
shall not be used. High flash point (at
truck requiring replacement shall be
replaced only by parts equivalent as to or above 100 °F.) solvents may be used.
safety with those used in the original Precautions regarding toxicity, ven-
design. tilation, and fire hazard shall be con-
(6) Industrial trucks shall not be al- sonant with the agent or solvent used.
tered so that the relative positions of (11) [Reserved]
the various parts are different from (12) Industrial trucks originally ap-
what they were when originally re- proved for the use of gasoline for fuel
ceived from the manufacturer, nor may be converted to liquefied petro-
shall they be altered either by the ad- leum gas fuel provided the complete
dition of extra parts not provided by conversion results in a truck which
the manufacturer or by the elimination embodies the features specified for LP
of any parts, except as provided in or LPS designated trucks. Such con-
paragraph (q)(12) of this section. Addi- version equipment shall be approved.
tional counterweighting of fork trucks The description of the component parts
shall not be done unless approved by of this conversion system and the rec-
the truck manufacturer. ommended method of installation on
(7) Industrial trucks shall be exam- specific trucks are contained in the
ined before being placed in service, and ‘‘Listed by Report.’’
561
APPENDIX A TO § 1910.178—STABILITY OF POW- stability: the vehicle’s wheelbase, track, and
ERED INDUSTRIAL TRUCKS (NON-MANDATORY height; the load’s weight distribution; and
APPENDIX TO PARAGRAPH (l) OF THIS SEC- the vehicle’s counterweight location (if the
TION) vehicle is so equipped).
A–1. Definitions. The following definitions A–2.2. The ‘‘stability triangle,’’ used in
help to explain the principle of stability: most stability discussions, demonstrates sta-
Center of gravity is the point on an object bility simply.
at which all of the object’s weight is con- A–3. Basic Principles.
centrated. For symmetrical loads, the center A–3.1. Whether an object is stable depends
of gravity is at the middle of the load. on the object’s moment at one end of a sys-
Counterweight is the weight that is built tem being greater than, equal to, or smaller
into the truck’s basic structure and is used than the object’s moment at the system’s
to offset the load’s weight and to maximize other end. This principle can be seen in the
the vehicle’s resistance to tipping over. way a see-saw or teeter-totter works: that is,
Fulcrum is the truck’s axis of rotation if the product of the load and distance from
when it tips over. the fulcrum (moment) is equal to the mo-
Grade is the slope of a surface, which is ment at the device’s other end, the device is
usually measured as the number of feet of balanced and it will not move. However, if
rise or fall over a hundred foot horizontal there is a greater moment at one end of the
distance (the slope is expressed as a percent). device, the device will try to move downward
Lateral stability is a truck’s resistance to at the end with the greater moment.
overturning sideways. A–3.2. The longitudinal stability of a
Line of action is an imaginary vertical line counterbalanced powered industrial truck
through an object’s center of gravity. depends on the vehicle’s moment and the
Load center is the horizontal distance from
load’s moment. In other words, if the
the load’s edge (or the fork’s or other attach-
mathematic product of the load moment (the
ment’s vertical face) to the line of action
distance from the front wheels, the approxi-
through the load’s center of gravity.
mate point at which the vehicle would tip
Longitudinal stability is the truck’s resist-
forward) to the load’s center of gravity times
ance to overturning forward or rearward.
the load’s weight is less than the vehicle’s
Moment is the product of the object’s
moment, the system is balanced and will not
weight times the distance from a fixed point
(usually the fulcrum). In the case of a pow- tip forward. However, if the load’s moment is
ered industrial truck, the distance is meas- greater than the vehicle’s moment, the
ured from the point at which the truck will greater load-moment will force the truck to
tip over to the object’s line of action. The tip forward.
distance is always measured perpendicular to A–4. The Stability Triangle.
the line of action. A–4.1. Almost all counterbalanced powered
Track is the distance between the wheels industrial trucks have a three-point suspen-
on the same axle of the truck. sion system, that is, the vehicle is supported
Wheelbase is the distance between the cen- at three points. This is true even if the vehi-
terline of the vehicle’s front and rear wheels. cle has four wheels. The truck’s steer axle is
A–2. General. attached to the truck by a pivot pin in the
A–2.1. Determining the stability of a pow- axle’s center. When the points are connected
ered industrial truck is simple once a few with imaginary lines, this three-point sup-
basic principles are understood. There are port forms a triangle called the stability tri-
many factors that contribute to a vehicle’s angle. Figure 1 depicts the stability triangle.
562
A–4.2. When the vehicle’s line of action, or tion or the vehicle/load combination falls
load center, falls within the stability tri- outside the stability triangle, the vehicle is
angle, the vehicle is stable and will not tip unstable and may tip over. (See Figure 2.)
over. However, when the vehicle’s line of ac-
563
ER01DE98.002</GPH>
A–5. Longitudinal Stability. mally rates the truck at a maximum load at

A–5.1. The axis of rotation when a truck a given distance from the front face of the
tips forward is the front wheels’ points of forks. The specified distance from the front
contact with the pavement. When a powered face of the forks to the line of action of the
industrial truck tips forward, the truck will load is commonly called the load center. Be-
rotate about this line. When a truck is sta- cause larger trucks normally handle loads
ble, the vehicle-moment must exceed the that are physically larger, these vehicles
load-moment. As long as the vehicle-moment have greater load centers. Trucks with a ca-
is equal to or exceeds the load-moment, the pacity of 30,000 pounds or less are normally
vehicle will not tip over. On the other hand, rated at a given load weight at a 24-inch load
if the load moment slightly exceeds the vehi- center. Trucks with a capacity greater than
cle-moment, the truck will begin to tip for- 30,000 pounds are normally rated at a given
ward, thereby causing the rear to lose con- load weight at a 36- or 48-inch load center.
tact with the floor or ground and resulting in To safely operate the vehicle, the operator
loss of steering control. If the load-moment should always check the data plate to deter-
greatly exceeds the vehicle moment, the mine the maximum allowable weight at the
truck will tip forward. rated load center.

A–5.2. To determine the maximum safe A–5.3. Although the true load-moment dis-
load-moment, the truck manufacturer nor- tance is measured from the front wheels, this
564
ER01DE98.003</GPH>
distance is greater than the distance from precise rules can be formulated to cover all
the front face of the forks. Calculating the of these eventualities.
maximum allowable load-moment using the [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40
load-center distance always provides a lower FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 43 FR 49749, Oct. 24,
load-moment than the truck was designed to 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 53 FR 12122,
handle. When handling unusual loads, such Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR
as those that are larger than 48 inches long 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 66270, Dec. 1, 1998; 68
(the center of gravity is greater than 24 FR 32638, June 2, 2003; 71 FR 16672, Apr. 3,
inches) or that have an offset center of grav- 2006; 81 FR 83005, Nov. 18, 2016]
ity, etc., a maximum allowable load-moment
should be calculated and used to determine § 1910.179 Overhead and gantry
whether a load can be safely handled. For ex- cranes.
ample, if an operator is operating a 3000 (a) Definitions applicable to this sec-
pound capacity truck (with a 24-inch load tion. (1) A crane is a machine for lifting
center), the maximum allowable load-mo- and lowering a load and moving it hori-
ment is 72,000 inch-pounds (3,000 times 24). If zontally, with the hoisting mechanism
a load is 60 inches long (30-inch load center),
an integral part of the machine. Cranes
then the maximum that this load can weigh
whether fixed or mobile are driven
is 2,400 pounds (72,000 divided by 30).
A–6. Lateral Stability.
manually or by power.
A–6.1. The vehicle’s lateral stability is de-
(2) An automatic crane is a crane
termined by the line of action’s position (a which when activated operates through
vertical line that passes through the com- a preset cycle or cycles.
bined vehicle’s and load’s center of gravity) (3) A cab-operated crane is a crane
relative to the stability triangle. When the controlled by an operator in a cab lo-
vehicle is not loaded, the truck’s center of cated on the bridge or trolley.
gravity location is the only factor to be con- (4) Cantilever gantry crane means a
sidered in determining the truck’s stability. gantry or semigantry crane in which
As long as the line of action of the combined the bridge girders or trusses extend
vehicle’s and load’s center of gravity falls transversely beyond the crane runway
within the stability triangle, the truck is on one or both sides.
stable and will not tip over. However, if the (5) Floor-operated crane means a crane
line of action falls outside the stability tri- which is pendant or nonconductive
angle, the truck is not stable and may tip rope controlled by an operator on the
over. Refer to Figure 2.
floor or an independent platform.
A–6.2. Factors that affect the vehicle’s lat-
(6) Gantry crane means a crane simi-
eral stability include the load’s placement
on the truck, the height of the load above
lar to an overhead crane except that
the surface on which the vehicle is oper- the bridge for carrying the trolley or
ating, and the vehicle’s degree of lean. trolleys is rigidly supported on two or
A–7. Dynamic Stability. more legs running on fixed rails or
A–7.1. Up to this point, the stability of a other runway.
powered industrial truck has been discussed (7) Hot metal handling crane means an
without considering the dynamic forces that overhead crane used for transporting or
result when the vehicle and load are put into pouring molten material.
motion. The weight’s transfer and the result- (8) Overhead crane means a crane
ant shift in the center of gravity due to the with a movable bridge carrying a mov-
dynamic forces created when the machine is able or fixed hoisting mechanism and
moving, braking, cornering, lifting, tilting, traveling on an overhead fixed runway
and lowering loads, etc., are important sta- structure.
bility considerations. (9) Power-operated crane means a
A–7.2. When determining whether a load crane whose mechanism is driven by
can be safely handled, the operator should electric, air, hydraulic, or internal
exercise extra caution when handling loads
combustion means.
that cause the vehicle to approach its max-
(10) A pulpit-operated crane is a crane
imum design characteristics. For example, if
an operator must handle a maximum load,
operated from a fixed operator station
the load should be carried at the lowest posi- not attached to the crane.
tion possible, the truck should be acceler- (11) A remote-operated crane is a crane
ated slowly and evenly, and the forks should controlled by an operator not in a pul-
pit or in the cab attached to the crane,
be tilted forward cautiously. However, no

by any method other than pendant or
rope control.
565
(12) A semigantry crane is a gantry (27) Conductors, bridge are the elec-
crane with one end of the bridge rigidly trical conductors located along the
supported on one or more legs that run bridge structure of a crane to provide
on a fixed rail or runway, the other end power to the trolley.
of the bridge being supported by a (28) Conductors, runway (main) are
truck running on an elevated rail or the electrical conductors located along
runway. a crane runway to provide power to the
(13) Storage bridge crane means a gan- crane.
try type crane of long span usually (29) The control braking means is a
used for bulk storage of material; the method of controlling crane motor
bridge girders or trusses are rigidly or speed when in an overhauling condi-
nonrigidly supported on one or more tion.
legs. It may have one or more fixed or (30) Countertorque means a method of
hinged cantilever ends. control by which the power to the
(14) Wall crane means a crane having motor is reversed to develop torque in
a jib with or without trolley and sup- the opposite direction.
ported from a side wall or line of col- (31) Dynamic means a method of con-
umns of a building. It is a traveling trolling crane motor speeds when in
type and operates on a runway at- the overhauling condition to provide a
tached to the side wall or columns. retarding force.
(15) Appointed means assigned spe- (32) Regenerative means a form of dy-
cific responsibilities by the employer namic braking in which the electrical
or the employer’s representative. energy generated is fed back into the
(16) ANSI means the American Na- power system.
tional Standards Institute. (33) Mechanical means a method of
(17) An auxiliary hoist is a supple- control by friction.
mental hoisting unit of lighter capac- (34) Controller, spring return means a
ity and usually higher speed than pro- controller which when released will re-
vided for the main hoist. turn automatically to a neutral posi-
(18) A brake is a device used for re- tion.
tarding or stopping motion by friction (35) Designated means selected or as-
or power means. signed by the employer or the employ-
(19) A drag brake is a brake which er’s representative as being qualified to
provides retarding force without exter- perform specific duties.
nal control. (36) A drift point means a point on a
(20) A holding brake is a brake that travel motion controller which releases
automatically prevents motion when the brake while the motor is not ener-
power is off. gized. This allows for coasting before
(21) Bridge means that part of a crane the brake is set.
consisting of girders, trucks, end ties, (37) The drum is the cylindrical mem-
footwalks, and drive mechanism which ber around which the ropes are wound
carries the trolley or trolleys. for raising or lowering the load.
(22) Bridge travel means the crane (38) An equalizer is a device which
movement in a direction parallel to the compensates for unequal length or
crane runway. stretch of a rope.
(23) A bumper (buffer) is an energy ab- (39) Exposed means capable of being
sorbing device for reducing impact contacted inadvertently. Applied to
when a moving crane or trolley reaches hazardous objects not adequately
the end of its permitted travel; or when guarded or isolated.
two moving cranes or trolleys come in (40) Fail-safe means a provision de-
contact. signed to automatically stop or safely
(24) The cab is the operator’s com- control any motion in which a mal-
partment on a crane. function occurs.
(25) Clearance means the distance (41) Footwalk means the walkway
from any part of the crane to a point of with handrail, attached to the bridge
the nearest obstruction. or trolley for access purposes.
(26) Collectors current are contacting (42) A hoist is an apparatus which
devices for collecting current from run- may be a part of a crane, exerting a
way or bridge conductors. force for lifting or lowering.
566
(43) Hoist chain means the load bear- independently of the regular operating
ing chain in a hoist. controls.
(60) A limit switch is a switch which is
NOTE: Chain properties do not conform to
those shown in ANSI B30.9–1971, Safety Code operated by some part or motion of a
for Slings. power-driven machine or equipment to
alter the electric circuit associated
(44) Hoist motion means that motion with the machine or equipment.
of a crane which raises and lowers a (61) A main switch is a switch control-
load. ling the entire power supply to the
(45) Load means the total super- crane.
imposed weight on the load block or (62) A master switch is a switch which
hook. dominates the operation of contactors,
(46) The load block is the assembly of relays, or other remotely operated de-
hook or shackle, swivel, bearing, vices.
sheaves, pins, and frame suspended by (63) The trolley is the unit which trav-
the hoisting rope. els on the bridge rails and carries the
(47) Magnet means an electro- hoisting mechanism.
magnetic device carried on a crane (64) Trolley travel means the trolley
hook to pick up loads magnetically. movement at right angles to the crane
(48) Main hoist means the hoist mech- runway.
anism provided for lifting the max- (65) Truck means the unit consisting
imum rated load. of a frame, wheels, bearings, and axles
(49) A man trolley is a trolley having which supports the bridge girders or
an operator’s cab attached thereto. trolleys.
(50) Rated load means the maximum (b) General requirements—(1) Applica-
load for which a crane or individual tion. This section applies to overhead
hoist is designed and built by the man- and gantry cranes, including
ufacturer and shown on the equipment semigantry, cantilever gantry, wall
nameplate(s). cranes, storage bridge cranes, and oth-
(51) Rope refers to wire rope, unless ers having the same fundamental char-
otherwise specified. acteristics. These cranes are grouped
(52) Running sheave means a sheave because they all have trolleys and
which rotates as the load block is similar travel characteristics.
raised or lowered. (2) New and existing equipment. All
(53) Runway means an assembly of new overhead and gantry cranes con-
rails, beams, girders, brackets, and structed and installed on or after Au-
framework on which the crane or trol- gust 31, 1971, shall meet the design
ley travels. specifications of the American Na-
(54) Side pull means that portion of tional Standard Safety Code for Over-
the hoist pull acting horizontally when head and Gantry Cranes, ANSI B30.2.0–
the hoist lines are not operated 1967, which is incorporated by reference
vertically. as specified in § 1910.6.
(55) Span means the horizontal dis- (3) Modifications. Cranes may be
tance center to center of runway rails. modified and rerated provided such
(56) Standby crane means a crane modifications and the supporting
which is not in regular service but structure are checked thoroughly for
which is used occasionally or intermit- the new rated load by a qualified engi-
tently as required. neer or the equipment manufacturer.
(57) A stop is a device to limit travel The crane shall be tested in accordance
of a trolley or crane bridge. This device with paragraph (k)(2) of this section.
normally is attached to a fixed struc- New rated load shall be displayed in ac-
ture and normally does not have en- cordance with subparagraph (5) of this
ergy absorbing ability. paragraph.
(58) A switch is a device for making, (4) Wind indicators and rail clamps.
breaking, or for changing the connec- Outdoor storage bridges shall be pro-
tions in an electric circuit. vided with automatic rail clamps. A
(59) An emergency stop switch is a wind-indicating device shall be pro-
manually or automatically operated vided which will give a visible or audi-

electric switch to cut off electric power ble alarm to the bridge operator at a
567
predetermined wind velocity. If the (3) Fire extinguisher. Carbon tetra-

clamps act on the rail heads, any beads chloride extinguishers shall not be
or weld flash on the rail heads shall be used.
ground off. (4) Lighting. Light in the cab shall be
(5) Rated load marking. The rated load sufficient to enable the operator to see
of the crane shall be plainly marked on clearly enough to perform his work.
each side of the crane, and if the crane (d) Footwalks and ladders—(1) Location
has more than one hoisting unit, each of footwalks. (i) If sufficient headroom
hoist shall have its rated load marked is available on cab-operated cranes, a
on it or its load block and this marking footwalk shall be provided on the drive
shall be clearly legible from the ground side along the entire length of the
or floor. bridge of all cranes having the trolley
(6) Clearance from obstruction. (i) Min- running on the top of the girders.
imum clearance of 3 inches overhead (ii) Where footwalks are located in no
and 2 inches laterally shall be provided case shall less than 48 inches of head-
and maintained between crane and ob- room be provided.
structions in conformity with Crane (2) Construction of footwalks. (i)
Manufacturers Association of America, Footwalks shall be of rigid construc-
Inc., Specification No. 61, which is in- tion and designed to sustain a distrib-
corporated by reference as specified in uted load of at least 50 pounds per
§ 1910.6 (formerly the Electric Overhead square foot.
Crane Institute, Inc). (ii) Footwalks shall have a walking
(ii) Where passageways or walkways surface of antislip type.
are provided obstructions shall not be NOTE: Wood will meet this requirement.
placed so that safety of personnel will
(iii) [Reserved]
be jeopardized by movements of the
(iv) The inner edge shall extend at
crane.
least to the line of the outside edge of
(7) Clearance between parallel cranes. If the lower cover plate or flange of the
the runways of two cranes are parallel, girder.
and there are no intervening walls or (3) Toeboards and handrails for
structure, there shall be adequate footwalks. Toeboards and handrails
clearance provided and maintained be- must comply with subpart D of this
tween the two bridges. part.
(8) Designated personnel—Only des- (4) Ladders and stairways. (i) Gantry
ignated personnel shall be permitted to cranes shall be provided with ladders or
operate a crane covered by this section. stairways extending from the ground
(c) Cabs—(1) Cab location. (i) The gen- to the footwalk or cab platform.
eral arrangement of the cab and the lo- (ii) Stairways shall be equipped with
cation of control and protective equip- rigid and substantial metal handrails.
ment shall be such that all operating Walking surfaces shall be of an antislip
handles are within convenient reach of type.
the operator when facing the area to be (iii) Ladders shall be permanently
served by the load hook, or while fac- and securely fastened in place and con-
ing the direction of travel of the cab. structed in compliance with subpart D
The arrangement shall allow the oper- of this part.
ator a full view of the load hook in all (e) Stops, bumpers, rail sweeps, and
positions. guards—(1) Trolley stops. (i) Stops shall
(ii) The cab shall be located to afford be provided at the limits of travel of
a minimum of 3 inches clearance from the trolley.
all fixed structures within its area of (ii) Stops shall be fastened to resist
possible movement. forces applied when contacted.
(2) Access to crane. Access to the car (iii) A stop engaging the tread of the
and/or bridge walkway shall be by a wheel shall be of a height at least equal
conveniently placed fixed ladder, to the radius of the wheel.
stairs, or platform requiring no step (2) Bridge bumpers—(i) A crane shall
over any gap exceeding 12 inches (30 be provided with bumpers or other
cm). Fixed ladders must comply with automatic means providing equivalent
subpart D of this part. effect, unless the crane travels at a
568
slow rate of speed and has a faster de- tors and hoisting ropes if they could
celeration rate due to the use of sleeve come into contact.
bearings, or is not operated near the (6) Guards for moving parts. (i) Ex-
ends of bridge and trolley travel, or is posed moving parts such as gears, set
restricted to a limited distance by the screws, projecting keys, chains, chain
nature of the crane operation and there sprockets, and reciprocating compo-
is no hazard of striking any object in nents which might constitute a hazard
this limited distance, or is used in under normal operating conditions
similar operating conditions. The shall be guarded.
bumpers shall be capable of stopping (ii) Guards shall be securely fastened.
the crane (not including the lifted (iii) Each guard shall be capable of
load) at an average rate of deceleration supporting without permanent distor-
not to exceed 3 ft/s/s when traveling in tion the weight of a 200–pound person
either direction at 20 percent of the unless the guard is located where it is
rated load speed. impossible for a person to step on it.
(a) The bumpers shall have sufficient (f) Brakes—(1) Brakes for hoists. (i)
energy absorbing capacity to stop the Each independent hoisting unit of a
crane when traveling at a speed of at crane shall be equipped with at least
least 40 percent of rated load speed. one self-setting brake, hereafter re-
(b) The bumper shall be so mounted ferred to as a holding brake, applied di-
that there is no direct shear on bolts. rectly to the motor shaft or some part
(ii) Bumpers shall be so designed and of the gear train.
installed as to minimize parts falling (ii) Each independent hoisting unit of
from the crane in case of breakage. a crane, except worm-geared hoists, the
(3) Trolley bumpers—(i) A trolley shall angle of whose worm is such as to pre-
be provided with bumpers or other vent the load from accelerating in the
automatic means of equivalent effect, lowering direction shall, in addition to
unless the trolley travels at a slow rate a holding brake, be equipped with con-
of speed, or is not operated near the trol braking means to prevent over-
ends of bridge and trolley travel, or is speeding.
restricted to a limited distance of the (2) Holding brakes. (i) Holding brakes
runway and there is no hazard of strik- for hoist motors shall have not less
ing any object in this limited distance, than the following percentage of the
or is used in similar operating condi- full load hoisting torque at the point
tions. The bumpers shall be capable of where the brake is applied.
stopping the trolley (not including the (a) 125 percent when used with a con-
lifted load) at an average rate of decel- trol braking means other than mechan-
eration not to exceed 4.7 ft/s/s when ical.
traveling in either direction at one- (b) 100 percent when used in conjunc-
third of the rated load speed. tion with a mechanical control braking
(ii) When more than one trolley is op- means.
erated on the same bridge, each shall (c) 100 percent each if two holding
be equipped with bumpers or equiva- brakes are provided.
lent on their adjacent ends. (ii) Holding brakes on hoists shall
(iii) Bumpers or equivalent shall be have ample thermal capacity for the
designed and installed to minimize frequency of operation required by the
parts falling from the trolley in case of service.
age. (iii) Holding brakes on hoists shall be
(4) Rail sweeps. Bridge trucks shall be applied automatically when power is
equipped with sweeps which extend removed.
below the top of the rail and project in (iv) Where necessary holding brakes
front of the truck wheels. shall be provided with adjustment
(5) Guards for hoisting ropes. (i) If means to compensate for wear.
hoisting ropes run near enough to (v) The wearing surface of all hold-
other parts to make fouling or chafing ing-brake drums or discs shall be
possible, guards shall be installed to smooth.
prevent this condition. (vi) Each independent hoisting unit
(ii) A guard shall be provided to pre- of a crane handling hot metal and hav-
vent contact between bridge conduc- ing power control braking means shall
569
be equipped with at least two holding (6) Application of bridge brakes. (i) On
brakes. cab-operated cranes with cab on bridge,
(3) Control braking means. (i) A power a bridge brake is required as specified
control braking means such as regen- under paragraph (f)(4) of this section.
erative, dynamic or countertorque (ii) On cab-operated cranes with cab
braking, or a mechanically controlled on trolley, a bridge brake of the hold-
braking means shall be capable of ing type shall be required.
maintaining safe lowering speeds of (iii) On all floor, remote and pulpit-
rated loads. operated crane bridge drives, a brake of
(ii) The control braking means shall noncoasting mechanical drive shall be
have ample thermal capacity for the provided.
frequency of operation required by (g) Electric equipment—(1) General. (i)
service. Wiring and equipment shall comply
(4) Brakes for trolleys and bridges. (i) with subpart S of this part.
Foot-operated brakes shall not require (ii) The control circuit voltage shall
an applied force of more than 70 pounds not exceed 600 volts for a.c. or d.c. cur-
to develop manufacturer’s rated brake rent.
torque. (iii) The voltage at pendant push-but-
(ii) Brakes may be applied by me- tons shall not exceed 150 volts for a.c.
chanical, electrical, pneumatic, hy- and 300 volts for d.c.
draulic, or gravity means. (iv) Where multiple conductor cable
(iii) Where necessary brakes shall be is used with a suspended pushbutton
provided with adjustment means to station, the station must be supported
compensate for wear. in some satisfactory manner that will
protect the electrical conductors
(iv) The wearing surface of all brake-
against strain.
drums or discs shall be smooth.
(v) Pendant control boxes shall be
(v) All foot-brake pedals shall be con-
constructed to prevent electrical shock
structed so that the operator’s foot
and shall be clearly marked for identi-
will not easily slip off the pedal.
fication of functions.
(vi) Foot-operated brakes shall be (2) Equipment. (i) Electrical equip-
equipped with automatic means for ment shall be so located or enclosed
positive release when pressure is re- that live parts will not be exposed to
leased from the pedal. accidental contact under normal oper-
(vii) Brakes for stopping the motion ating conditions.
of the trolley or bridge shall be of suffi- (ii) Electric equipment shall be pro-
cient size to stop the trolley or bridge tected from dirt, grease, oil, and mois-
within a distance in feet equal to 10 ture.
percent of full load speed in feet per (iii) Guards for live parts shall be
minute when traveling at full speed substantial and so located that they
with full load. cannot be accidently deformed so as to
(viii) If holding brakes are provided make contact with the live parts.
on the bridge or trolleys, they shall not (3) Controllers. (i) Cranes not equipped
prohibit the use of a drift point in the with spring-return controllers or mo-
control circuit. mentary contact pushbuttons shall be
(ix) Brakes on trolleys and bridges provided with a device which will dis-
shall have ample thermal capacity for connect all motors from the line on
the frequency of operation required by failure of power and will not permit
the service to prevent impairment of any motor to be restarted until the
functions from overheating. controller handle is brought to the
(5) Application of trolley brakes. (i) On ‘‘off’’ position, or a reset switch or but-
cab-operated cranes with cab on trol- ton is operated.
ley, a trolley brake shall be required as (ii) Lever operated controllers shall
specified under paragraph (f)(4) of this be provided with a notch or latch
section. which in the ‘‘off’’ position prevents
(ii) A drag brake may be applied to the handle from being inadvertently
hold the trolley in a desired position on moved to the ‘‘on’’ position. An ‘‘off’’
the bridge and to eliminate creep with detent or spring return arrangement is
the power off. acceptable.
570
(iii) The controller operating handle in the leads from the runway conduc-
shall be located within convenient tors. This disconnect shall be mounted
reach of the operator. on the bridge or footwalk near the run-
(iv) As far as practicable, the move- way collectors. One of the following
ment of each controller handle shall be types of floor-operated disconnects
in the same general directions as the shall be provided:
resultant movements of the load. (a) Nonconductive rope attached to
(v) The control for the bridge and the main disconnect switch.
trolley travel shall be so located that (b) An undervoltage trip for the main
the operator can readily face the direc- circuit breaker operated by an emer-
tion of travel. gency stop button in the pendant push-
(vi) For floor-operated cranes, the button in the pendant pushbutton sta-
controller or controllers if rope oper- tion.
ated, shall automatically return to the (c) A main line contactor operated by
‘‘off’’ position when released by the op- a switch or pushbutton in the pendant
erator. pushbutton station.
(vii) Pushbuttons in pendant stations (iv) The hoisting motion of all elec-
shall return to the ‘‘off’’ position when tric traveling cranes shall be provided
pressure is released by the crane oper- with an overtravel limit switch in the
ator. hoisting direction.
(viii) Automatic cranes shall be so
(v) All cranes using a lifting magnet
designed that all motions shall fail-
shall have a magnet circuit switch of
safe if any malfunction of operation oc-
the enclosed type with provision for
curs.
locking in the open position. Means for
(ix) Remote-operated cranes shall
discharging the inductive load of the
function so that if the control signal
magnet shall be provided.
for any crane motion becomes ineffec-
(6) Runway conductors. Conductors of
tive the crane motion shall stop.
the open type mounted on the crane
(4) Resistors. (i) Enclosures for resis-
runway beams or overhead shall be so
tors shall have openings to provide ade-
located or so guarded that persons en-
quate ventilation, and shall be in-
tering or leaving the cab or crane
stalled to prevent the accumulation of
footwalk normally could not come into
combustible matter too near to hot
contact with them.
parts.
(ii) Resistor units shall be supported (7) Extension lamps. If a service recep-
so as to be as free as possible from vi- tacle is provided in the cab or on the
bration. bridge of cab-operated cranes, it shall
(iii) Provision shall be made to pre- be a grounded three-prong type perma-
vent broken parts or molten metal fall- nent receptacle, not exceeding 300
ing upon the operator or from the volts.
crane. (h) Hoisting equipment—(1) Sheaves. (i)
(5) Switches. (i) The power supply to Sheave grooves shall be smooth and
the runway conductors shall be con- free from surface defects which could
trolled by a switch or circuit breaker cause rope damage.
located on a fixed structure, accessible (ii) Sheaves carrying ropes which can
from the floor, and arranged to be be momentarily unloaded shall be pro-
locked in the open position. vided with close-fitting guards or other
(ii) On cab-operated cranes a switch suitable devices to guide the rope back
or circuit breaker of the enclosed type, into the groove when the load is ap-
with provision for locking in the open plied again.
position, shall be provided in the leads (iii) The sheaves in the bottom block
from the runway conductors. A means shall be equipped with close-fitting
of opening this switch or circuit break- guards that will prevent ropes from be-
er shall be located within easy reach of coming fouled when the block is lying
the operator. on the ground with ropes loose.
(iii) On floor-operated cranes, a (iv) Pockets and flanges of sheaves
switch or circuit breaker of the en- used with hoist chains shall be of such
closed type, with provision for locking dimensions that the chain does not
in the open position, shall be provided catch or bind during operation.
571
(v) All running sheaves shall be tive warning signal shall be provided
equipped with means for lubrication. for each crane equipped with a power
Permanently lubricated, sealed and/or traveling mechanism.
shielded bearings meet this require- (j) Inspection—(1) Inspection classifica-
ment. tion—(i) Initial inspection. Prior to ini-
(2) Ropes. (i) In using hoisting ropes, tial use all new and altered cranes
the crane manufacturer’s recommenda- shall be inspected to insure compliance
tion shall be followed. The rated load with the provisions of this section.
divided by the number of parts of rope (ii) Inspection procedure for cranes in
shall not exceed 20 percent of the nomi- regular service is divided into two gen-
nal breaking strength of the rope. eral classifications based upon the in-
(ii) Socketing shall be done in the tervals at which inspection should be
manner specified by the manufacturer performed. The intervals in turn are
of the assembly. dependent upon the nature of the crit-
(iii) Rope shall be secured to the ical components of the crane and the
drum as follows: degree of their exposure to wear, dete-
(a) No less than two wraps of rope rioration, or malfunction. The two gen-
shall remain on the drum when the eral classifications are herein des-
hook is in its extreme low position. ignated as ‘‘frequent’’ and ‘‘periodic’’
(b) Rope end shall be anchored by a with respective intervals between in-
clamp securely attached to the drum, spections as defined below:
or by a socket arrangement approved (a) Frequent inspection—Daily to
by the crane or rope manufacturer. monthly intervals.
(iv) Eye splices. [Reserved] (b) Periodic inspection—1 to 12-
(v) Rope clips attached with U-bolts month intervals.
shall have the U-bolts on the dead or (2) Frequent inspection. The following
short end of the rope. Spacing and items shall be inspected for defects at
number of all types of clips shall be in intervals as defined in paragraph
accordance with the clip manufactur- (j)(1)(ii) of this section or as specifi-
er’s recommendation. Clips shall be cally indicated, including observation
drop-forged steel in all sizes manufac- during operation for any defects which
tured commercially. When a newly in- might appear between regular inspec-
stalled rope has been in operation for tions. All deficiencies such as listed
an hour, all nuts on the clip bolts shall shall be carefully examined and deter-
be retightened. mination made as to whether they con-
(vi) Swaged or compressed fittings stitute a safety hazard:
shall be applied as recommended by the (i) All functional operating mecha-
rope or crane manufacturer. nisms for maladjustment interfering
(vii) Wherever exposed to tempera- with proper operation. Daily.
tures, at which fiber cores would be (ii) Deterioration or leakage in lines,
damaged, rope having an independent tanks, valves, drain pumps, and other
wirerope or wire-strand core, or other parts of air or hydraulic systems.
temperature-damage resistant core Daily.
shall be used. (iii) Hooks with deformation or
(viii) Replacement rope shall be the cracks. Visual inspection daily; month-
same size, grade, and construction as ly inspection with a certification
the original rope furnished by the record which includes the date of in-
crane manufacturer, unless otherwise spection, the signature of the person
recommended by a wire rope manufac- who performed the inspection and the
turer due to actual working condition serial number, or other identifier, of
requirements. the hook inspected. For hooks with
(3) Equalizers. If a load is supported cracks or having more than 15 percent
by more than one part of rope, the ten- in excess of normal throat opening or
sion in the parts shall be equalized. more than 10° twist from the plane of
(4) Hooks. Hooks shall meet the man- the unbent hook refer to paragraph
ufacturer’s recommendations and shall (l)(3)(iii)(a) of this section.
not be overloaded. (iv) Hoist chains, including end con-
(i) Warning device. Except for floor- nections, for excessive wear, twist, dis-
operated cranes a gong or other effec- torted links interfering with proper
572
function, or stretch beyond manufac- graph (m)(2) of this section before plac-
turer’s recommendations. Visual ining in service.
spection daily; monthly inspection (ii) A crane which has been idle for a
with a certification record which in- period of over 6 months shall be given
cludes the date of inspection, the sig- a complete inspection conforming with
nature of the person who performed the requirements of paragraphs (j) (2) and
inspection and an identifier of the (3) of this section and paragraph (m)(2)
chain which was inspected. of this section before placing in serv-
(v) [Reserved] ice.
(vi) All functional operating mecha- (iii) Standby cranes shall be in-
nisms for excessive wear of compo- spected at least semi-annually in ac-
nents. cordance with requirements of para-
(vii) Rope reeving for noncompliance graph (j)(2) of this section and para-
with manufacturer’s recommendations. graph (m)(2) of this section.
(3) Periodic inspection. Complete in- (k) Testing—(1) Operational tests. (i)
spections of the crane shall be per- Prior to initial use all new and altered
formed at intervals as generally de- cranes shall be tested to insure compli-
fined in paragraph (j)(1)(ii)(b) of this ance with this section including the
section, depending upon its activity, following functions:
severity of service, and environment, (a) Hoisting and lowering.
or as specifically indicated below. (b) Trolley travel.
These inspections shall include the re- (c) Bridge travel.
quirements of paragraph (j)(2) of this (d) Limit switches, locking and safe-
section and in addition, the following ty devices.
items. Any deficiencies such as listed (ii) The trip setting of hoist limit
shall be carefully examined and deter- switches shall be determined by tests
mination made as to whether they con- with an empty hook traveling in in-
stitute a safety hazard: creasing speeds up to the maximum
(i) Deformed, cracked, or corroded speed. The actuating mechanism of the
members. limit switch shall be located so that it
(ii) Loose bolts or rivets. will trip the switch, under all condi-
tions, in sufficient time to prevent con-
(iii) Cracked or worn sheaves and
tact of the hook or hook block with
drums.
any part of the trolley.
(iv) Worn, cracked or distorted parts
(2) Rated load test. Test loads shall
such as pins, bearings, shafts, gears,
not be more than 125 percent of the
rollers, locking and clamping devices.
rated load unless otherwise rec-
(v) Excessive wear on brake system ommended by the manufacturer. The
parts, linings, pawls, and ratchets. test reports shall be placed on file
(vi) Load, wind, and other indicators where readily available to appointed
over their full range, for any signifi- personnel.
cant inaccuracies. (l) Maintenance—(1) Preventive mainte-
(vii) Gasoline, diesel, electric, or nance. A preventive maintenance pro-
other powerplants for improper per- gram based on the crane manufactur-
formance or noncompliance with appli- er’s recommendations shall be estab-
cable safety requirements. lished.
(viii) Excessive wear of chain drive (2) Maintenance procedure. (i) Before
sprockets and excessive chain stretch. adjustments and repairs are started on
(ix) [Reserved] a crane the following precautions shall
(x) Electrical apparatus, for signs of be taken:
pitting or any deterioration of con- (a) The crane to be repaired shall be
troller contactors, limit switches and run to a location where it will cause
pushbutton stations. the least interference with other
(4) Cranes not in regular use. (i) A cranes and operations in the area.
crane which has been idle for a period (b) All controllers shall be at the off
of 1 month or more, but less than 6 position.
months, shall be given an inspection (c) The main or emergency switch
conforming with requirements of para- shall be open and locked in the open
graph (j)(2) of this section and para- position.
573
(d) Warning or ‘‘out of order’’ signs inspection and an identifier for the
shall be placed on the crane, also on ropes which were inspected shall be
the floor beneath or on the hook where kept on file where readily available to
visible from the floor. appointed personnel. Any deteriora-
(e) Where other cranes are in oper- tion, resulting in appreciable loss of
ation on the same runway, rail stops or original strength, shall be carefully ob-
other suitable means shall be provided served and determination made as to
to prevent interference with the idle whether further use of the rope would
crane. constitute a safety hazard. Some of the
(ii) After adjustments and repairs conditions that could result in an ap-
have been made the crane shall not be preciable loss of strength are the fol-
operated until all guards have been re- lowing:
installed, safety devices reactivated (i) Reduction of rope diameter below
and maintenance equipment removed. nominal diameter due to loss of core
(3) Adjustments and repairs. (i) Any support, internal or external corrosion,
unsafe conditions disclosed by the in- or wear of outside wires.
spection requirements of paragraph (j) (ii) A number of broken outside wires
of this section shall be corrected before and the degree of distribution or con-
operation of the crane is resumed. Ad- centration of such broken wires.
justments and repairs shall be done (iii) Worn outside wires.
only by designated personnel. (iv) Corroded or broken wires at end
(ii) Adjustments shall be maintained connections.
to assure correct functioning of compo- (v) Corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or
nents. The following are examples: improperly applied end connections.
(a) All functional operating mecha- (vi) Severe kinking, crushing, cut-
nisms. ting, or unstranding.
(b) Limit switches. (2) Other ropes. All rope which has
(c) Control systems. been idle for a period of a month or
(d) Brakes. more due to shutdown or storage of a
(e) Power plants. crane on which it is installed shall be
(iii) Repairs or replacements shall be given a thorough inspection before it is
provided promptly as needed for safe used. This inspection shall be for all
operation. The following are examples: types of deterioration and shall be per-
(a) Crane hooks showing defects deformed by an appointed person whose
scribed in paragraph (j)(2)(iii) of this approval shall be required for further
section shall be discarded. Repairs by use of the rope. A certification record
welding or reshaping are not generally shall be available for inspection which
recommended. If such repairs are at- includes the date of inspection, the sig-
tempted they shall only be done under nature of the person who performed the
competent supervision and the hook inspection and an identifier for the
shall be tested to the load require- rope which was inspected.
ments of paragraph (k)(2) of this sec- (n) Handling the load—(1) Size of load.
tion before further use. The crane shall not be loaded beyond
(b) Load attachment chains and rope its rated load except for test purposes
slings showing defects described in as provided in paragraph (k) of this sec-
paragraph (j)(2) (iv) and (v) of this section.
tion respectively. (2) Attaching the load. (i) The hoist
(c) All critical parts which are chain or hoist rope shall be free from
cracked, broken, bent, or excessively kinks or twists and shall not be
worn. wrapped around the load.
(d) Pendant control stations shall be (ii) The load shall be attached to the
kept clean and function labels kept load block hook by means of slings or
legible. other approved devices.
(m) Rope inspection—(1) Running (iii) Care shall be taken to make cer-
ropes. A thorough inspection of all tain that the sling clears all obstacles.
ropes shall be made at least once a (3) Moving the load. (i) The load shall
month and a certification record which be well secured and properly balanced
includes the date of inspection, the sig- in the sling or lifting device before it is
nature of the person who performed the lifted more than a few inches.
574
(ii) Before starting to hoist the fol- ate properly, the appointed person
lowing conditions shall be noted: shall be immediately notified.
(a) Hoist rope shall not be kinked. (ii) The hoist limit switch which con-
(b) Multiple part lines shall not be trols the upper limit of travel of the
twisted around each other. load block shall never be used as an op-
(c) The hook shall be brought over erating control.
the load in such a manner as to prevent (o) Other requirements, general—(1)
swinging. Ladders. (i) The employer shall insure
(iii) During hoisting care shall be that hands are free from encumbrances
taken that: while personnel are using ladders.
(a) There is no sudden acceleration or
(ii) Articles which are too large to be
deceleration of the moving load.
carried in pockets or belts shall be lift-
(b) The load does not contact any ob-
ed and lowered by hand line.
structions.
(iv) Cranes shall not be used for side (2) Cabs. (i) Necessary clothing and
pulls except when specifically author- personal belongings shall be stored in
ized by a responsible person who has such a manner as not to interfere with
determined that the stability of the access or operation.
crane is not thereby endangered and (ii) Tools, oil cans, waste, extra fuses,
that various parts of the crane will not and other necessary articles shall be
be overstressed. stored in the tool box, and shall not be
(v) While any employee is on the load permitted to lie loose in or about the
or hook, there shall be no hoisting, cab.
lowering, or traveling. (3) Fire extinguishers. The employer
(vi) The employer shall require that shall insure that operators are familiar
the operator avoid carrying loads over with the operation and care of fire ex-
people. tinguishers provided.
(vii) The operator shall test the
brakes each time a load approaching FR 27400, June 27, 1975; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10,
the rated load is handled. The brakes 1984; 51 FR 34560, Sept. 29, 1986; 55 FR 32015,
shall be tested by raising the load a few Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 81 FR
inches and applying the brakes. 83005, Nov. 18, 2016]
(viii) The load shall not be lowered
below the point where less than two § 1910.180 Crawler locomotive and
full wraps of rope remain on the hoist- truck cranes.
ing drum. (a) Definitions applicable to this sec-
(ix) When two or more cranes are tion. (1) A crawler crane consists of a ro-
used to lift a load one qualified respon- tating superstructure with power
sible person shall be in charge of the plant, operating machinery, and boom,
operation. He shall analyze the oper-
mounted on a base, equipped with
ation and instruct all personnel in-
crawler treads for travel. Its function
volved in the proper positioning, rig-
is to hoist and swing loads at various
ging of the load, and the movements to
radii.
be made.
(x) The employer shall insure that (2) A locomotive crane consists of a ro-
the operator does not leave his position tating superstructure with power-
at the controls while the load is sus- plant, operating machinery and boom,
pended. mounted on a base or car equipped for
(xi) When starting the bridge and travel on railroad track. It may be self-
when the load or hook approaches near propelled or propelled by an outside
or over personnel, the warning signal source. Its function is to hoist and
shall be sounded. swing loads at various radii.
(4) Hoist limit switch. (i) At the begin- (3) A truck crane consists of a rotat-
ning of each operator’s shift, the upper ing superstructure with powerplant,
limit switch of each hoist shall be tried operating machinery and boom, mount-
out under no load. Extreme care shall ed on an automotive truck equipped
be exercised; the block shall be with a powerplant for travel. Its func-
‘‘inched’’ into the limit or run in at tion is to hoist and swing loads at var-
slow speed. If the switch does not oper- ious radii.
575
(4) A wheel mounted crane (wagon and lower the boom. The rope system
crane) consists of a rotating super- may be all live reeving or a combina-
structure with powerplant, operating tion of live reeving and pendants.
machinery and boom, mounted on a (16) The boom stop is a device used to
base or platform equipped with axles limit the angle of the boom at the
and rubber-tired wheels for travel. The highest position.
base is usually propelled by the engine (17) A brake is a device used for re-
in the superstructure, but it may be tarding or stopping motion by friction
equipped with a separate engine con- or power means.
trolled from the superstructure. Its (18) A cab is a housing which covers
function is to hoist and swing loads at the rotating superstructure machinery
various radii. and/or operator’s station. On truck-
(5) An accessory is a secondary part or
crane trucks a separate cab covers the
assembly of parts which contributes to
driver’s station.
the overall function and usefulness of a
machine. (19) The clutch is a friction, electro-
(6) Appointed means assigned specific magnetic, hydraulic, pneumatic, or
responsibilities by the employer or the positive mechanical device for engage-
employer’s representative. ment or disengagement of power.
(7) ANSI means the American Na- (20) The counterweight is a weight
tional Standards Institute. used to supplement the weight of the
(8) An angle indicator (boom) is an ac- machine in providing stability for lift-
cessory which measures the angle of ing working loads.
the boom to the horizontal. (21) Designated means selected or as-
(9) The axis of rotation is the vertical signed by the employer or the employ-
axis around which the crane super- er’s representative as being qualified to
structure rotates. perform specific duties.
(10) Axle means the shaft or spindle (22) The drum is the cylindrical mem-
with which or about which a wheel ro- bers around which ropes are wound for
tates. On truck- and wheel-mounted raising and lowering the load or boom.
cranes it refers to an automotive type (23) Dynamic (loading) means loads
of axle assembly including housings, introduced into the machine or its
gearing, differential, bearings, and components by forces in motion.
mounting appurtenances. (24) The gantry (A-frame) is a struc-
(11) Axle (bogie) means two or more tural frame, extending above the super-
automotive-type axles mounted in tan- structure, to which the boom support
dem in a frame so as to divide the load ropes are reeved.
between the axles and permit vertical
(25) A jib is an extension attached to
oscillation of the wheels.
the boom point to provide added boom
(12) The base (mounting) is the trav-
length for lifting specified loads. The
eling base or carrier on which the ro-
jib may be in line with the boom or off-
tating superstructure is mounted such
set to various angles.
as a car, truck, crawlers, or wheel plat-
form. (26) Load (working) means the exter-
(13) The boom (crane) is a member nal load, in pounds, applied to the
hinged to the front of the rotating su- crane, including the weight of load-at-
perstructure with the outer end sup- taching equipment such as load blocks,
ported by ropes leading to a gantry or shackles, and slings.
A-frame and used for supporting the (27) Load block (upper) means the as-
hoisting tackle. sembly of hook or shackle, swivel,
(14) The boom angle is the angle be- sheaves, pins, and frame suspended
tween the longitudinal centerline of from the boom point.
the boom and the horizontal. The boom (28) Load block (lower) means the as-
longitudinal centerline is a straight sembly of hook or shackle, swivel,
line between the boom foot pin (heel sheaves, pins, and frame suspended by
pin) centerline and boom point sheave the hoisting ropes.
pin centerline. (29) A load hoist is a hoist drum and
(15) The boom hoist is a hoist drum rope reeving system used for hoisting
and rope reeving system used to raise and lowering loads.
576
(30) Load ratings are crane ratings in center for wheelbase measurement is
pounds established by the manufac- taken as the midpoint of the assembly.
turer in accordance with paragraph (c) (47) The whipline (auxiliary hoist) is a
of this section. separate hoist rope system of lighter
(31) Outriggers are extendable or fixed load capacity and higher speed than
metal arms, attached to the mounting provided by the main hoist.
base, which rest on supports at the (48) A winch head is a power driven
outer ends. spool for handling of loads by means of
(32) Rail clamp means a tong-like friction between fiber or wire rope and
metal device, mounted on a locomotive spool.
crane car, which can be connected to (b) General requirements—(1) Applica-
the track. tion. This section applies to crawler
(33) Reeving means a rope system in cranes, locomotive cranes, wheel
which the rope travels around drums mounted cranes of both truck and self-
and sheaves. propelled wheel type, and any vari-
(34) Rope refers to a wire rope unless ations thereof which retain the same
otherwise specified. fundamental characteristics. This sec-
(35) Side loading means a load applied tion includes only cranes of the above
at an angle to the vertical plane of the types, which are basically powered by
boom. internal combustion engines or electric
(36) A standby crane is a crane which motors and which utilize drums and
is not in regular service but which is ropes. Cranes designed for railway and
used occasionally or intermittently as automobile wreck clearances are ex-
required. cepted. The requirements of this sec-
tion are applicable only to machines
(37) A standing (guy) rope is a sup-
when used as lifting cranes.
porting rope which maintains a con-
(2) New and existing equipment. All
stant distance between the points of
new crawler, locomotive, and truck
attachment to the two components
cranes constructed and utilized on or
connected by the rope.
after August 31, 1971, shall meet the de-
(38) Structural competence means the
sign specifications of the American Na-
ability of the machine and its compo-
tional Standard Safety Code for Crawl-
nents to withstand the stresses im-
er, Locomotive, and Truck Cranes,
posed by applied loads.
ANSI B30.5–1968, which is incorporated
(39) Superstructure means the rotating by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
upper frame structure of the machine Crawler, locomotive, and truck cranes
and the operating machinery mounted constructed prior to August 31, 1971,
thereon. should be modified to conform to those
(40) Swing means the rotation of the design specifications by February 15,
superstructure for movement of loads 1972, unless it can be shown that the
in a horizontal direction about the axis crane cannot feasibly or economically
of rotation. be altered and that the crane substan-
(41) Swing mechanism means the ma- tially complies with the requirements
chinery involved in providing rotation of this section.
of the superstructure. (3) Designated personnel. Only des-
(42) Tackle is an assembly of ropes ignated personnel shall be permitted to
and sheaves arranged for hoisting and operate a crane covered by this section.
pulling. (c) Load ratings—(1) Load ratings—
(43) Transit means the moving or where stability governs lifting perform-
transporting of a crane from one job- ance. (i) The margin of stability for de-
site to another. termination of load ratings, with
(44) Travel means the function of the booms of stipulated lengths at stipu-
machine moving from one location to lated working radii for the various
another, on a jobsite. types of crane mountings, is estab-
(45) The travel mechanism is the ma- lished by taking a percentage of the
chinery involved in providing travel. loads which will produce a condition of
(46) Wheelbase means the distance be- tipping or balance with the boom in
tween centers of front and rear axles. the least stable direction, relative to
For a multiple axle assembly the axle the mounting. The load ratings shall
577
not exceed the following percentages tion of rubber tires, boom lengths,
for cranes, with the indicated types of proper operating speeds for existing
mounting under conditions stipulated conditions, and, in general, careful and
in paragraphs (c)(1) (ii) and (iii) of this competent operation. All of these shall
section. be taken into account by the user.
Maximum
(2) Load rating chart. A substantial
load rat- and durable rating chart with clearly
Type of crane mounting ings (per- legible letters and figures shall be pro-
cent of tip-
ping loads) vided with each crane and securely
fixed to the crane cab in a location eas-
Locomotive, without outriggers:
Booms 60 feet or less .................................. 1 85 ily visible to the operator while seated
Booms over 60 feet ...................................... 1 85 at his control station.
Locomotive, using outriggers fully extended ....... 80 (d) Inspection classification—(1) Initial
Crawler, without outriggers .................................. 75
Crawler, using outriggers fully extended ............. 85 inspection. Prior to initial use all new
Truck and wheel mounted without outriggers or and altered cranes shall be inspected to
using outriggers fully extended ........................ 85 insure compliance with provisions of
1 Unless this results in less than 30,000 pound-feet net sta- this section.
bilizing moment about the rail, which shall be minimum with
such booms. (2) Regular inspection. Inspection pro-
cedure for cranes in regular service is
(ii) The following stipulations shall divided into two general classifications
govern the application of the values in based upon the intervals at which in-
paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section for lo- spection should be performed. The in-
comotive cranes: tervals in turn are dependent upon the
(a) Tipping with or without the use of nature of the critical components of
outriggers occurs when half of the the crane and the degree of their expo-
wheels farthest from the load leave the sure to wear, deterioration, or mal-
rail. function. The two general classifica-
(b) The crane shall be standing on tions are herein designated as ‘‘fre-
track which is level within 1 percent quent’’ and ‘‘periodic’’, with respective
grade. intervals between inspections as de-
(c) Radius of the load is the hori- fined below:
zontal distance from a projection of the
(i) Frequent inspection: Daily to
axis of rotation to the rail support sur-
monthly intervals.
face, before loading, to the center of
(ii) Periodic inspection: 1- to 12-
vertical hoist line or tackle with load
month intervals, or as specifically rec-
applied.
ommended by the manufacturer.
(d) Tipping loads from which ratings
are determined shall be applied under (3) Frequent inspection. Items such as
static conditions only, i.e., without dy- the following shall be inspected for de-
namic effect of hoisting, lowering, or fects at intervals as defined in para-
swinging. graph (d)(2)(i) of this section or as spe-
(e) The weight of all auxiliary han- cifically indicated including observa-
dling devices such as hoist blocks, tion during operation for any defects
hooks, and slings shall be considered a which might appear between regular
part of the load rating. inspections. Any deficiencies such as
(iii) Stipulations governing the appli- listed shall be carefully examined and
cation of the values in paragraph determination made as to whether they
(c)(1)(i) of this section for crawler, constitute a safety hazard:
truck, and wheel-mounted cranes shall (i) All control mechanisms for mal-
be in accordance with Crane Load-Sta- adjustment interfering with proper op-
bility Test Code, Society of Auto- eration: Daily.
motive Engineers (SAE) J765, which is (ii) All control mechanisms for exces-
incorporated by reference as specified sive wear of components and contami-
in § 1910.6. nation by lubricants or other foreign
(iv) The effectiveness of these pre- matter.
ceding stability factors will be influ- (iii) All safety devices for malfunc-
enced by such additional factors as tion.
freely suspended loads, track, wind, or (iv) Deterioration or leakage in air or

ground conditions, condition and infla- hydraulic systems: Daily.
578
(v) Crane hooks with deformations or (ii) A crane which has been idle for a
cracks. For hooks with cracks or hav- period of six months shall be given a
ing more than 15 percent in excess of complete inspection conforming with
normal throat opening or more than 10° requirements of paragraphs (d) (3) and
twist from the plane of the unbent (4) of this section and paragraph
hook. (g)(2)(ii) of this section before placing
(vi) Rope reeving for noncompliance in service.
with manufacturer’s recommendations. (iii) Standby cranes shall be in-
(vii) Electrical apparatus for mal- spected at least semiannually in ac-
functioning, signs of excessive deterio- cordance with requirements of para-
ration, dirt, and moisture accumula- graph (d)(3) of this section and para-
tion. graph (g)(2)(ii) of this section. Such
(4) Periodic inspection. Complete in- cranes which are exposed to adverse en-
spections of the crane shall be per- vironment should be inspected more
formed at intervals as generally de- frequently.
fined in paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of this sec- (6) Inspection records. Certification
tion depending upon its activity, sever- records which include the date of in-
ity of service, and environment, or as spection, the signature of the person
specifically indicated below. These in- who performed the inspection and the
spections shall include the require- serial number, or other identifier, of
ments of paragraph (d)(3) of this sec- the crane which was inspected shall be
tion and in addition, items such as the made monthly on critical items in use
following. Any deficiencies such as list- such as brakes, crane hooks, and ropes.
ed shall be carefully examined and de- This certification record shall be kept
termination made as to whether they readily available.
constitute a safety hazard: (e) Testing—(1) Operational tests. (i) In
(i) Deformed, cracked, or corroded addition to prototype tests and qual-
members in the crane structure and ity-control measures, each new produc-
boom. tion crane shall be tested by the manu-
(ii) Loose bolts or rivets. facturer to the extent necessary to in-
(iii) Cracked or worn sheaves and sure compliance with the operational
drums. requirements of this paragraph includ-
(iv) Worn, cracked, or distorted parts ing functions such as the following:
such as pins, bearings, shafts, gears, (a) Load hoisting and lowering mech-
rollers and locking devices. anisms.
(v) Excessive wear on brake and (b) Boom hoisting and lower mecha-
clutch system parts, linings, pawls, and nisms.
ratchets. (c) Swinging mechanism.
(vi) Load, boom angle, and other indi- (d) Travel mechanism.
cators over their full range, for any (e) Safety devices.
significant inaccuracies. (ii) Where the complete production
(vii) Gasoline, diesel, electric, or crane is not supplied by one manufac-
other power plants for improper per- turer such tests shall be conducted at
formance or noncompliance with safety final assembly.
requirements. (iii) Certified production-crane test
(viii) Excessive wear of chain-drive results shall be made available.
sprockets and excessive chain stretch. (2) Rated load test. (i) Written reports
(ix) Travel steering, braking, and shall be available showing test proce-
locking devices, for malfunction. dures and confirming the adequacy of
(x) Excessively worn or damaged repairs or alterations.
tires. (ii) Test loads shall not exceed 110
(5) Cranes not in regular use. (i) A percent of the rated load at any se-
crane which has been idle for a period lected working radius.
of one month or more, but less than 6 (iii) Where rerating is necessary:
months, shall be given an inspection (a) Crawler, truck, and wheel-mount-
conforming with requirements of para- ed cranes shall be tested in accordance
graph (d)(3) of this section and para- with SAE Recommended Practice,
graph (g)(2)(ii) of this section before Crane Load Stability Test Code J765
placing in service. (April 1961).
579
(b) Locomotive cranes shall be tested is installed shall be given a thorough

in accordance with paragraph (c)(1) (i) inspection before it is used. This in-
and (ii) of this section. spection shall be for all types of dete-
(c) Rerating test report shall be read- rioration and shall be performed by an
ily available. appointed or authorized person whose
(iv) No cranes shall be rerated in ex- approval shall be required for further
cess of the original load ratings unless use of the rope. A certification record
such rating changes are approved by which includes the date of inspection,
the crane manufacturer or final assem- the signature of the person who per-
bler. formed the inspection, and an identi-
(f) Maintenance procedure—General. fier for the rope which was inspected
After adjustments and repairs have shall be prepared and kept readily
been made the crane shall not be oper- available.
ated until all guards have been re- (iii) Particular care shall be taken in
installed, safety devices reactivated, the inspection of nonrotating rope.
and maintenance equipment removed. (h) Handling the load—(1) Size of load.
(g) Rope inspection—(1) Running ropes. (i) No crane shall be loaded beyond the
A thorough inspection of all ropes in rated load, except for test purposes as
use shall be made at least once a provided in paragraph (e) of this sec-
month and a certification record which tion.
includes the date of inspection, the sig- (ii) When loads which are limited by
nature of the person who performed the structural competence rather than by
inspection and an identifier for the stability are to be handled, it shall be
ropes shall be prepared and kept on file ascertained that the weight of the load
where readily available. All inspections has been determined within plus or
shall be performed by an appointed or minus 10 percent before it is lifted.
authorized person. Any deterioration, (2) Attaching the load. (i) The hoist
resulting in appreciable loss of original rope shall not be wrapped around the
strength shall be carefully observed load.
and detemination made as to whether (ii) The load shall be attached to the
further use of the rope would con- hook by means of slings or other ap-
stitute a safety hazard. Some of the proved devices.
conditions that could result in an ap- (3) Moving the load. (i) The employer
preciable loss of strength are the fol- shall assure that:
lowing:
(a) The crane is level and where nec-
(i) Reduction of rope diameter below
essary blocked properly.
nominal diameter due to loss of core
(b) The load is well secured and prop-
support, internal or external corrosion,
erly balanced in the sling or lifting de-
or wear of outside wires.
vice before it is lifted more than a few
(ii) A number of broken outside wires
inches.
and the degree of distribution of con-
centration of such broken wires. (ii) Before starting to hoist, the fol-
(iii) Worn outside wires. lowing conditions shall be noted:
(iv) Corroded or broken wires at end (a) Hoist rope shall not be kinked.
connections. (b) Multiple part lines shall not be
(v) Corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or twisted around each other.
improperly applied end connections. (c) The hook shall be brought over
(vi) Severe kinking, crushing, cut- the load in such a manner as to prevent
ting, or unstranding. swinging.
(2) Other ropes. (i) Heavy wear and/or (iii) During hoisting care shall be
broken wires may occur in sections in taken that:
contact with equalizer sheaves or other (a) There is no sudden acceleration or
sheaves where rope travel is limited, or deceleration of the moving load.
with saddles. Particular care shall be (b) The load does not contact any ob-
taken to inspect ropes at these loca- structions.
tions. (iv) Side loading of booms shall be
(ii) All rope which has been idle for a limited to freely suspended loads.
period of a month or more due to shut- Cranes shall not be used for dragging
down or storage of a crane on which it loads sideways.
580
(v) No hoisting, lowering, swinging, ling safety. Decisions such as position

or traveling shall be done while anyone of load, boom location, ground support,
is on the load or hook. travel route, and speed of movement
(vi) The operator should avoid car- shall be in accord with his determina-
rying loads over people. tions.
(vii) On truck-mounted cranes, no (xv) A crane with or without load
loads shall be lifted over the front area shall not be traveled with the boom so
except as approved by the crane manu- high that it may bounce back over the
facturer. cab.
(viii) The operator shall test the (xvi) When rotating the crane, sudden
brakes each time a load approaching starts and stops shall be avoided. Rota-
the rated load is handled by raising it tional speed shall be such that the load
a few inches and applying the brakes. does not swing out beyond the radii at
(ix) Outriggers shall be used when the which it can be controlled. A tag or re-
load to be handled at that particular straint line shall be used when rotation
radius exceeds the rated load without of the load is hazardous.
outriggers as given by the manufac- (xvii) When a crane is to be operated
turer for that crane. Where floats are at a fixed radius, the boom-hoist pawl
used they shall be securely attached to or other positive locking device shall
the outriggers. Wood blocks used to be engaged.
support outriggers shall: (xviii) Ropes shall not be handled on
(a) Be strong enough to prevent a winch head without the knowledge of
crushing. the operator.
(b) Be free from defects. (xix) While a winch head is being
(c) Be of sufficient width and length used, the operator shall be within con-
to prevent shifting or toppling under venient reach of the power unit control
load. lever.
(x) Neither the load nor the boom (4) Holding the load. (i) The operator
shall be lowered below the point where shall not be permitted to leave his po-
less than two full wraps of rope remain sition at the controls while the load is
on their respective drums. suspended.
(xi) Before lifting loads with loco- (ii) No person should be permitted to
motive cranes without using out- stand or pass under a load on the hook.
riggers, means shall be applied to pre- (iii) If the load must remain sus-
vent the load from being carried by the pended for any considerable length of
truck springs. time, the operator shall hold the drum
(xii) When two or more cranes are from rotating in the lowering direction
used to lift one load, one designated by activating the positive controllable
person shall be responsible for the op- means of the operator’s station.
eration. He shall be required to analyze (i) Other requirements—(1) Rail clamps.
the operation and instruct all per- Rail clamps shall not be used as a
sonnel involved in the proper posi- means of restraining tipping of a loco-
tioning, rigging of the load, and the motive crane.
movements to be made. (2) Ballast or counterweight. Cranes
(xiii) In transit the following addi- shall not be operated without the full
tional precautions shall be exercised: amount of any ballast or counter-
(a) The boom shall be carried in line weight in place as specified by the
with the direction of motion. maker, but truck cranes that have
(b) The superstructure shall be se- dropped the ballast or counterweight
cured against rotation, except when ne- may be operated temporarily with spe-
gotiating turns when there is an oper- cial care and only for light loads with-
ator in the cab or the boom is sup- out full ballast or counterweight in
ported on a dolly. place. The ballast or counterweight in
(c) The empty hook shall be lashed or place specified by the manufacturer
otherwise restrained so that it cannot shall not be exceeded.
swing freely. (3) Cabs. (i) Necessary clothing and
(xiv) Before traveling a crane with personal belongings shall be stored in
load, a designated person shall be re- such a manner as to not interfere with
sponsible for determining and control- access or operation.
581
(ii) Tools, oil cans, waste, extra fuses,

and other necessary articles shall be
stored in the tool box, and shall not be
permitted to lie loose in or about the
cab.
(4) Refueling. (i) Refueling with small
portable containers shall be done with
an approved safety type can equipped
with an automatic closing cap and
flame arrester. Refer to § 1910.155(c)(3)
for definition of approved.
(ii) Machines shall not be refueled
with the engine running.
(5) Fire extinguishers. (i) A carbon di-
oxide, dry chemical, or equivalent fire (3) A basket derrick is a derrick with-
extinguisher shall be kept in the cab or out a boom, similar to a gin pole, with
vicinity of the crane. its base supported by ropes attached to
(ii) Operating and maintenance per- corner posts or other parts of the
sonnel shall be made familiar with the structure. The base is at a lower ele-
use and care of the fire extinguishers vation than its supports. The location
provided. of the base of a basket derrick can be
(6) Swinging locomotive cranes. A loco- changed by varying the length of the
motive crane shall not be swung into a rope supports. The top of the pole is se-
position where railway cars on an adja- cured with multiple reeved guys to po-
cent track might strike it, until it has sition the top of the pole to the desired
been ascertained that cars are not location by varying the length of the
being moved on the adjacent track and upper guy lines. The load is raised and
proper flag protection has been estab- lowered by ropes through a sheave or
lished. block secured to the top of the pole.
(j) Operations near overhead lines. For
operations near overhead electric lines,
see § 1910.333(c)(3).
FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 34561, Sept. 29,
1986; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015,
Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996]
§ 1910.181 Derricks.
(a) Definitions applicable to this sec-
tion. (1) A derrick is an apparatus con-
sisting of a mast or equivalent member
held at the head by guys or braces,
with or without a boom, for use with a
hoisting mechanism and operating
ropes.
(2) A-frame derrick means a derrick in
(4) Breast derrick means a derrick
which the boom is hinged from a cross
without boom. The mast consists of
member between the bottom ends of
two side members spread farther apart
two upright members spread apart at
at the base than at the top and tied to-
the lower ends and joined at the top;
gether at top and bottom by rigid
the boom point secured to the junction
members. The mast is prevented from
of the side members, and the side mem-
tipping forward by guys connected to
bers are braced or guyed from this
its top. The load is raised and lowered
junction point.
EC27OC91.038</GPH>
by ropes through a sheave or block se-

cured to the top crosspiece.
582
EC27OC91.037</GPH>
(7) Guy derrick means a fixed derrick

(5) Chicago boom derrick means a consisting of a mast capable of being
boom which is attached to a structure, rotated, supported in a vertical posi-
an outside upright member of the tion by guys, and a boom whose bottom
structure serving as the mast, and the end is hinged or pivoted to move in a
boom being stepped in a fixed socket vertical plane with a reeved rope be-
clamped to the upright. The derrick is tween the head of the mast and the
complete with load, boom, and boom boom point for raising and lowering
point swing line falls. the boom, and a reeved rope from the
boom point for raising and lowering
the load.
(8) Shearleg derrick means a derrick

without a boom and similar to a breast
derrick. The mast, wide at the bottom
and narrow at the top, is hinged at the
EC27OC91.042</GPH>
(6) A gin pole derrick is a derrick with- bottom and has its top secured by a
out a boom. Its guys are so arranged multiple reeved guy to permit handling
loads at various radii by means of load
from its top as to permit leaning the
tackle suspended from the mast top.
mast in any direction. The load is
(9) A stiffleg derrick is a derrick simi-
raised and lowered by ropes reeved
lar to a guy derrick except that the
EC27OC91.040</GPH> EC27OC91.041</GPH>
through sheaves or blocks at the top of

mast is supported or held in place by
the mast.
two or more stiff members, called
stifflegs, which are capable of resisting
either tensile or compressive forces.
Sills are generally provided to connect
the lower ends of the stifflegs to the

foot of the mast.
583
EC27OC91.039</GPH>
plane held in place by the same cheek

plates.
(19) The foot bearing or foot block (sill
block) is the lower support on which
the mast rotates.
(20) A gudgeon pin is a pin connecting
the mast cap to the mast allowing ro-
tation of the mast.
(21) A guy is a rope used to steady or
secure the mast or other member in
the desired position.
(22) Load, working means the external
load, in pounds, applied to the derrick,
including the weight of load attaching
equipment such as load blocks, shack-
les, and slings.
(10) Appointed means assigned spe- (23) Load block, lower means the as-
cific responsibilities by the employer sembly of sheaves, pins, and frame sus-
or the employer’s representative. pended by the hoisting rope.
(11) ANSI means the American Na- (24) Load block, upper means the as-
tional Standards Institute. sembly of sheaves, pins, and frame sus-
(12) A boom is a timber or metal sec- pended from the boom.
tion or strut, pivoted or hinged at the (25) Mast means the upright member
heel (lower end) at a location fixed in of the derrick.
height on a frame or mast or vertical (26) Mast cap (spider) means the fit-
member, and with its point (upper end) ting at the top of the mast to which
supported by chains, ropes, or rods to the guys are connected.
the upper end of the frame, mast, or (27) Reeving means a rope system in
vertical member. A rope for raising and which the rope travels around drums
lowering the load is reeved through and sheaves.
sheaves or a block at the boom point. (28) Rope refers to wire rope unless
The length of the boom shall be taken otherwise specified.
as the straight line distance between (29) Safety Hook means a hook with a
the axis of the foot pin and the axis of latch to prevent slings or load from ac-
the boom point sheave pin, or where cidentally slipping off the hook.
used, the axis of the upper load block (30) Side loading is a load applied at
attachment pin. an angle to the vertical plane of the
(13) Boom harness means the block boom.
and sheave arrangement on the boom (31) The sill is a member connecting
point to which the topping lift cable is the foot block and stiffleg or a member
reeved for lowering and raising the connecting the lower ends of a double
boom. member mast.
(14) The boom point is the outward (32) A standby derrick is a derrick not
end of the top section of the boom. in regular service which is used occa-
(15) Derrick bullwheel means a hori- sionally or intermittently as required.
zontal ring or wheel, fastened to the (33) Stiffleg means a rigid member
foot of a derrick, for the purpose of supporting the mast at the head.
turning the derrick by means of ropes (34) Swing means rotation of the mast
leading from this wheel to a powered and/or boom for movements of loads in
drum. a horizontal direction about the axis of
(16) Designated means selected or as- rotation.
signed by the employer or employer’s (b) General requirements—(1) Applica-
representative as being qualified to tion. This section applies to guy,
perform specific duties. stiffleg, basket, breast, gin pole, Chi-
(17) Eye means a loop formed at the cago boom and A-frame derricks of the
end of a rope by securing the dead end stationary type, capable of handling
to the live end at the base of the loop. loads at variable reaches and powered
(18) A fiddle block is a block con- by hoists through systems of rope

sisting of two sheaves in the same reeving, used to perform lifting hook
584
EC27OC91.043</GPH>
work, single or multiple line bucket degree of their exposure to wear, dete-
work, grab, grapple, and magnet work. rioration, or malfunction. The two gen-
Derricks may be permanently installed eral classifications are herein des-
for temporary use as in construction ignated as frequent and periodic with
work. The requirements of this section respective intervals between inspec-
also apply to any modification of these tions as defined below:
types which retain their fundamental (a) Frequent inspection—Daily to
features, except for floating derricks. monthly intervals.
(2) New and existing equipment. All (b) Periodic inspection—1- to 12-
new derricks constructed and installed month intervals, or as specified by the
on or after August 31, 1971, shall meet manufacturer.
the design specifications of the Amer- (2) Frequent inspection. Items such as
ican National Standard Safety Code for the following shall be inspected for de-
Derricks, ANSI B30.6–1969, which is in- fects at intervals as defined in para-
corporated by reference as specified in graph (d)(1)(ii)(a) of this section or as
§ 1910.6. specifically indicated, including obser-
(3) Designated personnel. Only des- vation during operation for any defects
ignated personnel shall be permitted to which might appear between regular
operate a derrick covered by this sec- inspections. Deficiencies shall be care-
tion. fully examined for any safety hazard:
(c) Load ratings—(1) Rated load mark- (i) All control mechanisms: Inspect
ing. For permanently installed derricks daily for adjustment, wear, and lubri-
with fixed lengths of boom, guy, and cation.
mast, a substantial, durable, and clear- (ii) All chords and lacing: Inspect
ly legible rating chart shall be pro- daily, visually.
vided with each derrick and securely
(iii) Tension in guys: Daily.
affixed where it is visible to personnel
(iv) Plumb of the mast.
responsible for the safe operation of
the equipment. The chart shall include (v) Deterioration or leakage in air or
the following data: hydraulic systems: Daily.
(i) Manufacturer’s approved load rat- (vi) Derrick hooks for deformations
ings at corresponding ranges of boom or cracks; for hooks with cracks or
angle or operating radii. having more than 15 percent in excess
(ii) Specific lengths of components on of normal throat opening or more than
which the load ratings are based. 10° twist from the plane of the unbent
(iii) Required parts for hoist reeving. hook, refer to paragraph (e)(3)(iii) of
Size and construction of rope may be this section.
shown either on the rating chart or in (vii) Rope reeving; visual inspection
the operating manual. for noncompliance with derrick manu-
(2) Nonpermanent installations. For facturer’s recommendations.
nonpermanent installations, the manu- (viii) Hoist brakes, clutches, and op-
facturer shall provide sufficient infor- erating levers: check daily for proper
mation from which capacity charts can functioning before beginning oper-
be prepared for the particular installa- ations.
tion. The capacity charts shall be lo- (ix) Electrical apparatus for malfunc-
cated at the derricks or the jobsite of- tioning, signs of excessive deteriora-
fice. tion, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
(d) Inspection—(1) Inspection classifica- (3) Periodic inspection. (i) Complete in-
tion. (i) Prior to initial use all new and spections of the derrick shall be per-
altered derricks shall be inspected to formed at intervals as generally de-
insure compliance with the provisions fined in paragraph (d)(1)(ii)(b) of this
of this section. section depending upon its activity, se-
(ii) Inspection procedure for derricks verity of service, and environment, or
in regular service is divided into two as specifically indicated below. These
general classifications based upon the inspections shall include the require-
intervals at which inspection should be ments of paragraph (d)(2) of this sec-
performed. The intervals in turn are tion and in addition, items such as the
dependent upon the nature of the crit- following. Deficiencies shall be care-
ical components of the derrick and the fully examined and a determination
585
made as to whether they constitute a (2) Maintenance procedure. (i) Before

safety hazard: adjustments and repairs are started on
(a) Structural members for deforma- a derrick the following precautions
tions, cracks, and corrosion. shall be taken:
(b) Bolts or rivets for tightness. (a) The derrick to be repaired shall be
(c) Parts such as pins, bearings, arranged so it will cause the least in-
shafts, gears, sheaves, drums, rollers, terference with other equipment and
locking and clamping devices, for wear, operations in the area.
cracks, and distortion. (b) All hoist drum dogs shall be en-
(d) Gudgeon pin for cracks, wear, and gaged.
distortion each time the derrick is to (c) The main or emergency switch
be erected. shall be locked in the open position, if
(e) Powerplants for proper perform- an electric hoist is used.
ance and compliance with applicable (d) Warning or out of order signs
safety requirements. shall be placed on the derrick and
(f) Hooks. hoist.
(e) The repairs of booms of derricks
(ii) Foundation or supports shall be
shall either be made when the booms
inspected for continued ability to sus-
are lowered and adequately supported
tain the imposed loads.
or safely tied off.
(4) Derricks not in regular use. (i) A
(f) A good communication system
derrick which has been idle for a period
shall be set up between the hoist oper-
of 1 month or more, but less than 6
ator and the appointed individual in
months, shall be given an inspection
charge of derrick operations before any
conforming with requirements of para-
work on the equipment is started.
graph (d)(2) of this section and para-
(ii) After adjustments and repairs
graph (g)(3) of this section before plac-
have been made the derrick shall not
ing in service.
be operated until all guards have been
(ii) A derrick which has been idle for reinstalled, safety devices reactivated,
a period of over 6 months shall be given and maintenance equipment removed.
a complete inspection conforming with (3) Adjustments and repairs. (i) Any
requirements of paragraphs (d) (2) and unsafe conditions disclosed by inspec-
(3) of this section and paragraph (g)(3) tion shall be corrected before operation
of this section before placing in serv- of the derrick is resumed.
ice. (ii) Adjustments shall be maintained
(iii) Standby derricks shall be in- to assure correct functioning of compo-
spected at least semiannually in ac- nents.
cordance with requirements of para- (iii) Repairs or replacements shall be
graph (d)(2) of this section and para- provided promptly as needed for safe
graph (g)(3) of this section. operation. The following are examples
(e) Testing—(1) Operational tests. Prior of conditions requiring prompt repair
to initial use all new and altered der- or replacement:
ricks shall be tested to insure compli- (a) Hooks showing defects described
ance with this section including the in paragraph (d)(2)(vi) of this section
following functions: shall be discarded.
(i) Load hoisting and lowering. (b) All critical parts which are
(ii) Boom up and down. cracked, broken, bent, or excessively
(iii) Swing. worn.
(iv) Operation of clutches and brakes (c) [Reserved]
of hoist. (d) All replacement and repaired
(2) Anchorages. All anchorages shall parts shall have at least the original
be approved by the appointed person. safety factor.
Rock and hairpin anchorages may re- (g) Rope inspection—(1) Running ropes.
quire special testing. A thorough inspection of all ropes in
(f) Maintenance—(1) Preventive mainte- use shall be made at least once a
nance. A preventive maintenance pro- month and a certification record which
gram based on the derrick manufactur- includes the date of inspection, the sig-
er’s recommendations shall be estab- nature of the person who performed the
lished. inspection, and an identifier for the
586
ropes which were inspected shall be (2) Attaching the load. (i) The hoist
prepared and kept on file where readily rope shall not be wrapped around the
available. Any deterioration, resulting load.
in appreciable loss of original strength (ii) The load shall be attached to the
shall be carefully observed and deter- hook by means of slings or other suit-
mination made as to whether further able devices.
use of the rope would constitute a safe- (3) Moving the load. (i) The load shall
ty hazard. Some of the conditions that be well secured and properly balanced
could result in an appreciable loss of in the sling or lifting device before it is
strength are the following: lifted more than a few inches.
(i) Reduction of rope diameter below (ii) Before starting to hoist, the fol-
nominal diameter due to loss of core lowing conditions shall be noted:
support, internal or external corrosion, (a) Hoist rope shall not be kinked.
or wear of outside wires. (b) Multiple part lines shall not be
(ii) A number of broken outside wires twisted around each other.
and the degree of distribution or con- (c) The hook shall be brought over
centration of such broken wires. the load in such a manner as to prevent
(iii) Worn outside wires. swinging.
(iv) Corroded or broken wires at end (iii) During hoisting, care shall be
connections. taken that:
(v) Corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or (a) There is no sudden acceleration or
improperly applied end connections. deceleration of the moving load.
(vi) Severe kinking, crushing, cut- (b) Load does not contact any ob-
ting, or unstranding. structions.
(2) Limited travel ropes. Heavy wear (iv) A derrick shall not be used for
and/or broken wires may occur in sec- side loading except when specifically
tions in contact with equalizer sheaves authorized by a responsible person who
or other sheaves where rope travel is has determined that the various struc-
limited, or with saddles. Particular tural components will not be over-
care shall be taken to inspect ropes at stressed.
these locations. (v) No hoisting, lowering, or swinging
(3) Idle ropes. All rope which has been shall be done while anyone is on the
idle for a period of a month or more load or hook.
due to shutdown or storage of a derrick (vi) The operator should avoid car-
on which it is installed shall be given a rying loads over people.
thorough inspection before it is used. (vii) The operator shall test the
This inspection shall be for all types of brakes each time a load approaching
deterioration. A certification record the rated load is handled by raising it
shall be prepared and kept readily a few inches and applying the brakes.
available which includes the date of in- (viii) Neither the load nor boom shall
spection, the signature of the person be lowered below the point where less
who performed the inspection, and an than two full wraps of rope remain on
identifier for the ropes which were in- their respective drums.
spected. (ix) When rotating a derrick, sudden
(4) Nonrotating ropes. Particular care starts and stops shall be avoided. Rota-
shall be taken in the inspection of non- tional speed shall be such that the load
rotating rope. does not swing out beyond the radius
(h) Operations of derricks. Derrick op- at which it can be controlled.
erations shall be directed only by the (x) Boom and hoisting rope systems
individual specifically designated for shall not be twisted.
that purpose. (4) Holding the load. (i) The operator
(i) Handling the load—(1) Size of load. shall not be allowed to leave his posi-
(i) No derrick shall be loaded beyond tion at the controls while the load is
the rated load. suspended.
(ii) When loads approach the max- (ii) People should not be permitted to
imum rating of the derrick, it shall be stand or pass under a load on the hook.
ascertained that the weight of the load (iii) If the load must remain sus-
has been determined within plus or pended for any considerable length of
minus 10 percent before it is lifted. time, a dog, or pawl and ratchet, or
587
other equivalent means, rather than ings shall be stored in such a manner
the brake alone, shall be used to hold as to not interfere with access or oper-
the load. ation.
(5) Use of winch heads. (i) Ropes shall (ii) Tools, oilcans, waste, extra fuses,
not be handled on a winch head with- and other necessary articles shall be
out the knowledge of the operator. stored in the toolbox, and shall not be
(ii) While a winch head is being used, permitted to lie loose in or about the
the operator shall be within convenient cab or operating enclosure.
reach of the power unit control lever. [37 FR 22102, Oct. 18, 1972, as amended at 38
(6) Securing boom. Dogs, pawls, or FR 14373, June 1, 1973; 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24,
other positive holding mechanism on 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 34561,
the hoist shall be engaged. When not in Sept. 29, 1986; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR
use, the derrick boom shall: 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996]
(i) Be laid down;
(ii) Be secured to a stationary mem- § 1910.183 Helicopters.
ber, as nearly under the head as pos- (a) [Reserved]
sible, by attachment of a sling to the (b) Briefing. Prior to each day’s oper-
load block; or ation a briefing shall be conducted.
(iii) Be hoisted to a vertical position This briefing shall set forth the plan of
and secured to the mast. operation for the pilot and ground per-
(j) Other requirements—(1) Guards. (i) sonnel.
Exposed moving parts, such as gears, (c) Slings and tag lines. Loads shall be
ropes, setscrews, projecting keys, properly slung. Tag lines shall be of a
chains, chain sprockets, and recipro- length that will not permit their being
cating components, which constitute a drawn up into the rotors. Pressed
hazard under normal operating condi- sleeve, swedged eyes, or equivalent
tions shall be guarded. means shall be used for all freely sus-
(ii) Guards shall be securely fastened. pended loads to prevent hand splices
(iii) Each guard shall be capable of from spinning open or cable clamps
supporting without permanent distor- from loosening.
tion, the weight of a 200–pound person (d) Cargo hooks. All electrically oper-
unless the guard is located where it is ated cargo hooks shall have the elec-
impossible for a person to step on it. trical activating device so designed and
(2) Hooks. (i) Hooks shall meet the installed as to prevent inadvertent op-
manufacturer’s recommendations and eration. In addition, these cargo hooks
shall not be overloaded. shall be equipped with an emergency
(ii) Safety latch type hooks shall be mechanical control for releasing the
used wherever possible. load. The employer shall ensure that
(3) Fire extinguishers. (i) A carbon di- the hooks are tested prior to each day’s
oxide, dry chemical, or equivalent fire operation by a competent person to de-
extinguisher shall be kept in the imme- termine that the release functions
diate vicinity of the derrick. properly, both electrically and me-
(ii) Operating and maintenance per- chanically.
sonnel shall be familiar with the use (e) Personal protective equipment. (1)
and care of the fire extinguishers pro- Personal protective equipment shall be
vided. provided and the employer shall ensure
(4) Refueling. (i) Refueling with port- its use by employees receiving the
able containers shall be done with ap- load. Personal protective equipment
proved safety type containers equipped shall consist of complete eye protec-
with automatic closing cap and flame tion and hardhats secured by chin-
arrester. Refer to § 1910.155(c)(3) for def- straps.
inition of Approved. (2) Loose-fitting clothing likely to
(ii) Machines shall not be refueled flap in rotor downwash, and thus be
with the engine running. snagged on the hoist line, may not be
(5) Operations near overhead lines. For worn.
operations near overhead electric lines, (f) Loose gear and objects. The em-
see § 1910.333(c)(3). ployer shall take all necessary pre-
(6) Cab or operating enclosure. (i) Nec- cautions to protect employees from
essary clothing and personal belong- flying objects in the rotor downwash.
588
All loose gear within 100 feet of the cautions shall also be taken by the em-
place of lifting the load or depositing ployer to eliminate, as far as practical,
the load, or within all other areas sus- the dust or other conditions reducing
ceptible to rotor downwash, shall be se- the visibility.
cured or removed. (n) Signal systems. The employer shall
(g) Housekeeping. Good housekeeping instruct the aircrew and ground per-
shall be maintained in all helicopter sonnel on the signal systems to be used
loading and unloading areas. and shall review the system with the
(h) Load safety. The size and weight employees in advance of hoisting the
of loads, and the manner in which loads load. This applies to both radio and
are connected to the helicopter shall be hand signal systems. Hand signals,
checked. A lift may not be made if the where used, shall be as shown in Figure
helicopter operator believes the lift N–1.
cannot be made safely. (o) Approach distance. No employee
(i) Hooking and unhooking loads. When shall be permitted to approach within
employees perform work under hov- 50 feet of the helicopter when the rotor
ering craft, a safe means of access shall blades are turning, unless his work du-
be provided for employees to reach the ties require his presence in that area.
hoist line hook and engage or dis-
(p) Approaching helicopter. The em-
engage cargo slings. Employees may
ployer shall instruct employees, and
not be permitted to perform work
shall ensure, that whenever approach-
under hovering craft except when nec-
ing or leaving a helicopter which has
essary to hook or unhook loads.
its blades rotating, all employees shall
(j) Static charge. Static charge on the
remain in full view of the pilot and
suspended load shall be dissipated with
keep in a crouched position. No em-
a grounding device before ground per-
ployee shall be permitted to work in
sonnel touch the suspended load, unless
protective rubber gloves are being worn the area from the cockpit or cabin
by all ground personnel who may be re- rearward while blades are rotating, un-
quired to touch the suspended load. less authorized by the helicopter oper-
(k) Weight limitation. The weight of an ator to work there.
external load shall not exceed the heli- (q) Personnel. Sufficient ground per-
copter manufacturer’s rating. sonnel shall be provided to ensure that
(l) Ground lines. Hoist wires or other helicopter loading and unloading oper-
gear, except for pulling lines or con- ations can be performed safely.
ductors that are allowed to ‘‘pay out’’ (r) Communications. There shall be
from a container or roll off a reel, shall constant reliable communication be-
not be attached to any fixed ground tween the pilot and a designated em-
structure, or allowed to foul on any ployee of the ground crew who acts as
fixed structure. a signalman during the period of load-
(m) Visibility. Ground personnel shall ing and unloading. The signalman shall
be instructed and the employer shall be clearly distinguishable from other
ensure that when visibility is reduced ground personnel.
by dust or other conditions, they shall (s) Fires. Open fires shall not be per-
exercise special caution to keep clear mitted in areas where they could be
of main and stabilizing rotors. Pre- spread by the rotor downwash.
589
[40 FR 13440, Mar. 26, 1975, as amended at 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998]
590
EC27OC91.044</GPH>
§ 1910.184 Slings. Coating is an elastomer or other suit-

able material applied to a sling or to a
(a) Scope. This section applies to
sling component to impart desirable
slings used in conjunction with other
properties.
material handling equipment for the
movement of material by hoisting, in Cross rod is a wire used to join spirals
employments covered by this part. The of metal mesh to form a complete fab-
types of slings covered are those made ric. (See Fig. N–184–2.)
from alloy steel chain, wire rope, metal Designated means selected or assigned
mesh, natural or synthetic fiber rope by the employer or the employer’s rep-
(conventional three strand construc- resentative as being qualified to per-
tion), and synthetic web (nylon, poly- form specific duties.
ester, and polypropylene). Equivalent entity is a person or orga-
(b) Definitions. Angle of loading is the nization (including an employer)
inclination of a leg or branch of a sling which, by possession of equipment,
measured from the horizontal or technical knowledge and skills, can
vertical plane as shown in Fig. N–184–5; perform with equal competence the
provided that an angle of loading of same repairs and tests as the person or
five degrees or less from the vertical organization with which it is equated.
may be considered a vertical angle of Fabric (metal mesh) is the flexible por-
loading. tion of a metal mesh sling consisting of
Basket hitch is a sling configuration a series of transverse coils and cross
whereby the sling is passed under the rods.
load and has both ends, end attach- Female handle (choker) is a handle
ments, eyes or handles on the hook or with a handle eye and a slot of such di-
a single master link. mension as to permit passage of a male
Braided wire rope is a wire rope handle thereby allowing the use of a
formed by plaiting component wire metal mesh sling in a choker hitch.
ropes. (See Fig. N–184–1.)
Bridle wire rope sling is a sling com- Handle is a terminal fitting to which
posed of multiple wire rope legs with
metal mesh fabric is attached. (See
the top ends gathered in a fitting that
Fig. N–184–1.)
goes over the lifting hook.
Handle eye is an opening in a handle
Cable laid endless sling-mechanical
of a metal mesh sling shaped to accept
joint is a wire rope sling made endless
by joining the ends of a single length of a hook, shackle or other lifting device.
cable laid rope with one or more metal- (See Fig. N–184–1.)
lic fittings. Hitch is a sling configuration where-
Cable laid grommet-hand tucked is an by the sling is fastened to an object or
endless wire rope sling made from one load, either directly to it or around it.
length of rope wrapped six times Link is a single ring of a chain.
around a core formed by hand tucking Male handle (triangle) is a handle with
the ends of the rope inside the six a handle eye.
wraps. Master coupling link is an alloy steel
Cable laid rope is a wire rope com- welded coupling link used as an inter-
posed of six wire ropes wrapped around mediate link to join alloy steel chain
a fiber or wire rope core. to master links. (See Fig. N–184–3.)
Cable laid rope sling-mechanical joint is Master link or gathering ring is a
a wire rope sling made from a cable forged or welded steel link used to sup-
laid rope with eyes fabricated by press- port all members (legs) of an alloy
ing or swaging one or more metal steel chain sling or wire rope sling.
sleeves over the rope junction. (See Fig. N–184–3.)
Choker hitch is a sling configuration Mechanical coupling link is a non-
with one end of the sling passing under welded, mechanically closed steel link
the load and through an end attach-
used to attach master links, hooks,

ment, handle or eye on the other end of etc., to alloy steel chain.
the sling.
591
592
EC27OC91.045</GPH>
593
EC27OC91.046</GPH>
594
EC27OC91.047</GPH>
595
ER15AP19.005</GPH>
Proof load is the load applied in per- terminal component to the bottom
formance of a proof test. bearing surface of the lower terminal
Proof test is a nondestructive tension component.
test performed by the sling manufac- Selvage edge is the finished edge of
turer or an equivalent entity to verify synthetic webbing designed to prevent
construction and workmanship of a unraveling.
sling. Sling is an assembly which connects
Rated capacity or working load limit is the load to the material handling
the maximum working load permitted equipment.
by the provisions of this section. Sling manufacturer is a person or or-
Reach is the effective length of an ganization that assembles sling compo-
alloy steel chain sling measured from nents into their final form for sale to
the top bearing surface of the upper users.
596
ER15AP19.006</GPH>
Spiral is a single transverse coil that (14) Employers must not use slings
is the basic element from which metal without affixed and legible identifica-
mesh is fabricated. (See Fig. N–184–2.) tion markings.
Strand laid endless sling-mechanical (d) Inspections. Each day before being
joint is a wire rope sling made endless used, the sling and all fastenings and
from one length of rope with the ends attachments shall be inspected for
joined by one or more metallic fittings. damage or defects by a competent per-
Strand laid grommet-hand tucked is an son designated by the employer. Addi-
endless wire rope sling made from one tional inspections shall be performed
length of strand wrapped six times during sling use, where service condi-
around a core formed by hand tucking tions warrant. Damaged or defective
the ends of the strand inside the six slings shall be immediately removed
wraps. from service.
Strand laid rope is a wire rope made (e) Alloy steel chain slings—(1) Sling
with strands (usually six or eight) identification. Alloy steel chain slings
wrapped around a fiber core, wire shall have permanently affixed durable
strand core, or independent wire rope identification stating size, grade, rated
core (IWRC). capacity, and reach.
Vertical hitch is a method of sup- (2) Attachments. (i) Hooks, rings, ob-
porting a load by a single, vertical part long links, pear shaped links, welded or
or leg of the sling. (See Fig. N–184–4.)
mechanical coupling links or other at-
(c) Safe operating practices. Whenever
tachments shall have a rated capacity
any sling is used, the following prac-
at least equal to that of the alloy steel
tices shall be observed:
chain with which they are used or the
(1) Slings that are damaged or defec-
sling shall not be used in excess of the
tive shall not be used.
rated capacity of the weakest compo-
(2) Slings shall not be shortened with
nent.
knots or bolts or other makeshift de-
vices. (ii) Makeshift links or fasteners
(3) Sling legs shall not be kinked. formed from bolts or rods, or other
(4) Slings shall not be loaded in ex- such attachments, shall not be used.
cess of their rated capacities. (3) Inspections. (i) In addition to the
(5) Slings used in a basket hitch shall inspection required by paragraph (d) of
have the loads balanced to prevent slip- this section, a thorough periodic in-
page. spection of alloy steel chain slings in
(6) Slings shall be securely attached use shall be made on a regular basis, to
to their loads. be determined on the basis of (A) fre-
(7) Slings shall be padded or pro- quency of sling use; (B) severity of
tected from the sharp edges of their service conditions; (C) nature of lifts
loads. being made; and (D) experience gained
(8) Suspended loads shall be kept on the service life of slings used in
clear of all obstructions. similar circumstances. Such inspec-
(9) All employees shall be kept clear tions shall in no event be at intervals
of loads about to be lifted and of sus- greater than once every 12 months.
pended loads. (ii) The employer shall make and
(10) Hands or fingers shall not be maintain a record of the most recent
placed between the sling and its load month in which each alloy steel chain
while the sling is being tightened sling was thoroughly inspected, and
around the load. shall make such record available for
(11) Shock loading is prohibited. examination.
(12) A sling shall not be pulled from (iii) The thorough inspection of alloy
under a load when the load is resting steel chain slings shall be performed by
on the sling. a competent person designated by the
(13) Employers must not load a sling employer, and shall include a thorough
in excess of its recommended safe inspection for wear, defective welds,
working load as prescribed by the sling deformation and increase in length.
manufacturer on the identification Where such defects or deterioration are
markings permanently affixed to the present, the sling shall be immediately

sling. removed from service.
597
(4) Proof testing. The employer shall TABLE N–184–1—MINIMUM ALLOWABLE CHAIN
ensure that before use, each new, re- SIZE AT ANY POINT OF LINK—Continued
paired, or reconditioned alloy steel
Minimum allowable chain
chain sling, including all welded com- Chain size, inches size, inches
ponents in the sling assembly, shall be
proof tested by the sling manufacturer 11⁄8 29 32⁄
11⁄4 1
or equivalent entity, in accordance
13⁄8 13⁄32
with paragraph 5.2 of the American So- 11⁄2 13⁄16
ciety of Testing and Materials Speci- 13⁄4 113⁄32
fication A391–65, which is incorporated
by reference as specified in § 1910.6 (ii) Slings shall be removed from
(ANSI G61.1–1968). The employer shall service if hooks are cracked, have been
retain a certificate of the proof test opened more than 15 percent of the nor-
and shall make it available for exam- mal throat opening measured at the
ination. narrowest point or twisted more than
(5) [Reserved] 10 degrees from the plane of the unbent
(6) Safe operating temperatures. Em- hook.
ployers must permanently remove an
(f) Wire-rope slings—(1) Sling use. Em-
alloy steel-chain slings from service if
ployers must use only wire-rope slings
it is heated above 1000 degrees F. When
that have permanently affixed and leg-
exposed to service temperatures in ex-
ible identification markings as pre-
cess of 600 degrees F, employers must
scribed by the manufacturer, and that
reduce the maximum working-load
indicate the recommended safe work-
limits permitted by the chain manufac-
ing load for the type(s) of hitch(es)
turer in accordance with the chain or
used, the angle upon which it is based,
sling manufacturer’s recommenda-
and the number of legs if more than
tions.
one.
(7) Repairing and reconditioning alloy
steel chain slings. (i) Worn or damaged (2) Minimum sling lengths. (i) Cable
alloy steel chain slings or attachments laid and 6 × 19 and 6 × 37 slings shall
shall not be used until repaired. When have a minimum clear length of wire
welding or heat testing is performed, rope 10 times the component rope di-
slings shall not be used unless repaired, ameter between splices, sleeves or end
reconditioned and proof tested by the fittings.
sling manufacturer or an equivalent (ii) Braided slings shall have a min-
entity. imum clear length of wire rope 40 times
(ii) Mechanical coupling links or low the component rope diameter between
carbon steel repair links shall not be the loops or end fittings.
used to repair broken lengths of chain. (iii) Cable laid grommets, strand laid
(8) Effect of wear. If the chain size at grommets and endless slings shall have
any point of the link is less than that a minimum circumferential length of
stated in Table N–184–1, the employer 96 times their body diameter.
must remove the chain from service. (3) Safe operating temperatures. Fiber
(9) Deformed attachments. (i) Alloy core wire rope slings of all grades shall
steel chain slings with cracked or de- be permanently removed from service
formed master links, coupling links or if they are exposed to temperatures in
other components shall be removed excess of 200 °F. When nonfiber core
from service. wire rope slings of any grade are used
at temperatures above 400 °F or below
TABLE N–184–1—MINIMUM ALLOWABLE CHAIN minus 60 °F, recommendations of the
SIZE AT ANY POINT OF LINK sling manufacturer regarding use at
Minimum allowable chain
that temperature shall be followed.
Chain size, inches (4) End attachments. (i) Welding of end
size, inches
14
attachments, except covers to thim-
⁄ ⁄
13 64
⁄
38 ⁄
19 64 bles, shall be performed prior to the as-
1⁄2 ⁄
25 64 sembly of the sling.
5⁄8 31⁄64
(ii) All welded end attachments shall
3⁄4 19⁄32
7⁄8 45⁄64 not be used unless proof tested by the
1 13⁄16 manufacturer or equivalent entity at
598
twice their rated capacity prior to ini- (7) Safe operating temperatures. Metal
tial use. The employer shall retain a mesh slings which are not impregnated
certificate of the proof test, and make with elastomers may be used in a tem-
it available for examination. perature range from minus 20 °F to
(5) Removal from service. Wire rope plus 550 °F without decreasing the
slings shall be immediately removed working load limit. Metal mesh slings
from service if any of the following impregnated with polyvinyl chloride or
conditions are present: neoprene may be used only in a tem-
(i) Ten randomly distributed broken perature range from zero degrees to
wires in one rope lay, or five broken plus 200 °F. For operations outside
wires in one strand in one rope lay. these temperature ranges or for metal
(ii) Wear or scraping of one-third the mesh slings impregnated with other
original diameter of outside individual materials, the sling manufacturer’s
wires. recommendations shall be followed.
(iii) Kinking, crushing, bird caging or (8) Repairs. (i) Metal mesh slings
any other damage resulting in distor- which are repaired shall not be used
tion of the wire rope structure. unless repaired by a metal mesh sling
(iv) Evidence of heat damage. manufacturer or an equivalent entity.
(v) End attachments that are (ii) Once repaired, each sling shall be
cracked, deformed or worn. permanently marked or tagged, or a
(vi) Hooks that have been opened written record maintained, to indicate
more than 15 percent of the normal the date and nature of the repairs and
throat opening measured at the nar- the person or organization that per-
rowest point or twisted more than 10 formed the repairs. Records of repairs
degrees from the plane of the unbent shall be made available for examina-
hook. tion.
(vii) Corrosion of the rope or end at- (9) Removal from service. Metal mesh
tachments. slings shall be immediately removed
(g) Metal mesh slings—(1) Sling mark- from service if any of the following
ing. Each metal mesh sling shall have conditions are present:
permanently affixed to it a durable (i) A broken weld or broken brazed
marking that states the rated capacity joint along the sling edge.
for vertical basket hitch and choker
(ii) Reduction in wire diameter of 25
hitch loadings.
per cent due to abrasion or 15 per cent
(2) Handles. Handles shall have a
due to corrosion.
rated capacity at least equal to the
metal fabric and exhibit no deforma- (iii) Lack of flexibility due to distor-
tion after proof testing. tion of the fabric.
(3) Attachments of handles to fabric. (iv) Distortion of the female handle
The fabric and handles shall be joined so that the depth of the slot is in-
so that: creased more than 10 per cent.
(i) The rated capacity of the sling is (v) Distortion of either handle so
not reduced. that the width of the eye is decreased
(ii) The load is evenly distributed more than 10 per cent.
across the width of the fabric. (vi) A 15 percent reduction of the
(iii) Sharp edges will not damage the original cross sectional area of metal
fabric. at any point around the handle eye.
(4) Sling coatings. Coatings which di- (vii) Distortion of either handle out
minish the rated capacity of a sling of its plane.
shall not be applied. (h) Natural and synthetic fiber-rope
(5) Sling testing. All new and repaired slings—(1) Sling use. Employers must
metal mesh slings, including handles, use natural and synthetic fiber-rope
shall not be used unless proof tested by slings that have permanently affixed
the manufacturer or equivalent entity and legible identification markings
at a minimum of 11⁄2 times their rated stating the rated capacity for the
capacity. Elastomer impregnated type(s) of hitch(es) used and the angle
slings shall be proof tested before coat- upon which it is based, type of fiber
ing. material, and the number of legs if

(6) [Reserved] more than one.
599
(2) Safe operating temperatures. Nat- contact with the rope have sharp edges
ural and synthetic fiber rope slings, ex- or projections.
cept for wet frozen slings, may be used (5) Removal from service. Natural and
in a temperature range from minus 20 synthetic fiber rope slings shall be im-
°F to plus 180 °F without decreasing the mediately removed from service if any
working load limit. For operations out- of the following conditions are present:
side this temperature range and for wet (i) Abnormal wear.
frozen slings, the sling manufacturer’s (ii) Powdered fiber between strands.
recommendations shall be followed.
(iii) Broken or cut fibers.
(3) Splicing. Spliced fiber rope slings
shall not be used unless they have been (iv) Variations in the size or round-
spliced in accordance with the fol- ness of strands.
lowing minimum requirements and in (v) Discoloration or rotting.
accordance with any additional rec- (vi) Distortion of hardware in the
ommendations of the manufacturer: sling.
(i) In manila rope, eye splices shall (6) Repairs. Only fiber rope slings
consist of at least three full tucks, and made from new rope shall be used. Use
short splices shall consist of at least of repaired or reconditioned fiber rope
six full tucks, three on each side of the slings is prohibited.
splice center line. (i) Synthetic web slings—(1) Sling iden-
(ii) In synthetic fiber rope, eye tification. Each sling shall be marked or
splices shall consist of at least four full coded to show the rated capacities for
tucks, and short splices shall consist of each type of hitch and type of syn-
at least eight full tucks, four on each thetic web material.
side of the center line. (2) Webbing. Synthetic webbing shall
(iii) Strand end tails shall not be
be of uniform thickness and width and
trimmed flush with the surface of the
selvage edges shall not be split from
rope immediately adjacent to the full
the webbing’s width.
tucks. This applies to all types of fiber
rope and both eye and short splices. (3) Fittings. Fittings shall be:
For fiber rope under one inch in diame- (i) Of a minimum breaking strength
ter, the tail shall project at least six equal to that of the sling; and
rope diameters beyond the last full (ii) Free of all sharp edges that could
tuck. For fiber rope one inch in diame- in any way damage the webbing.
ter and larger, the tail shall project at (4) Attachment of end fittings to web-
least six inches beyond the last full bing and formation of eyes. Stitching
tuck. Where a projecting tail interferes shall be the only method used to at-
with the use of the sling, the tail shall tach end fittings to webbing and to
be tapered and spliced into the body of form eyes. The thread shall be in an
the rope using at least two additional even pattern and contain a sufficient
tucks (which will require a tail length number of stitches to develop the full
of approximately six rope diameters breaking strength of the sling.
beyond the last full tuck). (5) [Reserved]
(iv) Fiber rope slings shall have a (6) Environmental conditions. When
minimum clear length of rope between synthetic web slings are used, the fol-
eye splices equal to 10 times the rope lowing precautions shall be taken:
diameter.
(i) Nylon web slings shall not be used
(v) Knots shall not be used in lieu of
splices. where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or
(vi) Clamps not designed specifically liquids of acids or phenolics are
for fiber ropes shall not be used for present.
splicing. (ii) Polyester and polypropylene web
(vii) For all eye splices, the eye shall slings shall not be used where fumes,
be of such size to provide an included vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of
angle of not greater than 60 degrees at caustics are present.
the splice when the eye is placed over (iii) Web slings with aluminum fit-
the load or support. tings shall not be used where fumes,
(4) End attachments. Fiber rope slings vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of
shall not be used if end attachments in caustics are present.
600
(7) Safe operating temperatures. Syn- web slings shall not be used at tem-
thetic web slings of polyester and peratures in excess of 200 °F.
nylon shall not be used at tempera- (8) Repairs. (i) Synthetic web slings
EC27OC91.051</GPH>
tures in excess of 180 °F. Polypropylene which are repaired shall not be used
601
EC27OC91.050</GPH>
unless repaired by a sling manufac- (b) As used in § 1910.215 unless the

turer or an equivalent entity. context clearly requires otherwise, the
(ii) Each repaired sling shall be proof following abrasive wheel machinery
tested by the manufacturer or equiva- terms shall have the meanings pre-
lent entity to twice the rated capacity scribed in this paragraph.
prior to its return to service. The em- (1) Type 1 straight wheels means
ployer shall retain a certificate of the wheels having diameter, thickness, and
proof test and make it available for ex- hole size dimensions, and they should
amination. be used only on the periphery. Type 1
(iii) Slings, including webbing and wheels shall be mounted between
fittings, which have been repaired in a flanges.
temporary manner shall not be used.
LIMITATION: Hole dimension (H) should not
(9) Removal from service. Synthetic
be greater than two-thirds of wheel diameter
web slings shall be immediately re- dimension (D) for precision, cylindrical,
moved from service if any of the fol- centerless, or surface grinding applications.
lowing conditions are present: Maximum hole size for all other applications
(i) Acid or caustic burns; should not exceed one-half wheel diameter.
(ii) Melting or charring of any part of
the sling surface; FIGURE NO. 0–1—TYPE 1 STRAIGHT
(iii) Snags, punctures, tears or cuts; WHEELS
(iv) Broken or worn stitches; or
(v) Distortion of fittings.
FR 31598, July 28, 1975; 41 FR 13353, Mar. 30,
1976; 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9240,
Mar. 7, 1996; 76 FR 33607, June 8, 2011; 84 FR
15105, Apr. 15, 2019]
TYPE 1—STRAIGHT WHEEL
Subpart O—Machinery and
Machine Guarding Peripheral grinding wheel having a
diameter, thickness and hole.
AUTHORITY: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Sec- (2) Type 2 cylinder wheels means
wheels having diameter, wheel thick-
8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55
FR 9033), 5–2002 (67 FR 65008), or 1–2012 (77 FR ness, and rim thickness dimensions.
3912), as applicable; 20 CFR part 1911. Sec- Grinding is performed on the rim face
tions 1910.217 and 1910.219 also issued under 5 only, dimension W. Cylinder wheels
U.S.C. 553. may be plain, plate mounted, inserted
nut, or of the projecting stud type.
§ 1910.211 Definitions.
LIMITATION: Rim height, T dimension, is
(a) As used in §§ 1910.213 and 1910.214 generally equal to or greater than rim thick-
unless the context clearly requires oth- ness, W dimension.
erwise, the following woodworking ma-
chinery terms shall have the meaning FIGURE NO. 0–2—TYPE 2 CYLINDER
prescribed in this paragraph. WHEELS
(1) Point of operations means that
point at which cutting, shaping, bor-
ing, or forming is accomplished upon
the stock.
(2) Push stick means a narrow strip of
wood or other soft material with a
notch cut into one end and which is
used to push short pieces of material
through saws.
(3) Block means a short block of
wood, provided with a handle similar to TYPE 2—CYLINDER WHEEL
that of a plane and a shoulder at the
Side grinding wheel having a diameter, thick-

rear end, which is used for pushing ness and wall—wheel is mounted on the diame-
short stock over revolving cutters. ter.
EC27OC91.053
602
EC27OC91.052
(3) Type 6 straight cup wheels means FIGURE NO. 0–4—TYPE 11 FLARING
wheels having diameter, thickness, CUP WHEELS
hole size, rim thickness, and back
thickness dimensions. Grinding is al-
ways performed on rim face, W dimen-
sion.
LIMITATION: Minimum back thickness, E
dimension, should not be less than one-
fourth T dimension. In addition, when
unthreaded hole wheels are specified, the in-
side flat, K dimension, must be large enough
to accommodate a suitable flange.
FIGURE NO. 0–3—TYPE 6 STRAIGHT

TYPE 11—FLARING-CUP WHEEL
CUP WHEELS
Side grinding wheel having a wall flared or ta-
pered outward from the back. Wall thickness at
the back is normally greater than at the grind-
ing face (W).
(5) Modified types 6 and 11 wheels (ter-
razzo) mean some type 6 and 11 cup
wheels used in the terrazzo trade hav-
ing tapered K dimensions to match a
special tapered flange furnished by the
machine builder.
LIMITATION: These wheels shall be mounted
only with a special tapered flange.
TYPE 6—STRAIGHT-CUP WHEEL
Side grinding wheel having a diameter, thick- FIGURE NO. 0–5
ness and hole with one side straight or flat and
the opposite side recessed. This type, however,
differs from Type 5 in that the grinding is per-
formed on the wall of the abrasive created by
the difference between the diameter of the recess
and the outside diameter of the wheel. There-
fore, the wall dimension ‘‘W’’ takes precedence
over the diameter of the recess as an essential
intermediate dimension to describe this shape
type. TYPICAL EXAMPLES OF MODIFIED TYPES 6 AND
11 WHEELS (TERRAZZO) SHOWING TAPERED K
(4) Type 11 flaring cup wheels mean DIMENSIONS.
wheels having double diameter dimen- (6) Types 27 and 28 depressed center
sions D and J, and in addition have wheels mean wheels having diameter,
thickness, hole size, rim and back thickness, and hole size dimensions.
thickness dimensions. Grinding is al- Both types are reinforced, organic
ways performed on rim face, W dimen- bonded wheels having offset hubs which
sion. Type 11 wheels are subject to all permit side and peripheral grinding op-
limitations of use and mounting listed erations without interference with the
for type 6 straight sided cup wheels def- mounting. Type 27 wheels are manufac-
inition. tured with flat grinding rims permit-
ting notching and cutting operations.
LIMITATION: Minimum back thickness, E Type 28 wheels have saucer shaped
dimension, should not be less than one-
grinding rims.
fourth T dimension. In addition when
unthreaded hole wheels are specified the in- (i) Limitations: Special supporting,
side flat, K dimension, shall be large enough back adapter and inside flange nuts are
EC27OC91.055 EC27OC91.056
required for the proper mounting of

to accommodate a suitable flange.

these types of wheels subject to limita-
tions of § 1910.215(c)(4) (i) and (ii).
603
EC27OC91.054
(ii) Mounts which are affixed to the (i) Limitation: Cutting off wheels are
wheel by the manufacturer may not re- recommended only for use on specially
quire an inside nut and shall not be re- designed and fully guarded machines
used. and are subject to the following max-
(7) Type 27A depressed center, cutting- imum thickness and hole size limita-
off wheels mean wheels having diame- tions.
ter, thickness, and hole size dimen-
Max. thick-
sions. They are reinforced, organic Wheel diameter ness (inch)
bonded, offset hub type wheels, usually
16 inches diameter and larger, specially 6 inch and smaller ............................................... ⁄
3 18
Larger than 6 inches to 12 inches ...................... ⁄

14
designed for use on cutting-off ma-
Larger than 12 inches to 23 inches .................... ⁄
38
chines where mounting nut or outer Larger than 23 inches ......................................... 1⁄2
flange interference cannot be toler-

ated. (ii) Maximum hole size for cutting-off
LIMITATIONS: See § 1910.215(c)(1). wheels should not be larger than 1⁄4-
wheel diameter.
(8) Surface feet per minute (s.f.p.m.) (14) Abrasive wheel means a cutting
means the distance in feet any one ab- tool consisting of abrasive grains held
rasive grain on the peripheral surface together by organic or inorganic bonds.
of a grinding wheel travels in 1 minute. Diamond and reinforced wheels are in-
Surface Feet Per Minute = 3.1416 × diameter cluded.
in inches × r.p.m. ÷ 12 or .262 × diameter (15) Organic wheels means wheels
in inches × r.p.m. which are bonded by means of an or-
Examples: (a) 24-inch diameter wheel, 1,000 ganic material such as resin, rubber,
revolutions per minute. Surface Feet per shellac, or other similar bonding agent.
minute .262 × 24 × 1,000 = 6,288 s.f.p.m. (16) Inorganic wheels means wheels
(b) 12-inch diameter wheel, 1,000 revolu- which are bonded by means of inor-
tions per minute. Surface Feet per minute ganic material such as clay, glass, por-
.262 × 12 × 1,000 = 3,144 s.f.p.m. celain, sodium silicate, magnesium
(9) Flanges means collars, discs or oxychloride, or metal. Wheels bonded
plates between which wheels are with clay, glass, porcelain or related
mounted and are referred to as adap- ceramic materials are characterized as
tor, sleeve, or back up type. See para- vitrified bonded wheels.
graph (c) of § 1910.215 for full descrip- (c) As used in § 1910.216, unless the
tion. context clearly requires otherwise, the
(10) Snagging means grinding which following mills and calenders in the
removes relatively large amounts of rubber and plastic industries terms
material without regard to close toler- shall have the meanings prescribed in
ances or surface finish requirements. this paragraph.
(11) Off-hand grinding means the (1) Bite means the nip point between
grinding of any material or part which any two inrunning rolls.
is held in the operator’s hand. (2) Calender means a machine
(12) Safety guard means an enclosure equipped with two or more metal rolls
designed to restrain the pieces of the revolving in opposite directions and
grinding wheel and furnish all possible used for continuously sheeting or ply-
protection in the event that the wheel ing up rubber and plastics compounds
is broken in operation. See paragraph and for frictioning or coating materials
(b) of § 1910.215. with rubber and plastics compounds.
(13) Cutting off wheels means wheels (3) Mill means a machine consisting
having diameter thickness and hole of two adjacent metal rolls, set hori-
size dimensions and are subject to all zontally, which revolve in opposite di-
limitations of mounting and use listed rections (i.e., toward each other as
for type 1 wheels, the definition in sub- viewed from above) used for the me-
paragraph (1) of this paragraph and chanical working of rubber and plastics
paragraph (d) of § 1910.215. They may be compounds.
steel centered, diamond abrasive or or- (d) As used in § 1910.217, unless the
ganic bonded abrasive of the plain or context clearly requires otherwise, the
reinforced type. following power press terms shall have
604
the meaning prescribed in this para- the weight of the connecting rods,
graph. slide, and slide attachments.
(1) Antirepeat means the part of the (11) Device means a press control or
clutch/brake control system designed attachment that:
to limit the press to a single stroke if (i) Restrains the operator from inad-
the tripping means is held operated. vertently reaching into the point of op-
Antirepeat requires release of all trip- eration, or
ping mechanisms before another stroke (ii) Prevents normal press operation
can be initiated. Antirepeat is also if the operator’s hands are inadvert-
called single stroke reset or reset cir- ently within the point of operation, or
cuit. (iii) Automatically withdraws the op-
(2) Brake means the mechanism used erator’s hands if the operator’s hands
on a mechanical power press to stop are inadvertently within the point of
and/or hold the crankshaft, either di- operation as the dies close, or
rectly or through a gear train, when (iv) Prevents the initiation of a
the clutch is disengaged. stroke, or stops of stroke in progress,
(3) Bolster plate means the plate at- when there is an intrusion through the
tached to the top of the bed of the sensing field by any part of the opera-
press having drilled holes or T-slots for tor’s body or by any other object.
attaching the lower die or die shoe. (12) Presence sensing device means a
(4) Clutch means the coupling mecha- device designed, constructed and ar-
nism used on a mechanical power press ranged to create a sensing field or area
to couple the flywheel to the crank- that signals the clutch/brake control to
shaft, either directly or through a gear deactivate the clutch and activate the
train. brake of the press when any part of the
(5) Full revolution clutch means a type operator’s body or a hand tool is within
of clutch that, when tripped, cannot be such field or area.
disengaged until the crankshaft has (13) Gate or movable barrier device
completed a full revolution and the means a movable barrier arranged to
press slide a full stroke. enclose the point of operation before
(6) Part revolution clutch means a type the press stroke can be started.
of clutch that can be disengaged at any (14) Holdout or restraint device means a
point before the crankshaft has com- mechanism, including attachments for
pleted a full revolution and the press operator’s hands, that when anchored
slide a full stroke. and adjusted prevent the operator’s
(7) Direct drive means the type of hands from entering the point of oper-
driving arrangement wherein no clutch ation.
is used; coupling and decoupling of the (15) Pull-out device means a mecha-
driving torque is accomplished by nism attached to the operator’s hands
energization and deenergization of a and connected to the upper die or slide
motor. Even though not employing a of the press, that is designed, when
clutch, direct drives match the oper- properly adjusted, to withdraw the op-
ational characteristics of ‘‘part revolu- erator’s hands as the dies close, if the
tion clutches’’ because the driving operator’s hands are inadvertently
power may be disengaged during the within the point of operation.
stroke of the press. (16) Sweep device means a single or
(8) Concurrent means acting in con- double arm (rod) attached to the upper
junction, and is used to describe a situ- die or slide of the press and designed to
ation wherein two or more controls move the operator’s hands to a safe po-
exist in an operated condition at the sition as the dies close, if the opera-
same time. tor’s hands are inadvertently within
(9) Continuous means uninterrupted the point of operation.
multiple strokes of the slide without (17) Two hand control device means a
intervening stops (or other clutch con- two hand trip that further requires
trol action) at the end of individual concurrent pressure from both hands of
strokes. the operator during a substantial part
(10) Counterbalance means the mecha- of the die-closing portion of the stroke
nism that is used to balance or support of the press.
605
(18) Die means the tooling used in a (31) Foot pedal means the foot oper-
press for cutting or forming material. ated lever designed to operate the me-
An upper and a lower die make a com- chanical linkage that trips a full revo-
plete set. lution clutch.
(19) Die builder means any person who (32) Guard means a barrier that pre-
builds dies for power presses. vents entry of the operator’s hands or
(20) Die set means a tool holder held fingers into the point of operation.
in alignment by guide posts and bush- (33) Die enclosure guard means an en-
ings and consisting of a lower shoe, an closure attached to the die shoe or
upper shoe or punch holder, and guide stripper, or both, in a fixed position.
posts and bushings. (34) Fixed barrier guard means a die
(21) Die setter means an individual space barrier attached to the press
who places or removes dies in or from frame.
mechanical power presses, and who, as (35) Interlocked press barrier guard
a part of his duties, makes the nec- means a barrier attached to the press
essary adjustments to cause the tool- frame and interlocked so that the press
ing to function properly and safely. stroke cannot be started normally un-
(22) Die setting means the process of less the guard itself, or its hinged or
placing or removing dies in or from a movable sections, enclose the point of
mechanical power press, and the proc- operation.
ess of adjusting the dies, other tooling (36) Adjustable barrier guard means a
and safeguarding means to cause them barrier requiring adjustment for each
to function properly and safely. job or die setup.
(23) Die shoe means a plate or block (37) Guide post means the pin at-
upon which a die holder is mounted. A tached to the upper or lower die shoe
die shoe functions primarily as a base operating within the bushing on the
for the complete die assembly, and, opposing die shoe, to maintain the
when used, is bolted or clamped to the alignment of the upper and lower dies.
bolster plate or the face of slide. (38) Hand feeding tool means any hand
(24) Ejector means a mechanism for held tool designed for placing or re-
removing work or material from be- moving material or parts to be proc-
tween the dies. essed within or from the point of oper-
(25) Face of slide means the bottom ation.
surface of the slide to which the punch (39) Inch means an intermittent mo-
or upper die is generally attached. tion imparted to the slide (on machines
(26) Feeding means the process of using part revolution clutches) by mo-
placing or removing material within or mentary operation of the Inch oper-
from the point of operation. ating means. Operation of the Inch op-
(27) Automatic feeding means feeding erating means engages the driving
wherein the material or part being clutch so that a small portion of one
processed is placed within or removed stroke or indefinite stroking can occur,
from the point of operation by a meth- depending upon the length of time the
od or means not requiring action by an Inch operating means is held operated.
operator on each stroke of the press. Inch is a function used by the die setter
(28) Semiautomatic feeding means feed- for setup of dies and tooling, but is not
ing wherein the material or part being intended for use during production op-
processed is placed within or removed erations by the operator.
from the point of operation by an aux- (40) Jog means an intermittent mo-
iliary means controlled by operator on tion imparted to the slide by momen-
each stroke of the press. tary operation of the drive motor, after
(29) Manual feeding means feeding the clutch is engaged with the flywheel
wherein the material or part being at rest.
processed is handled by the operator on (41) Knockout means a mechanism for
each stroke of the press. releasing material from either die.
(30) Foot control means the foot oper- (42) Liftout means the mechanism
ated control mechanism designed to be also known as knockout.
used with a clutch or clutch/brake con- (43) Operator’s station means the com-
trol system. plete complement of controls used by
606
or available to an operator on a given mines the type of stroking when the

operation for stroking the press. operating means is actuated. The
(44) Pinch point means any point stroking selector generally includes
other than the point of operation at positions for ‘‘Off’’ (Clutch Control),
which it is possible for a part of the ‘‘Inch,’’ ‘‘Single Stroke,’’ and ‘‘Contin-
body to be caught between the moving uous’’ (when Continuous is furnished).
parts of a press or auxiliary equipment, (55) Trip or (tripping) means activa-
or between moving and stationary tion of the clutch to ‘‘run’’ the press.
parts of a press or auxiliary equipment (56) Turnover bar means a bar used in
or between the material and moving die setting to manually turn the crank-
part or parts of the press or auxiliary shaft of the press.
equipment. (57) Two-hand trip means a clutch ac-
(45) Point of operation means the area tuating means requiring the concur-
of the press where material is actually rent use of both hands of the operator
positioned and work is being performed to trip the press.
during any process such as shearing, (58) Unitized tooling means a type of
punching, forming, or assembling. die in which the upper and lower mem-
(46) Press means a mechanically pow- bers are incorporated into a
ered machine that shears, punches, selfcontained unit so arranged as to
forms or assembles metal or other ma- hold the die members in alignment.
terial by means of cutting, shaping, or (59) Control system means sensors,
combination dies attached to slides. A manual input and mode selection ele-
press consists of a stationary bed or ments, interlocking and decision-mak-
anvil, and a slide (or slides) having a ing circuitry, and output elements to
controlled reciprocating motion to- the press operating mechanism.
ward and away from the bed surface, (60) Brake monitor means a sensor de-
the slide being guided in a definite signed, constructed, and arranged to
path by the frame of the press. monitor the effectiveness of the press
(47) Repeat means an unintended or braking system.
unexpected successive stroke of the (61) Presence sensing device initiation
press resulting from a malfunction. means an operating mode of indirect
(48) Safety block means a prop that, manual initiation of a single stroke by
when inserted between the upper and a presence sensing device when it
lower dies or between the bolster plate senses that work motions of the oper-
and the face of the slide, prevents the ator, related to feeding and/or remov-
slide from falling of its own dead- ing parts, are completed and all parts
weight. of the operator’s body or hand tools are
(49) Single stroke means one complete safely clear of the point of operation.
stroke of the slide, usually initiated (62) Safety system means the inte-
from a full open (or up) position, fol- grated total system, including the per-
lowed by closing (or down), and then a tinent elements of the press, the con-
return to the full open position. trols, the safeguarding and any re-
(50) Single stroke mechanism means an quired supplemental safeguarding, and
arrangement used on a full revolution their interfaces with the operator, and
clutch to limit the travel of the slide the environment, designed, constructed
to one complete stroke at each engage- and arranged to operate together as a
ment of the clutch. unit, such that a single failure or sin-
(51) Slide means the main recipro- gle operating error will not cause in-
cating press member. A slide is also jury to personnel due to point of oper-
called a ram, plunger, or platen. ation hazards.
(52) Stop control means an operator (63) Authorized person means one to
control designed to immediately de- whom the authority and responsibility
activate the clutch control and acti- to perform a specific assignment has
vate the brake to stop slide motion. been given by the employer.
(53) Stripper means a mechanism or (64) Certification or certify means, in
die part for removing the parts or ma- the case of design certification/valida-
terial from the punch. tion, that the manufacturer has re-
(54) Stroking selector means the part of viewed and tested the design and man-
the clutch/brake control that deter- ufacture, and in the case of installation
607
certification/validation and annual re- metals are made more plastic for forg-
certification/revalidation, that the em- ing by heating.
ployer has reviewed and tested the in- (2) Open framehammers (or blacksmith
stallation, and concludes in both cases hammers) mean hammers used pri-
that the requirements of § 1910.217 (a) marily for the shaping of forgings by
through (h) and appendix A have been means of impact with flat dies. Open
met. The certifications are made to the frame hammers generally are so con-
validation organization. structed that the anvil assembly is sep-
(65) Validation or validate means for arate from the operating mechanism
PSDI safety systems that an OSHA and machine supports; it rests on its
recognized third-party validation orga- own independent foundation. Certain
nization: exceptions are forging hammers made
(i) For design certification/validation with frame mounted on the anvil; e.g.,
has reviewed the manufacturer’s cer- the smaller, single-frame hammers are
tification that the PSDI safety system usually made with the anvil and frame
meets the requirements of § 1910.217 (a) in one piece.
through (h) and appendix A and the un- (3) Steam hammers mean a type of
derlying tests and analyses performed drop hammer where the ram is raised
by the manufacturer, has performed for each stroke by a double-action
additional tests and analyses which steam cylinder and the energy deliv-
may be required by § 1910.217 (a) ered to the workpiece is supplied by
through (h) and appendix A, and con- the velocity and weight of the ram and
cludes that the requirements of attached upper die driven downward by
§ 1910.217 (a) through (h) and appendix A steam pressure. Energy delivered dur-
have been met; and ing each stroke may be varied.
(4) Gravity hammers mean a class of
(ii) For installation certification/val-
forging hammer wherein energy for
idation and annual recertification/re-
forging is obtained by the mass and ve-
validation has reviewed the employer’s
locity of a freely falling ram and the
certification that the PSDI safety sys-
attached upper die. Examples: board
tem meets the requirements of
hammers and air-lift hammers.
§ 1910.217 (a) through (h) and appendix A (5) Forging presses mean a class of
and the underlying tests performed by forging equipment wherein the shaping
the employer, has performed additional of metal between dies is performed by
tests and analyses which may be re- mechanical or hydraulic pressure, and
quired by § 1910.217 (a) through (h) and usually is accomplished with a single
appendix A, and concludes that the re- workstroke of the press for each die
quirements of § 1910.217 (a) through (h) station.
and appendix A have been met. (6) Trimming presses mean a class of
(66) Certification/validation and certify/ auxiliary forging equipment which re-
validate means the combined process of moves flash or excess metal from a
certification and validation. forging. This trimming operation can
(e) As used in § 1910.218, unless the also be done cold, as can coining, a
context clearly requires otherwise, the product sizing operation.
following forging and hot metal terms (7) High-energy-rate forging machines
shall have the meaning prescribed in mean a class of forging equipment
this paragraph. wherein high ram velocities resulting
(1) Forging means the product of work from the sudden release of a com-
on metal formed to a desired shape by pressed gas against a free piston im-
impact or pressure in hammers, forging part impact to the workpiece.
machines (upsetters), presses, rolls, (8) Forging rolls mean a class of auxil-
and related forming equipment. Forg- iary forging equipment wherein stock
ing hammers, counterblow equipment is shaped between power driven rolls
and high-energy-rate forging machines bearing contoured dies. Usually used
impart impact to the workpiece, while for preforming, roll forging is often
most other types of forging equipment employed to reduce thickness and in-
impart squeeze pressure in shaping the crease length of stock.
stock. Some metals can be forged at (9) Ring rolls mean a class for forging
room temperature, but the majority of equipment used for shaping weldless
608
rings from pierced discs or thick- (8) Point of operation means that
walled, ring-shaped blanks between point at which cutting, shaping, or
rolls which control wall thickness, ring forming is accomplished upon the
diameter, height and contour. stock and shall include such other
(10) Bolt-headers mean the same as an points as may offer a hazard to the op-
upsetter or forging machine except erator in inserting or manipulating the
that the diameter of stock fed into the stock in the operation of the machine.
machine is much smaller, i.e., com- (9) Prime movers include steam, gas,
monly three-fourths inch or less. oil, and air engines, motors, steam and
(11) Rivet making machines mean the hydraulic turbines, and other equip-
same as upsetters and boltheaders ment used as a source of power.
when producing rivets with stock di- (10) Sheaves mean grooved pulleys,
ameter of 1-inch or more. Rivet making and shall be so classified unless used as
with less than 1-inch diameter is usu- flywheels.
ally a cold forging operation, and [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 39
therefore not included in this subpart. FR 41846, Dec. 3, 1974; 53 FR 8353, Mar. 14,
(12) Upsetters (or forging machines, 1988]
or headers) type of forging equipment,
related to the mechanical press, in § 1910.212 General requirements for all
which the main forming energy is ap- machines.
plied horizontally to the workpiece (a) Machine guarding—(1) Types of
which is gripped and held by prior ac- guarding. One or more methods of ma-
tion of the dies. chine guarding shall be provided to
(f) As used in § 1910.219, unless the protect the operator and other employ-
context clearly requires otherwise, the ees in the machine area from hazards
following mechanical power-trans- such as those created by point of oper-
mission guarding terms shall have the ation, ingoing nip points, rotating
meaning prescribed in this paragraph. parts, flying chips and sparks. Exam-
(1) Belts include all power trans- ples of guarding methods are—barrier
mission belts, such as flat belts, round guards, two-hand tripping devices, elec-
belts, V-belts, etc., unless otherwise tronic safety devices, etc.
specified. (2) General requirements for machine
(2) Belt shifter means a device for me- guards. Guards shall be affixed to the
chanically shifting belts from tight to machine where possible and secured
loose pulleys or vice versa, or for shift- elsewhere if for any reason attachment
ing belts on cones of speed pulleys. to the machine is not possible. The
(3) Belt pole (sometimes called a belt guard shall be such that it does not
shipper or shipper pole,) means a device offer an accident hazard in itself.
used in shifting belts on and off fixed (3) Point of operation guarding. (i)
pulleys on line or countershaft where Point of operation is the area on a ma-
there are no loose pulleys. chine where work is actually performed
(4) Exposed to contact means that the upon the material being processed.
location of an object is such that a per- (ii) The point of operation of ma-
son is likely to come into contact with chines whose operation exposes an em-
it and be injured. ployee to injury, shall be guarded. The
(5) Flywheels include flywheels, bal- guarding device shall be in conformity
ance wheels, and flywheel pulleys with any appropriate standards there-
mounted and revolving on crankshaft for, or, in the absence of applicable spe-
of engine or other shafting. cific standards, shall be so designed
(6) Maintenance runway means any and constructed as to prevent the oper-
permanent runway or platform used for ator from having any part of his body
oiling, maintenance, running adjust- in the danger zone during the operating
ment, or repair work, but not for pas- cycle.
sageway. (iii) Special handtools for placing and
(7) Nip-point belt and pulley guard removing material shall be such as to
means a device which encloses the pul- permit easy handling of material with-
ley and is provided with rounded or out the operator placing a hand in the
rolled edge slots through which the danger zone. Such tools shall not be in
belt passes. lieu of other guarding required by this
609
section, but can only be used to supple- tilting arbors the fence shall be so con-
ment protection provided. structed that it will remain in a line
(iv) The following are some of the parallel with the saw, regardless of the
machines which usually require point angle of the saw with the table.
of operation guarding: (7) Circular saw gages shall be so con-
(a) Guillotine cutters. structed as to slide in grooves or
(b) Shears. tracks that are accurately machined,
(c) Alligator shears. to insure exact alignment with the saw
(d) Power presses. for all positions of the guide.
(e) Milling machines. (8) Hinged saw tables shall be so con-
(f) Power saws. structed that the table can be firmly
(g) Jointers. secured in any position and in true
(h) Portable power tools. alignment with the saw.
(i) Forming rolls and calenders. (9) All belts, pulleys, gears, shafts,
(4) Barrels, containers, and drums. Re- and moving parts shall be guarded in
volving drums, barrels, and containers accordance with the specific require-
shall be guarded by an enclosure which ments of § 1910.219.
is interlocked with the drive mecha-
(10) It is recommended that each
nism, so that the barrel, drum, or con-
power-driven woodworking machine be
tainer cannot revolve unless the guard
provided with a disconnect switch that
enclosure is in place.
can be locked in the off position.
(5) Exposure of blades. When the pe-
riphery of the blades of a fan is less (11) The frames and all exposed, non-
than seven (7) feet above the floor or current-carrying metal parts of port-
working level, the blades shall be able electric woodworking machinery
guarded. The guard shall have openings operated at more than 90 volts to
no larger than one-half (1⁄2) inch. ground shall be grounded and other
(b) Anchoring fixed machinery. Ma- portable motors driving electric tools
chines designed for a fixed location which are held in the hand while being
shall be securely anchored to prevent operated shall be grounded if they op-
walking or moving. erate at more than 90 volts to ground.
The ground shall be provided through
§ 1910.213 Woodworking machinery reuse of a separate ground wire and po-
quirements. larized plug and receptacle.
(a) Machine construction general. (1) (12) For all circular saws where con-
Each machine shall be so constructed ditions are such that there is a possi-
as to be free from sensible vibration bility of contact with the portion of
when the largest size tool is mounted the saw either beneath or behind the
and run idle at full speed. table, that portion of the saw shall be
(2) Arbors and mandrels shall be con- covered with an exhaust hood, or, if no
structed so as to have firm and secure exhaust system is required, with a
bearing and be free from play. guard that shall be so arranged as to
(3) [Reserved] prevent accidental contact with the
(4) Any automatic cutoff saw that saw.
strokes continuously without the oper- (13) Revolving double arbor saws
ator being able to control each stroke shall be fully guarded in accordance
shall not be used. with all the requirements for circular
(5) Saw frames or tables shall be con- crosscut saws or with all the require-
structed with lugs cast on the frame or ments for circular ripsaws, according
with an equivalent means to limit the to the kind of saws mounted on the ar-
size of the saw blade that can be bors.
mounted, so as to avoid overspeed (14) No saw, cutter head, or tool col-
caused by mounting a saw larger than lar shall be placed or mounted on a ma-
intended. chine arbor unless the tool has been ac-
(6) Circular saw fences shall be so curately machined to size and shape to
constructed that they can be firmly se- fit the arbor.
cured to the table or table assembly (15) Combs (featherboards) or suitable
without changing their alignment with jigs shall be provided at the workplace
the saw. For saws with tilting tables or for use when a standard guard cannot
610
be used, as in dadoing, grooving, joint- teeth. It shall be made of material that

ing, moulding, and rabbeting. is soft enough so that it will be un-
(b) Machine controls and equipment. (1) likely to cause tooth breakage. The
A mechanical or electrical power con- hood shall be so mounted as to insure
trol shall be provided on each machine that its operation will be positive, reli-
to make it possible for the operator to able, and in true alignment with the
cut off the power from each machine saw; and the mounting shall be ade-
without leaving his position at the quate in strength to resist any reason-
point of operation. able side thrust or other force tending
(2) On machines driven by belts and to throw it out of line.
shafting, a locking-type belt shifter or (2) Each hand-fed circular ripsaw
an equivalent positive device shall be shall be furnished with a spreader to
used. prevent material from squeezing the
(3) On applications where injury to saw or being thrown back on the oper-
the operator might result if motors ator. The spreader shall be made of
were to restart after power failures, hard tempered steel, or its equivalent,
provision shall be made to prevent ma- and shall be thinner than the saw kerf.
chines from automatically restarting It shall be of sufficient width to pro-
upon restoration of power. vide adequate stiffness or rigidity to
(4) Power controls and operating con- resist any reasonable side thrust or
trols should be located within easy blow tending to bend or throw it out of

CFR 2021 Title29 Vol5 Part1910

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CFR 2021 Title29 Vol5 Part1910

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Occu. Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt.

1910.27 Scaffolds and rope descent systems.

1910.122 Table of contents.

SAFETY-RELATED WORK PRACTICES

1910.218 Forging machines.

SOURCE: 39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, unless consensus standards or established

§ 1910.2 Definitions. Steiger Occupational Safety and

turers (AAI-RMA) Association, 1400 K ing Maintenance, IBR approved for

IBR approved for § 1910.261 (a)(3)(xviii) wood, CO 80112; telephone: 1–877–413–

§ 1910.261(a)(3)(xxv), (d)(1)(ii), (f)(5), (h)(2) (Table H–34); and

(7) AWS D10.9–69 Standard Qualifica- 1910.104(b)(6)(iii); and

(2) [Reserved] Electrical Manufacturer’s Association

approved for §§ 1910.110 (b)(3)(iv) and §§ 1910.106 (d)(3)(ii) introductory text

of Fire Tests of Building Construction (u) The following material is avail-

ance Criteria for Rollover Protective orders@renoufbooks.com; Web site: http://

(2) UN ST/SG/AC.10/Rev.4, The UN (iii) Conducts field inspections to

evaluation purposes to assure conform- grams against the requirements in this

such requests during its annual review web site.

the applicant wishes to be recognized. This 3. Negative finding by staff.—a. Notification

or publicity. 1910.111 .............................................................. 1218–0208

OMB con- OMB con-

1910.132 .............................................................. 1218–0205 1910.1200 ............................................................ 1218–0072

complying with the appropriate stand- (v) Ionizing radiation. Subpart Z,

the international legal requirements of the

§ 1910.18 Changes in established Fed- sure to inorganic arsenic which would

§ 1910.13, § 1910.14, § 1910.15, or § 1910.16, in (m) Methylene chloride (MC). Section

every employee to MC in every employ- Carrier means the track of a ladder

employee to be supported on an ele- a walking-working surface, such as a

ladder that requires an employee to connector, lanyard (or other means of

rial, or otherwise treated to minimize

(vi) Is designed, constructed, and clearance requirements in paragraph

(c) Standard stairs. In addition to (5) Exception to paragraphs (c)(2) and

(2) Exception to paragraph (b)(1) of this implemented no later than November

(iii) The requirements in paragraphs (xii) Equipment, such as tools, squee-

lanyard or similar method to prevent it (B) Safety net systems; or

one or more of the following: ments of § 1910.29(l).

Figure D-13 – Combination Handrail and Stair

(1) Cages and wells installed on fixed this section);

gaged in outdoor advertising oper- tection:

(c) Exit discharge.

resistant partitions, in a building pro- oratory. Section 1910.155(c)(3)(iv)(A) of

hardware, must be listed or approved Employees must be able to open an exit

a safe and orderly evacuation of other APPENDIX TO SUBPART E OF PART 1910—

necessary for self-protection. sounded. Employees must be sure that they

on a single floor, it is essential that these

dedicated to interior or exterior build- also be based on all other relevant

lation, as required in paragraph (g)(1) copper or other electrical conductors

structural members by nonconductive Interlock means a device designed to

ance of building maintenance using a tapered socket by means of poured

Primary brake means a brake designed Supported equipment means building

suspension wire rope supporting the supported equipment intended to pro-

manned by persons engaged in building (A) Intermittent stabilization sys-

or (e)(2)(iii)(C) of this section is pro- the building anchors have different

or if the building requires different sus- platform maintains no less than 10

circuit may also be connected to this be suspended by a carriage, outriggers,

(B) Transportable outriggers shall be vided which meet the requirements of

(B) Each single point suspended (H) The platform-mounted equipment

data: sal and phase failure. The control sys-

independent of the direction control rupt the equipment travel in the

and shall be clearly indicated on or (3) Maintenance inspections and tests.

Secretary’s representative and by the similarly be maintained in proper

ASME—American Society of Mechanical En-

(c) The controller, where used, shall be so